'•■-■^^^ f - ■ f •» \ ' « yi 
 
 ^™.J®L^_i^i.„._^kf. 
 
 V J MMMUMVK - ftMM i K i 
 
 N„f,vy-' !fOf*'?S 
 
 A.§ifi;ARHCS t ec>v 
 
CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 J 
 
Cornell University Library 
 arV16197 
 
 A complete grammar of the G|?,f™Jl, l*n9H39 
 
 3 1924 031 287 216 
 olin.anx 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31 924031 28721 6 
 
WORMM'S SEKIES FOK THE MODEM LANGUAGES. 
 
 COMPLETE GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THB 
 
 GERMAN^ LAl^GUAGE: 
 
 EXERCISES, READINGS, CONVERSATIONS, PAR- 
 ADIGMS, AND AN ADEQUATE 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 By JAMES H. WORMAN, A.M., 
 
 PROFESSOR OF MODEBN LANQUAGES AND LITEBATntfi AT ADELFHI ACADEMY, 
 BBOOKLTN, N. T. 
 
 A. S. BARNES & COMPANY, 
 
 NEW YORK AND CHICAGO. 
 
WOBMAN'S SERIES 
 
 MODERN" LANGUAGES 
 
 o B n i!«ic -A. isr . 
 
 An Elementary German Grammar. A shorter course in 
 the language. 13mo. 800 pages. 
 
 A Complete German Grammar. ISmo. 576 pages. 
 
 A German Reader, or Introduction to German Literature, with 
 references to the author's Grammars and those of Otto and Wood- 
 bury, and an adequate Dictionary. 13mo. 
 
 A Manual of German Conversation— the " Berliner Echo." 
 
 Pull practice in the language as sjioken in Berlin, with vocabulary 
 of words and idioms. 203 pages. 
 
 An Elementary French Grammari on the same plan as the 
 
 German. In preparation. 
 
 A Complete French Grammar, on the same plan as the 
 
 Complete German Grammar. In preparation. 
 
 A French Reader, on the same plan as the German. In prepara- 
 tion. 
 
 A Manual of French Conversation— the " Echo de Paris." 
 
 Plan of the " Berliner Echo." 
 
 Entered, according to Act of GongresDf in the year 1S68, by 
 
 A. S. BABNES & CO., 
 
 In the Clerk^i OflRce of the District Court for the Southern Blstrict of- New Torli. 
 
 Eliictrotyped by Smith & MoDougal, 82 & 84 Boekman Street. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Thk favor with which the author's Elementary German 
 Grammar has been received, together with numerous re- 
 quests from eminent teachers of modem languages, for 
 " a course" on a plan similar to that pursued in his 
 elementary book, has induced him to prepare and publish 
 the present volume. It is after the plan of "Gaspey's Eng- 
 lish Conversation Grammar," and is intended as a guide to 
 the English-speaking student in learning to read, speak 
 and write German correctly. While most of the grammars 
 hitherto published may enable the learner to master the art 
 of reading and writing German, there is only one, so far as 
 we know, namely Otto's, that really assists him in learning 
 to speak it. 
 
 The author has steadily aimed to unite the theoretical 
 with the practical. He has also sought to avoid encumber- 
 ing the student with what he must have learned from the 
 study and practice of his native tongue. Constant compari- 
 son has been made of the German with the English as well 
 as frequent reference to analogies with the other languages 
 studied in our higher schools and colleges. For the ety- 
 mological changes, following the method of Prof. Silber, in 
 his Latin Course, and others, we have adopted heavy type. 
 
 In Part L, which treats of etymology, the rules are illus- 
 trated by a series of exercises for oral and written trans- 
 lation, and by conversations which are given wholly in 
 Oerman. To make a still more practical application of rules 
 than is possible in very short sentences, extracts from the 
 writings of standard German authors are added to each 
 lesson after the sixteenth, in which the particular words 
 bearing upon the rules to be illustrated, are marked by heavy 
 type. In Part II., which treats of syntax, the arrangement 
 is made with a view to convenient reference. In the extracts, 
 words illustrating the rules of the lessons are no longer 
 marked by heavy type ; and the idiomatic phrases are in- 
 serted in the vocabulary so as to encourage the use of it. 
 
 The especial attention of instructors is invited to our classi- 
 
IV priEFAci;. 
 
 fication of nouns into /owr declensions, also to our treatment 
 of the irregular verbs. 
 
 To make the book still more complete, alphabetical lists 
 of the irregfular verbs, of verbs that are reflexive in German 
 but not in English, of verbs that form their compounds in 
 English with to have, but in German v?ith f tin (to be), and of 
 the prepositions, have been added, as well as a complete voca- 
 bulaxy, containing the words used in the body of the book, 
 with a number of idiomatic phrases, and in the English- 
 German part of it, the synonymwal significations of the Ger- 
 man words. 
 
 We have also prepared a Eeader, consisting of two parts. 
 Part First is elementary and progressive, intended to illus- 
 trate the lessons of Part First of the Grammar. Part Second 
 contains Schiller's Jungfrau and Goethe's Iphigenie, com- 
 plete, with Enghsh Extracts for translation into German, 
 an adequate vocabulary and notes, besides references . to our 
 own and other leading Ghrammars. This Eeader should be 
 placed in the hands of pupils at least as soon as they reach 
 the end of Part I. of the Grammar. 
 
 Among the many German grammars used iu the prepara- 
 tion of this book, we are under most especial obhgation to 
 the excellent work of Dr. Otto, which like our own is based 
 on Gaspey ; and to the works of Grimm, Becker, Heyse, 
 Noehden, Eoese, Douai, and Boileau. 
 
 We are also greatly indebted to several distinguished 
 American linguists for valuable suggestions made during 
 the frequent revisals of this book. We hope that the care- 
 ful revision to which this grammar has been subjected in 
 the present edition may render it still more worthy of the 
 continued confidence of American instructors and students 
 of German. 
 
 Brooklyn, N. Y., February, 1880. 
 
 J. H. W. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The Alphabet 11 
 
 Writing Alphabet 13 
 
 Pronunciation : Vowels 13 
 
 " Consonants 18 
 
 " Accent 20 
 
 Division of Words into Syllable& SI 
 
 Use of Capital Letters 33 
 
 Punctuation 33 
 
 Parts of Speech 33 
 
 PART I.— ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 LeBson 
 
 I.— The Definite Article 35 
 
 II.— The Indefinite Article 37 
 
 III. — Declension of the Noun : Declension I. The Masculine and 
 
 Neuter Nouns ending in cl, en, Cr, (f;Cn, and (etn 40 
 
 IV. — Declension II. The Masculine Nouns ending in c 45 
 
 V. — Declension III. The Masculine and Neuter Nouns not enu- 
 merated in Declension I. or II 49 
 
 VI. — Declension IV. The Feminine Nouns 58 
 
 VII. — Additional Remarks on the Number of Nouns C3 
 
 VIII. — Declension of the Proper Noun 07 
 
 IX. — Names of Countries and Places 73 
 
 X.— Gender of the Noun 77 
 
 XI. — ^Nouns governed by Prepositions 8G 
 
 XII.— The Auxiliary Verb of Tense : ^ tt l e n ' 91 
 
 XIII.— " " " " " fein 97 
 
 XIV.— " " " " •• werben lOG 
 
 XV.— The Auxiliary Verb of Mode 103 
 
 XVI.— The Adjective 123 
 
 XVII.— '• " Comparison 18S 
 
 XVIII.— The Numeral 140 
 
 XXIX.— " " Indefinite 155 
 
 XX— The Regular Verb : Active Voice 101 
 
 XXL— " " " Passive Voice 170 
 
 XXIL— The Pronoun: Personal 178 
 
 XXIII.— " " Possessive 180 
 
 XXIV.— " " Demonstrative 193 
 
VI CONl'BKTB. 
 
 Lesson Pago 
 
 XXV.— The Pronoun : Relative and Correlative li*** 
 
 XXVI.— " " Interrogative 'Md 
 
 XXVU.— " " Indefinite , ajti 
 
 XXVUI.— The Irregular Verb : First Conjugation 224 
 
 XXIX.— " " " Second Conjugation 2rf/ 
 
 XXX.— " "' " Third Conjugation 243 
 
 XXXI. — " " " Fourth Conjugation 357 
 
 XXXU.— " " " Fifth Conjugation 208 
 
 XXXm.— The Compound Verb : Separable 277 
 
 XXXIV.— " " " Inseparable 283 
 
 XXXV.— " " " Separable and Inseparable 391 
 
 XXXVI.— The Neuter and Intransitive Verb 295 
 
 XXXVII.— The Redexive Verb 303 
 
 XXXVIII.— The Impersonal Verb 311 
 
 XXXIX.— The Adverb 317 
 
 XL.— The Conjunction 339 
 
 XLL— The Preposition 341 
 
 The Interjection 350 
 
 PART II.— SYNTAX. 
 
 XLII.— The Article 359 
 
 XLUI.— The Noun 367 
 
 XLIV.— The Adjective 388 
 
 XL v.— The Pronoun 392 
 
 XL VI.— The Verb: 
 
 Auxiliary Verbs of Mode 403 
 
 The Tenses 41 1 
 
 The Modes 418 
 
 XLVn.— The Adverb 444 
 
 XLVIII.— The Conjunction 448 
 
 XLIX.— The Preposition 453 
 
 L. — Construction 473 
 
 List of Irregular Verbs 484 
 
 " " Compound Verbs 489 
 
 " " Neuter Intransitive Verbs 490 
 
 " " Prepositions with the Cases they govern 493 
 
 PART III. 
 
 Vocabulary : German-English ■ 493 
 
 " English-German 537 
 
 " National Appellations, Proper Nouns and Adjectives. 576 
 
ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 
 
 A or one, § 1, 4. 
 
 StSer, aBein, or fonbetti, p. 332. 
 
 Accent, p. 26. 
 
 Accusative, p. 34, § 19, 3, 4.; use of, 
 § 30 ; prepositions governing, p. 
 349 ; Dative or, p. 349 ; after cer- 
 tain verbs, § 13; after reflex. verbs, 
 p. 384, 3 ; after impers. verbs, p. 
 384, 3 ; after comp. verbs, p. 384, 
 4 ; verbs with two, p. 385, R. ; af- 
 ter verbs with twoobjects, p. 381, 
 3 ; to denote time, p. 377, 3 ; § 24. 
 
 AccBssoHY Sentence, § 110. 
 
 Adjectives, predic, 8 35 ; attrib., § 
 25, Exc. 3, § 26 ; decl. of, L. XVI. ; 
 compar. of, L. XVII. ; agreement 
 with nouns, § 38 & 37 ; repetit. 
 of, § 27 & 38 : with complement 
 (adverb, phrase), § 29 ; with prep., 
 S^30; derived from adv., p. 333, 
 X. ; denot. weight, measure, age 
 or value, p. 384, 5 ; denot. partic. 
 time, § 24 ; with the gen , § 11 & 
 13 ; with gen. absol , §17, 3 ; dat., 
 p. 383, 7 ; used as nouns, p. 135, § 
 35, 1 ; denot. nationality, p. 134, 
 X. ; syntax, L. XLIV. 
 
 Adverbs, L. XXXIX. ; formed from 
 nouns and partic, p. 818,111.; from 
 adject., p. 318, IV. ; from pron,, p. 
 319, V. ; from verbs, p. 330, VI. ; 
 by compos., p. 320, VII. ; compar. 
 of, p. 331 ; nouns used as, p. 318, 
 III ; p. 377, 3, 4 ; adverbial con- 
 junctions, p. 839 ; place of, § 95 & 
 Bxc. ; place by emphasis, § 96 and 
 Exc ; adverbial express, of time, 
 § 98 ; adverbial express., invers. 
 of, § 109, 4 ; place when joined to 
 adject., § 99 ; syntax, L. XL VII. 
 
 %H, with the art.,p. 155, II.; without 
 it,p.363.Exc.l; for whole, p. 156,11. 
 
 itttter, e, e«, p. 155, 1. & II ; prefixed 
 to saperl., p. 143, XIII. ; followed 
 by the rel. pron. btt«, p. 320, X. ; 
 
 for every, denoting time, § 45; 
 pec. use of, p. 181, IV. 
 
 9118, p. 333; — bae, p. 338, 1; — 
 mm, — eb, with the subj., § 69. 
 
 SdlDere, instead of jwcite, p. 151, XI. 
 
 9tn»ert|all), sweite|ttl6, p. 151, a. 
 
 Stnftatt, separable, p. 344, N. 3; 
 before infinitive, § 81, c. 
 
 Ant, how rendered, p. 156 IV • 
 p. 221, XIII. ;§ 5. 
 
 Apposition, p. 369, Exc. 1, 3; § 91,E. 
 
 Akticlb, definite, § 3 ; indef , S 1 ; 
 declens. of def , p. 35, 1.; of indef, 
 p. 37 ; contracted with prep., p. 88, 
 IV. ; for possess, pron., p. 362, R. ; 
 with folcl), p. 194, IV. ; before fjAtb, 
 p. 151, XIII., 2 ; ieibc, p. 156, III.; 
 repetit. of, § 6 ; posit, of, § 7 ; use 
 of, § 1-4 ; of excellence, p. 361, N. 
 1 ; partitive, § 5. 
 
 As — AS, AS — AGAIN, how ren- 
 dered, p. 143, XIV. & XV. 
 
 ATTKiBUTivE ADJECT. SeeAcljectw. 
 
 AuxHii ART Verbs offense, conjug. 
 of, L. XII.— XIV. ; omiss. of, § 65, 
 N. 4; of mode, L. XV. ; negat. of, 
 p. 115, VIII. ; when and how used, 
 §52—60. 
 
 Seiac, with and without art., p. 156, 
 III. ; gen. (possess.) after it, 8 46. 
 
 Capitals, use of, p. 33 & 393, N. 1. 
 
 Cardinal Numbers, p. 146 ; before 
 nouns of measure, weight, &c., p. 
 147, IV. 
 
 Cases, p. 33; §8—24. 
 
 Comparison of adject., L. XVII. ; 
 compar. and superl. declined, p. 
 140, VI. ; irreg., p. 142. 
 
 COMPAPJSON of adverbs, p. 331. 
 
 Compounds, p. 37 ; nouns, gend. of, 
 p. 83, X. ; how declined, p. 41, III., 
 p. 43, 2, p.65, II.; verbs, L. XXXIII. 
 —XXXV. ; sentene'S, % 111—113 ; 
 particles, p. 380, VII. 
 
 Conditionals, p. Ill ; § 66 & 67; 
 
AIiFHABBTICAIj ikdbx. 
 
 imperfect indicative in place of, § 
 
 63,3. 
 Conjunctions, L. XL. ; syntax of, 
 
 L. XLVIII. 
 Consonants, pronunc. of, p. 18. 
 Construction, L. L. 
 cobrblativb pronouns, p. 203; 
 
 syntax of, § 44. 
 Za, p. 334, III. , synon. with, ali, p. 
 
 336, E. ; comp. with words, p. 319, 
 Samit, Tirtth the subj., § 69. [V 
 ®a6, with indie , § 73, Kxc. 2 : with 
 
 siibj., § 70 : with indie, or subj , 
 
 § 71 ; ojnitted, § 74 
 Dative, p. 34, 3; § 18 ; after prep., 
 
 p. 347, II. ; 349, 1 v .; gov. by verbs, 
 
 §9, Exe. 3 ; instead of gen , § 10, 
 
 Bxe. 4 ; gov. by nouns, p. 383, 6 ; 
 
 after intrans. verbs, p. 380 ; after 
 
 comp. verbs, p. 381 , after adject., 
 
 § 18, Exe. 7 & 8. 
 Demonstrative Pronouns, L. 
 
 XXIV. ; syntax of, § 39 ; in place 
 
 of pers. pron., p. 195, VIII., 6 39 ; 
 
 in place of possess., p. 195, Vlf; in- 
 
 def. numer. in place of, p. 194, III. 
 Sisfev or jtaer, § 39 & N. 
 DiMiNunVBS.p. 77, N. 1 ; decl. of, p. 
 
 40, II. ; gend. of, p. 80,VIII. ; gend. 
 
 of pron. referring to, p. 180, N. 1. 
 Do, as auxiliary, p. 88, V. 
 Double Vowels, pron. of, p. 16. 
 Siirfen, conjug. of, p.l23; use of,§ 54. 
 einanBer. its use, p. 183, N. *. 
 Either-neithek, §47; either of, 
 
 § 47 & Exe. 
 m, use of, p. 181, IV. ; § 84 ; with 
 
 ill and flieM, p. 313, II ; contr. 
 
 with verbs or pron., p. 79, N. +. 
 Feminine NouNS.declens. of, L.VI.; 
 
 appell., p. 84 ; indecl. in the sing., 
 
 p. 58, 1. ; Exe, p. 58, N. *. 
 Foreign Nouns, accent on, p. 28 ; 
 
 decl. of, p. 45, 1.; p. 49, 1., 4. 
 Former and Latter, how ren- 
 dered, p. 196, IX. 
 Future, femes, § 65 ; near at hand, 
 
 §05, Exc.l;perf. instead of,§64,N 
 Future Pabticiple, § 94. 
 @£, prefix, of nouns, p. 80, 4 ; of the 
 
 pastpartic, p 161, II. ; omitted, p. 
 
 163, VII. ; comp. with separ. verbs, 
 
 p. 378, V. ; insepar., p. 387, V. 
 
 Gender, p. 33; of nouns, L. X.; doa- 
 ble, p. 83, X. ; of comp. words, p. 
 83, IX. 
 
 Genitive, p. 84 ; use of, § 10 ; lim- 
 iting nouus, § 13 ; adject., § 13 ; 
 with prep., p. 344, 1. ; with verbs, 
 § 13 ; after refl. verbs, § 15'; alter 
 certain impers. verbs, § 16 ; gov. 
 by pron., num., adj. or adv., § 10, 
 11, & 13 ; nouns in, for adv , § 17; 
 indirect object in the, § 14 , ex- 
 pressed by »on, § 10, Exe. 4 ; ab- 
 solute, § 17. 
 
 ®ern, compar. of, p. 331, IV. ; use 
 of, p. 338,3; 331,1. 
 
 @aien, conjug. of, p. 91 ; as auxU., 
 L. XII. ; with neut. and intrans., 
 p. 395, 1 ; 398, N. ; p. 306, N. 1. 
 
 §er or $in, p. 319, V.; p. 381, 
 VIII. 
 
 ^oi), before a noun, p 134, IX. ; 
 compar. of, p. 142, X. 
 
 ^ntiner, inserted after pronouns for 
 emphasis, p. 304, XI. 
 
 Imperative, formation of, p. 161, 
 II. ; persons of, p. 91, N. * ; of 
 auxiliaries, p. 109, II. : use of, § 
 78; past partic. in place of, 8 78, 
 Exe. 3 ; Indie, in place of, 8 78, 
 Exo. 2 ; Subjimct. in place of, § 77. 
 
 Imperfect, use of, § 63 ; § 73. 
 
 Impersonal Verbs, L. XXXVIIL ; 
 with gen., § 16 ; with ace. p. 384, 3; 
 followed by refl. pers pron of dat. 
 or ace. 313, II. ; subj. of, p. 811, L 
 
 iNDEPQfiTE Numerals, L XIX. 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns, L. XXVU.; 
 syntax of, § 45-51 
 
 Indicative, use of, § 68 ; after cer- 
 tain verbs, § 71 ; for the subjunct. 
 § 72 ; for theimper. 8 68, N 
 
 iNKNiTrVE, use of, 8 79-85 ; for the 
 pres. partic, p. 436, N 3 , in place 
 of past paxtic, § 85, § 88, Exe. 4 ; 
 without ju, § 80 ; with ju, § 81 ; 
 with urn — su, p. 438, N. 1 ; used 
 as a noun, p. 163, N. *, § 79 ; used 
 in the pass, after " to be," § 84 ; 
 indie, or subjunct. in place of, § 82, 
 § 101, 4 ; after how, what, wllioh, 
 &e., § 83 ; place of, p. 476, 8. 
 
 Insep. Comp. Verbs, L. XXXIV.,— 
 prefixes, p. 885, II., 287, VI. ; with 
 
ALPHABET -CAL INDEX. 
 
 pref. «c, p. 287, V. : without, p. 
 
 385, m. 
 
 Interjections, p. 358. 
 
 Interrogative Pron., L. XXVI. 
 
 Intransit. Verbs, L. XXXVI ; be- 
 come transit., p. 295 ; with ^aben 
 or fein, p. 395, 1. ; with dat., p. 380; 
 with ace., §20. 
 
 iKRE&tJLAB Verbs, L. XXVIII — 
 XXXII. ; why so caUed, p. 334, 
 N.*; division of, p. 335, III. ; con- 
 jug, of, p. 337, 338; list of, p. 484. 
 
 Iterative Ntjmekais, p. 1^, 3. 
 
 fionnen, conjug. of, p. 109 ; use of, 
 p. Ill, 133 ; 153 ; — and Detmiiaen, 
 § 55, N. 
 
 fioffcn. conjug. of, p. 132 ; use of, p. 
 138, §59. 
 
 Scute, aJJcnf^en, 5Blanner, use of, p. 
 64,N. *; p. 65, II. 
 
 nan, use of, p. 316, N. * and II. 
 
 Ma sctxline Nouns, decl.of,L.III.-V. 
 
 !0tij|)en, conjug. of, p. 130; use of, p. 
 123, § 53, 55. 
 
 MoUEs, § 68-85 ; indie, § 68 ; sub- 
 junct., § 69 ; imper., 78 ; indie, § 
 79—85 ; partic, 8 86 ; auxil. ot 
 L.XV. 
 
 Months, names of, p. 74, XI. [3. 
 
 MlTLTIPIilCATIVB NUMERALS, p.l48, 
 
 SKiiffen, conjug. of, p. 119 ; lemaxke 
 on, p. 118, § 56. 
 
 Negation, place of, § 97. 
 
 NauTEB Verbs. See intransitive. 
 
 Nominative, p. ^4, 369, 1. ; synt.of, 
 § 9 ; verbs with two, p. 368, 3. 3. 
 
 Nouns, decl. o^ common, L. III.-VI.; 
 proper, h. VIII. & IX. ; gend. of, 
 L. X. ; with prep., L. XI. ; num- 
 ber of, L. VII.; of materials, p. 63, 
 a ; abstract, p. 63, 6 ; of nteasv/re, 
 &c., p. 64, 3 ; synt. of, L. XLIII. 
 
 Numbers, p. 33. 
 
 Numerals, L. XVIII. & XX.; gov- 
 erning the genitive, § 11. 
 
 Object, §18, 1, p. 386 ; place of, § 
 108, 3, 5, 6, Exc. 1, 3 ; invers. oC 
 p. 479 ; in the gen., § 13, 15; direct 
 (aoc.) & indirect (gen.) § 14 ; in- 
 dir. (dat.), § 18 ; dir. (acc.l, § 19-33. 
 
 Oblique Narration, § 73. 
 
 Of, denoting possess., p. 87, % ; sign 
 of the gen., § 10, § 13, § 15 ; not 
 
 translated, p. 369, 3, p. 371, 6 ; ren- 
 dered (ion, p. 369, 4 ; rendered by 
 JU, N. a. p. 371, 7 ; p. 370, 5 ; pre- 
 ced. a verb, noun, p. 371, 8. 
 One or One3, p. 220, XI.; 8 25,Exc.3. 
 Ordinal Numbers, L. XVIII. 
 Partitive Num., see Fractioncds. 
 Parts of Speech, p. 33. 
 Passive, L. XXI.; of impers., p. 313, 
 V. ; its infin. after " to be," § 84. 
 Past Participles, form, of, p. 161, 
 II. ; use of, § 86, 89-93 ; fut., g 94 ; 
 used as adject., § 86, 89 ; for the 
 pres., § 90 ; abso]., § 91 ; for the 
 imper., § 92 ; compar. of, § 93 ; 
 infin. in place of, § 88, Exc.3; their 
 compar. & superl. as noun, p. 443, 
 N. 3 ; place ot; p. 476, 3. 
 Perfect Tense, its use, § 64 ; pres- 
 ent in place of, § 64, Exc. 
 Personal Peon., L. XXII. ; repet. 
 of, § 31 ; gen. of, for the objective, 
 I 33 ; with prep., § 33, N. ; with 
 vnani/mate obj. & abstr. ideas, p. 
 180, III. ; in address, pers., p. 179, 
 II. ; used reflex., p. 180 & 182. 
 Pluperfect Tense, § 65, 
 Plural, nouns without, L. VII. ; 
 
 with two, p. 83, XI. 
 Possessive, Engl, or Sax., § 10, N. 
 Pos.BssivE Pron., L. XXIII. ; dc- 
 clens. of conjunct., p. 181, II. ; ab- 
 sol., p. 187, III. ; without art., p. 
 187, IV. ; with art., 187, V. ; re- 
 peated, § 38 ; supplied by def. ar- 
 ticle, § 36, p. 187, N. ; synt. o£ 
 §36-58. 
 Predicate in a sentence, § 9, Exc. 
 
 1; §108; §109,1; §110. 
 
 Pbedic. Adject. See Adjectives. 
 
 Prefixes, accent of, p. 36 ; insep., 
 
 p. 378, rV. p. 385 ; Sep. p. 375 ; 
 
 Sep. and insep., p. 387, VI., p. 291. 
 
 Peepositions, L. XLl., mth the 
 
 gen., p. 314 ; with the dat., p. 247; 
 
 with the accus., p. 346 ; with dat. 
 
 andaccus., p. 349 ; contr. with the 
 
 art., p. 88 ; contr. with pron., p. 
 
 149,158 ; meaning of certain prep., 
 
 p.351; L.XIJX.; synt.of,§ 102-10?. 
 
 Present Partic, formation of, p. 
 
 161, II. ; use of, § 87, 88 ; with " to 
 
 be," p. 163, III., N. ; past in place 
 
ALPHABETICAl INDEX. 
 
 of, I 90 ; as adj., § 87 ; as attrib. 
 adj., § 87, 1 ; predicat., §87, Rem.; 
 adverb., p. 433, 3 ; as noun, § 88 ; 
 as abst. verb, noun, § 88, Exc. 1 ; 
 obj. gov. by, § 23; infin. in place 
 of, § 85, 88 Exc. 4 ; with gen. ab- 
 soL, § .17, 3 ; with, possess, pron., 
 p. 435, N. 1 ; with relat. pron. § 
 88, Ex. 3 ; absol., p. 435, 5 ; com- 
 parison of, § 93; place of, § 
 108,3. 
 
 Pkbsent Thnse, format, of, p. 163, 
 III. ; use of, § 63 ; perf. for the, 
 8 64, Exc. ; first fut. for the, § 65, 
 St. 1 ; for the fat. § 65, Exc 1. 
 
 Phonouns, pers., L. XXII., reflex., 
 p.l83; posaes8.demonst., L.XXIV.; 
 relative, L. XXV. ; correl., p. 303 ; 
 interrqg., L. XX V^i. ; iudefin., L. 
 XXVIL; posit, of, § 50-51 ; synt. 
 of, XLV. 
 
 Pbopbb Notms, declens. of (pers.), 
 L. VIII. ; (places, &c.) L. XI. 
 
 Rbflbx. Pron., p. 180, 183, VI. 
 
 Keflex. Verbs, L. XXXVII. ; how 
 formed, p. 303, I. ; with the da,t., 
 305, L ; with the ace , p. 384, 3 ; 
 neat, verbs used as, p. 303, N. 1 ; 
 
 RBLA.TIVB Pron., L. XXV. ; omit- 
 ted, § 41 ; abridged form, p. 301, 
 VI. ; place of, § 40 ; place of verbs 
 after, p. 300, II. ; conjunctions, p. 
 339; adv., p. 303, IX; clause, § 
 53 ; after aa foil, by o/, § 43 ; synt. 
 of, § 40, 41. 
 
 Rblat. com., p. 339 ; rol. clause, § 53. 
 
 @jin, L. XTlII. ; as auxU., p. 395, I., 
 II. ; 303, N. 6 ; with past part., p. 
 173, III. 
 
 Scl6fl orfelicr, p. 319, VI.; 183, N.f. 
 
 Self, compounds of, p. 188, VI. 
 
 Sentence, parts of, simple, § 108 ; 
 compound, §111-113; accus. or 
 subordin., § 110. 
 
 SiNOULAB, nouns without, p. 64, 2. 
 
 Sbpab. Comp. Verbs, p. 378. 
 
 Solicit, p. 114 ; rem. on, p. 115, 118, 
 § 57 ; as imper., p. 91, N. *. 
 
 Subject, place of, § 108, 1 ; 109, 1. 
 
 Substantive. See Noun. 
 
 Subjunctive, use of, § 69-77 ; for 
 the infin., § 70, § 101 ; for the in- 
 die, § 73 ; for the imper., § 77. 
 
 Syllables, words divided into,p.31. 
 
 Tenses, format, of^ regiil., p. 161, 1.; 
 irregul., p. 2ii4 ; use of, g 61-67. 
 
 Tbansitive Verbs, obj. of, p. 36, 
 III ; § 30 ; formed from iutransit., 
 p. 298, II. ; disting. from intransit., 
 p. 593, N. 1. 
 
 Utn JU, § 81, N. 
 
 Un, p. 304, N. *, 322, XI. 
 
 Verbs, aiix., of tense, L. XII.-XIV.; 
 of mode, L. XV. ; regul. (act.), L. 
 XX. ; (pass.), XXI. ; irregul., L. 
 XXVIII.-XXXI. ; comp., Sep., ,L. 
 XXXIII. ; insepar., L. XXXIV. ; 
 Sep. and insep., L. XXXIV. ; im- 
 pers., L. XXXVIII. ; neut. & in- 
 trans., L. XXXVI.; reflex., L. 
 XXXVIL ; subjective or objective, 
 p. 395, N. 2 ; with two nouns, p. 
 381, 2 ; with a«c., p. 385, R. ; with 
 nom., p. 368, 3 ; with genit., § 13 \ 
 gen. absol., § 17, 1 ; with the sub- 
 junct., § 70-73 ; synt., L. XLVI. 
 
 SQicl, comparison o^ and tventg, x). 
 153, V. 
 
 SJan, for the gen., p. 369, N.l, Exc. 4 
 
 Vowels, pronunc. of, p. 13, 29. 
 
 ffljirum, for t»a«, p. 212, VIII., 209, 
 III. 
 
 Wii fur ein, p. 309, 4, 5; 310, IV., 
 V. ; as exclajn., p. 313, IX. 
 
 SScIiiier. (rel.), used as exclam., p. 
 313, X. ; omitted, p. 301,V.&VI.; 
 with \aiji (but), p. 202, VII. ; for 
 some or any, p. 203, VIII. 
 
 98entg & Uiel, when inflect., p.l56,V. 
 
 aSer, InaS, interrog,, p. 311, VL ; 
 relatives, p. 301, IV. 
 
 aBciIlt, p. 335, VI., 8 ; withsubjunct., 
 p. 335, R., § 69 ; omitt., § 69, N. 
 2 ; § 75, § 109, c; mrm, ali, p. 335. 
 
 JSertetl/ conjug. of, p. 103; as co- 
 pula, p. 367, Exc. 1 ; in format, of 
 tenses, p. 103, 1. ; denot. incipient 
 state, p. 311, N. 3 ; gen. absolute 
 with, § 17. 
 
 SBo, comp. with words, p. 202, IX. ; 
 310, VIII. 
 
 aBoUen, conjug. of, p. 113-113 ; rem. 
 on, p. 113, § 58. 
 
 SBoTtlcn for gtworben, p. 104, N. *. 
 
 3u, with infin., § 81 ; with comp_ 
 p. 285, IIL, IV. 
 
THE GERMAN LETTERS. (Die 35ucO|laOen.) 
 
 The German Alphabet consists of the following twenty-sis 
 letters : 
 
 91 o (ah) 
 
 a 
 
 9J: 1 
 
 tt n 
 
 33 h (bay) b 
 
 JO o o 
 
 ® C (tsay) c 
 
 ?U M (pay) p 
 
 ® b (day), d 
 
 © q (koo) q 
 
 ® e (ay) e 
 
 Stt r (err) r 
 
 3 f* f 
 
 @ f«| s 
 
 ® 9 (gay) g 
 
 S t (tay) t 
 
 Sp. 1) (hah) h 
 
 tt u (go) u 
 
 3t i (ee) i 
 
 25 » (fow) V 
 
 St i (yott) j 
 
 'AiS W (vay) w 
 
 « f (tab) k 
 
 3E $ (icks) X 
 
 £ I I 
 
 ?| IJ (ipsilon) y 
 
 Wt ttt m 
 
 3 J (tset) z 
 
 COMPOUND CONSONANTS. 
 
 <^ ch 
 
 ^ sz 
 
 a ck 
 
 ^ tz 
 
 Letters which may easily be mistaken one for another : 
 
 as • and SB 
 
 ® 
 
 and © 
 
 b and ]^ 
 
 ® and ® 
 
 © 
 
 and ® 
 
 f and f 
 
 91 and 91 
 
 ^ 
 
 and 91 
 
 \> and 9 
 
 £> and © 
 
 a» 
 
 and a« 
 
 r and f 
 
 * Wherever the name is not given, it is as in English. 
 
 f German /and .7^ are alike in print; but the fact that / is only used 
 before consonants, and /before vowels, wiU enable the student to distin. 
 guish these two letters from each other. 
 
 % The last i is used at the end of a syllable before a consonant, or at 
 the end of a word ; e. g., lefm, Ui; SiS^en. 
 
GERMAN WRITING ALPHABET. 
 
 a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m. 
 
 n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, w, x, y, z. 
 
 COMPOUND CONSONANTS. 
 
 ch, ck, ss, sz, soh, sp, st, th, tz. 
 
 CAPITAL LETTERS. 
 A, B, C, D, E, P, G, H, I, J, 
 
 z ^^ x-^. / ^ f f^/. 
 
 K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, 
 
 ^ ^ m ^. ^ /f f ^ ^ 
 
 T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z. 
 
 * tor the use of this « (^tioJ 8) see foot-note J p. 11. 
 
PEONUNCIATION (SluSf^ro^e). 
 
 It is a very difficult undertaking to teach pronunciation 
 by writing. The teacher's voice cannot very easily be dis- 
 pensed with in the acquisition of a Modern Language. But 
 while this is true it must be remembered that the instructor 
 cannot always be with his pupU, and as soon as the student 
 leaves the class room he is obliged to trust to himself. The 
 only question that remains then is whether or not it is best 
 to give the student a guide which may lead him safely 
 through the labyrinths of pronunciation, or whether we shall 
 leave him entirely dependent upon the instruction received 
 in the class room? Most of our leading educators and 
 scholars answer that it is necessary to give the pupil this 
 guide, nay, many of them have complained that " the sub- 
 ject of pronunciation — the first and almost the last difficulty 
 in learning a language — ^has not received its due share of 
 attention even in our best grammars."* We have attempted 
 in the following pages to treat the subject of pronunciation 
 in such a manner that this great difficulty may be at least in 
 part removed. But let it be understood that our attempt is 
 not to teach pronunciation without the aid of a native 
 teacher, but rather to aid the instructor in his task, and to 
 incite the student to a more attentive consideration of the 
 subject than would be afforded by oral instruction only.f 
 
 The Vowels (SBocolc). 
 
 Simple Vowels. — There are in German a so-called long and 
 short sound for each vowel, but strictly speakincf 
 the two sounds differ from each other only in their 
 
 * Comp. a Practical Introduction to French Pronunciation, by Prof 
 Edward S. Joynes, A.M. (Preface). 
 
 t Comp. Dr. Sears' view in Noehden's German Grammar, p. 28. 
 
14 pbonunoiation: simple vowels. 
 
 duration. " The long and short sounds often ap 
 proach so near to each other as to make the pro- 
 nunciation depend more on accent than on quan- 
 tity." * This view has been embraced by the leading 
 German Grammarians. Prof. Peissner says, " Vow- 
 els (and diphthongs) will sound a little more open 
 before certain consonants. The cause of it Ues in 
 the nature of the transition of the vowel to the 
 consonant," and he further advises that if only the 
 primitive sounds are well learned, we may safely 
 trust the rest to nature.f 
 
 tt. The sound which best represents that of the Ger- 
 man a is found in the o in father, or in ah ; e. g., 
 lateit, ^at. 
 
 The duration of the sound of any vowel may be 
 lengthened by inserting a mute h Immediately after 
 the vowel; e. g., ^o^n, and shortened by doubling the 
 consonant; e. g., SKanit. 
 
 %. The various sounds of e are very difficult to reduce 
 to rule, as they depend partly on derivation, partly 
 on divided and fluctuating usage, and partly on 
 accent. They are best arranged thus : 
 
 1. Like ey in they (French £) ; e. g., 2c%}t; butwhen 
 followed by r,| like e in father ; e. g., gcbcr. 
 
 As a consonant when doubled has a tendency to 
 shorten the duration of the sound, 
 
 2. like e in bed or bet, when followed by two con- 
 sonants or a double consonant ; e. g., S.gtt. 
 
 3. In prefixes and affixes very short, as in bereave, 
 handle ; e. g., fcfa'^I, |atc, Sfel. 
 
 4. For the pronunciation of ie see under f, 
 page 15. 
 
 » Dr. Sears' Noehden, p. 39. 
 ■f Peissner's Grammar, p. 6. 
 
 t As in German so in Bnglist the t has a strong tendency to modify 
 the sound of the vowel preceding it— especially a, c, and I 
 
PKONUNCUTION : SIMPLE VOWELS. 15 
 
 3. Strictly speaking the vowel i has only one sound, 
 '" that of i in pin, milk; e. g., bin, SSirne. There are 
 
 some words in which the duration of the sound is 
 rather long, almost Hke ee in deer, especially when 
 followed by only one consonant ; e. g., Kir, 3gcl, 
 and in the termination ircn (sometimes ietett) 
 affixed to foreign verbs adopted in German ; e. g., 
 marf(^iren=marsheeren ; but most generally the i is 
 lengthened by inserting c (or 1^) immediately after 
 it, and sounds then like the ie in Jield ; e. g., iieit, 
 tl^m = eem. At the end of a word e after an accented 
 i merely lengthens it ; e. g., §armonl'e ; but when 
 unaccented the i is short, and e is sounded ; e. g., 
 Slmalie ( = Ahmahl'ee-uh or Ahmahl'i/MA). 
 
 D. The sound of the German O is the o in no, note ; 
 e. g., Soten ; followed by ^, it sounds like oa in he- 
 moan ; e. g., 9Jlo^n = moan. When two consonants 
 follow this vowel it resembles the sound of o in son ; 
 e. g., Sonne. It is so sounded also in son. Followed 
 by r it soimds hke o in north ; e. g., 91ort, Wott. 
 
 It. The pronunciation of the vowel u is the same in 
 German as in the Romance languages (vnth the ex- 
 ception of the French u). It is the o in prove or oo 
 in school ; e. g., nun, Jpttt. When short it has the 
 sound of 00 in good or m in full ; e. g., Stutl, 
 9«utter. 
 
 ^. The vowel t^ occurs only in foreign words, and is pro- 
 nounced like i. In some words derived from the 
 Greek the Germans pronounce it generally Hke the 
 French u, or the modified German u (it) (see page 
 16) or the Greek u (vipiAov).* g) formerly had 
 this for its usual sound, but as the French assign 
 to it the sound of their i (ee), and call it the Cfreek i 
 
 * Dr. Sears thinks that the Eomans probably pronounced it in the 
 same manner, as they confounded it with u, which seems to have had 
 the sound of the French u. Comp. S^Ua, also spelt 8idla, lacTYmm or 
 
16 PEONUNCIil'ION : DOUBLE VOWELS — MODIFIED VOWELS. 
 
 (I grec), the Germans have of late adopted a like 
 pronunciation. (For the pronunciation of 9 pre- 
 ceded by e see the Diphthongs.) 
 
 Double Vowels. — When the simple vowels cs, C, and o are to 
 
 have the long sound they are doubled. Hence the 
 double vov?els differ from the simple ones only in 
 being always long. They have not a change of sound 
 or quality. Thus in German 00 sounds like long 0, 
 and not like 00 in hoot. 
 
 Modified Vowels (Umlautc). — ^The simple vowels a, o, ti, when 
 accompanied by C are said to be modified or soft- 
 ened. Formerly the e was placed above these let- 
 ters (a, 0, u), but it is now generally replaced by two 
 dots, a, & tt. Sometimes the capitals 9t, D, U, take 
 these dots, but most commonly the e follows, 9le, 
 ©e, Uc. 
 
 %i, 51, ii. The modified ii (French S) resembles most the 
 sound of a in a word ending in e mute, as hate, late ; 
 e. g., fpdt (shpate). When short it sounds very 
 nearly like e in fell; e. g., ^Oittc, ^Kdttc. Followed 
 by r, resembles the sound of a before i in fair or 
 hair {not in aisle) ; e. g., S3ar. 
 
 Oe, 0, 0. There is no exact equivalent for ij in the English. 
 It is the French eu in feu, for which Prof. Joynes 
 gives the u in fur extended without sound of r. 
 The only sound in English which resembles is the 
 ea in heard; e. g. Ocl, §6Wc, ©be. 
 
 Uc, il, ii. There is no equivalent sound in the English for 
 the German it.* It is a close sound exactly like the 
 French u. Prof. Joynes thinks it is " the first 
 elementary sound after the t in the words twenty, 
 
 laervmcB (Grees, SaKpva). Some editions of Tacitus have Sviria for 
 SYna, in Ann. IV., 77, 78, 79, 81, 82, 83. Olupetis for clYpeus on some 
 ancient coins. Quintilian describes it as being between u and i. Medina 
 est quidam, Vet Iliterm sonus. 
 
 * It is an attenuated sound about midway between our long u (pure, 
 not dlptbthongal) and e, but nearer tlie e (very much like u in Ikirkey) 
 
peonunciation: diphthongs. 17- 
 
 tmst, etc.," and that " by arresting this sound at its 
 first formation, and noting the position of the 
 organs of speech the pupil can easily learn to de- 
 velop it himself ;" e. g., fiber, Usfcel, Srflcfc. 
 
 Exercise on the Pronunciation of the Vowels. 
 
 ■Der ^amtn, )jat, ter §ofer, ter .^ut, laSen, ter SKann, iai 
 ?ckn, lie %iUv, iai Sett, fcer Sail, befe^len, |abert, etel, tie 
 53u^Ie, fcie Sirne, liebcn, ler Jpamtner, ber Ttalvc, tie Mraiit, 
 tie 2ampe, 2lrie, ter Soten, ler ^Jloln, ojfen, ter Drt, nun, tcr 
 2Ial, tcr 2lar, tas §aar, ter ^ape, tas Jpeer, ba3 9)leer, (jut, ter 
 Dfen, tcr 33ruter, tie SKutter, tie Slumc, ter ®orten, ta« Del, 
 tai lictcl, tic ^iilte, ter ^b^Ier, tic ^ij^le, griin, iikr, ijte, ter Sar, 
 tie glotc, alter, ter 2(rm, tie ^ro^e, ter §ugel, ter Sfleffe, tie Sulpc, 
 tic 31attc, tic ®utc, tie Scanner, tic Sitcl, tic Srompe'te, ter Sflamc, 
 tie Sriiter, tic SJlii^le, tic Satttcr, tie §antc, tie Defen, cer JftBmer, 
 tie gibmerin, tcr Sube, ter Srfce, tic Sitrtcn, tic Sl^rannen, tic Jpiite, 
 ta« D^r, tie 5Wonatc, tie Jpii:^ner, tie Sanler. 
 
 DiphthOHgs (Xip^t^ongen). The vowels i, JJ, and n following 
 the vowels a, a, or e, may coalesce with them, and 
 produce a diphthong. 
 
 9lt. The sound of ax which occurs only in a few words 
 is that of ai in aisle {not ai iu bail) ; e. g., 9Jtai, Jpflin, 
 Safer. 
 
 @i. The sound of et is the same as of ai {i. e. it is like 
 that of ei in height, or the simple i in mine, fine) ; 
 e. g., mcin, Scin, ^cilen. 
 
 Formerly, 9 was employed at the end of words in 
 place of i ; e. g., Tta^, and often to distinguish two 
 words of a different meaning, but of the same 
 sound ; e. g., fein, his, fctjn, to be. At present, this 
 custom is nearly discontinued, and ei is more fre- 
 quently and more correctly employed. 
 
18 peoncncution: diphthongs — simple consonants. 
 
 SKu. The equivalent sound for ott is the ou in twuse or 
 mouse, or even the ow in cow or fowl ; e. g., ^(lUi, 
 fatti, glautcn. 
 
 6u. A sound similar to Ctt is found in oi of toil, boil, or 
 the oy in boy, toy ; e. g., trcu, |etttc, Scutc, 
 
 9lcu, Su, has the same sound as cu ; i. e., that of oy in toy, or 
 01 in mois< ; e. g., tic JpSitfcr. 
 
 Exercise on the Pronunciation of the Diphthongs. 
 
 Dcr 9Jlat, tcr §ain, bcr 33aicr, r>ai Setn, meitt, tas iaub, faul, 
 ber @Iau6e, ber Saum, Me 33dume, treu, bte' Scutc, :^cute, glaukn, 
 tic Zxaubi, neu, ba« gcuer, fret, iai papier', tie 33icnc, tcr grcunb, 
 tie ©iirtcn, ber Slcufcl, ber Sliiukr, atlein, bie Sicfcc, iai UeBel, 
 eln, lai Slugc, fvinf, brci, bie Sreite, iai §eu, iai %iehx, bie Scikr, 
 rcitcn, Icr Steitcr, einc Tldk, einc Slei^e, biinn, bie Sottevic, bag 
 9JlauI, bie ^Icibcr, ^cilcn, rautcn, frieren, fein, gloukn, bag gi, 
 meinc Siebcn, cin^cmmen, bie Silie, bie geigen, bie 3lcmter, bie 
 Saucnt, bie ^arbiniile, bie !D6rfer, bie Sliitter. 
 
 Pronunciation of the Consonants (<£onfononten). 
 
 Simple ConsonantSi — ^In German ail consonants used in the 
 spelling of words must be pronounced. Such in- 
 stances as kn in the English knave, are unknown. 
 The letter | is the only silent consonant, and even 
 it is never silent except when used to lengthen a 
 vowel in the same syllable. We shall give here only 
 the pronunciation of those consonants which differ 
 from the corresponding English ones. 
 
 !B, B. As in English; but, when at the end of a syllable or 
 immediately preceding a final consonant or con^ 
 sonants (with the exception of the liquids t, m, n, r). 
 
pbokcnciation: simple consonants. 19 
 
 like|>5* e. g., 3lbt, ohfiioHm.. The original sound 
 of B is retained at the end of a syllable, if the/ 
 next begins with 6 ; e. g., Sbbe, *&, or with J ; e. g., [ 
 ©eliibce. ''■ 
 
 d t. This letter is pronounced like f when it has that 
 sound in EngUsh (i e., before a, 0, u, an, and before 
 consonants ; e. g., ©ontibat' = candidate; ©or'fo = 
 Corso ; Kultur' = culture. 
 
 6 before ft, b,t c, i, and i^ has the sound of ts (the 
 same as 3) in German ; e. gr., tSafat = TscBsar ; ^if 
 cero = 2^i/sero; ©enttier = Tsentner; ©Jjliti'ler = 
 
 S sharing partly the force of f, and partly 
 that of J, is only used in foreign words, the t or 3, 
 as the case may be, being now universally substi- 
 tuted for it. Even in many foreign words which 
 from long use have become naturahzed in German, 
 the ! or J is now employed in preference to c. 
 
 S, b shares the same peculiarities as b. It soimds like 
 the Enghsh d, except at the end of a word or 
 immediately preceding a final consonant or con- 
 sonants, when it has the sound of dt ; e. g., ^ir.&, 
 ^in&Iein, mtl&, Sa&, mtnb. 
 
 Like 6 it keeps its origiual sound when doubled ; 
 e. g., 3Ci&&er. 
 
 ®, g is pronounced hard like g in go, garden, give, or 
 gh in ghost ; e. g., Qc^, @artcn, gieb, ® cifl. ® .find 
 approaches the sound of f; e. g., SBcrg, but if the 
 vowel i precedes, g has the sound of d^ (which see ; 
 e. g., Rom^= Konich), for which there is no equiv- 
 
 * This is the case in many languages, it is even found in the Bossian. 
 From Quintillian (Inst. Or. I.) it appears that the Romans pronomiced 
 the 6 at the end of a syllable like p. Thus Fortuna Ovseqiiens in place 
 of oBsequens is read on some Roman coins. See Ekhel, Doetrina Numo- 
 ram, Veterum, Vol. VII. p. 24 Comp. also Dr. Sears' Noehden, p. 38. 
 
 f Siiltt (Cologne) excepted, now generally spelt ( 
 
20 PEONCNCIATION : SIMPLE CONSONANTS. 
 
 alent in English. ttQ together sound like ng in the 
 words sing, singer ; but g with tt never has a double 
 sound in 6rerman, as in the English words finger, 
 hunger (as if fing-ger, hung-ger). But in compound 
 words the n and Q are pronounced separately; e. g., 
 an*Qenc|m, un^geCuttig. 
 
 In most words borrowed from the French g has a 
 soft sound approaching that of gr in gem or genius ; 
 e. g., &mit,{zhenee'), genius. 
 
 The practice of pronouncing the g in all words 
 like (^, as is done ia some parts of Germany, is not 
 to be commended. 
 
 §, 1^ at the beginning of words is sounded as in the 
 English words have, hand, helmet, house, hat ; e. g., 
 l^abe, /^ant, ^elm, ^Mi, ^ut. When between two 
 vowels the sound of the German ^ is so slight as to 
 be scarcely audible ; e. g., SJliil^c almost hke 9>iu^sc ; 
 
 Before a consonant and at the end of words % is 
 mute as in the English huM, ah, eh, oh, Jehovaa, and 
 indicates that the preceding vowel is long (Comp. 
 e at the end of words in English and French ; as, 
 stone, reine, etc.) ; e. g., Jpa]^n,U^r,5Jlol^r,9Rd]^tte,fru]&, 
 
 ^, when it does not begin a syllable, ought 
 always to be considered as lengthening its preced- 
 ing vowel.* 
 
 After t the | is silent, as in English after g in 
 ghost; e. g., f^tutv, pron. as if teucr. The sound of the 
 English th is not known in German. 
 
 * After the German Language had begmi to be cultivated, one of 
 the successive improvements seems to have been to free it from rough 
 and guttural sounds at least in part. Thus words with a strong gut- 
 tural c^ dropped the c, and retained the ^ only, which then became the 
 means of protracting the sound of the preceding vowel ; e. g., SBieift to 
 SJieSi rottlfi to rau^ (^oS retains the ^ when alone or compounded with 
 another word beginning with a consonant ; but when a vowel is added, 
 
PRONUNCIATION : SIMPLE CONSONANTS. 21 
 
 3/ i (yott) corresponds to the English y (consonant), as 
 in io, yes; ^al^r, year; 3oc^, yoke. 
 
 In 3ournflr and a few other words derived from 
 the French it approaches the sound of j in the 
 French journal, or of the English z in azure. 
 S, f is pronounced Hke the Enghsh k, and is never mute; 
 e. g., knee in German is ^nic ; but while the k is silent 
 in Enghsh, it must be pronounced in German.* 
 
 When a double sound is required c represents 
 the first f, as in dick ; e. g., g)acP, comp. d under 
 Compound Consonants, page 24. 
 
 O, q is in all cases followed by u, and these two letters 
 taken together have the sound of kw, as in queen 
 (tween), conquest (konk'west) ; e. g., ©uctte, ©Mittc, 
 ©ttat. In a few words derived from the French, 
 qu is sounded both in English and German like 
 simple I; e. g , Soquette (kokett). 
 
 M, r is trilled and emphasized more ia German than i.i 
 Enghsh, especially at the end of words where the 
 sound must be very distinct ; e. g., SJlu'^m = roovi, 
 Ztaam, dream ; SrCe, earth ; Spaat, hair. 
 
 In Sfl^etn, 3i^onc, etc., 3fl is followed by \ as in the 
 original Ehenus, Bhodanus; comp. English, rhyme, 
 myrrh. 
 
 e. g ,m comparison or declension, the c is omitted for euphony's sake ; 
 ^o^e, f)o jer). The lengthening quality of the ^ was introduced iu writ- 
 ing about the fifteenth century, and was universally established in the 
 seventeenth. According to Noehden it arose from the aspirate or full 
 breathing which, when inserted in the middle of a syllable, must 
 naturally prolong it in sound. Adelung derives this ^ from t^ which, 
 he says, existed at first as a mere modification of the letter t, and after- 
 wards served to give more tone to the vowels near it ; but the opinion 
 of Noehden seems more probable, and is even supported by the ortho- 
 graphy of Mosheim, who spelt such words as i^n, tufeti = tu^en. 
 (Comp. Dr. Sears' Noehden, p. 43, 44.) 
 
 * Noehden puts a short e after t to aid beginners in pronouncing fn ; 
 e. g., Snaie = .Renak. 
 
22 pronunciation: simple consonants, 
 
 S/ f, 8- The sharp or hissing Bound is given to s in English 
 at the beginning, and frequently in the middle and 
 at the end of words, but in German it has this sharp 
 sound only at the end of words. In the middle of 
 words it is expressed by doubling f. But at the 
 beginning of words | has only the sqfl or buzzing 
 sound of z, as in has, amuse, rosy. 
 
 1. Like z: Soln =: zone; @egcn, Scfen. 
 
 2. Like s: ®IaS, JpauS, SJlcffcr (comp. massy) ; 
 
 cffcn, Jpa^. 
 
 2, t is pronounced as in EngHsh; but before I not pre- 
 
 ceded by f and immediately followed by another 
 vowel it has the sound of ts ; e. g., foxtion'=Portsy- 
 one ; 9)atient' ; but Saftton (= bast-ee-ohn). 
 
 Note. — The sound of t is also preserved when the accent 
 is on ti ; «. g-, Demotratte. 
 
 83, H. The sound of this letter is exactly that of the Eng- 
 lish / and German f ; e. g., 2Jatcr, father ; toiel. In 
 foreign words between two vowels or diphthongs 
 and at the beginning and end of words, most Ger- 
 mans give it the sound of/ in qf= ov ; e. g., SSotal, 
 ©!Ia»c, Srettcl, lxa». 
 
 SHJ, tn answers nearly to the English v, and is never mute, 
 except in a few foreign words ; e. g., Stat^enottJ. It 
 approaches the sound of w (or ue) when it foUov^s j 
 or f^ ; e. g., ©(i^Wejicr {Sch^ester) ; jttiei {ts^ei). 
 
 3, J is without any exception pronounced like ts in gets 
 
 or wits; e. g., 3a^l {tsahl), ^elt, 3Ci^. 
 
 Exercise on the Pronunciation of the Consonants. 
 
 Tie 9latur, ®ott, ker SSater, kte ^Bmginnen, ker ^onig, ter 
 Gtlaoe, ka», bcr Sail, baS ©rat, tcr Sob, bas ^inb, bic Slbente, 
 tie Sonne, ble ?)ovtion, ble 9)robc, gefe^en, ber Samerab', bie 
 ^naten, bas ^nic, ble ^iimme, ble Z^^m, ber ©egcn, ber ^linj, 
 
pronunciation: double and compound consonants. Ai3 
 
 kie granscftntten, ker SSefen, jiuei, je'^n, ner jr;:Iti, bie §B^en, tie 
 U^rcn, ker ^ragen, ber Secg, kie SuDen, kas 3a^r, kie Semunft, 
 ker SBagen, ker-®eoatter, tie JBeine. 'Die SBcKen iti Dceani. 
 jDer SJitle jener Scanner. fBo ijl ker Setter keinei SSruiersS ? S;ie 
 aSbgel ftngen. gnglanb iji meiit SBaterlairt. I;ie (SanBiJaten ker 
 Sapellc. Eie 31^1 ijl uerrojict. Die Shaker keg SBogenS. liaS 91ok 
 ijtrunk. ^oben ©ie cincn jammer? Jpafl bu kas Sxempel ? !Eie 
 ^nakn :^aken i^rc Slufgabe gelernt. 3cne grau iji unfcre 5!KuUer. 
 "Lai SCetter ijl fe:§r angene^tn. S« war ein ^n'otl. Die ^atienten 
 meineS Dnfel«. ©efccn ©ie mir eine 9)ortion 3lujlem. 2Co ijl tie 
 DueUe ke« 3fl^eiti3 ? Die ©B|ne beg ©Ha»en. .^aien ©ic ein Sak 
 genommen? Die ^inklein ftnk ungekuIMg. 6afar unk Sicero waren 
 fR'mtx. Mln liegt am Sl^ein. Der Sankikat. Daa ®elu6ke. 
 Die me. 
 
 Double and Compound Consonants. 
 
 6^, ^. There is no sound corresponding to that of the 
 German &i in EngUsh. It can not therefore be very 
 clearly defined, and must be learned from the hps 
 of the teacher. 
 
 1. After a, 0, u, and au, it has a guttural sound, 
 and resembles the Scotch ch in Loch, the Irish gh 
 in Lough, or the Welsh c or ch ; e. g., Dac^, 3o(^, 
 2:u4>, Sauc^, lac^en, !o4»en. 
 
 2. After e, i, ei, ii, ij, it, iiu, cu, and the consonants, 
 it is a soft "palatal aspirate,'' and is identical in 
 pronunciation with the Spanish j in relqj, or a; in 
 carcaoc, or the Scotch gh in light ; e. g., Bred^en, 2i<i^t, 
 wi4», Icui^ten, ?Kann^ett, Siid^eli^en, £iic|>er.* 
 
 3. ©^ at the beginning of a word has the sound of 
 k, which is given to words in English derived from 
 the ancient languages, as in chorus, etc.; e. g., 
 ©ftor, ei^rijl. 
 
 * Some teachers think it may he ohtained in English hy giving h a 
 rery strong aspirate sound. 
 
24 psonunoiation: double and compound consonants. 
 
 4. In words derived from the French, ch has in 
 German, as well as in English, the sound of sh, as 
 chaise = shaise: e. g., Gl^arlotte. , 
 i^S. Whenever c^ is followed by i in the same syllable 
 (except when i is abridged from ti, as : Sucf)-S in- 
 stead of Suc^cS), as 2Ba^8, D<i^S, guc^jS, ^3 sounds 
 like so, comp. wax, ox, fox. 
 i is ttsed instead of I or ff at the end of words, when 
 the preceding letter is a vowel ; and has the sound 
 of ck in stick, as : ®IocEe, SRocf . 
 
 Note.— d is never used after a consonant, e. g., SCBerl (no* Strtt). 
 fl, ^ has a still sharper sound than the simple i, like ss 
 in kiss, as : ga^, §af , IKeffer. 
 
 In the middle of words jj is used, after a slwrl 
 vowel, when followed by another vowel, but after a 
 diphthong or a long vowel, or before a consonant, 
 after a short vowel, and especially at the end, j is to 
 be used ; e. g., ^^affcn, but |a^t, flic^en, grower, %l}xff. 
 So at the end of a part of a compound word, as 
 ©ro^satcr, compounded of ®rof and 25atcr. 
 
 Note 1. — In former periods of the language f, (f, g were 
 frequently interchanged, and authorities often differ as to 
 the use of ff or g. 
 
 3. — g is not compounded of f and j, as might be inferred 
 Arom the printed letters, but is a combination of f and i 
 (final s) = f«. Hence Wu^jug, not Slupug. 
 
 ®^, f^. ® appears frequently closely followed by &, and 
 then produces the sound given to sh in English, as 
 in (Sc^ijf, s/itp ; <S^U^, shoe ; ^^^t, ashes; fintij"d^, 
 childish; @c^af, sheep; ^ki^^^, flesh 
 
 Note. — i final never coalesces with <S) ; e. g., SRoScjien is 
 pronounced as if 9lB4»c^en. 
 
 @)), f|>, St, ft. ® with )5 or t beginning a syllable, has some- 
 thing of the sound of sh ; e. g., f|>at = shpcU ; 
 @|»ie{ = shpiel ; @tatt = shtadl ; @todE = shtock ; 
 Befte'^en = beshtehen. 
 
 Note. — In some parts of Germany fp and |1 are pronounced 
 as in^ English; but most Germans give fp and fl this 
 
pbonunoiation: dodble and compound consonants. 25 
 
 sound only when in the middle or at the end of a syllable, 
 as in Burfl (the (1 as in its English equivalent, thirst;) 
 Sitrlie, Slfi. 
 
 Qu, ^n. For the pronimciation of this combination see Q, 
 p. 21. 
 
 ng. See under ®, p. 19. 
 
 ^n. See under ^, p. 21. 
 
 tp§, )fi[^, in German and English, occurs chiefly in words 
 of Greek derivation, e. g., ^iXoao(pla, philosophy, 
 and has the sound of /, as in philosopher, ^l^tto* 
 fol»]^ ; geography, ®cogra|»]^ie' j ^(ZoZptes, 2tlolp^. 
 
 5Pf, ^f. This combination has only one sound, and is pro- 
 nounced with compressed lips, as : ^ferb, ?PfciIer, 
 
 Spf, ^f. In English p is silent before s, as m psalm; but in 
 German the two letters are imited like pf so as to 
 give only one sound uttered by a compression of the 
 lips; e.g., ^folmifl, »>fetttio, ^fittl(^. 
 
 Z% t^. In German as in all the modem European lan- 
 guages, except the Greek and English, ^ of t| is 
 silent, t alone being pronounced ; e. g., Sl^at, 5J?utl^. 
 There are, however, in English a few proper names 
 in which th sounds like simple t, as Tlwmas, 
 Thames, etc. 
 
 The ^ after t also indicates that the vowel next 
 preceding or following is to 'belong, as: 2lrmut]^. 
 The only exceptions are iffiirt^ and 3r|urm, in wl*ch 
 the vowel is short on account of the r following. 
 
 ^ = jj. The sound of 3 is doubled by prefixing t ; therefore 
 ^ is equivalent to 33, or English ts, as: ^a^e = kalse, 
 W\.Vi%t, flii^en. ^ is never used if a consonant 
 already precedes, as §er§, and not §er^. 
 
26 PEONCNOIATION : THE ACCENT. 
 
 Exercise on the Pronunciation of Double and 
 Compound Consonants. 
 
 Dcr S'^or jingt cin Siefc. "Lit S|riflcn epn ©c^weincfleifc^. 'Lai 
 SBac^g ifl gelb. Der Di^a ^at Corner. !Die giii^fe |tni) fdjlau. S)ie 
 m^\i I'^icpt lei^t. Der Soi^ fc^roiKt ben glu^. l;er ^uc^cit fc^mcctt 
 gut. 9Kctne 33ud)er rmli auf tern 3:tf(i^c. @e6en ®ic mlr ein Sii^t. 
 !Das Dad^ iti ©^loffeiS ifl Ioftf))ieItg. ©etn fHod ifl jerriffett. 
 2)a« SBcr! iti ®ro§»atcrg. Die ®rof mutter :^at eine 9)?agt). Jpafcen 
 <Sie ein SKeffer ? Die gajfer ftni runb. ®ie ©lode in Z^nxmti 
 Kutet. 3I5ir crwarten tiiglicf) tie fRMU'iix unfercs 2lboIp:^. fSricWd^ 
 ijl ein SieHlng Ser ©ro^mutter. 2Cir |aben unfere Scftion in ter 
 @eogro)3|ie. "Eie f)^iIofot)|te ift cin fd^mtcriges etubium. Xer 
 ©(^loager meiner (B6^mjttx. S3o ift ber ©c^liipl be« ©(^topa? 
 S)te ©cfeiffe fmb auf bent gluffc. ©potten ©ie meiner ni^t. "Die 
 beutfc^e ©prac^e ijl nid^t fe'^r fii^wer. 3Sir iialm bie ©pur bcS 'Simt 
 ter«. IDii S^orcn :^a6en feinen Wlvit%. (Slifofcet^ |at cine 5Jfu^e. 
 ■Eie ,Ro^e :^Qt Sa^en. Dcr Sens if^ gefommen. 3lrmut| ifl feine 
 ©(^anbc. 3d^ V^e ein Jpcrj unb 9«ut:^. Dicfe Zf^at iji lobcna* 
 werf^. 
 
 THE ACCENT. 
 
 In German in applying the accent a distinction is made 
 
 between simple and compound words. 
 
 Simple WordSi — ^A simple word may either be a monosyl- 
 labic or derivative word. 
 
 Derivative Words. — ^Derivatives take, as in English, the 
 primary* accent on the radical or chief syllable, 
 while the prefixesf and affixes have either the 
 secondary* accent, or none at all. As : resolve' 
 ■froia solve (Latin solrx)) ; improp'er from proper ; 
 
 * See Webster's Unabr. Diet, of the Eng. Lang, g 110, p. xlix. 
 f The unaccented prefixes are Be, cmp, cnt» cr, gc, t)cr, jcr. The affixes 
 c, el, en, enb, er, em, cS, eji, et, tg, i^t, in, if*, tifift, *en, ung, and igcn. 
 
peontjkciation: the accent. 27 
 
 readjust' ment from adjust; so in German, SSergcber 
 has the accent on get, because it is derived from the 
 verb geben, 
 
 EXCEPTIONS* 
 
 1) The Prefixes crj. mx%, ttn. and ur generally take the primary 
 
 accent, as: utaltf ungtitdU^. 
 
 2) ircn (ieren). Verbs ending in hen or ictcit have the primary- 
 
 accent on the it or ier, as : ruinirett, regtcren. 
 
 3) Words, whether German or of foreign origin, ending in ci, or 
 
 Ktx, have the primary accent on this ending, as: ©pielfteir 
 Satiicr. 
 
 4) The particles aUr bicf/ in compound words, and §tn and Ijerf 
 
 compounded with prepositions, never take the primary ac 
 cent ; e. g., aKctn. vielteiiljtf ^ina&r ^erauf . 
 
 Compound WordSt — Compound words have an accent on 
 each of the components, but that of the first is the 
 strongest, while the others have the secondary ac- 
 cent, as : JS^OttS^unti, Qro^miit^ig, nwfangen, fort* 
 ge^cn. But the primary or strong accent, as in 
 fottge^en, is transposed when the second syllable, 
 e. gr., ge^en, expresses the most important idea, thus : 
 ic^ ircrtc nic^l fwtgel^ctt, fontern fortreitcn. 
 
 1 shall not a^ay go, but mjnay ridk. 
 
 3 1 2 1 
 
 Note. — Compound particles have their accent on the sec- 
 ond syllable ; e. g.. With }U, Surijtf^tunft. 
 
 EXCEPTION. 
 
 The following words have the accent on the syllables 
 indicated; So^r^unbert, Korbmcftf ©itbafj, and other words 
 indicating the difierent points of the compass. 
 
 Dissyllabic Words. — There are a number of dissyllabic 
 words in English which are used as verbs on the 
 one hand, as nouns or adjectives on the other, and 
 are distinguished from each other by the different 
 position of the accent, as : con'vert, to convert'. 
 In German such words have the same accent when 
 used as verba or nbUns ; e. g., Seten,Zi/€; Ictcn, to live. 
 
 * Single anomalies, as leien'bij instead of U'benbtg/ are few. 
 
28 PBONUNCIATION : THE ACCENT. 
 
 Foreign WordSi — Foreign words wUh German endings (c, en, 
 i\6^, &c.) have the accent generally on the syllable 
 next to the last ; e. g., SSioltne, Z^eatn. Foreign 
 words (from the Greek, Latin, or French) withoiit 
 German endings have the accent generally on the 
 last syllable, as: ^legimcnt, ©oltat, £te))|ont, Sc^ 
 nat * 91atiott.t 
 
 Note. — ^Many foreign words adopted without change retain 
 their original accent ; as, ©tubium. Some words have both 
 modes of accentuation, as is the case in English ; e. g., Vi'o- 
 lin, or Violin'; as, 3RuTlt and aKuflF, 9)^?fit' and gj^^'fit. 
 
 Exercise on the Position of the Accent. 
 
 !Dcr 33cruf. 'Eer (Smpfang. 2^er entfc^tuf. "Der ®ebrau(^. 
 Die l^vxt. 'Das Saum^en. ©ic^ kflci^igcn. "Der (Smpfanger, 
 Die erfa^rungen. Derlnfang. DoS Jpauptoort. Der Santmann. 
 Der SRet^tlum. Die grcuntfc^aft. Der Untcrne^tner. DaS Unter* 
 tte'^men. Die Unterne|mung. DaS S^rt|lent|um. Da3 3utens 
 t^um. Die Srlaubnig, SBeroeinen. Srwac^en. Der SKaulkerbaum. 
 Die UniiBertrefflic^teit. Die 3urii(ffunft. 3lUer 3lnfang ijl fcbwer. 
 Der 3iegcn6ogen ijl :^errli^. Die Siingtinge lieben tie grcit)ctt. Die 
 Santlfute regieren felten. Das 9JJannIein iradjte Me ^la^ric^ten. 
 Der 5rounbfo(^ '^ot tin getcrmeflfer. 3eneS JpauS ^at jroci Singangc. 
 Da« Siinglingaalter lommt niii^t wielcr. Die U^rfdjluffd unto tic 
 getermejfer. _ Dos Sikntirot^ ijl %tn\\6^. Der ^onig Bon ^xi\x^zr\ 
 ^at siele SRegimentcr ©oltatcn. Die oftattfc^ert S'lationen lieten ten 
 Stcp^nten, Die ameritanifc^e Station ^at einen ©enat. Ss ijl cine 
 ©pielcret, ja eine ^inberci. es ijl ganj Unfinn, ungerc^t. 
 
 * Latin and Greek words drop their ending when used in German ; 
 e. g., Senat, and not ©enatuS. Words having ti in the final syllable 
 change this ending to 3 ; e. g., Horatius, $oraj. 
 
 f When the root of a word must in Latin be sought in the Genitive, 
 the Germans adopt the form of that case. 
 
PEONtTNCIATION : LONG AND SHOBT VOWELS. 29 
 
 Long and Short Vowels,* 
 
 Long : 1. A simple vowel followed by only one consonant 
 (with or without ^), or closing a syllable {especially 
 when accented) ; e. g., Scr, lam, 3?atcr, rotten, ^oBe. 
 
 2. All diphthongs and double vowels ; e. g., Iei|en, 
 ©oamctt. 
 Short : 1. All vowels in endings and in unaccented pre- 
 fixes-; e. g., befleHctt. 
 
 2. A single vowel, though accented, when followed 
 by a double consonant, or by two consonants origra- 
 aUy belonging to the same syllable ; e. g. SEonnc. 
 
 a. When the connection of two consonants is effected by 
 compounding two words, or by adding a sufllx or ending, the 
 preceding vowel remains long ; e. g., §utinac^er, ((Jtocrlic^. 
 
 &. The vowel of the following words, although followed by 
 two consonants, is long: 
 Sttt, kind $u|len, cough Duat^, quartz 
 
 Sttjl, physician fitojier, monastery ©i^wert, sword 
 
 SBart, beard SRagbf maid-servant tobt, dead 
 
 Sibc, earth 9Bonb» moon %xa% consolation 
 
 ©eiurt; birth mS^% nearest ttoflcn, to console 
 
 griiiit, greatest D6fl, fruit SSogt, bailiff, sheriff 
 
 liarj/ resin Dfiern, easter Wiijl, waste 
 
 §erb, hearth ^<i.%% pope Sffittfle, desert 
 
 i>ecrbe, flock 9)ferb, horse jart, tender 
 
 ^6^% highest 
 
 c. The vowel is short in a'6, an, 6tn, V\i, ba«, be*, ti, gi6, l^at, 
 ^tn, int, in, man, mit, ot, uw, »om, son, waa, tteg, jum. 
 NoTK — Some make the vowel short in (SloS, ®raa, gvo6, §of, Xag, 
 ttcl (generally K)0^l) and other words. 
 
 Exercise on Long and Short Vowels. 
 
 3c^ fnttt umawei U^r. S5er jiamm ift ju ftetn. ©tal^l ifl 
 ijiel Beffer ol3 Sifen. i)ai3 g)fert) t^ im (StaJt. Sie Sigeuner 
 fte^len. (Stcttcn ©ie Mefe^ Suii^ in ben 23u(^erfd)rant. ^cfeett 
 ©ie mir m(^t son Vi^m. SWcttcii ©tc i^n. !Das 9Scct fifl)t )'el)r 
 
 * These rules can only be of service to the student, when all the pre- 
 ceding rules have been carefuUy studied. 
 
30 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 fc^ijn aui. ?Mctn 9Sctt tfl ju eng fiir jwei. ^tttn ®ie fflr mtc^. 
 SBie man ftcb bettet, fo fi^laft man. 3c^ rtct(> i^m ^iet ju bleikn. 
 (Sr ritt foeBen fort. e« f«3^ic« mir nic^t rec^t. 'Lai ®<^iff ift 
 im §afcn. ®ebeti ©ie i^nt ciefcn ©tocf. i)^iinm tie^ SBudjelicn. 
 3|r ®ol^tt ift sici jiinger. !S)te @onne iji fockti aufgegongeii. 
 ©tnt ©le fi^on in Serlin getucfen? Sine Sonne Sicr wim nidt 
 au^rei^en. 3^r 93i.'ubet: ijl ^icr gewefen. SBo ifl meinc ^HftuU 
 ter? i/ie 93tfiber unt ixt ffft^tttt. tai <Sdft»ttt xii 
 ^oqtt^ ifl im ftloftec. 'Die HSftaQi ifi mit ter f^ctbt auf 
 ter SBeitc. SBaffer in ter ^ufte ifl ein wa'^rer S^toft. 2)tc 
 ^fcc&e ftnn in bem ©bftgarten. ®cr SJlann mit bem graucn 
 93arte ifi toit. 
 
 Exercise on Pronunciation. 
 
 3c^ crinnere mic^ ntc^t, ba§ ein Sui^, ein SJtcnfc^, ober irgcnb cine 
 
 I remember me not that a book, a man, or any an 
 
 Scgeben^eit iei iehni fo grofe SBirhingen auf mic^ ^eroorgebraii^t 
 
 event of(tbe) life so great effects on me produced 
 
 ^atte, aU bic fBftti^cn ©tiidc bie i6^ buri^ 3|rc ©iitigfcit ^abe 
 
 had as the precious pieces which I through your kindness have 
 
 tennen lemcn. ©ic fc^cinen ein SBerf eineiS ^immlif^en Oeniua ju 
 
 to know learned. They seem a work of a heavenly genius to 
 
 fcin, ber ftc^ ben SRenfc^cn na|ert, urn fte mit T"^ fel^fl 
 
 be who himself to the men approaches in order them with themselves 
 
 auf lie gclinbefte SEeife betannt ju madjen. S3 fmt leine ®ebic^te. 
 
 in the mildest manner acquainted to make. They are no fictions. 
 
 Ttan glaubt sor ben aufgefc^Iagencn unge|cuem Siicbern beg 
 
 One beUeves before the opened monstrous books of (the) 
 
 ©c^idfals 3U fle|cn, in bencn ber ©turmwinb bee Bewcgteflcn 
 
 fate to stand, in which the whirlwind of the mostmoved 
 
 Sebeng faufl unb mit ©ewalt rafc^ :§in unb wiebcr 
 
 (most-impassioned) life howls and with violence quickly to and fro 
 
 Mattert. 3<^ Mn iiber bie ©torte unb Sart^eit, iiber bic ©eioalt 
 
 turns the leaves. I am at the force and tenderness, at the power 
 
 unb SRuljc, fo crftount unb auffcr aHer Saffung gebrac^t, bag id^ 
 
 and tranquillity, so astonished and out of all composure brought, that I 
 
DIVISION OF WOEDS INTO STLLABtES. 31 
 
 nur ntit ©e'^nfud^t auf Me 3"t wartc, ba ic^ mic^ in elncm 
 
 only witli longing for the time wait, when I myself in a 
 
 3ujlant)c Beftnben mcrbe, wcitev ju lefen. 
 
 state find shall, further to read. 
 
 ®ljt^e'(3 „2Bitf)eIm SKcifler." 
 
 Goethe's "William Meister." 
 
 Division of Words into Syllables. 
 
 In English the division of a word at the end of a line is 
 determined by the etymology, but in German it is mostly 
 determined by the pronunciation of the word. Hence the 
 following rules : 
 Consonanti — 1. A consonant, standing between two vowels 
 
 in dissyllabic or polysyllabic words, belongs to the 
 
 second syllable, as : £c*6en, ^a4cn.* 
 
 Two Consonants, or A Double Consonant.— 2. When iwo 
 consonants occur between two vowels, the first con- 
 sonant belongs to the preceding, and the second to 
 the following syllable, as i ®ar«ten, frefsfen, S!Jlut*ter. 
 Note. — When a vowel has been elided between two con- 
 sonants, the separation is effected at the place of elision^ as : 
 cif-tij for (eiferig). 
 
 Compound Consonants. — 3. The compound consonants f 
 d^, Vi^, f<i^, %, and tl^ belong to the first syllable 
 if followed by a consonant; but, if followed by a 
 vowel, they belong to the second syllable, as : ntenfc^* 
 lid), rat^^li^ ; SJicnsfcben, rast^en. 
 
 Note.— Also |)f, when preceded by nt; belong to the syl- 
 lable following, as : .Sarp'fen; but, tam^lifen. 
 
 Diphthongs. — 4. Diphthongs are not susceptible of a division, 
 Neither are monosyllabic words. 
 
 * The sign used to indicate the division of a word at the end of a line, 
 is • ; e. g., Sea^cen^bent. 
 
 f The letters ng (except when they belong to different parts of a com- 
 pound word) always go with the preceding syllable, but giti in worac 
 from the French, and fc, when it has the sound of §, belong to the syl- 
 lable that follows ; e. g., TO^gnon, ©i'fcilJlin. 
 
32 USE OP CAPIT4L LETTEES. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Compound and Derivative Words. — 5. Compound words 
 and derivatives are divided according to the ehj- 
 mology of the word, and without regard to the pro- 
 nunciation, as : 6eo6*ac^tcn, tiottscnticn, cm)}^fangcn, tar* 
 urn, er*innern, SflijSsc^cn, etc. 
 
 Note. — Endings of which the first letter is a vowel, take 
 the final consonant of the preceding syllable, as : |iet«mat^. 
 
 ON THE USE OF CAPITAL LETTEES. 
 
 With a capital letter, begin : 
 
 1. As in English, the first word of a sentence or para- 
 
 graph, lines of poetry, and direct quotations.* 
 
 2. All nouns, words used as nouns, and nouns used ad- 
 
 verbially (cf. p. 318, m.) 
 
 Note. — Words used as nouns are especially adjectives (p. 135, 
 XI.), infinitives (p. 163*), indefinite pronouns, adjectives, and 
 numerals (p. 316, 1. ; 319, VII.). Usage, however, varies greatly 
 in the employment of the initial capital. 
 
 3. GreneraUy adjectives derived from the names of cities or 
 
 persons. 
 
 4. The personal pronoun ©ie (3d pars, plur.) with its 
 
 oblique cases, and its corresponding possessive 3^f/ 
 when used in address to superiors (cf. p. 179, 11.) 
 
 Note 1. — Pronouns of the second person (bit, ifir, cuet), and the 
 reflexive (i^ have the initial capital in letters, etc., intended to 
 come under the eye of the person addressed. 
 
 Note 3. — The pronoun ic^ (I) begins with a small initial, ex- 
 cept after a full stop. 
 
 * The use of the initial capital, up to the sixteenth century, was con- 
 fined to words beginning a new sentence, to new lines in poetry, and to 
 proper names. We so find it used in the German Bible and hymn books 
 of the last century, and in the writings of distinguished authors of our 
 own day even. Some writers, the brothers Grimm espeieially, labored 
 earnestly,but unsuccessfully, for the introduction of rules in German very 
 much like those of the English, to govern the use of the initial capital. 
 
PUHCTOATION ^ETYMOLOGY. 33 
 
 ON PUNCTUATION. 
 
 In German, the marks of punctuation are us^ very much 
 as in English, the comma* and exclamation poip^' *>f<'ep<=e(i. 
 which occur more frequently. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 The Parts of Speech in German are ten : 
 
 1. The Article, in SIrtitri or taa ©cfdjlec^tewort, 
 
 2. The Noun or Substanttob, taS ^anptwoxt. 
 
 3. The Pbonoun, iai gurwort. 
 
 4. The ADJEcmvE, iai gigenfc^aftSiBort. 
 
 5. The Numeral, iai ^aljlmrt, 
 >6. The Vebb, tai Qi\lwoxt. 
 
 7. The Adveeb, ta« Umflanigwort. 
 
 8. The Preposition, bag SBortBort or iRtt^M^mxi. 
 
 9. The Conjunction, iai SBinbeiuort 
 
 10. The Interjection, bas 2luSruflD0rt or gmfjfinbunggtDort. 
 
 Of these (ten) parts of speech the first six are capable 
 of inflection. The remaining four are invariable, and are 
 therefore called Particles, |)artiteln. 
 
 The inflection applied to the first five Parts of Speech, 
 viz. : Article, Noun, Pronoun, Adjective, and Numeral, is 
 called Declension. 
 
 The genders and numbers are the same in German as in 
 EngKsh, viz. : the masculine (tai mannlii^e), the feminine (Sos 
 tDciMii^c), and the neuter gender (taS fSc^Iic^c ©cfd^lec^t) j Sin- 
 gular (ginja^fel) and Plural (SJle^rj^t). 
 
 The relation of words to each other, in English expressed 
 mostly by means of prepositions, is in German also denoted 
 by a change of the ending of the noun and the article preceding. 
 
 * The comma is used to set off all subordinate or dependent sentences 
 
34 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 There are in German four cases which correspond best to 
 those in the Ancient Languages. They are : 
 
 1. The Nominative (fficrfatt), answering to the English 
 
 nominative. 
 
 2. The Genitiye (fficffenfall), usually corresponding to the 
 
 English possessive, or to the objective 
 after the preposition of. 
 
 3. The Dative (SBemfatI), usually corresponding to the 
 
 English objective after the preposition 
 to, especially when the indirect (or per- 
 sonal) object of a verb. 
 4 The Accusative (SCcnfaU), corresponding to the English 
 objective after an active verb, or after 
 other prepositions than of or to. 
 
 * The Vocatue is exactly the same as the Nominative, while the Ab- 
 latime is wanting as in Greek. 
 
F^RT I. 
 ETYMOLOGY (Woif 6if bung) . 
 
 LESSON I. Seftion 1. 
 
 The Article. (®cr miiM.) 
 
 Obs. I. — The German has, like the Enghsh, two articles, the 
 Definite (the), and the IndeiInite (a or an). Both the 
 definite and the indefinite article are declined, and 
 serve to indicate by their endings the gender, num- 
 ber and case of the noun, to which they belong. 
 
 Declension of the Definite Article. (®cr IcftimmtciKrtifcl.) 
 
 
 Singular, (©injal^l.) 
 
 PUral. (3Re^r8a:|I.) 
 
 
 Maso. 
 
 F&m. Neuter. 
 
 for the three genders. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 icv 
 
 iit baS 
 
 bie, the 
 
 Gen. 
 
 »e3 
 
 itv bed 
 
 ber, of the 
 
 Dat. 
 
 iem 
 
 &er bent 
 
 ben, to the 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ben 
 
 Me &Ǥ 
 
 bie, the 
 
 Obs. n. — The Pronouns ticfcr, this ; {ener, that ; jcier, every ; 
 and Wctc^er, who, which, have the same endings as 
 the definite article, except in the Nominative and 
 Accusative feminine and plural, where i is dropped 
 and e alone is used; e. g., tiefe (instead of Wefie). 
 In the Nom. and Ace. neuter, a changes to c ; e. g., 
 bicfcS (instead of biefaS). 
 
 
 
 Bingvlar. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Maso. 
 
 Fern. Neuter. 
 
 
 for tlie three genders 
 
 Nom. 
 
 iiefet 
 
 iiefc bicfe§, 
 
 this 
 
 Mefe, these 
 
 Gen. 
 
 kicfeS 
 
 Mefer McfcS, 
 
 of this 
 
 ticfer, of these 
 
 Dat. 
 
 bief«K 
 
 biefcr tiefcm, 
 
 to this 
 
 Mefcn, to these 
 
 Ace. 
 
 btcfen 
 
 biefc liefeS, 
 
 this 
 
 tiefc, these 
 
36 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 Obs. in. — The object of all transUiue verbs is put in the 
 accusative case : The father has the ball, Ut SJatcr 
 ^t ben ^aU. 
 
 Obs. IV. — German nouns form their accusative Hke the 
 nominative. (For the exceptions see Less. IV.) 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 f;h 3?ater, the father tcr 9'le|fe, the nephew 
 
 Me SJJutter, the mother bie Sfiidjte, the niece 
 
 iai ^aui, the house iai ©(^af, the sheep 
 
 ker ©o^n, the son tcr Oartcn, the garden 
 
 tie Soc^tcr, the daughter He Sampe, the lamp 
 
 iai ffiaffcr, the vsrater iai ©iKet, the silver 
 
 icr SSrubcr, the brother ber Jpunb, the dog (hound) 
 
 bie ©(^wejier, the sister ite ^c^e, the cat 
 
 iai S3uc^,, the book tai @ol5, the gold 
 
 unt, aiid ja, yes neitt, no nic^t, not toaij what 
 
 Peesent Tense of ^abett, TO HAVE. 
 3(^ 'i^abi, 1 have loir l^afcen, wo have 
 
 bu l)a% thou hast t^r ^aW, ) j^^^^^ 
 
 er :^at, he has ©ie |aBcn, J 
 
 [tc (e«) ^at, she (it) has [ic ^aben, they have 
 
 Reading Exercise (ficfciiBunfl) I. 
 
 !Dcif SSatcr uni tie 9JJutter. I;er ©o^n unt Me Silicate. S)oa ®oft 
 unt baa ©ilbci-. Sftcr §unb unc jebe ^a^c. SSaa |ot ber SSruber? 
 !Dcr 91effc ^at bic Sampe. !E;ic ©(^mefter '^at bas Suc^. §0^ bu bas 
 ©(^flf? SBir t)akn bie ^a^e unb ben ^unt. 3|r ^o6t ba3 ©otc unb 
 bag ©ilBer. §aben ©ie bag Sued ? SRein, ic^ iak baS 33uc^ ni^t. 
 Jpat fie beti^unb? ^a(l bu SBaffer ? ©ic '^aBcn ten ®arten unb bag 
 k>ani. Diefe SToc^ter unb jene gjic^te, SJel^eg 33uc^ :^at er ? 
 
 Theme (Stufgofic) I. 
 
 I have the gold. Thou hast the silver. He has the book. 
 She has the (Ace.) dog and the cat. Hast thou the lamp ? 
 
THE INDKFINITE ABTICXtl. 
 
 37 
 
 What has he? We have the house and the (Ace.) garden. 
 You have this sheep. He has that cat. Every father and 
 every mother. That son and this daughter. Have you the 
 book ? The brother of the niece. Which house has he ? 
 
 Conversation 
 
 §abe ic^ iai ©oft ? 
 SBas^ojlbu? 
 aBetc^eg§aMi3:^atcr? 
 §at fte Me Sampe ? 
 aBeI^e^a^c:^atfie? 
 §afl bu bas Suc^ ? 
 §akn ®ie tic ^a^e ? 
 SSScIc^cn Jpunb |flt er? 
 Jpaiti^rSSaffer? 
 
 (S|)re$u6ung). 
 
 9lein, bu lafl bas ©itter. 
 3c^ ^aU ben Jpunb. 
 ®r :§at bo3 §aug bcr 9li(^tc. 
 3a, pf ^flt *i2 2am)5e. 
 ©ie 'i^at jene ^a|c. 
 3c^ |ak bflS 33uc^ nic^t. 
 Stein, i^ 'i/abe boS ©i^af. 
 Sr t)ot btefen ^unb. 
 3a, »ir ia6en S93a([er nnb Ster 
 (beer). 
 
 *■«»■■» 
 
 LESSON n. €cft{ott 2. 
 
 The Indefinite Article, (Scr unficfiimmtc Slrttfcl.) 
 
 Obs. I. — ^Like the definite, the indefinite article has four 
 cases, vrhich, by their endings, serve to indicate the 
 gender and case of the noun to which the article 
 belongs. Because of its original significance = one, 
 the indefinite article has no plural. 
 
 Declension of the Indefinite Article, 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 eln 
 
 cine 
 
 eitt, 
 
 a or an 
 
 Gen. 
 
 eincS 
 
 etner 
 
 cincS, 
 
 of a 
 
 Dat. 
 
 einetn 
 
 einct 
 
 eincnt. 
 
 to a 
 
 Ace. 
 
 etnctt 
 
 cine 
 
 ein. 
 
 a 
 
 Obs. n. — The pronouns, mein, my ; bein, thy ; fcin, his ; i^r, her ; 
 unfer, our ; 3^r, your ; i|r, their ; and fctn, no ; take 
 
38 
 
 THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 the same endings in the singular. In the plural 
 they take the endings of the definite article, omit- 
 ting t in the Nom. and Ace; e. g., meinc, instead of 
 meinie. . 
 
 
 Bingvla/r. 
 
 
 PlwrcU. 
 
 
 Mase. Fern. 
 
 Nmter. 
 
 for the three genders. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 mtla jncinc 
 
 tnein 
 
 mciitc, my 
 
 Gen. 
 
 mclneS meinct 
 
 mctttcS 
 
 tneincr, of my 
 
 Dat. 
 
 mcineitt ntcince 
 
 mcinein 
 
 ntclncn, to my 
 
 Ace. 
 
 meinen nteine 
 
 mcln 
 
 ntcinc, my 
 
 Obs. m. — Adjectives remain unchanged when placed after 
 the noun ; e. g.. The boy is small, ter ^noBc ijl Ilciif; 
 but when they precede the noun they are declined, 
 and must agree with it in gender, number, and case. 
 (See Less. XVI.) 
 
 Obs. IV. — The possessive pronouns_(mein, bcin, &c.) agree in 
 German with the d)ject possessed; e. g.. Our 
 nephew and his niece, unfcr 91effe unb fcine 9lli^te. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 'Lit D*S, the ox 
 tie ^u|, the cow 
 tas ©(|af, the sheep 
 tcr 9l))fet, the apple 
 MciKil^, themilk 
 baa ©rag, the grass 
 gut, good 
 treu, true, faithful 
 oler, or 
 
 Present Tense op 
 
 3(i^ Mn, I am 
 tu Mfl, thou art 
 er ijl, he is 
 ffe (ti) t|l, she (it) is 
 
 kcr guf , the foot 
 bie Sutter, the butter 
 tag geft, the field 
 ter SJlanit, the man 
 bie SJlaua, the mouse 
 bag ®lag, the glass 
 gro^, great, large 
 tuo, where 
 tuer, who 
 
 @etn, TO BE. 
 
 Wir pnb, we are 
 i^rfetb, I 
 @ie pnb, P°" '^^^ 
 fie jlnb, they are 
 
THE INDEPINITE ARTICLE. 39 
 
 Reading Exercise II. 
 
 Die SKitt einer ^u^ ifl gut. SBlr %aUn cine ^4, i^r ^aBt elit 
 ©^af, (ie t)a6en ctnen Stpfel. Setn Sntter ^at cine SJlang. 3(1 tic 
 Snttet gut? S3i|T: tu dt? Sin Dd^g iji it^x (very) grog. 3ene3 
 ®ra« i|l griin. liefer 5Kann |ot ein (3hi, aitv fein SSaffer. ©cine 
 ©^toejtcr l}at nur (only) einen gug. ©cii i^r flein (small) otcr 
 grog ? Unfer gelt) ijt griin. 3|r ^^un^ iji treu unb mac^fam (watch- 
 ful). 2Ber i|l jener aUann? 3Co ift teine ©(^tocjler ? §att i^r eine 
 ^u| ? Sflein, roir ^akn ein ®(^af. Sift tu feinc ^lic^te ? ©ie fmb 
 unfer S^lcffc. Unfer gete ifl griin. ©ein ,§att« i(l neu. 3|r Sui^ ifl 
 nic^t neu, e^ ifl olt. 
 
 Theme II. 
 
 Thou art a boy (^nabe). I am a man. He is large. Our 
 sister is old. His brother is not rich (rcii^). We have a cow, 
 a dog, and a sheep. You have no garden. Have you a cow? 
 
 No, we have no cow, but our sister has a cat. Who has 
 your book? Is the milk of this cow good? That grass is 
 green. Your dog is faithful (treu). Art thou my niece? 
 She is a niece of your sister. Is a mouse small (fiein) or 
 large ? Has he also a cat ? 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 9Ber ift jener SKann? Setter SKann ifl mein Dnfcl (un- 
 cle). 
 
 S3t|l tu meinc 9lic^te ? Stein, i(| Bin teinc Sante (aunt). 
 
 ©cit i:^r grog unt att ? 3Bir ftnt nic^t grof , oBer alt. 
 
 ^abcn ©ie cine ^u^ ? 2Dir ^aBen cine ^u^ unt ein ©d)af. 
 
 2Bo jint unfere Siic^er (books) ? Sein Jflcffc unt unferc 91i(^te ^<if 
 
 Ben (ie (them). ^ 
 
 SQai ^aBcn ©ie ? 3(^ l«Bc einen 2l))fet. 
 
 3fl S^i^e iCoc^ter jung ? 3«, pe ifl fe^t^ (very) jung. 
 
 SBaa iflt tiefer §unt ? Sr f^at cine 3Wau«. 
 
 §aBt i^r g»ilc^ ? SBir |aBcn SRilc^ unt aSaffcr. 
 
 ©cit i:^r orm (poor), oter reid) 2Ctr f?nt rcii^ unt auc^ (also) 
 (rich)-? grog. 
 
40 FIEST DECLENSION. 
 
 $o[l bu meitt S3uc6 ? 3ltin, 3|re ©c^weflcr :^at ea. 
 
 ^at 3|re iSJJuttcr cine (S^t»e|lcr ? SKeinc SKuttcr |at cincn Srutcr, 
 
 abcr fcinc ©^weflcr. 
 
 LESSON in. Seftion 3. 
 
 Declension of Substantives. {Sicflinotion bcr ^ou^ittoiirtcr.) 
 
 Obs. I. — ^The declension of substantives forms rather an 
 intricate and difficult part of German grammar. 
 German grammarians are not yet agreed on the 
 division of the substantives into declensions or on 
 the number of declensions. While Adelung adopted 
 eight, and Klopstock preferred six, some have clas- 
 sified them into two. "Woodbury and a number of 
 others have followed the last-named class, but we 
 agree with Otto, that, while " this arrangement suf- 
 fices for Germans, who know from habit the inflec- 
 tion of each word, it is insufficient for foreigners." 
 The^best classification heretofore presented is that 
 followed by Otto, which makes five. We have re- 
 duced them to four, of which the first three contain 
 the masculine and neuter, and the fourth, the femi- 
 nine substantives. We believe that it is unneces- 
 sary to separate the neuter from the masculine 
 noun, whenever they agree in infiection, and we 
 are also satisfied that it will greatly diminish the 
 task of the learner, to place them together. 
 
 First Declension. 
 Obs. n. — ^The first declension contains all masculine and 
 neuter nouns ending in el, en, er, and the diminu- 
 tives in ^en and Icitl. Their inflections are S in 
 the genitive singular, and n in the dative plural.* 
 The radical vowels a, o, u, are often modified in 
 the plural. 
 
 * All nouns take n in the dative plural ; those ending in n, do not 
 reanire an additional n. 
 
FIBST DECLENSION. 
 
 41 
 
 MASCTJUirHl. 
 
 N. ber SSogcl, the bird 
 G. m SBogelS, of the bird 
 D. bcm SSogel, to the bird 
 A. ten SSogcI, the bird 
 
 N. bcr Dfcn, the stove (oven) 
 
 G. iti CfenS, of the stove 
 
 D. kcm Dfen, to the stove 
 
 A. ten Dfen, the stove 
 
 N. bcr SJiener, the servant 
 
 G. iti £)tenerS, of the servant 
 
 D. bent 2)tener, to the servant 
 
 A. ten Siener, the servant 
 
 Plural. 
 
 tte SSdgel, the birds 
 itx 256gcl, of the birds 
 ten ^dgeln, to the birds 
 tie 35dget, the birds 
 
 tie Defen, the stoves 
 tcr Defen, of the stoves 
 ten Defen, to the stoves 
 tic Defen, the stoves 
 
 tie S;tencr, the servants 
 ter l;icner, of the servants 
 ten S;ienertt, to the servants 
 tie 'Z.itmt, the servants 
 
 NEDTEB. 
 
 N. iai SJleffer, the knife 
 
 G. tea 9Wcj]erS, of the knife 
 
 D. tern 9Jleffer, to the knife 
 
 A. tai SKcjfer, the knife 
 
 N. taa SSaumc^en, the little tree 
 
 G. tes S5aum(^cn§, of the " 
 
 D. tent SSumii^en, to the " 
 
 A. tas Sdumc^en, the " 
 
 Plural. 
 
 tie SKeffer, the knives 
 ter SKejfer, of the knives 
 ten ^t^exn, to the knives 
 tie SJleffer, the knives 
 
 tie 33aum(fien, the little trees 
 ter 33dum(^en, of the " 
 ten Siiumi^en, to the " 
 tie Siiumi^en, the " 
 
 Obs. m. — Compound nouns are governed in their declension 
 by the last component. Among those of the first 
 declension are 
 
 Der ®ro^»ater, the grandfather tcr SfSSogct, the bird of pas- 
 ter @pra(i^Ic:^rer, the teacher of sage 
 
 languages tag !5ctcrme|fer, the pen-knife 
 
 ter Jpau^fc^Iitflfel, the street door- iai © d^lafatmmcr, the bed-room 
 
 key 
 
42 FIBST DECLENSIOIT. 
 
 Compound nouns are declined as follows : 
 
 Bngular. Plv/ral. 
 
 Nom. ter ®ro§»atcr Me ©rofoater* 
 
 Gen. bes ®ro^»aterd ber ©ro^uiitcr 
 
 Dat. bent ®ro^Bater ben ®ro§»atcrtt, 
 
 Ace. ben @ro^»otcr bie ®ropttoter 
 
 Obs. rV.-^The following words do not modify the radical 
 vowel : 
 
 ber Slbtw/the eagle ber SCagcn, the wagon 
 
 ber Su(;^ci8, the cake ber 2lmerifaner, the American 
 
 ber SJJalcr, the painter be; Sropfen, the drop 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 Obs. V. — The following nouns of this declension ending in 
 
 cw, very frequently drop the n in the Nominative, 
 
 and do not modify their vowel : 
 
 Der Stamen or ^lAmt, the name ber grieben or gi^tebe, the peace 
 
 ber ®Iau6cn or ®lau6e, the faith ber SBtlten or SBiEe, the will 
 
 ber gun!cn or gunte, the spark ber getfen or '%t\i, the rock 
 
 ber Jpaufen or ^flufc, the heap ber ©amen or ©ante, the seed 
 
 ber ®ebanten or ®ebonfc, the ber Suc^flaben or Su^jlaBe, the 
 thought letter (of the alphabet) 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Obs. VI. — The following masculine nouns are regular in the 
 singular, but take n mall cases of the plural, and 
 do not modify their radical vowel : 
 
 ber Saucr, the peasant ber ©tac^el, the sting 
 
 ber S3aier, the Bavarian ber ^^antoffcl, the slipper 
 
 ter SSetter, the cousin ber ©ettottcr, the godfather 
 
 ber SRac^fear, the neighbor ber '^niltl, the muscle 
 
 * Notice that in compound words the radical vowel of the last com- 
 ponent only is modified. 
 
ITRST DECLENSION. 
 
 43, 
 
 Obs. VII. — ^Words ending in or derived from the Latin, take en, 
 ■with the exception of tcr ^Jlajor, which takes c only. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Plural. 
 the godfather the godfathers 
 
 N. ber ©eoatter btc ©esattcrn 
 G. tea ©esatterS ber ©eBattertt 
 D. tern ©esatter ien ©csattem 
 
 the professor 
 
 ier profeffor 
 tea iJrofeJI'orS 
 kern ^^rofeffor 
 
 A. ben ©esatter lie ®e»attern ben ?5rofcj]for 
 
 Plural. 
 the professors 
 
 bie ^rofeffovew 
 ber $rofefforcn 
 ben ^rofefforett 
 bie 9>rofefforctt 
 
 Obs. Vin. — In compound tenses the past participle is placed^ 
 last. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ber Srotjfcn, the drop 
 
 ber Sngel, the angel 
 
 ber JQommer, the hammer 
 
 ber SRegen, the rain 
 
 ber ©iinger, the singer 
 
 ber ^tagel, the nail 
 
 ber Sillier, the baker 
 
 ber ©(^uler, the scholar, pupil 
 
 ber @fel, the donkey 
 
 ber ©c^iiiiJcf, the key 
 
 ber Scorer, the teacher 
 
 baS gcuer, the fire 
 
 gefe^en, seen 
 
 fc^ijn, beautiful |icr, here 
 
 bag SBetter, the weather 
 baS iKittct, the means 
 baa %tv.\itx, the window 
 baa ^lofler, the cloister (mon- 
 astery) 
 baa 50ldt)4en, the girl, maiden 
 baa Seili^cn, the violet 
 ber Snglanber, the Englishman 
 ber Sdbmer, the Roman 
 ber ©panier, the Spaniard 
 ber Suropiier, the European 
 ber Slmerifancr, the American 
 angene^m, agreeable, pleasant 
 ]t\x, very 
 
 Reading Exercise III. 
 
 ®(c ®c^»e(ler bea Sodera. Tiai 33u^ bea ©c^iilcra. Die Saum; 
 (^cn bea ©artcna. Ectn ©eaatter Vji in bent ©arten. Ser fefen i|i 
 in 3:§rem ©djlafjimmer. 'Diefer ©linger ^at ein Seili^en. ©te 9«ab* 
 ^cn finb gro^ unb fd^bn. l;ic Jropfcn bea Edcgena. Scner Saner ^at 
 einen Sfel. 3(i^ ^abe etnen ^ommcr, akr feinen !«agcl. SBo pnb bfe 
 
44 FIEST DECLENSION. 
 
 gcnjlcr? Das SBctter i|l fc|r angint^m, ®tbm ®ie (give) fcicfe 
 SKeffcr tent 1)iener. SBelc^eS JpauS ge'^brt (belongs) lent ^oifcr^? 
 'Lit Sngel ftnb im (contraction for in tent) Jpimmel. Tier 9lejfc 
 tea SlmerltanerS i|l aft, abcr tcr Snifeer iti <Bpaniixi ift jung (young). 
 §akjt @ie ken, ©prac^Ic^rcr gefc^^en? 
 
 Theme III. 
 
 The little tree of my garden. The book of the grandfather. 
 Where is your bedroom? That Bavarian has a servant. 
 Which house belongs to the singer ? Has thy godfather seen 
 the donkeys of my father ? Where are the hammer and the 
 nails ? The niece of the peasant is large. My brother has 
 the book of the scholar. Is that man a servant or a baker ? 
 The girls have found (gcfunten) violets. This man has a don- 
 key, a cow, an ox, and a sheep. Has he an apple? The 
 house of his cousin is very old. The pupils have seen the 
 teacher of languages. The girl is in (Dat.) a cloister. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 §at 3^re Sttc^te einen Sater ? Stein, fie |at letne Sftem (pa- 
 rents). 
 
 ©int tie ©d^iiler in ter ©c^ule 9iJein, jte |tnt in tent ©ortcn. 
 
 (school) ? 
 
 3ji taa aBctter angencl^m ? 3<», t& i|l fe'^r angene|m. 
 
 §o6en ©ic meinen ©rc^ttater gc* 3c^ ^alt 3|ren SSatcr gcfc^^en, o6er 
 
 fe:^en? nic^t 3l«n ©rofaater. 
 
 Sijl tu ter SfJcffe teg 3(mcritancrS ? 9lcin, id) Wn ein Srutcr iti @pa# 
 
 nicrs. 
 
 ^abt i^r ten jammer wnt tie SBir ^aBen ten jammer, a6er Icinc 
 
 9lagel? gflSgcI. 
 
 SCo ftnt lie ©c^iilcr leg ©pra^* ©ie ftnt in ter ©d^ule (school). 
 
 U^xivi ? 
 
 ©elt i'^r Slmcrilaner otcr guro* SBir ftnt 3lmerilaner. 
 
 jjSer ? 
 
 $at ta« SWiit^ctt icne« Sauere ©ie :^at cine ©^mefter unt einen 
 
 eine ©d^wcfler? Smter. 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 45 
 
 §aBcn ©ic cinen Dfen in S^rcm 9lein, tc^ '§ak nic (never) etn 
 ©(^lafsimmer? Seuer in nteinem ©c^Iofjim* 
 
 mcr. 
 aCo ijt t)cr SBater unfcrcg SSctterS ? Sr ifl nic^t :^ier, er i|t eielleic^t 
 
 (perhaps) in tern ®arten. 
 §0)1 bu ben Setter teiner 3«utter 3a, ii) ^o6e ten Setter meiner 
 gefe'^cn? Wlutttx unC ten ©o^n meiner 
 
 SruSerg gefe^en. 
 
 < 11 » 11 > 
 
 LESSON IV. Seftiott 4, 
 
 Second Declension, 
 
 Obs. I. — To this declension belong all masculine substan- 
 tives and national appellations ending in c, a few 
 monosyllabic words that were formerly dissyllabic, 
 and ended in C, and all foreign nouns of the mas- 
 culine gender having the accent on the last syllable, 
 except those ending in r, 0.1, an, and eft.* 
 Obs. n. — Masculine nouns and national appellations ending 
 in C add It, all others add cn, through aU cases of 
 both numbers (the Nominative, of course, excepted). 
 The radical vowel of nouns belonging to this de- 
 clension is not modified. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 MASCULINE NOtm. 
 
 SingtUar. Plural. 
 
 N. ber 5'leffe, the nephew tie ^fleffetl, the nephews 
 
 G-. bci$ Steffen, of the nephew ber ^lejfeti, of the nephews 
 
 D. bem 9Jejfen, to the nephew ben ^iJeffen, to the nephews 
 
 A. ben Steffen, the nephew bie S'leifen, the nephews 
 
 * Foreign nouns ending in r, al, an, and ttjl, belong to the^ third de- 
 clension. 
 
46 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 NATIONAL APPELLATION. 
 
 Bingvlar. Plural. 
 
 N. bcr Dcutf^e, the German bie lleutfdbcn, the Germans 
 
 G. Iei3 X)cutfc^cn, of the German ber SJeutfc^en, of the Germans 
 
 D. tern !l;eut|'d)en, to the German ten 5)eutfd^c«, to the Germans 
 
 A. ten £;eutfcl)ett, the German tie Deutj'c^eit, the Germans 
 
 FOREIGN NOUN. 
 
 8ikguki/r. 
 N. ter ^amerot,* the comrade 
 G. tea ^omcratett, of the " 
 D. tern ^amcratcn, to the " 
 A. ten ^ameracett, the " 
 
 Plural. 
 tie ^ameratctt, the comrades 
 ter ^omeratcn, of the " 
 ten ^amcratcn, to the " 
 tie ^antfratcn, the " 
 
 MONOSYLLABLE, FOEMERLT DISSYLLABLE. 
 
 a/r. 
 
 N. ter ^cll),t the hero 
 G. te« ^etcetl, of the hero 
 D. tern delicti, to the hero 
 A. ten JpellCM, the hfero 
 
 Plural. 
 tie JpeltCti, the heroes 
 ter ^eltctt, of the heroes 
 ten $eltctt, to the heroes 
 tie ^cltCtt, the heroes 
 
 Obs. m. — The monosyllables of this declension are 
 
 ter SSiir, the bear 
 
 ter Shrift, the Christian 
 
 ter gtnf(e), the finch 
 
 ter giirfl or g)rlnj, the prince 
 
 ter (Sect, the fop 
 
 ter ®raf4 the count 
 
 ter i^elD, the hero 
 
 ter Jpirt(e), the herdsman 
 
 ter 'i)Jleni'd^,§ man, mankind 
 
 ter 'i)Jtol)r, the moor 
 
 ter SRarr or 2:^or,§ the fool 
 
 ter Slicr», the nerve 
 
 ter S)c^«,§ the ox 
 
 ter ©djcnf, the cup-bearer 
 
 Obs. IV. — §err (mister, sir) takes tl in the singular, but en 
 in the plural ; and ter M.\t, the cheese, takes the 
 inflection of the first declension. 
 
 * French : eama/rade. In German, t is now generaUy used, (see p. 10.) 
 f |)elb is dissyllabic in Anglo-Saxon : healeth. 
 i Old German : Set (S5ra»e. 
 
 § Thos^^arked With an § are still frequently spelled with e, and so 
 pronounced by the lower classes in some parts of Germany. 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 47 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 fcer 2(ffe, the ape, monkey ler granjofc, the Frenchman 
 
 ter SBwc, the lion ter ©ac^fe, the Saxon 
 
 ter gfllfe, the falcon ter Sfluffc, the Russian 
 
 ter §afc, the hare fccr ^rctt§e, the Prussian 
 
 iiv atafee, the raven ter SMc, the Turk . 
 
 Uer ©Hase, the slave ter ©rtecfec, the Greek 
 
 ter 3uic, the Jew ter ^^riifitent', the president 
 
 icr Jpettc, the heathen ter S^i^rann', the tyrant 
 
 ter §irte, the shepherd ter Slep^ant', the elephant 
 
 ter 33u6e (bub), | ,, , ter ©oltat', the soldier 
 
 ter ^tiabi (knave), J ter ^^^ilofolJ'^', the philosopher 
 
 ter Srk, the heir ter 9ltler, the eagle 
 
 ter Dntel, the uncle i^erMtc^, mortal 
 
 Obs. V. — Adjectives and participles, when used substantively, 
 take the inflection of this declension, e. g., from alt, 
 old, ter 2lItC, the old man ; Gen. te^ 2llten, &c. 
 
 Reading Exercise IV. 
 
 Sener ^Jlann ijt ein 9Zarr. i;ic ^eerte tes $irten. 'Ltx ©esatter 
 te« ^nakn. !iDie Sflakn fint 2?ogel. "Ecr ^Jlcffe tcS gvanjofen ^al 
 cincn Sbtuen. 3fl jener Jperr eln ZMt oter ein 0luffe ? '£;te|'er 3ute 
 t(l ein xti&itx ©rtec^e. ipier ij^ ter @!IoBe teS Jpcrrn 5^atel. 'Lit 
 ^tler uttt tie ^dSXtv. :^akit glitgel (wing). 3jl jener §err etn ^^ilo^ 
 fopl ? Stcro unt Satigula ttjaren (were) S^rannen. Daa ®oIt ter 
 ®rafcn. iJie SuBen ^aben tret (three) ^afcn unt i)ier (four) 3lffen. 
 "Die 3lmertIoncr taBen !eine ©IlaBcn. > Die Sriiter teg ^aifer« ftnt 
 Sflujfen. !Die ©(^we^er tea §eltcn ijl tie SJtutter tes Jpciten. ©int 
 ©ie ©ai!^fen oter 5)«u^en? SWein ^amerat ifl ter ©o^n teincS 
 St^rera. SBlr ^akn cinen D(i^fen unt cinen 3lffen gefc^en. 
 
 Theme IV. 
 
 The hat (^ul, m.) of this boy is fiew. The house of the 
 Frenchman is large. The hares eat (freffen) grass. That old 
 
48 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 man is a slave. The shepherd of the herd. -The falcons and 
 the ravens are birds. (The) Men are mortal.* We are Chris- 
 tians, you are Jews, they are Heathen. The elephants are 
 very large. Are you a Russian or a Turk ? We are Prus- 
 sians and Saxons. The Greeks have soldiers. The heir of 
 the poet is sick (frant). The bears and the lions. These 
 boys are small, those brothers are large, My comrades are 
 the nephews of our neighbor. The son of this hero is a 
 count. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 Jpat ker 3ube eincn ^afett ? 
 
 Jpaien <3ie etnen 9lc jfen? 
 
 $a|l lu ten 3Iffcn gefc^^en? 
 
 3(1 jicncr ^crr cin granjofc ober 
 
 ein 3lmcrtfancr ? 
 SSJeriflMefer 9Rann? 
 2Co [mi We ©oltotctt ? 
 
 ©inti W ©icncr bca Satfera Sw* 
 
 ten? 
 Si(i tu eln Sfluffe oter cin ©ric^e? 
 
 ^aben ®ic bas Sud^ meinc« Srus 
 
 terg gc|'c:^en ? 
 §att it)r Jpafen ober 3laBen? 
 SBaa ^akn tie ^noben in ter 
 
 @tatt (city) gefe^en ? 
 ©ini tie ©eelen tcr 9Kenf(^cn 
 
 i^erHi(^? 
 
 ©r ^at cinen iomn, aiex feinen 
 
 ipafen. 
 3a, ic^ |a6c einen ^Rejfcn unb cine 
 
 3(^ ^abe ten 2lffcn, ten fiiJwen 
 
 unb ben Siiren gefe'^en. 
 3ener iperr t|l ein ®riec^e, bicfer 
 
 Jpcrr ifl ein Siirtc. 
 Sr ijl ber Satcr bcs ®rafen. 
 ®ie ©oltotcn |ittb in bem ^riege 
 
 (war). 
 Stein, bie ©iencr beS ^dferg |inb 
 
 St)rtfien unb ^eiten. 
 3(^ bin ein ©rtec^e, abcr mein 
 
 SBater tfi ein 3tuffc. 
 Stein, ic^ Ijabc ti nid^t gefe^en, cd 
 
 ijl ni^t :^ier. 
 SEir ^abcn Jpafen,aber feint Siaben. 
 ®ic |abcn ten lEatfcr, ben ©raftn 
 
 unb ben ^elten gcfe^cn. 
 £>te Seibcr (bodies) ber SJJenfd^cn 
 
 jinb jlerbliii, aber bie ©celen 
 
 jittb unjierblid^ (immortal). 
 
 * See page 64, footnote *. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 49 
 
 LESSON V. Suftiott S. 
 
 Third Declension. 
 
 Obs. I. — This declension contains all masculine and neuter 
 nouns not already enumerated in the first (el, en, 
 cr, c^cn, and lein), and second (e) declensions. They 
 are : 
 
 1. All masculine and neuter monosyllabic 
 roots : e. g., ber ^lu% the river ; la« ®c^af, the 
 sheep ; and such as take a prefix ; e. g., ter 9Sefe^I, 
 the command, order ; baS @cbet, the prayer. 
 
 2. Most masculine and neuter compound 
 words; e. g., tier Sa^nacjt (tooth-physician), the 
 dentist. 
 
 3. Masculine derivatives ending in tQ, tc^, at, 
 itlQ, and ling ; e.g., ber M\i^, the cage; ler ?)ftrfic^, 
 the peach ; ter Ttonat, the month ; tcr ^iirtng, the 
 herring; bcr Sungltng, the youth. 
 
 4 Some masculine (those ending in d, an, at, 
 ofl, and ier) and all neuter nouns of foreign 
 origin, having the accent on the last syllable ; e. g., 
 ber Corbinrtl', the cardinal; iai Soncert', the concert. 
 5. All nouns ending in t^uttt* and some in 
 ttt^ ; e. g., ber 3fletc^t(»ttm, the riches ; iai ^aifer* 
 t1)um, the empire ; iai SMnt^, the contract. 
 Obs. n. — ^Nouns of this declension have the following inflection: 
 
 1. In the singrilar they add C§f in the genitive, 
 and e in the dative ; 
 
 2. In the plural they add c in all cases, and in the, 
 dative besides the e an tt. Masculine nouns modify 
 the radical vowels a, o, ». 
 
 * f!ttii)tf)\m, Srtt^um unb 2Bac^«t^um are the only masc. nonns in t^um. 
 
 f Derivatives in tg elide the e in the genitive singular. Some writers 
 elide the e (of the ending) in the genitive and dative singular in all 
 dissyllabic and polysyllabic nouns, unless the last syllable is under full 
 accent. 
 
50 
 
 THIBD DECLENSION. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF MASCDLINE NOUNS. 
 
 MONOSYLLABIC ROOT. 
 
 Plural. 
 kie ©6^nc, the sons 
 ter ©d^nc, of the sons 
 ten ©d^ncn, to the sons 
 btf ©d^nc, the sons 
 
 N. bcr <So|n, the son 
 G. bes ®o|ncS, of the son 
 D. tern ©o^^nc, to the son 
 A. ten ©o^n, the son 
 
 NOUN WITH HIBPIX. 
 
 N. ter @e6rau(^, the custom 
 G. lieS®ebroud)eS,ofthecustom 
 D. tent ®c6rou^e, to the custom 
 A. ten®e6rau(^, the custom 
 
 Plwal. 
 He ®ebraud;e, the customs 
 bcr ®eBrttu^c, of the customs 
 ben ®e6rauc^en, to the customs 
 ble ®ekauc^e, the customs 
 
 BiTigvlar. 
 N. ber ^bnig, the king 
 G. "iti JlbnigS, of the ting 
 D. bem ^ijnige, to the king 
 A. ben ^ijnig, the king 
 
 DEBIVATITE. 
 
 Phiral. 
 ble ^onigc, the kings 
 ber ^Bntgc, of the kings 
 ben ^bnigen, to the kings 
 ble A'Bnigc, the kings 
 
 FOBBIGN NOUN. 
 
 N. ber ©encml', the general 
 G. be«®eneraI(e)§,ofthe" 
 D. tern ®eneral(c), to the « 
 A. ben ®enerat, the general 
 
 Plural. 
 bie ®enerdlc, the generals 
 ber ®encralc, of the generals 
 ben ©cneralcn, to the generaLp' 
 bie ®eneralc, the generals 
 
 COMPOUND WOED. 
 
 N. ber ©tro|]^«t, the straw hat 
 
 G. be3 ©troiiutcS, of the " 
 
 D. bem ©trol^^utC, to the " 
 
 A. ben ©trofc^ut, the " 
 
 Plural. 
 bie ©tro'^litttc, the straw hats 
 ber ©tro^tfitc, of the " 
 ben ©trot)^fltcn, to the " 
 bie ©tro^^fltc, the 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Obs. m. — ^The following words do not modify the radical 
 vowel in the plural : 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 51 
 
 ter Slrm, the arm -^er £ad)8, the salmon 
 
 ber ZaQi the day u itv 3IaI, the eel, 
 
 ber §uni, the dog ber §uf, the hoof 
 
 ter ©c^u'^, the shoe ^ ber 55fab, the path 
 
 ber @rab, the degree ber ©toff, the stuff 
 
 bcv '£>a6)i, the badger ber 5)unft, the period, point 
 
 Obs. IV. — The following words take cit in the plural and are 
 not modified : 
 
 ber ©toot, the state " ber ©porn, the spur 
 
 ber ©tro^t, the beam, ray ber !Dorn, the thorn 
 
 ber ©c^mer3, the pain ber @ee, the lake 
 
 Obs. V. — The following words modify the radical vowel and 
 take cr iu the plural : 
 
 ber Mann, the man ber ®ott, the god 
 
 ber SBotb, the wood ber Drt, the place 
 
 ber Seib, the body >^ ber Sormunb, the guardian 
 
 ber ®etji, the spirit, miad ber 3let(|t^um, the riches, wealth 
 
 ber SBurm, the worm ber Srrt^um, the mistake 
 
 ber aionb, the edge 
 
 EXAMPLE UNDER OBS. HI. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. ber lag, the day bie SogC, the days 
 
 G. be3 SogcS, of the day ber Sogc, of the days 
 
 D. bem Jagc, to the day ben Sagcn, to the days 
 
 A. ben Sog, the day bie Sag', the days 
 
 EXAMPLE UNDER OBS. IV. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ber ©porn, the spur bie ©porncn,* the spurs 
 
 G-. bea ©porneS, of the spur ber ©porr.cn, of the spurs 
 
 D. bem ©pome, to the spur ben ©porncn, to the spurs 
 
 A. ben ©porn, the spur bte ©pornea, the spurs 
 
 * Words already ending in e add only n (see page 84, XIII.). 
 
52 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 EXAMPLES TJNDEE OBS. V. 
 
 N. ber 'URann, the man 
 Gr. bes 5Mannc8, of the man 
 D. bem 5DJannc, to the man 
 A. ben Wlann, the man 
 
 Plural. 
 bic 9Jldnncr, the men 
 ber 50tdnncr, of the men, 
 ben SJJdnncttt, to the men 
 ble ^SJanner, the men 
 
 N. ber Srrt^um, the mistake bte Srrt^umcr * the mistakes 
 G. be33rrt^uiiteS, of the mistake ber 3rrt:^umer, of the mistakes 
 D. bcm Srrt^ume, to the mistake ben 3rrt:^umern, to the mistakes 
 A. ben Srrt^m, the mistake bte 3rrt^«mer, the mistakes 
 
 ber gug, the foot 
 ber guc^S, the fox 
 ber ^ut, the hat 
 ber Z^mm, the tower 
 ber Sfling, the ring 
 ber grcunb, the friend 
 ber ®a|l, the guest 
 ber ®olf, the wolf 
 ber Sraum, the dream 
 ber ©tocE, the stick 
 ber lang, the dance 
 ber SBatt, the wall 
 ber 3)alajl, the palace 
 
 VOCABULART. 
 
 ber ®efang, the song 
 
 ber D^rring, the earring 
 
 ber Ueberrodt, the overcoat 
 
 ber 3lpfeIbouin, the apple-tree 
 
 ber §anbfd^u% the glove 
 
 ber ^afig, the cage 
 
 ber Jponig, the honey 
 
 ber 3lbmtrat, the admiral 
 
 ber Dffijtcr, the officer 
 
 »ertoren, lost 
 
 getouft, bought 
 
 er^alten, received 
 
 nur, only fiig, sweet 
 
 Reading Exercise V. 
 
 Die SBoIfe unb bic giic^fe. "Die ©ij|ne betnea greunbc«. ©ie 
 %!Am bte ©iijie bes ©enerala gefel^en. Die aSiirmer friecbra 
 (creep). §aji bu elncn ©tod gefau^? Die 55at<ifle be« ^ijnigs 
 jinb grog unb fc^Bn. 3Clr ^atcn ben 3fling beg Offijiera gefauft. 
 ©inb Slate in btefem ©ee ? 3d9 ^o6e ben $ut jencg Slbmirate eriial^ 
 ten. §aW 3|r siel (much) ' §onig ? Mr '^aBen 33ogel in ten 
 
 * Notice that words ending in tOlim modify that syllable. 
 
THIKD DECLENSION. 
 
 53 
 
 ^aftgcn. ©inb 2tc))fet an (on) tern Slpfclboumc ? ®ie ©olbaten 
 |lnt auf (on, upon) tern SBrttle. Sr ^at cinen UeBerrodf gctautt. 
 §icr |tni ieinc ©c^u^e wnb ©triimpfe (stockings). SBir |o6en 
 £a# gefauft. tic SetBcr ber 9Jlen|d)en pnti jterblii^. I;ie Oijtter 
 ber §ett)cn fmb ia^ivtiiti (numerous). Unfer «Wac^kr |at fcine 
 aieic^tVamer »crIorcn. 
 
 Theme V. 
 
 The sons of my friend. The rings of the officer. The 
 orders of the generals. Where are my gloves ? We " have 
 seen the guests of the king. The dances of the heathen. 
 The birds eat (frej|en) worms. The heri-ings are fishes. Our 
 dog has caught (gefongen) a fox. The wolves and the lions 
 are in (Dat.) the woods. The song of these men. We have 
 bought three (trei) sticks. Have you seen the palace of the 
 admiral? We have lost a friend. The towers of the wall. 
 Have you lost my gloves ? Is (the) honey sweet ? His sis- 
 ters have found their (i^rc) earrings. This man has only one 
 arm. The pikes ($C(^te) and the sahnons are in (Dat.) the 
 lake. Oiu- friends have bought strawhats. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF NEUTER NOUNS. 
 
 MONOSYLLABIC ROOT. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. iai SRop, the horse tic Sftojfc, the horses 
 
 G. iti StoffcS, of the horse bcr SRoflfC, of the horses 
 
 D. bcm StojfC, to the horse ben Sftoffcn, to the horses 
 
 A. iai Slop, the horse bie SftojfC, the horses 
 
 NOUN WITH PKEFIX. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. ba« ®efe^, the law bic ©cfc^e, the laws 
 
 Q. Ui ©efe^eS, of the law ber ®cfc^c, of the laws 
 
 D. bem ©efe^e, to the law ben ©efe^eii, to the laws 
 
 A. bas ®cfc^, the law bic ©cfe^e, the laws 
 
 Ebmabk. — Words in t^utn have the same inflection in all genders. See 
 the example declined on page 52. 
 
S4 THIBD DECLENSION. 
 
 FOREIGN Nomsr. 
 8ingvla/r. Plural. 
 
 N. bag SnPtMnient', the instrament Me Snflntmcnte, the mstruments 
 G. 'iti '^v.^tv.mtnit^, of the " ber Snftrumente, of the " 
 D. tern Sn^ritnentc, to the " ben Snjlrumentcn, to the " 
 A. bas Snfintment, the " bic Snfttumentc, the " 
 
 NOUN ENDING IN ntg. 
 
 Bingulwr. Plural. 
 
 N. baa (Sefiingnl^, the prison ble ©cfangniiye, the prisons 
 G. bei3 ©eflngniffeS, of the " bcr ©cfangnijife, of the " 
 D. tern ®efangni(fe, to the " ben ©efSngnijifCtt, to the " 
 A. bag Ocfangnif , the " bie @cfiingnt(ye, the " 
 
 COMPOUND NOtTN. 
 
 Bngvlar. Plural. 
 
 N. bag ©tabtt^or, the city-gate bie ©tabttV^C, the city-gates 
 G. be3 ®tabtt|orc§, of the " ber ©tobtf^ore, of the 
 D. bent ©tabtt^orc, to the " ben ©tabtt^oreti, to tl^e " 
 A. bas ©tabttt;or, the " bic ©tabtt^orc, the 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 Obs. VI. — The following neuter nouns modify, in the plural, 
 the radical vowels a, o, u, and tate et : 
 
 baa 3laa, the carrion >^baa ®emiit^, the temper 
 
 bag 3lmt, the office baS ®cf(^lec^t,*the gender 
 
 baa Sab, the bath baa ©efpenji, the spectre 
 
 baa 33ife, the picture baa ®taa, ihe glass 
 
 baa Slatt, the leaf baa ®Ileb, the Umb 
 
 baa Srett, the board baa @raB, the grave 
 
 baa ^u&i, the book baa ®ut, the estate, boon 
 
 baa Dad^, the roof baa $aupt, the head 
 
 baa Sorf, the village baa ipaua, the house 
 
 baa Si, the egg baa §ont, the horn 
 
 baa %a6^, the compartment baa ^ofpttal', the hospital 
 baa 5a§, the vat, cask, barrel baa §u'^n, the fowl, hen 
 boa gett, the field baa ^aiferf^um, the empire 
 
 baa giirjlent^um, the principality baa ^a(b, the calf 
 baa ®elb, the money '^boa ^amifol', the jacket 
 
 baa .®cma(^, the apartment i baa ©ewanb,* the raiment 
 * Those with an * are Bometimes inflected regularly. 
 
IHIBD DECLENSION. 65 
 
 idi ^tnb, the chUd i&i 3teiS, the twig 
 
 tai Meii, the dress ^- kaS SUtnC, the (meat)cattle 
 
 iai ^orn, the grain l^ iai ©(^iln, the sign-board 
 iai MxMt, the herb iai ©c^Iof , the castle, lock 
 
 taS £amm, the lamb <^ iai <S^mtt, the sword 
 tag £icb, the song iai ©pitat', the hospital 
 
 taS So(^, the hole bag 3;^al, the valley, dale 
 
 tag SJJauI, the mouth taS 3:ud^, the cloth 
 
 tag Sfieft, the nest tag SSoIt, the nation 
 
 tag ^fant, the pawn, pledge tag 2Bet6, the wife 
 
 tag Slat, the wheel ^ tag SBammg, the jacket 
 tag 3tcgtmcnt', the regiment 
 
 Obs. YH. — The following neuter nouns take Ctt in the plural: 
 tag 2luge, the eye tag ^etnt, the shirt 
 
 tag Sett, the bed tag 3nfrtt', the insect 
 
 tag Snte, the end tag D|r, the ear 
 
 Note, — liai l>erj, the heart, adds in the singular enS in the Gen. and 
 cn in the Dat., and throughout the plural en ; as, gen. beS ^ericnfi dat. 
 bem §erjcn» plur. bte lierjen. 
 
 Obs. "Vm. — ^A few words ending in rtl, derived from the 
 Latin, take fen in the plural : 
 
 tag ^aritrtl', tag ^attxiaV, tag 'mimxal, k. 
 
 EXAMPLE UNDER OBS. VI. 
 Bngular. Plural. 
 
 N. tag ®tma6:i, the apartment tie ©emo^cr, the apartments 
 G. teg ®enta(^c8, of the " ter ©emac^cr, of the 
 D. tern ©craac^e, to the " ten ®emd(^crtt, to the " 
 A. tag ®m(i^, the " tie ®emo(^cr, the " 
 
 EXAMPLE UNDER OBS. VH. 
 Singvlar. Plural. 
 
 N. tag D:§r, the ear tie D^rctt, the ears 
 
 G. teg D^rcS, of the ear ter D^ren, of the ears 
 
 D. tern D'^re, to the ear ten D^rett, to the ears 
 
 A. tag D'§r, the ear tie D^rcn, the ears 
 
56 
 
 THIBD DECLENSION. 
 
 EXAMPLE UNDER OBS. VIH. 
 Singulm: Phj/ral. 
 
 N. tag iSRatcriat, the material bte 9>JoteriaIien, the materials 
 
 G. beg 9KatcrtaI(c)S, of the " ker 9)ktertalicn, of the " 
 
 D. bem iliKotcrial(c), to the " ten 9JlatertaIic», to the " 
 
 A. bag SWatertal, the " tie 9KatcrloIicn, the 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ta3 ©(^iff, the ship bag S^or, the gate 
 
 baS Srob, the bread bag gteifd^, the meat, flesh 
 
 bag §aar, the hair baS 9>lc^I, the flottr, meal 
 
 bag ®ing, the thing bag 9)opier, the paper 
 
 bag SSoot, the boat bag SWctali', the metal 
 
 bag ^o&i, the yoke brei, three 
 
 bog ^nie, the knee jwMf, twelve 
 
 bag Soog, the lot geBen ©te, give (you) 
 
 bag 916^, the net legcn, to lay 
 
 bffg ©alj, the salt ftfffcn, to eat (applied to 
 
 bag 3o|r, the year brutes) 
 
 Additional Reading Exercise. 
 
 Die ©d^iffe beg Sltmtralg. ^aji bu 9Rc^l obcr Srob ? Dag Jpaar 
 beg ^inbeg ifl wei^. Die Sliitter ber Siic^er. Die 5!}laucrn bicfeg 
 ©d^Iopg flnb %o^ (high). 2Bir |a6en gifc^e in ben SiJe^cn. Die 
 ^iiiner legert Sicr in i^ren 9leflcrn. Die SBorter ber Scftion fmb leic^t 
 (easy).. granlrei(| (Prance) ip cin ^aifert^um. Die giirpentpmer. 
 ^afcen ®lc bag 95a)jier unb bte Siti^er ? ®e6en ©ie mix (me) SBrob, 
 Sutter unb ©alj. Sin 3«|r l^at jwblf SKonatc. 3Bir 1a6en gleifdi, 
 eier unb 'iJJle^I ge!auft. ffio fmb bic 3tabcr beg SBageng ? Die SEalle 
 ^a6en brcl S^ore. Die Scaler unfercg Sanbcg fJnb fe:^r griin. Die 
 ©emiid^er beg ©(^loffeg ftnb grog unb fc^bn. Dicfer 5!Wann :|at jtuei 
 D^ren after nur cin 3luge. 3(^ '^aBc ntcine Dintenffiffer ioerloren. Die 
 greunbe feineg Sctterg finb im (in bem) ©efangnijfc. Die ©d^iffc beg 
 Sltmiralg ftnb im ^afen (harbor). Sg jinb (there are) siele 
 (many) Slcpfel an bicfcm Slpfclkume. 
 
THOtD DECLENSION. 
 
 57 
 
 Additional Theme. 
 
 These villages are small The laws of the Americans. 
 Our horses are ia (Dat. ) the field. The children have found 
 the nests of thy hens. The leaves of the trees are gi-een. 
 Where are my books, and my paper ? My yoke ia easy (lei(^t). 
 The apartments of the castles are not very large. Have these 
 ■walls [any] gates? Is France (granfretc|) an empire or a 
 principality? The regiments are in (Dat.) those valleys. 
 His face is not .very white.. They have bought two eggs, we 
 have found the flour. Are [any] fish in the nets ? The words 
 of this lesson are not very easy. "Where are the wheels of 
 our wagon? These ships belong (ge^ijrcn) to the admiral 
 of our king. The calves have no horns. The roofs of our 
 houses are new. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 §ajt bu Me aSblfe gefel)cn ? 
 
 JpaSen ®ic elnen ©tod ge!auft ? 
 SBo ftnb Me 9)oIo(lc S^res ^bnigs? 
 
 2egcn bcine Jpii'^ner Sicr ? 
 
 ©Int tie Seikr ber 9Jicnf(^en flcrb= 
 
 lic^? 
 ©ittb Stele (many) 2(c)5fel on i)ie* 
 
 fen Stpfelbiiumen ? 
 SQai '^oien ®te in ben ^Sftgen ? 
 a&ai freffcn bte Sbgel ? 
 SBer |at ben Sling beiS Dfft}icr(5 
 
 gefauft ? 
 Jpot bicfe SRauer SE^iirtne? 
 SCo fmb bit ©d^tffe in Slbmtrafe? 
 
 Stein, ic^ ^U bie pc^fe unb bte 
 
 3^ 'kahi jtcei <BtMi gefauft. 
 
 3Die ^ala\tt unferc^ ^ontg^ finb 
 in SBerlin. 
 
 SJletne ^it'^ner legcn tiiglii^ (dai- 
 ly) brei Ster. 
 
 3a, bie Setkr ber 5Kenfc§en finb 
 flerMii^. 
 
 £g |inb nur wentgc (few) Jlepfet 
 on btefen Slpfelboumen. 
 
 2Bir loten giic^fe in ben ^iiftgen. 
 
 Ste Sijgel freffen 2Biirmer. 
 
 !Der greunb bcs 2lbmiroIg l)at t|n 
 (it) getouft. 
 
 3^iefc Stouer ^at nur einen S^urm. 
 
 Hie ®d)iffe be« Slbmirola ftnb in 
 bcm §afen (harbor). 
 
58 
 
 rOUBTH DECLENSION. 
 
 Jpot biefcr SBogen leine fRMx ? 
 
 SCaS |a6t i^V auf bemfWortte 
 
 (market) gelauft? 
 Jpakrt ®ie tie 2:pler kcr ©(S^tueij 
 
 (Switzerland) gefe^en? 
 3(1 gtanfrci^ cin giirfient^unt 
 
 ober ein ^aiferf^um ? 
 ©inb bic SBIattcr ber SSaumc grun? 
 ©inb bie SSiinber betner ©i^wejler 
 
 wei^? 
 3fl baa @c|t(^t 3|rciS @Ha»cn wcig 
 
 ober fc^warj ? 
 Jpatbcr ^Bnig »tclc (many) SRegb 
 
 mcnter ©ctbatcn ? 
 
 9lcin, »lr ^akn bie Slaber biefeS 
 
 SSageng Bcrloren. 
 SBir 1)aUn mt% Sutter unb gifc^e 
 
 getauft ? 
 SBir '^afccn |ie (them) »or (ago) 
 
 3»ei Wlonattn gcfe|cn. 
 granlrci(^ ifl ein ^aifert:§um. 
 
 9lcin, |te |inb nodb nicfet grittt. 
 Die Siinber meincr ©c^wcfter fmb 
 
 gclb (yellow). 
 "Dai ®efi[d)t meincS ©Ha»en i(l 
 
 fe|r f^roarj. 
 3a, er ^at fe|r ijiete Sflcgimenter 
 
 ©otoatcn. 
 
 LESSON YI. 
 
 SefttPtt 6* 
 
 Fourth Declension. 
 
 Obs. I. — All feminine substantives belong to this declension. 
 In the singular they remain unchanged.* In the 
 plural : 
 
 a) monosyUdbic nouns add C in all cases and in 
 the dative besides the e an n. They also modify the 
 radical vowels a, 0,U\ 
 
 b) dissyllabic and polysyllabic nouns take Ctl,f but 
 do not modify their radical vowel. J 
 
 * Feminine nouns had at one time an inflection in the singular, and 
 vestiges of that practice still remain in poetry and in certain phrases, 
 e. g., auf Etben (instead of ouf ber Srfce), on earth ; iu ffi^tctt (instead of jur 
 [ju bet] ®^re), in honor of, etc. 
 
 t Feminine dissyllabic and polysyllabic nouns ending in e add n only, 
 e. g., bie ®aic» plur. bie ®a6cn. 
 
 X t)\t SKutteti the mother, and bie loc^teri the daughter, modify the 
 radical vowel, but do not change their ending, as, bie SWiitter, bie lEiicfiter. 
 
FOURTH DECLENSION. 59 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 MONOSYLLABIC NOUN. 
 
 Bingviar. Plural. 
 
 N. »ie grtt#, the fruit Me gtflc^tc, the fruits 
 
 G. ler gruiit, of the fruit ttt gr&i^tc, of the fruits 
 
 D. tier gruc^t, to the fruit ben grftdjtctt, to the fruits 
 
 A. tie %cVi&it, the fruit iie grftc^tC, the fruits 
 
 DiaSYUiABIC NOUN. 
 
 Singula/r. Plural. 
 
 N. bie Jpoffhung, the hope bte §offnungett, the hopes 
 
 G. bcr Jpojfnung, of the hope ier Jpoffnungcn, of the hopes 
 
 D. bej Jpoffnung, to the hope ben ^ojfnungcn, to the hopes 
 
 A. bie ^offnung, the hope tie Jpcffnungew, the hopes 
 
 POLYSYLLABIC NOUN. 
 
 SingvZa/r. Plural. 
 
 N. bte Srfa^rung, the experience bleSrfa^rungcn, the experiences 
 G. ber Srfa^rung, of the " ber Srfa|rungcn, of the " 
 
 D. ber Srfa^rung, to the " ben (Srfa^rungcn, to the " 
 A. bie grfa'^rung, the " bie Srfa^rungen, the '' 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Obs. H. — DissyllaMc and polysyllabic nouns ending in I or t 
 in the singular add only n in the plural. 
 
 Obs. in. — The following twenty-seven monosyllabic nouns, 
 which were formerly dissyllabic (comp. second de- 
 clension, Obs. m., and Notes on Monosyllabic 
 Nouns), still retain the old inflection in the plural, 
 viz. : en instead of e. 
 
 bie 3lrt, the kind, species bie 5a^rt, the passage 
 
 bie S3a^n * the road t. bie glur, the field 
 
 bie Sud^t, the bay l, bie {^luti, the flood 
 
 bie Surg, the old castle bie grau,t the woman 
 
 * Words marked with an * are still sometimes pronounced by the 
 lower classes in some parts of Germany as if they terminated in c. 
 •l Old German : Srouc, 
 
00 
 
 rOUKTH DECLKNSION. 
 
 tie 5orm,t the form 
 L bie ®tut^, the blaze 
 tit S'tgt', the chase 
 i^ We 2«fl, the load 
 ^ tie 5^flii^t, the duty- 
 tie |)oil,f the post(-ofl&ce) 
 - tic Quol, the torment, pang 
 u tie <S(^aar,* the troop 
 »,tte ©(^loi^t, the battle 
 
 bic 3cit, 
 
 " tie ©cbrift,* the writing 
 We ®(^u(t, the debt 
 
 ' tie ©pur, the trace, track 
 tie 3:^at, the deed 
 
 ' ktc Sracfet, the costume 
 bie U^r,* the watch, clock 
 bie 2Ca^I, the choice 
 bic SBcIt * the world 
 bic 3fl|l, ^^ number 
 
 the time 
 
 Obs. IV. — The following nouns take only e in the plural ; 
 
 tie SBctriibnip, (the) affiction 
 tic Srlaufeni^, the permission 
 bic ?5itt|iemi§, the darkness 
 
 bic ^cnntnij, (the) knowledga 
 »"t>ie SEriibfal, (the) sorrow 
 '^bie Scforgni^, (the) fear 
 
 EXAMPLES UNDER OBS. II. 
 
 N. bic ©atcl, the fork 
 G. ter ®aM, of the fork 
 D. ber ®abcl, to the fork 
 A. tie Oabcl, the fork 
 
 N. tie Setcr, the pen 
 Gr. ter geter, of the pen 
 D. ter geber, to the pen 
 A. tie geber, the pen 
 
 Plural. 
 bic ®aMn, the forks 
 ber ®akltt, of the forks 
 ben ©akin, to the forks 
 bie ®aBelM, the forks 
 
 tie getcrn, the pens 
 ter gctcrtt, of the pens 
 ben gebern, to the pens 
 bic gebcrtt, the pens 
 
 EXAMPLE UNDER OBS. lU. 
 
 I^. tie Surg, the (old) castle 
 G. ber Surg, of the castle 
 D. ber Surg, to the castle 
 A. bic Surg, the castle 
 
 Plii/ral. 
 bie Surgen, the castles 
 ber Surgen, of the castles 
 ben Surgen, to the castles 
 bic Surgen, the castles 
 
 * See first note on preceding page. 
 
 f 9)ofi and gortn are derived from the French, la poste, la forme. 
 
FOUETH DECLENSION. 
 
 61 
 
 EXAMPLE UNDER OBS. IV. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. bie ^enntnip, (the) knowledge tic ^enntniflTe, 
 G. ber ^enntnig, ter ^enntntffe, 
 
 D. ter ^enntnip, ben ^cnntttiffcn, 
 
 A. tie ^enntni§, tie ^enntniiTc, 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 tie §ant, the hand 
 
 tie Slyt, the axe 
 
 tie 33onf, the bench 
 
 tie gaujl, the fist 
 
 tie ®an3, the goose 
 
 tic Sau^, the louse 
 
 tic 5!rtagt, the maid-servant 
 
 tic iSWoi^t, the power, might 
 
 tic SRa(^t, the night 
 
 tie 9lup, the nut 
 
 gefunten, found 
 
 gcnommen, taken 
 
 lang, long 
 
 tic SBIumc, the flower (to bloom) 
 
 tic Stofe, the rose 
 ^ tic 53iene, the bee 
 t' tie SSriidc, the bridge 
 
 tie ^ircbe, the church 
 
 tic ^irfc^e, the cherry 
 
 tic Sliire {^vpa), the door 
 
 tic Jflatel, the needle 
 
 tic grci^eit, (the) freedom, liberty 
 
 tic greuntfc^aft, (the) friendship 
 
 cr^attcn, received 
 
 fofibar, precious 
 
 fauer, sour 
 
 Reading Exercise VI. 
 
 ©le S8(in!e ftnt long. Unferc 9)Jagt '^at tetnc Sljt scrlorcn. 2Cir 
 ^a6cn Stiiffc unt ^irfi^cn. SSo (tnt tic Spren ticfer ^irc^c ? S)ic 
 Siencn gc6cn (give) §onig. ^Eic grci^cit unt tie greuntfi^aft |lnt 
 fe^r ttjiinf^cnswert^ (desirable). 3fl tie SRofc cine Slumc ? 1;ie 
 SHii^tc ftnt ic^t nii^t fe|r lang. '^tm %xau. :^at jwei ©iinfe unt trel 
 §ii|ner getaufi:. Die SJtat^t ter giirjicn. SBer i)at meine getcrn gc* 
 nommen ? ®ic ginger S^rer §onte ftnt llein. Die Slatten unt tie 
 Wi.\x\t ftnt nit^t fe'^r grof . £« ifl cine |)flt(^t ter graucn. 3ene 
 SBurgen ftnt aft. <Sie |aBen ntcine U|r gcnommen. Deine Sricfe 
 ftnt auf (at, Dat.) ter 9)oji. Unfcre 3cit ijl loflbar. SOJein Sc|rer ijl 
 ein 3Rann »on Srfa|rung. Die ©oltaten ^a6en tie Srlau6nip er|at« 
 ten. 
 
62 
 
 rOUKTH DECLENSION. 
 
 Theme VI. 
 
 Has your brother bought the pens? We have received 
 cherries and wahiuts. Are the needles good ? Have these 
 churches no doors ? Your aaid-servant has carried (getragen) 
 the letter (Sricf, m.) to (auf, -with Ace.) the post-of&ce. The 
 cherries are sour. These flowers are beautiful (fd^on). We 
 have geese, but no bees. Who has taken the benches ? That 
 bridge is very small. The duties of [the] women. These 
 watches are of (Don) silver. [The] time is precious. Have 
 you [the] permission? The darkness of the nights. They 
 have found (gcfuntcn) the tracks. He has an axe in his 
 hand. The knives and forks are on (auf, with Dat.) the table 
 (Xifc^, m.). 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 aSo (tnb ttttfere 3lcj:tc ? 
 
 ©ini ble Stumcn SRofen ? 
 
 SBie side (how many) Z^ixxm 
 
 ^at biefe ^ird^c ? 
 JpaBen @ic 5Ru(fc ? 
 ®inb ile 5Rad^te im (in tern) 
 
 3Blntcr lang ? 
 aSo ijl lie grau \tmi SKonnca? 
 
 SHJer '^flt mcine gcbcnt ? 
 
 ^oBcn ®ie Wd\i\e in (Dat.) 3|* 
 
 rem Jpaufe ? 
 SBic »icle (how many) §5nie ^at 
 
 eln 9«enfc^ ? 
 §a6en ®ic ©linfc ? 
 
 Jpojl btt tic Srlefc awf (to) tie 
 
 5)ofl getragen (carried) ? 
 Jpaben ®lc elne U^r ? 
 
 Die SKagt '^at fie (them) genom* 
 
 men (taken). 
 Stein, tie Slofen fint SBIumen. 
 !Dlefe ^Irc^e lat tret Spren unt 
 
 clncn a:prm. 
 2Bir |c6en Stuffe unt ^lrfd)en. 
 Die 3la&itt ftnt tm SDlnter felir 
 
 tang. 
 Die grau jeneg SJlanneg Ijl In ter 
 
 ^Ir^e. 
 Die ©c^tuefier iener 9JJagte lat 
 
 fie (them). 
 Stein, meln §err; ftc fiirdfetcn 
 
 (fear) unfere ^a^en. 
 Sin 5Kcnfc^ :§at stuel ^iinte unt 
 
 3»el P^e. 
 Stein, trlr ^akn felne ©onfe, mlr 
 
 'iiaim SBlenen. 
 Stein, 3^re gjJagt l)at tie Srlefe 
 
 fluf tie 3)ofi getragen. 
 3c^ ^abc jMjcl U|rcn. 
 
THE NUMBEK or NOUNS. 63 
 
 SSSlc i)tcl U^r (what time) ifl c3 ? ©a ift sier U^r (o'cloct). 
 
 $at 3|i^ SfJac^bar %xix&iti tn fcinein ®r ^at Slepfel, Kliiffe unb ^irfc^en 
 
 ©artcit ? in feincm ®arten. 
 
 ^ahtn bie ?!}tutter jener ^naBcn Stein, nur We SJIuttcr biefes ^no* 
 
 i^re Z'o6^ta »er(oren? ten ^ot cine Zo6^ttv »erIoren. 
 
 LESSON YII. SefttPtt 7> 
 
 Additional Eemarks on the Number of Nouns.* 
 
 Obs. I. — There are a great many substantives in German, 
 which, from their signification, cannot be used in 
 both numbers. While some of them have no sin- 
 gular form, others are without a plxiral form. 
 
 1, Nouns that are used only in the Singular both 
 in English and in German axe : 
 
 a. The names of Materials, as : 
 baS ®oIb, the goldf bag ^upfer, the copper 
 
 ber ^lontg, the honey *^ tie 3lfd^c, the ashes 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Remaek. — Some of the names of materials have a plural 
 form when different kinds of the same material are referred 
 to ; e. g., bie SBeine, (the) wines, i. e., the different kinds of 
 wine. (Comp. Fowler's English Qram/imur, § 157.) 
 
 6. Abstract Noims, as : 
 
 ber ©c^Iaf, (the) sleep bie Siebe, (the) love 
 
 ber Jpungcr, (the) hunger bie SwflCttb, the youth 
 
 ber SRu^m, (the) glory, renovm bag 2llter, the age, etc. 
 
 Eemakk. — Notice that while in English abstract terms 
 are used without the article, this is not the case in Germaa 
 
 * This lesson might be reserved until Lesson XV. is mastered, 
 t Notice the use of the article here (see p. 360, § 3). 
 
64 THE NUMBER OF NOUNS. 
 
 2. Nouns that have only a plural § form are : 
 bie.3t^ncn, the ancestors . tie (Sefi^wifler, brothers, sisters, 
 tie 33eintlett>er, the trowsers or brothers and sisters 
 
 (pair of pantaloons) tie ^ojlcn or Unfojlen, the costs. 
 
 He Sintitnfte, the revenues expenses 
 
 tic gitern, the parents tic Seutc*, (the) people 
 
 tie Serictt, the vacation, holi-v lie SHafern, the measles 
 
 days V bie 9)Zolfen, the whey 
 
 tic Sorfa^ren, the ancestors i^^ie SHante, the intrigues 
 lie ©cBriitcr, (a mercantile '^te Sriimmer, the ruins 
 
 term) the brothers tic Sruppen, the troops 
 
 also the following : 
 tie gajlcn, (the) Lent *^ie 9)ftngjlen, (the) Whitsuntide 
 
 lie Djicrn, (the) Easter tie SBei^nac^ten, (the) Christmas 
 
 3. Masculine and Neuter Nounsf implying quan- 
 tity, weight, or measure, when preceded by a nu- 
 meral, and followed by a substantive or adjective, 
 are used only in the singular form, as : 
 
 3)aa Su^, a quire (of paper) ; e. g., fiinf Su(^ ^apkx, five quires 
 
 of paper.** 
 Daa Du^ent, a dozen ; e. g., sicr S)n^en& Safc^cntiic^er, four 
 
 dozen handkerchiefs. 
 J;cr %u^, a foot ; e. g., jwei ^u^ (not giige) lang, two feet long. 
 IDai Tlal, time, repetition ; e. g., jwci ffftal, twice. 
 Do« faaXit a pair ; e. g., tret ^aar ©hiimpfc, three pair of 
 
 stockings. 
 Xai ^\uvi), a pound ; e. g., adjt ^fun& $onig, eight pounds of 
 
 honey. 
 S;er 3ott, an inch ; e. g., neun 3"^ ^^cit, nine inches broad. 
 
 * State expresses the plural of persons in » very indefinite manner 
 without regard to class, species, or sex. Human heings are designated 
 by ?DJenf(I)en; the male sex by SWcinner, etc. We must say Unmenf^en, but 
 not Unleute. (E^elmte means married people, and (£^tm&rmtx, married meiu 
 
 § Dei Sotftt^te, bai ®einflcib, ba« Oef^wifier, ber IruwC)' ^^ ^^^^ 
 
 f Feminine nouns and all those which express time are used In the 
 plural ; e. g-, jttei £Ben XVl&i, two ells or yards o/doth ; bvet Sa^re lang, 
 for three years. 
 
 X 95«« also signifies few ; e. g,, etn 3)aflr ©tunbetn a few hours. 
 ** Notice the prep, of has no equivalent here. See p. 369, 3. 
 
THE NUMBER OF NOUNS. 
 
 65 
 
 Obs. n. — Compound words ending in SWantt, change this 
 ending in the plural to Seutc, when the substantive 
 denotes a person without special regard to sex, as : 
 
 tier Slmtmaitn, the sheriff; pi. lie SJlmtlcutc 
 ker (Scetntatin, the nobleman ; pi. Me Scelletlte 
 ker §fln5cteitt«ntt, the tradesman ; pi. lie §anlelatctttc 
 kcr ^auflttOBtt, the merchant ; pi. lie ^aufleute. 
 
 If, however, the term is to express a distinction of 
 sex, the regular form fSftanntt is used, as : 
 
 S)cr S^entann, the husband (married man) pi. lie S^cmonncr. 
 
 (S!ie S^elctttc, married people, meaning man and wife.) 
 Dcr S|rcnmann, the man of honor ; pi. lie (S^renmdnnes. 
 S)e» ©taatSmann, the statesman ; pi. lie ©toaWitt dinner. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 W ©(i^Iacfet, the battle 
 He U^r, the watch 
 lie ©e^utl, the debt 
 lie 3agl, the chase 
 las §cml, the shirt 
 las §aar, the hair 
 lag 3)apier, the paper 
 la3 Sanl, the ribbon 
 ber 3lllcr, the eagle 
 rei^, rich 
 ft(|t, eight 
 
 ler J)orn, the thorn 
 Icr Drt, the place 
 Icr 9lltc, the aged man 
 ler ^uc^cn, the cake 
 ler SOlaler, the painter 
 gefunl, healthy 
 Bcleutenl, considerable 
 f^warj, black 
 traurtg, sad 
 gcfangcn, caught 
 arm, poor 
 
 Reading Exercise VII. 
 
 S)ie U^rcn leS Jpanlct^monneg. !Die ©c^ulbett ler ^aufleute. 
 ^etne 9lofcn o|nc (without) Domen.^ "Die SlcUeutc jeneg Drtc3 
 fml ntc^t fe^r retc^. SReinc SctnHeiler |tnl jerriffen (torn), ©ie 
 fittttiinfte jener S^eleute ftnl jtentltc^ (pretty) 6cleutenl. ©inl liefe 
 Slemanncr ®cfc^»ifier ? "Die ©cirillcr Sot^f^itl :^a6en »iele (many) 
 ^ftufer in granffurt. !Dcr Prjl :^at lie Unloficn ler 3agl gctragcn 
 
66 THE NUMBER OF NOUNS. 
 
 (borne). S)lefc SEruptJcn M'btn Mc ©c^Iac^t gettonncn (won). Die 
 Stmtlcute unfereiS Dorfe« [mi reic^. grict^ic^ bcr @roge unt ®corg 
 SBaj^ingtott roarcn S^rcnrndnner unb ©taotgrnonner. 'Lai ^aax fci* 
 ner SItern iji fc^warj. !Dte SJJoIten ftnt) fe^r gcfunb. Sr |at »icr 33u4 
 |)apter unti acbt ^funt SSuttcr gcfauft. 
 
 Theme VII. 
 
 Sleep is the image (St&, n.) of death (Sob, m.). The 
 painter has bought a cake. These noblemen have lost their 
 brothers and sisters. The scholars of the teachers of lan- 
 guages have (a) vacation. The revenues of the brothers 
 Steinthal are pretty (jicmlid^) large. Who are your ancestors? 
 Have you seen the ruins of Pompeii (9>om)jej;i) ? My brother 
 has caught an eagle. The castle stands on (auf with Dat.) 
 the rock. Have you bought a pair of pants ? His sisters 
 have bought four dozen handkerchiefs. Give me (®eBcn ©ie 
 Jitlr) two pounds of honey. No (leinc) roses without thorns. 
 The merchants of that place are poor. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 SBcr ■^ot kic Unfojien bcr 3ag5 'Bit ©o'^ne iei Prfleit laBcn fie 
 
 gctragcn (borne) ? (them) getrageit. 
 
 2Ba3 ^o6ctt biefe ^ankeMcute ju ©ic ^abcn U^ren ju ttcrlaufen. 
 
 (to) serf aufen (sell) ? 
 ©tnb biefe (S'^cmanncr ®ef(^n)i|ler ? «Retn, fte finb nii^t ®c)'din)ijler. 
 3Car SQailington cln (S^rcn* SBai'^tngton wax eltt S|renmann 
 
 ntotin ? unb cin ©taat^mann. 
 
 Jpobcn unfcre Sruppen bic ©(i^Iacbt Stein, 3^te Sruppen ^oben atoei 
 
 gcwonnen (won?) ©(^lac^ten serlorcn (lost). 
 
 3fi ba« ^aax beiner ®ef(^tt)ijlcr £)og ^aat meiner ®ef(^iBi(lcr ijj 
 
 fc^toarj? iraun (brown). 
 
 ^ajl bu fapiix gefauft ? 3«, ^ la^e Bier 33ud^ 9)o))ier unb 
 
 ein Dtt^cnb ©ta^Ifebern (steel- 
 pens) gcfauft. 
 ^aten jene ^aufleutc ©^ulbcn ? Die ©(i^ulben jener ^aufleute finb 
 
 tcbeutcnb. 
 
PBOPEB NOUNS. 67 
 
 $aictt ®ic cineit 3lmtmann in SCtr '^oBert jwct Slmtlcute in un* 
 
 3^rem Dorfe ? ferem Dorfc. 
 
 Jpatt i^r geden in Mcfem iKonate ? Stein, wir ^aben leinc gcrien in 
 
 Mefem Wlonate. 
 
 LESSON Vm. Scfttott 8. 
 
 Declension of Proper Nouns. i^ttUmiion in 
 @tgcnnamcn.) 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Ob3. I. — ^Names of Persons are declined either with or toiih- 
 out tlie article (definite or indefinite). 
 
 1. When preceded by an article, the proper nouns 
 remain unchanged, as the inflection of the article 
 itself serves to indicate the different cases ; e. g., 
 bie Z^atin it§ Stcero, the deeds of Cicero. 
 
 2. When not preceded by an article, proper nouns 
 add only S in the Genitive ; e. g., ^arI8 Jput,* 
 Charles's hat. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 N. bcr Subtulg, Lewis A'art, Charles 
 
 G. beS Sufcwig, of Lewis ^arI8, of Charles, or Charles's 
 
 D. bent Stttwig, to Lewis Marl, to Charles 
 
 A. itn Suttoig, Lewis Rax\, Charles 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 N. He Tlaxit, Mary Slnna, Anna 
 
 G. bzt ^axk, of Mary 3lnna§, of Anna 
 
 D. bet 'SRaxit, to Mary Slnna, to Anna 
 
 A. bic Wlaxit, Mary 3lnna, Anna 
 
 * Notice that a proper noun in the genitive vnthovt the article stands 
 before the noun which it possesses, like a proper noun in the possessive 
 In English ; with the article, the sentence is : bet $Ut tied SttxX. 
 
68 PBOPER NAMES OF PEBSONS. 
 
 N. &et ©Coiner, SchiUer §omer', Homer 
 
 G. &c§ <B6^iUtv, of Schiller ^omerS, of Homer 
 
 D. itm ©critter, to Schiller Corner, to Homer 
 
 A. bm ©(filler, SchiUer Corner, Homer 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Oes. TL—Mascvline names ending in S, ^, fc^, % S, or } 
 take mi in the genitive ; e. g., iSJJoyettS Safc^cnbu^, 
 Max's pocket-book. 
 
 Obs. m. — Feminine names ending in c add ng; e. g., 5WaricttS* 
 Suc^, Mary's book. 
 
 Obs. rV. — ®ott is considered a proper name, and is declined 
 without the article. It takes eg in the genitive, as : 
 ®ottc8 ©nabe or btc ©nabc ®otteS, God's mercy or 
 The mercy of God. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Undue Obs. n. UsDiai Obs. III. Under Obs. IV. 
 
 N. %tmi, Francis Sntiltc, Emily ®ott, God 
 
 G. granjetlS, of Francis gmilietiS, of EmUy ®otte8,of God 
 
 D. gronj, to Francis Sntilie, to Emily ®ott, to God 
 
 A. granj, Francis Smilic, EmUy ®ott, God 
 
 Obs. V. — ^Foreign names ending in a single i, as ©olrateS, 
 do not admit of inflection in the genitive, but re- 
 quire the article ; e. g., bag Seicn fecS Sfcrjcc^, the 
 life of Xerxes. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 ®|riflu8 and 3efuS are declined as in Latin ; e. g., 
 ka3 2c6cn 3e|U &i)rifti, the life of Jesus Christ. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 N. 9[tdMal3c«, Alcibiades aefaS S|rijhl§, Jesus Christ 
 
 G. bed Sllcibiateg, of Alcibiades Seftt S:^ri(li, of Jesus Christ 
 D. 2llci6iabc0, to Alcibiades ^t\a ®|njlo, to Jesus Christ 
 A. 2ltclbiatic«, Alcibiades 3ef«»»» S^rifluitt, Jesus Christ 
 
 * Mary, the name of a queen or other historical person, is SWttria j e. g., 
 3)laria ©tuatt, Mary Stuart. 
 
PROPER NAMES OF PERSONS. 69 
 
 Obs. VL — ^If several proper nouns, referring to one and the 
 same person, stand together, the last only is in- 
 flected ; e. g., ^Vi^M SlloIpV* 3lu|m, the renown of 
 Gustavus Adolphus, or Gustavns Adolphus's renown. 
 
 Obs. vn.— If the word ^crr, '^tott, Wtaiamt, ^Jraulcin, 
 
 or some other common noun expressing a title or 
 dignity, accompanied by the article, precedes a proper 
 noun, only the common noun is declined ; e. g., 
 iai ^anS bc3 §errn ©^mitt, the houseof Mr. Schmidt ; 
 Hi ^rijnung its ^atfer§ %min&i, the coronation of the emperor 
 
 Frederick ; 
 bic Snt^auptung ter ^Bnigtn 5Jiaria ©tuart, the beheading of 
 (the) queen Mary (Stuart). 
 
 Obs. Vin. — When an adjective follows a proper name, in 
 apposition, both are declined ; e. g., Untcr ter Slcgie* 
 rung ^arlS tea Oropen, under the reign of Charle- 
 magne. 
 
 Obs. IX. — A noun in apposition with another noun must be 
 in the same case ; e. g., Jpaten ©ie feinctt Dnfel, ben 
 ^rofelfor S3opp, gefc^cn? Have you seen his uncle, 
 (the) Professor Bopp ? 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ob3. X. — Proper names of persons form their plural in C, if 
 masculine, and in tl* or Ctt if feminiae, but never 
 modify their radical voweL 
 
 Exceptions : Names of male persons ending in 
 c, ct, en, er, and tfyen, remain unchanged. 
 Obs. XI. — Proper nouns can be used in the plural only, 
 
 1. When the same noun is common to several 
 individuals ; e. g., tie ^tit ier grteCerii^c, the time {of 
 the government of the kings named Frederick) of the 
 Fredericks. 
 
 • Words ending in e in the singular add only n ; e. g., CuifC/ pi., bte 
 Suifen. 
 
70 
 
 PBOPEB NAMES OF PERSONS. 
 
 2. When proper nouns are converted into common 
 nouns, meaning persons of a certain character, as : 
 b i e ©(filler unfercr ^nt, the Schillers of our age ; tie 
 JletBtonc [mil feltcn, the Newtons (persons like New- 
 ton) are rare. 
 
 Note. — Notice that the proper name is preceded by the 
 
 §cinri(^, Henry 
 N. ik $einri(^c, Henrys 
 G. ier ^einri^e, of Henrys 
 D. ken ipcinrii^Ctt * to Henrys 
 A. Me Jpeinric^e, Henrys 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ©d^tHcr, Schiller 
 ite ©(filler, Schillers 
 fccr ©d^iOer, of Schillers 
 ben ©bittern, to Schillers 
 iic ©(^tder, Schillers 
 
 Suifc, Louisa 
 N. tte Suifett,t Louisas 
 Gr. bcr Suifen, of Louisas 
 D. ben Suifen, to Louisas 
 A. btc Snifen, Louisas 
 
 So'^onna, Joan 
 tic So'^anneti, Joans 
 ter 3o|annCtt, of Joans 
 ten 3o^an"Ctt, to Joans 
 tie Sotiannen, Joans 
 
 griebrii^, Frederic 
 9l5oI))^, Adolphus 
 SKoy, Max 
 Stuart, Edward 
 3aco5, James 
 ©eorg, George 
 3o^nn, John 
 SBil^elm, William 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ©op^ic, Sophia 
 ^oroltne, Caroline 
 Smma, Emma 
 ipenriettc, Henrietta 
 SWargarct^c, Margaret 
 3lmoUc, Amelia 
 Sucle, Lucy 
 Slife, Eliza 
 
 Reading Exercise VIII. 
 
 SJlein Srutcr Sltolp'^ iji jung (young), atcr meinc Sante Suifc i^ 
 alt. ©iefea SSui^ gc^&rt (belongs) meincm Setter 3o^ann. ^arl 
 ijl grof , a6er Smilie ijl tieln. .^enrtetteng iput i(l alt. 5Der .^unt 
 
 * In the dative plural n is of course added. 
 
 t Words ending in e in the singular add only n ; e. g., Suiffj pi. bit 
 Guifcn. 
 
PEOPEK NAMES OF PEBSONB. 71 
 
 griebric^a ifl [i^tDarj, «ber WlaximS ^a^t t(l grau (gray). SBo ifl 
 ieine ©i^wefler 3lnna? §ier fint> ©fitter's Oebti^te, 2Blr '^aien 
 Slleyanfcer ^umBolBfiS Srtcfe cr^altcn. ®te ^abm ®ot|e'(5 Sjerte 
 gelefcn. SmmaS flutter iji Irani. Slclfon'a ©leg (victory) Bet 
 (at) Trafalgar ifl Beru^^mt (celebrated). !Die ©nabe ®ottcs. !Der 
 jot) Seftt S^r-ifil. 3£er)(eS war ein ^iinig. §err ©tfculj '^at etne 
 SJlii^e (cap). §akn ®tc feine ©cfewejler ?5rd:;Iein 2ucio gcfe^cn ? 
 
 Theme VIII. 
 
 Has Francis a hat ? Frederick's book. Joan's brother is 
 small. Emily's cat is black, but John's dog is gray. Charles 
 has read Schiller's works. Henrietta has lost Goethe's 
 poems (©eiii^te). His sister, Mrs. Schmidt, is Tery beautiful. 
 Here is a cousin of Mr. Schulz. James's pantaloons are torn 
 (jerriffen). Has Max lost his penknife? Socrates was (roor) a 
 philosopher. The Shakspeares of our age (3 fit)- Where is 
 your brother George? Grive (®cben ©ie, with Dat.) my niece 
 Caroline this rose. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 3|l 3§re ©c^rocflcr ©op^ie jung SJJeine ©c^tDcjicr ©o)):§ie ifl nic^t 
 
 (young) ? ii^x jung. 
 
 ^at granj etnen Jput ? 9letn, grana ^at eine SJlii^e (cap). 
 
 3fl ^enriettcn^ ^a^c weif ? ^enrietteng ^a^e ifl grau (gray), 
 
 aitv 3o^onns Jpunc ifl wetf . 
 
 Jpakn ©ie ©M^c'a 3p¥35ni(i &^' 3<i, ^^ '§a6e fte jweimal (twice) 
 
 Icfen? gelefcn. 
 
 §0^ bu ^umBolJt'S Cosmos ? 9iein, aier id^ f^ah feinc SWeifcn 
 
 (travels) in 2lmerifa. 
 
 3fl feine 2:ante, grfiulein Sucic, ©ie ifl nic^t fc^on, ater au(^ nic^t 
 
 f(^bn ? Wl&i (ugly). 
 
 SCer war (was) ©icger in ber !Der Slbmlrol Jflclfon war (was) 
 
 ©c^Iai^t Bci- Strafalgar? ©iegcr 6ci Srafatgar. 
 
 aSar (was) ©otrateg ber Sc^^rer ^Wein, 2lriflotete3 wor ber Se^rer 
 
 Slleyanberg ? 3l(ej;anbcrg. 
 
 3fl Smma'S 35ater angefommen Sdein, er i^ no(% nii^t angctom* 
 
 (arrived) ? men. 
 
72 
 
 NAMES OF COUNTRIES AND PLACES. 
 
 SCle ^ei^t (what is the name of) 
 
 ber ^Bnig son 5>reu^cn? 
 9Co tji graitjens Slufgabe ? 
 SBcr l)at SmilicnS SBiicber »er* 
 
 toren ? 
 ^dfl tu fcinc ©c^wejier 3lnna 
 
 gefc^cn? 
 3jl griebrid^3 ^a^e fi^ttarj ober 
 
 grau? 
 SDoijiS^SruierSJlioIp^? 
 
 Sr Icipt aBlIlcIm. 
 
 Sr l§at fte (it) ticrlorcn. 
 
 Mxl ^at fie auf bent "SRatUt 
 
 (market) iierlorcn. 
 3a, i(^ f^ait |te in bcr ©d^ulc 
 
 gefc^cn. 
 2Benn ic^ nlc^t trre (mistake), ifi 
 
 fte grau. 
 Sr iji 6et meincr Sante Suife. 
 
 ^ ' ■ » ■ ■ » 
 
 I^SSON IX. 
 
 Scftiott 9. 
 
 Names of Countries and Places. (Stiibtcs, Siiniicrs unii 
 SBiilternamtn.) 
 
 Obs. I. — ^Names of countries and places have in German as in 
 English, no article. They add i in the genitive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 N. "Dcutfi^tanb, Germany 
 G. Seutfc^tanbS, of Germany 
 D. Deutfi^Ianb, to Germany 
 A. Setitfi^lanb, Germany 
 
 Scrlitt, Berlin 
 SerlinS, of Berlin 
 33erltn, to Berlin 
 SSerlin, Berlin 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Obs. n. — l;le ©^tueij, Switzerland, and bic SMct (S:Me9), 
 Turkey, are treated as common nouns. 
 
 Obs. in. — ^Names of countries and places ending in 8, f , or J, 
 must, others usually, take the preposition son, in- 
 stead of being put in the genitive ; e. g., bic ©tra§cn 
 Son 3)ari«, the streets of Paris; ber ^bnig von 
 5)reupen, the king of Prussia (see p. 369, 1-4.). 
 
NATIONAL APPELLATIONS. 73 
 
 Obs. IV. — In German, the proper names of countries, places, 
 etc., are not connected with the generic names by a 
 preposition, but stand in apposition with them and 
 are not subject to inflection ; e. g., tag ^onigreid) Sngs 
 lant, the kingdom of England. 
 
 Names of Elvers, Lakes, Mountains, &c. 
 
 Obs. V. — Names of rivers, lakes, &c., take the article as in 
 English, and are declined as common nouns. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE. 
 
 N. bcr 3fl|ctn, the Ehine tic Dter, the Oder 
 
 G. tti aiieineS, of the Khine bcr Dtcr, of the Oder 
 
 D. lent 3t^cine, to the Ehine ber Dicr, to the Oder 
 
 A. ten ai^ein, the Khine bic Dler, the Oder 
 
 National Appellations. 
 
 Obs. VI. — Many national masculine appellations are formed 
 from the names of the respective countries by ad- 
 ding tv (ner, oner), modifying usually the last radical 
 vowel. They are of the first declension. 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 bcr Suropiicr, the European ter Slfrtfaner, the African 
 
 bet Sngldtiber. the Englishman ber 3lmerilancr, the American 
 ber 2lt^ener, the Athenian ber Staliener, the Italian 
 
 ber ^arf^agcr, the Carthaginian ter S^anter, the Irishman 
 
 EXCEPTION. 
 
 Obs. Vn. — 1. 9lmeri!a and 3lfrifa insert n before the ending, 
 and do not modify the last radical vowel. 
 
 2. The following, formed irregularly, are declined 
 like common nouns : 
 ter Sad)|'e, the Saxon ber Sftulfc, the Eussian 
 
 rer grcmjofc, the Frenchman ber 55oIc, the Pole 
 ber ®ricd)C, the Greek icr Jitrtc, the Turc 
 
 ber 9)reu^c, the Prussian ber 'Lant, the Dane 
 
 ber ttut\i>«;* the German bcr ©c^mcre, the Swede 
 
 ber ©panicr, the Spaniard ter SSfli^r, the Bavarian 
 
 * This word is an adjective used as noun ; hence, a German is rend- 
 ered ctn ®eutf(^er (comp. p. 139, VI.). 
 
74 NATIONAL APPELLATIONS. 
 
 Obs. Vni,— National feminine appellations are formed from 
 the masculine by adding in or itttt in the singular 
 and innen in the plural. 
 N. bte (Snglantcritt the English lady bie Snglanticrinnew 
 G. itx Snglanberttt ber gnglanbcriitncn 
 
 D. Scr Sngianbcritt ken ©nglanterinncu 
 
 A. tic Snglanberin Me gngKnterinnen 
 
 Obs. IX. — ^Exception 1. If the masculine form ends in c, this 
 letter is dropped, e. g., bcr 3liu|fe,/em., tie SHufftn. 
 
 2. ^ie "Deutfi^C, the German woman, diflfers from 
 the masculine form only by a change of the article. 
 
 Names of Months and Days. 
 Obs. X. — ^Names of months and days require the definite article. 
 
 ter Sttnuar, January tcr 3uK, July 
 
 ter SeBruar, February tcr 3lugufl, August 
 
 ter Wixi, March tcr ©c^jtembcr, September 
 
 ter Slpril, April ter DKoBer, October 
 
 tcr 9Kat, May , tcr ^Rottcmfccr, November 
 
 tcr Sunt, June tcr Scjcmfccr, December 
 
 tcr ©onntag, Sunday tcr ©onncrflag, Thursday 
 
 ter 9Jiontag, Monday tcr grcitag, Friday 
 
 ter Dtcnjlag, Tuesday tcr ©onnoient or ©amjiflg, 
 tcr SiJlittmoc^, Wednesday Saturday 
 
 Obs. XI. — Before names of countries and places, to is rendered 
 nai^, in or at, in, and frmn, »on or mi 5 e. g., 
 
 ®e^cn <3ic ntiH} SImcrifa ? Are you going to America ? 
 
 SBo^nen ©ic in SBerlin ? Do you live in Berhn ? 
 
 2r fommt t)on '^«di. He comes /rom Paris. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Jl(tcn, Asia 2Bien, Vienna 
 
 Slfrifa, Africa 9lom, Eome 
 
 Jtujhalien, Australia ter 9(mcrifancr, the American 
 
NAMES OF COUNTBIBS, ETC. 75 
 
 Dcjiretc^, Austria bcr Dcilreii^er, the Austrian 
 
 ©pantert, Spain ber ©ponier, the Spaniard 
 
 Stalien, Italy ter StaKenei^, the Italian 
 
 ^reupen, Prussia fcer ^arifer, the Parisian 
 
 giuplant, Eussia icr 3ri(in*er, the Irishman 
 
 Reliant), Holland icr ^ofldtiJer, the Dutchman 
 
 guropa, Europe ber ©c^wcijer, the Swiss 
 
 Slmerifa, America tic Din, the Oder 
 
 Snglanb, England Me Sonau, the Danube 
 
 grantreii^, France bic §au)5tfiabt, the capital 
 
 Deutfc^tant, Germany flarf, strong 
 
 Srlanb, Ireland ^o^, high 
 
 Reading Exercise IX. 
 
 "Lie Warmn Sfluftanba ftnb jlart. T)ie ©eHrgc (mountains) ter 
 ©(^wetj ftnb fd)bn. Serlin ijl tie ^auptflaM ^xtvi^eni, 3ene grauen 
 (tnb Srlftnterinnen. I:tc ©trapen eon faxii |tnb fc^iin. Der 23ruter 
 beineg Setter^ ijl in 3lfien. 3nt (in bent) ^amax ifl ti fc|r taft in 
 Deutfc^lanb. 2)cr ©onntag ijl ein Slu^etag (day of rest) in 3lme» 
 rila. 3c^ ge^c (go) mi^ Sluflralien, §err 9)rDfeffor Sart^ war (was) 
 in Slfrifa. aConn (when) ge^en (go) ©te na^ gvonfreic^ ? £;er 
 3taliener unb ber Dcjlreic^er. Die ^bntgin »on Snglant ()eigt (is 
 called) SSictorta. Die ©ricc^cn |tnb bic greunte ber ©c^weijer. "Lit 
 ^oUdnberinnen fommen son ^mjlcrbam, 2lm ^Kontag oter am. 9)litt' 
 JBO(^. ©iefc grau t(i eine ©panierin. 
 
 Theme IX. 
 
 The Ehine, the Danube, the Oder, and the Elbe (SKe) are 
 rivers in Germany. The mountains of Switzerland are high. 
 Paris is the capital of France. The streets of Berlin are 
 wide (breit) and beautiful. Is it cold in Austria in the month 
 of May ? That German lady is very rich. The kingdom of 
 England is not very large. The Greeks and the Turks are 
 enemies (getnbe). Are you going (®e|en ©ie) to London or 
 
76 
 
 NAMES OF COUNTEIES, ETC. 
 
 Milan (SUIailanb) ? Where is Milan ? The Spanish ladies are 
 very beautiful. The queens of Europe are not very rich. Is 
 it Tuesday or Wednesday ? In the city of Vienna .the jhouses 
 lare Jiigh. The Turk comes (fommt) from (ouS) Turkey. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 @int) kie groucn 3lu§Ianta flarf ? 
 
 SBifl ktt cin gran3ofc, ober citt 
 
 3fl jener ipcrr ein gngliinbcr? 
 SEBelc^ea ijl tie ^au)}t(iait ©pa* 
 
 nicn« ? 
 ©inb tie ©tra^en SerlinS Brett 
 
 (wide) ? 
 ^i.iii welder ©tatt ge^en (go) 
 
 ©ic? 
 ®o jBo^nt (lives) ter Setter icS 
 
 ©c^weijcrs ? 
 SBte l^eigt (what is the name 
 
 of) bte ^atjcrin son granftcic^ ? 
 SBaa |at tie Staliencrin gelauft? 
 
 SEo i^ Me gI6e ? 
 
 3ft tic ipattptflatt ^reugcnS on ci* 
 
 ncm gluffc gelcgen (situated) ? 
 3ltt »c((^em B'ufTe t'^gt (lies) 
 
 9«ainj? 
 J^abcn ©ic ^Bln (Cologne) ge* 
 
 fe|en ? 
 ©inb Me ©(^weijer geinbe bcr 
 
 Slmeritaner ? 
 SSann ge|en ©ie nadfe SKiinc^eit 
 
 (Munich) in Saiern ? 
 
 Die grauen Stu^IanbS ftnb fetjr 
 
 jtarf. 
 Sd^ bin etn liirfe. 
 
 9letn, cr tfl ein 9lmerifancr. 
 50Jabrib ijt bie ipaupt^abt ©pa* 
 
 ntens. 
 ©ie jinb breit unb fc^Bn. 
 
 3Blr gc'^cn nac^ Surtn unb 5Kai* 
 
 lanb. 
 Sr »o|nt in Srlanb. 
 
 X;lc ^aiferln son gronfreic^ ^ei§t 
 
 gugenle. 
 5:;ie Staliencrin |at eincn $ut gc* 
 
 lauft. 
 £;ie gibe ifl etn gtug in l;cut)'(^* 
 
 lanb. 
 Serlin, bte ^auptflabt f rcu^cnS, 
 
 ijt an ber ©pree gelegen. 
 SJlatns licgt am SR^cin. 
 
 3a, tc^ '^abe ^Bln int SJJonat 3lutf 
 
 gnfl gefc^en. 
 !Dlc ©c^weijcr ftnb greunbe ber 
 
 Stmcrilaner. 
 3^ werbe (shall) tm 3an«(»r mlt 
 
 nteinem Setter nad^ 9)'Jiin(i^ett 
 
 gel^en (go). 
 
GEHDEE OF SUBSTANTIVES. 77 
 
 LESSON X. Seftton 10. 
 
 Gender of Substantives.* (©efe^Ic^t in ^mptto'ixkt.) 
 
 Obs. I. — ^This part of German grammar is unfortunately so 
 difficult to reduce to general and precise rules, that 
 the student can be successful in learning the gen- 
 ders of nouns, only by a careful study of the follow- 
 ing rules, and a constant attention to the article be- 
 longing to each noun, and noting its gender. 
 
 Obs. n. — In German, the gender of a substantiye is not, as in 
 English, determined merely by the signification, but 
 also by the endings. The names of inanimate things, 
 therefore, may be either mascdline, feminine, or 
 
 NEUIEK. 
 
 Obs. m.— masculine by SIGNIFICATION. 
 
 1. Appellations of IHales« as : 
 
 ber 9Kann, the man ker Some, the lion 
 
 ber ^atfer, the emperor kcr 3lJler, the eagle 
 
 Note. — Diminutivesf are always neuter. 
 
 2. Names of Celestial and Infernal Beings, and 
 
 Planets, as : 
 
 ber Sngcl, the angel bcr SOlonb, the moon 
 
 bcr 3;eufel, the devil ber ©tern, the star 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 iic @onnc,| the sun bit (Srbc,| the earth 
 
 * It miglxt be well to reserve this Lesson and Less. VII., until the 
 student has mastered all the other Lessons of Part I., or has learned at 
 least the regular verb. 
 
 f In German nearly all substantives may be formed into diminutives 
 by affixing ^en or Icin. Nouns ending in e drop this letter in the dimi- 
 nutive form, and those containing the vowel a, o, u modify it. The 
 diminutives are used not only to express smallness of size, but also 
 affection, and in some cases oddity, as, 3Rann, SDldnni^en; 3:oc^ter, SCi)^< 
 ter(ctn; aSaum, SBiiumi^en; l>uni:i, |>itnb!§cn. See also Lesson III. 
 
 X See Obs. VI., 1. p. 79. 
 
78 GENDEB OF SUBSTAKTIVES. 
 
 3. Names of Seasons, Months, Days, Points of 
 the Compass, Winds, and Stones, as : 
 
 ber ©ommer, smnmer icr ^ext (en), (the north) 
 
 ber 3a«Mflr, January ber ©amum, the Simoom 
 
 ber Si^citag, Friday ber Viamant, the diamond 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1)08 Sa^f' tte year, and its compounds, e. g., b«9 JJrit^ja^r, spring. 
 
 Obs. IV.— masculine by teemination. 
 
 1. Nouns ENDING m en* (not c^cn), tg, ic^, i«g, 
 
 AND Ungf, as 
 
 ber ©orten, the garden ber Sdegctt, the rain 
 
 ber ^&tiig, the king ber faring, the herring 
 
 ber 5)jirit<^, the peach ber ©iinftUug, the favorite 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 bnS Sccten, the basin ia^ Safen, the sheet 
 
 fcoS Sifen, the iron &n§ 8e:^en, the fief 
 
 iaS pttcn, the foal, &n8 SCapf en, the escutcheon 
 
 &aS ^iffen, the cushion, pillow SoS ^tx&itn, the sign 
 baa !&ing, the thing &a8 3JJefjtng, the brass 
 
 2. Five Nouns ending in cc : 
 
 ber ^affcc, the coffee ber ©d)ncc, the snow 
 
 ber 2;^ee, the tea ber Jllec, the clover ber Sec,! the lake 
 
 Obs. v.— FEMININE by SIGNIFICATION. 
 1. Appeijations of Females, as : 
 bie i^<M, the woman bie 2lmme, the nurse 
 
 bie Sungfrau, the maid bie ^aifcrin,§ the empress 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 &a8 3Bei6, the wife, woman >o8 Staucnjtmmer, a female person 
 
 * Infinitives used substantively are neuter, see p. 80, 3. 
 f See Third Declension, Obs. V, p. 49. 
 X ®ie ©ee, the sea, has no plural 
 § See Obs. XII., p. 84. 
 
GBSDEE OF SUBSTANTIVES. 79 
 
 2. Names of Trees, Fruits, Plants^ and Flowers, as: 
 
 Me Si^c, the oat tie 3)flan3c, the plant 
 
 kte Sirnc, the pear tie Silie, the lily 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 bet 9ll)orn, the maple &er Jpotiunter, the elder tree 
 
 bcr 3lpfe(, the apple icr 3Bad)^oItcr, the juniper 
 
 itt Sauni, the tree feaS 95crgi§meinnid)t, the forget- 
 
 bcr gtieter, the Ulac me-not 
 
 feet ©oltlact, the wall-flower 
 
 3. The Names of Rivers, as : 
 
 tie !Donau, the Danube tie Spree, the Spree 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 iet ?Kain, the Main bzt £a 5)Iata, the La Plata 
 
 bet 3JJiiTtffippi, the Mississippi bet D'^io, the Ohio 
 bcv 9JJijiouri, the Missouri btv fRf^dn, the Bhine 
 
 Obs. VI.— PElVnNINB BT TEEanNATION. 
 
 1. Nouns ENDING IN c (not ee) not having the 
 
 Peepix @e, as : 
 
 tie ©traf c, the street tie ^iitfc, the help 
 
 tk Sieie, (the) lore tie S^rc, the honor 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 &a8 3luge, the eye 1>0§ ®r6e, the inheritance 
 
 fc«8 Snte, the end &cr Ma\t, the cheese 
 
 Note. — Words like ©anic(n) cannot of course come under this 
 rule (Obs. V., p. 43), neither such as are by nature masculine. 
 
 2. IVouns ending in one of the Affixes ci (e^), 
 
 l^cit, f cit, ai^t, f^aft, uc|>t, ung, nib or 
 Uttft, as : 
 
 tie ©c^mei(6elet, flattery tie ^u^t, the bay 
 
 tic greil^eit, freedom tie 3l^tung, esteem 
 
 tie greuntlii^feit, kindness, affa- tie @etul&, patience 
 
 biUty tic 3lnfUttft, the arrival 
 
 tie Sreuntfcjiaft, friendshio 
 
80 
 
 GENDEB OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Obs. YIL— NEUTEE by SIGNIFICATION. 
 
 1. The Letters or the Alphabet, as : 
 iai 31, the A iai Tl, the M 
 
 2. The Naxes of Metals nsn Materials, as : 
 tai ®olJ, the gold bas Jpola, the wood 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 fcie 3)hli.ia, platina bct Zoxnbad, pinchbeck 
 
 bet ©ta'^I, steel bet QM, zinc 
 
 3. Infinitives and A4jectires used as Nouns, as : 
 iai Staud^Ctt, smoking Hi ^rinten, drinking 
 
 lai Sittet, the bitter tai ©i^Bne, the sublime, beau- 
 
 tiful 
 
 4. Collective NounSj especially those with the 
 
 Pbefk ®C, as : 
 iai ®e|ini)e, domestics iai SBie|, the catile 
 
 iai ® ettrgc, the chain of moun- iai 33oIf, the people 
 tains 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 bet OeBrflu^, the use &te ®ekrbe, the gesture 
 
 btt ®et)onfe, the thought bit ©eturt, the birth 
 
 btt ®i^alt, the salary bit ®tM^v, the tax 
 
 btt ©eiorfam, obedience bit ®efo^r, the danger 
 
 btt ®enu^, the enjoyment bit ©cmcinte, the parish 
 
 bzt ®crud}, the smell bit ®e)'c^t(t,te, history 
 
 btt ®cfang, the song bit ®e|c^tt)ul|l, the tumor 
 
 btt (3t\d:imad, the taste bit ®efiaft, the form, shape 
 
 btt ®ejtant, the stench bit ®e»alt, the power 
 
 btt ©ciBinn, the gain bit ®cl)ute, patience 
 
 Obs. VIII.— neuter by TERMINATION. 
 
 1. Diminutives nr c^en and lefn, as : 
 
 iai ©o^niJ^en, the Httle son iai S8auinc|>Ctt, the little tree 
 
 2. Nouns FOBMED with THE AfFIXES fcl, fal, ttl, 
 
 t^um, AND ni^, as : 
 
GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 81 
 
 ^iai aiot^fet, the enigma iai S^rtjlentl^am, Cbristianity 
 
 'Dai ©(^idtfal, fate Dai Siintnt^, the aUiance 
 
 tai 5)tittcl, the remedy, means ba3 Scrljiiltnt^, the relation 
 
 EXCEPTIONS, t 
 bet ©tiipfet, the stopper . &tc Sm))fangni^, conception 
 
 bit SriiBfal, the sorrow • bit Srfenntnip, perception 
 
 bet Srrt^um, the mistake, error bie Sriau6nt§, the permission 
 bet aieic^f^um, the wealth bie SrfiJarmf , savings 
 
 bet SGadj^t^um, the growth bie giiulni^, the putrefaction 
 
 i^bie SScbrangnijj, grievance bie ^enntnip, knowledge 
 
 y bie SSefummernip, sorrow fete SSerSommnig, damnation 
 
 . fete 33eforgnt§, apprehension feie Scrfdumntp, the omission, 
 
 I fete SBetmbni^, affliction delay 
 
 - feie Seroantnip, condition fete SBiltni^, the wilderness 
 
 Exercise on the Gender of Nouns.* 
 
 9CoIf. 33ar. SWenfc^. grau. 9Jtonb. ©onnc. Seufet. 
 ©tent, grfee. Jpa'^tt. Jpentte. 'Mai. MontaQ. ^nait. Some. 
 'Biamant ©arten. grii^ja'^v. 3a'^r:^Mtti'crt> ®ifen. SRegen. 
 ©olc, ©ilbcr. gaUen. Saten. ^tjfen. Se:^cn. ©unfiling. 
 3ungfrau. 2l|orn. <Spvu. !Donau. fRi^tin. Sft^one. ®id)c. 
 Sirnc. ^Bnig. faring, ©i^nec. ©ta'^I. grcunbfi^aft. Siek. 
 2luge. sffiac^VItcr. Z^n. ©ante, ©ebulo. 2Infunft. gietd;^ 
 t|um. fimtjfSngni^. ©eBurt. ©cnuf. 3louc^en. ©eHrgc. 
 ©B^ni^cn. grdulein. Wdi^m. Sli^tung. ©d^meic^elct. 3)ftri 
 ftc^. Bci^cn- Silif' ©tern. SlDler. ©amen. SKont. 3lmme. 
 ©ee. SBo^en. Srei^eit. 9l(^tung. SriiBfal. Sede n. ©tbpfel. 
 SBaumc^en. S3iinbnt§. Srfparnip. 31 unb 93, S|re. ©ebult. 
 Somkcf. SSeforgnig. ©djidfal. 2Bac^i3t^um. SrIauBnig. WU 
 tel. 3inf. 25ic^. Jrubjal. ^enntnip. ©cf(^nta(f. ©eBtrgc. 
 33ergi6meinnic5f7~ 9Jlatn. Ser^Itntf. grcunblii^Ieit. ®efa:^r. 
 Srrt^um. 3tatt)feL Jpottunber. 
 
 * Let the pupil determine the gender of each noun. 
 
 f Xriiifcil, SBac^St^unt, Sefummcrnig, ScwanbtitB, empfangnt^, Srfenntnig, 
 ErfiMtni^, Scrbamnig, SerberiniB/ and Sferfftunmig are also neuter. 
 
82 GENDEE OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Gender of Compound Substantives, 
 
 Obs. IX. — Compound Substantives take the gender of their 
 last component* as : 
 
 MeaDinbmulle { ^"^Ts-"' S'".!' T?"^ •„ [ the windmill 
 ( and tte 9Ku|le, the mill 3 
 
 s. ^ nM i - c ( from lie Dtnte, the iat ) ,, „ • i,„,„„ j 
 fe«a mental { and iaS ga^/the cask ['^^^^^^^^- 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 a. The following words are feminine, although 
 their last component is masculine : 
 Mc 9tnmut:^, grace bie Songmut^, forbearance 
 
 Me 3lrmut^, poverty bic ©onftmut^, meekness 
 
 tie IDemuf^, humility tie ®^tDcrmut|, melancholy 
 
 tic ®ro^mut|, generosity tie aDe^muf^, sadness 
 
 Note. — Other words compounded with mut^ are rrMscrdine; 
 e. g., tn ^eijrmtl), haughtiness. 
 
 6. The following words also deviate from the 
 general rule : 
 btt 2lbf(^cu (tie ©d^eu), abhorrence 
 He ^tcunauge (ta3 Sluge), the lamprey 
 bie Slntmort (tag SJort), the answer 
 &o8 ©egent^cil "j ( the reverse 
 
 ia& ^interticil [• (ler3;^eil),t-j the hind part 
 boS SBortert^^ctl ) ' the fore part 
 
 Double Gender. 
 
 Obs. X. — ^The following nouns, written and pronounced alike, 
 
 change their signification with their gender : 
 feet Sant, the binding of a &aS SBant, the ribbon, bond 
 book or a volume 
 
 * In French the gender of compound nouns is determined by the^st 
 component, 
 -j* Sometimes also neuter. 
 
GENDEB OF SUBSTANTIVES. 83 
 
 bcrSattcr,the peasant, farmer -"feaS Saucr,* the cage 
 &cr Sunb, league, confederacy&aS SuttJ, the bundle 
 tier ®^or, the chorus &n§ S^or, the choir 
 
 fcct @rbe, the heir &a8 grBc, the inheritance 
 
 ^ ber @ei§el, the hostage .Mt ©eigel, the scourge 
 
 bcr §oft, the hold, clasp itc §aft, the custody 
 
 bcr Jparj, the Hercynian Mts. >&a§ ^arj, the rosin 
 feer §ett>c, the heathen ■- &te Jpcibc, the heath 
 
 fcct §ut, the hat bic ^ut, the heed, pasture 
 
 i^fccr liefer, the jaw iic liefer, the Scotch fir 
 
 1- bcr ^unbe, the customer ' bic ^unte, notice, inteUigenee 
 
 &C£ Setter, the conductor &ie Setter, the ladder 
 
 &er ilKattgel, (the) want &te iKanget, the mangle 
 
 &te SRart, the mark, boundary "' &oS 9Jlar!, the marrow 
 bet gjlafl, the mast (ship) btc 5JJaft, fattening of cattle 
 
 bet 9Kenf(^, the man bflS 5Kcttfd), the wench 
 
 bet SHeia, the rice %a.^ SRct3, the sprig 
 
 ^ZX ©i^itti, the shield bo§ ©c^tIt,thesign(of ahouse) 
 
 bet ©ee, the lake bie ®ec, the sea (ocean) 
 
 ^tx ©proffe, sprout, scion Vit ©projfe, step of a ladder 
 
 btc ©teuer, tax, contribution i/brtS ©tcuer, the helm 
 ^ZX ©ttft, the tag, peg, pencil bo§ ©tift, foundation, 
 bet a:^or, the fool bo8 I^or, the gate 
 
 itx Serbietijl, the earnings - i«i^ Serttenfl, the merit 
 
 ^ bie SSe^r,- the defence baS 2Be|r, the weir 
 
 Double Form in the Plural, 
 
 Obs. XI. — The following noims have a double form in the 
 plural with different significations (comp., brother ; 
 plurd, brothers and brethren, &c.) : 
 
 Svngvlair. Plural. 
 
 l)a« S«nb, ribbon, tie bie Siinbcr, ribbons Sonbc, ties (bonds) 
 
 bie SSanf, bank, bench bie Sfinfc, benches Santcn, banks 
 
 btt« ®e(ic6t, face , bie ®cftc^tcr, faces ®e|td^tc, visions 
 
 baa |)orn, horn bie Corner, homs ^otitc, kinds of horn 
 
 bcr Saben, shop _ bie Sabcn, shops Sabcit, shutters 
 
 * Saner, cage, is also masculine. 
 
84 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Singular. Plwal. 
 
 ^ ^ „ , , , , t. „.. t ^ . ( SanJie poitiml; Siinbe- 
 
 bai Sanb, land, country, Die Sonber» countnee j ^^^^^^ j^^^^^ 
 
 ber Straup, nosegay, bit Striiupcr. nosegays ©trau§r, ©traupcit, os- 
 
 battle, ostrich bie ©triiupc» battles triches 
 
 ba* ffiort, word bieSBortcri single words SSJortei coherent words 
 
 Note. — 'Bai 3ntere||e, the interest, concern, advantage, has in the 
 plural, bit Snteteifen meaning the interest of money. 
 
 Obs. XII. — The following nouns have a change of gender but 
 
 not of signification : * 
 ber or bie fdaij,\ the brook ber or bttS S^eil, the part, share 
 
 ber or bag Co^n, the reward, wages iai or ber Seug, the cloth, material, 
 bfr or baS Drt, the place trash 
 
 Obs. Xm. — The following nouns have a double form in tbo 
 plural, but without a change of signification : \ 
 ar. Plural. 
 
 ber S)ont, the thorn bie Somen* or Sijrnjr 
 
 u' ber (ba4) ®a«, the country bie ®auc or Oaueit 
 ^ ba8 ®c>»anb, the garment . bie ©etoiinber or ©cwanbe 
 
 ^ ber |)alm, the blade (of grass) bie |)alnie(n) or ^iilmcr 
 
 ba« ^emb, the shirt bie ^embcn or (vuig.) Member 
 
 baS Samifol, the waistcoat bie Samiftlc or Jtamirolcr 
 
 ba« Cic^t, light, candle bie Sii^tcr or Siiljte 
 
 bttS 9)Ju^(, the repast bie 'Slu^t or M&ijltt 
 
 ber ©porn, the sp-or bie ©ijorcn or ©pomcn 
 
 -■ ber ©trauc^, the bush bie ©triiuf^c or ©triiu^cr 
 
 bttS X^A the valley bie X^'iltx or S^olc 
 
 baa tai): the cloth bie !Euct)c or Silver 
 
 ber SEBurm, the worm bie SBiirme or SBiirmcr 
 
 - ba« 3elt, the tent bie Seltet (or 3eltt) 
 
 Formation of Feminine Appellations. 
 
 Obs. XIV. — Most feminine appellations are derived from the 
 corresponding masculine forms by adding in or inn in 
 the sing, and innenin the plural. If monosyllables, the 
 radical vov?els a, o, u, are generally modified in the plur. ; 
 e. g., Ttx ®ta\, the count, bie ©raftn'n), the countess, 
 pi. tie ®rafi.incn, the countesses (see p. 74, viii.) 
 
 * The first form is the most common, and is to be used in the themes. 
 
 ■f Authorities are greatly at variance respecting the limits of theso 
 words, some rejecting as incorrect one or the other form, others ascrib 
 ing to each a more or less distinct signification. 
 
GENDliK Oi' SUBSTAKTIVES. 85 
 
 ttx ©(filler, the pupO, scholar bie ©c^iilerin, the pupil 
 
 ter Snglantcr, the Englishman tie Snglantierin,theEnghsh lady 
 
 ber 9)ioler, the painter tic SJlalerin, the painter 
 
 in ^iinfiter, the artist bie ^iinftlcrin, the artist 
 
 Reading Exercise X. 
 
 "Lit Slcler unb bie Sijtcen ftnb S^tcre (animals). S;ie 5rtc i(l 
 runb (round). £ie Snglonbcrin ^at jiuci ©t^iilertnnen. 3ft bie 
 5la(^barin ber ©rafin eine TKalerin ? ^at tie ^bnigin einen !Eio* 
 manten? Mr 6a6crt einen Sater irnb eine 5JJutter. Tag Sanb ii* 
 rof^, ber Sanb ifl dt. ©er SBauer :^ot einen SBogel Im SBauer. S;cr 
 $eibe ifl auf ber Jpeibe. Der S^or iji mit etnfr Setter am (an bem) 
 2::^ore. "Lai Sdaui^en unb iai Srtnfen ^mi bem SWenfi^en fi^ftb* 
 lid), ©int 2le))fel an meinera SBaume? !Die ^Bc^in ^at glieber, 
 Silicn unb SSergipmeinnic^t. £)ie £)onou t^ cin glug. '!I;ie ^firfii^e 
 jtnb fe^r t^euer (dear) in bicfem Sanbe. gin 3ei^en :^at ber ^immel 
 (heaven) ntir (me) tter^eipen (promised). !I;ie g^re, bie Mitung 
 unb bie grcunbfi^aft. !Der (£r6e :^at fein (Svk noc^ nici>t er^alten. 
 @eBen ©ie tnir (me) boS ©(^5ne unb nti^t bag Jpiiglic^e. Ter ®e« 
 fi^mocf ber 9JJenfc^en iji sevfitieben (different). £;ie 2(rmut| ijl teinc 
 ©4anbe. Eie Sangntut^, bie ©ro^rnut^ unb bie SJemut^. 
 
 Theme X. 
 
 The cook of our countess is a neighbor of my sister. 
 That Russian lady has very large eyes. The bonds of 
 friendship. The sister of the painter (masc.) is an artist 
 (fem.). These ladies are French ladies. The sea and the 
 lake. Christianity teaches (Ie|rt) humihty, generosity, and 
 forbearance. The customer has a hat. The intelligence is 
 sad. Is that an inkstand? The fate of [thej kings and 
 queens is sometimes (oft) very sad. Affliction and sorrow are 
 the fate of man. Margaret has taken the ribbon. The cook 
 (fem.) has a little garden. The widow and the widower 
 are neighbors. Gain is the end of flattery. Have you the 
 sheet and the pillows ? This B is too (ju) large, that C is too 
 small. 
 
86 
 
 NOUNS GOVERNED BY PEEPOSITIONS. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 3'fl jene grou 3'§re T;ienerin ? 
 
 §at etn ^Bnig »icle (many) San* 
 
 icr? 
 ^afllu etn Sofen? 
 2Bem ^at Jcr Jpimmel etn Sci'^en 
 
 »er|cif en (promised) ? 
 3|l btc ©c^ijn^cit cine Slugeni 
 
 (virtue) ? 
 3jl to« JErinfcn gcfunb (healthy) ? 
 
 3jl bein SSntScr ouf ler ipclDe? 
 
 §at Ux Srtc fein Srbe er^^aftctt ? 
 3fl es eine ©cbattije arm ju 
 
 fetn? 
 (SinB ?)ftr|t(^c in tiefcm Sonbe 
 
 t^cuer ? 
 aScr |at bas ©c^Io^ ber ©raftn 
 
 getauft? 
 
 9?ein, tic grau iti Mo&iti ifl un* 
 
 fere 3)ienerln. 
 Sin ^aifer ^at me^r (more) Sfin* 
 
 ber,aU ein ^ottig. 
 3c^ ^oit tin Salen, abtv !ein ^iflcn. 
 £;cr §immel t)at bcr Sungfrau »on 
 
 Drlcan^ ein 3cicf)en »er|ei§en. 
 9tctn, akr bie @ro§tnut| iji cine 
 
 Sugcnb. 
 ®al 2:rinfen unb Sftauc^en ftnb un* 
 
 gcfunb. 
 9lein, aber bcr ^cibe iji Bei ttiei» 
 
 nent SBruber, 
 3a, cr er'^iclt ti im grit|ja'^r. 
 Sic I;cutfc6en fagen (say), „3lr* 
 
 ntut:^ ift !eine ©c^anbc." 
 SDie ?ifirrtd)e unb Slepfet finb :^ier 
 
 fe^r bittig (cheap). 
 Die ^bnigin :^at ti ge!auft, unb 
 
 bie Soiferin :^at jtBci ©c^lbfcr 
 
 »erfauft (sold). 
 
 LESSON XI. Scftion 11. 
 
 Nouns Governed by Prepositions (aScr^^BItni^wBrter). 
 
 Obs. I. — The cases of nouns, in German, are so frequently 
 governed by prepositions, that at least a part of 
 them should be learned early in the course. A com- 
 plete list of the prepositions, with the cases which 
 they govern, may be found ia Less. XLI. 
 
 Obb. n. — The prepositions may govern either the genitive, 
 dative, accusative, or both the dative and accusative. 
 
NOUNS GOVERNED BY PEEPOSITIONS. 87 
 
 1. PEEPOSmONS GOVEBNING THE GeNITIVB.* 
 
 toa^renb, during luegen, on account of 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 »a|renb &c8 ^rtegcS (war) wegen &cS. SRcgcnS (rain) 
 
 2. Pkepositions GovEENiNa THE Dative. 
 
 avii, out of, from fcit, since 
 
 ki, at, by (with), near »on, of,J from, by 
 
 Tttit, with 3U,t to, at 
 
 na(^,t after, to, according to gegeniiber, opposite to 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 am btm ®artm M feinem greunte 
 
 3. Prepositions Governing the AccnsATivB. 
 
 iurc^, through, by means of, by o'^ne, without 
 
 fitr,§ for wm, around, about, at 
 
 gcgen, against, towards JDticr, against 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 kurd^ itn SEaft) m unfcreu Setter. 
 
 Prepositions Governing the Dative or Accusative. 
 Obs. m. — The following nine prepositions require the dative 
 when the verb in the sentence implies rest or motion 
 in a place, answering to the question " Where ?" and 
 
 * The prepositions governing the genitive were originally nouns with 
 the genitive depending upon them. They do not occur so frequently as 
 the others. 
 
 t After verbs denoting direction, toward, jUi is generally used before 
 the name oi a, person, and noi^ before the name of a place or eountry, 
 as: ®r flcl^t ju bent ©oirtner; er ge^t nai^ bem Dorfe. 
 
 X Of, when denoting possession, is rendered by the genitive ; e. g., the 
 house of the gardener, boS ^mi llcS ®ttrtner0; but, when denoting re- 
 lation, must be expressed by the corresponding preposition ; e. g., I have 
 it of the gardener, ic^ ^ok c« tan bem ©itttner. 
 
 § %m is never a conjunction in German ; the word corresponding to 
 the English conjunction for is &CKJJ. 
 
88 
 
 NOUNS GOVEKNED BY PEEPOSITIONS. 
 
 the accusative, when it expresses a direction or mo- 
 tion from one place to another, answering to the ques- 
 tion "Whither?" 
 
 an, at, in, on, to 
 
 auf, on, upon 
 
 Winter, behind 
 
 in,* in, into 
 
 neben, by the side ofj near 
 
 itkr, over, above, across 
 unter, under, among 
 »or,* before, ago 
 jtt)if(!feen, between 
 
 Contraction of Prepositions witli the Definite Article. 
 
 Obs. IV. — Some of the prepositions are frequently contracted 
 with the last letter of the definite article into one 
 word. They are : 
 
 an bent 
 
 into am 
 
 an baa into anS 
 
 ki tern 
 
 " beittt 
 
 auf baa " aufS 
 
 in bent 
 
 « iJtt 
 
 burc^ bag " bur^S 
 
 son bem 
 
 " »o»tt 
 
 fur baa " fiirS 
 
 jubcm 
 
 " sunt 
 
 in baa " inS 
 
 juber 
 
 " m 
 
 «m baa " um§ 
 
 s>or iai 
 
 " »org 
 
 liber baa " iibcrS 
 
 Present Tense or the Verb Semen, TO LEABN. 
 
 Plural. 
 t»ir lernen, we learn 
 
 ik Icrnet, ) , 
 
 1.. . ' ^ you learn 
 
 ©te lernen, ) 
 
 ftc lernen, they learn 
 
 i6l Icme, I learn or am learning 
 
 bu lemfi, thou leamest 
 
 cr lernt, he learns 
 
 fie (ea) Icmt, she (it) learns 
 
 Obs. V. — The auxiliary verb to do, which in English accom- 
 panies the verb in negative and interrogative sen- 
 tences, is not expressed in German. 
 
 ic^ lobe ni(^t, I do not praise lobcn Sic, do you praise ? 
 
 * 3n and »ot, when denoting time, require the daiim; e.g., in eincm 
 3a$re; M)r einem SRonate. 
 
NOUNS GOVEENED BY PREPOSITIONS. 89 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 
 i(^ liege, I lie i^ !aufc, I buy 
 
 ic^ fu(|e, I seek, look for i(^ fomme, I come 
 
 ii^ ftrtbe, I find ii^ fc^reibe, I write 
 
 id) erwarte, I expect ic^ jlc^^e, I stand 
 
 ic^ gek, I give i6^ fliege, I fly 
 
 Reading Exercise XI. 
 
 SCa:^rent) iti ^ricges. 3i^ lointne ani kcm ipaufe. ^einric^ ifl 
 beim ©c^nciDer. Sr ge^t mit beinem Srubcr. S53ir f(^reiben an ten 
 SiJcifen beiner ©c^mefler. ©eit meiner 2lnlunft (arrival), .Sommt 
 cr Bon Sertin ? 3(^ ^o^e bc" 23rief »on tern ©rafen crl^alten. @ie 
 fuc^cn cin ^ini son Jrei 3i^ren. ^ommen ©ie ju meinem SBctter? 
 3fl tein greunt ju ^aufc ? SBegen tc3 Sdcgena. ®c^en ©ie tur(^ 
 ten SfCalB ? 3c^ fi«fe bag SBui^ fiir tneinen Dnfel. ©te^t cr gcgen 
 ble SBant) (waU) ? !Dtt fc^retbfl witier meinen SBittcn. Ter SPcgel 
 fliegt auf« l;ac^. 'Liv §unti fle^t am Senflcr. T:n finbefl tie 9Iic^te 
 im ®arten. ©uc^ji ku na^ ntetnem SSJleffer? 2)ie gifd)c lefcen im 
 SBaflfcr. ©te:^t ter 3:i|'(^ nekn fccr 3:pre ? !Dcr ©tu^I ficljt ne6cn 
 tern Dfcn. "Die Ma^t liegt unter bent Sette. ©uc^e (seek) tns Suc^ 
 unter bem 2:tf(^e. Scge (lay) bicfe SSiii^er auf ben ©ttt|I. 3ni Srte* 
 ben unb im ^riege. Sr fc^rcibt an feincn Setter. 
 
 Theme XI. 
 
 During the rain. On account of the war. Out of the gar- 
 den. Near the house. I write with the pen of my brother. 
 The oxen butt (ftopen) with their horns (Jpbrner). The boys 
 come after their father. The pupils come from the school. My 
 sister buys of (Son) this man. He goes to the gardener. Those 
 boys go through the woods. This hat is for my little son 
 (©ij|nc^en). The table stands against the wall (SJanb, fern.). 
 We do auot icxpect jyou without money. You go against my 
 will. John stands at the window. The books lie on (upon) 
 the table. Put (lege) this hat upon the bed. The eagle flies 
 
90 
 
 NODNS G-OVBENED BY PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 across the sea. Go (®c|en ®le) into the garden. The chair 
 stands between the door and the window. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 9Bo |lc|t ber Sifc^ ? 
 
 3P tein Sruter In meinem Dn!el ? 
 3(i tetn greunb ju Jpaufe ? 
 2Co^er (whence) {ommen ©ic ? 
 ©i^t tier SSogcI auf Dcm SJai^e ? 
 SBo^in (whither) flicgeti bie SSB* 
 
 gel tm SBintcr ? 
 SBo "^aten ®ic bicje Slumcn ge* 
 
 funien ? 
 S5o :^at So^ann btcfen ©todt ges 
 
 fauft ? 
 SBo'^trt ge^en <Sic ? 
 giir wen (whom) (Int) tiefc Sil« 
 
 ber? 
 SSon tuem (whom) ^a(l bu ktefe^ 
 
 JpauS getawft ? 
 ©dbrciBcn ©ie an 3'^rcn Sruber ? 
 3fl bcln Setter aBgereifl ? 
 SSBo^in ^akn ©ie meln JEofc^en* 
 
 tu(^ getegt (placed, put) ? 
 ^afcen ©ie metnen Srief gefiern 
 
 (yesterday) cr|alten? 
 ©ud^en ©ie 3^1^ 2:afc^entucfe ? 
 aSiffen (know) ©ic,mo eg ifl? 
 SBotlen ©ie cin reinea (clean) 
 
 Saf^entuc^ ^a6en ? 
 
 ©te^t tttcin Zx\6i netcn ber S^iire ? 
 
 Ser 2:i|'c^ fte^^t gwifd^en bcm Dfen 
 
 unb Her 3:|iire. 
 Stein, cr ijl in faxis. 
 Stein, er ifl in ber ©c^ulc. 
 3i^ tommc Bom SKorftc. 
 S)er 33ogel ft^t auf bent Da^e. 
 ©ie fliegen libcrg Wlm. 
 
 3(^ ^abc fie auf bent gelbc gcfun* 
 
 ben. 
 3o^ann 'iiat biefen ©tod son bent 
 
 Sif^ler gefauft. 
 SBir ge'^en im Sweater, 
 ©ie fmb ftir bag fOtSbc^cn nteincr 
 
 SfJi^te. 
 3(^ ^abi ei »ott bent Steffen beg 
 
 Jpcrrn ©alomon getauft. 
 Stein, i^ fi^rcibe an meine 9)tittter. 
 Stein, cr ifl ju §aufc. 
 ^6:1 :^a6e eg auf bag genfler gelegt. 
 
 Stein, ic^ |aBe S^ren Srief erfl 
 
 (only) leute er^alten. 
 Stein, i&i fuc^e ntein gebcmtefTer. 
 Stein, i&i ^h eg nic^t gcfc:^en. 
 SJenn ©ie ein rcineg Safc^entud) 
 
 :^aBert, Mttc, gcBen ©ie ntir (me) 
 
 clng (one). 
 Stein, 3^r Z^^ fle^t »or bent 
 
 Sender. 
 
THE AUXILIABY VKBB ^dittl , 91 
 
 LESSON Xn. Scftton 12. 
 
 The Auxiliary Verb (§iilf8jcitttort) ^abcn, 
 
 Obs. I. — There are in German three auxiliary verbs of tense : 
 ^ahin, to have ; feitt, to be ; Wert en, to become. 
 They may also be used as principal verbs. §akn, 
 when employed as a principal verb, is transitive, 
 and expresses possession (to have). As an auxiliary 
 it serves for the formation of the perfect, pluperfect, 
 and second future in the active voice. 
 
 Conjugation of the Atjxiliaby Veeb S^ahtn, TO HAYE. 
 Principal Parts: ^abtn, l^atte, Qti^abt. 
 
 INFINITIVE. PAKTICrPLES. 
 
 Present. Jpafecn, to have Present, ^altni, having 
 
 Past. ©e^aBt ^aBen, to have had Pas^. ©el^aW, had 
 
 IMPERATIVE* 
 
 §o6e (lu), have (thou) ^aht or '^aBett <Bit, have (you) 
 
 INDICATIVE. StrejUNOErVB. 
 
 Present. 
 
 t(^ i)ait, I have ic^ '^ah, (if) I have 
 
 tu ^ajl, thou hast tu '^abefl, thou have 
 
 er (jte, c«) |at, he (she, it) has er (fte, ei) ^abe, he (she, it) have 
 
 tt)ir laBen, we have tuir l)aben, we have 
 
 i^r 1^abt, ) , i:^r l)aht, ) 
 
 m t)aben,t \ ^^^ ^^^^ ©ie ^akn, } ^^^ ^^^« 
 
 |te ^o6en, they have fic |aben, they have 
 
 ' Since a direct request, command, exhortation, advice, warning or 
 prohibition can be addressed only to the person spoken to, there can be 
 only one person for each number in the imperative. When referring to 
 a third person it is expressed by periphrasis with the auxiliary verb 
 foUtn, shall ; as : cr foH orbcitCili he shall work, etc. In an admonitory 
 or hortative sentence, the auxiliary verb of mode, laff Clt, to let, is em- 
 ployed ; as : loffct UltS lefeii, let us read. See § 78, Note. 
 
 f In German there are two modes of addressing a person, till and ©je. 
 
92 THE AUXILIABY VERB ^aBeit. 
 
 INDICATIVB. 8CBJCNCTITB. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 i^ ^atte, I had ^ ^iittc, (if) I had 
 
 tu :^attcji, thou hadst tu ^attc^, thou had 
 
 cr latte, he had er %htt, he had 
 
 roir fatten, we had ttir l^dttcn, we had 
 
 (ic 'fatten, they had fie patten, they had 
 
 The Oompoiind Tenses. 
 
 Obs. n. — The compound tenses are formed in German nearly 
 as in English. In the pebfect the past participle of 
 the principal verb is preceded by the present, and 
 in the pltjpebfect by the imperfect of \f<i\>tn (some- 
 times fcitt). The FiiiST fctdke and first condi- 
 tional are formed by combining the infinitive of a 
 principal verb with the auxiliary ttierben (see 
 Lesson XIV., p. 103,Hke shall and should in EngHsh). 
 In the second future and second conditional the 
 past participle of the principal verb is inserted be- 
 tween the auxiliary Wet^en and the infinitive of 
 l^aben (sometimes fetn). 
 
 INDICATIVB. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 {&! ^(At gc|a6t, I have had Ic^ '^aie ge'^oit, (if) I have had 
 
 titt ^afl ge^aBt, thou hast had bu laBc^ ^t^alt, thou have had 
 
 cr lot ge^W, he has had cr |o6c gelaH, he have had 
 
 relr |a6cn gc|a6t, we have had ttir |aicn ge^afct, we have had 
 
 i^r^aMgclaM, lyo^iiavehad ^^'^ ^"*'* Sc^al't, I you tave 
 ©ie '^abcn gc:|a6t, ) "^ ©ie '^o6en gc'^aH, J had 
 
 ftc |a6en gc'^abt, they have had fie |a6en gc'^aW, they have had 
 
 The former is used between near relations, intimate friends, and in 
 speaking to servants ; the latter is the polite mode of address, and is used 
 particularly with strangers and superiors. See Less. XXII., Obs. II. 
 
THE AUXILIARY YKKB ^ahiU. 
 
 93 
 
 HTDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJTJITCTIVE. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 i(S I)attc gc^Bt, I tad had ic^ ^tte ge^aW,* (if) I had had 
 
 tu ^ttcft ge^aBt, thou hadst had bu tiiitteji ge^abt, thou had had 
 er :^atte ge^abt, he had had cr ^tti ge^att, he had had 
 
 tt)ir I)atten ge^att, we had had tt)ir gotten ge^afet, we had had 
 
 ©ie I)atten ge^abt, } ^^^ ^^"^ ^^^.©ie fatten ge^afct, [ yo^^^adhad 
 fte fatten ge^aM, they had had fte fatten ge^oM, they had had 
 
 First Future. 
 
 ic^ merbc ^abcn, I shall have 
 tu luirjl laBen, thou wilt haye 
 er tBtrt |okn, he will have . 
 mix tBcrben ^akn, we shall have 
 i^r werbet iaBen, ) 
 
 fie tucrben |a6en, they vrill have 
 
 i(^ wcrbe ^a6en, (if) I shall have 
 bu toerbefi ^akn, thou wilt have 
 er iBcrbe '^akn, he will have 
 inir werien |a6en, we shall have 
 i^r wcrbet |akn, ) you will 
 ®tc tccrbcn |akn, J have 
 fte werben Minn, they wUl have 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 i&i toerbe 
 bu mirjl 
 cr trirb 
 tplr wcrDcn 
 t|r weriet 
 Sie werben 
 |ie roerben 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he wiU 
 we shall 
 
 , I you wiU 
 they wiU 
 
 t(| werbe 
 bu tuerbeji 
 '^ er tuerbe 
 a, tuir ttjerben 
 S i'^r reerbet 
 ©ic werben 
 fie werbcti 
 
 (if) I shaUv 
 j^ thou wilt 
 >2 he will 
 '^ we shall 
 
 'S" I you will 
 
 they will 
 
 i 
 ,4 
 
 JYraf Conditional. 
 
 ic^ Wiirbe ^afcett or t4 ^(itte, I should have 
 
 bu tBurbcfl |oktt or bu liittejl, thou wouldst have 
 
 er miirbe ^akn or er |dtte, he would have 
 
 tDir tBiirbcn iotcn or wir ptten, we should have 
 
 i'^r wxirbct '^<Atn or t|r l^iittet, you would have 
 
 fie iBurben '^c&in or fte ptten, they would have 
 
 * This form is used after toenn, if, as : If I had, tnenit il^ ^tiHt ; 
 
 If I had had, menit i^ ge^ubt ptte (the auxiliary is then placed at 
 
 the end of the sentence). 
 
94 THE AUXILIAEY VEEB ^ tt 16 C tt. 
 
 Second Conditional. 
 i(| wurbc gc^ait Mm or ic6 ^iitte getjott, I should have had 
 bu murtcfl ge^afit ^aiett or t>u |otte(l gc^abt, 
 er wiirte ge^oM |aben or er l^iitte gc^aM, 
 wir wtoen ge'^aW ^akn, tc. or t»ir pttcn ge|a6t, etc. 
 
 German Construction. 
 Obs. in. — ^In simple or principal sentences the order of words 
 is : 1. the subject, 2: the predicate, 3. the object 
 (Dat. or Accus.), 4. the adverbial indication. 
 
 Ex.— 9Rein Dntel (1) ^ot (2) ctn ^axti (3) in Setlin (i), my 
 uncle has a house in Berlin. 
 
 Obs. rV. — ^But when the leading verb is in a compound tense 
 the auxiliary holds the place of the predicate and the 
 participle or infinitive stands hst in the sentence. 
 
 Ex. — 5Wein Dntel ifat tin ^mi in Settin gefauft, my uncle ?ias 
 bought a house in Berlin. 
 
 Note. — If both the past participle and the infinitive occur, 
 the infinitive is put last, e. g., 3i% Wiirbe cinen |)ut ge{auft §0= 
 belt) I should heme bought a, hat. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1. When there are two objects in a sentence that of the person gener- 
 ally precedes that of the thing (p. 474, 5, 6, and exceptions,) e. g., £r ^ttt 
 feiner ©c^tBejlet* biefc3 ^mi gelauft/ he has bought his sister this house. 
 
 3. Adverbs of time precede the object (if not a personal pronoun, 
 comp. p. 475, 8, 9), e. g., ®£r 3«S£r ^"^ 6tute tinen liafen ^iet gefi^cffcn, the 
 hunter has shot a hare here to-day. 
 
 3. The Adverb of negation nil^t is placed after the direct object (for 
 exceptions see p. 476), and precedes all other adverbs except those of time 
 (see Exc. 3) ; e. g., iiaben ©ie i^ren Dnfel ^cutc nilftt auf ber g)ofl gefc^cn, 
 have you not seen your uncle at the post-office to-day ? 
 
 4. The verb must precede the subject when an adverbial expression 
 (§. 109.) begins the sentence ; e. g., Oejletn jatc i^ (not id) |a6e) ba« S8«(^ 
 gctauft, yesterday I bought the book. 
 
 5. The subordinative conjunctions (see p. 333) bag, that, and hienn, if, 
 when beginning a subordinate clause require the verbs to stand last (in 
 the clause) ; e. g., 3^ Wflvbe eincn SBagen gefauft })aien, tncnn t^ ®clt) ge^abt 
 ^dttCi I should have bought a wagon, if 1 had had the money. 
 
 Note. — SBenn, and bap, govern generally the subjunciive (see § 69 — 77). 
 
 * Notice that the indirect (personal) object is in the Dative (oomp. 
 §18). 
 
THE AUXILIAEY VEEB 1^ 6 C Jt. 95 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 itv SBagen, the wagon fjiielen, to play 
 
 Jer gremBc, the stranger Bcrtauft, sold 
 
 morgen, to-morrow Heikn, to remain, to stay 
 
 ge^en, to go Iet|ctt, to lend 
 
 Reading Exercise XII. 
 
 3(^ |a6e eittctt 3Cagcn. §afl ku eincn Dnfcl? gr ^tte jwci 
 greunbe. 3Bir ^aim cinen ®axtm Qi^ait. JpaBt ifcr cine W^t ge* 
 |o6t? ©ie fatten »iel ®el5 ge^aBt. ©ie werben Srob unb gleifi^ 
 taufen. 2Ctrb er noc^ Scrim ge^cn ? §at bcr ©olbat ben i«oct tea 
 ©cncrols ge:^att? ©te |akn geftcrn meinen megenfc^irm ge:§aM. 
 SBap l^abm bic Staliener ge^oBt ? Caroline mirb ein 5)aar ©triimpfc 
 ^aien. SDerben ®te tnorgcn au §aufc Heifcen ? Mr werben 5Kitt* 
 rcoc^ nai^ 9)arl3 ge'^en. !Eer grembe ^atte ben §ut bciS SSui^'^anblers. 
 3(!^ '§a6e cinen ginger^ut gel^oM, akr ic^ ^abc i^n (it) Dcrloren. 
 SJJcinc Jante |flttc atuet §a«fcr Bcrlauft. 3(^ witrbe ein ^fcrb '^aBen, 
 toenn xd^i ®e(b ^iittc.* SRctnc Jtlnbcr toiirbcn ©pieljeug (play-things) 
 :§aBen, wcnn |te fpielten. ®ic murben nic^t 3eit lahn. 2Ciirbefl in 
 aBein obcr SBaffcr gc^att l^atcn ? 
 
 Theme XII. 
 
 Have I a friend? Thou hadst a house. He had no money. 
 Had we not read (gclefcn) it? We shall have much pleasure 
 in (ouf) the country (Sanb). Tou would have a garden, if 
 you had bought that house. They will have much money. 
 The boys had had two dogs, but they have sold them (jic). 
 Shall we not have ink and paper ? Who has had my um^ 
 brella to-day? If they had a horse and a wagon. We 
 have two lions and a cow, you had a sheep, and John has 
 had many (»iele) oxen. Will he go to (noc^) Berlin to-day? 
 
 * After werat, the verb is placed at the end of its clause 
 
96 
 
 THE AUXILIAKY VERB '^ tt 6 C tt . 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 §aktt ©ie cincn SJagen ? 
 
 ^at ber Saucr tas Zu&i geJauft? 
 
 ^a(l i)u etn ^aax ^onbfc^u'^e gc* 
 
 funben? 
 fatten tic (SItern jcneS ^inbea 
 
 aSerben ©te Sutter unb ^a\t 
 
 laBcn ? 
 SBtoen wtr Scrgnitgen auf bem 
 
 Sanbc ge'^att ^akn? 
 SBcrben wlr SRegcn |a6ctt ? 
 
 ^ait t^r ^eit, wit mir (me) nai^ 
 
 Scrltn ju gc'^en? 
 SBiirbejl bu cin ^Jfcrb laufen, wcnn 
 
 buSelblottcjl:? 
 fBiirbcit ©ic mir ^l^nn (your) 
 
 SDagen let^cn, wenrt @te i^tt 
 
 (it) ^ier :§atten? 
 IBiirbcfl bu ®elb ^akn, tucnn bctn 
 
 Sater ju Jpaufe ware (were) ? 
 SSiirben ^e fro'^ fein, wenn |te ta3 
 
 ©pieljeug fatten ? 
 SSiirbcn ©ie 2Bein trinlen, ittetm 
 
 ©ic wclc^en (scire) ^Sltcn ? 
 SBerbcn ©ie ein 5)ferb, ober cinen 
 
 3Bagenfaufen? 
 §akn ©ie geflern' (yesterday) 
 
 meinen Stegeufd^irm gc'^ait ? 
 SBarum Bleiben ©ic nii^t l^cute Bel 
 
 uno? 
 SBerben ©ie t)cutc Sflai^mtttag 
 
 (afternoon) ju $aufe Heiben? 
 
 2Cir latten einen 3Bagett. 
 9iicin, ber ©o:^n 3^rc3 ^lad^haxi 
 
 toirb ti faufen. 
 9lcin, aberi^ ^abi ein faax^atCHf 
 
 fc^u'^e scrloren. 
 5Wein, |te gotten !ein ©cltj fic mareti 
 
 fe:§r arm, abcr |'el}r e|rli^. 
 3i^ fcrbe Sutter unb Srob, aBer 
 
 teincn ^afc t)a6en. 
 3^r miirtet Btcl SSergniigcit auf 
 
 bem Sanle ge^aM |aBcn. 
 9Jfln, ti tutrb t)eute nic^t regnen 
 
 (rain). 
 9Cir ^abcn |eute Mnc S^tt, »ir 
 
 werben morgen gc^en. 
 9letn, ic^ tuiirbe cinen Jpafen unb 
 
 jiDct Deafen faufen. 
 3c^ miirbe i^n (it) 3^ncu (you) 
 
 mit Sergnitgcn lei^en. 
 
 3c^ wiirbe uicrOcIb 'i^aUn. 
 
 ©Ic iriirben nie tuicber (never 
 
 again) betrubt fein. 
 3c^ roiirbe nur (only) UBaffer 
 
 trinfen. 
 3d§ ttterbe cinen 2Sagcn unb jwct 
 
 |>ferbe faufen. 
 9lein, gejtcrn ^at meinc ©d^rocjlcr 
 
 3|rcn SRcgcnfi^irm ge^abt. 
 3c^ |a6c fcinc 3cit, ic^ ntup in btc 
 
 ©(^ule ge'^cn. 
 Sflcin, ic^ wcrbe '^eute Slac^inittag 
 
 in ba« 2:^cater ge|cn. 
 
THE AUXILIAEY VEEB f C i 11 . 97 
 
 LESSON Xm. Scftiott 13. 
 
 The Auxiliary Verb @cin. 
 
 Obs. L — @ein, the second auxiliary Terb, serves for the 
 formation of the perfect, pluperfect, second future, 
 and second conditional, in some neuter verbs, and 
 for the formation of the same tenses in the passive. 
 "When not employed as an auxihary, @ein is an 
 intransitive verb, and expresses existence {to he). 
 
 Conjugation op the Auxiliaey Vekb @ctn,* TO BE. 
 
 Principal Parts: Pres. ®ein, Imperf. Wat, Past Partic. 
 
 getvefen. 
 
 nsTFUfiTrvB. participles. 
 
 Present, ©eiti, to be Present. @etcttb,t being 
 
 Past, getuefcn fein, to have been Past, gewefcn,! been 
 
 mPBRATIVB. . 
 
 ©ct, be (thou) ©eis or fcien ®te, be (you) 
 
 nSTDICATIVH. SUBJUNCTIVB. 
 
 Present. 
 
 i(^ Mn,§ I am i(| fet, (If) I be 
 
 tu iifl, thou art tu feiejl, thou be 
 
 er (fie, ti) ifl, he (she, it) is cr (|le, ca) fet, he (she, it) be 
 
 tolr fiitb, -we are irir feicit, we be 
 
 i^rfctt, I ilrfeiet, 1 
 
 ©ie rmb, [ y°^ ^^« ©iefcien, |y°'^^^ 
 
 fie jtnt, they are fte fclen, they be 
 
 * Some authors spell fein = fe9lt» to prevent mistaking the verb for 
 the pronoun fein, his. 
 
 + The present participle feicnb is hardly ever used. Being at the 
 mndaw (French, etant a lafenetre), must be constructed in German, As 
 I am, etc ; or, if it relates to the past. As I was, and must be rendered 
 by one of the following conjunctions, ba, aU, Wit or inbem. 
 
 i Oewefctt is undoubtedly related to SBe{en> Thus, the Perfect, IJime 
 been, is in German, 3<fi Sin gcluefcn. Here the German differs fix)m the 
 French and English, but agrees with the Italian, which has SoNO sta- 
 TO, lam been, instead of j'ai Ui, or I home been. 
 
 § The English-speaking student will notice the marked resemblance 
 
98 THE AUXILIARY VEBB fcin. 
 
 INDICATIVB. STJBJDNCTIVB. 
 
 ic^ mar,* I was 
 
 tM luarjl, thou wast 
 
 er wax, he was 
 
 mir waren, we were 
 
 t|r waret, 1 
 
 ©ie waren, } ^^^ ^«^« 
 
 fte warcn, they were 
 
 id^ »arc,t (if) I were 
 iu IBorcfl, thou wert 
 cr w'axt, he were 
 wir wiiren, we were 
 i^r roiirct, l 
 @ie waren, } ^^^^ ^^'^^ 
 fie iBdren, they were 
 
 ill Un gctBcfen, I have been 
 tu Mjl gewefen, thou hast been 
 cr ijl getcefen, he has been 
 Wir |tn5 geiuefcn, we have been 
 i|r fctt> gewcfen, ) you have 
 <Bit fittt gcmefctt, j been 
 fie fJnt gewefen, they have 
 been 
 
 ic^ fct gctoefcn, (if) I have been 
 bu fetefl getucfen, thou have been 
 cr fci gciDcfen, he have been 
 tctr fcicn gewcfen, we have been 
 i|r feict gcwcfen, ) you have 
 ©ic fetcn gcwcfcn, j been 
 |tc fcicn gcwefen, they have 
 been 
 
 of the singular of the present indicative of ftiiij to the present subjunc- 
 tive of TO BE. I be = lit bin ! both in some parts of this country and in 
 England, the form I be is corruptly used for lam. Comp. Eng. : " We 
 be true men." — Bible. " If thou beest he." — Milton. 
 
 * The imperfect indicative of fcin and of to be seems in both lan- 
 guages to be derived from some other ancient Teutonic verb, perhaps 
 wcfen, which is stUl used in Low German, and of which we have retained 
 the verbal noun, l)a$ SScfCHf the being, the thing in existence, some- 
 times also used in the sense of manner, rather the French, maniire 
 d'etre. — BorLEAU. 
 
 f A strong resemblance of the English verb to be to the German fetn, 
 is seen in the imperfect subjunctive (pax), to'ixt = were (was), where the 
 two languages agree in sound. The conditional conjunction, which ia 
 usual in English, may be omitted in German ; e. g., Strteitete er mejr, 
 worked he more. 
 
THE AUXILIARY VEEB fcilt. 99 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 ic^ war gctuefcn, I had been 
 tu iBarfl gctBC|'cn,thou hadst been 
 cr war geioefcn, he had been 
 wir waren gcwefcn, we had been 
 t6r warct gcttefen, ] you had 
 ®ic ttarcrt gcwcfen, j been 
 ftc roorcn gcwefcn, they had been 
 
 Mrst 
 {&i werbc fctn, I shall be 
 tu i»ir^ fetn, thou wilt be 
 cr tolrt fein, he will be 
 t»lr tcertcn fein, we shall be 
 iSr wertet fctn, 1 .„ , 
 
 ©iemcrbcnfetn, }y°^*^^« 
 -jic iBcrten fctn, they will be 
 
 ic^ toarc gctuefcn, (if) I bad been* 
 bu »arcftgciDCfen,thouhadstbeen 
 cr tBiirc gewcfen, he had been 
 tuir wiiren gcwcfcn, we had been 
 i^r tuarct geiBcfcn, \ you had 
 ®te roarctt gcwcfcn, J been 
 f{c ioaren gctuefcn, they had been 
 
 Fuiure. 
 
 x&i wcrle fein, (if) I shall be 
 bu tucrSejl fein, thou wilt be 
 cr werte fein, he will be 
 tulr wcrien fein, we shall be 
 ik tucrbct fctn, ) 
 ©tctucrtcnfctn,[ 7°" ^^ ^e 
 fie tuerben fctn, they will be 
 
 Second Mitv/re. 
 
 ic^ tucrbe 
 bu mirjl 
 er tutrb 
 tttr locrbcn 
 i^r luerbet 
 ©tc werben 
 [te wcrben 
 
 IshaU 
 , jj- thou wilt 
 
 he wiU 
 1^ we shall 
 
 ' , t you wlU 
 they will 
 
 x&i mitt 
 . bu werbejl 
 !%vc werbc 
 )-^ lutr werben 
 I i^r werbet 
 •^ ®ie werben 
 fie tucrben 
 
 (if) I shall^ 
 ■ thou wilt 
 he win 
 > ^ we shall 
 
 3 j. you wUl 
 they wUl 
 
 ic^ Wtirbc fctn 
 bu wiirbcfl fctn 
 er wtoe fein 
 wir wiirJen fctn 
 i|r wiirbet fctn 1 
 ©tc witrben fein J 
 fte wiirben fetn 
 
 or 
 or 
 or 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 i&i wiire, I should be 
 bu warefl, thou wouldst be 
 er ware, he would be 
 Wtr waren, we should be 
 i^r waret, ) „ , 
 
 ©tc waren, }y°^^°^*^« 
 fte wiiren, they would be 
 
 * If I had been, totnn i^ 
 
 sewefen tofire. 
 
100 
 
 THE iDXILIAEY VERB fcltt. 
 
 16) wiirbc gcwefen fcin 
 bu wtoefl gemcfen fcin 
 cr tDurSc gcwefcn fein 
 »ir witrtcn gctccfen fein 
 i|r tuiirbet gctucfcn fcin ) 
 ©ie JBiirbcn gewcfen fein j 
 fic wiirben gcwefen fein 
 
 Second Conditional. 
 
 or ic^ ware gctuefcn, I sliould 
 or bu tt)drc(i gcroefen, thou wouldst ' 
 or er wiire gcrocfen, he would 
 or wir todrcn gewcfen, we should 
 i^r te'dttt gewefcn, 
 
 or 
 
 i^r worn geweicn, l ,, 
 
 ®ic»arcngewcfcn,}y°^^°°l*^ 
 jte tudren gcwcfcn, they would 
 
 Obs. n. — 27iere is, are, was, were, etc., when expressing a 
 definite existence, or when a circumscribed distinct 
 place or space is added, are translated by cS and 
 the verb fcin, and the Predicate noun is put in 
 the nominative; e.g., ®S tft ettl SWotttt int ^aufe, 
 there is a man in the house ; ®S toarcn JWCt 
 (Stubenten im Sonccrt, there were two students at 
 the concert ; when, however, we wish to express 
 an indefinite existence, no distinct place being men- 
 tioned, use eS and the verb geBen with its appro- 
 priate case (accusative) ; e. g., @8 giebt QUtc unh 
 fc^lec^te Sente, there are good and bad people. 
 See page 312, Obs. H. 
 
 Note 1. — lam to is translated, i^ foU or mup; as: lam to 
 study medicine, i^ foU SDlebicin jlubiren. 
 
 Note 2. — To be rigid is translated SRec^t Ifabcn, and to he 
 wrong, Unrcdjt ^aben ; as, 1 am right, iii^ |alie Sttijt, you are 
 wrong, ©ie |alicn Unrei^t. 
 
 VOCABULABT. 
 
 iai Slcc^t, the right 
 baS J^cflter, the theater 
 ber ©i^ncibcr, the tailor 
 bic ©d^ulc, the school 
 ber Sail, the baU 
 
 gtiicflic^, happy 
 oufmerffam, attentive 
 jufrieben, contented 
 artlg, good, pretty 
 loflid^, polite 
 
THE AUSILIABY VEiSB j C i It . 101 
 
 Me Statt, the city ieriilmt, celebrated 
 
 ber Slbenb, the evening t-i»iinf(^en«locrt^, desirable 
 
 bcr ^orpcr, the body " topfer, brave 
 
 itv ^ad^mittaQi the afternoon '■ trage, lazy 
 
 tie Bffluitg, the fortress flc'^tg, diligent, industrious 
 
 ber ^amcraJ, the comrade Irant, sick 
 ter Wtttdi, (the) bravery, cour- fc^lci^t, bad 
 
 age gern, gladly 
 
 Reading Exercise XIII. 
 
 3(| Wn «rm. Slfl bu unglMi^ ? Sr iji trSge unb unaufmcrt* 
 fam. <Sie ijl fletptg unb aufmertfam. S93ir ftnb glMti^ unb jufrics 
 ben. SSBarfl bu gejlem in ber ^irc^e ? 3c^ war am SJlontag tm Sweater. 
 SCtr wcrben am SJltttwoc^ ju Jpaufe fein. ©ie werben e8 nic^t gc|abt 
 |obcn. Sr wirb es nlc^t gewefen fein. SReic^ unb fc^Bn gu* fein iji 
 wiinfi^enStocrt^. 3^ 'oc^ ©iener beim (at) ©(i^neibcr gewefen ? iEie 
 ©c^iilerin ijl in ber ©c^ule gewefen. 2Bir finb auf bem Satle gc»e= 
 fen. 3^r feib ni^t fleif ig unb aufmertfam gewefen. ®iirbe cr jufrie* 
 ben fein, wenn er xti6^ wire ? ©elb flei^ig, meine ©d^iiler. @el 
 aufmerffam unb artig, mein ©Blni^en. SBaren ©ic traurig gewefen ? 
 3|r SSruber iji in4 Soncert gegangen (gone), ©eine ©rogmutter ifi 
 nic^t fe^r alt gcwefcn. 3br Dnfel '^at Sdec^t, ber Setter ^ot Unrec^t. 
 Oeflern ware i^ gem in 3)ot«bam gewefen. SBaren siele (many) 
 Seute in ber ©tabt ? 3(^ voixxit in granlfurt getuefcn fein, wcnn ii^ 
 3eit ge^abt ^attc. S3 maren jmel Scanner ^ier, jie werben morgen 
 tBieber bmmen (come again). 9Jlcine ©ij^ne tciirben ausge^cn 
 (go out), wcnn fie nii^t tran! waren. 3(^ bin in 23erltn, ber Jpaupt* 
 jlobt 5)reugen3, genjefen. SBlr fmc in ber ©tabt unb gcftung ^bln 
 gewefen. Du bifl in ber ©c^ule mein ^amerab gewefen. 3|r feib 
 ©olbaten gewefen; feib tapfer! 3<^ war w 2Bien, ber ^auptftatt 
 Deji(er)reid^«, gewefen. 35Blr wiirben feine greunbe gewefen fein. ^abt 
 guten 9Kut^. 
 
 * In Gtermaji the intaitive follows its predicate. 
 
102 
 
 THE ATJXILIAKY VERB f C i tt , 
 
 Theme XIII. 
 
 Thou art happy, I am unhappy. He is diligent, she is 
 lazy. Are we not attentive and polite ? Tou were attentive, 
 but not industrious. He was at home yesterday. Will you 
 be at home to-morrow ? We shaU be at (in) church to- 
 morrow. His brother Frederic has been at (in) London, but 
 he has not been at Berlin. Be contented, and you will be 
 happy. I should be happy, if I were rich. Had you been 
 at the theater? They had been at the concert. Has the 
 merchant been at (auf) the ball ? Would you go into (auf) 
 the country (Sant), neut.), if the weather were not so bad? 
 The strangers (grcmben) would not have been so thirsty 
 (turfitg). 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 ©cit i|r gIiicKi(^ ? 
 
 ©int ©ic im Soncert gctccfcn ? 
 
 2&) hjaren beine ©c^toejlern gcs 
 pern 3lknt ? 
 
 Sifl tu idion (already) in Scrlin 
 
 getoefen ? 
 3ft ter S;icncr kirn ©^neiter 
 
 gcmefcn ? 
 SJiirte bein Dnlcl gludUc^ fein, 
 
 wenn er rei(^ mxt ? 
 
 SBaren jte traurig gewefcn ? 
 
 ©ie 
 
 ®o|tn (whither) merben 
 
 morgen Slbent gc^cn ? 
 SBk lange (how long) war er tn 
 
 SJmcrita gewefen? 
 Iffianim (why) ifl er traurig 
 
 gewefen ? 
 
 Sflein, wir ftnb fc'^r ungliiffi^. 
 3^ Hn im Soncert wnb im Z^tos 
 
 ter gewefen. 
 SKetne ©d^wefler Suife war in bcr 
 
 ^irc^e unb gUfabct^ njor ju 
 
 ipaufe. 
 3a, i^ Mn fd)on oft (often) in 
 
 SBcrlin gemefen. 
 9iJein, er ifl nod) ni^t bort (there) 
 
 geioefen. 
 ?!Jlein Dnfel ijl nle (never) nm 
 
 gtiidtii^ unb unjufriebcn gc* 
 
 wefen. 
 ©ic toaren ungufrieben, akr nidst 
 
 trourig getucfen. 
 2Bir rocrben ina a::|eotcr ober im 
 
 Sonccrt ge^tt. 
 Sr mar nur sler SJlonate in 3lme« 
 
 rifa getocfcn. 
 Sr l§atte feine ©telle (position) 
 
 serloren. 
 
THE AUXILIARY VERB » C 1 1 C tt . 
 
 103 
 
 3fl ber 5«enfc^ jlerMic^ ? 
 
 SBaren fiitU (many) Seute in ier 
 
 ©talt? 
 SBer (who) t^atk SRcc^t Qi^aU ? 
 
 ©inti ®ie in ^Btn gcwefen, ntein 
 
 §crr? 
 §a6cn ®ie tien £ijtncr Dom 
 
 (cathedral) gcfc^en? 
 §aji tu biefen 9la(i^mittag cine 
 
 Seftion gei^aM ? 
 ©tnb ©ie in Dejlreic^ gciucfcn, 
 
 mcine Jpcrrcn ? 
 
 SBiirtcn ©ie iai fftxi ni&it ge* 
 fauft ^akn, wenn ias ®clt) ^ier 
 gemcfen wdrc ? 
 
 Ser ^&rt>er iti SRenfi^en ijl fterts 
 
 Ii(^. 
 ®g waren ^eute ni^;t fe^r sietc 
 
 Seute in ber ©tatt. 
 5incirte Silicate :^atte Sdccfct get)aH, 
 
 unb ©ie :^atten UnreC^t ge^aW. 
 3ci, mein Jperr, ii^ bin in jener 
 
 ©tabt gewcfcn. 
 3a, mein Jperr,f ii^ ^aU jenen 
 
 Dom gefe^en. 
 3a, mein Sater, i^ 'ijobt biefen 
 
 Sfladsmittag cineSettion ge^obt. 
 3a, ntein §err, wir jtnb in 2Bien, 
 
 ber ^auptfiabt Defheti^?, gc* 
 
 wefen. 
 3(% ttiirbe bos 9)ferb unb ben 
 
 SCagen ge!auft Ijaben, 
 
 LESSON XIV. Seftion 14. 
 
 The Auxiliary Verb aSJctbcn. 
 
 Obs. I. — The third auxiliary, werben, is used in the formation 
 of the future and conditional, answering to shall (or 
 ivill) and should (or wovld) in English (see Lesson 
 XII., Obs. H.), and is also employed in forming 
 all the tenses of the passive voice. When em- 
 ployed as an independent verb, it expresses a chang- 
 ing or going from one state into another (to become, 
 Lat. fio).* 
 
 * SBetbEn is peculiar. It not only means to become, but answers also 
 to the English verb to grow, to get, or to be. Thus : it grows cold, is 
 translated : e^ tnirti Iftit ; in other words : It becomes cold ; it gets 
 late, ti toitti fiJtit, t. e., it becomes late or grows late. (See p. 311. 
 Note 3. t See p. 394, § 38, Note. 
 
104 
 
 THE ACXILIAEY VERB Wertetl. 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliaby Veeb aSSct&Ctt, TO BE- 
 COME, TO GBOW (TO BE). 
 
 Principal Parts : tottien, wuthft, geWOtbett 
 {or t»ot!»cn).* 
 
 rNFrNITIVE. 
 
 Present. SEerbcn, to become, to grow {or to be) 
 Past. ©eworten (tsorbm) fein, to have become (been) 
 
 PABTICrPLBS. 
 
 Present. SBcrticnt, becoming (being) 
 Past. ©cttortcn (roorten), become (been) 
 
 IMPBKATIVE. 
 
 SBerbe, become, be (thou) SBcrtct or mxim ©ie, become, 
 
 be (you) 
 
 INDICATITE. 
 
 Id) werbe, I become 
 tiu Wirjl, thou becomest 
 er tutrt, he becomes 
 mh wcrbcn, we become 
 
 t^rwcrbet, I you become 
 
 ©ie werten, ) 
 
 jte werben, they become 
 
 SUBJTINCTrVI!. 
 
 Preserd. 
 
 i&l mrti, I (may) become 
 
 tu wcrbcjl, 
 
 er wcrtc, 
 
 »lr tBcrten, 
 
 i^r wcrbet, ) 
 
 ©ic naertcn, 3 
 
 pe wcrten, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 ic^ tnurte (or ftark), I became 
 bu wurtejl, thou becamest 
 er tcurSc, he became 
 luir wurDcn, we became 
 
 i^rwurtet, [q^ became 
 
 ®le wurten, ) 
 
 fie wurtcn, they became 
 
 ic^ IDiirbc, if I became 
 
 tu witrtefi 
 
 er witrtc, 
 
 toir triirben, 
 
 i^x wiixM, \ 
 
 ©ie inurten, ) 
 
 fie wtoen, 
 
 * @Ct>IOr)ien is the paet participle of the independent verb tterien, to 
 grow, to become ; 6. g., \S) 6in arm geworbm, I home grown poor ; and 
 maiden is the past participle of the auxiliary verb werbtn, used to prevent 
 the repetition of the prefix ge; e. g., tc^ Mn geloit tuordeit (and »o«, ti^ bin 
 jeloit getBOrbtti), I have been praised ; wotben is also used in poetry. 
 
ipH AUXILIABY VEBB K C V t C n. 
 
 105 
 
 rSDICATITE. 
 
 I have become or grown 
 i(^ Hn gciccrten (roorten) 
 bu M|l geiDorten 
 cr ifl gemoricn 
 t»ir fmt) geroorien 
 i|r I'eil geworbcn ) 
 ®tc |tn6 gemorteit $ 
 (ie fini gcworbm 
 
 StTBJUlTOTrVB. 
 
 I may have become or grown 
 iij fei gemorben (worbeti) 
 iu feiejt gctDorben 
 cr fct gcworben 
 t»ir I'eictt getDorbcn 
 i^r feiet gctDorben ) 
 <Slc feien getoortcn j 
 (le feicn gcworbcn 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 I had become or grown 
 i(^ war geroorien (worben) 
 bu n)ar(l gemorben 
 er wax gercorben 
 iDir waren geworbcn 
 i1)x woret gemorben 
 fie toaren geworben 
 
 (if) I had become or grown 
 i^ mare gemorben (morben) 
 bu mareji gemorben 
 cr more gemorben 
 mlr marcn gemorben 
 t^r maret gemorben 
 fte maren gemorben 
 
 I shall become 
 ic^ merbe merben 
 bu mtrfl merben 
 er mirb merben 
 mlr merben merben 
 i^r merbet merben 
 fie mercen merben 
 
 First Futwre. 
 
 (if) I shall become 
 i^ merbe merben 
 bu merbe|i merben 
 cr merte merben 
 mtr merben merben 
 i:^r merbet merben 
 fie merben merben 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 I shall have become (grown (if) I shaU have become (grown 
 
 or been) or been) 
 
 tc^ merbe gemorben feln ic^ merbe gemorben feln 
 
 bu mlrfl gemorben feln bu merbeji gemorben feln 
 
 er mlrb gemorben feln er merbe gemorben feln 
 
 sir merben gemorben feln telr merben gemorben feln 
 
 l|r merbet gemorben feln t^r merbet gemorben feln 
 
 fSc merben gemorben feln fie merben gemorben feln 
 
106 
 
 THE AUXILIABY VEEB 10 C t b e It. 
 
 Obs. 
 
 Second Oonditionai. 
 I should have become (grown 
 or been) 
 id^ roiirbe gctooricn fetn 
 iu wtoefl getDOticn fein 
 er tBiirtc geroorbcn fein 
 wir wiirDen geiDorten fein 
 i^t wiirtct geworicn fein 
 fie wiiwert getoortcn fein 
 
 is rendered: tvaS tft 
 
 , »ai8 ijl aua S^i^em ®o|ne 
 gettf Otdett, what has become of your son ? 
 
 VOCABULAET. 
 
 JVrsi Conditional. 
 I should become (grow or be) 
 
 i^ tturte merten 
 bu wiiriefl werben 
 cr tuitrbe werien 
 wir wiirben werben 
 i|r wiirbct werbcn 
 fie wiirben reerbcn 
 
 n.— What 
 
 has become of- 
 
 getoorben ; 6. ^. 
 
 ber Wtax% the market 
 ber SBaicr, the Bavarian 
 ber %ld% (the) diligence, in- 
 dustry 
 bie ©parfamfeit, (the) economy 
 ber ©c^toager, the brother-in-law* 
 ber ©iiben, the south „ 
 
 ber 3lrjt, the physician 
 ber 25octor, the doctor 
 iai (Sivai, the grass 
 ber griilllttg, (the) spring r 
 Wa^r, true 
 
 regnen, to rain 
 effen, to eat 
 Jelannt, acquainted 
 gebulbig, patient 
 fc^mu^ig, dirty 
 fc^tafrig, sleepy 
 plB^Iic^, suddenly 
 bunM, dark 
 miibe, tired 
 jurtg, young 
 Ua^, pale 
 oft, often 
 
 Reading Exercise XIV. 
 
 3c^ Werbe oft front. "Ln wirft nie alt. Unfer !Biencr wurbe Btaf . 
 g« wirb 6alb (soon) buntel fein. @ie roerben nie miibe. ®er ®o|n 
 (son) unfereg Stac^krS tourbe ©olbat. £)ie SItem meines g^eunbcg 
 gbuorb tourbcrt pIo^Hc^ tranf. @g wiirbe regnen, roenn ti nidfet fo talt 
 (cold) toare. fis toirb fpiit, t»ir wcrben nid^t 3elt ^oben auf ben ^Kortt 
 ju ge^en. SBonn (when) wurbcn ©ie mit ^erm Stenmann tefannt? 
 SBerbet nic^t ungcbulbig, er wirb klb (soon) :^ier fein. ®« repet, 
 
THE ADXILIAKY VERB ID C r I C It. 107 
 
 wertcn ©ie ni(|t naji tuertcn ? 9Reinc ©(i^wcfter tjl aft; i* bin jung, 
 akr t(| werte alt luerben. 3^r ^leit ifl |'^mu|ig getrowen. ®ie 
 merben ganj gemif (surely) fron! lucrten, tenn <Sie cffen nii^t genug 
 (enough). Sler 9leffe Jc^ SaierS ifl turd) gleig unt ©pavfamteit 
 reic^ gcworten. 2CaS (what) ijl aus 3t)rem 3>etter geworten ? I;ie 
 Stic^tc tneiner ©(^iBcjler ijl ©iingertn geroorlien. 3fl c^ wa^r, tap 
 (that) 3^r ©d)»oger ©anger gciDorten i[l? Sr ifl Dfftjter gc* 
 irorten. 
 
 Theme XIV. 
 
 He becomes sleepy. She grew tired. It gets late. Sas he 
 become your brother-in-law ? His uncle was suddenly [tofceji] 
 ill. The children grew tired and sleepy. I have been patient^ 
 You will grow rich. Do not become impatient. It rains, 
 you Avill get wet. We are growing (tDerlen) old. It is growing 
 [becomes] darlc. You will be [become] sict, you eat too 
 much (jtt »iel). What has become of your daughter? She 
 has become a teacher in the south. The countess turned 
 [became] pale. It became late. What will become of this 
 man ? He will become a physician. Our neighbor has be- 
 come rich by economy and industry. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 SCertcn ©le nii^t front werten ? D nein, it^ werbe nx&ii oft franf. 
 3Btrb jenea SKatx^cn nie aft reer* 3<^ weifi (tnow) nii^t; fie ifl no(^ 
 
 ben ? (still) fel^r Jung. 
 
 SBannwirbbasSraSgriin (green)? 5)as ®ra3 unb bic 23aume wcrbeit 
 
 im grii^Iiitg gtfin. 
 ©inb ©ie ©olbat geworbcn ? 9letn, ii^ bin Softer getoorben. 
 
 3Cirb ti ^eutc rcgncn ? ^a, cs wirb |eutc ftarf (hard) 
 
 rcgnen. 
 3jl 3^r 5ilac^kr xi\^ gcworbm ? SiJcin, er ifl arm getrtorbcn, akr' 
 
 ntein SHeffe ifl fe'^r reid) geiuor^ 
 
 ben. 
 aBirfl btt nid^t nag wcrbcn? 3(^ glawk (think), eg wirb nid:t 
 
 rcgnen. 
 
108 THE AUXILIARY VEBB OF MODE ! B n tt C tt. 
 
 aBiirben ©ie ^aufmonn gcwortcn 3c^ wvirfcc ti getcorbcn feln, wenn 
 fcin ? ti nii^t gegcn ben aBillen meU 
 
 mi SBaterg gcmcfcn more. 
 Sftcgnet ti noc^ (still) ? 9tetn, ti Ijl fc^bn unb ttjarm (warm) 
 
 geworbcn. 
 SBer iji |eute f(i)Iiifrig getBorben ? So^ann t jl |eutc fc^ISfrig gcworben, 
 
 gejlern wurbc granj fi^Idfrig. 
 SSai t(l aui3 S^rem Setter gcwors gr tourbe ©enerd unb Ifl jc^t 
 ben ? (now) ouf elnem @ute (farm) 
 
 in ien 95ereintgten ©taateti 
 (United States). 
 SDarum Tmb ®ie ntc^t im Si^cater 3(^ tuurbe t>Ib^Iic^ Irani. 
 
 gcwefen ? 
 3ji er nag gcworbcn ? 9lein, er |atte etnen Sflcgenfi^irm. 
 
 3fl ti waiix, bag ^^v ©^wagcr 3a, mctn @e^»agcr tfl «Kajor gc? 
 Dfftjier geworben ifi? njorben,unb er wirb talb ®ene* 
 
 ral toerbcn. 
 
 LESSON XV. Seltion IS. 
 
 The Auxiliary Verbs of Mode. 
 
 Obs. I. — There are in German, besides the three auxiliary 
 verbs oi tense, 'fyaben, fcitt, and toer^ett, seven other 
 verbs, called the auxiliary verbs of mode, because 
 they convey no fall idea in themselves, but give cer- 
 tain modifications to other verbs (which are re- 
 quired to be in the infinitive). Thus, the verbs 
 fdnnett, buvfen, and mdgen express possibility 
 or ability, tnfiffen, foUett, and tVoUen imply ne- 
 cessity. Saffen expresses permission given by its 
 subject; e. g., et He^ &cn Tiitb laufen, he allowed 
 the thief to escape ; and hence sometimes command- 
 ment or causation ; e. g., CC Ue^ bctt fD'tann l^ttls 
 tid^len, he had the man executed, he ordered the 
 man to be put to death. 
 
THE AUXILIABY VEKB OF MODE I £ n n C tt . 109 
 
 Obs. n. — ^While the English auxiliary verbs of mode are very 
 defective, the German can be formed and used in 
 aU tenses. Their signification is more fully treated 
 in Lesson XL"VI. 
 
 Note. — The auxiliary verbs of mode, tBoHm and laffen ex- 
 cepted, have no imperative form. 
 
 Conjugation of the Adxiliakt Verb Stdnnen, TO BE 
 ABLE (Lat. posse). 
 
 Principal Parts : f dnnett, f onttte, gef onnt. 
 
 Present, ^bnnen, to be able. 
 
 Past. ©elonnt ^aitn, to have been able. 
 
 PAETICrPLBS. 
 
 Present. ^Bnncnt, being able (seldom used). 
 Past. ©efonnt, been able. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 ic^ fann, I can (or I am able) i(^ Knne, I may be able 
 bu !annfl, thou canst bu fijnnefl, thou mayst be able 
 
 cr !ann, he can er Bnne, he may be able 
 
 wir Ibnnen, we can Wir lonnen, v^e may be able 
 
 ' , .„ ' y you can ~, ,., r you may be able 
 
 <&tc lonnen, ) ©te fonncn, ) "^ 
 
 jt£ fijnncn, they can fte fijnnen, they may be able 
 
 ti^ fonnte, I could (or I was able) ic^ Knnte, I might be able 
 
 t>u f onntefl, thou couldst tu Knnte jl, thou mightst be able 
 
 cr lonnte, he could cr Knntc, he might be able 
 
 wir fonntcn, we could t»ir fijnntcn, we might be able 
 
 tjrbnntet, ( ^^j^ j!"/' lyou might be able 
 
 ©ie tonnten, J "^ ®te lonnten, i "^ 
 
 (ie fonntcn, they could fie fonntcn, they might be able 
 
110 THE ADXILIAET YEBB OE MODE f B tt n £ II. 
 
 Compound Tenses. 
 
 Obs. III. — The compound tenses of the auxiliaxy verbs of 
 mode are formed like those of the auxiliary verb of 
 tense, ^abm. 
 
 Obs. rV. — The auxiliary verbs of mode, when used in con- 
 junction with the infinitive of another verb, are 
 required to be in the iNriNiTrvE pbesent, instead of 
 in the past participle, n. g. : 
 
 Sr f^at ti nid^t ^aSstn f dnnen (instead of ge!onnt). 
 
 <S^ic laBcn ti ntd^t t|ttn (to do) iutfcn (instead of geburft). 
 
 INDICATrVE. SUJBJ U^CTIVB. 
 
 I have been able I may have been able 
 ic^ i^ait getonnt {or ic^ Ijobt fbnnen) tc^ ^abt gefonnt (or ic^^abe Jiinnen) 
 
 tu :^aji gcfonnt bu ^a6e^ getonnt 
 
 er |at getonnt, &c. er ^abe getonnt, &c. 
 
 Phi^perfect. 
 
 had been able I might have been able 
 
 ic^ ^ottc getonnt {or ic^ l^atte tijn* i^ '^iittc getonnt (or ic^ ^atte fbn* 
 
 nen) nen) 
 
 fcu lottejl getonnt ku ^ttejl getonnt 
 
 er ^tte getonnt, &c. er liitte getonnt, &c. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 I shall be able If I shall be able 
 
 i^ toerbe tiinncn ^ toerte tbnnen 
 
 ku toir|l tiinnen tu werbep tlmnen 
 
 er wtrb tonnen, &c. er werbe tBnnen, &c. 
 
 Beeond Future. 
 
 I shall have been able If I shall have been able 
 
 ic^ wcrbe getonnt '^aben ic^ werbe getonnt :^aten 
 
 btt wirii getonnt '^aBen bu toerieft getonnt ^a6en 
 
 er tvtrt) getonnt l)aten, &c. er werte getonnt l)akn, &c. 
 
THE AUXILIAEY VEKB OP MODE fijnttett. Ill 
 
 The Conditionals. 
 
 Obs. V. — The auxiliary verbs of mode most generally use 
 for the first conditional, the imperfect, and for the 
 second conditional, the pluperfect subjunctive, as: 
 i^ f onnte, ic^ ^attc gef onnt, in place of i&i wurte 
 fijnnen, it^ wuric getonnt :^o6en. 
 
 First Conditional. 
 i^ tBnntc {or ii) tuiirbe Knnen), I could, I might be able 
 bu tonntcjl {or lu wiirbcfl tijnnen) 
 cr lijnnte {or n iutoe fiinnen) 
 t»ir Bnnten {or wlr rotoen Bnnen), &c. 
 
 Second Conclitiondl. 
 ic^ ^atte gelonnt (or i^ wMe gefonnt ^altn), I could, I might 
 
 have been able 
 tu '^attcjl getonnt {or bu tourtcfl gefonnt %aim) 
 cr ^atte gefonnt {or er wiirbe gelonnt ^akn) 
 »ir l^atten getonnt {or tuir wurien getonnt :§aBen), &c. 
 
 Note. — In ancient German, fonncn signified to know 
 (Fr. sa/Boir), aa the old English to can (still found in the 
 Scotch idiom) ; e*g., " What we first learn we best can," i. e., 
 what we first leaiu, we know best. " Other prayers can I 
 none," i. e., I know no other prayers. — Scott's " Lay of the 
 Last Minstrel." Remains of this use of Umta, as equivalent to 
 f ennrn (Fr. connaJWre) or totffen (Ft. soAioir), to know, are stUl 
 found in expressions like the foUowing : XtX finaie f a n n 
 fcinc IKufgafie, the boy can say his lesson; i. e., the boy 
 knows his lesson (by heart) ; tonntn Ste bcutf^ ? do you 
 knme German, i. e., do you understand German ? — ^Dr. Sears' 
 Noehden. 
 
 Obs. YI. — The English Plupebfect Potential is expressed in 
 German by putting the principal verb in the Infinitive 
 (See Obs. IV. of this lesson), and the auxiliary of 
 tense in the Plupebfect Subjunctive ; e. g., Tou could 
 have sent the servant, ®tc I^atten ben Wiener 
 fc^tcFen f dnnen. 
 
112 
 
 THE AUXIIiUBY VEBB WOlUn. 
 
 CoNJUflATION OP THE AtJSILIAKY VeKB fSSoUttl, TO J\F' 
 
 WILLING, TO WISH. (Lat. veUe, Fr. vovMr) 
 Principal Farts : SSSoUett, tVoUte, getOOUt. 
 
 INFINITIVES. 
 
 Present. SBoUcn, to be willing, to -wish 
 
 Past. ©eipollt ^6en, to have -willed or wished. 
 
 PAETICIPLES. 
 
 Present. SBoUenb, willing or wishing 
 Past. ©ciBoHt, willed or wished. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 i^ win, I win, I wish 
 ku wtUfl, thou wishest 
 cr tDtll, he wishes, wiU 
 loir wotten, we will, &o. 
 i^r mUt or woUet, ) .„ 
 
 ©iewoUen, [you wall 
 
 jte tooHcn, they will or wish 
 
 SUBJUNCnVB. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ic§ mUi, I may be willing 
 
 tu troUeji, thou mayst be willing 
 
 cr wolte, he may be willing 
 
 Wtr wottcn, we may be willing 
 
 i|t rooUct, 1 you may be wiU- 
 
 ©ic iBolIcn, ) ing 
 
 (ic tuoflen, they may be wiUing 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 {(^ ttotttc, I wished, I was 
 
 willing 
 tu luoUtefl, thou wishedst 
 er tooUtc, he wished 
 ttir woUtcn, we wished 
 
 jie wottten, they wished 
 
 ic^ wotttc,* I might be willing, 
 
 I should wish 
 t)tt wotltcfl, 
 er wottte, 
 wir iDoUtcn, 
 i^r tooUtet, i 
 ©ic woBtcn, j 
 f!e woHtcn, 
 
 I have been willing, I have 
 wished 
 
 ic6 ^abt gewoUt 
 bu :^ojl flewoUt, &c. 
 
 I may have been willing, I 
 may have wished 
 iij ^ah gewotlt 
 tu laBefl getvoUt, &c. 
 
 * Notice that in the Imperfect Subjunctive of mUtn the vowel is not 
 modified. This is true also of foSen. 
 
THE AUXILIABY VEKB tUOllen. 113 
 
 I had been willing, I had I ijiight have been mlling, 1 
 wished might have wished 
 
 ic^ :^atte gewottt i^ ^dtte gercollt 
 
 liu iatteji gettottt fcu l^atteft gewotlt 
 
 cr ^aite gewollt, &c. cr t)atte gcwoUt, &c. 
 
 Mrit Fviiwre. 
 I shall be willing, I shall wish I shall be willing, I shall wish 
 ic^ werte rooUcn ic^ wercc moUen 
 
 bu wirji wolten iu merbeji wollen 
 
 cr wirti tuoUcn, &c. cr mcrJe tDoIIcn, &c. 
 
 Second Mttwre. 
 
 I shall have been willing, I I shall have been willing, I 
 
 shall have wished shall have wished 
 
 i^ merte gctrotft f^akn i^ werte gcwotit ^aben 
 
 6tt wirfl getooUt '^o6cn fcu »crbc(l gcttoUt '^akn 
 
 cr Wirt) getuotlt ^atcn, &c. cr werte gewoEt ^afcen, &c. 
 
 i'Srs* Conditional. 
 
 t^ wotltc (or i^ witrtic tBotten), I should be willing, I should wish 
 tu wiirtc^ wotten 
 cr tciirtc roolten, &c. 
 
 Second Oonditionai. 
 
 ic^ !ftottc gewollt {or x6i wiirtc gewoUt ^a6en),I shoidd have been 
 
 willing, I should have wished 
 tu ptteft gcivoUt 
 cr ^ottc gewottt, &c. 
 
 Note. — SSodcn is not, like the Englisli mU, employed to 
 denote futurity ; for this purpose bierlicn is used. SBaUcit 
 always implies, first, purpose and inclination ; e. g., SBoHen 
 ©ie au^ge^cti? will you go out, i. e., are you inclined to go 
 out ? and second, an assertion ; e. g., er tBtlt ti in bet Seitung 
 jefe^en '^aicn, ho affinns that he saw it in the paper; btefe 
 SBliinnct ttoffcn metnen Ditfrt gefe^en "^aSen, these men wU Imee 
 . it (that) they saw my uncle. 
 
114 THE APXniTAWY TEBB foUcn. 
 
 Conjugation or the Auxiuaet Vbbb <SoUett, TO BE 
 OBLIGED {TO HAVE TO). 
 
 Principal Parts : (SoOcn, foUtC, gefoUt. 
 
 INFINITIVBS. PABTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. ©oUen, to be obliged Pres. foDenb, being obliged 
 Past. gcfoUt ^aitn, to have Past. gcfoUt, been obliged 
 been obliged 
 
 htdicativb. btjbjunctive. 
 
 ic^ foH, I shall (or I am to) i(^ folic, I maybe obliged 
 
 bu foU^, thou shalt, &c. tu foll^, thou mayst, &o. 
 
 cr foH, he shall er foll(c) 
 
 tuir follen, we shall wir fotten 
 
 i^r follct, 1 , „ i^r foUet ) 
 
 ©ie follen, [y*'"^^*^ ©iefoUen,} 
 
 |te follen, they shall fie fotten 
 
 ill foUte, I should (or I ought to) ic^ follte, I should, &o. 
 
 6u foUtefl, thou shouldst, &c. Su follte^, thou shouldst &c. 
 
 i^ |a6e gefollt, I have been i^ |a6e gefottt, I may have been 
 
 obliged obliged 
 
 bu •^afl gefollt, &c. bu |oBcfl gcfoUt, &c. 
 
 Phiperfeet. 
 i<ij '^attc gefoHt, I had been ic^ '^attc gcfoUt, I might have 
 
 obliged been obliged 
 
 bu lattc^ gefollt, &c. bu ^ttcft gefollt, &c. 
 
 Mrat Future. 
 ic^ iDerbc follen, I shall be i^ toerbe fotten, (if) I shall be 
 
 obliged obliged 
 
 bu wirft follen, &c. bu werbcft follen, &c. 
 
THE AUXILIARY VI5EB follen. 115 
 
 Second Future, 
 i&i tuerbc gcfoHt |a6en, I shall ic^ wetbc gefoUt ^afeen, (if) I shall 
 
 have been obhged have been obliged 
 
 tu wirjt gefoltt ^abtn, &c. bu toericfl gefottt |a6cn, &a 
 
 i^'iVsi Conditional. 
 
 id) wiirbc foUen (or i^ jbttte), I should be obliged 
 iu wiirDefl fotteit, &c. 
 
 Second Conditional. 
 
 i(^ tuiirbe gefottt |a6en (or ii^ ^attc gefottt), I should have been 
 
 obliged 
 bu wiirDefl gefottt ^a6cn, &c. 
 
 Obs. VII. — I shdl is translated ic^ WCtie, and in the inter- 
 rogative form Werbe idlj ; but when shall lis use4 in 
 the sense of am I to it is rendered by foU i&i\ e. g., 
 we shall go, wir toerbcn ge^en ; shall we go ? i. e., are 
 we to go ? foUen wir ge^en? 
 
 Obs. Vni. — When a negative particle is used in a clause with 
 an auxiliary of mode, it is placed before the Infinitive 
 (which is put at the end of the sentence) ; e. g.. He 
 cannot write the letter, er fann ten S8rieftti«i^t f(^reikrt. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 tic ©etult, patience fc^rcikn, to write 
 
 ber Sauf, the course lefen, to read 
 
 bic ®lo(fc, the beU fprec^cn, to 
 
 btc Dinte, the ink tommen, to come 
 
 ber Sebicnte, the servant fc^iden, to send 
 
 beutfc^, German ^bren, to hear 
 
 franjbfifc^, French glauBen, to believe 
 
 t^utt, to do i^e^ten, to steal 
 
 serftonben, understood eriaukn, to permit 
 
 oJcr, or i-iiigeit, to lie 
 
 tDonn, when f(^te^t,.bad 
 
 mfjT, true dbtx, but 
 
116 THE AUXILIABT VEBB folletl. 
 
 Reading Exercise XV. a. 
 
 3^ lann fd^rcifccn unb lefen. Mam Dcin Srubcr nic^t fprec^en? 
 SBir fbnnen franjoftfc^ fprcAeti. .Kbntiten ®ie m&i f otsiam gc^cn ? 
 (Sr lonntc ti nic^t tiun. ©oil ii^ ju bcm Slrjte gelen? 2)u foII(l in 
 tas Ileatcr fommcn, Sr »irt nic^t tommcn fbnnen. SBiirtet 
 i^r ju mcincm Setter ge^en fbnnen ? ©ic follten tie Seftton gelcrnt 
 ^akn. ®r wottte in lie ®(|ulc ge^en. SBir wurDen ju Jpaufe bleikn 
 woUen. SBonn foUten t»ir nadb §aufe fommen ? 2Bir wurten ina 
 Soncert ge^^en follen. ®ie ^aben iai ^aui nid)t ^a6en fbnnen. ipa6t 
 i|r e« t^utt bitrfen ? ^cittefl bu beinen SJtencr fcfciiien fbnnen ? Diefe 
 ^Jlacc^cn fbnnen i:^re 3lufgaben. fbnnen ©ic franabfif^? ^tnt 
 grtfuen moHen meine Sante gefe^en ^aben. ®ie will meine 9lic^te auf 
 bem aWarftc gefe^en ^aBen. SBiirbcn ®ie ti t|un Ibnnen? J;u f^ay 
 tejl a ni&it t^un follcn. ®u wirfl im Saufe cine3 34«3 beutf(^ 
 fbnnen. SJlr tooHcn ©ebulb l^alitn. 3i^ |fl6f gewollt, abtv i(| habe 
 nic^t gefonnt. 3i^ lo", bu ttottcfl noc^ Sranfreic^ ge:^en 5 iji ti wa:^r? 
 
 Theme XV. a. 
 
 I can read. Canst thou write ? They can come. Could 
 you not go? Will (roollen) you go or not? I am not to go. 
 You might come to the house of the soldier. He would not 
 believe it. Thou shalt not steal. You shall read (you are to 
 read) The Bell of Schiller. When wilt thou go to Berlin? 
 The teacher should punish the pupil. (The) children should 
 not Ue. I could not have believed it. Will you vmte a 
 letter? Emily could not have understood the letter. They 
 shall seU (are to sell) their books to-morrow. Would 
 he be able to do it? They would not have been able to 
 write a letter, if they had had ink.* Shouldst thou be- 
 come a physician ? He was to feed (fiittem) my oxen and 
 horses, but he said that ho was not willing to do so (ti). 
 You could have sent the servant. The girls can rSad their 
 lesson. The boys know their lesson. These children will 
 have it (that) they saw (fft'^en) your cousin. Shall we remain 
 at home? 
 
 * Translate in the Subjunctive and see p. 419. 
 
THE AcxiLiABT VEBB biirfeit. 117 
 
 CONTOGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VeEB ^Dutfett, TO BE 
 
 PERMITTED, TO DARE, MAY* 
 Principal Parts : bfitfetl, &arftc, gebutft. 
 
 INPINITIVB. PAKTICIPLES. 
 
 Pres. SJiirfen, to be permitted Pres. biitfcnb, being permitted 
 Past, gcburft ^a6en, to have Past, geburft, been permitted 
 been permitted 
 
 rNDICATIVE. StrBJTWCTITB. 
 
 Present. 
 i^ barf, I am permitted {or I i(^ biirfc, I may be permitted 
 
 may) [mitted 
 
 bu barfjt, thou art permitted bu biirfefl, thou mayest be per- 
 cr barf, he is permitted cr biirfc, he may be permitted 
 
 tntr biirfen, we are permitted t»tr biirfeit, we may be permitted 
 i^r bitrfet, } ..^ , ik biirfct, ) you may be per- 
 
 ©te biirfen, [ y*'" axepermitted ^.^ ^^^^^^^ f ^.^^^;^ 
 
 jlc biirfen, they are permitted |te biirfen, they may be permitted 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 t(^ burftc, I was permitted i(J biirfte, I might be permitted 
 buburftcfl,thou wast permitted bu biirftefl, thou mightst be " 
 cr burftc, he was permitted er biirfte, he might be " 
 
 wir burften, we were permitted »ir biirften, we might be " 
 il)rburftet, 1 you were per- i^r biirftet, 1 ■ x.i-u i, 
 
 ©ie burften, \ mitted "^ ®ie burften, F°""^^^^*^^ 
 |ie burften, they were permitted fie biirften, they might be " 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 I have been permitted I may have been permitted 
 
 id) late geburft {or ic^ |oBe biirfen) i6^ laBe gcburft {or i6) |aie biirfen) 
 bu '^oji geburft {or biirfen), &c. bu '^afeep; geburft {or biirfen), &c. 
 
 * SJiitfen most generally answers to the French oser in expressions of 
 politeness. Interrogatively, barf iii, is exactly oserais-je {may If) 
 
118 THE AuxiLiAKy YEBB miiffeit. 
 
 Phjvperfeet. 
 
 I had been permitted I might have been permitted 
 
 ii^ ^atte geturft {or biirfen) Id) |otte gcburft (or tiirfen) 
 
 bu ^Qtte|l geburft {or biirfcn), &c. tu iiittefl gcturft {or biirfen), &c. 
 
 Mrst Future. 
 
 I shsU be permitted (if) I shall be permitted 
 
 ids merle tiirfcn ii> werbc biirfcn 
 
 btt t»ir|i kitrfen, &c. tu toerlcfl biirfen, &c. 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 I shall have been permitted (if) I shall have been permitted 
 
 iii toertc geturft fjcAtn i&i tcerbc gcburft 'i^aitn 
 
 In toirjl geSurft :§a6en, &c. tu werfecfl geturft ^aUn, &c. 
 
 JP?rsi Conditional. 
 
 tc^ biirfte (or i(^ Wiirlc liirfen), I should be permitted 
 btt tiirftcfl, (or bu wiirbeji liirfen), &c. 
 
 Second Conditioned. 
 
 i(^ ptte geburfl (or ic^ witrbe getmrft lakn), I should have been 
 
 permitted 
 t>u lijttejl geburft (or bu tDiirbcjl gcburft ^o6cn), &e. 
 
 Note. — In the same manner is conjugated Bctlurfcn, to be 
 in need. 
 
 Obs. IX.— There are in German two auxiliary verbs of mode, 
 viz.: folen and mujfcn, vyhich are rendered by iobe 
 oUiged. But, while ntnffeit implies an irresistible 
 necessity, foUen implies only that kind of necessity 
 which is imposed by the wiU of another who is en- 
 titled to superiority and, in case of need, can enforce 
 obedience to his commands. (Comp. Eberhard's 
 Synonymical Diet. No. 976). 
 
THE AUXILIABY VERB miiffett, 119 
 
 Conjugation op the Auxiliaey Veeb fStfiffett, TO BE 
 OBLIGED, MUBT (Lat. oporlet, French, U faut). 
 
 Principal Parts ; fEftui^en, mu^te, gemu^t. 
 
 rSFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. 9JJuffcn, to be obliged Present. SJliijfenti, being obliged 
 Past. ®emuf t lakn, to have (seldom used) 
 
 been obliged Past. ©emu^t, obliged 
 
 INDICATIVE. snBjinsrcnvB. 
 
 Present. 
 
 iifi mu^, I am obliged (must) id& JniiflTc, I may be obliged 
 
 ttt mu^t, thou art obliged butttiipfl,thoumaystbeobliged 
 
 cr mu§, he is obliged er tniiffe, he may be obliged 
 
 Wtr mujfen, v^e are obliged t»lr miipn, we may be obliged 
 
 i^r miijifct or miip, / you are i'^r miiffet, ) you may be 
 
 (Sic miiffcn, ) obliged ©ie muJTen, ) obliged 
 
 jlc tniijfen, they are obliged fte tniiffcn, they may be obliged 
 
 ic^ mupc, I was obliged i(^ mii§te, I might be obUged 
 
 ttt muptejl, thou wast obhged liu inu§tefl, thou mightst be " 
 
 er mu^tc, he was obhged er mii^te, he might be " 
 
 Wir muf ten, we were obliged wir mu^ten, we might be " 
 
 i|rntttptet, [ y^u were obliged li"; '""^f ' iyoumightbe" 
 
 ®te mu^ten, r ® ®te mugten, i "' ^ 
 
 fie mupten, they were obhged fie miipten, they might be " 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 I have been obliged I may have been obliged 
 
 ic^ ^abi getnugt i&i ^ah gemugt 
 
 in \a^ gemu^t, &c. iu ^alt^ gcmuf t, &c. 
 
 Pki)perfect. 
 
 I had been obliged I might have been obliged 
 
 i6!i 'featte gemu^t ic^ ^atte gemuft 
 
 fcu '^ottefl gcmn§t, &c. iu IStte^ gemu^t, &c. 
 
120 THE AUXILIARY VEEB Ut 15 C It. 
 
 INDICATIVB. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 First Future. 
 I shall be obliged (if) I shall be obliged 
 
 ic^ ttcrbc miijfen i(% totxu mujfcn 
 
 ku trtrfl miiffen, &c. bu tocrbcjl tnujfen, &c. 
 
 Second Futwe. 
 I shall have been obliged (if) I shall have been obliged 
 
 tc^ mxit geittugt ^akn tcfc wertc gemupt :§o6en 
 
 bu tBirjl gemugt laBen, &c. tu tDcrtefl gemupt ^abcn, &c. 
 
 J'Vj'** Conditional. 
 ic^ Wiirbe muifen (or ic^ miiptc), I should be obliged 
 iu wiiricjl miiffen, &c. 
 
 Second Gonditional. 
 i^ Wiirbe gcmup l^aBcn (or icb ptte gemugt), I should have been 
 
 obUged 
 bu tDitrt)c|l gcmupt l^oBcn, &c. 
 
 Conjugation op the Auxbliakt Verb ^fft&Qttl, MAY, TO 
 BE ALLOWED, TO LIKE A THING, ETC 
 
 Principal Parts : fSt&Qtn, mo^^tt, qtmo^t. 
 
 INFINrnVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. SJlBgcn, to be allowed Present. SJiiigent, being allowed 
 P(ist. ®emod^t ^afccn, to have (seldom used) 
 
 been allowed Past. ©entoc^t, allowed 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVB. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ic^ mag, I am allowed (or I may) ic^ mijgc, I may be allowed ' 
 
 bu magfl, thou art allowed bu mbgejt, thou mayst be " 
 
 er mog, he is allowed cr mbge, he may be " 
 
 wir mbgcn, we are allowed toir mbgcn, we may be " 
 
 tiir m&get {or mijgt), | you are i|r m&get, | ^^ „ 
 
 ©ic m'ogctt, ) allowed ©ie miigen, J 
 
 (!c mijgcn, they are allowed (le mijgcn, they may be " 
 
THE AUXILUBX VEEB Itt Q t tt, 121 
 
 INDICATITB. SUBJUNCTIVB. 
 
 ic^ mo^te, I was allowed {or I tc^ mBi^tc, I might be allowed 
 
 might) 
 
 tu moi^tejl, thou wast allowed tu mBc^te^, thou mightst be " 
 
 er moi^te, he was allowed er tnBc^te, he might be " 
 
 trir modjtcn, we were allowed xaix miJc^ten, we might be " 
 
 i> mom. \ n ^ere aUowed I!"; "^^f'l' \ you might be " 
 ©le moc^ten, > ®te molten, S 
 
 fie moc^tcn, they were allowed fte moisten, they might be " 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 I have been allowed I may have been allowed 
 
 id) ^a6e gemoi^t i&i %aiit gemo^t 
 
 t)u '^afl gemoi^t, &c. tu ^aicfl gemoi^t, &c. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 I had been allowed I might have been allowed 
 
 ic^ lattc gcmodjt i^ '^iitte gemoc^t 
 
 tu :^atte(i gcmoi^t, &c. tu :§attejl gcmoc^t, &c. 
 
 Fi/rst Future. 
 I shall be aUowed if I shall be allowed 
 
 i^ wcrte mbgcn \&i tucrte mijgcn 
 
 lu TOirjt mbgcn, &c. tu wcrtcfl mogcn, &c. 
 
 Second Future. 
 I shall have been allowed if I shall have been allowed 
 
 i(^ tuertc gemoc^t |a6ctt ic^ wertc gemo(^t l^aBcn 
 
 tu luirfl gcmoc^t ^akn, &c. tu wcrbejl gcmoc^t |a6cn, &c. 
 
 Mrst Oonditionai. 
 ic^ witrbc tnbgen (or i^ mi&ii), I should be allowed 
 tu tBurtcjl tnijgcn (or tu tnoi^tcjl), &c. 
 
 Second CondUimuil. 
 {&! tuiirbc gcmo(^t '^aBcn (or iii '^attc gcmor^t), I should have been 
 tu wurttfl gemod^t \abin. {or tu ^attcjl gcmo^t), &c. [allowed 
 
122 THE AUXILIAET VEBB laffCJt. 
 
 Obs. X. — fXft&Qcn is frequently used in the sense of like, 
 prefer or choose ; e. g., 3c^ WOg C3 nii^t, I do not like 
 it; ic^ indite ti |akn, I would like to have it. It is 
 never used to render the interrogative form of may ; 
 e. g.. May I? (French, oserais-je f) is, in German, 
 ^Otf i^ ? SKBgert, in the sense of fbnnen, as used 
 in the old German and even by Luther, has become 
 obsolete. (Comp. Eberhard's Synonymical Diction- 
 ary, No. 969.) 
 
 Note. — SBerntiigen, to be able, is conjugated in the same 
 manner as mogen. 
 
 COKJUGATION OF THE AuXILIAET VeEB Stlffetl, TO LET, 
 
 TO PERMIT, TO LEAVE. 
 FrmApd Parts : Saffen, lie^, gelaffett. 
 
 mriNrnvB. pabticiple. 
 
 Present. Saflfctt, to let, to permit Present. Sajfcnt) (is never used) 
 
 Past. ©elajfcn ^ahn, to have Past. ©elaffen, let {or per- 
 
 let {or permitted) mitted) 
 
 IMPERATrVB. 
 
 Singular. Soflc {or log), let (thou), (French, laisser) 
 Plural. £affet (lapt or laflTen ©ie), let (you) 
 
 IHDICATIVB. BUBJDNCTrVB. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ii)i lajfe, I permit {or I let) i^ (ajfe, I may permit 
 
 t)U lajfefl, thou permittest bu laffej^, thou mayst permit 
 
 er laft, he permits er lajjc, he may permit 
 
 rotr IflflTen, v?e permit ttir laffen, we may permit 
 
 i^r tftgt, you permit i|r laffct, you may permit 
 
 fie lojfctt, they permit fie lajtcn, they may permit 
 
THE AUXILIARY VEEB laffctt. 
 
 123 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 tc^ lief, I permitted 
 tu Iie^c|i, thou permittedst 
 cr Hep, lie permitted 
 TOir lichen, we permitted 
 i|r Itegct, you permitted 
 fte Itcpcn, they permitted 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 ic^ liege, I might permit 
 tu Itegeft, thou mightst permit 
 er Itcfe, he might permit 
 tt)ir liegen, we might permit 
 i^r liegct, you might permit 
 fie liegcn, they might permit 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 3c^ |o6e gclaffen, I have permitted 
 3(^ ^atte getojyen, I had permitted 
 3c^ luerte lajfen, I shall permit 
 3(^ iDerbc gelajfen |okn, I shall have per- 
 mitted 
 3cl) wiirfce laffen, I should permit 
 Second Conditioned. 3c^ iowcii gelaffen |aBen I should have per- 
 mitted 
 
 Perfect. 
 Pluperfect. 
 First Future. 
 Second Fvdure. 
 
 First Conditional. 
 
 Obs. XI. — Stiffen, to let {or to permit), when placed before 
 another verb in the infinitive, is like the English, to 
 cause (Fr. faire) ; e. g., \6) lie^ meinem ©o^ne einen 
 SWod ntflc^en, I had a coat made (i. e., I caused a coat 
 to be made) for my son. Exceptions see § 78, Note. 
 
 Obs. Xn. — The object of laffett is generally in the accusa- 
 tive, but, if there are two objects in a sentence, the 
 indirect object is in the dative, and the direct object 
 in the accusaiive ; e. g., gr |at mcinct SEantc &cn 
 §unb gclaffen, he left my aunt the dog. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ta« SBBrterbud), the dictionary 
 
 tcr SJtantel, the mantle, cloak 
 
 ter ^od), the coot 
 
 tag S5icr, the beer 
 
 Me ^u|, the cow 
 
 baS SJlufeum, the museum 
 
 Saierit, Bavaria 
 
 tcr Uekrrod, the overcoat 
 
 lie Dper, the opera 
 MiuSSeprn, to mend 
 
 arteiten, to work 
 
 kfhrofen, to punish 
 ^ iettctn, to beg, to go begging 
 
 6raten, to roast 
 
 fragen, to ask 
 
 mad;en, to make 
 
124 THE AUXILIAET VBKB laffctt. 
 
 fc^Iafen, to sleep »erfaufen, to sell 
 
 flertcn, to die i^gc'^orfam, obedient 
 
 jtitl, quiet ^ jlolj, proud anit, poor 
 
 Reading Exercise XV. b. 
 
 3(6 k«rf mcitt SBBrtertuc^ »cr!aufcn. 2)orf|l tu fontmen ? §at er 
 fcin aSiJrterbuc^ nic^t »cr!aufett tiirfcn? SEBir wcrtcn ina Sonccrt 
 ge^en tiirfcn. ©ie wcrtcn ntc^t ju §oufc Heifcen Ciirfen. @ie turfte 
 auf ten Sail gcl^cn, aBer ftc fonntc iti^t ; jte war franf. 3^r Setter 
 tctrt nic^t ins Sweater gc|en Ciirfen. SBir biirfen t^un, toai »ir fijn* 
 Itcn. "Du mu^t (iiU fein, i&i lann nic^t arkiten. 3o|<inn ntug cincn 
 9J?anteI ^afccn. ©ie rcerten iai §aus Berlaufen miipn. £u miiptejl 
 ti t^un, wenn Ccr Se^rer ^ier toarc. ©tc wiiricn nic^t bettcln gc^^en 
 miijfen, roenn (ie flei^tg gcwefen toiiren. SBcI^eg ^u|n foU kcr ^ocfe 
 katen? !E;er ©cfcneiier muf meinen Sflod oustcjfcrn. 2Gtr miigen 
 retc^ oJer arm fein, tuir miijfen Sllle (aU) fterkn. 3i6 ntug eiti ®la« 
 Sier. Sr mod^te auf tie ^a^i ge^en, aicr cr burfte nid^t ge^en. ©ic 
 ^aten nidjt arkiten mijgen, aber fte ^akn gcmu^t. ®r mag es f^un 
 ober nic^t. 3^ ^ok gejlern meine ^u'^ serfaufen fijnnen, aBer id^ 
 |o6e nic^t gemoi^t. 2affen ®ie ^^xm Dnfel f(6Iofen. 2apt eg [fic^] 
 nidjt t|un ? 6r |atte cinen Slrjt I)olert lajfen. ^einrii^ lie^ meinen 
 SRegenffi^trm Bei unferm ©c^neiter. Der Se^rer wiirte ben ©djiiler 
 Beflrafen laffen, »enn er unge^orfam ware. Earf i&i fragen, »ic fpiit 
 ti ift ? 3Bir wiirbcn iiefer grau einen Jput ma^en tajfen, wenn fie 
 nidJt fo (so) fiolj wiirc. Sajfen ©ie 3^rem ©o^ne cinen fRoi 
 mo^cn ? 
 
 Theme XV. b. 
 
 I am permitted to read a book. Are you not allowed to 
 go to (in) the concert? She was not permitted to go to 
 school. He would have been permitted to see the picture. 
 Would they be permitted to visit (Bcfuc^en) the Museum ? 
 We would have been permitted to stay here. Would you 
 have been permitted to go to (na^) Bavaria? You must 
 work and not play. He must have (needs) an overcoat. We 
 
THIS AUXILIABY VEBBS. 
 
 125 
 
 must delay (auffc^tefcen) our journey, we cannot leave (serlojfen) 
 the child. They were obUged to stay at home. His servant 
 would have been obliged to go after the dictionary. Do you 
 beUeve that (caf ) they would be obliged to go begging if 
 they had been industrious ? We should not be compelled 
 to remain here. Do you Uke (to eat) meat? You may 
 remain at (in) Berlin, provided (»orauggcfe^t) [that] you are 
 inchned (wollcit) to work. Would you like (mijgcn) to go to 
 the opera ? We have left our umbrella here. We shall have 
 the coat made (maiden . . . laffen) by (son) our tailor. Would 
 they have sold the furniture (WoM, pi.) without (o^ne) the 
 house? 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 SJlbgen ®lc glctfd^ oker Srob ? 
 Darf ii^ ^orcn,tt)aa er fagt (says) ? 
 Durftcfl in ju ipoufc 6Iei6cn ? 
 
 SCiirbet t^r tn« Z^tattx gc'^cn 
 
 fciirfcn ? 
 SSitS unfer ^Ra^Bar fein JpouS 
 
 Bcrfaufen mitffcn? 
 
 SBiirtc cr iettcln ge^cn tniiffen, 
 wenn er flet^tg getuefen tuiire ? 
 
 §a6en ©ie nic^t arteiten tnbgcn ? 
 
 §otte^ tu ctnen Srtef (letter) 
 fc^reikn fijnnen ? 
 
 ^Bnncn ®ie beutfc^ fprcc^m ? 
 
 SKu§ten @ie in fcic ®4ulc ge:^cn? 
 fflertcn ©ic morgcn in ben @flr- 
 ten ge'^cn tcofien ? 
 
 3c^ mag Srob, Sutter unb ^iifc 
 
 (cheese) . 
 D ia, ©ie ntbgen ^bren, was er 
 
 fagt. 
 9letn, mir mu^ten in bie ©i^ule 
 
 ge^en. 
 3a, wtr wiirben ini 2:^eater ge'^en 
 
 biirfen, wenn relr ^dt 'fatten. 
 3a, er ^at tein ®clb, unb fann 
 
 feine ©ti^ulsen (debts) nic^t 
 
 beja^Ien. 
 @r Ibnnte reid^ fein, menn er nic^t 
 
 trSge unb nat^Iiifflg (negU- 
 
 gent) gcwefen hjiire. 
 SBir ^a6cn arfcciten mbgen, a6er 
 
 mir ^aben nicfct gefonnt. 
 3d) ^flttc einen Srief ni^t fd)reis 
 
 Ben fbnnen, a6er ic^ ^tte t|n 
 
 (it) fc^reiBen mbgen. 
 SfJein, aber i(^ lann beutfc^ lefen 
 
 unb fiireiben. 
 ^lein, wir burften ju Jpaufe Heiben. 
 3(^ werbe morgen ju §aufe Mci* 
 
 ben, ic^ will cln SSud) lefen. 
 
123 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 §atte id) ju im Slr^t gc^en 5Rein, bcr Slrjt tonnte ^eutc ni(|t 
 
 foQcn ? fommen. 
 
 SBarum (why) Itepcn @ie 3|re ©le mar franf unb Jonnte ntc^t 
 
 ©i^wefter au ^aufe ? !ommcn. 
 
 2Bo (where) i^abm ©le meinen S^i^en Stcgcnfc^irm |abc i(^ auf 
 
 Slegenf^irm gelaffen? tern 5Karfte uerloren. 
 
 LESSON XVI. Seftiott 16. 
 
 The Adjective. (2)o8 ©igenfc^oftSttiott.) 
 
 Obs. I. — The German adjective, like the English, is m- 
 decUnable, whenever it is a predicate^ It is gen- 
 erally separated from the substantive by a veeb ; 
 e. g., ter 2Scin ijt gut, the wine is good ; bie gebern 
 l»aren i^^ti^t, the pens were bad. 
 
 Obs. n. — ^When the adjective is attriliutiTCj it precedes its 
 substantive, and agrees with it in gender, number, 
 and case ; e. g., lai Heine JpauS, tie Hetnetl Jpaufcr, 
 the small house, the small houses. 
 
 Obs. III.-^The attributive adjective has three different forms 
 of declension, which are as follows : 
 
 First Pobm : when preceded by the definite 
 article ; 
 
 Second Form : when preceded by the dsdefinitb 
 article ; 
 
 TaiBD FoBM : when it stands wUhovi any article. 
 
 First Form. 
 
 The Adjective pkeceded by the Definite Article. 
 
 Obs. IV. — ^Adjectives, when preceded by the definite ar- 
 ticle, or by any pronoun declined like the dejinile 
 article, take the endings of the Second Declension, 
 
THE ADJEOTiyE WITH THE DEFINITE AETICaiE. 
 
 127 
 
 t. e. in- the nomiaative singtilar c, in all other 
 cases, en. 
 
 Exception. — The accusative singular, feminine and 
 neuter, is always like the nominative. 
 
 EXAMPLES WITH THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 the good man 
 
 the good men 
 
 N. &cr gutc Tlann 
 
 bit guten Scanner 
 
 G. tii gutCtt DJJannca 
 
 ber guten ?Wdnner 
 
 D. lent gutcn SJJanne 
 
 ben guten ^JtSnnern 
 
 A. ben gutcn Wann 
 
 bie guten SJiiinner 
 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 the beautiful woman 
 
 the beautiful women 
 
 N. feic fi^bne grau 
 
 &ic fc^bnen grauen 
 
 G. fccr i&i'oneji grau 
 
 ber fc^Bnen grouen 
 
 D. ter fi^Bncn grau 
 
 ben f^ijnen grauen 
 
 A. Me fi^ijne grau 
 
 bie fci^bnen grauen 
 
 
 NEOTER. 
 
 the little child 
 
 the little children 
 
 N. &o§ Heine ^inb 
 
 bit Heincn ^inber 
 
 G. beg Helncn ^inbea 
 
 ber Heinen ^inber 
 
 D. bent fleinen ^inbc 
 
 ben Heinen ^inber 
 
 A. bos Heine ^inb 
 
 bie Heinen ^inber 
 
 EXAMPLE WITH A PRONOUN, 
 this new house those old houses 
 
 N. diefeS neuc ^ani [tnt altca Jpaufer 
 
 G. biefes neuen ^m\ei jener atten §aufcr 
 
 D. biefem neuen $aufe jenen alien ^aufern 
 
 A. bicfeg neue §au3 jene ottcn Jpaufer 
 
 Obs. V. — The inflection is Jihe same for two or more adjec- 
 tives ; e. g., btt gute alte Ttam, bit ^itit jungc 
 grau, etc. 
 
128 THE ADJECTIVK WITH THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Bingulwr. 
 N. itt rctc^e flite ^oufmann, the rich old merchant 
 G. ieS relc^eit alten ^aufmanne^, of the rich old merchant 
 D. lent rciii^en dtcit ^aufmonne, to the rich old merchant 
 A. ben retd^en altcn ^aufmann, the rich old merchant 
 
 Plural. 
 N. iit flclpgctt jungcn ^auflcutc, the indnstrions yonng merchants 
 G. ber flei^igen iungcn ^auflcute, of the industrious young " 
 D. ben fletflgcii jungcn ^aufleutcn, to the industrious young " 
 A. btc fici^tgcti iungen ^oufleute, the industrious young " 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ^ ber D|cim, the uncle (i^en, to sit 
 
 ber Oarten, the garden faufen, to buy 
 
 ber ©Srtner, the gardener getSmpft, fought 
 
 ■^ tm S^ttx, the army gerkoi^en, broken 
 
 bie Sfitung, the newspaper nad)Iaf|tg, careless 
 
 bic ©trope, the street nii^Iicfe, useful 
 
 ber @o(l|of, the hotel bittig, cheap 
 
 bie Sampc, the lamp tearm, warm 
 
 ber ffitntcr, the winter lurj, short 
 
 baS SB5rteriu(!^, the dictionary aii, than 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 Tier gutc fflJann. Diefe gnten SJtiinncr. 3cbe junge grau. 3ene3 
 fteine ^Inb. Unfere ncucn Jpiiufer. Der rci(^e alte ^aufmann iji 
 jufrieben. iJic fleifigen jungen ^aufleute toolncn in unfercm §aufe. 
 ©as Steifc^ ber fettcn ©iinfe if! ni(|t gefunb. Der Se^rer loM bie 
 fleigigen unb guten ^inber. ©ic gute oltc 9Wuttcr IteW it)rcn flcigigen 
 ©o^n. ©ie ^aBcn bas fc^ijnc neue §oua Ber!aufcn miipn. ®u foti* 
 tejt biefen golbenen 3Hng »erfauft |aBen. fatten ®ie ^^nn D^cim 
 
THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 129 
 
 bctt gropen fi^bnen ©arten taufen lajfen ? 1)ai weipe Srot ifl nti^t 
 fo (so) biHtg aU tia« fi^raarse. Das teutfc^e §eer ^ot gcgen bas fran* 
 jSftfc^e Jpeer ta))fer geliimpft. SBoHen ®ie Die neue franabfiii^e Scitung 
 lefcn? 3c^ Me Die f^bnen warmett Sage tm ^xmi. Jpabcn »ir 
 Mefen fteinen ^nakn nic^t auf ber ©trope gefe^en ? Mr :^akrt fiinf 
 grope ®afl|bfe in ^''^f''^ longett ©trape. 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE DEFINITB AETICLE. 
 
 This diligent girl. That little lazy boy. The good old 
 rich man. The industrious young merchsints. The careless 
 servant has broken our new lamp. Who has the old book ? 
 The good mother loves her industrious daughters. The feath- 
 ers of the fat geese are useful. The teacher punishes the 
 lazy and inattentive pupUs. "We have bought the good and 
 faithful dog of the old gardener. Have you received the 
 street-door key of the beautiful new house ? Tou should buy 
 a new hat, the old one (hat) is not good enough. Who has 
 found that gold(en) ring ? This young man has lost his new 
 overcoat. The birds sit in the ^een trees. I do not like 
 the short cold days of (the) vnnter. Are you permitted to 
 sell the old dictionaries? We have just (foeben) found this 
 little girl in the street. 
 
 Second Form, 
 
 The Adjective pbeceded by the Indefinite Aeticue. 
 
 Obs. VI. — Adjectives when preceded by the rNDEFmniE article, 
 by the pronouns mein, fecitt, feitt, tmfer, CMcr, 
 
 i^r, and f citt (no), dififer in their inflection from 
 the first form in the Nominattve Singular, Masculine 
 and Neuter, because in this case the article cin is 
 the same in both the masculine and neuter, and 
 hence cannot serve to indicate the gender of the 
 noun. The adjective, therefore, takes the ending 
 of the definite article, viz. : et in the masculine, 
 and c§ in the neuter. 
 
130 THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE mDEFIHITE AEHOLE. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 N. citt armcr SOtaler, a poor painter 
 G. eine^ ormcn 5KaIer3, of a poor painter 
 D. cincm armcn 9JJoIcr, to a poor painter 
 A. ctncn ormctt Tlakx, a poor painter 
 
 Fern. N. cine altc %ta\x, an old woman 
 
 G. cincr oltcn grau, of an old woman 
 D. einer altctt Srau, to an old woman 
 A. cine alte grau, an old woman 
 
 Nexd. N. ettt franlcS ^inb, a sick child 
 
 G. iimi trantctt ^tniea, of a sick chUd 
 
 D. cinem frantcn ^tntc, to a sick child 
 
 A. cin tranfeS Mrto, a sick child 
 
 Sing. N. metn (tcicr ®o^n, my dear son 
 
 G. meinca He6cn ©o^nea, of my dear son 
 D. meinem lictctt ©o^nc, to my dear son 
 A. nteincn liebctt ©o^n, my dear son 
 
 Plur. N. feine lief en jEBi^tcr, his dear daughters 
 G. feiner lietcn Jotter, of his dear daughters 
 D. feinen lieten SLbf^tem, to his dear daughters 
 A. feine lieten Sbc^ter, his dear daughters 
 
 N. f ein taltcS fflaffer, no cold water 
 G. fetneS fatten SCajferg, of no cold water 
 D. fcinem taltCtt Staffer, to no cold water 
 A. lein falteS SBaffer, no cold water 
 
 N. cin armet, ciftet, franlcc Wlann, a poor old sick man 
 G. ctne« armcn, aftcn, tranfcn Wanmi, of a poor old sick man 
 D. eincm ormcn, altcn, fran!ctt SRannc, to a poor old sick man 
 A. einen armcn, aUcn, franfett ^ann, a poor old sick man 
 
THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE INDEEINITE ARTICLE. 131 
 
 VOGABULARY. 
 
 bcr ®c^v^ma(^cr, the shoemaker ■^er Sli^aHelter, the lightning- 
 tie Svii^tructerhin^, (the) print- rod 
 
 ing ©c^weten, Sweden 
 
 ter f^ic^tcr, the poet SRuPanb, Russia 
 
 bcr §afctt, the harbor ^^oten, Poland 
 
 vcr ^rieg, the war '^ crfunben, invented 
 
 bcr ^rtegcr, the warrior 9efit|rt, conducted 
 
 bag ©liid, the fortune i^ gcf^icft, clever 
 
 bag UngliicE, the misfortune grofmiitlig, generous 
 
 bag Soil, the people [(^wa^, weak 
 
 btc Uekrfe^ung, the translation cng(tf(^, Enghsh 
 ber gclb^err, the field-marshal Wutig, bloody 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 Sin alter SJJann. Sine arme grau. ?!Jlein fleiner ©o'^n. Seine 
 Jungcn 2:B(i^ter. ^cin taltea aBaffer. Sin armer, alter, fc^wac^er 
 SJlann. Unfcr Sila^Mr ijl ein gutcr ©^u^mac^er. Seine S^ladjiarin 
 i(t cine fd^one jungc Srau. Jpoji tu beinen golbenen SRing »erloren ? 
 J^ier ijt ein alte3 franteiS 9)fert. 3fl 3^re ®ro|mutter eine alte grau ? 
 ©uttcnberg ijl ein Berii^mter ©eutfc^er, er t)at bie SSnc^brucEerlunft cr* 
 funben. ®ot|e unJ Slider linn jroei berii|mte bcutf^e Sic^ter. SEir 
 werben eine englifc^e B^itung lefen. Hamburg unb Srcmen finb grofe 
 beutf^e ^iifcn. Sin longer ^rteg ijl ein gropes Ungliicf fitr ein SSoIt. 
 Sine lange UeBerfe^ung ifl ein fleines Ungliid fiir cinen triigen ©(filler. 
 Die SdBmer l^aBen cinen langen ^rieg gcgen bie Eart^ager gefiit)rt. 
 ©uflas 3tbotp|, ^Bnig son ©c^tuetiett, hjar ein gcfd^icfter ge(t|err unc 
 ein grogmiit^iger ^rieger. granflin, ein fcerii^mtcr Slntcrilaner, |at 
 ben Sti^aBIeiter erfnnbcn. ffiJcr :^at "i^iii f^arfe SJJcflfer bcS atten glei* 
 \6),ixi> (butcher) ? 3ft ©:§alc«))eare ein Berii'^m.ter englifc^er £)i(^ter ? 
 Sfl SBicIanb ein fransbfifc^cr ober bewtfc^er Sifter? 
 
132 THE ADJECTIVE WITHOUT AN ABTICLE. 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 A poor painter. A good woman. Thy dear sons. Our 
 dear daughters. A poor sick old man. They have no red 
 wine. Their neighbor has a large beautiful garden. The 
 Ehine is a large river. My little boy is in (aitf) the street. 
 "We have a lightning rod on (auf ) our church. Shakspeare 
 is a celebrated English poet. We had a long theme. Bremen 
 is a German harbor. SchiUer is a celebrated German poet. 
 Russia has carried on (conducted) a long [and] bloody 
 war against Poland. You must read a German paper. 
 We have seen our good old king. Have you lost your gold 
 watch ? Who has taken my small sharp knife 1 
 
 Form Third. 
 The Adjective Without an Article. 
 
 Obs. Vn. — When adjectives accompany a substantive vnthoiU 
 being immediately preceded by an article, or by a 
 pronoun, declined like the article, they take the 
 termination of the (wanting) article to indicate the 
 gender of the noun which the adjectives qualify. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 SingiUar. Plural. 
 
 MASCnLrSTE. 
 
 N. rot|et SJcin, red wine {or rot^e 3Betne, red wines 
 
 some red wine * 
 
 G. rotten f SBeincS, of red wine rot^cr SBeinc, of red wines 
 
 D. rot^cnt SBeine, to red vnne rotten SBcinen, to red wines 
 
 A. rof^cn 3Bein, red wine rot^e SBcinc, red wines 
 
 * Some, before a substantive (See p. 156, IV.). 
 
 ■)• The genitive singular in the masculine and neuter, to avoid harsh- 
 ness of sound by a repetition of it generally takes n. 
 
THE ADJECTIVE WITHOUT AN ABTICLE. 133. 
 
 Singula/r. . Plv/ral. 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 N. frifc^c W\\6ii, fresh milk warmc ©upt^eit, warm soups 
 
 G. frif^cr W\{&i, of fresh milk warmCC ©uppcn, of warm soupa 
 
 D. frifc^cr 9Jttl(^, to fresh milk l»armCtt®u|5|)en,to warm soups 
 
 A. \n\&,t SOtili^, fresh millc iBarmc ©up))cn, warm soups 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 N. fcfewarjeS * Z\x&i, black cloth neue Silver, new books 
 G. fcbroarjcnJufl^jOf black cloth neuct S3u(^er, of new books 
 D. [(^roarsctttSucfe, to black cloth ncuen SBiic^ertt, to new books 
 A. f(^marjc8 Sui^, black cloth iteuc Siic^cr, new books 
 
 Singular. 
 N. gutct, alter, ro^Ct SBcin, (some) good old red wine 
 G. gutctt, altctt, rott;e,t SCeineS, of good old red wine 
 D. gutcnt, alteitt, rot^cm SBetne, to good old red wine 
 A. gutCtt, altctt, rotten SBein, (some) good old red wine 
 
 Plural. 
 N. f4i)nc, ncuc, fdbwarjc ^letter, (some) beautiful new black clothes 
 G. fdjbner, neucr, f^mar^ej ^letter, of beautiful new black " 
 D. fi^oncti, neueit, fcfcroarjen ^leitern, to beautiful new black " 
 A. fc^one, neue, f^roarje ^(etter, beautiful new black clothes 
 
 Obs. Vin. — Adjectives ending in cl, cn, or cr, generally drop 
 the C before (rarely after) the I, tt, or r when decUned.f 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 cbel, noble 
 N. kcr cMc ®raf, the noble count 
 G. tti ctlctl ®rafen, of the noble count 
 D. tern etlen ©rafen, to the noble count 
 A. ten ettcti ©rafen, the noble count 
 
 * In colloquial langiiage and in poetry, e« is frequently omitted, aa : 
 fc^wars %Viii, !alt SBoffcr, &c. 
 
 f Otto says, " Adjectives ending in en and er do not require the omis- 
 sion of tlie e in the nominative, except in poetry. 
 
134 THE ADJECTIVE WITHOUT AN ARTICLE. 
 
 Singvla/r. Plwrdl. 
 
 offcn, open ftnflcr, dark 
 
 N. cine offne SPrc, an open door flnjlrc 9la(^te, dark nights 
 
 G. ciner ojfnen Z^vxi, of an " finfhet S^lod^te, of dark nights 
 
 D. clncr ojfnett Spre, to an " ftnflreti 5'lad)ten, to dark nights 
 
 A. cine offne SE^iire, an " ftn|be Stdi^te, dark nights 
 
 Obs. IX. — The adjective, |o(i^ (high), when declined, drops 
 the t of i^. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Singvla/r. 
 N. bcr ^l^e SL^urm, the high tower 
 G. tea ^o3[ten Slurmea, of the high tower 
 D. bcm ^ol^cn SEl^urme, to the high tower 
 A. ken ^ol^ctt 2;t)urm, the high tower 
 
 Plural. 
 N. fcie lol^en SBftumc, the high trees 
 G. ber ^ol^en SSiiumc, of the high trees 
 D. ten ftol^en SSiiumcn, to the high trees 
 A. tic ^ol^en Siittme, the high trees 
 
 Obs. X. — ^Adjectives denoting nationality have generally the 
 ending tf<^, and begin with a small letter ; e. g., 
 
 amcrifanifi^, American nortBcgifd^, Norwegian 
 
 bairifc^, Bavarian b|bcic^if<i^, Austrian 
 
 kanift^, Danish }>oInif<i^, Polish 
 
 ietttf^, German })ortwgtefif<^, Portuguese 
 
 cnglifi^, English )>rcupf«^, Prussian 
 
 franjbflfiS^, French ruPf«^, Eussian 
 
 grle^if<3^, Greek fSi^^fif"^, Saxon 
 
 ^oUantif^, Dutch fi^wctifjj^, Swedish 
 
 irliinkif^, Irish fronif^, Spanish 
 
 ttaHcnlf4», Italian titrlif(^, Turkish 
 
ADJECTlyES USED SUBSTANTIVELY. 135 
 
 Adjectives used Substantively. 
 
 Obs. XI. — Adjectives in German, as in French, may be used 
 as substantives. They have the same inflection as 
 other adjectives, but begin with a capital letter ; e. g., 
 from geijig, bet @eijigc (French, I'avare), the avari- 
 cious man ; fd)ijn, bit @(^Bne (French, la belle), the 
 beautiful lady. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 ^ngvlar. Plural. 
 
 gefongen, imprisoned 
 
 N. tcr ©efangcnc, the prisoner tic ©efangenen, the prisoners 
 
 G. tc« ©efangcticn, of the " ier ©efangenen, of the " 
 
 D. bem ©efangenen, to the " ten ©efangenen, to the " 
 
 A. ben ©efangenen, the " Me ©efangenen, the " 
 
 fremb, strange, foreign 
 N. eine STerabC, a strange lady grembe, strangers (or some 
 
 strangers) 
 G. ciner gremien, of a " gremier, of strangers 
 
 D. einer gremtcn, to a " grentben, to strangers 
 
 A. eine gremte, a " grembe, strangers 
 
 Obs. XII. — ^After ettoaS, something ; tii«^td, nothing ; toiel, 
 much ; tventg, little ; and. mt\^t, more, adjectives 
 used substantively take the neuter ending of Form 
 Third, (e§); e.g., SttuaS ®uteS, something good; 
 9iic^t3 9leue§, nothing new, i. e., no news. 
 
 Note. — Most Gferman adverbs do not differ from the adjec- 
 tives from which they are derived. They take no equi- 
 valent to the English, ly, or the French, ment, or the Italian, 
 mente. 
 
 Obs. Xm. — ^Adjectives receive a negative meaning by prefix- 
 ing the particle Mtt (English, un, dis, &c.) ; e. g., 
 gliidlid^, happy ; vm%\M\\&i, lenhappy. 
 
 Note. — In like manner the prefix ab is used with parti, 
 ciples ; c. g., gencigt, inclined ; otsencigt, disinclined. 
 
136 
 
 ADJECTIVES nSED SXJBSTANTIVELT. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Cer ipflnbfd^u^mo^cr, the glover 
 tcr Unterrt(^t, (the) instruction 
 tic ©tunbc, the hour, lesson 
 jcr ®ele^rte, the scholar (learn- 
 ed man) 
 i^ tcr ©(^infen, the ham 
 - tcr Ocfantte, the ambassador 
 bic gflinilic, the family 
 tcr 9leifenSc, the traveler 
 in ©cbu^ntttc^cr, the shoemaker 
 kcr 3trBcttcr, the workman 
 Wc Jtntc, the ink 
 bcr Stoc^en, the jaws (of brutes) 
 
 itx S^cc, the tea 
 trinfcn, to drink 
 angcfommen, arrived 
 gcfd^Iagen, beaten 
 frifc^, fresh 
 kicE, thick 
 
 unjufriebcn, ^discontented 
 groufoin, cruel 
 kfui^cn, to visit 
 fagen, to say 
 tttoai, something 
 gcliimpft, fought 
 Ic^t, last 
 
 Reading Exercise XVI. 
 
 ipatten <Sk gutcn, often, rotl^en SCcin? 3d§ |aBe guten, fettctt 
 ©c^inlen unb tBarme ©tt)5pc gc^atit. ®ckn ©ie mir (me) etn ®lai 
 taltti, frifi^ca SBajfer. Sinna war cin 6cru^mter SRiJiner. 5Bir finb 
 in Srcmen geiuefcn; Srcmen iji cin tcutfc^er §afen. 3fi V^t ©c^onc 
 cine Srembe ? "Die cnglifi^cn (Stofcr ftnb fe^r gut. ^abcn ©ic bicfcs, 
 roti^ti ^afiix unb gutc, fi^warje Jinte ? 2^er Slcifcnbe will nsarmcS 
 SBJaffcr |obcn. S5er offcnc 3ta4en lei graufanten SBmcn, 2^ic 
 @d5t»cbcn (Swedes) ^aben ben b&ntfd^cn ®cncral gcfi^Iagen, !Eie 
 grici^ifc^cn ©olbotcn waren fe'^r ta)3fer. ®rogc gamilien iBo^ncn in 
 gro§cn ^aufcrn. ®er cb(c ®raf %at feinen 9lu|m im le^ten ^riege 
 scriorcn. SSrcfl unb ^aurc flnb jwel franjSftf^ Jpafen. 2Bir '^afcen 
 baS rufftfc^e ^ecr gefc'^cn. §umboIbt ijl cin berii^mter bcutf^er ®e* 
 le^rtcr. (Sin frcmbcr Sleifcnbcr ifl |cutc ^tcr angetommcn. !Eer fpa* 
 nifc^c ©cfanbte ^at ben tjclnlfii^en ®efon9cnen befuc^t. "Lit ^o^en' 
 aiiirmc bcr amcrllanifc^cn ^irc^en. TAt ttalicntfc^en ^ecre iabcn 
 gcgen bic oflrcic^if(ifeen ^ccrc gcIom|)ft. ©tettin iji cin prcuf ifd^er $a* 
 fen. 3^ t»itt fcinem often Setter ctwoa 9lcue8 fogen. 
 
THE ADJECTIVE WITHOUT AN AETICLE 137 
 
 Theme XVI. 
 
 Red wine is sour, white wine is sweet. Fresh milk is 
 warm. We shall have good warm soup and fat meat. Have 
 you good black cloth? Voltaire is a French poet. The 
 Dutch ships are in our harbor. Give me (mtr) a glass of 
 good cold water. I have bought these good gloves of your 
 glover. The Turkish ambassador has visited the Saxon pris- 
 oner. Fresh white bread is not very healthy. This young 
 girl has received a very long letter from her little sister.' 
 Every lazy pupU is discontented, if he has (mtt^) to write a 
 long theme. Will you have white or red paper ? Have you 
 green or black tea ? That avaricious [man] has been obliged 
 to seU. this large garden. The American soldiers have con- 
 quered the English soldiers. Have you something new? 
 We have a lightning rod on (auf) the high tower of our new 
 church. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 3|l bos gletfi^ bcr fcttcn ©iinfc ges fRein, ia^ gletfd^ ber fetten Oanfe 
 
 furtb ? i(l ungefunt). 
 
 ipakn ®ie 3^ren goltcnett SRing ^&i ^attc meinc golJcne lH)r »er? 
 
 »ertoren ? loren. 
 
 3|il)eln®rog»atcretn alter SKann? 5iJletn ©ro^satcr ifl cin fc^r alter 
 
 anann. 
 
 SJer ^<A kie Sui^brucEerhtnjt er« ©uttenberg, ein Deutfc^er, '^at He 
 
 funCen ? Sut^trudcrlunfl erfunbcn. 
 
 3jt ©oet^e ein franjojtfd^er Xid)^ ^Rein, ®oet^e ijl eirt krii^mter 
 
 ter ? tcutfi^er ©tester. 
 
 §abert ©ic clncn guteit ®c^u:^s Unfer ©c^u'^moAer ift cin fe^r gu* 
 
 mac^er ? ter Slrkiter. 
 
 Jpotten ttir :§ier nic^t gutc« frifc^es !Da« amerttanifc^e 35ier ift fe^r 
 
 33ier lawfen fiinncn ? fc^Ied^t; |tc miiflien e^ nic^t trin^ 
 
 !ctt. 
 
 aScKcn ®le fcie ncue italienif^e Sd^ njitt bie franjiJIlfc^e 3eitung 
 
 Scitung Icfen ? lefen. 
 
138 
 
 THE ASJEOTIVi: WITHOUT AN AETICLE. 
 
 SBle i)lele (how many) ©ajl^Bfe 
 
 ^abm ©ic in ticfer Heincn 
 
 ©tatit ? 
 Jpa6cn wtr btcfcn Kctncn ^nakn 
 
 jtic^t ^eute auf ter ©tra^e ge* 
 
 fe^cn ? 
 3jt wcigcs Srob ebcnfo Httlg als 
 
 3jl jener Sdetfmbe ctn gremtier? 
 
 ^cibtn ©ic itwai ^ttxH in ter 
 3eitung gcicfen ? 
 
 ^akn ©ie Untcrrtii^t im Deut* 
 f*cn? 
 
 SBir :^aBett jtoci Heine ©ajl^Bfe 
 unt einen fe^r gro^en. 
 
 9lein, wir '^aten iiefen Hetncn 
 
 ^naBen geflem auf lent WaxUe 
 
 gcfc^cn. 
 gg ijl etcnfo BtHlg, afcer nic^t fo 
 
 gut aii iai fc^roarje. 
 3cncr 3lei)"cn»e ifl cin tiinifd^cr 
 
 ©cncral. 
 Wan fagt (it is said), iai fwn* 
 
 jijfifc^e ^ccr l^iitte iai Bflrci^ifc^e 
 
 ipcer gefd)Iagen (beaten). 
 3fl, i^ |a6c , toglic^ (daily) cine 
 
 ©tunbc. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 Site allmiic^ttge §anb. 
 
 9lu^U$eg, aSBol^Itl^ottgcg unt UnentBc^tlt^cg, mi gur ^a^t 
 tung, jur SSetfciliung un6 jutn Obtac^, iikrlaupt jur er^altung 
 kcr (ebcnbcn ©efdjopfe gcprt, finten «5ir in ker Statur. Tiai 
 SSaflFer Ibf^t* unfernf Durfl; aUcrlciJ Sriic^te fiitttgen unfcrn 
 hunger ; toir fintcn SBlaterialicn ju unfcrer SBcHciiung unt jum Sou 
 unferer 2i3o|nungcn. (Sine aQmiii^tigc ^ant t^cllt aua,§ mi wir 
 betiirfcn. 
 
 Sl6er ouc^ (S^BneS, ©to^eS unt ^tvtli^td ^flt ®ott ges 
 
 * Cof^t, third person singular, present tense of the verb lofltcni 
 formed by adding t to the root of the verb, which is found by dropping 
 the infinitive ending, en; e. g., Idfi^scn, lof^st. 
 
 t Unfern instead of unfetcn/ the c before I, n, or r is generally omitted 
 in possessive pronouns as It is in adjectives. 
 
 X Snicrlei, all kinds (see Less. XVIIL, Obs. VI). 
 
 § S^cilt mi, third person singular, present tense of the leparMe verb 
 OUStJcilcn (see Less. XXXIII). 
 
COMPAEISON OP ADJECTIVES. 139 
 
 fi^affett,* teas loir tnit flauncnbtin SntjMctt fcetroc^tcn, toai 
 unfere SBcmurtberung crregt unt unfere ^erjen nttt grcutm erfutlt. 
 Ser ©lanj tea ©temen|iimmcl«, tie SJlorgen* unto 9lknttbt|e, tie 
 Bcrfc^iclicncn ©eftdtett unb garben ter SBoHen, baiS f^iJiiE ©ri'm 
 tcr SBiefen unb Sliitter an ben Saumen, bie Sliit^en unb SSIumen 
 jeigen uni3 f eine ©djiinl^eit unb ^rac^t, bie J unS § rii|rt unb icmegt, 
 unt unfere ©eele ju ®ott in banfbater ^nfcctung ert)e'6t, ba^ er 
 I'citi gropes ©i^ijpfunggwert fo l^ertUdj unb unnac^a^mli^ ges 
 fctjmudtt 1^at. \\ 
 
 LESSON Xyn. Scftion 17. 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives, 
 
 Obs. I. — ^Adjectives have tiie same degrees of comparison in 
 
 German as in English. 
 Obs. n. — The comparative is formed by adding tt to the 
 
 positive ; e. g., rei(^, rich ; reii^et, richer. 
 
 Note. — Adjectives already ending in the positive in e add 
 r only; e. g., ttcifc, wise; weifct) wiser. Those ending in el 
 reject the e of this ending in the compaxative ; e. g., cbcl, 
 noble , cblcr {not cbeler), nobler. 
 
 Obs. m. — The superlative is formed by adding eft to the 
 positive ; e.g., xi^, rude ; ro:^er, ruder ; rol^eft, rudest. 
 
 Obs. IV. — In the comparative and superlative degrees the 
 radical vovyel, a, o, or u of monosyllables is modified; 
 e. g., orm, poor ; atmer, poorer ; nrmcft, poorest. 
 
 * ©efc^affen, past part, of the verb f$a{fen> formed by prefixing gt and 
 adding en» i. «., flefi^affcn. 
 
 f Un8 (us), dative plural of the personal pron. t$ (see Lesson XXII.), 
 governed by jeigen (see p. 379, § 18.). 
 
 X 35ie» used for the relative pron. taclc^e> which, that, (see Less. XXIV.) 
 
 § ttnS (us), accusative plural of ii^ (see Less. XXII., aJso p. 383, § 19). 
 
 J The conjunction iia§ requires the verb to be placed at the end of 
 the sentence (see Lesson XL., Obs, VI.). 
 
140 COMFASraON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Obs. V. — When adjectives end either in t, t, or a sibilant (j, 
 8, ff, ^, f<^), the e before the jl of the superlative 
 becomes essential for the sake of euphony. In 
 other cases it is generally rejected, and ft only is 
 used ; e. g., tailb (wild), tDtltcr, wilceft ; ^ort (hard), 
 :^iirtcr, liirtcft ; f(^»ar§ (black), fc^waracr, fc^warjcft, &c.; 
 but, Bar (clear), Harer, tiatft ; fc^ulJig (culpable), f^uU 
 bigcr, ((^ulnigfl. 
 
 Obs. VI. — Adjectives in the comparative or superlative de- 
 gree are declined precisely like other adjectives (see 
 Less. XVI.), i. e., they take the article and have the 
 inflection of the second declension ; e. g., ter alterc, 
 the older ; bcr ditefic, the oldest ; Icr ormerc, the 
 poorer ; tier drmfte, the poorest. 
 
 Obs. Vn. — Besides the regular form of the superlative, pre- 
 ceded by the article, and agreeing with the noun in 
 gender, number, and case, called the attributive formj 
 a circumlocution is employed, which consists of the 
 preposition on and the definite article lent (governed 
 by the preposition in the dative), contracted into 
 out, and the adjective in the dative case ; e. g., turj 
 (short), am liirjcjlett. This form is called the pre- 
 dicative or adverbial form, and is used after the aux- 
 iliary verb fciti at the end of a sentence ; e. g., biefer 
 2;akf {|l am. ftdrfftett, this tobacco is (the) 
 strongest. 
 
 Obs. Vm. — In like manner the preposition auf is contracted 
 with the article of the neuter gender fcaS (governed 
 by the preposition in the accusative) into aufd and 
 is employed with adjectives in the superlative ; e. g., 
 aufa fc^iinfle. The use of this adverbial form is not 
 so common as that with am. It is chiefly employed 
 to denote excellence or eminence rather than to ex- 
 press comparison ; e. g., 5a« $au8 unfere^ ^Ra^Bor^ ifl 
 a«f§ ft^dnfte eingcric^tet, the house of our neighbor 
 is arranged most beautifully. (See also Lesson on 
 Adverbs, p. 317.) 
 
OOMPAEISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 141 
 
 Adjectives in their three Degrees. 
 
 Positioe. Oompa/rative. Superlative. 
 
 Sibilant. 
 
 rict {bU, ba&) fii^cflc, the 
 ftt^, sweet fiiper, sweeter i sweetest, or 
 
 i am [ttpcftctt, (the) sweetest 
 Ending in t. 
 
 f Alc&t bad mt&ttt worse i *^* f^'c^StcftP/ ^^^ ^o^st, or 
 \mtm, bad \mmt, worse I ^^ ,-(|iec^tcftett, (the) worst 
 
 Ending in e. 
 
 toeife, wise tucifcr, wiser 
 
 (ber weifeftc, the wisest, or 
 1 am wcifeften, (the) wisest 
 
 j feet cbetftc, the noblest, or 
 1 OTO eielftCtt, (the) noblest 
 
 (feet reidjftc, the richest, or 
 ( am. rei^ftCM, (the) richest 
 
 Ending in el. 
 
 cfecl, noble ebler, nobler 
 
 Superlative rejecting the e. 
 rcic^, rich reii^cr, richer 
 
 Modified vowel. 
 
 ftarf strong- darter stronser i *" f *''^^^*"'' *^® ^*''^°^^®''*' "'" 
 ftatf, strong )tOrtCt, stronger 1^^ (larlftett, (the) strongest 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Obs. IX. — ^Adjectives of two or more syllables, monosyllables 
 containing the diphthong au, as, Hau, taut, etc., and 
 those contained in the following list, do not admit 
 of the m.odification of the radical vowel. 
 
 Hafj, pale 
 t- bunt, speckled 
 falf(^, false 
 flai^, flat 
 fro^, merry 
 ()0^I, hollow 
 '^ t)olE, kind 
 ' fa^t,bald 
 i- farg, scanty 
 flar, clear 
 
 tnapp, close, scarce 
 Ial§m, lame 
 hi, loose 
 ntatt, tired 
 morfc^, rotten 
 nadt, naked 
 Jjlatt, flat 
 })IumlJ, clumsy 
 u ro|, raw, rude 
 runt, round 
 
 fanft, soft 
 fi^toff, slack 
 fc^Ianf, slender 
 fc^roff, rugged 
 (larr, stiff 
 flolj, proud 
 Pumpf, blunt 
 toll, mad 
 Bott, fuU 
 ja'^nt, tame 
 
142 COMPAKISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Irregular and Defective Forms, 
 
 Obs. X. — The following adjectives are irregular in their com- 
 parison : 
 
 Podtive. Compwratvoe. Superlative. 
 
 gro^, great grijger, greater tcrgrij^te,omgro^ten, the greatest 
 
 gut, good bejfcr, better ter 6e|ie, am 6c(lcn, the best 
 
 ^o4, high ^o^er, higher ber mfic, am ^b(^(len, the highest 
 
 na^c, near nii^er, nearer bcrnad^(lc,omnodfeflcn, the nearest 
 
 Bid, much mel)r, more tcr meijle, ant meijlen, the most 
 
 Obs. XI. — The following adjectives derived from adverbs of 
 place, or prepositions, have under a comparative 
 form a positive signification, and are for this reason 
 without a positive form. 
 
 kcr (iuf ere, the exterior (outer) ; ber Su§crfle,the extremest, utmost 
 bcr innere, the interior, inner; ber tnncr|lc, the innermost 
 bcr o6cre, the upper, superior; ber oBcrjle, the uppermost 
 ber untere, the lower, inferior; ber unterjie, the lowest, undermost 
 ber mtttlere, the middle; ber mittclfle, the middlemost 
 
 ber ^intere, the hinder; bcr linterpc, the hindermost 
 
 ber sorbcre, thd front — , fore — ; ber Borbcrjle, the foremost 
 
 Obs. XH. — 1. The English method of comparing dissyllabic 
 and polysyllabic adjectives with moee and most is 
 properly applicable in German only when two ad- 
 jectives, both qualifying the same subject, are com- 
 pared with each other ; e. gr., ©ie ^abcn me^c ©litd 
 flts SSerflanb, you have mme luck than sense. 
 Note.— On the conjunction ol8, here used (see p. 333, II., 3). 
 2. As in English, there is also in German an ah- 
 solute superlative formed by prefixing to the positive 
 such adverbs as iiu§erfl, ^bi^fl, fe^r, iilicrauS ; e. g., cin 
 au^etft fluger SWenfd), an extremely smart man. 
 
COMPARISON or ADJECTIVES. 143 
 
 Obs. Xm. — Sometimes the word alter (genitive plural of all), 
 
 , of all, is prefixed to the superlative, to give intensity 
 
 of meaning, as : ter flUcrj^arfjle, the strongest of all, 
 
 i. e., the very strongest ; am aUcrBcficn, the best of 
 
 aU, i. e., the very best. 
 
 Obs. XrV. — In comparative sentences, as, followed by an ad- 
 jective and another as, is rendered in German by 
 elfcnfo — olS ; e. g., she is as old as I, fte ifl ebenfo 
 aft olS id^, and not so — as by tti4>t fo — ol8, Fred- 
 erick was not so fortunate as his sister, grlebri^ war 
 ttic^t fo QlMi&i al§ feinc ©c^iDc^cr. 
 
 Obs. XV. — As — again is rendered by noify etttntal fo, or 
 ioppilt fo — ; e. g., you are as old again as my 
 brother, ©ie |tnb tio^ eintnal fo aft, (or bopptlt 
 
 fo aft) ali tnein Sruticr. 
 
 Obs. XVI. — When a relation between two comparatives is ex- 
 pressed, the English the — the before them is ren- 
 dered je— ^efto ; e. g.. The greater the gain, the 
 smaller the loss, 3c grii^er ber ©ciBinn, &cfto Keiner 
 ber SBcrlttjl. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 bag Slftcrt^um, antiquity ber 3Bcg, the way 
 
 bie SRcjlbcns, the residence baS S^ier, the animal 
 berSujlanbjthe condition, state ber SRonb, the moon 
 
 ber Sa6acf, the tobacco bie ©onne, the sun 
 
 bfc Sanne, the fir-tree bie (Srbe, the earth 
 
 bie gtc^e, the oat-tree noc^ cinmal, once more 
 
 ber Seller, the plate eBenfo— aU, as— as 
 
 ber a^ctl, the part Jc— bc^o, the— the 
 
 bo« ©ilkr, the silver immer, always 
 
 ba« SSIct, the lead aUgemciti, generally 
 
 fc^wer, heavy, difScult ru^ig, quiet 
 
 fi^tec^t, bad aft, old 
 
144 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Reading Exercise XVII. 
 
 2)cr gro§e gluf , Me grijgere ©ce, bas grb^te .5!Kcer. Dlcfe Zintt t|l 
 f^wSrjcr ; fie ijt »icf kffer. SJcr ^unt tfl flcin, tic ^a^e iji Helner, 
 bic 9Rau3 i^ om Heinflcn. Dcr 3lpfclbaum i(l '^oi^, bic Si^c t(i l)o^cr, 
 unb bic SEanne ijl am l)mien ; bic Sanne ifl »ort biefen bcr l^iJAfte 
 aSaum. Eic SRomer tuaren baa ta))fer(le Solf tea 2irtcrt:^umi3. !!:« 
 (hrcngflen ®cfc^c finb nid)t imracr bic Bejten. Der 3«|t<tnl' t''^ rbmi? 
 fc^en aieic^es war fc^Iec^tcr untcr a:i6eriu« afe unter 3lugufiu3. S^cr 
 §ofen ^amBurge ifl ber grbptc in Dcuifd^Ianb. Diefcr ^na6c ^at fcinc 
 Slufgak kpr gcmac^t <di feinc ^amerabcn. !Dte ^aufcr in ^axii 
 finb im Sldgemcinen (generally) lij^er oU bic ^aufcr in Serlin, abn 
 bic ©tragcn SBcrlinS ftnb Breitcr aU bic ©teamen »on ^axii. SBien, 
 bic Jpauptflatt son Deflrcic^, tfl gr5§cr aU aJZiini^cn, bic Jpauptflabt 
 »on Saicrn. ©t. 5)ctcrSburg, bic SRcftbcnj beg ^aifera, ifl bic fd^ijnfic 
 ©tabt in 3lupIonb. "Die furjejlcn SBegc finb nld)t immer bic bcficn. 
 3|r waret mc:^r luflig aU traurig. Dcr ©ta|I ifl bas Prtcfle, oter 
 a ifl nic^t ba« fc^werfle SKctaU. I^icfer ipelb i^ par!, tcin Dnlcl ifl 
 flSrtcr, oBcr unfer Stac^bar ifl ber atlcrflarlflc. ©cine 9lic6te :^at ba3 
 t^eucrjlc unb fdjbnfle ^tcib in bcr ©tabt. ©inb biefe Seller eknfo 
 flac^ ali bic SeUcr bciner SEantc ? ^azoi ip nic()t fo reii^ aU fetn 
 SJettcr. 3' gri3§cr ber ®e»inn, bcflo rctdjer bcr SWonn. 23a3 SBaffcr 
 bes 3fl|eine3 ifl flarcr aU bas aCaffcr ber Dber. SBaa tfl fiipcr ali 
 Jponig ? 
 
 Theme XVII. 
 
 Our church is higher than your church. Gold is more 
 precious than silver ; it is the most precious metal. The 
 richest people are not always the best. This sheep is useful, 
 that horse is more useful, but the cow is the most useful 
 animal. The earth is larger than the moon, the sun is the 
 largest. My aunt is the richest woman in the city. Are we 
 not happier than the poor ? The upper part is shorter than 
 the lower. Let us (un^) go to the nearest church. This 
 house is very clumsy, it is clumsier than the house of thy 
 cousin. The best bread is always the cheapest. Anna is 
 the most attentive girl, Frederick the most diligent boy. 
 
COMPABISON or ADJEOTIYES. 
 
 145 
 
 "Who is the largest? Is lead the heaviest metal? Nelson 
 is as celebrated as Wellington. The innermost part. John 
 is as old again as you. The qtiieter a life is, the hap- 
 pier it is. The rose is the most beautiful flower. American 
 tobacco is stronger than German tobacco. The houses of 
 my aunt are arranged (eingerid^tet) most beautifully. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 §ateri ©ie S^rcn &vitn neucn 
 
 §ut »crIoren ? 
 Sft Sltnalie Heincr, aU Staxl ? 
 3ii 2utfe etn aufmcrffame« SJlftJ* 
 
 §a|ltufrifd)efuge«!«i^? 
 
 2BcI(|er mam ijt am jiarlflcn? 
 
 Sffier ij^ flcigiger, SacoB obcr gers 
 
 ktnant ? 
 HBeli^e grou i^ bie fc^onflc ? 
 
 Iffielc^es SKetaU ifl am Prteficn ? 
 
 3i^ tic Mvi^ ebcnfo grop,. aU iai 
 95ferb ? 
 
 3ft bcr 3:|urm bicfes ^aufes cBenfo 
 t)o^ al« bcr I^urm unfercr 
 mv6^t ? 
 
 aCclc^c^ SSoI! keg 3lltcrt|um^ war 
 am tapfcrfien ? 
 
 3<^ ^aU mcinen k^en unb fc^iins 
 
 |lcn Jput Bcrioren. 
 D nein, 3lmoUc iji Biel griigcr. 
 £uife ijl ba3 aufmertfamfle SWab^ 
 
 djcn in ber ®^ulc. 
 Wltine ^u^ gictt (gives) bie 
 
 fii^c^c SJiild) im "Eorfe. 
 Unfer 9iocfe6ar iji ber attcrflarlflf 
 
 mam. 
 3aco6 ifl Biel flei§tger, cr iji ber 
 
 flcipigjie unb befle ©d^iiter. 
 ©cine Sante iji bie fc^bnjle unb 
 
 rei(^jle grau in ber ©tabt. 
 S)cr ©ta^l iji am prteflcn, okr . 
 
 iai ©oId iji am nii^Iic^jlen. 
 9Zein, bie ^xiij iji Heincr, ali bo3 
 
 5)fcrb, unb ber ^unb iji am 
 
 flcirtPen. 
 Stein, ber a:|urm unfcrcr A'ir^e 
 
 i^ »iel Ib^cr. 
 
 S)ic aiomer waren iai tapitx\ic, 
 bie Oriec^cn ba8 -gele^rtefte 
 SSoIf, 
 
146 
 
 THE NUMERALS. 
 
 LESSON XVin. Scftiott 18. 
 
 The Numerals. (2)ic So^Ittiortcr.) 
 
 Obs. I. — The numerals are either definite, e. g., jwei, two ; 
 or indefinitb, e. g., »telc, many. 
 
 Obs. II. — The definite numerals are divided into Caedinal 
 and ORDiNAii. 
 
 I. Cardinal Numbers. (©runtijo^Icn.) 
 
 ein, e (cin«), one 
 
 3»ei, two 
 
 Sret, three 
 
 sicr, four 
 
 fiinf, five 
 
 I'ec^a, six 
 
 fickn, seven 
 
 a^t, eight 
 
 iieun, nine 
 
 je^n, ten 
 
 f(f, eleven 
 
 jwijlf, twelve 
 
 treijel^tt, thirteen 
 
 »ier§cil^n, fourteen 
 
 fitnfjeW (yr fMtfjcI^n, fifteen 
 
 fec^jcl^n, sixteen 
 
 ftebenjel^tt or jteBjel^n, seven- 
 teen 
 
 adjtgcl^n, eighteen 
 
 neunjc|>tt, nineteen 
 
 awanjifl, twenty 
 
 eitt utiB jwanjig, twenty-one 
 
 jmei unli jwattjig, twenty-two, 
 etc. 
 
 brei^ig, thirty 
 
 cttt unb brei^ig, thirty-one, etc. 
 
 Bicrjig, forty 
 
 fiinfjig or funfitg, fifty 
 
 fcc^jig, sixty 
 
 ftcknjig or (icijig, seventy 
 
 ac^tjig, eighty 
 
 ttcunjig, ninety 
 
 lunbcrt, a hundred 
 
 ^unbcrt unb eina, a hundred and 
 
 one 
 l^unbert unb gftel, etc. 
 gwei^unbcrt, two hundred 
 Irei^unbcrt, three hundred 
 sicr^unbert, four hundred 
 taufenb, a thousand 
 jioeitoufcnb, two thousand 
 jc^ntaufens, ten thousand 
 fiinfjigtaufenc, fifty thousand 
 lunlerttaufenB, a hxmdred 
 
 thousand 
 einc Syjittion, a million 
 jwet SiJltttioncn, two millions 
 1868, cintaufcnb ac^t^unbert (or 
 
 a^tjcl^nl^uttbert) acbt unb 
 
THE numerals: 147 
 
 Note 1. — Notice that the numbers 13 to 19 inclusive add the 
 particle je^n (the English teen), and from 20 to 90 inclusively 
 with the exception of thirty,* the alEx jig (the English ty). 
 
 Note 2. — ©in* is used only in counting : e. g., t'mi, jwei ; 
 einmal cin* ijl eina. And when no allusion or reference is 
 made to any particular object ; e. g., ii (lat ein* gefd)Iageit, it 
 has struck one. When one is followed by a substantive or 
 by another numeral, cilt is used instead ; e. g., ein 3)fuilb. 
 
 Note 3.— In some compounds jwie is used instead of jwci; 
 e. g., jttiefa^, double; SwWaif, biscuit (twice baked). 
 
 Note 4. — A hundred, a thousand, is in German ^unbert, 
 taufcnb, (not cin^unbert, &c.) ; but the English one hundred, one 
 thousand is cin^unbett and cintaufenb respectively. 
 
 Note 5. — The numerals are declined like other adjectives. 
 
 Obs. he. — f^ivi {one) is declined like the indefinite article, 
 but has a stronger accent, and begins usually with 
 a capital ; e. g., ®itt iKann, one man. When imme- 
 diately before a noun or before an adjective quali- 
 fying a noun, expressed or understood, it has the 
 inflection of attributive adjectives. (See Less. XVl); 
 e. g., bcr @ine SSJlann, the one man ; tern ®inctt ijl p 
 warm, bcm 9lntcren ju fait, the one is too warm, the other 
 too cold ; §a6en <Sle einen §ut ? §ier ift ctticr. ^ot cr cine 
 ®aM? fir^at cine, ^ojl fcu ctn«!Kc(Tcr? 3c^ ^a6c cinS. 
 
 Obs. IV. — ^toti and fcrct not preceded by the article add Ct 
 ia the genitive, and cn in the dative ; e. g., tie ^ijt)c 
 jwciet iKdnner, the height of two men ; tic iEruppcn 
 breict ©taatcn, the troops o^ three States. 
 
 Rem. — The other numerals all admit of the end- 
 ing of the dative when employed as nouns ; e. g., 
 nttt ©c^fen fo:§rcn, to drive (with) six (horses) ; au\ 
 aHcn SBicrctt gc^cn, to crawl on all fours (i. e., hands 
 and feet). 
 
 Obs. V. — When the cardinals stand before nouns expressing 
 measure, weight, or quantity, the noun must be in 
 the singular; e. g., Qnd ^a^, fiinf ^funJ, a(^t ©tud.f 
 
 * The word brei ending in a vowel, {jig is added, instead of jig, to pre- 
 vent a harshness of sound, f See p. 64, 3. 
 
148 Tax NTMBBALS. 
 
 Exc. — ^The following noims ending in c are ex- 
 cepted : tie ^lafc^e, the bottle ; bic Ranut, can ; 
 lie Sonne, ton ; Sic @Ue, ell ; tie fffteile, mile. 
 
 Obs. VI. — From the cardinals the following numerals are 
 formed : 
 
 1. The Vaeutives, by the affix let (equivalent to 
 Sltt, kind) ; e. g., eincrlei, of one kind ; jwcicrlct, 
 of two kinds, &c. The syllable er is inserted for 
 sake of euphony. 
 
 2. The MuLTiPLioAirvES, by the affix fa«^ (fold) 
 or fattig ; e. g., einfac^ or einfaltig, single ; jreei* 
 fO(^ or groeifaltig, double ; it^nfatfy or je^nfaltig, 
 tenfold, &c.* 
 
 3. The Itebatives, by the affix ntal; e. g., cinmol, 
 once ; gmeintol, twice, &c. 
 
 4. The DisTKiBnTrvEs (Latin, bini, temi, &c.,) are 
 in German, as in English, formed by coupling the 
 cardinals by the conjunction unt ; e. g., jwci un& 
 jwci, tyro and two. Instead of the conjunction, unt, 
 the adverb jc (ever) may be used like the phrase at 
 a time ; e. g., \t trei, three at a time. 
 
 Obs. Vll. — ^The English expression what o'clock or what time, is 
 translated luie Siel Ul&r ; as, What o'clock (what time) 
 is it? SBic Biel U^r if! e^ ? When speaking of the 
 hour \fa\h (half) and Vtettel (quarter) are placed 
 before the next number ; as, 1a(6 titer (half past three) 
 literally half (towards) four ; cin SSlertcI auf fed)3 (a 
 quarter past five) literally a quarter towards (of) six. 
 
 Obs. Vm. — The practice, in English, of placing (me or ones 
 after the adjective is not admissible in German ; 
 e. g., a good one, cln gutet (fem. cine gutc, neut. cin 
 guteS), 
 
 * Compare English hie, as in double, treble, &c. ; Latin, plex, from 
 pUeo = to fold ; e. g., simplex (sine plex) = without a fold ; duplex, &c.; 
 Greek, jrHotJf ; e. g., iLnXov^ = double. — Prof. Codington. 
 
THE NCTMESALS. 149 
 
 70CABULAEY. 
 
 bic ©aule, the column tie JpB|e, the height 
 
 let $Ia^, the place tie ©eburt, the birth 
 
 tcr ^atfer, the emperor tic Stafi^e, the bottle (flask) 
 
 tie SBoii^e, the week gefangen, caught 
 
 tic SCtttwc, the -widow fc^on, already 
 
 p'-fd)offcn, shot fasten, to drive 
 
 Reading Exercise on the Cardinal Numbers. 
 
 Dcr attc ^'a^tx l^at ac^t Jpafcn unt fiinf Sftc'^c gefi^ojycrt. Der jungc 
 ©artner unfcrcS reic^en Dnfcia |at Bier Sftatten gcfangcn. Unfer ^fert 
 ■^at tie Jpb^c cincs SJlannca. 3n» S^nuar tsirt ter ®raf mit SSicrcit 
 fa^ren. Sifl tu rteficnjc^n 3a^« alt ? ipier ifl treierlei 2:uc^, <Sic 
 miijfen cincrici Juc^ fiir cincn giod :^akn. SSir fint treimal in 5)ari3 
 unt ncunmal in Sonton gcwcfen. Sic »iel ^^funt Si^div reirft tu fau* 
 fen ? <3ie miiffcn gwei '^aar neue ipantfi^u^c faufen. SBoHcn ©ic jtuci 
 unt jmanjig Stten gute3 Suc^ !aufcn? 3^r tniijjt jc jmei in iai ^aui 
 ge^en. X)ic grope ©iiule, auf tern ^la^c Vendome in ^^aris, l^at 
 cine §o^e son ^untert unt fiinf unt treiptg S«§. ®tc Silnfaule tes 
 ^oifers Jflapoleon, roel^e auf ticfcr ©iiule ifi, |at cine §i3^c son je^n 
 f5uf . £er Jlirc^t^urm Bon ©trapburg iji Bier '^untert unt fe(^« unt 
 treipig gug |o4 'Sic Slbc ijl ^untcrt unt fiinfjig ?DteiIen lang. !Eie 
 Sifenk^n Bon Serlin nat^ ^omfcurg ^at cine Sange Bon a&it unt 
 treipig teutf(^en 5WeiIen. Sic SHeformation (Reformation) in 
 Dcutfd^Iant Bcgann (commenced) im 3a|re 1517, lint ter treigig? 
 ja^rigc ^ricg im 3a:^rc 1618. Siccro tear romifc^er Sonful im 3'o^re 
 63 Bor e^rifli ©eburt. 
 
 Theme on the Cardinal Numbers. 
 
 He has only one fork. The old house of the poor widow 
 has^ only a height of three men. How many horses has the 
 king of Prussia ? Is your youngest son sixteen years old ? 
 My eldest daughter is twenty-one years old. Mary shall buy 
 
150 
 
 THE NUMEBALS. 
 
 six pounds of coffee and four yards of black cloth. Have 
 you a pair of stockings ? I shall have one dozen shirts. Gtive 
 me (mlr) one bottle of good red v(rine*and two bottles of 
 sweet French wine.* This little cat has caught four mice and 
 one rat. A week has seven days, a month has four weeks, 
 and a year has twelve months, fifty-two weeks, or three hun- 
 dred and sixty-five days. Mahommed lived (lebte) in the 
 year 622. Europe is about (uttgefoI)r) 3,250,000 square miles 
 in extent (gro^), and has about 250,000,000 inhabitants. The 
 city of London has 800 streets, 550 churches, and more than 
 3,250,000 inhabitants. The highest tower of Breslau has a 
 height of 385 feet. 
 
 11. The Ordinal Numbers. 
 
 tier crftc, the first 
 
 tcr jweitc, the second 
 
 ter trittc, the third 
 
 ber »ierte, the fourth 
 
 ■fcer fiinftc, the fifth 
 
 ber fcc^ete, the sixth 
 
 ber jtebcntc, the seventh 
 
 ier ac^tc, the eighth 
 
 kcr ncuntc, the ninth 
 
 ber jclntc, the tenth 
 
 bcr- etftc, the eleventh 
 
 bcr jwMftc, the twelfth 
 
 ber bretjc^nte, the thirteenth 
 
 bcr uierje'^ntc, the fourteenth 
 
 bcr fiinfjel^ntc, the fifteenth 
 
 bcr fcc^jc'^nte, etc. 
 
 bcr brcipigfte, the thirtieth 
 
 ber sierjlgfie, the fortieth 
 
 bcr fiinfjigflc, the fiftieth 
 
 ber fec^jigjie, the sixtieth 
 
 ber ficknjigfle {or flefcaigfle), the 
 
 seventieth 
 bcr o^tjigfle, the eightieth 
 bcr ncunjigjle, the ninetieth 
 ber ^unbertjie, the hundredth 
 ber ^unbert unb crfle, the hun- 
 dred and first 
 ber lunbert unb jwcitc, etc. 
 bcr ^unbert unb jwanjigjle 
 bcr jtueifeunbcrtfle 
 
 ber brcil^unbcrtfic, the three hun- 
 dredth, etc. 
 bcr taufenbfle, 
 
 ber 3»an3tgfte, the twentieth 
 bcr cinunb jttanjigPc, the twenty- ber jtDcitaufenbfle 
 first ber jcl^ntaufenbflc, 
 
 ber jmet unb jWanaiglte, etc. bcr (bic, bag) Ic^te, the last 
 
 * Use genitive here and see p. 369, § 10, 3, 6. 
 
THE NUMEEAIiS. 151 
 
 Obs. IX. — The ordinals are formed from the cardinals, up to 
 the 19th inclusiye (Ccr erfle, brttte and flcijtc excepted), 
 by adding tc, and from the 20th upwards, by adding 
 ftc, and are preceded by the article. They are de- 
 clined like adjectives. 
 
 Obs. X. — In compound numbers the last only is ordindl, the 
 others remain cardinals ; as, the 1238th, ber jwblfs 
 '^unbert ai^t uni trei^tgftc. 
 
 Obs. XI. — ^In place of ter jiuette, &er an^ete (Latin, alius), the 
 other, is used ; but only when no more than two 
 objects are referred to ; e. g., ein 3lrm i(l litrjcr ali ter 
 an^ere, one arm is shorter than the other. 
 
 Obs. Xn. — Det crftc and bcr le^te, when referring to two . 
 persons or objects, take generally the form of the 
 comparative ; e. g., the former, bcr (tie, tai) er(lctc, 
 the latter, itx (tie, iai) Ic|terc. 
 
 Obs. Xni. — ^From the ordinals the following compound 
 numerals have been formed : 
 
 1. The Fractionals (with the exception of f^alb) 
 by adding the letter 1 ; e. g., eln Drittel, a third part 
 or one third ; ein SBtcrtel, a fourth part or a quarter. 
 The fractionals are declined like neuter nouns. 
 
 Note 1. — The syllable tel is a corruption of the word 
 Z^tili a part, a deal. 
 
 Note 3 — §al6( half, is an adjective, and is placed ,a/i!«r the 
 article ; e. g., half a day, tin ^alber S^ag. 
 
 2. The Dimidiatives, by adding the word l^alb. 
 Their signification is pecuhar; e. g., !Dritte^aIb* 
 (literally the third half) means two whole ones and a 
 half of the third. Siertektt = 3^. (Sometimes the 
 c before ^16 is omitted ; e. g., sicrtl^rtlb, fiinft^jalb.) 
 It is not usual to say 3»cttel§flI6, but anbertl^alb 
 (really att^ete ^16, the C is exchanged for t for 
 sake of euphony). T/Xxiitifaih ^cAjXt, two years 
 and a half; eiert^rtlb SHcn, three yards and a half ; 
 onbertbolb SKonatc, one month and a half. But 
 we may also say. Bier unt eine %a&t Slle. The half 
 means fcic Jpiilfte. 
 
 * Compare Latin sestertius (semi-tertius) = originally 2^ Ases. 
 
162 
 
 THE NUMEnALS. 
 
 3. The Distinctires, by adding CttS, the final e 
 of the ordinal being thrown out ; e. g., cr^CttS (in- 
 stead of which we also say ix\i\i6»), first, firstly ; 
 }tvettett@, brittenS, ^iertend, etc. 
 
 Note. — The distinctives are by some granunarians called 
 Ordinal Adm&rbs. 
 
 Bem. — Among distinctives may also be classed a num- 
 ber of numeral nouns formed from the CAEDraALS by 
 suffixing cr, which serves to indicate the age of a per- 
 son, and the names and values of certain coins; e. g., 
 
 etn Dretgtger, a man of thirty 
 
 cine ©ec^jigcrin, a woman of sixty 
 
 ein Jlrcier, three German pennies (Prussian coin not quite a 
 
 cent) 
 ,ein ©e^fer, six German pennies (nearly one cent and a half). 
 
 Obs. XIV. — There is also a sort of mtenvgatim ordinal formed 
 from t>»ic (how) and t>itl (much) which is used 
 when we wish to put questions as to number ; e. g., 
 What day of the month is it to-day? bet tvietfielte 
 ift l^ente? or, fccn toieuieften tti SKonate ^aUn wir 
 
 VOCABULART. 
 
 tai Sfl'^r^uttbcrt, the century bic Piaffe, the class 
 
 iai ^Bnigrcic^, the kingdom iai SBcrf, the work 
 
 bcr 9Rorgen, the morning tcr ©icg, the victory 
 
 Me §alfte, the half i-gegcnwarttg, present 
 
 gewonncn, won, gained gew5^nli(|, generally, custom- 
 
 ^»er|cirat^ct, married arily 
 
 i^ Beina|e, almost i- ungelorfam, disobedient 
 
 c^rifHid), christian (-like) au^, also 
 
 , ter, tic, baS SSorigc, the last IcBcn, to live 
 bas 2lltcrt^um, antiquity iai SIcf, the lead 
 
 bic SHcltbenj, the residence angcmcin, generally 
 
 baS @itkr, the silver fd^wer, difficult, heavy 
 
THE NOMEEALS. 153 
 
 Beading Exercise XVIII. 
 
 ®er 3<t"«flr ifl ber crjle SKonat fces 3at)rc5, ter ©ienjlag ier fcritte 
 Sag ler SBodie. ^einric^ toav in ten le^tcn Sagcn Eer oorigcn 22oc^e 
 in 9Jliind)en. !Den wicsicttcn iti SKonats '^akn roir '^eute ? 'Dies 
 (contraction for biefeS) i»or mcin erflcS ®lai Sier, cs fott au4 taa 
 le^te feln. tinl 2lc^tet ftn* ^lie Jpiilfte son trei SSiertel. Sonftantin ber 
 ®ro§e wax ber crjle djrifitid^c ^aifer ber Si'mtx. Die Deutfi^en ^aBcnbie 
 ©dfelac^t 6ci Setpjig iibcr bie granjofen, am fec^jel^nten, ftetjc^ntcn unb 
 od^tjelintcn Dctofcer im Sa^^rc 1813, gemonnen. "Die trei uerMnteten 
 (allied) gurf^en, Sranj I. (ber Srjlc), A'aifer »on Dcfireid), griebri^ 
 9BiIl)cIjn ni. (ber Dritte), ^ijntg »on fnu^m, unb 2llc)canbcr I. (ber 
 Srflc), itaifer son Stuptanb, tuaren in biefer ©i^Iadit gegenredrttg. 
 !Ecine Jante ifl cine Dreijjigerin. ipakn @ie cinen .?preu(ji|'d)en 
 l;reter ? !r;eitt 33ruber :^at Ber|'(!^iebcne gctjier t er^cns ifl er Mnget)or* 
 fam, jtueitenS f^jielt er ju ijici, unb brittena ijl cr unaufmerffant. 5)cter 
 ber ®ropc, ^aifcr Bon SHu^tanb, fiarb (died) am (or ben) ad^ten 
 gcbruar 1725. grieSridill., ber @roge genannt (surnamed), ^bnig 
 son ^Jrcu^en, |at bie Sluffen in ber ®4Ia($t M 3ornborf, am 25(lcn 
 Stugujl 1758, krtcgt. Subirig XIV., ^bnig »on Sranfreid), fiarB 
 (died) in SSerfaides am crfien ©eptemkr 1715. §einri(^ "VTII., 
 ^onig Bon Snglanb, war fec^smal Berl^eiraf^et; fein ©o'^nStwarbYI. 
 ftarB (died) ben fe^Sten 3uli 1553. 3fl eS cin SSiertcl auf Bier ? 
 Unfere Silac^krin war anbcrtl^alB ^a^n in ©jjanien. 
 
 Theme XVIII. 
 
 It was beautiful during the last week in May. Saturday 
 is the seventh, Sunday the first day of the week. Prussia 
 became a kingdom the 18th of January, 1701. WilHam the 
 First is the seventh king of Prussia. The other six kings 
 of Prussia were Frederic I., Frederick William, Frederick II., 
 surnamed (genannt) the Great; Frederick William 11.; Fred- 
 erick William HI., and Frederick William IV. We read 
 our newspaper every morning at (um) a quarter to eighf. 
 What day of the month is [it] to-day ? Charles V., Emperor 
 of Germany, died (fiarB) in the year 1558. Charles X., a 
 brother of Louis XYU., and Louis XYHI., died (jlarb) in 
 
154 
 
 TEE NTTMERALS. 
 
 Germany, in his eightieth year. What time is it ? Eomulus 
 and Eemus founded (griinteten) Eome in the year 753 before 
 Christ. The Thirty Years' (irei^igjii^^rtge) "War began (kgann) 
 in the year 1618. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 ffieli^es ijlfcie ^iilfte »on | ? 
 SSas |at fcer Soger gcfd^ojfen? 
 
 2Bie lange ^aScn ©ie in StflHen 
 
 gelcBt? 
 3n tuetc^cm So'^r'^unbcrtc tcBcn 
 
 »tr? 
 fflSic»ieIi|i 10 mat 10? 
 SBie uiel Ttnt) 35 unt 198 ? 
 Urn iuic stet U|r gc^^en ©ie ju 
 
 Sett? 
 $aien ©ie nur einerlei %Vi^ ivl 
 
 sertaufen? 
 
 2Bic oU ijl 31r jiingjler ®o|n ? 
 
 SCann Begann (commenced) tie 
 gieformation in !r:cutf(^IanS)? 
 
 2Bar SJonnerStag nic^t kcr a&iU 
 3et)nte ? 
 
 ffl3ie»ietU|rifle«? 
 
 SBann flari Mxl ber gilnfte? 
 
 SBar §einrt(^ Vm. nte|r ofo eln* 
 
 maf scr^elrat^et ? 
 2Cie alt, glaukn ©ie, ifl 3|re 
 
 sRt(i^te? 
 SCo unb tuanrt ^arS ^arl XIL, 
 
 flijnig »on ©c^wcben? 
 
 ■Die Jpalfte son | ifl | oter /g. 
 Sr ^at 3»ei ^afen unb »icr IRt^t 
 
 gefc^ojfen. 
 3c^ ia6c ncun ^Jlonate unb fec^S 
 
 2:age bort (there) gcle6t. 
 aBir tekn im 19tcn 3<i^r|unbert, 
 
 im 3a|re 1868. 
 10 mal 10 ifl 100. 
 35 unb 198 Tmb 233. 
 iB3ir gc:§en ge»o|nItc^ urn brci 
 
 SSicrtelaufje^nju Sett. 
 D nein, ic^ '^abe »telerlci Suc^*, 
 
 \&i %ahi fc^warjea, rott}e3 unb 
 
 griineg. 
 9>Zein jiingjler ©o^n i[l ttc^t unb 
 jmanjig '^d^xt alt. 
 !E;ic ^Reformation in "Ecuti'dilanb 
 
 Begann im '^a^n 1517. 
 Donnergtag war ber cin unn 
 
 jtoanjiglie. 
 ga iji nac^ fec^3 U^r, c3 ijl Bcinolje 
 
 clnSSicrtel auf ftetcn. 
 ^arl ber gitnfte (larb im 34rf 
 
 1558. 
 $elnrlc^ Vm. war fcc^^mal Ber« 
 
 l|etrat|et. 
 SJlclne 9lt(^te mug cine SSierjigC' 
 
 rtn fctn. 
 ^arl Xn. jlar6 »or ber fjejhing 
 
 grieberi^«|aU, in Slorwegen, 
 
 ben 30|ten 9lo»cm6er 1718. 
 
THE INDEFINri'E NUMERALS. 
 
 155 
 
 LESSON xrx. 
 
 Section 19. 
 
 The Indefinite Numerals. 
 
 Obs. I. — The greater part of the indefinite numerals are used 
 and inflected as adjectives. They are : 
 
 Maae. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 Plwral. 
 
 Scbct (jebwcter, jcgli* 
 &itx)* every, each 
 
 aHer (all), aU 
 
 Ieiti,t no 
 
 manii^cc, many a (or 
 an) 
 
 »ie(, much 
 
 wenig, little 
 
 jebe 
 
 aflc 
 
 feinc 
 
 manege 
 
 jebcS 
 
 aflcS (all) 
 
 tein 
 
 mond^eS 
 
 (wanting) 
 
 aflc, all 
 feinc, no 
 mon4;C, some 
 
 ttiele 
 wcntge 
 
 »iel 
 tnenig 
 
 oielc, many 
 toenigc, few 
 
 kiJC, pi. both cinigc {ttXi^t), pi 
 
 nie^retc,f pi. several bif jneiftcn, pi. most 
 
 some, a few § 
 
 Obs. n. — 1. 9ttt (er, e, c3), is not, like the English all, followed 
 by the definite article, unless for special emphasis; 
 e. g., all the wine, rtUcr Si&ein ; all the girls, oUc 
 Sjilabc^en. But when ofl is uninflected the article 
 is, of course, used ; e. g., oU &cr SBcin. 
 
 2. 91U remains generally uninflected when fol- 
 lowed by a pronoun in the singulae ; e. g., in- 
 
 * Sebttcber and jeglt^et are rarely nsed; except in the language of 
 poetry. Seber is an indefinite numeral, conveying like aU, an idea of 
 totality, but differing from this numeral by its distributive power. 
 
 f .Rein (originally tiic^t ein) is a negative of both number and quantity ; 
 e. g., Et ^at feinen Steunb, he has no friend. Sometimes it is used to give 
 special emphasis to the negation of the predicate or attribute ; e. g., \m 
 ^egen feinen 9Jeib, we cherish no envy; fcin SBunber, no wonder! 
 
 X SRe^tctc is not the comparative of utelj but is a positive, and denotes 
 a considerable number in opposition to but one ; e. g., n>ir %t&tn nirtjt imr 
 ein §ttuS, fonbetn mel^rerCi we have not one house only, we have several. 
 
 § The plarals, einigc and etlt^C, relate exclusively to number. When 
 used as indefinite pronouns (which see), they begin with a capital. 
 
150 THE INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 
 
 stead of, aUei unfer ®clB, we say, aU Uttfcr ® cl& ; 
 but, aUc meitiC greunfce. 21U, in the neuter singular, 
 often denotes an indefinite number or amount; e. g., 
 2l(Ic§ frcut ftcf), everybody is bappy (see p. 219, VII., 
 and p. 220, X.). For the English all, in the sense 
 of the whole, use gattj, and not, all ; e. g., all the day, 
 i. e., the whole day, ten gattjen Sag (wo<, ten alien Sag). 
 
 Obs. m. — The article after both (kibe) may be omitted in 
 German. If it is used, its place is before 6citie ; e. g., 
 both, the prisoners, &ic ieiJen ©efangenen, (or ieite 
 ©cfongene). If a possessive pronoun is used instead 
 of the article, its place is also before htUt ; e. g., 
 both his daughters, feine teiDen Sijc^tcir. 
 
 Obs. rV. — The English some or any, before a noun in the sirtr- 
 gular, it is best not to render in Grerman ; e. g.. Here 
 is some butter, ^ier tfl Sutter ; have you any ink ? 
 t)a6en Sie Sintc ? But before a noun in the plural, 
 it must be rendered by cittigc ; e. g., Give me some 
 {i. e., a few) pens, gcBen ®ie mir cin^ge Scbent. When 
 in a reply the substantive after som£ is not repeated, 
 but understood merely, wo render some by the accu- 
 sative of wcli^cr (mel^cw, »c(d)e, tucli^es), or by tawn, 
 if the noun understood is in the singular, and by 
 Ctnige, if the noun understood is in the plural ; 
 e. g., Have you some bread, 1a6ert (Sie Srob ? Yes, I 
 have some; ix, id) '^a6e toelt^eS. Have you any 
 pens ? laBett ©ic ^t'iim ? Yes, I have some ; ja, id) 
 f^abi citttgs. See p. 221, XII. and XHI. 
 
 Obs. V. — SBicl and tvettig 1. remain umnfiected when they 
 imply a reference to quantity ; e. g., cr ^ot Oicl 2Bi^, 
 aier toentg @elD, he has much wit (sense), but liitle 
 money ; or to number in the sense of quantity ; e. g., 
 ti flnU t>lcl »crJ)orgene getnte in ber <Statt, there are 
 many (a number of) hidden (secret) enemies in the 
 city. But 2. they are inflected like adjectives when 
 they imply a reference to number,f and are used 
 
 * Before names of countries and places use ganj uninfiected. 
 \ The poets sometimes use it in the singular, or without inflection in 
 reference to rmmber. 
 
THE INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 157 
 
 substantively ; e. g., 9Sieled n)unfd)t fii^ ter SJJcnfd), 
 man desires much ; or if the number has regard to 
 the individuals separately and not collectively; e. g., 
 uieic §untie ftnS iii ^afen SoD, many dogs are death 
 to hares. However, 3. when »tcl and tpenig are pre- 
 ceded by an article or pronoun, they are invariably 
 inflected, no matter whether they imply reference to 
 number, measure, or quantity; e. g., iai Oiele ©elt; 
 fein »teIcS ®elc ; feine Vielen @e|'(^afte ; liefer ttf enige 
 SBeiit; meine toentgen greunlc. Instead of eitt 
 SSSentgeS, we say, however, also ctn tventg, to 
 indicate a small quantity of a thing (without contrail 
 to a larger quantity); e. g., cin tventg ©alj, a little 
 salt. 4 Used as indefinite pronouns (see p. 220), 
 »iel and mcnig are invariably inflected and begin 
 with a capital ; e. g., S$iele ftnB icrufen, ater SSettige 
 Pnl auaertod^It, many are called, but few are chosen. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 kaS ®efcf)ii))f, the creature taS SSoIt, the people 
 
 • bie Sluaflettung, the exhibition lie SQeft, the world 
 ler ©tein, the stone i^la^ ©emiille, the painting 
 ler SBurgetmetfler, the burgo- lag 2;t)or, the gate 
 
 master ler Z^nx, the fool 
 
 u lie Bfftunfl, the fortress lag 53bfc, the evil 
 
 1^ ler Sluiroanterer, the emigrant gattj, all, whole 
 
 grantfurt, Frankfort ttertoren, lost, forlorn 
 
 ler SJJain, the Main gcMJonncn, gained (won) 
 
 lag Jpols, the wood tmraer, always 
 
 Reading Exercise XIX. 
 
 3clcr Sofe ifi unfer gctnl. Seles 55oIf |at feine grofcn iSJliinncr. 
 
 3n 9lmcrila ^ai jele ®talt eincn Mayor ; in ©eutf(^Ianl '^at jeH 
 
 ©talt ctnen Siirgcrmetflcr. 3d} %ait ntdt aUe 5^la^e unl ®tra« 
 
 ^en ler gropen ©tait ^arls fe^en tijnnett. 2Bir f?nl Side lie ®e* 
 
158 THE INDEITNITE NUMERALS. 
 
 fc^Bpfe ®otte«. Eer SKoIer ^at me^rerc fojitarc Ocmiilic tter* 
 fauft. SKanc^cr ©olsat l)at im le^tcn ^ricge einen 2Irm serloren. 
 Xie meijien gremScn finC int ^Konat 3uni angctomtncn. Cannibal 
 ^at tiiclc ©icgc ixbiv tic SKbmer gerconnen, obgleii^ (although) tie 
 0lijmer in mel^reren ©^lacfcten «iel me^r ©oltaten fatten. 2lmerifa 
 ^at iBcniger Sinmo^ncr aU Suropa. ©e|)r side ©eutft^e tommcn in 
 jctcm 3fl|re nac^ 3lmeri!a. Sinige fccutfc^e Slu^wanterer fommen 
 fiber Sremen. ©inb beite S^ore tcr ^efhtng immcr opn? 2ltle 
 JWenfi^en lijnnen nic^t reid) fein, oitx atle fbnnen jufrieten fein. SBir 
 miiffen ten gonjcn iag orBeiten. ^o6en @ie gutc fi^marsc S:inte ? 
 iKbcbten ©ic ouf cinigc SBoc^en na^ faxii gel^en ? SJJeine tuentgen 
 greunte trin!en siel SSajfer, a6cr fein Ster. ®ekn ©ie mir (me) 
 .'in iDcnig Srot unt Sutter, 
 
 Theme XIX. 
 
 Not every man is rich, but many men are happy. Not all 
 large cities are beautiful. Prussia has several good harbors. 
 France has more large harbors than Spain. A few pupils 
 have made many mistakes ia the last theme. "We are all the 
 creatures of God. Many a vpoman has lost her husband in 
 the last war. (The) most German emigrants come by way of 
 (iikr) Hamburg. Have you good fresh beer ? Yes, I have 
 Bonie. Few men are contented. Are both your sons in 
 Australia ? Have you any good pens and any good black 
 ink ? I have some good pens and a little black ink. Can 
 you go to Berlin for (auf) a few months. My little brother 
 has lost all his money. You have made no mistakes in your 
 theme. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 Sint bie ipftufer tiefcr ©tatt son Sinige ^iiufer tiefer ©tott fint son 
 ©tein oter ^o\] geBaut ? ©tein gebaut, ater tie meijien 
 
 |tnt son .^olj gebaut. 
 §ot jebeS SoK einen ^onig ? Slcin ; utetc 55blter t)aben feincn 
 
 ^iJntg. 
 ^aben ©ie atle ©tragen unt ^lai^e 3d) l^alt man^c ©trap e nii^t ge; 
 ter Jpauptjlatt i^xm^tni ge* fel^en. 
 fe^en? 
 
THE INDEFINITE NCMEEALS. 
 
 159 
 
 SCann fommcn bic mctflen Stem* 
 
 ten |icr an ? 
 ipat 2lmerita cbcnfo side Sini»o|* 
 
 ner aU ©eutfi^tanti ? 
 
 fommcn oHe keutfdjen Slugwan* 
 lerer iikr Hamburg ? 
 
 Sann nidjt ein ieber 9Rcnfc^ relc^ 
 unti jufrtetcn fcin ? 
 
 aCotlcn ®te auf eintge Sage nai^ 
 Srantfurt am Wlain gel)en ? 
 
 §akn ©te guteS wetf e« Srot ? 
 
 SBorctt ^ijXi ktten S^lic^tcn jur 
 StuajlcHung in ^adi ? 
 
 aBantm ifl 3^r SSettcr fo traurig ? 
 SBas l^aien bte Soger gefcboffen ? 
 
 SJle^rcre lontmen im 3ttni, okr 
 
 tic SReiflen lommen itn 3uH, 
 2lntcri!a ^at me'^r Stnn3o|ner ofe 
 
 l;eutfd^(ant, okr nii^t fo siele 
 
 aU ©uropa. 
 !Eic SJieiflen !ommen iiBer ipam* 
 
 burg, SBiele liter Srcnten, unJ 
 
 Sintge liber ^oure. 
 9Ji(^t jctcr ?i}Jenf(^ tann reic^ fein, 
 
 abcr ein 3eier fann jufrieten 
 
 fein. 
 3c^ mij^te auf cinigc 3:age nacb 
 
 granffurt an ter Dber gel^en. 
 3a, icfe ^be lueli^eg. 
 ®ic Sine war gur Slu^jleUung in 
 
 ^axii, tie 2(nterc war auf tern 
 
 Sante. 
 ©r :^at all fcin ®elt scrloren. 
 ©ic '^abcn cinigc 3;auben (doves) 
 
 unt l»itte ®anfc (geese) gc* 
 
 fi^ojfen. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 93ef(^rctbung ban ^atis. 
 
 Sicbcr Srcunt! 
 
 SBor ungcfii^r bierjc^n iEagen ijcrfprac^' i&i, 3|nen" eitttgc 
 
 Sflai^ric^ten iiber faxii ju gcbcn. ©a i&i mid^" »or fiinf SBiertcI 
 
 Sa^rcn |ier nicbergelajfcn |obe, fo bin ic^ beffer im ©tante * a ju 
 
 t^^un, ate §unbcrte son Stcifentcn, tie' fi^' bier fBod^en :^ier auf? 
 
 1 SBtxfftaS), first person singular, imperfect tense, of the verb Uctftltei^en. 
 ' S^nen (to you), dative plural of the personal pronoun ®te. 
 ' 3Htc^ (accuB. sing, of the person, pron. ii^) tticbcrgrtafTeit Tftiit, perfect of 
 the verb fid) ilieticrlaffcni to settle (down) to live. 
 * 3m ©tanbe fein, to be able. 
 ' ©ie (who), relative pron. (see p. 200). 
 " ©i^ auf^olten, to stay. 
 
160 THE INDEFINITE NUMEEALS. 
 
 '^alten unt bann tide Siidjcr ii6cr tie ipau))tflatt grantrci^a fd^rciBctt. 
 Jpcute wertc ii^ 3^nen' laum ten jc^ntcn X^til (taS S^^ntfO 
 einer genauen Sefc^reibung geien fbnnen, oBer in a^i 2:ageit tuertc 
 xii 3t)neti' ta6 Xopptltt olcr iai 2)rcifo^c Bpn tiefer unge()euren 
 etatt, roel^e mc|r ali tint SHillion einwo^ner unt fo|l Diet uni 
 tint fjoI6c 9Wei(e im Umfang |at, fi^reikn. 3i^ wcrte mit cent 
 2;t)cater anfangcn. 
 
 g)ari3 :^at ine^r aU ein Su^cnb grofer J^eater. 'Lai cr^c 
 son nflcn ifl tic grope Dpcr in ter ©trape SepeUcticr. Dicfcs 
 Dpern^au3 ifl, nac^tem man' ten ©aol in tcr ©tra^e SRic^elieu, wo 
 ter ^erjog Don Serrg am 13ten gckuar 1820 ermorlet' tturtc, ge* 
 fc^Ioficn' ^atte, fiir tie Dper gekut' toortcn. ©cr ©aal fonn 1940 
 9)er|onen fajfen. Untcr ter 3flegierung Surmig f litippa ^attc tic Dper 
 son tcr Sflegierung einc jHftrlif^c Untcrfiu^ung son 160,000 granfen; 
 tie SReglerung Stapoleon m. |at tie ganjc SBcrwaltung iikrne^men 
 miilfen. 2luf tiefer Sii^nc (ingen tie crftcn ©anger unt ©Sngerin* 
 nen, unt tie otIerBefien Jiinjer KlBcn tic ^SaUtUZmppt. Eic 5)raft;t 
 tcr Dclorationcn unc ter SJleic^t^um tcr ^ojiiime tofien io:^rlic^ Hide 
 2au}cniic unc ftnt kwuntcrungswiirtig. ©ie Sorjlellungen pnten 
 gewb^nlic^ jcbtn Sag jiatt.' 
 
 ^ad) ter grogen Dpcr oertient tas Theatre-Pranqais unfcrc 9luf* 
 mertfam!eit. !Biefe3 ST^catcr ifi im 3a|re 1787 crbaut' luorten. 
 Der ©aat t)at etoa 1500 g^to^e. §ier fint tic Sragbtic, tie ilo* 
 mbrie unt 5a3 Drama, BefonterS tie ©tiicEc ter tlaffifdjcn Sic^ter : 
 Sorneide, Slacinc unt 5)Iolierc, ju Jpaufe. i;ie 35orficUungen tc# 
 ginnen in tiefem Sweater taglids um (jalb fieficn Ut)r unt tauern 
 Hi ^a\h obcr brci ffiiettcl auf elf U^r. Sor bier SJodjen 
 )"a^° id) in tiefem iE^eoter cine oortrefflic^e ©arfietlung tcr 5)|a* 
 tra" tur(| grauleln 3la(^el, tie berii|mtefie ©i^aufpielerln tiefem 
 
 ' S^nen (to you), dative plural of the personal pronoun ®ie. 
 ' SDZan (one or they), an indefinite pronoun (French- on). 
 ' Srmorbet, past participle of ermortien. 
 
 * Oefc^loffen, past participle of fi^lie^cn. 
 ' QitiaviU past participle of baucn. 
 
 ' ginbcn flott, to take place. 
 
 '' (£r6aut, past participle of crBautn. 
 
 * ©a^ (saw). Imperfect, first person singular, of fel^en; the -word SOt 
 requires the pronoun to be placed after the verb. 
 
 ' SD^oibra (PhMre), a tra^gedy by the great French writer, Badne. 
 
THE BEGUI^B YEBB. 161 
 
 Sweaters, rod^t fi^on, ola (te at^tscl^n So^re olt war, mit Scifalt 
 auf tiefcr Sii^^ne erfi^icn.' 3" ot^t otcr bterjc^n lagen we«c 
 i(^ tafelbjl bcr erftcn 3lup:^rung dnti neucn SuflfpielS »on ©criSe 
 idm^mn. 
 
 <!■»■■» 
 
 LESSON XX. Sefttott 20. 
 
 The Kegular Verb. (2)o§ gcittoort.) 
 
 Obs. I. — ^In German all verbs end in the infinitive in tt* or 
 cn. By removing this ending we find the root ; e. g., 
 tatel-tt, to blame ; Io6-cn, to praise. As in English 
 a distinction is to be noted between verbs that 
 change their radical vowel in the past tense ; e. g., 
 I sing, Set) fingc, / sang', ic^ fong, and those that do 
 not admit of a change of the radical vowel, but tate 
 a termination instead ; e. g., I love, 3c^ \\tW, I loved, 
 i^ liebtc. The former are caUed irregular (Comp. 
 Lesson XXVm.), the latter are called regular. 
 
 Formation of the Tenses of Regular Verhs. 
 
 I. THE ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 Obs. n. — 1. The Present Participle is formed by adding cnfc ; 
 e. g., tatiTcnb, thanldng ; and the Past Participle 
 \>Y prefixing gc and affixing t; e. g., gclernt, learned.' 
 2. The Imperatire, which has only one person for 
 each gender, is formed in the singular by adding e 
 to the root ; e. g., |oIe, fetch (thou) ; and in the 
 
 1 ©rWltitj past participle of the verb crfl^einctt. 
 
 ' Verb-roots ending in cf or et usuaUy take n; aJl others take en. 
 Verbs ending in el and tXt commonly drop t also in the other Simple 
 Tenses, because the termination brings another t; e.g., from tabclllr 
 Present : 3c^ toile (instead of tttbele); Imperfect, 3(!^ tabelte. 
 
 ' Both participles are also used as attributive adjectives ; e. g., bet 
 leibenSe SWamt, the suffering man ; baS gelie^te ^inb, the dear child. 
 
162 THE EBSULAB VEEB : ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 plural by adding ct : fuctjct, seek (ye), or cn when 
 the verb is followed by the pronoun ®ie: lobetl ©te, 
 praise (you). 
 
 Obs. in. — The Present tense is formed by adding e to the 
 root ; e. g., \&t \\tkt, I love, or I am loving ; the 
 Imperfect by adding te ; e. g., ic^ fcanftc, I thanked, 
 I did thank, or I was thanking. 
 
 Note. — 33) taufe, denotes that I am engaged in buying, but 
 to denote that I am buying at the present moment, the ad- 
 verb ebtlti just (now), must be added. Neither can we render 
 literally the English expression : / am, going to (French, je 
 vais), followed by an infinitive. In German we must say, 1 
 am on the point of, ^i) 6in im iBcgriff ju, «. g., I am going 
 to buy a hat ; i. e., I am on the point of buying a hat, ^ij 6t1t 
 cSctt im fflegriff ctncit ^nt ju foufcit; but if I am going is 
 actually intended for the physical I go, I walk, we say in 
 German, ij^ gel^e, followed by eSen or focbcn ; e. g., I am 
 • going (just now) to Berlin, i^ gc'^e faeSen na^ Serlin. 
 
 Obs. rV. — ^The Gmnpound tenses are formed in German nearly 
 as in English. In the Perfect the past participle 
 of the principal verb is preceded by the present, 
 and in the Pluperfect by the imperfect of ^aitn 
 (sometimes fein) ; e. g., tc^ laic gclemt, I have 
 learned ; {(^ ^aitt QClteBt, I had loved. In the First 
 Fatnrc and First Conditional, the infinitive of a 
 principal verb is combined with the auxiliary toerben 
 (hke shall and should in English) ; e. g., 3(^ lotvtt 
 laufen, I shall buy ; 3c^ tuurbe ma6^tn, I should make. 
 In the Second Future and Second Conditional the 
 past participle of the principal verb is inserted be- 
 tween the auxiliary tucrbcn and the infinitive of f)aUn 
 (sometimes fdit*) ; e. g., ic^ hJcrbe Qckut ^aBcn,, I 
 shall have built ; id^ tourke gc^orc^t !§a6cn, I should 
 have obeyed. 
 
 * ®cin is used as the auxiliary of intransitive verbs, for which see 
 p. 295 Obs. I. 
 
' THE BEGULAK VERB: ACTIVE VOICE. 163 
 
 Conjugation of a Regular Verb. 
 
 &ohcn, TO PBAISK 
 PriTidpal Parts : lohtn, lobtc, qeloht. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INFINITITB.* PAETICIPIES. 
 
 Present. SoBctt, to praise Present. So6ctt&, praising 
 
 Perf. gctofct t)a*Ctt, to have praised Past. QcloBt, praised. 
 
 rMPKRATIVB. 
 
 Sing. SoBe, praise (thou) PI. 8oB(c)t or loicn ®te, praise (you)t 
 
 INDICATIVE. SOBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ic^ Mc, I praise, am praising, ic^ lotc, I may praise, etc 
 
 do praise 
 
 tu Io6(e)ft, thou praisest ku loBcft, 
 
 er Io6(c)t, he praises et lote, 
 
 toir totctt, we praise Wir loBctt, 
 
 i^rlo6(c)t,) . %Iobct, 
 
 ©ielobcnJ^^^'P''™^ ©ieloBen, 
 
 jtc lobCtt, they praise fic lotcn, 
 
 * The infinitive may be used, in German, as a neuter noun of tlie first 
 declension : atieiten, to work, baa Strbciten, tlie act of working ; leien, to 
 live,. baa Cekit, the life ; tanjen, to dance, iai Zattim, (the) dancing ; e. g., " 
 dancing is fatiguing , JittS Xonjeit til ctmubenb. Many nouns are also 
 formed from verb roots by adding ct in place of the infinitive ending en. 
 Such nouns denote the doer of the action expressed by the verb ; e. ff., 
 ^orc^en, to hark, listen ; bcr §ord^er, the listener. 
 
 f In cone&rsational style, the third person plural is used with ©te 
 instead of the second person of the imperative, whether one or more 
 persons are addressed ; e.g., Come, fommen ©ie, instead of lowmet. 
 
164 
 
 THE BEaULAB VERB : ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVB. 
 
 StrEJCNCTIVB. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 id^ IolJ(e)tc, I praised, was 
 
 praising, did praise 
 tu IoIj(c)teft, thou praisedst 
 cr to6(c)tc, he praised 
 luir Iob(c)tcn, we praised 
 
 '??ff\V*' I you praised 
 (ie Iot(c)tcn, they praised 
 
 id) tob(c)te, I might praise, 
 
 &c. 
 tu tot)(e)tcfl 
 er M(e)lc 
 trir (o()(c)tctt 
 i|r roB(c)tet 
 ©ic Iob(e)tett 
 jlc Iob(e)ten 
 
 } 
 
 i(^l^c&egcIo6t, I have praised ic^ %<&t gclofct, I may have 
 
 bu ^ajl gefoit, thou hast " 
 cr |at gclobt, he has " 
 
 Wir 'baben gcto6t, we have " 
 t^r |ajt gcloBt, ) you have 
 ®te ^akn gcIoBt, j praised 
 fie :^akn getobt, they have " 
 
 tu ^a&eft gebbt 
 er l^abt gelobt 
 h)ir '^aBen Qclott 
 i^r :^abet Qclofct ] 
 ©ie ^aben gclobt j 
 fte '^akn gelobt 
 
 [praised 
 
 ti^l^attcgcWt, I had praised ic^ ^«tte geMt, I might have 
 
 tu ^attejl gefobt, thou hadst ' 
 er latte getobt, he had " 
 
 toir 'fatten gelobt, we had " 
 i^rlattetgelojt ) . 
 
 ©ie gotten gelobt, j J""""" 
 |ie 'fatten gdobt, they had " 
 
 tu pttefl gelobt 
 er ^iitte gelobt 
 tcir gotten gelobt 
 i^r pttct gelobt ; 
 ©tc ptten gelobt ' 
 fte fatten gelobt 
 
 [praised 
 
 Mrst Future. 
 
 ic^ toetbe Ioben,I shall praise 
 tu mirfl loben, thou wilt " 
 er wtrt lobcn, he will " 
 
 tolr werten loben, we shall " 
 i'^r joertet loben, ) 
 ©iewcrben loben, [y°"^'^" 
 jte ftertcn loben, they will " 
 
 ic^ n>erte loben, I shall praise 
 
 tu tifer^efi loben 
 
 er toerbe toben 
 
 wir werten loben 
 
 i|r trertct loben ) 
 
 @te werten loben j 
 
 fie tocrten loben 
 
THE EE&ULAB VERB : ACTIVE VOICE. 165 
 
 ESfDICATIVB. SUJSJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Second Future. 
 id) wcr&c I shall \ i(^ wertic \ I shall have 
 
 tuiBirfl \^ thou wilt j-^ bu tocr&cft 1 . [praised 
 cr Wirt) / >» he wiU / -I cr ttfet^e / J 
 t»ir ©erien ; »«■ we shall \ ^ ttJtr iuerten j ■^ 
 i^rmertet S | you wiU \ g )!': ""^^f I 
 
 fteiBcrtcn /* they will/ fte toerben 
 
 First GondUiorud. 
 
 i&i tourbe (oben, I should praise 
 ku tturteji loten, thou wouldst praise 
 er wiirte loben, he would praise 
 t»ir wiirticn lotcn, we should praise 
 
 i|r wtoet loBen, I o^ia praise 
 
 ©ie tuurten loiett, J 
 
 jic toiirben Io6cn, they would praise 
 
 Second CondiHonaZ. 
 
 \&i tomtit gelott f^abtn, I would, or should have praised 
 
 bu iBurtefl gclofct ^ben, thou wouldst have praised 
 
 cr witrte getobt |aben, he would have praised 
 
 tcir roiirbert gclobt |abctt, we would or should have praised 
 
 ibr rciirbct aclobt baben, 1 „ , . , 
 
 ©ie mtoen gelobt ^aben, \ ^""^ ^°^^ ^"^ P^^^^^*^ 
 
 fie roiirbcit gelobt ^bcn, they would have praised 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Obs. V. — ^For the sake of euphony regular verbs, whose last 
 radical letters are fc, t, hn gn, tm, ffm, c^n, or t\^m, 
 
 as, rcSett, beten, orfcnen, fegnen, iutfcmen, rcc|>tten, off* 
 tien, atl^men, generally retain C before the termina- 
 tion, in every mood, tense and person, if the end- 
 ing does not begin with C. 
 
166 THE EEGULAB VEBB : ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 ^titn, to talk. 
 
 Present. Imperfect. 
 
 i{^ rcte, I talk i&! reicte, I talked 
 
 tu rebe^, thou talkest bu rcbctefl, thou taHiedst 
 
 er rctet, he talks tx xtHtt, he talked 
 
 lulr rctcn, we talk Wir rcSctcn, we talked 
 
 tk relet, ) . „ i'^r reictct, ) j. n j 
 
 T, y vou talk A- 1 ^-i r you talked 
 
 (Bit reJcn, ) •> @le rctcten, ) •' 
 
 ftc reten, they talk |ie reieten, they talked 
 
 Perfect. Pluperfect. 
 
 l^ '^afce gerebet, I have talked ic^ ^atte gereBet, etc. 
 
 Obs. VI. — ^Verbs whose last radical letter is a sibilant (f, ff, 
 fc^, or J); e. g., rofen, to rage : ^affen, to hate ; luiin* 
 f(^en, to wish; fe^en, to put, place, also generally 
 retain the C of the termination ; e. g., id) tviinfc^e, tu 
 luiinfd^ejl; id) t)affc, tu \)a\\«-% &c. 
 
 Obs. Vn. — A number of verbs do not admit of the prefix gc 
 in the past participle. They are : 
 
 1. Verbs of foreign origia ending in ircn or 
 ictcn ; e. g., marfc^ircn, to march ; tnarfc|)tct (not 
 gcmarfc^irt), marched, rcQtcten, to govern, rcgictt 
 (not geregirt), governed. , 
 
 2. Verbs having the unaccented pfefix bc, (JC, 
 Cttt, emv, et, t>CC and get;* e. g., bcfud)cn, to visit. 
 befnc^t (not gefcefu^t), visited ; jcrfioreti, to destroy, 
 getftdtt (not gejerjiijrt), destroyed. 
 
 3. ^etben when used as an auxiliary. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ^le ®tgenf(i;aft, the quality tic ©ttmmc, the voice 
 
 ber SBlterjlant, the opposition bic Uekrlcgung, the meditation 
 
 ^ tic SScrnunft, (the) reason tie ^ranfleit, (the) sickness, 
 gc^rc^cn, to obey disease 
 
 * See the Lesson on " Compound Verbs," on page 285. 
 
THE EEGULAB VEBB : ACTIVE VOICE. 167 
 
 antoortcn, to answer griiitien, to found, establisli 
 
 jerilUren, to destroy i-^sertlciDigen, to defend 
 
 fcerountern, to admire l^anCeltt, to act 
 
 tiiufc^cn, to deceive brudcn, to print 
 
 folgen, to follow ^eilctt, to heal 
 
 reHen, to speak Wii^Ien, to choose 
 
 lernen, to learn witnfi^crt, to wish 
 
 ^oten, to fetch fingen, to sing 
 
 6aucn, to build Mm, to pray 
 
 fiirc^ten, to fear ttjo^ncn, to live (dwell) 
 
 Reading Exercise XX. 
 
 3c^ Icrne mclne Stufgafie. Du wointeft in granlfurt. Sr |at fci* 
 ncn ©c^iilcr gelobt. 2Bir wericn unfere Sltcrrt licbeit. <Bit mcrtieii 
 SSaffcr olcr SBeln gc^olt ^abett. SSJtoet i^r ein JpauS bauen ? lEcr 
 Server f^at ten tragen ^naben getatelt. ®ie luMen Cen Sflegen ge* 
 fiirc^tet ^obcn, icenn fie nidst einen Stegcnfi^irm ge^abt ^Stten. SCir 
 griinbeten cine fteine Solonic (colony) auf liefer ^n\tl (island). 
 3t)r ^ait cucr (your) SSaterfanD braD (bravely) toert^ettigt. 'La 
 ^onbelji ol)rte Ueberlegung, mein greunb, tu ma§t Her ©timme ber 
 SBernunft ge^or^cn. l;ie Beutfi^en SSu^BrucEer (printers) brudcn in 
 einem ^i^n ntc^r SBitc^er aU bie rufftfdjen Su^Brucfcr in je^n StJ^i""!. 
 IJic aierjte l)eilcn tie ^rant^eitcn te3 ^brpers, ®ott atlein l)eilt tie 
 ^ranf^citen ter ©eclc. ©ie watittcn iai bcfle »on biefcn trei 93ii;: 
 d^ern. 3<i) wunfi^e tag i'^r cure (your) grcunte bcjjer »a[)Iet, SSiin* 
 f(^ejl tu, tap cr antmortc ? 2ap uns (us) ni(I}t retcn, laffct un3 
 lanbctn. ©uc^ct eure j?ameraten, tcir mollen (tngen. 3:aufc§e teine 
 Brcunte nic^t. St betete fe|r crnflli^. (earnestly). Die ©oltatcn 
 ptten ten ganjen lag marfc^irt, wenn eS nii^t geregnct ^iitte. grie* 
 tri(^ SBir^crm IV., ^onig »on 9)reugert, f^at Bon 1840 bis 1861 
 regiert. ^abcn ©tc nic^t tie guten Sigenfd^aftep unferer Stai^borin 
 bcmun'vert ? 
 
 Theme XX. 
 
 I love my teacher. What did you buy ? James has 
 learned his lesson. We shall live in Berlin. Have you 
 
168 
 
 THE REGULAR VERB : ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 praised your pupils ? These young men had defended the 
 city three days. You should love your parents. Wouldst 
 thou choose the smallest of these houses ? The lazy pupil 
 has not learned his lesson, he vpill never learn. Tuesday 
 I shall have a new pair of stockings. Learn your lesson. 
 We should not have feared the rain, if we had had an um- 
 brella. He acts without deliberation ; if he would follow 
 the voice of reason jhe ,might be rich and happy. Is it true, 
 that the German printers print more books in one year than 
 the Eussian printers in ten years? The Italian soldiers 
 marched four days and three nights. Napoleon the first 
 became emperor of Prance in the year 1804 ; he had reigned 
 as consul from the year 1799. Would not the enemy have 
 destroyed the city, if he had taken (gcnommcn) it? 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 SSo|ncn ©ie in 9>ariS oicr in 
 Scrlin? 
 
 §at unfer (Si^ulmac^er meinc 
 
 ®d)ul)e gemad^t ? 
 aBirfl bit am iSHontag tna Sweater 
 
 ge|cn ? 
 
 SDiirbet i|r ein ^aui kuen ? 
 
 3BeI(^ea 9>fcrli tuiirbcn ©ie gewft^tt 
 
 laien ? 
 SBSpten ©ie bas ttouc (blue) 
 
 2Carum tabcft ter Scorer ben 
 
 ©c^iiler ? 
 tabm btc franjofifi^en ©olbaten 
 
 ile ©tafct nicfet »ert|eiMgcn 
 
 fonncn? 
 
 3ii) |ak fritter (formerly) in 
 
 5)aris getBo^nt, ahv je^ iBo'^nc 
 
 t(^ in Serltn. 
 yinn, in ©c^u^mai^cr unfercr 
 
 Zanti |at |te (them) gcma^t. 
 ^&l ge'^e nte (never) in ein 
 
 Sweater ; ic^ mxit am SJJontag 
 
 ina Sonccrt ge'^en. 
 S5ir wiirben ein §au3 6auen, 
 
 wenn wir ®elb :^otten. 
 3cfe wiirte iai grauc 9)fcrb ge* 
 
 »(i|It ^aien. 
 ytiin, t(^ wa^lte iai griinc. 
 
 ®r ijl immcr t.-iige, uni Witt feine 
 SiufgaBcn nic^t madden. 
 
 ®ie ^abixi fie (it), fo longe aii 
 aSlberjlanb mBglti^ (possible) 
 war, Dert^^eibigt, 
 
THE BEaDLAB VEKB : ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 169 
 
 SJiiitfc^ejl bu ba§ cr antworte ? 
 
 3|l e3 ma|i- (true) baf bein Sreunb 
 o^nc UcBerlcgung ^anbcltc ? 
 
 V 
 
 SBurbcn bte ©oltatcn ben ganjen 
 
 Sag marfi^irt '^aben, wenn ea 
 
 itidst gcregnet '^iitte ? 
 Jpot 3^r SSatcr nid^t bie gutcn 
 
 (Sigenf^aftcn unferct 9ia(i^6arin 
 
 6et»unbert ? 
 
 ©agte bcr Xiimv bo§ cr bicfe 
 gtafi^en nttt 2Bcin gefiiUt fjaU^ 
 
 §iiren ®ie bie fdione SJiufit auf 
 bcm ©djlojfe unferer ^atferln? 
 
 SBarum fitrc^tct bcr fromme 
 (pious) Wm\^ ben Sob 
 nic^t? 
 
 S>te bret Siiiuter. 
 
 3(^ wiinfc^e baf cr fofort (at once) 
 
 nad) SBerlin !omme. 
 9lein, cs i|l nii^t tco.'i^v; er l§an^ 
 
 belt nic o^nc reifli^e (careful) 
 
 Ueberlegung. 
 SHein, fte fottteit nur wal^renb be3 
 
 SSorraittagS (forenoon) mar* 
 
 I'c^ircn. 
 Sr |at bie gwten Sigenfc^aften 
 
 nidit nur (only) kwunbert, 
 
 fonbcrn er 'i^at fie (them) auc^ 
 
 gcIoM. 
 ©cr S^iener fagt, er |a6e biefc 
 
 glafdjcn mit Sicr gefiidt. 
 3a, i(^ |aBc fi^one SKufit wii^rcnb 
 
 bcr gangcn 9lo(^t auf bcm 
 
 ©(^loffc gcprt. 
 SBcil ter Sob ben frommen ^Ren* 
 
 fc^en ju ®ott fii^rt (leads). 
 
 ©rei aiduBcr morbcten unb ^(itniiettcn cincn ^aufmann, bcr' 
 mit ciner SJJenge ®elb unb ^oflBarfcitcn burc^ cincn ffialu teifte. ©ie 
 fcra^ten' ben gerauMen ©c^a^ in i^rc ^ij^lc, unb fc^idten ben jiingften 
 son t|ncn° in bie ©tabt urn Sebcngmittel ju fnufcn. 
 
 3l(« er fort tnor, f ogtcH bie beibcn anberen : SBarum foffen teir 
 biefc grofctt Sflci(^t|umer mit biefem SBurfd)cn t^ei(cn? SBcnn cr 
 iMxMtommi, mUtn »ir i^n tobten. 
 
 Der junge 3laukr ba(^te' untcr»cg« 6ci ftd^ : SBie glu(fli(^ to'itt 
 i(^, menu all bicfea ®c(c mir° gcl^atte ! 3i^ will meinc jwci ©efii^rs 
 ten bcrgtftcn, fo ^olic t(^ ti aMn, — 3lt« er in bcr ©tabt angcfunis 
 
 ' 2)er, used instead of the relative pronoun tOCll^er, who, whioh. 
 ' Srac^ten (brought), imperfect of brtngcn. 
 
 ' S^nen, dative of the personal pronoun fte (they), governed by the 
 preposition BOrt. 
 
 * Sac^te (thought), imperfect of lienTcn. 
 
 • 3Rir, dative of the personal pronoun 0). 
 
170 THE KEaULaH VEBB: PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 men taor, fouftc cr Sefen^mittcl, itc- er bnp\ictt, unb ft^xk' 
 
 in ten SBato 3urudt. 
 
 ^aum wor er in iic JpB^tc getreten, aU tie 6eitcn antcrcn auf 
 i^n° jufprangcn unt i^n ntit t^ren DoMen burc^ba^rten. ^ierauf 
 fc^tcn fte ftc^ unt a^ew* iic sergiftcten £cben«mittel. ©ie ftartm' 
 unter ^eftigcn ©c^merjcn, unb man font" i|re Seicbname mitten unter 
 ten ©c^ii^en, metc^e |ie aufge^ftuft fatten. 
 
 LESSON XXI. Scftion21. 
 
 The Passive Voice. 
 
 Obs. L — ^The various moods, tenses, etc., of regular and ir- 
 regular verbs are formed, for the passive voice, 
 from the corresponding tenses of the auxiliary verb 
 toetbett and the past participle of the verb to be 
 conjugated ; e. g., Qcltcbt tvet^ett, to be loved. 
 
 Obs. n. — The past participle of the auxiliary tttec^en, to be, 
 to become, is getoot^en, but when used to form 
 the passive voice of verbs gc is omitted, and tOOts 
 icn only is used ; e. g., 3c^ Mn getotcit toorbcn, I 
 have been blamed. 
 
 Conjugation or a Verb in the Passive Voice. 
 @elo&t MJcr&cn, TO BE PRAISED. 
 
 INFINITIVr. • PArTICIFLBS. 
 
 Pres. ®CIott (ju) totxitn, Pres. 3tt IoBCtt&, to be praised* 
 
 to be praised. 
 Perf. ®cto6t tVOtfeen fcin, Past. gctoM, praised 
 
 to have been praised 
 
 ' ©ie, used instead of the relative pronoun Inclr^cr, which. 
 
 ' Befttte — juritS, imperfect tense of the separable verb jutiilffelren. 
 
 " 3^n (him) accusative of the personal pionoun er. 
 
 * SIpen (ate), imperfect of ef?en. 
 
 5 ©tatSen (died), imperfect of fierkn. 
 « g«nb (found), imperfect of finticn. 
 
 * The Latin laudandus, a, um. This participle stands before its noun 
 as an adjective, and is declinable, as : A deed worthy of praise, i. e., to he 
 praised, ciiiC JU lobenbe XJot. For use of ju seep. 426, §80-81. 
 
THE REGULAR VERB: PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 171 
 
 mPBKATIVB.* 
 
 Sing. SBCirfre QCloBt, be (thou) Plur. SSec^et or toecfeen 
 praised ©ic QClobt, be (you) praised 
 
 nSTDICATIVB. 
 
 i^ tottit geloH, I am 
 lu Wirfl gcIo6t, thou art 
 
 er tuirb gcIoW, he is 
 
 Wir wertctt gcIoBt, we are 
 
 i:^r wertet getoW, ] 
 
 ©ic tDCrtcn geMt, P°" ^^^ 
 
 fie wcrtcn geloBt, they are 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 ic^ Werbc geloM, I maybe 
 bu tvexteft geb6t, thou 
 ^ mayst be 
 
 g cr tverbe geMt, he may be ( 
 g tutr tuerben getoW, we may be / 
 ^ i|r mercet gctoM, ) you may \ 
 ©ie ttjcrben gcIoW, j be 
 fie werben gelobt, theymay be'' 
 
 u 
 
 i(i^ tvnrbe gcIo6t, I was 
 btt wurbe^ gelobt, thou wast 
 cr tDurbe gclott, he was 
 wir wurben gclott, we were 
 IfirjDurbet gelobt, > 
 ©iemutbengelobt,[y°"^""" 
 fie wurben gelobt, they were 
 
 ic^ tOUtbe gelobt, (if) I were ^ 
 bu iBiirbeji gelobt, thou were 
 ' "S er wiirbe gelobt, he were 
 •| tutr wurben gelobt, we were 
 ^4 i^r iBitrbet gelobt, > 
 ©te wurben gelo6t,P°^''^''^ 
 (Ic wurben gelobt, they were 
 
 ca. 
 ft 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 ic^bin 
 bubifl 
 er ijl 
 wir |inb 
 i[)r fcib 
 ©ie finb 
 |te finb 
 
 «> 
 
 u 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 Ihave 
 thou hast 
 he has 
 we have 
 
 I you have I g 
 
 / ft 
 
 they have 
 
 i(^fci 
 bu fetefl 
 er fei 
 Wtr feten 
 i^r feict 
 ©ie feien 
 fie feien 
 
 8 
 
 S 
 
 I may 
 
 thou mayst 1 
 he may 
 we may 
 
 *S (. you may 
 ** they may 
 
 13 
 
 <o 
 u 
 
 ft 
 
 g 
 
 Q 
 
 * When a passive imperative is required, fei is generally preferred 
 to wcrben; e. g., @ei itfxxt^fH, o ®ott ! be praised, O God ! (instead of njcrbe 
 Septiefen). 
 
172 
 
 THE KEGULAH VEBB : PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTrVB. 
 
 I had been praised 
 iii Wat geloBt tour^en 
 tu war^ geIo6t icorten 
 er war gelofct »o«en 
 wir waren gelobt worCcn 
 
 fte iwarcn gelobt worteit 
 
 (if) I had been praised 
 id^ toate gelobt worsen 
 tu wareft gelobt worceti 
 er ware gelobt loorCen 
 toir toiiren gelobt toorten 
 i^r wiiret gelobt worten ) 
 ©ic wiireit gelobt wortcn j 
 fte toaren gelobt toorten 
 Mrst Future. 
 I shall or will be praised (if) I shall or will be praised 
 
 id) toertc gelobt toertett 
 liu ttiec^eft gelobt njerten 
 er toetbe gelobt luerJen 
 ttir loerCetx gelobt toertett 
 i^r merbet 1 , ,^ 
 ©ietoe«en|9^^''^'"'^'^^f« 
 (ic iocrbett gelobt loerbcn 
 Second Future. 
 I shall have been praised (if) I shall have been praised 
 ic^ ttierbe gelobt taoc^en feiti i(^ merbe gelobt toorben [ein 
 bu roir(i gelobt worbcn fein bu toerdeft gelobt worben fein 
 
 er wirD gelobt moreen fein er tverbe gelobt toorben fein 
 
 toir toerbcn gelobt worbcn fetn wtr werben gelobt worben fein 
 
 icb toexbe gelobt toec&en 
 Ju wirjl gelobt roerben 
 er wirb gelobt werben 
 wir werten gelobt werDen 
 ibr werbet ) , ,, 
 ©ie werben h^^"^*"'"*™ 
 fic wcrten gelobt werDcn 
 
 tbr werbet ) , ,^ . . . 
 ®te werben} 9'^"^' """^*^«.^"" 
 fie werben gelobt worben fein 
 
 i^r werbet ) . ,^ ^ ^ , 
 ®ie werben} 9*^* """^*'«f''« 
 fie werben gelobt worben fein 
 
 First Oonddiional. 
 I should or would be praised 
 
 ic^ toutbt gelobt ttferBen 
 bu wiirbejl gelobt werben 
 er wiirbc gelobt werben 
 wir wiirbcn gelobt werben 
 ibr witrbet gelobt werben ) 
 ©le wiirbcn gelobt werben ) 
 jic wiirbcn gelobt werben 
 
THE EEGHLAB VEBB : PASSIVE VOICE. 173 
 
 Second Conditional. 
 I should or would have been praised 
 
 ic^ tvittbe gelobt tootben fein 
 
 fctt wiiricji gclofct morlen fctn 
 tt wiirtc gcIo6t tuorten fein 
 juir lutoen gclobt worten fein 
 i^r wiirtet geIo6t worten fein ) 
 ®ie mtoen geloM worben fein 3 
 jle roiirben getoW ioorten fein 
 
 m. — The passive voice in German has great philosoph- 
 ical merit, and helps to express and distinguish 
 shades of meaning which are not to be found in 
 other languages. It has not only, as Noehden 
 says, all the merits of the passive voice in the Latin 
 language, but far exceeds it. But on account of 
 this difference from other languages it certainly 
 presents at first a great difficulty, especially to the 
 English-speaking pupU, who, in his native lan- 
 guage, is accustomed to use the verb to be, to form 
 the passive voice as well as the past lenses of neuter 
 verbs. For instance, is may be used indifferently 
 before a neuter verb, as : She is gone (French, elk 
 est allee), and before a passive voice, as : He is beaten 
 (French, il est frapp£). There is nothing in these 
 sentences that informs the hearer or reader that the 
 first "to be," (used with a neuter verb) expresses 
 a circumstance or state personal to the person 
 spoken of; and the second "to be," (used with a 
 verb in the passive voice), an action performed 
 upon, or a treatment sufered by, the individual 
 spoken of. But in German, tvetben, construed 
 with the participle past of an active verb, can de- 
 note only a passive, hence the passive voice can in 
 German never be confounded with the past tenses 
 of a neuter verb ; e. g., |te ift gegangen, and, er t»tr& 
 
17^ THE KEGULAU VEBB : PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 gcfc^Iagen, present immediately two distinct ideas to 
 the mind. The use of the verb fetn, |ie ift gcgangen, 
 makes it clear that the verb is in the past tense of 
 the active voice, while the use of the verb ftertcit, 
 foUofwed by the past participle (as in cr tott^ flcfdjlfl* 
 gen), informs us that the verb is used in the passive 
 voice. The discrimination is sometimes stiU more 
 striking ; e. g., cr ift geliebt (Latin, amaius est) simply 
 alludes to the state in which the subject happens to 
 be, without any reference to any agent ; er tuitb 
 gelicbt (Latin, amatur) denotes the state in which 
 the subject is placed by an agent, though there is no 
 agent mentioned. 
 
 Note. — ^In English the passive sense is sometimes rather 
 inelegantly indicated by placing the present participle of to be 
 before the past participle of the principal verb ; e. g.. My coat 
 is being made, mein SRod tnirJl gemac^t. But where no in- 
 fluence of human agency is apparent, and a, neuter verb is 
 used in English, it is rendered by the verb simply, and not 
 in the passive voice ; «, g., The water is boiling, means. The 
 water boils, iai SEflffct todjt ; whereas, bdi SBafTcr loirll geto^t, 
 would signify that the water is boiled by some person. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 lie 3:a|>fcr!cit, (the) fortitude tie ^onMung, the action 
 
 (bravery) tcr l;anf, the thanks 
 ber ^ronprinj, the crown-prince totten, to kill 
 
 Ber6ej|cm, to correct flrafcn, to punish 
 
 6eIo|ncn, to reward foc^en, to cook 
 
 Bejol^Icn, to pay fi^Iagen, to beat (strike) 
 
 »er6anncn, to banish tugent|oft, virtuous 
 
 ermartcn, to expect frcmm, pious 
 
 fldjten, to esteem ttcll, because 
 
 ■^alfcn, to hate fcltcn, seldom 
 
 tie Statte, the rat tie Sftngc, the length 
 
 gcfc^oflien, shot Mreit, to drive 
 
 tie S5Bo(i^e, the week gefangcn, caught 
 
THE BEGULAE VERB : PASSIVE VOICE. 175 
 
 Reading Exercise XXI. 
 
 3d^ wcrtc son tneincn Sttern gelictt. "Eu wurbefl »on beittcm 
 DnM geloW. !l;cr unaufmertfame ©diuler wirt son fcinem Se^rer 
 gctatett iBerten. SBir rcurtcit oft »on unfcrcr Sante scrteffert merren, 
 tuenn roir nic^t kffer lefen tbnnten. ©eac^tet toerwn tji kffev aU ge; 
 ^a^t werten. Xiefe ?Otatd)en unt jene ^nafcen ftnli »on rem tcutfdieit 
 Se^rcr nacb §au|e gefd^Wt wortm, locil fie i^re 3lufga6en nic^t gemadt 
 gotten. 3ene tugentiaften SJiiinncr roomi »oit alien Scuten tiefcr 
 ©tatt geai^tct worten. ®ufta» 2ltio,l))^, ter fromme ^ijnig son 
 ©c^tceten, ijt in ber ©djlac^t bei Sii^en, in ter SRii^c son Seipjig, ge* 
 tiJDtet roorten. 2Bir tucrben oft fiir unfcrc guten ipanilungen gctatcit 
 unti fclten 6cIo'[)nt, nitotejioroeniger (nevertheless) Ift ei nnfere 
 5)flid)t, ®ute3 ju t^un. 2;iefe gcfiung »"rbe nii^t son tein gcinbe 
 jerfiort tsorben fein, iscnn unferc ©olboten topfer ge!am))ft ptten. 
 SJ^gbeturg tsurbe son bem ®cnera( StiH? tsa'^renb beg brcipigjo^rigen 
 ^ricge« jer^ott. "Bai @(^Iog bc3 ^ronprinjcn son ^xtix^m tsurbe 
 int 3«^re 1858 gebaut. Eie S^ore bet ©tabt Serlin aerbcn jeben 
 a:ag Mm jc^n U^r gefi^toflfen (closed). 
 
 Theme XXI. 
 
 I am punished by my teacher, if I am disobedient or in- 
 attentive. Thou wast often praised by thy parents. Emma 
 will be blamed by (son) her music-teacher, if she does not 
 learn her lesson better. If I had been here, syour awatch 
 iwould not have been stolen. Your sister wiU be esteemed 
 by everybody (Sebermonn). The workmen have been paid 
 well. A false man is feared and hated. You are expected 
 with your parents at seven o'cloct, or a quarter past seven. 
 To be praised is better than to be blamed. My coat is mak- 
 ing by the most celebrated tailor of this city. Is the water 
 boiling? Alcibiades was banished from (au«) Athens. Car- 
 thage was destroyed by Scipio Africanus in the year 146 be- 
 fore Christ. Charles XII., king of Sweden, was beaten by 
 (son) the Eussians at (in) the battle of (son) Pultawa, in the 
 year 1709. 
 
176 
 
 THE KEGULAE VERB : PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 SBflrum i^ jcner grogc Bmbt be* 
 
 jbroft tuorten ? 
 SJerJen Jic Stioretcr ©tatt 33cr(tn 
 
 jc (ever) gefdjloffcn (closed) ? 
 2Bo flart (died) ®ujia» Sloolpl, 
 
 tcr fromme ^bnig Bon S^tuc- 
 
 ben? 
 3)1 tiefcs ©d^Iof fc^r alt ? 
 SBcr luurte in bcr ©(^lac^t ki 
 
 5)Mltowa fceftegt, tie Sluptt olcr 
 
 bic ©d^hjcben ? 
 SBann ijl ^art^go son ben Sibs 
 
 mem jcrflBrt roorben ? 
 
 SBantm warcn biefe ^naben unb 
 jenc WdT>S^m »on bem Se|rer 
 na^ §aufc gefd^idt worbcn ? 
 
 fBer ifl in ber ©^Io(^t 6ci SDoter* 
 loo Beficgt worben ? 
 
 SBurbcn bie ©oltaten fiir i^re 
 Sflpfcrfeitmtt^elbbelo^nt? 
 
 Siestel tuiirbe ben 3lrkltern fiir 
 biefe 3lrbeit gegeben werbcn ? 
 
 SBann, fagtcn ®ic, tourbc bie ©tabt 
 ffllagbeburg son Sill^ jerjibrt ? 
 
 ^Bnnen ®ie ntir nii^t genau fagen 
 wann bcr breifigjii^rige ^rieg 
 Witt^cte ? 
 
 t^r ^t feine Slufgafcc nid^t gemaiSt 
 
 unc ift unaufmerffam. 
 ©ie weruen jcben 2lbens urn |)unlt 
 
 (exactly) elf U^r gefc^Ioffen. 
 fir wurbe in ber ©d^lac^t 6ei Sit* 
 
 |en, cinige 'Keilen son Scipjig, 
 
 getbbtet. 
 fis wurtc im ^aW 1563 gebaiit. 
 3n ber ©c^Iac^t bci 5)ultarod tsur* 
 
 ben bie ©(^iscben unter ^arl 
 
 Xn. bcftegt. 
 ^art^ago ifl son ben aiL'mcrn 
 
 isa^renb beS britten punifd)en 
 
 (Punic) ^riegcg jerfibrt isor* 
 
 ben. 
 5^icfe ^naben unb jene 9JJabd)en 
 
 waren nac^ ^au]t gcfc^iift mors 
 
 ben, tseil fte trage unb unauf^ 
 
 mcrtfam ^ctsefen rearen. 
 £)ie granjofen unter 9tapoIeon fmb 
 
 in ber ©d&In^t bet 3Batertoo son 
 
 ben SBerbiinbeten (allies) beftegt 
 
 worben. 
 fiinige wurben ntit ®el5 belo^nt, 
 
 aber tie SKeiflen miiffcn mit bem 
 
 S)anle bca SBoHe^ jufrieten fein. 
 ©ie (siirbcn tSglie^ (daily) einen 
 
 ■^albcn a:|aler* ober fvinfje^^n 
 
 ©ilbergrofc^en * er'^alten. 
 2Co^renb tea breigigja^rigcn Srie* 
 
 ge«,im ficbje^ntcn 3aW«nbcrt. 
 Ser breifigja^^rtge ^ricg witt^cte 
 
 tsa|renb ber 3a|« 1618 6i3 
 
 1648. 
 
 * A JJalcr is a German dollar (about 70 cents in gold), and is equiv- 
 alent to 30 ©ilBergrofiSen. 
 
THE EEGULAB TEKB : PASSIVE VOICE. 177 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 2)ag gcflo^tcne i^fcrb. 
 
 Da3 fc^ijn|ic 9)fert) eincs Sauers toutbe Bet Sflai^t aui fctnem 
 ©tatic gcftoilen.' Iler Sauer rct^c ta^er auf etncn 95fer*cntartt, 
 wetter je^n 9Reitcn eon feinem 2)orfe gc^alten tourbc, in ter 3t6|t(^t, 
 ein ontercs ju laufen. Sr war nid;t wenig crjiaunt, unter ben 55fer* 
 ten, lie jum SSer!ouf ouegefieHt" waren, fein eigen' 3)fer5 ju cricnnen. 
 ©ogleic^ nimrat' er ti beim ^amtii unS ruft au3 :' „'Dxt\ei f ferb 
 ge^ijrt mir. 35or irei Sagen tft a mix gcfto^Ien' hmrbcn." 
 
 „tai lann nii^t fein, licBcr greunb," fagte fe'^r Pfli(i^ ber SKann, 
 ml&jtx iai $ferb uerlaufcn woUte ; „id! ^a6e liefcs ^^fcrb fc^on longer 
 ali eln Srijr. S3 ijl itt^t ^%x 9)ferb ; oBcr eS ip mBglid^, baf e« 
 einigc Sle^nlic^teit ntit i|m ^at." ° 
 
 !Der SSouct tegt f^neH feine fceiten ipance auf bie 2lugen bc3 ^^fertea 
 «nb ruft 5 „®ut ! wenn baa S'^icr 3|nen' fc^on fo langc gel^ijrt, fagen 
 ©ic mir nun, auf tuelclem 3luge es Winb i(i." 
 
 Der anbere ?!Jlonn :^atte iBtrlli* tai ^Jfcrb gc^o^^ten unb ^atte ei 
 ni^t gcnau unterfucbt, 3l6er bo cr anttnottcn ntugte, fagte er auf'8 
 ©eratfieirto^:' „2luf bem linfen 2luge."— „i;o« S^ier bllnb <iuf bem 
 Hnfen 2tugc ?" fragte ber SBauer erftaunt. „D^ !" rief » bcr 5:;icB, „t^ 
 ■^obe mi&i nur uerfproi^en,'" mit tent rei^ten Sluge jte^^t" ti ni&it." 
 
 ■ Oeflo^len, past participle of" fie^fen. 
 
 * Sludge jlellt, past participlefof tlie separable verb auSflcIIen ; the pre- 
 fix gCf in separable verbs, is placed between the particle and the verb. 
 See Lesson XXXIII., Obs. V. 
 
 ' ^igen, the ending e8 is here omitted. See Note * on page 133. 
 
 * 9Jimmt, third person singular, present tense, of the irregular verb 
 ne|men. 
 
 ' 3iuft MXi, third person singular, present tense, of the separable verb 
 ouSrufen. 
 
 ' The conjunction ia^ reqmres the v^rb to be here at the end of tha 
 sentence. 
 
 ' SJneit, dative of the personal pronoun Sie (you). 
 
 ' Slufd @erat:^ewo^I, at random, at hap hazard. 
 
 ' SRief (cried), imperfect of ruf cn. 
 
 '» 3^ id-it mi^ nur setfvroc^cn, 1 have only mcde a mistake. 
 
 " ©ie^t, third person singular, present tense, of ft jen. 
 
178 THE PEONOUNS. 
 
 §ierauf kecfte in iBciuer tie 3l«gcn iti gjfcrbca auf unt> fagte: 
 „(Sa ifl je^t ojfcnkr, bag ®te cin ©dsurte unb cin 'Bxtb rmb. ©el^cn 
 ®ic, ta« 5)fert) ifl gar ni^t Hint. 3(i) ¥^i ®ie nur gcfragt, «ni ben 
 l;ieifla^l ^erau^jukingcn." 
 
 Der !Bleb tnurJjc flcnot^igt, iai 3)fcrb suriitfjugekn,' unb wurbe 
 beftraft, wie er t& iDerbient |atte. 
 
 IiESSON XXIL Seftton 22. 
 
 The Pronouns, (^ic ffiirworter.) 
 
 Rem. — ^The pronouns are in German divided into Peesonai,, 
 PossEssrvE, Demonsteative, Relative and Coebela- 
 
 TIVE, iNTEREOGATIVE^and INDEFINITE. 
 
 Personal Pronouns. (Jpcrfonlt^e fjuritiorter.) 
 
 Obs. L — The personal pronouns are t^, I ; itt, thou ; et 
 {masc), he ; fie (fern.), she ; and eS {neut.), it ; Wit, 
 we ; i|>t (@ie), you ; fte, they. They are declined 
 as follows : 
 
 Ibt pebson. 2d person. 
 
 Ibr all genders. 
 Nom. ic^, I bu, thou 
 
 Gen. ntciner * of me beiner * of thee 
 
 Dat. inir, to me bir, to thee 
 
 Ace. mic^, me bid^, thee 
 
 ' 2>e(ttc — auf, Imperfect of the separable verb aufbecten. 
 
 ' |)erau$)Ukingeni sutitdjugeien; the preposition }u in separable verbs is 
 placed between the prefix and the verb. See Lesson XXXIII., Obs. V. 
 
 * In poetry and in certain familiar expressions, ntcilt, Scin, fetlt are 
 very frequently used for the genitive, instead of the full form, metncr, 
 beiner, feincr, ; e. g., Sergtg mein ni^r, forget me not ; gebente fein, re- 
 member him. 
 

 
 THE PEONOUNS. 
 
 j.7a 
 
 
 
 3d febson. 
 
 
 
 Mase. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 er, he 
 
 flc, she 
 
 eg,t it 
 
 Gen. 
 
 felncr * of him i^rer, of her 
 
 fcincr, of it 
 
 Dat. 
 
 \^XA, to him 
 
 {"^r, to her 
 
 i^m, to it 
 
 Aec. 
 
 i^n, him 
 
 ftc, her 
 Plural. For aU genders. 
 
 ti, it 
 
 
 1st pbkson. 
 
 3d person. 
 
 3d pekson. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Wir, we 
 
 i|r or ©ic, you 
 
 ftc, they 
 
 Gen. 
 
 unferer, of us 
 (unfer) 
 
 euerjor S^rer, of you 
 
 {■^rer, of them 
 
 Dat. 
 
 una, to us 
 
 eu^ or S^nen, to you 
 
 it)ncn, to them 
 
 Ace. 
 
 una, us 
 
 cuc^ or ©ie, you 
 
 jie, them 
 
 Obs. n. — ^In German there are two modes of addressing- a 
 person, in and @ie. ®U is employed in address- 
 ing the Deity, and is used between near relations, 
 intimate friends, § and to servants and inferiors 
 generally. @ie is, lilce you in English, the polite 
 mode of address ; || it is used particularly with 
 
 * See note on preceding page. 
 
 f 6S is frequently contracted with a verb or with a pronoun im- 
 mediately preceding; e. g., xi) Job'S, instead of xici (jatt ti; ttl« if)'§ gelf 
 fen ^atte, instead of Ai tifi e8 gelefcn fiatte. This contraction is not to he 
 recommended, except in colloquial expressions. 
 
 :j: The lengthened form, mxtXi is sometimes used Instead of citcr. 
 
 § Compare a passage in Schiller's Don Carlos, at the end of the first 
 act: 
 
 »Unb jejt noc^ eine Sitte, Cicier ! — nenne 
 SKii^ bu," jc. 
 
 I It is a custom in all of the modern languages, in polite modes of ad- 
 dress, to avoid directness by employing a plural form. We say, you 
 are, when addressing only one person ; so do the French. But the Ger- 
 mans, Italians, Spaniards, and Portuguese prefer the third person, as it 
 is still less direct. Noehdeu attributes this perverseness to the corrup- 
 tion of the middle ages. (Compare Fowler, English Language, p. 336- 
 238, § 330, 331.) 
 
180 THE PEONODNS. 
 
 strangers and superiors. Properly speaking, Ste 
 is in the third person plural, but is distinguisbed 
 from the other form of the same person by the ini- 
 tial capital.* 
 
 Eeflexive Foem : ftc^. 
 
 Dat. ! jji j himself, herself, itself \F(yr both numbers 
 
 Ace. i 1 yourself, yourselves, themselves ) and aU genders. 
 
 Obs. in. — In EngHsh all inanimate objects and abstract 
 ideas are neuter, but in German, as we have akeady 
 noticed, they may be either mascuUne, feminine, or 
 neuter. Hence the pronoun answering to the En- 
 glish U must in German be of the same gender as 
 the noun for which it stands ; thus, to the question, 
 "Where is thy pen? the German answers, ftc ift ijier, 
 and not, as we say, it is here ; because pen is a noun 
 of the feminine gender in German; thus also to the 
 question. Where is your hat? the answer, it is in 
 my room, would be in German, Ct ijl in meinem S'H'* 
 mer, because ^tlt is masculine.f 
 
 * The first periods of the German lan^iage knew nothing of such a 
 use of the pronouns. 3Jr for Su, in addressing persons of rank, was 
 introduced, probably from the French and Italian, towards the begin- 
 ning of the thirteenth century, and was soon applied to different classes 
 of persons. Su was used only in cases of intimacy, and by superiors in 
 addressing their inferiors. In the seventeenth century persons of dis- 
 tinction began to be addressed in the plural, and the third person sin- 
 gular was used mostly towards inferiors, and in familiar intercourse. 
 At present t?ie third person plural is almost universally employed, and 
 Su is reserved for affectionate intimacy, or for pathetic language.^ 
 Bbckeh. 
 
 t Ip cases, however, where the personal pronouns refer to persons, 
 whether male or female, who, for some reason, are put in the neutCi! 
 gender, (diminutives and words like 2Sci6, Sraueniimmtr', the fronoun 
 commonly follows the sex of the person spoken of, without regard to 
 the grammatical gender of the antecedent ; e. g., wai mac^t 3^t ®85n($en ? 
 t(i cr nod) frant ?— how is your little son ? is he still ill 1 
 
THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 181 
 
 Obs. rV. — The German pronoun cS is employed, 1. like it 
 and there in English, as a nominative both before 
 and after a verb, without regard to the gender or 
 number of any noun, understood or expressed ; e. g.. 
 It is the teacher, e§ i|l ber Se|rer ; it is the countess, 
 c8 i|l lie ®rdftn ; it is the child, C§ ifl iaS Mnt ; it is 
 my brothers, c8 ftnb meine Sriiler ; he means it well, 
 cr meint cS gut, &c. It is, 2. also used when special 
 emphasis is (o be given to the subject of the sen- 
 tence ; e. g., c8 IcBe ter ^ijnig, long Hve the king. 
 3. When n"© is used with a personal pronorai, as : it 
 is I, the position of words, in the afi&rmative form in 
 German, is precisely the reverse of the English; e. g.. 
 
 It is I, i(^ bin ei it is we, mir ftn& c3 
 
 It is thou, bu 6ift a it is you, | |^i/j/^j } ti 
 
 It is he (she), cr (|te) ift C8 it is they, pc ftn& ti, 
 
 rNTERROGATrVE FORM. 
 
 Is it I? 9Stn i^ a ? Is it we ? ftttb loir e3 ? 
 
 Was it thou ? warjl tu es ? Was it you ? woren ©ie c« ? 
 
 Note. — <Bi is never thus used in tlie genitive, but is sup- 
 plied by the demonstrative pronoun (see Lesson XXIV.) Jlef" 
 fen or bcffcIBen ; e. g., Are you in want of it ? Sebitrfen ©te 
 beffent In the dative after a preposition the adverb Jjn 
 (there) coalesces with the preposition, and is used instead, 
 comp. there«»J/j, thereof, etc. ; e. g.. How much has he paid 
 for it f tDtcioict l^ot er bafijr ieja^lt (and not fur e8); are you con- 
 tented mth it? jinb ©te iomit lufxititn^ See p. 319, Obs. V. 
 
 Obs. V. — ^To avoid a repetition of the personal pronoun of 
 the third person, cr, |ie, eg (in any of its cases), it 
 is sometimes replaced by the demonstrative terfelbe, 
 blefctbe, tojyelbe (lit., the same) ; e. g., the answer to 
 the question : Have you given him the stick ? I have 
 given it to him, would be rendered, tc^ ^obe tl)m &CttJ 
 felben gegeben (instead of ic^ i}ak i^n i^m gcgebcn). 
 
182 
 
 THE PEKSONAL PEONOtTNS. 
 
 The Reflexive Personal Pronoun. 
 
 Obs. VI. — The pronouns of the first and second person have 
 in German a reflexive power, hence the word self, 
 used ia Enghsh, cannot in these two persons be 
 separately expressed ; e. g.. Sing., I excused myse^ 
 i&j entfc^ulJigtc mic^ ; plur., we excused ourseZues, 
 l»ir cntf^uloigten un& ; go and wash thyse^, gc^ itnc 
 Waf^e &ic^ ; plar., go and wash yoursefoes, ge^et unD 
 Wofc^et eu^. For the third person a distinct re- 
 flexive and reciprocal pronoun is used in place 
 of i|ti followed by felbji : ft(J^ ; e. g., he excused 
 himse^, er cnt|'(|ul!)igtc fiify ; plur., they excused 
 themselves, fie entfc^utcigten ft«^. @ic^ has only one 
 form for the three genders both in the singular and 
 plural* (comp. also the Lesson on Eeflexive Verbs, 
 on p. 302). But when the English pronouns, my- 
 self, thyself, &c. (Latin, ipse ; French, mhne), are 
 only emphatic repetitions of the nominative, render 
 them fclbft (or felber), without repeating the other 
 pronouns ; e. g., the physician himself is sick ; he 
 cannot cure even himself, tcr Slrjt fetfift ijt tranf ; er 
 fann p* ftl^^ ni*t %t\\tn. You say so yourself, ©ic 
 fagen c3 fctbft ; they have seen it themselves, fie ^afccn 
 ii felbft gefe^en. 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 
 fcaS Safi^entuc^, the pocket- tie ©pracfee, the language 
 
 handkerchief i^aS OeHet, the territory 
 
 tie SBofc^frau, the washerwoman lag Dleid;, the realm, kingdom 
 tie SSa^rl^cit, the truth "iai ^aupt, the head 
 
 * When tlus reciprocal signification might be misanderstood and con- 
 founded with the mere reflexive sense (e. g., they love themselves ffie 
 lirten fl^] and they love each other) the indeclinable pronoun einan^cr 
 is used; e.g., fie Iteieti ctnantier; we know one another, ivtr tennen eiii' 
 ttnbcr. 
 
 f ©cI6(t placed before a noun answers to the English even ; e. g., even 
 his enemies admired him, fel6|i feine geinbe bcwunberten i^n. 
 
THE I'EKSOSAI, PEONODNS. 183 
 
 lit ©rammatif, the grammar He 9leifc, the journey 
 tie Jpantfi^rift, the handwriting i^einjo^ncn, to attend 
 
 (penmanship) loergrBpern, to enlarge, increase 
 
 ble ©elegcnlcit, the opportunity i/ittva6^ttn, to regard 
 ft^ ent|"(^ulltgcn, to excuse one's crjii^ten, to narrate 
 
 self fceenbtgen, to finish 
 
 |ic^ auajcii^ncn, to distinguish ixaud^m, to need 
 
 one's self itkn, to practice 
 
 |ic^ crinnem, to remember jcigen, to show 
 
 tterfc^affctt, to obtain, procure troden, dry 
 fajl, almost genau, precisely 
 
 Reading Exercise XXII. 
 
 3^ a&itt bid) unb bu lieBjl ntii^. (£r tnbelt jt(^ unb fJe Mt (^n. 
 ©ie |o6en uni geIo6t. 2Dir werben es felbfl t^un. 3c^ werbe bir* 
 morgen antoortcn. !Dtefe3 §au3 tfl i^m ju flein, cr lotrb e3 serfau? 
 fen. 9JJctne Sritber wcrben 3^nen ant jweiten 3lugujl antwortcn. 
 ©le ge^orc^t t^r ni^t. 2Barum antoortefl bu mix nti^t? SBirb ti 
 ©te nii^t getiiufc^i |aBen ? Sefhofen ©ie t|n bte|le3mal nii^t fur feine 
 §onbl«ngen, ahtx kjirafen ©ie i|rt bas jweitc 9Jlat. 2lntB3ortc mix, 
 l^afl bu bie aBa^ri)eit crja^tt? SBcrtaufc beine beutf^e ©rammatit 
 ni^t, bcnn bu »ir(l |te fafl tiiglic^ (daily) 6rau(^en. Jpier tji einc 
 \i^iini ^anbfd^rtft, fcetradjte jte (it) genau. SScrben ©ie mir eine ®c* 
 legen^cit Bcrfd^ajfen bic fransbfifc^e ©prat^e ju iiben ? Sllcyanber bcr 
 ®rof e ^ot jic^ gegen bie SJJutter tH ©ariua grogmiit^ig gejeigt. 9lai^ 
 ben ))unif(!^en (Punic) ^ricgen |at |t(^ bag ®cMet beg rbmifi^en Stets 
 c^eg fafl ia^rlid) (annually) Dergrbgert. Siifar tear noi^ ein junger 
 unklanntcr 5Kann, alg ^^ompejug pc^ f^on in nie|rcrcn ^riegen aug? 
 gejeic^nct |atte. Srtnnern ©ie jtd) niii^t feiner? 3^ ef egfcWfl? 
 SKcin SBettcr cntfi^ulbigte |i(^, er tonn ^eute nid^t fommen. 2lm 8ten 
 3ull 1689 war ^tttx I., ^aifcr son SRu^fanb, in 5Kogtau, urn etner 
 ^Jrojeffton (procession) in ber ^auptfir^e Betjuwo^nen, wo feine 
 ©c^wejler ©op^ie auc^ gegenwartig war. 
 
 * A noun or pronoun representing the object in reference to which 
 an action is done or directed, is generally put in the cUttim (see p. 379). 
 
184 
 
 THE PEBSONAL PKONOUNS. 
 
 Theme XXIL 
 
 He blames me, and thou lovest her. She has praised thee. 
 I shall answer you during this month. Will he do it 
 himself ? They wiU sell him all his books. She does not 
 obey us. We have not yet answered them. My friend, yoxi 
 deceive yourself. Did (^at) she accompany you on (auf) 
 your journey ? This time (licsmat, contraction for liiefcSmol) 
 Ij shall, not obey yous. Answer me, hast thou told the 
 truth ? Do not sell thy German Grammar, thou wilt need 
 it thyself. Procure me an opportunity to speak French. 
 Has your brother shovra you our new opera house ? Tou 
 have bought yourself English steel-pens (©ta^Ifeticr), show 
 them to me. They will finish their theme without you and 
 without her. I haye defended him, for he has always de- 
 fended us. Do you not see me ? Has the washerwoman 
 washed my silk (feiben) pocket-handkerchief? Yes, she has 
 washed it, but it is not yet (nod^) dry. Is it thou ? It is I 
 myself. Where is your old gray horse ? I. had an oppor- 
 tunity to sell it. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 SCarum |a6en ©ie ml^ getabett £u '§ajl beine SlufgaBc nid^t ge* 
 
 Mnb i^^tt gelofct ? ma^t, aier cr ^attt ftc gcmac^t, 
 
 §a6cn|ie3|itcnf4ongeontoortet? ^dti, fie l^abeit una no(^ (yet) 
 
 itic^t geantwortct. 
 SBerbcn @ie flc^ nld^t gctaitfc^t Stein, mcin Sreunb, wir fiinnen 
 laten? \mi unmBglic^ (impossible) 
 
 getiinfc^t '^obcn. 
 aBa« |at bic^ ber <So^n mni ©inb ©ie biefcn ©ommer in 
 S«ac^6ar« gcfragt ? granfreic^ gettefcn? fragte er 
 
 2Ca« flntoortetefl bu t:^m fluf feine SlUerbinga (to be sure), antoor? 
 grage (enquiry) ? tetc i(^ if^m, i^ bin me^r ali 
 
 fec^g SWonate In ^axii gctocfcn. 
 
THE PEESONAL PEONOUNS. 
 
 185 
 
 iKetn" SruScr ifl axi&i in 3)aris ge* 
 mefen, ^a6en <aie i^n nic^t 
 gpfe^en? 
 
 SBoUteit fte mit euc^ ge^cn? 
 
 §at 3^ncn 3^r Srubcr f(^on unfre 
 
 ncue Sriide gejeigt? 
 3|l e3 »ot)r lap tu tir cngllfc^c 
 
 ©ta^IfeBern getauft |afl ? 
 SBerHopft (knocks) on bic Ipr? 
 SBoUcn ®ic fo gut feln mit 3|r 
 
 SSiirtcrtut^ ju lei^en ? 
 3c^ Witt ti nur auf ctnigc JEagc. 
 
 SBarum fijnncn ©le ti mix ntc^t 
 
 Ici:^cn ? 
 ©age mir, ^ajt bu bte SBa'^r'^elt 
 
 gefagt? 
 3fl itc e3 fcttfl, ofecr ifl id nur il|r 
 
 ©(fatten (shadow) ? 
 SJirji tiu feiner in ictnem S3riefe 
 
 getcnten (remember) ? 
 
 SBiri) er fi^ biefe SSitc^cr felBjl »er* 
 
 ((^ojfcn f onncn ? 
 ©oUte i^r i^r Sruber baiS ®cfe fiir 
 
 tie Slcife nod) Scrlin getcn ? 
 
 Stein, ic^ ^^oBe i^n nic^t gefe^n, 
 aber ic^ ^bre bop ct mic^ gefe^cn 
 
 9lein, fie bonften (thanked) un3, 
 
 fte t)atten fcine ^t\t. 
 9iein, mcin Jperr, er ^ot fte mir 
 
 noi^ ni(^t gcjetgt. 
 3i^ tflufte mir nur cinigc, i(^ totfl 
 
 fte crji probircn (try). 
 23 ifl meine iConte, 3rflu ©riifc. 
 S3 t^ut mir leib (I am sorry), 
 
 ii^ fonn e3 3^nEn nic^t lei^cn. 
 3c^ toitrbe c3 S^ncn gem (gladly) 
 
 lei^en, okr e3 i^ no^ teim 
 
 Sud^Binber. 
 3c^ foge nur wai wo^r ijl, ^icr 
 
 fmb fie felbft. 
 ©le ifl ti felBfl, wcnn i^ mii^ 
 
 nii^t irre (mistake). 
 ^Kcin Srief ifl kinase beenbigt, 
 
 aber i&i wid feiner in meinem 
 
 9ldd^fien gcbenlcn. 
 Sr reirb \ii ftc^ mit §iilfe (aid) 
 
 meineS 93aterS serfdiopn fbnnen. 
 9teirt, er foflte e3 i^r nic^t gcben, 
 
 oB'er er wollte ti t^un.. 
 
 Site brei JJreuniic. 
 
 ®in 9Konn l^atte brei greunbe, giuet son i^nen licbte cr fe^r; bcr 
 tritte war i^m gleid^giiltig, oJgleii^ biefer fein befler Sreunb wor.' Sinfl 
 wurbe er' sor ben 3lid)ter geforbert, wo er — obfc^on unfdjulbig — ^bod) 
 ^art Berilogt war. SBcr unter euc^, fogte er ju feinen greunben, raitt 
 mit mir ge^cn unb fiir tnii^ jeugcn ? benn ii^ Mn ungcrccfet scrflogt, 
 unb ber ^bnig jiirnt. Der erfle feiner greunbc cntfd^ulbigte fi^ fogleid) 
 
 ' fS&at is required to be at the end of the sentence by the conjunction 
 oBfllcii^. 
 • dv is required to be after the verb by the adverb cinS. 
 
186 
 
 POSSESSIVE PIIONO0NS. 
 
 unt fogte, er IBnnc nlc^t ntit i^m gel^cn, tuegen anbercr <3i\&i'd]tt. ttt 
 Sroeitc Begleitetc i^n bt« jur Spre tes Sli^t^aufeg; tann wanlte cr 
 fii^ urn' unt gtng juriicf," avii gurd^t cor bem jomigen 9li(^tcr, £er 
 S/ritte, auf weli^en cr dm «5enigflen gcbaut ^attc, ging^ |inein, rctcte 
 fiir i^tt uirt jcugte son fclner Unf^ulJ fo frcuJig, tap bcr 9ti(^tcr i^u 
 ioalieg' unt kfi^cnftc. 
 
 Dret grcunJe tjat ter SJlcnfc^ in bicfer ffielt; wic Bctragen fie fid) in 
 ber ©tunbc bcs Zetti, wcnn ®ott i^n Bor fcin ©eric^t forbert ? 'Lai 
 ®etb, fcin cr^er grcunb, serldpt' t^n juerfi, unb ge^t nic^t mit i^m. 
 ©eine SSerwanbtcn unb Si^eunbe begleitcn i^n Hi jur 5E|itrc 
 bcs @ra6ca, unb tc^ren'bannjuriid in i^tt ^aufer. Ser Srittc, ben 
 er tm ScBcn am Bfteflen sergaf ,° ftnb fetnc gutcn 3D erf e. ©ie 
 atlein Bcgleiten i^n Ui ju bem sironc be« 9ltdf)ter« ; fie gc^en Doran, 
 fprec^en ^r i^n, unb ftnben Sarm^erjigfeit unt ®nate. 
 
 LESSON XXm. 2emon 23. 
 
 Possessive Pronouns, (©ep^onactgeniie Jfiirtoorter.) 
 
 Obs. I. — The possessive pronouns are derived (as in Greek 
 and Latin), from the genitive case of the respective 
 personal pronouns ; e. g., meitt, my, from nteiner, 
 of me ; &ctn, thy, from btintt, of ihee. They 
 agree in person with the noun which they represent ; 
 that is, the person of the possessors. As moreover 
 they are also declined, their endings assist in de- 
 termining the gender, number, and case of the noun 
 ■which they limit. 
 
 ' SSantlte (M) urn. Imperfect of the separable and reflexive verb ^ij 
 umtoentien. 
 ' ®ing s«rfiil, Imperfect of the separable verb juriitfge|en. 
 ' (Sing ^inein, Imperfect of the separable verb ^inetnge^en. 
 * Coaliei Imperfect of loJloffcn. 
 
 5 SJctloigt, Present tense third person singular of Bcrlttffen. 
 » aJerga'^. Imperfect of ticrfleffcn. 
 ' Sif)Kv—inxM, Present of jurittReSren. 
 
THi; POSSESSIVE PB0N0DN3. 187 
 
 Obs. II.-~"When a possessive pronoun stands in connection 
 with a noun, it is called a conjunctive possessive 
 pronoun, and takes in the singular the ending of 
 the indefinite, and in the plural that of the definite 
 article, as indicated in Lesson II., Obs. II. ; e. g., 
 Have yoa the book of my brother ? l)aben ®ie CavS 
 S3u^ melncS SruterS ? She has seen the hats of thy 
 sisters, fie ^ot Tie §ute letncr ©c^lDejiern gefcl)en. 
 
 Obs. III. — ^When a possessive pronoun is not immediately 
 connected v^ith a noun, but simply refers to a sub- 
 stantive already mentioned or understood, it is 
 called an absolute possessive pronoun, and in Ger- 
 man is used either vyith or without the article, 
 while in EngUsh the article must be omitted (comp. 
 mine, thine, &c.). 
 
 Obs. IV. — ^When the absolute possessive pronoun is not 
 accompanied by the article, the pronoun takes 
 the endings of the definite article, viz. : Ct (in the 
 masculine), C (in the feminine), eS (in the neuter) ; 
 e. g., meiner, teinc, fcincS (compare biefcr in Lesson I., 
 Obs. II., and Less. XVI., Obs. VH., on the inflection 
 of adjectives before a noun used without the article.) 
 
 Obs. V. — ^But when the absolute possessive pronoun is pre- 
 ceded by the definite article, the pronoun takes the 
 same ending as an adjective preceded by the definite 
 article (see Less. XVI., Obs. IV.) ; e. g., &cr metnc, 
 bit beine, &a§ feine, &c. (comp. French, le mien, from 
 mon ; le tien, from ton, &c.). Most generally the ab- 
 solute possessive pronoun, when preceded by the 
 article, inserts fg between the root and the ending ; 
 e. g., icr meinige, tie tcintge, SaS feintge, &c. 
 
 Note. — As a predicate with the verb fcin the absolute pos- 
 sessive pronoun, like predicate adjectives, generally remains 
 uninfleeted, e. g., biefe^ |>au4 ifl mcttt, this house is mine (no- 
 tice the change in the English from my to mine) ; imti 3)fcrb 
 if} ftin, that horse is his. (Comp. also Lesson XVI., Obs. I). 
 
188 
 
 THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. 
 wr. Plwak 
 
 Maae. 
 
 Feim. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 Fw all gm4er». 
 
 mcin 
 
 mctne 
 
 mcin, my 
 
 mctne, my 
 
 Icin 
 
 tcine 
 
 tcin, thy 
 
 tcine, thy 
 
 fein 
 
 feinc 
 
 fein, his 
 
 fcinc, his 
 
 U)r 
 
 %c 
 
 i^r, her 
 
 i^re, her 
 
 fein 
 
 fcinc 
 
 [cin, its 
 
 fcinc, its 
 
 unfcr 
 
 unfcref 
 
 unfcr, our 
 
 unfcrc, our 
 
 3^r. 
 cucr* 
 
 3^« 
 cucref 
 
 3^"^' [your 
 cucr, ) ^ 
 
 3^rc, ). 
 cucrc (cure), ) ' 
 
 i^r 
 
 t|re 
 
 i^r, their 
 
 i|re, their 
 
 your 
 
 The Absolute Possessive Pronouns Mot Accompanied by the 
 
 Article. 
 'lor. Plural. 
 
 Masc 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 meinec 
 
 mctne 
 
 mcineS 
 
 mctne, mine 
 
 teincr 
 
 tcinc 
 
 itinti 
 
 bcine, thine 
 
 feiner 
 
 feinc 
 
 feineS 
 
 feinc, his 
 
 i|rer 
 
 i^re 
 
 i^rca 
 
 i|re, hers 
 
 unfererf 
 
 unfere 
 
 unfcrc3 
 
 unfere, ours 
 
 3^rcr 
 
 3|re 
 
 3|rc3 
 
 3^"' (yours 
 euerc, 3 "' 
 
 euercrf 
 
 eucre 
 
 cucrcs (cttrc«) 
 
 i^rcr 
 
 i^re 
 
 i^rcg 
 
 i^rc, theirs 
 
 * S^ro was formerly vised instead of ^^u, her, and also in place of 
 6uer, your, in addressing persons of high rank ; e. g., S^to (now ^^rc 
 or (Sure) SKojejlcit, your Majesty. In written communications, the pro- 
 nouns (Eure, your ; ©cine, his ; and ©eincri to his, used in. addressing 
 persons of great distinction, are commonly abbreviated into gm., ®c., 
 ®r. ; e. g., 6tn. ©utc^Iauc^t, your highness ; (ge. SKajcjiait fcer ^onig Dott 
 95teu§en; @r. SSttjeflat bent fionige son SBaietn. 
 
 f The euphonic change to which adjectives ending in x, h or eiti are 
 subject (comp. Lesson XVI., Obs. VIII.), may also be applied to the pos- 
 sessive pronouns; e. g., itnfcre or unfrc; unfetcr or unfrer; bet unfertge; or 
 better, tinfrigt; euere or cure; tuerer or cuvcr; ber euerige or eurige. 
 
THE POSSESSIVE PEOKODNS. 
 
 189 
 
 The Absolute Possessive Pronouns Preceded by the 
 
 Article. 
 ar. Phi/ral. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neuter. For aU genders. 
 
 ter meine or metntQC tie mein(tg)e iai mein(lg)e tie mcin(i9)cn 
 ter tieinc or teinige lie t)etn(ig)e iai tein(ig)e tic tein(ig)ctt 
 ter feinc or feinigc tie fein(ig)e iai |'ein(ig)e tic fein(ig)en 
 tcr i|rc or t^rtge tie i^r(ig)e tas i^r(ig)e tic i|r(ig)en 
 
 ter, tie, tag unfr(ig)c;* pi. tic unfr(ig)cn 
 
 ter, tic, tag 3|r(ig)c or curige;* pZ. tie 3l';(tg)Ett 
 
 ter, tic, tag i^r(ig)e; pi. tic i^r(tg)cn. 
 
 Declension of the Absolute Possessive Pronoun with 
 the Article. 
 
 'Zar. Plural. 
 
 For all genders. 
 >ie meinctt 
 tcr meinett 
 ten meiitcn 
 tie meincn 
 
 Nom. &er meine 
 Gen. teg meinctl 
 Dat. tern mcinen 
 Ace. ten meinCtt 
 
 Fern. 
 
 He meine 
 ter meincn 
 ter meinctt 
 tie meine 
 
 Or: 
 
 ba^ meine 
 teg meinett 
 tem meinen 
 tag meine 
 
 Plv/ral. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 For all genders. 
 He meinigett 
 
 N. feci* meinige &ic meinigc t>o8 meinige 9ie meinigcti 
 I meintgeti tcr meinigen teg meinigcti ter meinigcn 
 n meinigen tcr meinigett tem meinigen ten meintgen 
 
 memtgeti tcr memlgen teg memtgcti ter mctntgcn 
 meinigen tcr meinigett tem meinigen ten meintgen 
 meinigen l)ic mcinige tag mcinige tic mcinigen 
 
 G. teg 
 
 D. tem 
 
 A. ten meinigen 
 
 Obs. VI. — In German, as in Greet, the definite article is used 
 instead of the possessive pronoun, in sentences 
 where no doubt or ambiguity exists relative to the 
 possessor; e. g., He had a knife in his hand, er ^attc 
 ein aJJejJer in &cr Jpant. 
 
 « See Obs. V. on page 187. 
 
190 
 
 THE POSSESSIVE PBONOUNS. 
 
 Obs. VII. — ^In English we often say of mine, instead of one of 
 my ; e. g., A friend of mine, or one of my friends ; 
 but in German the latter form only is employed ; 
 e. g., etnet meinet Srfunte. In conversalional Ger- 
 man the personal pronoun (Dat.) is frequently used 
 instead of the possessive ; e. g., He is a friend of 
 mine, cr ifl cin grcunb son mix, 
 
 Obs. Vm. — The absolute possessive pronouns are also used 
 as substantives, and then have a capital initial ; 
 e. g., txt fdletntgen ftnt alle gcfunC, all my family 
 are well; ^alten @ie lag ^i^te jufammcn, keep all 
 [that is] yours together, i. e., take care of your 
 property. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 kcr ©onncnfc^trm, the parasol in bte Safc^c pcden, to put into 
 bie Sliidfe^r, the return ohe's potket 
 
 L^ble SJimefcn^ctt, the absence gcprcn, to belong 
 
 tie Uni»cr|ttJit, the University foetcn, just now 
 
 ber ^xd&, the price iiitftoS, helpless 
 
 ter ©c'^aft, the salalry motern, fashionable 
 
 tie Sofc^e, the pocket gcfc^ricfcen, written 
 
 ancrfcnnen, to recognize gtlffcn, read 
 
 fhtJircn, to study getoren, bom 
 
 Reading Exercise XXIII. 
 
 tWein ©o|n ijl in ter ©c^ule; too ijl ber betne (rcinigc) ? 3|l fein 
 ^ou8 ebenfo grog oI« Sa3 S^rige ? Souifen^ ®ro§mutter iji »iel oltcr 
 aii Me eurige; fie wuWe im 3al^re 1T80 geboren. guer 2e|rcr iann 
 nfi^t \o gut l:cut)'^ fpre^en aU ber unfrtgc, benn cr t|l nur cin '^d^x 
 in i;cutfc^Ianb gcwcfcn. 3|r ^ut iji ntd^t fo fd^ijn unb mobcm ali bcr 
 ilrigej benn ber i|rc ifl in '^axii ju einem l^o^en fJreife gcfauft mor* 
 ben. Unfere ©oltatcn ^kn fiir ben grieben getam))ft, bie eurigcn 
 l^aBcn mit ben unfrtgcn gefam)jft. 9Wori^ |at feinc gebcm serloren; 
 Sflctlte l§at bic i^rigen gcfunben, SBtr 6a6en curen Sricf nii^t Icfcn 
 
THE POSSESSIVE PB0N0UN8. 191 
 
 Ibnnen. SBarum '^ofl ku mir feincn SSrief tua^rcnb tetner 2lfcwefcn|eit 
 gcfc^ricBcn ? £;cr SRcffc unfcres SlrjtcS war im Bortgen Sa^re in ber 
 SMci unb ^at gegm bie ©riei^en gcfampft; ki fclner fRMU^x tDoU* 
 ten i^n bie ©eintgen nii^t onertcnnen. ^Dtefer ®arten ij^ mein, cr 
 gel;i3rt ju jenem alten Jpaufc. 3d) flcdte tai ©clt in bie Safdic unb 
 fragte it)n, 06 cr me^r ^ttt, 3(^ tur*tete mid) ttor i^r, fie ^attc cin 
 fcbarfca 5Kcifer in bcr Jpanb. 3(1 jcncf fltte 9}?ann ein gi^cunb »on 
 3^nen ? S^iefe junge 1!omc iji cine meiner greunbinnen. @c. Wla^ 
 jeflat (majesty) ber ^Bnig Don ©riei^enlanb ^at gcgen bie 2:iirlct 
 ^ricg erflart (declare). 
 
 Theme XXIII. 
 
 Your house is very large ; is it as large as mine ? My 
 brother is not so industrious as his. That little boy has lost 
 his new hat. Their garden is much larger than ours, but it 
 is not so good. Charles has bought two gold watches, one 
 for his brother and one for yours. Have you not sold your 
 parasol? No, I bought a parasol at Paris, but I sold 
 hers at Berhn. The soldiers have fought for their king and 
 for their queen. These young ladies have lost their brothers, 
 we have lost ours. Our army has conquered yours. I made 
 my French translation on Saturday, my brothers made theirs 
 on Friday. The salary of my niece is much larger than mine. 
 He has read my book and hers. He has the books in his 
 hand. Does this garden belong to his uncle or theirs ? A 
 friend of mine han (iji) just now arrived from (son) St. Peters- 
 burg. Are your family all well ? 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 3fl 3^f 'So'^w rtenfo alt ali unferc Unfcr ©o'^n i^ j»ci ^af^xi alter 
 
 2;o*tcr? ofe 3'^rc Jocbter. 
 
 ^at cucr Srubcr meinen Srief ge* Sr :§at noc^ nic^t 3cit S^^a^ i^n 
 
 Icfen? jn Icfen; er '^atte fe'§r »iet ju 
 
 t^un. 
 
 3(1 3ettc^cn8 ©rofuatcr cSenfo aft 5Rein, bcr i^rige i(l alter, er irurbc 
 
 ali ber i^rigc ? im '^ai}xt 1179 gefcoren. 
 
192 
 
 THE POSSESSIVE PKONOUNS. 
 
 SBaS fagtc er, (di er bas ®el5 in 
 
 bicSaf^cgcllcift^atte? 
 SP jettcr junge Sflann ciner "^^m 
 
 grcunfce ? 
 SBarum t^at bcr Wiener niii^t teitt 
 
 SJJeflcr genommen ? 
 3jl SottifcnS Sante cknfo fi^Bn ali 
 
 tic Sflic^tc i^rcr ©c^tocfier? 
 
 Mann 3|r Scorer e'benfo gut Sng* 
 lifd) fprei^cn, al3 ker meinigc ? 
 
 ffiarum glauBen Sic, ba§ 3'§r 
 
 Se^rcr fceffcr ©eutfc^ fpre(^cn 
 
 tonne ali ber meinigc ? 
 ©ogten ©ic, ba^ ber junge Irjt Bet 
 
 feiner Sliictle^r son bcr 3:Mcl 
 
 son ben ©cinigen nic^t oner? 
 
 lannt (acknowledged) murbc? 
 3fl euer ©arten efcenfo grop aU 
 
 ber i'^rige ? 
 2Carum l^abcn ©ie mir !eincn 
 
 Sricf tua'^renb 3|rcr 2lBt»cfcn* 
 
 |cit gefi^rieben ? 
 
 Sr fragte mi^, ob ic^ no^ me^r 
 
 fiir i^n ptte. 
 3a, er t)l ciner mciner Bc|len 
 
 grcunbe. 
 "Dai beinigc ifi grii^er unb fi^arfcr 
 
 aU ba3 meinigc. 
 Souifens Sonte ifl ni^t fo fc^on, 
 
 abtx fte iji c^enfo ret^ aU tic 
 
 S'lic^te i^rcr ©c^mejler. 
 !E)cr i^rige !ann beffcr Sngtifc^ 
 
 fpred^cn, aBcr ber unfrige fann 
 
 6e|[er Jleutf^ fprecbcn. 
 Der unfrige ijl me^^rcrc 34« in 
 
 ®cut|'(^(anb gewefen, unb ^at auf 
 
 etner bcutfc^cn Unioerfttiit fiubirt. 
 3^/ cr tuurbc son ben ©einigen 
 
 nic^t anerfannt, iscil cr gegen 
 
 bie piflofen ®rie^en getampft 
 
 ^flttc. 
 2)cr i^rigc ifl nic^t fo grog ali bet 
 
 unfrige unb au^ ntd^t fo f(^Bn. 
 3ci) ^atte faum (scarcely) 3fit 
 
 bie beutf^c 3citung ju Icfen, abcr 
 
 gem |atte id^ son Slncn gc^ijrt. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 Xk brci SKrfe. 
 
 Sin frommcr SJJann ttjurbc cinfl gefragt, too'^er c i fommc, bag e r 
 tro^ oiler S;rangfatc tei SebenS bo(| fcinen ®lci(^mut^ bcwaliren 
 tijnnc. ® r antisortete : „ S) a 3 ' fommt balder, bag " i (^ meinc 3lugen 
 wo'^I in Sl^t nc^me ; " benn alica SBfe !ommt bur^ bie ©inne jum 
 
 ' 23aa is here not the definite article, but a pronoun (that). 
 
 ' I)o6 requires the verb to be here at the end (see p. 332, VL & VIL). 
 
 ' 3n %i)t ne^mcn (prendre garde), to take care ; to guard. 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONODNS. 
 
 193 
 
 ^erjen, flSer auc^ bag ®ute." Slut bte tueitcre Sragc, wic cr boa' 
 moc^e, fagte er t „3ebett 9)lorgen, c^e' t (^ an bic ®cf^afte unb utitcr 
 bic SKcnfc^en ge^e", rii^te icfe jiteinc Slugen bcbad^tfam auf brei I;inge: 
 SrflcnS, ^c6e i&i' fie gcn'Jpimmel unb erinnere mi 4 ba^ mein 
 ipau)}tgef^aft unb ba« 3*^1 mctncS SebcnS unb ©trebens bort oben fei/ 
 3t»citen«, fenle x&i'Jie jur firbe unb kbente, wie iDenig 3laum i(^> 
 tebarf," urn einp mctn ®rab barin ju finben. ©rtttens enbltd), fAauc 
 i^' urn midj unb 6etrac^te iai %ooi meiner SKUmenf^en. 3luf 
 bicfe SDeife trij|ic ii^ mi&j tntt itm SReinigcn, unb IcBe mtt 
 SBdt unb 5!Rcnf(^cn jufricbcn in ®ott. a u e 1 6 a c^. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 Scftton 24. 
 
 The Demonstrative Pronouns, (^intticifcniic gwrtootter.) 
 
 Obs. I. — The demonstrative pronouns are : 
 
 Ifeuter. 
 biefcS, this (Lat., hie, hoec, hoc). 
 JencS, that (Lat., ille, ilia, illud). 
 fotftcS, such. 
 
 baSjenigc ) that, the one (Lat., is or 
 6a8 ) lUe.) (Pr., celm, celle; 
 
 Lat. is, ea, id). 
 baj|eI6c, 1 the same (Lat., idem, 
 iai nixmlic^e J eadem, idem), 
 ihniafjdbi, the very same. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Mm. 
 
 bicfcr 
 
 icner 
 
 folc^pt 
 
 &crjemge 
 
 itv 
 
 biefe 
 ienc 
 foidje 
 Wcjcnige 
 
 berfelbc 
 ber namlii^e 
 etcnberfelbc 
 
 biefelfce 
 bic nomlic^e 
 cScnbicfclbe 
 
 ■ See Note 1, on preceding page. 
 
 ' (£]ftc (before, ere), throws the verb to the end of the clause. 
 ' (ErflenS, being an adverbial expression, the verb precedes its sub- 
 ject. 
 
 ^ Sen is a contraction of gegett, and is used vyifhout the article. 
 
 "i The siibordinative conjunction bag here governs the verb in the sub- 
 
 * Sebarf, present of BetliiTfctt, conjugated like the auxiliary biitfcn 
 (see page 118, Note). 
 
194 
 
 DEMONSTEATIVJS PRONOUNS. 
 
 Obs. n,— ^ie>r, fciefc, &ic,"c8, thia ; plur. iit^e, these; 
 iener, icnc, iene@, that ; plur. icne, those ; are 
 dechued like the definite article.* (See Lesson I., 
 Obs. n.) 
 
 Obs. m. — Instead of biefer, jencr, sometimes, the numerals ter 
 cine, ter anCcre, the one, the other ; Cer erflerc, ter 
 Ic^tere, the former, the latter ; 5er erjlc, Cer jiucite, 
 the first, the second, are used ; e. g., "itx cltte (tiefcr) 
 fagt 3a, ber on^ere (jencr) fagt SUtin, the one (this 
 one) says Yes, the other (that one) says No. 
 
 Obs. IV. — <SoIc^er, fslc^e, foI(|>ed, is declined like tiefcr 
 and jencr, when used vnthout the article. "When 
 preceded by the indefinite article it takes the same 
 endings as adjectives with the indefinite article; e. g., 
 eitt fo^er, cine foI(^c, cln folc^cS. Placed before the 
 indefinite article it does not take any case-endings ; 
 e. gi., foIc|l ctn SlKcnfi^, such a man ; fol(^ cine J^at, 
 such a deed. 
 
 Obs. V. — In German if this or that is separated from its sub- 
 ject by the verb to he it takes the neuter form of the 
 singfular without any regard to the gender or num- 
 ber of the noun following. Ex. This is my son, 
 £;iefcS ijl mein ®ol)n ; are these your gloves? fmt 
 t)ies(cS) S^'^e ^anfcf^u'^c ? 
 
 Obs. VI. — ®cricnigc, bieicnige, daSicnige, that, the one; 
 berfclbe, feicfelbc, baffclbe^f the same ; also itt 
 nomiiH^t, the same, and cbctt bcrfelbc, the very 
 same, are decKned like adjectives with the definite 
 article. 
 
 * Instead of biefeS or jenc4 Germans often use Wi and ba8, respect. 
 Ively, and also ti, Ex. S)i£3 (baS) jlnb mctne 2Botte, these (those) are my 
 words. 
 
 f Sometimes the article of this form is contracted with the preceding 
 preposition. 
 
DEMOHSTEATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 195 
 
 Declension of the Demonstrative Pronoun. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 N. icricnige 
 G. te^jcntgcn 
 D. centjcnigctt 
 A- tenienigeti 
 
 Singular. 
 Mm. 
 biejemgc 
 berjenigett 
 ierienigctt 
 tiejcnige 
 
 Plural 
 Jfeuter. for all genders. 
 
 ^a@jenige, that bteienigen, those 
 bc«jenigctt, of that berjcnigcii, of " 
 bemjenigen, to that ienjcnigcn, to " 
 Sasjenige, that tiiejcntgeit, those 
 
 Declension of tlie Abridged Form. 
 
 N. bcr* 
 G. teffcttf 
 D. lent 
 .A. ien 
 
 Mc 
 
 tcrctt 
 
 bcr 
 
 tie 
 
 iai, that 
 teffert, of that 
 tern, to that 
 iaS, that 
 
 t)tc, those 
 tercr, of those 
 tenen, to those 
 bic, those 
 
 Obs. Vli. — The genitive of the demonstrative pronoun, 
 abridged form, beffett, icten, Scffcn, is sometimes 
 employed for the possessive pronoun of the third 
 person, to avoid ambiguity ; e. g., she has seen our 
 sister and her daughters, their nieces, and their 
 relations, fie hat unfere ©(^wefler unt) decett SBi^tcr, i^re 
 5ili(^ten, unS itttn SBcrwanbtc, gcfe^en (i'^r would be 
 ambiguous as it answers both to her and their). 
 
 Obs. Vm. — ^The third person of the personal pronoun (er, fie, 
 ii), in all its cases, is sometimes replaced by the full 
 form of the demonstrative pronoun ; e. g., I shall 
 give it to him, i(^ werbe i^m daffelbe geben ; instead 
 of id) itjerbc ti \%m. geBen, or referring to a masculine 
 substantive, id^ wcrtc l^m icttfcfiten gekn, instead of, 
 i(^ werbe i^n i^m gcBen. 
 
 * This abridged form of the demonstrative pronoun receives more 
 stress than the definite article. 
 
 f Instead of befTen. Scfj is used in poetical language ; e. g., beg tii^mc 
 ber Mutige Sijjrann fic^ nii^t, of this the bloodthirsty tyrant shall not 
 boast. — iSefiiller. 
 
196 DEM0N8TBATIVE PRONODNS. 
 
 Obs. IX. — The farmer, and the latter, may in German be 
 rendered by Mcfct and iCttCt; e. g., feicfct tp neu, 
 ienex ifl alt, the former is new, the latter is old. 
 Thus also the one and the other may be rendered ; 
 e. g., ®ic t^eitte 3c6em cine ®abc, iem (biefem) 33lu* 
 men, jenetn Sriii^te auS, she distributed to every one 
 a gift, to the one (she gave) flowers, to the other (she 
 gave) fruits. — SchiMer. 
 
 VOCABTJLAET. 
 
 Ser SricfSote, 1 the . letter- cr'^atten, ) . , 
 
 ker Srieftragcr, f carrier cmpfangen, j ^®*'®^'^® 
 
 kas 3c"9nip/ ^^^ certificate unglMic^, unhappy 
 
 bcr !Di^tcr, the poet . unfii^ig, incapable 
 
 tai ®c6ot, the command gc6rad^t, brought 
 
 iai Suflfpicl, the play ♦^fccfolgcn, to obey 
 
 iai 3:rouerf))ieI, the tragedy fcgeln, to sail 
 
 tiai ©cfd^dft, the business i, fccrcueit, to repent 
 
 bit Sitrjle, the brush jlucifeln, to doubt 
 
 tie Jpanlifd^rift, the handwriting " uerbtencn, to earn, to deserve 
 
 tie 336rfc, the exchange, bourse '^iiberrafc^cn, to surprise 
 
 jDcbcr — noc^, neither — ^uor cinfl, once kenno^, nevertheless 
 
 Reading Exercise XXIV. 
 
 Sencr Svieftrager ^at tiefe fiinf Sriefe btcfcn SRorgen geBraii^t 
 (brought). 9Jlorife ^at tiefea B^wgnig in fcer ©c()ulc cmpfongen 
 (received). !Die §anJfd)rift Jiefea ^UJotx^cng ifl bcjfer al3 tie Jpants 
 fc^rift jenes. ®ebcn ®ic mtr »on kiefem Sierc nnt nic^t son jencni. 
 SRactnc unt 5J?oliere ftnt jmet franjBftfc^c I;id)ter; biefer i|l krii^mt 
 turc^ fetne 2u|i]>iete, jencr bur(^ feine Srauerfpiclc. ipier iji mein 
 Suc^ unb bagjcntge (or ba«) bcS Sc'^rcr^. 3cncr ©arten tfi Hetncr 
 ots bcr metneg 33atcr«. Dieg maren feine le^ten SBertc. Sin folc^cr 
 ?Menf(^ mac^t |t(^ u'nJ bic ©etnigcn ungliliHic^. ©ui^e folc^e ^reuben 
 lie (or weld)c) bu cin(l ni^t ju bereucn :^abcn wirjl. ©olcb ciner Il^at 
 glaute i^ blc^ unfa'^ig. ©it finb in ber ^auptjlabt gjreugcna unb in 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PEONOUNS. 197 
 
 fctrjcnlgett Dejkcti^S get»cfcn. liefer Srtef tjl »on ^vaQ, unb jcner 
 (or Icr) son Sriiffel. Sg tcirii k^auptet (asserted), to^ tie ©^ijfe 
 bcr Slmerifancr fi^ncHer fegcln aU sic cer Snglanter. S^tn, i^ ^alte 
 mill ju tenen (those), Me (who) tic^ fiiri^ten unc beine ®ebote befot 
 gen. ^^ ^a6e cbentcnfclben SOtann gcfe^en,bcr (who) gcjiern (yester-^ 
 day) bei tir roar, ©int iieg 2W ©b^ne ober iie S^re* Sflac^bard i 
 ?Meine Jointer ^at mir iai Stamlic^e gefagt. 2Bir fprci^en (speak^ 
 son Ciefcm iungen SWannc uni Bon jcnem. 
 
 Theme XXIV. 
 
 This is my hat, that is the hat of my brother. Here is his 
 book and that of the teacher. The handwriting of this boy 
 is much better than that of his sister. This volume of the 
 work is not at home. He gave (gob) to every one (3eber) a 
 gift, to the one books, to the other pens and pencils. Are 
 these your sons? His boy is very large, yours is small. 
 This ink is not very black, ours is much blacker. This 
 parasol is not mine, it is Emma's (that of E.). We have 
 been in the capital of France and in that of England. Eomu- 
 lus was the first king of Rome ; Numa was his successor 
 (Slad^folger). That one was warlike (friegerifdj), this one was 
 peaceable (frtebliebeni). I never heard of (wn) such a deed. 
 The hares which (roel(|e) we have shot are fatter than those 
 which (roeldje) the gardener hasj bought,. " Anna has lost her 
 watch, and that of her sister Emily. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 ©ollen iks 2^vt te^ten SBorte ®ie foDcn bie erjien unb bic Ic^tcn 
 
 fetn? fctn. 
 
 §aben roir nid^t cbcnbtcfetbe gran Stein, jtc iji eine grembe; fte iji crfl 
 
 biefen 5iKorgcn auf bem Wtaxtk »or ciner ©tunbe Mer angc* 
 
 gefe^en? tontmen. 
 
 SBerbcn @ie ntein |)ferb,ober bas? 3c^ »ei^tie bagjenigc bes §erm 
 
 Jcnige beg Jpcrrn Tlaltt taufen ? ©imon faufen, e^ ifl bag aUex^ 
 
 Bcfle 5)ferb. 
 
198 
 
 DEMONSTBATIVB PEONOUNS. 
 
 §ot ber Sricfbotc unfere Sricfe 
 gchac^t (brought) ? 
 
 SBarum ^at in Seker mcin Su(^ 
 
 nid)t genommen ? . 
 ^aben ©ie meine JBiirflc ober He* 
 
 jenige mcincs SReffcn Dcrloren ? 
 
 3|lbicfe3 3^r^aus? 
 
 3|l eg tta|r bog biefcr ©artcn ju 
 »ctfaufcnijl? 
 
 ©lauBen <Sle ka^ toir in btefcm 
 
 ©cfc^afte me^r Dersiencn liinncn 
 
 <xU in jencm ? 
 3|i bic3 berfelk SJlann ben 
 
 (whom) ic^ gc|lcrn auf ber 
 
 SiJrfc gefe^en l^aBe ? 
 ©lauBcn ©ic tap ber ®o^n un? 
 
 fcrea ^aufmonna folc^ ciner 
 
 S^at fiil^ig mfire ? 
 ^ot 3|ncn 3^r grcunb nt(|t baa 
 
 niimlii^e gefagt ? 
 
 S)er Srieffcote :|at unfere Sricfc 
 
 blefen SUlorgen urn | auf 9 U:§r 
 
 gebrac^t. 
 fir :^atte bagjenlge feineg SruberS 
 
 geflcm erl^altcn. 
 5^ ^ait roeber bie 3'^rige noc^ 
 
 (nor) bie 3^re5 9icffcn »ers 
 
 loren. 
 SfJcin, biefeg ifi ni(^t ba3 nteinigt, 
 
 aBcr {eneg ge^Brt mir. 
 SRein, nt*t biefer ©arten, fonbern 
 
 ber Winter jenem ^aufe ijl ju 
 
 Dcriaufcn. 
 D neltt, fm ©egent^eil, id^ glauk 
 
 bag »ir in jenem siet me^r »ers 
 
 bienen werten ali in biefcm. 
 9lein, a ifl ntc^t berfelk, ti ifl ein 
 
 anberer SJlann. 
 
 JiJcin, idfe latte c3 nte geglauBt. 
 
 Md^tg (nothing) iiterrof^te 
 
 mid^ me^r. 
 3a, er ^at mir bag namltc^e gc* 
 
 fagt, unb bcnnod^ jiueifelte ic^. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 (Sin ^oifer war auf einen ©ternbeuter fe|r 6iifc unb tooHte i '^ n 
 gcrn jum SEobe »erurt^eilen. Stneg Jagcg' fragte ber ^aifer ticnfelbni 
 bro:^ent: „2BeI(^eg Sobeg glaubjl b u, UnglitcftiAer, au {lerben ?" „3 c^ 
 
 ' Instead of adverbs of time the genitive of nouns is used when the 
 time is indefinite ; thus, elneS XagcS, is translated, one day, or onca 
 (Ck)m. Lesson XXXTX., Obs. UI.) 
 
RELATIVE PEONOUMS. 199 
 
 mx'it," fagte bicftr, „an im %kUt jierBen." „'£)u trrcfl Md^/' 
 cTOiebertc ter ^atfcr, „ku foll^ fogIet(^ cines gettKtItfamen SobcS^ers 
 kn," Sbcti woUten tie Dicner teS 5Konar(^cn btcfm Ungliidli^cn 
 crgretten, aW ex jum Jlaifcr fagtc:' „®nattgflet ^err," 6cfe^Ieit ® ie 
 nur, baj) ' cincr 3t)rer 3lcrjtc mir ieit 3)ulS fiip,' unti tv tutvJ 
 3^ n e n fagen baf ic^ tas giekr '^afce.'" Dicfer gute Sinfall rcttcte 
 bicjcm SJianne bag* SelJen. 
 
 LESSON XXV. Section 23. 
 
 The Eelative Pronouns. (Seauglicftc prtoorttr.) 
 
 Obs. I. — The relative pronouns are : toelc^ec, toe(c|ie, tocis 
 <i^cS, whj, v<rhich, or that; the abbreviated form, 
 bet, iit, &oS; and t»cr, who, and tooS, what. 
 They are declined as follows : 
 
 1. The Complete Form. 
 Ua/r. Plural. 
 
 Fern. Neuter. For aU genders. 
 
 N. iBcIcfccr m\&it wel^cS tue^e, who, which (that) 
 
 Gr. fecffcn* bctctt &effc« fcetcn, of whom, whose, of which 
 
 D. »el(^em weldjcc wcld^cnt roclc^cn, to whom, to which 
 
 A. welc^Ctt wel(^e welc^cS wct^c, whom, which (that) 
 
 ' 9118 is a siibordinative conjunction (see Lesson XL., Obs. IV), and 
 requires the verb at the end of the clause. 
 
 s This mode of address is frequently applied to persons of rank. 
 
 ' Soft is, like aU, a subordinative conjunction, hence the verb is also 
 here at the end of the clause. 
 
 * £o8 Sekn, the life, instead of his life (fetn Scien), as we would say in 
 English. (Compare Lesson XXIII., Obs. IV.) 
 
 * ®c6 is in poetical language preferred to beffen; e. g., SBo M(l iUt 
 SdUii, Jieft ©rtmme mtt erflang ? where art thou, Faust, whose voice re- 
 sounded to me ? — QoBTHE. 
 
200 eelatite pi80n0dns. 
 
 2. The Abkidged Form. 
 Singulm. Plural. 
 
 Mage. Mm. Neuter. For <M genders. 
 N. fcer bit boa tie, who, which (that) 
 
 G. ieffen bcrcn beffett fcercn of whom, whose, of which 
 D. tern bcr bent ^cticn, to whom, to which 
 
 A. ben bie baS bie, whom, which (that) 
 
 NoTK.— Notice that in tlie genitive pluial the abridged 
 form of the relative is beten, and not berer. 
 
 3. aaScr AND ^ad. 
 
 Masc. di Fern. Neuter. Plural. 
 
 N. tocr, who toaS, what (wanting) 
 
 Gr. weffctt (or tuep), whose weffen (or roc^), whose 
 
 D. mew, to whom f 
 
 A. wett, whom loai, what 
 
 Obs. n. — In German the relative pronoitns, toelc^er, Wels 
 ^e, toelc^eS, or bet, &ic, &aS are used indiscrim- 
 inately of persons, animals, or things, and require 
 the verb ai the end of the sentence ; the auxiliary, 
 if used, follows the main verb ; e. g., Not all are 
 contented wJio are rich, nii^t 2lUe fmC jufrieben, He 
 reic^ fin& ; I know the man who loves you, i&i tenne 
 ken 9jiann, tuelc^et (or &cr) ©ie licftt; you live in 
 the house which I have bought, ©ic ajol^nen in bcm 
 $aufe, toeli^ed (or bad) t(^ gefauft l^abe. 
 
 Obs. m. — ^Like whose, in English, the genitive of the relative 
 toeliliet or bet, beffen, bete:t, beffcn always pre- 
 cedes the word by which it is governed ; e. g., A 
 book (whose leaves) the leaves of which are soiled, 
 etn S3u(^, beffen Slitter befi^mu^t pnb, &c. 
 
 Note. — Notice that in German the article is not used be- 
 fore a novm connect.ed with a relative ; e. g.. The leaves of 
 which, beffcn SBtiitter, i. e., whose leaves. 
 
 * SBeft occurs also in the compoundB, hiePalii hiefewegen, why, where- 
 fore, on which or what account, which are admerbs. 
 
 t The dative is supplied by an, adverbial compound; as, IBOju (»o + ju)i 
 whereto, or to which (see p. 308, IX.). 
 
RELATIVE PnONOUNS. 201 
 
 Obs. rV". — SBS^, as a relative pronoun, always begins a 
 clause or sentence, but toǤ may either commence a 
 clause or sentence or may be placed qflar its proper 
 antecedent ; e. g., 98er nic^t ^ijren rcill, ter mup m^ 
 len, he who (t. e., whoever) vnll not hear must feel ; 
 tooS 'Sit&jt iji, Hei6t 3ied^t, m/io« (i. e., whatever) is 
 right, remains right ; SlOeS, tvaS t(^ gc:|i)rt ^atte, all 
 that {i. e., that which) I had heard. They are em- 
 ployed wherever the antecedent, is not definitely 
 known ; e. g., SSBcr toS gefagt '^at, i^ t^Brii^t, whoever 
 has said it (this) is foolish. 3c^ ^iJrtc ni^t, toaS cr 
 fagte, I did, not tear what he said. But, when the 
 antecedent is definite, ttfelc^ev, toelcJ^e, loelc^eS 
 mMs< be used ; e. g., !Den ©tocf, ttfelc^cn 6u mir ge* 
 gc6en |afl, the stick mj/w'c/i you have given me ; tasS 
 ^teit, toeI4(ed fie faufte, the dress which she bought; 
 tie ©triimp/e, toelci^e fte firictte, the stockings lohich 
 she knit. Often, Wet (t»a8) has at once the force 
 of both a relative and an antecedent ; e. g., SSSer 
 btc ®cfe^c c|rt, tjl cin guter S3tirger, he who (i. e., the man 
 who) respects the laws, is a good citizen ; toa§ gut 
 Ijl, iji nid^t itnmer fc^ijn, what {i. e., that which) is good, 
 is not always beautiful. 
 
 Obs. V. — ^In English, the relative pronoun may (^ten be omit- 
 ted, but in German it must always be expressed ; 
 e. g., This is the horse I bought (t. e., which I 
 bought) at Berlin, bicfeg tjl iai 5^fcri), toelc^ed (or 
 &o8) i&i in Sertin faufte; the woman I loved (i. e., 
 whom I loved), tie grau, toelci^e (or He) x^ Mte. 
 
 Obs. VI. — After the personal pronouns of the first and second 
 person, when these pronouns are to be repeated 
 after the relative, &er is used, and not tuelc^er ; e. g., 
 3(^, bet i6^ fo »tel ®elc ijcrtoren i^abt, I* who have lost 
 
 * Notice that in English the personal pronoun is not repeated. The 
 order of the words, however, might he reversed ; e. g., ic^ ber» instead of 
 tier ift'f when the English would be I, I who, &o. 
 
202 EELATIVB PEONOUNS. 
 
 SO much money ; bu, tct tu flci^ig gcttefcn, thou who 
 hast been diligent ; unfer 3Sater, bet tu iijl im §immel, 
 our father, who (which) art in Heaven. 
 Obs. Vn. — fSStl^tt, t, C§, or iet, connected with ntc^t, 
 answers to the English hxd after a negative sentence; 
 e. g.. There is no man but has his faults, ti gieBt lei^ 
 ncn SKenfc^en, b«x tttc^t feinc %t^tr :^at.— Otto. 
 This sentence might also be more simply con- 
 structed, thus : No man is without faults, {ein 'Slltn\6) 
 i|l o^^nc gc'^Icr. 
 Obs. YUL — fSStlifytt, t, ed in German is also used in the 
 sense of some or any, as a substitute for a noun pre- 
 vumsly expressed ; e. g., ^ajl tu Sroi ? 3<», ii^ \obi 
 tDelc^eS. SCoBcn ©te SSutter '^afccn ? • 9icin, {(l^ bante 
 3|ncn, i(^ ^a6e tveli^e. 3(^ ^a6e etwag ^Jopicrj 6rau* 
 (*^en ®ie ttfeld^eS ? 
 Obs. IX. — The following adverbs are also used relatively, in 
 place of the corresponding prepositions with the 
 relative pronoun (see Less. XXIT., Obs. IV., Note), 
 answering to the English whereof, whereby, where- 
 fore, &c., and, like the relative pronoun, require the 
 verb at the end of the clause.* 
 ttojtt, to which or what nJorOuS, from which or what 
 
 IBO&Utt^, by which or what tuoritl, in which or what 
 luolttit, with which or what «30rflbet,at (over)which<wwhat 
 Wobei, at which or what worauf , upon which or what 
 
 Wofftr, for which or what tuorait, at which or what 
 
 WoWOtt, of which or what woruttter, among which 
 
 Note. — ^Notice that r is inserted between the adverb and 
 the preposition, when the latter begins with a vowel. 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 ^ier ijl baa Sell, toomit i^ ben Here is the hatchet vMh which 
 
 fallen Bffnete. I opened the box. 
 
 Die ©umme, toofut ic^ biefeg The amount for which I am 
 ^au« kue, ip fe^r gcrtng. building this house is very 
 
 small. 
 
 ggoOOtt fpree^tttSie? Of what are you speaking? 
 
 * For other adv. combinations see p. 319, Obs. V. 
 
EELATTVE PKONOUNS. 203 
 
 Note. — These adverbs, like the pronouns which and what 
 preceded by a preposition in English, cannot refer to persons. 
 For this purpose the prepositions and the relative pronoun 
 are used ; e. g., mit bent (or toelc^em) iHj te<fle> with whom I was 
 traveling. 
 
 Correlative Pronouns. 
 
 Obs. X. — When a relative pronoun is preceded by a demon- 
 strative pronoun, the two conjointly are called Cob- 
 EELATTVE Peonouns. Thus : 
 
 ® ctjenlge, »el(^cr, or ) 
 
 iBcrjenigc, tcr, or >- he who, that which. 
 
 ®er, redder (cer), ) 
 Feminine. ®tcjenigc, tuclc^c, or ) 
 
 ^iejcnigc, itc, or >■ she who, that which. 
 
 S)ic, wclc^e (Ble), ; 
 Neuter. ® oSicntge, h)eI(^e§,or j 
 
 S)aSjenigc, t»a§, or (- that which, what 
 
 ®oS, Welches (wa^), ) 
 Plural for all S)tcjcnlgett, ttjcldje, or j 
 
 genders. ®iejcnigcn, &ie, or V those who, those which. 
 
 ®ie, wctc^e (tic) ) 
 
 In the same manner are used ; 
 
 !&erfelbe (or efienberfelbc), welc^er (or ter), the same who, 
 
 which, &c. 
 SHJer— (ict), he who — (he); never, ter, »cr, but terjenige, 
 
 ttclc^er. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ^erietttge, toel^et orra i% He who is poor, is not always 
 
 ifl nic^t tmmer ungliidlic^. unhappy. 
 
 3(^ Mrt mit einem !DritteI i>e§{es I am satisfied with one-third 
 
 ntgen ©cftica jufrtcten, toeU of the (that) money (which) 
 
 c^cS t(^ »erbienc. I am earning. (Engel.) 
 
204 
 
 EELATIVE PEONOUNS. 
 
 Siekt tic, He cuc^ ^ajfcn. Love those that hate yoiL 
 
 ^ec me^r giebt, ali cr |at, (>ct) He who (i e , whoever) gives 
 ifi ein ©i^urfe. more than is his own, (that 
 
 one) is a rascal. 
 Obs. XL — When the neuter of the correlative pronoun isrin 
 Enghsh used substantively (without a noun added 
 to it in the principal sentence), use tt>a§ (not Welches) 
 in the accessory sentence ; e. g., 
 
 S)a§, t»o8 gut ifl, ifl nid)t ints What (that which) is good, is 
 mcr fc^iin. not always beautiful. 
 
 Obs. Xn. — 9SSer and toad may be made more emphatic by 
 adding the adverb tmtner, the conjunctive nud^, 
 or an^ ttur, a««i^ immer (Lat. quidquid)* with 
 the subjunctive or an auxiliary of mode ; e. g., SHJct 
 au4> tmtner eg fei, whoever it be; toad fte cud^ 
 gefagt ^akn mag, whatever she may have said. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 fcer Uftrmadjer, the watchmaker cntoerfen, to discover 
 
 tie SSorflcttung, the conception fcnnen, to know 
 
 ter 9lid)ter, the judge bffnen, to open 
 
 bcr Gontitor, the confectioner [(^mecfen, to taste 
 
 ter Sif^, the table ^ tau6, deaf 
 
 bcr Z\\6^kx, the joiner unjufrieten, discontented f 
 
 tie 2ittiic, the linden womit, wherewith 
 
 ter ©c^aU, the sound i fauber, clean 
 
 au^erortentUcfe, extraordinary tott, dead 
 
 »era(^tung»reert'^, despisable friit), early 
 
 * Horace's well-known line, Quidquid delirant reges, plectuniur Achim, 
 is in Gennan : 2Bo8 aui) bie flonise rafen, immcr 6u§t e« ber Otiec^c— 
 
 J^VOTO BOILBATJ. 
 
 t Notice an adjective having the prefix utt has a negative meaning, 
 and answers to the English negative particles, un, dis, &c. ; e. g., un, 
 happ7, unflluSlic^. 
 
KELATTVE PKONOUNS. 205 
 
 Reading Exercise XXV. 
 
 3Bo flnb bic ^noteit, ml^t bicfe 2lufga6e gemac^t t)o6ert? !Dcr 
 Stfc^tcr, tucker biefen Stf^ gcmai^t ^at, ifl tott. 3^^ ^abe tie grau, 
 bcr tu ntcinen SHegenfiiirm gclie^en (lent) |aji, nidjt gcfe^cn, 'Lit 
 U^rmacijer, son welc^em icfe mcine U^r gctauft ^alt, ifl fc^^r ret(|. I;a3 
 ijl tie ©cfjneiBerin, weli^e tncin ^Uii gemac^t ^ot. 3ft 5 aS tie SEittoe 
 SBalter, in leren ^aufe iDeine Siiii^te tuo^nen wirb ? 2luf ter SHcife, tie 
 id) nac^ 55^3 gemai^t lafee, Bin tt^ in SJre«ten getoefen, ciner ®tabi, 
 bcren iKufeen (museums) i(^ Bcwunbert late. S;ie (Statt ©tettin, 
 tcrcn $ofen i(^ gefe^cn '^abe, i|l cine preugifcbe gefhing. "Die 
 !Donau, on ter bie ®tabt 5^efl Uegt, ifl etn grower gtuf. S5cr 
 ^ucben, t»etoen »ir 6eim Sontitor ^ranjler, unter ben 2inben (a 
 street in that city) in SSerlin, getauft toben, fi^medtc auperortenttic^ 
 gut. S)tejenigcn, weld^e taub ouf bie 2CeIt !ommen, ^abcn teinc SSors 
 jleHung torn ©^alle. £iejenigen, bie un3 fc^mcid^eln, fmb nid)t unfere 
 greuttbe ; benn unfere Srcunbe ftnb bicjenigen, bie ung bie aCa^r^eit 
 fagen. ®in SJlenfi^, bejfen ^leibung ni(^t foubcr ifl, ifl seroc^tungg* 
 wcrt^. SBer liigt, ber triigt. SBer einmal liigt, bent giaubt man 
 (one) nicbt, unb wenn et ani^ bie 3Ba^r'^eit fpricfjt (speaks). @ie, 
 ber ©ie fo fleipig gewcfen jtnb, fottten bcjfer beiol^nt tBorten fein. gs 
 giebt (il y a, there is) feihe SRofe, bie nidst i^re J)ornen ^ai. S)er 
 Dieb '^atte ben ©Aliijyel, womit er bie S'^iirc offnete, in feiner 2:afc^e. 
 Ser auc^ immcr fein JpauS gefauft ^aben mag, tsirb Mr> (soon) ein 
 Saufenb JT^ater sjerbienen. 
 
 « 
 
 Theme XXV. 
 
 Where is the joiner who has made our new table ? Have 
 you seen the house which our shoemaker jhas jbought ? The 
 pen which you \have] made (gcfc^nitten) me does not write. 
 Is this the daughter of the baker whom you know ? These 
 are the houses and the gardens which the rich merchant jhas 
 [bought. Columbus, who discovered America, was from (aue) 
 Genoa, a city in Italy. Socrates, whom his judges con- 
 demned to death, was a virtuous citizen at Athens. Vienna, 
 the capital of Austria, whose suburbs (35orflabte) aare jvery 
 
206 
 
 EELATIVB PBONOUNS. 
 
 spretty, is situated (Itegt) on the Danube, Toulon, whose port 
 I have seen, is a French fortress. The. books, which you 
 bought at the bookstore, are not those (sic, bie) you need. 
 Which of these books have you read ? He who does (erfitUt) 
 his duty is an honorable man. Bless those that persecute 
 you, love those that hate you. I give (gek) it to him (Dat) 
 whom I love best (ammelftcn). Those who are discontented 
 axe unhappy. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 aSo i(l ker ^noBe, i»ef(^er fdn Suc^ 
 
 ucrlorcrt %<A ? 
 2Ber i(l jenc alte grau, tic cine 
 
 SBritte triigt (wears spectar 
 
 cles) ? 
 ipafcen ©tc tie ?iKufcm in Serlin 
 
 gefe^cn, son Icncn wir S^nen 
 
 crjapen ? 
 3jt c3 »at)r, bag cin 9Wenf(^, bcr 
 
 iiigt, au^ Betritgt (cheats) ? 
 ^oben ©icjenigcn, »cl(^e taub auf 
 
 tic S5ett fommcn, icine SSor* 
 
 flettung Bom @(^al(c ? 
 ©tnt ©ic auf 3|rci^ S^c'l't/ fie ©t« 
 
 na(i^ 95r«9 ntac^tcn, in SCien gc? 
 
 wcfen ? 
 Olaubcn ©ie, bfl^ lEtcjcnigcn, Me 
 
 und fc^mcid^eln, nic^t unferc 
 
 fjreunfcc finb ? 
 aDoriibcr '^ot flc^ bcr ©oftat bcim 
 
 ©cncralbcflagt? 
 §abcn ©Ic ben ©^tujfcl, toomit 
 
 ker Sleb (thief) tie $au3t|iire 
 
 Bffnetc, bet i^m gefunken? 
 
 3c^ h)ci9 (know) nit^t, ic^ ^flbe 
 
 i^n '^eutc ni(^t gefc^cn. 
 ©ie i|l kle 9Ruttcr keg 50lalcrs, 
 
 tvelc^er ka^ neue ipaus gefau^ 
 
 ^at. 
 3a, wtr ^aben kic ?!Wufcett ScrlinS 
 
 gcfe^cn, unk l^abcn fie bewun* 
 
 kert. 
 2Dle fann eg onkcra fein, glaubcn 
 
 ©ie ^m nii^t aud^ ? 
 Jflein, metn ^err, fie fijnnen uns 
 
 ntijglid^ (not possibly) cine 
 
 SSorflettung »om ©(^aHe |aben. 
 3tt, mcin grdulcin, t»ir |tnb fcrei 
 
 Sage unk »icr 9ia(^te in 2Bien 
 
 getvefen. 
 Unfere greunke fc^meid^cln vmi 
 
 ntd^t, wenn |le vni auc^ immer 
 
 fo tieb ^abcn. 
 Sr beHagte ji^ liber kie ©trenge 
 
 kc8 SRajors. 
 ^iii fank (found) ken ©djluffcl 
 
 bei t|m, womit er kie ©tuben* 
 
 tPrc (chamber-door) ijjfncte, 
 
 aber nldit ben, ivomit er kie 
 
 .^augtpre ijffnete. 
 
EELATIVE PRONODNS. 207 
 
 Bennett (know) <BU ten Stfc^Icr, ^tin, metne ©ante, i^ tcnnc t'^n 
 
 ft)el(^er unferea neitcn ^leitcr* nid^t, akr mcin Sntber ijl mit 
 
 fi^tanf (wardrobe) gemac^t i|m ietannt. 
 
 SBeIc^c« son tiefen Safc^entiic^eni 3(^ ^aBc j;enc« rof^e fcibene (silk) 
 
 ijabtn ©k gcwii^It, mcin griiu* gciBSIlt, tooUen ©le eg mir na6^ 
 
 Icin ? Jpaufe fd^icfen ? 
 
 SRitkcm grijgten SScrgniigen; nur SBenn ®ie es mir nic^t frii^er 
 
 mu§ ic^ ®ie Bitten (beg), ti (earlier) fd^iden Bnnen, fo Mn 
 
 Ui auf ^eute SRat^mtttag ju acr* i^ naturttd^ (of course) tamit 
 
 fd^iekn (postpone). 3jl 3^* jufricDcn, 
 nen iai rec^t ? 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 Unfcr fionb. 
 
 IDte Screinigten ©taaten sen SfJortsStmcrtTa warcn einft ein grofer 
 Mooter 3Coto, in bcm t»ilt»e J^iere ^aujlen, bie ben ro|en @ingc6ornen 
 jur 9ia:^rung bientcn. ^eine orbentlic^e 3Co|nung, nur armfeligc 
 ^iitten waren :|ier ju finben. 9lun tfl iai Sanb mit ©tabten unb 'L'itf 
 fern Befdet, bie son BetrieBfamen Sinwo^nern 6et»o|nt werben. !Die 
 SBdlcer werticn immer me^r gclic^tet unb lai Sanb urBar gemac^t; 
 Icine rei^enDcn S^lere, feine witten SKcnfc^en gcfS^rben tai SeBen bes 
 fricblid^en Scwo^nerg. 9Kit ben trefflii^flen ®oBcn ®otte3 gefegnet, 
 ticfcrt cs bag, tooS ber 9Wcnfc^ ju fetnem Unter:|alte Bebarf.' 
 SieBtid^e gluren, fette SCeiben unb matertf(^e S3crgrei|en, jwifi^en 
 bfnen wonnige ST^dler f i 4 bf^en, tted^fetn mit einanber ab.' Qaf^h 
 rei(^e gifcnBal^nen, Sliijfc, Sanale unb Sdi^e bur(^treu3cn c « in otien 
 SWic^tungen unb Bringcn ben UeBerfIu§ bcs SanbmanneS jum SBertaufe" 
 in bie gro§en ©tSbte. S3Bcr nid^t mutl^witttg bie SlrBeit flie'^t, pnbet fafl 
 itBerall :|iniangfld^e, oft reic^Iti^e 3la^mnQ. UcBerbiep ift e i iai einjige 
 
 ' SBc))arfr Imperfect of the irregular verb fiebiirfcni is conjugated like 
 the auxiliary verb of mode turfcn (which see). 
 ' aSci^fcln — ab, present tense of the separable verb afitnc^fcln. 
 ' Sunt SJertoufc, for sale. 
 
208 INTEKEOGATIVE PE0N0UN3. 
 
 iatis, in t>m ml^xt Sleligion^frci'^clt unb Eultung :^crrfc^t, aUt Siir* 
 ger BoUtommeit gtct(^e Sfte^te ^abcn' unD tern Untcrfd^icD ©tott fintet," 
 ber jtd^ auf ble ®eburt grunnet. ©cit me^r oU gmci^untiert 3a|rcn 
 t(l c i lie 3ttflu^t«jlatte alter turc^ religtBfe mi politifc^c Sittolcranj 
 SScrfotgten, tt)e(^e ^icr Sdu^c, Brei^eit unb Sta^rung fintctt, tuenn fie 
 fic^ in ilrem neuen SSotcrlanSe nii^Hc^ mac^cn rooUcn. 
 
 I^SSON XXTI. Seftiott26. 
 
 The Interrogative Pronouns, (gtoflcnlic ffwrhiiirter.) 
 
 Obs. I. — The interrogative pronouns are : 
 
 SBer, who ? SBcIi^cr, which, what ? 
 
 3BaS, what? SQai \iix (cin), what kind or sort of? 
 
 Obs. II. — The interrogative pronouns t»tt and tvaS are 
 declined exactly like the relatives tcer, tcai; tvelc^et 
 like the demonstratives ticfer, jener, &c. ; and of 
 toad f&t ettt the indefinite article ein only is 
 declined. 
 
 Declension of the Interrogative Pronoun toclt^er. 
 
 Plural 
 
 Mase. Fem. Weuter. for all genders. 
 
 N. weld^Ct wclc^c wcIdicS, which ? tttel^e, which ? 
 
 G. »cl(^e8 welc^ct weli^eS, of which ? tuelc^cr, of which? 
 D. metc^em ml6)tt wetcbem, to which? welc^cn, to which? 
 A. wetc^Ctt wctc^e wcId^eS, which? luc^c, which ? 
 
 ' The verb is required to be at the end of the sentence by the relative 
 
 bent. 
 
 ' Stottflttben (to take place) must here be rendered is made 
 
INTEEEOGATIVE PEONODNS. 209 
 
 Declension of the InterrogatiYe Pronouns ton and toas. 
 
 N. Wcr, who? tttoS, what? 
 
 G. tocffcn,* whose ? toeffcn,* of what ? 
 
 D. went,* to whom? 
 
 A. tt»en, whom? tt>aS, what? J 
 
 Obs. m. — 1. SSScv is only used substantively, and refers 
 exclusively to persons. 
 
 2. SSBaS is, lite »cr, used substantively, ■\ and ap- 
 plied ordy to things or indefinite objects ; e. g., t»er 
 ijiba? eln SKann, cine Srau, ein ^ini — ^who is there? 
 a man, a woman, a child ; WaS (not toer) iji ba^ ? ein 
 9JJenfd), oter ein S3aum? what is that, a man or a 
 tree? 
 
 3. 98etc^et refers to particular objects, and 
 answers exactly to the English interrogative which; 
 e. g., which boy, tt>elc()er ^nobe ? 
 
 4 ^aS flir ein is used in asking after the kind, 
 quality, or species of a thing ; e. g., t»0§ ffir ein 
 ISlmn, what sort of a man ? tOoS fur cine ©c^utc, 
 what kind of a school ? toad fttt cin Jpaug, what 
 sort or kind of a house ? 
 
 5. Both welc^er and wai fiir cin are used adjec- 
 tively, and appear as substantives only when re- 
 ferring to a preceding noun ; Wili^tt in asking 
 
 * The genitive tBefTen and dative wcm are used only in reference to 
 persons, not to things. The abbreviated form weg, however, is need in 
 compounds (such as wcfwegen, wcg^ttlfe) in reference to things ; e. g., m^" 
 wegen jurnen Sit mir ? wherefore (why) are you angry with me 1 
 
 f SBaS is used sometimes for toieUiel; as, \saS @oIb, load ISbelfleine! 
 what (a quantity of) gold, what (a number of) precious stones ! and in 
 the exclamations : toaS Xau\tnt)i what a wonder ! fISaS ber SSIi| ! by 
 Jove! (by lightning!) It is sometimes used indefinitely for tocr; e.g., 
 gtit^ ittt ftc^, tnaS tin SKciflet toeiben will (SehiHer), he practises early, who 
 wishes to become a master. 
 
 t For the use of pronominal adverbials in oblique cases see p. 303, IX. 
 
210 INTEEBOaATIVB PEONO0HB. 
 
 after a particular person or thing, tt»oS fflr Cttt 
 after a particular kind of persons or things ; e. g., 
 ^icr ifl ein grauer unt ctn [(^toarjcr ^ut, weld^en 
 tvi(I{l tu '^aben, here is a gray and a black hat, which 
 one will you have? 93Sad fflr ein SanbSmann ift 
 Jcner ?Kann, what (tind of a) countryman is that 
 man? '^&i »ei§ nid^t »aa fiir ciner er i|i, I do not 
 know what kind of a one he is ; SSeliJ^ed ifl eucr 
 3)fcrb, which is your horse? Stapoleon ttar ein llugcr 
 gclt^err, afcer toaS ffir ctn gcfe^crr war SBcttington? 
 Napoleon was a wise general, but what kind of a 
 general was WeUington ? 
 
 Note. — Notice that tin of n>a* fiir ein, when used substan- 
 tively, takes the inflection of an adjective not preceded by 
 the article. (Compare Lesson XVL, Obs. VII.) 
 
 Obs. IV. — ^Before names of materials and in the plural the 
 indefinite article ein after tt»o8 fflt is dropped, and 
 wag fiir is immediately followed by the substantive ; 
 e. g., toaS fur aSein, what kind of vdne ? t»aS fftt 
 5)flptcr, what kind of paper? toag fiir ^leltcr, what 
 (kind of) clothes ? 
 
 Declension of toos fiir ein, with a Substantive. 
 
 
 
 Bingvlar. 
 
 
 Phvral 
 
 
 Mase. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neuter 
 
 for all genders- 
 
 N. 
 
 WOii fiir ein 
 
 eine, 
 
 ein 
 
 tt»a8 fftr, what sort or 
 kind of 
 
 G. 
 
 tt>a« fiir eincS 
 
 ciner, 
 
 cineS 
 
 Kai fiir, of what sort of 
 
 D. 
 
 teas fiir ctncm 
 
 cinet, 
 
 einem 
 
 was fiir, to what sort of 
 
 A. 
 
 waa fiir cinen 
 
 cine, 
 
 ein 
 
 wai fiir, what sort of 
 
 Obs. V. — The substantive form toai fiir cinet, toai fiir cine, mi 
 fiir eineS, must be rendered by what kind of a one;* 
 
 * The same mode of expression as the German [oaS fiir ctn ? is to be 
 met with also in old English ; as in, WTiat art thou for an animal to 
 suck thy livelihood out of my carcass ? What is he for a fool that be- 
 
INTEEKOGATIVB PBONOUNS. 
 
 211 
 
 e. g., ScontiaS war cin grower Jpctt, a6er was fitr cinet war 
 2lgamemnon ; Leonidas -was a great hero, but what kind 
 of a one was Agamemnon ? Strictly speaiing, it can 
 have no plural; the common conversational lan- 
 guage, however, has formed a plural to correspond 
 with the singularnumber, viz., waS fiir )»i\.€^t, what 
 sort (kind) ? 
 
 Declension of t»a8 filr cin, without a Substantive. 
 
 Singular Plural 
 
 Wem. Neuter. for dO, genders. 
 
 eine eineS wa« fiir (wclc^e) 
 
 eincr eincg wai fiir (luelc^cr) 
 
 einer einciti was fiir (weldien) 
 
 elite cineS wai fiir (wclc^c) 
 
 N. was fiir eincr 
 G. was fiir eineS 
 D. was fiir etnew 
 A. was fiir einCtt 
 
 Ob» VI. — The signification and use of the interrogative 
 pronounsis: wet, or tOC8, simply demand to know 
 the species to which the object in question be- 
 longs ; tt>a§ fttt etn demands a more particular 
 description of the nature or condition of the object 
 in question ; and tvelt^et, toelc^e, toelc^ed 
 (Latin, qualis) requires a precise designation of the 
 object itself; e. gr., 2Ber iji ba? who is there? Sin 
 aieifcnber, a traveler. 9fBa8 ffir einct? what 
 traveler (what kind of traveler) ? Sin (Sc6utte|rer 
 auS Berlin, a schoolmaster from Berlin. 98el(^ett 
 ©(^ut(e|rer ? which schoolmaster ? §err Slrnolt, Mr. 
 Arnold, etc. 
 
 Obs. "VTI. — ^The interrogative pronouns what and which, when 
 immediately followed by the auxiliary verb to be 
 
 troths himself to unquietness ? (Shakespeare.) It is worthy of notice that 
 as in these examples, so also in German, the pronoun what, tOOSi is some- 
 times separated from /or a, fiir cin; «. g-. Wag foil ic| fiir etn Suii^ Icfen? 
 what (kind of a) book shall I read? SBoS ^«t baS Sic^t fiir ®emcinf^aft mil 
 bet ginflctnip, what fellowship has light with darkness? — ^DotJAI. So 
 alscf in colloquial English : What for a man is he ? 
 
212 
 
 INTEEEOGATTVE PETNOUNS. 
 
 (fettt), are rendered by Iveld^eS, both in the sin- 
 gular and plural (comp. Lesson XXIV., Obs. V.) ; 
 e. g., what is his name, roc^cS ift fettt Stattte ? which 
 agarden jis sjours, wctc^cS ift 3^t ©artcn ? 
 
 Obs. Vm. — The interrogative ttfOd is not generally connected 
 with prepositions, but the adverb Ido is compounded 
 with the preposition instead ; and if this begins with 
 a vowel, r is inserted for euphony ;* e. g.. What are 
 you quarreling about ? tvatnm (for trontnt) flrcitct 
 3'^v? So njojw, »o»on, rooraita, woriiBer, &c. But toai 
 is often used alone for toartim, and sometimes a 
 preposition is placed before it ; e. g., fSiai fdjlagfl iu 
 niid^? why do you beat me? Unt toai jhcitet 3:^r? 
 what are you quarreling about ? 
 
 Obs. IX.— 9SSa§ ffir ein, and fvelc^er, toelii^e, toelc^ed, 
 
 serve also as exclamations, to express surprise, 
 amazement, or admiration ; e. g., wai fitr ein SSJlann I 
 nselc^er Wlatinl ttctc^e ©^btt^ett ! Welches ©efc^rci ! tcel^er 
 ©Iflnj ! what a man ! what beauty ! what noise ! what 
 splendor ! &c. In this signification ttJel^cr may, like 
 folder, drop its endings and place before the noim 
 the indefinite article; e. g., SSelc^ Cin Wann ifl iai I 
 SBet(^ citt SBunber! ?SSti^ citte STiefe ter fBci«:^eit! 
 SSSelc^ ciiteS SWatttte^ ®rbf c Jjreifefl tu ! In this ac- 
 ceptation, tvelc^ stands sometimes also immediately 
 before an adjective, and takes the inflection of an 
 adjective without the article (see Lesson XVI., Obs. 
 VII.), and the adjective itself the inflection of 
 an adjective preceded by the definite article (see 
 Lesson XVI., Obs. IV.,) or tpeld^ may remain un- 
 changed, and the adjective take the inflection of 
 
 * SB is frequently interchanged with S ; in Lat. MRam—es-am, cs. ; 
 Qieek, iaav — Eng. was, plural weRe, am-ast=art. — Codington. 
 
rNTEEEOGATIVE PBONOUNS. 213 
 
 an adjective not preceded by the article ; e. g., tods 
 d)cc fc^bnc fJRann, or tt»cl4» fi^ijncr SJlann ! welc^eS 
 laute ®efc^rcl, or toeld^ lautcS ®cf*rci ! 
 
 VOCABULABT. 
 
 baa ©efii^I, the feeling crmorbctt, to murder 
 
 Die aibfii^t, the intention rclc^en, to reach 
 
 tie SldJtung, the honor, esteem rufen, to call 
 
 taS Slut, the blood cinlabcn, to invite 
 
 bcr Sorm, the noise cmpfangen, to receive 
 
 fcer 33ricf, the letter liegcn, to lie 
 
 iic ^ortoffel, the potato ftnten, to find 
 
 baS ©cmiife, the vegetables (ic^ genji)|ncn, to accustom 
 
 Me SRa(^ri^t, the news, intelli- filfem, (of) silver 
 
 gence tuert^, worth 
 
 Reading Exercise XXVI. 
 
 SBelc^er SWann %a.t metnc ^leibcrMrjle genommcn ? SBcflTen SRod 
 i|l tag? 35on wc^em gtcuntc |aben ©ic ticfen 33rief cr'^altcn? 
 3n meld)cr ®tatt gran!reic^g ^aten ©ie gelc6t, mein §err ? 3c^ ^ate 
 in Soulon, etner franaBfifd^cn Sefhtng, gelebt. Son went |a6en wir tie 
 ^artoffeln, ta« nii^fic^jle ®cmufc ouf ter SBelt, er^alten ? SSBetc^eS 
 ftnl tie ktcutentflen gliiffe I;eut|"*lants ? 3Bas fiir etn Sui^ wollen 
 ©ie lefen ? SGaS fagte ter gremne ju tir, afo tu i^m ten Srief rcii^s 
 tcjl ? 2Ben '^at er gerufcn ? SBen '^a6en teine Sltern cingelaten ? 
 ©ie t)a6en meine kflen greuntc eingelaten. 5Ber ifl jcner ^err? S3a3 
 I'agen ©ie jur 9lac^ri(^t tic mir focben cr^alten lakn ? ^Qa^ ijl tas 
 @elD tsert^, roenn wir tcincn guten ©ebraui^ tason ma^en tiinnen ? 
 ^ier jint jiuet neue 3lbcfc, weli^er ))af t (fits) 3^nen flnt teften ? Ss 
 til altgemetn ktannt, wen ©ie 6ei ft4 empfangen, unt mtt went ©tc 
 leBen. SBeli^er Bon ten grofen 55lannern ®tie(^enlanl3 i^ ter tugent? 
 ^aftejtc gereefen ? 9Kit melt^cm »on ttefen Bctten (jmei) Sriitcm fint 
 ©ie om meiflen jufrieten, mit tern alteflen oter mtt tent jiingjlen? 
 aSepn ©ol^n ioar 2ltet:ant)et ter ®rof e ? 9la))oIeon war ein grower 
 ®enerol, ober was fiir einer war SBcttington ? 
 
2M 
 
 INTEBROGATITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Theme XXVI. 
 
 Which man deserves our esteem ? Who has made your 
 black coat? To whom have you told it ? Which woman was 
 at the house of your father ? Who is there (5a) ? To whom 
 belongs the white hat on that table ? Who has bought the 
 house and garden of our neighbor ? Whose silver thimble 
 have you there (ta) ? Why has the old joiner not sold his 
 furniture to your uncle ? What kind of a boy was the son 
 of your neighbor? What kind of a book lies on the table? 
 One of my books. Which ? The German Grammar. Whose 
 German Grammar? Becker's German Grammar. This 
 author (9lutor), a German, died (jtarb) a few years ago (»or 
 cintgcn 3o|rcn), but his work will Jive smany ayears lyet (noc^). 
 WTiat a depth of feeUng ! What a beautiful woman ! 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 S&ai fagtctt ©ie, tnein griiutein ? 
 
 Sinbcn ®le iag a |cute tuarmer 
 
 iflals eg gcftcrnwar? 
 SEctt f^abtn ®ic gerufcn, mcin 
 
 Jperr? 
 2Bcn mi ku clngclatcn, Jpetnrid^ ? 
 
 3Se(fcn ©o'^n tji jcncr junge Wtann 
 itx fo »ie[ Sarin ntai^t ? 
 
 2Bcpn §anb ^at iai 5B(ut §ctn« 
 rtd)« iti Sierten, tea teften in 
 ^bnige granfreic^g, sjergoffcn 
 (spilled) ? 
 
 5Ba3 bercegt (causes) ©te §eins 
 ri(^ ten Sierten aU 5en 6e(len 
 tcr ^ijnigc grantrci(^g ju ie* 
 jci(i^nen (designate) ? 
 
 3c^ fag'te to^ c3 ^eute ]tfjv mxm 
 
 til. 
 (Ei ijt nic^t toantter, atcr c3 ifl 
 
 tennoc^ ju warm. 
 3^ ^a6c meinen litener ^cinrid) 
 
 gerufeit. 
 3(^ ^a6e mcine bcjlen grcuntc 
 
 eingelaben. 
 Sr ijl Cer ©o6n in Walni cr tji 
 
 etn liebertid^er 5Jlenfi$. 
 3la»aittac ermortctc §einric^ ten 
 
 SBicrtcn, ken bcjlen ber ilbnige 
 
 grantreic^a, im ^af^xt 1610. 
 
 SBeil fclne 3lbfi(|t mx tint atlge* 
 metnc c^rijHi^ europatfc^e 3le- 
 )5ubnt (republic) ju begriinben 
 (found), uni feincn Untert^a* 
 nen (subjects) glcic^c fUtijtt 
 JU gemS^rcn. 
 
INTEBKOGATIVB PRONOUNS. 
 
 215 
 
 SBcr ifl iene Same kt bcm ©pie* 
 gel (looking-glass) ? 
 
 SDBiffcn ®ic, toeffen ®o^n Slleyon* 
 
 Jer ler @ro|e wor ? 
 35on weld^em ©tiicfe (piece) wols 
 
 ten ©ic, iaf x6^ ^i^nm dnen 
 
 5Baa fitr cin Suc^ iDotten ©ie 
 tcfen? 
 
 3n wc^cr ©tatt Seutfc^IftitbS ^a* 
 kn ©ie bie bcutfi^c ©j)ra(^e 
 eriernt (acquired), uni tuer 
 war 3^r Se:^rcr ? 
 
 ©ie ifl Me Jflic^te iti SSarons »on 
 Sitcom, ter im Srci^ciWlriege 
 fampftc. 
 
 gr wor ein ©o^it ^^'^ilipg son 
 iBtocebonien (Macedonia). 
 
 ■ffienn ic^ bitten tarf, maiden ©ie 
 mix einen fRod son tern fccjien 
 a:«d)e, ba^ ©ie ^^abtxi. 
 
 3(^ mb^e gern „®a« SSerlorenc 
 9)aral)icS " (paradise) son 
 iWilton lefen. 
 
 3* :^atte langcr ali cin ^a^v 
 M tern §en:n ^rofeffor 9JIo'^n 
 in Serlirt Untcrri^t (instruc- 
 tion), unb jlutirtc fpater auf 
 ber Uniserfttat (university) 
 in berfelben ©tabt. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 §ajl bu einen grijfcren SSo'§tt|atcr unter ben a:^ieren ali una? 
 fragte bie Siene ben «Wenf^en. 
 
 3a w%' erwiebertc biefer. 
 
 Unb wen ? fragte ganj' neugierlg bie Siene. 
 
 S)a« ©c^af, bcnn feinc SSoDc ifl mir not:§tt)enbig, unb bein §onig i(l 
 mir nnr angene^m. Unb ttiill|l bu noc^ einen anbern ®runb hjifl'en, 
 tnatum i^ baa ©c^af fiir einen grbgeren aDo^lt^iiter :^alte ali bie 
 Sicnc? 
 
 Unb tnaS fiir ctnen ®runb fannjl bu mir bafiir geBcn? fragte 
 toicberum bie 35iene. 
 
 ' 3a tOOl^I, is an adverb of affiTmation, and is translated mrtamly. 
 3o itself is often so translated, too^l is added to make the affirma- 
 tion stronger. 
 
 ' @anj is here used in the sense of fe'^r. 
 
216 rNDEFINITE PRONOnNS. 
 
 !£>a3 Sc^of fi^enft mit fcinc SBoUc o^nc iie geringfle (Sc^tBtcriglcit ; 
 o6cr trcnn iu mlr aut^' kcinen Jponig fc^enJefl,' ntu^ ic^' ini(^ immer 
 noc^ Dor keinem ©tai^el fiirc^tcn. 
 
 LESSON XXVn. Scftiott 2T. 
 
 The Indefimte Pronouns, (ttniejiimmtc JJiirttiBrtet.) 
 
 Obs. I. — The indefinite pronouns are : 
 
 9)?an, one (French, on), they. 
 SeOcrmantt, every one, every body. 
 Sentant, some one, somebody. 
 IRiemonB, no one, nobody. 
 6toa0, anything, something. 
 ^Itii^t^, nothing, not anything. 
 ©elbfi {or fclkr), self. 
 Sinanber, each other, one another. 
 
 Obs. n. — ^B^an,* which implies a general or indefinite per- 
 sonality, and answers exactly to the French on, 
 
 ' Translate tncnit — aur^> even if, or although. 
 
 * The verb is here at the end of the clause after toenit (see p. 333). 
 
 * The subordinate sentence is here placed first, and the principal 
 sentence put after the verb. Frequently this change is indicated 
 by the adverbial conjunction fo, sometimes called the particle of infer- 
 ence, and thus in this sentence it requires the exchange of the siibject 
 and the verb, although not expressed. The inversion of this sentence 
 would be : 3^ mug vai) immcr noc^ »or betnem Sta^el fitri^ten, ttcnn bu mit 
 o.n&i beincn ^onig f<|cnfef}, or as it is above with fo inserted : aber ttenn bu 
 mit auc^ beincn ^onig fci^Enfeil, fo mug i^ mic^ immer no^ sot betnem ©target 
 futc^tcn. The adverbial conjunction fo, when thus employed, cannot he 
 translated. ' 
 
 * The Germans also employ motl in the same way as the French em- 
 ploy their on, whenever they do not wish to use any of the personal 
 pronouns, bu, cr, ©te, or 3^t. They say, e. g., SOTan t:^uc ba3 nic^t mejt 
 {qu'on ne le fasse plus), let this not be done again ! SBJan ^ote ttia* id) 
 fagc (que Von Scoute ce que je dis), let what I say be listened to I It is a 
 
rNDEFIMITB PEONOCNS. 217 
 
 occurs only in the nominative, and requires the 
 verb in the singular. It is expressed in English 
 not only by one and they, but also by the passive 
 voice : SSJiatl fagt, they say, one says, or, it is said 
 (French, on dit). When another case is required 
 the corresponding oblique case of CttlCt is used ; 
 e. g., tu wittjl cincm ttie tcin £ci5cn tlagcn, you will 
 never teU any one {i. e., to any one) your troubles. 
 
 Obs. m. — ^ebetmann takes § in the genitive, the other 
 cases remain unchanged, ^etnan^ and 9tiemanb 
 add S or c8 in the genitive. In the dative they 
 add cm, and in the accusative Ctl, when the simple 
 form would be ambiguous ; e. g., ti ijl SRicmantem 
 cine §utfc, it is a help to nobody, where, if we used 
 9liemand, it might be read, nobody is any help ; 
 ftc loM Stiemantctt, she praises nobody;, but, fic lobt 
 fftittttani, might mean, nobody praises her. 
 
 Declension of the Indefinite Pronoun ScJjtrmonn. 
 
 N. Sctcrntantt, everybody 
 G. 3«titfmann§, of everybody 
 D. 3ctiertnann, to everybody 
 A. Sttcrmann, everybody 
 
 Declension of the Indefinite Pronouns SewmilJ and 
 9iicmanb. 
 
 N. Scntfltt'o, somebody Sticmanti, nobody 
 
 G. S^manbS or 3"nonlc8 9licmanlS or SttemantcS 
 
 D. 3fittanl' or 3cntontcitt 9liemonti or 9ltcmantcitt 
 
 A. 3ciuanii or ^tmanttn ^Ikmardi or 9liemonscn 
 
 kind of modified imperative, expressive of displeasure at anything done, 
 and is always construed with the subjunctive ; e. g., SRan loffe t)a3 fctn, 
 leave that alone! [Dr. Sears' Noehden]. It seems to hear some resem- 
 blance to any in the expression : let any man dare to do it ; or, Is there 
 any man to dare it? — Notice that the pronoun ntttl) is spelt with a single 
 n to distinguish it from the substantive SBansti man. 
 
218 iNDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Obs. IV. — The numeral @inet is occasionally used for 3e? 
 mant in the masculine singular. It is exactly the 
 English one in expressions lilce-"it gives one much 
 labor," ti gicbt Sincm »iel 3lr6eit, meaning by one, 
 any one of the whole human race, while ^emattb 
 rather points at a definite individual whose name is 
 not mentioned.* 
 
 Note. — The EngliBh one's must in German be rendered 
 by the possessive pronoun his — fcin; e.g., It is better to lose 
 one's life than OTie's honor, ti i|l icffcr feill Stitn a\i feine S^re 
 3U setlieren. One's self must, in German, be rendered by 
 fi$, sometimes ft(g felbfl, but never felbft without fii^ ; e. g., 
 One must not think too much of one's self, man mup ittc^t ju 
 viel »on fti^ fclbfi benfen (fatten). 
 
 Obs. V. — 1 . In conditional and interrogative sentences any- 
 body or any one, ia rendered by Setttattb {some- 
 body) and anything by @ttoad {something), c. g., if 
 anyone {i. e. some-one) should have it, tufnn Sentattft 
 tS |a6cn fotttc. Has anybody (i. e. somebody) seen 
 anything oi it, l^at ^emond @tt»a8 tason gefe^cn? 
 2. In negative sentences not-anybody or not-any 
 one, (i.e. nobody or no- one) is rendered by 9ttemanb 
 (Latin nemo), and not-anything {i. e. nothing) by 
 9ti^t§, e. g. I do not see anybody ; 3i^ fe'^c iStitt 
 manben ; I do not know anything (I know nothing) 
 about it, 3t^ W"^ 9lic^t8 baBoti. Nobody ever heard 
 him say anything against anyone, fiticmanb t)at it)tt jc 
 irgcnS f ®twa§ gcgcn irgent 3etnanb(en) fagcn '^Bren. 
 With verbs of ^negative meaning, governing an acces- 
 sory sentence, ^emattft, @tttiag, or @tnct only 
 can be used ; e .g.. He denies that anybody can point 
 
 * Compare Latin quidam and aliquis. 
 
 f When Germans intend to denote anything to be veiy indefinite, 
 they place before Einer, Semanb, ®ttta«, the adverb irgetttl ; «. g., ^at er 
 irgenb Stwaa gefagt? has he said anything (at all)? Srgenb is also placed 
 before too, where, to denote somewhere, meaning a place not definitely 
 known to us ; e. g., fflir \<Aiv. ienen 3Rann irBCntitoa gcrc^eu. 
 
INDEFINITE PEONOUNS. 
 
 219 
 
 to any wrong, as committed by him, er laugnet, ia^ 
 '^emanb (irgcnt Sentani, irgcitb Sincr) irgeitt ein Un« 
 rcc^t nenneit tbnntc, ali wn i^m bcgangcn. 
 
 Obs. VI. — The indefinite pronoun felbft* or fcIBcr (resem- 
 bling the English self) is invariable, and may be 
 added f to any personal pronoun or substantive ; 
 e.g., i(^ fclBft, bu felftft, &c.; ter (So:§n felbft, Me 
 Zo6^ttx fclbft ; or felbft may be placed nearer the 
 end of the sentence (see Lesson XXII., Obs. VI.) ; 
 e. g., tlefe Scute kauc^en i^r ®ctt» fclbft, these people 
 need their money themseZves. 
 
 Obs. "VH. — The indefinite numeral adjectives (alrfeady given 
 in Lesson XIX.) are also used as indefinite pro- 
 nouns, vsfhen the substantive vrhich they qualify is 
 only understood. For the convenience of the 
 learner we repeat them here. They are : 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 3ckCt(3ct»et)er,3cgs 
 
 SctC 
 
 ScbcS 
 
 (wanting) 
 
 ticker)! or cinjleter, 
 
 
 
 
 every, each 
 
 
 
 
 Slltcr (M), all 
 
 mt 
 
 3rac8 (3111) 
 
 3lUc, all 
 
 Reiner, no 
 
 ^eine 
 
 ^eitt 
 
 ^einc, no 
 
 ©incr, some one 
 
 gtne 
 
 (SincS 
 
 (wanting) 
 
 5Kani^cr, many a (or 
 
 man^e 
 
 5!Kand§cS 
 
 SOiancfee, some 
 
 an) 
 
 
 
 
 * The English self must previously be compounded with a pronoun, 
 such as him, her, my, thy, &c., to qOalify it for an adjunct to a substan- 
 tive or personal pronoun; e. p".. The man Aimse^/. the woman herself, 
 we ourselves, &c. ; but the German fcIBjl is neither compounded nor de- 
 clined. — Db. Seaes' Koehden. 
 
 f When placed before a noun or a pronoun, it is an adverb and signi- 
 fies even ; e. g., ®cI6{i er fanit %i m(^t t^un, even he cannot do it ; felBjl bet 
 •Raifer Fann t^tt nii^t retten, emen the emperor cannot save him. (Compare 
 Lesson XXII., Obs. VI., and Note f on p. 183). 
 
 % 3etlbictier and ScfllilScr.are, like fitli^tr, rather antiquated. They 
 occur, however, in poetical writings. 
 
220 
 
 INDEFINITE PKONOCNS. 
 
 ' Mdse. Fern. Neuter. Plural. 
 
 SStcf, much SBieIc SSicI SSicle, many 
 
 fflenig, little fBenige 5Cenig SScnige, few 
 
 S)cc 9'lomHcl;e, the Mc SflamlliSc feaS 5lamt'4c &te ?flamlid;cn 
 
 same 
 
 !i7er ^ttnete, the tie sincere bad ^nnere bic Slntcren 
 
 other 
 
 Scire, pi. both Sinige (etUii^e),* pZ. some, a few 
 
 SKc^rcrc, pi. several iie 9Keiftett, pZ. most 
 Sinige — 3lniere, some — others 
 
 Note. — Notice that when the indefinite nmneral adjectives 
 are used as indefinite pronouns, they begin with a coital. 
 
 Obs. vm. — ^ebec, 3ebttieber,t ^t^li^et,f ^Sftani^ev, 
 ®intc, and itgenb @iner are declined like the 
 demonstrative pronoun, kicfer. S©cr @tne, ict 
 Sincere, and bet 9tdmli(i^e, like the possessive 
 pronoun, ter meine. 
 
 Obs. IX. — SPtattii^et is sometimes used without the termi- 
 nation, immediately followed by tin 5 e. g., ^fftan^ 
 tin ^ann, &c. 
 
 Obs. X. — SlUed, followed by the relative pronoun toad, is 
 rendered by all or dl that ; e. g., SlUeS twaS ie^ %aht, 
 all (that) I have ; ti ifl nii^t tiUt& <Boll, toaS glanjt, 
 (dl is not gold that ghtters. 
 
 Note. — Slltea is also sometimes used in the sense of aU 
 persons; e. gf.. Everybody rejoices, SltteS fteut fi^; ^w Iw^P' 
 »o Sl£le8 liel)t (Schilleb), thou lovest, where everybody is 
 loving. " 
 
 Obs. XI. — One, plur. ones, after an adjective ; e. g., A gray 
 horse and a black one, is rendered in German by 
 the ending of the adjective itself ; e. g., 3^ ^o6e cinert 
 fc^warjen SRocE unb cinen fcraunett, I have a black coat 
 and a brown one. 
 
 * ©tlidjcr (aligui) is rather antiquated. It was frequently used by 
 Luther and his contemporaries, 
 t See Note on preceding page. 
 
INDEFINITE PKONOCNS. 221 
 
 Obs. XIL — The indefinite pronoun some, wlien referring to a 
 noun that has preceded, is frequently not trans- 
 lated, but may be rendered by the accusatiye of 
 toeld^CV, C, eS, if the noun to which it refers is 
 in the singular, and by tvelc^e, etnige, or baoon, 
 if the noun was in the plural ; e. g., SCoUen ©ic SBcin 
 trinfen? will you drink wine? '^d, gcien ®ic mir 
 toeli^en, yes, give me smne. Jpabeti ©ie no(^ »on kie* 
 fern Sui^c ? have you any more of this cloth ? 3a, 
 i(^ ^a6c nod) tvel^eS (einiged or &a)>on), yes, I 
 have some more. SoTne (persons), followed in the 
 same sentence by others (other ones), corresponds 
 to the German @tntge — Stttbere ; e. g.. Some say 
 this, others say that, @ititge fagen Wi, Sincere 
 fagen bas. 
 
 Obs. Xm. — Any, in an interrogative sentence, is not trans- 
 lated, imless equivalent to every, when it is rendered 
 in German by leftet, C, S ; e, g., Do you not find 
 that most any {i. e., every) person has his faults ? 
 ftnlm Sienic^t, tag kinase ie&cc 9Jlen|'c^ feirtc gc^Ier^at? 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 tiag®IM,(the)fortune,happiness au^crnjal^Ien, to choose, select 
 
 bag ©etBiffcn, the conscience aBreifett, to depart 
 
 iag "Eing, the thing, object einlaten, to invite 
 
 ber %tiiUv, the mistake i- nac^gekn, to yield 
 
 kcr ^onig, the king at^angcn, to depend on 
 Me Ucberjeugung, the conviction- scriaumbcn, to calumniate 
 
 1»a^nfinnig, crazy Hopfcn, to knock 
 
 jufammen, together i^Benciten, to envy 
 
 fc^ultig, owing fd^merjen, to pain 
 
 fjufrteten, contented N/fpotten, to ridicule 
 
 aueermo^lt, chosen kenfcn, to think 
 
 laum, scarcely t^n, to do 
 
 wcit, far Dcrliercit, to lose 
 
 ka, as ficjal^Icn, to pay 
 
222 INDBFtNITE PEONOUNSt 
 
 Reading Exercise XXVII. 
 
 SUlan fagt, in ^bttig son 9)reu^cit, gricbrid^ 2DtI^eIm IV., fet 
 ttfll^nfinnig. 5Kan ift ni^t tmmer sufrieben, wcnn man glMicfe ifi. 
 SejalU Setiermann, was 3^r fc^uloig feit, unb 3|r wertet »on !Ric* 
 inont)(em) ablangen. ^lopftc nic^t Semaitc ? ©er 2Cei)e Bcneirct 
 iai ®iM 'HlkmanUi unt> scrfeumket 9Zicmflnti(en). .&a6cn ©ic 
 91i(i^ts auf Her g)ofl cr^alten ? J|un ®ic nie ctwa« gegen 3^rc Uebcr? 
 jeugung. 3Bir 'feafccrt eS fclbfl gcfe:§crt. Sitter freut ftc^ (rejoices). 
 Siefc ^nabcn lickn cinanter wic Sriifccr, (tc !bnncn fount o^^ne tin* 
 anbcr Ic6cn. gr mUtt in fRic^ta na%cben. SBcnn man cinen 
 greunb scrltert, fo fc^merjt es (Sinen. 3et>er |at feine ge|ler; Reiner 
 i|l o|ne ge'^Icr. SWandjer ^at tl^rer gefpottet, oI« pe arm waren, aber 
 je^t, to |te rcic^ |inS, Bcnciben fte Stete. 9Jian^e« wirb scrfouft, o'^ne 
 jc bejollt ju wcrbcn. Derfclbe gcl^Icr ifl Don SWe^rercn gcmait wor* 
 ben. 3(^ tennc nur SBcnigc Bon i|nen. 3c^ ^obc mit Wt^xmn tor* 
 iiber gc|>ro(^en (spoken); ginigc mUm n ftun, SJlnbere ttJoDm ei 
 iibcrlegen, abcr tie 'Keiflcn gotten c3 fiir unrat^fam. SSiele ftni be* 
 rufen (called), ober ffienige fint au«ern)ii^tt. 
 
 Theme XXVII. 
 
 They say, the president is ill.* One is unhappy when one is 
 discontented. Such things are not heard [translate : jone ihears 
 not] everj' day. You ought to pay everybody what you owe, 
 before you depart. Do not envy anybody. Was there not some- 
 thing (gar nidits) at (ouf) the post-office ? These two boys love 
 each other. Do not envy the happiness of others. Never do 
 anything against your conscience. One must not think too 
 much of one's self. Few are without faults,' but some speak 
 no evil (33ofe«) of others, and many love their enemies. Sev- 
 eral have made the same mistakes. I have seen only a few. 
 That woman speaks (foridst) of everybody. Be not impolite 
 to (gegen) anybody. All that I have, I will give to you. I 
 have had a black hat and a white one. Many have made the 
 same mistake. 
 
 * Use subjunctive here and see p. 420, § 71, 2. 
 
THE INDEFINITE PliOKOUNS. 
 
 223 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 ®IauBt man, kaf ker ^aifer Boit 
 Dcflreic^ na^ Serltn ge^en 
 Wirt ? 
 
 Jpot S^ncn ias Semont gefagt, ber 
 am §ofe tefannt ift ? 
 
 SCarutn fd^kgen btefe jtt)e4 ^naben 
 
 einanter ? 
 3fl 3tmant |cute ouf tcr 9)o(t gc* 
 
 wcfen ? 
 
 3Bie lam (came) ei, iag 9yie|rere 
 tenfeI6en getter gemac^t ^akn ? 
 
 3^ es wa^r, bag in biefer SBctt 
 91icmanb o'^ne ge:^Ier i(l ? 
 
 3Bar Jflid^ta auf tcr 55ofl fiir mi(^ ? 
 
 ®Ia«kn ©ic, tag ic^ Stoa3 gegen 
 
 mcinc Uekrjeugung t|un wiirte ? 
 
 SBijfen ©ie toann tic meiflcit 
 grcmtcn tic Saner (baths) 
 kfuc^cti ? 
 
 SEotteit ©ie nid)t mit mir auf 
 cinige SEagc nad^ SSruflTct (Brus- 
 sels), tcr ^auptfiatt Selgicns ? 
 
 9luf tBcIc^cm SBcgc fommcn tic 
 2)cutfc^en get»ij|nli^ nad6 Salis 
 fomien ? 
 
 ^aBcn ©ic kite SSrittcr iti §erm 
 Sanf gcfel^cn ? 
 
 9Jian glauBt, ta§ cr nac^ Serltn 
 gc|en wirt, menn ter ^onig oon 
 ^rcugcit i^n cinlatctt iinrf. 
 
 Sin greunt son mir, ter mit rem 
 fKinijicr 33iSmarI tetannt ift, 
 ■^at tS mir gefagt, 
 
 3i^ glauie, tcr Sine tjat tern 21ns 
 teren ein gcbcrmeffer jerbrodjcn. 
 
 S3 ift no(^ S^iemant auf ter |)ofi 
 gcwefcn, foti ids 3«mflntcn fd)i* 
 cCen? 
 
 3(^ glauBc, tag Sinigc i^rc 2trljeit 
 jufammcn gemai^t t)akn. 
 
 ^licmant) (or Reiner) ifl in tiefer 
 SBcIt o^nc gel)Ier; in tcr nad^^: 
 ften 2BeIt toerten toir Sltlc o^nc 
 ge'^Icr fcin. 
 
 (S.i wax ^Jlic^ta fiir ©ic auf tcr 9)ojl. 
 
 D, ic^ 6in wcit ta»on cntfernt (it 
 is furthest from my miiid) 
 fo Stream son S^nen p tcnfcn. 
 
 5SieIc ge^en fd)on tm SJlai nad) 
 ten Siitern, akr tie iDteiften 
 ge|e« erjl im 3«ni "Ccr 3«H. 
 
 S3 t^ut mir fc^r leit (1 am very- 
 sorry), a6er ic^ |a6e augcn* 
 Hidiic^ ju sici l^icr ju ffeun. 
 
 9JJe^rcrc ge^cn ju ©d&tjf nat^ 
 ^m £)orI unt tann na^ <B<m 
 granciefo iikr Cant, akr tie 
 5J?eijlen ge'^en geiuB^nlic^ ten 
 ganjen 2Beg ju (by) SBaffer. 
 
 3itin, jtc iBaren nicfct gu §oufc, tcr 
 Sine war serreijl (gone out of 
 town), tcr 2lntcrc t»ar auf tcr 
 Sorfc (bourse). 
 
224: THE IBBEQUIiAIt VESB9. 
 
 LESSON XXVrU. Scftiott 28, 
 
 The Irregular or Ancient Verbs.* 
 (2)ie unregclmii^igen Scittoiittct.) 
 
 Obs. I, — ^In Lesson XX. we liave said that, as in English, 
 all verba capable of taldng a termination, and 
 whose radical vowel is not affected in conjugation, 
 are called regular ; and that such verbs as change 
 their radical vowel, in certain tenses, when con- 
 jugated, are called irregular. Of such (irregular) 
 verbs there are in German nearly two hundred.f 
 They deviate from the regular verb particularly in 
 the Imperfect and in the Past Participle. 
 
 Obs. n. — In the Imperfect Indicative, the irregular verbs, 
 as in English, change their radical vowd, and with 
 few exceptions (which are given on p. 242), do 
 not admit of a termination ; e. g., to sing, I sang, 
 fingen, i(^ fang. In the Past Participle they aflSx 
 
 * Some of the German grammarianB prefer to call these verbs the 
 ancient, the strong, or even the reguLar form, and those which we are 
 accustomed to consider regular, they call the modem, the weak, or the 
 irregular form, because nearly all the primitive verbs in the language 
 were conjugated like our irregulars. We can, of course, have no objec- 
 tion to the name ancient and modern, if these terms are to distinguish 
 the age of the two different forms, but we cannot consent to name 
 the ancient form the strong, and the modern the weak. To say that a 
 verb is atroTig because it does not require an addition from without ; 
 («. g., give-gave, but love-love-d), is to us incomprehensible. We con- 
 sider that strong which does not yield, and the old Hebrew grammarians 
 must have been of the same opinion, 'for they called those verbs whose 
 radiecUa yielded their place, weak. But the greatest objection to a 
 change of name is, that those verbs which we term regular, are only 
 subject to one and the same change, if by addition we may designate 
 a change, while those that we term irregida/r, although the older 
 form, are subject to a number of changes, which, to the foreign student 
 especially, are among the greatest difficulties to be encountered in 
 acquiring this language. 
 
 f Compound verbs are generaJlly conjugated like the simple verbs 
 frojn which they are formed. 
 
THE lEKEGULAE VEBBS. 
 
 225 
 
 Ctl instead of t (those given on p. 242, excepted); 
 c. g., tatfen (to bake): getacfctt, and frequently 
 change their radical vowel also ; c. g., icrjlen (to 
 burst) : geborflen. Some of the irregular verbs also 
 modify or change their radical vowel in the second 
 and third '^person singular of the Present ; e. g., 
 kdcn ; tu Mi^, er badt; and in the Imperatire sin- 
 gular ; e. g., gc6en (to give) : gicfe (give). The 
 Imperfect Subjunctive is formed regularly, i. e., 
 by adding c, and modifying the radical vowel when 
 it is o, o, or tt ; e. g., geben : Indie, id) gab ; Sub- 
 junct., id^ go6e. 
 
 Obs. in. — ^We divide all the iiregular verbs into five dif- 
 ferent conjugations, and each of these again into 
 different classes, so that the various vowel changes 
 which they undergo, may be easily and well com- 
 prehended. They are : 
 
 First Conjugation (Eadical Vowel «). 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive a 
 
 Imperfect n 
 
 Past Part, a 
 
 I. 
 
 iadtn, to bake 
 
 tul. 
 
 getacfen 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive a 
 
 Imperfect ic 
 
 Past Part, a 
 
 II. 
 
 Broten, (to roast) 
 
 6rtct 
 
 gebvatcn 
 
 Second Conjugation (Imperfect with a). 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive C 
 
 Imperfect a 
 
 Past Part, e 
 
 I. 
 
 Icfcrt (to read) 
 
 \a^ 
 
 gclefen 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive e 
 
 Imperfect a 
 
 Past Part, o 
 
 II. 
 
 brefdjcn (to thrash 
 
 braf^ 
 
 gctrofc^en 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive e 
 
 Irnperfect a 
 
 Past Part, a 
 
 III. 
 
 ncnnen (to name) 
 
 nonntc* 
 
 genannt 
 
 * Notice that verbs of this class not only change their radical vowel, 
 but also add the termination of regular verbs. See p. 343. Obs. 11. 
 
226 
 
 THE IRBEGULAB VEBBS. 
 
 TMrd Conjugation (Imperfect and Past Part, i or ie). 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive ei 
 
 Imperfect i 
 
 Past Part, i 
 
 I. 
 
 tei§en (to tear) 
 
 tip 
 
 geriffcn 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive ei 
 
 Imperfect ie 
 
 Past Part, ie 
 
 II. 
 
 prcifcit (to praise) 
 
 pxUi 
 
 gepriefcn 
 
 Fourth Conjugation (Imperfect and Past Part, with o). 
 
 Class 
 I. 
 
 Infinitive e 
 
 Imperfect o 
 
 Past Part, o 
 
 fec^ten, (to fence, 
 fight) 
 
 foc^t 
 
 gcfoc^ten 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive tc 
 
 Imperfect o 
 
 ^ast Part, o 
 
 II. 
 
 feiec^en (to creep) 
 
 trod) 
 
 gelroi^cn 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive a, 6, or tt 
 
 Imperfect O 
 
 Past Part. O 
 
 III. 
 
 go^rcn (to ferment) 
 
 QO^V 
 
 gcgol^ren 
 
 Fifth Conjugation (Eadioal Vowel i or it. 
 Imperfect a or «). 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive i 
 
 Imperfect a 
 
 PaM Part, u 
 
 I. 
 
 jingcn (to sing) 
 
 fang 
 
 gefutigen 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive i 
 
 Imperfect a 
 
 Past Part, o 
 
 II. 
 
 fpitinen (to spin) 
 
 f))ann 
 
 gefponnen 
 
 Class 
 
 Infinitive I or ie 
 
 Imperfect a 
 
 Pad Part, e 
 
 III. 
 
 liegen (to lie) ,^ 
 
 log 
 
 gctegcn 
 
THE IKBEGULAS VEBBS. 
 
 227 
 
 Conjugation of an Ieeegulab oe Ancient Verb. 
 ^c^lagen, TO BEAT (TO SLAY). 
 
 Principal Parts: fi^logctt, to beat ; fdslug, gefc^Iflgctl 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Sing, ©(i^tage, beat (thou) PL fi^Iagct or fc^lagcn ©ie, beat (you) 
 
 INFINITIVE. PAETICIPLES. 
 
 Pres. fc^tagen, to beat Pres. fc^Iagent, beating 
 
 Past. gefd^Iagctt laben, to have Past. gcfc^Iagcn, beaten 
 beaten 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I beat. 
 
 I may beat. 
 
 ic^ f^Iage 
 
 ic^ I'c^lage 
 
 bu f(^tdgfl 
 
 bu fd)Iagcfl 
 
 er fdjlagt 
 
 er fi^Iage 
 
 tBir fi^lagctt 
 
 wlr fi^Iageti 
 
 i^r fi^lagt 
 
 i|r iWagct 
 
 fie fc^lagctt 
 
 fte fcbtagctt 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I beat. 
 
 I might beat 
 
 ^ W»9 
 
 i^ fc^lfige 
 
 bu fc^Iug{l 
 
 bu fc^Iiigejl 
 
 cr fc^Iug 
 
 er [(i^Iiige 
 
 wtr fcfetugen 
 
 air f(^Iitgett 
 
 i^r fc^Iugt 
 
 i|r fc^Iiiget 
 
 (le f^Iugcn 
 
 fie fd^Iiigen 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 I have beaten. 
 
 I may have beaten. 
 
 ic^ fjait gefcfetagen 
 
 ic| ^ah gefc^Iagen 
 
 bu |afl gefd^Iagen 
 
 bu 'i^abt^ gefc^Iftgen 
 
 er ^at gef(^Iagett 
 
 er 1a6c gefc^Iagen 
 
 Wir fjalm gefc^Iagen 
 
 tuir ^aUn gefc^tagcn 
 
 i|r ^att gefc^tagen 
 
 i:^r fiaM gefc^tagen 
 
 Pc ^a6en gcfd^tagen 
 
 fie Iflten gei'^Iagcn 
 
228 
 
 THE ibhegulab vebbs. 
 
 I had beaten. 
 
 ic^. :^attc gefc^Iagctt 
 tiu ^attefi gefi^Iagen 
 er ^atte gef^Iagen 
 loir fatten gcft^Iagen 
 i^r lattet gefd^lagcn 
 fie fatten gefc^Iagen 
 
 I shall beat, 
 ti^ werbe fc^tagen 
 bu tvtrfl fi^Iagen 
 n ttirt fc^Iagen 
 jDir tterteit fc^Iogen 
 i^r mxiet fc^Iagen 
 jle mxitn f^tagcn 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 I might have beaten. 
 
 ic^ %'a.iit gefd^Iagen 
 bu |atte|i gefc^Iagen 
 er l^iitte gefc^logcn 
 trir fatten gcfc^Iagen 
 i^r pttct gcji^Iflgcn 
 fie l^dtten gefd^Iagen 
 
 .??»•«< Future. 
 
 I wiU beat. 
 i(^ tverte fc^tagen 
 titt wertcjl fd^Iagcn 
 er werte fd^togcn 
 »ir roerten f^Iogcn 
 i^r werbct fd^logen 
 fte iDcrbcn fi^tagcn 
 
 I shall have beaten. 
 
 \&i wertc gefc^Iagen ^akn 
 t>tt wirfl gefd^Iagen %aU\i 
 er wirb gef(^lagen ^atcn 
 loir ircrten gefc^Iagen ^aBcn 
 {■^r toertet gefdilagen ^akn 
 fie tverben gefdjlagen |akn 
 
 First Conditional. 
 
 I would beat. 
 
 \6) wiirbe f^Iagen 
 tu wiirkefi fc^Iagen 
 er wiirbe [(^lagcn 
 wir wiirbcn fcfjiagcn 
 i^r wiirbet f(^tagen 
 fie wiirbcn fc^Iagcn 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 I will have beaten 
 
 i(^ werbe gcfdilagen f^abin 
 
 bu wcrbcjt gef^Iagen ^ahn 
 er lurbc gefi^Iagcn ^aten 
 ftir itierbcn gef^Iagen l)aitn 
 i|r werbet ge|'d^Iagi>9 ^^^^^ 
 fie werben gefc^■taget^^a6ctt 
 
 Second Conditional. " ^ 
 
 I would have beaten, 
 i;^ wiirbe gefi^Iagen ^oBctt 
 bu iDiirbcjt geplagen %a\tn 
 er wiirbe gefdblagen ^afccn 
 Wir witrben gefc^Iagen ^abm 
 \%x wiirbct gefdjiagen %ahtn 
 fie wiirben gefc^Iagen l^ahin 
 
 Note. — The Passive Voice is exactly like that of the regular verb. 
 
THE IBBE3ULAB VERBS: FIEST CONJUGATION. 
 
 229 
 
 First Oonjugation (Eadioal Vowel «)• 
 
 Obs. rV. — This conjugation consists of verbs having a for 
 their radical vowel. In the imperfect, this vowel 
 changes in the first class to tt, and in the second 
 toic. 
 
 FiEST Class : Imperfect with u. 
 1. SSaif en, to bake. 
 
 f Infinitive, I'Ocfen, to bake 
 PmncipalJ j^p^fect, i(^ bud, I baked 
 Pabts ^ Past Part., gcbaden, baked 
 
 Present (Indie. ) Imperfect {Indie.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 3(i^ bade, 6u bactjl, er 
 
 SBir laden, i^r Bocfct 
 (©ie6a(fcn),rtekden 
 
 34 but, in Buljl, er 
 
 M 
 mx Mtn, i^r bu!et 
 
 (®ie) bulen, |ie buten 
 
 bade, bake (thou) 
 
 badet or badcn @ie, 
 bake (you) 
 
 Thus are conjugated : 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 2. fa^rcn,' to drive 
 
 ful)r 
 
 gefatjrcn 
 
 3. graben, to dig 
 
 grub 
 
 gcgroben 
 
 4. *Iaieit,' to load 
 
 Inti 
 
 gelaten 
 
 5. *fd)affen, to create 
 
 fc^tt^f 
 
 gefc^affcn 
 
 6. fc^Iagcn, to beat 
 
 lW«3 
 
 gefc^Iagen 
 
 7. tragcn, to carry (to wear) 
 
 trug 
 
 getragen 
 
 ' fjfa^teili to travel in a vehicle, is conjugated with fein» but vrhen it 
 has an active meaning, i. «., when it means to lead or drive the horses^ 
 takes ^abeit. 
 
 ' Verbs marked with an * are not modified in the Present. 
 
230 
 
 THE IBBEaULAB VEBBS: FIBST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) Past Part. 
 
 8. fwadsfen,' to grow 
 
 9. ttaf^en, to wash 
 
 10. *ma'^ten, to grind 
 
 11. tr«9«n, to ask 
 Also : 
 
 12. fle|cn, to stand 
 
 tan&ti ge»rod.)fen 
 
 lutt)"^ gtwofc^cn 
 
 (mtt|l,o6s.)mapt gcmc'^ten 
 (frag) or frogtc gefragt 
 
 (fhint)) or ^anb gejlanben 
 Second Class : Imperfect with ie. 
 13. 93lafen, to blow. 
 
 Peincipal ilf^^^^ fX'\^}^^ 
 Parts i I'np^Mi, ^ Wtc«, I blew 
 ( Past Part., gcMofen, blown 
 
 Present (Indie.) 
 
 Imperfect {India.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 3(5^ blafe, bu btafcfl, 
 
 cr Waft 
 SBir Mafcn, % Hafct 
 
 (©IcMafen), ficHofen 
 
 3c^ Hies, bu Hicfefl, 
 
 er Htca 
 2Str Hicfctt, f^r Wicfct 
 
 (©tc6Iicfcn),fleHiefcn 
 
 Mafe, blow (thou) 
 
 Hafet or blafen ©ie, 
 blow (you) 
 
 Thus are conjugated 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indic.)\ Past Part. 
 
 14 Brotcn, to roast 
 
 Brict 
 
 gcBroten 
 
 15. tfatlcn, to faU 
 
 fiet 
 
 gcfaflen 
 
 16. fangcn, to catch 
 
 fi(e)ng 
 
 gcfangen 
 
 17. fatten', to hold 
 
 WU 
 
 ge'^altcn 
 
 ' Verbs marked with f ^^ neuter. They form their compound tenses 
 generally with the auxiliary fein ; e. g., \i) bin flctBttc^feit/ I haw grown. 
 There are, however, some neuter verbs which use J^aBcit sometimes (see 
 p. 295). 
 
 ' ^altcilr with the preposition fiir, answers to the English, to regard, 
 as (to hold for), to take to be ; e. g., SEBir l^altcn unfern SJa^kr flir einen e^f 
 lichen SWmn, we regard our neighbor (as) an honest man. 
 
THE lEBEWULAE VEBBS: FIRST CONGUGATION. 
 
 231 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 18. t^angeh, to hang 
 
 ^i(e)ng 
 
 ge^ongen 
 
 19. laffen/ to let (leave) 
 
 Iteg 
 
 gelaffen 
 
 20. ratten, to advise 
 
 rict^ 
 
 gerat^crt 
 
 21. fi^lafen, to sleep 
 
 fd)licf 
 
 gefcblafen 
 
 22. ^auen, to hew (split) 
 
 ^ie4 
 
 ge'^aiten 
 
 23. laufen," to run 
 
 lief 
 
 gclottffn 
 
 24. fiopen, to push 
 
 fticg 
 
 gc^o^en 
 
 25. mfcn, to call 
 
 rief 
 
 gcmren 
 
 26. fge^en, togo 
 
 9«(e)n9 
 
 gcgangcn 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 
 
 kcr Scktengriiber, the grave- 
 digger 
 ker 9lnfang, the beginning 
 her 9ilad)mittag, the afternoon 
 ker Sttrteitcr, the workman 
 baa ©rat, the grave 
 l\.t%m, to draw 
 ^elfen (with dat.), to help 
 
 tie ©cfeultcr, the shoulder 
 ber §lmmel, the heaven 
 ber ^opf, the head 
 bic SBcIt, the world 
 bie ©tabt, the city 
 ber 9tlte, the aged man 
 i^f(^»t^cn, to sweat 
 fc^nell, quick, quickly 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class I. 
 
 3c^ bade baa Sejle Srob in btefcr <Stabt. ®u fa:^rjl ju fi^ncK. Det 
 Sobtengtakr griiSt eln ©rat. SBir wafc^en Jebcn SRontag. 3^r 
 labct 3U Bid auf biefcn Heinett SDagen. ©le ^artoffeln naac^fcn in 
 biefem 3a:^re ntd^t fo fi^netl. ®er 3lr6citer trug me^r ols :^unbert 
 f funb auf fclnem ^opfe. 'Bit ^nakn fd^Iugen cinonber. Du \a^x^ 
 ^cutc nic^t fpajicren, Mjl bu !ran!? 3c^ |a6c teln '^\<x'i, ntcin Srcunb 
 ijl gcflem nac^ ^bln gefai^ren. SEad^jt »ic( Sakd in ©eutfd^Ianb ? 
 
 The compound verb bevantaffCit is regular. 
 
 fiauftn is conjugated both with feiii and l^aten (see p. 395). 
 
232 THE IBREGULAB VERBS: TIEST CONJUGATION. 
 
 ©ic 3talicttcr ^obcn »telc ?Wcrti»iiri)igIcttcn ter 3llten ausgegrakn. 
 SBann ^ajl tu tic^ jum lefetcn 'Malt gcwafd^en ? 3m 3lnfang fc^uf 
 ®ott §immcl unc (Srle. Sr ^at Cle ganje SBelt crfc^affen. 
 
 Theme on Class I. 
 
 I am digging far (tta$) gold, will jou help me (Dat.) ? 
 Thou drivest too fast, the horse is sweating. Our cook 
 bakes better bread than the baker. Has the grave-digger 
 dug another grave ? Do you wash every week ? That man 
 carries two hundred pounds on his shoulders. Your brother 
 has beaten my little sister. Did the potatoes grow in this 
 country? They have loaded this wagon too heavily, the 
 horse will not be able to draw it. Shall we drive out this 
 afternoon ? My uncle drove yesterday seven miles in one 
 hour. Why are you beating that poor child? 
 
 VOCABULAET. 
 
 tie Jrompcte, the trumpet ber ©ta'^I, the steel 
 
 tier ©(iwinbler, the scoundrel ber <BtaU, the stable 
 tcr Sldukr, the robber unmbgltd^, impossible 
 
 ter Dic6, the thief ^crjlic^, heartily 
 
 tcr ©iifcel, the sword grii^en, to greet 
 
 griigen laffen, to send one's regards to frii^, early 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class 11. 
 
 3(^ Hafe fcie 2:rom|)cte gem. Du fc^tSffl ju Ionge,tu mwgt icfcen 
 9Rorgcn urn fiinf U^r aufflc|cn. Wtxn Setter lapt ©te |erjlic^ grits 
 §en. ajir ratten 3:|nen, [i^ mit jenent SKenfc^cn nic^t ein3ulaffen, er 
 t|l cin ©c^winWer. ®ie braten tie ^artoffctn nid^t iraun gcnug. 
 2lls er auf mi^ juUef, f^itb t^ i^n mit mcinem ©iibel nieber. SBarum 
 Iftufjl bu fo ? S« ifl no(% frit|. ©tof en ©ic mic^ md)t noi^ einmat, 
 bas rot^e ic^ S^nen ! SBarum |at er bic^ geflopen ? ®uten 5Korgcn, 
 meiniperr; Wan ©ie le^te 9la(^t gut gefdilafen? 2Cie hm man 
 
THE IBBEGULAB VEBBS: FIEST CONJUGATION. 233 
 
 Wa\x\t fangcn ? ^ii ^od)in |at iai glctfc^ ju lange ixatm lajfcn. 
 Sr riet:^ jnir H ^angcn a" lajfen. SBurtcn <Bit Den £;ieb loufett 
 kjfen? 
 
 Theme on Class II. 
 
 I advise you to punish the thief. Do you not hang the 
 picture too high ? This horse runs faster than any other in 
 this place. We hold it to be (translate /or) impossible. They 
 are going to the opera this evening. I caught a robber in 
 the stable of our neighbor, Mr. S. Could you not have held 
 him till (bis) I came (!om) ? John fell from the horse and 
 could not walk (ge|cn) [for] several weeks. Did he hold the 
 paper in his hand ? They have hewn down (nieberge^auen) 
 that beautiful little tree. When did the man catch these 
 rats ? One of our workmen has fallen from the roof. Why 
 have they pushed him off (son) the sidewalk (Siirgerjieig, masc.) ? 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ker 55o(liIIon, the stage-driver bie 2Baf(^e, the linen 
 iai Unternc^men, the undertak- y Scr ©pcd, the bacon 
 
 ing, enterprise ter gifcf), the fish 
 
 iai Sampfboot, the steamboat frii^er, formerly 
 icr ^trd^^of, the church-yard, tott, dead 
 
 burying ground wo^tit, whither 
 
 tie Sabung, the load wtrflic^, really, indeed 
 
 bcr Sobcn, the ground »oU, full 
 
 bcr SBinb, the wind t^ auSgcjeidsnet, excellent 
 
 iai §orn, the horn lofien, to cost 
 
 iie ©rube, the grave ctfcfeaffen, to create 
 
 Reading Exercise XXVIII. 
 
 SBantm Bacfcn ®ie 3:^r SBrob nidjt fcftji ? Mr Baden »icl «uc|m 
 unb lijnncn tcine 3eit i^'^ *fl^ Srobkctcn finben. gu|r betne Zante, 
 gran ©c^Iog, gc|lcm nac^ SRartenkb ? 3a; ^Brtefl bu nic^t, n)ie bcr 
 
234 THE lEREQCLAB VEBBS: FIKST CONJ0GATION. 
 
 9)ofHttionbaǤorn Uiei, aU |ic obfuir (drove oflf) ? fficr 3lnbercn 
 eine ®ruk graBt, fallt fetbfi l^tncitt. 3|rc grcuntc foUtcn ticfer gc- 
 grabcn |flbcn; in Boriger SBo^e wurJe auf lent Sanbc, weli^cs 3'^re 
 SriUier serlauft |akn, ®oH) gefunCen (found), ©ic |okn ben ffia* 
 gen ju fc^wcr gctoen. Sr luJ ba« ®etBc:^r sor cincr ©tunbe. ®Dtt 
 erfcfeuf ten ^tmtncl un5 tie Srce ; tie ganje 3BcIt tturtc »on i^m er* 
 f^affen. Sltern foUten it)re Winter ni(^t fi^Iagen. 3Bo|in tragi cr 
 ten ncucn diod ? Sr tragi i|n ju meinem DnM, SJa^ ^akn ©ie 
 |eute ge»afd}en ? grjl tuufc^ i^ cin QJaor ©iriimpfc, tann awci oter 
 trci ^emtcn «nt no^ side antere aBftfi^e. SBa^ft tcr ZaM in 
 Eeutfc^Iant ? ^ijnnen @ie tic Jrompetc Hofcn ? Sti Hic6 [le frii|cr. 
 !r;ie itBc^in :^at tas gleifc^ 3U lange gcbraten. Sin Slrkiter ftel tott 
 »om Dod^e. 9Jlit ©pedt fangt man 9Kau|'e. SBir t)abcn uicle gi|'(|c 
 in tiefem glujfe gefangen. §ielt er cin folc^e^ Untcrne|mcn fitr un* 
 mBglic^ ? Sr rict^ ntir tason abjulajfcn (to abstain). 2Bir l^aBcn 
 »a|rcnt tcr ganjcn 9iJac^t nii^t me|r ali Irei ©tuntcn gcfdjlafcn. 
 SBaram fiiigt cr tii^ ? (£r |ing an i|r mit Scib unt ©eclc, unt ten* 
 no(^ ticbte fie i^n nidst. Sr ricf ©ie, gcl^cn ©ic 3U i^m. ®ingen ©ie 
 nic^t nac^ 9)ari8 ? 
 
 Theme XXVIII. 
 
 Does not your baker bake fresh bread every day? The king 
 drives generally four horses, to-day he will drive six.* Why 
 did you not go by (mit) steamer ? The grave-digger dug a deep 
 grave. An ass was so heavily loaded (latcn), that when (aU) he 
 attempted to (transl. here by ju) carry the burden (2a|t), jhe 
 jfell dead to the (ju) ground. In the beginning jGod ,created 
 [the] heaven and [the] earth. Why does the father beat the 
 child ? It ia very dirty, it will not wash itself (|ic^). Why 
 do you always wear a black coat ? Because I have no other. 
 Formerly, tobacco did not grow in Germany, but now it 
 thrives (getei^t) pretty well. The vrind does not blow very 
 hard to-day. The cook (fem.) roasted the meat too quick. 
 A bird fell from the roof of our house and was caught by 
 (son) a cat. For whom do you take me ? A sword hung 
 over the head (^aupt) of Damocles. He gave (left) me no 
 peace (9lut)e). I had to beat him. Who has advised you to 
 » See p. 147, Obs. IV, Rem. 
 
THE IREKGULAR VERBS: FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 235 
 
 do that ? How many hours do you generally sleep ? Have 
 you slept well ? I ran (lief) as fast as I could, but I could 
 not catch him. They pushed the glass from the table. Did 
 he not call you ? You had (warcn) just gone away when he 
 feU. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 Sadeti (&ie !ein Sroi me|r ? 
 
 Wlit wit ijicfen 3)fetben fii^rt ter 
 ^onig ? 
 
 SBarum flnb <Bie nic^t mit ber 
 Sifcnk^n gcfa^ren ? 
 
 SBic siel fojiet ti, tintn SKcnfc^cit 
 auf ticfcm ^ir^'^ofe ju kgra* 
 ten (bury) ? 
 
 §atcn 3|re Seutc (men) nii^t iai 
 (S^ijf JU Bott gctoen ? 
 
 SBorauS erf^uf @ott icn $immel 
 unb tie S«c ? 
 
 Sragt fic^ SiefcS Suc^ ni^t fe'^r 
 gut? t 
 
 ^afcen @ie fi(^ noc^ ntc^t gcwa? 
 f(^en? 
 
 3c^ ^a6c ©ie fc^on einmat gcfragt, 
 06 tier Zaiat in Sicutfc^Ianb 
 
 SBaruitt fSttt baS @ol5 ni(^t ; bcr 
 ^rieg ifl boc^ beenbet (closed) ? 
 
 5Jein, wir |akn feine 3eit, unb bag 
 
 Srob bci3 Sadera ift fo Mttig. 
 ©er ^Bttig fa|rt gerobl^nlii^ mit 
 
 SSieren, :§eutc wirb cr mit ©e4s 
 
 fen fa^rcn. 
 SBeit ti im ©ommer 6iel angene|s 
 
 mer i|l, mit bem ©amijfboot ju 
 
 fa'^ren. 
 T)ai weig id^ »irtlid§ nic^t, obex i^ 
 
 fflnn 3^nen fagen, bag es nic^t 
 
 fe|r billig fein fann. 
 Dnein, im ©egent^cil; ba3<S(^iff 
 
 ^at noc^ ni^t einmat eine ^aI6e 
 
 Sabung. 
 ®ott |at ten Jpimmcl unb bie Srbe, 
 
 Ja tic ganje SBelt, aus Stic^ta 
 
 gef^affen. 
 S3 ijt ausgejeic^net, id^ ^a6e nie 
 
 cinen kjfcrn 0ioct ge^abt. 
 3c^ tBufii mic6, ali i&i aufftanb 
 
 (rose), aber i^ bin tuieler 
 
 f(|mu^lg geworben. 
 3fl, ber Sabaf wai^ji in ^Deutf** 
 
 lanb, aber cr ijl nic^t fo gut,al3 
 
 ber amerifanifc^e. 
 £)a« ®olD fallt nie, fonbern baa 
 
 5>apiergell fteigt im ?)reife, unb 
 
 we^batb (why) iai nic^t fteigt, 
 
 tji SKan^cm cin SRiit^fci (mys- 
 tery). 
 
236 THE IBBEGULAB VERBS: PIEST CONJUGATION. 
 
 ipalten ©ie etn foli^cg Ding fiir 3i^ ^irft c^ f«f unmBgltci^, oBcr i(| 
 unmoglid^ ? glaubc je^t, to^ cS mogli(^ (pos- 
 
 sible) ijt. 
 ©ogtc 3|re ©(^tocfler nl# au 31* 3<i< ^o^ if* ''« teutfc^er au^tmicE 
 ncn; (gc^lofen @ic iBOl^l? (expression), ten »tr nut 
 
 tm6!i sweet repose iiberfc^en 
 !5nnen. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 S^Iac^t bet S!iu]§(6erg. 
 
 Sim 24ten 3lj)ril 1547 wurtc bcr ^urfiirfl »ott ©adbfcn son ^arl V. 
 Bei 9Ku^I6crg angcgriffcn.' ©c^on Beim (in, Bei lent) Scginn be3 
 ^ampfeg fj^Jugen" bie fpanifc^en Sleiter tie fac^|i)'d^c SRcitcrci in W 
 glutei' unc, al3 ticfe cuf i^r eigcnea gu§»oIf ftie^en, B'urtcn fie 
 »er»irrt, unb lichen noc^ nur wenigen ©tunben tie ©panicr afe 
 ©ieger ouf bem geltc. Son ^o^borf Bi« gdtenBurg war bie ganjc 
 ®cgenb mitSeic^cn Betedt; mc|r aU breitaufenb ©adfefen waren ges 
 fatten, unb fetBft bcr ^urfiirfi So^onn gricbrii^ war gefangen gcnom* 
 men morben. 31"^' 2:age na&i ber ©d^tac^t morfc^irte ber ^aifer gegcn 
 Sorgau. I^iefc ©tabt ergoB' ft^' o^nc SSibcrflanb. ^ierauf tourte 
 SffiittcnBcrg son .Sari angegrijfcn. 3ltlcin am 19tcn WoX fi^Io^* man 
 einen Sertrag, toetcBer ben geinbfcligtciten cin Snte mad^tc. ^aft 
 bicfea Scrtragcg scrjidjietc So^ann gricbri^ auf bie ^urtoiirbe ju 
 ©unfien |"cine« Setters 5iKoriJ, unb iiBerlieferte bem ^atfer feine 
 ge|lungen. 
 
 ' Stngeflrtjfen, past participle of ongtrffen. 
 ' 3n Ste giurfit fd|lagen, to route. 
 ' ffirgai jti^ (yielded), imperfect of fl(J crgctien. 
 « O^lof, Imperfect of f^tiegen. 
 
THE lEEEGULAE VEEBS: SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 231 
 
 LESSON XXIX. ;8c{tion 29. 
 
 Second Oonjugatioii. (Imperfect with a). 
 
 Obs. I. — This conjugation is divided into three classes. Its 
 radical vowel, which in the inflnitirc is e, changes 
 in the imperfect tense to a. In the past participle 
 the radical vowel changes in the first class to C, in 
 the second to O, and in the third to «. In the sec- 
 ond and third person singular of the present (indica- 
 tive), those of the first and second class take i or ic' 
 
 FiEST Class: Past Participle. with c. 
 
 27. @fTetl, to eat. 
 
 ( Infinitive, C]Jen, to eat 
 
 pTRTr ] ^^P^'^'^t' i"^ «P' I ate 
 ( Past Fart., gegeffen, eaten 
 
 Present {Indie.) Imperfect (Indie.) 
 
 3(^ cjfe, bu tjfefl, er 
 
 3Btr cjfen, t^r cjfet (©ic 
 cffen), fie cpn 
 
 Thus are conjugated : 
 
 i(^ ag, t>u a^cfl, er 
 
 2Bir a§cn, i^r a^ct (®ic 
 ageit), file a^en 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 i^, eat (thou) 
 
 cffet or effcn @ie, 
 eat (you) 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. (Indio.) Past Part. 
 
 23. fveiTcn,' to eat frag gcfrcjfen 
 
 29. geben,' to give gat gegeben 
 
 30. fgencfcrt/ to recover from gcnaS genefcn 
 
 illness 
 
 31. gef^e^cn,' to happen gefc^a^ gefd^c^cn 
 
 ^t^cn (impersonal, and therefore used only in the third person), 
 lefen, fe^en, and sometimes also gebcn, take te in the second and third per- 
 sons singular of the present tense, all other verbs of this class take t, 
 except genefm, which is regular, and tretEn« which has : bu Ititfflf et ttttt. 
 
 ^ All verbs marked thus f are neuter (cf. p. 395). 
 
 ' Srelfen, is used of brutes, and vulgarly in the sense : to eat greedUy. 
 
238 
 
 THE IREEGULAE VBBBS: SECOND CONJUGATIOII. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Impel f. {Indie.) Past Part. 
 
 32. lefcn,' to read 
 
 lai 
 
 gelefen 
 
 33. mejfen, to measure 
 
 maf 
 
 gcmeffcn 
 
 34. fe^en/ to see 
 
 f«^ 
 
 gefe^en 
 
 35. ftrcten'to tread, step 
 
 trat 
 
 getretcn 
 
 36. Bergcjfen, to forget 
 
 uergap 
 
 »crge|fen 
 
 37. t]^un(t^uen),'todo,Tnake 
 
 t|at 
 
 get^an 
 
 VOCABULAET. 
 
 
 t»ie 8lr6ett, the work 
 
 tie ^ranf|eit, the illness 
 
 ter ^(ifc, the cheese ^ 
 
 ter 3»C(f, the end, the design ' 
 
 bie luficr, the oyster 
 
 tie Ijfaire, the affair ' 
 
 ber ipafer, the oats 
 
 %<^i ipcM, the hay 
 
 bad Earned, the camel 
 
 scriienctt, to deserve, to earn 
 wo^nen, to dwell, to Uve 
 «or!ommen, to appear, to happen 
 Berbcrtcn, to spoil 
 6ringcn, to bring 
 'gcfattctt, to please 
 loHiinbifi^, Dutch 
 {nap)>, scarce, scanty 
 gcni, gladly 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class I. 
 
 3ii^ f flc loHiiiitifi^ctt ^iife gem.' 'Lv. Itefcfl ju Diel, bu luirjl Mr bte 
 2lugen sjerberSen. ®a3 9^ferb fri^t §afer unb Jpcu. l!Bir geten 3'^nen 
 bag ®elb nur fitr blefen B^ccf. ©tc meffen baa Juc^ su fnapp. ©ot^e 
 SJingc gefc^c'^en in biefem Sanbe fc|r oft. 3ii^ Bcrgap S^rer, entfcbut* 
 bigen ®ie mtcfe, e« foil nii^t tuieber sorfommen (happen). Su gatfl 
 bent SRabc^en ju »tel fiir i^re SSrBett, fte ^«t bas nicf)t oerbicnt. 3(i) 
 fann ni(^t gc'^cn. ®r trat mic^ auf ben gup. 3Dir fa^en ben ^oifer 
 
 ' See note ' on p. 237. 
 
 ' %^vm is regular in the present: l(^ t^ue, bu t^ujl, n t^ut, Wir t^ucti, &c- 
 
 ' ®ern corresponds to the Ens;lish / Kke, and is generally used in 
 
 connection with a verb ; «. g., I like to eat, \iS^ ep gtm. I like to ride, 
 
 ic^ teite gern. 
 
THE lEEEGOLAE VEBBS: SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 239 
 
 9lfl|)oIconin.,aU witiit faxii waren. Zf^atm ©ic iai ntit lbs 
 flc^t ? iWeln greunt genaS »on feiner ^rant^eit unb tto|nt je^t in 
 Sfrlln. ^akn <Sit je Sluflern gegeffcn ? ®u |afl bafiir ju »iel gcges 
 kn. ©ie |akn mir in sicfcr Slffaire Unrec^t gef^an. ^aien ©ie 
 micb tenn ganj sergeffen ? 
 
 Theme on Class I. 
 
 I am reading Shatspeare's Othello. Seest thou a white 
 cat on that house ? He measures that cloth too short (tna)5)5). 
 "We eat every day at 8, (at) 12, and (at) 6 o'clock. You are 
 forgetting your duties. They do that work well, they 
 deserve to be paid welL The horses ate all the hay and 
 oats. Did you forget to bring me another book? How 
 long is it since your friend recovered from his severe ill- 
 ness ? We have seen a large camel at Bamum's Museum. 
 He has stepped [me] on my foot several times.* We have 
 done it to please you, but we cannot do it again. Have you 
 read Schiller's poems? 
 
 Second Class: Past Participle with O. 
 38. 93te4)en,' to break. 
 
 Phmtoipal { I^fi^'>ii''^3 trei^en, to break 
 
 Paets i ^'^P^^^^' '^ ^"^^^f I ^^0^6 
 ' Past Part., gekod^cn, broken 
 
 Present {Indie.) 
 
 3^ breeze, tu M&^, er 
 
 bridit 
 2Bir brcc^en, i^r brec^et, 
 ©ic brcc^en) f!c brcc^sn 
 
 Imperf. (Indie.) 
 
 \6!i brac^, tu bradjfl, 
 er brad^ 
 
 SBir brad^en, i:^r brad^et 
 (©ie brad^en), fie brad^cn 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 brid^, break (thou) 
 
 brevet, break 
 (you) 
 
 ' Sefe^Ien, emufe^tm, geMteit, fle^Ien, take ie in the second and third 
 person singular, present tense. The others take i only. 
 * For the use of fein with intransitives see p. 395. 
 
24:0 THE lEEBaniiAE VEEBS: SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Thus are conjugated : 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. (Indie.) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 39. befe^Ien/ to command 
 
 befall 
 
 befo^Ien 
 
 (order) 
 
 
 
 40. Bergen," to hide, to conceal 
 
 borg 
 
 gcborgctt 
 
 41. ierjlen, to burst 
 
 barfl 
 
 geborfieit 
 
 42. bref^cn, to thrash 
 
 tmfc^ 
 
 gcirof(^cn 
 
 43. cmpfe^Icn,' to recommend 
 
 cmprW 
 
 cmpfo^Icn 
 
 44. f'erfc^redenjto be frightened crf(^ra!' 
 
 crft^rwdeit 
 
 45. gelten, to be worth (esti- 
 
 flfllt 
 
 gcgoftcn 
 
 mated) 
 
 
 
 46. lelfen, to help 
 
 lolf 
 
 ge'^olfen 
 
 47. nclmcn^ to take 
 
 no^m 
 
 genommen 
 
 48. fc^eltcn, to scold 
 
 fc^alt 
 
 gefd^oltm 
 
 49. fpre(^en, to speak 
 
 fprac^ 
 
 gefproc^en 
 
 50. fled^en, to sting 
 
 fl«* 
 
 gcftoc^en 
 
 51. t|le*ert," to stick 
 
 poP 
 
 gclicrft 
 
 52. (ic^Icn," to steal 
 
 Ml 
 
 gc|lol}Icn 
 
 53. tllertcn, to die 
 
 ftarb 
 
 gcflorbcn 
 
 54. treffcn, to hit, to meet 
 
 trap 
 
 gctrojfen 
 
 55. ttcrtcrtcn, to spoil, to rnin 
 
 sertorb 
 
 Bcrborbctt 
 
 56. wcrbcn, to le-vy, to sue 
 
 warb 
 
 gctoorbcn 
 
 57. tDCrfen, to throw, to cast 
 
 warf 
 
 gcworfctt 
 
 Also : 
 
 
 
 58. getdrcn," to bring forth 
 
 gebar 
 
 gcboreit 
 
 59. t!ommcn,' to come 
 
 lam' 
 
 gefommcn 
 
 ' See note on preceding page. 
 
 ' Sergcn is only used in poetry, in prose its compound berbctgen, to 
 hide, to conceal, is used. 
 
 ' Verbs marked thus f , form their compound tenses with the auxiliary 
 fein/not|a6ett; «. g-, I Tume come, i^ bin selommen. (Comp. Less. XXXVI.) 
 
 * Etf^Ktfm, when an active verb, meaning to frigiiien some one, is 
 regular like fiftretftlt. 
 
 ' Etfi^raf, ttaf, and fant> take a simple consonant in order to give the 
 vowel a long sound. 
 
 « The trarmtime verb ftcd en, to put (comp. tense with l^aben), is regular. 
 
 ^ ^ommen is regular in the present indie. : id) fommc, bu Iamm{!i &c. 
 
 ° 92e^mcn drops the 1^, but doubles the last consonant, in the 3d and 
 3d person present indicative : bu ntmm^, cr nimmt. 
 
THE IBBEOULAB VERBS : SECOND CONJUGATION. 241' 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 iai ©etrettc, the grain tie St^tung, 1 
 
 fcer ©c^iife, the sharpshooter tcr SRcfpcct, ) *^® respect 
 
 ter ©turm, the. storm tai iOJittagkot, ) •,. 
 
 tic ««ot^, the need, difBculty iai SOnttageifen, j ^'^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 Ser SungC/ t^e boy ias St«, the ice 
 
 taa 9JZaI, the mark ougcnMicKi^, immediately 
 
 tier 5Ku3ttto, the mosquito Us, till, until 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class II. 
 
 3(^ befe^le tir ts augcnblicflic^ ju f^un. SJlcin ©o'^n, warum 
 Mrgfl bu tctn ©ejii^t ? 2)a8 ®Ia3 iri^t fc^r tet^t. 2Cir fiinnen i^n 
 S^nen aufa :^erjli^jle cmpfcllcn. ©tc f^eltcn ben armen 3ungen ju 
 oft. S)er Sauer braf(^ bag ©etretbe in jwel Sagen. SCarum 
 er|"i^ro!en ©ic fo ? Jpalf S^nfn jencr 9Kann nid^t au3 S^rer Stotl ? 
 J)ic 5$tinbc |a6en bte ©tobt mtt ©turm genommen. Sr fd^alt ben 
 armen Sungcn, ixi tx »or |t(^ fetbfl leinen Sdefpcct (2lc^tung) me^r 
 latte. (Sin S!«u«Hto (iai^ mic^ in iai Ocflcbt. 2Bann flarten 3^rc 
 ©Item? Sraf^ bu i^n ni(^t ju §aufe? er serfprai^ (promised) 
 mir bap er ni(^t »or 9 U^r gc^en witrbe. Urn »ie siel li^r ifl 3^rc 
 Sonrtne (or Safe) |ier eingetroffcn (arrived)? 3" tBcl(!^em 
 3a:^re ftnb ©ie geBoren ? ^ut menige ©c^ii^en I)a6en bo« ISRal 
 getrojfen. Unfere ^6(^in lat bag gleifcf) weggcworfen (thrown 
 away), eg war cerborfcen. SBann wurbcn bie ©olbaten l^ier anges 
 tporten ? Tiai Slg ifl geiorjlen, ne^men ©ie ftd) in (i6)t. 
 
 Theme on Class II. 
 
 I came to you, and threw myself at your feet (3^ncn ju 
 Sitpcn), but you would not help me. I speak of the good 
 qualities of my dear friend, James. "Why didst thou hide 
 thy face? This glass does not break very easily. Thou 
 helpest too many, thou wilt spoil several of them. You 
 frightened me. You threw the stone too far. Our cook 
 
242 
 
 THE lEBEGULAK VERBS: SECOND CONJUOATION. 
 
 spoiled the dinner. Did you meet (trcjfcn) him at home ? 
 We must all die, sooner (frii^er) or later. I have spoken 
 with him, but he -will not come. Hovr much was your paper 
 money worth in Germany ? Have you taken my new um- 
 brella ? I was born in the year 1845, on the £wenty-eighth 
 of February. 
 
 Thikd Class : Past Participle with a. 
 Obs. II. The verbs belonging to this class are only partly 
 irregular. They change their radical vowel in the 
 imperfect, but take also the endings dfthe regular verb ; 
 e.g., brennen, Imperf. fcranntc (not kannt). In the 
 past participle they take also the same ending as 
 the regular verbs ; e. g., gckattnt (not gebratinen). 
 
 60. Srennen, to bum. 
 
 p ( Infinitive, henncn, to bum 
 
 Pabt^ j ^'""■P^^^' i"^ fcronnte, I burned 
 ( Past Part., geBronnt, burned 
 
 Present {Indie.) 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 3c^ trcnne, tu brcnnfl, 
 
 t(^ Branntc, bu brann* 
 
 brenne, bum 
 
 cr brennt 
 
 tcjl, er 6rannte 
 
 (thou) 
 
 5Dir Brennen, t§r Srennet 
 
 SBir kannten, i^r 
 
 trennct, bum 
 
 (©tcbrennen),ftcbrcn* 
 
 kanntct (©ie irann^ 
 
 (you) 
 
 nen 
 
 ten), fte kannten 
 
 
 Thus are conjugated : 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie. 
 
 ) Past Part. 
 
 61. Tenfen, to think tai^te gebac^t 
 
 62. tcnnen, to know (Fr. con- fanntc QCfonnt 
 
 nattre 
 
 G3. ncnnen, to name nanntc genannt 
 
 64. frcnncn, to mn rnnntc gerantit 
 
 65. fcniien, to send fanbtc* gcfanSt 
 
 ' Also, Imp. fcnbcte; past Part, flcfenbet. f See note ' on p. 240. 
 
THE IKEEGULAB VERBS: SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 243 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 66. tuentcrtjf to turn wantte gewontt 
 Also : 
 
 67. Bringen, to bring hxa6^tt Qehac^t 
 
 68. wlffen, to know (Fr., savair) iuuf tc getcup 
 
 Note. — SSiff en inserts c in the present singular, making it 
 mVi instead of ta'x^x ic^ wcig. bu mei^t, ct wcig. But the plural 
 is formed regularly : ttir wilfen, \\t wiiTet (©ie ttiffen), fte WilTen. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 He UngcCuIt, (the) impatience 
 
 tcr ®^n)ieger»atcr, the father- 
 in-law 
 '"itx j^flulpetj, the lazy fellow 
 (slow-back) 
 
 ber ®^u|, the shoe 
 
 taS Del, the oil 
 
 baS ®ni, the gas 
 
 flc^ erlSItctt, to take cold 
 fi^tDelgen, to keep silence 
 bfS^lb, therefore 
 tnogttd), possible 
 ^a^ig, hastily 
 gewi§, certainly 
 ganj gemi^, surely 
 fc^netl, quick, quickly 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class III. 
 
 3(% fcrenne »or Ungebult. ^ennfl bu jene3 fjraulcin nid^t ? Sr 
 ne'nnt |te nic6t beim rei^tcn SiJamen. SRennen @ic ni^t fo, ©ie »cr= 
 ben f{(^ crfalten. 2Btr Mngcn Slumcn uub griic^tc, 3^r roift bason 
 nic^ts, be«|ol6 fd^weigt j^iH. ®(au6en <Ste, bog ti t^ncn mbgli^ fein 
 wirt, baa 33uc() per (or mit ber) 5^0(1 ju fenbcn ? 3(i) wonbte tnidj 
 an ben ©encral, a6er er tonnte niii^ta t^un. 9lanntcn ®ie i^n cinen 
 gautpelj ? 2Bir mu§ten nt(^t, ba§ |te ongetomnten maren. ©ai^ten 
 ®ie, ba^ id) ju 3Nfti lommcn wiirbe ? ®r ifi ju fc^ncH gerannt, er ijl 
 gan3 er^i^t (all in a heat). §a6en ®ie mir meinen neuen ((^roarjcn 
 
 f SSenkn, to turn, admits of both forms: Invp. i($ ivcnbete> and \i) 
 wanbte; Part, gcwenbet and gewanbt. 
 
244 THE rRBEGtrLAE VBEBS: SECOND CONJUGATIOlf.- 
 
 SRodt gekac^t? 3c^ :^ottc ntc^t getac^t, bag ®ie fo :^afltg f^atiotln 
 tturteit. ^at cr 3^neti meinen SBricf gefanit? Srcnncn ©tc ®aS 
 ober Del? 38ir ^abcn tmmer Del gc6rannt. 
 
 Theme on Class III. 
 
 I know that man, I have known him ab:eady for (feit) sev- 
 eral years. Bringest thou the new coat which the tailor has 
 made for me ? He thinks that I do not know where he is. 
 Do you send to the post-office daily ? We named our baby 
 (fletnea ^inb) Anna Louisa. Did they burn candles, oil, or 
 gas at the castle of the king of Prussia ? They thought that 
 I could not turn it. Have you known my father-in-law, (the) 
 Mr. Davis ? Why have they not sent for a physician, that 
 man wiU surely not live very long. Had you thought how 
 much it would cost to go to Boston by (tttit or niif ber) rail- 
 road? The shoemaker has brought you a new pair of shoes,, 
 they are very handsome. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 bag ^^dptc^gclb, the paper money bas ©tiicf, the piece 
 ber 9JJeud^cIiniJrDer, the assassin ^ baa 9Bac^3, the wax 
 bie TOol^rrufce, the carrot bas Sab, the bath 
 
 ber 'SHaQtn, the stomach bie gernc, the distance 
 
 bie 5)ortion, the portion bie Ireppe, the stairs 
 
 ber Spiegel, the looking-glass bag gickr, the fever 
 iai Simntfr, the room, chamber langfam, slow 
 ' t»i(^tig, important ' leife, slow, soft 
 
 fonft, else, at other times gelb, yellow 
 
 fti^ 3ufammen ne|men, to guard one's self. 
 
 Reading Exercise XXIX. 
 
 ■Ett iffejl ju fc^ncH. Illcfcg 9)ferb frag mc^r ^afer ali §eu. "Cie 
 9»cnfcbcn ejfcn, bie S^lere freffen. Sg gefd)ie^t bir rec^t, bu folltcjl ti 
 nic^t gett)an '^okn. §a6en ®ic bie :^eutigc Scitung gelefcn? SfJein, 
 i^ ^afce fte nic^t finbcn t&nnen; flanb ttroai SBi^tlgeg barin? ©ie 
 
■THE lEREatJLAB VEKBS: SECOND CONJUGATION. 245 
 
 mag bag luc^ ju tmpp; tcir Braudjen noi^ cine uiertel SHc. gr fa'^ 
 mid^ nidjt; id^ scrbarg mii^ |tnter ktc ^ivd)c. Sretcn ©ie ntir ntc^t 
 auf ten gug. 3* uergaf, 3|rer Zantt ju fagen, tap iiiein Srutcruon 
 fciner Rxanti^dt genc[en t|l, uni fi^ i|r empfe^Ien ISp. ©ic mijgen 
 f^un, was ®ic wotten, ®te fijnnen c3 mir nt(^t scrkrgen. S^er (Scnc:; 
 xal ^at Bcfo^len, tag lie 2lrmee sorriicEe (advance). £;a« ei« tfl ge» 
 fcorften. £ie ^B^in trat ouf tag ®Ia3 unt jerBrac^ c« in taufent 
 ©tilde. Die Sauern trefc^cn ta« ©etreitc im SCinter. Du cr|%idji 
 JU leidjt, tu mugt bic^ me^r aufammen ne^men, fonfl !ann id§ tir niii^t 
 lelfen. ®ilt ba« amerifanifdie 53a))iergelt in tiefem Santc ? SKan 
 nimmt c3 ntd)t gern. ©c^ilt fte nii^t; |ie |akn fcas i^rige gct^an. 
 Srafcn ©ie il)n nidjt ju Jpaufe ? ©tjrai^en ©ie fronjofifci^ oter englifc^ 
 mitS^rer greuntin? Unfer Stfd)Ier flarfi })lij|lt^ am getkn giebcr. 
 SRein fc^onftes ^Jfert ifl mir ge^o^Ien worten. Dcr tiei tuarf ten 
 9Rann ju SBoten unt woUte i|n tiicten. ^am t^r Setter gefiern auf 
 tetn 3immer? Die Sic^ter fcrannten Ma jum ^etten SJJorgen. 3c^ 
 bad^tc mir fogleicfe, tag ties nid^t moglii^ fei. 3(| |ate 3^re Sante 
 uiele So^re gefannt, aber i^ |aBe nie gewugt, tag fte eine Deutfd^e tfl. 
 <Sr flanb auf ter Zx(ppe, aU idj mi^ ju i^m wantte. Sienne nicfet fo 
 fc^nett. 
 
 Theme XXIX. 
 
 The horses ate hay, but no bats. This does not happen 
 often. This cloth measures only forty yards. He stepped 
 hurriedly to (an) the window and cast a stone at (nac^) the 
 prince. No one thought that he had done it, for they all ran 
 to the next house to catch the assassin. I forgot to recom- 
 mend to you a visit to the baths, you will there soon recover 
 from your iUness. Do not run on (auf) this ice, it cracked 
 this morning. "When do the peasants thrash their corn ? You 
 frightened me, you must not speak so low. He helped him 
 in his work two days. He thought that you had done 
 nothing. American paper money was not worth anything in 
 Germany, they (mon) took only gold and silver there. He 
 scolded the little children very much. Did you not find 
 the gentleman at home? Who broke (jcrBrai^) this looking- 
 glass ? 
 
246 
 
 THE lEEEGULAB VEBBS : SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 ^ahn ®tc nic^t ju Btel gegcffen ? 
 
 D nein, iai ifl fe|r wentg; ic^ cp 
 gcwb^nlti^ ©uppc, ®cmit|'e unt 
 gteifii. ©ins ®ic gcn)(§, ba^ 
 @ie nid^ts Stnfcercs gegejfcn ^os 
 Ben? 
 
 aRi§t cr iAd 3ett9 (cloth) ntc^t ju 
 
 ©agten @ie 3^rcr Sante, waa bcr 
 gc'^rer meiner Souftne 3^ne« 
 
 ipakn ®te ten ^aufmann, bcm 
 ©ie SBaaren serfaufen wollten, 
 JU ^aufe gctroffcn ? 
 
 SCer :^alf S^nen aua Slider SScr* 
 legen^eit (difficulty, embar- 
 rassment), wcnn i^ fragen 
 fcorf? 
 
 3^ e3 wa'^r, baf ba^ ameritanifii^e 
 5)apiergeic in biefem Sante 
 9fli#3 gilt ? 
 
 SDaS :|a6cn tie ©icBe in 3'§rem 
 
 ^flufe genommen ? 
 3BaS rear bie Urfai^e, baf ®ie 
 
 nic^t frii^er ottfgefianren fmb ? 
 
 3c^ a§ nur cine ^^ortion gteifc^ 
 
 jjiit SKol^rriiten. 5flenncn ®ie 
 
 iai Bid ? 
 D ja, i^ erinnerc mic^ ; ic^ a9 cine 
 
 5)ortion ^a^ttt (pie), tie wiit 
 
 ntir roo|rf(^cinnd) (probably) 
 
 ben SKagcn (stomach) ucrbor* 
 
 6en ^abtn. 
 @ie fragen ncuea §eu unb einc 
 
 ^aO>t Wt^t * (peck) ^afer. 
 ®r migt gereijl^nlid^ fe|r tnapp ; fa« 
 
 gen ©ic i|m, bag cr mir gcnug 
 
 gcBcn foil. 
 D, id^ »ergag e3, i(| will fogleic^ 
 
 nac^ ipoufe gct)en unb fe^en, 06 
 
 i(| fie ftnben fann. 
 9?cin, i(^ trof i'^n nic^t ju ipaufc; 
 
 cr fu^^r in letter SBSoi^e noc^ 
 
 Scipatg jur 9Weffc (fair). 
 Sin olter greunb »on mir, bcr ju* 
 
 fiillig (accidentally) in bcr 
 
 ©tabt rear ; er ^at mir fc^on oft 
 
 a\ii 33crtegen|eiten gc|olfen. 
 ©eit bcm ^riege, gilt ti ijin ni6^t 
 
 mc^r; btc SSc^Ster (broters) 
 
 wollen nur ®olb ober ©iltcr 
 
 ne^mcn. 
 ©ie |a6en cine goltene U^r mci* 
 
 ner grau genommen. 
 3(^ fonnte reegen bcr ^i^e (heat) 
 
 faum f(!^Iafcn, unb reor ju miitc 
 
 frii^er aufjujle^cn. 
 
 * A JBcfec is the sixteenth part of a German bushel (©(i^effel). 
 
THE lEEEGULAE YEItBS : SECOND CONJUGATION. 247 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 2)et menfc^enftcunbU^e 9la(^tloa^ter. 
 
 Sttt ^aS^tm'a&jttr fj'ixtt in ciner fc'^r laltett SBintemai^t, ali bcrfelBf, 
 wie getcB^niic^, feincn Xienfl uermaltcte, (jB^Hc^ au« bcr gernc l^eriikr 
 einen cigenen ^ammni' unc ^lagcton. SOtanc^cr Stnbere ^ottc fid) 
 nidjts wetter tabet getmc^t, otcr ^fitte sielleic^t gar ©efpenjlerfpuf »er=^ 
 ntut^^et; benn ti wax SJtittemoi^t. 
 
 ^Itid^t I'o unfer greunH, ber S^lac^toad^ter. Sr ba^te : ti ifl tcinc« 
 Imteg,' in ber 9lad)t UngliicE ju serpten. ©ic^crlic^ Hegt braugen cin 
 9Senf(i, ber fe^r fc^ncd ber §iilfe beborf. Siiig|l Jego6* er fic^' na(^ 
 §oufc, wcdte feinen ©o^n, unb ging mit biefem in ben na-^eliegcnten 
 ffiatJ. Smmer ft^wiii^er |orten \it iai SCimmcrn un-J ©tii'^nen; |ie 
 fuc^ten unt) fu^tcn, unl fa^en cnblic^ cinen ®reis, ber ft(^ Berirrt" 
 :^aben mugte, unb son ber ^dlte ganj crflarrt worben war. 
 
 „Sa ijt ein otter 3ube !" f^irot^ ber (3o|n, „unb er ift |'d)tBer." 
 
 „®eiienfc iei barm'^crjigcn ©amariter^ !" crwicbcrte ber SSatcr. 
 „i;er 3ube ift cin SKenf^, iuie tuir, unb ifl oft bejfer unb frijmmer, aU 
 ntanc^er S^rifi." 
 
 ©ic (ubcn ten erftarrten ®rcia auf bie ©(^ultern, Brac^tcn i'^n in 
 i|re Jpiitte, rieben* it)n ntit ©i^nce, goBen i^m lauwarmen iE^ee ju 
 trinfen, na^crtcn i'^n aUma^Hg bent geuer, unb fatten bie greubc, ben 
 alien 5Kann in bog Scben jurudjuBringcn. 
 
 "Eiefer er^olte pd) ' fo f(^nct(, ba§ er am anbcrn iDJorgen feine SReife 
 fortfe^en !onnte. Sr war arm, unb lonnte nur mit einem ^iinbebrudc 
 lo^nen. !Dem bro»en Stoc^twdcbter war bieS gcnug. Ueberbtep wurbe 
 i^m noil son ber 3lcgierung cin @efd)cn! liberreic^t. 
 
 Sctcr SKenfc^ fel bcrcit, feinem ^iiid^ften ju |clfcn unb beiguflelcn 
 oug ollen ^rSftcn. ®^cue boc^ Siiiemonb bobci weber Wixii, nod) 
 Dpfcr ; ti wirb i^m bur^ iai cigcne ^crj unb cinfl ira §immcl reiii^ 
 li^ ticrgolten wcrben! 
 
 ' ea ifl beinea Slmte«, SPfltiftt to l)e understood. 
 ' SegaS er fic^, he returned, or he went. 
 " ©id| uerirren, to stray, to go astray. 
 ^ tRititn, imperfect of rciSen. 
 ' ®i^ eriiolen, to recover. 
 
248 
 
 THE lEEEGULAE VERES: THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 Seftion 30» 
 
 Third Conjugation (Imperfect and Past Participle 
 witli i or ie). 
 
 Ob3.— This conjugation which is distinguished by the rad- 
 ical (iphthong ei in the infinitive, is divided 
 into two classes. In the imperfect and past parti- 
 ciple, verbs of the first class change the diphthong 
 eito short I, while those of -the second class lengthen 
 the i by inserting mute c after it. 
 
 FiBST Glass : Imperfect and Past Participle with i. 
 70. aSei^en, to bite. 
 Pbincipal ( Infinitive, Bcif en, to bite 
 Pakts i I^P^^^'^' i^H^,Ibit 
 
 ( Past Part., flcHffen, bitten 
 
 Present [Indie.) 
 
 Imperfect {Indie.) 
 
 Imperative, 
 
 3(^ Bcipe, btt Bcigefi, 
 
 er Belpt, 
 SBir ki^en, i|r beifct 
 
 (©icBctpett),|lcM5en 
 
 3d^ Mp, btt im, er 
 
 SBtr Btjfen, i|r Biffct 
 (©iefciffm), rtcMffm 
 
 fcetpe, bite (thou) 
 
 ietgeit or Bet^cn 
 @ie, bite (you) 
 
 Thus are conjugated ; 
 
 Infinitive, 
 
 Imperf. (Indie.) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 71. BefTetpen (fi(i§),' to apply Beflip 
 
 one's self 
 
 72. f Bleii^cn,' to fade BIi(^ 
 
 Befliffen 
 gcBIi(^en 
 
 ' ©ic^ iefleiBcni is a reflexive verb, and the student will do well to con- 
 sult Less. XXXVII., Obs. I., before he undertakes to conjugate it. 
 Sid) btflciftigcn is regular. 
 
 ' Verbs marked with f , are neuter. See foot-note ' on p. 330 ; also 
 Less. XXXVI., Obs. I. 
 
 ' Slci^en, to bleach, is a regular verb. 
 
THE IKEEGULAB VERBS : THIKD CONJDGATION. 
 
 249 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) Past Part. 
 
 73. gleic^en, to resemble (gov- glii^ 
 
 erns the dative) 
 
 74. fgleitcn/ to glide, slide 
 
 75. greifen," to seize, grasp 
 
 (gripe) 
 
 fneifen,' to pinch 
 
 Itcifi^cn,' to cry, scream 
 
 rciscn, to suffer 
 
 pfeifen, to vrhistle 
 
 rcipen, to tear 
 
 rcitcn/ to ride (on horse- 
 back) 
 82. ffc^lcic^cn, to sneak or 
 steal into 
 
 I'^tcifen/ to grind, 
 (sharpen) 
 
 fc^tctpen, to sUt 
 
 fcfemci^Ett, to throw 
 
 fc^neitcit, to cut 
 
 f^reitcn, to stride (step) 
 
 fplcigcn, to split 
 
 ^eid)cn,' to stroke (rub) 
 
 90. fkeiten, to dispute (quar- 
 
 rel, fight) 
 
 91. weii^cn,' to yield tt)tc^ 
 
 76. 
 77. 
 78. 
 79. 
 80. 
 81. 
 
 83. 
 
 84, 
 85, 
 86. 
 87. 
 88. 
 89. 
 
 gegli^en 
 
 glittip 
 
 geglittcn 
 
 griffll 
 
 gcgriffeu 
 
 Ittijfll 
 
 gctntffett 
 
 trifd) 
 
 gefrifi^eit 
 
 littll 
 
 gelittcit 
 
 ffiffll 
 
 gepfiffcn 
 
 rif 
 
 gcriji'cn 
 
 rittll 
 
 gcritten 
 
 |C^Ii(^ 
 
 gefi^Itd^en 
 
 Wiffll 
 
 gefi^liifen 
 
 Wi^ 
 
 gefc^Iiffen 
 
 fc^mif 
 
 geff^mificn 
 
 f*nitt|| 
 
 gefi^nitten 
 
 fi^rittll 
 
 gcf^rittcn 
 
 \m 
 
 gefpliffcn 
 
 ^i&i 
 
 gejlrii^ett 
 
 (Irittll 
 
 gefirttten 
 
 getvid^en 
 
 ' See note " on preceding page. 
 
 ' The final consonant of the root of verbs marked with an |, is 
 doiMed. 
 
 ' ®rEtfcn and flretc^Ctt omit e in the ending of the second person singu- 
 lar of the present : bu greiffl, bu |lrei(i^|l. 
 
 * @net)icni to pinch, is generally a regular verb. 
 ^ fiteif(^cn is seldom used, it is nearly obsolete. 
 
 * ©(^tcifen, to demolish (drag along), is a regular verb. 
 ' fBtiH^en, to soah, is a regular verb. 
 
 " SReiltn, in compound tenses, uses tjaSen or fein (see p. 491). 
 
250 THE lEEEGDLAB VEBBS: THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 bic %axbt, tho color bcr ^Jolijeiticner, ) the police- 
 
 baa SBunber, the wonder bcr Sonftafcler, ) man 
 
 ber ©ommer, the summer fic^ in 3l(i^t ne'^mcn, to take care 
 
 blc gde, the corner r fc^Ileglic^, finally 
 
 bag ©cwiffcn, the conscience /teflcn, to bark 
 bie Uekrmac^t, superior power flcrben, to die 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class I. 
 
 ^^ Bcflip mtd^ fwnsiJPff^ 3" lemcn. Sleie^t btefe %axbt ntc^t ? Du 
 wirfl i|n ni^t greifcn fijnncn. 3ene« SJiabd^cn glic| i:§rem SSatcr 
 mc:^r ate i^rer 9«uttcr. Snc^mcn ©ie fi(^ in 3lcf)t, ba^ ©ie nic^t 
 auSgleitcn (slip). "Der Sonflabler (^Jolijcibicncr) grijf ben Dieb 
 tcim ^ragcrt. ©te fnijf mi(^, Ui ic^ ea nid^t mc^r au«:^aiten (stand 
 or bear) tonntc. £)tc armcn ©olbaten |aben »tcl gcltttcn, eg i(l ein 
 aBunbcr baf nid^t me|r gefiorben |tnb. 2lIIe ^unbe tocldjc bclten, bci^en 
 ni(^t. ©cit wann tcibcn ©ic an biefcm Ucbel? SJcr SBStnb }>fiff bur(| 
 bie Sfiume, ali ob'er atles jcrflBren wotttc. 95fetfc nic^t ! ®r rt^ mir 
 ben Srief aug ber ^anb unb lag i^n. SBir rciten unfcrc f ferbc Je^t 
 nur cinmal reiJi^entltc^ (weekly) ; im ©ommer rittcn n>tr fie jeben 
 Sag. Xu fi^Ii^efl urn bie &dt 0.U ob tu ein i^U&tii ©cwiffen pt* 
 tejl. §a6en ©ie mein SJleflter no^ nic^t gefc^Itffen ? ©cfcmcige bas 
 fJapier jum gender ^inaus. SWcinc Heine ©d^roej^er Ijat ftd^ in ben 
 ginger gcfc^nitten. Unferc ©olbaten Written njie ^elcen, aber pe mug* 
 ten fi^Iieglii^ boc^ ber Ueberma(^t beg geinbea weid^en. 
 
 Theme on Class I. 
 
 Tour dog has bitten my little boy several times. Have 
 you applied yourself (|i^) to learn Itahan ? Tou resemble 
 the daughter of my brother. He pinched me. We suf-^ 
 fered very much during the late war. Our soldiers fought 
 like heroes, but they had to yield to the enemy. I have 
 cut my foot; ride at once after the Doctor. I could not 
 study, John whistled nearly all [the] day. How many 
 times did you cut the wood ? The last storm has torn many 
 
THE IBKEGULAR VEBBS: THIBD CONJUGATION. 
 
 251 
 
 limbs from the trees. The thief stole (supply himself) into 
 the house, and threw the books out of the window. If he 
 had not held me, I should have shpped (au^glettcn). 
 
 Skconb Class: Imperfect and Past Participle with te. 
 92. ^leiben, to stay, to remain. 
 
 Principal ( I^fi™^''-''^^ fHcifeen, to stay, to remain 
 Pakts j I'^P^fi'^*'' i"^ *'***/ 1 stayed 
 ' Past Part., geMicbcti, stayed 
 
 Present (Indie.) 
 
 ^6) blette bu mi% 
 
 ' er Melbt 
 
 mt Hciben, i^r bleibt 
 
 (®ie Heiben), fte bleis; 
 
 ben 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 3* mti, ku bliebjl, 
 
 cr blieb 
 mx blieben, t^r bliebet 
 
 (@ie bliebcn), fJc blie. 
 
 ben 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 bleibe, stay (thou) 
 
 bteibet or bleiben 
 ®le, stay (you) 
 
 Thus are conjugated ; 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. (Indie.) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 93. fgeKci^en/ to thrive gebie'^ gebie^cn 
 
 94. lei^en, to lend lic| gcUc|en 
 
 95. meiten, to avoid (shun) mitt gcmieten 
 
 96. (jreifcn, to praise (extol) pxiei gcprtefcn 
 
 97. rciben, to rub ricb gerteben 
 ■98. fc^eieen, to separate (part) fc^ieb gcfc^iebcn 
 
 99. fd^cincn, to shine, appear fcfeicn gef^iencn 
 
 (seem) 
 
 100. fd^rciben, to write fi^rtcb gefc^ricbcn 
 
 ' Verbs marked with f are neuter. See foot-note ' on page 230, also 
 Less. XXXVI., Obs. I. 
 
252 
 
 THE lEKEGDIiAR VEBBS: THIKD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 Past PaH. 
 
 101. ft^rcien,' to cry (scream] 
 
 fi^ric 
 
 gcfd^ricn 
 
 102. fc^mctjen, to be silent 
 
 fdsreieg 
 
 gefc^roiegcn 
 
 103. I'peten, to spit 
 
 ffie 
 
 gefpicn 
 
 104. *iletgen,'' to ascend, to 
 
 jlieg 
 
 gefliegen 
 
 mount 
 
 
 
 105. Ircifeen, to drive 
 
 trieb 
 
 getricbcn 
 
 lOG. iBCifen, to show 
 
 totes 
 
 gewiefen 
 
 107. jct^cn, to accuse 
 
 m 
 
 g«3te|ctt 
 
 108. teigen; to be called, to bid t)iep 
 
 gei^eigcn 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 iie SeCingung, the condition 
 
 japn, to pay 
 
 
 lie ©efeUf^aft, the company, 
 
 juriicf, back 
 
 
 association 
 
 iingern, unwilUngly 
 
 tier SSertcantte, the relative 
 
 ouf erorbenttic^, exceedingly. 
 
 bie SRorgcnluf t, the morning air 
 
 red)t, right 
 
 
 tie SBaffc, the weapon (arms) 
 
 fpat, late 
 
 
 ber 33erg, the mountain 
 
 lua^nftnntg, crazy 
 
 ba« SSene^mcn, the behavior 
 
 ol3 oj, as if 
 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class II. 
 
 SSir HteBcn nic^t langc in Sojlon, akr ti geftel uns au^erorbcnttic^. 
 ®ebcit)t ber Sokd in tiefem Sante? 3c^ Ue^ i^nt einen Z%a\n unter 
 ber- Sebingung ifen mir ^eute juriicfjujal^Ien. SJleite bie ©efetlfc^aft 
 jener ^JJiib^en, fie tt)i|Jen nic^t roai gutea Senel^men ift. ©ie riebcn 
 bie Jpaut bes ?!Jlonne3, abcr ti war ju fpat, er war tobt. 2Bir fd^ieben 
 ungern eon oUen unfercn ?$reunben unb Serwanbten. ^afl bu |'d)on 
 no(^ Sijln gefc^rieben ? (Sr fc^reit, oI« ob cr t»a|nrinnig ware. 3c& 
 
 ' ^rctfl^enr sometimes used in place of fc^reieni is mentioned under 
 No. 77. 
 
 ' See foot-note* on page 330. 
 
 " To this class belongs also the verb l^etgcnf which retains its radical 
 diphthong ci in the past participle. 
 
THE IKKEQULAE VERBS: THIRD CONJUGATION. 253 
 
 fc^wicg (lid, unb lieg «)n retcn. Saijet mi auf« '£^ad) (leigcn, mi Me 
 frif^c ^Korgenluft geniepen. 1;ie 9)reupett tric6en Die Dfftrcidjer wv 
 fi(^ ^er (before them), ali 06 fie feine SBaffen fatten. Tlan teiei 
 S^nen nii^t Icn rec^ten Drt. ^etpen ©ie nid^t ^err SD^iiller ? 
 
 Theme on Class II. 
 
 We remained two hours in the city. Did the potatoes 
 thrive in Germany (in) this year ? He has lent me five silber- 
 groschen.i How much are five silbergroschen ? One sixth 
 of a Prussian dollar. I shun his company. Praise the Lord, 
 thy God ! He is separated from his wife, he has a very bad 
 reputation. It seemed to me she was called Mary. I am 
 writing a letter to my father, just now. The child has 
 cried nearly all night. Why did you keep silence? Your 
 little brother is crying ; he is a very naughty (unartig) boy. 
 The travelers ascended (upon) the mountain. That man is 
 crazy, what shall I do to (mlt) him ? Call the policeman. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ' Me Slu^fti^t, the view (pro- vfti^ ergij^cn, to delight in (enjoy) 
 
 speet) Bcmcrfen, to notice 
 
 ber Umgang, the association Bortrefflii^, excellent 
 
 ber SligliraM, the Ughtning ■ ■ anjlantig, decent, becoming 
 
 bie ©ratfc^rift, the epitaph folgcnb, following 
 
 bie ®renje, the border ' unge^euer, enormous 
 
 baS (Scepter, the scepter icfannt, acquainted 
 
 bie T)ro|ung, the threatening oBglei^, although 
 
 ber 2Ingriff, the attack eingefc^t, installed 
 
 bie ®cgcn»art, the presence bie iBitte, the request 
 
 ber Jperjog, the duke bie SDeltbii^nc, the stage of the 
 
 ber 9Ba(^tcr, the watchman world 
 
 bie ®iitc, the kindness ber SlugcnHid, the moment 
 
 ' A Prussian Thaler (73 American cents) has 30 Silbergroschen. 
 
254 THE lEBBGULAK VERBS: THIED CONJUGATION. 
 
 Reading Exercise XXX. 
 
 Dicfe Sinter glcidsen i^rcn Sttern nld^t. Eie giirficn '^okn nte ken 
 Srieg gcmicben. SBir Hie6ctt cine sofle ©tunte anf tiefer San! fi^en 
 unb crgij^ten uns an ter ^errlii^en atus^t. Urn neun U^r luurben win 
 wm geinte angegriffen (attacked), unC o6glei^ toir i^n ju meiJen 
 gefu^t fatten, ntu^tcn wtr fccfeten. 3n bent Slugenblicte, wo 3l«guftu« 
 »on ber aBett6u:^ne fc^icb, ge^ijrte ber grii^te £^ei( ber 6efannten Srte 
 ben aibmem. Der ®raf ggmont et|d)ien (appeared) »or bent Sri* 
 bunal, tod&iti ber iperjog son 3lI6a eingefe^t |atte. 3Dtr lefen je^t 
 bie ©ef^ic^te beS brei^igja|rigen Sricgeg, Joelc^e ©(filler gefc^rieten 
 ^at, Sunge SJlanner ntiiffcn fc^weigen in ©egenmart olterer |5erfo* 
 nen. 3d3 Hn fcinen Sitten ge»i(^en, unb nic^t feinen ©ro'^ttngcn. 
 "Lai SCa|[er ifl feit geflern gc(liegen unb a fieigt immer noi^. 3lm 
 fttnf3e:^ntcn 3uni 1815, turj na^ feiner fRMti^v son Stfca, ftbetf(iritt 
 (crossed) SRa))oIeon bie franjBfifc^e ©rcnje mit 170,000 SHann. 
 !Die Defhreii^er unb 3tattener l^okn wd'^renb bea le^tcn italienifd)en 
 SricgeS unge'^euer gelltten. gronflin trurbe folgenbc ®rat|%ift 
 gegcien: Sr cntri^ ben Sli^fira^I bem Jpimntel unb Ui Scepter ben 
 Si^rannen. 
 
 Theme XXX. 
 
 The young men took up arms (ju ben SBaffen gteifett). Do 
 (you) what I have told you, write your letter, and do not 
 contradict me again (nod^ einmal). He shall leave (»erIo|V 
 jen) the room, if he cannot keep silence. Our soldiers did 
 not yield to the attacks of the enemy, although the latter 
 was more numerous. See, how the river has risen. Al- 
 though I kept silence, jl idid neverthelessa noticei how she 
 turned (became) pia.le, when (al3) you spoke to (mit) her. 
 Why did he not remain longer with you? Frederick the 
 Gb-eat wrote excellent memoirs (SRemoiren) of the wars which 
 he fought (fii^ren). These great black eagles, says Lamartine, 
 in his Travels to the Orient (Drtent, masc), seem to be*the 
 watchmen of [the] unfortunate Tyre (J^ruS, m.), and to fulfill 
 (crfiillen) the prophecies (f)ro))t)e3etl)ung, f.). I yielded to his en- 
 
 » See § 81, p. 437. ' 
 
THE IREEGULAE VERBS: THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 255 
 
 treaties, but I would uever have yielded to Ms threatenings. 
 The French army suffered so much (fe^r) during the war 
 with Russia, that it was nearly annihilated (aufgerieBen). 
 Shun the society of bad men, seek the friendship of good 
 men. The Merovingian (^Rerooingtfi^Cit) kings subjected 
 (u«tcrmertcn) Gaul (©allien), nearly as far as {Ui ju) the 
 Pyrenees, but most of the Pranks remained (on) this side 
 of the Loire. 
 
 Conversation 
 
 SBarum (inb <Sit feincn !Dro^un« 
 
 gen geroic^en ? 
 SBer l)at i^ncn gef(^rie6cn, la^ 
 
 mime. 9iid;ie Ber^etrat^t ifl ? 
 
 SBie torn ti, tap unfere ©oltatcn, 
 bic immer »ie JpclDen flritten, 
 kcm Seinle ge»i(^en finb ? 
 
 ©inS ©ie nii^t ju f^nell gerlt* 
 ten? 
 
 IBarum ^a\t tu ben Umgang jcner 
 Wdnntv nid)t gemieben ? 
 
 SBo feib i^r fo longe gcHieben? ic^ 
 tvaitete eine ganje @tunbe 
 in bem ^affec^aufc (coffee- 
 house). 
 
 Ginb ®ie nt^t §err Wlaniii, 
 
 wenn ic^ fragen barf? 
 ^ot S^ncn 9itcmanb biefe ©umme 
 
 (sum) Ict^cn lijnnen ? 
 
 SBarum griffen ^'i/n SanbSfeute 
 tti^t frii'^cr ju ben SCaffcn ? 
 
 3(| bin ni(^t feinen £)ro|«ngett, 
 fonbern feinen SSitten gcroidjen. 
 
 SOteln Dnfel fi^cint ei i'^ncn in 
 feinem te^ten Sriefe gefi^riebcn 
 ju '^oten. 
 
 Unfcve ©olbaten flrtttcn ouc^ bieSs 
 ntal »ie §elDen, oter ble Ueber* 
 ma^t wax fo grog, bag [it wets 
 &itn mugten. 
 
 aWetn Sbi^teri^en ifl ^jlii^Uc^ er* 
 franft (taken sick), «nb i^ 
 ittugte nac^ itm Slrjt rciten. 
 
 3(^ glaubte,ba§ fie gute,on|lanbigc 
 2eute wiircn. 
 
 2Str iourben auf bem ©teueramte 
 (custom-house) . aufgcbalten 
 (detained) unb mugtcn ju 
 f5ttg ge^en, ba wir feinc Srof^lc 
 (carriage) finben tonntcn. 
 
 Stein, meln §err, ic^ :^cipe ©otttieb 
 aDi(|cIm SeHer. 
 
 3c^ ^abe me'^rere Sefannte (ac- 
 quaintances), bie mir biefe 
 ©umme gern gelie'^en Ptten, 
 tucnn f{c |ic gc'^abt fatten. 
 
 ®te ^ojften, bag fie mit ®iite am 
 be^en forttommcn wiirben. 
 
2o6 THE IBEEGULAB VEKBS: THIBD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 XaS fBattthni. 
 
 SBo ktr, SWeitfc^ ! ©ottes (Sonne jucrfl f^ien, t»o fcir tie ©teme 
 iei ^immdi juerfl leuc^teten, »o feine Sli^c bir juerfl bie SlUmadjt' 
 offenfcarten unt feine ©turmwinbe bir ntit |eiligen <B6^xtdtn burd) ble 
 ©eele braufeten: ta i|l beine Siebe, boi^ bein Saterlonb. 
 
 aSo MS crfle 9Jlenf(^enauge fid^ licbenb iiber beine ffliegc neigtc, wo 
 beine TlMtx bic^ guerjt mit greuben auf bent ©^ooge trug, unb bein 
 Sflter bir bie Sc^ren bcr SBci^^cit ing ^erj f^tie6 : ia iji beine Siebe, 
 ta ijl bein Saterlanb. 
 
 Unb feien ti fa|Ie gelfen unb bbe 3nfeln, unb »ot)nc Slrmut^ unb 
 i»iu^e bort mit bir : bie Siebe fiir baa Saterlanb mirb bir croig filets 
 Ben ; benn bu bifl ein SOJenfe^, unb foll|l ti nii^t sergeffen, fonbem' 
 bc^alten in beinem iperjen. 
 
 3lu(^° ijl bie grei^^eit tein leerer Zvaum' unb lein wiifier 3Ba^n,° 
 fonbcra in i^r lebt bein 3Jiut| unb bein ©tolj unb bie ©ewi^eit, ba§ 
 bu wm §immel fiammfl. 
 
 Za ijl grei|eit, wo bu in ©itten unb SScifen unb ©efc^en beiner 
 35otcr (eben barffl; »o bic^ beglitcfet, toai fi^on beincn UrSItertiater 
 begliicfte 5 wo teine frcmben Unterbriicfer iiber bi(| gefitcten, unb leine 
 fremben Sreiber bic^ ttciien, wie man Sie:^ mit bem ©tcden trcifit. 
 
 "Diefei^ SSaterlanb unb biefe grci:^eit ftnb ein @c^a^, ber eine unent^ 
 bel^rlli^e Siebe unb SEreue in ftc^ bcrfd^licp, bag ebelfle ®ut, was, 
 ouger ber SReligion, in bcr no(^ eine '^Bl^erc grei^eit ifi, ein guter 
 fUlenfc^ auf grben beft^t unb ju bcpgen bcgel^rt. 
 
 e. 3R.-Slrnbt. 
 
 ' Slllmac^t refers here to ®ott already mentioned as the author of the 
 SonnCr and again referred to as the author of the SBli^i — fetnc SlilJe. 
 (Comp. also Lesson XXIII., Obs. VI). 
 
 ' Translate aui^ — f"H — unb — fcini neither — nor, and supply the inde- 
 finite article before Ueret Zxanm, and afifler SEBaJn respectively. 
 
 • Sontiern (but) is iised (not oBet) when a decided contradiction of a 
 itatement, denied in the antecedent clause, is to be made by substituting 
 an idea more correct or acceptable (see p. 333, 3). 
 
 * 3n flt6 Oerf^Uegeni to contain. 
 
THE lEBEGULAR YEEBS : FOCETH CONJUGATION. 
 
 257 
 
 LESSON XXXI. Seftion 31. 
 
 Fourth Conjugation (Imperfect and Past Participle with o). 
 
 Obs. — This conjugation, both in the imperfect and past par- 
 ticiple, has O as the characterizing vowel. It is di- 
 vided into three classes, the first of which has C for 
 the radical vowel, the second it {or i), and the 
 third the modified vowels a, &, U, or the diphthong 
 an. 
 
 FmsT Class : Radical Towel e. 
 109. lESe&en, to weave 
 
 Peincipai, 
 Paets 
 
 ' Infinitive, reekn, to weave 
 Imperfect, i(^ toob, I weaved 
 ' Past Part., gewo^ett, woven 
 
 Present (Indie.) 
 
 Imperfect (Indie.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Sc^ t»eftc, tu Wcfcfi, 
 
 cr tctU, 
 SBir wtbtn, i^r webet 
 
 (<Bit Wiim), fie t»ekn 
 
 3(^ woi,' ttt tDobfl, 
 
 cr wob, 
 SBir iDoBen,, i^r toolit 
 
 (®ien)o6en),riett)o6cn 
 
 mlt, weave 
 
 (thou) 
 tt)c6etorn)e6cn<Sie, 
 
 weave (you) 
 
 Thus are conjugated : 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. (Indie.) Past Part, 
 
 110. kficmmen, to press, to (kflomm) or JeHommctt 
 
 distress (usually regular) icfkmmtc 
 
 111. fcewegen," to induce tcwog Bettogcn 
 
 ' SBeBcn is also regular. 
 
 ' SSemegen is a regular verb when it simply expresses to move, to put 
 in motion, or to cause an emotion. 
 
253 
 
 THE lEEEaULAE YEKBS : FOUETH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 112. fed^ten,' to fight, to fence 
 
 113. fled^ten/.to twist 
 
 114. ^ekn, to lift, to raise 
 
 115. meHen, to milk 
 
 116. pflegen," to treat (cherish) 
 
 117. quellcn,' to spring or 
 
 gush forth 
 
 118. fi^cercn, to shear 
 
 119. fc^melgen,' to melt, to 
 
 smelt 
 
 120. fc^trjeBcn,' to swell 
 
 fo# 
 
 gefoc^ten 
 
 floi^t 
 
 gefloc^ten 
 
 ^o6 
 
 gel^oBcn 
 
 molt 
 
 gemolfen 
 
 Cflog 
 
 gepflogen 
 
 quoit 
 
 gequoHen 
 
 fd)Or 
 
 gefc^orctt 
 
 f^ntola 
 
 gefi^moljen 
 
 ^i^wvU 
 
 To this class belongs also : 
 121. erfc^aUen,* to resound erfc^otl 
 
 gefd^wottcn 
 
 erfc^oUen 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 tie ^utfi^c, the carriage 
 tcr ^orb, the basket 
 ker 3:e))|)i(^, the carpet 
 t)tc ^eimot^, (the) home 
 tic SSfc^c, the ashes 
 tie SKaffc, the mass 
 taS Eto^r, the cane 
 
 fiettern, to cUmb 
 
 fccr ©alpeterflein, the saltpeter- 
 stone 
 
 iai Sett, the fat 
 
 ter ©trom, the stream 
 
 ge»ot)nlic^, generally 
 ^ glii^ent), burning 
 'bttrcfefi(^tig, transparent 
 
 ' Sei^ten and flec^ten insert e between the radical syllable and the 
 ending, in the second and third person singular of the present ; e. g., bu 
 fedjtefl, er fe(|tct. 
 
 2 3)f[cgeil, to nurse, and also in the sense of gttB»:^nt feiit, to he OfCcua- 
 tomed, is regvlwr. 
 
 ' The three verbs queMeit, flftmeljetl, and ftgtoeUen change their rad- 
 ical vowel e to i in the second and third person singular of the present 
 (indicative) ; e. g., bu fd^willfi, ct f{^miljt. 
 
 * The simple verb fd^oUen, to sound, is regular. 
 
THE IKKEGCLAIi VEBB8 : FOURTH CONJUGATION. 259 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class I. 
 
 £te grauen, fie fle(^ten unli wcBen. 2Ba« ktuog ©te na&i Slmerita 
 ju fommen ? 2Cer t)at ia^ Sto^r in kicfcm ©tu^Ie geflo(^ten ? ipekn 
 ©ie mid^ auf ben S3oum, i* fann nicfet Hettent. SBann raelten ©ie 
 tie Jtii'^e? 2Bir f^ahn Ui je^t geiBo|nIic^ urn fe(^s U|r gentoHen. 
 g)flegt er iti 3lbent>3 ju Jpaufe 3U fcin ? !Da3 SBaffer quoU ous tern 
 Serge »te ein ©trom. 2Ber ^ot 3i^r .§oar gefdjoren ? ©c^eeren ©ie 
 mir COS §aar liirjer, ala tas le^te 9JloL £)os 2Baffer f^tuoB, unt man 
 fiirc^tcte, eS toixxU tai Sonb iiberfc^wcmmen (overflow). 'Ltx ©djnee 
 fc^milshauf ben 2llpen ntc^t »or bent SJlonat Sunt. 3|l bas Sett »or 
 lent genjtcr ge)'d}mol3en ? S^ie 9lt:^ener fo^ten wie ^clten in bcr 
 ©d)Iod)t Ui 'maxafijon im Sa^re 490 m S^rifli ©eBurt. Sie ©aU 
 pfterfieine tuaren son ber Jpi^e beS ?5euer3 gefd^motsen unt fatten fids 
 mit ber 3li'(^c unb bent gliilenben ©onbe Bcrmif(^t. 2ll5 bic glii'^cnbe 
 9)Jaffc fait gehjorben mar, lag auf bent Soben einc |elte, burc^ftd^tige 
 SJlaJTe; baS toar iai ®ta«. ©0 icurbcn bie ^^^oniatcr bie Srfinber 
 (inventor) biefeS ttJerf^soHen (valuable) ©egenjlonbe^, ber unS bie 
 grbpten ^Dienjle leiflet (to render). !Dicfcr Moxi ijl son bent neucn 
 ^orbmoc^cr (basket-maker) geflo^ten iuorben. Scncr 9)'lenfd§ fc^hiiirt 
 unt liigt (lies), nteibe fetnen Umgang (conapany or association). 
 
 Theme on Class I. 
 
 "What induced you to leave your home, and come to this 
 country? Our neighbor, the old woman, has woven two 
 carpets in three months. The Prussian soldiers fought hke 
 heroes in the last war against the Austrians. This basket 
 was not twisted very well. They lifted him from (aus) the 
 carriage, and carried him into the house. Have you milked 
 the cows? it is getting (or becoming) late. The water 
 gushed forth in streams. When will your sheep be shorn ? 
 We sheared ours a week ago (»or) already. The snow 
 melted in our place in the beginning [of] March. The river 
 is swelling. A voice resounded from the depth of the grave, 
 which frightened us. 
 
260 
 
 THE IB3EGULAB VKEU3S : FOUETH CONJUGATIOH. 
 
 Second Class : Radical Vowel ic {or i). 
 
 122. @ie^etl, to pour. 
 
 Infinitive, gic^ett, to pour 
 Imperfect, \&i gof , I poured 
 Past Part., oegojfen, poured 
 
 Principal 
 Paets: 
 
 Present {Indie.) 
 
 Imperfect {Indie.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 3(^ gic^c, bu gic^eil, 
 
 er gicgt 
 2Cir gicfen, i|r giegct 
 
 (©ie gie^en), fte gie* 
 
 fen 
 
 3(^ flOg, tu goffcfl, 
 
 crgo^ 
 2Btr goffcn, i|r gop 
 
 (©icgoffen), jie gcf* 
 
 fen 
 
 gicf c, flow (thou) 
 
 gtefct or gicfcit 
 ©ie, flow (you) 
 
 Thus are conjugated : 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 123. Sicgeit," to bend 
 
 tog 
 
 getogcn 
 
 124 fcieten {or gcbietcn), to of- 
 
 tot (geBot) 
 
 geBotcn 
 
 fer (bid) 
 
 
 
 125. =flicgen,' to fly 
 
 flog 
 
 gcflogen 
 
 126. tfliclen,' to flee 
 
 m 
 
 geflo^en 
 
 127. flicpen, to pour 
 
 M 
 
 gcfloffcn 
 
 128. friercn,' to freeze 
 
 fror 
 
 gcfroren 
 
 129. geniepen, to enjoy (eat) 
 
 genof 
 
 genoffcn 
 
 130. Kiekn, to cleave 
 
 Uob 
 
 geflokn 
 
 131. " !riec^en/ to creep (crawl) froc^ 
 
 gefrO(^en 
 
 132. riedjen," to smeU 
 
 roc^ 
 
 gcroc^crt 
 
 133. I'^ieten,' to push (shove) 
 
 fc^ob 
 
 gefi^okn 
 
 ' IBiegen, fliegen, flie^en, fricren, triec^en, ried^en, f(|tefien, roiegeit^ also, glim- 
 men, tlimmen, and serroirren, omit e in the ending of the second person 
 singular of the present; e. g., bu Megfl, bu vermirrj!, &c. 
 
 ' Verbs marked with a f are neuter (see Lesson XXXVL). 
 
 ' Sliegen, friec^enr and {iel^en take l^abcn or fein (see p. 29S). 
 
THE IBEEGULAB \ EEBB I rODEJ^H CONJUGATION. 
 
 261 
 
 Infinitive. . 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 134 fdjicpcn, to shoot 
 
 \&iO^ gefi^oiTett 
 
 135. fd)ItCBCrt, to shut (lock) 
 
 |"(^lop gcf^loiJen 
 
 136. ficDen, to boil (seethe) 
 
 fott ' gefottert 
 
 137. tl'prie^cn/ to sprout (ger- 
 
 frrog gefproflcn 
 
 minate) 
 
 
 138. t|lie6en, to fly off (sparks) floB gefloBcn 
 
 139. tricfen, to drop (drip) 
 
 trojf' getroffcrt 
 
 140. DerHeten, to forbid 
 
 ijertot »cr6oten 
 
 141. serbricpen, to vex (grieve) BcrJrojj »erI)roj|cn 
 
 142. Bcvlieren, to lose 
 
 uerlor »erIoren 
 
 143. irtcgen,' to weigh 
 
 iBOg gewogcrt 
 
 144. jic^en, to draw (pull) 
 
 jog sqogen . 
 
 To this class belong also the following : 
 
 145. glimmen,' to glimmer 
 
 glomtn gcgtommctt 
 
 146. Iltmmcn,* to climb 
 
 flomm gcHommen 
 
 147. Bermirren,' to entangle. 
 
 serwirrte »erworren 
 
 to confuse 
 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 tie ©attung, the kind, quality 
 
 Jas 9)ul»er, the powder 
 
 tie ©peife, the food 
 
 tai 3c«0f tbe cloth 
 
 tas ®eroid)t, the weight 
 
 nuf^eten, to lift up, give up 
 
 ter Saten, the store 
 
 auffi^iekn, to postpone 
 
 tie I^eilung, the division 
 
 Deriieten, to forbid 
 
 tcr Srokrer, the conqueror 
 
 flicgen, to fly 
 
 tic Srbfnung, the opening 
 
 friei^cn, to creep 
 
 taS "^xmrntx, the room 
 
 ^eng, severe 
 
 ' The letter b of the verb fiebcn is in the imperfect and past participle 
 hardened to t; the letter f of tricfen is doiCbled in the same tenses. 
 ' See Note ' on preceding page. 
 ' The active verb Wiegen, to rock, is regular. 
 * See Note ' on precedingr page. 
 
262 THE lEBEGULAB VEBBS: FOUBTH CONJUGAHON. 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class II. 
 
 "Ctefcr SBtntcr ifl fo jlreng, kag iai aBajfcr Im Simmer ^icrt. ®ic 
 bieten ju siel fiir tlefca 3cug, ti Ifl cine fdslci^tc ©attung. Der iBta^. 
 Hegt fidfe, unt Bri(i^t nic^t lei^t. ®ie ^jpnijicr (Phcenicians) foc^ten 
 unc genoflten i|re ©pcifen oft im greien (in the open air), ©ie fc^ie* 
 Jen ntd)t io(^ genug. Sin Sliter ijl foe6en auf bas Ua^ jcneg JpaufeS 
 geflogen. 3|i Die SBant fd^on gef^Iolfen? e« i^ erfl ein siertcl auf trel 
 U^r. £)a3 aCajfer foc^t, We ^artoffeln werben kit gefotten fcin, 3{^ 
 BerMete 3^nen,jc Ui Sweater ju befu^cn. Sr ijl unter iai SSctt ge* 
 troci^en, 3lufgefd^o6en i^ nic^t aufgc'^oBen. Sttec^en ©ie einmal biefe 
 3lofe. £ie Etcbe fini geflogen; man fann fie nirgcnfcs finbcn. SBir 
 jie^en morgen aui Sant ; toertcn ©ie una nic^t 6efu(^en? Zit ^unl? 
 nalclgeweire (needle-guns) ifin't tie fceflen ®ett)e|re (guns)'; fie 
 ttjurben son cincm preuf ifc^cn Dfftjier crfunSen, ber im »origcn ^a^tt 
 jiarB. ©oBalb er tiefe Srfinbung gemac^t ^atte, wurte er on einen 
 Drt geBraii^t, ben er nii^t uerlaffen fonntc, unb genof nid^t mc|r grel» 
 Jeit,afe ein ©taotSgefangener (a political prisoner). 
 
 Theme on Class II. 
 
 The Lacedaemonians (Socebiimonier) did not flee, they died 
 for their country. They had offered (angcBoten) me a chair, 
 but I was obliged to go and close the store. At the division 
 of the kingdoms which the French conqueror proposed (an* 
 Bot), Murat received Naples (^Jteapel). They will postpone 
 (auffd^ieBen) the opening of the school. We shall go into 
 the country, and enjoy the fresh air. Have the potatoes been 
 boiled ? He forbade his scholars to go to the opera. The 
 Rhine froze last year, it freezes very seldom. The worms 
 creep, the birds fly, the fish swim, (the) men walk. He was 
 confused by the noise. He climbed on to the roof of the 
 house, lost his balance, and fell to the (ju) ground. Have you 
 ever smelt powder? The boys ran away (liefen fort) as soon 
 as they saw that they would be punished!. 
 
THE IBBEGULAK VERBS: FOUETH CONJUGATION. 
 
 263 
 
 Thied Class : Vekbs havtog the Modified Vowels 5, o, it, 
 OB THE Diphthong au, fob their Eadical Vowels. 
 
 148. (Sttttagen, to consider. 
 
 { Infinitive, ertDfigen, to consider 
 P^*'°s*^ 1 1'^^P^f^"^' ^ ermog, I considered 
 ( Past Part., crtoogcn, considered 
 
 Present {Indie.) 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 3c^ ertvdge, iu er* 
 
 3(^ crwog, bu erwog^, 
 
 erwiige, consider 
 
 wSgjl, er criuogt 
 
 cr ermog 
 
 (thou) 
 
 2Bir trwiigcn, i^r er* 
 
 SBir crwogen, i%x er* 
 
 crwiiget or erwiigen 
 
 wiigct (©ic crwdgcn), 
 
 woget (@ie erwogen), 
 
 ®ie, consider 
 
 fic crwiigcn 
 
 ftc crwcgen 
 
 (you) 
 
 Thus are conjugated : 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie. 
 
 ) Past Part. 
 
 149. ga^ren,' to ferment a,o^x gego^rcn 
 
 150. xa&m, to revenge (rfi^tc) gero(^en (gerac^t) 
 
 151. fc^warcrt, to fester f^wor gefc^moren 
 
 152. weigen, to weigh »og gewogcn 
 
 153. terl6f(^en,"toexpire,goouterlofc^ erlofc^en 
 
 154. fi^wdrett, to swear fd)Wor gefci^morcn 
 
 155. tetrflgcn, to cheat, deceive jetrog betrogen 
 
 156. erittren, to choose erfor ertoren 
 
 157. liigen, to lie log gclogcn 
 
 158. trflgen, to deceive trog getrogen 
 
 159. I'awfen/ to drink fojf, gefoffctt 
 
 160. fa«gen,* to suck fog gefogen 
 
 161. fc^naubcn, to pant, snort fd^ito6, gcfi^noicn 
 
 -■ Verbs marked with a f are nevter, and form their compound tenses 
 with fein (not :^aien). 
 ' SiJWen, auaI6fi|en, and setlof^cn, to extinguish, are regular verbs. 
 
 • ©aufett is applied only to beasts, and, in a vulgar sense, to a person 
 who drinks hard, as we apply the word tipple. . 
 
 * SaugeKf to suck, is sometimes uSed as a regtda/r verb. 
 
264 THK IREEGULAE VEBBS: FOUBTH CONJUGATMH. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 tie ©ai^e, the thing, object ft(^ vaS^m, to take revenge 
 bcr Slutegcl, the leech ^alttn, to hold 
 
 He ©cfemicriglett, the difficulty anmac^en, to make 
 tic SBunSe, the wound "-'crmitteln, to determine 
 
 kcr ©^cin, the appearance fcefbafen, to punish 
 ker 3)ro3e^, the suit serfc^ieben, to postpone 
 
 ile SSerfolgung, the persecution"^' e^rli^, honest 
 or prosecution Wie, how 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class III. 
 
 ^aim ©ie tiefe ©a^e wo^I eroogen? Eer SBeiit ijl gegol^ren. 
 3(^ werte mic^ nie on i^m rac^en. SBie »iel ^iuM »og kiefcr ^ut 
 (cake) 3ucier ? Dcr ^aufmantt ^ot mi(^ nic^t ktrogcit, cr ktriigt 
 Stiemanlen ; Setermann ^iilt i^n fiir cinen e^rlic^cn SJann. S5u Mfl 
 erforcn bie ©tdrtc iti %imUi ju crmittetn. 3c^ ^abe nic§t gclogen, 
 iii^ liigc nie. 2:rugt ©ie tcr ©d)ein nic^t ? Die Deafen foffen, ali oi 
 |tc f^on in sier aBo(^en fftn SBajfer Qii^abt gotten. Die Stutegel 
 faugen iai Siut gem. Die ^ftvit fi^nofcen. 3fl tie SBunbe gefc^tuo* 
 ren ? Tiai Oeuer i|l crlofdjcn, gc^e unb fui^e §oIj bamit »ir ein an* 
 bcres onmac^cn tonnen. 2Btr serfc^okn (postponed) bie Serfolgung 
 unfereS f^rojejfea um 3«U ju gewinnen. 
 
 Theme on Class III. 
 
 The wine will ferment, it is too warm here. Never revenge 
 thyself on thy fellow man (9lle6cnmcnf(^en) ; God will punish 
 the wicked. How many pounds did the oxen weigh ? This 
 man is not honest, he has cheated us. We have been chosen 
 to lead (leiten) the attack. Consider the difficulties of your 
 undertaking. The fire will go out if you do not bring some 
 more wood. Never He, for he who lies once is never believed, 
 even (fclbfi) if he speak the truth. Appearance joften ,de- 
 ceives. This man does not drink. Our horse would not 
 drink this water. The mosquitoes sucked blood. The horses 
 pant. 
 
THE lEBE&ULAR VERBS: EOUBTH CONJUGATION. 265 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 "bcr Serbrec^cr, the criminal ter Slict, the view 
 
 ter Ut^eber, the originator . icr Mantel, the trade 
 
 tie 2ru«fid)t, the prospect - ker SBcrtrag, the agreement 
 Icr Sngpa^, the ravine ker ®aat, the haU 
 
 ter ®c6ritt, the step Ut ©tcUc, the place, position 
 
 - ker ^itgel, the hiU Jcr gaU, the case 
 
 (JUffc^teben, to postpone Pcgcn, to conquer 
 
 nuf^cben, to lift up i^au^trMid^, expressly 
 ertragcn, to bear, endure Wic^tig, important 
 
 ■ »erlaffctt, to leave (quit) ottcln, alone 
 
 fcereuctt, to repent wbrtlic^, literally 
 
 Reading Exercise XXXI. 
 
 WtcM fctetct ctnen fxtii son jtoijlf^untert Z^altxn bemjenigen, 
 weli^cr tic Ur'^ekr ttefea 93er6re^en8 entiecft. 2Bir faf en ten gan* 
 5cn 9la(^mtttag auf tent ^iigel unt genopn tie fc^Bne 2lu«pt welc^e 
 fi(^ unferen Slictcn tartot (presented). DaS ^aui <Btmxt i|l 
 crfi in ticfem Sa^i^^untert erlofd^cn, abtv taS ^ani SBalois eriofi 
 mit tent iEote Jpcinrid^ in. SBtr glaukn tlefen Seuten nti^t, fie |akn 
 gelogen. ^rcu^en unt Selglen |aben ctnen Jpantel«sS5ertrog gefc^lofs 
 fen. Eicjenigen »on ten geinten, weld^c nict)t eriegen waren, warcn 
 gcflo^en. "Diefc Socomoti»e jog nte'^r ali jwei^untcrt 3)fertc. 3cf) , 
 ^ate nie cine fd^tefttere SSor^eUung gefe^en, aU tic gcfkigc ; jwei ©tun* 
 ten crtntgcn (bore) tuir ti, oBcr cntlid^ »etIoren wir tic ®elult unt 
 Bcrliegen (left) ten ®aal. 3<^ W^^ ^Inm au^triiiflic^ serBotcn 
 (forbidden) auf tag Sant ju gcficn. 3ntmer ncue ©i^aaren »on 
 Siriflen jogen gen Dflcn, urn gegen tie UnglauMgcn ju fdmpfcn. 
 Sflapoleon scrlor in tcr ©(^(ai^t id fWofaiaf, in ter ^'af^i son WtoiUu, 
 gegen 40,000 SKann. 
 
 Theme XXXI. 
 
 Close the windows, the mosquitoes will come into the 
 room. Go, do not lose a moment. The three hundred 
 Lacedaemonians, in the pass (fingpag) at Thermopylae, did 
 not flee, but died for their country. I fear that we have lost 
 
 * Bender but here fanSCTn (compare p. 256, 3). 
 
266 
 
 THE niEEGniAB VEEBS : FOURTH CONJUflATION. 
 
 the right way. In 1812 Napoleon went (jie^cn) to Moscow. 
 The prosecution of the suit was postponed. The light 
 is extinguished. I have lost my way. That merchant 
 oflFered me one hundred and ninety dollars for my carriage, 
 and the same amount (®umme) for my gray horse. We went 
 into the battle, and swore to conquer or to die. Have you 
 well considered the matter, it is an important step. The 
 farmers shear their sheep generally in June, we sheared 
 ours in May. The mosquitoes and leeches suck the blood of 
 man ; the latter are useful to him, but the former are a 
 plague. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 SSai mag ilnkwogen |a6en fcinc 
 ipeimati ju »crlaffen unt attctn 
 nac^ Mefem Sante 3U lommcn? 
 
 glo'^cn We brctlunicrt Saccbiimo* 
 nier, aU (le tie Uetcrmad^t in 
 getnbeg »or |Id^ fa^en, unb jebe 
 2lu«fl(^t ouf ©icg serloren war ? 
 
 ©tauJien ®ie, bag »ir auf bctn 
 rcc^ten 3Degc jinb ? 
 
 3Bann, fagen ®ic, ifl iai ^ani 
 Saloig erlofc^en? 
 
 2Ccr |at bicfe Scppic^e gewoBen? 
 
 SBann fi^ceren @ie Qm^viiS^ 
 3^re S^afc? 
 
 ©laukit ®ie, bag {cncr {unge 
 'Sflann wirflti^ gdogen ^t ? 
 
 SScr fagt, bag bic Srowen fle^ten 
 unb mhn, bic meinigc iat nte 
 geflod^ten no(i^ gcrooteti? 
 
 Jpaben ©ie 3^re ^ii^e noc^ nic^t 
 gemolten, e3 ifi fc^on ^al6 ac^t? 
 
 9Ran fagt, bag er arm ifl unb ^ters 
 :^cr font urn ctne ©telle anju* 
 ne^men (accept), tic i^m 
 ongefcoten (offered) trurbc. 
 
 D neirt, |lc sert^elbigten bett Sng* 
 pag o^nc |)arbon ju nc^mcn, 
 unb Bcjlegclten i|re Stefce fitr 
 bag Saterlanb mit i^rcm Slute. 
 
 3(i^ fiirc^te, bag »ir ben rei^ten 
 SBeg »crloren ^aben. 
 
 Das $au3 55aIoi3 ift mit bem 
 a:obe §etnrtct) ni. ertofc^cn. 
 
 Unfere 5'ia(^krltt, grau SJliilter, 
 iat |le gcirtobcn. 
 
 3Ctr fi^cercn fie gctoB'^nltc^ im 
 3«ni,"bicfe« 30^1^ ^iBen wir fie 
 im iKai gefdjoren. 
 
 D nein, id^ gfaube a nic^t, wai 
 foUte i|n baju fccwogen |aben ? 
 
 ©AtEer ijat ti gcfagt, akr auf 
 leincn %aU wottte er, bag ti 
 wijrtltc^ scrjlanben witrbe. 
 
 S92lr waren im ^eufclte (hayfield) 
 unb mottten gem iai $cu in 
 ble ©^eune (barn) Bringen. 
 
THE lEEEatTLAR VERBS: FOURTH CONJUGATION. 267 
 
 3Bte bmmt ts, bag tie g(u(fe fo SCetl ier @(^ncc auf ben Sergen 
 
 angcfc^iooUen finb ? gefAmoIjen i(l. 
 
 SBie tttele ©oloatcn ttcrlor Stapo* ©egen 40,000 SWantt, ci6er auf 
 
 Icon in in ©i^tac^t M SKo* tern Mdjugc (return) Bon 
 
 ftti^H aiuplanb Bcrlor Napoleon 6ei« 
 
 na^c feinc ganje Slrmce. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 2)er SBBirt^in Xo^tttUin. 
 
 (58 jogctt ' bret Surfi^e " wo^l ' iikr ben 3l^cln, 
 SSei efner grau SBtrtl^in, ba !e:^rten ^ |te etn. 
 „%ta\i aBirt^in ! lat pe gut 33tcr unb aCein ? 
 aCo Vt Itc i|r fc^bnes Sbi^tertein ?" 
 „5Wein Sier unb aSetn ifl frif^ unb flat, 
 Wtia Sijc^tericin Itegt out' bcr 3:obten6air." ' 
 Unb ali jtc trotcn jur hammer ' |inein, 
 "Da lag ' jtc in clnem fc^warjen ©c^rcin.' 
 Dcr erjie, bcr f^lug ° ben ©(^Icier '° jurftcf, 
 Unb fdjaute " jic an mit traurigcm Slid x 
 „m ! Mtcft bu no&i, bu fdjbnc 5Waib ! 
 3c^ witrEc bic^ liefccn son biefer 3eit." 
 Dcr jroeite bcdte ben ©c^Ielev '" ju 
 Unb tc^rte '* fic^ aB, unb wcinte baju : 
 „2lc^ ! bap bu tiegfi auf ber Sobtenba'^r ! » 
 
 ' UcScr Sen Olftcin jicjcn, to cross the Rhine. 
 ' Surfl!)(c), pi. SBurfl^c(n), render here student. 
 ' Do not render Inol^I here at all. 
 
 * fc^rtcn . . . etn» from einft^ten (to turn in), put wp. 
 ' Xobtenia^T, bier. 
 
 • Hammer, chamber. 
 
 ' tog, imperfect of licgen. 
 
 " iSitreinf coffin. 
 
 ' Sifjtug . . . juriid, of juriiafc^lagen, to throw back. 
 
 '"> ®iJ|Icicr, vail. 
 
 " iSiioutc . . . nn< of onfc^oucn, to gaze at. 
 
 " Petite ficft 061 of ft^ aHe'^ren, to go aside, turn away. 
 
268 
 
 THE IBREQULAB VERBS : FIFTH CONJUGATIOW. 
 
 3c^ ^V bid^ gcIlcBet fo maneges 3a1r." 
 
 Dcr brltte ^u6 ' i^n mletcr foglcii^, 
 
 Unt liigte ' fie on ben 5l«unb fo Heic^ :" 
 
 jiDid^ lieBt' iA immer, blc^ IW i(^ noc^ '^cut', 
 
 Unb wcrbe btc^ Ilefcen in Swtgteit." * u i^ i a n b . 
 
 LESSON xxxn. 
 
 Seltion 32. 
 
 Fifth Conjugation (Kadical Vowel i [or ie], Imperfect 
 with a or «). 
 
 Obs. — This conjugation is divided into three classes, all of 
 which have i for their radical vowel. In the im- 
 perfect, i changes to a. In the past participle the 
 first class is characterized by », the second by O, 
 and the third by e. 
 
 FiEST Class : Past Participle with «. 
 162. 'SSinicn, to bind. 
 Peincipal ( I'^M'i-iive, Urtbcn, to bind, tie 
 Pakts ) ^''^P^f^^''' '^ *<*"*'/ 1 bound 
 ( Past Part., geiunben, bound 
 
 Present (Indie.) Imperfect {Indie.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 3c^ hinit, bu Mnbefl, 
 
 cr Hnbct 
 aCtr btnben, i|r Hnbct 
 
 (®ie Mnben), fie Mn* 
 
 ben 
 
 3(S 6anb, bu knbfl, 
 
 er bonb 
 2Cir Banbcn, i^r Bonbct 
 
 (©ie knben), fie 
 
 knben 
 
 Hnbe, bind (thou) 
 
 Hnbct, or binbcn 
 ©ic, bind (you) 
 
 ' §u6 (instead of ^oi), poetical, imperfect of l^efien. 
 
 ' Sijffcn, to kiss. 
 
 » SBlciiJl, pale. 
 
 * Stoiflfeitf eternity ; render here in ©ttigfcit, ever, or for ever. 
 
THE IBEEGULAE VEEBS : FIFTH CONJUGATION. 269 
 
 Thus are conjugated : 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 163. t'bringcn*' to urge 
 
 tmng 
 
 getrnngen 
 
 (press) 
 
 
 
 164. cm]3flnten, to feel 
 
 empfani 
 
 cmpfuntcn 
 
 165. finfcen, to find 
 
 fanii 
 
 gefttnten 
 
 166. gelingen (i?nper's.°),* to 
 
 gctang 
 
 gelnngen 
 
 succeed 
 
 
 
 167. fiingen * to sound (tin- 
 
 {(ang 
 
 gcflungcn 
 
 He) 
 
 
 
 168. ringen;*to wrestle (ring) 
 
 rang 
 
 gerungen 
 
 169. fc^Itngen,* to sling (twine) f^I<ing 
 
 gc|'d)Ittngcrt 
 
 170. f(^»intcn(orBer|'c^tDtnben), 
 
 fc^manc 
 
 gefi^tcuntien 
 
 to vanish (disappear) 
 
 
 
 171. fc^tufngen * to swing 
 
 fi^mcng 
 
 gcfc^wungen 
 
 172. fingen,* to sing 
 
 fong 
 
 gefungcn 
 
 173. t|inten*.tosink 
 
 fonf 
 
 gefunten 
 
 174. "fpringen,* to spring 
 
 (prang 
 
 gefrrnngcn 
 
 (jump, crack) 
 
 
 
 175. fttrtto* to stink 
 
 Pan! 
 
 geflttnfen 
 
 176. trtntctt * to drink 
 
 tranl 
 
 getrunfen 
 
 177. tuiniert, to wind 
 
 tuant) 
 
 geiBttnicn 
 
 178. atoingen, to compel (force) 
 
 3»ang 
 
 gejnjungcn 
 
 To this class may be added also : 
 
 
 179. tingcn, to hire 
 
 (bung) 
 
 getungen 
 
 180. I'c^inben, to flay 
 
 (fd^unb) 
 
 gefi^unten 
 
 ' Verbs marked with a f are neuter, and form their compound tenses 
 with the auxiliary fctn. 
 
 ' Verbs marked with an * omit e in the ending of the second and third 
 person singular of the present : bit bringji, er rtngt. 
 
 ' See p. 313. 
 
 * Untringen, to surround, is regular. 
 
 • ©pringen forms compound tenses with ^aten or fein (see p. 295). 
 
270 THE IBBEGULAB VERBS : FIFTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 
 kie 3"flui^t, the recourse ber ^anbel, the trade 
 tie S^ocotatc, the chocolate '-tcr ^(^vin, the fence 
 
 tie Scitcnfcbaft, the passion iaS SWccr, the ocean 
 ter SSlumenfranj, the wreath of "UUoi, lifeless 
 
 flowers -Jje^cim, secret 
 
 Me ©cfelangc, the snake tricrncn, to acquire 
 
 We ^atjUt, the flag 1ta|cn, to approach 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class I. 
 
 !Der ©efongcne remit gcBunbcn unb sor ben fRxiittx geni'^rt. SDenn 
 in cin unfccfonnteg 2Bort finbeji, fo nlmm Seine SmP"** 31"" Wtsxtm 
 6u(^. S;ie Sewo^ncr 3"bieng trurtcn gcjiuungen, ten Snglantcm jn 
 geiiorc^en. 3" ©panienjjnb Stolicn trinft man me^r S^ocoJobe ali 
 ^affce ; tie Saiem trinlen mc^r S3icr ali ofle anteren Deutfc^cn. Die 
 Wa&t in ^otliinber ijl mit i^rem ^onbel Berf^wunbcn. 3d) empfanb 
 eine ge^eime grcubc, i|n son biefer t^ijric^ten Seitienfc^aft ge|cilt ju 
 fel^cn. Die ^Rac^ridjt, ba^ bie gropen europoifdben Wdi^ti bie Siirlen 
 gejttjungcn i^afien, iai ungliidlic^e ^rcta ju fd^onen, ifl folf^. S3 
 Hingt mir noc^ je^t in ben D^ren- 
 
 Theme on Class I. 
 
 This boot is not well bound ; tell the bookbinder he shall 
 bind no more books for me. The enemy has made his way 
 (eingetrungen) into the country, and wiU oblige us to obey 
 him. Did you succeed?' He obtained a ticket for the opera. I 
 found my friend Werner at (in) the coffee-house. John jumped 
 over a high fence. The woman sank lifeless to [the] ground. 
 The girls have made wreaths of flowers, to decorate the 
 soldiers. Socrates drank the poisoned cup, and died the 
 death of the righteous. The ship which went to Europe last 
 week has sunk ; all the passengers jumped into the ocean 
 and [were] drowned. 
 
 ' Insert tS between the verb and the pronoun. 
 
THE rEEEGDLAB VERBS : FIFTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 271 
 
 Second Class : Past Participle with o. 
 181. SSeginnen, to begin (commence). 
 
 ( Infinitive, fceginncn, to begin 
 ^RTO^ j I'^P^'rfect, ic^ bcgann, I began 
 ( Pad Part., begonnen, begun 
 
 Present {Indie.) 
 
 Imperf. (Indie.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 3^ begtnne, tu 6e? 
 
 gtnnjl, cr beginnt 
 2Bir bcgtnncn, i^r begin* 
 
 net (®ie beginncn), fie 
 
 beginnen 
 
 \&i begonn, bu begann^, 
 cr bcgann 
 
 SBir begannctt, i^r be? 
 gannet (©ie began* 
 nen), fie begannen 
 
 begtnne, begin 
 
 (thou) 
 teginnct or begin* 
 nen ®ie, begin 
 
 (you) 
 
 Thus are conjugated ; 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 182. 
 
 (ftcb) bcfinncit, to reflect, 
 to recollect 
 
 befann 
 
 befonnen 
 
 183. 
 
 fentrtnnen,' to escape 
 
 entrann 
 
 cntronncn 
 
 184. 
 
 gewinnen, to gain (win) 
 
 gcwann 
 
 getnonnen 
 
 185. 
 
 frinnen, to leak, to flow 
 
 ronn 
 
 geronnen 
 
 186. 
 
 f f(itDimmen, to swim 
 
 f(^.ramm 
 
 gefi^mommen 
 
 187. 
 
 ftnnen, to meditate 
 
 fann 
 
 gejottncn 
 
 188. 
 
 fpinnen, to spin 
 
 fpann, 
 
 geiponncn 
 
 ' Verbs marked with an f are neuter (see p. 395). 
 
272 
 
 THE IBRBaULAB VKBBS: FirTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Thibd Class : Past Participle with c. 
 189. SSttten, to beg, to request. 
 
 r Infinitive, titten, to beg, to request 
 
 ^^^^ \ I^P^^' ^^ ****' I begged, requested 
 (Pas* Part., gefccten, begged 
 
 Present {Indie.) 
 
 Imperfect {Indie.) 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 3c^ ftitte, lu Httejt, er 
 
 bittct 
 aCir Wtten, i|r Httct 
 
 (©ie Bitten), fJe bitten 
 
 3c^ tat," ku Batefl, er 
 
 iot 
 3Dir Batcn, i^r Batet 
 
 (©icBaten), fteBatcn 
 
 Bitte (beg) thou 
 
 Bittet or Bitten ®ie, 
 request (you) 
 
 Thus are conjugated 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperf. {Indie.) 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 190. liegen, to lie down 
 
 lag 
 
 gelegen 
 
 191. fl^en, to sit 
 
 m' 
 
 gefeffen 
 
 192. Befi^en, to possess 
 
 Befar 
 
 Befeffen 
 
 VOCABULAET. 
 
 Ber Untert^an, the subject nnterric^ten, to iastruct 
 
 ier S|ron, the throne <^ entfc^lojfcn, decided, determined 
 
 bcr Unterric^t, the instruction i- wa^rfd^einli^, probably 
 
 tie SKct^oBe, the method cntmeBer — oBer, either — or 
 
 bcr %la6ii, the flax cnBli^, finally 
 
 tic SScrjei^ung, the pardon Beino^c, almost 
 
 Bie ©tammatit, the grammar nur, only 
 
 ' In the imperfect and past partidple, Httm loses one t, and the t of 
 fi^en changes to S. 
 
THE IBEEGULAK VERBS : JJ'iUTH CONJUGATION. 273 
 
 Reading Exercise on Class II. and III. 
 
 §akn ©ie kgotinen nai^ meincr 5JJet^oce 3U unterrii^ten ? 3i^ 
 Jegann bicfe ©rammati! »ot kinase Drei 'Monattn, im <Biptimitx 
 trcrbe icfe mit itx grogcren Beginnen. SJie ©i^lac^t |ot ber geinl 
 geiBonnen, aber fein ©teg ttirk i^m nlc^ts tjclfen. SBefinnen ©ie M 
 nur, i(^ war »or ac^t SEagen ntit mciner Zantt M S^nen. 3<^ »unfd)e 
 ni^t, mein ^crr, baf ®te i'^n Bitten ju mix ju tommen. Sr :§at ftc^ 
 6efonnen unt :§at (ii^ entfi^Ioffen (decided) je^t nii^ts mti^x ju lau* 
 fen, S)ie ^Jrcu^en ^aben grope ©iege iiber tic Dcftretc^er gctronnen, 
 [ic gewannen cine jctc ©(^lO(^t. iDai %a^ rinnt, ti ^at wa'^rfi^cinlic^ 
 tic ganjc SRoc^t gcronnen. fir fann unb fann Sag unt Stac^t, Ui cr 
 c3 entlic^ crfant. ?Weine Sbi^ter :^abcn biefen glat^a wa^renb in 
 le^ten SBinter^ gefponnen. 3(^ bitte urn SSerjei^ung, mein griiuleln. 
 
 Theme on Class II. and III. 
 
 Begin your work, it is late. We began to translate the 
 Eeading-Lessons of the smaller grammar last Friday. Did 
 you recollect (reflexive) him (gen.) ? The thieves escaped 
 during the night, they must have swum a mile before they, 
 went 3 on 2 [the] land.2 They let him win once, now they 
 have won it all back (jurucEgetBonncn), and all [of] his money 
 besides (oBenbrein). Can you swim ? The flax which my wife 
 had spun was found in her room. The sailors begged the 
 captain to lie stiU, but he was determined to conquer or to 
 die. He sat there and meditated more (longer) than an hour. 
 
 VOCABULART. 
 
 bcr Scic^nam, the corpse '^bic firwa^nung, the mention 
 
 bcr 3lnbti(f, the view, the sight ber Sranb, the conflagration 
 
 bie <B^'on^e\t, the beauty tbie 2i(t, the strategy, cunning 
 
 ber 33crbiinbcte, the ally bie 5!Jlobe, the fashion 
 
 bie 9lieberlage, the defeat , ber ?)r'a^t, the post 
 
 bie Snfc^rift, the inscription * crblicfen, to behold 
 
 ber Sweifcl, the doubt '- cntmut^igcn, to discourage 
 
 ber |)faffe, the priest . tuanfcn, to waver 
 
 ber SRabbiner, the rabbi "^fcgcn, to sweep 
 
274 THE lERBGtIIiAE VBEBS : FIFTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Reading Exercise XXXII. 
 
 2)cr SSranb son Stt^en cntmut^igte (discouraged) He nteifien 
 ©ricd^cn, okr jE^cml|JoKe3 jwang fte Mx&i eine Sift ju tampfcrt. 5Ro(^ 
 bem Sobe 9Kart Slurefe (Aurelius) 6egann itx S^ron ber rBmtfc^eit 
 ^atfcr JU wanfen. 2>ic ©nglftnbcr fccfi^en cincn grogcn S^eil 3n* 
 kicng. Sluf cincr SUtfaule tea Srutua fanb man iiefe 3nfd)rtft : 
 ©(^raffl btt, SSrutu« ? 3ll3 Me 5fla^ricfet son ber Siliclrcrlage beg Sams 
 in SRom anfam (reached), wottte fte bcr ^aifer nic^t glauben. Wan 
 fagtbag bie ©cbafala (jackals) oft ben ^eeren beg Dricntg gefolgt 
 (Inb, urn bie Scicfename ber gefatlenen ©ollaten ju Derfc^Ungen. Ss 
 fanben (toot) fafl tagli(^ @ee!ampfe flatt (place), jwtf^en ben SooU 
 lanbern unb ben Snglanbcm. 3ft a S^nen fc^Iie§iid^ gelungen teffere 
 9)ia^e fiir bie l^eutige SSorflcHung ju befomntcn? Die ©^lai^t 6ct 
 SJlofaigf, we^c bie granjofen unb i^re SScrBiinbeten am 7ten ©eiJtems 
 btx 1812 in bem ^riege gegcn bie Sluffen gewannen, ift cine ber Hu* 
 tigjten, bcren bie ©ef^i^te Sriual^nung f^ut (makes mention). 
 
 Theme XXXII. 
 
 The gentleman who sat opposite to me was an English- 
 man. A poor blind man, led by a small boy, begged me to 
 give him something. Ciitholic priests, Protestant ministers, 
 and Jewish rabbis were (k'^anbcn jids) in the procession. They 
 foimd that he followed too much the new fashion (dat.)- 
 The choir sang a few pieces, but they had never before (nod) 
 nie) sung so badly. The Indians bound the white men to (an) 
 posts, and shot at (auf or nac^) them with their bows. We 
 have found a few words in the Exercises that are not in the 
 Vocabulary. Seek them in the dictionary. The power of 
 the Genoese disappeared with their trade ; they were once 
 very powerful The Prussians insisted upon the deliver- 
 ance (SSuglleferung) of their subjects. The son of our neigh- 
 bor jumped from the window, and broke his leg. Many 
 ships have sunk during the late storm ; our friend Mr. Drew 
 has lost three or four vessels. Do you know who has hired 
 these men to sweep the streets ? 
 
THE lEEEGULAE VERBS: FIFTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 275 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 ^alen bic ^^'^Sntjier tie Suc^jla* 
 ten crfunlien, oler ^abcit |te |te 
 son cinem atiiem orientaltfc^cn 
 SBoKecr^dten? 
 
 SBic pntett ®ie tie neue Dper, 
 ttjel(^e ©ie gcjiern gc^ijrt ^a* 
 . Ben? 
 
 Dcnten ®ie, ba§ cs mir gelingen 
 tttrt) cinen 3)a^ (passport) fiir 
 bag Slu^anb (the foreign 
 countries) ju Betommen ? 
 
 ®ic latcrt leinen fel^r gitten ©i^ 5 
 wolten ®ie nic^t tneinen 9^Ia^ 
 anne^men ? 
 
 SSBo ^o6cn <3te St)! ^tnb gcfun* 
 
 ten? 
 ^iinnen ©ie ntir fagen,n)er {ener 
 
 ^err t(l, »or bent tie ©olJaten 
 
 bie ga^nen fc^wongen ? . 
 ^iJnnenSie ftc^ ntctner ntc^t ent* 
 
 (Inncn ? 
 
 SSBann Bcgann ber ^rteg jtrifc^cn 
 
 Dejtrci^ unb Stalien ? 
 SBcrbcn ©ie am erften Sl^jril cin 
 
 anbcrca SKabc^cn btngcn? 
 SBcr ^ot ba« SSoIf gcjroungcn, bic 
 
 ©olJaten l^ier aufjunelmcn 
 
 (accommodate) ? 
 
 « »tu^ f^on 8 U|r fetn; l^at 
 bic ©lode noc^ nii^t gctSutet 
 
 (run 5) '•■ 
 
 g3 tft ni^t ganj gemig, »cr bie 
 Sui^jlaben erfunbcn iat ; bie 
 SJlcijten glaujen, bog eS bie 
 ^J^onijter gewefcn fmb. 
 
 3c^ fanD fie nic^t fe^r fc^Bn, akr 
 bie iKeinigen fatten fie fiir ein 
 9Jlcijler»erf (master-work). 
 
 3* jweifle (doubt), bap ti 2kntn 
 gelingen wirb, ba man ^ricg mit 
 gtanJreii^ Befiirc^tet (feared). 
 
 D iii bante 3'^ne« lerjli^, i^ 
 laBe |ier fo lange gefeffcn, baf 
 i^ noc^ ein ^aar 9Jlinuten 
 (minutes) ft^en !ann. 
 
 3c^ fanb ei fc^Iafenb unter einem 
 Saume. 
 
 3ener Jperr, »or bem bic Sfl^nen 
 gef(|tBungen worten, ijl ber 
 ^ijnig son 9)reu§en, aBitt)etm I. 
 
 Stein, i(^ fann mi^ nt(^t auf ®ie 
 Beftnncn, aBer ic^ tann mii^ 
 3|reg SSaterS entjtnnen. 
 
 3m 3a'^rc 1859, unb er enbigte 
 au^ im felBen 3a^«. 
 
 Stein, i&i ^aBe f^on bag 9Kot(^en 
 meiner 9lad^Bartn gcbungen. 
 
 Der ©encrat jwang fie baju; cr 
 bro^te (threatened) eincn 
 Seben, ber feinen Scfc|Icn nid;t 
 gc'[)or(^en wiirbe, mebcrjufcijic* 
 fen (to shoot down). 
 
 !Rein, ea ijl noc^ ni# 3eit, [u 
 wirb erfl urn 10 U^r gelautet 
 werben. 
 
276 THK IKKEaDLAK VEKBS: FIFTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Reading Lessoiiv 
 
 Unfcrcr Sicficn. 
 
 1 
 
 di fo§ Bet fcuntcn Slumen auf etncnt ®ra6 cin ^inb ; 
 3n feincn fiocfen fpteftc Scr frifi^e SJiorgenalnl, 
 3^m' 9lu:§tcit frifd^ Tic SBangen,' »ie ^irfi^cn in tern 9Rai, 
 Unk I'eine 3lugen jira^ften »ie ©ternc liar unto fret. 
 
 •2 
 
 9lic^t Hi* ber gin! \o t^cUt,' kcr in ben Sweigen fingt, 
 ©o' frij^Iid) tie ©ajeHc, Sic in tent SBoIre ffiringt. 
 „gl fag', wie sicl' ©efc^roifler feit t|r, mein licbe^ ^int ?" 
 Da« ^inb fprac^ freunblid): „®ic6en in Mm unfer' finb. 
 
 3 
 
 „3i»el faen in bent ©arten, jtoci ru^n im @ra6c ^Icr ; 
 3»ci ftfAen auf bem SBaffer, brum ftebcn, ^err, ftnb »ir." 
 „2Bcnn jtoci im SJleere ftfd^en, unb jwei im gelte ftnb ; 
 S)ann feii i:§r ja° nic^t fteten; fag^ an, mein liete^ ^inb." 
 
 4 
 „Si, jwei »on un3 ja' Itegctt im griinen ©robe ^terj 
 Erum' fins ti unfer' fieBcn, ja,ftcben, ^err, ftnb wir." 
 „2Benn jwei »on eui^ begraten im griinen ©rate ftnb ; 
 i)ann fcib i^r ja nur fiinfe," mein gutes, lieks ^inb." 
 
 5 
 
 „D ncin, o nein, nic^t fiinfe;' nei«, ftcBcn, $err, ftnb »lr; 
 2)cnn Sriicerc^cn unb ©i^roejlcr^en, bie fommen oft ju mir. 
 <5e^r langc lag Xiai ©djmefteri^en gcbulbig tei um franl. 
 Unb btidte noA) fo freuntlid^, ali fdjon fein ^Bpfc^cn fonf. 
 
 ' 3Jm slii^ten fnf* bic SBonflcn, or feine aBonflen fllitfttcn frifij. 
 
 ' Formerly adverbs ended in tt it is still used witli a few adverbs, and 
 only in poetry, or vulgarly, with some adjectives and numerals ; as, ^cttti 
 gctnC) fitnfc. 
 
 ' Supply nod) before fa. 
 
 * Sid, the c is sometimes omitted in poetry and familiar conversation. 
 » Itnfct is the abbreviated form of the genitive plural unfcttr. 
 
 • 3a> translate here surely. 
 ' ®t — iO( translate aff—but. 
 
 ' Drum, abbreviated form of tlarum. 
 
COMPOUND VERBS. 277 
 
 6 
 
 „^cr Hefce @ott im §immcl, ben ti mir oftmal3 iolts, 
 S)er ricf tai Iranfe ©i^mefteri^en ju ft(^ in'« ^Jaratiea. 
 S5a gtng' ii^ mit tern SBruter^en gar oft jum Orabc '^in;' 
 SBir fc^mucEteti a mit Slumett unc fpicUen in bent @riin. 
 
 7 
 ifVo&i aU bcr falte SCinter tie SSIiimlein fc^neite' cin ;' 
 Da ricf aui^ ®ott tai Sriiberc^en jum lieben ©i^Bjefterlein. 
 Drum' fiinfe* ni&it, nein,fteBen fJnb, §err, in Mem wir; 
 3nt ©artcn, auf bcm SEBaffcr unb in bem ®ra6c ^ier." 
 
 LESSON XXXm. Seftiott 33. 
 
 Compound Verbs. (Sufommenflcfc^tc geittnortcr.) 
 
 Obs. L — ^In German, most simple verbs permit certain par- 
 ticles ' or prefixes to be united with them, and thus 
 become compound ve7-bs ; e. g., fd}rei6en, to write ; 
 aft*fc^rci6en, to copy. Most of these compound verbs 
 permit the prefix, in certain tenses, to be detached 
 or separated, i. e., permit it to stand apart from the 
 simple form of the verb. Many, however, are in- 
 separable, and a few are either separable or insepar- 
 able, according to circumstances. 
 
 • ®vAi—^n, Imperfect of ^inge^cn. 
 
 a ©dinette ein, Imperfect of cinfiftitcicn. 
 8 See note ' on precedimg page. 
 
 * See note ' on preceding page. 
 
 ' Under the name of Pabticlb or Pkbfix we comprehend all those 
 invariable words (such as adverbs and prepositions), which are united 
 with other words, to modify or change their signification. The simple 
 words to which they are prefixed are generally verbs ; but often nouns 
 and adjectives are used as prefixes to change simple verbs into com- 
 pound verbs ; e. g., from |>anb and ^aien, ^anb^otenr to manage. 
 
278 COMPOUND VEEBS : SEPABABLE. 
 
 Separable Compound Verbs. {ZvemUxt gchtoiirtcr.) 
 
 Obs. n. — ^Verbs, whose prefixes or particles have a significa- 
 tion of their own (generally prepositions or ad- 
 verbs), and have the primary or full accent, are 
 called separable compotind verbs ; e. g., auS*ge^en, 
 to go oiU ; f ort=:ge^ett, to go away. 
 
 Note. — The accent in separable compound verbs is placed 
 ioth on the prefix and on the simple verb ; e. g., ttu^'gej'en» 
 aV^i^xnVvni &o. 
 
 Obs. m. — The prefixes or particles are detached and placed 
 at the end of the clause in principal sentences and 
 simple tenses {i. e., in the present and imperfect, 
 and in the imperative); e. g., Fres., i&j QCl^C l)cute 
 ni(^t 0M8,-I do not go out to-day ; Imperf., gingett 
 ®te gcfiem auS ? did you go out yesterday? Imper., 
 ge^e mit tnir anS, go out vnth me. 
 
 Obs. rV. — When a sentence begins with a relative pronoun or 
 a subordinative conjunction (see Lesson XL., Obs. 
 VIL), requiring the verbs to be placed at the end 
 of the clause or sentence, the prefix cannot be sepa- 
 rated from the verb ; e. g., 'Ltx SSJJonn, toelc^et je^t 
 fottgc^t, the man who is now leaving (i. e., going 
 away); toentt ©ie l^eute nii^t au8gc|en, if you do not 
 go out to-day ; aid ic^ gejiem Ottdgtng, as I went out 
 yesterday. 
 
 Obs. V. — ^The prefix ge of the past participle always remains 
 next to the verb, so that in compound verbs its 
 place is between the particle prefixed to the simple 
 verb and the simple verb itself ; e. g., obf(i^ret6en, 06^ 
 %tt\&iXitim. The same rule applies also to the pre- 
 position JM, when it is required in the iafinitive ; 
 e. g., gS i|1 (etdfeter otPJttsfangcn, it is easier to com- 
 mence. 
 
COMPOUND VEKBS : SEPAEABLE. 279 
 
 Conjugation of a Separable Verb. 
 Slbfd^xeiben, to copy. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Sttbfc^rciBen and atjufc^reificn, to copy 
 
 fres. Slbfi^reifccnb, copying Past. aBgefc^ricBen, copied 
 
 ©c^rcik — ah, copy (thou) fi^reiSen ®ie — c6, copy (you) 
 
 Present. 
 
 3(^ f(^m6e — ah, I copy 3^ fc^ricB — ah, I copied 
 
 bu [(i^rcifcjl — ob, thou copiest ku |'(irtebji — a6, thou copiedst 
 
 cr f^reiBt — ab, he copies er fc^rieB — a6, he copied 
 
 tDtr f^reibcn — 06, we copy toir fi^rtekn — <A, we copied 
 
 i^r \&iXt\% — aB, you copy \%x ((^riebet— at, you copied 
 
 fte fc^reiben — ab, they copy fie f(^ticben — ab, they copied 
 
 First Fut. 3c^ wc'^^e obfcfcrciben, I shall copy, &c. 
 First Gond. 3(^ wiirte abfi^rciben, I should copy, &c. 
 Perfect. 3i^ ^o6e obQCfc^ricben, I have copied, &c. 
 
 Pluperfect. 3d.) lotte abflefdjrlcbcn, I had copied, &c. 
 Second Fut. 3^5 wertie obgefc^ricben |abcn, I shall have copied 
 Second Gond. 3^ Wtoc abQCfc^rieben ^oben, I should have copied 
 
 A. Simple Particles: Separable. 
 
 1. ah : abfdjreibcn, to copy (i e., to write off). 
 
 2. on: anjiefeen, to put on (i e., to draw on, attract). 
 
 3. ailf : aufmad^cn, to open {i. e., to make open). 
 
 4. auS: flu^fprcc^cn, to pronounce {i. e., to speak out). 
 
 5. bci: beifle^cn, to assist (i. e., to stand by). 
 
 6. bat tableiben, to remain at a place {i. e., to remain there). 
 
 7. iavt iarbringen, to offer (i. e., to bring there). 
 
 8. buti^: (seep. 291). 
 
 9. cin: einfii^rcn, to introduce {i. e., to lead into). 
 10. empov : cmport)eben, to lift up. 
 
280 
 
 COMPOUND VEBB8 : SEPARABLE. 
 
 11. fotts forttragen, to carry off (i. e., to carry away). 
 
 12. ^tt: lerBringcn, to bring here {i. e., to bring hither). 
 
 13. ^tim: f^emlt^xtn, to return home. 
 
 14. l^ttt: ^inge^en, to go there (i e., to go thither). 
 
 15. lo§t lo^ret^en, to tear off {i. e., to tear loose). 
 
 16. mitt tnitt^eilcn, to communicate, to impart, to tell {i. e., to 
 
 divide or part with). 
 
 17. na^t noc^folgen,tofollow, to succeed (i.e., to follow after). 
 
 18. ttiebet: nicterlegen, to lay down. 
 
 19. ftb : oMicgen, to be incumbent on {i. e., to lie on). 
 
 20. «m: ) 
 
 fiber: y (see p. 291). 
 untet: ) 
 
 21. t>ovi sorfletten, to imagine (i. e., to place before). 
 
 22. toc(j: wegnelmcn, to take away. 
 
 23. totebev: (see p. 291.) 
 
 24. ju: jufi^liepen, to close, to lock (i. e., to lock or shut to). 
 
 Obs. VI. — ^The following verbs, which were formerly vmtten 
 as two separate words, may now be treated as sep- 
 arable compound verbs : 
 
 Infinitive. Pres. Past Part. 
 
 55cl^Ifc^Iagctt,' to miscarry tc^ fc^Iagc— fc'^t fc|lgc|"c^Iagcn 
 
 ftcifprec^en," to acquit 1(5^ fpred^c — frei freigcfprodjcn 
 
 0tcic|>fommen,' to equal i(^ tomme — gteid^ glci^gefommen 
 
 lieh^aitn, to love id) |a6c — Ikb ItcBge|obt 
 
 fliUfcfeWcigen, to be silent ti^ fcfcweige— jlill fHUgefi^tDiegen 
 
 ftattfintcn (impers.), to iake ti ftnbet — flatt jlattgefunien 
 place 
 
 B. Compound Particles: Separable. 
 
 Obs. Vii. — The prefixes or particles are themselves also 
 either simple or compound. The former serve to 
 
 " When spelt separately, fel^I [(i^Ittgen means to misa one's llow ; frti 
 ^fxtijea, to speahfranMy ; gleic^ tommeit, to come direetl/y. 
 
COMPOUND VERBS : SEPABABLE. 281 
 
 give to the verb a rather general meaning, but the 
 compound particles attach to the verb the idea of 
 peculiar locality ; e. g., &o^c^en means, to stand in a 
 place, iOsbci*(ie|cn means, to stand right by the 
 side of anything ; Ottfommcit means, to arrive, get to 
 a place ; |>ct*attslommen, to draw near to it. 
 
 Obs. Vm. — The adverbs l^er and l^ttt, and the numerous 
 particles compounded -with them (e. g., herein, %txal, 
 &c., ^incin, ^ina6, &c.), must be carefully distin- 
 guished, ^cr and its compounds denote motion 
 towards the speaker, while l)itt and its compounds 
 denote motion away from the speaker ; e. g., ^ommen 
 ©te fofort ju mir l^ctauf, come at once to me up-stairs. 
 (The speaker is here up-stairs, the person spoken 
 to, down-stairs.) ®c^en ©ic ju i^m ^inauf, go up- 
 stairs to him. (The speaker is here down-stairs, 
 with the person spoken to, who is required to move 
 away from the speaker.) 
 
 VOCABULAEY. 
 
 >^ottne^tnen^ to accept </barjletten, to represent 
 (lattftnben, to take place elnf(^Iagen, to hit, take 
 
 ouffle^f n, to rise jufc^ttepcn, to close, lock up 
 
 onfangcn, to commence \/ abne^men, to diminish 
 
 einfc^Iafcn, to fall asleep ^ auflofen, to dissolve 
 
 aitflDcdtcn, to wake up ^^jurtiifulren, to reduce 
 OuSrufen> to cry out, exclaim i/initt|ei(en, to communicate 
 
 \/ant»cnbcn, to apply i/«or^elIen^ to iatrodueo 
 
 Reading Exercise XXXIII. 
 
 3c^ fc^reibe atle meinc Sricfe aB. Du fprt(^ji iai gran5b|tf(^c ni(^t 
 fe^r gut auS. ®r toollte bte a::^ure nic^t aufmai^en. ©tanfc cr S^nen 
 nt*t Bel ? 2Bic (ange |tnb ©ie tageHtekn, na(^tiem ttir <Bit serliegcn. 
 3|re ©c^njc|lcr fti^rtc S^rcn greunb ki wn« ctn, er ifl cin litbtnimixxf 
 fciger Wlin\6:i. !Dte Seii^en, »cl(^c tic 2leg9)5ter jlatt ter SBuc^jiakn 
 
282 COMPOUND VEEBS : SEPAEABLES. 
 
 anwenketcn, unb tocl^e bic SBijrtcr ber ©prac^e bor|leHeit, itcnnt man 
 ^ieroglpp'^en (hieroglyphs). 3ic^cn ©ie ©dfcule an, jjlatt ©tiefcl, 
 bic ®cbu|e Tmb kffer fiir cine Su^reifc. 3(| :^abc bir ctwag SBii^ttges 
 ntitjutlctlen, lomme jn mir herein. S;tc meijicn ^reu3fa|rer fc^Iugcn 
 ten 2Ccg fiber Sonflantinojiel cin. ©ic |at ft(^ nteberlcgen mtiffen, |ic 
 ifl fc^on felt nte:^rcrcn Sogcn ntc^t ganj ioo% JpoBt i|r bas ^aui %yxf 
 gefdilopn ? Sm britten 3a:§r^unbcrt na^m bic iWoc^t bcr rbmifi^cn 
 ^oifer taglii^ ob. Snbcm bie S^emifcr (chemists) bie ^ijrpcr auf* 
 Kfen, fiilren ftc blcfclbcn auf i^rc Heinflcn S^cilc jurM. 2)er ^err, 
 tDc^en i^ S^nen foebcn sorgcftctit :^abc, ifl cin Deftrci^cr. 3c^ 
 glaube nid^t, bog cr bic grec^|eit laten trirb mir nodfsjufolgen. 3lla 
 i^ leutc SKorgen aufjionb, |&rtc ii^ ein fonberkrcg ©eraufd^. i;rcb* 
 6el, cin l^oUanbifc^cr Sanbmann (peasant), :§at bag a:|ermometcr cr* 
 funben. 
 
 Theme XXXIII. 
 
 Put on your coat. I have copied all my exercises. He 
 does not pronounce the French very well (gut). My friend 
 has been acquitted (frcifprc(^cn). The lightning-rod attracts 
 the lightning. Commence to-morrow to speak German with 
 me. The £>ld General Ziethen had fallen (wor) asleep in 
 presence of Frederick the Great. A page (5)age), who had 
 noticed it, wanted to awake him ; but the king exclaimed : 
 " He has watched often enough for us, let him sleep now !" 
 Your boy may bring your letters hither. I did not dare 
 (wagcn) to follow him. "Why did you not stay there any 
 longer ? I have read again the last work of Victor Hugo. 
 King Alfred rose daily at four o'clock. I accept your offer 
 with pleasure, when will the concert take place? Has he 
 carried away all the letters I copied ? I intended (6cabftd^ti= 
 gen) to communicate this intelligence to you last (gcfiem) 
 evening. It will take place this evening ; it was to have 
 taken place last Saturday. Do not go up-stairs to him, he is 
 very busy (kfd^iiftigt) to-day. 
 
COMPOUND VERBS : SEPAEABLE. 
 
 283 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 3fl cS nbt^ig (necessary), t>a^ 
 
 ©ic alle 3^te Sriefe afcf^reU 
 
 kn? 
 SCic lomrat c8, bag <3ie boa ©cut* 
 
 f(^e nt^t Bejfcr ausfprec^ett fons 
 
 nen? 
 SBarum fle^jl bu beiner ©d^wefler 
 
 nii^t hi ? 
 
 ®ie lattcrt 3^rett grcunb Bet un« 
 cittfu:§rcrt foUen; »irb er ntc^t 
 iaiJ wicber ^ict^crlommett? 
 
 3il ber Jperr SRajor no(^ nii^t Son 
 feiner SHcife juriicfgete^^rt ? 
 
 Jportcji bu in ber It^ttn Stac^t cln 
 (Serdufc^, di3 tt)ir unS niebcrs 
 Qtltgt ^aitm ? 
 
 aBerben ®ic morgen au^ge^cn? 
 
 Jpafeen ©ic bie ^iflcn (boxes), 
 welcbe geflcrn Bon Suropa la- 
 mcn, fi^oit aufgemac^t ? 
 
 Urn wicsiel U|r (le:^en ®ic ge* 
 l»i)^n(i(^ (generally) auf ? 
 
 Urn fec^a It^r ober ein Stertcl auf 
 
 ficBen. Urn micBiet U^r ge|en 
 
 ©te oBcr ju Sett ? 
 aBiffen ©te, it»ann ^art V. ben 
 
 ^urfiitjlcn Bon ©ac^fen 6ci 
 
 SRiiPerg angrlff ? 
 
 ®i3 ijl ni&jt gerabeju (really) no* 
 
 t^ig, aBer tt^ fd^reifce fte lieter 
 
 alle a6. 
 2&I weif ni^t, man fagt mir, ba(j 
 
 ic^ baa granjiSfifc^e gut au(3« 
 
 fpret^cn fbnne. 
 34 toixxii t|r Beiflct)en, menu fte 
 
 aiec^t latte, aBer jte |at Un* 
 
 rcc^t. 
 ©0 ®ott Witt, toirb cr in ein ober 
 
 jloei 3a|ren tuieber ^ier^er* 
 
 fommen, utib bann mitt i^ mir 
 
 crtauBen,i'§n S^ncn sorjufletlen. 
 3^ fann ti 3^nen reirllii^ (really) 
 
 nic^t fagen, cr tourbc in biefem 
 
 SOilonate juritderwartet. 
 Silcin, i(^ l^Brte nic6ta; ti f(i^icn 
 
 ottea tu|ig JU fein. 
 
 9lein, ic^ gc^c morgen nic^t au«; 
 
 ic^ tocrbe meinc ,9lufgaBen ay 
 
 f(^rei6cn. 
 ffiir mac^ten fte t)eute morgen auf, 
 
 a6er tolr fanben nii^ta fiir ©ie 
 
 baritt. 
 3i^ flc^e gen)ij:§nlic^ um fiinf U^r 
 
 auf, unb barf i^ fragcn, wann 
 
 ©leauffte^cn? 
 2Bir geien jeben 3l6enb um neun 
 
 ober ein SSiertel auf je^n ju 
 
 Sett. 
 aCenn ic^ mic^ ni*t irre, fo griff , 
 
 ^arl ben ^urfiirftcn am 24 ften 
 
 Slpril 1547 an. 
 
284 COMPOtJND VEBBS: SEPAEABLES. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 SBag Bin i^ mt^t aU i^r. 
 
 3lm 27. Slprit 1785 trat bie Dbcr au3 i^rni Ufern, burcJBrotO 
 £)amme, rig SSriicfcn ai, toorf §(iufer urn unk wieS uielcn SKenf^en 
 i^rcn ©i^ ouf ten Dac^em ober auf ben Sautncn on, tco fctt|l bie SSogcl 
 ni(^t me^r fi^en woHtcn. ^tnber f^rieen, SKiitter {ammerten, SKiinner 
 Hagtcn: Sltleg ringg «m^cr war wU Sammcr unb 9lot^. Sble 9)?cn? 
 fi^cn^eracrt fu^ren in ^ft^nen ab unb ju unb fc^tcn ©reifc unb SBciber 
 auf g Srocfne,' unb ipanbe son ©c^wimmenben ragten aui btn giut^cn 
 em^jor unb trugen Winter ju i^ren 5Kuttcm on's Sanb, — furj/ Stotl 
 unb ^iilfc fuc^ten'g etnanbcr jubiirsut^un ; aitv bie Jilot^ :§atte longe 
 bie UeBermai^t. 
 
 Sag ebelfic SKenff^cn^^crj unter aKen fi^Iug afier biegmat in ciner 
 ^erjoggbruji. S)iefe bjfncte fid) jufammt Sbrfe unb ipaug fiir ^unbcrte 
 son UngIiicHi(^en. ^Rii^t genug! Salb ^anb ber Jperjog an&i am 
 Ufer, reo i^n glel^enbe son alien ©eiten umringten. (Sine iOiutter flel »or 
 i^m niebcr unb flel^te iammemb um ben Sefe^l, i|re ^inber ju retten. 
 fir 6ot®eIb auS, oter 9liemanb :^attc bag ^erj, c3 ju Berbienenj benn 
 gar' ju fcfeaurig raufc^te bie immer |o^er (ieigenbe glut|, unb cigneg 
 Seicn fianb gegen frembeg in ber 2Dage.' i)a totebcr^affte in 2eos 
 polbg Jperjcn bag nta^nenbe 3Bort: „S3Ber ba fui^et fcinc ©eele ju ers 
 l)alten, ber icirb fie serlieren ; unb wer fie »erliercn wirb, ber wirb i^r 
 3um Sc6en uer^elfen !" — unb fc^on fianb cr fclbfl im ^a|ne unb ant* 
 ttjortcte benen, bie i^m abrtetl^en : „5Bag Mn i(^ me^r alg i:^r ?" unb 
 bo^in fc^toanfte ber Silai^en iiber bie raufc^enbe glutV ©^on na|ert 
 cr jicb bent Jcnfeitigen !Damme; }e^t ifi er nur nod^ brei ©c^ritte battonj 
 fcfeon fie|t mon im ©eifie gerctteteg 2ebcn — a^, ba ft^lug plo^Itd^ ber 
 ^al^n urn, unb — ^bie SBeKcn ber Dbcr fangen ein ©raHieb, baju ganj 
 f5ranffurt, ja ganj Suropa meinte. Sr aBer !§atte feineg Seibeg Seben 
 »erIoren, aber' feiner ©cele jum Seben ser^olfen. 
 
 Stttmar! ,3etjenfotnet." 
 
 Xrodnc, the word 8onll is understood. 
 ' fiuij is here used adverbially : in short. 
 ' @or means intensMy ; thus : benn gat ju f^aurigj most t&miily. 
 *■ Stanb in ber SSSafle, was at liazwrd. 
 ' Translate afier in this connection yet. 
 
COMPOUND VEEBS: mSEPAKABLES. 285 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. «ettiott 34. 
 
 Compound Inseparable Verbs. 
 
 Obs. I. — Compound inseparable verbs, or, as the name im- 
 plies, those compound verbs from which the prefix 
 can never be detached, are formed with prepositions 
 or adverbs having only the secondary accent, or with 
 unaccented syllables, which have no meaning of 
 their own. 
 
 Obs. IL — ^There are twelve inseparable prefixes,' viz. : 
 
 1. 6e: Bejo^Icn, to pay from ja^Ien, to pay 
 
 2. tmp t cmpfongen, to receive ' " fangen, to catch 
 
 3. eitt: entc'^ren, to dishonor " e^ren, to honor 
 
 4. ct: cr'^alten, to receive " |alten, to hold 
 
 5. ge: gc|Or(|en, to obey " l^orc^en, to hearken, 
 
 listen 
 
 6. ffintev' X liinterge^cn, to cheat, deceive " gc^en, to go 
 
 7. Mti^': mipbrciui^en, to misuse " Broud^cit, to use 
 
 8. at: urt^eitcn, to judge, criticise " t^eilen, to divide 
 
 9. l>et: serfaufen, to seU " laufen, to buy 
 
 10. VoW : soflbringcn, to accompUsh " Mngen, to bring 
 
 11. Wibtv'': tuilerfprcd^ett, to contradict " fpre^en, to speat 
 
 12. jet: 3crreigen, to tear (apart or in 
 
 pieces) " rci^ett, to tear 
 
 Note. — Inseparable verbs compounded -with bar^, iiBer. 
 unter, and uiH/ may be found on p. 291. 
 
 Obs. m. — The inseparable verbs never admit of the augment 
 ge in the past participle, but reject it altogether f 
 e. g., JCtfibrt, and not gejerjiiirt. Neither is Jti, when 
 
 ' Of the influence wMch these prefixes have on the meaning of verbs 
 see Eberhard Synonym. Diet. : Introduction. 
 
 = The prefixes ^interi ntiftf tloO, anb tnibcr, when serving to compovmd 
 a noun or adjective, have the primary accent. 
 
 ' For exceptions see page 287, Obs. V. 
 
286 COMPOUND VEEBS: INSEPAEABLE. 
 
 required before a verb in the infinitive ever per- 
 mitted between the prefix and the simple verb as it 
 is in separable verbs. Its place is before the com- 
 pound form of the inseparable verb ; e, g., 3(^ !aitt 
 lier^cr '^^xt Slntoort ju empfangcn (not empjufangen), I 
 came hither to receive your answer. 
 Obs. rV. — But if the prefix be a compound, of which the first 
 component is a separable, and the second an in- 
 separable particle, JU is inserted between the two 
 particles of the prefix ; e. g., er foU ftc^ nur untcrfle|en fte 
 on*jtt?crfenncn, he shall only dare to recognize them. 
 
 Note. — The prefix mi§ in a few instances admits the aug- 
 ment ge in the past participle, e. g., (from mtpbeutenf to mis- 
 interpret), gcmipbeutet. 
 
 Conjugation of an Inseparable Verbi 
 Infinitive: 93edecEen, TO COVER. 
 
 ntPEBATrVE. PARTICIPLES. 
 
 SiTig. itttit&t, cover (thou) Fres. bebedett^, covering 
 Plur. ftefcccfet or Iteteden @ie, tost. Bebcdt, covered 
 cover (you) 
 
 Present. 
 
 i&i bebccte, I cover i^ bcbcdtc, I covered 
 
 bu bctedjl, thou coverest bu Bctccftejl, thou coveredst 
 
 er Bebectt, he covers cr kbedttc, he covered 
 
 it)ir tcbciien, we cover toir tebcdtten, we covered 
 
 i"br tebecfet, ) i^r 6cbecftct, 1 , 
 
 ki Bebeden, } ^"^ ''^^'^^ @te kbedten, [ ^"^ ''"^"'^^ 
 
 flc iebcden, they cover fie bebeiiteit, they covered 
 
 First Flit, iif toerbe bebedCtt, I shall cover, &c. 
 
 Fird Cond. id^ wiirbe bctecfetl, I should cover, &c. 
 
 Perfect. ic^ ^aU bcbcdt, I have covered, &c. 
 
 Pluperfect, ic^ '§attc Bebedt, I had covered, &c. 
 
 Sec. Fut. ic^ tscrbe fecbedt ^akn, I shall have covered, &c. 
 
 Sec. Cond. t^ tciirbe Betcdt ^aten, I should have covered, &c. 
 
COMPOUND verbs: insepabable. 287 
 
 Obs. V. — ^The foUowing verbs, some of them derivatives from 
 compound nouns, are also inseparable, but admit 
 the augment QC in the past participle before the 
 inseparable particle, and have the primary accent 
 on the prefix ; e. g., from argajB^ncn, past part, 
 gcorgtoij^^ttt. 
 
 atttworten, to answer ^mut]|^magctt,toconjecture, guess 
 
 ,-<irgtei)^nert, to suspect nac^troaitbcln, to walk in the 
 
 branbi'^a^en, to sack sleep 
 
 frol^todcn,' to exult " notl^jiii^tigcn, to ravish, violate 
 
 frfll^Pcten, to breakfast ijuatffolbcm, to use or give 
 
 ^ani^akn, to handle, maintain quack medicines 
 ^cirat^cn, to marry ratl^fc^Iagen, to deliberate 
 
 -^angwcilett, to annoy ^ tec^tfertigen, to justify 
 
 licbiiugetn, to caress MCt^cilen, to judge, criticise 
 
 Itcbtofcn, to caress toeiffagen, to prophesy, foretell 
 
 lufliuanDetn, to take a pleasure'^ ttjctteifcrn, to emulate 
 walk ^ toiUfa^rm/ to gi-atify 
 
 Four verbs with Itti^ are similarly conjugated : 
 
 nti^HHigcn, to disapprove mi^teutcn, to misinterpret 
 mi^brouc^en, to misuse, abuse «tl^|anieln, to misuse, abuse 
 
 Obs. VI. — Some of the inseparable prefixes are compounded 
 vrith separable particles (mostly prepositions). 
 Verbs with such compound particles are treated as 
 inseparables, and have the accent on the second 
 syllable of the prefix.'' 
 
 1 gro^loden and Wittftt^rcn moatly omit the augment ge in the past 
 participle. 
 
 ^ Except Jesotjle^tn, which is separable ; \<i) fleje tcDor, because tesor is 
 a word used by itself, and therefore a compound sepa/rcMe particle. (See 
 Lesson XXXIII., Obs. VII.) 
 
288 
 
 COMPOUND verbs: insepaeablb. 
 
 InfinitiBe. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 ^htatt'i bean'trogcn, to propose 
 
 ic^ beantrage 
 
 bcantragt 
 
 beant : kant'worten, to answer 
 
 i^ fccantoortc 
 
 kantroortft 
 
 benai^': bcnac^'rlc^ttgcn, to in- 
 
 ic^ knacbricfetigc 
 
 tena^rid;tlgt 
 
 form 
 
 
 
 benn': kun'ru^tgcn, to disturb 
 
 ic^ Seunrulige 
 
 Beunru^igt 
 
 bent': Bcur't^cilcn, to criticise, 
 
 i^ Bcurt^eile 
 
 kurt^cilt 
 
 judge 
 
 
 
 mi^'oet: mt§'»er|le^en,' to mis- 
 
 iij mi^»erjte^e 
 
 mi§»erjlanccrt 
 
 understand 
 
 
 
 vetab': serab'f'^cuen, to detest 
 
 ic^ seraBfc^eue 
 
 BeraBjc^cut 
 
 vttna^'i s^erna^'Id^igen, to 
 
 i4 ocraad^Io^ige 
 
 ssrnad^Iafigt 
 
 neglect 
 
 
 
 tferutt' : uerun'rcinlgen, to soil 
 
 i&i scrunretnigc 
 
 Berunrcintgt 
 
 »erur's serur't^cilen, to condemn 
 
 i(^ uerurt^cile 
 
 »entrt|cilt 
 
 tcr SSetriigcr, the cheat 
 ter Sc^rling, the apprentice 
 tie ®c»aft, the power (might) 
 tic 3er^i5nittg, the destruction 
 tie Srmortung, the murder 
 - fccge'^en, to commit 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 crfcnncn, to recognize 
 BctecEen, to cover 
 Betriigen, to cheat 
 scrwuntcn, to wound 
 »xcrfa|ren, to learn, to experience 
 BertrciBm, to drive off (away) 
 
 Reading Exercise XXXIV. 
 
 33e3at)tt getfrmann toaa t|r fc^ulrtg feic. ipafl bu tnetncn Sricf 
 ni^t cr^alten ? SQBtr murten aufs l^crjUd^jle empfangcn. 9Raif mup 
 fcinctt gltern unb Sc^rcnt gc^orc^ctt. 3(^ Bin o^ne Sweifel l^intcrs 
 gangcn tuorben. ®r 'i^at feinc grau gcmtg^anbett, fo bag |lc i^n ucr* 
 taptt muptc. ©e^cn ©ic ftcfe uor, ba8 9)fcrb fc^Kgt au«. 3<^ |aBc 
 melnen Se^rling fortgejogt, er 'i^at mix mc|reremal wibcrfprodicn unb 
 moUtc mir ni(J)t ge^or(i^en. 9Kan fotltc i^n bason Benac^rtitigt ^aBcn, 
 er witrbe ganj gcwig geantoortet |a6en. §aBen @ie nods nic^t gefrii:^* 
 fliictt? SrlauBcn ©ie mtr, 3|ncn ju fagcn, mcin ^crr, bag ©ic nid^t 
 
 ' Snig, being followed by an unaccented particle, takes the accent : 
 
 m;g'»er)lc^en, mt5'»ct|lanbcn. 
 
COMPOUND VEBBS: INSEPABABLE. 289 
 
 ric^tig geurt^ellt ^aUn. Slta ^ari xn. crfu:§r, i)a§ ntftn i^n mit 
 ®ewolt »crtrcikn tooUte, fagte er ben Sntfci^Ittg, ftc^ in feincm Jpaufc 
 gcgcn Caa ganjc ^cer 5cr Siirfen ju »ert^cUiigen. ^cinrli^ in. fccgtng 
 tin SScrtrcd^eit, inlcm er tie Sritiortung Ui ^crjogS son @uife er* 
 laubte. T)cr ^aifcr grieuric^ I. Ue§ clc ©tolt SJailonS jerpren. 
 ©Ic fc^eincn mir |cute fc^t jcrftreutj was fe^It S^ncn? 
 
 Theme XXXIV. 
 
 The Bomans destroyed Carthage. Do you recognize me ? 
 Your uncle will receive my letter to-morrow afternoon. She 
 covered her face with her hands and cried. That traveler 
 is a cheat, he cheats everybody. Was this soldier wounded 
 in the last battle ? Has the teacher corrected our German 
 exercises? What prophet had foretold the destruction of 
 Jerusalem ? The Arabs were very much degenerated (ent? 
 artct) when the Osmanians (D^manen) made theinselves mas- 
 ters (|I^ — Bemac^ttgten) of the Orient. Your name has slipped 
 (entfatten) me ; may I ask you to give me your card (^artc, 
 fem.) ? Pardon me the expression (Stu^trucf) which I used, 
 it escaped (entfc^Iiipfcn) me. Did you understand me or not ? 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 2^ |aBe ©ie im sorigcnSfl^re in £> ia, {e^t Befinnc IS) mid^ 3|r«, 
 
 ^olrt gcfe^en, erfennen ®tc nti(| ®te wurtien mir Bon meinent 
 
 ni^t ? SBetter sorgcfleUt. 
 
 ®anj rec^t, mcin iperr, unb mag @ott fei ®anf, rei^t m% 3c^ 
 
 i(^ fragcn wic |i(^ 3|re wcrt^e erwarte meine grau wnb SBc^ter 
 
 gamilie iefintet? l^cutc 2l6enti Don Sriijfel, 
 
 SBenn ©ie eriaukn, will i^ mir 3^ »erfi(^erc ©ic, bo^ ©ic met* 
 
 "oai SBergniigcn maiden ©ie in ner gamilie rec^t tDitltommcn 
 
 einigcn iEagen p fiefuc^en; fein tuerten; ©ie tBcrben uni 
 
 tcann roiirbe ti 3|nen am Je(ien immer beg 9ia(^mittag3 Ui 4 
 
 (saflten ? U^r in unfercm §aufc antrcffen. 
 
 ©ie iafcn ganj gcwi^ noc^ nic^t 3c^ »tu| ^^mn '^crjKc^ banifen, 
 
 gefrii'^^iicft; barf i^ ©ic titten ic^ I)a6e fi^on gefrii^iicft; man 
 
 mit mir ju frii^|iii(fen ? frii^jliieft in unfcrer gamllie urn 
 
 7U^r. 
 
290 COMPOUND VBEBS: SEPAEABLE AND INSBPAEABLE. 
 
 2So labctt ©ie |i(!^ 3|ten Slod fo mi ic^ iila ien Saun ficttcm 
 jerrtjfen? nioUte, lief ctn JpunD mir nacfe 
 
 «nb ri^ mir ten StocE »om 2ei6c, 
 SSaa gotten ©ie son bent ®nt# Sc^ bcwunCere tie Sapfcrlcit We* 
 f^Iuflfe Mart's teg Sfolften, fe3 ^onlgS, auf ten tie ©c^we? 
 (tc^ in einem Jpaufe gegen iai ten jlolj (proud) fetn mijgen, 
 ganje §ccr ter SMen gu Ber* aber i^ tann nic^t begreifcn 
 tlcitigen ? (understand) luie er glauBen 
 
 lonnte, ta§ er einem §ecre roi# 
 terjlc^en (oppose) Knnte. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 Set ©ctjl^als. 
 
 ®in ©eij'^ala '^atte cinen ©(i^a^ bergrofien. 9Jlan (la^r i^m ben* 
 fclben unt Icgte' einen ©tein on feine ©telle. UnglMi(i^er, ter' ic^ 
 Hn ! fagte ter ©eij^ola 3U einem 9lac^kr, intem er eS i|m etjii^Ttc. 
 — SBcn ncnnen ©ie ungliicHic^ ? frogte ticfcr. — ©c^one grage,* mic^ 
 fettfl; ic^, ter 16) mit Slncn rebe, ic6 bin ungiMid^; tas @elt) gel^orte 
 nic^t mir aflcin 5 man ^at e3 mir gefio^Ien, tas ansertraute ®e(t unt 
 mein cigeneg. — Wai tic ©umme betrtfft, tie 3^nen nic^t %t^oxt, 
 |at man 3^nen tiefclbe gegeben, «m \ii jn ItcrgraBen ? — ^SlUertinga 
 l^at man |ie mir taju" gegeben.— 9lun »o|I, bcrjc^tc ter 5Waii^bar, in 
 tiefem gaUe !ann S^ncn ter 'Diebfla'^I gleic^giiltig fcin, 3'^ncn "nb 
 3^«m greunte. $i(ben ©ie ftd^ atle Seite ein, ter ©tein fei 3|r 
 ©Aa^; ta ©ie i^nnii^t ienu^tcn, fo |int ©ie tarum ni(^t Srmcr. — 
 Unt |'elb|l tuenn i(^ tarum nii^t firmer tuare, berft^tc ter ©eij^ala, ifl 
 ein 2lntcrer ni(^t um' fo reii^er ?' 3(^ moi^te rafent toerten, wenn id^ 
 taran tente. 
 
 ' Notice the oonstmction of an active verb with mon instead of the 
 passive voice. 
 ' SOlon is here undenMod. 
 s Compare Obs. VI. of- Lesson XXV. 
 
 * iSl^iinc ^rage, expression like oxa funny question. 
 ' SttjU) thereto, therefor, i. o.,fcir that purpose. 
 
 • Um fo tetc^er, so much the richer. 
 
COMPOUND VBEBS : SEFABABLE AND INSEPABABLB. 291 
 
 I^SSON XXXV. Seftion 33. 
 
 Separable and Inseparable Compound Verbs. 
 (2rcnn6orc unii Untrcnnfiore gcitmbrtcr.) 
 
 Obs. — Many verbs compounded with butc^, fiber, unt, Utts 
 
 tct, and ttf ie^et may be either separcible or insepor 
 rdble. When the prefix and the radical retain each 
 its own peculiar and natural sense, these verbs are 
 separable, and the accent is placed on the prefix; 
 but when they assume a figurative or metaphorical 
 sense, they are inseparable, and have the accent on 
 the radical syllable. The former have generally an 
 intransitive, the latter a transitive signification. 
 
 EXAMPLES.' 
 
 Insepa/rdble. 
 
 ^ttr^^tlrtngen, to press or force buri^^tingen, to penetrate'' 
 
 through 
 iibetfc^en, to set over (cross) iiberfc^cn, to translate 
 lllttge|cn, to associate untgel^en, to go around, evade 
 
 untcrjlc^cn, to go wnrfer shelter -unterftc^Ctt, (fl^) to dare 
 totcfecr^okn, to fetch or bring wiefeer^olett, to rqwat 
 
 back 
 
 VOCABULARY, 
 b u r c^ rcifcn, to travel through fc^wadjen, to weaken 
 iux&i r c i f c n , to travel over ^ P(^ entfi^tiepcn, to decide 
 bu n^gc|en, to run away k aug»ctc^en, to yield, to evade 
 buri^ g e :^ c n , to go through f nicfccrreif en, to tear down 
 bte ©cite, the side fpiirti^, sparingly 
 
 baa Soot, the boat ^ jetra^tllc^, considerably 
 
 ' A number of verbs admit of both the separable and inseparable 
 form (see Complete List on p. 489), but many have either the separable 
 or inseparable form only. 
 
 • Of such verbs there are a few in English composition. I look over, 
 and I overlook ; I set up, and I upset. — Otto. To understand, and to 
 stand under ; to overcome, and to come over ; to undergo, and to go 
 under; to overtake, and to take over, &c., &c. 
 
292 COMPOUND VEEBS: SEPAEABLE AND INSEFABABIiE. 
 
 Reading Exercise XXXV. 
 
 Surc^ b r u n g c n son kern Scwwf tfcin iai SKcj^t auf mclncr ©eitc 
 3U l^aim, tonnte i6) mi^ niiSt cnt|d^Iic^cn sor i^m ouSjuwcicfccn. lEa^ 
 Sic^t fonnte nur fparlicb turi^ iai ftcine genjler(^cn bc« ®efongni|[e5 
 burc^tringcn. ^aim ©ie 3^« 3l«fga6e noc^ nti^t liicrfe^t? 
 SIIS tuir an ten glug famen, fe^tcn tulr in cincm fleinen Soote it 6 e r . 
 3c^ fagte 3|nen, Spp ©ie nii^t ntit jcncm 2Jtenfc^cn u m ge'^cn foHtcn, 
 Mr- umgingcn bie ®tatt Serlin. 3(i^ |abc M<i gckten, 
 nic^t mit i^m umjugclen. Sr ^at mic^ cinmal t)intcrgangcn, 
 ahn eg gef^ie:^! (happens) nie toicbcr. ©otl i(^ M " t e r gc^en unt 
 ti i|m fagcn ? 3* ^o6e bic aibftc^t gan3 licutf^Iahb ju burd^ r c i f e n. 
 auf mcincm SBegc nac^ SJten wcrbe ic^ b u r (^ 55rag rcifen. ^om= 
 ntcnSic, laffcn @ie un« unterfic^cn, ti toirb rcgnen. S!tt foUfl 
 bi(i^ nur unterjle'^cn biefc SEprc noc| einmol aufjumad^cn. l;ic 
 a:ro))^acn mctd^e SRapoIeon »on Scrlin nai^ |)aria na^m, |olten bie 
 9)reu^cn i» i e b e r, Sr wirb fti^ ni^t untcrflc^en btc« ju tuieber ^ o * 
 I e n . 9Jle|rerc 3flcgimenter unfcres Jpccrc« gingcn ju ten Deprei^em 
 ii 6 c r unb f(^»ad^ten uni 6etra^tlid^. Saffcn ©ie una biefc Scltion 
 iibcr g e ^ e n , fie ifl ju fc^wer fiir ©ie. 
 
 Theme XXXV. 
 
 Have you time to go through the new museum with us ? 
 The horse of our neighbor ran away and broke (jcrkad)) the 
 carriage. Go behind the curtain (SSor^ang, masc.) and tell 
 him to begin. He has deceived us, he is not honest. Can 
 you tell me who has best translated Schiller's poems? I 
 cannot cross this river, it is too stormy (piirmifi^). We have 
 traveled over all Germany, but never passed through Dan- 
 zig. The enemy evaded our army and entered (einbrtngcn) 
 [into] the city without molestation (^inberni^, neut.). Do 
 not associate with him. He has dared to come into my 
 house and to take a book from my library (SiMiot^e!, fern.) 
 without my consent (Semttligung, fern.). You (had) (t^aten) 
 better never [to] repeat it. Bring that book back again 
 at once. Some of the enemy's soldiers came (went) over to 
 
COMPOUND VERBS : SBPAKABLE AND INSEPABABLE. 
 
 293 
 
 ua. We must ^ass (iibergclen) this lesson, you will not under^ 
 stand it now ; we will learn it after we have finished the first 
 part of this book. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 SBJiffen ®ie, wcr ®(^illcr« ©cMi^te 
 ins Sngltfc^e' itfcerfe^t :§at? 
 
 3Carum fint ®ie mtt jenem SJJantte 
 umgegangcn ? 
 
 S5ifl tu je urn iic 9JJaucm ber 
 ©talit Serlin gegangen? 
 
 ipakn ©ie ttii^t in letter 3eit in 
 ten 3cituttgcn gclcfcn, bag Me 
 ®tabt6c|orten (city authori- 
 ties) Bcafc^tlgcn, fJe cinju? 
 reifen. 
 
 3(1 c3 tua'^r, i>a§ ©ic »on jenem 
 SKanne ^intergangen iBorbcn 
 jtnb? 
 
 ©laubfi bu, bog wir in blefem Reis 
 ncn ^a^ne (boat) werten ixltx 
 biefen gtug fc^cn fbnncn? 
 
 Sftegnete ti nii^t, alg i^r auf eurcm 
 aSegc nad^ §au|e ward ? 
 
 §akn @ic ie Bronfretc^ unb ©pas 
 nien burd^rei|l ? 
 
 3(^ glauBc, bet grofe englifc^e 
 ©(^riftflctler (author) Sulwcr 
 f^at fie iiierff|t. . ' 
 
 3(^ glauMc i|n, ba er aus einer 
 guten gamilte ifl (springs), 
 nteineiS 3?ertrauen« wurlig. 
 
 Slietn, ic^ 6in nte in SBerlin gciucfctt, 
 noc^ iuufte icb, bap bicfc ©tabt 
 son SJJauern umgeBcn ijt. 
 
 SCie lijnnte id) benn baeon getcfen 
 lafcen unb nic^t wiffcn, bag Ser* 
 lin i)on aKauern umgeben ifl? 
 
 3(^ mug 3'^nen nut geftclen, bag 
 ic^ nod^ nie einc Serliner' 
 3eitung gelefen |ak. 
 
 3a, er ^interging mt(^ etnmal, ater 
 bag foH auc^ bas le^te 5Wat fcin. 
 
 3i^ glauBe ti ni^t, ber ^a'^n ifl 
 
 jiemli^ Hein; ic^ benfe, wtr foUs 
 
 ten es nic^t triagen,barin iiter^ 
 
 jufe^en. 
 3<i, es regnete fe^r fiarf, toir waren 
 
 gcnijt^igt (obhged), unterju* 
 
 fle^en. 
 3^ ^abe Brontreic^ bur^reifl, akr 
 
 in ©ponictt bin i^ no^ nic ge? 
 
 wcfen. 
 
 ' Notice that adjectives derived from the names of cities are written 
 with capital initials ; as are also those denoting a language, if preceded 
 by the article (i. e., if they are used substantively). 
 
294 COMPOUND VEBBS : SEPABiBLK AND INSEPABAKLB. 
 
 §at Sool je kie 2BcIt umf^ifft C) ja, idi glaiiBc, er lat ftc mc^rere 
 (sailed around) ? 9JJal umfi^ifft. 
 
 SBarum f^ifften biefc ©cfcijfer i^re Tiai ®^iff ^atte cinen Scdt (leak) 
 SatuJigcn urn (transship) ? Befommen, unb fte iwarcn in 
 
 @efa|r (danger) ju |tn!cn. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 3)er Sluftrog. 
 
 5lls ®ujia» m., ^ijnig son ©c^wcien, ginnlanb kurc^reifle, trat' 
 elne afte 35auer«frau mit cinent SSricf in icr ^anb ju i^m' unt fo^tc" 
 ken Menatd^m, in gonj cinfac^ geflcitet rear unb ekn im Scgriff ju 
 5)tcrbc JU jlcigen, mit biefen 2Dorten Beim 2lrm :' „§ier l^ab" ic^ cinen 
 Srief, ben ic^ na^ ©tod^olm on ben ^onig fcnbcn mug, unb ber fiir 
 ntic^ son grower SBir^tigtcit ifl. 3|r rcifct »crmut:^Iiii^ bol^in juriiil, 
 erjcigt' mir tod^ bie ®efdllig!eit,* i|rt mitjunel^mcn ; 3|r fijnnt mlr 
 iaim^ ein 3)orto trfporen, unb ba 3:^r jo ' bort mo^l Befannt feib, fo 
 »3crbet 3|r i^n Icicfeter bur^Bringen fbnncn." S;cr ^onig iiBerna)|m 
 biefen 2luftrag mit einem giitigen giicfecln, fagte" ber gmu ein ScBettp^I,' 
 unb Berfprad^' i|r ben Sricf ju Beforgen. 
 
 ' Srnt— JU ijm, stepped up to Wm. 
 
 ' SBcim Mrm f often, to take one by the liand(ann> 
 
 ' The apostrophe in place of f. 
 
 * 2)ic ©ctaUigfeit crjctgcn, to do the favor. 
 
 ■> 3o, translate here : probably. 
 
 ' @in Seietoo^t fagen, to Ud adieu or to my fcereweU. 
 
NEUTEK AND INTEANSITIVB VEEBS. 295 
 
 LESSON XXXYI. Scttion 36, 
 
 Neuter and Intransitive Verbs." (SJlcutroIc obcr Uxibtt 
 3uglt(^e Sctttoattcr.) 
 
 Obs. I. — The conjugation of neuter and intransitive verbs 
 dififers from that of the active verbs only in the 
 compound tenses. Those neuter and intransitive 
 verbs that express a mere activity, a continuous 
 state, without a change or transition of their subject 
 from one state into another, such as : lekn, to live ; 
 fJ^en, to sit, form their compound tenses with '^aicn, 
 and those that express a change or transition of their 
 subject from one state into another, a motion from 
 one place to another, such as : fallen, to fall ; ge^cn, 
 to go, form their compound tenses with fciti,' when 
 the place or the manner of the motion is referred 
 to. But they are conjugated with ^abctt, when the 
 
 ' The transitive and intransitive verbs are not so carefully distin- 
 gfuished in English as in German, a great number of English verbs 
 being used both transitively and intransitively. In German, those verbs 
 only are transitive which, to be fully understood in their meaning, posi- 
 tively need an addition, viz. : the object. Intransitive verbs, on the other 
 hand, are those which are readily understood without such addition ; 
 first, because they either contain the object already in their own signi- 
 fication; e. g., antwottett, to answer, means to give an answer; teipe^m, to 
 assist, to bring assistance ; or, secondly, because the very idea of the verb 
 excludes the object ; as, jijeit, to sit ; fein, to be, &c. — RoBSE. 
 
 ' In German, verbs are either subjective or objective. A subjective 
 verb expresses either a quiescent state of tTie subject; e. g., id^ fc^Iafc; or, 
 an action confined to tJie agent; e. g., id^ gc'^e. Objective verbs express 
 action emanating from the subject or object, either directly, requiring 
 the object in the accusative ; e. g., Siefer ^nabe liett feintn Server; or in- 
 directly, and requiring the object in the genitive or dative ; e. g., £r 
 fpoltet fcintr; er fc^meid^clt 35«en. The subjective verbs correspond to 
 English neuter verbs; those of the objective verbs, which require the 
 genitive or dative, to the English intrandtvoe verbs; and those ob- 
 jective verbs, which require the accusative, correspond to the English 
 transitive verbs. 
 
296 NEUTEB AND ESTBANSITIVE YEEBS. 
 
 simple action is designated, or the verb is taken in 
 a figurative sense ; e. g., 3c^ Bit! in Die ©tatt gerittcn, 
 I have ridden (or rode) into the city ; but, ic^ \fabt 
 'Sai |)fcrb gerittcn, I have ridden the horse. 3c^ 6tn 
 i^m gcfotgt, I have followed him ; but, i(^ ^abe i^m 
 gefolgt, I have followed his advice or precepts. 
 
 A Heuter Verb conjugated with @eiti. 
 Stommttt, to come. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 3c^ fomme, I come, &c. 
 
 Imperfect. ^i^ lam, I came 
 First Future. 3cb ioerte tommcn, I shall come 
 Fira Cond. 3^ iBurle tommen, I should come 
 Perfect. 3db Bin gefommen, I ham come* 
 
 ku Sijt gefommen, thou hast come 
 er ifl gefommen, he has come 
 »oir finli gefommen, we have come 
 i^r felt (®ie (inH) gefommen, you have come 
 fie (Int gefommen, they have come 
 Pluperfed. Sf^ War gefommen, I had come 
 
 iiu tvarft gefommen, thou hadst come 
 er war gefommen, he had come 
 ttir tuaren gefommen, we had come 
 i:^r toaret (©ie waren) gefommen, you had come 
 fic waren gefommen, they had come 
 Second Fvi. 3c^ wcric gefommen fcin, I shaU have come 
 Second Cond. 3<^ i»urt)e gefommen fcitt, I should have come 
 
 Note. — ^Neuter and intransitive verbs have, in German, aa 
 in English, no passive voice ; but some of them occur impeiv 
 Bonally. For such see Lesson XXXVIII., Obs. V. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ber ©tifter, the founder ber ©aal, the hall 
 
 ber git'^rcr, the leader >^bie 3tuflage, the edition 
 
 bte SrBnung, the coronation bie 3ctt, the time 
 * Compar3 English, I am come, &c. 
 
HEUTEB ABD DtTBANSITIVE VERBS. 297 
 
 eilen, to hasten i^rjie^en, to educate, bring up 
 tanjcn, to dance erf^ctncn, to appear 
 
 juriidf e^rcn, to return " ji(^ er^i^ett, to get heated 
 unter U c g e n, to succumb fpajleren ge^cn, to take a walk 
 
 aWaufctt, to expire reifcn, to travel 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON NEUTER AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 ©ic finb gu fd^ncH gclaufen, ©ie |a6en jtc^ itiii^t. Wnn DnM ifl 
 geflcrn angefommen, unt wirt jtuel SBod^en id una Hetben. §at)cn 
 <Ste le^te Stadjt gut gefc^lafen ? 9Zcin, tc^ bin -ju frii^ ju Sctte ge* 
 gangen. Mr ^aben lange in S^eutfdjlanb gcwo^nt. "Lai SRcid) 
 3lIe]canJcr^ tti ®ro|en ifl noc^ bent Sote feincg ©tifters untcrgegangen. 
 Die jc^ntaufenb ®rtc(^en, wcli^c mit tent Si^rug gegen ten ^iinig 
 Slrtajjcryeg ntarf^irt woren, fine in i^r SSaterlant juriidgefe|rt, noc^tem 
 i:^r %ii^xtv in ter ©c^Iac^t bel Sunaxa fcinen gcinten unteriegen war. 
 SBir rtni> bei ter ^rbnung SflapoIeonS III., in 5)ari3, im 3a:^re 1852, 
 gegenmiirtig gcwefen. 3^' bin '§eutc SKorgen urn fed)g U^r aufgcjlan^ 
 ten. Unfere ^tit -ift obgclaufen ; fommen ©ie, lapn ©ic xmi eilen. 
 ©ie l^aben tie ganje Jlacbt getanjt, unt ntac^ten einen folc^en Siirm, 
 tag ic^ nic^t |obe fi^Iafen lijnnen. Ser §unt |at gcbcttt, aU ob 3c' 
 ntant ptte einbrec^en woUen. 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON NEUTER AND TRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 Why did you run so ? I walked much slower and have 
 arrived as soon as you. Have you traveled long in Prance? 
 When did you arrive at Paris? We were present at the 
 coronation of the king of Prussia, Frederick IV., at Berlin, 
 in the year 1840. I had come from Paris, in order (unt) to 
 study German with Professor Weber at Berlin. My friend 
 was bom in America, but he was educated in Germany. 
 How did you sleep last night ? I thank you, I slept pretty 
 well ; if they had not danced in the hall, opposite my room. 
 
298 
 
 NEUTEB AHD INTBANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 sl ishould have been able to sleep better. I have taken a 
 walk thid forenoon. The little boy has fallen into the river. 
 
 Obs. n.— As in English, a number of transitive verbs, -with a 
 causative signification, are derived from intransitive 
 verbs by a change of the radical vowel ; e. g., ft^en, 
 to sit ; fc^cit, to seV Most of these intransitive verbs 
 are irregular and form their compound tenses with 
 feitt, but the transitives are all regular and form 
 their compound tenses with ^dben. 
 
 Intraimtive. 
 eittf^Iafcn, to fall asleep: 
 ertrinfen, to be drowned: 
 fa^ren, to drive: 
 fallen, to fall: 
 flicpen, to flow: 
 l^angen, to hang: 
 lanten, to sound: 
 Uegen, to lie: 
 fangen, to suck: 
 fc^iuimmen, to swim: 
 flnlen, to sink: 
 figcn, to sit: 
 fpringcn, to leap, to jump, to 
 
 burst, to crack: 
 {iel^en, to stand: 
 fleigen, to mount: 
 trinlcn, to drink: 
 serfdjtuinticn, to vanish: 
 Wiegen, to weigh, to be of 
 
 weight: 
 
 Transitwe and reguUw. 
 
 einfc^lafcrn, to put w luU asleep 
 ertrantcn, to drown 
 ffi^rcn, to guide 
 fdactt, to fell 
 fldgcn, to float 
 ijangen, to hang up 
 tauten, to ring the bell 
 legcn, to lay, to put 
 faugen, to suckle 
 fc^wcmmen, to bathe horses 
 fcnten, to (make) sink 
 fe^en, to set, to place 
 fprengctt, to break open, to 
 
 blow up 
 flcHcn, to put upright 
 fieigern, to raise, to enhance 
 trfinlen, to water 
 »erf(^tt»enben, to waste 
 isilgen, to weigh, to ascertain 
 
 weight 
 
 Note. — The intransitive verbs, luuten, faugeit, fle'^en, trinten, 
 and tvieseitf form their compound tenses with |aien. 
 
 ' These verbs were more numerous in the Anglo-Saxon than they are 
 at present in English. (Comp. Fowler's Bng. Language, p. 303, § 307, 11.) 
 
NEUTER AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 299 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 bcr Sefc^I^^aSer, tlie commander Cet ©tutcnt, the student 
 bie Sdegicrung, the government tcr Siirm, the noise 
 ber SScrtrag, the agreement, con- ctuiiit^tn, to move out 
 
 tract ®er g c 6 e n, to hand over 
 
 ber So'^n, the reward, pay jcrkcc^cn, to break 
 
 ber aCirti, the landlord, host bicncn, to serve 
 ber ©rafccn, the ditch ttttet:^cn, to rent, hire 
 
 ber gieiter, the rider bauerit, to last 
 
 ^ ber ©cfanbte, the ambassador ^ unsorrtc^tig, careless 
 bie Zxefft, the stairs ^4tngefa^r, about 
 
 Reading Exercise XXXVI. 
 
 aSii'^renb »ir bie St^c fMtctt, ifl mein Dnfet uom ?)fcrbc gefaUen. 
 S^roit ifl ixbn ben §cHe«t>ont gefc^womtnen. $aM i^r bie ^in'nt '^eutc 
 gefc^wemmt? SCieBiet ^\mi wicgcn ®ic ? £)arf ic^ ©ie 6ittcn biefe 
 (Sa^c ju erwagcn ? @efii:^rt uon clnem foli^en Scfeitl^^oier, fonnten 
 bie 3;ru))i3Ctt nit^t gcfc^Iagen trerbch. SBotin |Inb (Sie tton Serlin ofc? 
 gefa'^ren ? Stai^bein cr olt fein ®clb Bcrf^wcnbct ^atte, Berf(^reanb er 
 ))Io^ti(^, unb man ^at nie wieber »on i^m ge|i3rt. ®ie fe^te baS ^tnb 
 ouf bicfetie Sanf,, ouf wetcfeer wir fof en. Sriinfc bie ^ferbe, ei luirb 
 l>iit, unb bann fomme unb trtnfe bcinen Coffee, cr wtrb tatt werben. 
 Unfer SBirtl |otunfere ?Wiet|e gej^eigert, hjtr loerben ju Djlern (Easter) 
 augjie^len, wir miijfen auc^ 3U Biele SretJpen jielgcn. ^18 ic^ ii6er ben ®ro= 
 ten fpringen woHte, fprcngte eln Steitcr ba^cr unb iikrgaB ntir biefen 
 Sriff fiir @ie, Sie ©lode |at geiftutct, ti i(l 3cit in bie ^irc^c ju 
 gc|cn. Der amerifanifi^e ©efonbte, ^crr Bancroft, ifl ^eute na^ 
 SJliinc^en gereijl, urn mit ber kirifc^en Stegierung cinen Sertrag ju 
 fc^Iic^cn. 3^ idbi gattj Snglanb burd^rcifi unb Hn aui^ in granf* 
 rcic^ gereijl. SBcnn bu nic^t fo frii| ju Sette gegangen tuorefi, wiirbejl 
 bu Bejfer gcfc^Iafen f^ahn. SRe^rere ®f(a»en finb ani bcm ^aufe 
 i^reS ^errn entflo^en. 
 
300 NEDTEn AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 Theme XXXVI. 
 
 Our servant bathed the horses, while we swam across the 
 river. My sister weighs ninety-six pounds. Consider well, 
 how long you have to serve without pay. The tree, which 
 the worlanen felled, fell against our house, and broke aU the 
 windows. We could not drive across the bridge, we were 
 obliged to lead the horse through the river. As soon as he 
 shall have spent (wasted) his money, he will suddenly disap- 
 pear, and we shall never see him again. The woman set the 
 basket on the bench, on which we sat yesterday. The land- 
 lord has raised the rent of our neighbor; he wiU rent a 
 house, where he will not have to moimt so many stairs. 
 That boy has jumped over the high fence. They have blown 
 up the lock, and have stolen all our money. The river flows 
 by our door, we have a magnificent view. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 SBattn ifl bte crflc 3luflage S^rcr SSor «ngefS:^r ac^t 9Wonaten, Bin* 
 SIemcntor*®rommatil crfi^ics nen welc^er gtit trei 3luflagcrt 
 ncn? BerJauft worsen |tnD. 
 
 2Caren ©ic M ier ^rBnung ^af D ncttt, bte ^riinung StatJoIcona 
 poleong I. in f arts gegen:; I. fant) im ^a.'i^vt 1804 flatt, 
 jBiirtig ? oBer i6) toax id Ser fRapoteona 
 
 m. gegentDiirtig. 
 
 ©inb ©ie knge in granlrcidb ges 3c^ Bin mc^f ati brei ^af^xi in 
 rctfl? grantrei^ gewefen, uno Bin 
 
 bann isieber in mein SBatcrlanb 
 juriidgcfc^rt. 
 
 SSarum f5nb ©ie fo gelaufcn, ii^ ©ic Ibnncn Stct fc^neUcr ge^cn aU 
 Bin »iel longfamcr gegangen, ic^, unb ic^ tnufte crjl noc^ 
 unb Bin bcnnoc^ jur rec^ten * mcinc Srtefe ouf bic ^o^ tro* 
 3ctt ongelommen ? gen. 
 
 ipoBt i|r bte ^jnU l^eute ge* 3a, Wtr ^oBen |le gefc^wcmmt aU 
 fc^wemmt? wir iiBcr ben gtug fd^wammen. 
 
NETJTEK AND tNTEANSITIVE VEEBS. 301 
 
 ^aSen ©ie bic gro^e Slc^e loor 3a, wlr fattten fte ^eute, unb unferc 
 S^rerS^iiregefaUt? arkiter waren fo unttorjtc^tig, 
 
 bag |te mir Beina^^e auf ben 
 ^opf gefatten tuiire. 
 3fl c« ma^r, baf bein S^effe aK [etn 3a, mein licber greunb, leibcr iji 
 ®elti »crf(^n)cnbet 'i^at, unb je^t eg nur ju toa:§r. 
 })lD^Iic^ »er|'(^n)unCen i^ ? 
 ^0^ bu bie 9)ferte fi^on getranft? Sleln, okr tc^ wiK pe tranten, )'o= 
 
 Mxi i6) nteinm ^affce getrun* 
 fen ^abe. 
 Jpakn ®ic le^tc 9loc^t nid^t gut tflein, ii^ fonnte nti^t fWett, bie 
 gcfi^lofen ? ©tubenten mir gegcniiber maS^^ 
 
 ten ju »lel Sftrnt. 
 SJlc lange f^at bie SSorjlelluttg gc* ®ie toat iimli&i furj, flc mt 
 jlern Slbenb gebauert ? fc^on »or jel^n U:§r aus. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 Set banlBare Sane. 
 
 Sin armer ©ttoe, ber oug bem $aufe fetneg ^errn entflnl^en ttior, 
 tiourbe jum Sobe »erurt|eilt. SJian ful)rtc i^n auf einen gro^en fla^, 
 ml&itx mil iKauern umgefien toor, unb lieg einen fur(^tbaren SBwen 
 fluf i|n log. a:aufenbe son SJlenfc^en roaren 3^«gen biefeg ©c^au* 
 fpiete. 
 
 3Der Some f^rang grimmig auf ben armen 5!Jlenf(^en; altein })I6^Iic^ 
 Blicb er fie^cn, toebelte mit bem ©c^weife, :^itt)fte' »olI greube urn i^n 
 Serum unb (ectte i^^m freunbltc^ bie Jponbe. Sebermann »ermunberte" 
 fi(^' unb fragte ben ©llasen, tt)ie° bas fomme.' 
 
 ©er ©flase erja^ttc gotgenbeg: „%U ic^ meinem ^erm entlaufen 
 ttar, Berbarg ic| mi(^' in einer §bile mitten' in ber SBuftc. 5)ann 
 
 ' SBolI gfrcube Jcrum pjifen, tojwmp about fuU of joy (i. e., joyfully). 
 ° ^iii bcrlounberni to be astonished. 
 ' Wit baS {omme, Ju>w that came to pass. 
 * Wiidi, myself. 
 
 ' SItttten, in the midst of; adverb formed of the noun bie 3Kitte, the 
 middle. 
 
302 KEFLEXIVE VKSBB. 
 
 fam auf cinmal' bicfcr Urn |crrin, ttinfeltc unb jeigte mir fctnc Sa^c, 
 in bcr ein grofcr i:;orn ftad. 3c^ 303 i^m ben Dorn l^croug, unt son 
 ber Beit on uerforgtc mit^ tcr £Bwe mil SBilBprct, unJ »ir lebtcn in 
 ber $o^le frieclic^ jufammen. Set ter te^ten ^aofi »u«cn wir gcfon* 
 gen unt Son tinanUx gctrennt. Stun freut \i6f tai gute S^icr, ntii!^ 
 toieber gefunten ju '^aBen." 
 
 Slttca SSolf war libcr bie SanttarWt biefca teilben S^icre^ entjiicft, 
 unb bat' laut urn ®nabe= fiir ben ©flatten unb ben Sijwen. J5cr 
 ©flase tttune fretgeIo(fcn unb rci(^lic6 fcefc^enft." Der £b»e folgtc 
 i^m ioic ein treuer Jpunb unb Uiti immer bei i:^m, o|nc Semanb ein 
 Seib an t^un. 
 
 < ii » li > 
 
 LESSON XXXVn. SeftionS'!, 
 
 Eeflexive Verbs (SRudBcjiiglteOc Scittniirter). 
 
 Obs. I. — In German, as in English, nearly every transitive 
 verb may be changed into a reflexive verb, but there 
 are also a great many verbs used in German only 
 as reflexive verbs, the idea of which is in English 
 expressed by the active or passive voice of simple 
 verbs.' Most of these verbs govern the reflexive 
 pronouns in the accusative; e. g., 3c^ gettij^nc mi^, 
 I accustom myself, &c. ; but there are a few that 
 govern them in the dative ; e. g., 3* bilf e ittit ein, 
 I fancy (to myself), &c. Reflexive verbs form their 
 compound tenses vrith l^abett.' 
 
 ' Muf cinmal, suddenly, all of a svM&n. 
 
 ^ gfreut ftcfe, is happy. 
 
 ' ttin ®nabc 6itten> to ask or heg pardon. 
 
 * 0ieti$Iti6 beft^enfen, togirne rich presents. . 
 
 ' For verbs reflexive in German, but not in Englisi, see page 304. 
 
 ' The verb fld^ icteugt fein, to be conscious of, is conjugated both in the 
 simple and compound tenses with the auxiliary fein; as, 3^ Mn uiir if 
 wupt, &c., 3(1) bin mir imv^i BCtncfcni &c. 
 
BEFLEXIVE TEBBS. 
 
 803 
 
 Oonjugation of a Eeflexive Verbi 
 
 (Sic^ freuen, to rejoice. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Pres. ft<3^ freuen, to rejoice t**^ freuenb, rejoicing 
 
 Perf. p^ gcfrcut ^abm, to have ft^ flefreut :^akn5, having re- 
 rejoiced joiced 
 Imperatvee. 
 Sing, freue bii^, rejoice (thou) 
 Plur. freuet eud^, rejoice (ye) 
 
 freuen ©ic flc^, rejoice (ye) 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ic6 freue mi&i, if I rejoice 
 
 tu freue^ iic^ 
 
 er ^eue ftdi 
 
 loir freuen unS 
 
 i^r freuet eu(^ ) 
 
 ©ic freuen fti^ S 
 
 {le freuen ftd^ 
 
 tc6 freue mi^, I rejoice 
 
 lu freuejl bi^ 
 
 er freut fi^ 
 
 wlr freuen mtS 
 
 i^r freuet cu<^ ) 
 
 ©ic freuen fi<i> J 
 
 Pe freuen ftc|» 
 
 i^ freucte mtc^, if I rejoiced 
 
 ku freuetejl bic^ 
 
 er freuetc fic^ 
 
 wtr freueten unS, etc. 
 
 li) freute tni^, I rejoiced 
 
 bu freuteft bic^ 
 
 er freute fl^ 
 
 toir freuten nni, etc. 
 
 i^ f^cAt ittid^ gefreut, I have re- i(| ^a6e mic^ flefreut, if I have re- 
 joiced joiced 
 
 bu ^ajl bic^ gefreut, etc. bu |abeft bt^ gefreut, etc. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 iS^ ^atte mic^ gefreut, I had re- ic^ l^dtte tfii&i gefreut, if I had re- 
 joiced joiced 
 
 bu :^flttejt btd^ gefreut, etc. bu l^Stteft bic^ gefreut, etc. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 i(|»erbeitti<^ freuen, I shall re- ic^ werbe nttc^ freuen, if I shall 
 joice rejoice 
 
 bu wirft bl^ freuen, etc. bu werccfl bi^ freuen, etc. 
 
304 
 
 BEFLEXIVE YESBS. 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 ic^ toerbc tttic^ gefreut l^abtn, I 
 
 shall have rejoiced 
 t)u ivirft t)i(^ gefreut i^abtn, etc. 
 
 First Cojulitional. 
 id^ wiirbe mic^ fceuen, I should 
 
 rejoice 
 tiu wiirDeji Cii^ freuen, etc. 
 
 ic^ tverte mic^ gefreut ^a'ben, if I 
 
 shall have rejoiced 
 ku werneji U6^ gefreut ^o6en, etc. 
 Second Conditioned. 
 
 ic^ wtoe mi(| gefreut :^a6en, J 
 
 should have rejoiced 
 iu wiirjejl ti^ gefreut :^akn, etc. 
 
 Verbs reflezive in German but not in English. 
 
 f!c^ annel^men, gen. to take care of 
 
 flc^ mitrrtt to change 
 
 '^d) anfc^tilett (iu), to prepare 
 
 \\ii) orflcrm to be vexed 
 
 (ic^ ttuffu^ren, to hehave 
 
 ftd) auf^alten, to sojourn, stay 
 
 ft(| auf^alten (ittet), to criticise 
 
 fti$ auflofcn, to be dissolved 
 
 {!<$ au^ern, to express one's mind 
 
 fic6 Bebantefl/ to thank 
 
 (td) iebcnten/ to reflect, consider 
 
 fti$ Bebieneitf gen. to make use of 
 
 fid; iniltn, to make haste 
 
 ft^ 6eftttbeit, to be, find one's self 
 
 (feel) 
 fic^ 6e(Ieigen, (irr.) ) to endeavor 
 W ieflctgigen, (rey.) f diligently 
 |i4 iegeiertf to go to, to happen 
 fii^ iegnSseUr to be satisfied with 
 fliS) Je^elfen, to do vrithont 
 flc^ Mt1)xm, to repent 
 (ic^ ieRagcn (iiier), to complain of 
 flc^ ktitmmern (urn), to care for 
 fi$ lelaufen (auf), to amomit to 
 f}c^ (emad^tigm, ^e». to take posses- 
 sion 
 fl(i^ tcmfi^en, to take the trouble 
 fli!^ Sene^mm, to behave 
 ^S) iaat1)m, to deliberate 
 flc^ tcrauf^en, to get drunk 
 {!i$ ierufcttr to appeal, refer to 
 
 fi4 tefc^wercn, to complain 
 
 (tt^ Seiimten, fl'era. to recollect 
 
 fi^ it^fxatim, to converse 
 
 fic^ bcfircicn, to endeavor 
 
 ^H) Betragen, to behave 
 
 flc^ 6etrintcn, to get drunk 
 
 fid^ ittxvLim (iiter), to be a£aicted 
 
 f5(^ kwegeii/ to move 
 
 fic^ teweiSen (urn), to apply or woo (for) 
 
 jtc^ Sejic^en auf, to refer to 
 
 fi(^ trc^cn, to break ; to vomit 
 
 (t^ HStn, to stoop 
 
 (td) cinOitbtn, ace. to be conceited, dat. 
 
 to imagine 
 ltd) etnlaJlTcn (in), to enter into, meddle 
 iiil emfjoretii to revolt [with 
 
 (tc^ cntfernen, to withdraw 
 ft^ ent^alteitf gen. to abstain 
 fii^ cntf(i^eibcn, ) 
 fic^ entf^Iiegcn, ] *° ' 
 |lc^ erJarmcni pera. to have pity 
 f{$ ttbreifleni to dare 
 |ic^ migncn/ wnper*. to happen 
 fi(^ erfrciien, Sfsra. to enjoy 
 flc^ ergcbetti to surrender 
 fi^ ergojtit, to delight 
 \iS) erl^olctl, to recover 
 fic^ ettnnern, gen. to recollect 
 fiii^ etnei|ten» to make a living 
 fic^ erKIteit, to catch cold 
 pi) ertutibigen, to inquire 
 
 I resolve 
 
B£FL£XIV£ VEItBS. 
 
 305 
 
 ft($ freiten, to rejoice 
 
 fic^ fugen (in), to comply (with) 
 
 ftc^ fii^Ien, to be sensible of 
 
 pc^ fiir^ten (»or), to be afraid of 
 
 S\^ gebuloen, to have patience 
 
 jti^ gefaUen/ to be pleased 
 
 I'ic^ gefeUeiii to associate 
 
 fi(^ groimen (u6m), to grieve 
 
 ftc^ fallen, to keep on this or that side 
 
 ftc^ ^angen (an), to stick to 
 
 ft^ iitten (Dor), to beware of 
 
 ftc^ irten, to be mistaken 
 
 fti| lagetn, to lie down, to encamp 
 
 ft($ legen, to lie down 
 
 ftc^ me^ren, to increase in number 
 
 {t($ mtfc^en, to meddle, mix 
 
 fii^ nci^etn, dat. to approach 
 
 ftd) neigen, to bow, to incline 
 
 ft^ ntcbcrlapn, to settle 
 
 jlcl niebcrlegen, to lay down 
 
 fi(^ ofnen, to open 
 
 fii^ regen, to stir 
 
 ftc^ tubmen, gen. to boast, gloiy 
 
 ft($ ru^ren, to bustle 
 
 ft^ fi^amen, to be ashamed 
 
 ftc^ fi^iitcn, irnpera. to be proper 
 
 jic^ fc^le))i!en, to drag along 
 
 (tc^ fi^miegcn, to cling to 
 
 (tc^ fe^nen (nad^), to long /or 
 
 jt^ fenfen, to sink 
 
 % fe^en, to sit down 
 
 ft(i fuutcn, to make haste 
 
 n<i lieSen (aW ob), to feign, to pretend 
 
 |ic^ fiiirstn, to plunge 
 
 ft^ tauf^en, to err, to be disappointed 
 
 fic^ ttenncn, to separate, to part 
 
 p(^ tiugen, to be mistaken 
 
 fi^ itbergeSen, to surrender, vomit 
 
 P^ umfe^en, to look back or about 
 
 fi(i^ untet^attcn/to converse with.amuse 
 
 ftc^ unter|le5en,to venture.dareCone'u self 
 
 ft(^ scrcinbern, to change 
 
 jic^ serfcreilen, to spread 
 
 ft^ sereittigen, to join with 
 
 ^i) veige^en, to commit an oflfence 
 
 jt(^ ser^eitat^en, to marry 
 
 fic^ DEtitren, to go astray 
 
 fli^ serlaffcn (auf), to rely upon 
 
 ft(i| serlteien, to fall in love 
 
 jt^ DErfammeln, to meet, to assemble 
 
 (tc^ »«fiJ)W5ten, to conspire 
 
 jl^ verfe^en, to make a mistake 
 
 P^ setfijoiten, to be (too) late 
 
 ft^ verPel^en (;u), to accede to 
 
 pd) sorpellEn, to dissemble 
 
 pc§ watsen, to wallow, to welter 
 
 pi^ tseigErn, to refuse 
 
 p^ ttcnben, to turn 
 
 pi| roi5£rj£^en, dot. to oppose 
 
 pc^ WiEbtr^olEn, to be repeated 
 
 p^ wunbern (u6tt), to wonder 
 
 pc^ janfEn, to quarrel 
 
 pi^ SerPrEUsn, to disperse 
 
 Pi| jtEl^En, to draw towards, to warp 
 
 pc^ jurudEiie^n, to retire 
 
 p(^ jutiagEn, impers. to occur 
 
 Obs. n. — The following verbs require the reflexive pronoun 
 to be in the dative : 
 
 |?4i anma^in, to usurp 
 
 fic^ ausbitten, to request 
 
 ft(^ einBiltcn, to imagine, fancy 
 
 ftc^ (Die greiieit) ne|mcn, to take 
 
 the liberty 
 |!d^ getraucn,* to dare. 
 
 flc^ serfc^apn, to procure 
 jlc^ fd^inel(^eIn,*toflatterone'sself 
 ft^ Borncl^mcn, to take the reso- 
 lution, make up one's mind 
 fl6) ttorflctlcn, to imagine 
 ffc^ m'iii t^un, to hurt one's self 
 
 * These govern the dative of person, and accus. or gen. of thing. See p.375. 
 
306 EETLEXIVE VEBBS. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Present {Indieative.) Imperfect {Indie.) 
 
 ic^ 6ttte tttir auS, I request ic^ t^«t tnir mf), I hurt myself 
 bu Mttcfl bit mi, thou re- fcu t|atefi btr m% thou hurtest 
 
 questest thyself 
 
 er bittet ftc^ mi, he requests er t|at (ic| we:^, he hurt himself 
 Wir bitten uni ani, we request tsir t^attn vmi toe'^, we hurt 
 
 ourselves 
 t^t bittet euc^ mi, \ you re- i'^r t^otet eu(^ toe^, ) you hurt 
 ©ie bitten (td^ au«, 3 quest ©ic t^aten fldfe we^, ) yourselves 
 fie bitten ftii^ mi, they request (ie t|aten |t^ tt)C^, they hurt 
 
 themselves 
 &c,, &c. 
 
 Obs. in. — ^The following phrases are made up in German 
 with reflexive verbs : ' 
 
 Semii^en ©ie fUfy, take the pains. 
 
 ®cben ©ie fii^ ni^t bie SBtft^e, do not take the trouble. 
 
 ©ie ^ot fi(^ fe^r seriinbert, she is quite altered. 
 
 Tiai SBettcr 'mUvttfii^, the weather changed. 
 
 ©er ffiinb mirb ftc^ legcn, tEe wind wiU cease. 
 
 3(| toerbe inic^ nac^ f arts begebcn, I shall go to Paris. 
 
 Sentfen @le fiify auf ml^, appeal to me. 
 
 3i^ ent^olte wti^ be« SBcinea, I abstain from wine. 
 
 SBir fii^ten UttS gliiiflic^, we feel happy. 
 
 I;ie Spre ijffncte ftc|>, tte door opened. 
 
 ^Re^men ©ie ft«^ in Slcfct, take care. 
 
 ' Whenever neuter verbs, usually conjugated with fet«, in compound 
 tenses, are used reflexively witli an adjective, they form their compound 
 tenses with ^aben instead ; e. g., fiii) la^m reitm, to ride one's self lame, i. e., 
 to make one's self lame by riding ; fUt) raiibe lOHfen, to run one's self 
 tired, to make one's self tired by running (also used for incessant walk- 
 ing). The German language abounds in such elliptical expressions, in 
 which ma^en is understood to refer to the adjective employed ; thus : 
 5S) f)tiit tniij U1)m geritten, is tantamount to, ic^ ^abe mic^ imii reiteit lajm 
 f)entad]tf or the adjective may be converted into a substantive preceded 
 by ]u; thus, instead of fi^ tobt arBeiten: fid) }u Sotie atietten. 
 
REFLEXIVE TEEBS. 307 
 
 Die ©ac^c tjcr'^olt fl<^ \o, that is the way the matter stands. 
 <Bit jerflreuten fic^, they dispersed. 
 
 SBenSe ii^ an len ^bnig, apply (address thyself) to the king. 
 ®te riic^cn ftc^ an i^rcn geinliett, they revenge themselves on 
 their enemies. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ft^ einbilccit, to imagine (one's ftc^ fd)Smen, to be ashamed 
 
 self ^4»eHien, to pasture 
 
 |t(^ offnen, to open (itself) melfcn, to milk 
 
 (t^ geffiij^nen, to accustom one's iDiciererfenncn, to recognize 
 
 self again 
 
 fic^ trren, to be mistaken ijcrfc^iJnert, improved (for the 
 
 fic^ crtnncm, to remember better) 
 
 ftil iintcrn, to change scrgrbf ert, enlarged 
 
 Reading Exercise XXXVII. 
 
 3(^ f^abt tni^ geint; ©ie jlnfc nii^t ber, ten ic^ fu^e. ^leibc^ ku 
 ti(i^ jeten SRorgen fclbjl an? ^axl V. |at ti sicflcic^t im ^(ofier Be* 
 reut, Bom Z^xont gefliegen ju fein. SBit; erinnern vmi gern ber 3cit, 
 Me »ir in ^axii jufcracbten. 3(^ 6itte niir Slu^^e aui3, t:§r tter^altet 
 cu^ ni^t ru^ig genug. S« freute i^it fe^r, bic^ ju fc'^cn. SBefintcn 
 ©te |i(^ ni^t tco^I ? ®te fe^cn Blfl^ aua. ©ie tuetgern ltd), cine 
 ©telle anjune^men, urn (for) wel^e filtcre 9J?iinncr oil ©ie ftii 6e* 
 worten ^afccn; glauBen ©ie mix, biefer ^ai^nrnt^ f(^i(ft fid) (becomes) 
 nl(^t fiir 3^r filter. SBie bie Si^ittn fic^ iinbern I S« ijl niebertrac^tig, 
 flc^ an fcinen geinben ju rSdjen. Orit|cr weitcten bie ^ijnige bie 
 Jpeerbenj l^eutjutagc (novr-a-days) fc^amen |t(^ bie ^natcn, tie ^ii^e 
 JU mclfen. Du mu^t bir Borne|men, frii^er aufjufielen. <ii t|at «tir 
 n)e|, i|n fo Icruntcrgcfommcn ju fc^en. Iiarf id^ mir bie grei^eit 
 ne^men, ©ie ju Bcfuc^en ? Sr tiltct fi^ ein, einer bcr grB^ten SJiiinncr 
 ber Se^tjcit (of the present day) ju fein. Scrlin ^at f?(^ in ben 
 le^tcn jwanjig ^a^nn fe^r serfc^bnert unb »crgrb^crt. ©u mu§t bic^ 
 nic^t ff^iimen, bcutfc^ ju fprec^en; i^ tuiU btr gern ojif attc ieinc gragen 
 
308 reflexive: yebbs. 
 
 antwortcn, unb beine ge|Icr ucrBcffcm. 3m iKorgmlanbc (Orient, 
 or East) wcrten ilc iWai^te oft unter fretem §immcf 3ugeirac^t ; fiir 
 unfer ^Hma wiirbe (fic^) tiefe ©Ute nlc^t »)0jfcn. 
 
 Theme XXXVII. 
 
 John hurt himself very much. I accustom myself to rise 
 early. Were you not mistaken ? He has changed very much. 
 The door opened, and before me I saw my cousin. We ab- 
 stain from all strong drinks, be they wine, beer, or brandy 
 (Sranntwein). Never revenge thyself on thy enemy. I do 
 not flatter myself to be the inventor of a new method (5JJe* 
 t^otc), but I hope that the careful (forgfiiltig) preparation of 
 the book will procure me many friends. After his return 
 from Elba, Napoleon dared to re-open (wietcrcrbjfncn) the wax. 
 You must resolve to be more careful (to take [yourself] more 
 care) in the future (3ufunft). I take the liberty to inform 
 you, that I reached (crreiii^cii) this city last evening, but that 
 I will only remain a day or two (translate : one or two days). 
 Why do you refuse to remain with us [any] longer? Apply 
 yourself to learn German, and in one year you may go to Ger- 
 many and study at the university. Apply to the king, and I 
 am confident (gci»t^) that he will procure (scrf^affcn) you the 
 right to return (juriicffe^ren) to your fatherland. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 Da« grii^flud (breakfast) i^ fers 9Jein, aier in fitnf ^Kinuten tserbe 
 
 tig ; 'lofcen ©ic fJd^ fi^on gc* tc^ tnic^ gewafc^en %9btu. 
 
 wafc^cn ? 
 Sannft tu bli^ titd^t feI6|l anllei? ^lein, ic^ getrauc cs (dare) mir 
 
 ten? nid^t; meinc SUluttcr fagt, id| 
 
 Bin ju ficin baju. 
 Jpat cr M nt^t fe^r scrSnticrt, feit Sr |at f{(^ fo seranbcrt, bag i(^ i:^rt 
 
 trlr i^ jum le^ten 9JlaI gcfc^cn ? taunt wlcberertannte. 
 ^Bnncn ©ic fief) nic^t gcwB^nen, 3(^ witrbc jcben a:ag urn fitnf U^r 
 
 \x^<x aufjuftc^cn? aufjic^^en, wcnn \&i um neun 
 
 U|r 3U Sette ge^en f&nnte. 
 
REFLEXIVE VEBBS. 
 
 309 
 
 SSie Bcfinten Sic |t(^ unb SW 
 wert^e (worthy) gamilie, weitn 
 ic^ fragcn barf '^ 
 
 §at fic^ tag Setter nic^t gciinSert? 
 
 SBann wirfl in tic^ nod^ Serlin 
 
 Begefcen (to go) ? 
 SQarum ^ait i^r euc^ benn ni^t in 
 
 3lc^t genommen ? 
 
 Sflimntt cr fi(^ ntc^t gar (alto- 
 gether) 3U stele grci^eiten ? 
 
 SBarum gctBii^ncn ©ie fi(^ nic^t 
 Seutfc^ 3u fprei^en ? 
 
 §crjli(^cn DanI fiir kic giitige 
 
 5^ac^frage, mir kftnbcn vim Mt 
 
 rcc^t iBo^I. 
 3a, i^ glaufce, wir t»crben 3lcgen 
 
 ielommen. 
 ©oBatc ic^ meinc ©tuMen (study) 
 
 auf tern Soltege Bcenbigt |abe. 
 Iffiir ita^mcn un« in 2l(^t, aber eiS 
 
 war fc|r buntct, unb tuir fonn* 
 
 ten nid^t fc^en. 
 3a, ic^ tenfe cr ifl cin unucrfi^iims 
 
 ter ©cfeU (fellow); man miipte 
 
 i^n eineS Sejferen fccle|rcn (to 
 
 teach). 
 3^ laBe ti mir f(^on nte'^rcre Wai 
 
 »orgenomraen, a6er mein Sdxuf 
 
 bcr fc^amt fti^ ti mit mir ju 
 
 fprcc^cn. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 
 Vf^^se^V^B^r*^ -r^ta-^^^^^j ^^^afl& 
 
 5<2-*es^ ^^-^f^^s 
 
 s <*:^r*^^;^^9*^|^aSft-?^^ ^#sS2-^3Sa *=;«2-^^« ^P4!f'-A^ 
 ■■ ^^■^^'f^. l-^^j^ '^^iC'iV^ ^^^-IV^^ *^^i^^ 
 
 ^*^^ -^f^*-/^^ y^\^ii^A^ 
 
 ^tt***'^**-!^-*^ 
 
 ■ Notice that a pronoun in direci address is written with a capital 
 initial. 
 
310 
 
 BEFLEXIVE VERBS. 
 
 ^"^-i^^iif-^^^iv-** %_J^^^Sf-*^^ 
 
 
 •effi**^ it^^'^ *e>e^^^ ■^^■***^ ■^■f-tf^^^;^^* -^^-^^ 
 
 *9ti*e^j^ c/^'^^-e^'es^gti!,^^ -j^-eifi^^if-c^^-^^ ■p^-^e*--0^»^xc ^-g^-^it^ 
 
 ^^*^'«i>^^*e;^^?#-*SS'S9&^ 
 
 ^^flBae^iW*'*^^* «^fe*s*j#^^*Se-*^^ -^^t^-^Sf-^-i^^V- ^^*-j^^^ ^■:^^^**'0 ^ 
 '4-i^r ^*-**-*^y ^t» *}t^*-^*^ **^*0 -eif^i^^fSf-rt^ ^^:^-^^^ 
 
 'f^'^^c-e^^^.f^**- ^=ss»^*=5*<«w^:*=:*s^ ■f'^^^^^f^^^!^ ■^is:^.'^^^ s^*;*^ 
 
 ^^^^ /'^1,^-jt^^ ^»-^¥»-^ 1<!«^-S»!^»f«*^ -^-^^ Z'^^^'Xt ■0»-*-**'f»'** 
 
 ' spittle ouf bcr ^oft ne^men, to be ticketed by stage. 
 ^ ®t4 miciicr cr^ott ^alicn, shall have rested. 
 ^ Um^etfitl^ren, to lead about, in the sense of to allow, 
 * §0(ftft fcicnSttJCrtO, rea% worth seeing. 
 
IMPEBSONAL VERBS. 311 
 
 
 
 ■^"^^ /"^^^^^ ■^^^^^a'ii^»^<i 
 
 ^ •■ » >« ^ 
 
 LESSON xxxyni. ^mvon as. 
 
 Impersonal Verbs, (Untjetfonn^e ScWtnortcr.) 
 
 Obs. I. — The subject, of impersonal verbs is, as in English, 
 the personal pronoun of the ihird person, singular 
 number, neuter gender, as:" 
 
 ti rcgnct, it rains ti bonnert, it thunders 
 
 ti \&intit, it snows ti ili^t, it lightens 
 
 ti ^agcft, it hails ti frlert, it freezes 
 
 (/ ti t^aut, it thaws ti reift, it is a hoar frost, it rimes 
 
 ei tagt, it dawns ti gic6t (giW), there is 
 
 ' fiefie re^t tnojl, fa/rmdl. 
 
 ' The auxiliary verb tocrben like the English verb to grow, helps to de- 
 note an incipient state. Thus in speaking of the weather : it grows 
 cold, li Ujirb kit (while the French say, U commence dfai/refrmd, literally, 
 it begins to make cold); it grows late, c* tnirJ) ftjcit. This indication of 
 an incipient state is also extended to such expressions, as e^ ifi mir xiM, 
 I feel sick, and to denote the incipient state of those situations, we say, 
 ©8 loirll ntir fiSeli or mir tntrll Mel, I am growing (getting) ill (French : Je 
 commence a, me sentir indispose). By the same analogy, Eina fcitti means 
 to be agreed, to be unanimous (Stre A' accord); Etn8 tocrtiett, to agree, to he- 
 eome unanimous {tomier ff accord.) — Boilean. (Comp. also note on p. 103.) 
 
312 IMFEBSONAL VERBS. 
 
 Oonjugation of an Impersonal Verb. 
 
 Present. Sa rcgnet, it rains 
 
 Imperfect. Sa fi^neitc, it snowed 
 
 1st Future. fig t»ir5 fricren, it -will freeze 
 
 1st Conditional, fig tutoe bonncnt, it would thunder 
 
 Perfect. S3 l^at geHi^t, it has lightened 
 
 Pluperfect. fig l;atte geVgelt, it had hailed 
 
 2nd Future. fig tuirb getagt l^aben, it will have dawned 
 
 2rui Conditional, fig wurbegcf^autl^a&ettiitwotdd have thawed 
 
 Obs. II.- — There is, there are, there vms, there were, &c., are 
 rendered in the following manner : 
 
 1. "When expressing a definite eadstence, or when 
 a circumscribed distinct place or space is added, by 
 e8 and the verb fcttt. Like the English to he, fcttt 
 serves merely as a copula, while the noun following 
 it, becomes a predicate noun, and is in the same 
 case as the subject, i. e., in the nominative ; e. g., 
 fig ift ctn SBJann brau^ctt, there is a man outside ; eg 
 tvaten nl(^t jc^n Scute bort, there were not ten per- 
 sons there. 
 
 Exception. — In the interrogative form, e§ is omit- 
 ted ; e. g.. Is there a bird in this cage ? i^ ein SSogel in 
 tiiefem ^iiftg? 
 
 2. When expressing an indefinite existence, no dis- 
 tinct place being mentioned, they must be rendered 
 by c8 and the verb ge&ett. The latter however, 
 serves as the predicate of the sentence and requires 
 the noun following it, as the object of the sentence, 
 to be in the accusative ; e. g., fig giebt (or giit) rotten 
 unb tocigen SJein, there is red and white wine. 
 
 Obs. m. — ^Impersonal verbs are followed by a personal pro- 
 noun of the dative or accusative (reflexive form) of 
 any person or number. 
 
 With the Accusative. With the Dative. 
 
 fig tiSu(i^t int<^, it seems to me fig a^nt Ittit, I forbode 
 eg biinft mi(^, it appears to me eg kflcgnet mir, it happens to me 
 
IMPEBSONAL VEfes. 313 
 
 With the Accusative. With the Daiive. 
 
 ti burflet mA^, I am thirsty ti bauc^t mtr, methints 
 
 f ti frcut mid^, I am glad ti clclt mir, I nauseate 
 
 t ti fricrt mic^, I am cold ti \'iM mir ein, it occurs to me 
 
 t ti ^ungert mi^, I am hungry ti gefiittt mir, I am pleased 
 
 ti jammcrt mldfejlpity/itgrieves ti gelihgt mir, I succeed 
 
 ti rcut mtc^, I repent [me ti iji mir leii, ) I am sorry 
 
 t ti f(|autert mie^, I shudder ti t^ut mir Iclb ) for it 
 
 ti fc^lafcrt mic^, I am sleepy ti (^ mir ©arm," I am warm 
 
 ti fc^merjt mi^, I grieve eg ijl mir t»o|I, I feol well 
 
 ti uertriept mi4 I am Tcxed eg tommt mir »or, it seems to me 
 
 ti »erlangt mic^, I desire ti liegt mir Diet Saran, it is im- 
 ti iDuntert m\&i, I wonder portant to me 
 
 ti f'rogt fic^, it is a question ti fc^wtntictt mir, I am giddy 
 
 ti f(^idt ftcfe, it is proper ti Wirt mir iiBcI, I feel sick 
 
 ti »erfle^t ftc^, it is a matter of ttaa fe|ft S^nen ? what ails (is 
 course or of course the matter with) you ? 
 
 Note. — E8 may be omitted and the reflexive pronoun 
 precede the verb ; thus, mic^ biinft, mit etelt, &c.' 
 
 Obs. rV. — ^A rather poetical construction is to place the sub- 
 ject after the verb, and give to the latter the imper- 
 sonal form, beginning the sentence vrith cS (in 
 English, there) ; e. g., Ss ging ein S^get burc^ ben 
 SB alt), there went a hunter through the woods. 
 
 Obs. V. — The impersonal passive form (Ute the Latin Uur, 
 venitur, venlura est), is used to denote some indefinite 
 
 ' Verbs marked thus f are also used personally; as, 3c^ freiie miij; id) 
 fricte ; ic^ Hn burpig, or ic^ ^a6e Sutfi. 
 
 ' 3^ 6in warm, ic^ Mn talt, are not good German expressions; but say 
 instead, ti ijl mir warm; e« ijl mir talt, or ic^ frierc, or c8 friert mi^. 
 
 ' Compare the English, me thinks, me seemeth or j»« seems, in the 
 sense of, it seems to me (Latin, mihi iMetw), as, "Me seemeth good 
 that with some little traine, forthwith from Ludlow the young prince 
 be fetched hither to Loudon, to be crowned our king." — Shakspeare. 
 " One came me thought and whispered in my ear." — Pope. 
 
 * Compare Latin, me pasnitet, &o. 
 
314 IMPBESONAL VERBS. 
 
 number of persona ; e. g., ®8 Voiti in S)cut|'{^lan6 
 »iel 33ier gctrunfcn, or Wan trintt Bid Sier in ^eutfAlanc, 
 there is much beer drunk in Germany, i. e., people 
 drink much beer in Germany. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 fcie ainnjefcn^eit, the presence bcr 5)la^, the place 
 tie ®tu6e, the room tie ^leicer, the clothes 
 
 Jic Ma^i, the treasury He 3)cr|'on, the person 
 
 an ier ^offc, at the door '^n 3u(ianc, the condition 
 
 mi^gludcn, to mishappen, fail fcer ©paf , the pleasure 
 ortentli^, orderly '^efiilligli, please 
 
 Reading Exercise XXXVIII. 
 
 g« regnct, ne'^men ®ic meinen 3flegcnf(^irm. gs fc^ncitc ken gan* 
 jcn 3:ag. gg toirt) roalrfc^einltc^ |agcln. gg ^at gebonnert unb 
 geblifet, Heibe an ^aufe. 3fi c8 l|cute fe|r talt ? gs wtrb cud^ reuen, 
 iflf i:§r mir nii^t gefolgt |abt. gs wiirse t^aucn, toenn c« warmer 
 wore, ga gelang SlleyanJer tern ®ro^en, iai 0leic^ ber ^tt\ix ju 
 crobern ; ti mipgliicftc i|m !ein Unteme^rnen. gs fc^aubert mid^, 
 wcnn ic^ Scnfe, wie »tcle 9lrmen fcine ^leiber |abcn, oii^on (although) 
 ti fo fiarl friert. g« \viut mic^, ba^ eS S^nen enblicb gelungcn ifl, 
 biefe ©telle ju er^alten, unb es tuunbert mic^, bap man fie S^nen nii|t 
 frii|er gegeben lat. g3 fc^Iafert unS, roir wotten ju SSctte get)en. gi3 
 jflmmertc mii^, bte »on ben Etaubern uermunbeten SlJlenfc^en ju felcn. 
 di burfict mi*, geben ©ie mir cin ®IaS SBoffer. ©agten ©ie, ta§ 
 ©te in biefem 3immer friert? mir iji im ©egentVil warm; g« fc^iift 
 fic^ nid^t fiir junge Seute, in 2lnwefen:&ctt aiterer 5)erfoncn tas SBort ju 
 fit^ren. 2BaS fatit bir etn? gs Berile:^t M, ba§ wir ben ©ewinn 
 unter una t^eilen. g« Berbrog i^n, bic^ in einem folc^en Sufianbe ju 
 fc|ert. aSaS giebt'3 5Reue3 in ber ©tabt ? g« jinb jwct neue ©tn? 
 bcnten angefommen, mit benen bie altcn Bielcn ©pag '^aben. ^ommt 
 eg bir ni^t »or, atg ob ei anfongt fetter ju werben ? gg giebt siele 
 Seute, bie fi^ nic^t ju '^elfcn wljfen. 
 
mrEBSONAL VEBBS. 315 
 
 Theme XXXVIll. 
 
 I am thirsty and hungry, give me something to eat and to 
 drint. It seems to me that you ought to have succeeded. 
 I am grieved when I think of the poor people. It rained all 
 night, now it hails and snows. Yesterday it froze, to-day it 
 thaws. Did it lighten? There are many wide and long 
 streets in Berlin, it is one of the finest cities in the world. 
 I heard them say all of the time (tie ganjc ^tit) : I am warm, 
 I feel sick, I am giddy. What is the matter with you ? I 
 wonder that you do not say what you want. It occurred to 
 me last night that it is important to him. Of course, we 
 shall divide it with our friends. I am glad to see you here, 
 my friend. I was very much pleased. It is not proper that 
 you stay here any longer, you ought to be at home by (um) 
 ten o'clock. "What is the news to-day? They are very 
 sleepy, show them their bed-rodln. Doctor Otto thraks 
 there can be ^p more beautiful old castle in the world than 
 that of Heidelberg. There were several new students at (auf) 
 the university to-day. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 Sftegnet eS ? 9letn, ahix ei ^at flarf geMi^t. 
 
 (Slaukn ®ie, ka§ ti ^cute fc^ncien 3^ glaube ntd^t, bag ti f^netcn 
 
 Wirt ? wirj, after e« roirti friercn. 
 
 2Bar ei geflem ^x loft In ber Stein, es war nid^t fo fatt ali »or- 
 <Stott ? gfjiern, ofeer ti i^ immer tort 
 
 warmer al3 l^icr. 
 SBarum Bt|l bu ntc^t liinger in D, ic^ bin nte in einer ©tabt ges 
 Scrlin geHieben; geftcl ti bit wcfen, tic mir bcpr geftel, aber 
 bortntc^t? mon fc^rteb mir, bag ic^ nai^ 
 
 Jpanfe tommen foffe. 
 SSift bu lungrlg ? Stein, aber tc^ bin burjMg, gicb mir 
 
 ein ®Ia« SBaflter. 
 ©agtejl bu, bog bi(| in biefer ©tube 9lein, i^ fogtc, mir ifl ^icr worm, 
 triert ? obcr ic^ f^ah hunger. 
 
316 
 
 IMPKBSONAX, VEBBS. 
 
 SDunbcrt ti ®te ntc^t, ia^ cr fol^ 
 eine gute ©telle Iietommen iat? 
 
 ©clang a S^nc" StUete fiir ite 
 ^eutige Sor{leUung ju n^altm ? 
 
 SHJflS fdHt S^neit ein, gtauben ®le, 
 tog nidjt atlc ^iMi sertauft 
 fmi? 
 
 SBBarum iifl iu fo traurig ? 
 
 [EBa« ijl blr gefdje'^cn, tuarum 
 weln^ ttt? 
 
 SSfl« fefcft S^ncn, ijl Skmn nic^t 
 ju worm ? 
 
 355o« gtcfct'g Sfleues ? 
 
 9Jeln, ti tBunkert ml^ nl&,ti ei^ ijl 
 
 eln ortentlic^er ilJlenfc^ unt 
 
 bcren luurtig. 
 yiiin, ti i^ tnir nt(^t getungcn; 
 
 ober eg toerken Slbents (in the 
 
 evening) no(^ Sitlete on ber 
 
 ^flp seriouft. 
 3ltin, mcin ^crr, ein grettnk »on 
 
 mir »erfi(^erte mir, top 2l6cnb3 
 
 tie befien ^IS^e sertouft tucrten. 
 di ft^merjt mi^, tof i^ meinen 
 
 trcuen grcunb Bcrloren |obe. 
 3c^ :^obe att mein ©elk Bcrloren 
 
 unk tonn ^cute nid^t ina Sonccrt 
 
 ge^en. 
 9Jein, ober ti ((^winkelt mtr, gc^ 
 
 ben ®ie mir gefSKigjl einen 
 
 ©tu^I. ^ 
 
 SKon fagt, ker ^Jrofikent fei pIo^:= 
 
 Hd^ gejlorben. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 SRctfcbcfc^reifiungett. 
 
 S« giebt sieic Seutc, wel(^c einige SJlonote m cinem Sonkc gercifct 
 fink, reel^e pc^ ein oter jwei SSoi^en inker Jpauptftokt oufgel^olten |as 
 ben, unk kie ft(^ ni^t »or kcr So^erlidbteit fiir^ten,' eiit Urt^cil iibcr ka3 
 Sank unk fcinc Semo^ncr ju fallen. ®eit kcr Srfinkung ker 5)om|)fs 
 I'c^iffe unk ker Sifcnbo^nen ^t ft^ kie 3o^I kiefer Slcifcnken fe'^r serme'^rt, 
 unk mon mug ie^ ken ©(^iltcrungen ker mcijlen SEourijtcn fofi cfccn fo 
 migtrouen, di ben Srja^Iungen einca 3iigcr8, hem c8 etntSttt, 
 mi felne Slbenteuer mitjut^^eilen. gg munbcrt mit^ nic^t, tflp 
 
 ' 35te fit^ nic^t »or bcr Soic^ettic^teit futd^tcn, translate : who are not afraid 
 to make themaeloea ridmdovs by, and put the following verb in the pre- 
 sent participle. 
 
THE ADVEBBS. 317 
 
 ulelc Seute felne 0lei|'c6ef(i^rci6ungctt ntC^r' lefcn teollcn, unb ia^ ti 
 anicrc reut, fie gclefen ju \dbm, mm f!e r>ai Sont feltji fe^en. ®em 
 ginen i|t ju ttinrm gettiefen an iem Sage, too er in einem SBaggon 
 cingefWoffen' burc^ cine ®egcnD fu|r, ben Stntem, ter cincn 3legentag 
 f^am, ^at in berfclben ©cgenb flefrorcn. ©er grfle ftnbct bag ^lima 
 be« 2anbca ju ^cif, bcr Smitt fccHagt fid) iikr bic ^iiltc. Diefem ifi 
 e§ nii^t gelungen, »a|rcnb feine« 3l«fent^ote in einet ©tabt eingelaben 
 ju werben : cr finbet, bog e8 ben fiinwo^^nem on ©ojllid^lcit unb on 
 §bflic6feit jt^it Sin 3lnbercr ifi mit bent ©cbonten abgereifl, Mti 
 tDie in feincm Sotcrtonbe ju ftnbcn. 68 ttorc i^m licfi gewcfcn, in bcr 
 Jpouptfiabt bc« fremben SonbeS bic ©uppen unt ©critic ju cffen, tueWc 
 cr ju §aufc nic^t entk^ren fonnte, unb gerabc 3tt bcrfctfccn ©tunbe ju 
 frii'^fiiidcn unb ju SWittag ju fpcifen." gin ©ritter tnunbcrt ficfi, bag 
 bic Seute i^n nic^t fo gut Bcrjiel^cn, wic ju §oufc, unb eg firgert tl^n, 
 wenn 3c>uanb fi^ bie iJ'^ci^eit nimmt, i|n jweimal, ju fragen, wai 
 cr lot fagen tuoilcn. SJlit cincnt ffiortc,* o6erflS(i^Uc^e lirf^eile fterben 
 oUe SEoge auf Sleifen gC^Brt. gin gngldnber, welc^er ftc^ cine 5Rac^t 
 in einer fteinen ®tabt granfreic^s aufge|olten |ottc, war son einem 
 ^etlncr kbient worbcn, wetcber rot^e Jpoarc |ottc, ftotterte unt nic^t fe:§r 
 !|oflicb war. 3lm onbern SRorgen fi^rieb cr in fcin 2;age{)ucb : „f)ie 
 ginwo^rtcr bicfer ©tobt 'i^alm rof^e Jpaorc, flottern unb ftnb fe^r groB." 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. Seftton 39. 
 
 Adverbs. (2iic Umfiotibighinrtcr.) 
 
 Ob8. I. — ^In German adverbs are not, as in English, formed 
 from adjectives by the affix ly. Most adjectives are 
 used as aid verbs, but they undergo no change of 
 form.' 
 
 ' SRel^r, any longer. 
 
 ' In Europe passengers are locked in railroad coaches. 
 
 " gu SIttttag f^jcifen, to dine. 
 
 * Mit etttcm SBortc, in one word, in short. 
 
 ' There are a number of adverbs, even in English, derived from ad- 
 jectives without a change of form ; e. g., this street is long, he stays ymg. 
 Fowler says that, while some have claimed adverbs thus formed to be 
 
318 
 
 THE ASVEBES. 
 
 Obs. n. — Adverbs in German, as in English, French, Latin, 
 and other languages, modify the signification of 
 verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs, and denote 
 manner, place, time, quality, quantity, comparison, &c. 
 They are indeclinable, and formed, by derivation or 
 composition, from almost every other part of 
 speech. Of a few, however, the origin is unknown. 
 According to derivation the adverbs may be classed 
 as follows : 
 
 Obs. in.— Adrerbs formed from Nonns and Participles: 
 
 Adverbs are formed from nouns and participles by 
 giving them the ending of the genitive S.' 
 
 SJlorgenS, in the morning from bcr SJJorgcn, the morning 
 S^eilS, in part or partly " tier 2:^eil, the part 
 
 jufclcntS, visibly " jufe^ent, looking at 
 
 Obs. IV. — Adverbs formed from Adjectires : Adverbs are 
 formed from adjectives, either in the same manner 
 as they are formed from nouns ; i. e., by the addi- 
 tion of S," or by affixing the endings U^, ^uft, or 
 Cittgd. The first two are also adjective endings, 
 and correspond to the EngHsh ly or ishly; e. g.: 
 
 relets, on the right from rci^t, right 
 
 f^lDcrli4>, hardly, scarcely " f^roer, heavy, hard 
 
 wa^r^oft, truly, verily " tra^r, true 
 
 HintlinflS, blindly " Minfc, blind 
 
 axljectives de natura, there is proof to the contrary, for all of these ad- 
 verbs, formed from adjectives without a change of form, had once a 
 termination peculiar, to this class of words, and this use must therefore 
 "not be reprobated as an innovation in language." Comp. Fowler, 
 Bnglish Language, pp. 313-314 
 
 ' Compare the Latin adverbial expression obtained from substantives 
 and adjectives, in the ablative case ; as, did, noete, jure, initio, prima, 
 merito, brevi, &c 
 
 ' The letter S is aflSxed also to adverbs ending in tnol i e. g., Vormald 
 formerly. 
 
THE ADVEBBS. 
 
 319 
 
 Note. — Nearly all German adjectives, in the predicate or 
 absolute form (see Lesson XVI., Obs. I.), are used as adverbs ; 
 e. g., cr Iciuft fil)nell, he runs quickly. 
 
 Obs. V. — Adverbs formed from Pronouns: The adverbs 
 formed from pronouns are : &«, there, from the 
 abbreviated demonstrative Set, fctc, &a§, this 
 or that ; two, where, from tt»et, who, and ttfcS, 
 what ; I)cr, hither, and l^itt, thither, according to 
 Noehden, from a lost demonstrative, |ir (?) equival- 
 ent to liefer. The combinations which may be 
 formed with ttJO we have already given on p. 202, 
 Obs. IX. We vdll here add a list of those ob- 
 tained by a combination of &o, l^CC, ^iti, with pre- 
 positions : 
 
 JaBei (by this or that), thereby 
 
 ftnturd^ (through or by this), 
 there-through 
 
 feafiir (for this or that), there- 
 for 
 
 fcomit (with this or that), 
 therewith 
 
 fcoran (on this or that), there- 
 on 
 
 fcjirauf (upon this or that), 
 thereupon 
 
 barauS (from this or that), 
 therefrom 
 
 &arin (in this or that), thetein 
 
 ftorum (about this or that), 
 therefore 
 
 fearunter (under this or that), 
 among 
 
 iosott (of this or that), there- 
 of 
 
 &03U (to this or that), thereto 
 
 l^eraB, down hither 
 l^crauf, up hither 
 ^ccauS, out hither 
 l^ctcin, in hither; into this 
 
 •place 
 l^ief^er, or l^ie^cr, hither here; 
 
 this way 
 i^crufcer, over hither 
 l^erutttcr, under hither 
 >a^er, from there hither, i. e., 
 
 thence 
 
 l^tnaB, down thither 
 I^inauf, up thither 
 ^inani, out thither 
 l^inein, into that place 
 
 ]^tcr|in thither, this way for- 
 ward 
 
 l^tttuber, over thither 
 
 l^ittunter, under there 
 
 &a^in, from here (to) there, 
 1 e., thither 
 
329 THE ADVEEBS. 
 
 looker, from whicli place wo^lit, from which place 
 hither, i. e., whence thither, i. e., whither 
 
 Note.— There are no words in English exactly correspond- 
 ing to Jer and ^in. They cannot well be translated by single 
 words, and are therefore often treated as expletives. We 
 have already spoken of them in Lesson XXXIII., Obs. VIII. 
 
 Obs. VI.— Adverbs formed from Verbs: A few adverbs are 
 derived from verbs by affixing \iS^ to the radical 
 syllable ; e. g. : 
 
 gkufcUc^, credibly, from glanbett, to believe 
 flerBlic|», mortal, from fterben, to die 
 
 Obs. vn.— Adverbs formed by composition : A great num- 
 ber of adverbs are obtained by a union of various 
 parts of speech. Thus there are 
 
 1. Several ending in the word toeife, (mode, 
 manner), which answer to the ending Urn, in Latin 
 adverbs ; c. g. : 
 
 (liictttcife {liak.,fr'ustatim), piecemeal, from iai ©titci, the piece 
 jlufenWelfe (Lat., gradaiim), gradually (step by step), from 
 
 tie ©tufe, the step 
 gtMl^crWeife, happily, luckily (glMic^, happy), from iai 
 
 ®lttc(, the fortune 
 
 2. Adverbs are also obtained by a combination 
 of a noun -with a pronoun; e. g. : 
 
 meincrfeitS, on my part, from tie Sette, the side 
 alterbingS, of course, by all means, from baa Sing, the thing 
 
 3. Several adverbs are obtained by a union of two 
 prepositions ; e. g. : 
 
 tut^^aud, by all means, throughout 
 bnrc^ unD but^, through and through 
 
 4. A few adverbs are obtained by an aflfix to an- 
 other adverb; e. g. : 
 
 riidlittgd, backwards 
 tiimmermel^r, nevermore 
 
THE ABVEBBS. 321 
 
 5. By joining several words composing a phrase, 
 they are made to serve as an adverb; e. g., 
 
 6ei}eiten, betimes ; futtoal^t, truly, verily 
 
 Comparison of Adverbs. 
 
 Obs. ym. — Only the adverbs of manner, quality) and time, 
 
 are susceptible of comparison. The positive and 
 comparative of adverbs are the same as those of 
 adjectives, but, in the superlative, instead of the 
 simple article the preposition nu is contracted with 
 the definite article into am (an tern) ; e. g., am 
 fdjBnjlen. 
 
 Obs. IX. — ^If the superlative is to be employed to express 
 excellence or eminence, it may be done : 1. by using 
 the simple or absolute form of the superlative (see 
 Less. XVII., Obs. in., IV., and V.); e. g., cr Kttct 
 l^ijflii^ft, he asks very politely ; 2. by adding to the 
 simple form the ending CttS ; e. g., er lii^t @te BejlcttS 
 grii^en, he sends you his most kind (sincere) regards; 
 3. by exchanging the preposition an for auf (which 
 contracted with the article gives auf8==auf bag), or 
 for ju (contracted juitt = ju tern) ; e. g., cr gritgt ©ic 
 aufd ^erjlt^fie, he sends you his regards in the most 
 friendly manner. 
 
 Irregular Oomparison of Adverbs. 
 
 PodtvBe. Oompa/ratiw. Swperlative. 
 
 tvo^I, well Bejfcr, better am Bejien, or auf« Befle, 
 
 , ,^ f frii'^cr, 1 ( <im ekflctl, the soonest 
 
 vaXo, soon ■{:<;. t sooner \ ,,,^, „ 
 
 ' ( cocr, ) \ balttgjt, very soon 
 
 g«rn/ willingly licBcr, better am licbjlen, best 
 
 ' ®ern, lie6er, am Iie6flen, correspond to I like, I like better, I like best, 
 in English, and are mostly used in connection with a verb, as : 3^ laufe 
 jcrn, I like to run ; ic^ fa^te IteSet, I prefer to ride, &c. 
 
322 
 
 THE ADVERBS. 
 
 oft, often 
 
 fe^t, very 
 ubel, evil 
 tfiel, much 
 
 bftcr, oftener 
 
 orgcr, vrorse 
 jne^r, more 
 f minbcr, 
 
 am '^Sufigflen, the of tenest, 
 
 (most often) 
 IBc^jl, auf erft, extremely 
 am (irgflcn, the worst 
 am meiflen, most 
 
 toettis,httle {„ent3e;,r««^ 
 
 ■ am minbcjlcn, 
 
 I am t»enigfleit, 
 
 ■;} 
 
 the least 
 
 Obs. X. — ^A number of adverbs of time and place are, unlike 
 any other language, converted into adjectives de- 
 noting the particular circumstances of time and 
 place, by afiSxing the syllable ig, and, like other 
 adjectives, are declined, but do not admit of com- 
 parison ; e. g. : 
 
 Bafttg, prompt 
 l^cutig, of to-day 
 ^ieflg, of the place 
 ge|lrtQ, of yesterday 
 
 kamalig, of that time 
 
 jc^ig, present 
 etnfltBeiltg, ad interim 
 
 from iaic, soon. 
 
 ■^eutc, to-day; as, iai '^euttge f5c|l 
 " |lcr, here; as, bcr lieftge SJcin. 
 " gcficrn, yesterday; as, bcr gcs 
 
 jhtgc 3laufd^. 
 " bamals, at the time; as, t>cr ka* 
 
 malige (Defantte {Vambassadeur 
 
 d'alors or de ce temps-la). 
 " ie^o, at present; as, t^r Je^tgcr 
 
 Wlann {le mari qu'elle a a 
 
 present). 
 " etn|it»eileit, in the meantime; 
 
 as, ber ciwfltDeilige SMinijler, the 
 
 minister ad interim. 
 
 Note. — There is also the anomalous fonn mOTgcnbi i. e., 
 of to-morrow, from morgeri/ to-morrow ; e. g., ber ntoisenbe Z^%, 
 the day of to-morrow. 
 
 Obs. XI. — ^Adjectives and adverbs may be given a negative 
 form by prefixing the negative particle un, answer- 
 ing to the English un, dis, &c.; e. g., gem, wiUingly 
 — ungcrn, wnwillingly; gludlii^, happy— Uttgtiitfl^ 
 Mnhappy. 
 
THE ADVEBB8. 323 
 
 Obs. XII. — Adverbs of time precede other adverbs or adver- 
 bial expressions, and take their place after the sub- 
 ject and the verb, but when an adverb or adverbial 
 expression begins the sentence, the verb precedes 
 the subject. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 tie 2lntoort, the reply, answer '/»er»elfen, to wither 
 tie ©ef^ic^tc, (the) history 6cqucm, convenient, comfortable 
 
 *^ ter gorfd^er, the investigator tBenigflenS, at least 
 tcr @efc^ic^t«forfc^er, the histo- Bcjianttg, constantly 
 rian >^ fccutltc^, clear(ly) 
 
 ' ta« Dpfer, the sacrifice ^ grfaufig, fluent(ly) 
 
 •^ fe:^lfd)tagen, to fail unpaffcnti, unbecoming, im- 
 
 '"'gcjlc^en, to confess proper 
 
 ^ jt^ kmii^en, to endeavor w^^artnddig, persistent, stubborn 
 
 Reading Exercise XXXIX. 
 
 2Denn ©te wollen, ka^ i^ ©ic »cr|le'^en foH, tniipn ©ic nic^t fo 
 fc^ncU fprec^cn. SBie stele ^erfonen fijnnen fcequcm in bicfem 5Bagcn 
 figcn ? ®iefc Stumen rle(^cn nii^t me^r gut, fie ftnt Berwelft. 2)u 
 mup fpate(len3 urn trei U|r ttjictcr juritcf fein. %&, glaube fi^werli^, 
 to§ eg mir mijgtii^ fein ttirD fo frii^ juriicE ju fein. Scmiiic (en- 
 deavor) blc^ wenigjiena 6ei Bciten jitriicE ju fein. 2)ie ©taat^fi^ult 
 gngtants ifi unge^euer gcwai^fen tDft^^rent) bcr ^riege, wel^e biefe 
 fSJlac^t fortma|reni5 gegen tie franjoftfiil^ StcpuMit unt ten ^aifer !Ra* 
 poleon gefii'^rt |at.' ©prec^en ©te Beftiintig teutfi^ ntlt tenen, soelc^c 
 beutfc^ fijitnen, tann tocrtcn ©ie liei'c ©pra^e in furjer B^it geliiufig 
 fpred^cn. 3c^ i««5 3'^ncn gf^e^c", tag es fc|r unpaffcnb \\i, fo \o.xi' 
 niicEig bei einem 33orfa^ ju HeiBen. ©pric^ langfamcr, mcin greunt, 
 aBer ^antlc fi^netter. ®es SWorgen^ fann man <xm. Beflen arBeiten. 
 fBenn ©ie an« Snte ter ©trape fommtn, tann Biegen ©ie rei^t^ ein. 
 .S^omnten ©ie gefdHigjl auf cine fWinute ^erunter, i^ mug ©ie fofort 
 fpred^cn. ®S gieBt side iunge Seute, tie Puftgcr im ^affec^aufe fine 
 als ju Jpaufe. 3(^ pflege t^n tann unt toann 3U fc^en. S3 mug 
 
324 
 
 CHE ADTEKBS. 
 
 3:^ncn tdntim^i fe:^tfd^Ia9£n. 3i^ tin kurc^oug ni^t erflaunt. 
 ©i^rcifcen ®ie mir kltigjl Stntoort. Der Jc^lgc amerifanlfdje ®e* 
 fantte om ))reujif(|cn ipofc ijl ein bcrii^mtcr @cfc^ld^t«forfc^er. 
 
 Theme XXXIX. 
 
 More than one soldier has become the sacrifice of his au- 
 dacity (SScrttJegen^eit). Now I see clearly that I was mistaken. 
 Four persons can sit comfortably in this carriage. I have 
 never attended a performance (dative) which was as bad 
 as that of yesterday. 3I swould irather die than live under 
 [the] tyranny. Everything is extremely dear in London. 
 When wiU you depart from here ? Mr. Schulze has been here 
 at least three times. It is hardly credible, that he should 
 have done it. We dine at precisely six o'clock. Please (Htte) 
 be punctual He is less happy than you think. Fortunately 
 I had not bought the tickets. The stars follow con- 
 stantly (befidnbtg) the course (Sauf) which has been marked 
 out (Sorjei^nen) for them. Old people think that the children 
 of to-day are not as obedient as they were in their youth. 
 Do this at least for me. Never can I consent to this (thereto) 
 willingly (freutig). I prefer [that] you do not go, if you go 
 unvrillingly. The Germans say : " Too little and too much 
 spoils all play." 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 SBo i(i meitt ©tod? 3<^ glau^e er ijl ba in ker SdEc. 
 
 2Bo|erfommm<Sic, mcin^ert? 3c^ fontmc aai ten SJerclnigtcn 
 
 ©taaten »on SImerilo. 
 ^onntejl bu i'^n nti^t irgenbwo DBglcic^ er felten tm ^ajfee'^aufe 
 ftntcn ? 35ieIIci(^t ijl et im i[l, '§a6e id^ i|n auc^ bort ge- 
 ^ojfce^aufe. jitd^t, ahx er ijl ntrgenba ju 
 
 ftnben. 
 ^Bnnten ®ie mic^ nid^t be3 Mon Jlein, metn §crr, ic^ |a6e toenig* 
 gcn« rajlren (shave) ? jlcns jwci mal fo siete Sunken 
 
 (customers) aU ic^ je^ h^ 
 tienen fann. 
 
THE ADVERBS. 
 
 325 
 
 SBann tannji bu frii^cfieng Bel mtr 
 fcin? 
 
 SBie tnug ic^ cs anfangm urn 'iai 
 Seutf^c in mogli^ft lurser Beit 
 gclauftg (fluently) ju cricrnen? 
 
 3|l §err SWMer auf feinem 3im* 
 mer? 
 
 Sann ic^ S'^nen ni^t flntcweitig 
 (otherwise) lienen? 
 
 SJictiielc 3)er)'oncn IBnnen 6equem 
 in bicfer ^utfc^e jt^en ? 
 
 2Bie gefici 3i^nm tie gejlrige 35or? 
 flctlung, wenn ic§ frogen Sarf ? 
 
 SBo l)a6en ©ie ge^ern ju SJlittag 
 gegejlfctt (or gefpeifl) ? 
 
 Stein, ic^ '^aBe nie son bicfent 
 Cafe ge'§6rt, ifl ti cine gutc 
 Stejiauration (Restaurant) ? 
 
 SSorcn ©ic jc in Seipjig im Sluer* 
 6ac^)'c^en3BetnMer? 
 
 SBarum fprcc^cn ®ie Bcflanbig 
 engtifcfe, IBnnen ©ie nic^t teutfc^ 
 fpKc^en? 
 
 3(^ lann bir nii^t serfprec^cn 
 (promise), 06 ic^ bei ^tiim 
 werle 6ei bir fein tijnnen. 
 
 ©ie miipn bcflanJig beutfi^ fpre- 
 c^en mit benen tuelc^c beutfc^ 
 IBnnen, bann tijnnen ©ie bie 
 ©proline in liirjefler 3eit 9^* 
 liiuftg fprcc^en (crnen. 
 
 Stein, er ifi wa|rf(i^einlii^ augges 
 gangen, er gc^t be3 9l6cnb3 im=; 
 tner mxi. 
 
 Stein, ic§ bon!e 3|nen, gegcn? 
 Bjiirtig Braui^e ic^ nic^ts 9lnbe* 
 res (or fonft Stints'). 
 
 ©eitjij^nUcfe fi^en unferer uier 
 borln, aber i(^ gtaube bag i^rer 
 fec^g ganj bequem barin fi^en 
 lonnten. 
 
 3d^ mup 3^nen gefte^n, bag ii^ 
 nie einer be|fcren SSorjietlung 
 beigetco^nt "^abe. 
 
 3c^ ap gcjlern auf bent GafeBelle- 
 vue JU 9Jlittag. ^aben ©ic 
 ie bort gcfpcifi? 
 
 ©ie i(l fiirwa^r bie Sc(ie in Sertin 
 bie ic^ fenne, unb eg ijl oben* 
 breitt alleg bort fc'^r billig, 
 
 9tein, meirt §err, ic^ bin noc^ nie 
 in 'Deutf(^Ianb gewcfen, aber ic^ 
 i^alit mix »orgenotttmen, nSc§5 
 jiens ba^ln ju reifen. 
 
 ^i^ bitte urn 25erjei:§«ng, mein 
 §err, i(^ fprcc^e c« fo fi^Ied^t, 
 bag ic^ liebcr englifd^ fprec^c. 
 
326 ADVEEBS. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 .j^ ,^^!^^y^ii^jl^y*<^^^:^l..-^t«if*^fi'^i^--^f^^ 
 
 
 T«^c/xi9i5W^«-^V^> -;;^S^^*^-^*S^*<^*^i»«« ^i^ 
 
 
 ,«»5!-«***' ^^iSjSS**^',^*!**-' 
 
 
 
 
 aisacst*^ 
 
 ' ®06 is a suboTdinative conjanction (see p. 333, Obs. VII.), and re- 
 quires the verb to be at the end of the clause. 
 
 ' Ungeai^tet is a preposition governing its noun in the genitvoe case. 
 
 ' 2)tc man nur finbeit fann, which can be found anywhere. 
 
 * ®a6 is understood after iinb, hence the verb is placed at the end of 
 the clause. 
 
327 
 
 '(-, '/^fity ^^t^ /ppt^ 
 
 ^i^*V*#555#*- li^#«- ,^##^**- -f^f^f^)^^ ylZl/^f '^^ ^C-f^' 
 
 
 
 
 ' See note ' and * on p. 326. 
 
 ' Soft is here again understood, and requires the verb to be j,t the end 
 o*' the sentence. 
 ^ SBenn (iQ is a subordinative conjunction. 
 
328 
 
 ADVEBBS. 
 
 ^^^^s?ivv^^©'C45^3!ef*' e,^^^is^f-'yaeiitf)it^^4S^^e^^^i^eefi-;, 
 
 
 eiRie«;ii«#as«s*as^i-i««5:; 
 
 ^*sfo; 
 
 ^-^/X^iS^<^^^ilf:^^^iSf^ 
 
 Vi^^i^ 
 
 ,<SS^i«S6?<i!>5»^Ss6 
 
 -a®»^^^^c®si^^,i«5<^ 
 
 
 f<.^C^X^^if^fi^ 
 
 ' See note ' on p. 326. 
 
 ' iSo is an adverbial conjunction (see pp. 339 & 330, Oba. IV. & V.), 
 ■wMoh, when it begins a sentence or clause, requires the subject to be 
 placed after the verb. 
 
THE CONJUNCTIONS. 329 
 
 LESSON XL. Scftiott 40. 
 
 The Oonjnnctions. (©inbcwortcr.) 
 
 Obs. I. — In German, conjunctions, which as in English, 
 French and Italian are uninflected words, exert a 
 great influence on the position of the verb. We divide 
 tiiem, therefore, into the following three classes: 
 
 1. The CO-ORDINATrTE CONJUNCTIONS, 
 
 2. The ADVEEBIAl CONJUNCTIONS, 
 
 3. The SUBOBDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 First Class : Co-ordinatiTC Coiunnctions. 
 
 Obs. IL — The Co-oedinative Conjunctions are: 
 
 2lber, aUeitt, fonbern, but unti, and 
 
 t)cntt, for, since foroo^t — afe, both — and 
 
 o5er, or 
 
 Obs. m. — The Co-oedinative Conjunctions serve merely as 
 links to sentences, and exert no influence on the po- 
 sition of the verb; e. g., 3c^ %(At i^n nic|t gc'^Brt, obct 
 icft ^abe i^n gefe^en, I have not heard him, hut I have 
 seen him. 
 
 Note. — Sometimes the co-ordinative conjunction oScr is 
 placed after the svbject or even after the v&rh (predicate), but 
 this change of position of o6er does not in the least alter the 
 sense, e. g., t)cr Server o6er fagte, Tmt the teacher said ; biefet 
 aiiann ^at etnen guten SSillen, er ^at abet Ceine ^raft, this man has 
 a good will, hut he has no power. 
 
 Second Class : Adverbial Conjnnctions. 
 
 Obs. IV. — The Adveebial Conjunctions are: 
 
 Sllfo, therefore, thus (alt — IdSi, sometimes — sometimes 
 
 ouc^, also, too ti«, ) 
 
 oupertem, iifcertcm, besides bann, alsbantt, ^ '' «*^ 
 
330 
 
 THB CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 kagcgen, ) on the contraxy 
 lingcgeti, j on the other hand 
 tenno^, and yet, still 
 ta^cr, Cepmegen, ] therefore, on 
 fcarum, tt^t^aib, ) that account 
 lemnacfe, \ 
 
 folglid^, (.consequently 
 mtt^irt, ) 
 
 ie^gleic^en, likewise; noc^, nor 
 befio, I the (with a com- 
 um fo, i parcUive.) 
 bepnungead^tet, \ neverthe- 
 nld^tsteflotocrtiger, ) less 
 fco(^, gteii^tto^I, ) yet, still, 
 ieboc^, inbeffen, J however 
 etncrfettS, ) on the one hand 
 anbrerfcto, ) on the other hand 
 enblii^, at last, at length 
 entweber — ober, either — or 
 
 erfl, jucrfl, at first 
 fcrner, further 
 ^txna&i, nai^^er, afterwards 
 faum, scarcely 
 nicbtnur, \ — fon* r not 
 nidjtaHeln, [- bent J only — 
 ni(^t iloi, ) auc^ ( but also 
 no(^, still 
 
 nun (je^t), now, then 
 fo, so, thus 
 fonfl, else, otherwise 
 iS^iiU — t^dii, partly— partly 
 iibcrbiea, besides 
 tihigend, as for the rest, how- 
 ever, moreover 
 Btclme^r, much more, rather 
 tDCbcr — nod), neither — ^nor 
 »o^I, jtoar, indeed, it is true 
 
 Obs. V. — The Adverbial Conjunctions, when beginning a sen- 
 tence or clause require the subject to be placed after 
 the verb or predicate ; e. g., ^V»at ^ottc cr 9tc(^t, akr 
 (atletn) mid^ ju f(i^Iagcn, bas war Unrest, U is true that 
 he was right, but to beat me was wrong. ^Ijx 9ieffe 
 ^at mi&i nic^t beja^It, folglii^ werbe ic^ i^n vectlagen, 
 your nephew has not paid me, consequently I shall 
 sue him. 
 
 VOCABITLAET. 
 
 umgelen, to associate 
 fld^ (eeilen, to hasten 
 fparcrt, to save 
 tSufc^en, to deceive 
 bic ©elegcn^ctt, the opportunity \/unterl^an&eIn, to negotiate 
 bcr ©c^wan, the swan y cntreif en, to take away, de- 
 
 ter ©inn, the sense, meaning prive of 
 
 bie Oegenwart, the present, 
 
 presence 
 blc 3"fi"ift( tlie future 
 ba« ®eMt, the face 
 
THE CONJUNCTIONS. 331 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON CO-ORDINATE AND ADVERBIAL CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 ©age ntir, mit mm tu umge^ji, unB i(^ toiU bir fagen, tccr iu Mfl. 
 ©as Seien i^ turj, keilen reir una alfo, Jic ©egcnwart ju fcenu^en, 
 fcenn wir tiirfen nie auf bie 3«J"nft rec^nen. 3^ !enne i^n nic^t »on 
 ®ePt, afcer ii^ lenne i^n tern Stamen nac^. !DaB ©liiiJ iji unkfiiin* 
 tig, tep^alfc mup man fparen, »enn man bie ©elegcn^eit |at. !l;ie 
 2llten gtauiten, bag ter ©(^wan melobtf^ fange, tsenn er bem Sobc 
 na'^e u are. .@ott fte^t Mti, folglid) Knnen tciv i:§n nii^t taufi^en. 
 aSeCer ®ote nocfy ®r6ge fijnnen uni gluctlic^ maiden. SDiglei^ ber 
 ^alif son lain ju gleic^er ^iit mit ben S^rijien unb mit ben Siirfen 
 untertontelte, ^aftc er tic Sincn, tueil fie bie geinbe teiS 9)rorteten 
 njoren, bie Slnbern, tucil fte i'^m ©^ricn entrijfen l^atten. £ie ©onne 
 fi^eint fid) ju betoegcn, tueil t»ir xmi mit ber Srte tiiglii^ «m tcren Slye 
 trel^en. Snbem trir fagen: bie ©onne ge^t auf unb unter, urt^eilen 
 iBir alfo nai^ bem Sdjein. 5)o wir aBer gewo^nt ftnb, fo ju reben, unb 
 wcti Scbcrman ben ©inn ba»on »erfie^t, fo todre ea iikrpfjtg, biefe 
 SletenSart ju iintem. Sr war fe^r miibe, rtii^tsbeflomeniger fu|r er 
 fort ju arteiten. 3ilic^t nur ter J^err ©taat^minificr, fontern ftu4 ber 
 3)rafitent beg 2l6geortncten^aufeg ttsirb erioartet. 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON CO-ORDINATE AND ADVERBIAL CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 My shears and my spectacles are in the drawer. Give me 
 some bread, butter, and cheese, if you please. I have heard 
 him, but I have not seen him. We cannot understand yoij,^ 
 for you speak too fast. I shall not go out to-day, because I 
 am sick. You must take an umbrella, or you wiU get wet. Not 
 only my parents, but also the teachers, have permitted it. 
 Neither the officers nor the soldiers did their duty. He paid 
 partly money, partly notes. Thou hast been lazy and disobe- 
 dient, consequently thou shalt stay at home. She did not wish 
 to go, moreover (iifcrigeng) we had no time. He was forbidden 
 (transl. it was him forbidden) to do it, but he did it neverthe- 
 less. Have you heard whether Mr. Bancroft is at the court of 
 Baden ? ¥ou live very far from our house, however I wiU try 
 
332 THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 to come. We had scarcely returned from our journey, wlien 
 our friends came after us in order to go to Paris. At first I 
 was willing to go, but I decided finally to stay at home. 
 
 Third Class : Snbordinatirc Coiynnctions. 
 
 Obs. VI. — The SuBOBDiNATivE Conjunctions are: 
 
 atS, when, as fo oft (aU), whenever 
 
 ksor, c|c, before fo 6al5 (aU), as soon as 
 
 Ui, until fo langc (ol^), so long as 
 
 ba, as, since {reason) vmQtai^tet, notwithstanding 
 
 tamit, in order that iBa^rcnl, while, whilst 
 
 fcaf , that toanit, when 
 
 faflg, in case that weil, because 
 
 intern, while, as Wenn, if when 
 
 Je — ,the — (with the compar.) avi&j, 
 
 noc^Jem, after tBcnnglet4 y although 
 
 am, ) 
 lleic^, y 
 ■(^on, ) 
 
 Jc nac^bcm, according as fi^o 
 
 oB, whether, if tole, how, when, as 
 
 obcjlii&i, obfi^on, ) though, luie au(^, however 
 
 ofcwo^l, 5 although totetoo^I, although 
 
 fett, feittcm, since {time) joofcrn, if, in case, that 
 
 Obs. Vn. — The Subobdinative Conjunctions (both simple and 
 compound) if they begin the sentence, require the verb 
 governed by them to be placed at the end of the first 
 clause, and the second clause to begin with the verb 
 folhwed by the svhject; e. g., 2118 id) i^n juerfi f anttte, 
 »ar er nocft etn ^nft6e. (Comp. also Part n.. Less. 
 
 XLVin.) 
 
 Obs. "VlU. — As a few of the conjunctions are translated by 
 the san^e word in English, an explanation of their 
 different synonymical significations is here given. 
 
 I. W)tt, aUcin, fon^etn, but. 
 
 1. ^htx, Latin autem, vero 
 
 2, StQetn, " sed, at 
 
THE CONJUNCTIONS. 333 
 
 These conjuiietions are disjunctwc, but tibtt ra&j 
 also be copulative. 9lbcr and aUettt are used indif- 
 ferently, if the antecedent clause has not a negation ; 
 e. g., 3cb tnijc^te ti !aufen, «Bcr (allein) ic^ t)akfein (Sell), 
 I would lite to buy it, hut I have no money. But 
 when the second clause has its own subject and 
 verb, obex is used even after a negative ; e. g., Sr 
 i|l no(^ nic^t '^ier, abet cr wirt gc»i§ fomtnen, he is not 
 yet here, but he will surdy come. 
 
 3. Sonbetn is disjunctive, and is used only 
 when a decided contradiction of a statement denied 
 in the antecedent clause is to be made ; e. g., ffti^t 
 flu« Siek jur ©ocbe, fonbetn am §og gegen fcincn ®cg* 
 ncr ^at er iiei get^an, not out of love for the cause, 
 but out of hatred to his opponent has he done it. 
 
 n. 2118, when, as, than, but. 
 This conjunction has different significations : 
 
 1. At the beginning of a clause or sentence it 
 signifies when, if followed by the verb in the Imper- 
 fect or Pluperfect tense ; e. g., When I told him, 
 oIS {(^ ti i^m I'agtc 5 when he had finished his exercise, 
 0I8 cr feine 3lufga6e kenttgt '^attc. 
 
 2. 2llg answers to the English than or as, after 
 an adjective in the comparative, or after fo or ebett: 
 fo followed by an adjective ; e. g., John is taller than 
 my brother, So^ann ifl grogcr alS mctn SBrutcr; he 
 knows it just as well as you, er lann eg ebenfo gut 
 alS tu. 
 
 3. 9118 answers to but after an adverb of negation ; 
 e. g.. She shall say nothing but the truth, fte foil 
 ni^tS 0I8 t)te SQa^r^eit fagcit, 
 
 4 2118 may denote quality or condition ; e. g.. He 
 acted as a man, er 'ijmMit al8 9JJann. 
 
 Note. — Sometimes the present participle is used in Eng- 
 lish instead of the conjunction as, followed by a past tense ; 
 
334 THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 e. g.. Standing (i. e., as I stood) by the window, which must 
 be translated alj xdj am Senfier flanb; bat, if a simultaneous 
 action is spoken of, the present participle is rendered by iti: 
 bent ; e. g.. Stretching out his arm, he said, inbent er feinen 
 arm auailrecEte, fc^tie er. 
 
 m. !&a, as, since. 
 ®a, like the English a& or since (French c&mme), 
 denotes a reason or cause; e. g., ® a i(^ nii^t Beit ^ait, \o 
 mxit i(^ nidit ge|en fbnnen, as I hare no time, {there- 
 fore) I shall not be able to go. For its use, in the 
 sense of when, see p. 336, VI., Eemark. 
 
 IV. S)h%Ui^, oijdfott, obtvol^I. 
 
 These conjunctions are all synonymous, but olts 
 glei^ is most frequently employed. They are gener- 
 ally divided -when one, two or even more monosyllables 
 follow ; e. g., Db \&, glet(^ flein war, or obglci^ \&i tleiti 
 tear; ob i^ mic^ glei^ freue, or obglett^ ic^ mid^ 
 freue. When they begin a sentence, the following 
 member corresponds to them by means of the con- 
 junctions &o4>, itnno^, or similar particles ; as, 
 feemungea^tet, nothwithstanding that; nic^td: 
 ^eftotpentger, nevertlieless ; e. g., Dbfcfeon er nod) 
 jung ifl, ^at er iod^ fc^on graueS ^aar, although he is 
 stiQ young, he has already grey hair ; 06 cr glcic^ alt 
 i(l, )o %at er ntc^tSbeftolventgev ten siJUigcn ©etrauc^ 
 fcincr ©ciftcstrafte, although he is old, he has still the 
 perfect use of his mental faculties. 
 
 V. @o, so, thus, as. 
 1. ®0 often serves to connect the subordinate 
 clause with the antecedent, when the sentence be- 
 gins with ta, or one of the conjunctions nai^lem, ot* 
 glctc^, oBfc^on,. oBroo^I, tBcil, wcnn or wfc ; but they need 
 not be translated into English and may be omitted 
 even in German; e. g., ^a cr l\i jc^t nic^t grtommen 
 tft, fo wcrbe id) tiidjt longer warten ; wcil ®te ti fagen, 
 fo mug id) ti gtaufcen; tuenn ter ^no6e flcif ig i|t, (fo) 
 fann er 311 2()rcn lommen. 
 
THE CONJUNCTIONS. 335 
 
 Note. — In these sentences the learner will notice that an 
 inversion or transmutation of both clauses has taken place, 
 to indicate which, fo is employed, hut we might just as pro- 
 perly say :_ 3c^ wetbe nt(^t loinger watten, tia er Hi jcft ni(|t ge- 
 fommett ifi, &c. 
 
 2. @0 before an adjective, followed by-the con- 
 junction au(^, answers to th'e English however, for 
 which see p. 339, No. V. 
 
 3, @0 denoting if or on condition that, is anti- 
 quated except in the usual phrase : ©o ®ott Witt, if 
 God please, or, if it please Go3. 
 
 VI. ^fltttt, ttfentt, al§. 
 
 The EngUsh word when may correspond to any one of 
 three German words, namely : 
 
 1. SSann, the interrogative adverb of time ;' e. g., 
 fSSann mxtt x^ iic^ ju ^aufe finten ? when will I find 
 you at home ? 
 
 2. SSJctltt, the coiijunction of time referring to 
 events supposed to occur ;^ e. g., 38enn ier Setter 
 tommt, Ia| mi) rufen, when the teacher comes, call 
 me. 
 
 Eemaek. — SSSentt is used also as a conjunction of 
 condition answering to the Enghsh if; e. g., SCenn bu 
 front Hfl, fi^reibe mix, if you are sick, write me. When 
 used with a verb in the imperfect it must be in the 
 subjunctive mode ; e. g.. He would be glad, if she 
 come, a ioare i^m lie6, toenn fie fame. 
 
 3. 3113, the conjunction of time past; e. g., 2118 
 i^ trant War, tarn er tiiglic^ ju ntir, when I was ill, he 
 came daUy to me. 
 
 ' SSenit and tnann are frequently used without discrimination one for 
 the other ; so are benn and bann. But the application of them is de- 
 cidedly fixed as given above, and bcitn must be used only as a conjunction 
 of cause — bann as an a&oerb of time. The only connection in which 
 tuann is properly used, without being interrogatory, is the old saying ; 
 2!)ann unb xovcm, now and then. 
 
336 THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Bemaek. — S)(l (which is synonymous with ali), 
 the conjunction of time past, and cause, or either ; 
 e. g., $)a (aU) er m^ Sonbon lorn, fanii n cine <StcI? 
 lung, when he came to London, he found a situation. 
 "We prefer alS, but as ba is sometimes used wo 
 mention it in this connection. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 'Bit Mla^t, the class ^ cnieuern, to renew 
 
 iai SlrtcitS^auS, the wojkhouse toaxttn, to wait 
 taa ©c^a^fpicl, the game of ianfctt, to thank 
 chess - iorgcrt, to trust 
 
 bie SUieffc, the fair irillcnS, willing 
 
 bcr Sriumpl, the triumph langfam, slow, slowly 
 
 Me ©c^ute, the debt miiDe, tired, fatigued 
 
 tie ®abe, the gift bic^t, close 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON SIMPLE SUBOBDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 ©ie tnai^tcn uni ben SSorfc^lag, umjutc^ren, ali wir fc^on mf^t Bei 
 ber ©tatt waren. SJian ntu§ fporen, tueil man jung tj^, bamtt man 
 im 2llter ru^en fantt. 3|r ^nabe ifi fi^on ber jwcite in feiner ^laflfe, 
 elmU cr erfl sjicr aCoc^en barln tfl. 'La er ni(^t artetten will, fo foil 
 cr ins 2lrbcit«^QU3. Sdii urn fiinf U^r Hcibe ic^ ju ^aufe. 3c^ teftnbc 
 mid^ tBoM, feitbem ic^ aufs Sanb gefomntcn bin. 9lac^bcm »ir ju 9)'Jtt* 
 tag gefpeifl :§atten, )>ielten ttir ©^a^. SBir mijc^ten btefeiS 3)fcrb 
 gem faufcn, aber cr toill ea nlc^t scrlaufen. 9lic^t fiir ®elb, fonbent 
 aus ma^rer greunbfdjaft |at cr bieS fiir ©tc gct:^an. 3lte i^ btf^jum 
 le^tenmal fa^, worfl bu no* fcl^r Iletn. gr fprac^ ni(^t ntit mir, ob* 
 glcic^ ic^ bic^t bet t^m flanb. Dbfc^on ic^ arm bin, |abe i^ ©ie bod& 
 nicfst betrogcn. ©o ©ott nsill, reifen ftir nfti^llc 3Bod)c na(^ Seipjig 
 jur ?Weffe. Stis Selifar ben ^bnig ber SSanbaten (Vandals) gefangcti 
 genommen '^atte, na^m cr it)n mit (id) nai^ Son^antinopcl, mil er 
 wiinfdjte, bie 2:rlttmi)|e ber alien 3lBmer ju erneucrn. 
 
THE CONJUNCTIONS. 337 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON SIMPLE SUBORDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 When I knew him, he was still a boy. As soon as I had 
 received your letter, I went to see him, but he had already 
 gone to Paris. I could not see them, as it was very dark. 
 Who told you, that he has lost all his money? After we had 
 sold our house, we were offered (tuurbe una — angel6oten) more. 
 Although the child is still very young, I shall nevertheless 
 send it to schooL In case you do not pay me to-day, I shall 
 be obliged to sue (serflagen) you. We have not seen Miss 
 Miller since we left Bordentown. So long as he wiU pay me 
 what he owes, I shall trust him again. He swore, as he 
 raised (up) his arm. He is not willing to pay his debts. Go 
 slowly, lest you should get tired. Can you not wait for me 
 until I have written my German exercise ? Before we eat we 
 ought to thank God for his gifts. 
 
 Compound Subordinative Oonjunctioiis. 
 
 Obs. IX. — Compound subordinative conjunctions consist of 
 
 two separate subordinative conjunctions. They 
 are : 
 
 Sll3 Us, until im gatt bap, in case 
 
 ali ba§, but that, but jie — beflo, the — the (tvith the 
 
 aU 06, ■) -f comparative) 
 
 aU wcnn j }e na^bem, according as 
 
 anflott baf , instead of gleii^ trie, fo loic, just as 
 
 ouf ba^, in order that o^nc bo§, without, but' 
 
 Ms Jaf , tiU, until fcBfl wcnn, even if 
 
 ftarait — nic^t, lest.' fo bag, so that 
 
 ' Lest in the sense of for fear of, after a negative clause, is sometimes 
 rendered by mi Surd)! (bag); but, after the verb to fear, fitt^teni it must 
 be rendered by bag simply (and not by bamit — nic^t) ; e. g., I did not go to 
 Paris, lest I should be arrested, (mi guriftt, ser^aftct ju tterben, or, mi 
 ^rniii, bag ic^ »ctSaftet toetben wutbe) ; 1 feared, lest he should fall, ic^ furcate, 
 bag cr fatten fBmtte. 
 
 ' The French sans que. 
 
338 
 
 THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 trie— aui^, j -fwrnn—aud^, j ^^^^^ jf 
 
 [o-au<^ Uowever twenn-glei.^, ^ ' 
 
 to |c:|r— aM(^, ; firenn— tcfeon, ) ^ 
 wrau^gefe^t ka^, supposing, fwenn — nur, provided 
 
 provided that fwctttt — ftuc^ noc^ fo, though or 
 
 fmenn — nii^t, ) , i ^ ever so 
 
 fwofcm — nid^t, ) ^^ ^^^ urn ju (vvith the Inf.), in order to 
 
 Note. — Those marked with a f require the Becdnd com- 
 ponent after the subject, and if there are personal pronouns 
 in the sentence, even after these; e. g., I^a^ren fie ^mt, tamit 
 a nni ntl|t ein^olt, drive fast, lest^ he should overtake us. 
 
 Obs. X. — Xiike the simple conjunctions explained under Obs. 
 Vm., some of the compound subordinate con- 
 junctions require further explanation and illus- 
 tration. 
 
 I. 21IS ia$, 1. After a negative clause in which 
 otherwise, or anything else, is understood, with the 
 adverb anScrg, al8 &n^ is used and is equivalent 
 to the English hvt or but that ; e. g., 3c^ toii^ ni&it 
 anbcrs, aid ba^ cr feine ©c^utecn c^rlic^ 6eja:§ft, I don't 
 kuow but (that) he always pays his debts. 2. When 
 Jtt is used in the sense of too, to indicate that the 
 certaia action spoken of is too much beyond 
 probability to take effect, di ia^ is employed ; e. g.. 
 The news was too good to be believed, tie 5Rac^ric^t mar 
 JU gut, ol§ baj^ man fie gtaufcen fiinnte. 
 
 Note.— Notice that in English the verb used after too is in 
 the infinitive, while in German the past tense is used as if the 
 sentence read : The news was too good as that one could 
 believe it. 
 
 II. £* {jnc hc^, after an excluding negation, cor- 
 responds to the English but; e. g.. Not a moment 
 passes, but I think of you, nic^t eine 9Jllnute tocrgc^t, 
 ol^nc fea^ tc^ on ©ie tenfe. 
 
 ' Unlebb means also : ti fet benn, ba§; but this is rather antiquated, 
 Luther used it frequently in his translation of the Bible. — Otto. 
 2 See note ' on preceding page. 
 
THE CONJimCTIONS. 330 
 
 in. The dash after [c — indicates that the ante- 
 cedent clause is to follow ; e. g., 3c mc^r fte |aben, its 
 fto mt^x WoUen jlc, the more they have, the more they wish. 
 
 TV. The dash between fo fe^t — au^ indicates 
 where the personal pronouns are to be placed ; e. g., 
 @o fcl^r Sic fi(^ auc^ gejlcrn jhttten. If the sub- 
 ject be a noun, fo [e^r auc^ need not to be separated; 
 e. g., @o fd^r o»^ tie grou i|n kt 
 
 V. 9HJic— Ott<J^, or fo — aM<^. The place of the 
 adjective to be used with these compound con- 
 junctions is indicated by the dash ; e. g., SSSte arm 
 auc^ [etn Dnfel [ein mag ; ®o grop au^ tie Si^reden ted 
 ^rieged fein mbgen. Sometimes alS is inserted before 
 aui^ ; e. g., @o angenc^m clS a antfy fein mog (fo) lann 
 i(^ ca to^ nic^t Mltigen ; or an inversion of the senten'ce 
 may take place and <m^ be entirely dropped ; e. g., 
 2lngene|m alS ti war, fo fonnte x&i ti to(^ nic^t Billigen, 
 
 Eelative Oonjunctions, 
 
 In indirect questions' all adverbs of interrogation have the 
 value of relative conjunctions, and require the verb to be placed 
 at the end of the clause. Such are: 
 
 SSJann, when ttie, how 
 
 rearum, why »ie»iel, how much 
 
 tuefi^ati, 1 , . toie tange, how long 
 
 tte§megen,[^^^''^*''^'^ too, where 
 
 and all the compounds of too as tvo^er, ttfO^in, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ®agen ®te mtr, two er t^n ttaf, tell me where he met him. 
 Jpat man ttr nii^t fagen tootten, loarum er nicbt gelommen ift, would 
 they not tell you, why he did not come ? 
 
 ' Direct questions, when placed in dependence on a preceding verb, 
 become indirect, and in this case require the verb to be at the end of the 
 sentence : e. g~, SBeigt bu, Wtr biti jefagt got? The direct question -would 
 be: SBet ^at bis8 flefogt? 
 
340 THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Note. — ^Notice that the entire compound verb of the first 
 clause precedes the relative conjunction. It would he in- 
 correct to say : $at man bir, roatum er ntiJ|t gefommen tfif fagen 
 iDOIIen 7 
 
 VOCABULAET. 
 
 Eie ©c^ulb, the debt '' fic^ janfcn, to quarrel 
 
 tai ©ttUfc^weigfn, the eilenoe ^ gc»a|ren, to grant 
 iai ©cfc^dft, the business sortereitcn, to prepare 
 
 bte aUcbe, the speech v,itXQtf)tn, to pass over 
 
 kcr Scaler, the dollar bctcibigen, to offend 
 
 Reading Exercise XL. 
 
 SS fd^eint mir, ali 06 (or dli mm) ic^ 'ti^ fc^on irgenbwo ge? 
 fe^fecn ptte. @ie ^a6cn mic^ gu fc^r geftranft (or fcclcitigt), al« tog 
 ic^ c3 mit ©tiUfcbtueigen libergc^cn lonntc. ®ieb mir bit Sriefe, ba* 
 mit i(^ fie auf tie 3)o^ trage, eS wirt fpat. 3c c|fi^ it)r tics t^ut, teflo 
 sort^eiliafter wirt ei fein. 2ln|latt tag feine ®ef(|afte je^t be|fcr ge^en 
 foUten, gel^cn |te fc^lecfeter. D^ne tag i^ mt(^ taraitf »or6ereitet l^atte, 
 mugte ic^ ^eute Slknt eine Slete l^often. ©ic tniirten fieffer t^un, 
 ni&it 3U l^ciratl^en, {aU) Ui ©ie einen Scruf ptten. 3m gaB 
 (or fatt«) ifi) 3^tien wcrte tiencit tijnnen, fcfjreifcen ©ic mir fofott. 
 kana^ tu nic^t worten, Ud tag xAi meine Settion gelcrnt '^a6e ? 
 Stimm einen Stegenfdsirm, tamit tu mc^t nag wertefl. SCenn cr miii 
 au(^ nocfe fo fe|r Mttet, id^ Knnte es i^m nidjt gemii^ren. !E;u toirjl 
 ftiel oter wenig in tiefem Drte sertaufen Bnnen, je na^tem tie 3)rei)"c 
 ^0^ oter nictrig fint. SSte f^te^t aud) immer er au^fc^cn mag, i^ 
 werte i|n tod^ eriennen. SBiirten ©ie mir jwci 2;:|aler Iei:^cn lonnen, 
 wenn id^ pe 3^ncn Mnnen (or inncr^^aK) tret oter Bier ©tunten toic^ 
 ter juritdgcfcc ? 
 
 Theme XL. 
 
 It seems tome as if I had seen your sister somewhere. I 
 don't know, bvi his business is doing well [German : his 
 
'IHE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 341 
 
 business (plur.) go well]. He has offended me too greatly (fc|r) 
 to pardon it. A man ought not to marry urdil he has a pro- 
 fession. In case thai I can help you, write me immediately. 
 This news is too good to beheve it. Not a day passes hrd we 
 think of you. Ihe more we have, the more we wish. How- 
 ever much they quarreled, they will soon be good friends 
 again. However poor his uncle may be, he will nevertheless 
 pay his debts. ¥ou must take care, lest you fall. He cannot 
 do anything, hut he hurts himself. The plebeians (5)lc6ejcr) 
 intended to leave Eome, in case the Patricians (^Jatrijicr) did 
 not keep their word. This is the man on whose account we 
 went to Frankfort on the Oder. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 ^annfl bu kiefc SlufgaBc rttd^t o|ne 
 tncinc ^ittfe (help) f^reikit ? 
 
 aSic fa:^ jte au«, da tw |ie fa'^fl ? 
 
 ^ijnncn <Sie f?c^ mciner nic^t cnt* 
 flnnen? 
 
 @c:^cn 3|re ®t\6^o.\tt jc^t nic^t 
 
 kffcr ali im ©ommer ? 
 2Bann reiftejl tu son SJlagbeBurg 
 
 aSie lommt ti tenn, ba^ bu bepns 
 wngeac^tet |ctttc crfl |o fpiit ^ter 
 elntriffji (arrive) ? 
 
 SCcrtct 3^r am ©fcnflag mit mi 
 tia&i Slarlottcnturg gc^eit Ion? 
 nen? 
 
 aScrben @lc mir nicfet metnen 
 gc^ltritt. Bcrjct^en, tucnn ic^ 31* 
 nen »erfprc(^e, ntii^ ju kjfem ? 
 
 3^ tonntc es tuolt, akr ic^ mbii^te 
 
 ed nic^t gem atletn t^un, ta id^ 
 
 fetnc getter mac^en toitt. 
 ©le war fo Hctc^ (pale) unb biinn 
 
 (thin), bap \^ fiie fount er* 
 
 fonnte. 
 9lein, ougcnblifii^ nt^t; aSer eS 
 
 fd)eint mir, als oB ic^ ®ic fc^on 
 
 irgcnbtto gcfe^cn ^dtte. 
 Slnftatt ba§ fie beffer ge^en fotttcn, 
 
 ge|en |te noc^ fi^Iei^ter. 
 ®e(lern 9(iac^mtttag mit. bcm 
 
 ©d^nettjugc (express-traia). 
 3)er 3ug lief son ben ©cfeienen 
 
 (track) unb tsir mu^ien tsar* 
 
 ten, lii eine anberc 2ocomotise 
 
 una 3U .^iitfe !am. 
 Stic^t o|ne bag unfer Se^rcr una 
 
 bie Srtaubnif ert:^eilt, ober felbjl 
 
 mitge^^t. 
 ^x&jt e|er, aU 6ia ii^ bet Sejfcs 
 
 rung getsig bin. 
 
342 
 
 THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 SEGoHcn <Bit mi&i Bcja'^Ien obcr 
 
 nic^t? 
 3il eg gcfuitb, latige ju fd^Iafen? 
 
 SlBcr wic Bide (Stunlen glauten 
 'Bit, kag man fc^lafen fcB ? 
 
 ©eit wann Mfl tu Wtcticr in Sit* 
 feed? 
 
 SDiirbcji bu Untcmc^t tn bcr beut* 
 
 fdjen ©prac^c ne^mcn, wenn bu 
 
 ®elt liitteft ? 
 Me fcracbtefl bu bctne 3eit ?«/ 
 
 wo^rcnb tolr auf bie 3<»9b gins 
 
 gen? 
 
 3c^ wm ®ic kja^len, (oBalb ic^ 
 
 nur ®clb |aBc. 
 Vlein, je longer man fc^liift bejlo 
 
 tr&ger wirb man. 
 SJJan fott ungcfa'^r fec^g bis jteten 
 
 ©tunbeii I'c^Iafen, oBer feineS- 
 
 faUs longer, 
 ©eit i(| mein Syamen (exami- 
 nation) auf bcr Uniscrfttat 
 
 mad^te (passed). 
 3c^ Wiirbe nicfet allcin Unterridjt 
 
 im IJeutf^en, fonDem au^ im 
 
 Sranjij|ifd^en ne^mcn. 
 Srfl fcbrlcb ic^ meinc StnfgaBe ab, 
 
 bann fpielte t(^ im ©arten. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 S)aS Siifcget)). 
 
 StIS bcr )5reupifc^e ©toat fein ^riegs^ecr noi^ bur^ Slu^tanbcr cr* 
 giinjte, :§iclt er in mel^reren ©tabten ^auptleute, bie ©ollaten fiir 
 ®clD bort onjuincrben fuc^ten. Sin foIAer SBerbc^auptmann war auc^ 
 ipcrr ».' 9lei|ig, unb jwor in bcr ©tott Ulm, im ^ijntgrcic^ SBiirtcm« 
 Berg. Sei i^m mcliete pc^ einca Sagg ein fd^ijner, junger SRcnfdi, 
 bcffen ganjes SBcfen Siltung serried, unb bcr furd^tfam an aUen 
 ®Iicbcrn jittcrtc. Ser §ou))tmann fragtc t^n, tuarum er jittcrc unb 
 jt^ fiirdjtc, nat^bcm er cinmal ben gntfc^Iup gefagt ftabc," (!c^ anwerten 
 3U tajfen," urn ©olbat ju wcrben. „9l6cr, ii^ fiirc^te, ba^ ©te mii^ 
 ni^t anne^mctt wiirben," war bie 3lntroort, bie er mit i^ranen Be* 
 gleitete. 
 
 ((DariiBer feien ©ic unBeforgt," cntgegnetc bcr ^auptniann ; „©ie 
 gefatten mir; rcc^t gem werbc ic^ ©ic anne^mcn." — „%in i&i fiircfctc, 
 bo^ S^nen ba« ffierbegelt, t»cl(^c« ic^ forccrn mug, ju ^o&i fcin tcirb," 
 
 ' Sen @ntfl4tu$ foffen, to decide, to make up one's mind. 
 
 ' Si^ onlBcrlicn (offcn, to enlist. 
 
 ' U., abbreviation for son (like French 'de, sign of nobility). 
 
THE CONJUNCTIONS. 343 
 
 cwteiierte bcr gremtie.— „2Ca3 scrlangen ©te bcnn ?" ' fragte i^n ter 
 ^auptmattn. — „®ine iringente SiJot^iucntigtcit jwingt mid), l^untcrt 
 ©ulBctt ju fortcrn," anttoortete ber junge SJlenfc^, „unl» i^ Hn tcr uns 
 glitcflidjiie SKcnfc^, ttienn ®le m'tr tiefe ©untme a6fd)Iogen." — „§uns 
 bert @ul5cn," fagte tcr ^auptmann, „ftni freili(^ »iel ; oBcr ©ic ge* 
 fatten ttiir. 3i^ glaubf, ha§ ®ie 3ire 9>flic^t tl§un iuerfeen, unb iA 
 iDitt mit 3|ncn ntc^t ^anieln. §ier ftntt fie ! SJlorgm rcifen mtr ai." 
 3)tit ttefen SBorten ja^Ite er, ungcac^tcf' ter gro^cn gorberung, U)m bas 
 ®elb iaax aus. !Der junge ?!Kenfci) war fe'^r crfreut, Bat" ben §aupt= 
 mann urn tie ©riaubnig, nac^ ^aufe ge^en ju biirfen, urn einc '^cilige 
 5)fltc^t 3U erfittten, utti) serfprac^ in einer ©tunbc wieber juriid ju fcin. 
 Jperr ». Sdeiftg Iie§ i^n gel^en, im Sertrauen auf fein c|rti(^e3 ©effect. 
 Sllier tticil cr in feinem ganjcn SSetragen ctwas 3[uf erorbenttic^es hi 
 merft l^atte, folgte* cr i'^m son feme* nac^ unb fat), wte cr ciligfi nad) 
 bem ©tabtgefangnif lief. %U ber §aut)tmann bte 3:pre bes ©cfiing* 
 niffeg errei^t ^atte, prte er ben iungen SiJlenfi^cn mit bem^erlermei? 
 |ler retcn unb ju i^m fagen: „§ier ifl bag ®elc, um bcjfentoitten' mein 
 SBater gefangen ft^t." Ser ^er!ermeifler bffnete barauf bag ©efSngs 
 nip, ber @o^n ftel feinen alien SBater um ben ^aU unb serKinbcte i^m 
 fcinc grei:^eit. £)er SGater anttoortete : „DBglci^ ii^ ol^nc meine 
 ©djult arm gcttjorben, unb in ©(i^ulbcn geriet^, fo fann i^ bad| meine 
 grei^eit ni(^t buri^ bie bcinige eriaufen lajfen, tiekr ®o^n ! 3c^ Bin 
 alt, unb mciner Slagc fmb nur noc^ wenige, unb ber ^crJcr ifi mir 
 weniger eng unb tocnigcr buntet, ba i^ einen fol^en ©o|n |aBe. 
 Sragc Mi ©elc tuieber :^irt unb erl^alte Seine greil^eit!" ®er ©oI)n 
 (iriiuBtc ft^; ber Sater bat, unb SSeibe |ielten fid) umarmt unb wcin:; 
 ten grof c 2:|ranen. 2)0 trat ber Jpauptmann niil^er ju i^nen, nmarmte 
 |tc Bcibe, crHdrte SSeiben i'^rc grci^eit, fii|rte fie au3 bem @cfangni§, 
 serweigerte bem ®o'§ne bas SRcc^t, i'^m 3U folgen, unb licit biefen Sag 
 fiir len gliidlici^jiett feine« SebenS. 3)u|lIu^en»®IttniotB. 
 
 ' ® enn, in sentences of tMs kind, answers to tlie English well; as. Well, 
 how much do you ask? 
 
 * Ungeaii^tct is a preposition governing its noun in the genitive. 
 " Um ©rlouBniS Bitten, to ask (for) permission. 
 
 * SBon feme noi^folBCn, to follow at a distance 
 
 ^ Seffentwiflen (on account of which), compounded of the pronoun bcff en 
 and the preposition nitUen (governing the genitive case). The t is in- 
 serted for euphony sake. 
 
34.4 THE PEEPOSITIONS. 
 
 LESSON XLI. Section 41. 
 
 The Prepositions.' (t)te aSor* ottn aSer^ottni^tnortct.) 
 
 Obs. I. — The cases of nouns are in German, as in Greek and 
 Latin, frequently governed by prepositions. They 
 do not, however, govern the noun as in English in 
 the objective (German accusative only), but may 
 require it to be either in the genitive, dative or 
 accusative, the three cases by which dependency 
 can in German be expressed. Indeed, some of the 
 German prepositions, as we have already seen m 
 Lesson XL, may govern even two cases, so that to 
 the English-speaMng student, the preposUions be- 
 long, no doubt, to the most difficult part of German 
 grammar. 
 
 I. Prepositions governing the Genitive Oasei 
 
 anflatt' or jiatt, instead of flii^S^/ along 
 
 au^cr^att, without, outside • flout, according to 
 
 fciejfeitS, on this side of oBer^att, above 
 
 flatten, ) on account of, by unter^att, below 
 
 flatter/ j reason of tro^, in spite of 
 
 icnfeto, on the other side of urn — »5itlen, for the sake of 
 
 inner|att, within {place) unBcfclabct, without prejudice 
 
 f fraft, by virtue of itngco(^tet, notwithstanding 
 
 unweit (uttfern), not far from t»o|rent), during 
 
 »ermittel|l (mtttelp), by means of wegcn, on account of 
 
 uermijge, by means of sufotge, according to* 
 
 ' Becker ranks prepositions with form words, " because,'' he says 
 " they express not the substance, bat the form of our ideas." 
 
 ' ^nfiatt, compounded of an (m) and @tatt (place), is sometimes sepm 
 able ; e. g., SHn beS 25aler« ©tatt, in the father's stead. 
 
 ' Those prepositions marked with an f are rather antiquated. 
 
 * 3uf olge requires the noun to be in the genitive, when placed before, 
 and the dative when placed after it. See list of prepositions requiring 
 the 'genitive. 
 
the peepositions. 345 
 
 Old Veese to help the Memobt: 
 
 Utttocit, mittelft, froft unS ma^renb, 
 Saut, bcrmagc, ungca^tet, 
 Oitt^ali urd) untcrl^alb, 
 ^nnerl^alt mi au^et^ali, 
 SiicffeU, jenfett, l^albcn, tnegen, 
 <Biatt; auc^ liingg, gufolgf, tro^, 
 ©te|en tnit bent Genitir, 
 Dter auf bic gwge: SSeffcn ? 
 ®0(i ijl ^iet ni4t ju sjcrgcffen, 
 ®ag bei tiefm le^ten brel 
 9(u(^ ier Dativ vii^tig fet. 
 
 Note. — 1. galien or ^a(6cr is always placed after the 
 noun which it governs ;' ^alicn being preferred when the noun 
 is accompanied by the article or pronoun ; e. g., iii SaterS 
 |al6cilj on father's account or for father's sake; SJergnitgen^ 
 ^alberj for pleasure's sake. When ^al6en is united with the 
 genitive of a personal pronoun, the r of the pronoun is 
 changed to tj e. g., SDJeinrt^olben,^ for my sake. 
 
 Note.— 3. Ungea^tet, tocgen and jufolge may either precede 
 or follow the noun which they govern ; e. g., Ungeadltet ttHer 
 ©(i^wteristeiteni feineS SJcrmiigena ungeai^lct. But jitfolge, when its 
 place is after the noun which it governs, requires the latter 
 to be in the datiee; e. g., mcincit Sefe^lcn jufolge, according to 
 (or pursuant to) my orders. 
 
 Note. — 3. Like jufolge, liingd and troft may also govern the 
 dative, but they retain their place before the noun which 
 they govern ; e. g., ttoj nteinen SSitteiti in spite of my requests. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Tin ®influ§, the influence bag Ufer, the shore 
 
 Hi SJarnung, the warning bte ©cfcttfiSaft, the company 
 
 ttx gtemtc, the stranger gefatlcn, to please 
 
 ber Srtrcrfi, the acquirement i- Bcr^often, to arrest 
 
 bcr 5Kitmenf(^,the fellow-man fpajieren fo^rm, to ride out 
 
 crwetkn, to earn untcnie|men, to undertake 
 
 ' Thus in Latin, teniis has its place always after the noun which it 
 governs. 
 » Compare the Latin preposition Cum : meeum, tecum, noKacum, &c. 
 
346 
 
 THE PEEPOSITIONB. 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON PREPOSITIONS REQUIRING THE QENITIYM. 
 
 3c^ wertc att|latt meineS SSoterS ttai^ Stalicn reifen. S3or ciiter 
 ©turttc warcn wir itoc^ au^cr^aK ier ©tatt. S^nfcitS teS ©rates 
 gtcBt eg ctn c»tgc3 SeBen, nacb bem icier SJlenfi^ jlrcfccti follte. 2Bir 
 ^a6en un« sermbge unfercS glei^e^ tie 3lc^tung unt SteBe unferer SJlits 
 mcnf^en crworben. SBtr ftni gc^em langs t>ti fjluffcs fpajiercn ge* 
 fa'^rcn. Scrmltteljl ieg SinflufcS feinea reid^cn Dn!elg \<x\. er ilefe 
 ©tcKc cr^altcn. ^raft meincS Slmtcs »er|ofte ii^ ©ic. Sro^ metner 
 iSBarnungen untemo|jn er ti. ffiii'^rcnli tea ©omntcrg ftnb fc^r 
 »lele grcmte in ^t)Tingen. "Ecs fc^Iecfcten 3Cetter« ungeai^tct, ging 
 er fpojiercn. greunbfc^afts |aIBcr \j(xi er mir kiefen ©efaHen ge* 
 tt)an. (Seinet^Ken mitt i^ ti noc^ cinmal t^^un. Slii^moni) liegt 
 jwBIf aJlcilcn ober^alB, ©reentoic^ fiinf 9ReiIen untcr|alb ber Sonconer 
 Sriide. Urn mciner SItern wiHen, wcrle ii^ toieber nac^ Deutfc^knb 
 juriicEte^ren. 3nner|aIB cine3 3(»^re3 wcrtic ic^ o«f tie Uniserfitot 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON PREPOSITIONS REQUIRING THE QENITIYE. 
 
 The servant came instead of the master (§crr). Can I send 
 my wife instead of myself! I shall go to Salzbrunn(en) on 
 account of my health. We met our friends outside the city. 
 Wo sailed along the shore. My father has acquired (fic^ er« 
 werBen) his reputation by means of his integrity (0lec^tf(^ajtcn« 
 l^eit). The battle of Lutzen took place not far from Leipzig. 
 Notwithstanding the nearness (9'lat)c) of the enemy, our 
 soldiers ventured (themselves) outside the city. I vdll ac- 
 company you for the sake of (your) company. The country 
 on this side of the Rhine belongs to Germany, and what lies 
 on the other side [of it] belongs to France. According to an 
 order, the criminal was executed. For God's sake, help me, 
 or I am lost. Tou can do this by means of youi- under- 
 standing. 
 
THE PKEPOSITIONS. 347 
 
 11. Prepositions governing the Dative Case. 
 
 mi, out of, from nS^ji, ) 
 
 auger, except, besides jund^jl/ j ^^^ 
 
 M, near, with, by, at ne6ft, ] , ,, .,, 
 
 Mnnen, within (for time) fammt, \ *°g^*^'^ ^*^ 
 
 mit, with feit, since, for 
 
 ttad^, after, according to Bon, from, of, by 
 
 ob, account of (is obsolete) ju, to, at 
 
 and the following, which are placed c^er the sub- 
 stantives they govern: 
 
 cntgegen, against, towards jufolge, according to, in aecord- 
 
 gegcniifeer, opposite to ance with 
 
 gentaf , according to suwtbcr \ ™ opposition, 
 
 ' ( contrary to 
 
 Old Veese to help the Memoey : 
 
 <Siiviii: mii, no^, niit^ji, ncBfi, fommt, Bet, fcit, Hon, ju, juwibcr, 
 ©ntgegen, Binnen, anS, flet3 mit bent Dativ nieter. 
 
 Note. — We have already noticed on p. 87 that after verhs 
 denoting direction to or toward, ju is generally used before 
 persons, and na^ before places or countries. See also p. 354 
 how to render to. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 tic SJJote, the fashion kie ©ctfHtc^fctt, the clergy 
 
 tic gamilic, the family fcefuc^cn, to visit 
 
 lie 9Reticin, the medicine fic^ ktrtnfcn, to get intoxicated 
 
 tic 5Sor|%ift, the direction cntgegen gc^cn, to go to meet 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON PKEPOSITIONS REQUIRING THE DATIVE. 
 
 ®c|e i^m aua tern SScge, cr ifl Betrunfen. SRein Srutcr %'a\t fl(^ 
 noc^ imntcr auf er Santcg auf. £)er SJrutcv te3 ic|igen ^ijntga »on 
 
848 THE PKEPosmoss. 
 
 9)reupen tturbe (jlb^Iicfe franf utib jiari Mnnen a&it Sagcn. 2Ca|rcnt) 
 kc^ ©ommerg jie^en wir nac^ ©diijncberg. ©c|cn ®tc jenen Jperrn, 
 ker nddijl meinem Dntcl p^t. Unfercm §aufe gegcnuBcr Befintet |ic^ 
 Me 9)ojl. SSWetn Sllod ijl nat^ bcr tteucn SKote gefdsmttcn, §akn 
 ®ie fdjon nac^ kern 'Doltor gefcbidt? Jpen Sbtoenti^at ncfc^ fettter 
 ganjen Samilie fccfui^tcn uns »orge(lcrn. §ofl tu no^ !cinen Sricf 
 son leinem SSater er^attcn ? aBiUji tu, to§ »ir unfercm Scorer ent* 
 gegen ge^en? Sr na^m tie SKjticin ten 25orf(|rlftcn te« Slrjte^ gemii^. 
 33on ten Sdbmern tourtc tag ci^alpinif^c (cisalpine) (Sallicn In 
 aiBci Siicile get^eilt. 3fl ii wa^f; ta^ ®ie tie tcutfc^c <Bpxa6^t 
 fdjon felt trei ^ai)Xin lerncn? Dcr |)a))fl ging ^ori tern ®ro§en mit 
 ter ganjcn ®eiflU(^!eit cntgcgen, unt empftng i^n ou^cr^^alb tcr ©talt. 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON PREPOSITIONS REQUIRINa THE DATIVM 
 
 Have you made this journey alone, or with your father? 
 My brother has accompanied me as far as Dresden, from 
 Dresden to Prague I traveled alone. The castle lies opposite 
 the museum. I was at the carpenter's, but he was not at 
 home. Go to the gardener, and tell him to bring me (transl. 
 that he shall bring me) a basket fuU of nice red apples. 
 We shall go to Brunswick to the fair. In accordance with 
 your order I have sent you two beautiful pictures. It is 
 contrary to reason, to lead a reckless (Iet(^t|innigeS) Ufe. I 
 do not like to do it, but I do it in accordance with my 
 promise. The Dutch (^oHSntifi^) merchants have just arrived 
 from Amsterdam. This affair (@ac^c) is of very great im- 
 portance. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 3ia^^ni§ an bie CueUc. 
 9lo^ Sir fc^ma^t' i&i, ju "Dir eiP id^, Du gcliettc DueHe, Du 
 9tu§ Dir Wepr i^, Bft ®ir ru^ i(^, fe^ iem ©ptcl ter SBeMen ju ; 
 gjJit t)ix f^crj' i^, don ®ir lern' id^ fetter tur^ ta3 Seben luatten, 
 Slngelad^t ban Srii^IingsHumen, unt kgrit^t bon 9lac^tigaIIen. 
 
 SR a m I e r. 
 
THE PISEPOSITIONS. 349 
 
 III, Prepositions governing the Accusative Case. 
 
 kttrcfe, through, by o^fene, without, but for 
 
 fiir, for um, about, around, at 
 
 gcgen, towards, against, to witer, against 
 
 and the following, which are placed after the sub- 
 stantives, they govern : 
 
 ■^tnauf, up fiindb, |inunter, down 
 
 ^inburcb, through cntlang, along 
 
 Old Veese to help the Memoet : 
 
 Set tnxSi, fitr, dl^nc, um, au^ funiier, gegcn, hiiber, 
 iSc^reib' {iets ten Accusativ unt nie ten Dativ nieter. 
 
 Note. — 1. Both gcgcn and lotlier (not mteber, which is an 
 adverb) are sometimes rendered by against. But while gegcit 
 indicates direction and tendency in an .ndifierent sense, 
 friendly or hostile, toibcr denotes an opposition, doing or 
 designing evil ; e. g., Wir fegcln geocn ben 2Bini>, means only 
 "toward the wind, meeting the .wind," but totSer bcnSEBinfc, 
 signifies against the wind, i. «., struggling against it. 
 
 Note. — ^3. Um is rendered by at when it refers to time ; 
 e. g., Sommen ©ie um fc^* U^r, i. e., come at six o'clock. It is 
 also used to designate lots; e. g., J)ct 3)lenf(^ ^at mi^ um mctiie 
 ^alie getrailt, the man has cheated me out of my ovm (prop- 
 erty), or the man has caused me to lose my own (proj)- 
 erty). 
 
 rV. Prepositions governing the Dative or Accusative. 
 
 an, at, in, on, to Winter, behind 
 
 auf. on, upon in, in, into 
 
 ncfccn, by the side of, near tox, before, ago 
 
 itnter, under, among 3»t|'d^cn, between 
 fiber, over, above, across 
 
 Obs. II. — The above nine prepositions require the dative 
 when the verb in the sentence implies rest or motion 
 in a place, answering to the question "Where?" 
 
350 THE PEEPOSITIONS. 
 
 and the accusative, when it expresses a directum or 
 motion from one place to another, answering to the 
 question " "Whither ? " e. g., T)cr 31d(! ptigt :^intcr bet 
 Xiiiivt, the coat hangs behind the door. You ask : 
 " Where or in what place does the coat hang ? " The 
 answer nmst of course be in the dative, as it is made 
 in reply to the question, where ? and because the 
 verb ^ongen, to hang, indicates rest. Hang the coat 
 behind the door, is translated l^iittge len fRod Winter &ie 
 jE^itre. The question now is whither (whereto) or to 
 what place ? The answer is, remove the coat from one 
 place to another. Here is indicated motion, not within 
 a certain place, but from one place to another, and 
 the preposition requires consequently that the noun 
 be in the accusative. 
 
 Old Verse to help the Memoet : 
 
 9ln, auf, ]§inter, nekn, in, 
 Ueier, unter, bar unS jtnif^cn 
 ©te^en mit tern Accnsatir, 
 SQenn man fragen fann: toalin ? 
 9Rit Kent DatiF ficVn fie fo, 
 S)a§ man nur fann fragen: wo? 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 t)9ii l;am))ff(i^tff, the steamer bcr §olg, the neck 
 
 »er Sufluc^taort, the refuge JaS glefecr, the fever 
 
 tie Unfc^ulb, the innocence Me SKii^e, the trouble 
 
 ia« ©e^cimnig, the secret btc §t^c, the heat 
 
 5aa ®efej6u(^, the code of law jleuern, to steer 
 
 Reading Exercise XLI. 
 
 SEittfl ttt mtt una burcfe ten 2Da(!) gc:§cn ? 3Dir l^abcn eine ncuc 
 ^^^ fiir unfern tieinen Srutcr getauft. ®cgen elf U^r Witxiii »er* 
 
THE PKEPOSITIONS. 331 
 
 Hcf baa ©am|>ffc^iff ben ipafen, m H cinen 3Mft«'^'*''rt gegcn ken 
 Sturm gefuc^t ^otte, unB jlcuerte gen Storten. 3<^ niixU ntit^ nie in 
 fremten ©tattcn o^nc eincn gii^rer fcegniigen. ©ie pel nttr urn ben 
 ^ali nnb tuetnte wie ein ^inJ. fir lief bie ®tra§e tjinavi unb |inuns 
 tcr. Die gan^jc fRa&it |inburc^, !onnte ic^ nicbt bie 3lugen fd)lie§en. 
 Sllejconbcr ber ®ro^e jiarB on einer ^rant^cit in Sab^lon. ^at nic^t 
 Scmanb an bie St^itre gcllopft ? 2Dir (licgen urn 4 U^r ouf ben S3erg, 
 c|e bie ©onnc aufgegongcn war. 3m fttblic^en Stalien ifl bie ^i^« 
 im ©ommer fo unertraglic^, bag man in ber 3ia6^t fpajieren ge^^t, maV 
 renti man am Sage fc^Iaft. ^jjlcin ^inb ijl ins SSajfer gefallen unb 
 tuiire ertrunten, wcnn ti nic^t »on cinem jungen SJianne gcrettet stjorben 
 wiire. "Die Sbgel fliegcn »or bem fBinter iiber's ^Jleer, in ein mar* 
 mereS ^lima. ^arl |at feinen SaU iiber bie SJlauer getcorfen, foil i(^ 
 i^n ttieter ^olen? Unfer ©ommer^ouS flc^t auf einer Heinen 2ln^b^c, 
 jroifc^en bem gluffe unb ber Sanbflra^e. Unter ber 3legierung grieb* 
 rid) tea ®rofen er^ielt 9)reu§en ein ncuca ©efe^bu^. Tiai ©e^eim? 
 ni§, weli^ea i4 blr an»ertraut ^a6e, mug unter una 6leiJen. Die Un* 
 f^ulD auf bem ©^affotte logt ben Sl^rannen auf bem a;riumt>^«5agen 
 erbleid^cn. 
 
 How to render some English Prepositions. 
 
 In Gerinan a proper use of the prepositions requires an 
 intimate acquaintance with the character of the language. 
 We give to the student here only a few hints for the proper 
 rendering of those prepositions most generally in use, and 
 reserve the more specific remarks for Less. XUX. 
 
 L At.' 1. With reference to any locality on the 
 same level with the person speaking, at is rendered 
 by in ; e. g.. We arrived a< Paris last night, »ir lamcn 
 ge|iem Slfcenb in 3)aria an. 
 
 ' Fowler says : " To is made use of before nouns of place, where 
 they follow verbs and participles of motion ; «. jf., " I went to London." 
 But at is generally used after the verb to be ; e. g.,"I have been at Lon- 
 don." In is set before the names of countries, cities and large towns; e. g.. 
 He lives in France. Mdrkay says, " At must be placed before villages, 
 single houses and distant cities." Gaspbt says that at may also be used 
 
352 THE PEEPOSITION. 
 
 2. With reference to any locality higher than the 
 persons speaking at is rendered by ouf ; e. g.. They 
 are ai the castle (burgh), |le ftnt) auf kcr Surg. 
 
 3. When used in the sense of in,' at is rendered 
 by in ; e. g., I have been ai London, i^ Hn in SonJon 
 gcwefen; ai the beginning, iitt Slnfang. 
 
 4. When used in the sense of on, ai is rendered 
 by auf; e. g., at my risk, Ottf Jtteine ©cfo^r. 
 
 5. When used in the sense of for, ai is rendered 
 by ffir ; e. g., ai two shillings a bushel, ken ©c^cjfel 
 fflt jwei ©c^iUing. 
 
 6. Denoting the hour or part of the day, ai is ren- 
 dred by UItt \ e. g., ai four o'clock in the morning, 
 urn titer U^r ?Worgcn«5 at midnight, wa 9Rittema(^t. 
 
 7. To the following no particular rule will apply : 
 
 ai the end, am @nbe, 
 at my age, itt mcinem 3lftcr. 
 ai home, JU ^aufe.' (See p. 466.) 
 IL Byt 1. With the Passive voice (the Latin a, db) 
 by is rendered by »on ; e. g., This house is built by 
 my father, iicfe^ JpouS wirb t>on meinem SSater gebaut. 
 
 2. With reference to a place (Latin juxta) by is 
 rendered by bci or nebett ; e. g.. He stands by (or 
 near) the door, er jielt bei (or neten) ter S:^ure. 
 
 8. Denoting the cause, means or instrument of an 
 action by is rendered by bnt^ (sometimes also son 
 or mit) ; e. g.. He conquered only by force, er jicgte 
 nur but<^ ©ewolt; he became perfect by practice, er 
 wurbc tontc^ UeBung sotdommen. 
 
 4. Used in the sense of on, by is rendered by nti; 
 e. g.. To know a person by his speech, 3emant Ott ber 
 ©^iroi^c erlennen. 
 
 5. Used in the sense of after, by is rendered by 
 naii^; e. g.. To sell by the ell, ticc^ ter Sffe ttcrtaufen. 
 
 of cities lying near to us, while in is aw correctly appKed." This difference 
 of opinion makes it difficult to render English piepositions into German. 
 
 ' See preceding note. 
 
 • Compare the vulgar " to home" as heard in certain sections. 
 
THE PREPOSITIONS. 353 
 
 6. Used in the sense of from, by ia rendered by 
 Don ; e. g., Tired by the journey, mixit ©on iev Sleifc. 
 
 7. Used in the sense of of, by is rendered by t>on ; 
 e. g., A tragedy by Schiller, einc Slragbiie t>t}n ©driller. 
 
 8. By is used in the following expressions to which 
 no particular rule will apply : 
 
 By land or by water, ju SBaffer otcr ju Sante. 
 By half, gttr ipalftc. 
 
 By four dollars dearer, uttt ttier Zijakx t^cttrcr. 
 (See p. 467.) 
 III. In. 1. In is rendered by in governing the da- 
 tive, because it answers exactly to this German pre- 
 position ; e. g., I lost it in your room, ic§ Berlor ti in 
 S^rcm ^\mmtx, 
 
 2. When it signifies on, in is rendered by tin ; e. g., 
 I have a friend in him, ic^ ^atc cinert gi^eunt an t|m. 
 
 3. When it signifies by, in is rendered by bet ; e. g., 
 in the day-time, bet S^age. 
 
 4. When it signifies vyiih, in is rendered by ntit ; 
 e. g., in (i. e., with or within) one word, ntit einem 
 aSorte. 
 
 5. When it signifies after or according to, in is ren- 
 dered by nac^ ; e. g., in my opinion, nad^ mciner 
 SKeinung. 
 
 6. When it signifies during, in is rendered by 
 nntet ; e. g., in the reign of Augustus, unter ter 
 Slcgicrung tea Sluguflug. 
 
 7. When it signifies before, in is rendered by 
 »»or ; e. gr., to appear in court, »or ®eri(i^t crfc^ctnen. 
 (See p. 468.) 
 
 8. /« is rendered variably in the following phrases, 
 to which no particular rule wiU apply : 
 
 In German, onf kcutfi^, or ittt £>cutf(^en (not in ieutfi^). 
 To be in the country, ouf tern Sanbe fcin. 
 In former times, »or ^tittn (i. e., times ago). 
 In time, gtt reciter Scit- 
 
354 
 
 THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 IV. Into is rendered by itt governing the accusative ; 
 e. g., Put yoiir money into your pocket, fiecCen ©te 
 3^r ®elJ in tie Sofc^e. 
 
 Note. — Notice that while to be in the country is auf Sent 
 Caitbe fein, to go into the country, is ouf bo8 Canb ge^en. 
 
 V. On. 1. Wlien it means upon or unto, on is rendered 
 by Ottf ; e. g.. The book lies on (or upon) the table, 
 t»as Sui!^ licgt 'ouf ietn Sifc^e ; put the book on (or 
 upon) the table, ^legc tai 33u(^ anfben a;ifi^. 
 
 2. Meaning cZose to or denoting time (of the week) 
 on is rendered by an ; e. g^., Frankfurt on the Oder, 
 granffurt an tcr DJer; on what day, an ttric^em Sage? 
 oji Thursday, am ©onnerflag. 
 
 3. Signifying ftj/j on is rendered by 6ei ; e. g., 
 upon (or by) pain of death, bei 2:o5e3flrafe. 
 
 4. Signifying concerning, on is rendered by iibet; 
 e. g., A lecture on the drama, cin Sortrag fi&et bas 
 5Drama. 
 
 5. Signifying ybr*, on is rendered by f fir j e. g.-, on 
 {or for) my part, fflt mclnen SE^etl. 
 
 6. Signifying Mi<7i, on is rendered by ntit; e. gr., 
 on (or with) purpose, ntit 3Iet^. 
 
 7. Signifying under, on is rendered by untev ; e. g., 
 on this condition, iinter ticfcr Scbingung. 
 
 8. Signifyiug at, on is rendered bet ; e. g., on this 
 occasion, bei fciefer ©elegen^clt ; on my arrival, bcl 
 ntetncr 2lnfunft. 
 
 9. On is rendered variably in the following and 
 similar phrases : (See also p. 469.) 
 
 On horseback, jtt 9)fcrbe. Upon the whole, int ganjen. 
 ¥1. To. 1. Denoting direction to a place {proper name), 
 to is generally rendered by na^ ; e. g.. This ship is 
 going to America, fcicfcS ©^tff ge'^t na^ Slmertla. 
 
 2. Denoting direction to a place {common name), 
 
 to is rendered either by JU, governing the dative, or 
 
 by an' governing the accusative ; e. g.. He goes to 
 
 the railway, er ge^t jut Sifcnfca^n (/r an Me StfetiBal^n. 
 
 ' See p. 464, ancient usage of ju. 
 
THE PEEPOSITION. 355 
 
 3. Denoting direction to a place of a higher loca- 
 tion than the speaker, to is rendered by o«f (see 
 I., 2.) ; e. g., We are going to the castle, Wir ge^cn 
 auf S (Sc^Iop. 
 
 4. When synonymous with into (IV.) or inside, to 
 is rendered by in governing the accusative ; e. g., I 
 am going to the opera, ic^ ge^e in tie Dper. 
 
 5. Denoting direction towards a person, to is gen- 
 erally rendered by ju ; e. g., I am going to the shoe- 
 maker's, i^ ge|c junt ®c^u|ntac6er. (Comp. p. 464.) 
 
 6. Signifying /or, to is rendered by ffltj e. g.. It 
 it lost to me, ti x\l f&t mic^ scrlorcn. 
 
 t. In the following and similar phrases the usage 
 is anomalous: 
 
 To the bottom, bid auf ten ©runb. 
 
 As to that, was licS Bctrifft (i e., as regards this). 
 
 That is nothing to me, baS ge'^t mid^ Stilts an (i. e., 
 
 that does not concern me). 
 To give audience to some one, Sewftnbcn »or fl^ laflfen- 
 
 Note. — ^Notice also the following idioms : 
 With TO BE (Dative). With to go (AcctrsATrvE). 
 
 at the market, auf bent SRatttc to the market, auf ben 3)Jarit 
 
 at the post-oflSce, auf bet 3)o|l to the post.office, auf Jlie 9)oft 
 
 at the ball, auf bent Satt to the ball, auf ben Sail 
 
 at the chase, auf bcr Sagt) to go hunting, auf bic Sagb ge^en 
 
 Tin. With. 1. When used with verbs indicating mo- 
 tion, with is generally rendered by mit ; e. g., I shall 
 go with my sister, tc^ iuerbe mit nteiner ©i^ttefler ge|eit. 
 
 2. Denoting associaiion with others ^lnth is ren- 
 dered by bci; e. g.. Stay vrith me, Heik bci tntr; he 
 dines vMh us, er fpeifl bci uttS. 
 
 3. Signifying through, with is rendered by ivt^ ; 
 e. 5-., To cure with fasting, bntc^ Saflen :|eiten. 
 
 4. TFi% used in idiomatical phrases : 
 
 To fight a duel vnth pistols, fid^ ouf ^^iflolen fi^Iagen. 
 It is all over with him, ti ifl utw i^^n gefiie|en. ' 
 
 (See p. 472.) 
 
356 
 
 THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Theme XLI. 
 
 We arrived at Brandenburg last night. We will return to 
 Berlin to night, and it mil be very agreeable to us to have 
 your company. As we ascended the mountain, one friend of 
 ours, who was standing on the summit, told us not to go any 
 further. At what time will it be most convenient for you to 
 see me ? At noon we heard a noise, which must have been 
 the firing (iai geuem) of a cannon. At the beginning and at 
 the end of all things we ought to give thanks to God for His 
 kindness unto us. You may buy potatoes if. you can get 
 them at four or five shillings a bushel. He is loved by every- 
 body. I stood by (or near) the door, when the lighting 
 struck (treffcn) that tree. Only by force could he have obliged 
 us to do it. We do not sell by the yard, madam. This book 
 was written by a teacher of the modem languages, on the 
 method of Dr. Gaspey's EngUsh Conversation Grammar. We 
 prefer to go by water, as it is by far the cheapest. I put my 
 book (up)on the table, in your room. He did it in broad 
 day-light (^cDen li^tem ZaQt). Put this knife in your pocket. 
 On what river is BerUn situated ? He has done it on purpose. 
 He seemed to me very distracted (jcrflrcttt) on that occasion. 
 We are going to Neustadt-Eberswalde on horseback, wiU you 
 accompany us ? 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 SJoUt i|r mit mi fluf Me §ctte asir m&i^ten gem mit cuc^ gelen, 
 
 gclcn ? atcr wir :§a6cn Mm Beit, 
 
 ^at nic^t Scmanti an Me S|itre (58 f^eint mix fo/rufcn ©ie nur, 
 
 geflopft? :^eretn! 
 
 aColitt fllcflen bte Sbgel im SJitt* @ie fliegcn in ein wormeres 
 
 ler ? mima. 
 
 aSftrum i|l 3|r 8mbcr in letter SCcgcn cines grogen SSertujlea, 
 
 3ett fo trourig ? bcr i'^n Betrojfen l^at. 
 
 2Co waren ©ie biefcn Slac^mtttag SBir ftnb Wngs iti Ufcra in ©pree 
 
 urn 3 U^r ? fpajleren gefa^ren. 
 
 Darf id frogcn 0)0 ©te wo^^nen ? 3c^ Wi>|ne feit ^e\xidf)x (New- 
 year) 6ei meinent DnM. 
 
THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 357 
 
 Urn tuieioict U^r ttjirb §err ©(i^Iog. 
 »o^I nac^ ^aufe fommcn ? 
 
 3(ierauger|d6ber ©tabt? 
 
 ^onnte iai ©(^iff, tnit bem ®ic 
 
 »on Suropa tamen, wegen lei 
 
 ttttrigcn 3Bin5e3 ni^t 06* 
 
 I'cgeln ? 
 3n roelc^cm a5aji|of logtrt 3^r 
 
 grcunt, §crr ©c^tuerin ? 
 2Bar 3o^ann f(^on auf im 
 
 mavUt ? 
 S« Jiiu^t tnir, taf ca fceflfer wore, 
 
 i^n jc^t ouf ken Waxtt ju fc^t« 
 
 cfen, waa bcrtfll bu ? 
 ©tnJ ©ie fi^on bicfen' ©ommer 
 
 aufbcrSogb genjcfcn? 
 
 Sr !ommt ^ctno'^nlic^ urn fcc^s 
 U^r nad)§aufe, okr :^eute tuirt 
 er nif^t cor aijt ^tx fein. 
 
 3a, tx ijl mit feiner gomilte aups 
 Sons gefo^^ren. 
 
 Der SBini i»or fe^r giinfltg, okr 
 m Mapiiain ct^ielt Scfe^l »on 
 feincn Sorgcfegten, troft icjTen 
 cr im Jpofen iUibm mugte. 
 
 3m fc^morjcn Sltlcr, 3immcr uier* 
 jig im tritten ©tod. 
 
 ^Rein, cr ge|t jc^t cten ouf bie fo% 
 \o\i cr au(^ oufben Tlaxtt ge^cn ? 
 
 3c^ uberlojfe eg bir, bu tueift om 
 k|ten, tcie »iet 3"t 3i'|onn 
 lot. 
 
 5Wcin, fltcr iuir :|aBcn bie 9ltf{d)t, 
 niic^flengottf bic3fl8t' 3" 9c|£n. 
 
 Reading Lessons. 
 9(n ben SRonb. 
 
 ?luf bid) Hictet,' nuf bir weilet oft meiti 3lu!)' in fiifcr Sufi,' 
 
 Slit bir '^oft' i(^, on bic^ fcnb' ii^ mon^' ©efii^l ous fro^^er Srujl. 
 
 3ii bi(^ fc^ct, in bir ftnbet mcine ^J^ontofte aid ©ccnen, 
 
 Untcr bie |!e gern fid) trSumet, unttr benen bort bie fc^Bncn 
 
 ©ectcn, liter bicfe grb' erP^ct, liBer ®ro6crn toonbcln. 
 
 SBor mic^ tritt bonn, tor mir flc^t bonn bcr Sntfd^lu^, rcdit gnt ju ^onbein. 
 
 ,^liiifi^en biefen ©trijuc^en fi^' td&, jttift^en fie ftiel)ft |i(^ iJcin ©tra|I, 
 
 jJcBctt mi&i finft,' neficn tnir ru|et fie, bie grcunbin meiner SBo^I; 
 
 (ptnter mid§ fiiH '^ingcfd)Iid)en, flonb |te lodienb l^inter mir, 
 
 Unb toir rcbcn son ben ©terncn, xtnfem £ic6en unb »on Sir. 
 
 ' SBUltcni translate here, to gaze. 
 
 ' fiufl, enchantment. 
 
 ' Stnfen, translate liere, to dcsaend. 
 
358 
 
 THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 $P^i(emiin an fetnen §reunb. 
 
 ^ur(5 Etc^ iji Me iEBelt mir f^ijn, o^nc n^ tDJtrb' ic^ flc ^ajfcn, 
 tfiir Di(^ Ie6' ii^ ganj aHetn, urn Dl* roitt i(^ gem crMajfcn; 
 (Segcn !I>ic^ foil fein 35erlaumlcr ungcfhraft fit^ je »crgc|cn, 
 aaSiber SJicb fcln g»tnt ftc^ woffnen, i^ tcitt Sir jur ©eitc jlcl^ot!" 
 
 Stumler. 
 
 The Interjections. (2)tc Smifc^cnttiortcr.) 
 
 Obs. I. — ^Interjections are in German, as in English, Latin 
 and French, uninflected, and constitute no part of 
 a sentence in analysis, but are used as entire pro- 
 positions of themselves. The following are those of 
 most frequent occurrence : 
 
 3li$ ! ah ! alas ! oh dear ! 
 
 3lc^tung ! take care ! attention ! 
 
 a|! a^l et! ah! oh! 
 
 auf ! auf bmn ! on forwards ! 
 
 ou ! oh I 
 
 fSeucr! fire! 
 
 fort! begone! be off! 
 
 ®cttto6 ! God be praised ! 
 
 gut! good! 
 
 l^olt! halt! stop 
 
 ^c ! ^tial ho ! I say ! 
 
 |eifa! huzza! hurrah! 
 
 §ctl ! hail ! 
 
 '^ml humph! hum! 
 
 %oU ! holla ! hollo ! 
 
 ^u! ugh! 
 
 !^ut! ^o! huzza! quick! 
 
 j«d)^e ! hurrah ! 
 
 leiber ! alas ! unhappily ! 
 
 SBunber ! O dear ! 
 
 ive^e! O dear! alas! 
 
 0^ ! :^o ! oh ! ho ! 
 
 pat\ii ! pat 1 
 
 |>fut ! fie ! pish ! 
 
 tJiff! tJajf! bang! 
 
 po^ toufcnb ! zounds ! 
 
 redbt fo ! 'tis well ! all right I 
 
 fa^te! gently! 
 
 fte^ ta ! look ! behold ! 
 
 fo ! indeed ! 
 
 fl! fllU! hush! hist! 
 
 DorwSrtS ! forwards ! 
 
 tueg ba ! out of the way I 
 
 wel^e ! woe ! 
 
 IBcr ia ! who's there ! 
 
 Wollatt ! well then ! 
 
 3U ^iilfc ! help ! 
 
 ' Sot ®Cttc flc^CIt, to protect, assist. 
 
P^HT II. 
 
 SYNTAX (Wodfugung). 
 
 LESSON. XLH. Seftivtt 42. 
 
 The Article, (^cr SlrtiM.) 
 
 § 1. — ^The indefinite article is generally used as in 
 English and French. 
 
 Ex. — ^3i^ fa| eineit 2)Jann im Oatten, I saw a man In the gaiden. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. The definite article is used for a or an before a noun 
 denoting measure, weight, &c., when the price is spoken of. 
 
 Ex. — 2)icfe8 Zn^ {ojlet s»« Scaler bte Stte, this cloth costs two dollars a 
 yard. 
 
 2. Before /ew (cfnigc), man?/, hundred (^unticrt), and thousand 
 (taufent), the indefinite article is omitted. 
 
 Ex. — 9JHt ttenifle Ceute ttifTen ti, only a few people know it. 
 
 3. The expressions many a (manner, e, ti), and no less a 
 (Icin geringerer), omit the article. 
 
 Ex. — Many a man, monger aJfann. 
 
 He was no less a man than a king, et war fein flcringfter SHann 
 (Hi em ^Snig. 
 
 4. In certain forms of the interrogative sentence in English 
 ffl — one is sometimes added, where in German it is not ad- 
 missible, as: Is that house a large orie .^ (Seep. 148, Obs.VII.) 
 
 Ex.— 3|1 icne« |>ttua grog ? Is that house a large onef 
 
360 
 
 SYNTAX THE ABTICLE. 
 
 5. Common nouns expressing some rant, profession, &c., 
 when used with the verb " to become," (roertcn,) take in Eng- 
 lish the indefinite article, but in German the predicate noun 
 of ttjerbcn is required to be in the nominative, and the article 
 is omitted. (See § 9, 1.) 
 
 Ex. — Sr ifl ^aufmann geuorben, he has become a meichant. 
 
 § 2. — ^The definite article is often used as in English 
 and French. 
 
 Ex. — (£r gaB mit taS Su^, he gave me the book. 
 
 Exception. 
 
 Certain collective terms preceded by adjectives employ in 
 EngUsh the definite article, where in German the indefinite 
 article is used. 
 
 Ex. — 6in |od^»eif«r SRat^, the most learned senate. 
 
 § 3. — The definite article is cdso used in all cases in 
 which a noun is given in its mdest sense, or as being a 
 
 imique : 
 
 a. Before the names of materials when representing 
 aU that material existing. 
 
 Ex. — SaS ®oIb ifl baS fol^iatfle SDletaS, gold is the most costly metal. 
 
 h. Before abstract nouns when taken in their whole 
 extent,^ 
 
 Ex. — Ste lugtnb ifl b«a ^ii^^i ®«t/ imtw is the highest good (gift). 
 
 c. Before concrete nouns representing ideas which 
 mean a whole genus or species. 
 
 Ex. — Zitx SKenfc^ ijl ^vcVMi, man is mortal. 
 
 ' The Greek and the French similarly place the article before abstract 
 nouns. 
 
SraTAX THE AETICLE. 361 
 
 d. Before the names of religious creedSi govern- 
 iBcnts, corporate bodies, sciences, &c. 
 
 Ex. — SaS Subent^uM tfl ber altefie 3)Jcttct^eiamu?» JvMism is the oldest 
 monotheism. 
 
 e. With substantiye-infinitires (i. e., infinitives used as 
 nouns). 
 
 Ex. — So8 SRcgic'ren t(i feine Ui^te Slrteit, to reign is no easy task. 
 
 /. Before the proper names of a person or country 
 when connected with an attributive adjective. 
 
 Ex. — Scr ^eUige 3)etrug, Saint Peter. 
 
 2)0S f(|one Sranfreic^, beautiful France. 
 
 g. With a proper name, when designating a person 
 well known, whether preceded by a common noun or 
 not.' (Comp. Less. Vm.) Also, when the name of an 
 author is used instead of his works. 
 
 Ex. — Ste flontgtn SStctotia, Qiteen Victoria. 
 
 Ser So^anit foil su |)tt«fe Meifitn, John shall remain at home. 
 $a6en ®ie ben l>ot«S no^ nic^t gElefen ? Have you not yet read 
 Horace f 
 
 h. Before the names of mountains and streets^ 
 
 Ex. — ;5er Sefustu? ^atte Wrjlic^ jlarfe StuSBriti^e, Vesavins had lately 
 severe eruptions. 
 SBtt too^ncn in Ser grtebtic^«|lrttgc, we live in IP^ederieifsstreet. 
 
 i. Before nouns expressing time, as: seasons, montlis 
 
 and days. 
 
 Ex.— Set 55ru6(ing t|l bte fi^6n|le Sa'^reSjeitj Spring is the most beauti- 
 ful season. 
 
 Jier 3l(>ril i|i ietoS^nlii) nag unb Mt» AprU is generally wet 
 and cold. 
 
 Set Sienflaj tarn, aSet unfer ®elb Blte6 aua, Tuesday came, but our 
 money did not come. 
 
 ■ Compare the use of the Greek definite article o, and of the Latin de- 
 monstr. ille, before names previously mentioned or well known. The 
 article in this use might be called " the article of excellence." 
 
362 SYNTAX THE ABTIOLB. 
 
 j. After the prepositions. 
 
 Ex. — SBir t6ti\vm in 6er ©tabti we live in town. 
 
 ®t]^|l bu tw^ 6er Stabt? dost thou go to tovm or to tlie dty? 
 (£r fommt mi Ser .ffit^e, he is coming from chweh. 
 
 k. With expressions referring to some part of a living 
 being, where in EngUsh the possessive pronoun is em- 
 ployed.' (See p. 394, 36.) 
 Ex.— SWctn aSrubet ^at iaS SSein iibnd^ttt, my brother has broken 
 Ms leg. 
 %|lbubi#in ttn Singer gefc^nitten? have you cut yoitr finger? 
 S)er |)unb ^at W rinen S)orn in Den Sup b""""*' *l^e "log ^^^ '^'™ 
 a thoiu into his foot. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. After both' (Jetbc), such (fold^e), and o«' (ftHe), the article 
 is generally omitted. (See § 7.) 
 
 Ex. — Both the boys, Seibe Smien. 
 
 All the girls, dUt SKoibc^en. 
 Note. — When the def. article is used with hoth, it precedes. 
 Ex.— Both the children, iie 6eiben fiinber 
 
 2. Before the names of the points of tlie compass : the 
 
 north (Sflorien or 9Wttterno(^t), the south (©iiben or SKittag), 
 the east (Djlen or SKorgen), the west (SScjlen or 3lbcnb), when 
 governed by the prepositions gegett (gen) or uaify, the article 
 is not used. 
 
 Ex. — STmerife liegt gegen (or gm) SSJcflcn, America lies towards the west. 
 
 Note. — If not governed by the preiwsitions geflen or na^i the article is 
 used, as : (Er too^nt im SBeflen, he resides in the West. 
 
 3. After the genitive of the relative pronoun, both in the 
 singular and plural, the article is omitted. (See also p. 200, 
 Obs. m., Note). 
 
 Ex.— ®et Sttunt, licffen ©latter serwelten, the tree, the leaves of which 
 wither. 
 
 ' Similar to the use of the definite article 6 in Greek, as an unem- 
 phatic possessive pronoun. 
 = See also Less. XIX., Obs. II. and III. 
 
SYNTAX — THE AETICLE. 
 
 363 
 
 ^ When two or more nouns, connected by " unt" (and), 
 express one idea, especially when forming an allUeration, the 
 possessive pronoun is sometimes used in English, but neither 
 the pronoun nor the article is used in German. 
 
 Ex. — tiu follfl Sater unb SBlutter e^reti (Luther's transl.), thoushalt honor 
 thy father and thy mother. 
 
 5. The definite article is used in English with a few names 
 of countries, some of which take it also in German ; but the 
 following do not use the article : 
 
 Sraftlicn, the Brazils 
 Wloxta, the Morea 
 a^rol, the Tyrol 
 
 D^inMen, <;ie East 1 ^ ,. 
 SScflinMcn, the West j ^^^^ 
 
 § 4. — Certain prepositional, adverbial, and idiomatic 
 
 phrases, such as the following, emit the article in German. 
 
 ju Sanfc, by land 
 
 3U Sffiajfer, by water 
 
 JU 55fcrb, on horseback 
 
 JU guf , on foot 
 
 jtt SSagen, in a carriage 
 
 JU ©i^iff, on board a ship 
 
 Dor Jpungcr, of (with) hunger 
 
 uor Durjl, of thirst 
 
 id Sag, by day 
 
 Bet ytaiit, by night 
 
 8u|l |oBen, to have a mind 
 
 fHt^in\&ia\t aHcgen, to render 
 
 account, to account for 
 in Dtinmac^t fatten, to swoon 
 ©(^rciJen cinjogcn, to terrify 
 ST^eil tte|men, to take part 
 Slbf^iet ne^men, to take leave 
 ©efa^r laufen, to run a risk 
 %&jt iahn or ge6en, ) to take 
 ftc^ in Slc^t nelmen, ) care 
 
 mit Scrgniigen, with pleasure 
 ^ani SSertru^, from vexation 
 <mi ipa^, from hatred 
 Dlec^t ^aBcn, to be right 
 Unrec^t ^aBen, to be wrong 
 hunger |aBcn, to be hrmgry 
 £>urfl laBen, to be thirsty 
 JU SJIittag cffen (fpeifcn), to dine 
 JU ^a&it cffen, to sup 
 SBort fatten, to keep one's word 
 um Scrjei^ung Bitten, to beg 
 one's pardon 
 1^ ©louBcrt Beimcpn, to give credit 
 §ilfe leiften, to render assistance 
 JU §ilfe fcmmen, to come to 
 
 one's assistance or help 
 JU Sett ge^^en, to go to bed 
 JU ®runtie ge^en, to perish 
 JU ©runbe rii^ten, to ruin 
 ju ©tante lommen, to succeed 
 
864 SYNTAX THE ABTIOLE. 
 
 ®ebufe ^aBctt, to have patience ju ©tanbe Wngen, to accom- 
 Sltitlcitien ^aben, to have com- plish 
 
 passion ©rwd^ung t^un, to mention 
 
 3u3::^cilt»ertiett,tofalltoone'slot utn 3lat| ftagen, to ask for 
 3;ro^ Bicten, to bid defiance advice 
 
 PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 
 
 § 5> — ^In English before names of materials when 
 taken in an indefinite sense, no particular kind, measure, 
 or quality being referred to, some or any is frequently 
 used, but in German it is best to use the noun itself 
 only. (See also p. 156, Obs. IV.) 
 
 Ex. — ®eien ©ie mtr SSafTer 8« ttintm, give me some water to drink, 
 ■feaien ©ie Stob ? Have you any bread ? 
 
 REPETITION OP THE ARTICLE. 
 
 § 6> — In German as in French, the article is generally 
 repeated before every word to which it belongs. 
 
 Ex. — Xtv Oarten, tit SfBicfe, baS ^ani, unb iie getter — aDe se^bren mei* 
 nem SSatcx, the garden, meadow, house, and fields — ^belong aU 
 to my father. 
 @tn ^aufmantii em doctor unb ein Sel^ret fagen in einem Sier^aufe 
 iufantmenr a merchant, doctor, and teacher sat together in an 
 ale-house. 
 
 Note. — In German, when several nouns stand together in consecutive 
 order, unless they are of different genders, the article need not be re- 
 peated. 
 
 Exception. 
 
 In German as in French, when two adjectives are used 
 with one noun, the article is not repeated, unless one of the 
 adjectives refers to a noun understood. 
 
 Ex. — Der alte nnb Brave Solbitt, the old and brave soldier. 
 
 '/Otx alte unb bci iunge 3)tann, the old and tJie young man. 
 
 POSITION OP THE ARTICLE. 
 § 7. — ^In German the article precedes not only the 
 
SYNTAX — THE AETICLE. 365 
 
 noun, but also the adjective and adverb. It never follows 
 them as is the case in English, after hoth, half, double, 
 quite, too, so, as or how. (Comp. p. 362, 1.) 
 
 Ex. — ^te Jeiben fiiitbet, or fecibc Sitiberr both the children. 
 @tnen ^aUen Zaq, half a day. 
 
 Reading Exercise XLII, 
 
 £;er Warn, bie %xau, ba« Mint unti ein flcincr Mnalt fmb angrtotn* 
 men. 2)te Sffiblfe, SSarcn, Somen, Siger lajfcti fi^ turc^ ©efcutb uni 
 a3c^ortIi(i^feit 3a:^mett, icarunt foUten tie 'Slm\d^tn unkjii^mbarcr feitt 
 ali rcifenie S^iercl 3Sic»teI foflet tai fm'^ »oit biefem Buder? 
 eg ioareii nur wenige Scute tort, ©ein Smber ift fi^Uepc^ tio{| 
 ©oftat gewortett. Da« gifcn ift bas nii^tic^^e SUletaH. ®a« f ferb 
 i|t ein cWe« I^ier. £)ie Sugcnb f%t jum ®liide. i)er Songreg 
 tolrb fK^ iin na(^|lcn SKonate scrfammeln. Sag ga^ren gefatlt i:^m. 
 Dcr fieinc Maxl '^at feinc Slufgafie gut gctentt. SBo^nen ©ic in bcr 
 5Rofentf»aIerftraf e ? ^a6cn ©ie ten ®bt|c noc^ nic^t er^alten ? ©ie 
 :§aknnic^t 2Bort ge:§alten. ®arf ii^ ©ie urn SRat^ fragcn? !Eic 
 Steifc Bon Jpamburg m6^ Sonbon !ann man auf cincm S5am|)ff(^iffc 
 in jtoci Ms brei 2:agen maiden. gran!rei(^ ^at im ©iiben bie fi^xtf 
 nam unb Xiai 3WitteImecr, im Djlen 3taUcn, bie ©c^tocij unb Scutfc^* 
 lanb, im ^Rorbojlen Selgien, im Sflorbcn ben Eanal unb im SBeftcn 
 ben Dcean. ^a6^ bcm Syjtttagejfen tserben ©ie uns gewiilnlic^ ju 
 ^aufe finben. Ser ©tolj ^at fi^on Bicten Scuten gefc^abet. SEein 
 unb ^affee finb sielen ^erfoncn fdjSBlic^. Siige ocrge'^t, SJa^r'feeit 
 6e(le:^t. gaHua ^anmni fanb ein SI'littcIjbcn ipannikl auf3ul)alten, 
 o^ne einc ©^Ia(^t ju liefern. 
 
 Theme XLII. 
 
 Laziness is a bad quality. Count Mirabeau is dead. 
 Princes are men, and cannot always help. In [the] Tyrol the 
 winter is pretty cold. Supper is ready. Earth and heaven 
 are the works of God. Come to (auf) my room after dinner. 
 How much is a bottle of this wine? Little Charles has 
 broken his ai-m. I would gladly pay you twice the amount. 
 
366 BINTAX — THE ABTICLE. 
 
 You shall learn only half a page. Have you any bread ? I 
 have some bread, but not any butter. The West Indies lie 
 tovrarda the south of the United States. Have you read all 
 the books I sent you ? Many a man has lost his money in 
 oil-speculations. He has become a physician. Man is mor- 
 tal. Is this river a deep one? September is generally a 
 very warm month. The old and poor man, the son of whom 
 is in America, mentioned your name to me. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 Drci 2Bovte nentt' 14 eudi inlattfdjwer 5 
 
 <Sie ge|en »on 9Runle ju 9JJunlc ; 
 Vo&i jlammen fie nid)t »on au§eti |ct, 
 
 tai §erj nur gibt tat>on Auntie. 
 Eem aRenfd^en ifi aUcr 2Cert^ gcrauW, 
 SBenn er ni^t me^r an bic irei SSortc gtottBt. 
 
 Der SSJJenfc^ ijt f r e i 'gcfi^affen, i|l fret, 
 
 Unb wiirt' er in ^ctten geboren ; 
 2fl^t eu(^ nii^t trren tti ^'iMi ©cf^rei, 
 
 ^lic^t ben SiJli§6muc^ rafenber 2:|orcn. 
 SSor bent ©flasen* tt>cnn er bie ^ettc Brii^t, 
 SSor bent freten iSJlenfcfeen erjittcrt nidjt. 
 
 Unb bie Sugenb, fie ijl lein Iceret ®^aU, 
 
 ®er SiJlenfc^ fann fie iifcen int Sekn 5 
 Unb fotit' er auin fhau^cln iiieraU, 
 
 ®r tann nacb ber giittlic^en (ireBen j 
 Unb wai tein SScrftanb ber SSerftiinbigcn fle^t, 
 2)as iibct In gtnfalt ein linblii^ ©emiit:^. 
 
 Unb cin ®ott ifl, ein ^ciliger Mtte leJt, 
 
 aSte aucfe ber menfc^Itc^e won!c ; 
 ^oc^ itier ber Qiit unt bent SRaume iccfit 
 
 Scfcenbig ber .i)B4(ic ©ebante ; 
 Unb ob aides Im ewtgcn SBe^fel Ireipt, 
 ®g Be^arret im Sedjfel ein ru^igcr ®eifi. 
 • Supply erjittert, (tremble before . . . , but not before). 
 
SYNTAX — THE NOUN. 367. 
 
 ®ie ))fIonjet lOon Slunte ju SJJuntc : 
 Unl flammen ftc gki^ ni(^t son augen ^tv, 
 
 Suer 3>mcreS gtbt ca»on ^unte. 
 Tjcnt fWenfc^en i(l tiimmer fcin SSert^ gerautt, 
 ©0 laitg cr no(^ an fcic brei SEorte gtau6t. 
 
 < .1 ♦ «i » 
 
 LESSON XLHI. Scftiott 43. 
 
 The Noun. (Stag ^au^itoort). 
 
 § 8. — ^The general principles of the construction of 
 the noun are about the same as in English. But instead 
 of the possessive and objectiYe the German has three 
 cases by which to express relation. 
 
 The Nominative Case. 
 
 § 9. — In German as in English, the nominative is the 
 only case which expresses independent relations. 
 Ex. — ^ct Snilie lauft, tlie boy runs (or is running). 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. In English the verb is the predicate in a sentence, with 
 the exception of the verb to he, which, unless it signifies to 
 exist, serves merely as a copula, and makes of the connected 
 adjective or noun a prediccUe. In Germ.an not only fcin, 
 but also the following verbs, require the noun or adjective 
 following them to serve as the predicate. They are : 
 
 toetben, to become blciben, to remain 
 
 ft^einen, to seem l^ei^en, to be called {not to call) 
 
 Ex. — (St to at ein gutet SWamt, he was a good man. 
 
 Stteanber ^iefe bet Oroge, Alexander was called the Grea-t. 
 
ficificn, ) fc^lmpfcn, to reproach (with vile 
 
 " ' ^'^'y call 
 
 368 SYNTAX THE NOHN. 
 
 2. Those verbs which in the active voice govern tiw accusa- 
 tives, have in the passive voice two nominatives (see p. 385, 
 Rem.) ; viz. 
 
 nennen, | *" "^^ names) 
 
 fi^cltcn, to scold taufen, to baptize 
 
 Ex.— ®a8 Stnb i|i SMarte gctauft WOtbett, the child has been chiistened 
 Mary.. 
 SIBaf^ington wttb bcr 3J«tcr feinc8 Satctlanbes senttnnt, Washington 
 is called the father of his country. 
 Note.— From this rule, however, the verb lel^tett, to teach, must be 
 excepted. 
 
 3. The follovrang verbs, which, in the passive voice (see p. 
 382, 3.), in English, take two nominatiyes, require in Ger- 
 man the preposition JU with the dative : 
 
 crnettrtcn, to appoint cr»a|Ictt, to choose mo^cn, to make 
 
 Ex.— aRein Steunb 5t. ifl jum SJrofefTor bet mobemcn ©t>rttc^en erwo^It wor- 
 ben» my friend A. has been chosen Professor of Modem Lan- 
 guages. 
 
 Note. — Ettlaren, to declare, requires the preposition fiir. 
 
 Ex.— Et tturbe fiir rinen unfc^ulbigen 5Wenf^en etHatt, he was declared an 
 innocent man. 
 
 The Genitive Case. 
 
 § 10. — ^The Genitive case in German corresponds 
 
 usually to the English possessive, or to the objective 
 
 case after the preposition of (or from). 
 
 Ex. — 'S>tx ®arten tltS ®iirtnerg, the garden of the gardener. 
 ^Cg gleifc^etg $unb, the butcher's dog. 
 
 Note. — The English or Saxon possessive may be employed in all 
 cases in which the governed ward is the attrilmte of another word, or 
 where it expresses poBseasion. When, however, the genitive gualiflea the 
 governing word, or denotes the whole of which the governing word ex- 
 presses a povrt, it is inad/mssible. 
 
 Ex.— (£in ^elb erjler OtBge, (but not erfler ®riige 4itlb), a hero of first 
 or superior greatness. 
 
SYMTAX — •"THE NOUN. 369 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. -The names of countries, towns, Tillages, and places, 
 
 also the names or dates of the months, when connected with 
 their generic names, are said to be in apposition,' and, of 
 course, must be in. the nominative.^ 
 
 Ex.— Sua Sttiferretc^ SRuglattb, the empire of Bussia. 
 2)ie ©tabt 3)e|l, the city o/Pesth. 
 S)er iWeite SetJtemter, the second of September. 
 
 2. Nouns denoting a whole follow, in English, nouns de- 
 noting a part, and are governed in the objective case by the 
 preposition of, but in German (if not accompanied by an 
 adjective or some other qualifying word), they are put in the 
 same case as the noun denoting a whole, and of is not trans- 
 lated. 
 
 Ex. — Sin ®lai SBein, a glass o/wine. 
 
 3wet Sap (not gapt) Sier, two barrels o/beer. 
 
 Note. — a. When the latter noun is taken in a partuyula/r or definite 
 sense, ofmnst be translated by lion; e. g., 3mi Su§ bott btefeut 9<^fKX, 
 two quires of this paper. 
 
 &. When the latter noun is preceded by an adjective or some other 
 qualifying word, the genitive must be used ; e. g., eine Slafi^e fuf en SBet" 
 ntSt a bottle of sweet wine. 
 
 e. The poets use the genitive in certain phrases, though not qualified, 
 by any word. 
 
 3. In English we use frequently the preposition to in sen- 
 tences where the Germans do not use the dative, but the 
 genitive. 
 
 Ex. — ^He is an enemy to his (native) country, er ifl ein getnb feincS SJa" 
 terlanbeS. 
 
 4. In place of the genitive, the preposition of is rendered 
 by tfOn, governing its noun in the dative, in the following 
 
 ' The Latin admits a double construction ; e. g., Urbs Soma, or Urbs 
 Eom^, the city of Rome. Compare the growing usage in our own lan- 
 guage : The City New York, &c. 
 
370 SYNTAX — THE NOUN. 
 
 a. Before nouns denoting qnality, rank, measure, weight, 
 age, distance, and the like. 
 
 Ex. — (£in SDlanit tiDtt ebler SDenfungSttrt, a man 0/ noble thoughts. 
 3)er ^aifer Don Stafilien, the emperor of Brazil. 
 (£in ®i$iff ban vierse^n^unbett Zermtn, a ship of fourteen hundred 
 
 tons. 
 (£ln $ut BnStt bon Stvansts $funb, a cake of sugar 0/ twentjr pounds. 
 (£r fiai( im Snter Bon fec^jel^n Sa^teni he died at the age of sixteen. 
 Sine Sntfernuns Don ^ei)i WltiUn, a distance o/six miles. 
 
 &. Before nouns denoting the material or substance of 
 which any thing is made. 
 
 Ex. — (Ein Stiver Don ®o\i (ein Bolbener Seeder), a cup (or goblet) of gold. 
 (Sin sua Hon @eibe, a dress of sillc. 
 
 c. Before the names of countries and towns, if the adjec- 
 tive be not preferred. 
 
 Ex.— Die eirenjcn ban Satern (or bie ©renjen Satetng), the borders (boun- 
 daries) of Bavaria. 
 S)ie ®trapen ban £re^ben> the streets of Dresden. 
 
 d. Before nouns in the partitive sense. 
 Ex.— 5>et iBertauf ban 3)Zakln, the sale 0/ furniture 
 
 e. After the demonstrative, relative, and indefinite pro- 
 nouns, after the ordinal numbers, and after the superlative 
 degree (sojietimes the genitive is used, see § 11).' 
 
 Ex. — Serienige bon S^ten Scutcn, that one of jour men. 
 SBel^er ban S^ten Sreunben; which o/your friends 
 Siniae ban mcinen Sdjfilctn, some of ray pupils. 
 Set jtttite ban i^nen, the second of them. 
 ®er fleinile ban ben flnaben, I ^j^^ ^^^^g^ ^j,^^^ ^ 
 or, bet tleinlle tttt Snaim, ) 
 
 5. Q/'used before the present participle is rendered by gtt, 
 and the verb is put in the infinitive. 
 Ex.— Sie Sur#t jn ftctben* the fear of dying. 
 
 ' This is a matter of ewplumy. We may as well say : ffitnifle nteinct 
 grcunbe; bie met|lett S^rcr ©cottier j but it would be less harsh to say, bie 
 meijlen ban 3^«>> ©^Wern.— Otto. 
 
SYNTAX THE NOUN. 371 
 
 6. A number of nouns connected in English by the preposi- 
 tion of, are rendered in German by compound nouns, omit- 
 ting the preposition altogether. Such are : 
 
 The love qT truth, Me ffi^r^eitsIieBe 
 
 The art o^ poetry, bie Di^tfun^ 
 
 A wreath o/" flowers, ein Slumcnfranj 
 
 The field of battle, iai ©(^ta^tfclD 
 
 A drop o/" blood, ein Slutstropfcn 
 
 The matter of fact, Me 2;:|at|'a(^e 
 
 A man (/business, ein ®efdbaft3mann 
 
 7. Of, when used in the sense of "about" or "among," is 
 translated by toon, and the noun following is governed by it 
 ia the dative case. 
 
 Ex.— Er ftro^ bon bir, he spoke of(i. e., dbout) thee 
 
 8. Of preceding a substantive formed from a verb which 
 requires a preposition, is translated according to the mean- 
 ing of the preposition. No particular rule can be given for 
 such cases. 
 
 Ex.— Sie %m(^t box ®ott, the fear o/God. 
 
 Set ®ebartfe an ben Zoi, the thought o/ death. 
 S>ie Ctcte jum Seien, the love of life. 
 
 Reading Exercise. 
 
 ON THE NOMINATIVE AND GENITIVE. 
 
 Dag SBiiib^ert wafd^t ^eute. ©ein SBruber Hteb ^et^ mcln grcunb, 
 otgtcic^ cr mcin ®egner ju feiti fi^ien. <Sic wurte tie SBefi^ii^erin 
 alleg ®uten. S'lapoleott I. '^eift bcr ®roge. SJRein iBruier tuurte 
 3um Doftor ber ^^^llologte emonnt. Wldmi SSaterS ipauS i(l siel 
 gtofer unb fc^Bncr, oli iai ^aai iti Jperm ©c^neiber. Das ^Bnig* 
 rcic^ 5)reuf en ifl bie Jpauptmad^t in Deutfi^lanb. ®e6en ©ie mir ein 
 gag bes Beften bairifc^cn SSicrca. ffiir tranlen jroci ®lag son bent bc^cn 
 ©iif*3Betn. SBenn cr ein greunb feines SSatcrianbea ware, witrbc cr 
 ti nt(|t in ber Stotl) serlaffen |a6en. 5)iio6e war bie aRuttcr son sier* 
 
372 SYNTAX — THE NOUN. 
 
 3c|n ^inkern; T)ie ©tabt ©anft ^tkribuxQ wurbe son g)eter bcm 
 ©rogcn unter »telen ©^wicrtgWten crbaut. aCotten ®ie 3^re tc«t' 
 f(^c <BtanU (bes) fWorgenS oier (teg) SlbenSS ne^men ? (Sine ©tatue 
 »on SWarmor wirt bcm krii^mten ^errn gjlufttcircttor ©c^intclmciifcr 
 son fetnen greunSen crri^tct werben. S)ie ^Bnigin wn gnglant ^at 
 ben 9)rin3cn Sllbcrt Don ®ac^fcnsSo6urg*@ot^a ge:^cirat^et. !Eie 
 ®c»o|n:^ett ju fdjnupfcn ifl in Deutfc^Iant \t^v atlgemein. ^W bie 
 gurc^t wx ber ©trafe, fonbern bie Siebe ju ®ott fotlte «n« ob^altcn, 
 Unrec^t ju t^utt. Jpabcn ®ie jc iai ©c^lad^tfclb Don SEotcrloo Be* 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON THE NOMINATIVE AND GENITIVE. 
 
 The boy is playing in the yard. Charles is the favorite 
 of his schoolmates. The Uttle girl has been baptized Agnes. 
 Henry was called by his own friends a spendthrift. A 
 brother of mine was appointed physician in the Prussian 
 army. Virtue and happiness do by no means oppose each 
 other. In man, thy brother, thou offendest God, thy father. 
 I know a young man who is studying the French, German, 
 Latin, and Greek languages, and history with equal success. 
 Socrates was a wise man. My uncle's dog is a large black 
 animal. Is a pound of meat less than a pound of fish? Two 
 of my brother's daughters are at the Vassar College. A 
 daughter of the Queen of England has married the crown- 
 prince of Prussia, son of the reigning king William I. We 
 rode a distance of six mUes. Many of the Jews in Poland 
 wear garments (®ewanl)) of black alpaca. The sale of fur- 
 niture at the auction is very small. The art of poetry is 
 greatly cultivated in Germany. 
 
 The GENITIVE Case governed by Pronouns, Numerals, 
 Adjectives, or Adverbs. 
 
 § 1 1 . — ^Pronouns, cardinal and ordinal numbers, and 
 adjectives in the superlative degree, may govern a 
 
SYNTAX THE NODN. 373 
 
 word taving a partitive signification in tlie genitive 
 case. 
 
 Ex. — SBel^Et icr SKcinntt ^at b'lti 3et:^an? Which of the men has done 
 
 this? 
 ®(tner jwei wurbm baS $a«8 niebetretfen/ two (persons) like him 
 
 would tear the house down. 
 Set erjle feincr gKunbe, the first one of his friends. 
 Set griigte Jcr ^naien, the largest one of the hoys. 
 
 § 12. — A noun or pronoun limiting the application of 
 certain adjectives, is in German governed in the genitive. 
 In English this relation would be expressed by the pre- 
 position of oxfrom. 
 
 1. The Adjectives _(1.) thus governing the genitive are : 
 
 Bcbiirfttg, ) in want of, lo^, rid of 
 
 ienot^igt, 3 in need of wiic^tig, master of 
 
 BetDU^t, conscious mxibc, ) tired of, 
 
 cingctenl, mindful fatt, j weary 
 
 fa^ig, capable quitt, rid, free from 
 
 fro|, glad f^uliig, guilty 
 
 gcwa^r, aware t^eil^aftig, partaking 
 
 gewiirtig, in expectation of "iikririifftg, tired of, weary 
 
 gerotp, certain - »erbac^ttg, suspected 
 gctro^nt, used to, in the habit KSerlufHg, having forfeited 
 ^a6|aft, getting possession of soil, full 
 . funttg, acquainted with ttcrt'^, worth 
 
 leMg, empty, void Wiirbig, worthy 
 
 leer, void ; 
 
 also (2.) those of the above adjectives which admit the 
 negative prefix Utt, as : unbewupt, unetngebenf (unmindful), 
 unfii^ig, &c., and the participles of all those verbs which 
 govern the object in the genitive case, when these parti- 
 ciples are used as adjectives, such as : angeflagt, beraubt, &e. 
 Ex.— <1.) ®ie Etbe ifl soil Set ®ttte bc3 ^vcm, the earth is full of the 
 goodness of the Lord. 
 (2.) ©tefe Setter [mi be« aJertre^en« ttcrJiiiftttB, these women are 
 suspected o/ crime. 
 
374 SYKTAX THE NOUN. 
 
 Es.— Sr ill rii) M Siaixdimi mitm^t, he is unconscious of the crime. 
 
 ©ciner ^inber 6cratt6t, robbed of his children. 
 Note 1. After jewa^t, gewo^nt, mui)c, fatt, moll and mxtl}, the accusative 
 is often used. 
 Ex.— ai« er tgn fltwa^r wurbe, when he noticed him. 
 Note 2. Oewigi le"r soOi may take the genitive, or Don with the dative. 
 Ex.— Sinb ©ie heffen auc^ aewi^ ? are you sure of it 1 
 
 ©a? ©^iif »M »ott Hon ®oIb, the ship was fall of gold. 
 Note 3. Sa^ts, takes the genitive, or ju with the dative; fto^ (glad 
 ■of,) takes either the genitive, or via with the accusative. 
 Ex. — Et i|l icffcn bcnot^lst, he is in need of it. 
 
 (Er ifl ]tt einer foMjen S^at unfa^tg, he is incapable for such a deed. 
 
 fit i(J iciftll fro^f he is glad of it. 
 
 3^ Mn fto^ iikr ben gludUilen (Erfolg, I am glad o/the happy result. 
 
 The OENITIVE Case governed by Verbs. 
 
 § 13. — The following verbs govern their object in the 
 genitive ; those marked with a f take, in common con- 
 versation, more frequently the accusative. 
 
 fli^tcn, to mind lac^cn,' to laugh at, to deride 
 
 h5urfcn,t to need j'^sgcn, to foster 
 
 icge|rcn, to desire ft(^ fd^iimen, to bie ashamed of 
 
 irauc^en, to use f(|oncn,t to spare 
 
 cntbc|rcn, to be in want of fpottcn,' to mock 
 
 entrat^en, to do without »erfe|Ien, to miss, to fail 
 
 ermangcin, to be void sergcffen, to forget 
 
 crtDii^ncn, to mention tBa^ren, to guard 
 geimIen,to remember, think of tto^rnc^mcn, to observe 
 
 gcntegen, to enjoy walten, to manage 
 
 gcwa^rcn, to observe ttortcti, to attend to 
 ^axxtn, to wait patiently for 
 
 § 14. — The following verbs having as direct object a 
 'person, in the accusative, require the indirect olyect (if 
 needed) in the genitive : 
 
 ' Cttc^en, fpotten, and |t$ fc^iimen prefer the preposition flSct with the ac- 
 cusative, barren may take the prep, auf with the accusative. 
 
SYNTAX THE NOUN. 
 
 ^75 
 
 anilagett, } to accuse, 
 
 j: 
 
 cntfe^ett, to displace 
 entwij^nen, to wean 
 logfprec^en, to acquit 
 ma|nett, to remind 
 ixln^tim, to exempt 
 fikrfii^rcn, to convict 
 uBcrjeugen, to conviace 
 m[i6^ixn, to assure 
 Scrtrbjlen, to put off with hope 
 tturttgen, to favor 
 jci^en, to accuse, to charge 
 
 tefi^uteigen, j to charge with 
 Mt^ren, to inform 
 krauben, to rob, to bereave 
 entblnben, to release, to absolve 
 
 from 
 entblbpen, to strip 
 ent^eten, to exempt 
 cntftcicen, to deprive of 
 entlaben, to disburden 
 cntlajfen, to dismiss 
 cntlebigctt, to free from 
 
 Ex. — ©r ^dt i^n ii$ Setrugel angeKast, he has accused him 0/ felony. 
 @t iii feined 3(mte$ entfe^t Worbent he has been removed from his 
 office. 
 
 Note 1. — Snftiitben, to set free ; cntMiipeni to strip ; cntReiben, to undress ; 
 cntlttbcn, to disburden ; entlaffen, to dismiss ; entfe|;en, to displace ; ent»(i^'= 
 nen, to wean ; loSfijtec^cn, to absolve; uierfu^rerii to convict; itterjeugen, to 
 convince ; sctfli^crn, to assure — may take the genitive of the object, or 
 Don with the dalive. 
 
 Note 2. — 33ettrii|len, to put off with hope, may take the genitive or 
 anf with the accusative. 
 
 Note 3. — 3)la^nen, to remind, may take the genitive, or an with the 
 accusative. 
 
 Ex.— 3(§ wurbe Hon ittcincm aJetfiirec^m (or meineS aJcrftsrei^cng) ettrtunbcn, 
 I was relieved of my promise. 
 6r ma Jnte i^n an feinm SBuSfel, he reminded him of his note. 
 
 § 15. — The following intransitive reflexive verbs gov- 
 ern the object in the genitive : 
 
 f{(^ anma§en, to claim 
 
 ft(^ anne^mcn, to interest one's 
 self for 
 
 (tc^ betienen, to make use of 
 
 f{c^ Bcfleipigcn or Befleipett, to ap- 
 ply one's self 
 
 fii^ bemiic^tigm, to seize, to take 
 possession of 
 
 flc^ BegcBcn, to give up 
 fic^ bcmci|lern, to seize 
 JH&I befc^ciscn, to acquiesce in 
 fic^ bcfinnen, to think upon 
 ftdf) entau§cm, to abstain 
 f?c^ cntblBbcn, to dare 
 fic^ cntbred^cn, to forbear 
 fiil entfalten, to abstain from 
 
376 SYNTAX — THE NOUN. 
 
 fic^ cntlcMgcn, to get rid of fti^ Qtix'o^m, to hope for 
 
 (id^ entfc^Iogett, to part with fii^ rii^men, to boast 
 
 ft(^ cntfinnen, \ to recollect, fi4 fi^cimen,' to be ashamed 
 
 ft^ crinnent, 3 to remember f{(^ iiier^cten, to be arrogant 
 
 ftd^ enttoblnett, to disaccustom fld^ unterfangen, to dare 
 
 one's self flc^ «ntertt)int)cn, to undertake 
 
 ft^ er6arraen, to have mercy |t(^ scrmcffert, to presume 
 
 ft(^ crfrec^ctt, to presume (td^ uerfc^m, to be aware of 
 
 |l4 erfreuett, to enjoy ftd^ »er[i(^em, to make sure of 
 
 ftc^ crfii^ttcn, to venture |t(^ tucigcm, to refuse 
 
 flc^ (cr)n)el^ren, to ward off ftc^ wunbcm, to wonder 
 
 Ex.— 3c^ fjcAt mtc^ fciner angenommen, I have interested myself for him, 
 or in his behalf. 
 
 Note. — ©i^ ettarmen, to pity ; ftc^ freueni to rejoice ; ^H) ieflageti, to 
 complain ; fti^ fc^amen, to be ashamed ; ftc^ tvunbertlf to wonder, may take 
 the g^nitive of the object, or itBtr with the accusative. — Peissner. 
 
 Ex. — ®r \a.t fic^ liter i^n erbttrmt, he has taken pity on him. 
 
 § 16. — ^After the following impersonal verbs the geni- 
 tive is in like manner used : 
 
 ®a jammert mtd^," I pity or compassionate. 
 
 S3 reuct mi&i' I repent or regret. 
 
 &i gcluflct mic^, I desire or am pleased with. 
 
 Sa lo'^nt ftc^, it is worth while. 
 Ex. — <£i iammett mid) bcr Sinitt, I pity the children. 
 Note. — ®elit|iett can also take na$ with the dative. 
 Ex. — (&$ geliiflet miHj nait tintm faring, I desire a herring. 
 
 THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 § 1 7. — The use of the genitive absolute was very com- 
 mon in the old German, and is still iu frequent use. 
 1. It is used with the verbs, 
 
 fcin, to be werictt, to become ge|cn, to go 
 
 iekn, to Uve flerBcn, to die fa|ren, to drive 
 
 ' See Note ', page 374 
 
 * Compare the Latin construction of genitive after impersonals : pee- 
 nitet, muereor, &c. (See Andrew's and Stoddard's Lat. Oram., § 215.) 
 
STNTAX — THE NOUN. 377 
 
 Ex. — hungers flericn, to die of hunger. 
 
 ©eineS SBegeS gc^en, to go one's way. 
 ®te {tnb btS Xobe^i you are a dead man. 
 ®cr lioffnung le6eni to live in hope. 
 
 2. With attributive adjectives and participles. 
 
 Ex. — Er t1)at c8 uniiSerlegtcr SBcife, he did it without consideration. 
 
 ©te^etibcit gupeg fc^ticJ ei einen SBrief, vmmediately he wrote a letter. 
 
 3. With statements of tinw given indefinitely.'^ (See 
 p. 318, Note '.) 
 
 Ex. — XtS 3)Jorgen8 ge^e tc^ eine ©tunbe fpajireit, I take a walk an hour in 
 the morning. 
 
 4. In full adverbial form. (See p. 318, HI.) 
 Ex. — ^3c^ Mil SEBiHeng ti p invent I am willing to do it. 
 
 Bemaek. — For a list of the prepositions that govern the 
 genitive, see p. 344, 1. 
 
 Reading Exercise on the Genitive. 
 
 S)ie mciflctt ber ©i^uler (or Bon ben ©cfeulcm) !§attctt i^re ScWon 
 gut griernt. SBlr mugten aai 9JtangcI an @eft) ben §eimt»eg cin? 
 f(|tagen. S)cr crfle bcftc fctner grcnnbe wurbe V\ti gem fiir i^n gct^on 
 ^aBen. Sr war bcr Jpiilfe fe^r tebiirfttg. SReinca SBerfprei^enS cin* 
 gebenf tranf id§ cin ganjcg 3a|r fein Sicr. Ser SKenfd^ mu§ flets bc3 
 Sobeg gcwMg feln, benn ber Sob »erf(|ont 9liemanben. S5e3 SScgeg 
 unfunbig Dcrloren totr un^ im bitten SBalb unb u'erfiJiiteten una fb, 
 bo§ wir crji (bes) 3l6enbs bie ©tabt erreic|tcn. ©oklb er mcineg Sei? 
 jlanbeg nic^t me|r kburftc, fa| i^ i^n nlc^t tcieber. ®ie fpotteten 
 
 ' Definite statements of time or place are expressed by the accusativa 
 (See §34) 
 
378 SYNTAX — THE NOUN. 
 
 nteinet S)ro:^uttg. Der ©enator f^at mic^ fcincr ®un(i scrfld^ert. ®at 
 oft crinncre ic^ mic^ ber Sage, ia wir nod^ jufammcn |>icltcn. ^ann|l 
 tu Mc^ beg Siertrtnleits ni^t entwBl^nen ? Sin ©tubcnt iiefcr Uni* 
 »er|itat ijl ke« 95erbrcc^en« angeflagt unB ufierfii'^rt worbcit. S« jams 
 mert mid^ fetner gftcrn, (Ic scrbtcnen bag ni&it. Sog i|n feineg SBcgca 
 ge^cn. S)er 9Kenfc6 foH bet bcjlen ^offrtung leten. 
 
 Theme on the Genitive. 
 
 We will not remember the wrong. They are still waiting 
 for the decision. Of what crime is this student accused? 
 Two like him would have rid us of them. He has never made 
 mention of him, so long as we have been here. Spare him, 
 he is worthy of a better treatment. If you are not sure of 
 it, you ought not to say it. I am in the habit of rising at 
 six o'clock every morning. Tou are a dead man, if you do 
 not leave the country to-night. He was willing to do it, but 
 he was not capable of doing it well. I beheve I have met 
 you before ; but, I assure you, I cannot recollect you. The 
 emigrants remained ever mindful of their country, and were 
 never indifferent to its fate. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 3)er t^rupng. 
 
 Sin frommcr ^na6e, ber ©o^n elnca Sanbmanneg, wanbcfte im Ses 
 gtnn bes grit^Iings auf bent gclbe unt^cr, unb fein ^erj erfreutc fidft 
 ber ^errlidjtcit bes jieugcfeomen Sa^reg. 
 
 Unb aU er lange um^crgcwonbelt, lagerte er fic^ auf cinen Jpiigel 
 u6er ber Ciiietlc einea tnurmelnben Siic^Ieing, unb Bliifte ting3 urn (Ic^ 
 ^tx mit ainbac^t unb 8lc6c, unb toav bcwegt in fclncm ^tvitn, 
 
 Da »crna'^m cr cin lelfcg ©Sufeln in bem ®ebuf(^ jur ©ette be3 
 §ugel«, unb ti trat :^er»orbie cble ®e|lalt eincs 3ungling« '!tnb na:§ete 
 |i(^ bem §»igel, unb fc^te fic^ jur ©ette bea flnnenbcn ^naben. 
 
 „a3em [Innefl bu na^, ntcin Sieber," rebete cr i^n an, „unb warum 
 
SYNTAX THE NOUN. 379 
 
 Hjlbu fo entfl in ber SIutt)e Mnti Mtni ?" — 'Ltv Rnabt antoortete: 
 „(SS t(i mtr fo cigen im Jperjen; W ^errlic^feit fceS lommenben grii|i 
 lings erfreuet mii^ tBO^I, abtx ti tjl einc jliUe greute Boll SSe^mut:^ mti 
 |imm(i)'(^cr S^rfur^t. ©ic^c, ti Wuc^t mir, aU ob ic^ in einem 2:cm^ 
 pil roarc. " 
 
 „S5tfl bcnn fcu tttc^t ouc^ in cinent ZimptU" fragte Icr 3iin9Kn3, 
 nnb fein groges MaucS iwgc flra|Ite wit cigenem l^^eren ©tange. 
 „Sl6er," fragte er barauf, „toai erfMte icnn kein ^crj »or anicrn wiit 
 foMen (Smjjftntungcn ?" 
 
 S)cr ^nabc antnjortctc uut fprac^ : „'£)ai leife SBantcIn bcr Jlatur 
 wnb tie ©titte, ntit welc^er alle biefc Jperrlid^tcit, wie son fetter, fiiife 
 fcUtetc. 
 
 „2lfe ber ©i^nee noc^ in in ben ©c^Iuc^ten lag, unb bie ©i^otle ttO(^ 
 ;§art war »on beat niic^tlic^en grojl, ba »er!iinbete fc^on ber grii^Ung 
 fein ^ommen. 
 
 „Sr fanbte feine 9)ro)j'^etin, bie itv^i. (Bit f^wcWe aui3 ber gurd^e 
 jum Jpimmel tmpor, ali ob fte ben fc^Iummernben ^eim ftngenb aufriefe 
 jum freubigcn Srwae^en unb bem SWenfc^engeft^Ied^te bie cmige Drb* 
 rtung ber '^atva serfiinbetc. £)enn ft^weiet |te niiit jtngenb jwifd^en 
 bem Jpimmet unb ber Srbe? Man [it^t ei ber traunen Srufl ber 
 grii^Iingafiotin rti{^t an, ba^ |ie eine 3)rot)|eten|limme in fl(^ trogt,unb 
 ajlonc^e uertennen ti." 
 
 (Ssttfe^unj folgt in bet na^flen Settton.) 
 
 The Dative Case. 
 
 § 18i — ^The Dative Case in German is used for the 
 indirect or personal object corresponding usually to the 
 English objective after the preposition to {or for). 
 
 Ex.— es i|l mtr wertji it is dear to me. 
 
 3c^ geie tiem ^naten aStob, I give bread to the boy. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. A noun or pronoun used to represent the object in 
 reference to which an action is done or directed (objec- 
 
880 
 
 SYNTAX THE NOUN. 
 
 tive in English), must in German be put in the dative 
 case. 
 
 Ex. — Er bttrfte inir« he thanked me. 
 
 ea geftrf sielen 8euten» it pleased many people. 
 
 VERBS GOVERNENa THE DATIVE. 
 
 According to this exception the following intransitive verbs 
 govern the dative : 
 
 ahat^en, to dissuade 
 
 an^ongen, to adhere 
 
 an(le|en, to suit 
 
 fltttoortcn, to answer 
 
 ■favimii^m, to evade 
 
 kfe^(en,to command, order 
 
 ffcegcgnen, to meet, to occur, 
 to happen 
 
 Bc'^agen, to please 
 
 6el^tmmen, \ to agree with 
 
 6ei))fli(^ten, j some one 
 
 ttetjle^en, to assist 
 
 fklommen, to agree with a 
 person 
 
 f6coorfle|cn, to impend 
 
 iantcn, to thank 
 
 kicnen, to serve 
 
 broken, to threaten 
 
 f cinfaHen, to occur 
 
 elnleuc^ten, to be evident 
 
 f cntge|m, ) to avoid, 
 
 fcnttotnmen, j to escape 
 
 f etttlaufen, to abscond 
 
 fntfprcd^cn, to answer, to cor- 
 respond with, to accord 
 
 criauben, to allow, permit 
 
 Wm, I to be wanting 
 mangcln, J 
 
 " flui^en, to curse 
 ifolgcn, to follow 
 frb^ncn, to indulge 
 gc6u|ren, to be due 
 gefallctt, to please 
 mi^faUcn, to displease 
 gc'^ord^en, to obey 
 gc|i5rcn, to belong 
 fgelingen, to succeed 
 geniigcrt, to suffice 
 gcreld^en, to redound, conduce 
 gejicmen or jiemett, to become 
 glauBen, to believe 
 gteic^en, to be like 
 ^clfen, to help 
 /|ttltigen, to do homage 
 tnigtraucn, to mistrust 
 f5c^ na|cnt, to approach 
 nii^en, to be useful 
 xat^tn, to advise 
 f(i^a»en, 1, , . 
 
 fc^cinen, to seem 
 fc^mei^eln, to flatter 
 ^mtxn, to check, to remedy 
 tro^Crt, to bid defiance 
 trauen, to trust 
 tuntcrliegen, to succumb 
 
SYNTAX — THE NOUN. 381 
 
 |t^ untcrtDcrfcrt, to submit totberfprei^en, to contradict 
 
 ■JTJorangc^cn, to precede wittfa^rert, to grant, to indulge 
 
 sorieugen, to obviate tuo^lwotten, to favor, to vrish 
 UCCt^vttt, to prevent, ward off well 
 
 f meic^en, to give way, to yield ju^Bren, to listen 
 
 t»iticr[le|cn, l f jufommen, to fall to one's 
 flt^ ttjiscrfc^en, j *° ^^^^ share 
 
 and many compound verbs, especially those with 
 
 ®r, »ot, etit, 
 
 3lb, an, auf, hci, etn 
 
 @ntgegen, na^, nnter, i>ot, toiler, ju. 
 
 Ex. — 3i^ entrtge "flEn meinen Stnfptiid^en, I renounce all my demands. 
 
 Eemaek. — These verbs being intransitive, they cannot be 
 used in the passive voice, except sometimes in the third per- 
 son (see p. 296, Note) ; the passive sentence must, therefore, 
 in German, be changed to a corresponding active sentence. 
 
 Ex. — iKoit folgte tgnt Sercitwtlltg, he was readily followed. 
 
 2. The following verbs which govern two nouns, one of 
 the person and the other of the thing, require the person in 
 the datirC) and the thing in the accnsativei 
 
 'antieten, to offer ■^Itefcrn, to furnish 
 
 1^ torgcn, to borrow nc^mcn, to take from a person 
 
 tringcn, to bring pflficn, to fit 
 
 entreipcn, to snatch away fagcn, to tell 
 
 crja^Ien, to relate fc^enlen, to present with 
 
 ge6en, to give fi^ultett, ) 
 
 gcwa^ren, to grant f(^ulttg fetn, ) *° °^® 
 
 glaukn, to beheve »crfc^affcn, to procure 
 
 let^eit, to lend serjei^en, to pardon 
 
 Ictjicn, to render »orie|"cn, to read to a person 
 
 Ex. — ®ieli bcrtl 5Wab(|cn ttaS Xwd), glye the cloth to the girl. 
 Cage mir Jlie fSSd^t^tit, tell me the truth. 
 
382 SYNTAX THE NOUIf. 
 
 3. The verbs : erncnncn, to appoint ; crwii'^Ien, to choose; 
 tnac^cn, to make, which in English govern two nominatives in 
 the passive voice, require in German the preposition JU. 
 
 Ex. — &err 91. t|l jum Dottor gemac^t tuotbcn, Mr. A. was made a doctor. 
 
 Eemakk. — The verb erf lateil, to declare, requires the pre- 
 position fflt. 
 
 Ex. — (Sr ttutbe f iir Banftott crfloirt, he was declared a banirupt. 
 
 9)almet iBtttbe fiir unfc^ulbig erflttrt, Palmer was fomid not gmlty. 
 
 4. The dative of personal pronouns, especially of the first 
 and second person, often occurs as an idiomatic form of em- 
 phasis. 
 
 Ex. — 2>tt3 t»ar cuij aitx cin $eft, but lie was truly a hero. 
 
 5. The dative of personal pronouns is also used with expres- 
 sions of persojioZ harm, damage, sorrow, or joy, where the Eng- 
 lish language would use possessive pronouns. (See p. 862, k.) 
 
 Ex.— Die 3:^rttncn liefen i^r iiier bie SBangen, the tears ran down her 
 cheeks. 
 
 THE DATIVE CASE GOVERNED BY NOUNS. 
 
 6. This occurs in more elevated language only. 
 
 Ex. — Sen Sebiirftigen war tt (lct« cin $elfer» to thoee in want he was 
 ever a help(er). 
 Sroir rofien in ber ^aUi ^elm unb ©(^ilb (Schiller), my helmet and 
 my shield are getting rusty in the armory. 
 
 ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 7. The following adjectives are placed after their object, 
 which they govern in the dative case. 
 
 a6gcnctgt, disinclined ftwflijf tfl, offensive 
 
 a^nltc^, like Belannt, known 
 
 angc6orcrt, innate Begrciflt^, conceivable 
 
 angemcjfen, appropriate 6equem, ] convenient, 
 
 angenc|m, agreeable k^ogli^, j comfortable 
 
SYNTAX THE NOUN. 383 
 
 6c|'d^ieben, destined liifltg, troublesome 
 
 6c|"(^»crlid^, troublesome Ucb, ] , 
 
 banfbar, grateful t:^cttcr, j ^^^ 
 
 bicnli^, 1 . , , mBglicb, possible 
 
 iienpar, [ serviceable „a(^t^eilig, ) prejudicial, detri- 
 
 etgen, } f^iitilid), ) mental, hurtful 
 
 ci9cntpmli(!^, [ P^''^^^'^ na|e, near 
 
 frcmi), strange nii^Iic^, useful 
 
 gc^orfam, obedient treu, 1 f^^^-^^i 
 
 gcma§, according to gctrcu, ) 
 
 gemein, common iiBcrlegen, superior 
 
 geioogen, l . , , Hnin5gli(^, impossible 
 
 gunflig, [^vorable ^cr^a^t, odious 
 
 gcneigt, inclined ttort^cil^aft, advantageous 
 
 gcisfl^fcn, equal to jutbrtg, adverse 
 
 gteic^, Uke, equal WtUfommen, welcome 
 
 gnabig, gracious, kind jutriigliA, conducive, beneficial 
 
 ^cilfain, salutary 
 
 Ex. — S)icfe« W&bSttn t|l (or |ie^t) i^tet 3Rutter a1)vXii^t this girl is like (re 
 sembles) her mother. 
 
 8. The dative case is governed by adjectives or adverbs, 
 expressing inclination, vicinity, union, conformity, harmony, 
 assistance; or, the contrary, aversion, distance, disunion, &c., 
 (unquestionably again, a personal reference). 
 
 Bemabe. — For a list of the prepositions that govern the 
 dative, see p. 347, n., and p. 349, IV. 
 
 The Accusative Case. 
 
 § 19. — The accusative in German is the case of the 
 direct object. 
 Ex.— 3c& lefe MS fBnH), I read the hook. 
 
 § 20. — The direct object is used : 
 1. With all transitive verbs. 
 Ex. — 25t£fet 5WanK ^«t meinen Sfel getaufd this man has bought my ass. 
 
384 SYNTAX. THE NOUN. 
 
 2. After nearly all reflexive verbs. (For the Exceptions, 
 see p. 305, 11.) 
 
 Ex. — SJerjei^en ©it, ic^ l^aSe nitr^ fleittt, pardon me, I was mistaken. 
 
 3. After most impersonal verbs of an active meaning. 
 (For the Exceptions, see p. 312, lU.) 
 
 Ex.— (£« freut mt4 ®'e J« Wf' I a™ glad to see you. 
 
 4. With most verbs compoimded with the inseparable 
 particle Be ' and after those compounded with the pre- 
 positions burc^, Winter, itber, urn and unter 
 
 Ex. — SBoKcit ©ie ntil^ Seja'^Ien, will you pay me ? 
 
 3^ wnit ben ©taQ tv.ttliia'i)tn lalfen, I shall have the stable 
 searched. 
 
 5. With the following adjectives denoting wdght, meas- 
 ure, age, or valve, generally preceded by a numeral. These 
 adjectives are placed after their case. 
 
 alt, old tang, long 
 
 Brett, broad, wide fc^ttcr, heavy, weighing 
 
 flro§, great, large, tall ttcf, deep 
 
 fjo&i, high jBcrt^, worth, etc. 
 
 Ex.— Die ®tuBe war mc^r ali eincn Sug tiefr the ditch was more than a 
 foot deep. 
 
 Eemaek. — ^Por a list of the prepositions that govern the 
 accusative, see p. 349, HI. and IV. 
 
 § 21. — ^Many intransitive verbs may, ia German as 
 in other languages, acquire a transitive meaning. They 
 then govern their object in the accusative case. 
 
 Ex.— St f($Iaft tien le^tett ©c^Iafr he sleeps his last sleep. 
 
 ■ The exceptions are : tegegmn, tejagen, tefle^tit, itm'^tn, ie^onm and if 
 
SYNTAX. THE NOUN. 385 
 
 Eemaek. — The following verbs are constructed with two 
 accusatives in the active voice, while in the passive voice they 
 have two nominatives. (See p. 368, 2.): 
 
 ^eipett, [tQgall f(^im))fcn, to reproach (with vile 
 
 nennen, ) names) 
 
 Ic^rcn, to teach taufcn, to baptize 
 fc^eltcn, to scold 
 
 Ex.— Er fc^ttt mtft eititn Marten, he calls (scolds) me a fool. 
 
 § S2. — Sometimes the object appears in the accusa- 
 tive governed by the present participle of a verb ex- 
 pressed or understood. 
 
 Ex.— ®en 35olc^ im Oewanbc (tteriergenb), Mding the dagger under the 
 mantle. 
 
 § 83. — ^With the following words the accusative is 
 used to mark definitely the measure, amount, or distance in- 
 dicated by them : 
 
 Wtcgen, to weigh gcltett, to pass for 
 
 foflen, to cost tDcrf^, worth 
 
 fc^trer, heavy rei^, rich 
 
 lang, long wcit, wide 
 
 Ex. — Stefer ©todE ifl eincn S«5 long, this stick is a foot long. 
 
 § 24. — ^Nouns denoting indeftnite time are put in the 
 genitive (see p. 377, 3), but those denoting a particular 
 point or duration of time are put in the accusative. 
 
 Ex.— 3^ it^t iebctt 2;«8 na^ ber ©tabt, I go to the city every day. 
 
 Reading Exercise XLIII. 
 
 Sic ©onnc, Me ^iinigin tc« Sages, Begtnnt t^rcn Sauf. Wtin un« 
 ticmittefter, aitv tugenti|after greunt ifl jo gtiicHic^ t»te fein vti&m 5Wa^-' 
 bar. SBarum wUtn ©ie fic^ ni^ tes 9lau(^ens entroo^nen ? Lincoln 
 
386 SYNTAX. THE NOUN. 
 
 wirb son SSlelen ber jwcite SSatcr feincS SatertanbeS gcnannt. 3fl c3 
 wirlltc^ »a|r, kag ©tc jum S3iMiot£)etar crnannt mxitn (inb ? !Diefe3 
 tji ntetnes SSatera Sant:§auS. T>ai ^bnigreie^ ©ac^fen |flt cine 2lus* 
 be^nurig son 280 fceutfd^cn Duabrotmciten. Sringc mlr gefalligfi tin 
 ®la« fitgen 2Cetnc«. ipabcn ©tc etncn Jput 3udEer »on 20 ober 25 
 9)fttnb? SBelcfeer son beinen Sreunben ift na^ Sftu^Ionb gcreifl? 
 !Dcr fromme ^Jlenfc^ fennt bic gurd^t bei3 ©tertmg nic^t. Sr ift be3 
 gauCenjeng fatt unb toitt wicbcr artcitcn. SBann (au(^) imnter ©ie 
 meineg SetjianteS bebitrfen, fi^rcibcn ©te mir nur. SQiberfprcc^en ©ie 
 mir nii^t noc^ cinmol. ®r ^at mir Ui je^t no^ nic^t auf meinen 
 SSrief geantoortct. IDu fottjl bcm ®efe^e nldjt tro^en. 3Ba0 nii^t bir 
 aH bctn ®etB, o^ne SSilbung 'i <ii war mir unmBglid^, ©ie gcjlem ju 
 Bcfuc^cn, Diefcr SKann ^at fcincn Slnt^eil unter bcm .Kojlcnprcife Bcr» 
 tauft. tkiei ^inb i|l jiBoIf 5)funb fc^tuer. ®« ifl cin unb bic nam* 
 licfce ^raft, bic in ben ^flanjen ric Sluntc Bilbet, unb in bcr Sruft bcr 
 Stmfel unb bcr Scrd^c ben ©cfang wac^ ruft. 
 
 Theme XLIU. 
 
 Frederick the Second is called the Great. My nephew has 
 been appointed consul to the city of Leipzig. In the 
 morning we go to the city, in the evening we return to the 
 country. The month of July of this year was the hottest 
 month we have had this summer. I should prefer a sUk 
 dress to all my other dresses. I dissuaded him from it, but 
 he would not follow my advice. He hurt himself. BeUeve 
 me, I shall ever remember (gcbcn!en) you. Will you not assist 
 me? Pardon my negligence, it shall never happen again. 
 According to your promise, I expect to see you at eight 
 o'clock. She scolded (fc^cften) her brother. He calls me his 
 friend. The French frequently caU Louis the fourteenth, 
 the Great. Who teaches you the German language ? Con- 
 vince yourself that I am right. I shall have the house 
 searched for him. Do you return to the country every day ? 
 The watch was at least one himdred years old. 
 
SYNTAX. THE NOUN. 387 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 2)cr IJrii^Iing.— Oortfe^ung. 
 
 „®a3 ifl ka« Soos bes ©bttlii^cn in fciner cinfac^crt ®f jlalt," fagtc 
 bcr Swttgtittg. 
 
 „2l6er fa^re fort, ntein Sickr, mir Me ©efc^ic^tc ke« Scnjcg ju er* 
 jiillen !" 
 
 Dcr .SnaBc fprad^: jiSfJutt crwa^ten, bcm, Stuff ge'^orc^ent), taufeni 
 SeBcn in tern ©cfeoo§ ber »om grofl cntBwnicnen, ntiitterlic^en Srtc. 
 2>ic SBinterglbcfdjen (iantcn ba, wie Hii^^cnber ©c^nec, unb gemetnfam, 
 oU 06 pc serfciincet ben tuicbcrfe^renbcn ©turm unb Srofl nii^t fitrdste? 
 ten. 9ln ber ©onnenfcite beg ^iigeU, »om Dorncngefhraud) tefc^trmt 
 unb nur bent fpiil^enben 2luge erfi^cinenb, Hii^ete bag cinfame, buftenle 
 SSetlc^en, cin erfreutidjeg 3"(^en, bag bie friil^cre fJropletin ble SQa^x^: 
 f^dt serfiinbet ^a6e. 
 
 „Unb »ie buri^flromte nun ber Dbent beg IScnjes bie ganje ^atm, 
 unb »eriiingte bag Slntli^ ber Srbe ! Sent ^leinften unb 3'>''tcften nsarb 
 feinc 9)flege fo gut toic bcm ©rcfen. 3lu(^ bie Ber^iillte ^nog))e unb 
 bog eingewidelte SStatt l|iat fctnc SJontnierung unb fOJorgenriJtl^e. 3fl e3 
 ni^t eine unb bie namlii^e ^raft, bie in ben ^flanjen |i^ jur SSIunte 
 gcftaltet, unb in ber SBruft ber 3Imfel unb ber Scrcfcc junt ®efange fii^ 
 Mlcet? ©0 gcfeUte fi^ SSliit^e pi Sliit^e, unb ©efang jum ©efange, 
 unb ktb," — fagte ber ^nabe mit jha^Icncen 2lugcn — „Mi irirb bie 
 Stai^tigatl ben g^orgefang ttoUenben, ber— ic^ sweifle nid)t— bie fort=s 
 fc^reitenbe Sntfaltung ber ^rSftc bcgleitet*." 
 
 „2Co^I bir, mein Sieber," fagte ber SitngHnfl, „baf bu bie §onb ber 
 sRatur aui!^ in i'^rem Icifen 3Bir!en ertcnnefi ! 'Lk toirft in beat SSatcr 
 ber sRatur au^ balb ben SSater ber 9«enjc^en crfennen !— 3c^ fi^eibe," 
 fu|r cr fort; „griebc fei mit bir! ©ie'^e, i^ Bin ber (Sngel beg 5ru|* 
 lingg !" 
 
 iaig ber Siingltng biefeg gefprocfecn, jerflof cr Bor ben Slugen beg 
 .Snaben in einem mitben Sii^tglanj. j)er ^aunenbe ^naBe fa^ i|n 
 ni(^t ntcBr, aBer in bem SCatbc^en fc^wcBte cin Icifcg ©aufeln, bie 
 3tBeige jittcrten, bie Snogpcn Blii'^eten auf, unb aui^ bie ©timmc ber 
 5RacfetigaI ertiJnte jum Ic^tcn SBlale, unb ber ^naBe fcIBft jlanb »crwan* 
 belt ba — ein frSftigcr SflngKng- 
 
388 SYNTAX. — THE ABJECTIVE. 
 
 LESSON XLIV. Scfttott 44. 
 
 The Adjective. (Sms eigcnf^oftsttiott.) 
 
 § 35. — Predicative Adjectives (p. 126, I.) are, as in 
 English, generally separated from the noun by the verb, 
 and are indeclinable. 
 
 Ex.— ©tefet aSomt i)l rei^, this man is rich. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. When the predicative adjective is used snbstantiyely it 
 is declined (p. 135, XI.). 
 
 Ex.— ©octateS ^eist mit Sitijt ber SBeifc, Socrates is j istly called t?ie wise. 
 
 Note. — ^But even used as a noun, the adjective may remain indeclin- 
 able when it denotes a quaMy, or a materuU named after that quality. 
 
 Ex.— ®ie Sarte iti SIctbc* ifi ein fc^oneS !Kot|, the color of the dress is 
 a beautiful red. 
 
 2. When a noun is understood after the adjective, the 
 latter becomes attributive (p. 126, IL), and takes the ending 
 of attributive or qualifying adjectives (p. 126, m.). In Eng- 
 lish the noun omitted is suppUed by "one" (p. 148, Viil., 
 and p. 220, XI.). 
 
 Ex.— 25er SBitig son frcugen, Sriebtic^ SBil^rtm HI., wax etn gfitigcr unb 
 tteifcr, the king of Prussia, Frederick William III., was a kind 
 and wise one. 
 
 § S8.— Attributive Adjectives (p. 126, IT., & III.) agree 
 in gender, number, and case with their nouns, expressed 
 or understood, and are placed before them.' 
 
 Ex.— ®er gute SWann i|l tinea 6c|reren So^nd reiirbig, the good man is 
 worthy of a better pay. 
 ©in ImntcS fiinb mni^t ber SBJntter »tel Sotgen, a sick child gives 
 much care to its (his) mother. 
 
 ' The poets, however, often place the adjective, even when it is an 
 epithet, at some distance from its substantive ; e. g., ©e Jten fi^ ouf bi« 
 ©ante bie pljernctt.— QoETHK. 
 
S1NTAX. — THE ADJECTIVE. 389 
 
 Eiit Coffel Dott warmer ©uppc, a spoon full of warm soup. 
 <&( uai ben SQeifen ein 3}atecr ia/ ein gutiger unb geve^ten he was a 
 father to the orphans, yes, a, kind and just one. 
 
 § 27. — ^With two or more Nouns. "Wlien tlie same ad- 
 jective belongs to two or more nouns of different genders, 
 the adjective must be repeated witb each. 
 
 Ex. — Ein gutcr ©o^n unb etne jute 3;o($teri a good son and daughter. 
 
 § 38. — Two or more Adjectives with one Noun. When 
 a noun is qualified by two or more adjectives thej are 
 mck inflected (p. 127, V.). 
 
 Ex. — SRttu^tg unb unfreunbli(^e8 SEBetter, rough and disagreeable weather, 
 ttnfete f^6ne< junge^ retire ?ia(^6atin, our beautiful, young, rich 
 neighbor(ess). 
 
 Exceptions- 
 
 1. When several attributive adjectives, not preceded by 
 the article, qualify a noun, the first adjective, if it has a 
 fcyrmoL or local meaning (as : fotgettber, na^fle^enter, obigcr, 
 etttd^nter, etc.), causes those adjectives followiag it to be de- 
 clined as U. preceded by the definite article (p. 126, V.). 
 
 Ex. — DiigcS Wa^rt SBort, the above true statement (word). 
 
 3n Sotge uBenerwa'^ntcr wta)tigcn 'Sni^t, in consequence of the 
 above-mentioned important case. 
 
 2. When several adjectives, taken together, constitute ori^ 
 collective idea, only the last adjective is declined. 
 
 Ex. — Die fc^Wtttj-totHolbtnc go^ne i|l ni^t mfjx, the black, red, gold flag 
 is no more. 
 
 § 29. — With a complement. In English the complement, 
 sometimes called adverbial phrase, is placed after the ad- 
 jective, but in German both the complement and adjective 
 are placed before the noun, immediately after the article. 
 
 Ex. — Ein tiici gcreijlcr SRann, a man of much travel. 
 
 Ein naA Stci^tOumern Segteriger fWenf^, a man eager after riches. 
 
390 
 
 SYNTAX. THE ADJECTTVB. 
 
 Adjectives with Prepositions. 
 
 § 30. — Some adjectives are followed by prepositions. 
 They are : 
 
 fruc^tkr on, productive of 
 gterig nac^, covetous of 
 glet^giiilHg gegen, indififerent to 
 gcfii^Ko^ gegcit, insensible of 
 nac^Iaffig in, careless of 
 reid^ an, rich in 
 flolj auf, proud of 
 uerlieBt in, lq love with 
 it6erjeugt »on, convinced, sure 
 
 of 
 untDiflTenb in, ignorant of 
 »crfc§menberifcb ntit, prodigal of 
 3»cifcl|aft iiBer, dubious of 
 jufrietcn ntit, satisfied with 
 unjufricbcn mit,dissatisfied with 
 
 fceforgtfiir, '[careful of 
 knge »or, afraid of 
 6efi^amt iiber, ashamed of 
 fccgterig na(^, desirous of 
 fcefreit son, l rid of 
 frei son, j free from 
 e|rgeijig na^, ambitious of 
 empfdngUi^ fiir, susceptible of , 
 tmpftnSli^ iikr, sensible of 
 cifcrfiic^tig iikr, jealous of 
 eitel auf, vain of 
 ermiitet son, tired by or with 
 fii^ig ju, able, capable of 
 fro^ iiber, glad of 
 
 Ex.— ©et me gicrig nai) SRei^tpmern ito^ »etr($»enberifc^ ntit 6cm wai 
 bu '^ail, be never covetous of riches neither prodigal of that 
 you have. 
 
 Reading Exercise XLIV. 
 
 Derjcntge, ber ettcl auf feinc ^enntntflrc ifl, ifl fcebaMernawcrtI, 2Cir 
 nennen cinen 9Renf(^cn, ber nid)t fe^n tonn, ctnen Slinbcn. "Las 
 ©run bcr SBftltcr ifl wo'^tt'^ucnb fiir tie 2lugcn. 3)icfer junge Sleutfc^e 
 i|l ein fclr fleiftger StrBeiter, aBer fetn greunb ifl ein fe^r faulcr. Sin 
 retnes ftnbH(ieS ^crj, BcrBunben ntit grogen ®clfle«anlagen, ijl eine iiu* 
 f erft feftene ®rfcf)cinung. SBir :|atten tie tiorigc ^a6^t cine fitrc^terU(i)e, 
 triidenbc $t^e, weli^c crfl gegen SWorgen nac^ einem- mel§r(liinbigen, 
 ^efttgen ©emitter nai^lteg, Sflod^fle^^enkeiS ongiel^enke SKii:§rc^cn tourbe 
 pii« Hon oBenerroa^ntem alten greunbe mitgetlcilt. S)ie f(^Ie«tt>igs 
 
SYNTAX. THE ADJEOTIVB. 391 
 
 l^oIiletttif(^c Srage BcronIa§tc ben Slu^Bruc^ iti )}rcu^if^*oflcrrci^ifc^en 
 ^tcge«. 'Lit »ott ber 3lrktt crmiitcte SJlenfc^ iitcrtiipt ftc^ cincr £ci6 
 unb ©eele crquicfenteit Sftu^c. 
 
 Theme XLIV. 
 
 The tailor, wlio was formerly rich, is now poor. Among 
 the Greeks the good and the beautiful were synonymous. 
 These grapes have a pleasant sweet (taste). The horse, which 
 I sold, is a very wild one. America is a great [and] free 
 country, the home of the good [and] great Washington. I 
 have seen a quantity of fine ripe peaches to-day. The above- 
 mentioned case occurred a short time ago. In the English 
 language there are many words of Anglo-Saxon origin. Alex- 
 ander the Great, made proud by his conquests, soon forgot 
 the lessons received from his teacher Aristotle. I am satis- 
 fied with you, and you may rest if you are tired with working. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 S)te ^ofaune beg ©crt^tl. 
 
 ®av ttjunbcrkr uni fcltfam tucrben oft btc SScr'^altnijfe beS Wlmt 
 fc^enlebcns serMpfl. S)a3 jiint) ^noten unb iSJJafc^ett, bie leine iWen* 
 f^en^anc, fei fte noc^ fo funjlgeiibt, fnitpfm tann; iai |inb ?5cr»icte* 
 (ungen, bic ber pfiffigjle SSer^anb nii^t IBfen !onn. grcitic^ gc^t 3ltte« 
 natMic^ baJet ^er, unb tai ijl tbm iai SSunber, baf Ma gcmo^^ntic^ 
 ijl, unb bo^ 2lu^erorbentIi(^e3 baraua ^ev»orge:§t. SBie jcigt jTc^ iai 
 tuiccer an biefer ©efc^i^te ! 
 
 (Serabe bort, too bic ©cmarfungen jwcicr S;ijrfcr [li^ fdjciben, mitten 
 iin ffialDc, wurbe in einer gru^Iing^nodjt, jur 3eit bes SBoIfmonbcS, 
 eine fi^redlii^e Ztjat ttoUBrac^t. Sine SBoIte »cr:^iinte iai 3lntli^ bes 
 SJJlonbeg; bie Stac^tigatl ^ieft tnne mitikem fcbmctternben ©cfangc, aU 
 ber .Snicenbc ben 5!)a|tnge^e(ften burd^fuc^e unb Mn, toai er fanb, ju 
 fii^ jtedtc. 3e^t "o^nt er i^n auf bie ©(^ulter unB mollte i^n :^ina6» 
 tragen on ben ©trorn, ber fem^er raufc^tc, urn i^n bort p ijerfenlen. 
 3)IB^li(^ Mie6 er jle^en, leui^enb unter ber tobtcn Saji. !Der SKonb 
 
392 SYNTAX, — THE PEONOFN. 
 
 war :^erau«gctrctcn unb wacf fein fanfte-J Sii^t burd^ bie ©tiimme, «nl 
 ti tBM, di 06 ouf ben (Straiten be^ 'iWonJc^ bie £ijnc einc3 lerjer* 
 grcifenben Siebea getragcn tDiirben. ®anj na^e Wic3 ein ^o|l|ortt bie 
 SBeifc be« Siebc3: (("Dcntft bu naran ? !" Der 2Bieber|atl in Zi^al unb 
 gelt) 906 ea juriiiJ, unB e3 war, aU ob bie Serge unb Saume )'angenj 
 „ben!|l bu baran !" Dem Srogenbcn »ar'3, »ie wcnn bie Seiche auf 
 feinem SRiicten lebenbig witrbe unb i^n erwiirge. ©c^neU warf er bie 
 Soft flb unb fprang baBon, intmer weiter unb weiter. Snblic^ am 
 ©trome 6lie6 er fle^en unb laufi^te. 3l(Iea roar flill, unb nur bie 
 SBellen floffen fd)nell bo^in, als eilten fie fort son bem iKoner. Eiefer 
 firgerte [i&i jc^t, ia^ er bie ©puren feiner S^ot ni^t sertilgt ^abe unb 
 p^ son fonberkrer gurcbt forttreifeen liep. fir eilte nun juriicE, roan* 
 belte |in unb f^a, Bergauf unD fcergat; ber ©(fe»ei§ rann i:^m Bon ber 
 ©tirn; ea roor i^nt, ali ob er SIci in alien ©liebern l^atte. SKan^er 
 9la(|t»ogcI flog flatternb auf, roenn er fo burc^'g 'Lidiijt brang ; aber 
 nirgenbg fanb er lai ©efuc^te. fir :^ielt an, urn ftc^ jurei^t ju finten, 
 um ftc^ bie ©egcnb gcnau ju BergegcnroSrUgen ; aber faum roar er brei 
 ©c^ritte gegangen, fo roor er in ber 3rre. Sltleg flimmcrte »or feincn 
 Slugcn, unb a roar i^m, roie roenn bie Sdume auf* unb nieberroanbet 
 ten unb i|m ben S33eg oerftellten. £)er SJlorgen brac^ enblic^ an. S)ie 
 SBgel f(^roangen fic^ auf unb fangen i:§re ^cHen Sieber; »om S^ale 
 unt aui ben Sergen |&rte man f eitfti^en fnatlen. Ser aJibrber maifete 
 
 rt(i^ eiligjl baBon. 
 
 (GonUmted in the next lesson.) 
 
 LESSON XLV. Seftion 45. 
 
 The Pronoun. (2io8 gutWort.) 
 
 Personal Pronouns. 
 
 § 31. — ^In German, when a personal pronoun of the 
 
 first or third person is followed by the relative pronoun 
 
 bet, &ic, iaS, (English who), the personal pronoun is 
 
 repeated, (p. 201, VI.) 
 
 Ex.— ®U, ber bu fo »iel ®elb setbient Jajl, thou who hast earned so much 
 money. 
 
SrNTAX — THE PEONO0N. 393 
 
 § 33t — After verbs governing the genitive, and in con- 
 nection with numerals, the genitive of the personal pro- 
 nouns is used in place of the English objective. (See § 11 
 and 15.) 
 
 Ex. — Er etlnnertc flc^ memcr» he lemembered me. 
 Uafcrer swei, two of us. 
 
 Note. — This genitive is likewise joined with the prepositions wegeitj 
 ^albtn, and WiBen, in which case the r is changed into i, as : meinetwegen, 
 on my account (means also : as for me) ; S^tetmegcn, on your account ; 
 urn feinettvillen, for his sake, etc. 
 
 § 33. — ^The dative of personal pronouns is in familiar 
 style often employed in a merely expletive manner. (See 
 p. 382, 4, -and 5.) 
 
 Ex. — 3<^ lobe ittir bett beutfii^en SBcin, 1 lite German wine for me, i. e.. 
 I prefer German wine. 
 
 § 34. — ^Use c§ for so or it. These words are in Eng- 
 lish usually omitted. (Comp. § 51.)* 
 
 Ex.— 4Kein ©o J«, ii|"t bu frani ? 3(i» ic^ iin tS. (My) son, art thou sick ? 
 Yes, I am. 
 3i) Mn ret^, unb (Sie follen tS fein; I am rich, and you shaJl be (so). 
 
 § .35. — ^A personal pronoun used after cdl, followed by 
 of, is in English governed in the objective, but in German 
 the pronoun precedes aUt, and is put in the nominative. 
 
 Ex. — SBir Slttc finb betftlSen SBteinuttg, aU of us are of the same opinion. 
 
 Possessive Pronouns. 
 
 § 36.— The conjunctive possessive pronouns (p.l87, 11.) 
 are in German frequently replaced by the definite article 
 where no ambiguity exists in regard to the possessor, 
 (p. 362, h.) 
 
 Ex. — St ^tttte etneit Solc^ in bet ^anb, he had a dagger in his hand. 
 
 • Similarly the French use le. 
 
394 SINTAX THE PEONOTIK. 
 
 Exception. 
 
 When an emphatic reference to the subject is to be ex- 
 pressed, the dative of the corresponding personal prononn is 
 used in addition to the article, when it can be construed as 
 the indirect object of the verb in the sentence. 
 
 Ex.— $ajl bu Sir ben (beinen) guft ief(i^abi9t ? Have you hurt your foot? 
 
 Note 1. — The personal pronoan is put in the Accusative instead of the 
 Dative, when the part or plctcB affected is added with a preposition (see 
 p. 350). 
 
 Ex. — ®r ttat milt (Wo^in?) auf ben Sug, he stepped on my foot. 
 
 Note 2.— But whenever ffitasm, |le#ttt, treten, and like verbs are taken 
 in an intransitive, i. e., subjective state, the pers. pron. may alsobe put in 
 the Dative,* provided, however, that a prep, of location (p. 349,rV.) is used. 
 
 Ex. — Sr trat mir auf ben gug (compare Example of Note 1). 
 
 § 37. — ^A collective noun is not, in German as in 
 
 English, represented by a pronoun in the plural. 
 
 Ex.— ®a« Dteugtft^e SJoIt fi^t taufer fur fcin SRe^t, the Prussian people 
 are fighting bravely for their right. 
 
 § 38, — ^Possessive pronouns, if they dififer in gender, 
 are repeated before every word to which they belong. 
 
 Ex. — ®ici mir meine SWu^c unb meinetl ©tod, give me my cap and cane. 
 Winn SSater unb meine 3)2utteT |tnb gefommen, my father and mother 
 have come. 
 
 Note. — When addressing relatives and friends the possessive pro- 
 noun is generaMy placed before every noun. 
 
 Ex. — 2llcin SJater, meine 3>futter, meine Sreunbe, lommen ©ie ju Kif(J» 
 &ther, mother, friends, come (to the table) and dine. 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON THE PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 mix 9Kertfc^cn, bte toir wiffcn, bog tuir ^ertcn miiffcn, fotttcn me^r 
 an ben Sob benlcrt. SScrgcffe icb bctn, 3eru)'alcm, fo werbe meiner 
 SRec^tcn scrgcflcn. SaS i|l mir cin tcunberli^er Oefclte, ben i^ ba 
 l^aBe fennen gelcrnt. S^aUn ©ie ba« tuirlti^ flcfagt? 3fl, ic§ ^aie 
 ti gcfagt. ©ejlern waren tolr atte tn« Soncert gegangen. Qr trug 
 clnen runben §ut auf bent ^ojife unb einen ©ftd auf bcm Sdiicfcn. 
 • Comp. Heyse (J. C. A.) Schulgrammatik, 20th edition, (1864), p. 277. 
 
SYNTAX THE PRONOUN. 395 
 
 ®iti mir mcitt Suc^ unb metncn Stod, id^ mu§ ic^t gc'^cit. J)ie 
 !Deutf(^en taud)en gent aui gropen, langert 3)fetfen. ^ommcn ©te, 
 mcine §erren, wir miiflfen ge^en. Srutua »crurt^citte fcinc ©o^ne 
 fettfl, wnt ot3 man fcineti Utt|eU«fprud^ milDertt wottte, fagtc er : 
 ©prcc^t mir nid^t »on i:§ttcn, e« fini 3Serriit|et. 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON THE PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 How can you, who know but three words of English, in- 
 struct me, who have studied it for three years ? Three of us 
 stood opposed in battle to five of them. You need not 
 trouble yourself about him. Only think, our dear friend 
 B. has lost one of his eyes by an accident. Do you know 
 that John has gone to America ? I heard so this morning. 
 AU of you are mistaken, he is stUl here. Grive me your hand, 
 and do not turn away your face,, for I am stiU your friend. 
 He has sprained his foot. Where are your father and 
 mother? Come, children, we will take a walk. 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 § 39. — ^A demonstratiye pronoun is sometimes used 
 in preference to the personal pronoun of the third per- 
 son for the sake of distinction as well as sound. When 
 alluding to a nearer object liefer (or ber le^ere, p. 194, 
 m.) is used, and when a distant one, jenet (or ber erftere); 
 or the whole sentence is changed. 
 
 Ex. — ^SRtttie wot 6ei STgnea a«f Sefuc^, ali mir flc fu^ten, Mary was on a 
 /Mt to Agnes, when we were looking for her. 
 SWatit war Ui StgneS auf ScM, aU wir iiefc (bte Icfctm) Mten. 
 3Rarie teat Bet 9[gnf«, uuf Sefu^, aU wtr jene (Me etficre) fu^teti. 
 
 Note. — In the first example f{e may refer either to Agnes or Mary, 
 hence it would be better (like the English, the former and the latter) 
 to use liiefe (le^terc) and jenc (erjlete) to avoid ambiguity. (See also p. 195, 
 VII., VIII., and IX.). 
 
396 SYNTAX ^THE PRONOUN. 
 
 Eelative and Correlative Pronouns. 
 
 § 40. — In German the relative pronoun always takes 
 the first place in the sentence (always subordinate sen- 
 tence) which it introduces, and can only be preceded 
 by prepositions. Therefore, when in English a noun 
 precedes the genitive of the relative, it must in German 
 be transposed so as to appear after the pronoun, and if 
 the noun be accompanied by the article, the latter must 
 be omitted in German, (p. 200, HI.) 
 
 Ex.— 3c^ %(&t me'^rere Sfiii^er, bercn Sn'^alt Mj ni#t femte, I have eeveral 
 books, the contents of which I am not acquainted with. 
 
 § 4 1 . — In German the relative pronoun must be used 
 although omitted (p. 201, V.) in English. 
 
 Ex. — ^This is the penknife I lost {i. e., which I lost), biefcg ijl iai gefcer» 
 mt^a,mi^tS (or lioS) t^ Dcrlor. 
 
 Exception. 
 
 After the conjunctions than or as it is generally omitted. 
 
 Ex.— 3(;^ tann mit feinen grofern gjcic^f^um »or|leIIen, olS (»el(i&m) SRot^fc&ilba) 
 Jeftjert/ I cannot imagine a greater wealth than <Aai which 
 the Rothschilds possess. — Douai 
 
 § 43. — As in English, a relative clause may be placed 
 between the subject and the predicate of a principal sen- 
 tence without changing in the least the construction of 
 the latter. 
 
 Ex.— 9Jic^t aUt, Jiie rcii6 linli, f?nb^lfiiilti$; or, 
 
 92i^t aQe ftnti glitrtlt^, bie teti$ fmb/ not all who are rich, are 
 happy ; or, not all who are happy, are rich. 
 
 § 43. — A relative pronoun used after all, followed by 
 the preposition of, is in English governed in the objective, 
 but in German the pronoun precedes aUe. 
 
 Ex.— St '^at breiSij^nc, bie (v>eVi)t) aUc SKebiein Ihibirt 5aben,he has three 
 sons, all of whom studied medicine. 
 
 ' Some German writers give to proper names of persons in the plural 
 the ending S ; but this usage is not sanctioned by good authorities. 
 
SYNTAX — THE PBONOUN. 397 
 
 § 44. — The phrase such as, when equivalent to those 
 ivho, is translated by the correlatives fccticntgc (or ber), 
 
 Ex. — He would address with a senuon such people as he could find in 
 the streets, cr (jrtbiste Dor icnicniflcn (beti) Ccuten, iDcHc «r auf 
 ber ©trttpc fanb. 
 
 Note.— The form fo in the place of tocl^c or lie is obsolete. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. But when the accessory sentence is expressive of an 
 effect such is rendered by folii^cr, and as by the conjunction 
 
 Ex. — He enjoys such a reputation as to have enough to do for foul 
 hands, et fleniept einett fol^cn SRuf, Hag er fienug fur »icr ^Mt ju 
 t^un ^at. 
 
 2. When such — as mark similarity (i. e., between two per- 
 sons) they are rendered by folc^e — tt»ic. 
 
 Ex. — To associate with such persons as (those that) you speak of, is 
 unsafe, mit foltjen Scutcn umsuge^en tote bit, son benen ©ie fprcc^en, 
 ijl unfli^et. 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns. 
 
 § 45. — Every, ic&er, when denoting time, is fre- 
 quently rendered by aUc requiring the noun following to 
 be in the plural. 
 
 Ex.— Every day, jebcn %a$, or oHe Sage. 
 Every year, jebe* Sa'^r, or aUt Stt^re. 
 
 § 46. — SSei^e, both, like aU, all, never admits of a 
 genitive after it. (See § 35.) 
 
 Ex.— Both of us, tntr aSctbe. 
 
 In both 0/ these books, in biefen Seibcn Sit($ern. 
 Note. — The English both — and is a co-ordinative conjunction, and Is 
 rendered by fotoojl— alg. (See p. 329, H.) 
 
 Ex.— Both silver and gold, fewest ©itOer oXi ®oIb. 
 
398 SYNTAX THE PEONOUN. 
 
 § 47i — Either' — neither (the pronouns, not the con- 
 junctions) are rendered by einer Bon beiben, — feiner son 
 kibcn. But the word beibe is frequently omitted, and 
 eitlier of, when two persons are spoken of, are translated 
 by einec »Ott. 
 
 Ex. — ^Either of them, einer (fem, etrtt) »on t^nen. 
 
 Exception. 
 
 When the indefinite pronoun either is preceded by the 
 negation no<, it must be rendered by f eittcr »on Bcitcn; not 
 any is rendered by f citi 5 not anybody, by 9tientanb ; not 
 any thing, 9ti(^td. (p. 218, V.) 
 
 Ex. — I have not seen either of them, ic^ ^a6e feincn t)On IScibcit gefe^en. 
 Have you not had any bread? ^dten @te tein Srob ge^ait 
 
 § 48. — Other is generally rendered by onbcre ; an- 
 other, tin anbetet j but when the latter signifies a third 
 thing of the same kind, it must be rendered by noi^ ein. 
 
 Ex.— Will yon not take another cup of coffee ? WoBen ®ie ni^t no4 
 cine XalTe Saffee ne^men? 
 
 § 49, — 1. Any more, some more, and more, when no com- 
 parison is implied, are rendered by ttOC|l, in such sentences 
 as these : 
 
 Ex. — Have you any more paper ? ^aicn ©ie no^ 3)a))ter ? 
 He has three more sons, er ^ttt neij brei ©ii^ite. 
 
 2. But no more, and no longer, in similar sentences, are 
 expressed, by tnel^r after a negation ; and me^r stands after 
 its noun. 
 
 Ex. — ^You have no more money, ©ie l^itien tein ®elb ltte|r. 
 
 This little girl has no longer a mother, biefeS Heine SRttb($en ^at 
 feine SJuUcr me^r. 
 
 -' The negative acherbs not — either (nor or neither) are translated 
 OU18 nil^i. Ex. : I have not seen him either, ic^ ^ttSe i^n and) nil^t B^ff^f- 
 
STIBTAX — THE PEONOnU. 399 
 
 Position of tlie Pronoun, 
 
 § 50. — To conjugate a verb interrogatively, place the 
 pronoun immediately after the verb in simple tenses, and 
 between the auxiUary and participle in the compound 
 
 tenses. 
 
 Ex. — fSiai f^riefim ®ie ? what did you -write ? 
 
 S35a3 ^a6en ©ic gefe^en ? what have you seen? 
 
 § 51. — ^Answers, when not simply fa. or nein, should 
 be compfefe' sentences. 
 
 Ex. — SBer ^ot biefe fflorfc sctloten ? who has lost this purse ? 
 3^ Ijoie fie sertoteiti I have lost it (not merely I did). 
 
 Reading Exercise XLV. 
 
 Wdnt grcunbe au« Seutfi^Ianb unb granl«tc^ |inb gejlcrn Ward 
 angc!ommen ; crflcre ntit tern §am6urgcr, Ic^tere mit bent ^asre 
 Dompfer. £)icfe SBIumen, beren tuunberfdibnc SarBen ©ie fo fe|r Be- 
 iBunbern, '^afce i^ fctt^ gcjogen. SCir l^aicn nie aufmerffamere ®^u* 
 ler gefe'^en, ati blefcr SC^rer :^at. Das Heine 9Rab^cn, bcj^en Sltern 
 gejlorBcn jinb, t[l erjl fiinf Sa'^re alt. Dtefe JpSufer unb ©drtcn, bie 
 aUe jenem rctc^cn ^aufmanne ge^ren, fotlen na^e SEo^c serfleigert 
 werben. ©iejenigcn, bie i^re Slufgakn gema^t ^aBen, biirfen nac^ 
 ^aufe ge^cn. S)ie granjofcn untcr bem crjten ^aiferrei^e HIbeten 
 cine fo furc^tkre SRa^t, bag fie ganj (Suropa jtttern marten, ©oli^e 
 reine unfd^ulbige greuben wie wir aU ^inber l^aBcn, te|ren im fpfitercn 
 Se6cn fcltcn wieber. Sltte 5Korgen, luenn wtr aufflc1cn,ttnb allc Slknbe, 
 wcnn wir jur SRu^e ge'^en, follten h)ir ®ott banJen. ®« Pngt son 
 biefen Bciben Umfianbcn a6, 06 i^ mitgcl^en lann obcr ni^t. Diej'et 
 !!Wann i|l fowoM rcii^ ftta auc^ freigcBig. 95ertt, aug teelc^cm man fo 
 »iel @clb 3og, war barum nii^t rcic^cr. ®te Sergwerle, avid toelc^en 
 man Ui jc^t baS 6cfle QucdftlBer gewonnen ^at, finb in ©panicn. 
 
400 SYNTAX THE PEONOUN. 
 
 Theme XLV. 
 
 Goethe and Shaispeare were two great poets ; the for- 
 mer was a German, the latter an Enghshman. This is the 
 view, the beauty of which I so much admire. Tour loss is 
 no greater than that which I have sustained. The horses 
 and cows, all of which you see on yonder hill, belong to my 
 friend, Mr. B. "We should only associate with such as sus- 
 tain a'good character. I believe, I never had such a funny 
 dream as I had last night. Every time I see the sun rise, 
 my heart rejoices. Both German and French are difficult 
 languages. Neither of my sisters-in-law are in this country. 
 She has not yet forgotten anything of that which you told 
 her. I shall drink another glass of water. Is there any 
 more paper in your desk? 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 2)te ipofoune bcS ©ertt^tg.— (gortfc^ung.) 
 
 £)lc Scte^c «3urt!e gefunten unfe nac^ kctn "Dorfc gcferae^t, in bcffen 
 ©emarlung fte lag. 2tn ber rec^tcn ©c^liifc trug tcr entfccttc mvfa 
 ©puren tinti ©c^Iagca, lute uon cittern fd^arfcn ©tetttc. ^eitt SSott* 
 ierkc^,' teitt ^ctitt3ci(^eti n5ar ju fttttctt, mi tent tttatt Me ipcrhtttft tti 
 gtttfeelten enttte|itteit loittite. 3luf fceitt Mri^W, fcertietett tcr ^trc^e 
 |c^ otett auf tctn §itget licgt, an bejfeti gupe ble Satttiflrape, ttt Selfcti 
 ge'^auett, soriifcerjie^t, foUtc itun keS (ttxbern SageS bcr toitc gretttbe 
 fcegrakti wertett, . ®itte uttjiiPge SRcnge 9JJettf(^ett folgte bcttt SW' 
 <Bit toaxm mi atleti 6ettac^barteti DBrfcm gctottttttett ; ^t'ttx woHte 
 fetne Uttfc^ult, feitie Srauer utib fettte 2:|eilita^jne Bchttttcn, ©till, 
 
 ' In Qennany mecliaiiics formerly were obliged to go abroad for three 
 years as goon as they had passed their apprenticeship. All travelers were 
 required to have passports, except mechanics, who instead were fur- 
 nished with a SBanbertui^, by which it could be determined what places 
 they had visited, what had been their experience, and what satisfaction 
 they had given to those by whom they had been employed. 
 
SZNTAX THE PEONODN. 401 
 
 ©■^ne laute ^lagc, nur mit tiefem 2Dc| im ^eqcn, Betuegtc ft(^ ber 3»9 
 ben Serg ^inort. ©er ©eijWic^e :^ie(t cine' ergrcifente aiebe. Su^fl 
 tetcte cr icn Sntfcettcn an unJ fprad): „9luf Jem SSBcgc Mil trn gefatten. 
 2Ccr tt)ei§, tco^tn baS Jperj fit^ fe^ntc, welc^cg ipcrj tir cntgegenfc^Iug. 
 SKijge ber, ber Ma ttnnt unb SlfleiJ |eilt, Sflu^e unD grieten in bie 
 ©eelcn ber ©einigen fennen ! Unbefannt bijl tu gcfaHen, son unBc* 
 fannter §anb. 5Ucmonti wci^, wo^^er bu lam(l, tuoMn bu gingjl; abet 
 gr, ber beinen gingang unb 3lui3gang lennt, ^at bic^ Sa^ncn ^inans 
 jleigcn laffcn, bie unfer Sluge nie ntijf' t. 3" lotl^tx Rir&ii bu ge:|i5ra 
 tefl, welt^c ©prac^e bu renetejt, wcr mag ben jtummen iSJlunb fragen? 
 £)u fleljl je^t »or 3'^nt, ber iiber atten ^irc^en t^ront, ben atle ©pra? 
 (^en nennen unb bod^ ntc^t ju faffen BcrmiJgen." — „gr^ebct mit mil 
 cure .^anbe!" fu^r ber ©eifiti^e ju ben SSerfammelten fort; unb atle 
 l^obcn bie Jpanbe empor. Dann fprae^ er toieter: „S!Bir '^eben unfcre 
 §anbc empor ju Mr, o Slllwifj'enter ! @ie |tnb rein »on Stut|'d)ulb. 
 ^ter im £i(^te ber ©onne bcfennen wir: SSir |inb rein »on biefcr 
 S^flt. ®ie ®erc(^tigfeit abcr »irb nid)t auaMeiben. SBo bu auc^ 
 »eilc|t, ber bu teincn Sruber in SBalbeSnat^t erfc^Iugji: bas ©(^tucrt 
 fditoebt unjiii^tbar iibcr bcincm ^aupte, unb ti wirb fallen unb bi(^ jer? 
 jc^mettern. ^e|r' urn, fo langc es noi^ 3^'* i|l • ^"iuff ^W ^^coti 
 auf gfwri; benn einft, toenn fie ertijnt, bie |)ofaune in ®ericf)t3 . . . ." 
 Da, pIBpi^ Prte man »on ber ©traf e |crouf iai ^ofl{)orn crfii)allen. 
 IDai Sicb critang : „Dentft bu baran !" Mti fc^wieg unb ^ielt ben 
 Slt^em an. 9lu3 ber SJlitte ber Serfammettcn (liirjte cin junger 5Ulonn 
 niebcr unb rief : „3(^ bin's !" Stad^bem man i^n aufgel^oben, gejianb 
 cr rcumiitlsig feinc S^at, luic er in ber ©tabt bas ®e(t) feines Jpcrrn, 
 bei bcm er bicntc, »crfpielt 1^abi ; ttie cr ben grcmbcn, ben cr nur nie* 
 berioerfctt wolttc, ermorbet 'ijobt ; wic bie 2:ijne bes 5)ojt|orns i^n ttcr* 
 Wirrt, wic cr feinc §anb brenncnb gefii^ft f^ait, ali cr ftc jum Jpimmel 
 er^ob, unb tuie je^t bicfclben IBnc iei ^o^oxni i|m bag ®e(ianbni^ 
 abprcgten. 
 
 ©till, o^^nc laute ^tage, nur mit Icifcm ffie'^ im Jperjen, ^atte fid) 
 ber 3u8 !>'" S'1^3 linabbctrcgt. SJlit jitternbcr ©ceic, Si^rSnen in 
 ben 3lugcn, laut iai Un^cil beflagcnb, Ic^rtcn SBieIc l^cim. 
 
 3»ei 9Jlettf(^en marcn auf ci»ig aui ber ®eno(fenfc^aft ber SJlcnfc^cn 
 
 gef^ieben. 
 
 SSertl^oIb StuerSa^ (bom 1813). 
 
402 SYNTAX THE VERB. 
 
 LESSON XLYI. ^cftivn 46. 
 
 The Verb. (2)tt8 Scitttott.) 
 The Auxiliary Verbs of Mode. 
 
 § 52. — The original signification of t&nntn was to 
 
 know or to know how (French, savoir), IJke the old Eng- 
 lish to can (even now found in the Scotch).' Thus 
 t'innen is stiU used as the equivalent to fennen (French, 
 connaitre) or toiffen (Fr., savoir), to know, and is gener- 
 ally rendered by : to be at liberty to do a thing, or to be 
 able. 
 
 Ex. — ©ie fiinncn nac^ |)aHfe ge^eni you ma^ (i. «., are at liberty to) go 
 home. 
 Dtefet iungc Mam lonn beutf^ f|>tec^en, this young man cam (i. e., 
 is able to) speak German. 
 
 § 53. — Si&ttuttt, at present, however, indicates chiefly 
 possibility by nature, the fact of being able to do some- 
 thing, and hence it is often aptly rendered by may. 
 
 Ex. — 2)er Wlm^ knn ge^en, ber aScgcI fann fliegen, man can (i. e., is able 
 to) walk, the bird can fly. 
 S)er SKonb knn itm1)M fetm fosicl ait wiffen, the moon may be in- 
 habited, for aught we know. 
 
 Note 1. — Siinnen, when meaning to he able, is sometimes replaced by 
 the phrase, tm Stonie fetrt. 
 
 Ex.— ©te fonnen mir nic^t (or ©ie (tnb ntii^t iitt Stontie mix }u) fii^aben, you 
 are not cAle to injure (or hurt) me. 
 
 Note 2.— The German idiom iii^ fann Itt^t um^tn, means, leannot hslp 
 or forbea/r. Sometimes in English the auxiliary requires the negative 
 form, and is followed by but. This is always the case when nur is used 
 in German after the auxiliary. 
 
 Ex. — 3c^ knn nic^t um^in S^nen ju gejle'^en, I can not help confessing (or I 
 can not but confess) to you. 
 (Et knn |i(i^ nur ttunbetn, he can not but wonder. 
 
 • See page 111, note. 
 
SYNTAX THE VEBB. 403 
 
 Eemark. — The English could, 
 
 a. When referring to a past time {was able), must be ren- 
 dered by the Imperfect Indicative. 
 
 Ex. — ^3c6 mar tei i^m, a6er \i) fonitte i^tt ni(|t fe^eni I was at his house, 
 but I cotiM not (was not able to) see him. 
 
 b. But when its meaning is conditional {would he able), it 
 is rendered by the Imperfect Subjunctive. 
 
 Ex. ©ie fonntCi wcnn fte iBotttei she cotdd (». «., she would be able) if 
 she would. 
 
 c. In oblique narration, however, it is rendered either by 
 the Present or Imperfect Subjunctive. (Compare § 72 and 73.) 
 
 Ex. — Sr fagte, ba^ et ti nic^t mai^eti tijiine (or fonnte), he said, that he 
 coiUd not do it. 
 
 Exception. 
 
 When a fact is stated the Indicative is generally used. 
 Ex.— 3c§ t» e i 6 , bag er ta nii^t t^un tann, I know he cannot do it. 
 
 § 54. — ^fttfen signifies possibility by law or per- 
 mission. 
 
 1. It is generally rendered by to he permitted or to dare. 
 In the latter signification it is now only seldom used. 
 
 Ex.— Sebetmann iavf in Stmcrita aBaffett ttagen, in America everybody is 
 permitted to carry arms. 
 SEBir biirfcn ni^t immer fiigen tt)a« wir benfeit, we d(we not always say 
 what we think. 
 
 2. In expressions of politeness, and especially used 
 interrogatively, it has the sense of the French oser, Eng- 
 lish may. 
 
 Ex. — Satf ii| ®ie 6iit«t( wit bie Seber ju icic^en? may I (fiseramje) ask 
 you, to reach me the pen ? 
 
 3. Negatively it is best rendered by must not. 
 
 Ex.— Eine $anb aorf nicfet Wiffen waa bie anbete (Sjui, one hand must Jiot 
 know what the other (one) is doing. 
 
404 
 
 SYNTAX — THE VBBB. 
 
 4, It also signifies to need (brauc^ett), particularly when 
 construed with the conj\inction nut, but, only^ 
 Ex. — Er barf nur Scfe^len, he need only command. 
 
 EEMAEK.^When feilcfett is used without being followed 
 by an infinitive, to complete the construction, an infinitive 
 must be supplied. 
 
 Ex.— ©t barf mir nii^t in ba« |)ttu« (fommen), he must not dare to come 
 into my house. 
 
 § 33. — 1. S9tdgett signifies possibility under conces- 
 sion from another, and is, 1. Generally rendered by may. 
 But it signifies also, 2. Chance; 3. Indinatwn (similar to 
 to like, gern l^aben or gern woUen) ; 4. Wish 
 
 Ex. 1. — tivi ittagfl ben SRcd Dertttufcn, you may sell the coat. 
 
 St mog etn e'^rli^er 3){ann feini he may be (t. «., I grant that he is) 
 an honest man. 
 
 Ex. 3. — £S miiltte regnen, it migM rain. 
 
 Ex. 3.— 3(i^ mag tein Sttr trinten,' I do not like to drink beer. 
 
 Ex. 4.— SKoge (or mBc^te) bet $immel jeSen, b(tg e« rni^x mfae, may heaven 
 grant, that it be true. 
 
 Note. — ^There are also some instances in which miigcn is tantamount 
 to being able ; e. g., Set mag bte Stetne am liimmel joi^Icn, who can count 
 the stars of heaven ? But most modem writers prefer Uerntogeni in 
 which the prefix bcr has the more strengthening power. HJermogcit 
 denotes physical capacity, the possession of sufficient physical strength 
 to do a thing. It is exactly lean, I am able. — ^Boileau. 
 
 2. Negatively m&^tn corresponds to not to lilce. 
 
 Ex. — Zd) ntttg nii$t tanjen, I do not like to dance. 
 SHiemanb moii^te e« efTen, no one liked to eat it. 
 
 ' Luke xvi. 3. Luther has : »®taien ittog iij ntc^t, mi) f^oim' i^ mt^ 
 ju icttcln," but the English version is : "I cannot dig, to beg I am 
 ashamed." 
 
SYNTAX THE VEBB. 405 
 
 Bemabk. — In the Subjunctive Imperfect of the verbs fdn* 
 ncn, feutfcn, and m&Qcn, there is very little difference of 
 signification. Either of the three verbs may be employed to 
 express a modest assertion. 
 
 Ex.— 3(i& fiinnte bas Oegentl^ell bc^auDtcn, I might assert the contrary. 
 3^ m'oiltc mii) geirtt 1)9.iin, it is not impossible that I ma^ have 
 
 been mistaken. 
 (£8 tm\U morgen ju fpcit fein, it migJU be too late to-morrow. 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON ^onnen, ©iirfcn, and SBBgen, 
 
 3Cir '§a6cji unferc Slufgatcn nicbt mac^en liinncn, bcnn fte toarcit ju 
 flower. 3(5 'Eonntc Me ganje 9la^t leiit 3luge jubructen. 2)o3 fatin 
 tBo^l fein ; 3^iemanc ijl Im ©tanbc, ctne gefi^e^ene S^at ungefi^e'^cn 
 JU ma&itti. !Die 3i»f<5«Mcr tonnten nii^t um|in, Bet ler Sluffii^rung 
 Siefes Sttjifpteta ju lai^en. ©icfe Sto^rli^t ifl \o untcal^rfiijeinlic^, 
 tap tt)ir ffe fceaweifcln miijfcn. ffienn meine SJiutter nii^t Iran! mare, 
 fo fbnnten wir jc^t mit euc§ ge^en. .Slbnnen <gie mir »iettei^t fos 
 gen, toiestel U^r c3 ift? i)ct ^ran!e iurfte nic^t fpredien. S)arf 
 J^eotor mit mi fptelen ? S^riflen biirfen il^re gelnte nic^t ^apn. 
 ^Jlein griiutein, ber 2Bagcn mt Bor ber Z^ixx, fie bitrfen nur einjtei* 
 gen. 3^r moget jc^t wo^I ntiibe fein, ^inber, barum ntbgct i^r nun 
 flu(^ JU Sette ge^cn, fonjl tnijc^tct i^r morgen frii^ ntd^t ju red^ter 3eit 
 miecer aufflc^^en tiinncn. ®3 mbd)te fein, ba§ i^ mi6^ geirrt ^iitte. 
 D, bap »ir bodfe immcr Bcbenlen mijc^tcn, bag iai itUn furj wa^rt ! 
 ffijlr modjtcn T>ai Sier ni^t trinfen, ireil es ju Mtter war. 2Cer mag 
 tBipn, wie oft er fc|It ? SBo Knnte biefer Srtef tuo^t :^ertommen ? 
 
 Theme 
 ON tonncn, S)iirfcit, and SOlogcn. 
 
 When shall we be able to speak Gferman ? What may not 
 all happen between to-day and to-morrow? Dogs can bark. 
 He might have said so. Austria was not able to beat Prus- 
 sia in 1866. I cannot but express to you my most heartfelt 
 
406 SYNTAX — THE VERB. 
 
 gratitude. If you had spent your time well you could now 
 have taken a walk with us. She told me that this work was 
 so hard that she could not do it. If my father were home, 
 you might ask him yourself. Tou are not allowed to pick 
 these flowers. May I read what you have written ? You 
 need not fear, there is no danger. You may come back in 
 an hour, then I shall be ready. Let us hurry, the shower 
 might overtake us. We may do as he pleases. Would (that) 
 our friends were here ! May you never live to see that. I 
 do not like apples, I prefer pears. I may possibly have been 
 mistaken. No one can answer this question. 
 
 § 56. — ffft^ffcn, lite the Latin oportet, the French U 
 faut, signifies (1.) Necessity by law or nature, and is nearly 
 akin to the English mtist. Its predominating power 
 being always obligation or necessity, it must be employed, 
 (2.) for such expressions as, / am obliged to, I am to, I 
 have need to, and the like. 
 
 Ex. — (1.) STKc SSJenfc^en ntiiffen ficrten, all men must die. 
 
 -(1.) STKc SSJenfc^en ntuffett ficrten, all men must die. 
 (3.) Sintier, i^r muffct eutcrt Elterit gc^ot^en, children, 
 (obliged) to obey your parents. 
 
 yon are 
 
 Ebmakk. — As with tntfen (§ 54) an infinitive is oftentimes 
 understood. 
 
 Ex.— 35u mupt fojlei^ jurfiif, thou must (go) back at once. 
 
 <SoUen. 
 
 § 57.— While mfiffen signifies necessity by law or 
 nature, and hence is irresistible, foUett signifies only that 
 kind of necessity imposed by the wiU of another person, who 
 is entitled to superiority, and who in case of need, can 
 enforce obedience to his commands 
 
SIMTAX THE VEBB. 407 
 
 Eemaek. — How best to render this auxiliary into English 
 must be determined by circumstances. AH that the learner 
 need observe is the primary idea which is shall or to he obliged 
 to, to which he must ever adhere. 
 
 Ex. — Ibu folljt ni(|t fle^Ieni thou sbalt not steal. 
 
 £)u folIR beinm 9{ac^flen lUkn tnie bic^ fel&|}, thou shalt love thy 
 
 neighbor as thyself. 
 3^ fallte feine Sc^ulben Beja^len, I was to pay his debts. 
 
 Note 1. — The Imperfect of foQett after tnenn expresses a chance or 
 an event which is rather uncertain. 
 
 Ex. — SSJenn nteitt gtcunb femmeit foUtCt if my friend should (or were to) 
 come. 
 
 Note 2. — The Imperfect Subjunctive iH) foUte (cigeittHi^' may be added 
 or not) is the English I ought to. 
 
 Ex. — 5i) folltc (eigentlid)) morgen nac^ 9>oKi)am reifen, I ought to go to 
 Potsdam to-morrow. 
 
 Note 8. — Oftentimes foUcit is used in the present tense in the sense 
 of is, are said, or reported. 
 
 Ex. — Unfcr fleet foU gefc^lagen worben fctnj our army is said (or reported) 
 to be beaten. 
 
 Note 4. — Sometimes fallen is used elliptically, an infinitive being 
 understood. 
 
 Ex. — fSiai foil bie8 Sarmett (i. e. l^etgen or bebeuten) ? what means this 
 noise? 
 ®t foil iJitt fetn, let him be quiet ! 
 
 Eemaek. — The English idiomatic use of "should" in sen- 
 tences like " it is impossible that he should have done it," 
 "it is proper that T should do it," " I wonder that he should 
 have said so," " I regret that this should be so," and similar 
 phrases, where "should" expresses possibility or a modest 
 doubt, can not be imitated, but is to be rendered either in 
 the Indicative or Subjunctive, as the case may require ; e. g., 
 ti ip unmijglic^, bag tr ca get^an |ot*, c3 ifl meinc 55fli(^t, baf \6^''i 
 t|ue (Subj.) 5 \&i tuunbere mi(^, bftg cr baa gefagt ^at ; ic§ tcbaucre, 
 bap bics fo tfl. — DouAi. 
 
408 
 
 SYNTAX THE VBBB. 
 
 fSSoUcn. 
 
 § 58. — SSoQen (French vouloir, Latin ve^) signifies, 
 
 1. Necessity enforced by the vnU of tlw subject. It implies 
 also, 2. Future purpose, like tm S3egriff feijt, auf tern 
 ^nnfti pe^en (to be on the point of). When used in the 
 latter signification it is generally followed by cbctt. 
 
 Ex. l.-S« mem tann mi er toiir, wenn et toill mi er tam, man can 
 do what he wills, if he is only wiUinff to do what he can.- 
 
 RUCKEBT. 
 
 Ex. 3.— 3i^ wollte ijm eBcn (i. e., iS) mx eJen tm Segriff, or t^ flanb eimauf 
 bent 3)unfte) ji«)fi^tei6en, I was (just) about (going) to write him. 
 
 Note 1.— Negatively used, tnoMen does not differ from moBen, except 
 that it is rather more expressive. 
 
 Ex.— SBenit iiJ| c« itid^t t^un mill (mag), tter famt mt^ jwtngcn ? If I do not 
 chose to do it, who can force me to it ? 
 
 Note 3. — Kindred to these significations are the English expressions, 
 he will have it, he asserts or affirms. 
 
 Ex.— er toiti bi^ gefe^en '^aien, he wiU have it that he has seen you. 
 
 Saffen. 
 
 § 59. — Saffen signifies, 1. Permission, as well as, 
 
 2. Command, or, 3. Oansation (p. 123, XII.), and an- 
 swers to the English to let, suffer, permit, 
 
 Ex. 1. — Cng mii^ gel^ett, let me go {"let me alone") ox permit me to go. 
 
 Ex. 3.— fioffen ®ie ben Smien auf mtc^ toarttn, tell (or bid) the boy to 
 wait for me. 
 
 Ex. 3.-3^ lofje aiir eiit itcuea $aa8 iauen,' I am hamng a new house 
 built 
 
 XOTE 1. — fiafleit is also sometimes used in the sense of the English to 
 
 ' In English the verbs to have, to get, or to cause, require the verb fol- 
 lowing them to be in past participle, as : I am getting my wood savm, 
 but in German the verb following loffen is in the infinitine, as : 3ii) IttfTe 
 mcin $otj fogen. 
 
SYNTAX — THE VERB. 409 
 
 leave, when the latter approaches the meaning of to let. It never de- 
 notes, however, to leame in the sense of to quit a place. 
 
 Ex.— 8a6 btt* ftin, leave (let) that alone t 
 
 Note 3. — Sttflen signifies also to look in the sense of to fit, to suit, to 
 become, to have a certain appearance. 
 
 Ex. — Sa liigt |t<^ Bortreffltc^, it looks exceedingly well. 
 ®oIb Ifi^t gut ju rot^i gold looks well upon red. 
 9JHn liigt ft^ b« ^«t erjl fii^iin ! Now the hat becomes you well !-i 
 
 Oellebt. 
 
 Note 3.— With the reflexive pronoun fti^r laffen signifies can be or 
 maybe. 
 
 Ex. — Sariiier liigt fti^ Siieiti fasexr of that much could (or might) be 
 said. 
 
 Note 4. — Saffeit is also used, as in English, to form a third person in 
 the Imperative. See § 78, Note. 
 
 Eemaek. — Care must be taken to avoid the ambiguity that 
 may occur in the use of laffen. For instance, i^ lic§ i|n 
 fc^Iagcit, may mean "I made him beat" (namely, somebody 
 else), and " I had him beaten" (himself) ; in the former case 
 f^Iagcit is actively employed ; in the latter, passively. The 
 ambiguity may easily be avoided by using, instead of Iflffcn, 
 the verb ettaukn, or kfe^tcn, as the case may demand. 
 
 § 60. — Instead of fdnnett and tnnffen, the infinitive 
 with jtt is sometimes employed, both in a passive and 
 active sense ; e. g., 
 
 S)ie« Jleiit noc^ su t^un, this remains to be done ; i^ f)ait tint Strteit 
 }U itlttd^cn, I have a work to do ; ba« menf(|Iid^e CeJen ijl ctit 3u|lanb, in ttcl- 
 i^m »icl JU ertragcn unb metlig ju geniepen ijl, human life is a state in which 
 much is to be endured, and little to be enjoyed ; btefe« Ungliitf ijl tioc^ ju 
 erttagen (fann etttagcn werben), this misfortune is to be endured ; i^ 5»ie 
 ®clb JU Dtrse^rcn, I have money to spend (I can spend money) ; btefer Srief 
 ifl ni^t JU Tcfen (tann ni^t gclefm werben), this letter is not to be read ; iai t(i 
 JU tabcln» this is to be blamed (bai Jann or mug getabelt werben). The pas- 
 sive construction of the above English sentences can not be imitated in 
 German, where the infinitive may be taken either passively or actively. 
 — DOUAI. 
 
410 SYNTAX THE VEEB. 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON THE AUXILIARY VERBS OP MODE. 
 
 SBcr nli^t ^ijrcn tDtlt, muf Wlcn. SBir woUtcn cincn SKonat In 
 farts iteiben, obex ia »ir Iciit ®e(t mc^r :^atten, fo mu^tcn »ir f^on 
 nad^ ciner SBoi^c wieler afirelfen. Hermann, iu mugt gleic^ mit mi. 
 ©ein aSatcr fagtc i^m, bog er ju ^oufe hlMtn follte. SBaa foU id) 
 Je^t anfangen? @te tsoHte :^eute SlbcnC jum crjlcn 9Ralc im S^coter 
 ottftreten. Du fotttefl ti bir jur Sdcgcl mac^eit fritter aufjuficlen. 
 ©cr beutfc^c Slflror.om ^tpltx foH in grower 2lrmut^ gcjtorkn fcin. 
 ffioju fott tein tidti SScincn ? Ss ijl fc:^r leii^t mijgli4 ba§ ii^ bo^ 
 gcfagt :^obe. Sa tBiirlie ft^ fiir ®ie aietncn, Sag ©ic beffcr »on 3:^rcin 
 greuntc fprac^cn. 3(^ unS mcin §auiJ, toir mUtn bem ^errit bicnen. 
 3cf) |abe i^m ni^t [agen woUcn, t»cr mix bieS crjii'^It f^at. gri^ reitt 
 in siina gcwcfcn (ein. SRein Sater liigt mii^ nic longer ali fe^8 
 ©tunbfn.fdjlofcn. !Do |abcn ©ic fti^ cine ju fc^merc £ofl oufbiirten 
 laffcn. Sog mic^ in Srtebcn ! S« logt nii^t f(^on, wenn ^inber wx» 
 tei^ig flnb. ©er Sorf^Iog lagt T"^ ^oren. 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON THE AtrXILIARY VERBS OP MODE. 
 
 Every effect must have a cause. When must you go (fort) 
 again? I was obliged to borrow two hundred dollars. When 
 did your father say, you should come home ? Where were 
 we to meet him? You ought not to have lost your book? 
 What ought I to have done under such circumstances? 
 Melanchthon is said to have been of a very gentle disposi- 
 tion. What does your quarreling signify? It is high time 
 that you should understand it. It was not my will to offend 
 you. They are about sailing. I do not want to see him 
 now. They left us in the dark as to their intentions. This 
 sentence can be translated in a different way. Allow me to 
 hold your umbrella, it is too heavy for you. The teacher 
 made his scholars work too much. As soon as I had my 
 tooth pulled, the pain ceased at once. 
 
SYNTAX THE VEBB. 411 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 Slit fe^g fS&axMn. 
 
 ©cc^8 ©ijrtlein nt^mm mlc^ in 3lttf))ru(^ jcben Jog : 
 3^ foK, ic^ mug, x&i tarn, t^ ioiH, tc^ borf, i^ mag. 
 3d^ fott t|l las ®efc0, »on @ott in'g ^erj gcfc^ricbcn, 
 ®aa 3iel, nac^ roeld^em id^ Bin son mir )elb(i gctriefcen. 
 3^ mug, fcas ijl lie S^ranl' in mld^tx mic^ lie 2BcIt 
 Son cittcr— , lie 9tatur son onb'rer ©cite ^dlt. 
 3d^ tann, la« ijt 6a3 Tla^ ler mir BcrlicVnen ^ra^ 
 2)cr S^at, ler Scrttgfeit, ler ^un|l unl SJijfenfc^aft. 
 3(i^ Witt, tic '^iJ^fle ^ron' t|i liefea, lie mic^ f^miidt, 
 SDas ifl ler grei^cit ©iegcl, lem Ocijle aufgelriidft. 
 3c^ barf, iai ifl jugleic^ lie Snfi^rift bci lem ©iegct; 
 Sel'm aufgct^oncn a;:§or ler grei^eit auc^ cin Stiegcl. 
 3(^ mag, lo« enllic^ t(l, roai jtotfcfecn 3ltten fcbwimmt, 
 Sin Un6c|iimmte8, bo« ler 3lugenWi(f ieflimmt. 
 3(^ fott, t(^ muf, i^ fann, td^ witt, ic^ barf, id^ mag, 
 ®ie ©eftfc nc^men mi(^ in Slnfpru^ jeben Sag. 
 Stur wcnn Su feI6fl mic^ le^rfl, weig id^, wai Jclen Sag 
 3d^ foU, ic^ mug, i^ fann, id^ ttitt, id^ barf, id^ mag. 
 
 The Tenses. (2'tc ScMcn.) 
 
 § 61, — ^The use of the tenses in German is so similai 
 to those in English that only a few hints are necessary. 
 
 § 62. — Present Tense : The present tense expresses, as 
 in English, what exists or is taking place at the time 
 being, but instead of three forms ; e. g., I love, I am lov- 
 ing, I do love, the German has only one, which consists 
 of the simple verb and the pronoun without any auxiliary. 
 
 Ex. — 3(^ ^i)xtii(, I write, I am writing, or I do writs. 
 
412 SXNTAX. — THE VERB. 
 
 Note 1. — The present historical is used, as in English, French and 
 Latin, in animated nari'ation. 
 
 Ex.— 3Ran rief mi*, i* lief l^iitauf ; 3* fc^e i^n au^geflteilt am Soben, they 
 called me, I ran up ; I see him stretched on the grouud. 
 
 Note 2. The present is also used in connection with the words (jSjon 
 
 or (cit of an action or state begun in the past and still continuing. 
 Ex. — ^3* IcBe (ett »ter Sa^rtn in ®reifattalb, I ham been (living) at Greifs- 
 wald for four years. 
 SEBie lange flnS ©ie f^on ^iet, how long have you been here ? 
 
 Note 3, — When continuance of an action is to he stated the adverbs 
 tbeit, gtrdbe or je^t (just now) are placed alter the verb. 
 Ex.— 3c^ friiPude e6eil, I am breakfasting. 
 
 Note 4. — The present tense is sometimes employed for a futwre near 
 at hand, and when its time is especially indicated by an adverbial ex- 
 pression, or when the certainty of a future event is expressed with 
 
 Ex. — 3i$ fomme in einet @tunbe Utelier, I shall come back (again) in an 
 hour. 
 3c^ reifc (alt) mxc^ ©cutfi^Ianb, I shall soon go to Germany. 
 SBJir ftegen obet flerten, we shall conquer or die. 
 
 § 63. — ^Imperfect TcnsCi The imperfect tense is the 
 narrating or historical tense as in English : it expresses 
 what existed or was taking place at some past time indi- 
 cated by the context, and like the present has for the 
 three English forms only one. 
 
 Ex.— 3<^ afi, «M et Iain, I ate, (was eating, or did eat) when he came. 
 SBolfe flel in ber ©*lad)t bet Quebed, ben 13. ©eptember 1759, Wolfe 
 fell in the battle of Quebec, September 13, 1759. 
 
 Note 1.— The imperfect tense is employed by the person who nar- 
 rates events of which he speaks as an eyewitness. 
 
 Ex.— ©cflern hiurtc ein 3Rann l^ier erWagen, nW i* aaf meincm SEBcge jur 
 ©($«le war, yesterday, a man was killed here as I was on my 
 way to school. 
 
 Eemabk. — The imperfect may be used even by those who 
 have not themselves witnessed the event, provided they in- 
 troduce or accompany their statement by such phrases, as : 
 fagtc fr {said he), fagt man (it is said, they say). 
 
SYNTAX. — THE VEEB. 413 
 
 Note 3. — The English likould and wovZd are in German best rendered 
 by the imperfect sitbjunctive. 
 
 Ex. — Would you go with me to Paris, if you had money i @tngcn ©ie 
 mit mix nai$ $ari$r menn ®ie ®elb ptten ? 
 
 Note 3. — In German the imperfect subjunctive is also frequently used 
 instead of the conditional, to express a present desire or wish, which in 
 English is more properly expressed by the present. 
 
 Ex.— 3(^ tniinftfttc, bap ic^ S^nert BeplM f"" Wnnte, I msh I could be of 
 service to you. 
 
 § 64. — Perfect Tense. The perfect tense expresses 
 in German an action or event perfectly ended at the time, 
 being without reference to any other time or event. As a 
 general rale this tense corresponds closely to the imperfect 
 in English. 
 
 Ex. — gr tft sorige SEBoc^e angefomntcn, he arrived last week. 
 
 3c6 ja6c S^tm ffirubct ^eute.nic^t gefe(jen, I have not seen (I did 
 not see) your brother to-day. 
 
 Note. — As in English, the perfect is sometimes used in place of the 
 second future. 
 
 Ex.— ©oSalb ic^ S^ten Stief cr^altcn joBe, wetbe i^ S^nett antwcrten, as 
 soon as I {shaM) have receieed your letter, I wlU answer you. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 In English, for an action of past time continuing at pres- 
 ent, the perfect is used, but in German the present tense is 
 employed. (§ 62, Note 2.). 
 
 Ex.— I heme knmm him these eight years, x^ lenne t^n feit ac^t Sa^ren. 
 
 § 65. — Pluperfect and Future Tenses. The pluperfect 
 and the second future tenses are employed as in English. 
 
 Ex. — ©otttlb ti( fetnen Srief aelefen Iftottt, macule vii nti^ auf bett SEBeg, as 
 soon as I had read his letter, I went on my way. 
 
414 SXNTAX. THE VEItB. 
 
 3$ tncrllC lommctli Wtnn i^ 3etl ^«*t» I shall come, if I have the 
 
 time. 
 SfBcnn ei iai $ferb mHjt gclauft ^afiert toixti if he shall not have 
 
 bought the horse. 
 
 Note 1. — The first future tense is also employed in German to indi- 
 cate probability, where in English the present is most frequently used. 
 
 Ex. — He is probably sick, Er toirll frant fcin. 
 
 Where facts speak, words a/vail but little, wo Me %^at ftiricljt, ia 
 inirB Hi SBoit nid^t »iri |c(fcn. 
 
 Note 8. — English expressions, which represent or mention a future 
 action as obligatory, or necessa/ry — like, / am to speak, he is to come — 
 cannot be rendered literally. They are either rendered hy the future, 
 or by employing foUeilf which is expressive of obligation or necessity. 
 
 Ex. — I am to be at Cassel this evening, id] toerbe ^eute Sltcnb in Eaifel 
 fein. 
 He is (obliged) to remain there at least four weeks, ec {oU IvetiiS' 
 jlenS Diet SDo^ert bort Heitien. 
 
 Note 3. — The English expressions, / was about, I was going, &e., 
 which indicate the last moments before an action is taking place, are, 
 in German, rendered by tooQen or the phrase, ira ffiegriff fein. 
 
 Ex.— /waafiroiniyto writealetter.'id^ WoUte i^m (eien) etncn Srief f^reiJen. 
 I was about to explain the matter, i^ toor int IScgtiff, tie ©«4« 
 ju ertlaren. 
 
 Note 4 — ^In subordinate sentences, the auxiliary is sometimes omitted 
 in the perfect and pluperfect, especially, however, in poeti^. 
 
 Ex.— SJiii^t bu, bet flets fic^ felicr trcu geMicien (i. e., if}), not thou, who 
 didst always remain faithful (true) to thyself, 
 ttnb c^' i^m nod^ ba« SBort entfaHen (i. «., i»at), and before the word 
 Jiad escaped (his lips). (Stiller.) 
 
 Exceptions, 
 
 1. For a future near at hand, especially when its time is 
 indicated by an adverbial expression, or when the certainty 
 of a future event is expressed with emphasis, the present 
 tense is used in German, (p. 412, Note 4.) 
 
 Ex. — I shcM be hack again in two weeks, in jtoei SCBo^en Bin ii) ttiebei 
 $ier. 
 
SINTAX. THE VEEB. 415 
 
 2. In place of the second future, the perfect is frequently 
 employed in German. (§ 64, Note.) 
 
 Ex. — As soon as I shall lume read your letter, I will commTinicate to 
 you my decision, foMIb ic^ beinen 33iief gelefett (a&c, nerbe ic^ 
 bit meinen Sntfc^Iug mitt^eilen. 
 
 The Conditionals. 
 
 § 66. — ^The First Conditional, as in French, denotes 
 that a thing would happen on certain conditions, and cor- 
 responds to the imperfect subjunctive in the apodosis in 
 Latin, the protasis being, in German, expressed by the 
 imperfect subjunctive, while in French and English the 
 indicative is used. 
 
 Ex. — 3c§ tniittic ge^en, wenn id^ bie 3eit pttc. I shovM go, if I Ttad the 
 time, or, I wovid go, if, etc. 
 
 § 67. — The Second Conditional, as in French, denotes 
 that a thing wovM have happened on certain conditions, 
 and corresponds to the pluperfect subjunctive in the apo- 
 dosis in Latin, the protasis being, in German, expressed 
 by the pluperfect subjunctive, while in French and Eng- 
 hsh the pluperfect indicative is used. 
 
 Ex.— St tuiirbe bit gefi(rte6en l^aten, tvenn bu ti berlangt ptteQ, he 
 toould have written you, if you had asked it, or, he wovid have 
 vyritten you, if, etc. 
 
 Note. — We present here a comparative view of the forms of condi- 
 tional sentences in the Greek, Latin, French, English and German. The 
 outline of this table is from Magill's French Grammar. 
 
 1. Certatntt. 
 
 EZ Ti ixio, Si6a/ii. "X 
 
 Si quid habeo, do. Lmtt. _li.. t • 
 
 mfai guelque chose, je le dmine. ^ I ^^'^ anything, I give It. 
 
 SEBenn {i$ (Stwad ^aie, gcBe \iiti. J 
 
416 SYNTAX — THE VEBB. 
 
 2. PbBBBNT iMPOSSrBILITT. 
 Et Ti clxov, ISiSovv av. \ 
 
 Si quid haberem, darem. ( If I had anything, I wovld 
 
 Sifwems guelque chose, je le donneraia. f gii>6 it. 
 
 SB(nn ic^ Stwae ^atte, tDiirbe t4 (^ getien. i 
 
 3. Past Impossibilitt. 
 
 EZ Ti eayov idaka av. \ -rrt-L j i^ j 
 
 c- -J 1. 1. • J J- \ Iflhadhadany- 
 
 Si quid habmssem, dediBsem. I ^,. ^ ui 
 
 „. , . ,1 • ,. ■ J ^ rtl""ff. I wowM 
 
 SEBenn i^ Stwa^ ge^ait ^titte, mitrbc i^ e« gcgtben |aBen. J ^tv i ■ 
 
 4. Uncebtaintt. (Puturb.) 
 
 Si quid habeam. dabo. I j^ j ^^^ anything, I will give it. 
 
 at, jai quelqiie cMise, je le Aonnerai. 
 SDmni^ Sttva^ ^ak, toitt ii^ ed gelien. ■ 
 
 5. PossrBiLiTY. 
 EZ Tj Ixot/ii, icdoltjv av. '\ 
 
 Si quid haberem, darem. f If I shotUd home anything, I 
 
 Sifcmaia quelque chose, je le donnerais. C wovld gi/oe it. 
 
 3Benn i^ Stwos ^oitte, tourUe ic^ H gcben. J 
 
 Remaek. — The imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive are 
 aJso frequently employed in expressing conditional proposi- 
 tions. Indeed, in point of time, there is no difiference be- 
 tween the imperfect subjunctive and the first conditional, 
 and between the pluperfect subjunctive and the second 
 conditional 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON THE USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 SBir leSen ni(^t urn ju cjfen, fonbern wtr cffm urn ju leBcn. Stauvx 
 ^atte f54 icr ?Rcict jcrfheut, aU wir auc^ fd^on ben getnfc Bor una in 
 ©^tacfstorinung aufgcflcflt fe|en. Sittc, tretcn ®ic na'^cr «nb nc^mcn 
 ©ie fla^j meln Sotcr ijl auagcgangcn, er !ommt a6er glclc^ wicSer. 
 
SYNTAX. THE VERB. 417 
 
 ©te linker fpieten fc^on feit cincr ©tunic im Oartcn. 35origc3 ^a^x 
 lattcn wtr eine reic^c Sntte. SEenn er ni^t fo faul ware, fo pntc er 
 auf. 3c^ ttolltc, t(^ Ibnntc mtt Ux gc^cn, Sr ifl »or ciner ©tunte 
 angefommen. 3(^ wer^c ticfes Jpflua faufen, fobalc ic^ ©elt genug 
 taju ^a|)c. Stapolcon I. ^atte toum wicter granfrctc^ fcetretcn, aU bcr 
 ^ricg son neuem au^brai^. 2Btr toiixim atte tranf feln, luenn tuir 
 nic^t sorfiAtiger tBiircn. ®er fi^reit Cenn ta ? 3Bir tcurbcn ntorgcn 
 frii^ aSgereift fein, wenn beln Srutcr gefommcn tDSre. I;er grit'^crr 
 jDoHte cben fein 55ferb 6c|ielgcn, ate t^n eine .Rugel ntcberjiretftc. ©cit 
 jte i^tm SJtann seriorcn, ifl it)t: gro^finn ia^tn. 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON THE USE OF TH's TENSES. 
 
 His courage is failing. He, who does not tnow how to 
 govern himself, is to be pitied. But he does confess to have 
 done it. My nose is bleeding. We shall return to America 
 next spring. Kome was built in the year 754 b.c. The 
 servant broke a glass when she was setting the table. If 
 you had been diligent, you would be able to speak German 
 now. I wish I had followed your advice. My vsdfe died a 
 week ago last Tuesday. As soon as he will have read his 
 newspaper, he will go with us. The sailors had just reefed 
 the sails, when the storm broke out. What do you think of 
 this man ? He is, no doubt, a swindler. These horses are 
 to be sold at auction. The news which I have received has 
 made me sad. When this young man shall have attained 
 (to) his sixteenth year, he will commence business. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 3)er §ivitntmit. 
 
 girt ^Bnig ^atte etnen ©(^a^mci|ler, kcr ftc^ »om ^irtcnjlobe ju 
 Mefcm wl^tigcn 2lmtc emporgcfc^wungcrt ^ottc. Tax ©c^a^mctjlcr 
 wurbe aiix Bel bent ^ijnige Bcrflagt, ba§ er bc« tiiniglid^en ©4fl^ 
 
418 SYNTAX THE TEBB. 
 
 krauk unb ble gerauBt'tt ^o|l6ar{citcn in etnem ©cwMk scrkrge, 
 iai mit ciner cifcrnen Z^ixx uerfc^cn fci. 
 
 Ser ^bnig Bcfudjte ten ©(^a^melfter, befa'^ feinen 95ala^ unti da n 
 an iie ctferne siiir fam, fcefa^l er, flc gu bffncn. Site ber ^Bnig f^im 
 eintrat, rear cr ganj erflaunt. Sr fa^ ut^W al« Me »ier wei^en 
 SBanbe, clncn tanctid^cn Stfc^ unb cincn ©trolfcffel. Sluf bem Sifd) 
 lag bie ^irttnflijtc, cin ^irtenjiab unb eine ipirtcntofdjc. S)aa waren 
 bie ©c^a^c, ml6)i bie eifemcn fftiegel unb ©c^Ibffer »crwa|rten. 
 
 2)er ^bnig f^amte fic^, S)er ©c^a^mcifler akr fprac^ j „3n mcis 
 ncr 3«genb l^iitcte iii bie ©c^afc. 2)tt, o ^Bnfg, jogji mic^ an beincn 
 Jpof. ^ter in biefcm @c»blbe brac^te ic^ feit ber S^it tSglid^ eine 
 ©tunbe jtt, crinnerte mid^ mit greuben meinea sorigcn ©tanbca, unb 
 ttieberl^oltc bie Sieber, bie ^ cremate jum Sobe beg ©d^bpferS fang, 
 ali i&i frleblii^ meine §cerbe liitete. 3l(^, lag mtc^ wiebcr juriidtfelren 
 in iene frieblid&en Scaler, wo x6^ gliicEIi^er war aU an beinem ^ofe !" 
 
 Ser ^bntg war fe^r erjtirnt iibcr bie SSerlaumber bicfea cblcn SKan* 
 nca, umarmte i:§n, unb bat i|n ki i|m ju bleiben. 
 
 Steie^finb.) 
 
 The Modes. (2)ic 9lu8fogeform.) 
 
 I. The Indicative Mode. 
 
 § 68. — The indicative is, in German as in English, 
 employed, (1.) in all absolute or independent sentences, 
 and expresses certainty. But even, (2.) in condituyrud 
 phrases it is used, provided the condition is assumed 
 as a fact, 
 
 Ex. — (1.) Er tttrb morgen ^i« anfcmmcn, he -will arrive here to-morrow. 
 (3.) Stfl bu relc^, fo giet »iet; H|l bu atm, fo gteB beta SDJenije* gem; 
 art thou (t. «., if thou art) rich, give much ; art thou poor, 
 give thy little part gladly. 
 
 NoTB.— The indicative is sometimes used as an emphatic imperative. 
 (See § 78, Ex. 2.) 
 
 Ex.— Sl^r f^lneigtf iia an mii bit IReiJe lommt, le sOent, untU your turn 
 comes. 
 
SYNTAX THE VEEB. 419 
 
 n. The Subjunctive Mode." 
 
 § 69. — The subjunctive is employed in German after 
 the conjunctions, (1.) S)ainit', that, in order that ; (2.) 
 ®omit' . . . ni^t, lest; (3.) ^enn, if; and, (4.) 311S 
 toenn or alS oh, as if. 
 
 Ex. — (1.) ©^teiien ©ie ti i^m, tiamtt et (t^ entf(§Ht5t, ■write (it toj him, 
 
 that {or in order that) he ttm^ decide. 
 (2.) Sile, bamit er nii^t p fpdt fomme> hasten, lest he (should) 
 
 come too late. 
 (3.) 9Senn er ntc^t fo ttoge tniire , if he were not so lazy. 
 (4.) St ficH mi aU ob et ®etb ^ottd he looks as if he Iiaei 
 
 money. 
 
 Note 1. — Of the above conjunctions, (3.) and (4.) are used only with 
 the imperfect or pluperfect. 
 
 Note 3.— The conjunction Incnit may be understood, and yet gov- 
 ern the verb in the subjunctive ; but, as in English, the verb is in such 
 instances placed at the beginning of the sentence. 
 
 Ex. — gittte ti$ ein ^aixi, fo wUtbe i^ nic^t foitjie^enf Tiad I a house, I 
 would not move away. 
 
 § 70. — After verbs expressing, (1.) Advice; (2.) Com- 
 mand; (3.) Consent; (4.) Desire; (5.) Doubt; (6.) Hope; 
 (7.) Joy; (8.) Eegret; (9.) Surprise; or (10.) Fear, the 
 infinitive is generally used in English ; but in German 
 the dependent or subordinate clause always begins with 
 ia^ (that), and requires the subjunctive. 
 
 Ex.— (1.) Si) ttttje, b a f et tm §aufc Blcilie> I advise him to stay in the 
 house. 
 (3.) 3# Befc^Ie, bag er fit^t, I order him to ^o. 
 (3.) Et erlouSt nic^t, bag wit «Itetn gc^en, he does not permit us 
 
 to go alone. 
 (4.) aSSiinfc^ell bu, bag l^ ben Srief Beonttoorte? do you wish me 
 
 to answer the letter? 
 (5.) 3tBeifIen ©ie, bag er e8 t^un foime, do you doubt that he is 
 « able to doit ^ 
 
 ' German grammarians call this mode " Conjunctive." 
 
^20 SYNTAX — THE VEBB. 
 
 (6.) @{e ^offt, ia^ ei S^nen geltngeit tott'Dti she hopes that you 
 
 will succeed. 
 (7.) S« freut mt(i§, bag er ti itUmmtn tocrbe, I am delighted to 
 
 hear that he will receive it. 
 (8.) <a t^t il)m leibr b a g i^r ni^t fommen f iinneti he was sony that 
 
 you cannot come. 
 (9.) di wunberte mi^, b a f er @te (e)a|ItCf I wondered that he 
 
 paid you. 
 (10.) 3c& fiitc^te, b a g er fcinen 4iut tietUerer I fear that he will lose 
 his hat. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 a. After the verbs 1>cfe^ltn (2.), to order or command, and 
 fagen (2.), to tell, used in the past tense, instead of the sub- 
 junctive, the auxiliary foUen is most frequently employed. 
 
 Ex.— 25er Se^rcr 6efa^I, bttg mtr ju ©aufe Meifien foDten, the teacher ordered 
 us to stay at home. 
 
 b. After the verbs fntti^ten (10.), to fear ; bitten (4.), to 
 beg, and sometimes also after tofinfc^etl (4), to wish, in- 
 stead of the subjunctive of the main verb, ntdgen is used 
 in the subjunctive (present and past tenses) wiUi the maia 
 verb in the infinitive. 
 
 Ex.— aSir fur^ten, bag er ti faufen m'iiitt, we feared that he might 
 buy it. 
 ®ie (at itti^, bag ii) ti V)t fagcn modltti she begged me to tell 
 it to her. 
 
 Note 1. — When fiiti^tcn stands in the present, the verb following 
 may be in the future subjunctive. 
 
 Ex. — SRan fiir^tet, et tOttit ttic^t ge^en, they fear he will not go. 
 
 Note 3. — The conjunctive tlafi may be omitted, when the preceding 
 verb has not a negative form. 
 
 Ex. — 2i^ munfc^te, fie tame Jeute ni^t, I wish she would not come to-day. 
 
 § 71. — Such verbs as glanben, to beKeve; meinen, 
 to mean ; jtoeifefn, to doubt ; fagen, to say ; l^offen^ to 
 hope, &c., when used with the present or future tense, es- 
 pecially in the interrogative form, require it to be, (1.) in 
 
SYSTAX THE VEEB. 421 
 
 the Indicative, when their object leaves no doubt with 
 the person making the interrogation, however doubtful 
 to others it may appear to be ; and, (2.) in the Subjunctive, 
 when the speaker is merely to repeat or quote a state- 
 ment without vouching for its accuracy {oratio indirecta.) 
 
 Ex.— (1.) (StauSji bu, bag cr antwcrten tnirJii dost thou think he will 
 answer ? 
 (3.) ®lau6|i bu, bap ct attttBortcn toetiie, dost thou think that he 
 ■will answer ? 
 
 Ebmabk. — ^The meaning of Ex. (1.) is : I (myself) believe (or 
 think) that he will answer ; do you think the same ?" 
 and of Ex. (2), " I have a doubt as to his answering, what 
 do you think ?" 
 
 § 72. — ^In oblique narration after the Verbs otttltfors 
 ttu, to answer ; ie^auptttt, to assert ; ftenf ett or glaus 
 hen, to think ; erflaven, to explain ; etjal^Ien, to relate ; 
 ftagen, to ask ; meinen, to think ; fagen, to say, &c., in 
 English the imperfect indicative is used ; but in German, 
 the present ' or imperfect subjunctive is employed, either 
 with or without the conjunction ia% 
 
 Ex.— ®r antwortete mir, b a p et nic^t beutfd^ ftireifie (or f t) r iS c^ e), he 
 answered me, that he did not speak German. 
 3^r Stubcr it^mmt, bie S»a($tlc6t fet (or to a r e) falfc^, your brother 
 asserted that the intelligence was incorrect. 
 
 Ezceptions. 
 
 1. The Indicative is employed in German, as in English, 
 when these verbs are used in direct questions and state- 
 ments. 
 
 Ex. — ^iSj frajc btc^ noc^ einmal, oJ bu baa ®elb Igafl, I ask you once more. 
 liast thou the money ? 
 
 2. The indicative is used in the subordinate clause of a 
 sentence with the verb wijfen, to know ; fc^cn, to see ; jcigen, 
 
 ' Compare similar usage of the Greek. 
 
422 
 
 SYNTAX — THE VEEB. 
 
 to show ; iiicrjeugt fein, to be convinced, &c., though followed 
 by ba^. 
 
 Ex.— 3cl) wcij, bag cr fein Oclb $ati I know that he Ium no money. 
 
 § 73. — In German, the present and imperfect tenses 
 of the sabjunctive mode are used indifferently. But 
 whenever the third person singular of the imperfect in- 
 dicative does not differ from the same person and tense 
 in the subjunctive,' the present is preferred for the sake 
 of distinction. 
 
 Ex.— 3c^ ftagte t^n, teen et fuc^e (or fuc^te), I asked him, for whom he icaa 
 lookuig. 
 
 § 74. — ^As in English, the conjunction ba^ (that) 
 may be omitted in German ; but the place- of the verb is 
 in such instances as in a priacipal sentence. 
 
 Ex. — ZH) pne, et fei (or wate) angefomaien, I heard he Jutd arrived. 
 
 § 75. — As in English, the conjunction tvenn (if) may 
 be omitted ; but the verb must begin the dameorsentenceia 
 such instances. 
 
 Ex. — SBiire ii) ein fiSnig, were I a king. 
 
 § 76. — Aa in English, the imperfect subjtmctive is fre- 
 quently employed instead of the conditional, (p. 416, Eem.) 
 
 Ex. — (Sa more la^erli^ (or ei ttfitbe Wi^eritc^ fein) baritter ju weinen, it 
 were (or would be) ridiculons to cry over it. 
 
 § 77. — The subjunctive is in German sometimes used 
 in place of the imperative to express a wish or command. 
 
 Ex. — Sang IcBe ber fiaifer ! long live the emperor ! 
 (£r lomnte nur, only let him come. 
 
 NoTB. — ^The English auxiliary, let, followed by the objective case of 
 
 '■ Nearly all regvZar verbs are alike in the third person singular im- 
 perfect of both modes. 
 
SYNTAX THE VEKB. 423 
 
 the personal pronoun, is rendered either by the third person of the 
 preient subjunctive, or by the auxiliary fallen • 
 
 Ex.— (Sr t^uc feint 3)flic^t, or et foil feine 9>flic^t t^un, let him do his 
 duty. 
 
 Ill, The Imperative Mode. 
 
 § TS. — The imperative mode is similar to the Eng- 
 lish. The pronoun, however, which in English is some- 
 times used after the verb in the singular, is omitted, 
 while in polite address the pronoun @ic is used after 
 the verb in the plural. 
 
 Ex.— ©et fltff ! be quiet I 
 
 SJe^men @ie T^ in St^t ! take care ! 
 
 Note. — When the first and third person, singular or plural, are to be 
 used, they are expressed either by the present subjunctive, or by peri- 
 phrasis with the auxiliary fallen. If used in an admonitory or horta- 
 tive sentence, laffen or toallcn are employed. 
 
 Ex. — Er fet fitll, or er fall flitt fein, let him be quiet, or he shall be 
 quiet 1 
 fio6 « i>ftS fetn, or tt lalfe baS feini let him leave it alone I 
 Safjen ®ie mS ge^en, or uttr moSen s^1)m, let us go ! 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. The subjunctive of the auxiliaries mdgen and tOoUett 
 
 is frequently employed in requests which are to be made in 
 a modest and polite manner. 
 
 Ex. — S)u toollcfl Hi) (mogell bu btc^) feiner fletS erinnem! pray, remember 
 him always, or may you always remember him ! 
 
 2. Instead of the imperative, the indicative is employed 
 to express a decided command. 
 
 Ex. — Su HeiJfl, thou shalt remain ! 
 
 3. In place of the imperative (by a peculiar ellipsis) the 
 past participle is sometimes employed. 
 
 Ex. — 9Jur nic^t lanje gejautietti do not hesitate long 1 
 
424 SYNTAX — THE YEEB. 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON THE INDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTnTE, AND IMPERATIVE. 
 2luf ben ©ommet folgt ber ^crbjl. ©u BIci6jl |ler ji^cn, Ui bu 
 bcinc aittfgabe gemac^t ^afl. fir Ilef cilcnbiS fort, bamit er ben 3ug 
 nidjt Berfe|Ic. SJiircn ble SWen|(^en oHc friebfcrtigcr, fo tujirben fte 
 gliidlii^cr feln. ^U ob i^ nlc^ts ju t|un mte, ali Jein ©cplappcr 
 an5u:^i3ren! ®a wSre fc|r ju t»unfc^cn,bag ti kib auflBrte au fd^ncien. 
 SBir lofften, cr toerbc feme Sel^auptung juriicEnclmen. ®te luunber* 
 ten fH^, ba^ biea friiljcr ®itte gewcfen fci. 9Jlctnc ©Item fiirc^tetcn 
 fc^on, toir |iittcn ben 2Dcg nii^t gefunben. 3^ erfuc^te i^n, bag er 
 mir mitt^eilen mBi^tc, roai er auf bem Jpcrjen liitte. 3d) glauttc cr 
 ware !ranf, nun aber fe'§e ii^, bay ii^ jitti^ getrrt 'i^ait. ©agten ®ie 
 ni^t, ©ie fatten metnen Srubcr gcfe^eit ? 3(^ ^ortc, cr |aie fcine 
 9Kuttcr uerlorcn. 2Btr frogtcn unfcre SItem, 06 wir mit ^^mn ge^^en 
 biirften, 2)cr Dicner befiiri^tctc, cr ttierbe Bcflraft toerbcn. £)iefe 
 Scute |tnb liBcrjettgt, bog wir unfcfeulbig finb. fatten wtr fetnen Sr* 
 nta'^nungen ®cpr gcfd^cntt, fo gtnge ti xmi {e^t Bejfer. di ware 
 ^zxvli6^, wcnn ft^ ba3 fo t5cr|ie(te. „8ang lebc ber ■Kbnig t H freue 
 ft^, wer ba flt^met im roftgcn Sic^t." ®tn 3et>er arBeite nac^ fctncn 
 ^rdften. <Btl aufmer!fam. @c6cn ®ie mir gefafiigjl jenen §ut. 
 SJlijgcfl btt nie »ergcffen, xoai cr fiir bii^ gct^an ^at. ©till gcjlanbcn ! 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON THE INDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, AND IMPERATIVE. 
 
 The Germans fought bravely. If you are tired, you may 
 go. Henry, come upstairs at once ! Send him oflf, lest he 
 (should) come too late. If I were rich, I should build a 
 church. He speaks as though he had seen it himself. Had 
 I known you to be in town, I should' have called on you. I 
 desire him to help me plant this cabbage. My neighbor hopes 
 that he will be able to see me this evening. I feared (lest) 
 he would die with (Bor) laughing. The king commanded 
 the gold(en) goblet to be brought. We wished that you 
 might come in time. Do you think he is old enough to un- 
 derstand what I say ? It is doubtful, whether this be so or 
 not. He said, he was not able to do that. I fear the ship 
 will be lost. We know that he is a cheat. She asked him 
 
SYNTAX — THE VERB. nSliSi 
 
 how often lie visited his patients. I learned you had given 
 up your enterprise. He would not act so mean, were he not 
 a scoundrel. Time and money would be thrown away in 
 this case. God bless this good man ! Let him give me his 
 word for it, and I wiU believe it. Do not grumble ! Let Ug 
 work while we are young. May you never repent of it ! Be 
 silent! Now, stop I 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 Sob unb St^Iaf. 
 
 Sriiberlic^-umfc^Iungcit, burcfewanbeltett tcr Sngcl iti ©c^Iummerg 
 unb ber 2:ote«engel tie Srbe, &i wax 3l6cnt). ®te lagcrten ficfc auf 
 ctncm §ugel, ni^t fern son ben So^nungen ber SKenfc^en. Sine 
 we^miitiige ©tide waltete rings um:^er; auc^ iai 2l6cnbglb(flein im 
 fernen Borflein uerflnmrnte. ©till unb fi^mcigenb, toie tS i^re SSeife 
 ifl, fafen bie ieiten tuo^lt^^atigen ©enien ber 5)Jenfd)^eit in traulic^er 
 Umarmung, unb fc^on na^ete bie ^a&jt. T;a er^ob [i6^ ber Sngct beS 
 ©d)(ummera »on feinem Bentoof ten Sager, unb (treute mit leifer ^anb 
 bie un|lc6t6aren ©c^Iummerfbmtein anS. !Die fanftcn 2l6enb»tnbe tru* 
 gen fte in bie fBo^nungen bea ntiiben Sanbmanne^. S^lun umftng ber 
 ©(^laf bie SBehJo^ner ber liinblic^en §iitten, ttom ©reife, ber am ©tote 
 ge|t, Hi 3tt bem ©Sugltng in ber SBBiege. tin Mvaritt Bergap feine 
 ©(^mersen, ber a;rouernbe fcinen Summer, ber DarBenbe fetnen SWan- 
 gel. Sitter 9Iugen fcblojlen ftc6. — 9iutt fe^tc jtc^ mi^ uottenbetem ©e* 
 fc^iift ber tro^lt^iitige Sngel bes ©c^lumnters wieber ju feinem ernftcn 
 Sruber ^in. „2Bcnn bie 5WorgenriJt^e ertuoc^t," fagte er mit frij^ltc^er 
 Unfc^ulb, „bann ))reifen mid^ bie SJJenfc^en ali i^ren greunb unb 2Bo|t=: 
 t^ter. D, es ift fu§, ungefe'^en unb '^eimlid) roo^Ijut^un ! 5Cie gliid* 
 lic^ jinb trir unji^tbaren Soten be« guten ©eijies ! 2Bie fdjBn ifl unfer 
 Seruf !" — ©o fpra(^ ber freunbli(^e Sngel be3 ©c^lummers. — S^n fo^ 
 ber jTobesenget mit (titter 2Be^mut| an, unb cine S^rane, tote bie Un? 
 fler6Ii(^en |ic weinen, trat in fcin gropes, bunttea 3lugc. „2l(J!," fprai^ 
 er, „ta^ ic^ nic^t, wie bu, bes frB|Iic^en Tianki mi6^ freuen tann ! ^Hic^ 
 nennt bie Srbe i^ren geinb unb gricbenSjlBrer !" — „D mein Sruber," 
 erwieberte ber Sngel in ©^lafeg, „h)irb nicfit avi&i kirn Srwac^en ber 
 ©ute in bir feinen greunb unb SBo^tt^atcr erfennen, unb banlBar bicfe 
 
426 STNTAX THE VERB. 
 
 I'egnctt ? iSinb »tr niAt Sriitier unb Soten etnes SoterS?— ®o fprft* 
 cr. ®a glanstc baa 3luge be3 a:obe«cngel3, unb sartttd^er untftngen ftc^ 
 bie iriiberllc^en ©cnien. 
 
 IV. The Infinitive Mode. 
 
 § 79. — ^The infinitive mode is in German frequently 
 employed as a noun." 
 
 Ex. — ^tS iReitenl 6tn tc^ miibe, I am weary of horseback riding. 
 Sum Semen ii\t bu m.ii)t seBotm, you are not born to learn. 
 
 Note. — The infinitive so used, often requires to be translated by the 
 present partidple in English. 
 
 Ex.— ®o8 JRcifen trmubet fe'^r, tramKng tires very much. 
 
 § 80. — ^The infinitive is used without the preposi- 
 tion ju : 
 
 a. After the auxiliary Tcrbs of mode mBgen, tiirfen, 
 fijnnen, rooUen, foUen, mflffcn, and laffen; and after ttets 
 ben when employed as an auxiliary to form the future 
 tense. 
 
 Ex. — 3c^ mug fofott nac^ SSonn rtifen, I must at once depart for Bonn. 
 
 h. After the following verbs : 
 
 ftnbcn, to find le^ren,' to teach 
 
 fii|tcn, to feel lerncn,' to learn 
 
 l^elfen, to help madden, to make 
 
 l^et^en, to hid \t\m, to see. 
 '^ixtn, to hear 
 
 Ex. — ®r ^ilft mir |)arfen> he helps me to pack. 
 
 3(i^ fa^ unfere 92a($kTin tiaTu6ergelien> I saw our neighbor (ess) 
 passing by. 
 
 ' See p. 80, 3, and p. 163. 
 
 ' Sel^ren and lernen, however, admit ju when the infinitive expresses 
 rather a purpose or design, and is not their object. 
 
SYNTAX THE -VERB. 427 
 
 c. After the following verbs in certain phrases : 
 
 tlei6en, to remain ma^cn,' to make 
 
 ffll^ren, to drive nennen, to name 
 
 gc^cn, to go or walk, reiteit, to ride 
 
 l^abtn, to have fein, to be 
 
 legen, to lay t^un,' to do 
 
 Ex. — SBir follm uni fi^Iafen (egettf we are to lay ourselves down to sleep. 
 £t 6Iie6 ft^en, oigleic^ t^ i^ti tief, he remained sitting, although 1 
 called him. 
 
 § 8 1 . — The infinitive is preceded by ju : 
 
 a When governed by a verb (except those mentioned 
 in § 80). In English the dependent verb is frequently in 
 the participle present. 
 
 Ex.— ©ie ^orten auf ju teben, ola tttr mi noi^erten* they ceased to speak 
 (or speaking), when we approached. 
 
 b. After nouns or adjectives which, in English, are 
 followed, "either by the preposition to with the infinitive, 
 or by (/ with a participle. 
 
 Ex.— §afl bu £u|t mit mtt ju ge^en ? hast thou a mind to go with me ? 
 SEBann wetben wtr iai Sergniigen ^aien, ©ie wiebet iei «ni5 ju fe^en? 
 when shall we have the pleasure of seeing you again at 
 our house 1 
 
 c. After the prepositions flatt or anftatt and o1}nt, 
 
 Ex.— StnPatt mi fofott bason ju 6ena^ri^tigen, instead of notifying us of 
 it at once, 
 ©r »erite6 mtd^, o^ite nur ctn SEBott }U fagen, he left me without even 
 saying one word. 
 
 > 3Bad^cn, however, cannot, as in English, be used to signify to make 
 or cause iy force : thus the English phrase, make hi/m go out, is trans- 
 lated, Io6 (not mac^E) i^n l^inauage^cn. — Woodbury. 
 
 2 The infinitive without ju is used after tjuit only when xilSttS a\8 
 precedes ; e. g., Sr Jl^Ht tAi)ti «\i fc^eltcn, he does nothing but scold.— 
 
 WOODBUBT. 
 
428 STNTAX — THE VEKB. 
 
 Note 1.— After nouns or verbs expressing a design or purpose, )U is 
 generally preceded by um (likej)0!win French) to render the expression 
 more forcible. 
 
 Ex. — W\i Diet Oelb btau^t man benn, um rei^ jU fein ? how much money 
 is needed to be rich ? 
 3c^ biau^e ein S3uc^, um meine Settton ju tenteit, I need a book in 
 order to learn my lesson. 
 
 Note 2. — Um is also used after adjectives preceded by ju (too), or fol- 
 lowed by gcnug. 
 
 Ex.— Sr t(i JU tlein, um biefe« 3>«ifct ju ttagcn, he is too small (in order) 
 to cany this package. 
 Da« flinb ifl nic^t alt genug, um in bte ©c^ule gefc^tcEt ju werben, the 
 child is not old enough,^ order) to be sent to school. 
 
 § 88. — ^In English, the infinitive preceded by to, ia 
 frequently used in peculiar compound verbal construc- 
 tions after verbs expressing desire, opinion, option, &c., 
 where, in German, the indicative or sufyuruMve preceded 
 by &a# is employed. 
 
 • Ex.— ©ie wugten, bag fte eme sorttefWe gtau tour (or tffif they knew 
 her to he an excellent woman 
 
 § 83. — When, in English, an infinitive preceded by 
 which, when, where or hx)w follows after such verbs as feffi, 
 teach, know, say, &c., one of the auxiliary verbs of mode, 
 foUen, ittfiffeti or tdnnen, either in the indicative or 
 subjimctive, is used in German. 
 
 Ex. — Ce'^te '\^n, »te et ti t^un mu^ (or raiilfe), teach him how to do it. 
 Sagen @ie i^nti tva$ n i^r fagen fottf tell him what to say to her. 
 
 § 84. — In English, after the verb to he, when express- 
 ing a necessity of action or a stated fact, the verb fol- 
 lowing is required to be in the infinitive of the passive 
 voice, but in German the verb following feiti must be in 
 the active voice. 
 
 Ex.— Seirt Sob ifl fe^r ju BcKngen/ his death is very much to be 
 lamented. 
 
SYNTAX THE VEKB. 429 
 
 Note. — The infinitive of the active voice is also, instead of the Eng- 
 flsh passive, employed in German : 
 
 1. Saffcn, when it signifies to order or to cause. 
 
 Ex.— Semanben rufen laffen, — ^olen lafTen, — ftagen lafleit, — cinlaben Ittjfcn, 
 to order or cause somebody to be called, to be brought, asked, 
 invited, &c. 
 
 3. Also especially with the reflexive pronoun : 
 
 Ex.— ©i(^ bc^anbeln, — iele^rett, — Setritgen, — einfi^iiii^tttn laffcn, &c., to 
 suffer to be treated, — taught, — cheated, — ^frightened, &a 
 
 3. Also in the idiomatic phrase : tm Ia§t fti^^ ntc^t t^un, that cannot 
 be done. 
 
 § 83. — ^The verbs iiitfen, fdunen, viid%tvi, tnfiffen^ 
 fpUen, tvoUen, laffen, l^dten, and fel[>en, when pre- 
 ceded by another verb in the infinitive, require in their 
 perfect and pluperfect tenses the infinitive instead of the 
 past participle. (See p. Ill, VI.) 
 
 Ex.— 3c^ ptte i^tt gevn prCtt tttdgcn, I would like to have heard him. 
 
 Reading Exercise on the Infinitive Mode. 
 
 tai Slf^mcn wtrb bcm gngbriifltgen fd^wer. 3(uf Sa^cn folgt 
 SCeinen. .Kciner fanit fi(^ sor kcm Slugc bcS Slttgegcnttarttgcn »er* 
 bergcn. 5Cenn ©ie mix ^ctfcn n5oflen,titefen ^notcn ju IBfcn, fo tscrte 
 id) 3^ncn fe^'' serBunten fctn. 3lls bie SJiuttcr i^r .^tnb fc^rcicn 
 :^ortc, m&jit lie auf. Unfcre 9Rarle tDtrb 6el bicfem SKanne ^iano 
 fpiclen lernen. S55tr lernten fiifcon frii^, uttS mit Jfficntgem begniigeti. 
 SBotlen @ic bet una wo^nen Hetben ? §einric^ ifl fpajtcren gefa|ren. 
 3c^ |abc i^n oft in SBicn fpieten ^^Breti. Sr t^ut ten ganjen Sag 
 rd&jii oXi lefcn. Sd) ^aBe groge ^offnung, meine §elmat() wielerjus 
 fe^eit. Slnfiott objuroarten, bis id) fcrtig war, unt o^ne cin 2Bort ju 
 crwieicrn, »erlie§ cr mi*. SBir lebcn nic^t urn ju cffcn, fonnern wir 
 cffen, urn ju leben. Du bifi je^t ju olt, mein ©ol^n, fiir foldje ^inbes 
 rcicn. fir fottte urn ^16 jwci U^r fertig fein. Slber i(l tas mir cine 
 
430 SYNTAX THE VERB. 
 
 2lr6cit. 3(^ fagtc i^r teai fie f^un fofle, «m blefe ®))rac^e rii^ttg ju 
 lernen. SBoIlcn ®ic mir jeigcn, wai ic^ jc^t ftrWen mw§ ? 5Bir 
 wiffen nt(^t, wit »ir taa atdtxi augtriicEcn fbnnten. 3Qai ijl ic^t ju 
 tl)un ? Sr iji fc|r ju tabeln. 28ir ^abtn atte unfere ScrwanBte etn« 
 laten laffcn. ®r :|at (ic^ nic^t iikweten laffen. SBir pttm wn« Jaa 
 tDoll kcnien IBnncn. 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON THE INFINITIVE MODE. 
 
 I prefer reading to writing. How many languages has this 
 man learned ? To whom did you bid him go ? When did 
 you hear Henrietta Sonntag sing ? He taught me to write 
 and to read Italian. Make him stop. You must not ask me 
 such a foolish question. I often heard him mention your 
 name. She does nothing else but cry. I have the pleasure 
 of introducing to you Professor Wrage. I cannot judge of 
 this case, without having heard all the particulars. Instead 
 of confessing his guilt, he persistently denied it. He made 
 use of aU means in order to carry out his purpose. This 
 work is difficult enough (in order) to make anybody tired. 
 Cicero knew his life to be in danger. I supposed this mat- 
 ter to be settled long ago. He did not know where to find 
 his books. It is very much to be hoped that you will act 
 more prudently hereafter. What is to be done ? The judge 
 has caused this paper to be copied. I should not have suf. 
 fered myself to be treated so shamefully. This poor emi- 
 grant has suffered himself to be cheated by his country- 
 men. You ought to have seen this beautiful spectacle! 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 2)cr fpilgcr. 
 
 3n cincm prac^ttgen ©(^Io|fc, eon bent fc^on longfl {etc <Spnx »er? 
 [(^wunbcn i^, lebtc cinji etn fe|r relc^cr SRitter. gr »emanWc fe^r 
 stel ©clb, urn fcin ©i^top 3U »erfc^i)nerit, ahx er t^^at wenig fiir-tic 
 Slrmett. 
 
SrNTAX THE VERB. 431 
 
 Dfl font nun einmal cln ormer ^ilgn in iai ©c^log, in urn cine 
 91flc^t|er6ergc iat. Tux Slitter tcie^ i^n tro^ig ah uno fprai^ : „"Die=: 
 feiS ©d^Iop ifi fein @ajil)au3," „grlau6t mir nur brei gragen," fogte 
 ter 9)tlger, „fo toitl ic^ wetter ge^en." uTiai gebc i^ 3U," serfejte ler 
 SRttter. 
 
 „2Der bcwo^nte tjor Sudfe bicfeg ©i^lop ?" fragte tcr 55tlgcr. „9Jlein 
 Sater." „2Ber war »or i^m Ser Sewo^ner biefeg ©c^loflcg?" „5Wctn 
 ®rog»ater." „Unt i»er teiv'i nac^ Su(^ Jorin iDo^nen ?" „©o ®ott 
 mid, metn ©oin." 
 
 n'^rin," fprai^ icr ^^ilger, „n)enn Seter nur cine gewijjc 3eit in kie* 
 fern ©c^loffe wolnt, unD raenn immer Sincr bent Slnbern Sarin ^la^ 
 mac^t, fo feib 3|r nur ©itjlc :§icr unb bag ©c^Io^ ift wirfltd^ cin (3ap 
 ^anS. Serwenbet ba^er nic^t fo »iel, urn biefcs JpauS fo fe^r ju sers 
 f(^6ncm, welc^cg ®uc^ nur fitr fo htrje ^dt be|cr6ergt. S^ut licbcr 
 ben 3lrmen ®utc8, fo toerbet 3|r im ^immel einc cwige 2Bo|nung 
 eriangen." Der Sflitter na'^m bicfe SSorte ju Jperjen, ge»a:|rte bem 
 9)ilger feinc SSitte, unb tuurbe fitr bie golge wo^It^Stigcr gegen bie 
 Slrrnen. 
 
 ®ic ^ertlic^feit bet SSJelt ucrgcjt, 
 
 9J«i mi wir ®utea t:^un, deflect.— £?. © ^ I it b 1 1 r. 
 
 V. The Participles. 
 
 § 86. — The participle partakes of the nature of the 
 noun, verb, and adjective, just as the infinitive partakes 
 of the nature of both the verb and the noun. Used 
 (1.) as an adjective, the participle agrees in gender, 
 number, and case with the noun; and (2.) may also gov- 
 ern the same case as the verb from which it is derived. 
 
 Ex.— ^.) 2»te briidcntie l>ite nlmmt mtc^ mit, the incessant heat af- 
 fects me. 
 (S.) I)te affc8 Belejientie ©onne, the aXl-animatinff sun (i. «., tha 
 
 sun that animates all.) — ^Woodbtjbt. 
 25icfe ©efc^ii^te ifi tsal^r^aft crmiilicn)), this story is tiulj fatiguing. 
 
4:32 SYNTAX THE VEBB. 
 
 Note. — ^Notice (1.) tliat the word, governed by a verhai adjective is 
 placed immediately before the verbal adjective. In some instances (2.) 
 the words unite and form compounds ; as, e|tlieienbi gcfe^gelieiit)> &c. 
 
 Ex. — (1.) 2)ie unS serfolgtiibcn SRauier, the its pursuing robbers, i. e., the 
 robbers that pursue us. 
 (3.) Tiit bie ® jre Ueienben Surger, or tie e^tltclicntien Siitger, the 
 the honor-loving citizens, i. e., the citizens who love honor. 
 
 «. The Present Participle. 
 
 § 87. — ^The present participle is used 
 
 1. As an attributive adjective. 
 
 Ex. — Sin jlttrEenbcS Sab, a strengthening bath. 
 Eine liebcnbt ®attin, a loving wife. 
 
 ®ie kle^renbjit Sucker, the instructing books (t. e., books that are 
 instructive). 
 
 Eemabk. — ^Present participles can be used only in the attri- 
 butive connection ; but a number of them which, from long 
 usage, have assumed entirely the nature and meaning ©f 
 adjectives, may also be used as predicatives. The following 
 are of the latter description : 
 
 oBjlo^enb, repulsive bcbeutenb, important 
 aBwecfcfelnti, changing, varied kte^rcnb, instructive 
 
 abroetii^enl), different BelelKigcnt, offensive 
 
 abtocfent, absent 5ctru6ctib, afflicting 
 
 antucfenb, present tesauBernb, enchanting 
 
 an^altenb, assiduous kringcnb, pressing, urgent 
 
 onmagcnt), arrogant trudtcnb, oppressive 
 anfprec^enb, onjic^cnb, attractive bur^brtngcnb, piercing 
 
 anflerfenb, contagious . clnnc^mcnb, captivating 
 
 auffa^rcnb, irritable cm)>orcnb, revolting 
 
 auffottcnb, striking entfd^etlcnb, decisive 
 
 awabauernb, persevering cntfprec^cnb, adapted 
 
 ousfc^wcifenb, extravagant cntluiirbigcnb, degrading 
 
SINTAX THE VERB. 
 
 433 
 
 entjucfcnb, ravishing 
 
 ermtoenb, fatiguing 
 
 fcffcint, interesting 
 
 flief en5, fluent 
 
 geM^rent, gejiemenb, proper, 
 becoming 
 
 gctiiigent, sufficient 
 
 gldnjent, brilliant 
 
 l^inreigcnb, ravishing, over- 
 powering 
 
 Irdntcnt, mortifying 
 
 laknb, refreshing 
 
 ladjenti, smiling 
 
 locfenb, enticing 
 
 rafent, frantic 
 
 reljcttb, charming 
 
 f(^re(!ent, (in compounds) 
 
 fiime6cm), suspended, contin- 
 uing 
 
 fpannenb, fascinating 
 pBrcnb, troubling 
 libercinjiimment, harmonious 
 iikrfii^rent, convicting 
 ufcerjeugcitt), convincing 
 uSerrafdjcnli, surprising 
 tttcrwattigent, overpowering 
 iikrwicgent, preponderant 
 umfaffent, comprehensive 
 untcr^alteim, entertaining 
 Mnternelmcnl, enterprising 
 untBi|Ten5, ignorant 
 ser^cerenti, desolating 
 »erte^ent), offensive 
 Scrmogcnb, wealthy 
 Bielfagcnt), expressive 
 Bor^crrfc^ertti, predominant 
 Wiit^cnt), furious 
 
 Also some others, chiefly those preceded by Utt, as, untebeu* 
 tettb, those compounded with tbncnt), lltngent, lautcnb, as too^Ia 
 (iikis) tBneitb, ^ctt^Hingertb, tBoPautenb, and with prepositions, 
 as aifc^reiieiit, deterring. 
 
 2. When in connection with another verb, as an abridged 
 (or adverbial) form of a subordinate sentence, in order to 
 express manner, state, time or occasion. 
 
 Ex— 3ittcrnt) »or iebem ©c^ottcn, Uitt in Wiibtx in mi^n 9ttig|l, trem- 
 bling before every shadow, the murderer lived in constant 
 fear. 
 50ttc^ noil einmal fitfTcnb, fu'^t et basoni kissing me once more, he 
 drove away. 
 
 Note. — ^Verbs thus employed are generally netjtbk ; but the poets 
 occasionally use also active verbs in the present participle, with its gov- 
 ernment before or after it. — Otto. 
 
 Ex. — 9)«tro£Iua, bem Itcieit greunbe gc^or^Ctl)), Patrocles, obeying his 
 dear friend. 
 
434 SYNTAX THE VEEB. 
 
 Ex.— SJtt nmguttenb mit bem lieltenf^wert, girding Mm with the hero's 
 sword. 
 3Rtt t)en ^anben ftl^totngenb bie ®t>eete> brandisMng the spears in 
 his hands. 
 
 The Present Participle used as a Noun. 
 
 § 88. — The present participle, like the adjectiye, may 
 also be used substantively, by placing the article before 
 it: the noun, completing the sense of the adjective, being 
 understood. (See § 24, 10.) 
 
 Ex.— ®er iHeifenbe eme« gtogen SBerliittr 4iaufc8 t|i :^ier »er^aftet motbcn, the 
 [one or person] traveling for a great (large) Berlin house has 
 been arrested here. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. The present participle in German, cannot, as in Eng- 
 hsh, become an abstract verbal noUD; by placing the article 
 before it. Such English participial nouns are rendered in 
 German by present infinitives. (See § 79.) 
 
 Ex. — 1> a a gcfcn satn Suc^et t|l empfe^lenatBert^, the reading of good 
 books is to be recommended. 
 
 2. In Enghsh, a relative pronoun before the present parti- 
 ciple may be omitted ; but in German it must be expressed 
 and connected with its verb in the corresponding tense. 
 
 Ex. — He was a man {who was) incessantly doing good, ®t t»ai ein SRattlt 
 ier (or mXi^vc) unauf^Srlic^ ®utc« t:^at. 
 
 3. When, in Enghsh, the present participle depends upon 
 another verb or a noun, or is immediately preceded by the 
 preposition of, it is rendered into German by the infinitive 
 immediately preceded by JU. 
 
 Ex.— He began gpeaUng just as we arrived, er Png an jtt [)> 1 1 c^ c n » gc" 
 tabe «18 wir ttntamen. 
 The art of printing was invented by » German, bic ^un|l ju 
 brutfen (or bic Su(|btu(ferfunfi) wurbe son ctnem Deutfc^en erfiinbctt. 
 
SYNTAX THE VEEB. 435 
 
 4. When, in English, the present participle is immediately 
 preceded by the prepositions on, upon, imth, without, instead 
 of, it can be rendered in German, either (1.) by the verb in 
 the indicative mode followed by a corresponding' cori/Mnciion," 
 or better (2.) by the infinitive immediately preceded by J». 
 
 Ex.— (1.) Er reiflc <ii, oftnc bog er mt§ bwon ienai^rii^ttBte, He departed 
 witTkout infonning me of it. 
 (2.) (Er teipc o6, o^ne mid} bason ju b e na (I tiOtttn, 
 
 Note 1. — However, when the present participle is preceded by a 
 poaaessim pronovn, with or without a, preposition, use (1.) the verb "in 
 the indicative mode followed by a conjunction; or (3.) the infinitive 
 alone. 
 
 Ex.— (1.) gr retfle aB, Olgne lioft ic^ e« wugte, he departed without my 
 knowing it. 
 Semertten Ste, toie er mic^ aitfa^, did you notice how he looked 
 at me? 
 
 (2.) Sr Der^etrat^ete fi^ o^ne aBifftn fetne« SJaterS, he married with- 
 out his father's hnowing it. 
 
 Note 2. — ^Notice that a noun in the genitive joined to a possessive 
 pronoun, if rendered by the indicative and conjunction, is in German, 
 as the subject of the second clause, required to be in the IVonii- 
 native. 
 
 Ex.— Unfere Sloc^ter flarS, u'^ne ba§ metn SDJonn fie fn^, our daughter died 
 without my huaband'a seeing her. 
 
 Note 3. — When the present participle is preceded by any other prep- 
 osition than those mentioned above, they must be rendered by the cor- 
 reaponding conjunction^ followed by the indicative. 
 
 Ex.— Mttgertem }iag er fein Sermiigeit serlcren Jot, besides his having 
 lost his property. 
 
 5. When in Enghsh the present participle is used abso- 
 lutely, i. e., without a preposition, and denotes cause, reason, 
 or time, it is in German, as in French and Latin, replaced 
 by a corresponding conjunction with the verb in the indi- 
 
 ' J)a§ corresponds to of, on, at, and upon ; ojnc boS- to without; e^t 
 or itbatt to before ; ftoBCfletl, JDag, to against, &c. 
 
436 SYNTAX — THE VEBB. 
 
 cative. The corresponding conjunctions for the participle 
 denoting (1.) cause or reason, are: ba (as or since); WCil 
 (because) ; iubtm (as, since) ; those (2.) for time : alS (when) ; 
 na^itm (after); and indent (while). 
 
 Ex.— (1.) J)a wit i^m serefit fein WoUen, fo werbett toir ^iet *Ut6en, (?«mr- 
 Mi^ to do him justice, we shall remain. 
 (3.) 3lo4hem' ic^ lanjet «W eine Stunbe gemartct ^ntte, aific i* a6, 
 hamng waited more than an hour, I departed. 
 
 Reading Exercise 
 
 ON THE PRESENT PAETICIPLE. 
 
 "Dicfe rcijcnbeti tinier gc|6ren unftrnt ^Roi^kr, bent ©c^uHel^rcr. 
 Sic SSnter uit5 ©tdcte ttcrmiijientic ®eu(^c, S^olera gcnannt, lam ou« 
 Slflcrt. 3Bir miijfcn unferit SSorgefe^tcn gcbii'^rcntc Slc^tung cr* 
 wet fen (pay regard to). Diefcr SJlenfc^ ijl no(^ »eit anma^eitfecr. 
 Subroig XIV. war ein iiu^crjt ))ra^tlicbcnber ^Jlonarc^. "Die ^iite 
 f^wcnfcnt (swinging) jogen tie ©oltaten jum S^ore '^inattS. Sin 
 ©c^Iafcnter weif nt(^t, wm wm i|n ^er »orgc6t. Daa kute ©precben 
 fdUt tern (gc^wtrtbfiidfettgeti firmer, gin SKann, ber nic » o m 95 f a b e 
 ber ^ftii^t abweic^t (swerve or deviate), tfl fc^wer ju ftntcn. 
 28erbe tc^ saS Scrgniigen ^aben, @ie |eute 3lbenb bci mtr ju fe^cn ? 
 Sr gitig tn^ 3;|coter, jlatt feine beutf^e Seltion ju lenten. "LOii ^inb 
 ftel »om ©tu^te, o'^ne ba^ id) im <Stanbe war ti ju »cr|tnbcrn. £ied 
 ijl tttit SBijfcn unb SBilten nteiner SItcrn gefC^e^cn (happened), 
 ©tatt '00.^ fein Srubcr meincm Sftat^e folgte, t|at er gerobc bas ®cgen* 
 t^eit. ^Rac^Dem Tulr eine ©tunbe lang auf i^n gcwartet fatten, fant 
 er enblid^. 38cil ber Sdoct noc^ n\6)i bejap ijl, fo wotlte i^n ber ©djneis 
 ber nii^t :^ler lajfen. 9lac^bem bag ©i^iff cincn Sed beloranten 
 (to spring a leak) |attc, fc^eiterte ti. 
 
 Theme 
 
 ON THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Pressing business has prevented me from attending this 
 meeting. This is a spectacle (which is) revolting to every 
 
 ' The subordinative conjunction, na^tiemi generally requires the Plv^ 
 perfect of the Indicative. 
 
SYNTAX — THE VEEB. 437 
 
 honest man. The heat we had during the last summer was 
 very oppressive. I hope you will never commit an act 
 (which would degrade) degrading you. I saw his face beam- 
 ing with joy. Praying for his enemies, Stephen died the 
 death of a martyr. The living must not speak ill of the 
 dead. Smoking is a very bad habit. A child ever obeying 
 the commands of his parents is loved by all good men. I 
 remember having seen this lady at Mrs. B's dinner party. 
 They went bathing instead of writing their theme. They 
 ran at full speed, without once looking around. You may 
 take this money without troubUng yourself. I did not do 
 this on purpose. I should not Uke to undertake this with- . 
 out my father's permitting it. After having slept seven 
 hours I awoke quite refreshed. Supposing him to be ex- 
 hausted I offered him a chair. After having been invited 
 three times we could decline her invitation no longer. The 
 tribes wandering in the interior of Africa are not all known 
 yet. Water is one of the greatest moving powers which man 
 can apply (anwcnten). 
 
 ft. The Past Participle. 
 
 § 89. — The past participle serves not only in the for- 
 mation of the compound tenses (1.) (see p. 162, Obs. 
 rV.), but, like the present participle, is also frequently 
 used as an adjective both attributively, and predicat- 
 ively (2.). 
 
 Ex.— (1.) Wltitt SBata '^at biefm Sricf er|l ^eute gefi^rieBeit, my father 
 has written this letter only to-day. 
 
 (3.) SWeine geltette Eouflne 5lnna ifl fe^t hanf, my dear cousin Anna 
 is very sick. 
 ©einDnfel ijl fe^r gelel^ttf his uncle is very foasraed " 
 
 Note. — Some of the German past participles have almost lost the na 
 
438 
 
 SYNTAX THE VERB. 
 
 ture of a verb, and are now exclusively used as adjectives. They also 
 admit the negative prefix un. Such are : 
 
 tctannt, known gelungen, successful 
 
 bemittelt, wealthy ■^ Sefi^idt, clever, skillful 
 bcrctt, eloquent gcjc^woren, sworn 
 
 bcrii'^mt, renowned gctoo^^itt, accustomed 
 
 Seforgt, concerned ttcrfd^wlegen, silent 
 
 ktriiW, sad &c., &c. 
 
 § 90- — ^Verbs of motion employed with the verb font: 
 men require to be in the past participle instead of the 
 present. 
 
 Ex.— £t fomitit ocloufeiti iti<^nm' 8efP™n8t«' smtttn, gefa^ren, u. f. w. 
 he comes running, walking, jumping, riding, &o. 
 
 Note. — In the same manner is formed the phrase serlorcn gel^etl, to be 
 or to get lost. 
 
 Ex. — Sin Sinb ijl ««f bet §eibe berloren gegangen, a child was lost on 
 the heath, 
 
 § ©1. — The past participle, which is generally used 
 with the accusative, is sometimes used absolutely | as, 
 
 gefe^t or angenommen, suppose ; auggenomnten, excepted ; 
 obgefe^en or abgcrcc^net, not reckoned ; jugcgeben, granted 
 (instead of: wenn man annimmt, obftel^t, jugicbt, &c. 
 
 Ex.— ®efc^t, or onjjenontmcn i^ toiiibe ti ni^t jujeitn, suppose I 
 should not permit it. 
 
 Eem. — A similar construction takes place when the parti- 
 ciple forms a kind of apposition with a noun or pronoun. 
 
 Ex. — Son alien gcai^tct unb geel^tt, (lart er in ben 9[rmen ber ©einigen, 
 honored and esteemed by all, he died in the arms of his 
 friends. 
 
 § 92. — ^In German the past participle accompanied by 
 a negation is frequently employed instead of the Impera- 
 tive. (See § 78, 3.) 
 
 Ex. — 9lii^t nte^r gcplaubett ^eute, let there be tio more talking to-day ! 
 
SYNTAX — -THE VEEB. 
 
 439 
 
 Oomparison of Participles. 
 
 § 93. — Only those participles, present and past, which 
 have entirely assumed the nature of adjectives, admit 
 of comparison. 
 
 Eem. 1. — ^For the present participles, see the list in § 87' ; of 
 the past participles the following list is as complete as possible : 
 
 (abgcneigt), disinclined 
 atgenu^, worn out 
 abgefagt, renounced 
 angefefen, distinguished 
 angcgrtjfen, affected, weakened 
 angentefl'cn, fit, apt 
 aufgcBIafen, haughty, vain- 
 glorious 
 aufgefliirt, enlightened 
 oufgeregt, excited 
 
 a"fgeme?}^"^^'^'^ly'g^y 
 
 au^crloren, j 
 
 an^eriefen, >- chosen, choice 
 
 ciusgebrEitct, ) , , n 
 ausgete^nt, [ ^^*^^^«^ . 
 au^gclajfcn, extravagant 
 fltt^gejcic^net, excellent 
 Beiout, cultivated 
 befreunbet, friendly 
 begait, gifted 
 kgliictt, blessed 
 iegrenjt, limited 
 (begiitert), wealthy 
 (fee|aftct), afficted with 
 
 (k^crjt), courageous 
 (6eja^rt), aged 
 (klannt), known 
 kllommen, oppressed 
 6elummert, soiTowful 
 (belcfcn), versed in books 
 belebt, enlivened 
 (belicbt), cherished 
 (temittcit), wealthy 
 (bcrett), eloquent 
 (bcriic^tigt), famous 
 bcrii'^mt, celebrated 
 bcf^affen, qualified, of a kind 
 befi^dftigt, occupied, busy 
 bcfc^riinft, limited 
 bcfoffctt, tipsy ' 
 bcfonncn, prudent 
 fceforgt, apprehensive, careful 
 bcfiimmt, definite, certain 
 bcfui^t, visited, frequented 
 bctrunfen, inebriated 
 be»bltcrt, peopled 
 (bcwantert), versed 
 beiuii^rt, tried 
 bctoo^nt, inhabited 
 bcTOunlicrt, admired 
 
 ■ Of the whole list g^ven on p. 432, only anttefetib and aBteefenb do not 
 admit comparigou. 
 
440 
 
 SYNTAX — THE VEEB. 
 
 burd^bac^t, well pondered 
 
 kurc^trieten, cunning 
 
 entartet, degenerated 
 
 entfemt, distant 
 
 (ctitlegen), remote 
 
 entfdjietcn, decided 
 
 entfc^Iolfcn, resolute 
 
 cnt»oI!ert, depopulated 
 
 cntoictclt, developed 
 
 cntjMt, ravished 
 
 erKttcrt, angi-y 
 
 crfo^ren, experienced 
 
 ergcben, devoted 
 
 ergriffcn, touched 
 
 er^aBen, elevated, sublime 
 
 crifucfetct, enlightened 
 
 txfxdbt, tried 
 
 fortgcfcferitten, progressive, ad- 
 vanced 
 
 geMtCet, educated 
 
 geSunbcn, tied, fettered 
 
 gciicgen (from gefcei|en), gen- 
 uine 
 
 gcbriingt, crowded 
 
 gee^rt, honored 
 
 gcfogt, gelojfcrt, collected, com- 
 posed 
 
 gelegen, opportune 
 
 gele|rt, learned 
 
 geltebt, beloved, cherished 
 
 getungen, well done 
 
 gemii§tgt, moderate 
 
 gemtfc^t, mixed up 
 
 genctgt, inclined 
 
 geratlm, advisable 
 
 gefe^t, grave 
 
 (gef(|i(it), skillful 
 
 (gefittct), moral, decent 
 gefpannt, intense 
 gefuc^t, sought for 
 geiiM, practised 
 gewogen, favorable 
 getDo^nt, accustomed 
 gewunben, winding 
 itberetlt, rash 
 iiterlaben, overfraught 
 (uBerlcgen), superior 
 ubertriebett, excessive 
 iiScrlegt, considerate(ly). 
 un6efangcn, free, unbiased 
 unfcefledft, unblemished 
 (unbefugt), illicit 
 unbe^olfen, clumsy 
 wntctannt, unknown 
 (unBefi^oUen), untarnished 
 unbefd&ranft, i ,. .^ -, 
 uneingef.^ranft,}"^^*^'^ 
 uttcr^Drt, untold, unheard of 
 unerfi^rocfen, intrepid 
 unerroartct, unexpected 
 uncrwicfen, not proven 
 ungeBunben, frank, unfettered 
 ungegriinbct, unfounded 
 ttngc^aftcn, angry 
 unge^inbert, free, frank 
 ungercimt, absurd 
 ungejiaftet, ] misshapen, de- 
 (ttitgefc^Ioc^t), f formed 
 ungcfc^Iiffett, ill-mannered 
 ungefliirt, undisturbed 
 ungejogcn, ill-bred 
 ttrtgejtuungen, unconstrained 
 uniikriegt, inconsiderate 
 unumtvunben, unceremonious 
 
SINTAX THE VEEB. 
 
 44:1 
 
 uniJcrborBcn, uncorrupted , 
 unserbroffen, indefatigable 
 untter^ojft, unlocked for 
 unscrfdjamt, impudent 
 unserfc^ulcet, undeserved 
 uttBcrjagt, unterrified 
 untcrDrucEt, oppressed 
 Beranbert, changed 
 loerad^tet, despised 
 scrBorgen, hidden 
 Dcrfcrcitct, spread, extensive 
 »erl5or6en, corrupted 
 Berticnt, merited 
 Serfc^It, abnormal, blundering 
 vergnitgt, amused 
 mfj'axtit, obdui-ate 
 scr^agt, hateful 
 Uerfe^rt, wrong 
 Serlegen, embarrassed 
 »erlc6t, worn out 
 seriicW, enamoured 
 sertogen, lying 
 sermejfcit, rash, foolhardy 
 uerrufcn, decried 
 
 (scrruc^t, profligate) 
 serriicEt, crazy 
 Serfc^Iuffen, reserved 
 »erf(^rtcn, defamed • 
 tterfd^roben, perverse 
 Serfc^wlcgen, silent 
 Serfoffen . ever drunk 
 DcrflecEt, concealed 
 Der^immt, out of humor 
 »cr|io(ft, obdurate 
 Bcrtraut, intimate 
 sertDa^rtoji, neglected 
 serwankt, related 
 Berworfen, vicious 
 Berwb^nt, pampered 
 Berjagt, timid 
 Berroorrcn, intricate 
 Berjartelt, effeminate 
 Berjogen, spoiled (of a child) 
 Berjudt, enra,ptured 
 Bcrjioeifelt, desperate 
 (Botllommcn), perfect 
 jcrfhcut, absent-minded 
 
 Rem. 2. — The above participles included in parentheses, 
 as Bcgiitert, fcelcfen, &c., are participles only in form, no verb 
 existing from which they could be derived, and must be con- 
 sidered as adjectives proper formed after the analogy of 
 participles. 
 
 EemV 3. — Here belong also the adjectives gcftebcrt, feathered; 
 gcfpomt, spurred ; gcfilefelt, booted ; and gfja^nt, with teeth ; 
 gcrSnbert, edged ; gcBtert^cift, divided into quarters, and simi- 
 lar ones. 
 
 Note 1. — Such other past participles as do not admit of a compara- 
 tive and superlative formed by inflection, may, nevertheless, form the 
 same, as in English, by placin.'r mc^r and meifl or am meijlm (Pd^fl, tcff, 
 
442 SYNTAX. THE VEBB. 
 
 am ^oii^flnt, am kjlen) before the positive ; as, ic^ iiit itie'^t (flatfer, firger) 6e» 
 leibigt ali i^t ; tc^ tin am mci|len (fiSttilen) kleibigt son euc^ alien, I have 
 been more insulted than you, I am the most insulted man of all of you. 
 Indeed, all participles, past and present, may form the comparative and 
 superlative in this way, those given in the above list and in § 87 in- 
 cluded ; and this form of the comparative and superlative is in most 
 cases considered more elegant than the other. — Douai. 
 
 Ex.— S)ie am meifien Betiil^ttttcn Seute ftnb ni^t immer bte ieflcn, those 
 persons most renowned are not always the best. 
 
 Note 3. — The comparatives proper and the relative superlatives of 
 all the adjectives and participles in list of § 87, and of aU the past parti- 
 ciples given in the list of § 93, may be employed as substantives. 
 
 Ex. — Xtt ©eitlitefle fann fic^ ittcn, the most experienced man may err. 
 
 The Future Participles. 
 
 § 94. — In German tlaie future participle is obtained by 
 placing jtt before the present participle. It has a pas- 
 sive signification, and can be formed only from transitive 
 verbs.' 
 
 Ex.— ®ie jtt loBenbe S^at, the deed to be (i. e., that ought to be) 
 praised. 
 
 Reading Exercise XLYI. 
 
 ©icfcr SKenf(^ l)at fciti mir gcgcfcenes gSert>rci^en geBrodfeen. ©ie 
 ijl an cinem geBroc^enen Jperjcn gc^orbcn. Sie Bufunft ifl aUen Wltn^ 
 f^en Bfrfcorgen. Ttai ^olsfpalten i|l mtr ctne fc^r ungewo^nte SlrBcit. 
 £)cr Dic6 lam burets genfler gefc^Iidsen. ^ai hamburger 'Dampr'i'cfetif 
 „k{c 2lu|lrla" ging im 3al)rc 1858 Bcrloren. Sugegckn, tag er bic^ 
 Bereibigt ^atk, fo ^ottcfl tu boc^ nic^t xtd^t i|n tuiebcr }u Mcibigcn. 
 Bon aUen fcincn ©c^iilcrn Be w cint (lamented), l^aud^te ©ocrattS 
 fctnen ©eifl am (expired). 3e^ abet itt^t ISngcr gejautcrt, 
 t»lr l^aBen Ictnc 3cit ju Dcriicrcn, wcnn wir 3ur rcd^ten 3ett to fcin woBcn. 
 5^ bin cin Selnb attcr ®c^mci(i^clelcn (flattery), guropa ijl ie»M* 
 
 ' This form corresponds to the Latin participle in — dut ; e. g., km- 
 dan&us, a, v/m. 
 
SYNTAX THE VERB. 443 
 
 Icrtcr aU ?lmcrita. Sr ^antclt mtijx iiberlegt ali fein jiingercr iBm* 
 ber. S« tDOr iai ©erat^enfle, aai id) unter ben Umftanben t^un 
 tonnte. Seder's ©eutfie ®rammatif tfl em fc^r ju emtjfe^lenbcs 
 SGBerf. 3»fi e^i^g^'jigc 5Wflnner, OertinanJ Sortej unb Sranj ^Jijarro, 
 ^aben fid^ um ben 3lu|m gellritten, bic Stntoo^ner Don Slmerifa ju 
 unterwerfen. Sltle 6eibe l^oben ft(| unjlerblii^ gema^t burc^ bie Za'p\tv^ 
 leit unb bie Unerfcferoden^eit welc^e jte entfaftet (manifested) ^aben. 
 
 Theme XLVI. 
 
 We have declined his invitation. Our lost opportunities 
 never return. Will you eat now ? the eggs are boiled. William 
 of Orange, it is said, vras taciturn. A horseman came riding 
 down the hill. One of my trunks was lost on my journey 
 to France. Suppose you should see somebody in danger of 
 being drowned, what would you do ? Abandoned by all his 
 former friends, he committed suicide. Be silent, and write 
 your lesson. This young man is more self-conceited (einge- 
 bilbet) than I thought he was. Of all my servants WiUiam 
 is the most tried. This is a statement very much to be 
 doubted. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 ®eM tnii^tcnb bcr iBifjilai^t. 
 
 SSftter, ic^ rufe bi^ ! 
 SriiUenb Mmtcblft mx6j ber Eampf ber ®cf($it^e, 
 ©prii^enb umjudten nticfe raffelnbe Slt^e. 
 Senfcr ber ©c^Iad^ten, i(^ rufe bi(^ ! 
 
 Soter btt, fii^re mic^ ! 
 
 SSater bu, fii^rc mlc^ ! 
 gii^r' mi^ jum ©iege, fiilr' mid^ gum Sobe: 
 ^err, iij erfcnne beine ©cBotc; 
 
 ^crr, ttie bu toillfl, fo fit|re mic^ ! 
 
 ©ott, i(^ erfcnne bic^ ! 
 
444 SYNTAX THE ADVEBB. 
 
 ®ott, i(^ crtennc bid^ ! 
 ©0 im |cr6)Hi^cn Sflaufclen icr Sliitter, 
 Site im ©c^iad^tenbonncrroettcr, 
 
 Urquell ber Onabe, crtenn' ic^ blc^l 
 SSater bu, fcgnc mic^ ! 
 
 35ater bu, fcgne mic^ ! 
 3n beine Jpaitb 6efe|r id^ meln Sckn. 
 Du {annfl ed ne^men, bu ^afl e^ gegekn; 
 
 3ujn SeBen, jum ©terben fcgne mic^ ! 
 
 Sotcr, ic^ prelfe bic^ ! 
 
 Satcr, tc^ preifc bic^ ! 
 '8 i(i ttt tet« ^ampf fiir bie ©iitcr ber Srbe ; 
 Dag ^etligjle fi^u^eit wir tnit bem ©d^recrtc: 
 
 Drum, failcnb unb flegcnb, prctf ic^ btc6. 
 
 ®ott, blrcrgeb'i(|mi(^! 
 
 @ott, bit ergcV ii^ mic^! 
 SDcnn mid^ bie Donner tea Socca begrii^cn, 
 SBenn mcine 2lbern gcBffnct fliegett: 
 
 Dir, mein ®ott, bir ergeb' ic^ mic^ ! 
 SSatcr, ic^ rufe bic^ ! 
 
 Corner (1791—1813). 
 
 m •> * t' m 
 
 LESSON XLVn. Seftiott 47. 
 
 The Adverb. (2)o8 ttmfloniiStoott.) 
 
 § 95. — ^Adverbs are placed after the verb, and in gen- 
 eral also after the object. 
 
 Ex. — l£r rs»^ti$t itnmer wn feinem Qidit, he is always speaMng of his 
 money. 
 ®ie Be^nbetten ben ©egenfianb tiortreffliit, r°u treated the subject 
 admirably. 
 
SYNTAX — THE ADVEBB. 445 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. Adverbs of time are generally placed immediately after 
 the verb, and before the object. (See § 109, 9.) 
 
 Ex. — t)ai 'Sldbi^m fu^te gcQcrn i^r ^leib, the girl was looking after her 
 dress yesterday. 
 
 2. Adverbs of place are put at the end of the sentence. 
 Ex. — Sit fu^ten bic^ iibcraUi we looked for you everywhere. 
 
 Note. — If the verb of the sentence is used in the compound tense, the 
 complement of the auxiliary, he it participle or infinitive, /oSo«!« the ad- 
 verb of place. 
 
 3. Adverbs of interrogation are placed as in English. 
 Ex. — SBie mac^t man bai, how is that done? 
 
 § 96. — ^For the sake of emphasis the adverb may be 
 removed from its proper place, and be put nearer to the 
 beginning of the sentence. If the emphasis is to be 
 made very strong, the adverb may begin the sentence. 
 
 Ex.— 3c^ ^aie jcutc beineit ©tuber gtfe^en, I have seen your brother 
 to-day. 
 
 STOorBeit wetbcn tolt gewi^ aBretfen, to-morrow we shaU surely de- 
 part (leave). 
 
 Note 1.— Notice that when an adverb or adverbial expression begins 
 the sentence, the verb preaedes the subject. 
 
 Note 3.— The adverbs of interrogation are, of course, not included in 
 this rule, as their proper place is always at the beginning of the sen- 
 tence. (Comp. § 95, Exc. 3.) 
 
 Exception. 
 
 The adverbs denoting chance, probability, and similar 
 rague and undefined ideas, are usually placed without 
 regard to emphasis. When placed between the subject and 
 
446 SYNTAX THE ADVEEB. 
 
 the verb, where other adverbs cannot usually stand, they 
 are said to give force to the subject. 
 
 Ex.— SScrmut^lift ^iit ftin Stubct i^m ba8 gefc^tielien, probably bis brother 
 has written him this. 
 2)ie Sot^ter M &meuli oiefletc^t toirb ti faufcn, perhaps the daugh- 
 ter of the general will buy it. 
 
 § 97. — The adverb of negation, tti<^t, is generally 
 placed after the object ; but if the negation is to empha- 
 size particularly the action of either the subject, object, or 
 any other word, it is placed immediately before the word 
 to be thus emphasized. 
 
 Ex.— JJicjt SReiilt^um, fonbern Sufrieben^eit ma^t ben iUlenf^eit jludli^, not 
 riches, but contentment, make man happy. 
 Sttffet una ni^t ben SSerlufi unferer Stubet ktlttgen, fonbern laffet «n« 
 fro^IoSen be3 ©iejea uber unfete geinbe ! Let us not lament the 
 loss of our brothers, but let us rejoice over the victory over 
 our enemies. 
 
 § 98. — When several adverbs or adverbial expressions 
 are used in the same sentence, those of time precede all 
 others. 
 
 Ex.— Sr ivirb ^eute tva^rrc^etnUc^ ntc^t aireifenr he will probably not de- 
 part to-day. 
 
 § 99. — ^When an adverb is joined to an adjectiTe, the 
 former must always precede the latter. 
 Ex. — <&x fann fejr git'e SSorte geien, he can speak very good words. 
 
 Reading Exercise XLVII. 
 
 SBir ttcrben 6aft» iricbcrlommcn. Sr f)at sorgcflcm fcin titnti 
 Sflfc^cntuc^ Bcrlorcn. Sin fcfciincreg Mima, aU in Edifornicn, ftnkcfl 
 bu nirgcnbg. 3(^ glauie, icfe |a6e btefc %ra\x irgentwo gcfc'^ctt. 3Do 
 ftnt ©ie gcflcm 3l6cnb gcwefcn? 9We|r aU cln ©ofoat ijl bas Dpfcr 
 feiner Sertucgcn'^eit geworben, Sftebcn ©ic ni6^t fo taut, ©ic scr'^in* 
 
SYNTAX — THE ADVEEB. 447 
 
 bcm mid^ am Slvteiten. SBfl^rfi^eittlii^ trirt cr fitr itefc Jpcftent^at 
 einc grope Sclo^nung erl^olten. S^\Mq mW fcin aSint, fonft wiirc 
 baa ganjc §au« o^ne 3"'cifel iticbergeBrannt. "Lai fi^Ic^te SBcttcr, 
 BermutWicfe, |at i|tt aBge|aItcn ju tomnten. SKetn Srutcr raui^t unb 
 fplctt nit^t. „gii(^t cine aScIt, tie in i|r 9(lii|t3 ucrgc'^t, nic^t ctnen 
 <Zd)ai^, ler nid^t fann cwig gelten, nic^t eitlen 3lu^m :^ot pc^ ntein '^crj 
 crfle^t (implore) : 3c^ bin ein S^riji, ic^ fui^e be||rc SCelten." SSir 
 finB knge nic6t ^ier gewefen. Siefer ffiein foU augerorbentli(;^ gut 
 fein. 
 
 Theme XLVII. 
 
 These ungrateful people never think of the obligations 
 which they owe. The Prussian army fought most bravely in 
 the battle of Sadowa. I was once very healthy, but now I 
 am always suffering. -He is nowhere to be seen. I put your 
 knife somewhere. When do you intend to start? To- 
 morrow, to-morrow, and not to-day, thus lazy people will 
 always say. This is surely the best joke I have heard. 
 He who does not wish to work shall not eat. Tell your 
 master I shall be there by two o'clock. You are most likely 
 deceived by this man, for I am quite sure, he is not at all to 
 be trusted. Tediousness and sickness are found more com- 
 monly in the palace than in the cot. 
 
 Reading Lesson, 
 ^ic tDuflc Snfel. 
 
 gin reiser, guttpttgcr ISlam ttotlte cincn feiner ©ttocn gliicflidi 
 ma^cn : er fc^enfte i:^m ble Srei^ett unb Hep i:§m ein ©cf)tff ntit sie* 
 ten fDJWic^en SSaaren ausriiflen. „®ei" fagte er, „unt) fegte tamit in 
 ein frembeg Sanb; m&itvt mit bicfen SBaaren, unb aller ©emtnn fott 
 bein fcin." Der ©floBc rcific ab ; aUx lauin war er einigc 3«'t auf 
 bcr ©ce, al« fic^ ein '^eftigcr ©turm cr'^06 nnb bag @i|ijf gegcn cine 
 MUfpt worf, bag ti f^citcrte. ©le fiJjHid^en SBaaren serfanfcn im 
 
448 
 
 SYNTAX — THE CONJCNCTION. 
 
 SKeer, aUt feine ®t]a^xttn tamcn urn, unl cr feI6(i erreic^tc ntlt gcnfluer 
 9Jot| iai Ufcr einer 3n)'el. ^ungrig, nacEt unt o^nc §ulfc, ging er 
 defer in'3 Sont ^inein, unj weintc iiber fein UngtiicE, ali cr son fern 
 etne groge ©tabt erfclidte, au5 5cr i^m einc SKcnge SintDo|ner mit 
 grogem ©cfc^rei entgegen hm. „ipcil unfcrm ^bnige !" riefcn fic t^m 
 3U, fe^tcn i^^n auf eincn priii^ttgen SBogen, un5 fiilrten i|n in ite 
 ©tatt. Sr fam in ben fijnigtic^cn 5)otajl, wo man i^m einen f)urs 
 purmontel aniegtc, etn Siatem urn feine ©tirn knb unb i^n einen 
 goltencn S^ron 6cjlcigen lieg. Sic ?5orne|inen troten urn i^n ^er, 
 ftelcn »or i^m nieter uni fc^wuren im Stamen in ganjen Soltca il^m 
 ten Sic bcr a;rcuc. 
 
 !Der neue ^Bnig glauBte SlnfangiS, aKc biefe ^crrlid^fcit fei etn fc^ijs 
 ncr Sraum, Big sic gortbauer fcincg ©fiidcs iin nic^t me:^r jwcifeln 
 licg, bap bic wunbcrBarc S3egc6en:^cit wirHid^ tualr fei. „3c^ begrcifc 
 niAt," fprac^ cr bei |i(^ fclbfl, „mi bie 3lugen bicfeg wunberlic^en SSoIs 
 fes Besaubert ^at, einen nadtten grembting ju jclnem ^ijnig ju madden. 
 @ie wiflten nic^t, tuer ic^ bin, fragcn nic^t, too i^ ^erfomme, unb fc^cn 
 mic^ anf i^ren S^ron ! fflSaa iji tai fitr cine befonberc ©itte in blefem 
 Sanbe?" 
 
 (ffcttfeftung folgt.) 
 
 LESSON XLVm Seftion 48. 
 
 The Oonjunction, {2in8 Sinbctoiirt.) 
 
 § 100. — Conjunctions are followed (1.) by the indica- 
 tive or (2.) subjunctive, and exert also (3.) a certain in- 
 fluence on the position of the verb. (Comp. Less. XL.) 
 
 Ex.— (1.) grifc unb ©opjie mfifTen ju ^aufe iftiien, Pred and Sophy must 
 remain at home. 
 (2.) (£t Befte^lt, bag bu fofctt mH) ^aufe fammeft, he orders you to 
 
 come home at once. 
 (3.) Sttar jottc cr Unrest, dbtx bennoib moiSte lii i^n ni^t Jefhafen, 
 it is true, he was wrong, but nevertheless I did not like 
 to punish him. 
 9118 t^ fie jum erfienmat \a^, f($ten fie »te( f($oner/ wTienl saw her 
 for the first time, she seemed to be much prettier. 
 
SYNTAX — THE CONJDNCTION. 449 
 
 ^ 101. — 1. After the conjunctions iantit, that, in 
 order that ; bamit—ui^t ; wtnn, if, and aB wetitt or 
 
 al§ ob, the subjunctive is employed. (Oomp. § 69.) 
 
 Ex.— (Sflgrt e« mit, bomit t^ niftt loinger Utbtr tell me it, that (or in or- 
 der that) I may no longer su^r. 
 
 2. The conjunctions toenn and oh are frequently 
 omitted in conditional and concessive sentences, when 
 the verb begins the sentence. (§ 75.) 
 
 Ex.— 3|l e8 gletc^ ftat, iet Wiori) Witti Int^ten, although it is late, the 
 moon will shine. 
 
 3. When the conjunction baj^ is omitted in subordi- 
 nate clauses (comp. § 70), expressing some stated fad or 
 reality, the subordinate clause joins the other part of 
 the sentence in the form of a principal clause. (§ 74.) 
 
 Ex.— 3(i^ ttetp, er fagt nie Me fBa^v^tit, I know he never tells the truth. 
 
 Note. — This form is preferred by many of the best writers, because 
 it states the contents of the srdiordinate clause as something intended or 
 thought of. When given as a quotation, the verb is required to be in 
 the subjunctive mode. 
 
 Ex. — Wlan fagt, ber ffetnb fct gcfc^tagm mtbm, they say (that) the enemy 
 has been beaten. 
 
 4. After verbs expressing advice, command, consent, 
 desire, doubt, fear, hope, joy, regret, or surprise, the 
 infinitive is generally used in English, but in German 
 the dependent or subordinate clause always begins with 
 ba^, and requires the verb to be in the subjunctive. 
 (§ 70.) 
 
 Ex. — 3^ iBiinfd^e, tiai t>u beine Seftton lernefl, I wish you to learn 
 your lesson. 
 e« t^ut mir leib, bag i^r ntc§t gel^en tnertiet, I am sorry that you 
 will not go. 
 
450 SYNTAX — THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 Reading Exercise XLVIII. 
 
 Mr :^a6ctt nii^t nur atte genilcr, fonbem aud^ tic Spren aufge* 
 ntoc^t, Weil ti ju warm i^. (Sntweker miifl'cn @ie itttr Siirgfd^aft 
 (security) gebcn, otcr ©ie fbnnen mcin ipaus nti^t miet^cn ; tenn 
 ©ic (iitb mir sijflig fremb. Sr fagte, lap feine ©c^njejicr gejiorBen fcl. 
 Sr ^at mir ti jwar |oc^ unt ^eilig tierftc^crt, oHein id^ !ann bcnnod^ 
 feinen Shorten tcincit ©lauben fc^cnten. SDiein SSater !^at mir cinen 
 38ec^l"el auf 9)ari« mitgcgefccn, kamit id^ ttid^t in @clt»crlegcn'^cit lame. 
 3Bare(l bu gejicrn Slbcnb bci uni gcwefen, fo wiiric^ bu cinen grojjen 
 ®enu^ ge^aJt ^aBcn. ®ie fel^en, ti ifl mir unter biefcn UmPonlen 
 nid^t m6gli£^ S^nen ®ctb §u Iei|cn. ®r be|au))tct (asserts), cr ]|aBe 
 cinen Slfcfd^eu (aversion) »or ©c^mcic^Icrn (flatterers) unb ©c^mas 
 ro^em (spongers). 3d^ rat|c bir alien SmficS, folctie ©|>ecttIationen 
 ni^f ju madjen. SSa^renb in grantrcic^ bic iKad^t bcr SJZonarcfccn 
 feit £ubtt)ig XI. fid) prfte (became stronger), wurbe boS 3lnfe|en 
 (reputation) ber bcutfc^en ^aifer immer fdjttac^er. 
 
 Theme XLVIII. 
 
 These people are neither rich nor poor ; but they are very 
 liberal. He pretended not to know anything about it. The 
 more pains you take to learn German, the sooner you mU 
 learn it. As soon as I had received your dispatch I started. 
 I complied with your wishes, in order that you might have 
 no reason to complain of me. We should like to go to 
 Europe, if it did not cost so much. He treats me as if I 
 were his worst enemy. I know he is a great scholar and a 
 gentleman, and I doubt not that you will like him. We 
 were told that it was not advisable to start before daylight. 
 I want you to set the table, and tell me when dinner is 
 ready. Louis of Bavaria and Frederick of Aiistria contended 
 for (|l(^ ftrciten um) the crown of Germany. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 35ie ttittflc Snfcl.— (Sortfe^ung.) 
 
 ©0 ba^tc cr unb wurbe fo ncugierig, bic Urfac^e feincr Sr|e6«ng ju 
 wiffcn, baf er fic^ entfc^Iop, einen son ben 35ornc'§mcn an feincm §ofe, 
 
SYNTAX THE CONJUNCTION. 451 
 
 in i^m cm wcifer Wlann ju fcin fc^ieit, urn Me Jluflofung i'.t\ii Si'dt^s 
 \eU ju frogen. „35e3ler !" relcte er i^n an, „iBorum l)abt i()r mic^ tenn 
 ju eurcm ^iinige gemac^t ? 2Bie tonntet i^r iBijfen, iaf id) auf eurcr 
 3n|'ct angcfommcn fei? Unt tna^ wirt cnMi^ tnit mir wertcn?"— 
 „^err !" antroortcte Jer SSejier, „ttefe 3n|'el wirt son ®cijlern bewo^nt. 
 <Sie ^im »or tangen 3"^^" tift Slllmac^tigen gekten, i^nen jd'^vlii;^ 
 einen (Sol^n Slcama ju fenten, ba^ cr jte regiere. S)er SlBmiic^tige f^at 
 i^re Sittc angenommen, unli lop a(Ie 3n^re, an bcm namlic^cn Sage, 
 einen STOenfc^en an i^rer Snfei lanben. I5ie fiinino'^ner eilen i^^nt, 
 mie tu gefe'^en ^aft, freutig entgegen unb ertennen Hin fiir i^ren Dber* 
 |crrn ; ater fetne SRcgierung tauert nic^t longer aU ein 3a^r. 3|i 
 btcjSt 3"t serfloffen uni ter Bejitmmte Jag wieier erfc^ienen, fo wirti er 
 feiner SBiirKc entfe^t ; man krauit i^n Ui fBntgli(^en ©c^mnde^ unb 
 Icgt i^m fi^lec^te .Kleitcr an. ©eine SBettenten tragen i^n mit ®emalt 
 ans Ufcr unb legen i^n in ein tefonbers iaiv. geBauteS ©c^iff, bag i:§n 
 auf eine anbere 3n|'cl 6ringt. i)ie ^n\tl i|l triifl unb obe ; jener, bcr 
 noc^ »or iBenigcn Sagen ein mdi^tiger .Sonig war, fommt |icr nadt an 
 unb finbet weber Untert^anen nod^ greunbe. ^Jltemanb nimmt an fels 
 nem Unglitde a::^ctl, unb er ntup in biefem tuiijlen 2anbe ein trauriges 
 unb tummer»olle« Seben fit^ren, wenn er fein ^a^x ni^t tlug ongewens 
 bet ^at 3la6:j ber Serbannung bes alien ^Bniga ge^t iai Soil bem 
 neucn, itn i^m bie SSorfe'^nng bes 3lHmai^ttgen jebeg ^ai^x o^ne Slua* 
 na^me fenbet, auf bie ge»6|nli(|c ffieife entgegen unb nimmt i^n mit 
 glcic^er greube, wie ben oorlgcn, auf. tiui, §err, ifl bas ejuigc ®efe^ 
 bicfea did^^iS, baS lein ^Bnig wiitjrenb feiner SRegierung auf|e6cn 
 fann." 
 
 „©inb benn aud^ meine SSorgonger," fragte ber ^ijnig tueiter, 
 „tton biefer furjen ®auer i^rey ^o^ett unterridfctct gewefen ?" — ^„^etnem 
 i5on i^nen," antwortete ber SSejier, „ttar biefea ®cfc^ ber SergSnglii^s 
 !eit unfcefannt : ater (Stnigc liegen |t(^ son bem ®lan3e, ber i^ren 
 J^ron umgaB, Henben ; jie »ergagen bie traurige 3ufM"ft, «nb tterlefc* 
 ten i|r ^a^v, o|ne weife ju fein. 2tnbere Beraufc^ten fti^ in ber <3ixt 
 ^ig!eit i^rea ®ludeg; fie getrauten |t^ ni(^t, an bie t»ii|te 3nfel jw 
 benfen, a\xi gurc^t, bie 2lnne|mlic^feit be« gegenwartigen ®enuj[e3 gu 
 serbittern; unb fo taumelten |te, »ie STrunfene, aus ciner greube in bie 
 anbere, Ui it)rc 3cit «'" ff"^ wnt fte in bag ©(^iff gcworfen irurben. 
 SBcnn ber unglitdlii^e fag lam, fo ftngen SlUe an, fic^ ju beflagenunb 
 
452 STHIAX — THE PEEPOSITION. 
 
 {■^re ScrHenkung ju Befeufjenj abn nun war ti ju fpat, unb fie wuri 
 ken o|ne ©^onung kern eienkc iibcrgefceti, fcas fie erwartetc unk bent 
 fie kuri^ 2Bei«|cit nid^t :^atten Borbeugen wotlen." 
 (gottfelung folgt.) 
 
 m •• * •• ^ 
 
 LESSON XlilX. Seftion 49, 
 
 The Preposition. (2>a8 aSer^oUnifewort.) 
 
 Eemabk. — ^The use of prepositions is too variable to be 
 determined by definite rules. Their departure from the 
 original signification can be best seen from examples. 
 
 L 3(n (signifies generally at). 
 
 1. (£t fle^t an ber Zlfikt, he stands at the door. 
 
 2. SWcine ©c^ttefier fiart tm gelSen gieier, my sister died 0/ (the) yellow 
 
 fever. 
 S. Se^ne bid) ni(!^t an ben S^if^, do not lean against the table. 
 
 4. ©ic crfannte i^n an feinem Iritt, she recognized him by his step. 
 
 5. Sritl^er litt ic^ efi an ^Dpftve^, formerly I suffered often from head- 
 
 ache. 
 
 6. 31m 2:age (i. e., tvci^tenb be$ Xage^) i{l er felten p ^m.\t, dmring the 
 
 day he is seldom at home. 
 1. %m fftgt, bag et mifi an ®ott glauBt, they say, he does not believe 
 in God. 
 
 8. Serlin liegt an bet S))rec, Berlin lies on the Spree. 
 
 9. 3^ Werbe an bie Ufct bca SJ^eina gt^cn, I shall go to the banks of 
 
 the Rhine. 
 
 10. <S.i mu$ an a($t Snonitte it^m, it most be os&ouj eight months. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 11. 9lm 8 e B e n frin, to be BtUl aliva 
 
 12. ©0 an bet Strt ^afccn, to be one's way (custom). 
 
 13. e« liegt i^m wetter vXSjti an bet ©ac^e, he does not care any further 
 
 about the matter, or he has no further interest in the matter. 
 
 14. %n ^Uem SCel ^a^eit/ to be disgusted with everything. 
 
6TNTAX. THE PREPOSITION. 453 
 
 15. (Et tji fo ja^m Wie tin |iunb an in ^ette, he is just as tame as a 
 
 chained dog. 
 
 16. 3Rorgen t»mmt bie Sei^e an mtii^, to-morrow it is (comes) my turn. 
 
 17. £)ttS war ni^t an bent, that was not true (there was nothing in it). 
 
 18. (&mm an bie |>anb se^en, to assist any one. 
 
 19. St iBirb e« an ben 3)lann ju btingen »tiTen,hewiU know how 
 
 to find his man. 
 
 20. 35 n i e 6 1 an jinge t4 cin anbere* Sieb, henceforth (from now on) I 
 
 win sing a new song. 
 ,21. (Er (le^t tmmer o 6 e n an, he is always at the head. 
 22. Oe^en ©ie nur n e S e n an, only go next door. 
 
 n. Stttf (signifies generally on or upon). 
 
 1. ©pielfl bu auf bent Skaier ? dost thou play on the piano ? 
 
 2. ®ie fonnen ft^ auf i^n oerlalTen, you may depend tipon him. 
 
 3. SBann wetbet i^r auf'8 8anb ge^en? when will you go into the 
 
 country ? 
 
 4. Stage biefen Sttef auf bie 9>o|l, carry this letter to the post-office. 
 
 5. 4>ail bu einen Sttef fiir mtc^ ouf bet 9>ofl gefiinben, didst thou find a 
 
 letter for me at the post-office ? 
 
 6. Sag un« ouf bie SBtefe fpasieren ge^cn, let us take a walk in the 
 
 meadows. 
 
 7. SKan Jat bte Sroffnung ber Scuttle auf lutje 3eit tjerf^oben, they have 
 
 postponed the opening of the school for a few days. 
 
 8. S^icfea |)aua foflet mtt^ auf Dtcrjigtaufcnb S^^atet, this house costs me 
 
 cAout forty thousand dollars. 
 
 9. ®t wutbe auf Sefe^I beS SonigS serjaftet, he was arrested by order of 
 
 the king. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 10. Wuf bet Sagb fetn, to be out hunting. 
 
 11. ?luf bie Sagb ge'^en, to go (out) hunting. 
 
 12. &i ijl 3eit, bag wit un3 ouf ben SBeg raac^en, it is time, we should go. 
 
 13. SBtt tuaten fa|l ben ganjen ©ontmet Ottf SReifen, we were nearly the 
 
 whole summer abroad. 
 
 14. 8ag ba« Wlai^m fofott ouf ben SWattt ge^en, let the girl go at once to 
 
 market. 
 
 15. SKein Dnfcl pit »tcl (groge ©tiitfe) ouf bcinen Slcffen, my unde thinks 
 
 a great deal o/your nephew. 
 
 16. X>a$ ^ et gt auf beutf^, that is in 0erman. 
 
454 SrNTAX. THE PKEPOSITION. 
 
 m. 2luS (generally out of or from), 
 
 1. !ttu8 ben Slugen, au8 bent Stnn(e), out of sight, out o/mind. 
 
 2. 3^ weij ba« au0 erfo^rung; I know ihaX from experience. 
 
 3. SBaa fott aaS bir werben, what will become of you ? 
 
 4. SBir liefen auS atten flraften> we ran wifA all our might. 
 
 5. Sc^ t^at ti aill SSetfe^etlf I did it by mistake (fArtwg'A inadvertence). 
 
 6. Slug Blogem 3Jcrba(i|t ^dtte er ba* mi)l faflen foUen, cm. mere suspicion 
 
 he should not have said that. 
 
 7. SttttS biefem Ontnbe mag ic^ e« m(%t t^un, for this reason I prefer not 
 
 to do it. 
 
 8. 3ejt tjl ti ganj auS mtt bir, now it is all over with you. 
 
 9. ©^reibe mir ban 9Ke6 auSr write me from Metz. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 10. 9ttt8 5!re«nbett wcrben oft Seinbe, au8 geinbeit feltener greunbe, friends 
 
 often become enemies, enemies less frequently become friends. 
 
 11. Et tveig webet au0 nod^ cin, he is entirely at a loss. 
 
 12. ®r wirb fiij auS b e m © t a u 6 c gema^t l^aSen, he will have run 
 
 away. 
 
 IV. 9Sci (signifies generally at, near or by). 
 
 1. SStt biefet STtSett werbe idi wa^ttic^ nic^ta geroinnen, at this work I shall 
 
 surely not gain anything. 
 
 2. Scr ©lu^l (le^t bet bent Dfcn, the chair stands near the stove. 
 
 8. 3)u itiugt nid)t 6ei 9Jad^t jlubiren, bu wirjl bir bie Stugen »erbcrJen, you 
 must not study by (at) night, you will spoil your eyes. 
 
 4. SIei6' Bet mtt unb ge^' ntd^t fort, an meinem lietjen ijl bet f^iinfle Dtti 
 
 stay with (or about) me, and go not away, your best place is 
 near my heart. 
 
 5. 'Zai if! ntc^t bie ©ttte Bet un^, this is not the custom among 
 
 (with) us. 
 
 6. ©ie ftnb njojl ni^t Bei ©innen, you must be out of your head (or you 
 
 cannot have your senses). 
 
 7. Er tear lange 3ett fci^r angefe^en Bei ^ofc, he was for some time quite 
 
 honored at court. 
 
 8. ®u|la» StbolD^ ficl in bet ©^Iac|t Bei fifteen, Gustavus Adolphus died 
 
 in the battle at Liitzen (or at the battle of Liitzen).' 
 
 9. <Bi fte^t Bei S^ncn, it depends upon you. 
 
 10. $a(} bu tein ®elb Bet bit, have you no money about (with) you ? 
 
 11. SBci bem ^efttgen SBJinbe tDat e« unmoglic^ fc^neUct ooiwatt* ju tommtn, 
 
 in consequence of the high wind, it was impossible to move 
 more rapidly. 
 
SYNTAX THE PEEPOSITION. 455 
 
 12. SEBenn 3emanb Sefc^ciben Jteiit, nitSjt Jeim So6e, fonbern bcim Eabd, ifi cr 
 ti, if one remains modest, not under praise, but under cen- 
 sure, then he (really) is so.' 
 
 V. S>Utc^ (signifies generally through). 
 
 1. Saffet una oHe buriS ben SBalb gc^en, let us all go through the woods. 
 
 2. 2)te sanje Jtac^t ^inSuriS ptte bcr Sdrm nii|t auf, during all the night 
 
 (the whole night) the noise did not cease. 
 
 3. ^ur(6 ®elb, fagt man, loi|t |tc^ SJiclea au«rl(^teit, iy [means of) money 
 
 they say, much can he accomplished. 
 
 4. Sttt4 ntc^t^ 0eiei^nen bie SDlenfi^en me^r t:^ren S'^arafter tAi bun^ ba$, 
 
 tt)a« jte loic^ertic^ finben, in nothing do men more (perfectly) indi- 
 cate their own character, than in that which they call ridicu- 
 lous.— Goethe.' 
 
 "VI. '^fit (signifies generally /or). 
 
 1. Stefe SBii^er jlnb fiir bie Sugenb gefii^rieSen, these books are written 
 
 for the young. 
 
 2. ^onnen ©te mir tin JKtttel fiir baS SdJnwe^ geteni can you not give me 
 
 a remedy against (the) tooth-ache ? 
 
 3. gtu^et faf et fie Sag fiir Sag, formerly he saw her day after (by) 
 
 day. 
 
 4. 3c^ mu§ ctn Simmer fiir mtc^ '^aBeitr I must have a room to (by) my- 
 
 self. 
 
 5. SBie»ieI WoUen <Ste ©tuS fiir ©titd, how much do you want piece by 
 
 piece (or for the lot) ? 
 
 6. S8ir tBoHen f^on fiir a&ti forgen, mac^eit ©te fic^ nut tcine llmjlanbe, we 
 
 will take care o/ everything, only give yourself no trouble. 
 1. fiaufe fiir funf ®tofi^en Saffee, atiet teine S^ocotabe, buy five groaehens' 
 worth of coffee, but no chocolate. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 8. 3^ efTe e8 fiir m e i n 8 c i c n gem, I am extremely fond of it. 
 
 9. SBtt ftnb auf tetncn Wall bafiir, we are by no means in favor 0/ it. 
 
 10. (Sr pit e« fiir fetnc |)fltc^t, fonfl wurbe et ei ntc^t t^un, he considers it 
 
 (regards it as, or regards it to he) his duty, else he would not 
 do it. 
 
 11. 2)u iifl unfete 3uft«c^t fiir u«b fiir, thou hast been (art) our dwelling- 
 
 place in all generations. (Ps. xc. 1.) 
 
 ' For this example we are indebted to Woodbury's German Grammar. 
 
456 SYHTAX TH5. PEEPOSITION. 
 
 Vn. ©egett (signifies generally against, towards). 
 
 1. ©ie jlanbEll in SmpiitHng gegen i^n auf, they rose in rebellion againat 
 
 him. 
 
 2. ^ommen Sie gegen Stbenb ju una, come to see us toward evening. 
 
 3. Sr floii gegen brei be$ SRotgen^, he died &y (Tieor) three o'clock in 
 
 the morning. 
 
 4. ©el ^iiflic^ gegen Sebermann, be polite to (or towards) everybody. 
 
 5. 3^ Kettaufe nur gegen iadxt Sa^ung, I sell only /or casA. 
 
 6. 2)a8 fieBm glctf^t gegen bie (Ewigfeit, bem fc^neHcn liauc^ bev bera ©ter^ 
 
 ienben entflieft, life compared with eternity, is the short breath 
 of the dying. 
 
 I. Ss {tnb gegen Mi SSo^en feit i^ auf ^ Sanb gtng, it is cibout six weeks 
 
 since I went to the country. 
 8. 3^r Viibtl ijl mSjti gegen bai metne, your iUness is nothing in com- 
 parison With mine. 
 
 Vm. 3tt (signifies generally in or into). 
 
 1. ©te werben wctnen Srubcr im Oatten pnben, you wiU find my brother 
 
 in the garden. 
 
 2. Oe^cn ®te nic&t in icne8 ^mai, do not go into that house. 
 
 3. ®r wirb ma^tfcijeinltc^ tm Sijeater fein, he will most probably be at 
 
 the theater. 
 
 4. 3Reitt SJctmogen Jefle^t in eincm 'fatten Settler, my property consists of 
 
 half a dollar. 
 
 5. SBir t:^aten eS in ber 3I6(l^t 3^nen Jeplflic^ ju fein, we did it, wUh the 
 
 intention of aiding you. 
 
 6. SBoBen ©ic nic^t mit un« inS Eontett ge^en, will you not go to the 
 
 concert with us ? 
 
 7. £r war cien im Segrip a^sureifcn, he was just on the point of 
 
 starting. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 8. 5Ba« ^ajl bu nun im ©inn(e), what have you on foot (in your mindl 
 
 now? 
 
 9. ®a8 ganje Suf»olt wurbe in bie glu^t g«i«flt (or gef^lagen), 
 
 all foot were put to jligM. 
 10. ©ic ftrangen in bie |)o^e, they jumped (sprang) up. 
 
 II. SBarum fltttf^ejl bu in bie ^oinbe, why do you clap your hands? 
 
 12. ©ie ^at Iti^ in ben ginger gefci^nitten, she has cut her finger. 
 
 13. 35tt« mug Sebcm in bie ^ugen fatten, that must attract everybody's 
 
 attention. 
 
SYNTAX THE PREPOSITION. 457 
 
 14. 3c^ ^ait fie Bcibe in 3Jeri)ai|f, I suspect them both. 
 
 15. 31jx mit^t nii^t fo in ben Xag ^inein leben, you must not live so extra- 
 
 vagantly. 
 IC. Sr fi^Iagt tie 3trme in einanber, he folds his arms. 
 
 17. ®ie brang in mi, mi su erCIareni she pressed us to declare our- 
 
 selves. 
 
 18. 3)Jetn Dntel Kejt in ben leglen Sugcti, my uncle lies at the point of 
 
 death. 
 
 19. Sen ganjen licBen %ai Hegen fie flc^ in ben |) a a t e n , they are to- 
 
 gether by the ears the whole livelong day. 
 
 20. ©te rebete in etnem fottf she talked without ceasing. 
 
 21. SEBir txcrben in alter Oru^e atiteiftn, we ahall atari very eai'lff. 
 
 22. aSit finb Mi) tetneafalla int Sfteinen batitber. we are by no means de- 
 
 cided {or agreed) in reference to it. 
 
 23. ®t wirb in ben erflen Sagen aireifen, he will depart in a very few 
 
 days. 
 
 24. 3n ber lefeten Seitijletfe^t trautig gwefen, for some time past 
 
 he has been very sad. 
 
 25. ©e^8 SBorttein ne^wen mic^ in SInf))tud^ jeben Sag, six words 
 
 claim, my attention every day. 
 
 26. 3c^ teetbe Hi) in © (^ u 6 n e ^ m e n, I will take you under my pro- 
 
 tection, of I will protect you. 
 
 IX. 9ta^ (signifies generally ifter). 
 
 1. ^omuien @ie naSt SJetlauf von vterje^n S^agen toieber, call again (come 
 
 back again) after fourteen days. 
 
 2. ©c^itfe fofott no^ beat Sltite, send immediately for (after) the phy- 
 
 sician. 
 
 3. SBic^ butfict na$ Si>x1)m, I thirst /w fame. 
 
 4. Sc^ s,t^t ^eute 9lknb mit bem ©c^neHguge nai^ Soln, I am going to Co- 
 
 logne, to-night, with the express train. 
 
 d. 6r foil nur naif ateinen Sefe^len l^anbeln, he shall only act according 
 to my orders. 
 
 6. Sie ©fitter fl^en na^ a^j'^aietif^er Drbnnng, the students sit in al- 
 phabetical order. 
 
 i. ®in SBJenfc^ mug naSi fetner tteBctjeugung l^anbeln, a man must act in 
 accorda/nce with his conviction. 
 
 i. ©pielfl bu ntd|t nai!^ SSoten, do you not play ly note(s) ? 
 
 9. Sicfea Sitb {fl na4 ber Sfatut gejei^net, this picture is drawn 
 
 from nature. 
 10. ©er SDratcn fe^ntedt Uilli 3t»iebeln, the roast meat tastes o/ onion*. 
 
453 
 
 SYNTAX THE PEEPOSITION. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 11. Sag mi naUi $ a u fe S e ^ e tii ti wirb ^fUt, let us go home, it is get- 
 
 ting late. 
 
 12. ©ie miffen nai^ SB e U e i e n ^anbeln, you must act as you please. 
 
 X. Ueber (signifies generally over). 
 
 1. Ste Hcmft fjSMSf itiet bent j^ttminei the lamp hangs over the chimney. 
 
 2. ajerpigm ©ie ii6er ntein Oelb unb ®ut, dispose of my money or for- 
 
 tune, or my money and fortune are at your disposal. 
 
 3. di til iiber s»et Sa^te ^er, feitbem id) ©ie gefe^en ^ah, it is more than. 
 
 two years since I saw you. 
 
 4. 2)cn SBSimcr iiier ^a6en »ir nii^t* serbieiteit tiiitnett, duHng the winter 
 
 we were not able to earn anything. 
 6. 3i^ fann itti($ nur itljer ©ie tvuitbetnr I can only wonder (be astonished) 
 at you. 
 
 6. £)ad gtng tDirflic^ it&cr meitie StS.% that went really begond (above) 
 
 my strength. 
 
 7. ®e|e ttid^t iiicr biefe Sritde, do not go across (over) this bridge. 
 
 8. SBir erl^ielten SBrtefe iificr Sriefe, we received letter after letter. 
 
 9. SafTet bie ©ottne uhtt euren Bon nid^t itttterge^en, let not the sun go 
 
 down vpon your wrath. — ^Eph. iv. 36.' 
 
 10. ^ieritber ^atte iS) ttic gcbai^t, on this I had never thought. 
 
 11. Unb WoIIen, bag ntein Solt meineS 9Jamen3 SergelTe uBcr i^ten a;r«iumcn, 
 
 gleic§ wie ijre SSciter nteinc* 9?amcn« setgagen u6cr bent SBaal, which 
 think to cause my people to forget my name by their dreams, 
 as their fathers have forgotten my name /or Baal. — Jer. 33.' 
 
 12. UcBer fcine langweiltge SJebe fcjiliefen wit etn, under his tedious speech 
 
 we fell asleep. 
 
 13. (Er iDurbe itlicr bet Xfyit son ntit ettawt, he was caught by me in 
 
 the act. 
 
 14. Et ^atte flc^ getr8|let uBcr Stmntott, he was comforted concerning Am- 
 
 mon. — 3 Sam. xiii. 39. 
 
 15. Sir motten ^eute ilScr ac^t Sage ju S^nen fontmcn, we will come to you 
 
 a -week from to-day. 
 
 16. Sei t^m gc^t bie SRcbti^feit nii^t vibtx ben SBeutct, with him honesty 
 
 does not go above his ptirse. 
 
 17. ©te ging foeien nbtt'S Sclb, she walked mfothe coimtry. 
 
 ' For this quotation we are indebted to Woodbury's Qerman Grammar. 
 
SYNTAX THE PREPOSITION. 459 
 
 18. 3c^ tann ti «t(§t iilicr bai ^tn Jringctir I cannot find it in my heart. 
 
 19. sajerben ©te iiber Sremeit ober ^amiurg rtifen» will you go by way of 
 
 Bremen or Hamburg ? 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 20. ttcBcr (urj ober tang mug eine SJetanberung jlattfinben, sooner or later 
 
 a change must be made (or must take place). 
 
 21. UeBer ben bummcn Sungett, oh, the foolish boy ! 
 
 22. Di iiBer bie Slinben bit nic^t fejen wollm, (0) shame on the blind that 
 
 ■will not see I 
 
 23. SBiesiel tojlet ti vbtt bicfen glug ju fe^en, how much does it cost to 
 
 cross this river? 
 
 XL Witt (signifiea generally round or about). 
 
 1. S)c8 gansm ®««ea Sauertt jlejen um bett Drt gefc^aart, the peasants of 
 
 the whole province are gathered round the place.' 
 
 2. Saifet UHd um ben %\.\i) ^ e r u m ft^en, let us sit around {about) the 
 
 table. 
 
 3. ©te fapen uin'S Seuet J crum, they sat dbovt the fire. 
 
 4. SBniten ©ie um bie ©ail^e, did you know of (about) the affair? 
 
 5. ©ptcle nie um ®clb, never play /<w money. 
 
 6. Um ttiesiel U^t pnbet man i^n ju ^aufe, at what time is he found at 
 
 home? 
 
 7. E« ijl um ne gcfc^e^en, it is over with them. 
 
 8. Set SBeg nac^ gjofen mx granffurt ifl um iwct ©tunben Hirjer, the way 
 
 to Posen by Fraakftirt is iy two hours shorter. 
 
 9. 33a« »ctbtente ii| tBa^rlii^ nid^t um bic^, that I do surely not deserve 
 
 from you. 
 
 10. ©t pel i^t um ben ^M unb Kgte f?e, he fell wpo» her neck and 
 
 kissed her. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 11. tilt ©tunbe t|l umi the hour is v/p. 
 
 13. Sr ^at fii^ um fie verbient gema^t, he has deserved well of her. 
 
 13. Su mugt ben T)octor um Siitt:^ frag en, you must consult the 
 
 physician, 
 li. 3c^ iitte ©ie um SJetjei^Mng, I beg your pardon. 
 
 ■ For this example we are indebted to Woodbuet's German Grammar. 
 
460 SYNTAX — THE PBEPOSITION. 
 
 15. ®tt3 war uitt f» (or beflo) ieffer fur ett^< that was so rrmch the 
 
 better for you. 
 
 16. ©agcti ®ie i^m, bap er einen Jag, um btn anbetn fommen foil, 
 
 tell him that he shall come every other day, (or on alternate 
 days). 
 
 17. So«sitt«fo ^at ^&i um Slmenfa serbient gtma^t, Kosciusko de- 
 
 serves well of America. 
 
 18. 3(% fprac^ ttie eS mit um'S ^ e r j war, I spoke as I thought (felt). 
 
 19. (Ea ^anbette |t(^ nic^t um Sleinigfdten, there were no trifling subjects 
 
 under consideration. 
 
 20. 5BIU WEDi »ir|l bu uitt bie SEJette* reiten, with whom will you 
 
 ride /or a (the) wager? 
 
 Note 1. — In compound verbs unt frequently denotes loss or priva- 
 tion; e. g., 
 
 21. ffir ttitb VxiS^ um atte beine §a5t JrtngeB, he will cause you to lose aU 
 
 your property. 
 
 22. (Sin SBlann wurbe l^ter im SBalbe umgeJrac^t, a man was murdered in 
 
 this forest. 
 
 23. SlIIc 9)a|fa8iere unb ber grogte I^ett ber 3Hannfc^aft tamcn um, all the 
 
 passengers and the greater part of the cieyi perished. 
 
 Note 3. — Sometimes um followed by the accusative is best rendered 
 in English by the nominative ; e. g., 
 
 24. 6* tfl etn Wic^tigcr 9)unlt um bie SSJal^l, (the) voting is an important 
 
 point {or as to voting, it is a very important point). 
 
 Xn. lltttct (signifies generally under). 
 
 1. SBir fageit untcr ber Sinbe gemiitp^ beifammen, we were gathered 
 
 joyfully under the linden-tree. 
 
 2. Ser |)unb Kegt untcr bem 3;if^e, the dog lies ielow (under) the 
 
 table. 
 
 3. S)a« war unter aUer SBfltbe, that was beneath aU dignity. 
 
 i. Unter biefen Sebingungen gel^e ic^ barauf ein, on this condition I agree 
 
 to it. 
 6. Untcr breipig SDttoern war nii^t einer ju jlnben, among thirty men not 
 
 one was to be found. 
 6. SBir warcn ben gansen Sag untcr bem ©c^alle ber Sanonen, we were all 
 
 day amid, the roaring of the cannon. 
 
 ' ttm bie Sette is frequently equivalent to ctfrt((» zealous(ly), with all 
 one's might. 
 
STTNTAX THE PBEPOSITION. 461 
 
 1. ©0 laitje ber Srtc ein «inb ifl, fo ijl untcr (s»iWen) i^m unb feinem 
 Bnei^te fein Unterfc^ieb, as long as the heir is a child, there is na 
 difference ietween him and the servant. (Literal translation of 
 Gal. iv. 1.)' 
 
 8. Sie fennen m&j nut unter biefem SSamen, they know me only by that 
 
 name. 
 
 9. ®e^e unb lomme ttiir nic^t wicbct uttter bte Stitgen, go, and come never 
 
 again before my eyes. 
 
 10. S)tc fransoftfc^e Orammatif i|l unter ber 3) r e f f e, the French gram- 
 
 mar is in press. 
 
 11. ©ie i|l untcr (or bet) ber Sttbett etngef^fafen, she has fallen asleep at 
 
 her work. 
 
 12. ©ie Knnen eg ni^t untcr fiinf X^olet laufeit, you cannot buy it for less 
 
 than five dollars. 
 
 13. Unter bem lif^e ^ e r» o r, from under the table. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 14. iSlorgen jejett »tr untcr ©egcl, to-morrow we sei gaiJ. 
 
 15. Sfl c3 mostly ttlle Soufe untcr einen |iut ju Sriugen, is it pos- 
 
 sible to make aJX mien accept one opinion ? 
 
 16. 35arf ic^ ©ie urn eine ttnterrebung untcr »ter Stugen bitten, may 
 
 I ask you for apri/BOte (secret) intermewf 
 
 17. 9Kcin SBruber wirb untcr bte ©olbaten ge^en, my brother will become 
 
 a soldier. 
 
 18. Sa tag aUei untcr cinaitber, everything lay in confusion. 
 
 19. ©ie jJecEen alle untcr einer Setfe, they are all joined in interest (un- 
 
 der one cover). 
 
 Xm. ^on (signifies generally of or from). 
 
 1. fSiai pit matt ban i^Klf what is said of him ? 
 
 2. SBom ftfi^en SWorgcn Hi jum fjjatett Slbenb, from early in the morn- 
 
 ing till late in the evening. 
 
 3. SitefeS aSuc^ t|i Hon bem aJerfafler bet fratijiififc^en ®rammattf, this book 
 
 is by the author of the French grammar. 
 
 4. ©ie tommen tidu bem Sweater, they are coming from (out of) the 
 
 theatre. 
 
 5. ©ie Pnb ton SBonne trunten, they are intoxicated mth delight. 
 
 6. aWeinc ©^roejlet ijl ficin bon SJcrfon, my sister is small in size. 
 
 1. 3(i| werbe ban mettten (£infunften Icben, I shall live on my income. 
 
 ' For this example we are indebted to Woodbury's German Gram- 
 mar. 
 
462 
 
 SINIAX THE PBEFOSITXON. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 8. e« (je:^t aUti iimXxi) gut Don © t « 1 1 e n, it is all going off (succeed- 
 
 ing) pretty well. 
 
 9. 3c^ t^at e« Don (or aai) freien Stiiilen, I did it o/my own accord. 
 
 10. SBom erfJen Sonuat 1869 an too^ne tc^ in ber Sricbti^ilraBe, after (or 
 
 heginning with) the first of January, 1869, 1 shaJl live in Fred- 
 rick-street. 
 
 11. 3S) banfe S^nen ban sinjem ^etjeti, I thank joumth all my 
 
 7iea/rt (most sincerely). 
 
 12. t)tx Sin' in golbncn Ccifen, ber Stnbre gwu ban §««/ the one with (in) 
 
 golden locks, the other gray-haired (or with gray hair). — 
 Uhland.' 
 
 XIV. 2Jot (signifies generally before). 
 
 1. Su mugt bot ie:^n U^r ju $aure fein, you must ha at home hefcn-e ten 
 
 o'clock. 
 
 2. St lam bor Stoei SSJoii^en :^iet an, he arrived here two weeks ago. 
 
 3. 3)te Sc^ulct weinten bar ffteube, the scholars wept /or (with) joy. 
 
 4. 8ie6er |Jerte ic^ bor liunget, I would rather die of hunger. 
 
 5. ©ie war aujer ^ij bor Born (greube)( she was beside herself wUh 
 
 anger (joy). 
 
 6. Su 6i|l nic jl^er bor ijntj you are never safe/ro»i him. 
 
 1. 6t n>o^nte ftU^tr bor ber ©labt, he lived formerly outside the city. 
 
 8. @4(itt bor ©(^ritti step &2^ step. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 9. ©te btauc^en fti$ nii^t bor i^m ju ffirc^ten, you need not fear him (or 
 
 be afraid of him). 
 
 10. Sin Sremifi^ea ©4i(f It e s t in unferem |)afm bor St n t er, a Bremen 
 
 ship lies (or is) in our harbor at anchor. 
 
 11. ®ie ^intid^tung iti Mixbtxi wirb in noic^fler tBoi^t bar ft^ it^tn 
 
 (or jlttttfinbcn)/ the execution of the murderer will take place 
 next week. 
 
 12. ^lutet tnij bor i^m, beware of him. 
 
 XV. 3« (signifies generally to). 
 
 1. S8 ttirb nttt jur S^te gerei^en, it will be an honor to me. 
 
 2. gtt icnct Sett gaS c* tcine Sanonen, ai that time they had no cannons. 
 
 ' For this example we are indebted to Woodbukt's German 
 Clrammai. 
 
SYNTAX THE PBEPOSITION. 463 
 
 3. Die £ie6e juitt 3l«|m BegeifletU i^tt, the love 0/ glory animated him. 
 
 4. 3i) ^abt mir %ti<S) ju ciner SBefie gefauft, I have bought me cloth for 
 
 a vest. 
 
 5. !Da8 biente mir jum Seweife, that served me as (for) a proof. 
 
 6. 25ie .Rinber fletben ^i" JU ■^unbertcn, [the] children are dying here 
 
 by hundreds. 
 1. !Die gifd^e fcingt man jejt ju $awfen, fish are now caught in (by) 
 multitudes. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 8. Semm, lag mi ju Sctte ge^en, come, let us retire (go to bed). 
 
 9. Er gaJ eitt gejl }U S^tcn bea amerifani|"(i^en ®cfanbtcn, he gave a feast 
 
 in honor of the American ambassador. 
 10. SEBit Jabcit jtBci De|lrei[|er jit ®efangenm gema^t, we have made two 
 
 Austrians prisoners. 
 n. ©ie mogert mir bai3 SBIag ju eiitcm SRode nc^mcn,' you may take my 
 
 measure for a coat. 
 
 12. SDleine ©(^wefler rci|l gem ju SEBagen, meiti Stubct ju 9)fErb, aier i^ jit^e 
 
 eS »or JU Sttg S" ttiftn. my sister Ukes to travel in a carriage, my 
 brother on horseback, but I prefer to travel on foot. 
 
 13. 3m ffiintcr reifen wit ju Canbe, im ©ommtt ;u SBafler, during the win- 
 
 ter we travel by land, during the summer by water. 
 
 14. ®« rear jujtt ® I fl cE tei« SBJenfc^ in bem ®etttube, there was forttt- 
 
 nately no person in the building. 
 
 15. Sle^^mtn ©ic pm Seifptel cin ©titil ®IaSf take /or example (in- 
 
 stance), a piece of glass. 
 
 16. 3u biefem SiV>ti 6tau^m wit ®elb, for this purpose we need money. 
 
 Note 1. — gu ^^ frequently used after a noun preceded by auf 
 or n&i^. 
 
 17. ©ie ging gerabc a u f ijn jUi she went directly to him. 
 
 Note 2. — A noun in the dative preceded by ju, and used in con- 
 nection with tnerben, is in English frequently rendered by the 
 nominative ; when used after Xddiitn, the preposition is omitted 
 in English, and the noun required to be in the objective. 
 
 18. SJon Slatur Be|H)en Wit feinen Better, ber ni^t jiir Sugenb werbcn fiinnte, 
 
 by nature we possess no fault that might not become a virtue. 
 
 19. 2)et Sricg macule ben ffleft^er be« golbtei^en 3)eru pm armen SKanne, 
 
 the war made the possessor of gold-yielding Peru a poor man. 
 
 IDIOMS WITH JU AND XiaS). 
 
 1. (Et 6r«^te e* cnbliii^ ju©tanbe, he accomplished it ^nzXyy. 
 
 2. (Et follte ii(§ ben Umjlanb ju 9lufee mac^en, he should ^r<!^< by 
 
 the eireumstance {or occasion). 
 
464 SYNTAX — THE EBEPOSITION. 
 
 3. $ aitt ba8 Seinige (leta 3U fHat^, ever tofe cfflw of your own, 
 
 4. Stmug jur Slber gelaffen wcrbcn, he must be bled. 
 
 5. 34 l^afie i^n fi^oit feit einem Sa^re nii^t ju®efic^te 6efomiiten,itis 
 
 already a year Bince I saw him (or since I 7i.ad a sight of him). 
 
 6. So lag mi($ boii^ ju SS o 1 1 e f m men, then let me be hewrd. 
 
 1. T)ai airb bir ft^x ju ©tatten fommen, that wUl be very /usoor- 
 aBle (or of great service) to yoa 
 
 8. ®te |)aate liattbtit i^r ju Serge, hoT hait stood on end. 
 
 9. @ie {ann «or Sa($en (aunt ju 3lt^em !ommen, she can scarcely g^et 
 
 her breath for laughing. 
 
 10. Sflbtrbenn nii^t wo^l ju SUiut^e, doyounot/eeZ well (at ease)? 
 
 11. 2>a8 ifl jum toll tverben, that can make one mad. 
 
 12. 3n SBoTtti^ logirten mir im SSixtf)i1)tMi jum Slbler, in Norwich we 
 
 lodged at the £!agle Hotel. 
 
 13. 3 fl ni^t bie Spre ju ? Slein, aJet ic^ toia (te jn m a d& e n. Is not the 
 
 door shut f No, but I will shut it. 
 
 14. 34 ^aie tva^renb id <Bi)mmexi ju Viet ju tl^un, during the summer I 
 
 have too much to do (or I am too busy). 
 
 15. 5?ur immer ju, keep on, go on I 
 
 16. ®4jvermut^ unb Xraurigfeit ntac^en bie (Secle na4 unb nai) fi^Iaff unb 
 
 we^miit^ig, melancholy and sadness gradually (by degrees) 
 make the soul remiss and effeminate. 
 
 17. 3|l S^r SSatet ju §aufe, is your father at home? 
 
 18. Snetn Ontel ge^t na$ $ a it fe , my uncle is going hMne. 
 
 Note 1. — JUa^ denotes 1. motion or tendency toward a place, 
 and ia espedally used with the names of places and countries (not 
 before the names of persons where ju is employed) ; 3. indirect^ 
 it denotes reference to a person, rule or order, dignity, time, &c. 
 
 Ex.— <1.) ffir tetfl naSt 9)art8, he is traveling to Paris ; ct fragte na^ 
 b i r, nn^ beinemSJamen, he asked for you, for your name. 
 (3.) (Sr i|l bcr Wad^fle noi^ i^m, he is next to him. 
 
 Note 3. — gu designates 1. a reference to an object within a 
 certain space (i. e., if this object is a person) ; 3. a certain distance 
 of a motion, a place of rest ; 3. an aim ; and 4. a certain time in 
 which something happens; e. g., (1.) 3^ ging ju ntetnem Dnfel, (4.) al8 
 bie SWefTc ju ®nbe ging, (3.) urn ijm ctn SOort jur Slufmunterung ju fagen; 
 (3.) \i) fanb i^n a6er nt(^t ;u $aufe, I went to my vmde, when the 
 fair was near its close, (in order) to say to him a word of en- 
 couragement and of consolation, but I did not find him at home. 
 
 Note 3. — gu denotes also (5.) art and manner; e.g., 3u 9)ferbe, 
 on horseback ; (ft) finally also the relation of value, &c., of one 
 thing to another ;«. jr., S)u Der^ltfl bi^ ju ijmwte eln 3»erg ju etncm 
 SRiefen, you compare to him as a dwarf to a giant. 
 
STNTAX. — THE PEEPOSITION. 465 
 
 Exercise 
 
 ON PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE OR DATIVE.' 
 31 u« bcm 3)flan3enmc^c nimmt tcr 5Kenf(^ einen gro§en Z^til 
 fetnct ©))eifert, unt tereitet auc^ aui baffcitc siele gcifltgen ®tf 
 triinte. Sttu^criem liefcrt cS una aut^ gloc^g ju unfere ^Ici* 
 liung,§oIj ju unfer en aCo^nuttgcnunti etne 5!Rcngc BonSlrsnci? 
 ^rautcr.— 2Sa:^rent bent ^riegc Micb nton(^e3 ntit Dielen 
 Sifer angcfangcne SCert unsoHenbet.— ^ r o f t ber ©efe^c wtrb Drb=: 
 nung erl^alten.— 31 n |1 a tt beiS SSricfeg Jradjte cr mtr munJlic^e ma^== 
 rt(^t.— Der 3lr3t :§at iijm, ungeac^tct iai fc^6ne fficttcr, iai 
 3lu!3ge:^en »ert)otcn.— Unfcr ©arten Itcgt au^erlaU bcr ©tabt, 
 jenfeit eincm ficinen 33ac6c.— 3^ wcrbe JJir cntgegcn fonts 
 men, wenn ic^ nt c i n e r ©cfc^otte :^ a I b c r ti mBglic^ maiden fann. 
 — S^rciS 3luftrageg auf o Ige war bte Slrbcit tnncr'^alB 
 einem 3a|re fertig.— ®r fe^te mix jwar manege ©riinbecntgc? 
 gen, tnbejfen war er m i 4 boc§ in ber Jpauptfa^e nii^t 3 u t» i b c r. 
 
 Exercise 
 
 ON THE PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE, 
 DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 Ste gtnrtd^tung, bap ©efc^c imb Dbrigleiten ba ftnb, burft toelc^e 
 ®id^er|eit, 3l4e unb Drbnung er:^alten luerbcn, ijl not^roenbtg f iir 
 ber menfc^tic^cn ©efettfi^aft; wer ftc^ alfo ber Dbrtgtcit wiber? 
 fe^t ober i|re 33efe^Ie entgegen :^anbelt, ifl fe:§r flrafbar.— 
 Seber ^Kenf^ ifl f(*tttbig, g e g en f e i n c n greunbcn bie Sl^tung 3U 
 bcweifcn, bie cr f iir f cine ?)erfon ion fie felb(l Derlangt.— 
 ®cr ?5or3ug bcs 5!)Ienf(^en uor ben a:|iercn Be^e^^t barin, bag 
 er it b e r ben ® .• g c n ^ ii n b e n, bie i:6n umgeben, nac^benf en lann. 
 — S5er Wm\^ fann in ben :| c i f c ft e n unb fiifteflcn Sanbcrit beg 
 (Srbbobens leben. Sr gcwB^^nt ftc^ fe:^r leid^t an ciner ©ad^e, an 
 iebe« ^tinta, an iebe Seben^art. — S3 ifl untcr ben 3(ugcn 
 bcr SKenfii^cn cine grope Seri'd^icbcn^cit ; cinige fe^cn »cit in bcr 
 gcrnc, anberc nur i n bie 9Ja'^e, nod^ anbcrc glcic^ pt i n b t e Stli^e 
 unb in bie %txne. — tn 9Renf(^ »crt>flan}t frembc, nit^Iic^e ©cwSc^fe 
 auf feinen »aterldnbi|%n Soben. 
 
 ' The mistakes in these exercises the student is to correct. 
 
466 filNTAX THE PBEPOSmON. 
 
 How to render some of the English Prepositions. 
 
 I. Above. 
 Above, when it denotes time or number signifying more 
 than or longer than, is rendered by fiber or tttel^C alS. 
 
 Ex. — It is above (or more than) forty miles from Bremen to Cologne, 
 eS ijl fiber (or rac jr olS) sierjij Wttiln »on Sremm nai^ ^Bln. 
 The fever lasted above (or longer than) eight hours, bui giek.t 
 bamtt iiSer (or me^r olS) «*t ©tunben. 
 
 n. Abonti 
 
 Jbout, 1, in the sense of around, is rendered by nm 
 Ex. — ^His friends were constantly about (i. «., around) him, feine greunbe 
 n>aren fiets um i^n. 
 
 2. In the sense of in, by ill ; 
 
 Ex. — Several thousand people are <^out (i. e. in) the streets, ttte'^Mre 
 tttuftnb SWenfi^cn jlnb in ben ©tragen. 
 
 3. When it denotes concerning or of, by fiber ; 
 
 Ex. — ^He will think dbovt (f. e., concerning or of) this propontion, 
 er Birb fiber bicfcn SJotfc^Iuj nnHjitnUn. 
 
 i. When signifying toward, by gegen ; 
 Ex.— It was about {i. «., tmea/rd) ten o'clock, e8 war gegen je^n ttjr. 
 5. When used in speaking of things which people carry 
 about them, render it bei. 
 Ex. — ^I never carry weapons cibout me, ii^ trage itte SSBaffen bet mit. 
 
 in. Against. 
 
 Against, 1. used in the sense of on, is rendered by Ott ; 
 Ex.— Hang the picture against (i e., ori) the wall, pnge Hi S3tlb 
 
 an bte SESanb. 
 2. When signifying/or, by l>or. 
 Ex. — Guard against (i. e.,for) him,' pte bic^ lior i^nt. 
 
 IV. At. 
 
 Ai, 1. is generally rendered bei, with or without the article. 
 
 Ex.— He was at supper, er war betm SJienbeffen (or bei StW). 
 
 Note. — At is also rendered bet when in English it precedes TiMise ex- 
 pressed or understood ; e. g.. Were you at my sister's (house), waten @ie 
 bei meinet SiJ^weffer ? 
 
 I Compare the English phrase to look ovifor. 
 
SYNTAX THE FEEPOSITION. 467 
 
 2. After nouns or verbs expressing anger, dffrision, smrow, 
 surprise, &c., render by fiber with the accusative. 
 
 Ex. — They will laugh at you, man iBttb iibcr bic^ laijta. 
 
 3. Used in the sense of amid, is rendered by utttet. 
 Ex.— 4« (i. e., amid) the sound of the trumpets, untcr Swmpetenfii^all. 
 
 4. In the sense of with, by iwit. 
 
 Ex. — He sells it at a loss, ct uerfauft e8 mit © ^ a b e it. 
 Idioms. — a. To lie at anchor. Dot Sinter liegen. 
 &. At the same time, ju glei^er 3ett. 
 
 V. By. 
 
 By, 1. after to sell, to buy, to work, &c., preceding a noun 
 denoting weight, measure or time, render by nad^ (placing 
 it either before or after its noun). 
 
 Ex. — In America they sell potatoes 5^ the pound, in Stmerita serfauft 
 man bie ^artoffdn na^ bent 3)funbe (or bent 3)funbe nod)). 
 
 2. Or by affixing toeife to the noim. 
 
 Ex. — We buy our sugar by the pound or himdred-weight, »it fttufen 
 unfem Builet 9)funb» ober £entner«toetfe. 
 
 3. Preceding a numeral immediately followed by an adjec- 
 tive of dimension render by un^. 
 
 Ex. — This house is one hundred feet long 6y thirty wide, btefe? §au3 
 tfl ^unbett Su^ tang unti bieipg ireit. 
 
 4. In affirmations and swearing is rendered bci. 
 
 Ex. — ^He swore hy his honor, er fc^ttoi feet fetner &)te, 
 
 VI. For. 
 
 For, 1. used in the sense of on account of, render by tttlt. 
 
 Ex. — I did it for my honor's sake, e« kk mit uitt bie S^re ju t^vm. 
 
 2. Signifying as, render by JU. 
 
 Ex. — He wiU take her for his wife, er ioirb fie jur Swu ne'^nten. 
 
 Idiomb. — a. For ever, ouf immer. 
 
 6. To cry /or vengeance, uitt SRa^e fc^reien. 
 
 c. To weep /w joy, Bdr greube wetnen. 
 
 VII. From. 
 
 From, 1. is generally rendered by tfon. 
 
 Ex.— I received tljis book /row him, \iij cr^ielt btefe* Sud^ bOlt ijm. 
 
4G8 SYNTAX — THE PKEPOSITION. 
 
 Note 1. — From— to are generally rendered by Don— JU (l.>; but when 
 speaking of extent or time, they are rendered Don — fiiS &.)■ However, when 
 two names of towns or places are mentioned, render botl — nai^ (3.)- 
 Ex. — (1.) He traveled from city to city, cr rcifle t)on ©tabt jtt ©tttbt. 
 (3.) From July to October, ban 3uli 6iS Dttolier. 
 (3.) From Paris to Berlin, tlOit 3)aiiS nai^ Setlin. 
 Note 3. — From under are rendered by unter — ^|erl)Iir> 
 Ex. — ^He crept /rows under the table, er Iroc^ ttltttr bem Z\\i)t ^crtior. 
 
 2. Signifying in, is rendered by an. 
 
 Ex. — He hindered -me from writing, er ^tnbctte mtd^ anx ©^reiien. 
 
 3. Signifying ovi or out of, is rendered by aai, 
 
 Ex. — Do you come from France, .Sommen ©ie au§ 55r«ttttetc!) ? 
 
 4. Signifying from before, is rendered by t>or. 
 
 Ex. — ^He hides himself from everybody, er DetWrgt [td) dor Scbermann. 
 
 vm. In. 
 
 In, 1. after words that denote hurting, wounding, {but not 
 cutting), &c., preceding a possessive pronoun with reference 
 to any part of the body, is rendered by an followed by the 
 definite article. (Comp. § 362, k.) 
 
 Ex. — ^He hurt himself in the arm {his arm), ct serwunbele jTc^ oat SIrme. 
 
 Note. — To have a pain in is rendered by a compound noun, such as : 
 SctJfwe^, head-ache (or a pain in my head). 
 
 Ex. — 1 have a pain in my chest, t(^ ^aSe ©tujllne'^ or SSrufifi^mcrjcn. 
 
 2. In adverbial expressions of time, it is rendered either 
 by tin or by the genitive with or without the article. 
 Ex. — In the evening, oitl Sttenb, or (Bc8) 3l6enbS. 
 
 IX. Of. 
 
 Of, 1., in the sense of d)out, concerning {!.), or from, is 
 rendered by t>on (2.). 
 Ex. — (1.) He speaks very frequently of you, er ffirxi^t fe^r oft Don bit. 
 (3.) Fear nothing of (i. e., from) him, fur(^te niijti Don i^nt. 
 
 2. In the sense of for it is rendered by jn. 
 
 Ex. — The love of glory, bie Siebe jum SRu^m. 
 
 IniOMB. — a. To make much of any one, SJtel ouf Scmanb '^alten. 
 
 6. To lose sight of, anS ben Slugen serlteren. 
 
 e. That is a matter of course, ba8 »er|le^t |lc^ Hon felb|i. 
 
 d. He arrived of late, tx (am ^ter Dot lurjCtn an. 
 
SYNTAX THE PBEPOSITION. 469 
 
 X. On or upon. 
 
 On or upon. 1. after to live are rendered by t>on. 
 Ex. — This aged woman lives only on bread and water, fatefe «lte (fX" 
 ja^rte) gitttu I e 6 1 nur bOlt Srob unb Staffer. 
 
 2. After to play they are not translated at all. 
 Ex. — Do you play on the piano, fptelctt Sie .Slasiet ? 
 
 XI. Over. 
 
 Over, 1. is generally rendered by Sbct, 
 Ex. — Do not drive over this bridge, fa^te nic^t iificr biefc StS4e. 
 
 2. But when it denotes an action completed, it is rendered 
 ifOt&btV (sometimes by an3). 
 Ex. — We shall not leave the church until service is over, ttir aetben bie 
 fiitc^e nti^t »eitaifen, 6W ba ®otte«bieii|l Uortiiet (tttt^) ifl. 
 
 xn. Under. 
 
 Under, signifying on or by, is rendered bet. 
 Ex. — Under (i. e., on or 5^) pain of death, 6ct 3iobea|hafe. 
 Idioms. — a. To be bound under an oath, turtf) cincn Eib geBunben fein, 
 6. Under the favor of the night, iegunjltgt lion bet 3lai)t. 
 
 c. She is under great affliction, fte ifl fe^r BetummErt. 
 
 d. He is under age, er ijl unmunbig. [fproc^en (DetloJt)- 
 
 e. She is under promise of marriage (engaged), jte i|l i)tt<' 
 
 xm. With, 
 
 With is generally rendered by itttt : 
 Ex. — ^Yesterday I went with her, gejlcrn ging ic^ mtt i^r. 
 
 1. In the sense of among it is rendered hci, 
 
 Ex. — It was a custom loith the ancients, tS tsar &titaui^ 6ci ben Stlten. 
 
 2. In the sense of by or through it is rendered by burc^. 
 
 Ex. — To cure with fasting, hurtj gaflen ^nlm. 
 
 3. In the sense of from by t>Ott. 
 
 Ex. — I love you with all my heart, iH) Itebe bii§ Doit ganjcm lierjen. 
 
 4. After to starve, to die, to perish, &o., it is rendered by t>Ot. 
 
 Ex. — He died with hunger, er )l«rt Dor liunget. 
 
 NOTR. — Of, immediately preceded by to die, is generally rendered on. 
 
 Ex. — He died of yellow fever, er jlarb om gelien Stcber. 
 
 5. After to meet with (begegncn) (1.) ; to trust with (anucr^ 
 trauen) (3.) ; to reproach with (»owcrfen) (3.), all of which gov- 
 
470 SYNTAX — THE PEEPOSITION. 
 
 em, in German, two objects, one in the accusative, and one 
 in the dative, it is not rendered at all. 
 Ex.— (1.) He met with an accident, ii iegegnetc i^m cin Unfttll. 
 
 (2.) He trusted me with a horse, er »ertraute mir cin 9)fett) an. 
 l3.) He reproached him mth (his) ingratitude, cr watf i^m feine 
 Unbttnt6arteit »or. 
 Idioms.— a. To fight a duel mth pistols, ^i) duf 9)ifiolen f^lagen . 
 6. To be all over with any one, unt einen flefd^e^en feln. 
 
 c. To put up with, futlteb nc^men. 
 
 d. It is with us as mth all the poor, tiit^iXMi \ovt aHen Sttmen. 
 
 e. To succeed mth, gelinsen. 
 /. To part with, ^ingeien. 
 
 Place of the Preposition, 
 
 § 103. — ^In German^prepositions are placed, (1.) im- 
 mediately before the words they govern, and (2.) directly 
 after their object. (Less. XLI., I. (1, 2 ;) II. and III.) 
 
 Ex.— (1.) 3i^ f^retJe an feinen SSater, I am writing to his father. 
 
 (2.) 4iafl bu einen Stief mi Setttfc^lanb er^alten, have you received 
 a letter y^oOT Qermany ? 
 
 Exception. 
 
 § 103. — ^For the sake of emphasis the preposition with 
 the words which it governs are sometimes placed, (1.) before 
 the object, or (2.) even at the beginning of the sentence. 
 Ex.— <1.) ^afi bu au8 Seutfc^Ianb einen Sricf cr^alten, have you received 
 a letter from Germany ? 
 (3.) Slug Seutfa^lanb ^aSe i(^ feinen Stief n^alten, /ro»» Qer- 
 many I have received no letter. 
 Note 1. — ^The preposition cannot be placed between the subject and 
 the verb unless it refers exclusively to the former. 
 Ex.— 2)er SnaSe, intt ber 6la«en 5Wafee, fat mlc^ stfi^Iageit, the boy 
 mth the blue cap has beaten me. 
 * Remake. — From the collocation of the words it is to be understood that 
 that boy is charged with beating another person who carries a blue cap. 
 Note 2. — ^If an adverb and preposition meet in the same clause, place 
 the adverb before the prepoation, especially when the former consists 
 of only one or two syllables. 
 Ex.— Er reiflc 1^ e u t e mit bent S(!6neltsuge, he went to^ay with the ex- 
 press train. 
 
SXNTAX. THE PBEPOSITION. 471 
 
 § 104. — As in English a preposition is used before 
 the day of the week or month expressly pointed out. 
 
 Ex.— £r tsiib am gteitag Jommen, he will come on Friday. 
 Note. — Translate the preposition, in before a word indicating a por- 
 tion of the day expressly pointed out, by the adverbial form. 
 Ex. — ^He goes to town in the afternoon, er ge^t SRai^mittagS in bie ©tabt. 
 
 § 105. — 95ci before a noun or pronoun means at, at 
 the house of ; while wit mean^ with, in the company of. 
 Ex. — Sie wo^neii bet un«, they live at our house. 
 
 ©age niit niit toem bu itntge^, unb ii) win bir fagen loer bu iij}/ tell 
 me mth whom you associate (or wJwse company you keep), and 
 I will tell you who you are. 
 Note. — IBci before the names of nations means among. 
 Ex. — '3ei ben ®iied)en unb SRiimetn, among the Greeks and Romans. 
 
 § I ©6. — The agent, after passive verbs, is usually 
 preceded by Von or ittti^, »Ott (French, de) generally 
 referring to a sentiment, and i»t6f (French, par) to an 
 outward action {or instrument). 
 
 Ex. — Et Wirb bon Sebetmann gea^tet, he is esteemed by everybody. 
 Et rourbe burd) SufaH gctobteti he was killed by_ accident. 
 
 § 107. — Uirt, before an infinitive, means in order to. 
 Ex. — 3^ tarn urn ©it ju fe^cn, I came (in order) to see you. 
 
 Theme XLIX. 
 
 Are you going into the country ? Goethe died at Weimar 
 in the year 1833. My friend arrived ia the beginning of 
 autumn. This book was not to my taste, I did not like it 
 {it did not please me). We met that gentleman on our jour- 
 ney in Spain. She has been veryimjust towards her teacher. 
 Did you arrive at or after five o'clock ? Before the church 
 there are three high poplars. She went from Hamburg to 
 Helgoland all alone. He lives with his brother, a German 
 merchant in London. The patient is at present out of dan- 
 ger. The dog sprang (out) from under the table. Our house 
 is twenty feet and a half deep by six wide, and eight long 
 William the Second was killed by an arrow in the Newforest. 
 Charles was wounded in his leg, and not in his arm. I have 
 very often a pain in my teeth {or tooth-ache). 
 
472 
 
 STOTAS THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 Sie toufte 3nicl.— (gortfe^ung.) 
 
 "Diefe (Srja^Iung iti ©eijiea erfiidtc ten ^bnig mtt gur^t, er f^flu* 
 berte wx bem ©djictfate Der Borigen ^Bnige juriirf unB rounfdjte, t^rcm 
 Ungliide ju entge^en. fir fa^ mtt ©d^redcn, bog fc^on einige SBoc^en 
 »on btefcm furjcn Sa^re »erfloffcrt maren, unb Da^ er eilctt miipte, Die 
 iibrigeit 3;age feiner Sftegierung beflo Bejfer ju nii^en. „SBetfer SSejier !■' 
 fprac^ er ju bem ®ctfle, „5tt |aji mtr metn liinftigea ©cfeictfat unt bie 
 iurje Daucr mclner fBntglit^en Wad^t cntbcift; okr td^ Bittc bic^, fage 
 mix an&i, toai ic^ t|un mug, wenn ic^ bas Slenb melitcr SBorgditger 
 sermeibcn will." — „Srtttncre bti^, Jperr!" ontroortete ber @ei(l, „bag 
 bu nacft auf unfcre 3nfrf getommeit Wjl ; benn ebcn \o »lr|l bu wteDcr 
 linauggckit ut^ niemala juriidfe^rcn. Sa tjl alfo nur ein etnjtgea 
 SQlittel mijglid^, bem 9KangeI sorjubeugen, ber in {encm Sanbe ber 25cr* 
 iannung bro|t: wenn Bu e^ namlic^ fruc^tbar mac^fl unb mit Sinwo^s 
 nern befe^efl. ©tea if} nai^ unfercn ©efe^cit DergBnnt, unb beine Un* 
 tert^anen finb bir fo ijolltommcn ge|orfam, bag ftc ^tnge^en »o bu |le 
 ^infenbejl. ©(^ide olfo Slrbeit^Ieute ^iniiber unb tag btemitficn getoer 
 tn fruditbarc Slccfcr ttcrwanbeln; baue ©tabic unb SBorratl^spufer unb 
 serforge fie mit 2e6en«mittcln. 5!Wit cinem SSort ; bcreite tir ein 
 neues Sfleic^, bejfcn ®in«5o|ner bid^ na(^ beiner SSerbannung mit greu^s 
 ben aufne'^men. 3tbcr etic, lag leinen 3lugenbticf soriibcr ge^en; benn 
 bie 3eit i(l turj, unb j[e me'^r bu gum Slnbau beiner tiinftigen SBo^^nung 
 t^ujt, befto gliidltc^er toirb bcin Slufcnt^alt bort fein. Senfe, bein 3a|r 
 ijl morgen f(%ort urn, unb nit^e beine grei'^eit wie ein gliii^tling, ber 
 bem SSerbcrben entge:6en »itl. SBcnn bu meincn SRat:^ uera^tcfl ober 
 jauber|i, fo bifl bu Berloren, unb langca Stent ifl bcin Soo^." 
 
 ®cr ^ijnlg war ein ftuger iSJlann, unb bie Stebc bca ©eiftes goB 
 feiner Sntfi^ticgung unb feiner SEl^atigfeit gliiget. gr fanbtc fogteid^ 
 cine Wm^t Untcrt^anen ob : |ie gingen mit greubcn unb griffen ba3 
 2Ber! mit gifcr an. !Dic 3nfet ftng an |i(^ ju scrfc^bnem. unb e^e 
 fec^g 9)lonbcn sergangen warcn, jlanbcn ©tiibtc auf i^rcn btit'^enbett 
 3luctt. Dejfcn ungead)tet tieg ber ^bnig in feinem gifer nic^t nac^j 
 er fanbtc immer me'^r ginmo'^ncr '^iniiber; bie folgenben waren nod^ 
 ^eubiger, al8 bie erflen, ba |ie in ein fo wo^t angebautes 8anb gingen, 
 baa t^re greunbc unb 2ltt»cr»anbtcn beico^nten, 
 (Sa^ittg foiflt.) 
 
CONSTBTJCTION. 473 
 
 LESSON L. Scftiott SO. 
 
 Oonstmction. (aSJottflcIIuttg.) 
 
 Eehiaek. — The German, like the Latin, admits of a great 
 variety in the arrangement of words in sentences, thus afford- 
 ing great facilities for securing proper emphasis, and for 
 imparting to its periods the same harmonious flow for which 
 the Latin classics are distinguished. But with all this free- 
 dom every word or member of a sentence in German takes 
 its position according to certain definite laws of arrange- 
 ment, which cannot be disregarded without great offence 
 against euphony. 
 
 I. The Principal or Simple Sentence. 
 
 a. COMMON CONSTRUCTION. 
 § 108. — 1. As in other languages, every simple sen- 
 tence must have at least two principal parts, 
 
 1. A subject, (noun or its equivalent), and a predicate 
 verb (expressed or implied).' 
 
 Ex. — ®tt8 SinS Wfint/ the ehiid cries. 
 
 Note. — The verbs fcilt (unless it signifies to exist), to be, tnctilcn, to 
 become, f^etncn, to seem, (Utiien, to remain, ]^et§cn, to be called {not to 
 call) serve merely as the copula, while the noun, pronoun, adjective, or 
 participle, which follows serves as the predicate, and is put in the same 
 case as the subject (uom.)'' (§ 25, p. 312, 1. ; § 9, Exc). 
 Ex.— ©in guter aHenfc^ i|l ein glutfliiScr aMcnfft, a good man is a 
 happy man. 
 Strnolb wurbe ciit SBettfttlftcr fcinea aJatcrlanbea, Arnold became a 
 traitor to his country. 
 
 2. If the predicate has an object, the latter constitutes 
 the third principal part, and is placed after the predicate. 
 
 Ex. — Sr f^tei6t cineit SBrief, he writes a letter. 
 
 • The subject is sometimes called the grarmnatical subject, and the 
 ■pio^csAe the grammatical predicate ; the entire subject is sometimes 
 called the logical subject, and the entire predicate, the logical predicate. 
 
 ' This is the case also with any of those verbs which in the active 
 govern two accusatives (p. 368, 2.) when employed passively. 
 
474 OONSTKUCTION. 
 
 3. When the leading verb is used in a compound tense, 
 the auxiliary holds the place of the predicate, and the 
 participle or infinitive stands last in the sentence. 
 
 Ex.— (Er 4 at gcfc^rteitn, he hm written. 
 
 ffiit ^aben beittctt SBvief er|allen, we haw recmed your letter. 
 
 Note. — When the auziliary is itself in a compound tense, the simple 
 tense only holds the place of the predicate, and the complement stands 
 even after the leadmg verb. 
 
 Ex. — £c i fi eine^ SSnixt^ini Befi^ulbigt tnorbeiif he has been accused 
 of (a) crime. 
 
 4. When the leading verb is a compound separable, 
 the radical holds the place of the predicate, and the par- 
 tide stands last in the sentence. 
 
 Ex.— ®tt« £i^t 8 e ^ t anS, the light goes out. 
 
 Note. — There are several phrases consisting of verbs and nouns, 
 some of which are accompanied by prepositions or adjectives, in which 
 the noun is made to serve the part of a separable particle of a compound 
 verb, and occupies also the same place. They are : 
 
 Stc^t geSett, to pay or give attention' SroJ b'lttttt, to bid defiance 
 
 fe|l ^altm, to hold fast wni ScBcn iringcn, to kUl 
 
 Ocfa^r laufcn, to run a risk um 9iat^ frageit, to ask advice 
 
 ®e:^6r geSetti to grant a hearing j« Orunbe ge^en, to perish 
 
 ^itlfe letjlen, to render aid ju Orunbe rid^ten, to ruin 
 
 in* SEStrf ffjen, to execute p |)itlfe f ommen, to come to the aid 
 
 Stat^ geieit, to advise ju Wixttai efTen, to dine 
 
 llill fle^en, to stand still ju ©tanbe Bringcn, to accomplish 
 
 ©orge ttttgen, to take care jU Xfjttt wetbeit, to fall to one's part 
 
 5. When there are two objects in a sentence, that of 
 
 the person precedes that of the thing. 
 
 Ex. — 3^ i)abc meincr @4toe{ter einm Srief gef^tieien, I have written ?»^ 
 sister a letter. 
 
 6. When both objects are persons, the accusative pre- 
 cedes the dative. 
 
 Ex.— 3ii| werbe 35ren So^n iweincm greunbe empfe^lm, I shall recom- 
 mend ^our son to my friend. 
 
 ' Compare French, faire attention (to make attention). 
 
CONSTRUCTION. 475 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. When one of the two objects is a personal pronoun, 
 place it before the noun. 
 
 Ex.— 4>crr ©^ulje ^at rair cinen SBejue^ ftigeflattet, Mr. Schulze tas paid 
 me i» visit. 
 
 2. When both objects are personal pronouns, the mono- 
 syllabic one is placed first (1.) ; but if both are monosyl- 
 labic, the accusative precedes (2.)'; e. g., 
 
 Ex. — (1.) Er ^atte eS S^nen flefc^itekn, he had written it (to) you. 
 (3.) Stnna ^nt fie mir jelie^en, Anna has lent them (to) me. 
 
 7. Adverbs and adverbial expressions of phce and 
 manner are placed, (1.) immediately before the participle, 
 when the verb stands in a compound tense ; but, (2.) 
 when the verb is used in a simple tense, such adverbs 
 are placed last. 
 
 Ex.— (1.) Str^akn baa fitnb iiicroH gefu#t, we have looked (for) 
 the child everywhere. 
 (3.) SBir erfitUm unfete 3)fti(i§t mit Srettien, we fulfil our duties 
 
 8. Adverbs of time and adverbial expressions of time 
 are generally placed, (1.) before the object, and (2) before 
 adverbs (or adverbial expressions) of place. 
 
 Ex. — (1.) 3^ tuerbe eiligfl eitien Sotm fenbcn, I shaU hurriedly despatch 
 a messenger. 
 (3.) gr fott gcflcrn f^on einen Srief gcfc^rteitn ^tt6en, he is said to 
 have written a letter already yesterday. 
 
 Note. — In a sentence, containing two adverbial expressions of time, 
 the true adverb precedes the noun used adverbially. 
 
 Ex.— ©ie mitlTen intmer (be«) St 6 e nbS ju ^aufe ikiim, you must alwaya 
 remain at home in the evening. 
 
 9. Personal pronouns without a preposition precede 
 adverbs of time. 
 
 Ex. — 3c^ ^aie i^n Kjorgejietn gefejeit, I saw him the day before yesterday. 
 
 ' SKir and bir, however, may be used before or after the accusativa 
 
476 
 
 CONSTEUCTION. 
 
 Exception, 
 
 Pronouns with a preposition follow the adverb and the 
 object. 
 
 Ex. — SWetne Xante ^at scfletn bicfea Suc^ Bci S^nen flefcl^en, my aunt saw 
 this book yesterday at your house. 
 
 10. The place for the negation ni^t is after the direct 
 object (accus.). 
 
 Ex. — 3i| ftnbe metne ®r«mmatif nii^tf I do not find my grammar. 
 
 Aarl $at feine ^TufgaBe itt^t gut gef^rie6en/ Charles has not written 
 his theme welL 
 
 Exception. 
 
 ^iH^t is placed hefcrre the direct object, when the latter 
 is preceded by a preposition. 
 Ex.— 3^ fpra^ ntc^t t)on biefem !t)in3e, I did not speak of this thing (affair). 
 
 11. Adverbs of place and manner {not time) stand after 
 Ex. — titm Sd^uellet i^ ni^t ^ter genxrettf your sister has not been here. 
 
 b. Inversion. 
 § 109. — The above rules refer only to regular or com- 
 mon construction. But this arrangement of words may 
 be inverted for the sake of giving especial emphasis to a 
 partictdar part of speech, by removing it from its usual 
 place to the beginning of the sentence. 
 
 INVERSION OF THE SUBJECT. 
 
 1. In German as in English, the subject and predicate 
 (verb) may be inverted ; 
 
 a. In interrogative sentences. 
 Ex.— ®rouB|l bu, »9« er fogt, do 3/0M believe what he says 1 
 
 ®oMtc e I ti ni^t gc^Btt :^aien, ahovU he not have heard it? 
 
 h. In optative and imperative sentences. 
 Ex.— ®4rci6e (b u) fofort, write (thou) at once 1 
 
 giitte e t bo^ ba9 nic^t 8ef(i§iieBett, Ma he only not written that I 
 
CONSTRUCTION. 477 
 
 c. As in English, in conditional sentences, when the 
 conjunction toenn, if, is not used. 
 
 Es.— SJBore ii% m<^t trant genjefen (instead of wcitn i(^ nic^t, &c.), had I 
 not been sick. 
 
 d. After adverbial conjunctions (see p. 329, IV.). 
 Ex. — Saum ]^ a 1 1 e i (^ Die Ipte geoffhet, scwrcdy had I opened the door. 
 
 INVERSION OP THE OBJECT. 
 
 2. The iuTersion of the object takes place when a par- 
 ticular stress is to be laid upon it. In such a case the 
 subject is placed after the verb. The sentence : 34) 
 ne^mc 3^r Slnerbieten mit greuben an, appears inverted thus: 
 
 S^r Knetiieten ne^itie ii^ mit greuben on, your proposal I accept 
 with pleasure. 
 
 3. Monosyllabic personal pronouns often precede the 
 subject when the latter is dissyllabic or polysyllabic. 
 
 Ex. — 2)« 3$nen SB i e ai a n b (Sttsa? in ben ffleg Icgt, as no one hinders you. 
 
 INVERSION OF ADVERBIAL EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 4. Adverbial expressions (especially those of time) 
 very frequently begin the sentence when a particular 
 stress is to be laid on them. Here also the verb pre- 
 cedes the subject. 
 
 Ex. — ©eficrn Slbcntl tarn mcine S^wejler in 3)ari8 on, last evening my 
 sister arrived at Paris. 
 
 5. According, to the sfress to be laid upon certain 
 words, the following and similar sentences may be ex- 
 pressed in various ways : 
 
 1. Der giirjl gaS bem Sauer ba9 ®elb, the count gave the money to the 
 peasant. 
 
 2. txxi ®elb gai ber gfirfl bem Sa«er. 
 
 3. ®em Sttuer gat ber gitr|J ba8 ®elb. 
 
 4. ®er Siitfi gai ba« ®elb bem Sauer. 
 
 5. ®a8 ®clb gaS bem Soucr ber gur|l. 
 
478 CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 EEMARK.^Aceording to some ancient obsolete forms which 
 
 poets frequently make use of, we might also say 
 
 (6.) Scm So^ne ber SJatet ben ©egen sa>. 
 (7.) 2)M aSater bem So^rie be« ©cjen gai. 
 
 II. The Accessory or Subordinate Sentence. 
 
 § 1 1 0. — ^An accessory sentence always begins either 
 with (1.) a relative pronoun, or (2.) a rdative adverb. The 
 order of the subject, object, and adverbials remaining 
 unchanged, the verb (predicate) is placed at the end of the 
 sentence. When (3.) the verb is used in a compound 
 tense, the participle or infinitive precedes tlie auxiliary. 
 
 Ex.— {1.) Saa ^<xai, toeliJeS wir son Sf^nen fauften, i|i tin fe^r oXiti, 
 the house (which) we bought of you, is a very old one. 
 
 (3.) Tlie Se^terin fragte mij, toarum bu ni^t in bte 'BijvXt t a m fl , 
 the teacher asked me why you did not come to school ? 
 
 (3.) ®er ©to(f, w e I c^ e tt \^ bcrloren ^ a 1 1 e , if! wiebergcfiinben 
 tsocbenf the cane wMeh I had lost, has been found again.* 
 
 Exception. 
 
 In a sentence containing two infinitives or an infinitive and 
 a participle, the auxiliary precedes. 
 
 Ex. — 2)er ©ee, in welc^cm ic^ biii^ IjaBe Saben fel^en, the lake in 
 which I have seen you bathing. 
 
 Note. — This is the case also when the infinitive form of the auxilia- 
 ries of mode is used in place of the participle (p. 110, IV.). 
 
 Ex.— 9R«n figte mir, ba5 ic^ bi^ ni^t toiirlie fe^en tannen, they told 
 me that I could not see yon. 
 
 in. The Compound Sentence. 
 
 § 1 1 1 . — ^The Compound Senteace is iormed either by 
 co-ordination or by sub-ordination. 
 
 a. CO-ORDINATE COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 § 1 13. — ^There are two ways of co-ordination, 
 
 ' The poots sometimes place the auxiliary first. 
 
CONSTEUCTION. 479 
 
 1. Two sentences may be placed simply beside each 
 other without any connection. 
 
 Ex. — ©ie ga^nen jtattetten, ei fdimettertm XxoaSfttm, the flags fluttered, 
 the trumpets resounded. 
 ®e^e (bu) linfg, i^ werbt xeH^ti ge^en, you go to the left, I will go 
 to the right. 
 
 Eemabk. — This omission of the conjunction is, in English, 
 called asyndeton. 
 
 2. They may be connected either by a demonstrative 
 pronoun (a.) ; by a co-ordinate conjunction (6.); or by an 
 adverbial conjunction (c). 
 
 Ex. — (a.) Sllexanbet ber ©roge unb E?tu« tBOren jtuci ntac^tige Sricger; jcner 
 Seriatib Sfficia^ctt mil 3ltt))fetleit, Iltcfer> &c-, Alexander the 
 Great and Cyrus were two mighty warriors, the former 
 joined wisdom to bravery, the latter, &c. 
 
 (6.) 3c6 scrlaffe bic^ jc^t, dbtr ii) werbe bi^ 6alb wieberfE^en, I leave 
 you now, but I shall soon see you again. 
 
 (c.) ®itfe ©ta^Ifebern ftnb ju ^art, tiePalb taugcn |te ntd)t pm ©d^rci* 
 ben, these steel-pens are too hard, Mnce they are not fit to 
 write loith. 
 
 Note. — Sentences joined by a relative pronoun are not considered as 
 compound, but as accessory sentencea 
 
 Ex.— 3(^ tjAit bai Sui$ et^alten, tocl^eS ®ie wit Bcfinbt JaScn, I have re- 
 ceived the book, which you sent me. 
 
 b. suboedinate compound sentences. 
 
 § llS.-^l. Compound sentences with subordinate 
 clauses consist of two essential parts, the principal sen- 
 tence, and the subordinate (accidental) sentences. Their 
 connection is effected by means of the subordinative con- 
 junctions, (see p. 832.) 
 
 2. Subordiaate clauses are characterized by the follow- 
 ing particulars : 
 
 a. They cause the verb to be removed to the end. 
 
 Ex. — S4 wax bunfel, «1« ic| i^n trof, it was dark, when I met him. 
 
480 CONSTErCTION. 
 
 b. In compound tenses the participle precedes the 
 auxiliary. 
 
 Ex.— l£r tonnte aiteifen, na^bem er einen 3)ap crdoltcn ^attt . 
 
 c. The particle (or prefix) of separable compound 
 
 verbs is not separated. 
 
 Ex.— ©ie ifi nic^t gefunb, toctl fie nic^t tagltii^ ttttSfo^rt, she is not well, 
 beccmse she does not ride out daily. 
 
 d. Depending cases are placed between the subject 
 
 and the verb. 
 
 Ex.— SBittbefl bu mir junien, tteRit tc^ Jefet ben Sricf Seiner ®^tnc|ler ntcis 
 ncm Cruller fenbe, would you be offended with me, if I should 
 now send your sister's letter to my brother ? 
 
 3. The subordinate sentence may be either the first 
 member or the second ; if it is placed first, the subject 
 of the principal sentence is placed after the verb. Fre- 
 quently this change is indicated by fo which must, how- 
 ever, not be translated. 
 
 Ex. — Er fi^reibt fciaen (SItern nid^t, weil er trfige iH, he does not 
 write to his parents, because he is lazy. 
 SB e i t e r tr oi g e i |i( (fo) fc^reiW er feinett ettern nic^t. 
 
 4. "When the pronoun of the subordinate sentence 
 represents a person, an inanimate object, or an abstract 
 idea of the principal sentence, the pronoun is removed 
 to the principal sentence, and the noun to the sub- 
 ordinate. 
 
 Ex. — Dbfc^on unfetc SJa^Sarin fe^r rcid^ tjl, t|l fie bo^ nii^t gludlid^, although 
 our neighbor (fern.) is very rich, she is, nevertheless, not 
 happy. (Regular order : Unf ere Sloftfiorin ijl bo^ nic^t glflcE' 
 Ii(i^, o6fc^on fte fe^r retc^ tjl.) 
 
 5. The subordinate sentence may even be inserted 
 
 between the words of the principal sentence, and that 
 
 without aflfecting the order of the words of the principal 
 
 sentence. 
 
 Ex.— fJati t^etlte tnir foglet^, aU ii$ Bon meincr iRcife juriitKe^rte, ben 
 3;ob bttncr ©^wefler mtt, they informed me of the death of 
 your sister, immediately on my return from my journey. 
 
CONSTEUCTION. 431 
 
 6. The conjunctions tventt and bo^ are frequently 
 omitted. In this case the verb is not removed to the end. 
 
 Ex. — iJvittc ic6 ti geujugt, fo ttiirte ic^ getn ju btr getommtn fein, had I known 
 it, I would gladly have come to you. 
 
 Remake. — Very frequently two or more subordinate clauses 
 occur in a compound sentence ; but they make no other 
 change in the arrangement of the words than if only one 
 were occurring. Each of them stands in its proper place. 
 We subjoin an example spacing the words forming the prin- 
 cipal sentence : 
 
 ^etnrti^ bet SBme wurbe in bie Slc^t erttart, mil cr fcinen 
 fiaifcr serlaffen ^atte, al« biefer wit ben lomtatbifc^en ©tabten foim^jftc, 
 welc^c ft^ bcr tttifprlic^en Dber^ctrf^aft ju entjie'^eii jlrebteti, Henry the 
 lion-hearted was outlawed, because he had left Ms emperor at- 
 the time when the latter fought the Lombardian cities, who at- 
 tempted to free themselves of the imperial government. 
 
 Reading Exercise L. 
 
 3^ Bc'^aupte, bag unfer ®eneral, we^en aKe feine ©olsaten tewun* 
 bcrn, uns pttc retten !onnen, tuenn tiii^t tie grofeUc6erjo^Ibe3 getntes 
 ieben SHiidjug unmBgU(^ gemo(i^t ptte. 3i^ fierce unfdJulJig, fagte 
 2ut>»ig XVI. auf tem ©i^affot, unt) bu unglMItd^eS SSot! — 9cr* 
 gefcen^ woltte er welter fpred^en, bcr Shrm ber 2:rotnmeItt iatdtt feine 
 ©ttmme. ^aum ^attc Slntontus bie Silai^ricfet Bon bent SEobe ber 
 gleopotra ge^brt, aii er felBjl ju pierien 6ef^Iof . "Liz Oatticr foc^ten 
 mit cent ?!Rut^c, ttclc^en ber T)urfl na^ ^a^t unb bie SSerjwetflung 
 giefit ; aber |ie unterlagen cnblld^ ben SRiJmern, weli^e eine au3ge3et(^* 
 netc ^riegafunfi: unb bie (kcngjle 9)tann«3ud)t unteficgSar ntafttc. 
 aSielleic^t ijl e« erIauM au fogen, bag bie augeronentlic^en SBort^eile ber 
 SRegierung be« erflen Sonfuls Sonaparte baS Unrei^t berfelBen wiebcr 
 gut gemai^t ^afccn; wenigjiens (ieUte er iiieratt bie Drbnung toicbcr 
 ^er; auferbent mug man auc^ an bie grogen ©c^roterigfeiten bcnfcn, 
 »eld|e er ju tefiegen :^atte. ^aum l^atte man bie Sinjel^etten (de- 
 tails) ber ?)tane be« SoiumBud erfa'^ren, ate man ben treutofcn Sc* 
 feeing fagte, fie o|nc i^n auSjufti^ren. ?Wan riiftete ein ©c^iff mi, 
 unb ga6 bcrn ^apitiin bie Slnweifungen, we^e man son bem ©cnuefer 
 
482 CONSTKDCTION. 
 
 er^aUeti |atte. 3ltlein Wcfe ®y))et)ition '^attc fctitcn erfolgj Solum;! 
 6ua, aufgeBrad^t iiter tiefc areuloftsfeit, serlicp £tffaBon, un* ric^tetc 
 [eine Slide (directed his attention) nad^ ©panien. 
 
 Theme L. 
 
 While the Portuguese were endeavoring to reach India 
 by continuing their explorations on the African coast, Co- 
 lumbus asserted that he could reach this land by steering 
 west. " They who have employed the study of history, for (ju) 
 their instruction, for the regulation of their private matters, 
 and for the management of public affairs, must agree with 
 me, that it is the most pleasant school of wisdom. It is a 
 familiarity with past ages, and an acquaintance with all the 
 heroes of them.' It is, it you wiU pardon the similitude, a 
 perspective-glass carrying' your soul to (in) a vast distance, 
 and taking iu the farthest objects of antiquity. It infoims 
 the understanding by the memory ; it helps us to judge of 
 what will happen' by showing* us the like revolutions of for- 
 mer times. For mankind being* the same in all ages, agi- 
 tated by the same passions, and moved to action^ by the same 
 interests, nothing can come to pass,'' but (o^nc iaf) some pre- 
 cedent' of the like nature (9lrt) has already been produced ; 
 and having the causes before our eyes, we cannot easily be 
 deceived in the effects, if we have judgment enough to draw 
 the parallel." — Detden. 
 
 Reading Lesson. 
 
 2)te toiifle 3nfri.— (®^tug.) 
 
 Untertepn tarn iai Snbe id 3a^re3 immer iia^cr. !Die sorigcn 
 ^ijnigc fatten uor tiefem SlugenBUdc gejittert, bicfer fa^ i|m ntit ©e^n^ 
 
 ' See p. 181, V. » See p. 434, 2. 
 
 ' What will happen, baa BuKnftige. * See p. 435, Note 3. 
 
 ' See p. 435, 5. ° StngettieBetl ju :^ttnbeln. 
 
 ' Otf^ejen, fUs ereignen. " Sin ftu^cret gall. 
 
OONSTBCCTION. 483 
 
 fu(^t entgegmj tenn er ging in cin Sanb, m er ft(^ burc^ felnc Huge 
 a:^atigtelt einc cauernte 2Bot)nung gekut |atte. — ©et fceftimmte Sag 
 erfc^ien cnDli(|. Ser ^ijnig wurJc in fcincm ^^atajte crgrijfen, feints 
 2;ia5em3 unti felncr !bnlgtic^en ^Iciiung Uvaukt iint auf bag unser* 
 mciKlii^c ®(^ijf gebrac^t, tos t^n na^ fcincm 33crknnung«ortc fii^rtc. 
 .Slaum war cr abet am Ufcr ter neuen Snfct gclanbet, als i:§m bic Sin* 
 njo^ncr mit grcutcn cntgegcn ciltcn, i^ mit grower ®^rc cmpftngcn, 
 unb feln ^aupt ftatt jcnea Diabem^, bcffen Jpcrrlic^Ieit nur cin 3a^r 
 tt)at)rte, mit etnem un»crtBclf(ic(5en Stumenfranjc fc^miicftcn. £)er 
 SlUmiifi^tigc belo^ntc [cine aScig^cits Sr gab i|m tic Unfletbli^fnt fel^ 
 ncr Untert^ancn unb mac^te i^n p i^rcm ctcigen ^finigc. 
 ***** 
 
 T)it rei^e, wo^tt^iitigc ^SJlann t^ ©ott; ber ®Uaw, ben feln §err 
 fcrtfcnbct, ijl ber 9)ienf^ bei fciner ®cburt ; bie Snfet, wo er anianbet, 
 t|l bie SDBelt ; bie Sinwo^ner, bie i^m freubig cntgegcn tommen, fmb 
 bic Sltern, bie fiir ben nacften SBeinenbcn forgen. ®er Segier, ber ibn 
 »on bem traurigcn <B&iid\al, iai i^m bc»orjlc|t, unterriditct, ijl bie 
 SBeis^cit. Das So^^r fciner Slcgicrung ift ba« mcnfdjlic^e Seben, unb 
 bic wiijtc Snfcl, wo^in er gefii^rt wirb, bic funftige SCcIt. Die 3lrs 
 beit«Ieute, bic cr bo'^in fenbct, fmb bic gutcn SBcrte, bie er wo^rcnb 
 feincg Sebens Dcrri^tct. Die ^ijnige aber, ml&)t wx it)m ba'^ln* 
 gegangcn (Inb, o'^nc iiber baS UngliicE, bas i'^ncn brobte, naiSaubcntcn, 
 finb biejcnigctt f^ijrii^tcn ?!Jienf4en, bic |tc^ Uoi mit irbifi^cn greubcn 
 befc^aftigen, o'^nc on i^r Sebcn nac^ bem Sobe ju tcnfen; [it werben 
 mit ewigem Slcnb befiraft, Wcil ftc Bor bem SL^ronc bc3 2lt(ma(^tigcn 
 mit §anbcn crfdjcincn, bie an guten SBcrfen leer jinb. 
 
 ©0 fe'^et i^r nun, ^a^ ber iiJlenfc^ burc^ bie SBcrfe gercd)t wirb, nicfet 
 bur^ ben (Slauben attcin. 
 
484 
 
 LIST OP lEKEQCIiAB VERBS. 
 
 An Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs. 
 
 This list contains tlie principal parts of all irregular verbs, also the 
 Imperfect Subj., the 2d and 3d Singular Indie. Present, and the 3d 
 Sing. Imperative, whenever they differ from the forms of the regular 
 verb. The verbs or forms marked * are also regula/r; those marked f 
 are parOy irregvlar (see p. 342). Forms given in parenthesis ( ) are rather 
 unusual, poetical, or dialectic. The figures on the margin indicate the 
 number of the irregular verbs found on pp. 229—372 inclusive. 
 
 Imperative. PartUAple. 
 
 Saden, ') to bake 
 BefeMen, to command 
 SefleiSen (fiW, to exert 
 one^B self 
 
 feesinnen, to begin 
 
 iei^en, to bite 
 
 *6encmmen, to oppress 
 
 Secgen, to hide 
 •Setftcn, to burst, 
 
 crack 
 * tenegen/ ') to induce 
 tiegen, to bend 
 iieten, to offer, bid 
 itnben, to bind, tie 
 bitten, to beg, request 
 Blafen, to blow 
 Blet&en, to remain 
 Mei^en, ') to bleach 
 braten, •") to roast 
 ive^en, to break 
 
 •i" Brennen, to bum 
 
 iiringen, to bring 
 <X3enten, to think 
 Mngen, to hire 
 
 bcet^en, to thrash 
 
 btltigcn, to press, nrge 
 
 bfitfen, to be permitted 
 
 (Smtifinben, to feel 
 
 empfe^Ieit, to recom- 
 mend 
 
 cntvinnen, to escape 
 erEiiren, to choose 
 «it6?tl)en, ') to become 
 
 extinct 
 •erWallen, to resound 
 •ett4«*eni°) to become 
 
 frightened 
 
 Present Indie. 
 2(i and M Fere. 
 
 *td(Ifl, BStet 
 
 Sltgp, Sitgt 
 iitfteft, iicfl 
 
 (toutft, Seut) 
 Mafeti, WaKc)t 
 
 * 6totft, 6rot 
 Iiric[)(t, i\\S)t 
 
 *fcril^ejl, btiWt 
 
 b«tf, botffl, b«tf 
 
 cmpfieMjl, 
 
 tiflep 
 
 ctti(#ell, eilltt^t 
 
 Imperfect 
 Ind. ana Sub. 
 
 But, ifife 
 SeWI, ScWIe- 
 [Befip 
 itfOi, Feflilie 
 begonn, Begiins 
 
 ne, Begdnne 
 Uif Siffe 
 (Betlomm, ie= 
 
 tlommO [ge 
 BMg,Batge,6M- 
 ( Batft, BStft 
 1 Bocji, BBrfle 
 Bewog, BenBge 
 Bog, BBge 
 Bof, B5tc 
 Banb, Bdnbe 
 Bat, Bote 
 BIteS, BIteie 
 BtieB, BlieBc 
 Bli^, Bli^e 
 
 • Bttct, Brlete 
 ixa^t Brd^e 
 Brtinnte, Bcen= 
 
 nete 
 Bia^te, Br&c^te 
 ba^te, bai^te 
 
 * bung, bfinge 
 ,ibtam,bcaMe 
 
 < bcDfi^,biDfa;c 
 s btang, bi&nge 
 'btung, btunge 
 bucfte, bStfle 
 crnvfanb, cm= 
 
 ))fdnbe 
 empfo^t, ems 
 ffoBIe, (eins 
 
 entrann 
 eilot, eitBre 
 
 eilotiB, eclif^e 
 et(^i!U,et(^6ne 
 ecftniad, et: 
 ideate 
 
 Befie^I 
 
 Bltg 
 Biril 
 
 (Bent) 
 
 Bti^ 
 * bviffi 
 
 enitific^I 
 
 etiiiif 
 
 ect^ctct 
 
 geBaden 
 Bcfoflen 
 
 Befliffen 
 
 Bcgonnen 
 
 geBtnen 
 Bc(lom = 
 
 men 
 geBoigen 
 
 gcBociten 
 
 Bemogen 
 
 geBogen 
 
 geBoten 
 
 gcBunben 
 
 geBeten 
 
 geBIoten 
 
 geBlieBcn 
 
 geBlidjen 
 
 geBraten 
 
 geBtodjen 
 
 gcBcannt 
 
 geBcac^t 
 gcbaiTjt 
 gebungen 
 
 gcbcofcljen 
 
 gebcungen 
 
 gcbutft 
 
 emffunben 
 
 cravfo^Icn 
 
 enttonnen 
 ettoten 
 
 etloic^cn 
 ecf^oUen 
 
 etWroSen 
 
 M. 
 
 n 
 
 181 
 
 70 
 110 
 
 40 
 41 
 HI 
 
 rj3 
 
 124 
 182 
 189 
 13 
 92 
 72 
 14 
 38 
 
 81 
 62 
 179 
 
 43 
 
 183 
 156 
 
 193 
 121 
 
 44 
 
 1) Bairn is also regular when transitive, escept the participle gcBaden. 
 
 2) Semegen In other senses than " induce " (to a decision) is regular. 
 8) SBlei^en as transitive is regular ; it is also regular as intransiUm. 
 
 4) IBcatcn is also regular, as transitive, except in the participle geBtaten. 
 
 6) See I6Wen. 
 
 6) Qctc^ieitcn is irregular only as intransitive. 
 
LIST OF rEBEGULAH VERBS. 
 
 485 
 
 Itiflnitlve. 
 
 enen, to eat 
 gajten, to drive 
 fallen, to bll 
 *foIten, tofold 
 
 iangen, to catch 
 e^teii, to fight 
 inben, to find 
 [et^ten, to twist, twine 
 licjen, to fly 
 [teSen, to fiee 
 lie^en, to flow 
 'fcagen, to EBk 
 frejfen, to eat, devonr 
 ftieten, to freeze 
 (Sttinn, to ferment 
 aeSircn, to hring forth 
 ge&eit; to give [mand 
 geBieten, to order, com- 
 jebeiBen, to thrive 
 gefducn, to please 
 jeBeit, to eo 
 gettiigen, to sncceeJ 
 Belten, to be worth 
 acnefen, to get well 
 
 genie^en, to enjoy 
 
 geffie^en, to happen 
 geiBtnner, to win, to 
 
 gain 
 glefien, to pour 
 Blet^en, ') to resemble 
 gleitcn, to glide, slide 
 *aItramen,tobnm faintly 
 flraien, to dig 
 flreifen,to gripe, to grasp 
 fiaBen, to nave 
 fialten, to hold 
 Sangen, ") to h 
 $auen,'} tohew 
 ititn, to lift 
 
 iei^en, to be called 
 Belfen, to help 
 
 * ffetfen, to chide 
 ffennen, to know 
 
 * tlUien, to cleave 
 *nimmen, to climb 
 
 Itingen, to soond 
 *lnclfeti, to pinch 
 •Jneijjen, '■ 
 {Dtntnen, to come 
 lonneiu to can 
 
 * Iteif^en, to scream 
 Mcc^en, to creep 
 Ifiten, to choose 
 Ssben, to load 
 laffen, to let 
 laufen, to nm 
 leiben, to snfibr 
 lei^eti, to lend 
 Ie(en, to read 
 Kcgtn, to lie 
 
 Present Indie. Impeifect 
 M and 3d Pen. Jnd. and Sid 
 
 tjieft, i|t 
 
 fdngft, fangt 
 
 *ni^tejl, fli^t 
 (fleuaft, fleugt) 
 ffleu^ft, Heui^t) 
 ffleuSejl, jleu|t) 
 fcaaft, ftagt 
 friifefl, ftilt 
 
 •geBtetfl, geBiett 
 aifeM, gi(c)6t 
 (gebeutfi, geBeut) 
 
 giUP, gitt 
 
 (geneune(i, ge= 
 neufi) 
 
 gcWie^t 
 
 Cgeutfeil) (geujl) 
 
 gcaBft, grdtt 
 
 ')CLt ~ 
 
 mi 
 jongft, ^angl 
 
 ^ilfil, W 
 
 : :i 
 
 (Bmmp, Bmrat) 
 lann, lannfi, lann 
 
 (Iteii^ft, txmSjt) 
 
 •(Iab(e)n,tot(c)t) 
 Io!!c(J,M|ft 
 •louffl, louft 
 
 ItefeMt«((e)' 
 
 0.% a^e 
 ^uBc, ffl^ve 
 id, fiele 
 
 W We 
 trot, frire 
 * go^t, goitre 
 geBn, geBare 
 goB, gSBe 
 geBot 
 
 *gebie5,geble^e 
 gefiel, gettele 
 ging, gtnge 
 gelang, gelange 
 gaUgaIte(g51te) 
 genas, geniife 
 
 genoj, genBJlc 
 
 geW(i^,gef^a^e 
 gemanti, ges 
 iconneigewanne 
 
 8f.6-g6m 
 
 glit^, gMe 
 
 glitt, glitfe 
 
 glDmm,gI5mme 
 
 gtuB, gtuBe 
 
 Stiff, gvtffe 
 
 Mtte, Batte 
 
 Bielt, ^telte 
 
 Bi(c)ngBi(e)nge 
 
 *5ieB, SieBe 
 ( BoB, BBBe 
 ■)«u6,BiiBc) 
 
 Bie|, Me 
 
 ?iff,fiffe [fe) 
 lannte, tennete 
 HoB, lloBe 
 nomm, IKmme 
 Hang, IWnge 
 (Hung, tlfinge) 
 Iniff, Jnlffe 
 Init))), Cnip))e 
 lam, Mme 
 {onnte, tSnnte 
 friW 
 
 tcoi^, lc6$e 
 tor, tore 
 *IuB, Hibe 
 lieg, tlege 
 lief, Hefe 
 litL ntte 
 Iie$, lie^e 
 Ia«, lafe 
 lag, Mge 
 
 Imperative. Pardeiple. 
 
 gegcffen 
 
 gefaBren 
 
 gefaUen 
 
 gcfalten 
 
 gefangeti 
 
 gejo^ten 
 
 gefunben 
 
 geffoi^ten 
 
 gcgogen 
 
 genoBen 
 
 geftoffen 
 
 gefcagt 
 
 gefteffen 
 
 geftoten 
 
 gego^cen 
 
 geBjnen 
 
 geaeben 
 
 geBoten 
 
 gebieBen 
 
 gefauen 
 
 gegangen 
 
 gelungen 
 
 gegolten 
 
 genefen 
 
 genoffen 
 
 gef^e^en 
 
 getvonnen 
 
 fli*t 
 (fteuL 
 (fteuft) 
 (fleuK 
 
 m' 
 
 • geBiet 
 
 aitc)6 
 
 (geBeut) 
 
 gitt 
 
 (geneuf) 
 (gcf^ie^) 
 
 (3«"W 
 
 m 
 
 (fteudi) 
 Hes"" 
 
 gegoffen 
 
 gcgllmen 
 
 gcglitten 
 
 geglommen 
 
 gcgraBen 
 
 gcatlffen 
 
 geBaBt 
 
 genanen 
 
 gcBangen 
 
 gefauen 
 
 ge^oBen 
 
 geBet^en 
 gcBoIfen 
 gefiffin 
 geEannt 
 geflDBen 
 gellommen 
 
 gellungen 
 
 gelnlffeit 
 
 geEniptien 
 
 gctDtnmen 
 
 geJonnt 
 
 gcttiWcn 
 
 gclrocSen 
 
 gctoreix 
 
 gclabcn 
 
 gclaffen 
 
 gctaufen 
 
 gelittcn 
 
 gelte^en 
 
 gctcfen 
 
 getegen 
 
 1) ©lei^en, to make similar, having a transitive meaning, is sometimes regular. 
 
 2) jgangen is sometimes confonnded in its forms with the transitive ^angen, to hong, 
 which is regular, 
 
 3) jgauen, in the sense of to hew to jiieces (split) or to work by hewing, is more 
 accurately regular. 
 
486 
 
 LIST OF IKREanLAK VERBS. 
 
 tniflnitlve. 
 
 *I6I(§en, •) to extingnish 
 tugen, to He 
 Sffia^len,') to grind 
 nieiben, to sbon 
 
 * melten, to milk 
 meffcn, to measure 
 miBfaHen, todispl 
 itiilUnsen/ to faU 
 
 mitjicn, to oblige 
 SKe^men, to take 
 
 nennen, to name 
 
 ipfeifen, to whistle 
 
 * pflegen, to cherish 
 
 *))tei(en, »)to praiBe,extol 
 •Duelten,*) to gush forth 
 !Rac!)en, •) to avenge 
 ratten, to advise 
 teiten, to rah 
 rei6en, to rend 
 reiten, to ride 
 nnnen, to run 
 lie^en, to smell 
 
 tinjen, to wring, wrestle 
 
 ttnnen, to run 
 
 tufen, to call 
 
 * Saljen, to salt 
 faulcn, to drink 
 
 * fougcn, to suck 
 
 • t^affcn, •) to create 
 *fmauett, to resound 
 
 • it^eltsn, ') to part 
 f^etnen; to shine 
 
 f^elten, to scold, chide 
 
 leten, to shear 
 lieSen, to shove, push 
 lie^en, to shoot 
 inieitf to flay 
 lofen, to sleep 
 ilogcn, •) to strike 
 linden, to sneak, steal 
 into 
 
 * Weifcn, •) to sharpen 
 "ilciSen, to slit, split 
 
 ilielen, to lock 
 ilingen, to sling, wind 
 imet^en, to fling 
 
 • Wmeljen, '") to (s)melt 
 
 • WnauScn (fftnieSen), to 
 snort, hreathe 
 
 fAneiben, to cut 
 
 * \iixmim, to screw 
 
 I Present Indie. 
 I ad and 3d Pen. 
 
 liidjeU, HW(e)t 
 Icuqjl, Icugi) 
 [ina^Ijl, mo^lt) 
 
 (mlttft, mint) 
 raiifeft, intfKOt 
 see fallen 
 
 mag, maajl, mag 
 mut, mu;t, mu^ 
 nimmft, nimmt 
 
 (luiHti, quim 
 •tat^il, ratl^ 
 
 (teuSjjl, xeue^t) 
 'fouffl,fdufi 
 
 K^iltjl, Mitt 
 *Wicit(l, Wlett 
 
 (Wctt|e(l, f^eu|t) 
 
 j*Iam, Mlift 
 {4ld9(l,rtla9t 
 
 Imperfect 
 Ind. and Sub. 
 
 log, I6ae 
 * mu^f, mu^Ic 
 raieb, micbc 
 moU, m&lU 
 ma^i ma^e 
 miefiel [linae 
 mipang, mif^ 
 mot^te, mic^te 
 mii^te, mfipe 
 na^m, nd^me 
 ■ *nonnte, nen= 
 nete 
 
 pftog, pflSgc, 
 
 ptieS, prieie 
 quoU, qu5ae 
 (toft, rSiJe) 
 tiet]?, rUt^e 
 rieb, rieie 
 rij, tiBe 
 ritt, ttttc 
 *rannte, tenncte 
 xoif, x'oijt 
 
 'rang, range 
 rung, tftnge 
 lann, t&nne, 
 ronne 
 
 " rief, tlefe 
 
 [off, \m 
 
 f*uj, fftufe 
 (Soir, (tboffe 
 Mieb, Mtebe 
 mien, Sqitm 
 Matt, MiWtt, 
 
 Wott) MSttc) 
 
 «Dt, Wore 
 jmo6, t^obe 
 \Ao%, M6(fe 
 fSunb, ttunbc 
 iffllief, (Stiefe 
 i4lug, Wjluge 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 m 
 
 (leug) 
 
 PartUAple. No. 
 
 Weu^eft.WIeu^t) 
 
 WmtJjefi 
 
 imitj(e)l 
 
 (milf) 
 
 nimm 
 
 quilt 
 
 (leu^) 
 
 (ftloS, Wtofte 
 Wlang, Wfange 
 WmiS, Wmifie 
 
 f^molj, WraBIje 
 
 Wnot, f finite 
 Mnitt, Mnitte 
 f4to6, TOtcbe 
 
 wat 
 
 f^ier 
 
 (WleuB 
 
 Wmilj 
 
 getofi^en 
 
 gclogen 
 
 gemotlen 
 
 gemieben 
 
 gemolfcn 
 
 gemcffen 
 
 mi|fallett 
 
 mipungen 
 
 gemo^t 
 
 gemu^t 
 
 genommen 
 
 genannt 
 
 geppfien 
 
 gepftogen 
 
 gepriefcn 
 
 gequoUen 
 
 (geto^en) 
 
 getatfien . 
 
 gerieben 
 
 getijjen 
 
 geritten 
 
 gerannt* 
 
 geto^en 
 
 gerungen 
 
 geronncn 
 
 getufen 
 
 gefaljen 
 
 gcioffcn 
 
 gefogen 
 
 gejftaffen 
 
 geiqouen 
 
 gewieben 
 
 gef^ienen 
 
 gefj^Dlten 
 
 geffioten 
 
 getnoben 
 
 geWoffen 
 
 getnunben 
 
 geralafen 
 
 gestagen 
 
 geWtiebcn 
 
 geWtiffen 
 
 gewliffni 
 
 gewtoficn 
 
 gemlungcn 
 
 gcWminen 
 
 153 
 107 
 10 
 95 
 115 
 33 
 IS 
 
 loe 
 
 47 
 
 79 
 
 116 
 
 96 
 117 
 190 
 20 
 97 
 80 
 81 
 64 
 132 
 
 168 
 185 
 
 159 
 
 160 
 
 5 
 
 131 
 
 43 
 
 118 
 133 
 134 
 180 
 21 
 
 84 
 135 
 
 85 
 
 geft^moljcn 119 
 
 getAnobcn 
 gemnitten 
 gewi'oben 
 
 161 
 86 
 
 1) fiBMcn is generally only reguhur when transitive. 
 
 2) 3Ha?ten, to grind, is generally regular now, except the participle gema^tcn. 
 
 3) SSieifen is sometimes regular, though more accurately i/rregular. 
 
 4) Ouellen, when transitive, to swell, soak, is regular. 
 6) iJio^en is rarely used as an irregular verb. 
 
 6) SiMfen, meaning to be busy (e. g. {i^ ju— ma^en), or to procure la generally re^rt- 
 la/r. Slnfffiaffen is also regular. 
 
 7) S^ciben, when transitive, meaning to di^oin, is regular. 
 
 8) SiatbWagen and berat^Wagen are regular. 
 
 9) S^IeiKn in other meanings than to whet, sharpen, is more properly regular. 
 101 S^weljen, as a transitive, is properly regular. 
 
LIST OP IRBEGULAB VEBBS. 
 
 487 
 
 'j^ttSin, ») to Btartle 
 mmim, to write 
 Mrclen, to cry 
 fmteiten, to stride 
 •j^coten, to nibble 
 fqiDiieti/ to fester 
 
 * Wmeijen,') to be silent 
 
 * Wiuetleii, ') to swell 
 
 f^iDimmen, to swim 
 
 f^tDtnben, to vanisb, I 
 disappear ) 
 
 Wmlngcn, to swing 
 
 fc^mScen, to swear 
 
 fe^en, to see 
 fein, to be 
 
 t fenben, to send 
 
 * fieben,*) to boil 
 nmen, to sing 
 finlen, to sinE 
 
 finnen, to tbink 
 
 fi^en, to sit 
 
 * Jpoltert, to split 
 
 * jpeien, ') to spit 
 
 fpinnen, to spin 
 
 Mei|en, to split 
 uceneii/ to speak 
 JjirieBett, to sproat 
 ipringen, to spring 
 ftei^en, to sting, prick 
 
 * fteim, •) to stick 
 
 fie^en, to stand 
 
 fte^Ien, to steal 
 
 (leigcn, to mount 
 
 flecBen, to die 
 
 fUeBen; to fly (as dnst) 
 
 fltnten, to stink 
 
 no^en, to pnsb 
 jicei($en, to nib 
 fttelten, to strive 
 St^un, ') to do 
 ttoaen,') to carry 
 Ireffen, to hit 
 tcetben, to drive 
 treten, to tread 
 
 Pres&nt Indie. 
 Zd and Sd Pers. 
 
 Wtiiifi, wtidi) 
 
 (^minii, wiuim 
 
 6in, Sijl, i|l 
 
 fptiM,fBtie^i 
 
 (fpteu6e|i,(|)teu|t) 
 
 fH*li7fli*~ 
 m% iliift) 
 
 (Htbil, |Ht6t 
 
 trogfl, ttogt 
 ttiffll^Wfft_ 
 
 tttttft, tritt 
 
 Imperfect Imperative. Participle. No. 
 Ind. and Sub. 
 
 ((i^tai, Wtoile) 
 (ficieb, Mtiebc 
 iffirte, f^riee 
 f^citt, Wtitte 
 
 fc^ivieg, fc^miege 
 
 f^tcamm, 
 f^wamme 
 O^memme) 
 fc^roonb, 
 
 f^ivanbe 
 fe^mong, 
 
 WiBonge 
 
 f^mung, 
 
 . Mmtage 
 
 (oiror (mtDoce 
 
 (f^niurif^iifire 
 
 Bot, mate 
 *(onbte, fenbete 
 
 fott, ?6tte 
 fong, fange 
 fan!, fanft 
 tann, (fonne), 
 f&nne 
 f«6, We 
 
 fple, fpice 
 fponn, fpanne, 
 (fponn, ifonnc) 
 
 SptoJ, fptofje 
 prang, fprdnge 
 taS), )ta(^e 
 tal, (lite 
 J (ianb, fianbe 
 ■) ((lunb, (lunbe) 
 (ftajl, flo^Ie 
 
 (lieg, (licgc 
 ( ftarb, ftotbe, 
 
 1 (tlurb), (IntSc 
 
 flob, Hobe 
 ((iont, (lanfe 
 1 (jlunt, ftitnte) 
 
 (Hej, ftieSe 
 
 fttic^, ftri^e 
 
 fbitt, ftritle 
 
 t^of), t^ate 
 
 tcug, trime 
 
 ttof, tiofe 
 
 ttieb, triebe 
 
 ttat, trftte 
 
 Wtiil) 
 
 fie?(e) 
 fei 
 
 fpcii^ 
 (tpteu© 
 
 m~ 
 
 (ftitf) 
 
 ftte^ 
 fHrS 
 
 floWO 
 
 hiff_ 
 ttttt 
 
 (geWtoJen) 
 
 gefmtleben 
 
 gewtien 
 
 gefncitten 
 
 getificoten 
 
 gemworen 
 
 gefc^mies 
 
 gen 
 gef^woaen 
 
 gefil^Dom: 
 men 
 
 geMmuns 
 ben 
 
 gefc^mun: 
 gen 
 
 gefi^woten 
 
 gcfe^en 
 
 gemejen 
 f gefanbt 
 I iejenbet 
 
 gefottcn 
 
 gefungen 
 
 gejunfen 
 
 gefonnen 
 
 gcteffen 
 
 geipalten 
 
 gefplen 
 
 gefponncn 
 
 gefpltffen 
 
 gefpwaen 
 
 getproffen 
 
 gejprungcn 
 
 gefioAcn 
 
 gefioaen 
 
 geflanben 
 
 geftoblen 
 
 geftlegen 
 
 gefiotben 
 
 geftoben 
 
 geftnnfen 
 
 geftoben 
 
 gcfttiSen 
 
 gefiritien 
 
 get^an 
 
 getragen 
 
 getroffen 
 
 gettieben 
 
 getceten 
 
 loa 
 101 
 87 
 
 Ifil 
 102 
 120 
 
 18« 
 170 
 
 m 
 
 154 
 
 34 
 
 65 
 
 136 
 
 172 
 173 
 
 187 
 
 191 
 
 103 
 
 188 
 
 137 
 174 
 60 
 61 
 
 62 
 104 
 
 63 
 138 
 175 
 
 90 
 87 
 7 
 64 
 
 105 
 
 1) S^reden, when transitive (to frighten), is regular, and irregnlar when intransitive. 
 
 2) ©roroeigen, as transitive, to ^i^snoe, and nsed for berf^nretgen, is generally re^utor. 
 
 3) ©(^TOelfen, when transitively used, is regular. 
 
 i) @ieben, when transitive, is more accurately regular, 
 
 5) ©peien is sometimes regular. 
 
 6) ©teden is generally regular, especially when transitive. 
 
 7) In common conversation the Imperfect Ind. of tbun is oftentimes tt)it, especially 
 it. is used as auxiliary in dialectic German, 
 
 8) SBeontiagen, and beonftvagen, (from ber Slntrng and bet Stuftrac) are regular. 
 
488 
 
 LIST OF IBREatTLAB VEBB8. 
 
 Iftflnitive. 
 
 * iriefcn, to drip 
 Mnlen, to drink 
 tritgen, to deceive 
 
 SSetberien, to epoil, rain 
 
 vecbtie^en, to vex 
 
 vetgeffen, to forget 
 « uer^e^Ien, to conceal 
 »etlteten, to lose 
 veilif^en, to extingnish 
 
 * eenDitren, to entangle 
 snSa^fen, to grow 
 
 * tsMen, ') to weigh 
 iDBTOeti, to wash 
 
 * iceUn, to weave 
 
 * iteie^cn, ') to yield 
 ivcifen, to enow 
 
 i nenbeti, to torn 
 
 Kttim, to eae 
 
 icecben, to be, become 
 
 Itetfcn, to throw 
 
 ■(• utegen, •) to weigh 
 trinbeiii to wind 
 + nilKen, to know 
 tBoKen, to wish 
 Bei^en, to accuse 
 jteBen, to draw, pnll 
 jningen, to force, com- 
 pel. 
 
 Preseni Indlc. 
 id and 3d Pars. 
 
 (tteuf jl, tteufO 
 
 t)erbici|i, oecbirbt 
 
 (veibceulO 
 
 vergilefl, vergi^t 
 
 see ecUfi^en 
 niai^fcft, n>&4|l 
 
 nitbfl, uitbt 
 ii)it(l, niib 
 ivitffi, ntcft 
 
 icciS, mtiit, ntli 
 minfi, miU 
 
 (jeui^il, jeu^t) 
 
 Imperfect 
 InU, and Sub, 
 
 troff, ti'iiife 
 trant, tcanle 
 trog, trdgc 
 uerbarb, cerbtirf 
 
 be, (oetborbe) 
 oerbrol, i)er= 
 
 btine 
 vetgal, vetg&lc 
 
 eeclDc, eetlotc 
 
 nog, wbge 
 nmilj, tDufc^e 
 noil nobe 
 wic^, niibe 
 rates, uiefe 
 *nanbte, men: 
 
 bete 
 Barb, (ffiSrSe), 
 tofttbe 
 nutbe, wnrbe 
 ivatf, (nacfe), 
 
 mutfc 
 wog, ivbge 
 n>anb, nanbe 
 mu^te, wiilte 
 
 aie^, ite^e 
 i'ii JOSe 
 
 jmang, jtoSnge 
 
 Imperative. 
 (tteuf) 
 
 uerbirb 
 
 (DCtbteuS) 
 oetgtS 
 
 witb 
 toirf 
 
 Porficipfe. No. 
 
 getioffen 
 getrunlen 
 getcogen 
 
 oerbocben 
 
 Berbto((en 
 
 Dernejfen 
 vecbo^Ien 
 oerloren 
 
 oermorren 
 
 gemac^Ien 
 
 genogen 
 
 genofi^eii 
 
 geicoben 
 
 geiut^en 
 
 gewtefen 
 
 J genmnbt 
 
 ( genenbet 
 
 getsorben 
 
 gewotben 
 
 gewrafen 
 
 geivogen 
 
 gemunben 
 
 geteu^t 
 
 gejle^en 
 gejogen 
 
 gejiBuiigen 
 
 139 
 176 
 168 
 
 142 
 
 147 
 8 
 
 152 
 9 
 
 109 
 91 
 
 106 
 
 66 
 
 67 
 
 143 
 
 1!7 
 
 107 
 144 
 
 178 
 
 1) SEagen, to distinguish It fi-om megen and micgcn, is generally regular ; ctmSgen, to 
 C(m^Mer,^ is always irregvlar. 
 
 2) <!Bei<^en, when signii^g to sqften, both as tranBitdve and intransitive, le mora 
 accurately regvlar. 
 
 fS) Siegen, to rock, is always regular. 
 
COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 489 
 
 A List of Compound Yerbs, 
 
 which are either separable or inseparable, according to their 
 signification. When separable, the accent is on the prefix, 
 when inseparable, on the root of the verb. 
 
 bur^HWen 
 
 to glance through 
 
 to know one's design 
 
 burc^to^ren 
 
 to bore through 
 
 to pierce 
 
 bHtc^btingen 
 
 to force through 
 
 to penetrate 
 
 buTi^Slu^en 
 
 to heat through 
 
 to inflame 
 
 bur^e^en 
 
 to run away 
 
 to examine 
 
 burc^taufeit 
 
 to run through 
 
 to peruse hastily 
 
 burc^retfm 
 
 to travel through 
 
 to travel over 
 
 burd^fc^auen 
 
 to look through 
 
 to penetrate 
 
 butc^fc^iegcn 
 
 to shoot through 
 
 to interleave 
 
 buti^fi^neibm 
 
 to divide by cutting 
 
 to cross 
 
 burii^flogen 
 
 to push through 
 
 to pierce 
 
 bur($|lreic^cn 
 
 to strike out 
 
 to roam 
 
 fiSetBringcn 
 
 to bring over 
 
 to deliver 
 
 ii6erfaam 
 
 to fall over 
 
 to take by surprise 
 
 iiberfu^ren 
 
 to convey over 
 
 to convict 
 
 fldergejen 
 
 to go over 
 
 to overlook 
 
 ^er^tben 
 
 to lift over 
 
 to dispense with 
 
 ubeilaben 
 
 to load over 
 
 to overburden 
 
 Perlcgen 
 
 to lay over 
 
 to reflect 
 
 liter laufeB 
 
 to run over 
 
 to importune 
 
 ibcrreic^eit 
 
 to reach over 
 
 to deliver 
 
 flberf^Iagen 
 
 to turn to one side 
 
 to calculate 
 
 «6etfii)rcil)en 
 
 to write over 
 
 to direct 
 
 iiberfiiuttm 
 
 to spUl over 
 
 to cover with 
 
 uSerfcJen 
 
 to pass over 
 
 to translate, to overcharge 
 
 flaetftringen 
 
 to leap over 
 
 to skip 
 
 flterjieigcn 
 
 to mount over 
 
 to surpass 
 
 fiterttagcn 
 
 to carry over 
 
 to transfer 
 
 fiSertteten 
 
 to go over 
 
 to transgress 
 
 iiJerroerfcit 
 
 to throw over 
 
 to fall out with one 
 
 toersic^m 
 
 to draw over 
 
 to cover 
 
 11 ttt gel^ett 
 
 to go around, to associate 
 
 to elude 
 
 umtleibcrt 
 
 to change clothes 
 
 to clothe on all sides 
 
 umfa^ren 
 
 to ride over 
 
 to sail around 
 
 «mfa|Ten 
 
 to set anew 
 
 to embrace 
 
490 
 
 NEUTEB AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 
 
 Umf^iffen to put into another ship 
 
 umfc^reiben to recopy 
 
 umf($utten io pour into another vessel 
 
 umftJannm to change horses 
 
 umfiellen to transpose 
 
 umwt^en to blow down 
 
 umsic^en to change clothes, remove 
 
 unttxixaitn to dig under 
 
 unter^ttlten to keep under 
 
 «ntetf(^tcJen to shove under 
 
 unteif^Iagen to beat under 
 
 unterjlc^m to stand under 
 
 unterjic^en to draw under 
 
 DollfMen tofiUfull 
 
 tv i e b e T l^olen to fetch back 
 
 to circumnavigate 
 
 to circumscribe, to paraphrase 
 
 to place around 
 
 to span 
 
 to surround 
 
 to blow upon from all sides 
 
 to beset, to overcast 
 
 to undermine 
 
 to entertain, to support 
 
 to substitute falsely 
 
 to embezzle 
 
 to venture 
 
 to undergo 
 
 to fulfill 
 
 to repeat 
 
 A List of Neuter and Intransitive Verbs, 
 
 which are conjugated in German mth fein (to be), but in 
 English with to have. 
 
 entfaKen, to slip from 
 cntflie^en, to escape by flight 
 entge^en, to escape by going 
 tntlaufen, to escape by running 
 entfii^kfeR, to fall asleep, to expire 
 entf^lupfen, to escape by slipping 
 entftinitgeni to escape by springing 
 entWeidSjetij to escape by yielding 
 enttvifc^en, to escape by gliding 
 
 away 
 etilaffen, to grow pale 
 ettalten, to grow cold 
 erriit^enr to blush 
 nfc^eineni to appear 
 erWretfen, to be frightened 
 (Tflaunen, to be astonished 
 ertrinfen, to be drowned 
 nwac^en, to awake 
 fa^Teitf to ride in a carriage 
 faUm, to fall 
 fauleui to rot 
 
 Sl6faIIeti, to decay 
 
 ttMaufcn, to run down 
 
 alJreifcn, to depart 
 
 tttweic^tn, to deviate 
 
 aufile^en, to rise 
 
 aufiuai^en, to awake 
 
 aufleBen, to come to life again 
 
 ttuffi^ieSeni to shoot up 
 
 auftreten, to step up 
 
 aufwtic^fenf to grow up 
 
 aviaxttn, lo degenerate 
 
 ouagleiten, to slip 
 
 auStvanbern, to emigrate 
 
 audjic^^en, in the seme of to move out 
 
 of a house 
 Segegneni to meet 
 Jerjlcn, to burst 
 iletimi to remain, to stay 
 bo»otilaafnt, to run away 
 tinbringenr to penetrate 
 cinfc^tafetii to fall asleep 
 
NEUXEH AND INTBAKBITIVE VERBS. 
 
 491 
 
 fijttern, to flutter 
 
 flie^en, to flee 
 
 flic^en, to flow 
 
 folgeit, to follow 
 
 itititjta, to prosper, thrive 
 
 gc^eit, to go 
 
 gelinsWi to sacceed 
 
 genefert, to recover 
 
 jerat^en, (in or unter et»a3)» to ( 
 
 into, fell among 
 getlnncn, to coagulate 
 gef^e^enr to happen 
 Hettern, to climb 
 fommcn, to come 
 lanben, to land 
 queSenf to gush forth 
 tetfetti to ripen 
 loUeitf to roll 
 tofleni to rust 
 (infm, to sink 
 
 fi^lcti^en, to sneak ^ 
 
 fc^melietii to melt, smelt 
 fc^liipfen, to slip 
 fi|winben, to vanis-i 
 fi^wellett, to swell 
 flerben, to die 
 (Iranben, to strand 
 amfommen, to perish 
 ttemltetij to become antiquated 
 Seratmen, to become poor 
 VtxiUii^tn, to grow pale 
 DetMu^en, to fade 
 »etbut|ieti, to die of thirst 
 
 The following intransitive verbs, which express motion produced by 
 the acting power of the subject, are conjugated with f e i n, when a refer- 
 ence to a place or space is denoted ; with 1)aitn, when expressing a 
 mere activity, a continuous state without a change or transition of their 
 subject from one state into another. 
 
 Uetfaaen, to decay 
 scrfaulen, to rot 
 sevfliegen, to evaporate 
 serge^en, to pass away 
 uet^unsern, to starve 
 oetici^ren/ to become invaUd by time 
 setoben, to become desolate 
 Verrau^en, to evaporate 
 Derretfen, to go on a journey 
 uerrojlen, to be consumed by rust 
 Jjcrfc^allEn, to cease sounding 
 serfi^eiben, to depart this life 
 ȣtf(^roinbcn, to disappear 
 »cr|lrctc^cn, to pass away, to elapse 
 »er|htmmen, to grow dumb 
 sertrodncn, to dry up 
 serttclfen, to fade 
 Setwcfen, to decay 
 SDrbringcn, to press forward 
 wad)fen, to grow 
 wanbettif to wander 
 tDetc^ert, to yield, to give way 
 JDCtben, to become, to get 
 jerfallen, to fall to ruins 
 jctfpringen, to burst 
 jufriertn. to freeze over 
 jutitilte^^ierti to return 
 jutttcEhetm, to step back 
 juftttnmenlrepn, to meet together ;— 
 and all separable verbs compounded 
 with ileiSen, fasten, fafftn, folgen, gt- 
 ^m, fcmmetk 
 
 (Eileti, to hasten 
 fliegen, to fly 
 pDfen, to hop 
 Ilettttn, to climb 
 
 ftted^ett, to creep 
 
 laufen, to run 
 
 reitenf to ride on horseback 
 
 teifent to travel 
 
 fi^Wtmmert, to swim 
 fpringen, to spring 
 fieigeni to mount 
 
492 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 List of Prepositions with the Oases which they govern. 
 
 sin, on, at, to, dat. or ace. (Less. 41) 
 
 06, on account of, dat. 
 
 onflatt, instead of, gen. 
 
 oSet^ttlJ, above, gm. 
 
 «uf, on, upon, dat. or ctee. 
 
 o^ne, without, ace. 
 
 ttu«, out [of], dat. 
 
 ol^ngead)tet, see ungea^tet. 
 
 *a«6er, except, outside [of], dat. 
 
 fammt, together with, dat. 
 
 auger^ali, without, outside [of], gen. 
 
 fett, since, d^. 
 
 fbci, by, near, -with, dat. 
 
 fonber, without, aee. 
 
 iinnen, within. 
 
 (latt, instead of, gen. 
 
 bieneit[8], on this side, gen. 
 
 1x6%, in spite of, gen. or (Ja<.J 
 
 burc^. through, oax. 
 
 fiier, over, above, dat. or ace. 
 
 entgcgcn, towards, against, dat. 
 
 urn, around, ace. 
 
 fiiti for, ace. 
 
 urn— tttllen, for the sake of, gen. 
 
 fiegm, against, towards, dat. 
 
 unfern, not far from, gen. 
 
 gegenitBeti opposite, dat. 
 
 ungca^tet, notwithstanding, gm. 
 
 gcmoig, conformable [to], dat. 
 
 unter, below, under, dat. or ace. 
 
 gen, see gegcn. 
 
 unter^ali, below, gen. 
 
 l^alSen or ^alicr, on account of, gen. 
 
 unweit, not far from, gen. 
 
 Winter, behind, «ia«. or ace. 
 
 Ueimittelil, see mittclfl. 
 
 in, in, das*. — ^into, ace. 
 
 Kermoge, by dint of, gen. 
 
 innet^alb, within, gen. 
 
 »on, of, from, by, dat. 
 
 jenreit[«], on thatsideof, beyond, jren. 
 
 Dot, before, dat. or ace. 
 
 ftaft, by or in virtue of, gen. 
 
 Kd^renb, during, gen. 
 
 KngS, along, gen. or dat.X 
 
 roegen, on account of, gen. 
 
 laut, according to, ^«n. 
 
 ttiiber, against, ace. 
 
 mtt, with, dat. 
 
 ju, to, at, dat. 
 
 mitteW or mittcljl, by means of, ge^i. 
 
 }ttna(^|l, next, dat. 
 
 n(i(^, after, to, dai. 
 
 jufolge, in consequence of, gen. or 
 
 Itic^ll, next, near, dai. 
 
 dat.t 
 
 neien, beside, dai. or ace. 
 
 juwibcr, contrary to, dat. 
 
 neifl, together with, for, dat. 
 
 jwifcben, between, dat. or aee. 
 
 * Slu^er is an adverb when followed by the genitive, e. g. au^et 8an» 
 bca, out(Bide) of the coimtry. It is also used with the accusative some- 
 times after verbs of motion, Seugniffe beren Slufrii^tigteit nt^t ouScr olleit 
 8»eifcl gefe^t i|l, (Lessing). 
 
 f Set, in a few instances, governs the accusative. This use is re- 
 commended by Becker, in his Sehvl Crramimatih (p. 339). 
 
 X Ccinga, sufolge, and trofe govern generally the genitive, but they may 
 also govern the dative : 
 
 » SroJ nteinet STuffidit (dative) meincitt flatfen ©uc^en 
 9Jpc^ floiltatletten, no^ gel^elme ®4«^« !"— (Schiller, " Maria Btvart") 
 
VOCABULARY 
 
 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 ady. adjective. 
 
 adv. adverb. 
 
 eonj. conjunction. 
 
 /. s. feminine BubstantiVe. 
 
 jig. figuratively. 
 
 inter), interjection. 
 
 mod. modified. 
 
 m. s. masculine subatantlTe. 
 
 n. s. neuter substantive. 
 
 part, participle. 
 
 pi. plural. 
 
 prep, preposition. 
 
 pron. pronoun. 
 
 V. a. verb active. 
 
 V. a. & n. verb active and neuter. 
 
 v. a/iKE. verb auxiliary. 
 
 V. imp. verb impersonal. 
 
 v. i/r. verb irregular. 
 
 «. n. verb neuter. 
 
 V. reflex, verb refiexive. 
 
 Whenever the EirDlN0 OF substantives difiers in the plural from 
 that of the singular, it is given. The word " modifibd " refers, of course, 
 to the radical vowels, o, o, u, only. Peopbb nouns not spelled alike in 
 the two languages may be found near the end of the dictionary. 
 
 For the irregular verbs and the prepositions see alphabetical lists in 
 Part III. 
 
 Slal, m. «., pi. -t, eeL 
 
 (A unb jU( to and fro. 
 
 Sl'Bcitb, m. «., pi. -t, evening 
 -itob, n. s. supper; -roll 
 evening red, evening sky. 
 
 Sl'knb^i adv. in the evening. 
 
 SI'ienteuet, n. s. adventure. 
 
 tt'kr, eoT0. but, however; 
 adv. again. 
 
 ttb'ffi^ten, V. a. to lead oflf, away. 
 
 Stt'aeotbnctc, m. «., pi. -n, represent- 
 ative, deputy ; -n^ani, n. house of 
 delegates. 
 
 GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 aS'gcreifl, paH. departed, set out. 
 
 aV^alttrtt v. a. & n. ir. to hold or 
 keep off, hinder, prevent. 
 
 ai'^tegcn, v. a. & i/r. to hang or de- 
 pend on, or upon. 
 
 ftB'taufen, v. a. & n. ir. to run off or 
 out, expire. 
 
 aB'ne^mcn/ v. a. & n. ir. to take off, 
 diminish, decrease. 
 
 ai'lircfTen, «. a. to press out, wring, 
 wrest (from one). 
 
 aB'rat^en, v. a. & i/r. to dissuade. 
 
 %Vxn\t, f. s. departure. 
 
 aS'retfen, v. n. to depart, set out. 
 
 aJ'tcipcitiD.fls.&w.M'.totearawaywoff. 
 
 ; west; 
 
 -mate, 
 
494 
 
 VOCABTTLABY.^-GBKMAN AKD KNGLIBH. 
 
 oi'f^toS'tt' «■ Oi- if- to refuse, deny. 
 
 aS'f^tciSen, ». ra. to copy. 
 
 31 6' pi^t/ /. «., jpZ.-en, design , intention. 
 
 ai'roatten, «. a. to wait (for). 
 
 ai'we^rdn/ 1). <i. to alternate, change. 
 
 oS'lueifen, s. a. & ir. to refuse. 
 
 tti'lBcrfm, B. a. & ir. to throw off or 
 down. 
 
 StS'weftn^eit,/. «. ^Z. -ett/ absence. 
 
 «^, »»<«»:;■. ah, oh, ay. 
 
 O^t, a(2;. eight. 
 
 oc^'ten, «. a. to regard, esteem. 
 
 Stcl'tHngi /. «. esteem, regard, re- 
 spect. 
 
 Stc'tet, TO. «., jjZ. mod field, 
 
 St'bel, m. a. nobility. 
 
 St'ber, /. s.,pl. -n, vein, artery. 
 
 Slti'Ict/ m. 8. eagle. 
 
 SIbmiral', m. «., pZ. -c» & wioti. ad- 
 miral. 
 
 9lf' fe, m. s., pi. -XI, monkey, ape. 
 
 afntn, v. a. to have a presentiment 
 of; ea a^itt mix, I forebode. 
 
 SIe5n'Ii($teU, s.f.,pl. -ett/ similarity. 
 
 Silt (er, e, e^), ad^. all, eveiry, any, 
 whole ; -et6e|l', adm. best of all ; 
 -erbtnga', adv. indeed, of course ; 
 -etlet'r adv. various, all kinds of; 
 -etjlaitjl', a^'. strongest of aU ; -je'.^ 
 gtntoarttg, adj. omnipresent ; -ge« 
 mein, adg. general (ly), imiversal- 
 (ly) ;-mac^t, /. s. almighty power ; 
 -ntcipg, adm. gradually ; -moic^ttg; 
 -ttifTenb, adj. all-wise, aU-know- 
 ing, almighty. 
 
 flUein', adv. alone, only; corij. but, 
 however. 
 
 tXi, eonj. than, but, when, as, like ; 
 -iia, tmtil ; -bag, but that, but, 
 (see p. 338, X.) ; -o6, -wenn, as if, 
 as though. 
 
 Stel'tern, pi. parents. 
 
 al'fO' adv. thus, so, therefore, conse- 
 quently. 
 
 alt, adj. old, aged, ancient. 
 
 5irter, m. 8. age, old age. 
 
 Sll'tett^umi n. «., pi. -n, & mod. an- 
 tiquity. 
 
 ant, contraction of an bem. 
 
 Stm'me, / nurse, wet nurse. 
 
 3rm'fel,/.«. blackbird. 
 
 STmt, p. «., pi. -tx, & mod. charge, 
 office, service ; -mantt, bailiff. 
 
 Stn'Stttt, m. 8. culture. 
 
 an'itttiEHf V. a. to cultivate. 
 
 Sln'ictitng, /. «. adoration. 
 
 Sln'tltif, TO. s., pi. -t, view, aspect, 
 sight. 
 
 an'iie($en, v. a. to break, begin, enter 
 upon; ber 3)2orgen bric^t an, the 
 day breaks, it dawns. 
 
 Sltt'bac^t,/. 8. devotion. 
 
 an'ber (ber, bie, bai anbere), adj. sec- 
 ond, other, next, following. 
 
 an'bent, v. a. refl. to alter, change. 
 
 Sln'ertieten, n. s. offer. 
 
 an'erSieten, v. refl. to offer one's self. 
 
 an'eifennen, v. a. ir. to acknowledge, 
 to own. 
 
 Stn'fang, m. «., pi. -e, & mod. begin- 
 ning, origin. 
 
 an'fangen, v. a. ir. & n. to begin, com- 
 mence. 
 
 an'fang*, adv. in the beginning. 
 an'getomnten,parf. arrived. 
 an'getBorten, part, of an»erSett, levied, 
 
 enlisted, 
 an'gene^m, adj. agreeable, pleasant, 
 an'gtetfen, v. a. ir. to attack, to take 
 
 hold of, to touch. 
 Sln'grtff, to. s. pi. -e, attack, assault, 
 an'^alten, v. a. & n. ir. to hold, stop. 
 
TOCABTJLART.- 
 
 SREIMAN AND KNGLISH. 
 
 495 
 
 Stn' Jo^e, /. s. pi. -n, height. 
 
 an'^Sreni v. a. to listen to. 
 
 an'Hagetti «. a. to accuse, indict. 
 
 an'tleibetti v. n. & refi. to dress. 
 
 on'fommen, ®. m. i>. to arrive. 
 
 Sln'funft, /. a. arrival. 
 
 an'Iac^eti, v. a. to smile upon, cheer. 
 
 an'moc^m, v. a. to fiisten ; fjcuer -, to 
 kindle a fire. 
 
 an'ne^men, v. a. ir. to accept, receive, 
 take -jjig. to assume, suppose ; ftc^ 
 eincr 'Bai^t — , to interest one's 
 self in or for a cause, care for. 
 
 Stn'ne^mli(i^tett, /. s., pi. -en, agree- 
 ableness, delight. 
 
 (in'rebeni «. a. to accost, address. 
 
 ttn'fe^'tti 'o- o- & M". to look at, no- 
 tice, perceive. 
 
 ^n'^fixui), m. s. claim ; in — ne^men, to 
 claim attention. 
 
 an'llanbig, adj. decent, proper. 
 
 5tn't^eil, m. a. share, lot. 
 
 Slnt'It|# n. a. face, countenance. 
 
 an'tteffen, «. a. ir. to meet with, find. 
 
 Slnt'tBort, /. a. pi. -m,' answer, reply. 
 
 ant'lBOrtcn, v. a. to answer, reply; 
 -auf, reply to. 
 
 (in'snttauen, v. a. to intrust, to con- 
 fide to or in. 
 
 STn'settBttitbte, a. pi. relations. 
 
 on'lBetfen, v. a. ir. to assign, compel 
 to take. 
 
 Stit'tBeifung,/. a. pi. -t«, order, direc- 
 tion. 
 
 an'wenben, v. a. ir. to apply, make 
 use of. 
 
 ttn'werien, v. a. to recruit, enlist. 
 
 Stn'mcfen^cit, /. «. presence, [terest. 
 
 an'jie^ett, v. a. ir. to draw, pull, in- 
 
 Slp'fri< ''i- >■> pl- ^ftod. apple ; -iaxm, 
 apple-tree. 
 
 Slt'ieit, /. a. pi. -en, work, labor; 
 -er, m. a. workman, laborer ; 
 -i1)avii, n. a. work-house, poor- 
 house; -^matin, m. a. pi. -aieute, 
 laborer. 
 
 at'Jeitcn, v. a. & n. to work, labor. 
 
 cir'gcnt, v. a. to anger ; refi. to be 
 angry. 
 
 3(rm, m. a., pi. -f, arm. 
 
 arm, adj. poor ; -fetig, adj. very 
 poor. 
 
 8ttmee', /. a. army. 
 
 Str'wut^, /. a. poverty. 
 
 Slrt, /. a. pi. -en, species, kind, pro- 
 priety. 
 
 ttr'tig, adj. polite, pretty. 
 
 Slrjt, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. physician. 
 
 atjt'Iic^, adj. medical ; -e Se^anMung, 
 medical attendance. 
 
 S['f^e</- a. ashes. 
 
 Slfi, m. «., pi. -e, & mod. branch. 
 
 3f jlronom', m. a., pi. -en, astronomer. 
 
 31'l^em, m. a. breath. 
 
 at'^'men, i>. n. to breathe ; flg. to en- 
 joy, live. 
 
 au(^, eonj. also, too, likewise, even, 
 indeed. 
 
 Slu'e, /. «., pi. -n, pasture. 
 
 ftttf, prep, on, upon, toward, at, to ; 
 -unb nieber, a^. up and down, to 
 and fro. 
 
 auf Mfi^en, v. n. to begin to bloom, 
 blossom. 
 
 auf Jringen, v. a. ir. flg. to irritate or 
 provoke one. 
 
 ttuPtitrben, v. a. to burden ; flg. to 
 impose. 
 
 auf beden, n. n. to uncover. 
 
 auf btftam, ®. a. to impress. 
 
 auf elTen, v. a. kir.to eat up. 
 Stufent^att, m. a. stay, residence. 
 
196 
 
 TOCABULABT. — aERMAH AND ENGLISH. 
 
 Sluf fanning, /. s. conduct, perform- 
 ance. 
 
 STufgale, /. «., pi. -n, th^me, lesson. 
 
 ttufge^en, v. n. ir. to rise, to open. 
 
 «uf fatten, v. a. vr. to delay, stop ; 
 refl. to stay, sojourn. 
 
 auf pufen, v. a. & refl. to heap up, 
 accumulate. 
 
 «uf ^eSen, «• a. ir. to raise or lift up, 
 to pick or give up, save, abolish. 
 
 atlfpretif v. n. to cease, discontinue. 
 
 Sluflttge, /. »., pi -n, edition. 
 
 «uf IBfertj V. a. &r«^. to solve, dissolve. 
 
 $(uf lijfunsr /. s. solution, dissolution. 
 
 aufma^enr v. a. to open; refl. to 
 arise, to set out. 
 
 auf merirant/ adj. attentive. 
 
 Sluf metlfamfeiti /. «. attention. 
 
 «uf nt^men, v. a. & ir. to receive. 
 
 aufrufetir v. a. to call or wake up. 
 
 auf fel^eni v. u. to compose. 
 
 auf fc^ieStHi «. a. ir. to delay, to post- 
 pone. 
 
 ttuf fc^winsen, c. a. ir. & re^. to soar 
 or swing up. 
 
 Wuf fti^t, /. s. care. 
 
 auffijringen, «. n. ir. to spring w 
 start up. 
 
 auf fie^en> v. a. ir. to rise, arise, get 
 up, to be open. 
 
 ouf lleHeit) V. a. to set up, array. 
 
 3Iuf tragi m. s. order, commission. 
 
 auf t^un, i>. a. & ir. to open. 
 
 ttuf tretcn, v. a. & ir. to step forth, to 
 make one's appearance. 
 
 aufwac^eni v. n. to awake, to be 
 roused. 
 
 auf nieden, v. a. to wake, rouse. 
 
 Slu'ge, n. s., pi. -n, eye. 
 
 Sfu'genSIitf, m. a. moment, twinkling. 
 
 au9enWt{'Ii4i adj. immediately. 
 
 ttuS'artm, v. a. to degenerate. 
 
 aua'klTernf v. a. to mend, repair. 
 
 ttua'Hcten, v. ir. a. to offer. 
 
 au^'Htten, v. a. ir. & refl. to ask or 
 beg for, request. 
 
 aui'iltiitn, v. a. to stay out, away, 
 fail. 
 
 Mli'iitSjtni v. a. ir. to break out. 
 
 ^vi'ituiS), m. «., pl.-<,& mod. break- 
 ing out. 
 
 STua'bcl^nuitg, /. ,»., pi. -en, extension, 
 expansion. 
 
 StuS'btud, m. s , pi. -t, & Tnod. ex- 
 pression. 
 
 auS'britdcn, v. a. to express. 
 
 aua'biiicHic^, fl^. expressly. 
 
 au^'ettva^Ien, v. a. to elect, choose. 
 
 auS'ftt^im, «. a. to carry out ; flg. to 
 accomplish. 
 
 au^'gejetdlnetf adj. & ode. distin- 
 guished, excellent. 
 
 ttua'ge^en, v. n. ir. to go out. 
 
 Stua'Knber, m. s. foreigner. 
 
 Slu^'na^me, /. «., pi. -«, exception. 
 
 au^'rufeur «. a. ir. to call or cry out, 
 exclaim. 
 
 auS'ru^en, v. n. & re^. to rest. 
 
 auS'tii|lenf v. a. to fit out, equip. 
 
 auSTi^togef/ «• «• ir. to kick, to re- 
 ject. 
 
 ani'ft^m, «. a. & ». ir. to see to the 
 end, to appear, look. 
 
 ttu'pm, ode. without. 
 
 ttu'f er, prep. & eonj. beside ; -itm, 
 adv. besides, moreover; -'^affi, 
 pr^. & adv. outside; -orbentli^/ 
 extraordinary(ly), exceedingly), 
 strangePy), uncommon(ly). 
 
 £u'pem, v. n. to express, manifest. 
 
 fiu'perfl, adj. extremely, utmost ; auf 
 itti -t, to the utmost. 
 
TOCABULABY. — OERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 497 
 
 9ru8'|!(|t, /. «., pi -m, view, prospect. 
 
 ttu«'f)>te§en; «. a. & n. vr. to pro- 
 novmce, to express. 
 
 aua'ilellen, «. a. to expose. 
 
 Slu^'fieUtttig, /. «., p2. -en, exhibition. 
 
 Slu'iier,/. a., pi. -n, oyster. 
 
 aHg'iJrcuen, «. a. to strew. 
 
 AttSTu^en, «. a. to select. 
 
 au^'t^^eilen, «. a. to distribute, ad- 
 minister. 
 
 au^'wcic^m, v. n. i/r. to give way, 
 evade. 
 
 ouS'ja^Ien, ®. a. to payout ; iaat-, to 
 pay oasb. 
 
 aui'set^nen, v. a. to distinguish. 
 
 Olta'jtc^en, e. a. & n. i/r. to move from, 
 extract; refl. to undress one's 
 self. 
 
 au^'jieren, v. a. to decorate, adorn. 
 
 Slie, /. s. axis. 
 
 Slrt,/. »., pi. -t, & mod axe. 
 
 iMx, see Bar. 
 
 Sa^i »i. g., pJ. -e, & mod brook. 
 
 fdaS'e, f. s., pi. -n, cheek. 
 
 Soid'er, »i. «. baker. 
 
 SSabi ». «., j)2. -er, & mod. bath. 
 
 Sa^n,/. «.,p2.-en, pathway, railroad. 
 
 iaib, a^. soon ; -igjl, oAo. speedily, 
 
 soon ; iflib — ialb, now and then. 
 Sal'terij to. «. beam, rafter, 
 fflall, TO. »., jjZ. -e, & TOod ball. 
 SBaUet'/ n. «. ballet ; -tntt)))ef ballet 
 
 troupe. 
 Sanbr TO. «., jj?. -e, & tmA. volume ; 
 
 71. «., pi. -tx, & mo(Z. ribbon, tape. 
 
 (see also p. 83, XI.) 
 S9aiif» /. ». bench, bank ; pi. -en, 
 
 banks ; -pi. t, & too(2. benches. 
 
 iar, a<27. & o^. in cash, bare, naked. 
 
 fdatt TO. «., pi. -m, bear. 
 
 Saim^ers'tg, <m^'. merciful, charitable. 
 
 aSatm^etj'ijteit, /. a. mercy, charity. 
 
 aSa'fc /. a., pi. -n, cousin (fern.) 
 
 SBaUf TO. «. (pi. a9auten)i building. 
 
 iau'enf «. a. & n. to build, cultivate ; 
 auf eineat -, to rely upon some one. 
 
 SSau'er, to. a., pi. -n, peasant ; n. a. 
 cage ; -fraa, country-woman. 
 
 Saum, TO. «., pi. -t, & mod. tree. 
 
 beat'ftc^tigcn, «. a. to intend, pur- 
 pose, aim at. 
 
 kant'ttortem v. a. to answer, reply. 
 
 icbac^t'fam, es«^'. & (wfo. careful(ly), 
 eamest(]y). 
 
 6ebttu'ern, v. a. to be sorry, pity; 
 -ixont^, adf. deplorable, lament- 
 able. 
 
 Scbed'cn, «. a. to cover, shelter, 
 drown (voice). 
 
 beben'teni v. a. i/r. to consider, think 
 of. 
 
 bebeu'tenb, a^. & adm. considerable, 
 considerably, important. 
 
 Sebie'neti, v. a. to serve ; refl. to help 
 one's self. 
 
 SBebien'te, to. a., pi. -n, servant. 
 
 Sebing'ungj /. a., pi. -n, condition. 
 
 bebiir'fen, ®. n. ir. to need, want. 
 
 teburf tig, adj. needy, wanting ; 
 with, gen. in want of. 
 
 beei'Ien, v. n. & refl. to hasten. 
 
 bem'ben, been'bigen, v. a. to end, ter- 
 minate. 
 
 SSefeJl', TO. «.,pi. -t, command, order. 
 
 Sefe^la'ljabet, to. «. commander. 
 
 bcfeyictti Sefe^'Kgen, «. a. ir. to com- 
 mand, order, 
 
 befin'bcn, v. ir. refl. to find one's sel^ 
 to be (feel), to be situated. 
 
498 
 
 VOCABUIjAKT. — GAKUAN AKD ENGlilSH. 
 
 Bepttc^'teni v. a. to fear, apprehend. 
 
 SBege'kn^elt, /. a. pi. -n, adventure, 
 event. 
 
 Sege'^en, v. a. ir, to commit, perpe- 
 trate. 
 
 bti€S)'xm, V. a. to desire, to request. 
 
 Seginn', m. s. beginning. 
 
 Segin'ncn, «. a. & n. i/r. to begin, com- 
 mence. 
 
 ieglei'ten, v. a. to accompany, con- 
 duct. 
 
 iegliid' en, v. a. to make happy. 
 
 tegnii'gen, c. r«^. to be contented, 
 satisfied (with). 
 
 Segta'ieit, v. a. ir. to buiy. 
 
 Segtiif' , m. a., pi. -t, conception, no- 
 tion ; im — feitt, to be about, to be 
 upon the point (of). 
 
 6egru§'en, v. a. to greet, salute. 
 
 Se^an'telH/ «. a. to treat. 
 
 Be'^al'ten, v. n. ir. to keep. 
 
 Se^ar'reti, v. n., to continue, perse- 
 vere. 
 
 Sei«r'l^tett, /. a. perseverance. 
 
 ie'^au))'tenr ®. a. to assert, affirm. 
 
 Se^aup'tung, /. «., jjZ. -en, assertion. 
 
 Se^er'ietgen, v. a. to lodge. 
 
 itii prep, at, near, in. 
 
 iei'be, adj. both, two ; alle -, both. 
 
 Sei'fttll, »re. a. applause, approbation. 
 
 ©etn, n. a., pi. -e, leg, bone. 
 
 SBein'tleiber, pi. a. pantaloons. 
 
 ietna'^e, ach). almost, near(ly). 
 
 Sei'llanb, m. a. assistance. 
 
 iei'jJc^en, v. n. ir. to assist, to stand 
 by. 
 
 Bei'lltmmen, v. n. to agree with, as- 
 sent to. 
 
 iei'wo^nen, v. n. Jig. to be present at. 
 
 ietannt', ac^. known, acquainted. 
 
 Befen'neni «. a. ir. to confess, own. 
 
 SeRa'gcn, v. a. to lament; refl. to 
 complain (of). 
 
 Setlei'bung,/. a. dress. 
 
 teEom'meni v. a. i/r. to get, obtain. 
 
 kfun'ben, «. a. to manifest, show. 
 
 6elei'btgen, v. a. to offend, insult. 
 
 telei'bigt, paH. offended. 
 
 Dcl'Icn, v. n. to bark. 
 
 belo'^'ncn, «. a. to reward, 
 lo^'nung,/. «., jjZ. -en, reward. 
 
 Semet'ten, u. o. to mark, observe, no- 
 tice. 
 
 6emoofl', ad^. moss-covered. 
 
 Semu'^cn, v. a. to trouble ; refl. to 
 give one's self trouble, take pains, 
 to endeavor, try. 
 
 Senad^'bart, adj. adjoining. 
 
 6ena(i^'ri(^tigen, v. a. to inform. 
 
 Scne'^'men, n. a. conduct, behavior. 
 
 bene^'men, «. a. ir. to deprive of; 
 refl. to behave or demean one's 
 self. 
 
 benci'ben, v. a. to envy, grudge. 
 
 benu^'en, v. a. to use, make use of, 
 improve. 
 
 beo'ia^ten, d. a. to observe. 
 
 bequem', adj. convenient, comfort- 
 able. 
 
 betau'ben, v. a. to rob, deprive of. 
 
 berttu'fi^en, v. refl. to intoxicate. 
 
 bereit', a^. ready, prepared. 
 
 beteit^', a<2o. already. 
 
 berei'ten, v. a. ir. to prepare. 
 
 bereu'en, «. n. to repent. 
 
 Setg, TO. a., pi. -e, mountain ; -rei^en, 
 mountain-ranges ; bcrgauf unb 
 bergab', up hUl and down bill ; 
 -ttett, n. a., pi. -e, mine. 
 
 Serial', m. a., pi. -e, account, report 
 
 Seruf, TO. a. calling, vocation. 
 
 beriibmt', ad^. celebrated, famous. 
 
VOCABULABT. — QEBMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 499 
 
 icftt'etti V. a. to BOW (on, over), dot, 
 cover. ' 
 
 Sefi^ttf' tigeit) v. n. refl. to be occupied. 
 
 SBeft^ei'ben^eit, /. «. modesty. 
 
 tefc^en'fen, v. a. to make or give a 
 present (to). 
 
 iefi^ir'mcn, v. a. to protect. 
 
 iefi^Itc'pcn, v. a. ir. to Conclude, de- 
 termine. 
 
 Sefe^Iu^', m. »., pi. -e, & Tiwd. deci- 
 Bion, discrimination. 
 
 SBef^retS'ung, /. «., pi. -en, descrip- 
 tion. 
 
 Sef^ug'er, m. «. protector. 
 
 befe'^CH/ «. a. w. to examine. 
 
 Befc^'en, «. a. to fill, supply. 
 
 JeflEg'fcatr a<?/. conquerable. 
 
 Icfte'gen, e. a. to overcome, vanquish. 
 
 ■ iefie'geln, v. a. to seal, to put one's 
 
 seal to. 
 
 ieftn'nen, r>. ir. refl. to think of, re- 
 collect. 
 
 ie(t6'e«, "• «• m"- to possess ; enjoy. 
 
 JefDit'beiSf a(to. particularly, pecu- 
 liarly. 
 
 iefot'gen, v. a. to take care of, pro- 
 vide, apprehend; fear; forward. 
 
 SBefotg'nip, /. « , pi. -t, fear, appre- 
 hension. 
 
 ScPfei, comparative of gut. 
 
 ief fern/ «. a. & re/J. to improve. 
 
 Sef ferttng, /. s. improvement, recov- 
 ery. 
 
 icjlan'big, a^. & a<fe. constant(ly), 
 continual(]y). 
 
 ie(l, otZ;. best ; ttuf? Se'jle, best of all. 
 iejle^'en, «. a. & ti. ir. to insist, per- 
 sist, endure, remain ; to consist 
 of. 
 Seiiei'gew, «. a. to ascend, mount. 
 Seftirn'men, ■». a. to fix, determine. 
 
 Jeflimmt', adj. fixed. 
 6eflra'fen, «. w. to punish. 
 SScfud)', m. s., pi. -e, visit, call, 
 kfu'^en, v. a. to visit, to go to see. 
 Se'ten, «. «.. to pray, say prayer, 
 iettac^'tttl, V. a. to look upon, to con- 
 template, to reflect, consider, re- 
 gard. 
 ktrac()t'Iii^, adj. considerable, con- 
 siderably. 
 Setrag', m. «., pi. -t, mod. amount. 
 Setra'gen, n. s. conduct, behavior. 
 Setra'gen, v. a. ir. & refl. to conduct, 
 
 behave or demean one's self. 
 Settef fen, «. n. ir. to concern ; befall, 
 
 regard. 
 Betre'ten, 'O. a. ir. to tread or step 
 
 upon, 
 ktrtei'faffl, adj. industrious. 
 6ettin'fen, v. ir. refl. to get intoxi- 
 
 cated. 
 Setrutt'fen fetn, to be intoxicated. 
 Sctrit'ien, ». a. to grieve, afflict. 
 Settiib'mp, /. «., pi. -t, affliction, 
 
 grievance. 
 6etriiit', adj. melancholy, sad, af- 
 flicted. 
 6ctru'gea, b. a. ir. to cheat, defraud, 
 
 deceive, 
 ©ettii'ger, m. s. cheat, deceiver. 
 ktrun'ten, part, drunk. 
 Sett, n. s. pi. -en, bed, bed-side, 
 (et'teln, v. n. to beg, ask alms. 
 Sesiirfern, v. a. to people, populate, 
 iesor'fle^en, ».»».&«•. to await. 
 6e»aV«n, ®. a. to keep, preserve; 
 
 ®Dtt iewa^re, God forbid. 
 6ett)c'gen, v. a. & refl. to stir, move. 
 teWe'gcn, «. a. ir. to stir, move. 
 6en)etb'en, v. ir. & refl. to endeavor, 
 en, «. a. to inhabit. 
 
600 
 
 VOCABULAKY. — QEBMAN AND ENGLISB. 
 
 ^'ner, m. s. inhabitant. 
 
 SBctBun'bern, «. a. to admire. 
 
 SetBun'berung, / ». admiration. 
 
 iettun'berungawfirbifl, adj. & adti. 
 worthy of admiration. 
 
 bettitgt', a^. conscious of. 
 
 SBeuu^t'fein, n. a. consciousness, con- 
 science. 
 
 ScjaJ'Ien, s. a. to pay. 
 
 ityxix'itm, V. a. to enchant. 
 
 Sejie^'ungi/. s. reference, regard. 
 
 ieiWei'felttr v. a. to doubt, question. 
 
 Sqwing'en, s. a. vr. & refl. to over- 
 come, conquer. 
 
 fdiiliet^tUx' , m. »., librarian. 
 
 Sie'nc,/. »., pi. -n, bee. 
 
 Siei, n. s. beer. 
 
 Silb, n. s. pi. -tt, picture, image, 
 portrait ; -faule, statue. 
 
 Wben, V. a. to shape, form ; to cul- 
 tivate, improve, compose ; Jig. to 
 form, fashion. 
 
 Sirbung/ /. «. education, culture, 
 formation. 
 
 StUet', n. s. ticket. 
 
 (il'lig, adj. cheap. 
 
 bitt'ben, v. a. vr. to bind, unite, tie. 
 
 Mn'neit, prep, -within. 
 
 Sir'ne, /. «., pi. -n, pear. 
 
 bid, adm. & conj. (un)til to ; — um, 
 (un)ti] ; — iefet, hitherto ; — bag, 
 (un)til (that). 
 
 Sit'tt, /. «., pi. -Jt, request, entreaty. 
 
 bit'ter, a^. bitter ; -\\i!i)t bitterly. 
 
 blag, ac^. pale. 
 
 fSiUM't n. B., pi. -ttt & mod. leaf, 
 page, journal. 
 
 blau, a^. blue. 
 
 SBIei, m. 8. lead. 
 
 Slei'ben, v. n. ir. to remain, stay, con- 
 tinue. 
 
 ilen'bert) «. a. to blind ;/g'. to dazzle. 
 Slid, m. «., pi. -e, look, glance, 
 blidt'ctt, ». n. to view, look, glance ; 
 
 ^ell — , to appear joyfully ; (rings) 
 
 um ft^ ^er — , to look (all) around. 
 (Itnbf a^. blind. 
 
 ©life, m. «., pi. -e, lightning, flash. 
 Mi^'en, «. n. ia lighten, 
 blti'^en, v. n. to bloom, blossom, 
 
 flourish. 
 Slu'me, /. »., pi. -n, flower ; -nftani, 
 
 m. s. wreath of flowers, garland. 
 Slittr m,. s. blood ; -egcl, m. s. leech ; 
 
 -fc^ulbi bloody or capital crime, 
 btu'ten, v. n. to bleed ; Jig. to pay 
 
 for. 
 blut'gteiig, a^. sanguine, blood- 
 thirsty. 
 fdWO)t,f. »., pi. -n, blossom ; — be* 
 
 ScJcn^i flower of youth, 
 blu'tig, adj. bloody ; Jig. crueL 
 So'benr m. «., pi. & mod. ground, 
 
 bottom, loft, garret. 
 So'gen, m. s. bow ; sheet of paper. 
 33oi)t» n. «., pi. -e, & »?wd. boat. 
 i'i'^t, adj. & adv. bad, wicked, angry ; 
 
 — oufr angry with, 
 ffiiir'fe, /. s. bourse, purse. 
 So'te, m. 8., pi. -n, messenger. 
 aSranb, m. «., pi. -e, & mod fires, 
 
 burning. 
 Sia'ten, m. s. roast-meat, 
 iia'ten, o. a. ir. to roast, fry. 
 brau'^eiti «. a. to want, need ; to \ise. 
 brauit, adj. brown. 
 brau'f«n» «. m. to roar, rush. 
 Sta», adj. brave, valiant, honest, 
 
 good, 
 brett, adj. wide, broad. 
 SSrief, m. «., pi. -tt letter ; -bete, or 
 
 -triiger, letter-carrier, postman. 
 
VOCABULABY.— OaBMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 501 
 
 fflrob, n. »., pi -tt bread, loaf; 
 
 -badeni n. the baking of bread. 
 irfitt'eni ». n. to roar. 
 SBtitdE'e, /. «., pi. -n, bridge. 
 Stu'ber, m. «., pi. & mod. brother. 
 Jitt'betliil, adj. brotherly, fraternal. 
 aSritfi, /. s., pi. -t, & mod. breast, 
 
 bosom. 
 33u'6e, m. a., pi. -n, boy, lad, knave, 
 
 villain. 
 Sh(^, n. «., pi. -er, & mod. book ; 
 
 quire ; -Sinber, bookbinder ; 
 
 -brudcr, printer; -bruderfunfl, /. 
 
 a. art of printing ; -r-^attbleti book 
 
 seller ; -labett, m. a. bookstore ; 
 
 -|labe(n), m. s. letter (of thealphar 
 
 bet). 
 aSuc^t,/. a., pi. -cit, bay. 
 Sit^'ne,/. «., pi. -n, stage. 
 Siin'bel, n. a. bundle. 
 aSflnb'nif ,/. a.,pl. -t, alliance, league, 
 
 covenant, 
 iunt, adj. colored, confased, varie- 
 
 ©urg. /. a., pi. -tn, castle, citadel. 
 SSur'ger; m. s. citizen ; -meijler, bur- 
 gomaster (mayor). 
 fBm'^Hjt, m. a., pi. -n, fellow, boy. 
 Siir'lle,/. a., pi. -n, brush. 
 Sut'ter,/. «. butter. 
 
 (lamV, m. a., pi. -t, & m^d. canal, 
 
 channel. 
 Ettff'ee, aee Sttffce. 
 Eametab', aee fiomerab. 
 G^arat'ter» m. a. character, title. 
 G^ocola'be, /. a. chocolate. 
 SJor, m. & n., pi. -ii & mod. chorus, 
 
 choir (aee § 83) ; -gefftns, choral 
 
 song. 
 
 E^o'Ura,/ s. cholera. 
 
 S^rifl, m. a., pi. -tn, Christian. 
 
 c^ttfl'lic^, a^. christian. 
 
 Goncett', n. «., pi. -e, concert. 
 
 Songre^/ m. a., pi. -t, union, con. 
 
 Sonbi'tot, m. a., pi. -m, confectioner. 
 
 Gonjlai'Ier, m. a. constable, police- 
 man. 
 
 Son'fulf m. a. consul. 
 
 doufin't m. a. cousin (male) ; Soufi'ne, 
 /. a. cousin (female). 
 
 Sa, adv. & eonj. there, then, when, 
 
 as, since, because, just (now) ; 
 
 — diet, but as. 
 ba6ei', ad/B, by that, thereby, near 
 
 it ; -MctSm, to adhere to, to insist 
 
 on. 
 babur^', adv. by this, by that, there- 
 
 by. 
 liai), n. a., pi. -cr, i& mod. roof. 
 bafut'j adv. for it, for that. 
 ba'^et', adj. & adv. thence, from 
 
 thence, hence, along ; Hi — , un- 
 til then, 
 ba^iti', adv. thither, there, away, 
 
 gone ; -flie^en/ to flow along ; 
 
 -jeftredt, part, stretched out ; -tcr, 
 
 adv. behind it. 
 'Qa'mtif.pl. -Tit lady, gentlewoman, 
 bamit'i ado. & covj. therewith, with 
 
 it ; in order that ; — nidjt, 
 
 lest. 
 Eatnm, m. a., pi. -e, & mod. dam, 
 
 dyke. 
 S)am'mcrung, /. a twilight, dusk. 
 Dampf, n. a., pi. -t, & mod. steam. 
 
502 
 
 VOCABUIiAKT.— GERMAN AND BNGIilSH. 
 
 smoke ; -Boot, or -f^if, n. «., pi. 
 -t, steamer, steamboat. 
 
 1)a.v.t, m. a. thanks, reward, grate- 
 fulness ; -'6atfeit,/. «. gratitude. 
 
 bttnt'tar, a^. thankfully), grateful- 
 Gy). 
 
 banrettf v. a. & n.to thank, return 
 thanks. 
 
 bttnn, adv. then, thereupon ; — itnb 
 nam, now and then. 
 
 baran'f ach. thereon, thereat, at, 
 near by, of it. 
 
 barauf, adv. thereon, thereupon, 
 afterwards, then. 
 
 barauS', ado. thereout, therefrom, 
 thence. 
 
 bar'kitr V. n. to suffer, famish. 
 
 barin', adv. therein, in that, this, or 
 it. 
 
 bttt'na^, adv. thereafter, there. 
 
 bat'llellert, v. a. to represent. 
 
 Bat'lleHung, /. a., pi. -ett, represen- 
 tation. 
 
 barit'kr, a^. over that, thereon, 
 beyond that, concerning that, 
 on account of that, above, 
 more. 
 
 bttrum', a(fe. for that, for it, there- 
 fore, on that account. 
 
 bttfcTifl', ad/D. there, in the place. 
 
 baf , co>nj. that ; — tiic^t, lest. 
 
 bfiU(^'Utii V. imp. to appear, seem. 
 
 lExax'tx, f. a. duration. 
 
 ban'txn, v. n. to last. 
 
 bason'/ adv. thereof, therefrom, of 
 or from it, off, away ; ji^ ctligfl — 
 ma^ett, to hurry or run away. 
 
 baju', adv. thereto, to that, to it. 
 
 befl'en, v. a. to cover. 
 
 Detoration',/. a. decoration. 
 
 bcmna^'i adv. according to. 
 
 bcn'fen, v. a. & re. m*. to think, ima- 
 gine ; — an, to think of. 
 
 benn, eonj. for, then, than, but. 
 
 ben'no^, conj. yet, however, never- 
 theless, notwithstanding; ti fri 
 — , unless, except. 
 
 ber, bie, bai, art. the pron. he, that 
 or this, who, which. 
 
 betjenige, (bie-, bai-), pron. that, the 
 one, he. 
 
 bctftlie, (bie-, ba8-), pron. the same. 
 
 bei't)dli, or beg'^alb, adv. therefore, 
 for this reason, on that account. 
 
 beftu, adv. the ; — ieffcr, the better. 
 
 beut'Uc^, a^. clear, distinct, plain. 
 
 bic^t, ac^. tight, dense, close, solid, 
 thick. 
 
 3)l(^'ter, m. a. poet. 
 
 biS, adj. thick. 
 
 Bid'jc^t, n. a., pi. -t, thicket. 
 
 Dieb, m. a. thief; -WI, stealing, 
 theft. 
 
 bien'm, v. re. to serve. 
 
 SJten'er, m. a. servant, waiter. 
 
 Sienjl, m. a., pi. -e, service. 
 
 S)ien'fiag, m. a. Tuesday. 
 
 biea, (er, e, e8), pron. this, the lat- 
 ter. 
 
 bteS'mal, ado. this time, this once. 
 
 Sing, n. a., pi. -t, thing, affair, mat- 
 ter, feat. 
 
 S)tn'te, /. a. ink ; -nfag, re. a. ink- 
 stand. 
 
 boi^, conj. but, yet, however, never- 
 theless. 
 
 Dct'tor, TO. «. physician, doctor. 
 
 S)dIc^, m. «., pi. -e, dagger. 
 
 Don'ner, to. a. thunder ; -wetter, re. «. 
 thunder-storm, tempest. 
 
 bon'nern, v. n. to thunder. 
 
 S)on'ncr|lag, to. a. Thursday. 
 
VOCABULARY. — GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 503 
 
 bo|)'t)eItf ad^. double, twofold, adv. 
 twice. 
 
 35orf, m. «., pi. -er, & mod. village, 
 hamlet. 
 
 ®om, m. a., pi. -m, thorn ; -gejlrau^, 
 briar. 
 
 bott, ado. there, yonder ; a,^. hither, 
 that way, yonder. 
 
 2)ra'ma, n. s. drama. 
 
 Srang'fal,/. «. oppression. 
 
 btaup'enf adv. without, out of doors, 
 abroad. 
 
 bxt'^m, V. a. refl. to turn, twist, re- 
 volve. 
 
 brei', nam. adg. three. 
 
 bring'enb, v. n. pressing, urgent. 
 
 bto^'ttt, V. n. to threaten. 
 
 Sto^'ung, / s.,pl. -m, threat, threat- 
 ening, menace. 
 
 brud'en, v. a. to print, imprint. 
 
 brud'enj v. a. to press, squeeze, op- 
 press. 
 
 bntm, see barum. 
 
 bu, pron. thou. 
 
 ®ucll', n. 8; pi. -it duel. 
 
 bufJeHf V. n. to perfume, to give 
 fragrance. 
 
 bitl'ben/ v. a. to endure, [toleration. 
 
 Dul'bung,/. «. enduring, suffering, 
 
 buinm'» ffl4/- dull, stupid. 
 
 b«m))F, adg. duU, hollow. 
 
 bunPel, ad^. dark, dusky, gloomy, 
 dim, obscure. 
 
 bttnf'en. «. n. to seem, appear ; refl. 
 to fancy, imagine one's self. 
 
 butc^aua', adB. throughout, entirely ; 
 — tti^t, by no means, not at all. 
 
 buri^Jo V", «. a. to pierce, perforate. 
 
 burd^'jfcc^cn, b. a. to break through. 
 
 burc^'ftringm, «. Ji. to bring or get 
 through. 
 
 burii^'bringetl, «. ra. &ir. to penetrate. 
 
 burc^'ge^en, ». n. & m*. to go through. 
 
 buri^'rcifen, v. n. to travel or pass 
 through ; burc^rei'fetii to travel 
 over. 
 
 burd^Ireuj'ett, v. n. to cross through. 
 
 burc^'ftc^tig) adj. transparent. 
 
 butd^fltB'men, v. a. & n. to stream 
 through, pervade. 
 
 bur($wan'beln/ v. n. to wander or pass 
 through. 
 
 2)ur|i, m. s. thirst. 
 
 butll'ig, a^. thirsty. 
 
 bu^'en, V. a. to call one "thou," ad- 
 dress familiarly. 
 
 Su^'cnbi m. «., pl.-t, dozen. 
 
 E'Bctt, adj. & adv. even, exactly, 
 just, about ; -fo, as. 
 
 Sd'e,/. »., ^i -n, edge, comer 
 
 c'bel, adj. & ad». noble, generous. 
 
 S'belmanni m. s. nobleman. 
 
 e'^e, adv. before, ere. 
 
 e'^cr, adv. sooner (comp. of 6alb) ; je 
 — je He'Ser, the sooner the better. 
 
 (&fj'ttt f. s. pi. -tti honor ; -nmunn, 
 man of honor. 
 
 e^ten^aftr a^. honorable. 
 
 (S^r'futii^t,/. «. veneration, awe, rev- 
 erence. 
 
 e^r'geijig, adj. ambitious, covetous 
 of honor. 
 
 ifjx'WS), adj. honest. 
 
 Si, n. 8., pi. -er, egg. 
 
 ei, interj. ay, why, ey. 
 
 (Et'(^e,/. «., pi. -n, oak. 
 
 Eib, m. «., pi. -e, oath ; — bet 3;teut» 
 oath of allegiance. 
 
601 
 
 VOCABULABT. — GBBMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 el'gcni adj. own, peculiar ; einem fo 
 — fetiti to feel strangely, peculiar- 
 
 ly. 
 
 Ei'genfc^aft, /. s.,pl. -cit, quality. 
 6tl'e or (Eili /. s. haste, huny. 
 eU'en, «. n. to hasten, hurry, speed, 
 ril'enb?. ads. hurriedly, hastily, 
 
 speedily. 
 ei'Hgll, adv. hurriedly, hastily, 
 
 speedily, 
 (initn'berf adv. one another, each 
 
 other, 
 cin'ialfanitrenf v. a. to embalm. 
 ein'Megcni v. a. & n. refl. to turn 
 
 (into), hend in. 
 ein'MIbcn, v. refl. to imagine, fancy, 
 
 think. 
 ein'Stec^en, v. a. ir. to break down, 
 
 break open ; v. n. ir. to invade, 
 
 give way. 
 rin'fac^r adj. single, plain(ly), simple. 
 (Sin'foSi ^- i- idea, notion, thought, 
 ein'fclteni e. n. vr. {wUh dat.) to fall 
 
 or come into the mind, occur. 
 Ein'faUi/. «. simplicity. 
 (Ein'flug, m. s. influence. 
 ein'fii^Kn/ v. a. to introduce, 
 ©in'gang, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. en- 
 trance, entry. 
 €in« unb ^ui'imi, coming in and 
 
 going out. 
 ein'gcSoren, ac0. native, 
 etn'gebenf, adv. mindful. 
 eln'geWIoffen, pwrtie. enclosed, locked 
 
 up or into, 
 ri'ntgerf (-e, -i), adj. & pron. some, 
 
 any. 
 ffiin'funfte, / «., pi. income, revenue. 
 tln'Iabcn, v. a. i/r. to invite, to be in- 
 vited, to call. 
 
 ein'ltt|ren» «■ refl. to have to do (with 
 one). 
 
 ein'mal. adm. once ; auf — , suddenly, 
 on a sudden ; noc^ — ; once 
 more. 
 
 ein'raumetii v. a. to put into a house ; 
 f^. to permit, give up. 
 
 cin'teifTen, v. a. to tear down. 
 
 ein'fam, adj. solitary, retired. 
 
 ctn'f'i&I«ftnf V. n. vr. to fall asleep, die. 
 
 ein'fi^Iagen, v. a. i/r. to strike in, take. 
 
 eiit'f^IiES™ » "■ <»• w"- to enclose, lock 
 in, confine. [snow. 
 
 etn'fi^lltictl» "■ vin/p. to cover with 
 
 einTe^ettr v. a. to put in, appoint. 
 
 einji, a(f». once, one day. 
 
 ein'fietgen, v. n. i/r. to step or get into 
 (carriage). 
 
 ein'wiif elHi v. a. to wrap up. 
 
 Sin'tso^neti m. s. inhabitant. 
 
 rin'jiflf aclj. only, alone. 
 
 (£ii, n. 8. ice, ice cream. 
 
 SiTeXi n. s. iron ; -ia^itr railroad. 
 
 ei'tel, ad}, vain, trifling. 
 
 elementar'; adj. elementary. 
 
 fi'Icnb, TO. s. misery. 
 
 EletJ^ttltt', m. «., pi. -en, elephant. 
 
 elf, ffltf?'. eleven. 
 
 erie, /. 8., pi. -n, yard, ell (two 
 feet). 
 
 Sl'terit, see Sleltern. 
 
 entljfang'en, «. a. ir. to receive, accept. 
 
 em()fe'^l'en, «. a. ir. to recommend ; 
 ftd^ — lalJen, to send one's re- 
 gards. 
 
 SmiJfin'bung, /. «., pi. - en, feeling, 
 emotion. 
 
 emyor', a(2». on high, upwards, up. 
 {This adverb in compounded verhs 
 retains its meaning without modi- 
 fication). 
 
VOCABUIiABY. — GBBMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 505 
 
 ©n'be, n. «., pi. -% end, aim, pur- 
 pose. 
 
 enb'lt($> (Z(^'. at last, finally, at 
 length. 
 
 cng'i adj. narrow, close; -iritjlig, 
 aAj. asthmatical. 
 
 Sng'tl, m. a. angel. 
 
 (Eng'pap, m. s. narrow pass. 
 
 Sn'Celi m. s. grandchild, grandson. : 
 
 entJe^t'en, v. a. to do without ; miss. 
 
 cntMiib'en, 11. a. ir. to deliver, release. 
 
 eittWiif 'tit, «. a. to deprive (of), lay 
 bara 
 
 entbed'en, v. a. Jig. to discover, dis- 
 close. 
 
 ©ntfalt'ung, /. *., pi. -tn, unfolding, 
 development. 
 
 entflie^'en, v. n. ir. to flee, run away. 
 
 entge'gm, adv. & prep, against, op- 
 posite ; -fd)Ittgcn, to beat for. 
 
 entge'gcnciten, v. n. to hasten, to 
 meet. 
 
 entge'gcnge^en, b. w. to go to meet. 
 
 entge'gentonimen/ t). n. to come to 
 meet. 
 
 entgeg'nen, v. a. to reply. 
 
 entge'gm, v. & ir. to escape. 
 
 enllflf fen, v. a. ir. to discharge, dis- 
 miss. 
 
 enttttuf en, ®. n. to run away, desert. 
 
 entmu't^igen, v. a. to discourage. 
 
 cntne^'men, v. a. ir. to take from; 
 — mit to draw from ; fig. to un- 
 derstand from, deduce from ; refl. 
 to undertake. 
 
 enttei^'en, v. a. ir. to snatch away, 
 tear from, rescue from. 
 
 entfi^tag'en, v. refl. & ir. to forget, 
 get rid of. 
 
 cntfi^lieg'cn, «. n. ir. to resolve upon, 
 determine. 
 
 (£ntf($lie6'ttna, /. s. resolution, deci- 
 sion. 
 
 ®ntf(^tu6'( m. s., pi. -t, & mod. reso- 
 lution ; decision, purpose ; ben — 
 faffen, to resolve, make up one's 
 mind. 
 
 entfc^ulb'tgen, ». a. to excuse ; refl. 
 excuse jne's self, apologize for. 
 
 entfeelt', adj. lifeless. 
 
 ctttfej'en, v. a. to dispose ; refl. to be 
 amazed at. 
 
 cntfin'nen, t. refl. & ir. to remember, 
 recollect. 
 
 enttte'ber — obcr, eonj. either — or. 
 
 entwo^n'enf v. a. & n. to disaccustom. 
 
 cntjM'en, v. a. to transport, fill with 
 ecstasy ;j>fflrt. delighted. 
 
 ertau'en, v. a. to build, erect ; flg. to 
 edify. 
 
 (Er'ie, m. »., pi. -n, heir. 
 
 eri'en, v. a. to inherit. 
 
 crtlaf fen, v. n. to grow pale, die. 
 
 ctileic^'en, v. n. ir. to grow pale, die. 
 
 erblid'en, c. a. to behold, perceive, 
 see. 
 
 Er'be, /. «., pi. -n, earth, ground. 
 
 erfa^r'en, v. a. i/r. to learn, expe- 
 rience, endure. 
 
 Srftt^v'ung,/. «., pi. -en, experience, 
 knowledge, practice. 
 
 erftnb'en, «. a. ir. to find out, invent, 
 discover. 
 
 Erpnb'et, m. «. discoverer, inventor. 
 
 ©rjinb'ung, /. «., pi. -en, invention, 
 contrivance. 
 
 erjle'^'en, v. refl. to implore, obtain 
 by entreaties. 
 
 Erfolg', m. «., pi. -e, result. 
 
 cxfreu'eni v. a. & refl. to (cause to) re- 
 joice, enjoy. 
 
 erfteu'Ii^, ac^. pleasing, delightful. 
 
506 
 
 VOCABULAKY. — GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 erfuK'cn, v. a. to fill, fulfil, perform. 
 
 ergoinj'etii v. n. to supply. 
 
 erged'eitf v. refl. & m*. to surrender, 
 submit ; yield, yield up ; a^. de- 
 voted, obedient. 
 
 ergijlj'en, v. a. to delight ; refl. to be 
 delighted. 
 
 ergtcifen, t. a. w. to seize; touch. 
 
 er^alt'em r>. a. vr. to keep, maintain, 
 preserve, save, receive. 
 
 er^al'tung, /. «. preservation; sup- 
 port. 
 
 er^e'Ben, n. a. ir. to raise ; refl. to 
 rise up, rebel, arise. 
 
 (Stje'iung,/. a. elevation, exaltation. 
 
 ct^i^'en, V. a. to heat ; refl. to be- 
 come excited. 
 
 tr^ij^cn, v. a. to raise, heighten, ele- 
 vate. 
 
 et^o'Ien, «. a. refl. to recover, amuse 
 one's sel£ 
 
 etin'nemf v. a. to remind, mention ; 
 refl. to remember, recollect. 
 
 erfal'ten, «. re^. to take or catch 
 cold. 
 
 etfttBf en, v. a. to purchase, buy. 
 
 erfen'nen, v. a. ir. to perceive, discern, 
 distinguish, recognize, acknowl- 
 
 etHd'ten, v. a. & n. to explain, de- 
 clare. 
 
 crfltng'en, v. n. ir. to sound, resound. 
 
 crlang'en, b. a. to reach, attain. 
 
 criaui'en, v. a. refl. & impers. to per- 
 mit, allow. 
 
 ErIauB'nip, /. s. permission. 
 
 erlern'en, «. a. to learn. 
 
 eilie'geit, v. n. ir. to succumb. 
 
 (Erma^'nung,/. a., pi. -en, admonition, 
 exhortation. 
 
 ermit'teltt, «. a. to determine. 
 
 crmct'bcn, v. a. to mtirder. 
 
 ©rmorb'ung, /. a. murder. 
 
 ermii'ben, v. a. & n. to tire, weary. 
 
 crnEn'ncn, «. a. ir. to nominate, ap- 
 point, name. 
 
 erneu'en, erneu'etn, v. a. to renew, ren- 
 ovate. 
 
 etnji, crnji'^aft, adj. serious, grave, 
 sober. 
 
 Ern'te, /. a., pi. -en, harvest, crop. 
 
 ero'6ern, v. a. to conquer, gain. 
 
 ®ro'6eter, m. a. conqueror. 
 
 ffiroff'nung, /. a. opening. 
 
 erquitf'en, «. a. to refresh. 
 
 etrat^'en, v. a. ir. to guess ; divine. 
 
 erre'gen, v. a. excite, cause. 
 
 etieic^'en, v. a. to reach, attain. 
 
 erric^t'en, v. a. to erect, establish. 
 
 erfi^tttt'en, ®. n. ir. to sound. 
 
 crf(I)etn'en, «. a. to appear, arrive. 
 
 erfd&ein'enb, part, perceptible. 
 
 Erfc^ein'ung, /., pi. -en, appearancf^ 
 apparition, phenomenon.. 
 
 crfdjiag'en, v. a. ir. to slay. 
 
 erfijar'cn, v. a. to save. 
 
 er|l, a4). & adv. first, at first, only ; 
 -eni, firstly ; ber er(le tejle, any 
 one. [numbed. 
 
 crflarr'cn, v. n. to be appaled, be- 
 
 ®r|laun'en, n. -i, astonishment, 
 amazement. 
 
 cr|ioun'en, v. n. to be astonished, 
 surprised. 
 
 erfui^'en, v. a. to entreat, request. 
 
 erton'cn, v. n. to^sound, resound. 
 
 ertrag'en, v. a. ir. to bear, support. 
 
 crtrcig'tid^, adj. endurable, 
 
 ertrinfen, e. n. ir. to be drowned. 
 
 crwaii^'cn, v. n. to awake. 
 
 ctweig'tn, ». a. ir. to weigh, ponder, 
 consider. 
 
TOCABtTLAKT. — GBBMAN AND ENGUBH. 
 
 507 
 
 txtoSI)'nen, v. a. to mention, allude 
 
 to. 
 (Srma^^'nung (l)rm, to make mention. 
 eriDarl'en, ■». a. to expect, await, 
 erwcd'en, «. a. to awaken, rouse ; 
 
 flg. to excite, raise. 
 erttJCti'en, «. a. ir. to acquire, earn, 
 
 gain. 
 erwicb'ern, v. a. to return, reply, 
 
 answer, 
 etwiirg'en, d. a. krefl. to strangle, 
 erjcil^ren, v. a. to rebate, tell, narrate. 
 Etstt^rttng,/.,p?.-en, narration, rela- 
 tion, tale, account, story, 
 erjeig'cn, o. a. to render, do ; confer, 
 erjeug'eit, ■». a. to generate, procreate, 
 
 produce. 
 erjie'l^en, ■». a. «V. to bring up, nurse, 
 
 educate, 
 erjit'tern, v. n. to tremble, 
 erjitt'ncn, v. n. to become angry. 
 ti, pron. it ; — gieiti there is, there 
 
 are ; — fei benn, unless, provided. 
 S'feli m.-i, pi. -t ass, donkey, 
 effeji/ V. a. & n. to eat, feed, 
 ettsa', o<?j). perhaps, about, nearly. 
 et'Wtt^, pron. something, somewhat ; 
 
 some, any ; a little, rather, 
 eu'et, euete, euer, pron. your, 
 e'wig/ adj. etemal(ly), everlasting- 
 
 (ly) ; «uf — , for ever. 
 <&tfitV\ivtv.', f. s. expedition. 
 
 s?. 
 
 ^S^'x^i a^. capable. 
 
 Sci^'igtett,/., pl.-m, ability, capacity, 
 fitness, faculty, talent. 
 
 5a^'ne(/.,p?. -n, colors, ensign, stan- 
 dard, flag. 
 
 fojt'ctt, V. a. ir. to drive ; ». n. ir. to 
 
 go in a carriage. 
 Ba^tt, /., pi. -n, passage, voyage. 
 %0.1'k, m. «., pi. -Hi falcon. 
 SttH, m., pi. -t, & mo(i. fall, decay, 
 
 decline ; case. 
 faU'en, ■». n. vr. to fall, tumble ; «m 
 
 ben ■JfaK — , to embrace. 
 fall'eni d. w. jfSg'. to pass (judgment). 
 faU^, at2«. in (the) case that. 
 falfi|, «<?;. false, mock, counterfeit, 
 
 treacherous. 
 gami'Ue, /. «., pi. -n, family. 
 fttng'en, «. a. jr. to catch, seize, 
 gar'tt, /., pi. -n, color. 
 Sf«§, »i. «•, pi. -cti & TOOf?. barrel. 
 faf fen, ». a. to seize, take hold of; 
 
 hold, contain, conceive, compre- 
 hend. 
 fttjl, adm. almost, nearly, about 
 faul, adj. lazy. 
 fau'Icn, V. n. to rot, putrefy ; -jcn, 
 
 !!. n. to be idle, lazy. 
 gau'Ienjcr, gaul'tjelj, m. s. lazy fellow. 
 Saul'^eit, /. laziness, idleness, sloth. 
 Sttuft, /., pi. gaufle, fist, wrist. 
 fc(J^t'en, V. a. to fight, fence. 
 ge'ber,/.,yZ. -n, feather, pen, spring ; 
 
 ,-me(]"ct, n. penknife, 
 fc'gen, «. a. to sweep, cleanse. 
 ge^rtrttt, «i. «., pi. -c, error, false 
 • step. 
 fc^I'en, «. m. to fail, miss, mistake, 
 
 ail, want, be deficient, lack. 
 SJe^I'er, m. «. mistake, error, 
 fel^rfc^togen, b. n. & i>. to go amiss, 
 geinb, TO. «., pi. -e, enemy, foe. 
 gelnb'fclisteit, /. «., ;p?. -en, hostility, 
 gelb', ra. «., p?. -er, field, plain ; -^en, 
 
 or -ntttrfi^ttlt, commander-in chie^ 
 
 general. 
 
508 
 
 VOCABUliAltY. — QEBMAlf AND ENGLISH. 
 
 SeWj or Srt'ftn, m. s. rook, cliff. 
 
 gen'flct, n. s. window. 
 
 Se'rim, pi. vacation. 
 
 fern, adj. & adv. far, distant ; DOtt — , 
 from afar, from a distance ; -^er, 
 from afar. [ness. 
 
 ger'ne, /. «., pi. -n, distance, remote- 
 
 fer'net, a^. & adv. further, fiarther. 
 
 fcr'tiSf adj. ready. 
 
 Sftr'tigtcit,/. «. readiness, perfection. 
 
 gejl'ung, /. »., pi. -en, fortress, cita- 
 
 fctt, adj. fat, greasy, rich. [del. 
 
 geu'et, /. 8. fire ; -36rttn|l, /. «. con- 
 flagration. 
 
 gie'ter, n. s. fever. 
 
 pnb'en, v. a.i/r. to find, discover ; jt(^ 
 jurec^t — , to find one's way. 
 
 Sint, m. »., pi. -en, finch. 
 
 ging'er, m,. «. finger ; -'^ut, thimble. 
 
 fJtt'jlet, adj. dark, gloomy. 
 
 Stn'flernig, /. «., pi. -t, darkness. 
 
 gif(^, m. s., pi. -t, fish ; -«r, m. s. 
 fisher, fisherman. 
 
 fif^'en, V. a. to fish. 
 
 flac^, a4). flat, plain, level, shallow. 
 
 glacis, m. a. flax. 
 
 Slara'me, /. «., pi. -n, flame, blaze, 
 flash. 
 
 gla'fi^e, /. «., i)?. -n, bottle, flask. 
 
 flat'tetn, v. n. to juggle, flatter. 
 
 fle'^cn, «. a. to implore, beseech, en- 
 treat. 
 
 glcifii^, n. s. meat. 
 
 gWJf »»• «. diligence, application, 
 industry. 
 
 fleigij, adj. diligent, industrious. 
 
 glie'se, /. a. fly. 
 
 flicj'en, V. n. vr. to fly. 
 
 flim'mern, v. n. to glitter, glisten, 
 glimmer. 
 
 Slop, n. «., pi. -t, & »iod. raft. 
 
 glu^t, /. a. flight, escape, 
 glu'gtl, m. «. wing, 
 glut, /. 8.,'pl.-tn, field, plain, floor, 
 glug, TO. «. jjZ., -e, & mod. river, 
 
 stream, 
 glut^, or glut, /. «., i>;. -en, flood, 
 
 deluge. 
 gol'ge, fur bte — , for the future ; in 
 
 future, 
 fol'gen, v. a. & n. to obey; to follow 
 
 (advice) ; to follow, succeed. 
 fol'genb, adj. following. 
 foIg'U^, adv. of course, consequent- 
 
 ly. 
 
 for'bcrn, v. a. to demand, ask, re- 
 quire. 
 
 gor'bciung, /. «., pi. -en, demand ; 
 grope -*-, large or high price. 
 
 germ, /. «., pi. -en, form, figure, 
 shape, fashion. 
 
 fort, adv. away, off. 
 
 gcrt'bauer, /. a. continuation. 
 
 fort'eilen, v. n. to hasten or hurry 
 away. 
 
 fort'ftt^ren, v. n. to depart ; continue. 
 
 fort'Iaufen, «. n. to run away. 
 
 fort'iagen, «. a. to drive away, chase 
 off. 
 
 fort'fi^rciten, v. n. to advance, pro- 
 gress. 
 
 fort'fejen, v. a. to continue, pursue. 
 
 gort'fefung, /. «., pi. -en, continua 
 tion. 
 
 fort'trelBen, n. a. to drive away. 
 
 fcrt'rod^renb, adv. continual(ly). 
 
 gra'ge, /. a., pi. -n, question. 
 
 frag'en, u a. & n. to ask, question. 
 
 grau, /. «., pi. -en, woman, wife. 
 
 grau'Ieln, n. a. miss, young lady. 
 
 grcc^"^eit, /. a., pi. -en, audacity. 
 
 frei, adj. free, exempt ; -gebig, adj. 
 
VOCABULAKT.— GEKMAH AND ENGLISH. 
 
 509 
 
 generous, benevolent ; -lid|, aim. 
 certainly, to be sure. 
 
 gret'^eit, /. »., pi. -«n, liberty, free- 
 dom. 
 
 frei'laffen, ». «. to liberate. 
 
 frei'ftiKc^en, v. a. to acquit. 
 
 grei'tasj m. s. Friday. 
 
 fremb. adj. strange, foreign. 
 
 gremb'Iing, m. «., pi. -i, foreigner, 
 stranger. 
 
 Sreu'fae, /. «., pi. -n, joy, pleasure, 
 delight. 
 
 freub'ig, adj. glad(ly), joyfu](ly). 
 
 fieu'cn, V. refl. to rejoice, be glad, 
 enjoy. 
 
 Sfrcunb, m. s. pi. -e, friend ; -fc^aft, 
 /. ». friendship. 
 
 freunb'lic^, ae0. friendly, kind, pleas- 
 ant(ly). 
 
 Stt'»ri» in. 8. mischief, crime. 
 
 8tieb'c(n), m. s. peace ; -Sfiiiter, peace- 
 disturber. 
 
 frieb'ltc^, adj. peaceable(ly). 
 
 frieb'fettiS/ adj. peaceable(ly). 
 
 ftie'ren, v. n. to freeze, to be or get 
 cold. 
 
 ftifi^, adj. fresh, cool, new. 
 
 fto^, adj. glad, joyful, joyous. 
 
 fro^'lic^f adj. joyful, cheerful, happy. 
 
 gto^'finn, m. s. cheerfulness, joy. 
 
 grofl, m. 8. frost. 
 
 fromm, adj. pious, devout. 
 
 Sruc^t, /. «., pl.-t, & mod. fruit. 
 
 ftuc^t'6ttr, adj. fruitful ; — maijm, to 
 fertilize. 
 
 ftiiS, adv. early (in the morning) ; 
 -er, adv. formerly ; -fiitifcn, v. n. 
 to breakfast ; ntorscn — , to-mor- 
 row early or to-morrow morning. 
 
 grit^'ja^r, spring. 
 
 grii^'ling, m. a. spring ; -iiott, mes- 
 
 senger of spring; -«Mumm, 
 spring flowers. 
 
 %uiii, m. «., pi. -e, & mod. fox. 
 
 fu^leni V. a. & n. to feel, perceive. 
 
 fii^'ren, v. a. to carry, lead, guide; 
 ^tteg — , wage war. 
 
 Bii^'ret/ m. s. leader, guida 
 
 fittt'ett, V. a. to fill. 
 
 Sutt'cn, n. 8. foal, colt. 
 
 fiinf, adj. five. 
 
 fur, prep, for ; -tua^r, adv. indeed. 
 
 %\u'ijt, f. 8., pi. -n, furrow. 
 
 fut'd)en, V. a. to furrow, wrinkle. 
 
 Snt^t, /. a. fear, apprehension. 
 
 furc^l'tar, adj. fearful, formidable, 
 frightful. 
 
 fiir^f ctt/ V. a. to fear, be afraid ; v, 
 refl. to be in fear, be afraid of. 
 
 fur^t'ctlt^, adj. frightful, horrible. 
 
 furc^t'fam, adj. timid(ly), timorous. 
 
 gitrfl, m. »., pi. -en, prince, sover- 
 eign ; -ent^um, sovereignty, prin- 
 cipality. 
 
 Sup, m. «., pi. -e, & m^d. foot, bot- 
 tom ; -laiJfm, m. 8. track, trace, 
 footstep ; -reife, journey on foot; 
 -Solf, n. a. infantry. 
 
 ®a'6e, /. «., 'pl. -n, gift, talent. 
 
 ®a'bel, /. a., pl. -n, fork. 
 
 ®an?, /. «., pl. -e, & mod. goose. 
 
 ganj, adj. & adm. whole, all ; very. 
 
 ganj'Ii^, adj. & adv. wholly, utterly. 
 
 gar, adj. & adv. suflBciently done, 
 quite, very, even; — wunbcrbar, 
 very Btrange(ly) ;-ntc§t, not at aiL 
 
 ©ar'ten, m. a., pl. & mod. garden. 
 
 ©oirt'ner, m. a. gardener. 
 
 ®a^, n. 3. gas. 
 
510 
 
 VOCABTJLAKY. — GEBMAS AlTD ENGLISH. 
 
 ®tt|^, m. «., pi. -e, & mod. guest, 
 stranger ; -^mi, or -^of, hotel ; 
 -Xiijhxtif. s., pi. -en, hospitality. 
 
 ®at'te, m. «., pZ.-n, husband, spouse. 
 
 ©at'tung, / «•, pi. -en, kind, quality. 
 
 ©ajene, /. «., pi. -n, gaaelle. 
 
 gea4t'et,i)art. & adj. esteemed. 
 
 geSd'teit, B. a. ir. to bring forth, 
 bear. 
 
 @eiau'be, m. s. building, edifice. 
 
 ge'icn, B. a. ir. to give, grant. 
 
 ®ciet', a. «., pi. -t, prayer. 
 
 OcMtt', ». «., ^Z. -e, district, prov- 
 ince, territory. 
 
 fleiiet'en, «. a. ir. to command, order. 
 
 ®ebirg'e, n. s. chain of mountains ; 
 pi. mountains. 
 
 geio'ren, ^art. bom. 
 
 ®et)ot', 71. «., j)2. -e, commandment, 
 order. 
 
 (jeirttc^t', ^aw^ brought. 
 
 ®titm6j', TO. s., p?. -e, & mod. use, 
 usage, custom, practice. 
 
 ®c6rii'ber, pi. brothers. 
 
 flctu^'ren, «. 71. to be due, proper. 
 
 ®e6iKtj /. »., pi. -en, birth, nativity. 
 
 ®eSiif(l)', n. a. pi. -t, thicket. 
 
 ®eiia^t'ni5, n. «., pZ. - e, memory, re- 
 collection. 
 
 ®ebttn'fe, m. »., pZ. thought, idea. 
 
 gebci'^cn, v. n. ir. to prosper, suc- 
 ceed, increase. 
 
 gebcnt'en, «. n. ir. to remember. 
 
 ®ebt(^t', /. «., pZ. -e, poem. 
 
 ®ebulb', /. s. patience. 
 
 gebulb'ig, ctdj. patient(ly). 
 
 ®efa^r', /. a., pi. -en, danger, peril. 
 
 gefd^r'bcn, «. n. to endanger. 
 
 ®efci^r'te, to. «., p?. -n, companion, 
 mate. 
 
 ®cfal['en, to. «. kindness, favor. 
 
 gefaff'cn, v. n. ir. to please, like. 
 
 gefdtl'ig, adj. kind, accommodating. 
 
 ®efdl['igfell, /. «., pi. -ew, kindness, 
 favor. 
 
 gefoiD'igjl, otdj. please, if you please. 
 
 gefang'en, pa/rt. imprisoned, caught ; 
 -ne^men, to take or make prisoner ; 
 -ft^en, to be imprisoned. 
 
 ®efang'enf(i|aft, /. «., pi. -en, captiv- 
 ity, imprisonment. 
 
 ®efdng'ni§, n. «., pi. -e, prison. 
 
 ®cfu^r, n. «., pi. -e, feeling, sensa 
 tion. 
 
 gcfufjrl', part. lead. 
 
 ge'gen, prep, against, towards, near. 
 
 ®e'genb,/. «., pi. -en, country, region, 
 neighborhood. 
 
 ®e'gen|lanb, m. s.,pl.-t, & mod. sub- 
 ject, object. 
 
 ©c'gent^cil, n. a., pi. -e, contrary, 
 reverse, opposite.. 
 
 ®e'flenwart, /. a. present (time), pres- 
 ence. 
 
 ge'genmdrtig, adj. present, on hand. 
 
 ®eg'ncr, m. a. opponent. 
 
 ®e^alt', TO. «. contents, salary. 
 
 ©e^eim'nig, m., »., pi. -e, secret. 
 
 ge'^cn, v. n. ir. to go, walk ; (finem) 
 gut — , to be doing well. 
 
 ®ePt', n. s. sense of hearing; — 
 fd^enten, to give heed, listen to. 
 
 StTjOxif'tn, V. n. to obey. 
 
 ge^oi'cn, «. n. to belong, appertain 
 to. 
 
 ge'^ot'fttm, adj. obedient, dutiful. 
 
 ®eif'fel, /. a., pi. -n, whip, scourge. 
 
 ®ctfl, TO., pi. -er, spirit, soul, mind ; 
 -lic^c, m. «. minister ; -licdfeit, /. 
 «., pi. -en, clergy, spirituality ; 
 -tiMlaim, pi. talent, natural abil- 
 ities. 
 
VOCABULAKY. — GBKMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 511 
 
 <Setj, m,. a. avarice ; -^ale, m. s. avsr 
 ricious person, miser. 
 
 getj'iSi a^. avaricious. 
 
 gcHiwft', adj. fought, contended. 
 
 getauft'j part, bought. 
 
 gEloiufig, adj. fluent(ly). 
 
 geli, adj. yeUow. 
 
 (Selb/ n. s., pi. -cr, money ; -»erle« 
 gen^eit, /. d. pecuniary embarrass- 
 ment. 
 
 (Sele'gen^eit, /. «., pi. -en, occasion, 
 opportunity. 
 
 gcle^rt', ac^. learned, scholarly. 
 
 gele'fen, part. read. 
 
 gelotcn, v. a. to promise, vow. 
 
 ®eluit)e, n. s. vow ; — t^utt/ to take 
 the vow. 
 
 ®ema(|', n. s., pi. -tx, & mod. room, 
 chamber, apartment. 
 
 gemac^t', part. made. 
 
 ®enta^I', m. s., pi. -e, consort, spouse. 
 
 ®emal'be, n. s. picture, painting. 
 
 ©ewarf ung, / a., pi. -en, boundary, 
 border. 
 
 gemetn', adj. common; -fam, to- 
 gether, joined. 
 
 ®emu'fE, n. a. vegetables, greens. 
 
 ©erniit^', n. a., pi. -tx, mind, soul, 
 heart, nature. 
 
 gemut5n(i^, ac0. agreeable. 
 
 gen, contraction for gegeit. 
 
 gcnannt', part, named. 
 
 genau', a^. & adv. close(ly), accurate- 
 (ly), careful(ly). 
 
 ®enctar, m. a., pi. -e, & mod. gen- 
 eral, commander. 
 
 ®e'niu8, m. a., genius ; pi. ®c'nien, 
 
 guardians, spirits, 
 genom'men, part, taken. 
 ®enop'(en), m. a. companion, asso- 
 ciate ; -fi^aft, /. 8. companionship. 
 
 gcnBti^'igt, part, obliged. 
 
 genug', a^. sufficient. 
 
 geniig'en, v. a. to siiffice. 
 
 ®enu^', m. s., pi. -c, & mod. enjoy. 
 
 ment, pleasure. 
 ®c))Ia))'per, n. a. chattering, nonsense, 
 gcrab'e, adj. & adv. exactly, straight, 
 
 directly, precise(ly). 
 gcrat^'en, v. n. i/r. prosper, succeed ; 
 
 to fall or get in or into. 
 ®erttt^etto^r, n. a. hap-hazard. 
 ®erdufc^', n. a. noise, bustle, 
 getec^t', adj. just. 
 
 ®erec^t'tgteit, /. s. justice, righteous- 
 ness, 
 gereijl', pa/rt. traveled, 
 gereu'en, v. imp. to repent ; tS gereut 
 
 mtc^, I repent, I am sorry. 
 ®eti$t', n. a., pi. -t, tribunaJ, court 
 
 of justice ; judgment. 
 gcrtng', adj. little, small, 
 gem, adv. (aee p. 321, footnote 1), 
 gladly, cheerfully, willingly, very 
 much. 
 gcruf en, part, called. 
 ©efanb'te, m. a., pi. -a, ambassador. 
 ®cfang', m. a., pi. -e, & mod. song. 
 aft', n. a., pi. -c, business, 
 en, V. imp. to happen. 
 ®cfi$en!', n. a., pi. -e, present, gift. 
 ii)t't,f. a., pi. -n, history, story, 
 iii^t^'fac^, n. a. the department 
 of history. 
 lic^t^'forfcijer, m. s. historian. 
 gefc^iift', adj. skillful, apt, proper. 
 gefi^Iag'en, part, beaten. 
 ®efc^tec^t', n. a., pi. -ex, sex, gender. 
 gefc^loPfcn, part, closed. 
 ®ef^mac£', n. a. taste, 
 gefd^murft', part, adorned. 
 
 i)l>f , n. a., pi. -c, creature. 
 
512 
 
 VOCABULARY. — aBRMAIt AND ENGLISH. 
 
 gefc^offen, part. shot. 
 
 ®cf(^rci'f n. a. cry, clamor. 
 
 flefi^riefi'en/ part, -written. 
 
 @eril)u|;'f n. s., pi. -tt cannon, artil- 
 lery. 
 
 ©efc^wifter, /., pL brothers, sisters, 
 or brothers and sisters. 
 
 jefej'en, part, seea 
 
 ©efcH', m. «., pi. -en, joumeymaii, 
 comrade, fellow ; -f(^ttft, /. «., pi. 
 -ttli society, company, association. 
 
 Btfri'Icn, V. refl. to associate, follow. 
 
 ®efej', n. «., piL -t, law, statute; 
 -Ju^, w. «., i)?. -er, & mod. law- 
 book, code of law. 
 
 ®cftc^t', n. «., pi. -Er, (-t), (»ee p. 83, 
 XI.), face. Eight ; son — lemteni to 
 know by sight. 
 
 (Sefpenll', n. s.,pl. -tx, ghost ; -erR>ucr, 
 apparition of ghosts. 
 
 Stfftoi^'m, pivrt. spoken. 
 
 ®e|lalJ'/.-«„ pi. -en, figure, form. 
 
 fiejlalt'cn, «. refi. to form or shape it- 
 self. 
 
 ®efloinb'ittg, w. «., pi -c, confession. 
 
 gefle^'en, v. a. ir. to confess. 
 
 flefl'etn, «*!). yesterday. 
 
 flefiol^'lm, port stolen. 
 
 ®e|ltttu^', n. «., pi. -e, bushes, 
 thicket. 
 
 flejl'rig, atZo. yesterday. 
 
 gefunb', a^. sound, healthy. 
 
 ®etraitl'/ n. «., pi. -c, drink. 
 
 getrau'ett, ». re/?, to dare, venture. 
 
 ®etretb'e/ n. s. grain. 
 
 ®e»at'ter, m. s. cousin. 
 
 gemd^r'en, v. a. to afford, grant. 
 
 ®etBatt', /. s. power, might, force. 
 
 flOvalt'ig, fl^'. powerful, forcible, 
 mighty, violent(ly). 
 
 gcwalt'fant; a^. violent, forcibly. 
 
 jcwtirt'ig, adv. (with ^tn), liable to, 
 
 in expectation of. 
 ®en)e^r', n. «., pZ. -c, gun^ 
 ®c»i(^t', re. «., pi, -t, weight : fig. 
 
 importance. 
 ®e«)tnn', m. e., pi. -t, gain, profit. 
 Sewinn'eit, c. a. & n. vn. to win, gain, 
 
 profit, earn. 
 gewif', aiij. & adv. certain{ly), sure 
 
 Oy). 
 
 ®e»if fen, n. s. conscience. 
 
 ©etBt^'^eit, /. s. certainty. 
 
 ®ewil'ter, n. s. thunderstorm, tem- 
 pest. 
 
 flcwii^n'cn, v. a. & refl. to accustom, 
 acquire the habit. 
 
 ®c»o^n'^eit, /. »., pi. -en, custom, 
 practice, habit. 
 
 im'i\jn'lii^, adj. customary, usualdy). 
 
 gewsl^nt', adj. accustomed. 
 
 QiWaVie, n. «. vault. 
 
 ®ejelt', n. s. pi. -t, tent. 
 
 gejiem'en, v. imp. & refl. to be 
 proper. 
 
 ®ift, n. 8., pi. -t, poison ; -6ec^et, 
 poisoned cup. 
 
 ®Ianj, m. a. lustre, splendor. 
 
 glcinj'en/ v. n. to glitter, glisten, 
 shine, sparkle, to be bright. 
 
 ®laii n. a., pi. -er, & mod. glass. 
 
 ®Iaui'e(n), m. «. faith, belief, credit. 
 
 glttuli'en, v. a. to believe, trust, think. 
 
 glaub'tid), adj. credible, credibly. 
 
 gleiiS^i ac0. &adv. immediately, pres- 
 ently, at once ; equal, (al)thongh ; 
 -gultls, adj. & adv. eqmvalent(ly), 
 equal(ly), indifferent(ly) ; ju -er 
 Beit, at the same time, 
 ic^'en, v. a. & n. ir. to resemble, be 
 like. 
 
 ®tei4'mut^, m. a. equanimity. 
 
VOCABIILAIIY.— GBBMAN AETO ENGLISH. 
 
 513 
 
 ®Iieb, n. «., pi. -cr, limb, member ; 
 afle Olicber, the whole body. 
 
 ®lo(f'e, /. «., pi. -n, bell, clock. 
 
 OIucE, n. s. fortune, luck, happi- 
 ness. 
 
 glua'Uc^, adj. fortunate, happy ; -cr* 
 tteife, happily, fortunately. 
 
 glu^'eiti v. a. & n. to make red hot, 
 glow. 
 
 ®Iut^(/. «., pi. -en, glowing, fire, 
 flame. 
 
 ®na'be, /. a., pi. -n, favor, mercy, 
 grace. 
 
 gna'big, ac0. gracious, merciful. 
 
 ®oIti, n. s. gold. 
 
 golb'cn, adj. golden, made of gold. 
 
 ®ott, m. «., pi. -n, & mod. God ; (in 
 exclamations translate Tiecmen) ; 
 fo — Will, the Lord willing, 
 
 gBtt'li^, adj. divine, godly, godlike. 
 
 ®vaS/ n. «., pi. -«, & mod. grave ; 
 -Itebi funeral-song ; -f^rift, tomb- 
 stone inscription. 
 
 grai'cn, v. a. & n. ir. to dig, engrave. 
 
 ®iab, m. «., pi. -e, degree. 
 
 ®rttf, m. «., pi. -en, count. 
 
 ®tanima'ttt, /. «., pi. -en, grammar. 
 
 ®ta.ii 71. s. grass. 
 
 grau, adj. gray. 
 
 grau'ftm, ffli?;'. cruel, barbarous. 
 
 gret'fen, v. a. & n. ir. to catch, seize, 
 lay hold of. 
 
 ®ret^, m. «., pi. -e, an aged man ; 
 sotti ®rcife bet om SMie ge:^t, from 
 the aged leaning on their staff. 
 
 ®rcn'je, /. «., pi. -n, limit, border, 
 boundary. 
 
 grim'mig, o^?- & <*'^''- fierce(ly), furi- 
 ous (ly). 
 
 groi, ad;', coarse, uncouth. 
 
 gtof , a^'. large, great, grand. 
 
 ®ro6'mut^, /. magnanimity, gener- 
 osity. 
 
 gtop'mut^tg, adj. magnanimous. 
 
 ®ri)f't)atcr, -mutter, grandfather, 
 -mother. 
 
 ®ru'bc, /. «., pt -n, grave. 
 
 griin? Ojdj. green, verdant, fresh. 
 
 ®runb, m. »., ^i -f, & woe?, ground, 
 bottom ; reason. 
 
 grun'ben, «. a. to establish, lay the 
 foundation of, to base on. 
 
 grup'en, v. a. to greet, salute. 
 
 ®ul'bcn, m. s. florin (German coin). 
 
 ®itn|l'Ung, m. «., pi. -c, favorite. 
 
 gut, adj. & adv. good, kind, well . 
 -niac^en, to repair (damages oi 
 loss) ; -t^oitig, adj. beneficent, 
 charitable. 
 
 ®ut, n. s.,pl.-tXt&mod. possession, 
 property. 
 
 ®iit'e, /. 8. kindness, goodness, 
 bounty. 
 
 gut'ig, a^j. kind, benevolent ; pleas- 
 ant. 
 
 ®unjl, /. s. favor. 
 
 gnn|l'ig, acij. & adv. favorable, favor- 
 ably. 
 
 |)ttar, n. «., pi. -c, hair. 
 
 ^a'ben, v. aux. & a. ir. to have, pos- 
 sess ; gem — , to like ; rcd^t — , to 
 be right. 
 
 |)a'fen, m. s., pi. & mod. /larbor, 
 haven, port. 
 
 Iia'fer, m. s. oat, oats. 
 
 ^af ten, v. n. to cling. 
 
 §a'geln, v. n. & imp. to hail 
 
 iia^n, m. s. pi. -e, & mod., rooster. 
 
 Iiai'be, see ycibc. 
 
514 
 
 VOCABXJLAST. — GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 ^ali, Ojdj. half. 
 
 4>aipte,/ «., pi. -n, half, middle. 
 
 ^Ai, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. neck, 
 throat ; uiii ben — faUetl, to em- 
 brace, fall on one's neck. 
 
 ^alt'eit, V. a. & n. vr. to hold, take, 
 keep, support, stop ; inne — , to 
 stop (short) ; — ftoj to take to 
 be, regard as. 
 
 ^ant'mer, m,. s hammer. 
 
 $ani)> /. a., pi. -t, & mod. hand; 
 -fi^u^, m. s. glove; -f^u^mae^er, 
 glover ; -f^rift,/. «. handwriting ; 
 ^anbebrudf squeeze or pressure of 
 the hand. 
 
 ^anb'eli m. s. barter, trade, com- 
 merce ; -Smann, trader ; -Dertrog, 
 commercial treaty. 
 
 ^anb'eln. v. n. to act, trade, trafBc. 
 
 ^ttnb'lHngr /. «. action, deed, trade. 
 
 png'en, v. a. to hang, to be attached 
 to. 
 
 ^fa'ing, m. «., pi. -t, herring. 
 
 ^at'rcn, v. n. to stay, wait for, tarry. 
 
 |att, adj. hard, severe ; -noitfig, adj. 
 stubborn, headstrong, pertina- 
 cious. 
 
 ^a'fci m. s., pi. -n, hare. 
 
 $a§, m. s. hate, hatred. 
 
 ^af'fen, v. a. to hate. 
 
 m'Ui^, adj. ugly, hateful, deformed. 
 
 1)a^ii, adj. hasty, in a hurry. 
 
 |)attf e, m. s., pi. -it, crowd, heap. 
 
 pu'fen, v. a. to heap. 
 
 Puf ig, adv. frequently, often. 
 
 |)au))t, n. »., pi. -er, & mod. head, 
 chief ; -Kr^e, principal church ; 
 -m«^t, /. «. principal power; 
 -mann, captain ; -(l«bt,/. «. capital. 
 
 ^CMi, n. «., pi, -er, & mod. house, 
 household ; ju -t, at home ; na$ 
 
 -e, home ; -Pliilfel/ m. s. street 
 
 door-key ; -ftiire, /. street door. 
 ^auf en, «. n. to lodge, reside, live. 
 §ttut, /. «., pi. -e, & mod. skin. 
 ©eer, n. a., pi. -e, army. 
 |)cer'be, /. a., pi. -n, herd, flock, 
 ^ef tig, adj. violent, passionate, severe. 
 §ei'be, m. a. heathen ; /. a., pi. -n, 
 
 heath, wood, forest. 
 §etl, n. a. happiness, prosperity, 
 ^etl'en, ■». a. & n. to heal, cure. 
 ^eil'ig, ac^. holy, sacred ; '^oH) unb — , 
 
 most solemnly. 
 Iietm'tttl^, /. «., pi. -n, home, native 
 
 country, 
 ^eim'tel^ren, d. a. to return home, 
 ^ctm'weg, m. a., pi. -t, way toward 
 
 home. 
 ^eim'Ii(i^, adj. Becret(ly), private(ly). 
 ^ci'rat^en, v. a. & n. to marry. 
 ^eip, ac0. hot. 
 ^eif 'en, ■». a. & n. to call, bid, mean, 
 
 signify, to be called. 
 ^ei'tcr, adj. serene(ly), clear(ly), 
 
 bright, cheerful(ly). 
 $rtb, m. s., pi. -en, hero, 
 ^el'fen, «. a. & «. ir. to help, assist. 
 ^eQ', ac^. light, bright, loud. 
 $el'lefi)cnt( m. a. the Hellespont. 
 $emb, n. a., pi. -en, shirt, 
 ^er, adv. hither, hitherward. 
 ^erauf , adv. up, upwards, up stairs. 
 ^crauS', ad^. out (of) ; -Jrtngen, v. a. 
 
 to bring to light, discover ; -tte* 
 
 ten, to appear. 
 Iicr'betge, /. a., pi -n, inn, shelter. 
 $etbf}, m. a. autumn. 
 l^eTift'U(^, a^. autumnal, 
 herein', ad/a. In, into. 
 ^tt'it1)t«, V. n. to go hither ; e8 ginfl 
 
 lufJig l^er, they were all merry; 
 
TOCABDLAET. — GEKMAH AND ENGLISH. 
 
 515 
 
 natSrltc^ iait\ — , to take the 
 natural courge ■v/iih it, not to 
 cheat about it. 
 
 ^er'funft,/. s. descent, origin. 
 
 $ert', m. s., pi. -en, Lord, master, 
 mister, gentleman, sir. 
 
 |err'It§, adv. excellent(ly), magnifi- 
 centtly), sp]endid(ly). 
 
 |>Mr'Ui^teit, /. «., pi. -en, excellency, 
 splendor, beauty. 
 
 ^ert'f^en, v. n. to rule, govern, pre- 
 dominate. 
 
 ler'flammen, v. n. to descend, come 
 from. 
 
 l^etit'Jet/ adv. over, across (to this 
 side). 
 
 ferum', adv. round, about. 
 
 l^ersor'fle^en, v. n. ir. to go forth ; to 
 proceed, result. 
 
 ^MSot'treten, v. n. ir. to stand out, 
 step forward, be prominent. 
 
 |)etj', n. s., pi. -erii heart, courage ; 
 in^ — fdjieiktii to engrave in the 
 heart. 
 
 Scrj'lic^, adj. heartily, kind. 
 
 l^erj'ergreifenb, adj. heart-affecting. 
 
 §er'i03, m. a., pi. -e, duke ; -aJrufl 
 heart of the duke. 
 
 \jtvit, ^eu'te, adv. to-day ; — SKorgcn, 
 this morning ; — Slienb, this eve- 
 ning. 
 
 l^iet', adv. here ; -auf, adm. there- 
 upon. 
 
 4iUf t, see |)itlfe. 
 
 ^im'mel, m. «. heaven, heavens, sky. 
 
 l^imm'Itfc^, ad}, celestial, heavenly. 
 
 ^itt unb \)tx, see p. 281, VIII. 
 
 Ijinab't adm. down; -flrigejt, to de- 
 scend. 
 
 ^inan', adv. up, up to ; -IJeis™' to a^ 
 cend, mount. 
 
 ^inaitf , aAr>. above, up stairs ; ^^unb 
 
 l^inuntcr, adv. up and down. 
 l^inttuS', adv. out, out of, out there, 
 ^inburc^', adv. throughout, 
 ^inein', adm. in, into ; -je^cn, to enter. 
 ^in'gejen, v. n. to go there, 
 ^inun'teri ad/o. down stairs, below. 
 ^in'tcingli^, a^. sufi5cient(ly). 
 ^n'^ijlni)ett, v. n. &vr. to creep, steal 
 
 to. 
 ^m'fE$tn, V. a. to put down ; refl. to 
 
 seat one's self, 
 ^in'tragcn (micber), v. a. to carry back 
 
 again. 
 ^in'teri adv. & prep, hind, behind, 
 
 back, after ; -gel^'en,to deceive. 
 ^inju'fugElt, V. a. to add to or thereto. 
 |)irt(e), m. s., pi. -en, herdsman, 
 
 shepherd ; -en^aJ, m. s. shepherd's 
 
 staff; -enflotc, /. s. cane, flute; 
 
 -entafi^e, /. s. shepherd's bag. 
 $t^'e, /. s. heat, ardor, passion, 
 ^oc^, adj. high, lofty, sublime, 
 
 great ; — itnb ^nlx^i most solemn- 
 
 ly- 
 
 ^oc^'mut^, m. s. haughtiness, pride. 
 
 $of, n. «., pi. -t, & mod. yard, court. 
 
 ^of fen, V. a. to hope, expect. 
 
 ^off' entlicj), adj. in hopes. 
 
 ©ofpnung, /. «., pi. -en, hope, expec- 
 tation. 
 
 ^of lic^, adj. polite(ly), courteous(ly). 
 
 ^'6fl\i)kii,f. s. politeness. 
 
 ^i"it,f. s.,pi. -n, height, highness, 
 elevation. 
 
 ^0^1, adj. hollow, concave. 
 
 Iiij^re, / «., pi. -n, pit, cavern, cave. 
 
 ^olb, adj. affectionate, kind, favor- 
 able, dear, lovely. 
 
 ^ol'en, V. a. to fetch, go for; — 
 IttlTcn, to send for. 
 
516 
 
 VOCABDIiART.— OKRMAN AMD ENGLISH. 
 
 |)olun'berf m. s. elder. 
 
 •^olji n. a. wood. 
 
 ^o'nig, m. s. honey. 
 
 l^or'en, v. a. Si n. to hear, give ear ; 
 fiii^ — lapn, to be worth hearing. 
 
 |)orn', n. a., pi. -ct, & mod. horn. 
 
 ^iiBfiJ^> adj. handsome, pretty. 
 
 $uf, m. »., pi. -e, hoof. 
 
 -fiu'gel, m. s. hill. 
 
 ^u^n, n. g.,pl.-cx, & 5reo(i.fowl, hen. 
 
 Iiiil'fe,/. s. help. 
 
 plfloS, <«?;. helpless. 
 
 ©ntib, TO. a., pZ. -e, dog. 
 
 l^un'bett, adj. hundred. 
 
 ^ung'd) m. s. hunger, famine. 
 
 ^ung'crn, v. n. & imp. to hanger. 
 
 pp'ftH/ V. n. to jump. 
 
 |)ut, m. «., jpt -e, & motZ. hat, bon- 
 net ; loaf. 
 
 p'tenj «. refl. to look after, take 
 care of ; to be on one's guard. 
 
 iiut'te, /. «., pi. -n, hut, cottage. 
 
 Sbee'i /. «., pJ. -It, idea. 
 
 <S)m, (dat. of er). him. 
 
 HjXt pron. her. 
 
 Im, contraction of in iim. 
 
 im'mer, always, ever, constantly ; 
 
 — noijt BtUl. 
 intern', e<mj. while, as, because, since, 
 inbef'fen, adv. however. 
 in^alt(i3)'f^t»et> <i^i>- very important, 
 
 full of meaning, 
 in'net, adj. inner. 
 Sn'f^itft, /. s., pi. -en, inscription. 
 Snfett', n. «., pi. -en, insect. 
 Sn'fcl, /• o., pi. island. 
 Sn'jlrument, n. «., pi. -e, instrument. 
 
 3ntolerttnj', /. t. intolerance. 
 ir'Mfc^, adj. earthly, worldly, 
 ir'genb, adv. any, some, ever. 
 ir'genbtBO, ade. somewhere. 
 Sr're, /. ». error ; in ber — , astray, 
 it'ren, v. n. & refl. to err, be mis. 
 
 taken ; fl^ — lalfen, to be deceived, 
 
 to be led astray. 
 Srr't^um, m. »., pi. -et/ & Tnod. error, 
 
 fault. 
 
 3. 
 
 3a, adv. yes. 
 
 Sagb, /. «., pi. -en, chase, hunt. 
 
 Sfl'gM* TO- *■> P'. hunter, sportsman. 
 
 Sa^r, n. «., jA. -e, year ; -^unbert, n. 
 s. pi. -e, century. 
 
 jfl^r'H^, adj. annual, yearly. 
 
 Sarn'mer, m. s. lamentation, misery, 
 pity, calamity ; -gefdjrci, n. s. lam- 
 entation ; -ton, doleful cry or 
 accent ; -soil, adj. full of misery, 
 deplorable. 
 
 jam'mern, «. n , a., imp. & refl. to 
 lament, weep, pity ; fill with pity. 
 
 ie, ado. ever, always ; — nun, well ; 
 ijon — Vr, always ; — nad^bent, ac- 
 cording as, — . . be|lo, the . . the. 
 
 iebet (e, 8), pron. every, every one, 
 any one. 
 
 Se'betmann, pron. everybody. 
 
 Seb'njeber, pron. everybody. 
 
 iebo^', conj. however, yet, neverthe 
 less. 
 
 jes'Iic^, see ieber. 
 
 je'm«nb, pron. somebody, any one. 
 
 ie'ner (c, i), pron. that, that persoi., 
 the former. 
 
 im'^titi, prep. gen. on the other sida 
 
VOCABULAET. — GBEMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 517 
 
 of; ienfeitig, adj- opposite, being 
 
 on the other side, 
 je^'ig, adj. present, actual. 
 je|'o, je^t, adv. now, at present. 
 3oc^', re. s., pi. -e, yoke, burden. 
 Su'be, m. s., pi. -en, Jew. 
 jfl'btf(^, ac^. Jewish. 
 Su'genb, / s. youth ; -freutlb, m. »., 
 
 pi. -t, early friend. 
 Su'It, m. s. July. 
 jung, adj. young, youthful, new, 
 
 fresh, early. 
 Sung'e, m. «., pi -n, boy, fellow. 
 Sung'frau,/. s.,pl. -en, maid. 
 Sung'ling, m. s. pi. -e, youth, lad. 
 Su'hi, m. a. June. 
 
 Jfaf fee, m. coffee ; -^aua, n. «., pi. 
 
 -er, & mod. coffee-house. 
 fla'ftg, m. a., pi. -e, cage. 
 la^I, adj. bald, bare, naked. 
 Jla^n, m. «., pZ. -e, & mod. boat. 
 flai'fer, »». «. emperor. 
 .SaiTerrcid^, n. a., pi. -e, empire. 
 Salif, m. «., ^Z. -en, caliph. 
 Jtalb, ». «., pi. -n, & jKocZ. calf, 
 kit, adj. cold. 
 Sal'te, /. a. cold (weather), 
 jfamcel', ra. a., pi. -e, camel. 
 fiumerab', m,. a., pi. -en, comrade. 
 ^ampf, m. a., pi. -e, & mod. conflict, 
 
 struggle, fight, contest. 
 (amyf en, v. n. to combat, fight, 
 tann, aee tonnen. 
 Capital', 71. «., yZ. -e, or -er, & too^. 
 
 capital, upper part of a pillar. 
 SttJJttcin', m. a., pi. -e, captain. 
 farg, a^. parsimonious, scanty. 
 Sattoffel, /. s., pi. -n, potato. 
 fldTe, »». «. cheese. 
 
 fflaf'fe, /. «., ^Z. -n, chest, money- 
 drawer. 
 
 tat^o'Iifc^, adj. catholic. 
 
 Sat'e, /. «., ^Z. -n, cat. 
 
 tuu'fen, V. a. & n. to buy. 
 
 Sauf mann, m. a., pi. -leute, merchant. 
 
 taum, adv. scarcely. 
 
 fe^'ren, v. a. to sweep, brush. 
 
 fieim, m. a., pi. -e, germ, bud. 
 
 fein, {-er, -e, -eS), adj. pr. no, no 
 one; -eafaHS, -eSweg^, by no 
 means. 
 
 .SeH'ner, m. s. waiter. 
 
 ten'nen, v. a. vr. to know, be a(^ 
 quainted with ; — lernen, to be- 
 come acquainted with; Don ®e' 
 fl(^t — , to know by sight; bent 
 9!amen wxi) — , to know by name. 
 
 ^ennt'nif , /. a., pi. -e, knowledge, in- 
 formation. 
 
 Senn'jeic|cn, n. a. mark. 
 
 Ser'fer, m. a. prison. 
 
 flet'te, /. «., pi. -n, chain. 
 
 teuc^'en, v. n. to pant. 
 
 fitnb, n. a.,pl.-zx, child ;-ete't'/. s.,pl. 
 -en, childishness, childish trick. 
 
 ftnb'Iic^, adj. childlike. 
 
 ^it'^e, /. s., pi. -tt, church. 
 
 .Sirc^'tl^utm, church-tower. 
 
 Sirc^'^of, church-yard. 
 
 &\.x'Siji, f. a., pi. -n, cherry. 
 
 ffiiffen, n. a. cushion, pillow. 
 
 Sla'ge, /. a., pi. -n, complaint, lamen- 
 tation. 
 
 Ik'gen, v. a. & re. to complain, la- 
 ment. 
 
 fila'geton, m. a., pi. -e, & m^d. plain- 
 tive tone. 
 
 ftar, adj. clear, bright, fair, plain. 
 
 Piaffe, /. «., pi. -n, class. 
 
 Kaf jtfil, adj. classical. 
 
518 
 
 VOCABtJLAEY.— GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 SU&, n. s., pi. -tx, dress. 
 
 Hei'ben, v. a. & refl. to dress. 
 
 filei'bertutflc, /. «., pi. -it, clothes- 
 brush. 
 
 Slcib'unj, /. «., pi. -m, apparel, dress. 
 
 Heiit, Ml), little, petty, trifling, mean, 
 
 Het'terrif v. n. to climb. [small. 
 
 Ali'ma, n. s. climate. 
 
 nins'eni «. n. & ir. to sound, tingle. 
 
 SWft, f. a., pi. -n, clifi; rook. 
 
 (lotif en, v.a.kn. to knock (at the 
 door), beat. 
 
 ^lo'fier, n. a., pi. & mod. convent. 
 
 Sna'6e, m. a., pi. -n, boy. 
 
 hwH'en, v. a. & n. to give a report, 
 smack (a whip). 
 
 tmw, a4j. scarce. 
 
 Snie, n. a., pi. -e, knee. 
 
 (nie'en, v. n. to kneel. 
 
 flnoa'pe, /. «., pi. -n, bud. 
 
 .Rno'ten, m. a. knot. 
 
 Mpfcn, u a. to join closely, tie, 
 knot. 
 
 fio^, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. cook 
 
 foii^'eit, V. n. to cook, boil. 
 
 fom'men, v. n. i/r. to come. 
 
 SomS'bie, /. a., pi. -it, comedy. 
 
 Sij'itig, m. a., pi. -e, king; -xni^, 
 kingdom. 
 
 fon'ttett, v. n. ir. to be able, under- 
 stand, know ; ic^ tititn tti^t um^iti, 
 I cannot help. 
 
 fiopf, TO, a., pi. -e, & m^)d. head. 
 
 flort, TO. a., pi. -c, & mod. basket. 
 
 SBrn'Ieitt, n. a. little kernel. 
 
 SBr'))er, to. a., pi. body. 
 
 to|l'6ar, oeZ/. costly, precious. 
 
 Se^iaxtnt, f. a., pi. -en, trinkets, 
 costly or precious things. 
 
 fofl'en, V. ». & ffi. to taste, try, cost, 
 bear a price, require. 
 
 J?o|l'en))tet8, m. %., pi. -e, cost. 
 fb(l'Iic|, ado- costly, precious. 
 So|lum',»i.«., pl.-ii fashion, costume, 
 frai^'en, v. n. to crash, crack. 
 frad)'enb, pa/rt. cracking, crashing. 
 .Rtaft, /. a., pi. -t, k mod. strength, 
 
 power, might ; on* aBen firaften, 
 
 with all one's might. 
 fraft, prep according to, by virtue 
 
 of. 
 fidf tig, adj. strong, vigorous, 
 ^ra'gen. m. a., pi. collar, cape, 
 fcanf , adj. sick, ill. 
 iRronf'^eit, /. a., pi. -en, sickness, ill- 
 ness, disease, 
 trcinf'en, d. a. & refl. to grieve, vex, 
 
 ofiend. 
 frei'fen, s. n. to revolve 
 fireu}, n. a., pi. -e, cross, crucifix ; 
 
 -faster, crusader, 
 frie'd^en, v. n. ir. to creep, crawl, 
 firieg, m. a., pi -e, war ; -afunfl, /. a. 
 
 art of war, noilitary science, 
 flrie'ger, to. a. warrior, soldier. 
 Srieg^'Jecr, n. a., pi. -t, army, 
 firo'ne, /. «., pi. -n, crown. 
 firon'iJtinj, to. a., pl.-tn, royal prince. 
 ^tiin'Hng, /. «., pi. -en, coronation. 
 ffiuc^'en, TO. a. cake, 
 ^u'get,/. «., jpi. -n, ball. 
 fiu^, /. «., J);, -e, & TOod. cow. 
 tii^M, «<?;. bold, hardy, 
 ffunt'mer, m. a. grief; -soli, acfj. 
 
 grievous, sorrowful, 
 fiiin'meni, v. a.& n. & refl. to concern. 
 ^unb'e, /. a. intelligence ; — geben, 
 
 to give information, testify 
 fiunft, /. a., pi -e, & mod. art, skill ; 
 
 -gciibt, practised, skillful. 
 ^ut)Fcr, n. a. copper. 
 Sut'ffivn, TO. «., ^2. -en, elector.. 
 
VOCABULAKT.— GEBMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 519 
 
 flur'tufitbc, /. s. electoral dignity, 
 furji adj. short, brief, in short. 
 JUrjlid), adv. lately. 
 But'f(|e, /. «., pi. -n, coach. 
 ^Ut'fc^eir m. s. coachman. 
 Siifl'e, /. 8., pL -en, coast, shore. 
 
 e. 
 
 K^'eln, v. n. to smile. 
 
 la^'en, «. re. to laugh, joke. 
 
 Ia(|'erlic(). atij. ridiculous. 
 
 Sac^'erlic^teit,/. «. ridiculousness. 
 
 Cttc^a, wi. «., ^Z. -e, salmon. 
 
 lab'm, B. «5. vr. to lade, load, freight, 
 charge. 
 
 fiab'ung, /. «., p?. -en, lading, load- 
 ing, load, freight, cargo. 
 
 Ca'get, n. «., pi. couch. 
 
 la'gern, «. re/Z. to lie down, rest, be 
 encamped. 
 
 Sa'fen, re. «. sheet, cloth, pall. 
 
 £amm, re. «., pi. -er, & »raod. lamb. 
 
 Sam'lJe, /. »., pi. -m lamp. 
 
 Saab, n. «., ^ji. -er, & »wk?. (see p. 83, 
 XL), land, ground, soil, country ; 
 -mann, m. «., pi. -leute, peasant ; 
 -jhage, /. «., J)?, -n, highway ; ft* 
 auger SanbeS auf^alten, to reside 
 out of one's country, or abroad 
 
 ianb'en, «. a. & re. to land. 
 
 lanb'tiiS, adj. rural. 
 
 I«n9(c), adj. & adv. long, tall, during, 
 of long duration, length, for a 
 long time. 
 
 Cdns'c,/. «., pi. -n, length. 
 
 Cttng'cweilc, /. s. annoyance, tedious- 
 ness, ennui. 
 
 lang'wcileti/B. a.&refl. to annoy, tire. 
 
 lang'ttjcilig, adj. tiresome, annoying. 
 
 lang'futti/ adj. & ad/o. dull, heavy, 
 slow(ly). 
 
 langS, prep, along. 
 
 tangfl, adv. long since. 
 
 Sarm, m. s. alarm, noise. 
 
 la^'tn,v.a.&n. ir.tolet,permit,grant 
 fit, look, seem to be ; to cause. 
 
 8afi, /. «., pi. -en/ charge, weight, 
 load, burden. 
 
 Ittft'ig/ adj. burdensome, trouble- 
 some. 
 
 Sattf, m. s., pi. -t, & mod. run, course, 
 currency. 
 
 Sans, /. «., pi. -t, & mod. louse. 
 
 laufc^'cn, V. n. to listen. 
 
 £aut, m. 8. pi. -t, sound. 
 
 laut, prep, according to ; — adj. loud. 
 
 tttu'warm, adj. lukewarm. 
 
 le'ten, «. re. to live. 
 
 Ce'6en, re. «. life ; -SaBenb, m. 8., pi. 
 -t, evening of life ; -Smittcl, re. 8. 
 provisions, victuals. 
 
 leicn'btg, a^. alive. 
 
 £e6ctt)o'^I', re. «. farewell. 
 
 Icfi'^aft, adj. lively, vivacious, 
 sprightly. 
 
 Ici'IoS, adj. lifeless, inanimate. 
 
 letf'en, v. re. & a. to leak, lick. 
 
 leer, adj. empty, vain. 
 
 le'gen, v. a. to lay, put, place. 
 
 Se^'re, /. «., pi. -n, instruction, doc- 
 trine. 
 
 le^'ren, v. a. & re. to teach. 
 
 St1)'xtx, m. s. teacher, instructor, pro- 
 fessor, master. 
 
 Se^r'Iing, m. «., pi. -c, apprentice. 
 
 &dif m. 8., pi. -er, body, waist, bod- 
 ice ; mtt — unb ©eele pngen, to be 
 greatly attached. 
 
 Seic^'c, /. «., pi. -n, dead body, 
 corpse. 
 
520 
 
 VOCABULABY.— GEaiMAJT AND ENGLISH. 
 
 itHSj'mm, m. «., pi. -t, corpse. 
 Itic^t, ad^. light, easy, flighty, 
 leib, adj. sorrowful. 
 8eib» n. s., pi. -va, harm, sorrow ; 
 
 einem — t^un, to be sorry (for it), 
 leib'eit, V. a. & n. ir. to suffer, endure. 
 Seib'cnfi^aft, /. «., pi. -en, passion. 
 \i\!itx,interj. alas ! with grief, 
 lei^'en, a. a. ir. to lend. 
 Iet'fe,a<^-low,soft, light, 8low,gentle. 
 lei|i'en, v. a. to render, accomplish, 
 
 fulfil. 
 Sei'teti /. «., pi. -n, ladder, scale. 
 Cefttott', /. »., pi. -en, lesson. 
 ficnFcr, m. s. ruler. 
 Seng, TO. ». spring. 
 Cer'(^e, /. «., pi. -n, lark. 
 Icrn'en, u a. & m. ir. to learn. 
 Ce'feiitung, /. «., pi. -en, reading 
 
 lesson, 
 le^t, a^. last, ultimate, 
 leu^t'en, v. a. & n. to light, shine, 
 fieu'te, pi. of aSann, (see p. 65, II.), 
 
 people, persons, servants, 
 fii^t, n. s., pi. -et, & -e, (see p. 84), 
 
 light, candle ; -glanj, to. «. ray of 
 
 light. 
 XKi^U adj. clear, bright, lightcolored. 
 U^t'en, V. a. to clear, light up. 
 fteJ, OiSj. dear, beloved, pleasing. 
 CieB'e, /. s. love, affection. 
 Iic6'cn, B. a. & n. to love, like. 
 IteJ'enawarbig, adj. amiable, 
 liei'er, ads. lovely, delightful. 
 Iteilt^, aAj. lovely. 
 Stcb, n. s., pi. -er, song, air. 
 lie'berlic^, adj. loose, disorderly, 
 lie'fern, v. a. to furnish, provide, de- 
 liver ; elne 'BijU6)t — , to ^ve 
 
 battle, 
 lieg'en, v. n. to lie, be situated, con- 
 
 sist in, lean, incline ; ti licgt »iri 
 
 baran, it is of great consequence. 
 SiVit, f. s., pi. -n, lily. 
 Cin'be,/. »., pi. -n, linden. 
 linl, adj. left ; Knia, to the left. 
 Cifl, /. «., pi. -en, craft, cunning, 
 
 deceit. 
 CoJ, n. s. praise. 
 Io6'en, V. a. to praise. 
 Sotf'e, /. s., pi. -n, lock, curl, 
 fiocomoti'se, /. «., ^?. -n, locomotive. 
 So^ttt TO. «., p?. -e, & TOod. reward, 
 
 wages ; pi. hire, pay ; -btcner, 
 
 hired servant, 
 lo^n'en, v. a., to pay, reward, 
 logi'ren, v. n. to live, reside. 
 Soei, n. s., pi. -e, fate, 
 lo^, a(lj. loose, unbent, untied, free, 
 
 released, acquitted. 
 loP^'en, V. a. to quench, 
 lo'fe, ac^. loose. 
 
 86'fegelb, n. s., pi. -er, ransom. 
 ISfen, V. a. to loosen, solve, untie. 
 loS'Iaffen, v. a. ir. release. 
 So'we, TO. s., pi. -n, lion. 
 Snft, /. »., ^t -e, & mod. air, breeze, 
 
 atmosphere. 
 Ctt'ge, /. «., pZ. -tt, lie, untruth, false- 
 hood. 
 Ifig'en, v. a. & n. ir. to lie, deceive. 
 Stt|l, /. «., pi. -e, & mod pleasure, 
 
 enchantment, lust ; id^ ^tt6e — , I 
 
 have a mind, 
 lufl'ig, adj. merry, gay. 
 £u|l'ft)tel, n. s., pi. -e, comedy. 
 
 an. 
 
 11. s., pi. -c, measure. 
 JC^'en, V. a. to make, fabricate, pro- 
 duce, represent, form, cause. 
 
TOCABULABT. — GflBMAIT ASD ENGLISH. 
 
 521 
 
 )t, /. «., pi. -t, & mod. might, 
 power, force. 
 
 mai^'tig, adj. miglrty, powerful. 
 
 3Raba'me, /. ». madam, my lady. 
 
 ^ab'ijtn, n. s. maid, girl. 
 
 SWagb, /. «., pi. -e, & mod. maid. 
 
 SRa'gen, m. «., j>?. & wod stomach ; 
 ftc^ bttt — serbetben, to become 
 sick at the stomach. 
 
 3R«^i'$m, TO. ». fairy tale. 
 
 mal^n'en, ®. a. to urge, daim, re- 
 mind of debt. 
 
 STOd, m. s. May. 
 
 fUlaiox't m. «., pZ. -ett, major. 
 
 malt n. s., pi. -tt time. 
 
 3)Ial'cr, ?re. s. painter. 
 
 aiarerifi^, a^. picturesque. 
 
 man, pron. one, they, people. 
 
 mon'^crr -e, -i, pron. many a, pi. 
 many. 
 
 SWang'el, to. »., i)Z. & wiod. want ; aui 
 — an, for want of. 
 
 SDJann, m. «., pi. -tXt & mod. man, 
 husband, person ; -Sju^t/ /. «■ 
 military discipline. 
 
 fSlcm'ttl, TO. s.,pl. & TOOtf. doak, robe, 
 gown, mantle. 
 
 5Blatft, TO. «., pi. -tt & TOot?. market, 
 mart, market-place, fair. 
 
 5Wor'mor/ m. s. marble. 
 
 mttrf^t'(e)te«, ®. n. to march. 
 
 SRcirs, TO. «. March. 
 
 aita'fern, /. «., ^Z. measles. 
 
 Wd^t see 3)2aag. 
 
 5Wa'fi^c, /. «., ijZ. -n, mesh. 
 
 9)laf'fe» /. »., i)?. -n, mass, bulk. 
 
 SDZaterial'/ m. «., pi. -ieni material 
 
 3Ratro'fc to. «., p?. -n, seaman. 
 
 watt, adj. faint, feeble, tired, ex- 
 hausted, languid. 
 
 SJJau'cr, /. «., pi. -n, wall. 
 
 /. «., pi. -ti & TOod. mouse. 
 
 3)lcbictn', /. a. medicine. 
 
 3Kect, TO. «., j3?. -e, sea, ocean. 
 
 Wit^i n. s. flour, meal. 
 
 mel^v, e<ymp. of »iel. 
 
 me^r'ete, adj. pi. several. 
 
 me^r'pitn'btg, adj. lasting several 
 hours. 
 
 mei'ben, «. a. to avoid, shun, forbear. 
 
 9)Jet'le, /. «., ^i. -It, mile (the German 
 mile is a little more than four 
 English miles). 
 
 metn, pron. my, mine. 
 
 aRciti'ung, /. «., pi. -en, oiiinion; ber 
 — fein, to be of opinion. 
 
 met|}, adj. most; -enS, «£?«. mostly. 
 
 mei'ben, v. a. & refl. to announce. 
 
 meto'bifi^, adj. melodious. 
 
 SWcng'e, /. «., p?. -n, multitude, quan- 
 tity, concourse (people). 
 
 3Jtenf^, TO. s., pi. -en, man, mankind, 
 person, human being ; -enauge, to. 
 s. human eye ; -enfreunb, m. s., pi. 
 -tt philanthropist ; -gefc^Icc^t, n. »., 
 pi. -er, mankind ; eble -en^erjen, 
 noble-hearted men ; -enlebett, hu- 
 man life ; -en^anb, human hand ; 
 gefunbet -»er|lanb, good common 
 sense. 
 
 men'fi^enfteunblid^, adj. humane. 
 
 SKenfc^'^ett,/. s. humanity, mankind. 
 
 mcnf^'Iic^, adj. human, humane(ly). 
 
 3Rert'tt)utbtgteit,/. s.,pl.-m, curiosity 
 
 ^JJcrfCi /• <•, pi. -nj fair, mass. 
 
 3)lef fet, TO. «. knife. 
 
 SRetaH', TO. «., pi. -it metal, 
 'be, /. «., pi. -n, method. 
 , /. s. milk. 
 
 milb, adj. mild, soft. 
 
 SKie't^e, /. s. pi. -n, rent. 
 
 mle't^en, v. a. to hire, rent. 
 
522 
 
 VOCABULART.— OEBMAN Am) ENGLISH. 
 
 milb'etn, «. a. to mitigate, modify, 
 soften. 
 
 Wmttal't n. s., pi. -ient mineral, fos- 
 sil. 
 
 SRimt'te, /. «., pi. -n, minute. 
 
 min'beftenS, adv. at least. 
 
 mit, (dat. of ic^), pron. me or to me. 
 
 SKip'irauc^, m. «., pi. -e, & rood, 
 abuse, misuse. 
 
 mi^iViS'm, «. ». to fail, miscarry, 
 succeed ill, mishappen. 
 
 mif trauen, v. a. to mistrust. 
 
 nttt, prep. dot. with, by, at, upon, 
 under, to, along ; -einanbcr, one 
 ■with another, together, jointly. 
 
 5Slit'mettf($, m. s., pi. -en, fellow-man. 
 
 iWit'tag, m. «., pi. -e, midday, noon ; 
 ju — ftjeifm, to dine ; -effen, m. ». 
 dinner. 
 
 Wiil'U, f. s. midst. 
 
 SRtt'tet, n. 8. middle, medium, means, 
 expedient, remedy ; -meer, Medi- 
 terranean sea. 
 
 mit'ten, ada. under, among, in the 
 midst of, in the middle of. 
 
 5Kit'ttvnttc^t, /. «., pi. -e, kmod. mid- 
 night. 
 
 ntit't^eilen, v. u,. to communicate,. im- 
 part, inform, tell. 
 
 mitt'Iere, adj. middle. 
 
 SKit'woc^, m. «. Wednesday. 
 
 mit'nel^men, v. a. to take along with 
 one, exhaust. 
 
 fWo'ieli n. s. furniture. 
 
 iWo'be, /. «., pi. -n, fashion. 
 
 moberit', mo'ii^tS), aclj. fashionable, 
 modern. 
 
 mii'gen, v. n. i/r. to have a mind, 
 wish ; to be permitted, possible. 
 
 miiS'Ui^, adj. possible, feasible, prac- 
 ticable. 
 
 3Rolf'en, /. «. whey. 
 
 !Wonar(i|', m. «., pi. -en, monarch. 
 
 iWo'nat, m. «., pi. -t, month. 
 
 SWonb, m. «., pi. -t, moon. 
 
 SKon'lag, m. a. Monday. 
 
 motb'm, V. a. & n. to murder. 
 
 iWot'ber, m. s. murderer. 
 
 3Ror'gen, m. «. morning ; -it adm. in 
 the morning , -riitl^e, /. «. aurora: 
 -bufti odor; -Btnb, morning or 
 east wind. ' 
 
 nior'gen» adv. to-morrow ; — ftit^, to- 
 morrow early or in the morning. 
 
 mu'be, adm. weary, tired. 
 
 SWii'^e, /. «., pi. -n, pains. 
 
 miifi'ftni, oAj. painful, hard, pains- 
 taking, troublesome. 
 
 9)!unb, m. «., pi. -cr, & mod. mouth. 
 
 SKunb'ung, /. «., pi. -m, mouth. 
 
 mur'meln, v. n. to grumble, mutter. 
 
 3)!u'fi^rf/ /• *■, pl- -H' shell, muscle. 
 
 SKufe'um. n., pl. 3)?ufe'en, museum. 
 
 SOJunf, /. «. music ; -birectot, director 
 of music. 
 
 3){ltSfi'ti), Wi. &/. s. mosquito. 
 
 mitlTeii, v. n. vr. must, to be obliged. 
 
 SWut^, m. 8. courage, spirit, humor. 
 
 mut^'wiHig, adj. & adv. pert, wanton- 
 (ly), intentional(ly). 
 
 SBlut'ter, /. «., ^Z. & moiZ. mother. 
 
 mUttetlic^, ad}, motherly, maternal. 
 ife'e, /. «., i>l -n, cap, bonnet 
 
 91. 
 
 Jitt^'iar, w. «., pt -n, neighbor. 
 nac^bem', adv. after, wheii. 
 na(f)'bcnfett, e. n. to reflect. 
 9Iac^'en, m. «. boat, ship. 
 
VOCABXJLAKT. — GBEMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 533 
 
 ttad/fclgen, v. a. to follow, succeed, 
 imitate. 
 
 9Iac()'fta(jc, /. «., pi. -n, inquiry. 
 
 KxiSj gekn, v. n. to give in, yield. 
 
 na^'taffcn, v. a. & n. i/r. to relax, re- 
 lent, [slovenly, inattentive. 
 
 twdj'Ialfig, adj. negligent, careless, 
 
 Sfac^'mittagi m. s., pi. -c, afternoon. 
 
 3}ac^'vt<^t, /. «., pi. -en, account, 
 advice, information, intelli- 
 gence. 
 
 Sla^'Wtiftj /• «■, pi- -eti' postscript, 
 inscription. 
 
 3?ad)'fi^t, /. «., pZ. -en, indulgence. 
 
 nitc()'|tnnen, «. ». to meditate (upon). 
 
 nac^fi'. prep. & adj. next, nearest ; 
 -mit adv. shortly, next time. 
 
 SJcii^fi'e, m. s.,pl. -n, neighbor. 
 
 nac^'fle^cnb, adj. following. 
 
 3?oc()t, /. «., p?. -e, & mofi. night; 
 -^etlJcrge, night's lodging ; -wac^" 
 ter, night watchman. 
 
 ncidjt'Uii^, adj. nightly. 
 
 SJai^t'igatt, /. «., pi. -en, nightingale. 
 
 nacEt, a(^'. naked, bare. 
 
 SJa'bel, /. «., pi. -n, needle, pin. 
 
 SIta'gel, m. s.,i pi. mod. nail. 
 
 na'^e, adj. & o(Z». near, nigh, close, 
 imminent ; - liegenb, adj. neigh- 
 boring, adjoining, lying near by. 
 
 9?a'^e, /. s. nearness, proximity, 
 neighborhood. 
 
 na^'en, noi^'ern, v. n. & refl. to ap- 
 proach, draw near. 
 
 nci^et'tcmmen, «. n. to approach. 
 
 9!tt^'nabel, /. «., pi. -n, needle. 
 
 na^t'en, v. a. & n. to nourish, foster, 
 
 SRtt^t'ung,/. «. food, livelihood, [feed. 
 
 9Ja'mc(n), m. »., pZ. -n, name, title, 
 renown, reputation. 
 
 nam'li^, adj. namely, same ; rin «nb 
 
 (ber, tie) ba3 3?amtid^e, one and 
 the same. 
 
 Start, m. «., pi. -en, fool, fob, cox- 
 comb. 
 
 nap, adj. wet, humid, moist. 
 
 9tatur', /. «., ^?. -en, nature. 
 
 9?e'6el, m. s. fog. 
 
 ne'kn, prep, by, near, beside, be- 
 sides, by the side of, next, close 
 to, with ; -an, adv. next door, 
 hard by ; -Jcr, adv. along with, 
 by the way. 
 
 JJe'beniu^Icr, m. s. rival. 
 
 ?fe'6cnltnic, /. a. collateral line. 
 
 9?eff'e, m. s., pi. -n, nephew. 
 
 ne^'men, v. a. & ir. to take, receive ; 
 ftcfe in Sl^t — , to take care, guard 
 one's self, be on one's guard ; mit 
 jtc^ — , to take along. 
 
 neig'en, v. a. to bend ; — refl. incline. 
 
 ncin, adv. no. 
 
 nen'nen, v. a. & ir. to name, call. 
 
 9lcr», m. a., pi. -en, nerve, sinew. 
 
 3le|i, n. a., pi. -er, nest, aerie. 
 
 Vltl^, n. «., pi. -t, net, caul. 
 
 ntu, adj. new, anew, fresh, recent, 
 modern ; -giettg, curious, inquisi- 
 tive(ly). 
 
 nic^t, ado. not. 
 
 3fi(|'te, /. a., pi. -ri, niece. 
 
 nti^t^, adv. nothing, naught ;-be|lo» 
 Benigcr, nevertheless, notwith- 
 standing. 
 
 nie, adv. never, at no time ; -mM, 
 never. 
 
 nie'bet, adj. low, nether, inferior, 
 mean , — adv. low down, down- 
 wards ; -legen, to lay down ; ft^ 
 -Ia|Ten,to settle ; -reigen,*. a. to tear 
 down ; -fheien, to throw or strike 
 down, stretch at length ; -jlittjen, 
 
534 
 
 VOCABUIiABY. — GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 V. n. & refl. to fall down, pros- 
 trate ;-tra^tijr adj.\>ase; -werfett/ 
 «. a. & vr. to throw down. 
 
 SRie'bcilage, /. «., pi. -n, defeat. 
 
 me'brig, adj. low. 
 
 Sfie'manb, pron. nobody, no one. 
 
 nit'senb*, -too, adv. nowhere. 
 
 noc^, adAl. k eonj, yet, still, neither ; 
 Weber — , neither — nor ; — einmal, 
 agcjn, once again ; -mal^, again ; 
 — tmmer, stiU ; — fo (fe^t), ever so 
 much. 
 
 9lorb(en), m. s. north. 
 
 tiotji aclj. needful, necessary : -bitrf» 
 tig, adj. needy, scanty ; -ttetlbig, 
 necessary. 
 
 SRof^i /. 8. (time of) need, want, dis- 
 tress, difficulty ; -tBenbisfeit, /. »., 
 pi. -en, necessity ; mtt stopet — , 
 scarcely, narrowly. 
 
 niJtV'S ^ttifit/ "• <^- to need. 
 
 nBt^'lgen, v. a. to oblige. 
 
 3lo»em'6er, m. s. November. 
 
 nun, ad^. now ; — m1)l, well then. 
 
 rair, adv. only ; — no^, only. 
 
 nflj'en, v. a. &n. to use, make use of. 
 
 nfi^'H^i a^. useful, profitable. 
 
 Oi, conj. whether, if ; prep, on, on 
 account of. 
 
 o'ben, adv. above, up-stairs, on high, 
 aloft ; on the surface ; -bretn, 
 over and above, surplus. 
 
 o'6er, ado. upper, high, higher, supe- 
 rior ; -p(^It^, adj. superficial. 
 
 D'Bet^ert, m. «., pi. -en, sovereign. 
 
 Di'ba^, n. a., pi. -er, & mod. abode, 
 shelter. 
 
 oiglei^', conj. though, although. 
 
 ei^ijen', eonj. although. 
 
 Oiji, m. 8., pi. -en, ox. 
 
 D'cean, m. s., pi. -ti ocean. 
 
 D'bem, m. a. breath, aee Slf^em. 
 
 De'be, /. «., pi. -n, desert. 
 
 8'be, adj. solitary, deserted. 
 
 Del, n. a., pi. -e, oil. 
 
 D fen, TO. »., pi. & mod. stove, oven, 
 furnace. 
 
 off' en, adj. sincere, vacant, open. 
 
 ojf'enbat, adj. clear, plain, (self-) 
 evident. 
 
 off'enSaren, v. a. & rejl. to manifest. 
 
 Dffer'te, / «., pi. -n, proposition, 
 ofier. 
 
 Dfftcter', TO. »., pi. -e, officer. 
 
 off nen, «. a. & refl. to open. 
 
 oft, ad/B. oft, often, often time, fre- 
 quently. 
 
 of tet, ac^. & adv. frequent, often. 
 
 oft'mata, ad/o. frequently, oftentimes. 
 
 0^, intery. oh ! 
 
 D'^eim, to. a. pi. -e, uncle. 
 
 nYntt prep. & adv. without, besides, 
 excepted, but ; — bap, (aee p. 338, 
 II.) without, but. 
 
 D:^r, n. 8., pi. -en, ear; -ting, ear- 
 ring. 
 
 Dn'tel, aee D'^eim. 
 
 D'|)er, /. «., pi. -n, opera. 
 
 Dlj'fet, n. s. offering, sacrifice; 
 -1)a\li, house of sacrifice. 
 
 or'bentltc^, adj. orderly, steady. 
 
 Drb'nung, /. a., pi. -en, order, ar- 
 rangement. 
 
 oriental'tf^, adj. oriental. 
 
 Drt, TO. «., pi. -er, & mod. place, 
 region. 
 
 Dfl(cn), TO. 8. east. 
 
 Dfl'em, pi. or Dfl'ernfefl, n. a., pi. -t, 
 Easter. 
 
VOCABULABT. — GEKMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 625 
 
 9)ttar, n. e.,pl. -t, a pair, couple, few. 
 9)atafl', m. pi. -c, & mod. palace. 
 3)antof frt, m. »., pi. -n, slipper. 
 9)tt)!iet', n. 8. paper. 
 9)a))(l, m. «., pi. -t, & mod. pope. 
 9)atatiiea', n. s., pi. -e, paradise. 
 9)arbon', m. s. pardon, quarter. 
 9)eit'fi^ej /• »■> p^- -tit whip. 
 95erfon', /. »., pi. -en, person. 
 9)fat>, «i. s., pi. -e, path. 
 9)faf fe, m. s , pi. -n, priest. 
 9)ftt^l, M. «., pZ. -e, & mod. post, 
 
 stake. 
 3)fei'fe, /. «., pi. -n, fife, whistle, 
 
 (tobacco)-pipe. 
 ))fei'fen. v. n. & as. ir. to whistle, pipe. 
 5>fei'Iet; m. «. pillar, pier. 
 9)ferb, Ji. «., pi. -t, horse. 
 3)fctb'emartt, to. «., pi. -e, & motZ. 
 
 horse-fair, place where horses are 
 
 sold. 
 jjfiff' tg» adj. cunning, smart. 
 9)ftn9|l'en, pi. Pentecost. 
 9>fit'|ii^» /. s., pi- -ti peach. 
 3)flan'je, /. «., pi. -n, plant, 
 (jjlan'sen, v. a. to plant, transplant. 
 5>(Ic'9e, /. «. care, nursing, 
 pflc'gtn, v. a. to take care of, nurse, 
 
 foster, administer, attend to ; v. n. 
 
 to be accustomed, use. 
 9>(Ii(^t, /. «., pi. -en, duty. 
 9)funb, n. «., pi. -c, jwund. 
 3)^antajte', /. »., pi. -en, fancy, fan- 
 tasy. 
 9)^ilolo'3e, OT. «., p?. -n, philologist. 
 3)^iIoIogie', /. «. philology. 
 9)t)t'ofo))^', TO. «., p/. -en, philosopher ; 
 
 -ie, /. «., pi. -n, philosophy. 
 3>ta'no, ra. ». piano. 
 
 SJU'ger, m. s. pilgrim. 
 3)lan, m. «.,pi. -t,&mod. plan, idea. 
 ;)lott, ad;, flat, plain, even, level, low. 
 9)Ia|, m. «., pi. -c, & m^d. place, 
 
 room, seat ; — ne^men, to take a 
 
 seat, sit down. 
 pIoJ'Uc^, ae^. & adv. suddenly), 
 
 abrupt(ly), instantaneous, on a 
 
 sudden. 
 tilum)), adj. & interj. plump, clumsy, 
 
 awkward, coarse. 
 Ijlunb'crn, v. a. to plunder. 
 3)ij'6el, m. s. mob, the vulgar. 
 9)oet', m. »., pi. -m, poet. 
 ))oIt'tif(i^, atf;'. political. 
 3)oIi8ei'liiener, m. s. policeman, con- 
 stable, officer. 
 3)ortiDn', /. «., pi. -en, portion, share. 
 S)»r'to, n. s. postage. 
 9)offlu'ne, /. <*., pi. -n, trump ; — bii 
 
 ®eti(^t«, judgment-trumpet. 
 3)oil, /. «. f>i. -en, post, post-office, 
 
 mail. 
 3)o|T:^orn, n. «., pi. -er, & wod. post- 
 
 hom. 
 5>o|iiI[(i)Dn', m. «., pi. -c, postillion. 
 3)ra(i&t, /. s. pomp, splendor. 
 tirac^t'ig, adj. elegant, magnificent. 
 9)raftbent', m. «., pi. -en, president. 
 9>re'btgcr, m. «. preacher, minister. 
 9)rei8, »i. s., pi. -e, price, prize, cost, 
 
 rate, reward, praise ; — geien, to 
 
 expose, 
 pteifen, ■». a. & ir. to praise, extol. 
 3)rinj, «i. «., pi. -en, prince. 
 3)toferfoi, m. «., pZ. -en, professor, in- 
 structor. 
 SJtofeifion', /. «. pi. -en, profession. 
 9)rD))^ct', >re. s., pi. -en, prophet ; -en* 
 
 jlimme, /. «. voice of the prophet. 
 Vrotcjlan'tiftlV adj. protestant. 
 
526 
 
 VOCABULABT.— GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 9)r05e6', m. «., pi. -e, lawsuit. 
 9)ul«, m. g. pulse. 
 3)ul'»et, n. a. powder. 
 3)untt, m. a. pi. -t, point, dot, pe- 
 riod. 
 
 Duttbrat'/ n. a. pi. -t, quadrate, 
 square ; -meile, square mUe. 
 
 Dual/ /. «., pi. -en, pain, torment, 
 torture, pang, grief. 
 
 Duel'Ie, /. a., pi. -n, spring, well, 
 fountain. 
 
 3ta'Jt, m. a., pi. -n, raven. 
 
 fRaSj't, f. s. revenge. 
 
 tStaSii'en, m. a. mouth or jaws (of 
 brutes). 
 
 rttc^'en v. a. & refl. to revenge, re- 
 venge one's self. 
 
 SRab, m. a., pi. -er, & mod. wheel. 
 
 tag'en, «. n. to project, stand forth. 
 
 StavS), m. a., pi. -et, & mod. edge, 
 side, border, brink, brim. 
 
 SRanf, m. a. rank, order, rate, grade, 
 precedence, quality, dignity. 
 
 tanf'm, «. n. to rank, wrestle. 
 
 ra'fenb, adj. raging, insane, mad. 
 
 rarfein, «. n. to rattle. 
 
 SRttt^, m. a. advice, counsel. 
 
 SRSt^'fel. n. a. riddle. 
 
 Oittt'te, /. a.,pl. -n, rat. 
 
 rmVttt, V. a. to rob. 
 
 tR&n'icx, m. a. robber, highway- 
 man. 
 
 tauc^'eti, V. a. & n. to smoke. 
 
 SRaum, m. a., pi. -t, & m^d. room, 
 
 space, 
 raufii^'en, d. n. to rustle, murmur, 
 
 roar. 
 re(i^'nen, i!. a. to reckon, count, cal- 
 culate ; bttrauf — depend on. 
 rec^t; ad^. & acta, right, true, real, in 
 right condition, legitimate, fit- 
 ting, suitable, convenient ; — 
 gem, (very) gladly. 
 SlE^t, n. a., pi. -e, right, claim, title, 
 privilege, immunity, law, justice ; 
 — Jttben, to be right ; bic SRec^te, 
 the right hand or arm. 
 rec^t'feitigen, v. a to justify, vindicate. 
 xtSjti', ode. on or to the right hand. 
 SJe'be, /. a., pi. -n, speech, oration, 
 discourse ; eine — fatten, to make 
 a speech ; bie — fein, to be the sub- 
 ject of speech or conversation ; 
 -n, pi. words, 
 re'ben, v. a. & n. to speak, talk, say, 
 
 converse. 
 Ke'benSart, /. a., pi. -en, phrase, ex- 
 pression, term. 
 SRe'gel, /. a., pi, -n, rule, precept, 
 
 principle. 
 re'gen, «. a. & refl. to stir, move, rise. 
 SRe'gen, m. a. rain, shower ; -f^itm, 
 
 umbrella. 
 rcgte'ten, v. a. & n. to reign, govern. 
 SRegie'rung,/. a., pi. -tn, government, 
 
 reign. 
 SRegiment', n) a., pi. -er, regiment, 
 
 government, 
 gjegion', /. a., pi. -en, region, 
 reg'nen, v. n. & imp. to rain. 
 SJe'^, n. a., pi. -e, deer, roe. 
 reic^, adj. rich, wealthy, opulous; 
 -Wi), adj. k adm, plentiful(ly), 
 ample, amply. 
 
VOCABtrLAKT.— GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 527 
 
 8lei<^( n s. kingdom, empire, realm 
 
 icic^'en, v. a. & n. to reach, present, 
 extend to, offer. 
 
 gjetc^'t^unt/ m. «., pi. -er, & mod. 
 riches, wealth. 
 
 rein, ac0. clean, innocent, clear, 
 pure. 
 
 Sfei'ftf /. «., pi. -n, journey, travel, 
 voyage ; -tef^reiiung, description 
 of travel or voyage; -gefci^ttc, 
 companion. 
 
 reif en, «. n. to travel, go on travels. 
 
 SRet'fenbe, m. a., pi. -n, traveler. 
 
 tei^'en, v. a. ir. to tear, pull, sketch, 
 draw, rush ; -b, ad^. wild. 
 
 reit'en, ■». a. & n. ir. to ride, go on 
 horseback, break in. 
 
 SReit'er, m. s. horseman, trooper. 
 
 SBetterei', /. s. cavalry. 
 
 rei'senb, (tdj. charming. 
 
 Stelijion', /. «., pi. religion ; -afrei- 
 ^eit, religious liberty. 
 
 teligto^', adj. religious. 
 
 9ie))uMtf, /. «., pi. -en, republic. 
 
 SRejibens', /. «., pi. -tn, city where 
 the royal fanuly resides, resi- 
 dence. 
 
 SReftelt', m. a. respect. 
 
 Diejlaaration', /. «., pi. -en, restora- 
 tion, restaurant. 
 
 ret'ten, v. a. to rescue, save. 
 
 SRet'ter, m. a. savior, deliverer. 
 
 reu'en, ■». imp. & refl. to repent, to 
 be scfrry. 
 
 ten'mut^ts, adj. repenting(ly), re- 
 pentant, with repentance. 
 
 ric6t'en, v. a. & refl. to direct, ad- 
 dress, arrange, level, judge, ex- 
 ecute, criticise. 
 
 SRi^t'er, m. a. judge. 
 
 ri^t'ig, adj. accurate(lj). 
 
 gjic^t'^aua, (aee p. 186) n. a., pi. -er, 
 & mod. common hall. 
 
 SRic^t'ung, /. a., pi. -en, direction. 
 
 dtit'itl, m. s. rail, bolt. 
 
 SRing, m. a., pi. -e, ring, circle. 
 
 ringSierum', -^eruntet, ado. all round. 
 
 rin'nen, v. n. to run, leak. 
 
 SRtt'ter, m. a. knight, cavalier. 
 
 Stod, m. a., pi. -t, & m/)d. coat. 
 
 ro^, adj. raw, rude, savage. 
 
 SRol^r, n. a., pi. -e, & m/)d. reed. 
 
 SRo'ff, /. a., pi. -n, rose. 
 
 rof ig, adj. rosy. ' 
 
 SRog, n. a., pi. -e, horse, steed. 
 
 rot^, adj. red. 
 
 SRo't^c, /. «., pi. -n, redness, red 
 color. 
 
 SRiidE'en, m. a. back, rear. 
 
 SRiid'te^r, /. a. return. 
 
 SRud'sug, m. a., pi. -t,&mod. retreat. 
 
 SRuf, m. a. call, vocation, fame, ra- 
 mor, renown, reputation. 
 
 tuf en, ®. a. & n. ir. to call, cry. 
 
 SRu'^e, /. a. rest, repose, quiet, tran- 
 quillity, peace, sleep. 
 
 ru'^en, v. n. to rest, repose, sleep. 
 
 tu'^tg, adj. quiet, peaceable, tran • 
 quil. 
 
 SRu^m, m. a. renown, fame, honor. 
 
 rii^r'en, v. a. & n. to stir, affect. 
 
 lunb, adj. round. 
 
 ®a«I, m. a. pi. -e, & mod. saloon, 
 
 parlor, hall. 
 ©a'kl, m. a. sabre, falchion. 
 ftt'cn, V. a. to sow (seed), 
 ©tt^'c, /. «., pi. -n, thing, matter, 
 
 affair, concern, business. 
 
528 
 
 VOCABtJLAKT. — GBBMAN AUD ENGLISH. 
 
 ®adr m. a., pi. -t, & mod. bag, sack. 
 
 fag'en, v. a. & n. to say, tell, speak. 
 
 ©alpe'terpein, m. a. pi. -t, saltpeter- 
 stone. 
 
 @ali, n. a. salt. 
 
 @amaii'terf m. s. Samaritan. 
 
 ©anb, m. a. sand , -wfijle, /. «., pZ. 
 -n> desert. 
 
 fanft, adj. soft, gentle, smootli, 
 mild. 
 
 ©Cing'tr, m. «. singer, songster. 
 
 ©ontt, Saint. 
 
 fattf adj. satiated, fall, tired (of). 
 
 fcit'tigen, v. a. to satiate, satisfy one's 
 hunger. 
 
 fau'Ber, ac^. clean, neat, elegant. 
 
 fau'eti ad), soar, acid, troublesome. 
 
 ©dug'Iing, m. s., pi. -t, infant. 
 
 ©au'tc, /. «., pi. -n, column, pillar, 
 post. 
 
 (au'felni ®. n. to whistle, rustle. 
 
 ©ce'nc, /. a., pi. -tii scene. 
 
 ©cqj'tcr, m. a. scepter. ^ 
 
 ©c^aat, /. a., pi. -en, troop, band, 
 throng, multitude. 
 
 ©^a^, n. s. chess. 
 
 ©(^ttc^t, m. a., pi. -e, shaft, pit. 
 
 ©c^a'be, m. «., ^jJ. -n, & mod loss, 
 damage, detriment, prejudice, in- 
 jury. 
 
 fc^ab'en, v. n. to injure, damage, 
 hurt. 
 
 fc^oib'Iiii^, adj. injurious, pernicious, 
 dangerous. 
 
 ©^af, n. a., pi. -c, sheep. 
 
 ©c^a'fer, m. a. shepherd. 
 
 fi^aff'ett, V. a. ir. to create, make, pro- 
 vide, procure, furnish. 
 
 ©c^affot'r {gen. -ea), n. a. scaffold. 
 
 ©cl)al(, m. a., pi. -e, sound. 
 
 ©(^an'be, /. shame, disgrace. 
 
 fc^atf, a^. severe, rigorous, hard, 
 sharp, strict. 
 
 ©c^a^, m. a.,pl. -t, & mod. treasure ; 
 -meifler, treasurer. 
 
 fd^au'en, i>. a. & n. to look. 
 
 fd^au'rig, a^. horrible, awful. 
 
 ©c^au'fricl n. a., pi. -e, play, trage- 
 dy; -^aua, theatre ; -cr, actor. 
 
 fc^ci'beit, V. a. & refl. to divide, sep- 
 arate, depart. 
 
 ©d^etH/ m. a., pi. -e, shine, splendor, 
 appearance, pretence. 
 
 fd^ein'eit, v. n. & ir. to appear, seem. 
 
 fi^eit'trn, ■». n. to be wrecked. 
 
 fd^ent'etl, v. a. to give, present. 
 
 fi^etj'en, v. n. to joke, play. 
 
 fc^eu, a^. bashful, shy. 
 
 f^m'cn, V. a. & refl. to shun, avoid. 
 
 fd^id'en, «. a. & n.to send ; mi)-, to 
 send (for). 
 
 ©d^td'fttl, n. a., pi. -e, fate. 
 
 ©c^iff, n. a., pi. -t, ship, vessel ; -tr, 
 sailor. 
 
 ©d^illjerung, /. a., pi. -en, picture, 
 description. 
 
 ©d^int'en, m. a. ham. 
 
 ©d^Itt^t, /. a., pi. -en, battle, en- 
 gagement ; eine — liefein, to give 
 battle. 
 
 ©c^Iaf, m. a. pi. -e, & mod. sleep, rest, 
 repose ; temple, side of the head ; 
 -jimmetf n. a. sleeping apartment. 
 
 fd^Ittf en, V. n. & ir. to sleep. 
 
 ©c^Ioi'fe,/. «., pi. -n, temple (head). 
 
 fd^Wfetn, v. imp. krefl. to be sleepy. 
 
 fd^laff, adj. tired, fatigued, weak. 
 
 ©c^Iag, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. blow, 
 stamp; kind. 
 
 Wttg'en, v. a. & n. ir. to beat, strike, 
 slay, coin, warble, build. 
 
 ©d^lttng'e, /. a., pi. -n, serpent, snake. 
 
VOCABICLAKY. — GEBMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 529 
 
 ptanf, adj. slender, slim, lank. 
 fi^Ie($t, adj. bad, base, mean, low. 
 fi^Ieif en, v.a.hw.to grind, sharpen. 
 fi^Iitj'cn, V a. li ri. ir. to conclude, 
 
 shut, close. 
 fc^tie§'U($, adv. finally, at last ; — 
 
 boij, after all. 
 ©(|top, n. s., pi. -tt, & mod. lock, 
 
 castle, 
 ©c^luiit, /. «., pi. -ax, ravine. 
 Sc^Ium'mer, m. s. slumber, 
 fc^lum'ntern, v. n. to slumber. 
 S:^Iuf'fri( m. s. key. 
 f^mac^t'en; v. n. to pine, languish, 
 fd^mect'en, v. a. & n. to taste, smack, 
 
 savor, taste well, relish, 
 f^metc^'eln, v. n. to flatter, caress, 
 fd^mei^'m, ti.n.kir. to throw, strike. 
 ©d^meti, m. s.,pl.-tii, pain, ache, 
 
 grief. 
 fc^met'terK, v. a. & n. to sound shrill, 
 <Bil)MM, m. s. ornament, 
 fi^miifl'en/ v. a. & n. to adorn, attire, 
 
 dress, trim, 
 fd^mug'tg, adj. dirty, foul. 
 ©c^nee, m. s. snow, 
 ©d^nei'bet, m. s. tailor. 
 Ptret'ert, n. imp. to snow. 
 fi^neU, «c(2;. & adv. quick, fast, 
 
 swift, sudden ; quickly, rapidly. 
 ©i^nitt, m. s., pi. -(, Cut. 
 Wnupf en, v. a. & n. to snuff. 
 ©i^ol'Ie, / «., pi. -n, piece (of ice). 
 fd^ort, adu. already, even. 
 fd^Sn, adj. beautiful, handsome, fine, 
 
 fair.- 
 ©c^ijn'^eit, /. s., pi. -en, beauty, fair- 
 
 fd^on'en, v. a. to spare, save, for- 
 bear, 
 ©t^on'ltng, /. s. forbearance. 
 
 ©c^oop, m. S; pi. -c, & mod. lap, 
 bosom. 
 
 ©c^o))f, m. «., pi. ' -c, & mod. head, 
 top, tuft, hair. 
 
 fc^opf en, ■». a. & m. to draw (water), 
 derive. 
 
 ©c^()))f'er, m. s. creator. 
 
 ©i^iitif ung, /. s. pi. -en, creation ; 
 -itotxt, work of creation. 
 
 ©c^ran'te, / «., pi. -n, bar, barrier. 
 
 ©c^reil, m. s., pi. -en, terror. 
 
 fd^reS'en, v. n. i/r. to frighten. 
 
 fc^red'Hc^r adj. terrible, awful. 
 
 fd^rttb'en, r>. a. & n. to write. 
 
 f^tci'ett, «. n. w. to cry, scream. 
 
 fc^tcit'en, "O. n. ir. to stride, step. 
 
 ©^rift,/. «.,i}2. -en, writing • -fieller, 
 m. s. author. 
 
 ©^ritt, m. s. pi. -c, step. 
 
 ®^u^, m., pi. -e, shoe. 
 
 ©c^u^'mac^er, m. s. shoemaker. 
 
 ©^ulb, /. «., pi. -en, fault, debt ; in 
 ©d^ulben gerat^en, to run into debt. 
 
 f(|uli)'ig, Oidj. guilty, culpable, in- 
 debted, owing. 
 
 fi|ulb'lo8, adj. innocent. 
 
 ©c^u'Ic, /. «., pi. -n, school. 
 
 ©(i^ul'Iel^rcr, m. «. school-teacher. 
 
 ©c^iircr, m. s. scholar, pupil. 
 
 ©^ul'ter,/. «., pi. -n, shoulder. 
 
 ©i^ut'te, m.s. scoundrel, knave, ras- 
 cal ^ 
 
 'e, m. a., pi. -n, archer, marks- 
 man. 
 
 uf'en, v. a. to protect. 
 I, adj. weak, feeble. 
 i'c^e, /. «., pi. -n, weakness. 
 
 fdlwod^'en, v. a. to enfeeble, weaken. 
 
 ©d^wa'get, m. s. pi. & mod. brother- 
 in-law. 
 
 m. s. pi. -t, & mod. swan. 
 
530 
 
 VOCABULARY. — QEBMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 r($tvan!'eni v. n. to hesitate, totter, 
 
 fc^tearSi adj. black, daik, gloomy. 
 
 fi^web'en, ». n. to hang, hover ; swing, 
 move gently. 
 
 Sc^iveif, m. a. pi. -t, train, tail. 
 
 fc^wctg'en, V. n. to be BUent, keep 
 silent, BUence. 
 
 ©^»eip, m. s. perspiration. 
 
 flower, ac^. heavy, difficult, hard ; 
 -mut^iSf a^. dejected, sad, melan- 
 choly; — fcin, to be heavy, to 
 weigh ; — fttHen, to be difficult. 
 
 &i)tBtx'mut1j, f. s. melancholy. 
 
 fc^wet'Iicf), etch, hardly, scarcely. 
 
 ^3)Wtrt, n. «., pi. -er, sword. 
 
 ©(^wejl'er, /. «., pi. -«, sister. 
 
 Sc^toieg'eTUater, m. «., pi. & mod. 
 father-in-law. 
 
 f^tvier'tg, adj. difficult. 
 
 ©c^tBier'igfcit,/. s.,pl. -en, difficulty. 
 
 f($n)im'men> v. n. to swim, float ; -it 
 part. pres. of f^wimmen. 
 
 ©^Winb'Ier, m. s. swindler. 
 
 f(^»inb'Mrt3' <«&'• consumptive. 
 
 <Stt, m. 8., pi. -en, lake ;— /. «., pi. 
 -en, sea. 
 
 ©ee'tampf, m. s., pi. -e, & mod. battle 
 at sea. 
 
 ©ee'Ie, /. »., pi. -n, soul ; vott ganjer 
 — , with all my heart. 
 
 fe'gein, v. a. & n. to sail. 
 
 feg'ncn, v. a. to bless. 
 
 fe'^en, v. a. & n. ir. to see, look. 
 
 fe^n'en,D.r6^.toyeam,desire,longfor. 
 
 ©e^n'fu^t, /. s. desire, longing ; mit 
 — cntgcgcnfc^cn, to await with im- 
 patience. 
 
 fe^r, adm. much, very, very much, 
 extremely. 
 
 fein, pron. his, her, its ; -et^ulkn, on 
 his account {see p. 345, note 1). 
 
 fein, v.n.&i anix. ir. to be, exist ;um 
 — , to be at an end, expire. 
 
 feit, ad/o. & pr&p. since ; -bent, adm. 
 since then ; — x&iijx, for (more 
 than). 
 
 ©ci'te,/. »., pi. -v., side, flank, front,* 
 page, part, point ; jur — , by the 
 side of. 
 
 fel'ier, or feI6|l, pron. & adv. self, 
 even, him-, (her-, it-) self, them- 
 selves ; ttte son — , as of it- 
 self. 
 
 fel'ten, a^. & ad/o. rai'e, scarce ; sel- 
 dom, rarely. 
 
 felt'font, adj. & ad/o. strange, oddly. 
 
 ©ena'tor, m. «., pi. -en, senator. 
 
 fenb'en, v. a. & vr. to dispatch, send. 
 
 fcnf'en, «. a. to lower, cast (down). 
 
 fe^'en, b. a. to put, place, set ; — refl. 
 to be seated, to take a seat. 
 
 ©eu^'e, /. «., pi. -n, pestilence, 
 plague. 
 
 feuf sen, «. n. to sigh. 
 
 ftc^, pron. one's self, himself, her- 
 self, itself ; pi. themselves. 
 
 ftc^'etli^, adv. assuredly, certainly. 
 
 |t(^t'6ar, adj. & adv. visible, visibly. 
 
 lie, pron. she, they (when used for 
 second person, you, it is written 
 ©ie). 
 
 jte'ien, adj. seven. 
 
 ©ieg, m. »., pi. -e, victory, conquest. 
 
 ©ie'gel, n. a. seal. 
 
 fteg'en, v. n. to vanquish, conquer. 
 
 ©teg'et, m. s. conqueror, victor. 
 
 ©il'6er, n. «. silver ; -grofc^cn, a Ger- 
 man coin equaJ to three cents. 
 
 jil'ietn, adj. silver. 
 
 jing'en, ». a. & ra. ir. to sing, chant. 
 
 ©inn, m. «., pi. -c, sense, mind, in- 
 tention, meaning, acceptation. 
 
T0CABX7LAKT. — GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 531 
 
 Pnn'eit, v. n. ir. to meditate, 
 ©tt'te,/. «., pi. -n, custom, manner. 
 ©ij, TO. «., jpi. -e, seat, chair, resi- 
 dence ; — ameeifen, to give a seat. 
 PJ'en, V. n. ir. to sit, reside, be im- 
 prisoned. 
 ©IIa'»e, TO. »., pi. -n, slave. 
 fOr a<2t). & coTi;. go, as, thus, in that 
 manner, in such a manner, such ; 
 fo fOt so as ; so so ; -ittlb, as soon ; 
 -bannr then, in that case, as ; 
 — c6en, just now ; -fott, -gleic^, ttt 
 once, immediately; -Wo^l ttWr as 
 well as; — Oott Will, the Lord 
 willing. 
 
 ©ol^n, TO. s., pi. -e, & mod. sou. 
 
 folc^', (-er, -e, -e8), pron. such. 
 
 ©olbat', m. a., pi. -en, soldier. 
 
 foU'm, «. n. to be obliged, owe, shall, 
 ought. 
 
 ©om'mer, m. s. summer. 
 
 fon'bcrtar, adj. singular, odd, strange. 
 
 fon'betn, ®. a. to separate, sever, 
 sunder, disjoin. 
 
 fcn'bern, eonj. but (p. 383). 
 
 ©on'ne, /. a., pi. -n, siiu ; -nfi^irnt, 
 TO. «, p?. -e, parasol. 
 
 ©onn'aScnb, to. «., pZ. -e, Saturday. 
 
 fonn'tg, a<??. simny ;-er ?(6enb, sunny 
 evening. 
 
 ©onn'tag, to. «., ^?. -e, Sunday. 
 
 fonjlr (idv. else, otherwise, in other 
 respects, besides, moreover, at 
 other times, formerly. 
 
 ©org'falt, /. «. care, pains ; atte — 
 unb 3>flege, the most extreme care. 
 
 fijci^'en, B. n. to espy, piy. 
 
 ftal'ten, «. a. to split. 
 
 fpttt'en, «. a. to save, spare. 
 
 ftcir'Iii^/ adj. parsimonious, econom- 
 ical. 
 
 ©parTnmfcit, /. «., pi. -en, economy, 
 
 thriftiness. 
 ©pag, TO. «., ^;. -e, & mo(?. fun, joke, 
 fljoit, at?;, late ; -eflenSi at the latest. 
 ftJttjie'ren, v. n. to walk ; — o,(^i% 
 
 take a walk, walk out ; — fasten, 
 
 drive, take a ride. 
 ©Ijeculation', /. «., pi. -en, specula- 
 tion. 
 ©ped, TO. s. bacon. 
 ©tjei'fe, /. «., pi. -n, meat, dish, meal, 
 fpei'fent v. a. to give to eat, feed, 
 
 nourish ; — v. n. to dine, eat. 
 ©IJte'gel, m. s. mirror, looking-glass. 
 ©))iel, n. «., pi. -c, play, game, 
 fljiel'en, v. a. & n. to play, gamble, 
 
 trifle, sport, 
 ©piel'jeugi n. s. playthings. 
 ©tiit'telf n. s. hospital. 
 ftJDtt'en, V. a. & n. to mock, ridicule, 
 
 scoff, banter, deride. 
 ©pra^'e, /. «., pi. -n, language, 
 
 speech. 
 ©prac^'Ie^ter, -nteljlct, to. s. teacher 
 
 of languages. 
 fpted/enr ®. a. & m. ir. to speak, 
 ftjrcng'en, «. as. & n. to break open, 
 
 blow open, to gallop. 
 fpting'en, ®. n. ir. to leap, jump. 
 fprul/en, e. a. & m. sparkle. 
 ©|)wr» /. » , pi. -en; track, trace, 
 ©taat, TO. «., p?. -eni state, country, 
 
 government ; -imarm, m. «., pi. 
 
 -er, & TO«^. statesman ; -4minijler, 
 
 TO. «. secretary of state ; -gfdjulb, 
 
 /. «., pi -en, debt. 
 ©;a6, TO. «., pZ. -e, kmod. stafl! 
 ©tac^'el, TO. «. sting, prick, thorn, 
 ©tabt,/. «.,;pZ. -c, & mod. city, town, 
 ©ttt"^!, TO. s. steel ; -feber, /. a., pi 
 
 -n, steel-pen. 
 
533 
 
 VOCABULARY. — GEBMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 fla^t'en, «. a. to steel. 
 
 ©tall, m. «., pi. -ti & mod. stable, 
 stall. 
 
 Stamm, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. trunk. 
 
 (lamm'cn, v. n. to descend ; ^er-, to 
 come or descend (from). 
 
 'Stanb, m. s. pi. -e, & mod. rank ; 
 im Stantic feiit, to be able, to be in 
 the position. 
 
 flatt, adj. strong, stout. 
 
 ©tatt'e, /. s. strength. 
 
 fiarr, adj. stiff, benumbed, obstinate, 
 
 ftatt/ prep, instead. [staring. 
 
 (latt'ftnben, v. n. ir. to take place. 
 
 ©tatu'e, /. «., pi. -n, statue. 
 
 |laun'en> n. a. & n. to astonish or be 
 astonished. 
 
 ©teS'nabcl, /. «., pi. -n, pin. 
 
 Sted'en, m. «. goal ; stick. 
 
 ^ed'cn, B. a. & n. ir. & r«/J. to put, 
 fix, stick ; to be fixed, lie, remain, 
 511 |ic^ — I «. a. appropriate to one's 
 self, take with one's self. 
 
 fit^en ilciben, v. n. to stop. 
 
 jle^I'en, «. a. ir. to steal, pilfer, rob. 
 
 flcig'eitf 1). n. & ir. to mount, ascend, 
 rise, advance ; — uop, descend. 
 
 flctg'etn, v. a. to raise. 
 
 StEin, m. a., pi. -t, stone. 
 
 Stcl'le, /. «., pi. -tti place, situation. 
 
 ©tel'Iung, /. «., pi. -en, situation, po- 
 sition. 
 
 fltr'ben, v. n. to die, decease ; — M, 
 to die of. 
 
 fierb'U^, adj. mortal, desperate. 
 
 ©tern, m. a., pi. -e, star ; -Ett^immri 
 starry sky ; -beutet» astrologer. 
 
 ftetit adv. continually, always, ever. 
 
 flcu'ein, «. a. to steer, pay taxes. 
 
 ©tie'fel, TO. a. boot. 
 
 ©tif teri TO. s. founder. 
 
 fllll, adj. silent, qmet(ly), 
 
 ©titt'ft^WtiStl' '"'■ *• silence. 
 
 ©til'le,/. «. stillness, silence,, quiet. 
 
 Stim'mc, /. »., pZ. -n, voice. 
 
 ©tirn, /. a., pi. -tn, brow, forehead. 
 
 ©tod, TO. «., pi. -t, & TOod. stick, 
 cane. 
 
 ©toff, TO. «., pi. -t, cloth, material. 
 
 jlo^n'tn, «. n. to groan. 
 
 ©tolj, TO. a. pride. 
 
 IJoIj, <M&. proud, haughty. 
 
 jlo^'en, V. ir. to push ; — auf, to 
 meet (with), to come upon. 
 
 fiot'tetn, V. n. to stutter. 
 
 fJrttf en, v. a. & n. to punish. 
 
 ©trafe, /. a., pi. -n, punishment. 
 
 ©tta^l, TO. a., pi. -en, beam, ray. 
 
 fha^'en, v. a. &n.to beam. 
 
 ©trag'e, /. a., pi. ~n, street, road,, 
 highway. 
 
 (trdufi'en, v. a. Sin. & refl. to resist, 
 bristle up. 
 
 ©trau^, TO. «., pi. -e, & m^d. brush, 
 shrub. 
 
 flrauc^'eln, v. a. to stumble;—.^., 
 fail. 
 
 ©traug, TO. a., pi. -e, & mod. bunch, 
 fight, ostrich. 
 
 (Itcb'cn, v.n. to strive, struggle, en- 
 deavor ; — mi), to strive for. 
 
 fltctc^'etn, «. a. to stroke, caress. 
 
 flrcit'en, v. n. vr. & re/Z. to fight, con- 
 tend, dispute, quarrel. 
 
 flreng, a^. rough, strict, rigid, hard. 
 
 flrifl'cn, B. a. & n. to knit. 
 
 ©tro^, n. a. straw ; -feffel, straw- 
 chair ; -^ut, straw-hat. 
 
 ©ttom, TO. a., pi. -c, & mod. stream, 
 torrent, flood, current, course. 
 
 ©ttumtit, TO. a., pi -e, & mod. stock- 
 ing. 
 
VOCABUIiABY. — GBKMAU ASD BNQLIBH. 
 
 533 
 
 ©tu'6e/ /. «., pi. -Hi room, apart- 
 ment. 
 
 ©tud, n. «., pi. -tt piece, part, frag- 
 ment, tune, article. 
 
 ©tubem', m. a., pi. -en> student. 
 
 nubi'reiif V. a. & n. to study. 
 
 @tu^I, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. chair, 
 seat, pew. 
 
 fiumnif adj. dumb, silent. 
 
 Stunb'e, /. «., pi. -n, hour, lesson ; 
 -n Unit for hours. 
 
 ©tatm, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. storm, 
 tempest, alarm, fury, assault ; 
 -tt)inb, hurricane, storm, wind. 
 
 Stu'te, /. «., pi. -n, mare. 
 
 fuc^'en, D. a. & n. to seek or look 
 (for). 
 
 ©ub'eiii m. «. south. 
 
 Iiib'lic^, ac0. southern, southerly. 
 
 ©um'me, /. «., pi. -n, sum. 
 
 ©u))'))e, /. «., pi. -n, soup. 
 
 ffig. fflrf;. sweet. 
 
 ©iif'.gfeit,/. «., pi. -en, sweetness. 
 
 Z. 
 
 Za'iaS, m. s. tobacco. 
 
 ta'belit, V. a. to blame, censure. 
 
 Za'ftXt f. s. black-board ; cake (soap, 
 
 chocolate, etc.) 
 Ittg, m. »., pi. -t, day ; -tbu^, n. a. 
 
 diary ; ac^t -e, a week ; stcrje^n 
 
 -e, a fortnight ; eined XajeS, one 
 
 day. 
 tag'tn, «. ». & vmp. to dawn. 
 tcig'ltc^, ffl(^'. daily. 
 Ittn'ne, /. «., y?. -n, fir, fir-tree. 
 Ittn'tc, /. a., pi. -It, aunt. 
 Ittltj, m. a., pi. -e, & m^d. dance, 
 tanj'en, «. a. & n. to dance. 
 S^cin'itr, m. a. dancer. 
 
 tapfer, atZ/. brave, valiant, cour- 
 ageous. 
 
 Zaf'fnkit, f. a., pi. -en, valor, cour 
 age. 
 
 Saf^'e, /. a., pi. -n, pocket, pouch ; 
 -ntu^, n. a., pi. -tx, &mod. pocket- 
 handkerchief. 
 
 Za^'t, f. a., pi. -tit paw, daw. 
 
 tau6/ adj. deaf. 
 
 tttuf at) ». a. to baptize, christen. 
 
 taura'eln, v. n. to stagger. 
 
 taufc^'en, v. a.&refl. delude, deceive, 
 disappoint, cheat, to be mis- 
 taken. 
 
 tau'fenb, adj. thousand. 
 
 Zd'ltt, m. a. plate. 
 
 Ztm'pilt m. a. temple. 
 
 ZtVii^i m. a., pi. -t, carpet, tapes- 
 try. 
 
 Scu'fcl, m. a. devil. 
 
 S^ttl, m. a., pi. -et, & mod. dale, val- 
 ley. 
 
 Z^a'ln, m. a. dollar (a German coin 
 worth about seventy cents). 
 
 S^at, /. a., pi. -en, deed, fact, action. 
 
 S^d'ttgfett, /. a., pi. -en, activity. 
 
 tl^ttu'en, V. imp. to thaw. 
 
 S^en'ter, n. a. theatre. 
 
 3:^ee, m. a. tea. 
 
 S^eil, m,. a., pi. -e, part. ■ 
 
 £^eil'na^me, /. a., pi. -n, participa^ 
 tion, interest, part. 
 
 t^etl'ne^men, v. a. to take part, take 
 interest in. 
 
 t^eil'en, v. a. to divide, part, share. 
 
 I^eil'ung, /. a., pi. -en, division, dis- 
 tribution. 
 
 S^ermome'ter, m. & n. thermometer. 
 
 t^eu'er, adj. dear, expensive. 
 
 Z^lttt n. a., pi. -e, animal, beast. '__ 
 
 X^OT, n. a., pi. -t, gate. 
 
534 
 
 VOCABULAKT. — GERUAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 Z^ox, m. s., pi. -en, fool ; jum Xf^ttt 
 ^inau^jici^en, to leave the city. 
 
 t^o'ri^t, adj. foolish. 
 
 I^ra'ne, /. ». pi. -n, tear. 
 
 I^ron, w,. «., pi. -t, throne. 
 
 J^ton'en, n. a. & n. to reign, be en- 
 throned, 
 
 tl^uit, «. a. ir. to do, perform, act, 
 make, put, cast ; e^ t^ut mir leib, 
 I am sorry ; ba« t^ut ni^tg, that is 
 no matter ; m%t — , to hurt. 
 
 S;pr(c), /. «., pi. -It/ door. 
 
 I^utm, m. s., pi. -t, & mod. tower, 
 steeple, spire. 
 
 tief, adj. deep, low, profound, high. 
 
 Sicf'e, /. «., pi. -a, depth, deep, pro- 
 fundity. 
 
 St'ger, m. a. tiger. 
 
 Stn'te, / a. ink. 
 
 Xirann'/ see X?ramt. 
 
 Sifc^, «i. »., pJ. -ei table. 
 
 3;ifc^'ler» m. a. joiner, carpenter. 
 
 Xix^'ter, /. «., j)^. & mod. daughter. 
 
 Sob. m. a. death. 
 
 tobt, adj. dead, inanimate. 
 
 tiibt'eit, V. a. & n. to kai. 
 
 Sobt'engroiber, m. «. grave-digger. 
 
 ton, o^;. mad, frantic, raging. 
 
 'ion, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. sound. 
 
 Sour'ijl, m,. s. tourist. 
 
 Jrad^t/ /. a., pi. -en, costume, dress. 
 
 ttoi'gc, adj. lazy. 
 
 trag'en, ®. a. & w. m*. to bear, wear, 
 yield, suffer, support; in |tc^ — , 
 to carry about, possess. 
 
 Srau'tr, /. a. grief, sorrow. 
 
 trau'etn, n. n. to mourn. 
 
 trau'Ii(^, adj. familiar, friendly. 
 
 Ztmm, m. «., pi. -t, & mod. dream, 
 fancy. 
 
 Iroium'en, «. n. & ir. to dream, 
 imagine. 
 
 ttau'rtg, aiij. sad, sorrowful, melan- 
 choly. 
 
 treif' It^, adj. excellent 
 
 tteit'eni v. a. & n. ir. to drive, move, 
 push, carry on, perform, urge, 
 force, be driven. 
 
 S^reib'er, m. ». driver. 
 
 tren'ncn, v. a. to separate, sever. 
 
 Xttp'jft, f. a., pi. -n, staircase. 
 
 tret'en, v. a. & n. ir. to step, rise, ap- 
 pear ; na|er — , to approach, come 
 or go near. 
 
 ttCU, adj. faithful, trusty ; -lo8, 
 faithless. 
 
 S^ieu'e, /. a. faithfulness. 
 
 Steu'loltgfeit, /. a. faithlessness. 
 
 Stifiunal', n., pi. -e, tribunal. 
 
 Sritt, m. «., pi. -e, step, space. 
 
 Stiumrt', m. «., pi. -c, triumph ; 
 -wagen, chariot of victory. 
 
 trod'en, adj. dry, arid. 
 
 trotf'nen, v. a. &n.to dry. 
 
 Zxampt'tt, f. a., pi. -n, trumpet. 
 
 tropfen, v. a. & n. to drop, drip, 
 run. 
 
 %xi>f%i.'t, f. a., pi. -n, trophy. 
 
 trii^'en, v. a. & n. to comfort, con- 
 sole. , 
 
 tto^'en, e. n. to dare, brave, defy. 
 
 tro^'ig, axlj. daring, defying. 
 
 triig'en, v. a. & n. to deceive. 
 
 Iriim'mer, pi. rubbish, remains. 
 
 itun'fen, <k??. tipsy. 
 
 luc^, n. «., p^. -:r, & m^d. cloth. 
 
 Sn'genb, /. a., pi. -en, virtue. 
 
 tu'genbl^aft, adj. virtuous. 
 
 %X)tMm' ,m. a., pi. -en, tyrant. 
 
 Sijtannei', /. a. tyranny. 
 
VOCABULAKT.- 
 
 GIERMAK AJSTD ENGLISH. 
 
 535 
 
 U. 
 
 tte'iel, ac0. & adv. evil, ill, bad, 
 sick, wrong. 
 
 n'itn, V. a. &n. to exercise, practise, 
 execute. 
 
 u'ber, prep, over, above, about, be- 
 yond, at, besides, by way of; 
 -all, adv. everywhere ; -Me?', adv. 
 moreover, besides. 
 
 He'Scrfluf, m. s. (super)abundance. 
 
 u'terpfflg, adj. superfluous. 
 
 fiJerfu^'ren, v. a. to convict, convince. 
 
 flSerge'icn, v. a. ir. to surrender, de- 
 liver. 
 
 atergE^'ni, n. a. w. to look over, omit, 
 pass by ; ii'ietge^cn, to pass over. 
 
 flter^auvt') adv. in general. 
 
 tt6crlaf'fen, b. a. vr. to leave with ; — 
 refi. to give one's self up to ; 
 fid) felifl — fetn, to be left to one's 
 
 S3lf. 
 
 itlietleg'en, «. a. & n. to reflect, con- 
 sider, lay over. 
 
 UeSerlcg'ung, /. s. consideration, re- 
 flection. 
 
 ulJciUefetn, v. a. to deliver, make 
 over. 
 
 Ite'ktmac^t, /. s. superior force, pre- 
 dominance. 
 
 itiietne^m'en, v. a. ir. to take posses- 
 sion of, accept, undertake. 
 
 iiiicirttfil'en, «. a. to surprise. 
 
 iikrteb'en, v. a. to persuade ; fid) — 
 U\fm, to be persuaded. 
 
 iiUxttii^'tn, v. a. & m. to present, 
 hand, reach or hand over. 
 
 WbtxxeS, m. s., pi. -c, & mod. over- 
 coat. 
 
 iiScrf^rcl'eitr v. a. to outcry, out- 
 roar. 
 
 iiierfc^tcit'eni ■». a. to cross over, ex- 
 ceed. 
 
 iiJerfe^'ctt, v. a. to translate ; iikr'' 
 fe^eti, to cross, set over. 
 
 Ucicrfef'uttg, /. «., pi. -en, transla- 
 tion. 
 
 Ue'terja^I, /. «. majority. 
 
 utetjcitg'en, v. a. to convince. 
 
 Ueter-jeug'ung, /. «., pi. -en, convic- 
 tion. 
 
 ii'ttig, ac0. remaining. 
 
 tt'fer, n. s. shore, bank. 
 
 Ul§i,,/. s., pi -en, clock, watch ; urn 
 jtBci — , at two o'clock. 
 
 urn, prep., adv. & cojij. about, round, 
 near, at, over, as, for ; -^er, adv. 
 about ; — JUf in order to. 
 
 umtttm'enj v. a. to embrace ; ^1) urn- 
 aimt ^alten, to hold each other in 
 embrace. 
 
 Uraarm'ung, /. «. embrace. 
 
 ttm'fang, m. s. circumference, ex- 
 tent. 
 
 umfttng'en, v. a. ir. & refl. to em- 
 brace. 
 
 Um'gang, m. s., pi. -e, & mod. inter- 
 course, company, acquaintance. 
 
 umgei'en, v. a. ir. to surround, en- 
 close. 
 
 um'ge^cn, ®. n. ir. to associate with, 
 to have intercourse with ; um^ 
 ^tTf'm, to go about ; haunt. 
 
 um^et', adv. around, about, round 
 about ; -ttanbeln, v. n. to wander 
 or stroll about. 
 
 um^tn', adm. about ; i^ fanti nic^t — , 
 I cannot forbear, I cannot but, I 
 cannot help. [back, return. 
 
 um'feferen, v. n. to turn round, turn 
 
 um'tommenr v. n. ir. to perish, die. 
 
 um'ieilTen, v. a. to tear away, destroy. 
 
536 
 
 VOCABULAKT. — OEBMAN AND ENQLISH. 
 
 umting'en> v. a. to Burround. 
 
 nm'f^Iosenf v. a. & n. i/r. to knock 
 over ; to be overturned with vio- 
 lence, upset. 
 
 umf^Ung'en, v. a. fig. to embrace, 
 clasp round. 
 
 Um'flanb, mi. «., pi. -t, & mod. circum- 
 stance. 
 
 um'Wenben, e. a. ir. & refl. to turn 
 (round), reverse, invert, change. 
 
 um'wetfen, v. a. & ». ir. to throw 
 down, overthrow, upset. 
 
 uniU)5U'cii> v. a. to envelope in clouds. 
 
 um;ud'ent v. a. to flash or flare 
 about. 
 
 un, this particle prefixed to nouns, 
 adjectives, adverbs, and any par- 
 ticiple pafit negates or inverts 
 the meaning. It always takes 
 the primary accent. It is gen- 
 erally rendered by the Eng- 
 lish particles vn, in, dis or by 
 not. 
 
 un'^emitteltt eu^. poor, without 
 means. 
 
 Utt'ieforgtf a^. unconcerned. 
 
 nn'iei£$niiar, a^. nntameable. 
 
 unbf amj. and. 
 
 un'etltie^rli^, adj. indispensable. 
 
 Un'etfc^rotfen^eit,/. s. intrepidity. 
 
 un'etttagKi^i ac^ intolerable, insuffer- 
 able. 
 
 un'jea^tet, aeh. & prep, (with gen.), 
 & conj. notwithstanding, in spite 
 of, although. 
 
 Un'gebulb, /. «. impatience. 
 
 un'fitbulbig, adj. impatient. 
 
 un'gefttjr, ado. about; Don — , by 
 chance. 
 
 un'se^euet, ae^'. immense, monstrous. 
 
 un'gtmetn, adv. exceedingly ; — leib 
 t^un, to make exceedingly sorry. 
 
 un'senu^t/ adj. without profit. 
 
 un'gefunbF ac^. unhealthy. 
 
 un'glttuiig, a^. incredulous, unbe- 
 lieving. 
 
 nn'glUdi n. g. misfortune, accident, 
 mischance. 
 
 ttn'^eil, n. s. evil, misfortune, mis- 
 chief 
 
 Unlsctlttat'i /. «., pi. -en, university. 
 
 Utt'foflen, /. «., pi. expenses, costs, 
 charges. 
 
 un'hllibig> adj. ignorant, unacquaint- 
 ed. 
 
 lln'mmge. /. ». immense quantity, 
 immense concourse (of people). 
 
 nrimiia^mliiS), adj. inimitable. 
 
 un'tjaffenbi adj. imbecoming. 
 
 un'rat^foutf adv. not advisable. 
 
 Un'rc^t, n. s. wrong ; — ^ttieit, to be 
 wrong. 
 
 un'te^t, adj. wrong. 
 
 ttn'f<^utt( /• »■ innocence, purity. 
 
 un'f^u&igi adj. innocent, guilt- 
 less. 
 
 tttl'feti pron. our, ours. 
 
 un'flertli^, adj. immortal. 
 
 Un'tiertli^teit, /. i. immortality. 
 
 jtn'teti prep, under, below, beneath. 
 
 unterbeffen, ado. meanwhile, in the 
 meantime. 
 
 Untctbiud'er, m. s. suppreasor, tyrant. 
 
 unteibritd'eti) v. a. to suppress. 
 
 un'terge^en, v. n. ir. to go down, set 
 
 Un'tet^altf m. a. maintenance, liveli- 
 hood. 
 
 unter^alt'etij v. a. ir. to maintain, 
 amuse, interest. 
 
 untet^anb'dn, v. n. to negotiate. 
 
YOCABm-AKT. — QEKUAN AMD ENGLISH. 
 
 537 
 
 untcrlieg'cttr v. n. ir- to succumb, be 
 subdued. 
 
 unterne^m'en, ». a. ir. to undertake. 
 
 Hntetne^m'en, n. a. enterprise. 
 
 Up'terric^tj m. s. instruction, [inform. 
 
 untemd^t'en, v. a. to instructj teach, 
 
 Mn'tetf^ieb, m. s., pi. -c, difference. 
 
 unterPe^en, v. a. & refl. to dare. 
 
 UntetflitJ'uns, /. «., pi. -m, assistance, 
 support, help. [into. 
 
 untcrfit^'en, v. a. to examine, inquire 
 
 Un'tert^anf m. »., pi. -m, subject, 
 citizen. 
 
 un'tCTt^an, adj. subject to, dependent 
 
 mttxtot^i'f ad/o. on the road. 
 
 BittertBerf en, v. a. & refl. ir. to sub^ 
 jex!t, submit, yield. [evitable. 
 
 un'»ermcibHc^, adv. unavoidable, in- 
 
 un'Dcrfc^amt, adj. shameless. 
 
 un'Korfti^tig. adj. careless. 
 
 Un'sa^Ugf adj. innumerable, [tented. 
 
 uit'sufriebenr adj. dissatisfied, discon 
 
 Ut'aUer»tttei, m. a., pi. & mod. great- 
 great-grandfather, ancestor, fore- 
 father. 
 
 ut'iat, adj. arable, productive. 
 
 Ur'^eier, m. a. originator, author. 
 
 Ur'queff, m. a., pi. -tn, foimtain-head. 
 
 Ut't^ett» n. a. judgment, opinion; 
 -Sftjntii^/ sentence, judgment, ver- 
 dict. 
 
 ut't^etUn, «. a. & TO. to decide, judge. 
 
 ttt'fttc^e, /. a., pi. -n, cause, reason. 
 
 9$a'ter> m. a., pi. & mod. father; 
 
 -lanb) n. a. fatherland. 
 Seil'c^en, n. a. violet. 
 iserttJ'rcbeit, v. a. & n. to have an 
 
 understanding. 
 ti(Tac^'ten> v. a. to despise 
 
 SJerttc^'tung, /. a. contempt. 
 
 »erad^'tung«t»ert^, adj. worthy of con- 
 tempt, contemptible. 
 
 setcinb'etn, v. a. & refl. to change) 
 alter. 
 
 veratt'Iaffettr v. a. to cause, induce, 
 occasion. 
 
 eerlan'neni v. a. to banish, exile. 
 
 aJttban'ttung, /. »., pi. -tn, banish- 
 ment ; -8ott» m. a., pi. -«, place 
 of exUe. 
 
 Derberg'eni «. a. ir. to hide, conceal. 
 
 sertefTern, v. a. to correct. 
 
 »erJiet'cni v. a. ir. to forbid, pro- 
 hibit. 
 
 seriinb'ettr «. a. ir. to tie (up), unite, 
 join, dress (a wound) ; — refl. to 
 oblige, lay under obligation. 
 
 aSeriinb'ung, /. a., pi. -en, union. 
 
 serSit'tern, v. a. to embitter. 
 
 SJetilcnb'ung,/. a.,pl. -en, fascination. 
 
 3Jcrbte(i^'en, n. a. crime. 
 
 »et6ttnb'en, part. & adj. obliged, to- 
 gether (with). 
 
 serWnb'en, v. a. & n. to ally. 
 
 tjerbitnb'ct, adj. allied, united. 
 
 SJctbiinb'ete, m. a. ally. 
 
 Dcrberi'en, «. a. & n. ir. to corrupt ; 
 spoil, perish. 
 
 S^erberi'en, n. a. ruin, destruction. 
 
 verbien'en, -i). a. to gain, earn, merit, 
 deserve. 
 
 Verein'tgen, «. a. to unite, join, asso- 
 ciate. 
 
 nerein'tgt, ac^. united, associated. 
 
 uetfe^rcn, v. a. to miss. 
 
 serfliEg'ett, ®. n. to expire, pass. 
 
 sctfolg'en, s. a. to pursue, persecute. 
 
 aJerfolg'iing,/. a.,pl. -en, persecution. 
 
 Setgans'ltci^feit, /. «. transitoriness. 
 transientness. 
 
538 
 
 VOCABTTLABT. — GZ31MAK AND ENGLISH. 
 
 sergeJ'en, v. a. vr. to forgive, give 
 away, pardon. 
 
 sergeJ'eita; otto, in vain. 
 
 serge'genwfirtigett, «. n. to remember, 
 realize, recall. 
 
 sergc^'cn, u. ». m". to pass away, van- 
 ish, elapse, perish, decay ; — refi. 
 to transgress. [neglect. 
 
 sergeffen, «. a. w. to forget, omit, 
 
 ttergertcn, v. a. to reciprocate. 
 
 setgift'en, «. o. to poison. 
 
 vergnug'en, v. a. to amuse, please. 
 
 SJetgnuj'eni n. a. pleasure, amuse- 
 ment ; jtc^ t>a« — ma^en, to take 
 the pleasure. 
 
 Dtrgiin'ncn, v. a. to permit. 
 
 UergraS'm, «. a. i/r. to bury, inter. 
 
 sergrBg'em, ®. o. & re^. to enlarge, 
 magnify, increase. 
 
 ser^dft'ot, «. a. to arrest. 
 
 uet^alt'en, d. a. i/r. ; jt^ ru^ig — , to 
 keep quiet ; |t^ fo — i to be act- 
 ually so, to be just so. 
 
 SJer^alt'en, n. s. demeanor, conduct. 
 
 ajetplt'tttg, n. «., pi. --•« relation, 
 circumstance. 
 
 scr^ei'tttt^en, v. a. & refl. to marry, 
 to enter in marriage. 
 
 vtrljd^m, V. a. ir. to help to, pro 
 cure. 
 
 Der^inb'trn, v. a. to prevent, hinder. 
 
 setptt'en, ■». a. to conceal, hide. 
 
 uetpt'tn, ?!. a. to prevent. 
 
 Jeriftng'en, ■«. a. to renovate, make 
 young again. 
 
 S^erktlf r m. »., pi. -t, & mod. sale. 
 
 verfauf en> v. a. to sell, dispose of. 
 
 verten'neit, v. a. i/r. to misapprehend, 
 mistake 
 
 VerHag'eilf «. a. to accuse, sue. 
 
 »erlnut)f en, d. a. to link, tie. 
 
 serfitnbEtt, «. as. to announce. 
 
 serla.ng'en, v. a. & n. to ask, desire ; 
 i)a(x)m<S) — . to long for it. 
 
 setlalT'tn, *. a. ir. to leave , — v. n. & 
 ir. auf einem — , to rely upon, de- 
 pend upon. 
 
 ucrlaum'ben, v. a. to calumniate, 
 slander. 
 
 SJetWum'ber, m. s. slanderer, calum 
 niator. 
 
 SSertaum'bnng,/. ».,pl. -en, calumny, 
 slander. 
 
 setteb'en, e. a. to spend. 
 
 aJetle'gen^eit, / s.,pl. -en, embarrass- 
 ment ; |!c^ ttua bet — jie^cn, to 
 seek to rid one's self of embar- 
 rassment. 
 
 serlei^'en, v. a. ir. to lend, let out, 
 entrust (to). 
 
 setlier'en, v. a. & n. ir. to lose ; »«» 
 loren ge^cn, to be lost; — v. n. ir. 
 to disperse, disappear. 
 
 SJerlujl', m. a., pi. -t, loss, [crease. 
 
 Dcrme^r'en, v. a. n. & refi. to in- 
 
 setmeib'en, «. a. ir. to avoid. 
 
 setmifc^'en, v. a. & refl. to mix. 
 
 Detmit'telji, adv. by means of. 
 
 »ermBg'en, v. a. & ir. to be able to. 
 
 SJetmcg'cn, n. s. fortune, wealth, pos- 
 session. 
 
 scrmut^'cn, v. a. to suppose. 
 
 sermut^'U^V adv. probably. 
 
 tterne^m'en, v. a. ir. to hear, examine. 
 
 SJeinunft', /. «. reason, sense, judg- 
 ment. 
 
 serrat^'en, v. a. ir. to betray. 
 
 Serroit^'er, m. a. betrayer, traitor 
 
 verri^t'en, v. a. to do, perform. 
 
 veifant'meln, «. a. & n. to congre' 
 gate. 
 
 serfiSum'en, v. ».' to miss, spare. 
 
VOCABULAliY — GBliMAN AND ENGUSH, 
 
 539 
 
 ttetfi^ttfTent v. a. to procure, provide. 
 
 »erf(^teb'enf aclj. different, diverse, 
 sundry. 
 
 »)etf(i^Uep'en/ v. a. w. to lock. 
 
 serfd^Iing'en, «. a. vr. to devour, swal- 
 low up. 
 
 scrf^Bn'eni, ®. a. to beautify, embel- 
 lish. 
 
 Sctfi^on'en, ®. a. to spare, forbear. 
 
 setfc^Winb'en, «. n. vr. to disappear, 
 vanish. 
 
 serfe^'cn, ®. a. ir. to omit, mistake ; 
 to provide. 
 
 serfengt', adj. burned, singed. 
 
 Dcrfent'en, v. a. to sink, drown. 
 
 »erfe|'en, e. a. to reply, transpose ; 
 in tie Slof^wctibistcit serfcjt fein, to 
 be under the necessity, to be 
 obliged. 
 
 serjTc^'ern, v. a. to assure. 
 
 SJerfic^etimSf /. s. assurance. 
 
 DEtfint'en, v. n. ir. to sink. 
 
 serforg'en, v. a. to provide (for or 
 with). 
 
 Scrfpttt'en, ®. refl. to be late. 
 
 serfperr'en, v. a. to obstruct. 
 
 UetftJtel'en, v. a. to lose (by gambling 
 or at play). 
 
 SJerfprcc^'cn, n. s. promise ; ein — er* 
 fitHen, to fulfil a promise. 
 
 Vtx^fxti)'m, V. a. & refl. to promise ; 
 to bind (one's self) by a promise, 
 be engaged. 
 
 SJcrfianb', m. a. sense, mind. 
 
 Derjlanb'en, past part, of serflel^cn. 
 
 Strflanb'igf adj. sensible, judicious, 
 wise. [comprehend. 
 
 Detjie^'en, v. n. ir. to understand, 
 
 ScrlJei'gern, e. o. to sell (at auction). 
 
 »cr|lctt'en, v. a. & «. to close, ob- 
 struct, disfigure. 
 
 uerjlumnt'en, v. a. to be or become 
 silent. 
 
 sett^ei'btsett, v. a. to defend, main- 
 tain. 
 
 vextl^til'tn, V. a. to divide, distribute. 
 
 Derttt'sen, v. a. to destroy, extirpate, 
 erase. 
 
 Setttag', m. «., ^?. -e, & mod. con- 
 vention, contract, treaty. 
 
 sertrau'cn, v. a. & n. to rely upon, 
 
 Serttttu'en, n. a. confidence. 
 
 uerur't^etleit, v. a. & n. to condemn. 
 
 Derwal'tctt, i>. a. to perform, manage. 
 
 SJcrWttlt'ung, /. «., pi. -en, manage- 
 ment, [transform. 
 
 serfcttnb'eln, v. a. to alter, change, 
 
 Sermanb'tc, /. «., pi -n, relative. 
 
 SScrwcg'en^ett, /. «. audacity. 
 
 serwei'gern, v. a. to refuse. 
 
 Dermeiren, «. a. & n. to spend, delay. 
 
 serwelt'en, «. n. to fade, wither. 
 
 Dcrwelt'Ii^, adj. fading, withering. 
 
 serwenb'en, v. ir. to spend, lay out. 
 
 WxXBiUj'tn, adj. past, last. 
 
 SJerwtd'elung, /. a., pi. -en, entangle- 
 ment, [found, entangle. 
 
 setttin'en, v. a. to embarrass, con- 
 
 serwunb'cn, «. a. to wound, hurt. 
 
 Semunb'ern, v. refl. to wonder, be 
 surprised. 
 
 uetttfiji'en, v. a. & n.to destroy, de- 
 vastate, [excuse. 
 
 Dftiei^'en, v. a. ir. to pardon, forgive, 
 
 Dctjtc^t'en (awf), v. n. to renounce. 
 
 35erjtt)eifl«ng,/. a. despair. 
 
 Sel'ter, m. s. cousin. 
 lin't m. s. vizier. 
 
 PU^, n. a. cattle, beast, brute. 
 
 »iel, adj. & adv. much, a good deal. 
 
 Diclteic^t', adv. possibly, perhaps, 
 may be. 
 
540 
 
 VOCABULARY.— GERMAN AND BNGLIBH. 
 
 »itt, adj. four ; -yHjn, fourteen. 
 SSier'tel, n. a. quarter, fourth part. 
 SJo'gel, m. I., pi. -, & mod. bird, fowl. 
 Solt, n. «., pi. -cr, & mod. people, 
 
 crew, nation. 
 Dolt, ad0. full, filled, entire. 
 SoO'tg, adv. fully, wholly, entirely. 
 SSoQ'monb/ m. a. fall moon, 
 sottbrtnj'en, e. a. ir. to accomplish ; 
 
 tine %1)eA — / to commit a deed. 
 toQenb'eiti v. a. to end, finish, ac- 
 complish. 
 SoIIIcm'men, adg. perfect(ly). 
 Doili p'tep. of, from, by, on, upon. 
 »or, prep, before, from, of, ago, 
 
 since. 
 Doran'i ad/e. before, ahead, in ad- 
 vance, 
 sor'tctcitett, v. a. to prepare, dispose, 
 sor'ieugctt, ». o. to prevent, 
 voc'ber, OfdQ. front, fore, anterior. 
 Sor'jdnger, m,. a. predecessor. 
 Vor'se^m> v. a. to come, to pass, 
 
 happen. 
 SJor'gcfe^te, m. a., pi. -n, superior, 
 
 overseer, 
 sot'gefiern, adv. day before yester- 
 day. 
 Uot'ig, adj. preceding, last. 
 »ot'fommm, «. n. ir. to seem, appear, 
 
 happen. 
 Sor'mittag, m. «., pi. -c, forenoon. 
 SJor'mutib, m. a., pi. -n, & mod. 
 
 guardian. 
 Dor'ne^m, adj. noble, 
 scr'ne^men, v. a. ir. & refl. to take in 
 hand, undertake, determine upon. 
 SJor'ftt^' ™- a.,pl.-tt & mod. purpose. 
 fSex'rat^ m. a., pi. -e, & m^d. pro- 
 visions, [magazine. 
 SSoxxat^'pni, n. a., pi. -tx, & mod. 
 
 33or'fi%l«g( m. a., pi. -t, & mod. prop- 
 osition. 
 
 Sor'fi^ttft, /. a prescription, order, 
 direction. 
 
 sor'fE^en, v. a. ir. to take care. 
 
 aJot'fe^ung, /. »., pi. -en, providence. 
 
 Dor'fii^tig, adj. cautious, careful. 
 
 Sor'fteHen, v. a. to introduce, repre- 
 sent, place before ; — refl. imagine, 
 introduce. 
 
 SSot'lleHung, /. a., pi. -en, remon- 
 strance, presentation, idea, no- 
 tion. 
 
 SJor't^eiJ, m. a., pi. -e, advantage, 
 profit. 
 
 sct't^eil^aft, adj. profitable. . 
 
 »«rtrejf li^, adj. excellent. 
 
 Doru'SetgeJen, v. n. to pass by or 
 along. 
 
 vorii'ietiie^en, v. n. to pass by. 
 
 SJcr'TOunb, m. a., pi. -c, & mod. pre- 
 tense. 
 
 Sor'tDifcig/ adj. forward, impudent. 
 
 sot'sei^nm, s. a. to sketch, trace 
 out. 
 
 Dor'jie^cn, v. a. ir. to draw forward, 
 prefer. [ence, advantage. 
 
 SJor'pg, m. s. pi. -t, & m,od. prefer- 
 
 SBatt'te(n), /. s. pi. -n, goods, mer- 
 chandisa [awake. 
 
 tvai^'en, v. a. & n. to wake, to be 
 
 tsa^'fen, v. n. ir. to grow, increase. 
 
 SBa^'ter, m. a. watchman. 
 
 Saf fe, /. a., pi. -n, weapon. 
 
 waif' nen, «. a. to arm. 
 
 SBa'ge, /. s., pi. -n, balance, pair of 
 scales. 
 
 ttag'en, v. a. n. & rejl. to venture. 
 
VOC^VBULAKY. — OBBMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 541 
 
 Sua gen, m. s. wagon, carnage, 
 
 vehicle. 
 S&a'ge{lu({i n. s. rash action, risk, at 
 
 venture. 
 Saggon'j to. «., pi. -i, railroad car- 
 riage. 
 SBJa^I, /. «., ipl. -en, choice, option, 
 
 election. 
 tvd^I'en, v. a. to choose, elect. 
 SBa^n, m. a. fanc^, dream, 
 na^n'finnig, adj. frantic, mad. 
 na^T, adj. true, genuine, real, 
 ttoi^t'en. «. n. to endure, last ; turj — , 
 
 to be of short duration, 
 ttd^r'enb, prep. &. canj. during, 
 
 while. 
 aBa^t'l^cit, /. «. truth. 
 Ba^t'fi^EtnU^, adj. probable, likely; 
 
 adv. probably. 
 SEBalb, TO. «., pi. -cr, & TOO(i. forest, 
 
 wood(s); in Salbe^nad^tf in the 
 
 thickest of forest. 
 SBaH, TO. s., pZ. -e, & mod. dam, ram- 
 part, bank. 
 SBaK'nup/ /. s., i)?. -e, & mod. walnut. 
 tuaU'en, ®. n. to bubble, boil up, 
 
 wander. 
 walt'en, v. n. to manage, reign, 
 wan'beln, v. n. to wander, move ; l^in 
 
 unb ^tx — , to wander to and fro ; 
 
 ttuf unb nieber — , to wander or 
 
 walk about. 
 ffian'berbuc^, n. i., pi. -cr, & mod. a 
 
 book serving as a passport to 
 
 traveling journeymen. 
 3Ban'bcrer, to. s. traveler. 
 aaSang'c, /. «., pi. -n, cheek. 
 loant'en, «. n. to stagger, hesitate, 
 
 waver, 
 toann, adv. when. 
 SBap'tJcn, n. a. coat of arms. 
 
 warm, adj. & adv. warm. 
 
 SSatn'ung, /. «., pi. -en, warning, ad- 
 monition. 
 
 watt'en, v. a. & n. to wait, stay, at- 
 tend to. 
 
 warum', adv. why, wherefore. 
 
 v>a.i, pron. what, that. 
 
 SJttfc^'e, /. a. wash, cleaning, linen. 
 
 SEBafftr, n. a., pi. — , & m^d. water. 
 
 SEBec^'fA »»• «■ change, order. 
 
 ttec^'f«I«» i>- a. & ra. to change. 
 
 wed'en, «. a. to wake. 
 
 we'beln,®. a. towag(withthetail),fan. 
 
 lue'bcr, conj. neither ; — wi), neither, 
 nor. 
 
 SBeg, TO. a., pi. -t, way, road. 
 
 SBc^, n. a., pi. -m, pain, sorrow; 
 -t^un, to hurt, grieve, offend ; ti 
 t^ut mir We^, it grieves me. 
 
 wc^'en, V. n. to blow. 
 
 SEBeJ'mut^, /. s. sadness, sorrow, wo- 
 fulness. [ful. 
 
 we^'miit^ig, adj. sad, woful, mourn 
 
 SStii, n. a., pi. -tx, woman. 
 
 raeib'Ui^, adj. feminine. 
 
 ttei'c^en, v. ». & n. vr. to soften, 
 yield. 
 
 SBttb'e, /. a. pasture, meadow. 
 
 weib'cn, v. a. & n. to pasture, graze, 
 feed. 
 
 wei'gcrn, ». a. & refl. to refuse, de- 
 cline. 
 
 SSci^'nac^ten, pi. Christmas. 
 
 weil, conj. while, during, because. 
 
 SSJeil'e, /. a. while, space of time. 
 
 weit'cn, v. a. & n. to stay, tarry, rest. 
 
 Sffietn, TO. »., pi. -t, wine, vine. 
 
 ttcin'en, v. n. to weep, cry. 
 
 ttet'ft, ac^- sage, wise. 
 
 SSSci'ft,/. a., pi. -tt, manner, method, 
 custom ; melody, tune ; $anb' 
 
542 
 
 VOCABDIiABY. — GEBMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 lungatBeife, the way or manner of 
 SaJeiS'^eit,/. a. wisdom. [acting, 
 
 weig, adj. white. 
 
 teeif fageitj v. a. to prophesy, foretell 
 tveit/ adj. & adv. distant, far, wide, 
 
 much. 
 Bsit'er, adv. farther, further, 
 wcit'ergcl^en, v. n. to go on one's way, 
 
 proceed. [which. 
 
 tBtlc^'er, (-e, -«), pron. who, that, 
 ttelfen, v. n. to wither. 
 SBeH'c, /. «., jj?. -n, wave. 
 SfBcIt, /. «., ^2. -en, world ; -Jii^ne, 
 
 /. «., ^Z. -n, the world's stage, 
 isen'iien (an), v. refl. to apply to. 
 tte'nig, a^. & adv. little, few ; r-er, 
 
 corop. of — , less, 
 tve'nigllene, adw. at least. 
 Wcnn, ad/B. & emj. if, when, when- 
 ever ; — mS^, (al)though. 
 Wcr, pron. who, he who. 
 SSSetB'cgelb, n. a., pi. -er, bounty, 
 
 handmoney. 
 SBerB'e^auptmttnn, m. ». recruiting 
 
 oflScer. 
 wer'ben, v. n. ir. to become, grow ; 
 
 roaS IBirb mxi mir — , what will 
 
 become of me. 
 teer'ftn, v. a. ir. to throw ; »on fi^ — , 
 
 to cast or throw away. 
 SBcrf, n. a., pi. -e, work. 
 fBtrtfjt m. a. worth, value. 
 tBcrt^, adj. worth, deserving, worthy. 
 SBe'fen, n. a. being, behavior. 
 wep'^alO, adv. why. 
 SBcjl'en, m. a. west. 
 SBet'ter, n. a. weather, 
 tvtc^'ttg, a^'. Important, of conse- 
 quence. 
 SEBid^'tigfeit, /. s., pi. -en, importance, 
 
 consequence. 
 
 tBt'bet, prep, against, contrary to. 
 
 S>ibn\fxcij'ta, v. n. ir. to contradict. 
 
 9Bi'ber|lanb, m. a. resistance, opposi- 
 tion. 
 
 tBi'brtg, a4j. contrary, adverse. 
 
 tvte, ado. &,conj. how, as, as if, like; 
 — and) (immer), however ; — aU, 
 as if; such as ; — Don fel6er, as of 
 itself. 
 
 tvie'ber, adv. again, in return, back. 
 
 SEBie'ber^aU, m. «. re-echo. 
 
 Wie'ber^aHcn, v. n. to re-echo, resound. 
 
 tvie'bererfennen, v. a. ir. to recognize. 
 
 tt)ieber:^er'|}ellen, «. a. & refl. to re- 
 store, reproduce, re-introduce. 
 
 Wie'ber^olen, v. a. to fetch back. 
 
 t»teber§oren, v. a. to repeat, re- 
 hearse. 
 
 ttie'bcrtt^ren, v. n. to return. 
 
 wie'berura, adv. again. 
 
 SBie'ge, / a., pi. -n, cradle. 
 
 SBie'fe, /. «., pi. -n, meadow. 
 
 wicstel', adv. how much. 
 
 wilb, adj. wUd. 
 
 SDSilb'prct, 71. s. game, deer, venison. 
 
 S[Biff'e(n), m. a. will, mind, consent. 
 
 Kiinom'men, adj. & ads. welcome. 
 
 njtm'metn, v. n. to moan. 
 
 SBtnb, m. a., pi. -t, wind, air. 
 
 Win'frin, v. n. to whimper, whine, 
 moan 
 
 SBin'ter, m. a winter; -glod^tw, n.a. 
 (name of a flower); -na^t, /. a. 
 winter-night. 
 
 ttir, pron. we 
 
 SBirf'en, n. a. work, efffects. 
 
 Biri'Hi^, adj. actually, really, indeed. 
 
 3Birt^, m. a., pi. -t, host, master of 
 the house. 
 
 aBllT'en, n. a. knowledge ; -f^aft, /. 
 a., pl.-tn, science. 
 
TOCABTILAKT.— QERMAB AND B:NGLISH. 
 
 543 
 
 SBitt'we, /. «., pi. -It, widow. 
 
 JDitt'wet, m. «. widower. 
 
 reoi oc?o. where, when ; — (mi)i 
 
 wherever, whenever. 
 SBoc^'e, /. «., pi. -n, week. [place. 
 wo'^et', adv. whence, from what 
 tbo^in'f adm. whither, what way. 
 tto^I, adv. well, indeed, perhaps, it 
 
 is true ; — biti happy for you, it 
 
 is well with you. [deed. 
 
 SSo^Vtljatt f. «., pi. -tn, favor, kind 
 SEBo^l'tptet, m. a. benefactor. 
 Wo^I'tpttj!/ adj. benevolent, munifi- 
 cent [ficial. 
 tDO^l't^uenb, adj. beneficent, bene- 
 tto^I't^un, V. n. i/r. to do good, be 
 
 beneficial or charitable. 
 Wo^n'cn, V. n. to reside, live, dwell. 
 SBo^n'ung, /. «., pi. -tn, dwelling, 
 
 habitation. 
 SBolf, m. «., pi. -t, & mod. wolf. 
 SBoI'te, /. »., pi. -n, cloud. 
 SDJol'Ie, /. J. wool. 
 IDoII'en, V. a. &, n. vr. ia will, be 
 
 willing, want, be about. 
 ttomtt', ado. wherewith, by which. 
 won'niij, adj. delightful, blissful, 
 worttti', adm, whereon, whereat, at 
 IBOtau?', otfo. out of what. [what. 
 Sort, n. a., pi aBttte & SBiirter, {am 
 
 p. 83, XI.) word, expression. 
 SBot'teriuc^, n. a., pi. -ex, & mod. 
 
 dictionary. 
 jDott'Iic^, adj, verbal, literally. 
 tBcjit', ado. whereto, wherefore, to 
 
 which or what, 
 ttud^'ern, v. n. to practice usury. 
 SEESunb e, / »., pi. -n, wound, hurt. 
 SBun'ber, n. a. wonder, marvel. 
 Wun'bertiir, O/dj. wonderful. 
 jBun'beriic^, adj. strange, odd. 
 
 wun'bcrni «. n. & reft, to wonder, be 
 astonished. 
 
 wun'berfdion, adj. wonderfully, beau- 
 tiful. 
 
 tJjiin'f^en, v. a. to wish, desire. 
 
 SBur'be, /. «., pi. -n, dignity. 
 
 wur'btg, adj. worthy, deserving. 
 
 SBurm, m. a., pi. -er, & mod. worm, 
 vermin. 
 
 Wii)}, adj. desert, empty, madj — 
 itnb ijbe, desert and desolate. 
 
 SBujl'c, /. «., pi. -tt, desert. 
 
 Baljli f. »., pi. -tn, number, cypher. 
 Stt^l'en, -0. a. & n. to pay. 
 jtt^rreii^, adj. numerous. 
 jttdm'en, v. a. to tame. 
 Sa^n, 771. «., pi. -t, & m,od. tooth ; 
 
 -arjt, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. dentist. 
 sanf tn, v. -n. & refl. to quarrel. 
 jart, adj. delicate, tender; — adv. 
 
 delicately, tenderly. 
 Soitt'lic^, adj. fond, tender. 
 jou'bttn, v. TO. to linger, delay. 
 3aum, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. bridle. 
 Saun, m. a., pi. -t, & mod. hedge. 
 Sti<l)'m, n. a. sign, token, mark. 
 ;ti^'ntn, v. a. & n. to sign, mark, 
 
 draw. 
 Stig'tn, v. a. to show, manifest ; — 
 
 r0. to appear, prove. 
 3tit, /. a., pi. -tn, time ; iti Sfiten, 
 
 in season ; »on btt — an, from 
 
 that time forward. 
 Bcit'ung, / a., pi. -en, newspaper. 
 jertrt^'cn, s. a. & to. ir. to break, 
 
 fracture. 
 
544 
 
 VOCABtJIiAKV. — GERMAN AND ENGLISH. 
 
 serfliel'eitf «. a. w. to melt, dissolve. 
 
 jcrtei^'cn, is. a. & n. w. to rend, tear 
 to pieces. 
 
 jetff^met'tetn, ®. a. to crash, destroy. 
 
 jcr|l8r'ett, u. a. to destroy. 
 
 3«(lSt'Hiig, /. »., pZ. -en, destruction. 
 
 jerjlreu'm, ®. a. to scatter, confuse ; — 
 reffl. to disperse, clear away. 
 
 jerflrcut' feitti o. n. to be absent- 
 minded. 
 
 3etts'e> n. »., pi -n> witness. 
 
 Seug'en, «. a. to testify. 
 
 jte^'eiif D. o. ir. to draw, pnll; move 
 
 Bid, n. s.,pl. -e, limit, aim,goal, end. 
 
 jiem'ctt, «. imper«. to fit, become, be 
 suitable. 
 
 jtem'Ui^, ac0. pretty, toleTable(bly). 
 
 3iM'mx, n. s. apartment, room. 
 
 jit'tem, V. n. to tremble, shiver, 
 shake. 
 
 BoUr m,. »., pi. -t, & mod. inch, tax. 
 
 jorn'iS/ adj. angry. 
 
 ju, pr«p. & ada. to, too, by, at, for, 
 in ; -erfi', adv. (at) first. 
 
 iu'Jringett, «. n. to spend. 
 
 jud'en, u n. & a. to ehrog, stir, 
 quiver, give a quick motion. 
 
 Sud'er, m. «. sugar. 
 
 ju'br&den, v. a. to shut. 
 
 Su'fdUtg, ac^. & a<2«. accidental(ly). 
 
 Su'flui^t, /. «. refuge, shelter, re- 
 course ; -ioxt, m. «., pi. -tx, & 
 «wi. place of refuge ; -flcitte, /. 
 «., pi. "0, shelter, place of refuge. 
 
 iufrie'ben, ac^. contented, satisfied. 
 
 3«9. m,. s., pi. -t, & mod. train, pro- 
 cession. 
 
 iu'geien, «. a. & n. to admit, confess, 
 grant. 
 
 iugleic^', a<2ti. at the same time, im- 
 mediately. 
 
 Siig'ttogel, m. «., ^2. & mod bird of 
 passage. 
 
 jum, contraction of ju bem, to the. 
 
 jurec^t'finbtn, v. refl. to find one's 
 way. 
 
 junt'en, n. a. to be angry. 
 
 juritd', Oidm. back backward ; -eilen, 
 v. n. to hasten back ; -fii^rett, n.a. 
 to lead back ; -geteti/ e. a. & n. to 
 return, ^ve back ; -ge^cn, -fcl^ren, 
 «. ra. to return ; -fommcB, «. n. vr. 
 to come back, return ; -ne^men, 
 ®. «.. i/r. to retract, take back ; 
 -fc^aubetn, «. n. to be stricken 
 back with horror ; -fi^retfen, ®. a. 
 to frighten back ; -jie^en, e. ». 
 & r«J?. to draw or pull back. 
 
 jufam'mm, od». together, jointly ; 
 -fHitjm, ». n. to fall in or down. 
 
 iufam'menne^men, v. a. ir. to collect 
 (one's self), take together, gather 
 
 iurammt'r adti. all together. [up. 
 
 3u'f<SftU«i »»■ «■ spectator. 
 
 ju'fc^awen, b. to. to look at or on. 
 
 iuTi^Iiefen, «. a. to shut, dose. 
 
 iu'fc^eii^ ^- )i- to look at or on, to 
 watch. [upon, jump. 
 
 ju'fpringen, v. a. & «.. ir. to rush 
 
 3u'iianb, m. s., pi. -e, & mod. con- 
 dition, stake^ situation. 
 
 juvor'tl^Uttr V. a. vr. to get before- 
 hand, get the better (of). 
 
 jttat, conj. namely, to be sure. 
 
 Bwi, m. s., pi. -e, design, purpose. 
 
 jtBti, adj. two. 
 
 Sroei'fcl, TO. s. doubt, question. 
 
 itvei'fetn, v. n. to doubt, question. 
 
 dtveig, TO. >., pi. -e, branch, bough. 
 
 Snxit'e, adj. second, next. 
 
 lWi^'m,prep. among, between. 
 
 }»)6tfte, adj. twelfth. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 
 
 Abandon, v. a. (desert) vetlaffm, (an 
 
 enterprise) aufgeten. 
 Abide, v. n. iteikn. 
 Ability, «. SJermiigen, »./ Stnlflgen, 
 
 f.pl. 
 Able, adj. gefi^tiit 5 to be — ^, im 
 
 ©tanbe fcin. 
 Abolish, D. a. auf^eien, eifc^affm. 
 About, prep, (round) um, (toward) 
 
 Sejeit, (of number) an j — adm. fafl, 
 
 ungefa^r ; to be — , im Segriff fcin. 
 Above, adt. baruter, oSen ; — men- 
 tioned, oiengenannt. 
 Abroad, adm. braugeni OKfer bent 
 
 ^aufe ; in ber grembe. 
 Absence, s. WBwcfen^eit, /. 
 Absent, <m§. aSwcfcnb ; to be — 
 
 minded, jcrflreut fein. 
 Absolute(ly), ad/. &,<idv. (unlimited) 
 
 unumf^canCt, bur^au^, (expressly) 
 
 ftu^brficfli^. 
 Abstain (from), jlc^ enf^alten, (with 
 
 gen.) 
 Abnndant(ly), adv. (overflowing) 
 
 flSerPITig, (sufficient) reti^Iic^. 
 Accept, v. a. anne^men, cmpfanflen. 
 Acceptable(ly), adj. & adv. annc|m^ 
 
 lic^, anne^mkt. 
 
 Accident, «. (chance) Sufaffi (misfor- 
 tune) UnfaII,m.; by — , son nngefd^t. 
 
 Acclamation, «. Srifalt, Suntf, m. 
 
 Accommodate, v. a. (at one's house) 
 aufne^mcn, (suit) paifenb mac^en, 
 (help) fluS^elfen. 
 
 Accommodation, ». SBequemlidjfeit, /. 
 
 Accommodating, adj. gefoillig. 
 
 Accompany, v. a. Begleitcn. 
 
 According to, prep, gemap ; — as, 
 je nac^bent. 
 
 Account, on — of, prep, wegen. 
 
 Accumulate, v. ttuf^ciufen, a.;— fig. 
 iune^men, n. 
 
 Accurate(ly), a^. & adii. gcnau. 
 
 Accuse, V. a. anflagen/ iefc^ulbigen. 
 
 Accustom, V. a. pc^ gcwii^ncn ; to be 
 -ed, V. n. gewo^nt fein, pflegen ; -ed, 
 pa/rtic. geiut^nt. 
 
 Ache, «. ©c^metj m.; — v. n. we^ t^un, 
 fc^merjen. 
 
 Acid, ac^. fauei. 
 
 Acknowledge, «. a. erfennen. 
 
 Acquaint, v. a. iefannt mo^en ; -ed, 
 to be — (with), Jctannt fein ; -ance, 
 s. SSefanntf^aft, (association) Vim- 
 gang, m. 
 
 Acquire, v. a. ertterten. 
 
 Acquisition, «. ®rn)eriung, (gain) Oe" 
 minn, m. 
 
546 
 
 TOCABCLABT.— BajGLISH AND GEBMAN. 
 
 Acquit, V. a. Uifprti^m, ftelfpte^' 
 
 c^en. 
 Across, prep, flier. 
 Act, V. n. tjanitln ; — «. ^aMvnp f. 
 Action, s. $ant)I«ng> (deed) Sl^at, /. 
 Actually, adu. wirRic^. 
 4.cute(ly), adj. & adv. f^arf. 
 Administer, v. a. (manage) vertval' 
 
 ten, (sacrament) ttu^t^eilen. 
 Admiral, s. 3Ibmirat, m. 
 Admiration, s. SetBunberuilg, /. 
 Admire, v. a. Jettunbetn. 
 Admixture, s. Seimif^ungi/. 
 Admonition, a. SEBarnung, /. 
 Adorn, v. a. auSfi^mflden. 
 Advance, v. a. ic|letgen> (troops) uor* 
 
 tuden. 
 Advantageous(ly), adj. sort^eil^ttft. 
 Advertence, «. Slufmettfamfclt, /. 
 Advice, «. fStai^, m. 
 Advisable, adj. vat^fam. 
 Affair, s. (business) ©a^e, /. ; Sing, 
 
 n. ; Slngeltgen^cit, /. 
 Affectation, «. 3tererei, / 
 Affection, s. SieSe,/. / -ate, adj. Seie* 
 
 VoQ, eifrigr geneigt. 
 Affliction, «. (suffering) Seibctt, n. ; 
 
 (tribulation) ®xa.m, tn. 
 Afflicted, ad), iettfltt. 
 Afford, i>. a. (give) gewo^reil, tettiHi* 
 
 gen, (procure) serfc^uffen. 
 Afraid, adj. furc^tfont, ieforgt ; to be 
 
 afraid, fic^ fntiSjttn. 
 After, prep. Mij ; — adv. nai^bem, 
 
 nac^:^er, l^inter^er ; -noon, s. 5ffa#' 
 
 mtttag, m. ; — that, nac^bem. 
 Again, adv. tuieber, (once more) 
 
 abexmali. [gegen, on (p. 466). 
 
 Against, prep, ttibet (see p. 349, N.l), 
 Age, a. 3lltcr, n. ; (time) Seitf (cen- 
 tury) Sajr^unbert. 
 
 Agitate, «. a. erregcn, ttufrcijen, et' 
 
 ]^t$en. 
 Ago, adm. voir «oimaI^. 
 Agree, v. a. & n. flbcrcinjlimmtn, (to 
 
 a proposal) beiflimmcn ; to — to, 
 
 ft(^ gefttUen laffcn ; -able, adj ongc' 
 
 rie^ht, gemut^Iid), artig. 
 Aim, ». (object) Steli «. ; (purpose) 
 
 8tt)cdE, m. ; 6nbe, n. ; (design) Sib' 
 
 m< f- 
 
 Air, 8. Suft, /. ; (breeze) SBinb, m. ; 
 
 (song) fiieb, n. 
 Alarmed, to be — , ®. n. «f(^rcilt or 
 
 aufgeregt fein. 
 AU, adj. & adx, ttll (-er, -e, -cS), 
 
 (every) ieber, (whole) ganj. 
 Alliance, «. SBiinbnigr n. 
 Allow, ». a. (permit) erioubcn, (grant) 
 
 gewa^ren. 
 Ally, «. SunbeSgcnoffe, aJcrbunbetc, m. ; 
 
 — 9. a. serilnben, scretnigen. 
 Almighty, adj. allma^tig. 
 Almost, adj. fafl, beina^c. 
 Alms, s. Stlmofen, pi. ®abe,/. 
 Alone, adj. & aM. aUetUr (unique) 
 
 einjig. 
 Along, ads. & prep. lang^ ; -«ide. 
 
 Icings. 
 Already, ado. icrcitS, fc^on. 
 Also, eonj. auc^. 
 
 Alter, ■». a. (slightly) finbern, (con- 
 siderably) seranbcrn ; — v. n. ftc^ 
 
 inbetn. 
 Although, eonj. ebglci(i^. 
 Always, adv. immct; jletS . 
 Amaze, v. a. in Erfiaunen serfe^en. 
 Amazement, s. Srflaunenf n. 
 Ambassador, s. ®efanbtc, m. 
 Ambition, s. E^rgetj, m. 
 Amiable, amiably, adj. & adv. Itc 
 
 fenswurbig. 
 
VOCABUIiABT. — ENGLISH ASD GEKMAN. 
 
 D47 
 
 Among, amongst, prep, untcr, 
 
 sn)ifd)cn. 
 Amount, 8. Setrflfl, n.; — v. n. ietra-= 
 
 Ancient, adj. alt. 
 
 And, cOTi?'. unb. 
 
 Angel, «. Engct, m. 
 
 Animal, «. X'&icr, n. 
 
 Another, ad^. anber (-sr, -f, -e«). 
 
 Answer, s. Sintwort, /. ; — ». a. & re. 
 
 ttntworten, (question, letter, etc.) 
 
 ieantworten. 
 Antiquity, s. Sntert^um, n. 
 Any, adj. iebcr, -e, -ii •,pron. Semanb ; 
 
 — one, Semanb ; -thing, etWaS, 
 
 trgenb tttoai ; — longer, loinger. 
 Anxious, adj. leforgt. 
 Apartment, s. Simmer, ®tmiid), n. 
 Apologize, ■». a. (for another) »er» 
 
 t^eibigen, (for one's self), r«/f. urn 
 
 ajergeiung iitten, fic^ entf^ulbigcn. 
 Appear, ». n. erfc^eineiij (seem) Mi' 
 
 fejen, sorfommen. 
 Appearance, s. ffirfc^einungi /. 
 Apple, s. 9l))fel/ m.; -tree, s. St?fel' 
 
 Ittum, TO. 
 Apply, v. a. (to a purpose) onwen* 
 
 ben ; — v. n. (for a gift cr favor) 
 
 mS)^ai)ttt or Sewerten (urn). 
 Appoint, V. a. (nominate) emcnnen, 
 
 (fix a time, etc) iejiimwcn, fefl» 
 
 fejen. 
 Apprehend, v. a. (fear) fiird)ten, 
 
 (grasp with the mind) greifen, 
 
 iegteifen. 
 Apprentice, s. Ce'^rting, m. 
 Approach, s. Sutritt, m. ; — v. a. & 
 
 refl. (come near) fi^ na'^en, (draw 
 
 nearer) tia^etn. 
 Apt(ly), (Mlj. &adv. gef^iilt. 
 Archer, a. SSogenfii^fift, ©c^flfe, m. 
 
 Ardor, «. (eagerness) SBcgierbe, /. ; 
 
 (zeal) gifei, m. ; (heat) Olut^, /. 
 Arise, v. n. ir. aufjie^en. 
 Arm, «. 3lvm, m. ;-s, (weapons) ffiaf* 
 
 fen,/, pi; (escutcheon) SBai)|»e>i/ »■ 
 Army, «. Sltmee, /. ; §eer, n. 
 Around, prep. &. adv. um, ^erum. 
 Arraign, v. a. anHttgen. 
 Arrange, v. a. oibnen. 
 Arouse, v. a. mSm, aufwetfcrt. 
 Arrest, a. SJer^aft, m. ; — ». a. set' 
 
 ^aftcn. 
 Arrival, a. 3lnfunft, /. 
 Arrive, «. n. onfommen. 
 Arrow, /. ^Ifeil, m,. 
 Art, a. .Suttll, /. ; (cunning) Sif}, /. 
 Artery, a. 9)«laaber, ©(^logaber, /. 
 Artful, adj. (cunning) fitnfilii^, Itfltg. 
 As, eonj. al*, ttie, btt ; — soon as, 
 
 fotalb (al«) ! as far as, fo tteit at8, 
 
 as much again as, noi^ einmal fo 
 
 viel aid ; as far as, bid nai^. 
 Ascend, ®. n. (mount) iefieigen, 
 
 (climb) etfleigen, (rise) auflleigen. 
 Ashes, s. afc^e, /. 
 
 Ask, fl. a. & «.. (inquire) fragcn, (re- 
 quest) Sittcn ; (to — i^ardon) um 
 
 fflerjci^ung iitten. 
 Asleep, adj. f^Iafcnb ; to fall — , v. 
 
 ir. einfc^lafcn. 
 Aspect, «. Slnfic^t,/.; ffiliS, m. 
 Aspire, v. n. (strive) flreicn, (after, 
 
 long for) tjerlangen. 
 Ass, «. Sfel, m. 
 Assault, a. Slngriff, m.; — v. a. (attack) 
 
 angteifen, (fall upon) anfaUen. 
 Assemble, «. a. uerfammeln ; — v. n. 
 
 fic^ uerfammcln. 
 Assert, o. a. iel^aupten. 
 Assist, V. a. (aid) ietfie^en, (help) ^el' 
 
 fen,tmterfii($en; -ance,«.a3ei{)anbim. 
 
548 
 
 Y0CABX7LABY.— mraUBH AITD GBBMAN. 
 
 Assocaate, «. T^tttnt^mn, m. ; part. 
 
 veciunben; — v. a. umsel^en, sugefeQett) 
 
 (accompany) Jegleiten. 
 Association, 8. GJefedf^aft, /. 
 Assume, v. a. (usurp) jt4 anniapen/ 
 
 (suppose) anne^men. 
 Assure, D. a. Derjl^ttn. 
 Astonish, v. a. in Er^auncn feften ; — 
 
 «. ra. & refl. {fii)) wunbetn ; -ment, 
 
 '«. Siflaunen, n. 
 Astray, adu. im, »om teAten SBege 
 
 ai ; to go — , V. n. fic^ seritten. 
 Asunder, adt. (divided) getTemU, 
 
 (apart) au^einanber. 
 At, prep, ju, an, tei, auf; —first, atZ®. 
 
 juerfl ; — last, adv. enbli($, Wieg" 
 
 It^, jule^t ; — present, ack. \t%U 
 
 augenJlidlid^ ; — once, ad/e. fo= 
 
 gWc^, fcfott. 
 Atone, V. n. (suffer punishment for) 
 
 iitgetti (make reconciliation) Sifag 
 
 geten. 
 Attach, D. a. ati^eftm, an^^angot; — to 
 
 one's self, an fic^ jie^eit ; to — 
 
 credit, Olaukn 6eiine|fen. 
 Attack, s. Stngriff, m. ;—v. a. angrei* 
 
 fen. 
 Attain, v. a. errci^ett. 
 Attempt, «. (trial) SerfH(|/ m. ; (at- 
 tack) Stngriff, m. ; — j). a. Kerfuc^en. 
 Attend, v-. a. (to business) (eforgen^ 
 
 (to sick person) pflegen, (a meet- 
 ing) ieifto^nem jugegen fein. 
 Attention, a. STufmettfamfeit, /. 
 Attentive(ly), o/Sj. & adv. aufmei^ 
 
 fam. 
 Attire, «. (apparel) Stnjug, »i. ; 
 
 (adornment) S(i^ntud, to. ; — o. a. 
 
 (clothe) anfleiben, (adorn) fc^miitfen. 
 Attract, «. fl!. anjie^en, reijenj -ive(ly), 
 
 a&j. & adm. anjie^enb, reijenb. 
 
 Auction, «. Stuftion, /. ; to sell at — , 
 
 serflcigern. 
 Audacious(ly), a6Q. & adt. (brave) 
 
 fu^n, (daring) brciji, serwegcn ; 
 
 -ness, audacity, «. y (insolence) 
 
 Srec^lieit, (valor) M^nJeU, (daring) 
 
 ajerttegenjeit, /. 
 Augment, ®. a. setme^ttn ;— ». n. |t4 
 
 setme^ren, june^men. 
 Aunt, «. Sante,/. 
 Aurora, «. SWotgenrBtl^e, Slurcra/ /. 
 Author, s. (of a book) Si^rift|ieIIw, 
 
 m. (originator) Htl^eier, m. ; -ize, 
 
 v. a. bevoQmad^ttgcn. 
 Autumn, «. |)erbf}, m. 
 Avail, V. a. & n. ^clfen, nu^cn. 
 Avarice, avariciousness, «. ®eij, m,. ,• 
 
 (covetousness) ^aiMt/ /. 
 Avaricious(ly), adj. & adv. gctjig, 
 
 gtettg. 
 Avenge, v. a. rfi(^e« ; — v. refl. (i^ 
 
 tac^en. 
 Avoid, V. a. (shun) nieibcn, setmeiben; 
 
 (yield) ti)ei(i^en. 
 Avow, «. as. (declare) trtlaten, (admit) 
 
 gefie^en. 
 Awake, adj. wa^ ; — v a. mitn, ttuf* 
 
 Becfen ; — v. n. txmaHjtn. 
 Away, adv. fort, bason. 
 AwkwaTd(ly) adj. & adv. ungef^iit) 
 
 (heavy) flunil). 
 Axe, «. mt, f. ©cil, n. 
 Axis, axle, «. Kc^fe, /. 
 
 B. 
 
 Back, ». SRiidEcn, «i. ; behind one's — , 
 adv. ifinttx bem fUMtn ; -ward(ly). 
 ac^. & ot^. (slow) langfanif (bash, 
 ful) iliibe, (in growth) jutuff . 
 
VOCABULAKT. — ENGLISH AND GEEMAS. 
 
 549 
 
 Bacon, s. ©jjccf, m. 
 
 Bad(ly), ad}. & adv. f^lec^t, (evil) 
 Wfe. 
 
 Badger, s. iDa^St m. 
 
 Bag, s. ®alf, Seutel, m. 
 
 Baggage, s. Oepcia, ra.; Saggage, /. 
 
 Bake, v. a. & n. iaSm. 
 
 Baker, s. Sdder, m. 
 
 Balance, s. (scale) SBage, /. ; (equi- 
 librium) ©Ictd^gtwi^t, n. 
 
 Bald(ly), adj. & adv. fa'^l. 
 
 Ball, s. (round object) 33al(, m. ; (bul- 
 let) tugel, /. 
 
 Band, «. Sanb, ».; (of troops) 
 ©c^aat, /. 
 
 Banish, ®. a. scrtunnen. 
 
 Bank, «. (of a river, etc.) Ufer» n. ; 
 (money oflBce) Sant, /. 
 
 Banker, ». Sanquier, m. 
 
 Banner, ». ga'^ne, /. 
 
 Banquet, «. ®c^mau8, m. / OdjJma'^l, 
 
 71. 
 
 Baptize, ®. a. taufen. 
 Barbarous(ly), «!«?>. & adt. (cruel) 
 
 graufam, (savage) ro^. 
 Bare(ly), adj. & aao. IiIog» (naked) 
 
 naffcni) ; — b. a. (expose) enrtlopcn. 
 Bargain, «. §anbtl, m.; — s. a. ^anbeln. 
 Bark, «. Saumrinbe, /. ;— ». m. iellen. 
 Barrel, «. Sap, ra. ; lonne, /. 
 Basket, «. fiorS, m. 
 Batb, ». Sab, w. 
 Bathe, «. a. iabctt. 
 Battle, «. ©c^laa^t, /.; Samt)f, ot.; 
 
 — at sea, «. ©eefampf, to. ; ®ce» 
 
 f^ki^t, /.;—». n,. Kmlifen, cin SEtef* 
 
 fen liefcrn. 
 Be, v. n. i/r. fttn, (become) tterben. 
 Beam, s. ©tro^T, m. ;—^. n. fha^lcn. 
 Bean, ». So^ne, /. 
 Bear, «. Sot, m. ;— «. a. & >i. (suffar) 
 
 ertrogen, (keep patience under) 
 
 bulben, (give birth to) gebciien. 
 Beard, a. SBatt, m. 
 Beast, «. (coll. cattle) Slater, SBie^, «. 
 Beat, B. a. & m. ir. f(i^Iagen. 
 Beautiful(ly), at?;. & a(f«. fc^Bn, |ert« 
 
 lii^. 
 Beautify, ®. a. serf^Bnern. 
 Beauty, s. ©^iin^cit, /. 
 Because, eonj. roeil, ba, (inasmuch) 
 
 tnbem, (for) bmn. 
 Become, v. a. i/r. iDetben, (in dress 
 
 or conduct) ft(^ fditilen, sicmcri ; — 
 
 fond of one, etnen Xxzb gewinncn. 
 Bed, s. SDett) n. ; -cham.ber, -room, 
 
 ©^lafjtmmer. 
 Bee, «. Stcne, /. 
 Beech(-tree), «. Suc^t, / 
 Beef, g. SRinbjIcifcl, n. 
 Beer, s. Siet, ra. 
 Before, ^r«p. Dot ; conj. ieuor, cfic ; 
 
 -hand, adj. & a(2«. sorau^, tereilS. 
 Beg, D. a. & n. (favor) Sittcn, (alms) 
 
 Setteln ; — v. n. Settein gel^en. 
 Beggar, s. Settler, m. 
 Begin, r). a. & n. i/r. anfangen; -ning, 
 
 ». Stnfang, to. in the — , anfanga. 
 Behalf, in his — , feinettBcgen. 
 Behave, «. n. i/r. ftc^ Jetragttt. 
 Behavior, «. Setrogen, Sene^mcn, n. 
 Behind, prep. & adj. l^inter, (left 
 
 back) jHritd. 
 Behold, ». a. i/r. (espy) crDIidcn, (look 
 
 upon) anfe^en, (regard) tetrac^ten. 
 Belfry, s. ©lodcnt^urm, m. ; ®Ioiicn«' 
 
 ^au8, n. 
 Belief, «. ®Iau'6e(n), to. 
 Believe, t. a. & n. gIttuJen, (trust) 
 
 trauen. 
 Bell, «. ®Iottc, /.; to ring the — , bie 
 ®Io<ie Iciuten. 
 
550 
 
 VOCABULABT.— ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 
 
 Belong, V. n. ^i^ormi juge^iirMt. 
 
 Beloved, adj. gelieit. 
 
 Below, prep, untet ; — adv. unten. 
 
 Bemoan, «. a. (complain of) ietlaje«» 
 (mourn over) ietrauerit. 
 
 Bench, s. Sant, /. 
 
 Bend, v. a. & n. iicgen, (stoop) |!c^ 
 ieusen, ft(^ Hegcit. 
 
 Beneath, jpr«p. unter ; — adv. unten. 
 
 Benefactor, s. SaJo^If^oiter, m. 
 
 Beneficient, adj. Wo^Itl^ucnb. 
 
 Benefit, ». (advantage) SJottl^eil, m. ; 
 (kind act) SBo^lt^at, /. 
 
 Benevolence, «. SBo^IwoHen, n.; 
 ffio^Itptigfelt, /. 
 
 Benevolent, adj. wojiwoffenbt (chari- 
 table) roo^lt^ottig, (kind) giitis, (lib- 
 eral) freigeiig. 
 
 Benumb, v. a. erflttrren, ietauBen. 
 
 Bereave, ■». a. BerauScn. 
 
 Beside(s) prep, neien, an^n^M, o^ne ; 
 — adv. fonft j to be — one's self, 
 
 ttuger M f«in« 
 
 Best, a^. btr, tie, ini Befle; very — , 
 ttHctiejl i for the — , auf'« Bejlt. 
 
 Bestow, V. a. (present) f^enfen, (ap- 
 ply) dnwenljett. 
 
 Bet, s. 2BeMe, /. ; — ». a. wetten. 
 
 Betray, v. a. Dctrat^en. 
 
 Betrayer, «. SBvctat^tx, m. 
 
 Better, adj. & adv. ielfcr. 
 
 Between, betwixt, prep, jwif^en. 
 
 Beware, v. n. & rejl. \ltSj pten, fti^ 
 Dotfe^cn, fid) in a^t ne^men. 
 
 Bewilder, «. a. serwirven. 
 
 Beyond, prep. auger'^ttlB, (above) iiier. 
 
 Bid, V. a. ir. (command) icfe^len, 
 (offer) Sieten, (order) ^eigen ; to — 
 farewell, Cckroo^l fagcn. 
 
 Big, a^. & adv. bid, grog. 
 
 Bind, V. ir. Jinbcn. 
 
 Bird, «. SJogel, m. ; — of passage, 
 
 s. 3ug»ogeI, m. ; -cage, ». flaftg, 
 
 SogeHauer, m. 
 Birth, «.®e6Mrt,/. 
 Bite, V. a. ir. Beigen. 
 Bitter(Iy), adj.&adv. Bitter, Bittrrli^. 
 Black, adj. f(i^»ari ; -smith, a. ©ret" 
 
 fi^mib, m. 
 Blame, s. Ittbel, to. y — ». a. tabein ; 
 
 -ful (blameworthy), adj. tabcl^aft. 
 Bleed, v. n. ir. blutcn ; — v. a. jur 
 
 Slber lafTen. 
 Bless, V. a. fegnen. 
 Blind, adj. blinb. 
 Blood, s. Slut, n.;-j,ac0.; -ily, 
 
 ado. blutig. 
 Bloom, blossom, «. Sliif^e,/. ; — s.m. 
 
 ilit^en. 
 Blow, V. n. ir. (wind) blafen, we^en ; . 
 
 — open or up, f))rengen. 
 Blue, ad}. & adii. Hou ; -ish, MauUc^. 
 Blunder, s. gt^ler, m. 
 Blunt, adj. |lumt)f, l)lum|). 
 Blush, V. n. errot^en. 
 Boast, V. n. |lc^ grop l^un, pral^len. 
 Boat, «. SSoot, n. 
 Body, «. 8eib, Sor))cr, m. 
 BoU, B. a. & n. fD^cn, fieben. 
 Boistferousfly), adj. & ods. ungcflitm. 
 Bold(ly), adj. & ada. (brave) fii^n, 
 
 (insolent) frec^ ; -ness, s. SWjvS^H, 
 
 %niiWi /• 
 Bond, s. Sanb, m. ; -age, ^ne^t=" 
 
 f^aft, /. 
 Bone, s. ^noc^cn, m. ; Sei«, n. ; (of 
 
 fish)®rfite,/. 
 Bonfire, ». 5Jreubenfeucr, n. 
 Bonnet, «. Damen^ut, to. ; $au6e, /. 
 Book, «. Suc^, »i. ; -binder, S3«c|l)in» 
 
 bcr ; -seller, Sudj^anbler ; -store. 
 
 IBu^Iaben. 
 
VOCABDliABT. — BNOLIBH AND aBKMAN. 
 
 551 
 
 Boorish, a^. iauerifc^, groB. 
 
 Boot, «. Stiefcl, m. . 
 
 Border, s. Orenje,/. / — ». a. grcnjen. 
 
 Bom, ipwrt. geSoren. 
 
 Borrow, «. a. Borgcn. 
 
 Bosom, ». SBufcHi m. ; (breast) Sntji, 
 
 /. y (heart) |)etj/ n. 
 Both, ffl(f/. Jcibe ; — and, fowo^t . . . 
 
 Bottle, «. Slafc^e,/. 
 
 Bottom, s. (Stunbf m. (of a cask) 
 
 Soben, m. 
 Bough, «. 3ttcig( St|l, «i. 
 Bought, 'pa/rt. gefauft. 
 Bound(ary), «. ®renje,/. 
 Bounty,*. Oiite,/. 
 Bow, «. Sogen, in. 
 
 Box, s. SBiic^fe, /.; (chest) Sttjlen. w. 
 Boy, s. ^noJe, to./ (famil.) SungCj m. 
 Bracelet, «. StrittBttiib, ft. 
 Brag, V. n. pto^Ien. 
 Braid, «. a. flec^ten, (weave) weBen. 
 Brain, i. (Se^irn, ft.; (sense) SJcr* 
 
 flanb, m. 
 Branch, ». (main) 3l|}, m. ; (twig) 
 
 aweigi »ft. 
 Brass, ». Erj, Suijfer, n. 
 Brave(ly), «(?> (courageous) Brtt», 
 
 (bold) tayfer ; -ery, «. Jttpfetteit, /. 
 Bread, «. Srob, m. 
 Break, i>. a. & ?i. ir. Sweden ; to — 
 
 (to pieces), jetSre^cn ; to — into, 
 
 einbre^en ; to — out, auabre^en. 
 Breakfast, ». grii^fiutf, n. ;—v. n. 
 
 fru^liaScn. 
 Breast, «. SBrufl,/; (heart) $«j, m. 
 Breathe, v. a. kn. dtl^metl. 
 Breeze, «. Cufti /. 
 Bribe, v. a. bejlcc^eit. 
 Brick, «..BwgeIilttn, 7». 
 Bride, s. Staut, / 
 
 Bridge, s. Stud e, /. 
 
 Brief(ly) adj. & asiiw. furs, turjli^. 
 
 Bright, a(?j. ^ell, (clear) flar. 
 
 Brighten, b. ft. fi^ aufflaren. 
 
 Brilliaut, a6j. gloinienb. 
 
 Brim (brink), s. SRanb, m. 
 
 Bring, u a. ir. bringen ; to — back, 
 jUtiicEbringen ; to — forth, geboirm ; 
 to — up, ttufitc^eni or erjie^en. 
 
 Broad, adj. btett, (wide) tecit. 
 
 Broil, V. a. braten, roflen. 
 
 Broken, ^ari. &»(?;. gc orjetbroc^en. 
 
 Brook, s. aSacb, m. 
 
 Broom, ». Scfctt, 7ft. 
 
 Brother, Srubet, m. s. ; -in-law, 
 <S*»aget; Brothers (in trade) ®c» 
 brubsr ; brother(s) and 8i8ter(s), 
 (the children of one family), Oe* 
 f^ft)i|ler. 
 
 Brown, adj. braun. 
 
 Brush, s. Siitfle,/; — v. a. biirjlen. - 
 
 Brutal, adj. (beastly) uie^ifcb, (raw) 
 
 rob/ "''I'*' 
 Brute, «. SJie^, n. ; fig. Unmenfc^. 
 Build, n. a. & n. ir. bauen, (found) 
 
 griirtbcn; to — upon, ft^ serlafTen 
 
 ttuf, bauen auf. 
 Building, s. Oeboube, n. 
 Bulk, s. 3RttJTe, /./ Slumiien, m. 
 Bullet, 8. Sugel, .ffittnonentugel, /. 
 Bumper, g. tjoHeS ®ltt8. 
 Bunch, «. (of keys, etc.) Sunb, Sun* 
 
 bcl, n. 
 Bimdle, «. Sunbel, ft. 
 Burden, s. Sa(l, Sfirbe, /. ; — b. as. 
 
 aufbfirben ; -some, adj. laflig ; «. 
 
 Sdfiigfeit, /. 
 Burgomaster, s. Siirgcrmctfler, m. 
 Burial, «. Scgrdbnig, ft. 
 Bum, «. ffl.&m.M'. brenneit) (consums 
 
 by fire) scrbrenntn. 
 
553 
 
 VOCABULARY. — ENGLISH AND GBRMAH. 
 
 Burning, adj. slu'^enS. 
 
 Burst, V. n. ir. ierjlen ; «. a. fprengcn ; 
 
 to — open, jerfprcngcn. 
 Bury, V. a. iegraicn. 
 Bush, s. (shrab) fBu^d), m.; (thicket) 
 
 ®et)uf($, n. 
 Bushel, s. ©c^effel, m. 
 Business, «. ®ef^iftr n. 
 Bustle, s. ®er(ittW, n. ; |)anbel, pi. 
 Busy, adj. Bef^fiftigt, 
 But, conj. dbtXt foiibcrn"(«e6 p. 333,3), 
 
 (liowever) ttHein, boc^. 
 Butcher, s. gteifc^er, aSeSger, m. ;— 
 
 V. a. f^lac^ten. 
 Butter, s. ©utter, /. 
 Button, s. Snoijf, m. 
 Buy, V. a. laufen. 
 By, prep, (see p. 352) burc^, son, ju, 
 
 iti, an ; — aohi. na^e, noi^er ; — no 
 
 means, (eine^uieg^, auf feinen SaU ; 
 
 — which, ttomit. 
 
 C. 
 
 Cabbage, «. So|t, m. (head) So^I' 
 
 fopf, m. 
 Cabin, s. |)utte, /. 
 Cage, «. SJogelJauer, flcifig, «». 
 Cake, s. j{u$en, m. 
 Calamity, «. UnglM, Sleitb, n. 
 Calculate, «. a. itxti)ntn, jtc^ ettt" 
 
 ri^tctt. 
 Calf, «. Sal6, «. 
 Call, I', a. & 7i. rufen, (by name), 
 
 l^cipcn, (name) nennen, (hard 
 
 names) ft^impfen, (on or visit) if 
 
 fu^en; to — to mind, ftc^ erinncm. 
 Calling, «. (vocation) S3etuf, m.; 
 
 (trade) ®e»cr6e, n. 
 Calm(ly), adj. & otfc). (quiet) tu'^ij, 
 
 (gentle) fanft. 
 
 Calumniate, v. a. verleumben. 
 Calumny, ». SJetlaumbung, / 
 Camel, s. ^ameel, n. 
 Can, ». fianne, /.; d. n. ir. fonnen. 
 Canal, s. Xaml, m. 
 Canary-bird, s. Sanarleiwogcl, m. 
 Candid(ly), a<^. & adv. aufrtc^tig. 
 Candidate, «. Sanbtbat, m. 
 Candle, s. Si^t, n.; fierje, /. 
 Candor, «. Offender jigfeit, Sieberteit,/. 
 Cane, s. (reed)9lo^r,»./ (stick) ©to(f, 
 
 m. 
 Cannon, s. Sanone, /. 
 CaiJ, s. SKiiJe, /. 
 Capability, ». goi^igfeit,/. 
 Capable, ffl^'. fa^tg, (able) tfiii^tig. 
 Capacity, s. (room) Umfang, m. ; (of 
 
 mind) ga^igftit, /. 
 Cape, «. (collar) ^ragen, m. 
 Capital, «. Capital, n. ; (city) ^an))!' 
 
 flabt,/. 
 Caprice, «. (whim) ®rille, /. ; 
 
 (humor) Saune, /. 
 Captain, s. .Ra|)ttan, |>au|)tmann. 
 Captive, adj. geftttigen ; — ». ®cfangent, 
 
 m. &/. 
 Capture, «. a. (catch) fatigen, (take 
 
 prisoner) gefangen nt^men, (prize or 
 
 valuables) etboitett. 
 Card, ». ^atte, /. 
 Cardinal, «. AarbitutI, m,. 
 Care, ». ©orgt, /. ; (in sickness) 
 
 9)frege ; to take — , fi(i^ in 9li^t 
 
 nel^men ; to have — , ft^ sorfe^tn ; 
 
 -ful(ly), adj. kade. beforgt, sorjtil^* 
 
 tig, (exact) genttu ; to be — , ji(^ t« 
 
 Sld)t nejmen ; -]eBs(Iy) adj & a^Jii. 
 
 unsotftd^tig, (neglectful) nac^Wffig. 
 Caress, b. a. Iteitofen, (fawn upon) 
 
 f^meic^eln. 
 Carpenter, «. 3intmeimann, m. 
 
VOCABUIiABY. — BNaUSH AND GERMAN. 
 
 553 
 
 Carpet, s. Xe|9|)t4i m. 
 
 Carriage, s. Sutfc^c, /. ; fflageui m. 
 
 Carry, v. a. & n. tragen, (bring) 
 
 tringen ; — away, forttragen ; — 
 
 out, auSfu^tcn. 
 Carve, v. a. Jauen, f(%netben. 
 Case, s. %aU, m. ; in — that, im 
 
 gaOe, fitlliS, gefe^t. 
 Cast, 7>. a. ir. werfen. 
 Castle, s. S^Iopf n. 
 Cat, s. fla^e, /. 
 Cataract, s. SBafferfattf m. 
 Catch, e. a. ir. fangetlf (seize) trgrei'' 
 
 fen ; to — cold, fid^ ettalten. 
 Catholic, adj. fa4oKf(i^ ; — s. .Rat^o* 
 
 W. 
 Cause, a. (reason) Urfad^e,/./ (occaflion) 
 
 aJerojilalfttng, /. ; — v. a. seturfac^eHf 
 
 sctanlaptt. 
 Cautious(ly), adj. & ach). vorftd^ttg. 
 Cavalry, n. Steitetet, /. 
 Cave, 8. $op, /. 
 Ceaee, v. n. auf^iiren, (ran out) ai" 
 
 laufen. 
 Celebrate, ». a. fetertt, iege'^en. 
 Celebrated, adj. ittu^mt. 
 CeUax, «. teller, m. 
 Cemetery, a. Six^ifiif, ®ottc8aaer, m. 
 Censure, a. label ; — v. a. tabeltt. 
 Centre, s. SWittelpunIt, m. 
 Century, a. |>uitbctt, Sa^r^utibert, n. 
 Certain(ly), adj. & adt). gewig, fi^et'» 
 
 m). 
 
 Certify, v. a. iejeugen. 
 
 Chain, a. Stttt, f. 
 
 Chair, a. <Stu% m.; (seat) ©IJ, m. 
 
 Chamber, a. Simmer, ®emac^, n. 
 
 Chance, a. Sufall ; by — , juf^Hig. 
 
 Change, v. a. onbern, scranbern; (ex- 
 change) tauffiett/ tte^feln ; — v. n. 
 jti^ cinbetn. 
 24 
 
 Chant, 8. ©efang. m. ; — ». n. (tngen. 
 Character, a. (person) S^atafter/ ot../ 
 
 (letter) Suc^flttie, w. 
 Charge, s. Safl,/.; (office) Stmt, ». 
 Chariot, a. SBagetti to. y — of victory, 
 
 SitiumiJl^njflgcn. 
 Charity, a. (Sutmitt^igfett, 3»irbe, /. / 
 
 (alms) ®aie,/. ; (love) fiieie, /. 
 Charm, v. a. (attract) bejttuiern, tei* 
 
 sen. 
 Chase, v. a. jagen. 
 
 Cheap(ly) adj. & adv. Bitttgi wo^lfeil. 
 Cheat, «. aSetruger, Sc^winbto, m.;— 
 
 V. a. icttitgcn. 
 Check, a. |)mbetnig, n. ; (at chess) 
 
 S^a^ ; — ». a. etn^alten. 
 Cheer, s. gro^Hnn, m./ to be in good 
 
 — , gutcn ©tnne« feinj -ful^ly), a^. 
 
 & adv. ^eiter, lujltg, (gladly) gerit. 
 Cheese, *. Safe, m. 
 Cherish, «. a. (aid) pflegen, (fondle) 
 
 Iie6tofen. 
 Cherry, a. fiitfi^e, /. 
 Chess, a. ©c^ac^fticl, n. 
 Chest, «. Sruft, /./ (box) ftijle, /.; 
 
 — of drawers, ^omobe, /. 
 Chicken, a. ^itW™' «•• 
 Chide, «. as. fd^elten. 
 Chief, ». $aupt, n. ; -ly, <wfj. ^auiJt- 
 
 Child, s. Stnb, re. / -hood, fiinb^eit. 
 
 /. ; -ish, adj. tinbifc^. 
 Chimney, a. flamin, m. 
 Chocolate, a. E^ocolabe, /. 
 Choice, a. SBJa^I, /. 
 Choir, a. E^or, m. & n. [aee p. 83). 
 Choose, V. a. & n. V)a1)ltn, (select) 
 
 (Miroafjlm. 
 Chorus, s. E^cr, m. 
 Christen, v. a. toufen. 
 Christian, adj. (^tt|lli(^. 
 
654 
 
 VOCABULABT. — ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 
 
 ChriBtmas, s. SfBei^nac^terir pi. 
 Church, «. Sirc^e, /. ; -steeple, Sir^'= 
 
 t^urm, m.; -yard, Sir(|^of, m. 
 Cipher, s. 3«^l,/.; (zero) SKuK, /. 
 Circle, «. 3itfel, m. ; (geog.) Srei«, 
 
 m. ; (ring) SRing, «i. 
 Circulate, «. a. in Umlauf Srittjett. 
 Circumference, «. Umtrei8, m. 
 Circuinspeet(ly), ad^. & a(to. sorjlc^* 
 
 tts, te^utfanti iufe^enb. 
 Circumstance, «. Umjianb/ n. 
 Citadel, s. gejiung, /. 
 Cite, ®. fls. (a person) sorlaben, (a 
 
 proof) anfu^ten. 
 Citizen, s. Sttrget, to. 
 City, «. ©tabt, /. 
 
 Civilize, «. a. Silben, gejtttct maiden. 
 Claim, g. ^ti^t, n.; — ®. a. forbern. 
 Clamor, «. ®cfc^rei, n.; — v. n. f(i^reim. 
 Claret, s. ftansoftfcljer rotter SSSciit. 
 Class, g. Stolfe, /. 
 
 Claw, g. iiraHe, Saje, /.; — r>. a. Irofecn. 
 Clean, adj. rein ; — ». a. tetntjen. 
 Clear(ly), a^?. & '^*''- M^i i^7> "^^o 
 
 apparent) {Iar> (plain) beutlic^. 
 Cleave, «. m. i/r. (adhere) antleben, 
 
 (split) fijttlten. 
 Clergy, g. ©eipc^feit, /. 
 Clergyman, s. ®et|lUc[)ei to. 
 Clever, adj. gefc^itft ; (kindly) artig. 
 Clifr, ». fitiwe, /. ; ©clfen, to. 
 Clime or climate, «. fiUma, n. 
 Climb, 1/. ?i. flctlcrn ; — x>. a. (moun- 
 tain) crlleigen. 
 Cling, ®. n. ir. anpngeti. 
 Cloak, g. Wlmtti, to. 
 Clock, a. SSSanbu Jr» /.; at . . o'clock, 
 
 urn . . H^r. 
 Cloister, ». Jflojlct, n. 
 Close, V. a. (shut) juma^en, (lock) 
 
 iufi^litgtn ; (-ly), adj. & adv. (in 
 
 dealing) gcnau, (locked or tight) 
 
 »eifi^Io(fE«, (dense) btd)t. 
 Cloth, «. %uiSj, Seug, n. ; ©toff, to. 
 Clothing, «. ^Itibung, /. 
 Clothes, g. ^leibung, /. ; flleibet/ n. 
 
 pi. 
 aoud, s. aBoIfc, /. 
 Clumsy, a^. plumi). 
 Coach, g. flutf^e, /. 
 Coal, g. So^t, f. 
 Coarse(ly), adf. & ad®, (thick) gtoS, 
 
 (not refined) rau^. 
 Coast, 8. M\lt, f. 
 Coat, «. SRcd, TO. / over-, tteierrodj 
 
 TO. 
 
 Coax, V. a. ^mtidjtln, gHte SBotte 
 
 gebcti. 
 Cock, g. $a^n, to. 
 Coffee, «. Saffee, to. ; -house, Saffee* 
 
 ^au8>, ra. 
 Coffin, s. ©arg, to. 
 Cold(ly), acl}. & ad«. fait, (frigid) 
 
 fro|lig ; — «. .ffttlte,/. / to catch — , 
 
 fti$ ertnlten. 
 Collar, g. ^alibavb, n. ; (of clothes) 
 
 Sragcn, to. 
 Collect, V. a. fammcln, (congregate) 
 
 scrfammcln ; to — one's self, |t^ 
 
 fallen ; -ion, a. ©ammlung, /. 
 Color, g. Sttibe, (flag) glagge, ga^nc, 
 
 /. / — B. a. (dye) farten ; — v. n. 
 
 (paint) Itc^ farfien ; (blush) cttot^cn. 
 Column, g. ©aule, /. 
 Comb, g. flttmm, m. ; — v. a. tammen. 
 Combat, s. (struggle) ^am|)f, to. / 
 
 (fight) Oefcc^t, n. ; — o. n. tcimtjfen. 
 Combine, ». a. »«binben j — ». n. Jic^ 
 Come, t. n. tommcn. [serbinbtn. 
 
 Comfort, s. SErojl, to. / ®. a. trpj^en ; 
 
 -able(ly), adj. trojllicS, (in room) 
 
 bequem. 
 
VOCABrrLAKT. — ^ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 
 
 556 
 
 Command, id. a. & n. geitEtem Bcfe^« 
 len ; — s. Sefc^l, m. ; -er, Sefel^W^ 
 ^atiew (Seneral, m. 
 
 Commence, ®. as. & 71. anfangen. 
 
 Commerce, «. 4>itnbel, m. 
 
 Commission, «. Sluftrdgf m. 
 
 Commit, ®. a. (entrust) uSetgcJen, 
 (do) iege^en-; — suicide, |t^ ba« 
 Sektt ne^m««. 
 
 Common(ly), oi^*. & ado. gemein, 
 (usual) gew8:^«lic^. 
 
 Communicate, <b. a. mttt^rilen. 
 
 Companion, «. Oefci^ite, m. ; (play- 
 mate) ®ef))iele, m. 
 
 Company, ». (society) ©eftUf^aft,/./ 
 (intercourse) Umgang> m. 
 
 Compare, v. a. »etglei(i^eil. 
 
 Compel, 0. a. jwingen. 
 
 Competent, adg. fd^ig. 
 
 Complain, «. ». f!(^ itKagett. 
 
 Complete(ly), <idj. & ach>. voQflMigr 
 (wholly) ganj. 
 
 Complexion, «. ®£|tc^t«farte, /. 
 
 Compliment, s. Sompltment, «». / to 
 present — , ft4 empfc^lttt. 
 
 Comply, fl. ». t'mwitligen 5 to — with, 
 etffitten, na^totnmcn. 
 
 Compose, «. o. serfttfTtn. 
 
 Comprehend, v. a. Segreifen. 
 
 Comrade, «. Samerabr m. 
 
 Concave, a<^'. ^o^, (round) tunb ; to 
 make — , au^p^ten. 
 
 Conceal, v. a. serkrgen. 
 
 Concerning, pr^. & adv. Setreffenb ; 
 — it, barfikr. 
 
 Concert, s. Soncett, n. 
 
 Condemn, v. a. (sentence) »crur» 
 t^tiUn, (blame) tabetn. 
 
 Condition, ». Buflanb, m. ; (circum- 
 stance) Umnanb, m. 
 
 Conduct, 8. (behavior) Stupljrung, 
 
 /./ aSetragen, n.; (escort) ®elett, w.y 
 
 — V. a. (lead) fii'^ren, lettm. 
 Confectioner, s. Sonbitor. 
 Confess, «. a. & n. (avow) ietcnnm, 
 
 (own) gefle^en. [SScttrauen, n. 
 
 Confide, v. n. sertraucn ; -nee, s. 
 Confident(ly), adj. & adv. sertrauenb. 
 Confound, v. a. Kttwirren ; -ed, adj. 
 
 setwirrt 
 Congress, «. EDngreg, m. 
 Conquer, v. a. & n. fiegeit, (subdue) 
 
 (ie)ftegm( (territory) eroictn ; -or. 
 
 «. ©teger, Srcterer, m. 
 Conquest, s. ®ieg, to. 
 Conscience, ». OctuiHen, n. 
 Conscious(ly), adj. & adv. btwuft. 
 Consciousness, s. Seivugtfein, n. 
 Consent, «. eitUBiHigung, /. ; — v. n. 
 
 einntQigen. 
 Consequence, «. Sclge, /. 
 Consequent(ly), adj. & adv. folgllc^. 
 Consider, v. a. & n. tiScricgen, (pon- 
 der) etwdgen, (observe) ietra^ten ; 
 
 -able, adj. ktrdc^tli(% ; -ation, s. 
 
 Ueietlegung, /. 
 Consist, V. n. iefle^en. 
 Constant(ly) adj. &adv. befldnbig. 
 Contain, v. a. fallen, (enclose or 
 
 comprise) cnt^alten. 
 Contemplate, «. a. (consider) letra^» 
 
 ten, (intend) bcaiftc[)ttgcn. 
 Contempt, «, SSetttii^tung ; worthy of 
 
 — , uera^tungSwett^. 
 Contend, v. a. flteiteit, (with swords) 
 
 fe($ten. 
 Content, adj. jufiicbm ; -ed, ad}. & 
 
 adv. (satisfied) jufrieben, genitgfam. 
 Continual(ly), adj. & adv. (frequent) 
 
 icjldnbig, (perpetual) fortt»d:|rcnb, 
 
 flet«. 
 Continue, ®. a. foitfefen ; v. n. fott* 
 
556 
 
 TOCAB0LAKT. — ^ENGLISH AKD GERMAN. 
 
 fasten, (remain) Wetten ; -d, o^'. 
 
 ununteciioc^en. 
 Contradict, v. a. ttibctfvtec^cn. 
 Contrary, adj. & prep, juwiber, 
 
 gegcn ; — «. Oegent^eil, n. ; on the 
 
 — , im ©egcnt^ea. 
 Convene, v. a. & refl. UKfawmeln. 
 Convement(ly), adj. & ode. iequem. 
 Conversation, «. Oefptoic^, ra. ; ttnttt* 
 
 ^altung, Sonverfatton, /. 
 Convey, e. a. (person) fii^ten» (news) 
 
 mitt^cilen. 
 Conviction, s. UcSerjeugung,/. 
 Convince, v. a. itierseugtn. 
 Cook, s. Rti), TO.V — B. a. lo^m. 
 Cool. aii?. fit^l, (fresh) fiifc^. 
 Copper, s. flupfer, n. 
 Copy, «. SHSfc^tift. /. ; — v. a. ai^i^tt'i" 
 
 ien. 
 Corn, «. ©Etteibe, ra. 
 Comer, ». (Ede, /.y (angle) SBintcl, 
 
 m. 
 Coronation, «. firiinung, /. 
 Corpse, s. Sei^nant, m. 
 Correct, v. a. serieffetn. 
 Correspond, D. ?i. (accord) Ctttfvrcc^en, 
 
 (by letter) einen Sriefwc^fel fu^ren. 
 Corrupt, «. a. sctbtrien. 
 Cost, «. (expense) flojlen, pi; (price) 
 
 9)reta, fioflenpteiS, m.; — v. n. fojlen; 
 
 -ly, ad}, foflbar, fofifpielig. 
 Costiime, s. Ztai^t, f. 
 Cot, a. §ttttE, /. 
 Counsel, s. SRaf^, m. 
 Count, s. ®taf, m.; — ». a. rc(i^nen. 
 Countenance, «. @eft4lt, 7i. 
 Counter order, a. Ocgeniefe^l, m. 
 Counterfeit, v. a. Deifoilf^en ; — adj. 
 
 Country, a. fianb, n.; (native) SSatet' 
 lanb, n.; (neighborhood) CSJegcnb, 
 
 /./ -man, C«nb8m«im, (peasant) 
 
 fiojibmann 5 -woman, Sauetfrau, 
 Couple, a. 9)ttar, n. 
 Courage, a. 3But^, m.; (fortitude) 
 
 Sopfertcit,/. 
 Course, a. Soaf, m.; ffla^n,/./ of — , 
 
 natiirlif^, naturlic^er SQeife. 
 Court, a. §of, m.; -ier, a. ^ofling, m. 
 Cousin, a. SSctler, Eoultlt, m. ; Safe, 
 
 G»ufine» /. 
 Covenant, a. SBuitbni^, n. 
 Cover, a. ®c(Ie, /./ — ». a. Stbedeti. 
 Covetous(ly), adj. & a(?». (of praise) 
 
 iegterigi (avaricioos) ^a6fii($ttg, 
 
 geijig ; -ness, a. ^abfui^t, /./ (eager- 
 ness) SBcgietbe,/. 
 Cow, a. ^u^, /. 
 Crack, v. n. fptingcn, icrficn. 
 Crackle, v. n. fttt{i^cnr fnijiern. 
 Craft, s. (art) Sunjl, /. / (cunning) 
 
 Sifl,/. 
 Cravat, a. ^alilui), n. 
 Crawl, V. n. friec^en. 
 Create, v. a. fi^affenj crf(^tt(fen. 
 Creature, a. Oefii^opf, n. 
 Credible(ly), ad^. & adm. gkuHic^. 
 Creep, «. n. ir. hte^eit. 
 Crime, a. SSerirec^en, n. ; (fault) 
 
 S^utb,/. 
 Criminal, a. SScrtrcc^er, m. ; (-ly), 
 
 aeJ?. & ad/o. vertiedjerifc^. 
 Criticise, u a. h n. ieurt^eilcn, (judge) 
 
 rid)ten. 
 Cross, a. .Rreus, n. ; — over, s. n. 
 
 aietfc^reiten, (river) u6etfe|pen. 
 Crowd, a. ^a«fe(ti), m. 
 Crown, a. flrone, /. ; -prince, Sron- 
 
 piinj> m. 
 Crucifix, a. Erucip):, n. 
 Cruel(ly), adj. & adm. gtaufam, 
 (bloody) Mutig. 
 
VOCABULAET. — ENGUSH AUD GBKMAN. 
 
 557 
 
 Crumb, s. Jttumei/.; pi Srofantett. 
 Crumble, v. a. & n. Itumeln, jerfrii* 
 
 meln. 
 Crusader, «. ^teujfa^ret. 
 Cry, V. a. & n. (weep) wctneB, (scream) 
 
 fc^teien, (exclahn) au«rufen. 
 Cultivate, v. a. (talents) cultiviren, 
 
 (land) aniamn, (a person) ttlben. 
 Cunning, s. (artifice) £i|l, /. ; (sly- 
 ness) Sc^laul^eit, /. ; (-ly), ad). & 
 
 adv. Itflig, f^Iau. 
 Cup, s. Se^er, m.; poisoned — j 
 
 ©iftk^et. 
 Cure, 8. jettons, /. ;— ». a. Jetlen. 
 Cushion, s. Sifftn, n. 
 Custom, «. ®ebrau($, m. ; ©itte, /. / 
 
 -ary (arily), adj. & ad-e. geJriJai^'' 
 
 Cut, 4. ©c^nttt, m. ; — ». a. & n. ir. 
 fi^neiben, (into stone, etc.) eiit* 
 graven, eingtasiten. 
 
 D. 
 
 Daily, adj. & adm. toiglic^. 
 
 Dale, s. 2;^al, n. 
 
 Dam, «. 2)amm, m.; (wall) Soli, m. 
 
 Damage, a. ©i^aben, m.; — v. a. ©d)n» 
 
 ben iufiigen ; to be damaged, 
 
 @c^aben Uiben. 
 Dance, ». Slanj, m. ; — t. n. tanjen. 
 Danger, a Ocfa^r,/. / ^-ous(ly), adj. 
 
 & adv. geftt^rlic^, (hurtful) fi^cibli^. 
 Dare, i>. n. ir. biitfctt, (defy) tro^en ; 
 
 (presume) jld| unter|lc^ett. 
 Dark, adj. buntct, finfler ; -ness, s. 
 
 "hmUlijtM, ginfternip,/ 
 Daughter, «. 2;i)(i^ter, /. 
 Dauphin, «. 2)tturttn, to. 
 Dawn, «. ®ammetung, f.;~~v. a. tagen, 
 
 bcimmern. 
 Day, «. Sag, ». ; to — , '^eute ; — 
 
 before yesterday, »orge(lern; — of 
 birth or birth-, ®e6utt«tag, m. ; 
 -light, «. a;agc«ltc|t, n. ; (dawn) 
 Sloge^anitu^, m. 
 Dead, adj. tobt. 
 Deaf, a<??. tauJ. 
 Deal, a great — , Bid, fel^t. 
 Dear(ly), at?;. & adm. t^euer, lieS, 
 
 (valuable) wert^. 
 Death, s. Slob, to. 
 Debt, a. ©c^ulb, /. ; state-, ©taaW" 
 
 fiiiurb,/. 
 Decay, g.SJerfatt, to.; — e. n. serberBen. 
 Decease, «. SlBfletten, m.; — e. ra. 
 
 jierben. 
 Deceive, «. a. triigen, (cheat) 6etru» 
 
 gen, (delude) toiufc^en. 
 December, a. BejemSct, to. 
 Decency, «. Slnflanb, to.; (propriety) 
 
 ©^iaiiclfeit, /. 
 Deoent(ly), (wZj. & adxi. anildnbig, 
 
 (proper) \i)\Si\&i. 
 Decide, v. a. entfdieiben, (determine) 
 kfltmmen, 6efii)Iie§en, ftil entfc^ltep en. 
 Decision, «. Entfc^etbung,/. / (deter- 
 mination) Sntfc^liefung, /. 
 Declare, v. a ttnjetgen, erflatcn; — v.n- 
 
 fi(^ ertloiren. 
 Decline, v. n. (refuse) ijerweigem, ftc^ 
 weigecn, (offer) oJfc^lagcn, (invita- 
 tion) aStf^nen. 
 Decorate, «. a. (luSjiercn, (person) 
 
 fc^ntiiffen. 
 Decrease, b. a. serattnbetn ; — s. n- 
 
 aSnc^mcn ; — a. Stbntt^me, /. 
 Deed, «. 2^at, lianblung,/. 
 Deem, «. n. fallen (fur), ftnben. 
 Deep(ly), adj. & ado. ttef, (thorough) 
 
 gtunbli^. 
 Deer, s. $trfc^, to. ; (roe) SRe'^, n. 
 Defect, «. gel^ler, to. 
 
558 
 
 TOCASIXLAIIT. — SNOLISH AND SERMAH. 
 
 Defence, s. Sert^etblsitna, (resiBtance) 
 
 ®egen»e^r, /. 
 Defend, v. q. vert^eibtgen. 
 Defer, «. a. auffc^ieien. 
 Define, v. a. & n. it^immai, ernciren. 
 Defraud, v. a. ietriigen. 
 Defy, «. a. Jro^eit, %X6^ Meten. 
 Degrade, v. a. I^erattturbigen. 
 Degree, s. ®tai>, m. 
 Delay, s. (postponement) Sluff^ub, 
 
 m.; (lingering) Sctsug, m.; — v. a. 
 
 & n. auftalten, (linger) setsiiatrn. 
 Deliberation, s. tte Jericgunsi /. 
 Delight, «. SJergniigeni ». 
 Delude, «. a. t&a^i^tn. 
 Demand, «. gorberung, /./ — o. a. fot" 
 
 betn, (for one's self) fic^ auaJittcK. 
 Denial, s. SJetneinung, /.; (refusal) 
 
 «if(i^lttgtge Slntwort, /. 
 Dentist, s. Qa^mxit, m. 
 Deny, v. a. Iciugnen. 
 Depart, ®.«. airctfen; -ment, «. Sfac^, 
 
 n.; — of history, ®e^i)\S)tiM, n. 
 Depend, v. n. atpngcn ; — upon or 
 
 on, (t^ »etlaPii auf . . . ; -ent, s. 
 
 Untett^an, m.;—e^. ab^cingig. 
 Deprive, v. a. beiauben, bene^men. 
 Depth, s. Jiefe, /. 
 Deputy, «. Slbgeorbnete, m. 
 Deserve, i). a serbieiten. 
 Deserving(ly), adj. & ach>. Deibtentr 
 
 (worthy) toittbig, »crt§. 
 Design, s. (purpose) SlbjliSt,/.; (end) 
 
 SwS, m.; — V. a.&n. bettbjic^tigen. 
 Desire, a. SJcrlangctt, n. ; (wish) 
 
 SBJunfc^, m.; — ». a. Prebttt, ttitnf($en. 
 DeBirous(ly), adj. & ack. (eager) be* 
 
 gterig, »unfc^enb;to be— ,t»iinfi$ett. 
 Desk, a. 9)ult, m. 
 Despair, a. SUerjWttflung, f.;—v. a. 
 
 beriteeifeln. 
 
 Dessert, a. 9Ja^tif(^, m. 
 
 Destroy, v. a. jerftSren, (spoil) »er» 
 
 berbeit. 
 Destruction, a. Serfliiiung/ /. 
 Detain, «. a. ttuf^altcti. 
 Detect, V. a. cntbetfen. 
 Determine, v. a. jl^ entf(i^liegen, (re- 
 solve) fic^ tjotnel^men, (ascertain) 
 
 eimitteln. 
 Devil, 8. Xcufel, m. 
 Devotion, a. Slnbac^t, /. 
 Devour, «. a. Detfd^lingcn, (feed on) 
 
 freffcn. 
 Desterous(ly), adj. & adv. gefi^idt. 
 Dictate, v. a. (to an amanuensis, etc.) 
 
 DDifageni (order) vorfc^teiben. 
 Dictionary, a. SSJiirtetbu^. n. 
 Die, V. n. (lerben ; — v. a. (fade) blci* 
 
 c!)en. 
 Different(ly). oi^'. & ad/o. »eifc^ie» 
 
 ben. 
 Difficult, adj. fc^wer, f(I)n)tcrig ; -y, a. 
 
 Sd^wierigteit, /. ; with — , mtt ge» 
 
 nauet or (napber 3tot^. 
 Dig, V. a. & n. gtaben. 
 Dignity, s. SButbe,/. 
 Diligence, «. Sleig, m. 
 Diligent, adj. fleigtg. 
 Dim(ly), a(^'. & ad/o. buntel, (faint) 
 
 tnfttt. 
 Diminish, v. a. scrminbertt ; — o. n. 
 
 abne^mcn. 
 Dimness, a. Suntel^eit, /. 
 Dine, d. n. ju 3)littag effen ; — .v a. 
 
 ftjetfen. 
 Dining-room, s. SbfiWinner, n.; 
 
 (saloon) <S))eifcfaaI, m. 
 Dinner, a. SKittttgaefTen, n.; -party, 
 
 ii. 3)Jlttag«gefeItf(^aft. 
 Direction, «. SRic^titngi /. ; (address) 
 
 9tHff(i^tift, /. 
 
■VOCABOLAKY — ENGLISH AND GEEMAN. 
 
 559 
 
 Dirty, a^}- fc^ma^ij. 
 Disagreeable, adj. unangem^m." 
 Disappear, v. n. scrfc^winbcn. 
 Discern, v. a. & n. ertennen. 
 Discharge, v. a. tnttalTen. 
 Disclose, V. a. tntbecEcn ; — v. n. (tell) 
 
 |li$ ciupern. 
 Discontent, s. Unsuftiebm^cit, /.; -ed, 
 
 p(wt. & adj. -edly, adm. unjufriebm. 
 Discourage, v. a. eittwutjigett. 
 Discover, v. n. eittbectcn/ (find) (inben. 
 Discovery, ». Entbedung, /. 
 Disobedient(ly), a(^' & adm. ungc* 
 
 ^otfam. 
 Dispatch, s. Depefc^t/ /. / — v. a. a6» 
 
 fc^icfcn. 
 Dispose, ®. a. uerfaufett. 
 Disposition, s. (arrangement) Sttl' 
 
 rid^tung, Sttiorbnung, /. ; (inclina- 
 tion) Sleigung, /. 
 Dispute, s. ©treit, m. ; — ». a. & n. 
 
 flteitm, (quarrel) janten. 
 Dissatisfied, adj. unjufneben. 
 Dissipated, adj. liebetli^. 
 Dissolve, B. a. aitflofeit ; — ». n. jer=> 
 
 fc^nteljen. 
 Dissuade, «. a. a^rat^en. 
 Distance, «. gtrne, Entfernuitg, /. / a 
 
 — of, t»eit. 
 Distant, adj. & adv. entfetntf (far) 
 
 Weit. 
 Distinct(ly), a^dj. hoAo. (dear) beut' 
 
 X\&i, (exact) genau. 
 Distinguish, «. a. ftc^ auSjeic^nen, 
 
 (separate) untetfc^eibea ; -ed, 'pwrt. 
 
 & a^Q. auSgejetc^mtf (noble) vor« 
 
 tie^m. 
 Distracted(ly), adj. & adm. waW' 
 
 ntg> (beside one's self) auger f!i$. 
 Distribute, v. a. au^t^eileit. 
 Divide, ■». a. f^cilen, sert^ctlen. 
 
 Division, s. S'^eilung, /. 
 
 Do, B. a. & n.vr. t^utt, (make) mad^ot; 
 how shall (or am) I to — that, 
 tt)te foU id) baa anfangen? how do 
 you do, »Bte Jejinben ©ie (t(^ 7 luie 
 gc^M ? 
 
 Doctor, «. 35oftot» Sttst, w». 
 
 Dog, a. |)unb, «i. 
 
 Dollar, s. S^^aler, m. 
 
 Door, s. 3;pre, /,/ out of doors, 
 braupen. 
 
 Double, B.ffl. »erbo)Jt)cln; — v.n. |ic^»er' 
 boijpein ; (-ly), adj. & adt. bopijelt. 
 
 Doubt, a. Sweifcl, m. ; — ». a. & n. 
 jtteifeln, JejiDeifeln ; -ful, adj. ji»ci» 
 Waft. 
 
 Down, prep. & adv. nieber, (p. 281, 
 VIII.) :^eta6, :^tna!(,^inumer,^erunter. 
 
 Dowry, «. 9tua|lattung, /. 
 
 Dozen, a. S)ut}cnb, n. 
 
 Drag, B. ffl. & n. jie^ett. 
 
 Drain, ». a. aMeiten, (dry) auattotfncn. 
 
 Draw, v. a. & n. w. jie^cn, (off) ad* 
 jie^ett, (with pencil) jetc^nen ; to 
 — near, na^en, ft^ nci^ern. 
 
 Drawer, a. ©(i^u6Iabe, /. 
 
 Dream, a. Xraum, m.; — ». a. & n. 
 trauntm. 
 
 Dress, a. Stnjug, m. ; SBetleibung, /. ; 
 (frock) fileib, n. ; (fashion) Jrac^t, 
 /. ; — e. a. anfleibm ; — v. n. (one's 
 self) fii^ anjiel^cn or ^lii anflciben. 
 
 Drink, a. ®ctranf, n. ; — o. n. & a. vr. 
 
 Drip, D. a. & n. tropfeln. [trinfen. 
 
 Drive, v. a. vr. treiSen; (ride) fasten; 
 to — away, fortjagen; — off", fort"' 
 fa^ren; to — out, auSfa^rcn; -r, s. 
 ,ffiutf(^er, m. 
 
 Droll, «. gJolTe,/. ; —adj. Do(rt(e)ritt^. 
 
 Drop, s. ZxB^^m, n. ; — an acquaint- 
 ance, eine SSctanntfi^aft aufgeSen. 
 
500 
 
 VOCABCIiABY. — ENGLISH AKD GEBMAN. 
 
 Drown, v. n. or to be -ed, ertri«te«. 
 Drowsy, ad^. drowsily, adn. f^ldftis. 
 Drum, «. Srommel, /. 
 Drunk, adj. ieltuitten ; to get — , ft^ 
 
 Settintm. 
 Dry, ac^. troden ;-^. a. & ».tro(tnen. 
 During, prep, tott^renb. 
 Dust, «. ®taui, m. 
 Dutiful(ly), a(i/. & (idm. ge^orfain. 
 Duty, s. S^flic^t, /.; (obedience) ^t" 
 
 :^otfam, m. 
 Dwell, tt. n. ir. tto^nen. 
 
 E. 
 
 Each, pron. jebcr; -otlier, einanbet. 
 
 Eagle, «. Stbler, tt^. 
 
 Ear, s. D^r, ra.; -ring, Darting, m. 
 
 Earl, «. ®taf, m. 
 
 Early, ocJj. & a(2«. fru^ ; earlier, 
 frfil^er. 
 
 Earn, v. a. etacrien, (gain) geainnen. 
 
 Earth, s. Srbe, /. 
 
 East, 8. Djlen, m. ; -er, g. Djltrtt, pt 
 
 Easy (easily), ac^. & a<fo. Iciest, (com- 
 fortable) fiequem ; to make — , it^ 
 ru^lgen. 
 
 Eat, 1. a. & Ji. M*. tfTeit. 
 
 Economy, s. ©parfamfeit, /. 
 
 Edge, s. (border) SRttJib, m.; (comer) 
 
 eae, /. 
 
 Edition, s. auflage, /. 
 
 Educate, «. a. erjie^en/ au8MIben. 
 
 Eel, «. 3(al, m. 
 
 Effect, s. (operation) SEBtrhtng,/.; (re- 
 sult) ffirfolg, m.; (use) SButtn, «i. 
 
 Egg, «. Si, n. 
 
 Eight, 0(2;. a^t. 
 
 Either, pron. eincr »on beiben ; eonj. 
 entwebcr; — . . or, tntweber . . ober. 
 
 Elapse, V. n. Dcrgc^eii, Dcrftiegcn. 
 Elect, «. a. t»ttl)leii; adj. erwdl^tt. 
 Elector, «. fiuifurjl, mi. 
 Elegant(ly), ad;. & adv. (tasteful) 
 
 geff^madsoll, (nice) jtcrtic^. 
 Element, s. (Element, n.;—s. pi. Stn» 
 
 fang^griinbe, /.; -ary, adj. elemeti' 
 
 tttrifi^. 
 Elephant, «. IS.le(i1)<mt, m. 
 Elevate, v. a. ei^eben, (raise) er^o^en. 
 Eleven, aclj. elf ; -fold, tl^ai). 
 Ell, «. enc, /. ' 
 Else, prep. & ad/o. fonjl ; -where, 
 
 ad®, ttuberawo, fonfj irgenbioo. 
 Embalm, v. a. emialfamiren. 
 Embellish, d. a. setfi^Bnern, (adorn) 
 
 jteren. 
 Emigrant, s. ^ttiioavbtm, m. 
 Eminent(ly) a^. & ad®, (high) ^oc^, 
 
 (exalted) er^aben, (distinguished) 
 
 au^geiet^net. 
 Emperor, «. fiaifer, m. 
 Empire, a. Saifetretc^, n. 
 Employ, V. a. (occupy) bef^dftigen, 
 
 (apply) ttttttenbeni (use) gebrau(^en ; 
 
 -ment, s. (occupation) Sefc^dftt» 
 
 gung, /. ; (business) ©ef^dft, n. 
 End, s. Enbe, n.; — ». a. (finish) if 
 
 enbigen ; — v. n. (cease) auf^iiten. 
 Endeavor, s. Scjlreben, n.; — v'. n. 
 
 (make exertion) jlc^ befireben, {t^ 
 
 bemit^en, (try) Derfuc^en. 
 Endurable, adj. ertldgltc^. 
 Endure, v. a. & n, (patiently) CMi' 
 
 ^nUttt, (suffer) leiben, (last) be°< 
 
 fie^en. 
 Enemy, g. fjeitlb, TO. 
 Enfeeble, si. a, fc^wdc^en. 
 Engage, ®. a. jic| »tr()fli^ten ; -d, 
 
 port. & adj. (betrothed) setlobt, 
 
 (promised) »etfi)tO(^cn, (busy) be« 
 
TOCABCLABT. — ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 
 
 561 
 
 fd^aftigt i -ment, s. SJerijflt^tung, 
 
 /./ (of soldiers) ®cfec^t, n. 
 Engrave, v. a. eingtaben. 
 Enjoy, v. a. geniepen ; -ment, s. ®£» 
 
 nug, TO. ; (delight) Sreufcie, /. 
 Enlarge, «. a. sergtB^etn, (expand) 
 
 au^be^nen ; — v. n. (spread) ji^ wc' 
 
 ireiten. 
 Enlist, v. a. anwerten. 
 Enough, adj. & ack. genug. 
 Enterprise, s. Hntente'^mcn, n.; (spec- 
 ulation) Speculation, /. 
 Entertainment, «. (feast) @afbna^I, 
 
 11.; (society) Unter^ttltunu, /. 
 Entire(ly), adj. & adv. (whole) ganj, 
 
 ganjliii^, (full) DoH. 
 Entreat, s. a. fle^Eiii fe^t Bitten, (re- 
 quest) erfu^en ; -y, «. Sitte, /. ; 
 
 (request) ®efu(^, n_ 
 Epistle, s. Srtef, m. 
 Equal(ly), adj. & a(i«. fllcic^ j — »■ ». 
 
 Stei{| fcin. 
 Equivalent, a. bet gletc^e SBert^ ; — 
 
 adj. (value) 8let(j^9eltenb. 
 Error, s. Strt^unt, m. ; (mistake) 
 
 Seller, m. 
 Escape, «. a. enttinncn, (expressive) 
 
 entfc^Iiipfert ; — v. n. enttommen. 
 Especial(,ly), adj. & adm. iefonbera, 
 
 (principal) ^auptfad^Iii^. 
 Essential(ly), adj. & ado. wefentUi^, 
 
 (principal) :§au))tfa(|ltc^. 
 Establish, v. a. grunben. 
 Estate, a. (land) ®«t, n. ; (property) 
 
 Sctmogen, n. 
 Esteem, «. Stc^tung, /./—!). a. a^ten. 
 Etemal(ly), adj. & adm. et»tg. 
 Evade, «. a. & n. auatscid^en. 
 Even, adj. eien, (smooth) glatt, (flat) 
 
 jlatti — adm. au(^, feftfl, f(i^on, fogat. 
 , Evening. «. Sl6enb, to. ; in the — , 
 
 (be«) S[6cnb« 5 this — , ^eute SI6enb, 
 
 last — .geftern Sffienb. 
 Ever, adv. je, (always) immer, |iet«. 
 Everlasting(ly) adj. & ado. immei- 
 
 wcil^renb, cwig. 
 Every, pron. jebet, jebe, jcbe« ; -one, 
 
 -body, Sebetmann, Sebtoebcr ; — 
 
 time, icbeamttl, affejeit ; -thing, 
 
 StUeS ; -where, Petalt. 
 Evident(ly), ac^. & ado. ttugenf^ein* 
 
 Uc^. 
 Evil, s. Uebel, n.; (bad) Safe, ?i./ (sin) 
 
 ©unbe, /.;— a<^'. u6el, bofe. 
 Exactfly) adj. & adv. (accupite) ge* 
 
 na«, (punctual) pitnttUc^. 
 Examination, g. 3)tufung, ././ (inves- 
 tigation) Unterfu^ung, /. 
 Examine, v. a. (jrufen ; -r, «. Unlet' 
 
 fuii^er, TO. 
 Example, s. SScifpiet, n.; for — , junt 
 
 Seifriel. 
 Exceedingly), adj. & ado. auperjl, 
 
 (in great degree) tm ^o^ett ®rabe. 
 Excellent(ly) adj. & adv. sottrefflid), 
 
 ^etrlic^, (distiuguished) (MimeiHj^ 
 Except, prep, aufet. [net. 
 
 Excite, V. a. (irritate) leijen, (heat) 
 
 er^i^en. 
 Exclaim, v. n. aaSntfen, 
 Excuse, s. ®ntf($ulbigung, /. ; — v. a. 
 
 entfc^ulbtgen, (pardon) setsei^en. 
 Execute, v. a. (criminal) :^inri($ten, 
 
 (order) auefiil^ren. 
 Exercise, «. (practice) Ueiung, /. ; 
 
 (lesson) Slufgabe, /. ; — v. a. uScn ; 
 
 —^. n. ft^ iiBen. 
 Exhaust, V. a. ecf^bpfen. 
 Exhibit, s. 2)ttr|lellu«g, /.; — v. a. bar* 
 
 (leHen ; -ion, «. Slu^jleltung, /. 
 ExUe, ». SJertannung,/.; — v. a. »er» 
 
 iannen. 
 
562 
 
 TOCABDLAKT. — EITGLISH AND GBBMAN. 
 
 Exist, e. n. it^i^m, (be) fein. 
 Existence, a. Sttfein, n. ; to call into 
 
 — , Waffen, erf^affm. 
 Expect, ®. a. & n. (wait for) etn)ar» 
 
 ten, (hope) ^offen ; -ation, g. Sr* 
 
 ttartung, ©offnung, /.; -ing, -ant, 
 
 adj. gewaitig. 
 Expense, a. StuajaSe, /.y (cost) Sojlett, 
 
 Experience, «. (Erfal^rung, /. ; — o. a. 
 
 erfal^ren. 
 Expire, «. w. ailaufen, (die) fletSen. 
 Explain, 's. a. erflaren. 
 Exploration, ». Erforfc^ung, /. 
 Exposition, «. 9lu«|lel[iing,/. 
 Express, ®. a. ou^bruiieti ; -ly, adj. 
 
 & a(fo. au8bruaii(^i -ion, ». 9{ebeti«» 
 
 art, /.; Sluabrod, m. 
 Extend, «. a. auabe^nen ; — ». m. jic^ 
 
 erfiredEeit. 
 Extension, s. Slu^be^nung, /. 
 ExtenBive(ly), adj. & aeZ®. auSge* 
 
 be^nt. 
 Extent, «. Stuabe'^nung, /. 
 Extinguish, v. a. (flames) AU^Iofc^enf 
 
 (erase) sertilgen. 
 Extraordinary, adj. au^erotbcntlic^. 
 Extremely, adj. & ad/t. auperjl. 
 Eye, ». Sluge, n. 
 
 F. 
 
 Pace, «. ®e(l^t, «. 
 
 Fact, «. VifiXif. 
 
 Fail, «. n. fel^len, (miscarry) aiig^- 
 
 gluden. 
 Fain, adj. & odi). firo^, gem ; — b. «. 
 
 to be — , ri<% fe^nen. 
 Faint(ly), adj. & ffltJo. matt j — c. »■ 
 
 tn O^nmiu^t faUen. (tire) nmatten. 
 
 Fair, adj. fi|5n/ (honest) e^rtic^ i — ft 
 2!le(rei/-; Sa^rmartt- »»•; -ness, «. 
 (frankness) Dffcn^eit, /. / (beauty) 
 ®i^o4eit,/. 
 
 Faith, «. ®lauk(lt) m.; -ful(ly), fl^. 
 & a(!«. treu. 
 
 Falcon, «. galfe, m. 
 
 Fall, «. SttK, TO. ; (autumn) 4>erSil, 
 TO./ — B. n. ir. fatten; to — asleep, 
 einfii^Iafen ; to — in with, treffeit. 
 
 False(ly), a^. & adm. falfi$. 
 
 Fame, a. SBu'^m, to. / (character) 9htf/ 
 
 TO. 
 
 Familiarity, a. Serttauli(i^feit, /. 
 Family, a. gamilie) /. / (genealogy) 
 
 ®ef(^Ic(i^t, n. 
 Famine, a. ^unget^not^/ /. 
 Famou8(Iy), adj. & adv. Settt^mt, 
 Fancy, a. StnMIbung, /. ; — ». a. & n. 
 
 |5^ einiilben, (think) benf en, (dream) 
 
 traumcn, (like) getn ^atcn. 
 Far, adv. mitt (distant) fetn ; by — , 
 
 in wettem ; -ther, adm. teeiter. 
 Farmer, s. Sauei, to. 
 Fashion, a. aRobe, /.; — ». a. Silben. 
 Fast, adj. & a<fj). f(^neU, (tight) fc^ 
 Fat, o(^. fett, (thick) bid ;— ». Sett, 
 
 n. 
 Fate, a. ©^idfttl, n. 
 Father, a. SJatcr, to.; -in-law, ©^teie* 
 
 getsatcr ; -land, SJaterlanb, m. 
 Fault, a. Seller, to. 
 Favorite, a. ©unfiling, to. 
 Fear, «. n. fiir^ten, ft^ ffir(3^ten;— 
 
 V. a. iefUi^ten. 
 Feather, a. geber, /. 
 Feature, g. ®eji^t85ug, to. 
 February, g. Seiniai, to. 
 Feeble (feebly), a,^. & ado. f$n>ac^, 
 
 (dim) matt. 
 Feed, «. a. i/r. f|)etren, (animals) fu^ 
 
VOCABULAET. — ^BNGLISH AND GEKMAN. 
 
 563 
 
 tern, (graze) weiben -i—s. Sutter, n.; 
 aCeibe,/. 
 
 Feeling(ly), part., adj. & adv. fii^Ienb, 
 aefu^l»oII ; — s. Oefit^I, n. 
 
 Fellow, «. (Gompanion) Oefoi^rte, 
 m.; (comrade) flametab, Oefettt/ 
 m. ; -man, SDJitmenfc^, m. ; -trav- 
 eler, SReifegefa^rte, m. ; -student, 
 3Ritfc^uIcr, m. 
 
 Pence, s. Q<m.% m.; — a. n. fec^ten. 
 
 Fetch, V. a. ^clen, (bring) Sringen ; to 
 — back, Wieber^olcn. 
 
 Fever, «. gieber, n.; -ish, adj. fitter^ 
 
 m- 
 
 Few, adj. wentg ; a — , etnige, ttenige. 
 Field, «. gelb, n. ; (plain) glur, / 
 Fierce(ly), o/dj. & asd». graufatn, 
 Fife, «. 9)feife, /. 
 Figlit, B- ffl. & ». ir. fed^ten, (contend) 
 
 fimpfcn. 
 Figure, ». gigut, gorm, /. ; (shape) 
 
 ®e|lttlt,/.;— ^). as. Dorjlellen ; — v. n. 
 
 tine SRoUe fptelcn. 
 Fill, V. a. faUtn, jlopfen. 
 Final(ly), adj. & aife. enbU(i§, (at last) 
 
 fc^lieplic^. 
 Find, B. a.ir. finben/ (health) fid) te» 
 
 jtnben ; to — fault, ouapellcrt. 
 Fine, a^. & adv. f;tn, f^cn, (thin) 
 
 biitm. 
 Finger, a. ginger, m. 
 Finish, v. a. Seenbigcn. 
 Fir, a. Xmm, f. 
 
 Fire, a. geucr, n.; (heat) QiUtlj, f. 
 Firing, a. geuern, n. 
 First(ly), adj. & adv. erjl ; at — , crjl» 
 
 Uc^, (before) peril. 
 Fish, a. %i\iS), m.;—v. a. & n. jtfdjen. 
 Fist, a. gauf}, m. 
 Pit, V. a. tjafien, (a coat) aniJttffett ; — 
 
 41. n. (to be proper) jtemen. 
 
 Five, adj. fiinf. 
 
 Flag, a. gttl^ne, /. 
 
 Flame, «. gtomme, /. ; (heat) 
 
 /• 
 Flask, a. glftfc^e, /. 
 Flat, adj. & ad». pltttt ,^— «. ^Uijetf. 
 Flatter, v. a. (c^meid^eln. 
 Flatterer, a. ©d^meic^Ier, m. 
 Flattery, a. ©c^metc^elei, /. 
 Flax, a. %lai^i, m. 
 Flee, «. n. ir. fliel^eti, (avoid) meibcit. 
 Flesh, s. gleif^, n. 
 Moat, a. glop, n.; — v. n. fc^mimntcn. 
 Flood, a. glut^, f.;—v. a. u6er=- 
 
 fdjwemmm. 
 Floor, a. glur, /.; guPoben, m. 
 Flower, a. Slume, /. 
 Fluent(ly), adj. & ado. gelaujtg. 
 Ply, a. gliege, /.; — ». a. & n. ir. (on 
 
 wings) (liegett, (flee) flic^en. 
 Foal, «. giiHen, gotten, n. 
 Foe, «. getnb, m. 
 FoUow,». a.kn. folgcn, (dative) mi^" 
 
 fclgcn ; -ing, part, folgcnb. 
 Fond, adj. ucrtieBt ; to be — of, gern 
 
 ^aten, licSen. 
 Food,*. ©Detfe,/. 
 Fool, a. Xljor, 9?arr, m. 
 Foolish(ly), ac^. & adv. t^oric^t. 
 Foot, a. gug, m. ; -step, gu^ttt^fcn, 
 
 m.; -(man), gugsolt, n.; on — , ju 
 
 gug; bare-foot(ed), Jarfitf. 
 Foppish, adj. gejiert, (vain) eitet; 
 
 -ness, a. Siererei, /. 
 For, prep, fur, gegen, mi) ; — conj. 
 
 bcnn. 
 Forbear, v. a. & n. ir. ertragen, (spare) 
 
 Derfc^onen. 
 Forbid, v. a. & n. ir. scriieten. 
 Force, a. .ffiraft, /.; (power) Oeroolt,/ 
 Forebode, i>. a. & n. a^nen. 
 
564 
 
 VOCABULAKT.— ENGLISH AND GEKMAN. 
 
 Foreign, adj. ftemb ; -er, s. grembe/ 
 
 9lu«Ioini)cr, m. 
 Foreman, b 35ormann, m. 
 Forenoon, s. 3$ormittagi m. 
 Forest, «. SBalb, m. 
 Foretell, o. a. ma^tfagen ; — v. n. ))»=' 
 
 Forgery, «, (smith's work) S(i^mte»' 
 beatSeiti /.; (falsification) SJet* 
 foilfi^ung. 
 Forget, D. tt. ir. scrgejfen. 
 Forgive, v. a. w. serjei^eU/ Ketgcben. 
 Fork, «. Oabel, /. 
 Form, s. gorm, /. ; (figure) ®e|lttlt, 
 
 /.; — V. a. Silben. 
 Former, «. Dorig ; -ly, (Uki. fonfl, e^e« 
 
 xdaM, fritter. 
 Forsake, «. a. jr. serlaffen. 
 Fortress, «. gejtang, /. 
 Fortunate, adj. gludlid) ; -ly, adm. 
 
 gliitflic^ertteife. 
 Fortune, s. <S\M, n,; (property) 
 
 SJermiJgen, n. 
 Fought, pa/rt. gefo^tcit. 
 Found, V. a. grunbeti, jliften \—^art. 
 
 gefunben. 
 Founder, s. ©tiftcr, ®tunber, m. 
 Fourteen, adj. Kietje'^n. 
 Fowl, « SJogcI, m. ; (poultry) ®£p- 
 
 gel, n. ; (hen) |iup, n. 
 Fox, «. ^ixifi, m. 
 Fracture, «. a. Bremen, jertred)en. 
 Fragment, s. SBrui^jlM, n. 
 Frank(Iy), adj^ & odA). fret, (candid) 
 
 offen^ersig. 
 Frantic, a(J/.&a^.»tt^nftnntg, (mad) 
 
 ton. 
 Free(ly), a^. & ad '. frei, Xoit (candid) 
 
 offen'^etstg, (liberal) fteigeiig. 
 Freedom, s. gtei^eitf /. 
 Freight, s. Cabung, gtac^t, /. 
 
 Frequent(ly), adj. l^oiuflg, »fl. 
 Fresh(ly), a^. frifc^, (green) gtun 
 
 (unfaded) neu. 
 Friday, «. greitttg, m. 
 Friend, s. greunb, m. . 
 Friendship^ s. grciiitbfc^aft, /. 
 Frighten, v. a. ir. crf^rcdcn. 
 Frightful(ly), adj. & adv. ffir(i^tcrli^, 
 
 (terrible) fd^retfli^. 
 Frigidness, «. fiaUe, /. 
 From, prep. i)on» <mi ; — what place, 
 
 ivo^er. 
 Front, «. SJorberfcite, /. ; in. front, 
 
 comp. sorbet ; -ier, s. ®renie, /. 
 Fruit, ». Srwc^t,/. 
 Fry, v. a. & n. traten, toilen. 
 Full(y), adj. & adxi. soil, (exact) ge- 
 
 nau, (sated) fatt. 
 Fun, s. ©c^erj, ©Ijap, m. 
 Funny, adj. fomifc^. 
 Funeral, «. Ceidjcnkgttngni^/K.y -song, 
 
 ®ratgefang, m. 
 Furnish, is. a. liefern, moUinti. 
 Furniture, ». 3)to6eI, n. pi. 
 Further, Ojdj. weitcr; — a(i». uBerbieJ ; 
 
 — J), a. forbern, iefSrbern. 
 Future, s. Sufunft, /. ; — adj. & adm. 
 
 litnfttg. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gain, s. ®en)tnn, m. ; — b. a. (win) 
 
 getvinneiii (earn) veibienen. 
 Galley, s. ©alleere, /. 
 Gallop, V. n. ba^cr= or um^crfpringen. 
 Garden, s. ®attcn, m. ; -er, «. ©to* 
 
 Iter, m. 
 Garland, s. SBlumentranj, m.y Slumen^ 
 
 fcttc,/. 
 Garret, ». ©obett, ?»./ -chamber. 
 
VOCABULARY. — ESGLISH AND GEKMAN. 
 
 565 
 
 dae s. @ai, n. 
 
 Gauntlet, «. ©yiegrutl^En, /. ; (glove) 
 (9)anjer)^anbf(^u^, m. 
 
 Gender, « Oefc^tcdjt, n. 
 
 General, «. Ocnetal, gclb^ctr, m. 
 
 Generally, adu. u(>er^au))t, (ordi- 
 narily) gemii^nUc^. 
 
 Generously), adj. & adv. grD9mut^i3, 
 (liberal) ftetgeMg. 
 
 Gentle (gently), adj. & adv. (peace- 
 able) fanft, (kind) gfltiS!' 
 
 Gentleman, «. |)ett, 3)?ann Don E^rc, 
 
 TO. 
 
 Genuine, cit2;. & adv. ac^d (natural) 
 
 notiirlic^, (true) wa^r. 
 Get, «. a. ir. (receive) er'^altcttr ietom* 
 
 mm ; to — on (a coat), anjie^en, (in 
 
 bfe) forrtommen; to — up, aufjle^cn. 
 Ghost, s. ®eif}, m. ; (apparition) (Se* 
 
 fpenfi, n. 
 Gift, ». ®a6e, /. ; ©efc^ent, n. 
 Girl, «. SHabc^en, m. 
 Give, ®. a. ir. gcicn ; — i). n. (yield) 
 
 nac^geSen ; — up, aufgeiett. 
 Glad(ly), aef;. & adv. gcrn, (happy) 
 
 fetter, fro$ ;—■!). a. erfreuen. 
 Glance, «. (eye) Slid, m. ; (gleam) 
 
 Sd^immer, m. ; — v. n. fd)immctn ; 
 
 to — at a, thing, einm fliic^tigen 
 
 Sltif auf elwa* trerfen. 
 Glass, s. ®Ia3, n. 
 Gloomy, adj. & adv. buntcl, (black) 
 
 f<i^tt)ars, (cast down) nicbergcfi^lagin. 
 Glove, s. |)atibfc^u^, m. ; -r, «. $anb» 
 
 Glow, «. Otut^, /. ; — J), n. glii^en, 
 itcnnen 5 -ing(ly), 'part., adj. & 
 a(iB glu^cnb. 
 
 Go, V n. ir. ge^en, (move) jie^en ; to 
 — about, umge(|cn; to — through, 
 burc^gt^en ; to — away, bason*, 
 
 fort* or auSgc'^en ; to — amiss, 
 fe^lfdjlttgtn ; to — on horseback, 
 tetten ; to — in a vehicle, fa^rcn ; 
 to — out, (fire) erlofi^en. 
 
 Goblet, s. Secret, m. 
 
 God, s. ®ott, m. ; -father, 3)ttt^e, m. 
 
 Gold, s. ®oIb, n. ; made of — , son 
 ®oIb ; -(en), adj. golben. 
 
 Good, adj. & adm. gut, (well) roo^ ; 
 — pi. ®iiter ; -uess, a. ®ute, / 
 
 Goose, «. ®an8, /. 
 
 Govern, v. a. regieten; — v. n. bie 
 DScr^anb Bel^autJten ; -ment, s. SRe- 
 gicrung, ^ertfc^aft, /.; SRegimtnt, n. 
 
 Gracious(ly), adj. <& adv. (conde- 
 scending) gutig, (merciful) gnabtg. 
 
 Grade, «. ®tab, m.; (rank) SRung, m. 
 
 Gradual(ly), adv. ttttntoi^Kg. 
 
 Grain, «. ®etreibe, fiorn, n. 
 
 Grammar, a. ®ramntatit, /. 
 
 Grand, adj. (great) gro§, (sublime) 
 er^akn ; -child, a. ®nfcl, m. 
 
 Grandeur, a. ®tope, /. ; (splendor) 
 95rad^t,/. 
 
 Grant, g. SiIauBnip, /. ; — v. a. ge* 
 warren. 
 
 Grape, a. Xxaait, SBeinttaute, /. 
 
 Grasp, a. ®tifF, m.; — b. a. greifen. 
 
 Grass, a. ®raa, n. 
 
 Grateful, Oidj. bantJar. 
 
 Gratitude, a. SantBarfeit, /. 
 
 Grave, a. ®ttti, n.; ®tu6e,/. ; -dig- 
 ger, S:obtengrakr, m.; -stone, Set* 
 ijenflein, m. — ». a. cingraben. 
 
 Gray, adj. gran; — horse, ©d^tm* 
 
 Graze, 0. n. weiben. [met, m. 
 
 Greasy, adj. f^mieng. 
 
 Great, 04?. grog, (celebrated) Icrii^mt; 
 -grandfather, a. Utgrogsalet, m. ; 
 -ly, adv. fe^t, (much) »iel, auf tine 
 grope 3ltt; -ness, «. ®t6pe,/. 
 
566 
 
 VOCABULABT. — ENGLISH AND OEBMAN. 
 
 Green, ad(j. gtun x—pl. (55emfifc, ?i. 
 Greet, s. a. & n. giufen. 
 Grievance, a. SBetrittnip, /. 
 Grind, «. a. ir. ma^leni iermatmen. 
 Gripe, «. ®ttff, m.; — v. a. & n. 
 
 (grasp) jreifen, (snatch after) ju* 
 
 gtrifen. 
 Ground, «. (bottom) ®runt), TO.y 
 
 Oand) SSobttt, m. ; (Erbe, /. 
 Grow, V. n. ir. vxxd^ftn, (become) 
 
 werbcn. 
 Grumble, v. n. murrm. 
 Guard, s. SBac^e, /. ; to be on one's 
 
 — , auf ber $ut fein, |t^ t« Stc^t 
 
 ne^men ; -ian, s. SSotmunb, m. ; 
 
 (protector) Sef^^er, m. 
 Guest, «. Oafl, m. 
 Guide, «. git^tcr, m. ; — o. a. Icitcn. 
 Guilt, «. ©^ulb, /. ; -less(ly), adj. & 
 
 adv. fi^ulblo^ ; -y, a^. & adv. 
 
 fii^ulbig. 
 
 H. 
 
 Habit, s. ®two1)nS)tit, f. ; to be in 
 
 the — o^ jetBol^nt (ju) fein ; bit ®e* 
 
 tvo^n^eit l^aOett. 
 Hair, «. ^xwt, n. 
 Half, ». bie licilfte ;— a(f?. l^att ; by 
 
 halves, pr ^cilfte. 
 HaU, «. @aal, m. 
 Halt, «. 4)alt, TO.; — o. ». ^altctl. 
 Ham, «. ©(i^tnfen, »i. 
 Hammer, ». jammer, m,. 
 Hamlet, «. 2)ijrf(^ert/ n. 
 Hand, ». |)ttllbi /. 
 Handsomefly), aS^. & ffi«fe, f(^iin. 
 Happen, «. ?i. gefii^ejen, fi^ ereignett. 
 Happiness, ». ©liid, «.. / (state of) 
 
 ©Ifldfeliglcit, /. 
 
 Happy (happily), adj & flS(?B. glfttfU^, 
 
 gluctlic^crweife. 
 Harbor, «. |)ttfen, m. 
 Hard, a<^'. ^art, (tedious) mft^fitttti 
 
 (difficult) fc^wer, (wind) ^efttg ; -ly, 
 
 adiB. fdjwerlid^, (scarcely) faHm. 
 Hare, «. $afe, «J. 
 
 Hark, e. ». ^or(iS)en ; — vnierj. l^oti^ 1 
 Harm, ». Unrec^t, ». ; — v. a. fci^dben, 
 
 (hurt) serle^en. 
 Haste, 8. (Eifc / ; -n, «. a. eilen , — 
 
 D. n. teWIeunigen ; to make — , ftc^ 
 
 Sceilen. 
 Hasty (hastily), a^. & otto, eilig. 
 Hat, ». ^ut, m. 
 Hatchet, s. »etJ, «. ; Mxi, f. 
 Hate, «. ^9.% m. ; — v. a. ^ttlTen. 
 Hatred, «. |)ttf , m. ; (grudge) ©roll, 
 
 m. 
 Haughty (-Uy), adj. & (w?». (lotj. 
 Haunt, «. Stufentl^ttlti to. / — v. a. be 
 
 lajltgtn. 
 Have, ®. a. ir. l^aien. 
 Hay, s $eu, n. [headed, iar'^au|)t. 
 Head, «. Si)))f, m. ; ^axfl, n. ; bare- 
 Headstrong, ad^. ^al«|lttrtig. 
 Heal, V. a. & n. ^etlen. 
 Health, «. ®cfunb^eit, /.; -y, adg. ge- 
 
 funb ; -ful(ly), adj. & a(i®. gefunb. 
 Heap, «. $aufeit» m,.- (quantity) SKen* 
 
 ge, /. ;— D. a. pufen. 
 Hear, v. a. & ». vr. ^xm ; -d, atf;'. 
 
 gel^Srt. 
 Heart, «. Iietj, n. ; (mind) ©entiif^. 
 
 n.; -felt or (il)y, ad;. & aifo. ^erj" 
 
 liii^. 
 Heat, « ^ige, /.; — o. a. er^ifeen. 
 Heathen, s. ^eibci m. 
 Heaven, s. |iimmel, m. 
 Heavy (-ily), adj. & aofe. fi^wer. 
 Help, s. §ulff, /. ;— I), as. & n. ^etfen ; 
 
VOCABtTLABT. — ^ENGLISH ASD GERMAN. 
 
 5G7 
 
 I cannot — it, ic^ taim ni^t bafiit ; 
 
 -less, adj. plftoS. 
 Hen, s. |)cnne, /, 
 Herd, s. ^cctbe, /. 
 Here, adv. \\tx ; -after, adm. fiinftig. 
 Hero, a. ^elb, m. 
 Herring, «. Ijating, m. 
 Hesitate, D. n. jSgern, (waver) Wantm. 
 Hide, s. Iiaut, /.; — v. a. sertergen. 
 High(ly), adj. & a£?». :^o(^ ; -way, 
 
 8ttnb)ltape, /.; -wayman, ©trafen* 
 
 rttukr, TO. 
 Hill, ». Iiugel, m. 
 Him, prOTi. i^m. 
 Hinder, «. a. l^tnbern, (prevent) «b* 
 
 ^ttlten. 
 Hire, v. a. (person) bingen, (house, 
 
 etc.) mief^en. 
 History, s. ©efc^ic^tc, / 
 Hither, adm. '^Ux^tx. '■ 
 
 Hold, ®. a. ir. ^altm, (contain) faffen. 
 Hollow, adj. ^0^1. 
 Home, «. ^eimat^, /. / — ««?». l^eim, 
 
 na($ §aufe ; at — , ju ^aufe. 
 Honest(ly), adj. & a&i. e^rli^f (up- 
 right) icbliii^. 
 Honey, ». §o«ig, to. 
 Honor, «. E^te, /. ; — ». a. e^ten ; 
 
 -able (-ably), a,dj. & atfe. e^ren»ell, 
 
 reblic^. 
 Hoof, «. $«f» »re. 
 Hop, V. n. ppfcn. 
 Hope, 8. |)offnuttfl, /. ;— «. ». ^offen ; 
 
 in hopes, ^offentlic^. 
 Horn, s. $otn, Ji. 
 Horrible (-ly), ac^. & adv. groufam, 
 
 Horse, s. 95ferb, j!../-back, jU 9)ferbe; 
 
 -man, s. Sleiter, to. 
 Hospitable (-ly), adj. & adi>. gaflfvei. 
 Host, «. (inn) SBtrt^, ®a(hi)trt5, to. 
 
 Hot, a^'. ^etg, warm ; red-, glii^enb. 
 
 Hotel, s. §oteI, ra. 
 
 Hour, s. ©tunbe, /. 
 
 House, «. $ttu«, n.; at the — of, Bet. 
 
 How, adv. ttite ; -ever, aitx, jeboc^, 
 bennoc^, (nevertheless) nic^tabeilo- 
 wetitger. 
 
 Huge(ly), adj. & adv. unge^eutr, (ex- 
 traordinary) aupcrorbentlid). 
 
 Hnman(ly), adj. & adv. ma\i)liilj. 
 
 Hundred, «. ^unbert, n. ;—adj. :^un'' 
 
 Hunger, «. hunger, m. [bert. 
 
 Hunter, g. Sdget, to. 
 
 Hurricane, s. Drtan, Stutm, m. 
 
 Hurriedly, adv. tiligP. 
 
 Hurry, «. Eile, /.; — ». n. eilen. 
 
 Hurt, «. (wound) SJerleJung, /. ; (in- 
 jury) ©c^ttbcn, TO.; — ». a. ir. (give 
 pain) tue^e tjun, (wound) serlc^en. 
 
 Husband, ». iKann, ©^ernanit, to. 
 
 I. 
 
 Ice, ». ffit3, re. / a piece of — , dii' 
 
 Idea, ». Sbec, /./ (conception) S8c» 
 
 grijf, TO. / (thought) ®ebante, to. 
 If, cojt/. wenn, oi. 
 Ignorant(ly), ac^. & «(?«. uniDilfciib, 
 
 unfunbtg. 
 ni, adj. & adv. front ; -ness, g. SxmU 
 
 Beit, /. 
 Image, g. IBilb, re. 
 Imagination, ». SJorjleHung, /./ (con 
 
 ceit) EinMIbung, /. 
 Imagine, v. a. ftd) cinWtbcn. 
 Inmiediate(ly), adj. & adv. foglci^ 
 
 fofort. 
 ImmenBe(ly), a^. & ad«. unge^euer. 
 Impatience, g. ttngebulb, /. 
 
568 
 
 YOCABTJLAKT. — BNGLIBH AND GBBMAN. 
 
 Impatient, ad^, ungebulbig. 
 Importance, s. SBic^tisfeit, /. 
 Important, cbd^. Wic^tig, icbentenb. 
 Impassible (}.y), ac^. & a&o. unmogUc^- 
 Impotent(ly), adj. & adv. jinseimii' 
 
 genb, (weak) fc^wad^. 
 Imprint, 'S. a. bnufen. 
 Imprison, z. a. gefoitgen M^XMXL^or 
 
 fcjni ; — V. n. scfangen jijen. 
 Improve, t. a. & n. serteffeni, pone's 
 
 self) jtc^ befiein ; -ment, «. SJerbef= 
 
 ferunj, /./ (piogiess) gortf(^ritt, m. 
 In, prep, in, ttn, auf. 
 Inattentive(Iy), od/. & o<to. unauf^ 
 
 mcttfam. 
 Inch, «. Sou, m. 
 
 Income,*. Sinfommen, n.; Stnfiinfte,^^. 
 Inconsiderate(ly), adj. uniebai^tfani, 
 
 (rash) «ortvt$ig. 
 Inconsistent(ly), ac^. & adv. Wiber- 
 
 fprc^enb. 
 Inconstant(ly), adj. & a3n>. unic» 
 
 jlcinbig. 
 Increase, • «. Sltna'^nttf /• / — "■ n. 
 
 (grow) wac^ftn, (thrive) gcbci^eit ; 
 
 — ■». a. (quantity) ttxmtfftm, (mag- 
 nify) sctgropern. 
 Indebted, adj. f^ulbtg, Derfc^ulbet, 
 
 (obliged) verbimben. 
 Indeed, ad/v. tBtrHic^, fiirWa^r, (of 
 
 course) freilii^. 
 Indian, s. Snbtamr, m. [giilttg. 
 
 Indifferent(ly), adj. & adm. glei^' 
 Indigence, «. SRangel, m. 
 Indigent, adj. bfofttg, (poor) arm. 
 Induce, n. a. ^eranlaffen. 
 Indulgence, ». ®cbulb, /. 
 IndiiBtriou8(Iy), adj. & ad/e. fleipg. 
 Industry, «. gleig, m. 
 Inferior, adj. ntebriger, (lower) xmitx, 
 
 (worse) Wlec^tet. 
 
 Inflexible (-ly), adj. & adm. unBlegfam. 
 Influence, «. ©inftup, m.;—v. a. 6in' 
 
 flug ^aJen. 
 Inform, v. a. (communicate) ienac^' 
 
 ri(^tigen, (instruct) untem^ten> 
 
 (teach) bele^ten ; -atlon, a. (knowl- 
 edge) flennttti^, /./ (report) Se» 
 
 ri#t, «i. / (news) 3iai)xxi)t, %\ii' 
 
 funft, /. 
 Ingeniou8(ly), adj. & tw^. jinnreii^/ 
 
 getflreid^ [m. 
 
 Inhabitant, s. ffiintto^n, Sewo^ner, 
 Inherit, D. a. criert. 
 Injure, v. a. (hurt) ttctlegen, (harm) 
 
 fi^aben. 
 Injuriou8(Iy) a^. & adv. fc^abtic^. 
 Ink, «. ®inte or Itnte, /. 
 Innocence, «. Unf(^ulb, /. 
 Innocent(ly), adj. & adv. unfi^ulbig, 
 
 (harmless) unf^cibUd^. 
 Inquiry, ». 9lac^ftagc, ©rhtnbtgung, /. 
 Inquisitive, ac0. neugiettg. 
 Insect, s. Snfctt, n. 
 Insist, V. n. Sefle^ett, it^antn (auf). 
 Instance, «. (example) Seifpiel, n. ; 
 
 (occasion) ®elegen^eit, /. 
 Instant, «. Stusenilttf, to. / -ly, adj. 
 
 & adv. AugenbliifU^. 
 Instead (of), prep, (latt, anjlatt ; — of 
 
 it, bafitr. 
 Instruct, V. a. unterri^tett, le^ren ; -ion, 
 
 8. Unttrri^t, m.; -or, «. Secret, m. 
 Instrument, s. Snjlrument, n. 
 Insuflerable (-ly), adj. & adv. mtX' 
 
 trdglic^. 
 Intelligence, s. (news) Sfa^rt^t, /. ; 
 
 (imderstanding) Serflanb, to. 
 Intend, v. a. & n. beabfti^tigen, SSiQen^ 
 
 feiit. 
 Intention, «. (aim) Stipc^t, /.; (mind) 
 
 ©inn, TO. ; (end) 3t»e(f , to. 
 
VOCABtTLAKY. — ENGLISH AND OBKMAN. 
 
 569 
 
 Intercourse, ». SBerfe^r, Umgang, m. 
 Interest, s. 3ntcte|fe, n. ; (share) Sin* 
 
 t^eil, m..; (gain) QJewinn, m.; — ». a. 
 
 intercffttcn, (concern) angc^en ; -ing, 
 
 •paH. & adj. interelfant, (attractive) 
 
 ansteVni>' (entertaining) untei^al* 
 
 tenb. 
 Interior, «. Snnete, n.; (country) 3n» 
 
 lanb, n.; — aSj. innerlic^. 
 Interpret, u. a. (explain) etftareti; 
 
 (translate) u6erfc|en. 
 Intimate, «. SJcrtrautc, to. &/.; — "o.a. 
 
 jtt Kerjlel^En ge^tn ; -I7, a&j. & as*!). 
 
 sertvaut. 
 Into, prep, in, ^tnein. [ttciglic^. 
 
 Intolerable (-ly), fflt?;'. & a(?«. unet* 
 Introduce, «. a. (to society) einfu^rcn, 
 
 (to persons) scrfleHen. 
 Invade, ®. a. (enter) einfftUcn, ein* 
 
 Bremen/ (attack) ftierfallcn, angrcifcn. 
 Invent, «. a. erflnben, (fabricate) er* 
 
 benten ; -or, «. Erfinber, to. 
 Invitation, «. ginlabung, /. 
 Invite, V. a. etntaben. 
 Iron, s. Eifen, n. 
 Island, «. Snfeli /• 
 It, prora. ea. 
 Importance, ». SSJtc|tigfeit, /. / it is 
 
 of — to me, %i Itegt mir »iel baran. 
 
 J. 
 
 Jest, ». ©pag, ©*er5, to.;— «. n. f^et* 
 
 jen, fraf en. 
 Jew, «. Subc, TO.; -ish, adj. jubifc^. 
 Jewel, s. Slcinob, n.; Sutoele, /.; 
 
 gbclflein/ to. 
 Join, «. a. (connect) serdntgtn, set* 
 
 Jtnben; -er, «. liWet, to. 
 Jointly, odj; & aSm. jufammen, set" 
 
 innben. 
 
 Joke, «. ©jag, ©(i^eri. "*• ; — "• <*• & 
 
 m. fc^erjen, ftjofen. 
 Journal, 8. SeitungSMatt, Souinat, n. 
 Journey, «. SReife/ /. ; — on foot, 
 
 gugreife, /.; — v. n. reifen. 
 Joy, «. grcube, /. 
 Judge, s. SRic^ter, m. ; — v. a. & n. 
 
 ric|te«; (of) urt:^eilcn, Seurt^eilen. 
 Judgment, «. ©ntfi^eibunfl, /. ; (law) 
 
 "Oeri^t, n.; (faculty) Mrt:^eil«trttft,/. 
 July, «. Sulii TO. 
 Jump, «. M.. i/r. ftringen. 
 Just(ly), adj. & adAi. geted^t; — now, 
 
 ad-o. foeScn; -ify, «. ct. rec^tfettigen. 
 
 K. 
 
 Keep, «. a. ir. '^aTtcn, (retain) Je» 
 
 fatten. 
 Key, ». ©^lufTel, to 
 Kick, j>. a. & 71. au«fi$Iagen, mit bem 
 
 gu^e anSWIagen. 
 KUl, ■». a. tiibten. 
 Kind, «. ©ttthing, /. ; (-ly), adj. & 
 
 adM. giittg, ^olb ; -hearted, adj. 
 
 guf^erjig ; -ness, s. ©ute, ®itttgleit, 
 
 /.;-heartedness,«. ©utmut^igfeit,/. 
 King, «. .Ronig, to. ; -dom, s. ^iinig* 
 
 Knife, «. SWeifer, m. 
 
 Knock, s. ©c^lag, to.; (at a door) 
 Slopfen, n.; — ». 71. Ho))fen, antlopfen. 
 
 Know, 7). ffl. ir. Wiffen, (a person) 
 tennen ; -ledge, «. Scnntmp, /. ; (ex- 
 perience) Erfa^vung, /. ; -n, adj. 
 Selannt. 
 
 Labor, s. STrieit, /. ; (pains) ^u^t, 
 /.; — B. n. arteiten ; -er, «. Strtciter, 
 TO. ; (day) Sagrti^neti to. 
 
570 
 
 VOOABtHiAIlY. — ENGLISH AKD GERMAN. 
 
 Lad, 8. Sraxit, Sungei m. 
 
 Lady, a. Dame, Srau, /. 
 
 Lake, a. 'Set, in. 
 
 Lamb, a. Samnii n. [iebauern. 
 
 Lament, v. n. flagetl ; — v. a. (ellaaen, 
 
 Lamp, 8. Samije, /. 
 
 Land, «. Sanb, n. / -lord, a. SBitt^, to. 
 
 Language, a. ©f w^t» /■ 
 
 Lank, a<7;'. fi^Iant. 
 
 Large, cidj. grop, (extensive) toeit, 
 
 breit ; -ness, a. ®to6e, /.y (width) 
 
 Steite,/.; (extent) Sluabe^ming, /. 
 Last, «. n. bauertt ; — o^'. Xt^tt, (past) 
 
 tjortge ; at — , f^IiepU^. 
 Late(ly), adj. & adv. fijcit, (siortly) 
 
 neult^ ; to be — , |i^ »etft>aten. 
 Latter (ly), ad». \t%(\.\^) ; — 0(ij. fpcitcr, 
 
 (late) refetli*- (last) Iett(er, c, 8). 
 Laugh, ■<). lac^en ; -ter, a. (Selac^tet, m. 
 Law, a. Oefeftt SRec^t, n./ -book, ®t' 
 
 fcPuii^, m. ; -giver, ©efejgetcr, m.; 
 
 -suit, SJroje^i m. 
 Lay, V. a. i/r. legen, jlellcn ; to — hold 
 
 o^ ergreifen ; to — the foundation 
 
 of, gritnben. 
 Laziness, a. SJauI'^eiti Stag^eit, /. 
 Lazy, fig. fauli troige ; — fellow, 
 
 5?aullenjcr, to. 
 Lead, a. 93Iei, n. 
 Lead, «. gul^rung, Sdtungf /. / — v. a. 
 
 & n. ir. fii^reiti leiten ; to — back, 
 
 juruilfu^rcn ; -er, a. Srnfii^ter, to. 
 Leaf, a. ©latt, n. 
 
 League, ». Sunb, to.; ffiunbiti^, n. 
 Learn, «. a. & n. Itrtien, (experience) 
 
 erfa^ten; -ing, a. ®elcl^tfam(eit, 
 
 Stlbung, /. 
 Least, adj. tleinlle, wenigfie ; adv. am 
 
 ttenigjlcti ; at — , at the — , »eitig» 
 
 (len«, minbefJms. 
 Leave, a. (pennission) SrlauBni^. /. ; 
 
 (furlough) UrIauB/ to.; — v. a. &n. 
 
 ir. lajfen, ttireifen, (forsake) »er< 
 
 taffeni to — to, uierlalTen; to — 
 
 oflfj nai^IaJTctt. 
 Led-hoTse, a. ^anbpferb, m. 
 Ledge, «. Cage, /.; (edge) SRanb, to. 
 Leech, «. ©lutegel, to. 
 Leg, s. Sein, m. 
 Lend, «. a. ir. Ici^en. 
 Length, «. Cdngc, /. ; (duration) 
 
 Saucr, /.; (extent) 3lM8bc]^nnng, /.; 
 
 at — , adv. enblid). 
 Less, adj. & adv. iveniger, minber. 
 Lesson, a. Seftioti, /. ; (instruction) 
 
 Unterric^t, to. ; (of a teacher) Se^t* 
 
 flunbe, /. 
 Lest, eonj. bamit ni^t, bag tli^t. 
 Let, V. a. ir. lafTEiti (house, etc) ucr* 
 
 mict^etl ; v. n. (permit) juloffen. 
 Letter, a. Srtef, to.; (alphabet) 
 
 f8viS)^abt(n), to.; -carrier, Stief* 
 
 iote, TO. 
 Level, a. gla^e,/.; — (wf;. glet^, eSen, 
 
 (flat) flac^ : — V. a. & n. gtetc^ or 
 
 dm mai^tn ; to — with the 
 
 ground, ber Etbe gletc^ mac^en. 
 Liberal, adj. Itieral, (generous) frei' 
 
 Liberty, a. Srei^eit, /. ; to take the 
 — , fic^ bte grei^eit nejmen. 
 
 Librarian, a. fBiillet^etcix, to. 
 
 Lie, a. fiiige, /.; — v. n. ir. (speak 
 falsely) lugen, (recline) liegen. 
 
 Life, a. Utim, n. ; -less, a^. IeH»8, 
 tobt. 
 
 Lift, V. a. & n. ir. ^eJen ; to — up, 
 auf^eicn. 
 
 Light, a. Sic^t, n.;—adj. & adv. leti^t, 
 (step) leife ; -minded, leic^tflnnig , 
 — V. a. & n. ir. leuditen ; -ning, 
 a. Slt^ TO.; -rod, Sltgableiter, to. 
 
VOCABTTLAEY. — ENGLISH AND QEBMAN. 
 
 571 
 
 Like, ac^. gtet^, ttie , — adv. gcrn ; -ly, 
 adj. roaljrfi^cinlii^ , — e. n. gefallen, 
 getn^dkn, mogen, Iteben ; to be — , 
 gleic^en ; -wise, adv. 9let(|fattg. 
 
 Liking, s. Siete, /. ; ©efaHen, m.; 
 (taste) ®efc^mtttf, m. 
 
 Lily, «. Silie, /. 
 
 Limb, «. (branch) 9tjl, m. 
 
 Limit, «. ©renje, /./ — ». a. iegtensen. 
 
 Lineament, «. @e{tc^td3ugf m. 
 
 Linen, g. fieintBanb; SBSoifc^e,/. 
 
 Lion, s. £iisve/ tra. 
 
 List, s. Si|le, /. 
 
 Listen, v. a. & n. laHfc^eit, ^orc^cn ; — 
 to, folgen. 
 
 Literal(ly), adj. & ddm. iuc^|lci6lt^, 
 (exact words) Wiittlid^. 
 
 Little, adj. & adv. (small) Kein, 
 (not much) wenig, (trifling) gcring. 
 
 live, V. n. Men, (dwell) ii)o:^nm ; -ly, 
 adj. & adv. lei^aft. 
 
 Load, s. Sabung/ /.; (burden) Sttfl, /. 
 
 Loaf, g. Srob, n. 
 
 Lock, «. ®i^l»g, 71. ; — V. a. f(i^liegen, 
 (up) 5uf(5Itegen. 
 
 Locomotive, s. Socrnnotisci /./ Sampf^ 
 wagen. to. 
 
 Lodger, «. Sewo'^ner, SBJief^er, m. 
 
 Lodging, ». aBo^tiungi /. ; (for the 
 night) SJat^rtaget, n. 
 
 Lofty, «(?;. & adv. Jo^, (proud) ^ols, 
 (sublime) er^aSen. 
 
 Long, ac??. & adm. langi jcbe^nt, grog ; 
 — ago, f^on lange, »or langcr Sett ; 
 — v.n. to — for, ftd& fe^nra na{| ; 
 -er, a^". langer. 
 
 Look, a. Slid, »re. ; (aspect) 3Riene, 
 f.;—pl. (face) ®e|lc^t, n.; (appear- 
 ance) %Vi.i\ii)ta, n.; — v. a. & n. fc^cn, 
 ■ (seem) auafe:^m ; to — for, fui^en ; 
 to — upon, iettac^ten ; to — 
 
 around, jic^ umfe^en ; -ing-glasa, 
 
 ©(lieget, m. 
 Loose(ly), adj. & adv. Io«, (free) frei, 
 
 (unchaste) liebevU^. 
 Lord, «. |)err, m. ; (peer) Soibi m. 
 Lose, V. a. & n. vr. sevUercn. [m. 
 Loss, s. SJetlujl, Ml.; (harm) ©c^aben. 
 Lost, part. & adj. serloteni (ruined) 
 
 ruinirt. 
 Loud(ly), adj. & adm. laut. 
 Louse, «. Cau«, /. 
 Love, «. 8ie6e, /.; — o. a. licBen, (like) 
 
 gern ^aitn. 
 Low, atf;. & adv. niebrig, unter, (deep) 
 
 tief, (not loud) Uifc. 
 Luck, s. ®Iud, ?i.; -y, ck?^' gludli^ ; 
 
 -ily, adv. gliidliilcrtBeife. 
 Luggage, s. ®tf(iS, n. 
 
 M. 
 
 Mad(ly), adj. k adv. t»a:^nfittntg. 
 Made, pa/rt. past, gemac^t. 
 Madam, s. SBtabame, /. 
 Magistrate, a. DStigtett, /. j 0lic^ter, 
 
 m. 
 Magnificent(ly), a^. & adv. ^ettlic^. 
 Maid, a. Sungfrau, /. / (servant) 
 
 aSagb, /. 
 Main(ly), adj. & adv. ^ausjtfci^lic^, 
 
 (chief) »orne:^m|5e, T^anpi^adjlidj^t. 
 Maintain, •». a. & re. (support) er^al' 
 
 ten, (assert) it^an\)ttn, (defend) uer* 
 
 t^eibigen. 
 Maintenance, s. Er^altung, /. 
 Major, «. SRajor, m. 
 Make, v. a. & n. inac^en> (do) i\im ; to 
 
 — use of, ttnwmben. 
 Man, a. 3Kenfii^f m.; (male sex) SRanit, 
 
 m. ; — of honor, ©^renmttjiti, m. ; 
 
 -kind, baa mmfd^U^e ®ef(^lec^t. 
 
573 
 
 TOCABULABY.— ENGLISH AKD GEBMAN. 
 
 Management, s. SSerWiItungt /. 
 Manner, 4. Strt, /.; (way) Seifc, 
 
 aJlaniei, /. 
 Mantle, s. SBlantcl, m. 
 Many, adj. Siele ; — a, Stele, monger. 
 March, s. 5R(irs, m.;—v. n. marf^iren. 
 Mare, a. ©tute, /. 
 Mark, s. Seic^en, 3Rart. »./ 3Karte,/./ 
 
 (border) ©renje,/./ — n. a. & n. aui» 
 
 jeic^neti, jtgniten; -sman,«. ©c^itje,«». 
 Market, a. SBlttttt, »i./-place, SBlartt/ m. 
 Marriage, s. ^oc^jeit, ^eiraf^, /. / 
 
 (matrimony) SJe,/. 
 Many, «. a. & m. '^eiraQen, (give in 
 
 marriage) ser^^eirat^en. 
 Martyr, «. SJJoitti^rer, m. 
 Master, ». (workman) 3)Jei|}er, m. / 
 
 (the Lord; also the title Mr.) 
 
 |)etr, m. 
 Material(ly), adj. & adB. niatciielt, 
 
 (Important) tvefentli^ 
 Matter, s. ©a^e, /. / (affair) Stngelc 
 
 genjeit, /. ; what is the — ? n>tt« 
 
 gieit c« ? 
 May, «. SBlftt, m. 
 Mayor, «. Siirgermeijler, »ra. 
 Mean, adj. niebtig ; -s, a. iBJittcI, n. / 
 
 by means of; sermtttclfl ; by no 
 
 means, nnter teiuen Umflctnben. 
 Meaning, a. ©inn, m. 
 Meat, a. gleifc^, n. 
 Meditate, v. a. & n. finncn, (ponder) 
 
 na^benfen. 
 Meditation, a. SWac^bcnlen, n. 
 Meet, v.a.&n. ttcffen, jHfttmmentreffen, 
 
 (in a place) begegnem (together) 
 
 ji^ serfammeln ; to — with, an* 
 
 treffen ; -ing, a. SSerfammlung, /. 
 Melancholy, «. ©(^tecrmut'^, /./ — adj. 
 
 fd^wtrmiit^ig, (sad) ttautig. 
 Melodious(ly), ac^. & adv. tnclobtfi^. 
 
 Memory, a. ®eboc^tmp, n. 
 
 Mend, «. a. auSbeffcrn. 
 
 Mention, a. Erwa^nung, /.; — o. a. tx* 
 
 IBoi^nen, gebcnfen ; to make — , er* 
 
 ttci^nen {with gen.) 
 Merchant, a. Saufmann, m. 
 Mere, ac^. (entire) lauter, (vain) eittl. 
 Merit, v. a. serbienen. 
 Messenger, a. ©efanbte, m. 
 Metal, a. SKetatt, to. 
 Method, a. 3Rct^obe, /.,• (manner) 
 
 SEBeife, /. 
 Might, a. WaS)t, ®tmXt, f. 
 Mild(ly), adj. & adv. fanft. 
 MUe, s. mtUe, f. 
 Military, ac^. friegerif^. 
 Mind, a. ®emitt!^, to. ; Serflanb, ©inn, 
 
 m. ; (will) SBiHe, m. ; -fiil(ly), 
 
 adj. & adv. (attentive) aufhtettfttm, 
 
 (thoughtful) eingeben!. 
 Mine, a. Sergttetl, to. 
 Miner, a. SBergmann, m. 
 Mineral, a. SRineral, to. 
 Minister, a. (pastor) 3)rebiger, m. 
 Minute, a. SJlinute, /. 
 Miracle, a. SSJunber, to. 
 Mirror, a. ©(Jtegel, m. 
 Mischance, a. UnfaU, m. ; UngIM,-TO. 
 Miser, a. ®etifald, m. 
 Misery, a. Sttmmer, m.; (want) 9lot^,/. 
 Misfortune, a. Ungliid, to. 
 Miss, ». gtoiulein, to./ — v. a. & to. feV 
 
 len, Dcrminen. 
 Mistake, a. Scaler, m.; — v. a. & n.ir. 
 
 setfcnncn, |t^ irren, fe^Ien; to be 
 
 mistaken, jlc^ irren, (in error) im 
 
 Srtt^um fein. 
 Mock, V. a. & TO. Derfpotten. 
 Modern, adj. ntobern, mobif(^, neu. 
 Moment, a. $(ugenbliit, m. 
 Monarch, a. SWonttrc^, m. 
 
YOCABDI-AKT.— ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 
 
 673 
 
 Monday, ». SKontog, m. 
 
 Money, «. ®elti, n. ; -box, ©elbfaffe, 
 
 /.; -less, adj. flelbloS. 
 Monkey, s. Slffe, m. 
 MonstrouB(ly), adj. & adm. unge^euet. 
 Month, 8. 3)li)nat, m. 
 Moie, adj. & adv. me^r, (still) no^. 
 Morn(ing), s. SKotgen, «». / this — , 
 
 l^cute SWorgen. 
 Morrow, s. SKotgen, m. ; to — , o^. 
 
 morgen. 
 Mortal(ly), adj. & ads. (Icrtlic^. 
 Mosquito, s. 3Jtu«ttto, »». & /. 
 Most, adj. mrijl ; otto, am meiflen. 
 Mother, «. 3)lutt», /. 
 Motion, s. aSetoegung, /. / to put in 
 
 — , tretien, in Semcgung fefeen. 
 Mound, ». ©amm, to. 
 Mount, ». Ji. (Icigen ; -ain, «. Serg, 
 
 m. ; (chain of) Oeitrgc, n. 
 Mouse, s. SMtttt?, /. 
 Move, B. a. Setnegen, (persuade) uief 
 
 reben. 
 Much, oiZJ. & adm. Did, (very) fel^r ; 
 
 how — , wtE sicl. 
 Multitude, s. SWenge, /.; |iaufe(n), m. 
 Murder, s. ©rmorbimg, /. 
 Muscle, s. SRuSfel, «i. 
 Museum, a. SRufcum, ». 
 Music, «. sKurtf, /. 
 Mutual(ly), a<?j. & adm. gcgenfcilig. 
 Mysterious(ly), adj. & adm. ge^eim* 
 
 Mystical(ly), a(?/. & adv. gc^eimnig'' 
 
 N. 
 
 Nail, «. SZagel, »re. 
 Naked(ly), a^. & odn. natft. 
 Kame, s. 9Jame(n), ot. 
 
 Namely, adfe. namliii^. 
 
 Napkin, «. ©er»iette, /. 
 
 Narrate, ■». a. erjci'^len. 
 
 Narrow, adj. cnge ; — pa,ss, «. (Eng» 
 
 iJflp, Mi. 
 
 Nation, «. Station, /. y SJolt, re. 
 
 Native country, ». §eimat^, /. [n. 
 
 Nature, s. Jlatur, /.; (mind) Oeraiit^, 
 
 Naughty, adj. unatttg, angejogen. 
 
 Near, adj. na'^e, uin, (towards) gcgcn ; 
 -est, «. 9lac^(le, m. ; -ly, adv. iet» 
 na^c, (almost) fttfl ; -ness, Sla^e, /. 
 
 Neat(ly), a^. & adv. fauict. 
 
 Necessary, ai?;. not^, niit^ig. 
 
 Neck, «. .fiaW, m.y -erehief, s. ^M' 
 IVii), n. 
 
 Need, s. Jlot^, /. y to have — of, 
 ixauijttt, icburfeit ; — v. n. Srauc^en, 
 Sebitrfen ; -fully, adj. & adv. noti). 
 
 Needle, s. SJabel, / y (for sewing) 
 9Jtt^nabel, /. 
 
 Neglectful, adj. nad^laJTig. 
 
 Negligence, s. 9}a^Ia|Tigfeit» /. 
 
 Negligent(ly), ac^. & ado. na^Iaffig. 
 
 Negotiate, «. n. unttr^anbeln. 
 
 Neighbor, s. ?iac^6at, m. 
 
 Neither, canj. tueber ; — nor, tteber 
 — no(i^. 
 
 Nephew, «. SReffe, m. 
 
 Nerve, s. 9iet»(e), m.; ?Jer»e, /. 
 
 Nest, s. 5Jc|l, ». 
 
 Net, s. Vlcf^, n. 
 
 Never, adv. nk, ntemaT^ ; -theless, 
 adv. nii|t«bejlowtmgtr, benno^, boc^. 
 
 New, a^'. ncu ; -s, pi. 9ieuigfett, /. y 
 what is the news? Kdi gtetlM 
 3?cuea ? -paper, s. Seitung, /. 
 
 Next, adj. nac^fl. 
 
 Nice(ly), astf;. & adv. (fine) feitl, (ac- 
 curate) genau. 
 
 Niece, «. 9?id)te, /. 
 
574 
 
 VOCABULABY. — ENGLISH AND OEBMAN. 
 
 Nigh, a^. tui^t. 
 
 Night, «. SRac^t, /.; last — , tetsati' 
 
 gene Slac^t ; to — , ^eute Sllicnb. 
 ISfine, adj. ntun. 
 No, adu. nein ; indef. numeral, letit; 
 
 -body, pron. SRiemanb. 
 Noble X-bly ),«(??■. &fl5(i«. ebel; -man, 
 
 a. (Ebclmann, m. 
 Nod, V. n. iiitfen, (drowsy) fc^tamnierit. 
 Noise, ». ®etaufc^, m./ 8arm, m. 
 Nominate, n. a. etnennen. 
 Noon, 8. SBlittag, m. 
 Nor, eonj. mH). 
 North, «. 9jDtb, m. 
 Nose, «. 9tttfe, /. 
 Not, ado. ni^t. 
 
 Note, s. SBec^fel, ?»./ (music) SRote,/. 
 Nothing, ado. niifti. 
 Notice, V. a. iemertcn. 
 Notwithstanding, conj. ungeaii^tet) 
 
 benno^, ntc^t^beflotveniger. 
 Nourishment, «. ©pctft> /. 
 November, s. dlowmin, m. 
 Now, ado. nun, je^t. 
 Nowhere, adv. nirgenba. 
 Number, «. 30.1)1, STnifll^I,/. 
 Numerous, adj. jajlreic^. 
 Nurse, s. SSScirtetin, /.; (wet)-, SCmmtr 
 
 /.; — V. a. (in fUness) pfTegtit. 
 Nut, «, Slug, / 
 
 Oak, «. ei^e, /. 
 Oats, s. pi. f)afer> m. 
 Obedience, s. Oe^otfam, m. 
 Obedient(ly), adj. & ado. ge^orfam. 
 Obey, V. a. ge^orii^en, (be subject to) 
 
 unteit^an fein. 
 Object, «. ©egen^anb, m. 
 Obligation, a. SJcriiPii^tung, /. 
 
 Oblige, V. a. (by favor) Deryflic^ten, 
 (compel) nSt^igen; -d, sertunben, 
 »er))fli(^tet ; to be obliged, mitifen, 
 foQen, geneticist fein. 
 
 Obscure, adj. bunfel. 
 
 Obscurity, a. Iiunfel^etti /. 
 
 Observe, «. a. iemcrten. 
 
 Obstinate(ly), adj. & ado. ^aUflanig. 
 
 Obtain, v. a. erl^ttltcn, (secure reach) 
 etteic^cn. 
 
 Occasion, a. QJelegen^ett, /. 
 
 Occur, V. n. fi6) ereignen. 
 
 Ocean, «. Ocean, m. ; 3Rcer, n. 
 
 O'clock, at . . . — , urn . . . UJr. 
 
 October, a. DctoJer, to. 
 
 Odd(ly), ad). & adv. fonbetbar. 
 
 Of, prep, son, ani ; — it, bariiitr ; — 
 what, woson, wotutet. 
 
 Off, adv. fort, bttKon. 
 
 Offend, D. a. beleibigen ; -ed, icietbigt. 
 
 Offer, V. a. Meten/ (propose) anMeten ; 
 — a. Slnttttg, m. ; Slncrtieten, n. 
 
 Office, a. Wmt, n.; -r, a. Dfficier, m. 
 
 Often, adv. oftt 6fter9. 
 
 Oh ! interj. e1)l aS)l 
 
 Oa, a. Oel, 71. 
 
 Old, adj. alt : — age, a. Sitter, n. 
 
 On, prep, an, auf, Set , — adv. fovt ; on 
 band, 6ei ber $anb, (present) gegen' 
 t»atttg ; — that side, jenfeitS. 
 
 Once, adv. einmal, (formerly) einfl ; 
 — more, noc^ cinmal; at — , auf 
 einmal, (immediately) fogleic^, fo" 
 fort. 
 
 One, a^. tin, eine, etn. 
 
 Only,a(^; einjig ;— at^B.alleln, nur,er|l. 
 
 Open, «. a. iiffnen, aufmac^cn, auft^un, 
 — V. n. (as a box) aufge^n, itdC 
 ofnen ; -ing, a. (Stoffnung, /. 
 
 Opera, a. iOptx, f. ; -house, Di)ern> 
 1)auii n. 
 
VOCABULARY.— ENGLISH AHD OERMAII. 
 
 575 
 
 Opponent, s. ©egner, m. 
 Opportunity, «. ©Elegen^eit, /. 
 Oppose, B. a. fic| wiberfejen ; to stand 
 
 opposed, (|t($) gegtnuberjJt^en. 
 Opposite(ly), adg. & adv. segcnitier. 
 Opposition, «. S5!iber|lanb, m. 
 Oppressive, adj. btitienb. 
 Opulent, adj. xdij. 
 Or, core;, ober. 
 Orange, s. Slljfeirtne, /. 
 Order, s. Drbnung, /. / (command) 
 
 Sefe^I, m. ; in — that, bamit ; — 
 
 v. a. to — , geiieten. 
 Oriental, adj. onentalift^. 
 Origin, s. Slnfang, m. ; (derivation) 
 
 Sttflammung, /. 
 Other, adj. anber. 
 Ought, V. aux. follctt. 
 Out, adv. ttuS; — -prep, auger; -cry, «. 
 
 ©^ret, m. y — v. a. (exclaim) axii<- 
 
 rufen, itierfclrcieti ; -side, prep. 
 
 augcr^alS. 
 Oven,'«. (Saa)Dfen, m. 
 Over, prep, iiier, b«r(6 ;— a(2«. :|er= 
 
 iiber, (remainder) baritter ;-coat, ». 
 
 tttberroif, »». / -come, e. «s. ir. k* 
 
 Sttingen; -take, b. a. ir. ein^olcn, 
 
 (surprise) it6errafi^en. 
 Owe, V. n. fi^ulben. 
 Own, V. a. anetfcnnen (power) befi^en. 
 Ox, ». ^iji or D^fe, m. 
 Oyster, s. Stuflcr, /. 
 
 P. 
 
 Page, a. Stite, /. 
 
 Pain, s. Sc^mcrj, m.; (torment) 
 
 Dual, /. / — V. a. & n. we^e t^un ; 
 
 to take pains, )tc^ 3Rii^c geben, M 
 
 bemii^eit. 
 Painter, s. 3)!ater, m. 
 
 Painting, «. ®emttlbe, Silb/ ra. 
 
 Pair, «. 9>aar, n. 
 
 PaJaoe, s. 9)ala|l, to. 
 
 Pale(ly), adj.. & adv. bittf, bleic^ ; to 
 
 grow — , erMei(^en; -ness, s. SlaflCr 
 
 /• 
 Pang, «. S*Etn/ Dual, /. 
 Pantaloons, «. ©eintlciber, n. pi. 
 Paper, «. 9)a))ier, m. y (documents) 
 
 Stctett, /. pi.; (newspaper) Seitung, 
 
 /• 
 Parallel, «. 3)arttllelc, Ste^nlic^teit, /. 
 Parasol, s. ©onncnfc^trm, m. 
 Pardon, v. a. uersci^en, DetgeScn. 
 Parents, «. Slterit, pi. 
 PaTsimoniou6(Iy), adj. & ad/o. genau. 
 Parson, a. 9>faffe, m. 
 Part, a. %\n\, m. ; (in a play) 
 
 8ioIIe, /./ — ». a. t:^eilen ; to — with, 
 
 (leave) ȣria|fen, (give up) aufgebcn ; 
 
 T-ly, adv. tl^eila ; -ition, a. S^cilung, 
 
 /.;-y, «. 3)artct,/. 
 Particulars, a. Einjcl^ctteu, /. pi. 
 Pass, V. n. serge'^en, (happen) ftc^ jU' 
 
 fitgcn ; to — away, uerge^en ; 
 
 -enger,s.9)a|ftt9tcr,TO.; — through, 
 
 (travel) burc^tcifen ; -age, a. SEBeg, 
 
 m.; (journey) %a\xt, f. 
 Passion, a. SJaffion, /.; (anger) Sctti, 
 
 m.; |)i6e, /.; to fly into a — , Icf- 
 
 tig tterben. 
 Past, adj. setgangcn. 
 Pasture, v. a. & n. WttbtU. 
 Patch, V. a. au8be|fein. 
 Path, a. 5>fab, m.; Sa^n, /. 
 Patience, «. Ocbulb, /. 
 Patient, «. 9)atient, ffranfe, m.j — 
 
 (-ly), adj. & adv. gcbulbig. 
 Pay, V. a. ir. jal^Ien, bcja^Ien ; to — 
 
 back, jurflrfja^Icn ; to — in cash, 
 
 iaax au«ja|Ien ;— «. ©c^alt, i 
 
576 
 
 VOCABDLABT. — ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 
 
 Peace, s. Srieb«<n), m. 
 
 Peach, s. 3>fttfi^{e),/. 
 
 Pear, s. Sitne, /. 
 
 Peasant, 8. Saniimann> SSauetr m. 
 
 Pen, a. geber, /. ; -cil, s. Sreifiift, 
 
 m. ; -knife, «. gebcrmefTEr, n. 
 Penetrate, v. a. & n. buri^bringetl. 
 Pentecost, «. gjftngfleit, ■jfi. 
 People, ». (nation) SSclf, w. / (folk) 
 
 8cute, ipl. 
 Perceive, d. a. Bemerfen, ertlitf en, jc* 
 
 warren, (know) erfenncn. 
 Perfect(ly), adj. & ac?*. sodtommen, 
 
 (wholly) gaitj. 
 Performance, s. Stuffu^ning, /. 
 Perhaps, aAn. sicKeic^t. 
 Perish, ®. n. sergt^en, umfommen. 
 Perjury, a. 3Keineib, m. ; to commit 
 
 — , einert SJteineib fc^woren. 
 Permission, «. Srltttt6ni§, /. 
 Permit, m. a. erlttuSen, IttfTeit ; to be 
 
 permitted, burfert. 
 Perpendicular(ly), ad,j. & ach. fcnt* 
 
 rec^t. 
 Persecute, v. a. Detfolgcn. 
 Persecution, «. SJetfolgung, /. 
 Perseverance, «. fdtljattXiiiUU, f. 
 Persist, v. n. ie^arten, (remain) Me^ 
 
 Sen ; -ently, adj. fe(l, ie'^ortli^, 
 
 (deny with) flanb^ttft. 
 Person, a. 9)erfon, /./ -s, (people) pi. 
 
 Scute, 
 Perspective-glass, «. Setngla?, to. 
 Perspire, u. to. fc^wi^ett. 
 Philology, «. gS^ttotogie,/. 
 Pluloaopher, «. 9)^Ui)fop:^, m. 
 Philosophy, a. 3)^ilofct)^te, /. 
 Phrase, a. SRebenSart, /. 
 Physician, «. 5[rjt, «i. 
 Pick, «. a. ()i(ten, (le(i^en, (pluck) 
 
 jfluden. 
 
 Picture, a. Silb, to. 
 
 Piece, «. ©tiid, «. 
 
 Pier, «. Bttmm, m. 
 
 Pile, s. 9)fa^I, TO. 
 
 Pillar, a. ©oiule, /. 
 
 Pillow, a. Sopftiffen, to. 
 
 Pin, ». 9?abel, /. 
 
 Pinch, V. a. fneifen. ' 
 
 Pious(ly), adj. & adn. frofflm. 
 
 Pipe, a. SJo^re, /. / — v. to. yfeifen. 
 
 Pitiable, adj. itiamtniwnff). 
 
 Pity, V. a. iebaacrit. 
 
 Place, a. 9)IaU, Drt, m.; (passage 
 
 cited, position) ©teUe, /. ; — of 
 
 refuge, Sufludj'^ort ; to take — . 
 
 flattftnben ; in — of, an|latt ; to — 
 
 before, DorPcffcn. 
 Plague, a. 9)Ittge, /. 
 Plain(ly), ac^. & adv. (level) eBeti, 
 
 (la^, platt ; (clear) beutltc^ ; — a. 
 
 gelb, n. ; glut, /. 
 Plant, V. a. ()jlttn}e«. 
 Plate, a. leUer, m. 
 Play, a. ©piel, n. ; — o. to. ftielen. 
 Pleasant, adj. angene^nt. 
 Please, ». a. & to. gefaffen, sergnit' 
 
 gen. 
 Pleasing; adj. gefaUtg. 
 Pleasure, a. SJergniigen, to.; (joy) 
 
 gteube, f.; to have the — , |i^ bo4 
 
 aJergnfigen mac^cn ; with — , gem ; 
 
 to give — , V. a. gefalten. 
 Plot, a. (ground) 5)Ia{, m.; (con- 
 spiracy, SJerf^ttiinmg, /. 
 Plump, ac^. ))Ium|). 
 Pocket, a. Safc^e, /.; -book, Safi^en" 
 
 tu^, TO./ -handkerchief, a. %a^tH' 
 
 tvi), TO. 
 Poem, a. ®ebic^t, to. 
 Poet, a. 9)oet, 'X)\S)itr, m. ; -ry, a. 
 
 S)i(^t«ng, /. 
 
VOCABULARY. — BNGI^ISH AND QBKMAN. 
 
 577 
 
 Point, s. 5>unft, m.; — ». a. to — out, 
 
 iejct^nen, jeiflen. 
 Poison, s. (Sift, n. ; — v. a. sergiftm ; 
 
 -ed cup, ®iftJeiI)cr, m. 
 Police, «. 95oliset, / ; eonfia6ler, m.; 
 
 -man, 9)olijeiMencr, m. 
 Polite(ly), adj. & adv. l^ijfliij). 
 Poor(ly), a^.&adv. arm, iinbemittelt; 
 
 very — , armfeHu ; — in purse, 
 
 gelbarm; -house, s. Sttmen^auS, n. 
 Poplar, s. 9mii> /■ 
 Port, s. ^afen, m. 
 Portion, 8. Stiit^eil, m. & n. 
 Position, s. ©teffung, /. 
 Possess, V. a. Sefijen, (have) ^Aittt ; 
 
 -ion, s. Scfi^, m. y-^Z. (property 
 
 or lands) Oittcr, [mijgli^ct SBetfe. 
 Possible, adj. mBgltc^; possibly, adv. 
 Post, s. 9)fa^I, m.; ©ciule, /.; -office, 
 
 9)ofl, /.; -ilion, s. 9)(i(HIt(t)on, 
 
 ©c^waget (vulg.) »j. 
 Postpone, v. a. ttuffi^teBen. 
 Potato, «. tartoffeli /. 
 Pouch, «. lafifte, /. 
 Poultry, s. gcbersie'^, n. 
 Pound, s. 9)fuiib> «■• 
 Pour, V. a. giepen, (out) einfc^cttten. 
 Powder, s. 9)ul»cr, ft. 
 Power, s. SBla^t, /.y (dominion) Qic 
 
 n)ttlt,/.y SRegtmcnt, »i./ (mechanical) 
 
 .Rraft/./ -fully, a^. & ae^o. ma(|tig. 
 Practise, s. a. tikn. 
 Praise, v. a. loben. [-er, s. Ortet, w. 
 Pray, b. a. & Ji. icten, (request) Bitten; 
 Preacher, s. 3)tcbtger, »ra. 
 Precarious(ly), a^j- & a(fe. unfi^et. 
 Preceding, ad^. ijorig. [3>unft. 
 
 Precise(ly), adv. genou ; — at, urn 
 Precious(ly), adj. & ado. foil6at. [/. 
 Precipice, s. STtigrunb, m ; fjelswant), 
 Precipitate, v. a. ftitrjcn. 
 
 Prefer, «. a. sorjie^etli -ence, «. ffior^ 
 
 8«g> m. 
 Preparation, s. S5»ricteit«ng, / 
 Prepare, ». a. »or6eteiten. 
 Presence, s. ®cg£nwart, /. 
 Present, adj. aitmeftnb, jugcgen ; at 
 
 — , augcnMitflic^ ; — «. a barfleHcn, 
 
 (introduce)»orflelleii, (give) fc^enten ; 
 
 -ation, s. SSorflcIIung, /. ; -iment, 
 
 s. Sl^nung, /./ -ly, adv. fogletd), 
 President, s. ^xix^xitxAt m. [glci(|. 
 Press, « n. ticitetti -ing, part., adj. 
 
 & adm. bringcnb. 
 Pretend, v. n. Dotgekn. 
 Pretty (-ily), adj. & ade. atttg, \ii'm, 
 
 (tolerably) jiemlic^, — well, jteai' 
 
 li^ gut. 
 Prevail, v. n. butc^brlngen. 
 Prevent, v. n. cCb^tHim. 
 Price, a. 3)rci«, m. 
 Pride, s. ©tolj, m. 
 Priest, «. 5>rtcfier, 3)faffc, m. 
 Prime, a^. erjl. 
 Prince, s. (reigning) giirll, m. ; 
 
 (lung's son) 3)rinj, m.; -royal, 
 
 Sionprinj, m.; -ess,/. 3)rtnaepn,/. 
 Principal(ly), adj. & adv. lauptfac^" 
 
 Ii(| ; — character, ^aupttotte, /. ; 
 
 -ity, s. S'ittflentBum, n. 
 Print, V. a. bruden ; -er, s. Suslj* 
 
 btuifer, m. ; -ing, s. Sriifferci, / ; 
 
 art of — , Suc^bruderfunjl, /. 
 Prison, s. ®cfangnip, n. ; -er, s. ®e» 
 
 fangme, m. &f. 
 Private(ly), otfj- ^ **''• gcIjtt'Jl- 
 Privilege, s. SJorttd)te, grtiljeit, /. 
 Prize, s. ®ewtmt, m. 
 Probability, s. SlBa^rf(i&cinIt^fcit, /. 
 Probable (-ly), adj. & adv. luaBr- 
 
 fi^cinli^. 
 Procession, «. Bug, Sliifjug, to. 
 
578 
 
 VOCABULARY.- ENGLISH AND GBBMAN. 
 
 Proclaim, s. a. auStufcn. 
 
 Procure, «. a. Derf^affen. 
 
 Produce, v. a. crjeugen. 
 
 ProfesBion, «. Serttf, m. 
 
 Professor, a. 9)rofcfror, m. 
 
 Proffer, v. a. anMeten. 
 
 Profit, s. ®c»inn, m. ; — ». a. gLDin* 
 ntn ; -able (-ly), ai^. & adv. Wt* 
 t^eii:|aft. 
 
 Prohibit, «. a. DerMcten. 
 
 Promise, s. SJctft)ie(^en( re. / — «. a. & 
 n. DerRjtec^en; — solemnly, (an)3e* 
 loien. 
 
 Pronounce, v. a. au«fi)tec^en. 
 
 Property), ad^. & a(to. 8ef(|idt, (de- 
 cent) anjlcinbig. 
 
 Property, «. eigetitl^um, «.; ®utet, 
 
 Prophet, s. 3)rortct, m. 
 
 Propose, V. a. soifc^Iagen. 
 
 Proposition, s. SJotfc^Iag, wi. 
 
 Prosecution, a. SSerfoIgung, /. 
 
 Prospect, s. auafid)*, /. 
 
 Prosper, s. ?i. gebet^en. 
 
 Protector, s. Scfi^itjet, wi. 
 
 Protestant, arf^'. (jroteflantifc^. 
 
 Proud(ly), adj. & ffl«^. flolj. 
 
 Provide, ». as. (procure) serfc^affcn, 
 (furnish) liefErn; -d that, -ti fet 
 bag, wenn nur. 
 
 Province, s. ®cMet, «. 9'M»inj'j/- 
 
 Provision, s. (care) SJotpc^t, /./ (vic- 
 tuals) SSorrat^, >ra. 
 
 Prudently), adj. & atfu. »orftcI)tig. 
 
 Pubhc, adj. Sjfentlid). 
 
 Pudding, 8. 9)ubbing, m, 
 
 Pull, «. a. jie^en, (asunder) teipen. 
 
 Punctual(ly), otij. & adv. (jfinfrttc^. 
 
 Punish, ?). a. flrafcn, 6e|lrafen. 
 
 Pupil, s. ©^iiler, to. 
 
 Purchase, v. a. laufcrt. 
 
 Pure(ly), adj. & ode. rein. 
 
 Purpose, s. (object) SWEcE, ot. / (in- 
 tent) 3t6ri*t> /•; (aim) (Enbe, ?i.; 
 on — , ab^xijtli^ ; — b. re. ieaBjtc^* 
 tigen; -ly, ffl^. mit gleig. 
 
 Pursue, V. a. setfolgen. 
 
 Push, «. a. ir. jlogen. 
 
 Put, V. a. ir. (lay)Iegen; (stick or 
 place) lleilen ; to — in (pickle), 
 rinfaljcii ; to — out, ani^tUen ; to 
 — up with, f1^ ttwai gcfaUm 
 lalfen; to — on, (dress) anjie^^eru 
 
 Q. 
 
 Quadrate, s. Duabrat, n. 
 
 Quality, s. (property) Eigcnfc^aft, /.; 
 
 (sort) Daalitdt, 4>atamg, /. 
 Quantity, «. 3)lenge, /. ; (number) 
 
 Quarrel, c. a. jfltlf ett, (dispute) jltriten. 
 
 Quarter, s. SJtertel, re. 
 
 Queen, s. ^ontgiitr /. 
 
 Question, s. gragc, /.; (doubt) BKtU 
 
 fcl, TO. / — D. a. & re. fragcn, (doubt) 
 
 jweifeln. 
 Quick(ly), <«??. <fe adv. fc^nell. 
 Quiet(ly), od; & adv. rii^tg ; to keep 
 
 — , ft^ ru'^tg Der^altcn. 
 Quite, ada. gaitj, (throughout) burcf)' 
 
 Mi, (tolerably) jtemlid). 
 
 R. 
 
 Rabbi, a. fHaW, Siaillnei, to. 
 Race, s. Oefc^lec^t, re. 
 Raft, «. glog, re. 
 Raging, ati;. toll. 
 
 Rail, s. SRicgtl, to. y -road, -way, 
 Eifett()a(;ii, /. 
 
VOCABDIiABT. — ENOLISH AND OEBMAK. 
 
 579 
 
 Bain, s. SRcjen, m. ; — ». imp. regneit. 
 Raise, v. a. (up) auf^ebeit, (increafie) 
 
 ficigern. 
 Bampart, a. SEDaUi m. 
 Rank, s. Stang, m. 
 Ransom, «. Siifegelb, n. 
 Rapid(ly), adj. & odAi. f^ncK. 
 Rare(ly), ndj. & (kZd. ftlten. 
 Bat, « SRatte, /. 
 Rather, ade. c^cr. 
 Raven, «. SJaie, m. 
 Raw, adj. to^. 
 Ray, ». ©tra^l, »i. 
 Reach, «. a. & n. tet^cit/ (attain) ct» 
 
 retc^cn. 
 Bead, v. a. & n. t>. Icfen ; -ing- 
 
 lesson, s. SefeuSung, /. j—part. 
 
 & adj. gclefcn, irtcfert. 
 Beady (-ily), ffl(??. & adv. feittg. 
 Eeally, ad«). totvHii^. 
 Bear, «. Sludcn, to. tj 
 
 Beason, a. SJcrnunft,/. (cause) Hrfac^c, 
 Eeceive, ®. «■. cmpfangen, (accept) an* 
 
 nc^men, (obtain) cr^altcit. 
 Eocognize, o. a. ertcnnen, iBtebtrer* 
 
 Icnnen. 
 Eecollect, v. a. fi^ Etttfinncn. 
 Becommend, v. a. empfe^leil. 
 Becover, v. a. |tc§ ctl^olen. 
 Becruit, «. a. anwerScn. 
 Bed, adj. rot^. 
 Beedy, a<Zj ro^tig. 
 Beef, «. fls. refftn, riffcn. 
 Beek, v. n. rouAen. 
 Befit, V. a. auaklTetn. 
 Beflect, V. n. iejinncn. 
 Beflection, s. Ueterlcgungr /. 
 Befresh, «. ffi. crquiaen. 
 Befuge, «. Suflu^t, /. 
 Befuse, v. a. ft<^ wcigetn, DeTOeigctn. 
 Begard, v. a. acf)tcn ;— s. Sldjtung, /. 
 
 Begiment, s. (rule) SHegtciung, /.; (ol 
 
 soldiers) SUtgimcnt, n. 
 Begion, a. Drt, to. 
 Begulation, a. Drbnutig, /. 
 Rehearse, ®. a wteber^olm. [/. 
 
 Reign, v. a. regtetm ; — s. SRegtening, 
 Rein, «. Siigcl, 3<i«m, to. 
 Reject, B, as. auSfi^Iagert. 
 Bejoice, v. n. |tc^ fteum, etfreucn. 
 Belate, v. a. crjci^len. 
 Relation, a. Sctwanbtc, to. & /. 
 Bely, V. a. |t§ serlaffcn (auf). 
 Bemain, D. n. tlcticn, ft^ ttuf^altcn ; 
 
 to — there, ba bleiten. 
 Bemark, v. a. bcmcrfen. 
 Remember, v. a. fid) ertnnErn, jic^ er.t» 
 
 liimett (with gen.) ^ 
 
 Remote(ly), adj. & at?®. Wett; -ness, 
 
 «. Seme, /. 
 Remunerate, «. a. ielo^ncn. 
 Rend, b. a. i/r. jcrrcifcn. , 
 
 Renew, v. a. crneucin. 
 Renovate, «. a. crneucnt. 
 Renown, a. 9Ju^m, to./ -ed, adj. lie 
 
 tii^mt. 
 Rent, ». aKiet^c, f. 
 Repair, «. a. ainJicfTcrn, 
 Repeat, «. a. Wiebcr^olcn. 
 Bepent, «. ffi. iercucn. 
 Beply, ». ffl. antwottcn, teantmorten. 
 Eepose, a. (rest) SRu^e, /; (sleep) 
 
 ©^Ittf/ TO. 
 
 Represent, d. a. barjlellen ; -ation, a. 
 
 SJorjleHung, /. ; -ative, a. SCbgcorb- 
 Repress, v. a. untctbrutfen. [nttc, to. 
 Reproach, v. a. sorwcrfcn. 
 Reproof, a. Sormwrf. to. 
 Republic, s. gjc))uHit, /. 
 Reputation, s. 3Juf, TO.; (name) 
 
 9lame(n), to. 
 Request, «. ©itte, /.; — v. a. titten. 
 
580 
 
 VOCABULABT. — BNOIilfiH AND OfiKltlAN. 
 
 Require, B. a. Derlangot. 
 
 Rescue, v. a. iefreien ; — from, ent- 
 
 reipen. 
 Resemble, v. a. sWc|cn. 
 Resentment, «. Un»iffe(n)r Soin, m. 
 Reside, ®. n. too^nen ; -noe, a. 3iefl=' 
 
 btnj,/.; (2Bo^n)®it, m. 
 Resistance, «. SfBiberpanb, m. 
 Resolution, «. ffintfc^lii^, m. 
 Resolve, «. n. fi^ entf(i^licpen. 
 Respect, «. STc^tung, /. 
 Rest, s. (remnant) tte J etrt jl, m.; (sleep) 
 ©c^taf, m. ; — o. a. ru^en, (from fa^ 
 tigue) ftc^ auarul^ett. 
 Restaurant, «. 3lc|iaurtttton, /. 
 Hestore, ®. a. juritffgeSen, teiebeil^er^' 
 
 lieHen. 
 Retire, d. m. flc^ surSiIjie^m. 
 Retired, ^ort. & adj. eingejogen. 
 Return, «. a. juritdfe^rm, (on the 
 way) umfel^ren, (give back) juruif» 
 geSen ;— s. SRiidte^r, /.; in — ^, adxi. 
 wiebet. 
 Revenge, ®. a. toii^en. [/. 
 
 Reverence, s. S^rerbietuttg, 23c»otion, 
 Revolt, s. Sm))orung, /. ; SltfaH, m,. 
 Revolution, «. 8Je»oI«tton, /. 
 Revolve, «. o. brc^cn. 
 Reward, b. a. ielol^nen;— «. Se'^n, jre.; 
 
 (thanks) 2)ant, m. 
 Ribbon, «. SBanb, ». 
 Richfly), adj. & adv. uiH). 
 Rid, V. a. tefreiett. 
 
 Ride, V. a. & n. i/r. (horseback) rei" 
 ten, (in a carriage) fasten; to — full 
 gallop, fprengen ; -r, a. SReiter, m. 
 Ridge, a. Siutfctii m. 
 Ridicule, «. a. fpotten. 
 Right(ly), adj. & adv. rec^t, ric^tig ; — 
 a. SRcc^t, n.; to be — , 9teil)t ^aien; 
 -eous(ly), a(^". & ad». gerci^t. 
 
 Rigorous(ly), adj. & «j(to. jlteng. 
 Ring, a. SRing, to.; -leader, «. Ur* 
 
 l^eJer, to. 
 Ripe(ly), adj. & ad«. rcif. 
 Rise, v. n. (river) fi^wcUeni (sun, etc.) 
 
 aiifgefeen, (get up) aufflcl^en. 
 River, s. glup, to. 
 
 Road, a. SBcg, to.; ©trapc, /. [to. 
 Roast, «. as. iraten ; -meat, «. Sraten, 
 Robber, a. fSt&ain, to. 
 Robe, a. SRod, to. 
 Robust, a(?;. jlttrf. 
 
 Rock, a. gelferif to.; (stone) ©tein, to. 
 Roof, «. S)ac|, n.. [?i. 
 
 Room, ». ©mk, /.; ©emo^, Simmer, 
 Rose, a. 0tofe, /. 
 Rough(ly), flsfi;. & adv. to^. 
 Round(ly), od?. & adv. tunb. 
 Rouse, e. a. aufroectcn. 
 Royal(ly), adj. & adv. fbnigli^. 
 Rude(ly), adj. & adv. ro^. 
 Ruin, «. ju ©rwnbe ric^tcn. 
 Rule, B. ffl. gebicten. 
 Run, V. n. & a. ir. laufcn, (race) 
 
 renneil, (leak) tro()fen; — away, ba* 
 
 Don laufcn; — a. Sauf, to. 
 Rush, «. (bot.) Sinfc, /. ; (violent 
 
 course) Ungefliim, n. 
 
 S. 
 
 Sabre, a. SSbtX, to. 
 
 Sack, a. ©atf, to. 
 
 Sacrament, s. ©acramcnt, ra. 
 
 Sacrifice, a. Offer, ?i.; — ■». opferit. 
 
 Sa<3(ly), adj. & acZa. traurig. 
 
 Sagacity, a. ©c^arfjlnn, to. 
 
 Sage, adj. weife. 
 
 Sail, s. ©cgel, n. ;—v. n. fegctn ; -or, 
 
 a. ©i^iffer, SWatrcfe, to. 
 Sake, for the — of, urn. 
 
TOCABTrLAKT. — ^ENGLISH AND GEKMAN. 
 
 581 
 
 Salary, s. (Sc^alt, m. & n. 
 
 Sale, s. ajettauf, m. 
 
 Salmon, a. 8ac^8, m. 
 
 Saloon, a. ©aal, m. 
 
 Salt, a. ©alj, n.; -peter-stone, a. ©al* 
 
 5)cter|letn, m. 
 Salute, v. a. grugen. 
 Same, adj. ber-/ i)ie-, bafTelbe; the — , 
 
 ba« namli^e. 
 Sand, «. ©ani>, m.; -y desert, ©anb" 
 
 Witfie, /. 
 Satiate, adj. fatt. 
 Satisfaction, a. Sufrieben^ett, /. 
 Satisfy, ■». a. & n. kgnitgen. 
 Saturday, «. ©onnaknb, m. 
 Save, B. a. f))aren, (reserve) auf^eien. 
 Say, «. a. & ra. fagen. 
 Scanti(ly), ac^. & af^B. (niggard) 
 
 fljarftttn, (seldom) fellen. 
 Soaioely, adv. taum, mtt genaucr 9Jot^, 
 
 Scene, a. SSii^ne, /. 
 Scepter, s. ©cepter, ?i. 
 Schemer, «. ©c|»mblcr, m. 
 Scholar, «. (pupil) ©cottier, m. ; 
 
 (learned man) ®ele^ttcr/ m. 
 School, a. ©^ule, /.; -mate, a. ©c§ul» 
 
 genoffe, m. 
 ScoflF, V. n. fljotten. 
 Scold, V. n. fc^eltcrt. 
 Scoundrel, a. SSetritger, m. 
 Scream, v. n. fc^reim. 
 Sea, «. 9Jleer, n.; -man, s. WatroTe, »i. 
 Seal, «. a. bejtegeln. 
 Search, «. as. & n. \\x^tn; to have 
 
 searched, burc^fu^cn Ittffen. 
 Season, a. Stt'^rcajett, /. / in — , 6ci 
 
 SettEit. [/. 
 
 Seat, a. ©t^, 9)Itt^, m.; (bench) Sttitf, 
 Second, adj. jweitc, (other) ttnbert; — 
 
 V. to — , untcrfliijcn. 
 
 Secret, a. ®e^eimnti, n.; -(ly), adj. ^, 
 
 adv. ge^eim. 
 Secretary, a. ©ccretcir, to. 
 See, V. a. & n. ir. fe^en, (espy) er« 
 Htcten, (appear) ttuSfc^cn; -n,pa/rt. 
 gefe^en. 
 Seek, ®. a. f«($en. 
 Seem, ». a. fc^etnen, sortommen. 
 Seize, v. a. & n. ergreiftn, (touch) 
 faffm ; to — the opportunity, bie 
 (Selegcn^ett ergrcifen or ienu^en. 
 Seldom, adj. & adv. felten. 
 Select, V. a. augmdWett. 
 Sell, ». a. Dcrtaufen. 
 Senator, j. ©enator, to. 
 Send, «. a.&n. fd)icEen, fenbcn; — for, 
 f^itfen nac^ ; to — away, entloffen 5 
 — back, surufffii^iifert ; to — one's 
 regards, ftd) emjife^ten laffert. 
 Sensation, a. (impression) Sinbtud, 
 m.; (feeling) Ocfii^I, n.; pi. OeniifTe. 
 Sense, a. ©inn, m. ; (intellect) Set* 
 
 nunft,- /. 
 Sensibility, a. ®cfu^I, /t. 
 Sensible, adj. gefn^lsblt. 
 Sentence, a. (iu grammar) ©a^, m.; 
 
 (in law) Utt^cil, n. 
 Separate, v. a. fonbcrn. 
 Sepulchre, a. ©rat, ®rii6mtt^l, n. 
 Serpent, a. ©c^Iange, /. 
 Servant, a. Diencr, SSebiente, m. ; 
 
 -maid, s. 9Kagb, IDiencvin, /. 
 Serve, v. a. bienen, iebicnen. 
 Service, a. Sienjl, m. ; Stmt, n. 
 Set, V. a. fct'Crt ; to — open, offncn, 
 
 aufma(|m ; — (the table), bcdcn. 
 Settle, ■B.flj. ir. orbnen, (decide) ent* 
 
 fc^eiben. 
 Several (times), adj. me^rere (mot). 
 Severefly), adj. & adv. jlteng ; (hard) 
 fc[)»er. 
 
583 
 
 VOCABULABT. — ENGLISH AND GEEMAN. 
 
 Sox, «. ®cfc^Ic(|t, n. 
 
 Shaft, s. ©i^aft, m. 
 
 Shake, «. as. vr. jittcrn. 
 
 Shall, s. a. jr. foEen, werbm. 
 
 Shameful(ly), adj. & atfe. fc^cinbUc^. 
 
 Shape, ». gorm, /./ — v. a. bilben. 
 
 Share, «. %%n\, m. 
 
 Sharp(l7), adj. & oM. f($atf. 
 
 Sharpen, b, a. f($letfen. 
 
 Shatter, «. a. serf(|mcttcrn. 
 
 Shears, «. pZ. Sc^eere, /. 
 
 Sheep, a. ©c^aaf, ». 
 
 Sheet, «. (paper) Sogen, »ra.y (bed) 
 
 Safen, n. 
 Shelter, s. 3«tl«*t, /. 
 Shepherd, ». ©(^afer, »i. 
 Sheriff, s. SSogt, ©c^crtf, to. 
 Sherry, s. S(^err?»cin, »i. [to. 
 
 Shine, v. n. vr. fdjeineit ; — «. ©d^ein, 
 Ship, «. Sc^iff, OT. 
 Shirt, «. $emb, ?i. 
 Shiver, ». m. jittern. 
 Shook, «. ©tog, anfair, m. 
 Shoe, H. ©(^u^, TO.y -maker, s. ©c^u^' 
 
 ma^er, m. 
 Shoot, ■». as. ir. fc^iegen. 
 Shop, «. Cabcn, «8. 
 Shore, s. Ufer, ?». [furg. 
 
 Short(Iy), adj. &, adv. lutj j in — , 
 Shot, part. gefi^oJTcn. 
 Shoulder, s. ©coulter,/. 
 Show, V. a. i/r. jeigm. 
 Shower, «. ». regncn ; — s. SKegm; m. 
 Shnu, ». a. meiben. 
 Shut, «. as. vr. jufc^Iiegen, jubtiiden. 
 Sick, adj. trant; -ness, s. £rant^eit,/ 
 Side, B. ©eite, /. ; (edge) SRanb, m. 
 Sight, «. SlntUif , m. ; to get a — of, 
 
 fe^cn. 
 Sign, «. 3et(I)cn, ra. 
 Signal, «. Sciften, n. 
 
 Signify, V. as. & n. iebeutm. 
 
 Saeace, «. n.. fc^weigm ; — i. ©c^tBCtj' 
 fanifeit, f.; to keep — , fd^tteigen. 
 
 Silent(ly), asd;. & adv. (taciturn) 
 fi^weiafam, (quiet) tu^ig. 
 
 Silk, ». ©tibe, /./ -(en), as<?^'. fcibcn. 
 
 Silly, adj. tpric^t. 
 
 Silver, «, ©it6er, n. ; — adj. jiltErii. 
 
 Similarity, a. ®letc^artigfeit, /. 
 
 Similitude, «. Sle^nlicl)feit, /. 
 
 Since, prep, feit ;— asdj). [citbcin ; — 
 conj. ba (see p. 334), weil, inbcm. 
 
 Slncere(ly), a(g. & ad/e. aufiifl)ti3. 
 
 Sing, V. a. &, n. i/r. jingen; -er, «. 
 ©einger, m. 
 
 Single, cbdj. einjig. 
 
 Sir, a. |ierr, m. 
 
 Sister, «. ©(^tBcfler, /. ; -in-law, a. 
 
 ©djtodgerin, /. 
 Situated, asdj. gdegen. 
 Situation, a. (position, seat) Soge, f.; 
 
 (condition) Sui^anb, m. 
 Six, adj. fei^a. 
 
 Skmful(ly), adj. & ado. gcri^Wt. 
 Slaughter, a. SBIutbab, n. ; — v. u,. 
 
 fdjlfld^ten. 
 Slave, a. ©Ka»E, m. 
 Sleep, a. ©c^laf, m.; v. n. f^Ittfm ; 
 
 -(il)y, adj. &adv. f(^ldftig. 
 Slender, ast^'. fdjittnf. 
 Slim, asd;. fc^Iant. 
 Slip, 11. n. ir. glcltcn. 
 Slipper, «. 9'antcffcl, m 
 Slow(ly), adj. k adv. longfam. 
 Sly(ly), adj. fi^lttUi (secretly) ^eimlid). 
 Small, adj. tlein. 
 Smell, «. a. riec^cn. 
 Smoke, «. re. tttu^en. 
 Snake, a. ©i^Iange, /. 
 Snatch, v. a. cntteigen. 
 Snow, a. ©c^iteci m. 
 
VOCABULAET. — ^ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 
 
 583 
 
 So, ad/m. & conj. fo. 
 
 Soar, B. a. ^oc^ fliegm. 
 
 Society, a. OJefcirfi^ttft, /. 
 
 Sofa, ». ©otJ^tt, n. peife, 
 
 SoftCly), aig. & adm. faitff, (alow) 
 
 Soften, II. a. n>et^m. 
 
 Soil, g. Sanb, n. ; ©rbc, /. 
 
 Sold, pa/rt. Derfauft. 
 
 Soldier, «. ©olbat, m. 
 
 Solicit, V. a. ^i^ iewerlien (unt). 
 
 Solution, ». Sluflofung, /.; (a question) 
 
 fiofung, /. 
 Some, ado- einise, xntli^t {see p. 156, 
 
 IV. 2) ; (quantity) tltaai ; (about) 
 
 ettoa; -body, Sentanb; -one, ^t^ 
 
 mani); -(thing) etttoa; -where, tr» 
 Son, «. So^rt/ m. [genbieo. 
 
 Song, s. ®cfan3, m. ; Sieb, ra. / -ster, 
 
 8. Sangert m. 
 Soon, aM. Mb, (quick) fii^nclt ; as 
 
 — as, (e6en) fobalb Ai, (cben) fo 
 
 fii^ncll oM; -er, ctdrn. c^er, licier. 
 Sorrowful(ly), a^. & adi). trtturtg. 
 Sorry, adj. tramig ; I am — , e8 t^ut 
 
 mtr Icib. 
 Soul, s. ©eele, /./ ®ct(l, to. 
 Sound, «. ©^aH, to. ; — ». ffl. flingeti ; 
 
 -(ly), acZj. & aife. gefunb. 
 Soup, «. ©uvtie/ /. 
 Sour, a^. faucr. 
 South, «. ©itb(cn), TO. / -erly, (wij. 
 
 fiibli^ ; -em, a^. fublic^. 
 Sovereign, «. gitrfl, to.; -ity, «. giii» 
 
 fient^um, ra. 
 Spare, «. ffl. & to. (treat with pity) 
 
 fdionen, (let alone) sctfc^onen. 
 Sparingly), adQ. & ascto. genau. 
 Spark, «. m. fitnteln. [(say) fogen. 
 Speak, v. a. & n. vr. fprecj^en, lebcn, 
 Special(ly), a^. flugerorbentlid) ;— ocZa 
 
 bcfonberd. 
 
 Spectacle, «. ©^aufptel, ra.; (pair of) 
 -s, «. ^2. StiOc, /. 
 
 Speculate, t. n. & a. f))cMtten. 
 
 Speculation, «. ©pttulation, /. 
 
 Speech, s. 0Jebc, /. ; (language) 
 BpmiS)t, f. 
 
 Speed, s. <EUc, /. ; to run at full — . 
 fc^r fc^nell laufen. 
 
 Spend, V. a. & n. scrf^wenbcn, (time) 
 pirtngctti — well, gut anwenbcn; 
 -thrift, s. 35erfi!^n>enber, to. 
 
 Spill, '0. a. Detf^fitten. 
 
 Spire, 3. 3;^utm, to. [to. 
 
 Spirit, s. OeifJ, m. ; (courage) 3)lut^, 
 
 Splash, ®. a. icfiJri^en. 
 
 Splendor, s. ©^ein, to. 
 
 Spoil, V. a. & n. scrbcrBcn. 
 
 Spoken, pa/rt. gefptoii)en. 
 
 Spoon, s. Sfiffel, to. 
 
 Sportsman, a. 3ager, m. 
 
 Sprain, «. ?i. scrreuten. 
 
 Spring, ». gtu'^jtt^r, m. ; — ». n.. ir. 
 frringen. [bratmeilc,/. 
 
 Square, adj. sicreilig; -mile, s. Dua» 
 
 Stable, s. ©tall, to. 
 
 Stage, «. Su^rtc, /. 
 
 Stagger, v. n. wanfcn. 
 
 Stair, a. ©tufc, /. / -s, pi. ^Ircwea, 
 /. ; -case, StrepK' / 
 
 Stake, s. g)fa^I, to. 
 
 Stall, s. ©tan, TO. 
 
 Stalwart, ad}, flarf. 
 
 Stand, o. re. jle^cn ; — by, Betile^en. 
 
 Star, a. ©tern, to. 
 
 Start, V. n. (journey) aircifcn. 
 
 State, s. (condition) Suflanb, to. ; 
 (political) ©taat, m. ; secretary 
 of — , ©taatSminijler, to. ; -ment, 
 a. (assertion) aScl^auptung, /. / (re- 
 port) aSctiii^t, TO.; -sman, a. 
 ©taat^ntonn, to. 
 
584 
 
 VOCABULARY. — ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 
 
 Statue, «. Silbfciulc, /. 
 
 Stay, ®. n. ilei6en, (wait) ttarten. 
 
 Steal, V. a. i/r. fle^Ien. 
 
 Steam, «. SJamyf, m.; -ex, s. SJampf' 
 
 fcoot, ra. ; ®am|)fcr, »i. 
 Steed, g. tHo^, n. 
 Steel, «. ©ta^I, m. 
 Steeple, ». Z^mm, m. 
 Steer, v. n. & a. (icuent. 
 Step, V. n. fc^reitm ; — «. ©c^rttt, m. 
 Stick, s. ©tod, m. ;— «. a. i/r. fletfen, 
 
 (fast) fefl jlcdcit. 
 StlfF(ly), adj. & at^B. |lau. 
 StUl, odQ. iltll(e), (quiet) ru:^i3;— otto. 
 
 no^ (immer). 
 Sting, ». ©ta(i^cl, m. 
 Stock, «. (lineage) Stamm, m.; (store) 
 
 SJotratJ, wi. 
 Stocking, «. ©trumijf, «i. 
 Stolen, pwrt. gejlc^len. ^ 
 Stomach, s. iWttgen, to. ; to be sick 
 
 at tte — , jlc^ ben SKagen set^ 
 
 bertcn. 
 Stone, a. ©teirti )». 
 Stop, «.- a. ^alten ; (end) cnben, on* 
 
 l^alten, (cease) auf^Bten ; to make 
 
 — , ttaf^ijtert laffen. 
 Store, 8. Cttben, m. 
 Storm, ». ©turm, m. 
 Story, a. ®efc^ia^te, /. 
 Stont(ly), a^. & ad'B. flatt. 
 Stove, «. Dfen, to. 
 Straight, at?/. & adm. gerabe. 
 Strange, adj. fremb, (wonderful) 
 
 wunbctlic^; -r, a. grembc, to. & /.; 
 
 (visitor) ®tt|l, TO. 
 Straw, a. ©tro?, n. 
 Stream, a. (current) ©trom, m. ; 
 
 (river) Slug, to. 
 Street, s, ©trape, /. ; -door-key, « 
 
 §auaf4luffel, TO. 
 
 Strength, a. ©tarfe, /.; Sraft, /.; 
 
 (power) 3Rtt^t, /. [genttu. 
 
 Strict(ly), adj. & cs(fe. flteiige, (exact) 
 Stride, ». 71. fc^reitcn. 
 Strike, 0. a. & m. ir. (beat) fi^Iagen, 
 
 (throw) f^meipen ; to — in, nvi" 
 
 f^Iagen. 
 Strive, «. n. fheien. 
 Stroke, b. a. flretd^cln. 
 Strong(ly), adj. & adv. jlarf. 
 Stubborn(ly), otZ;. & adv. l^artncidFig. 
 Student, «. (at college) ©tubenf, m. ; 
 
 (person devoted to study) OeU^r- 
 
 tcr, m. 
 Studied, a^. gele^tt. 
 Study, a. ©tubiunt, n.; — ». a. jhibiren, 
 
 (learn) leritcn. 
 Subject, a. (of a sovereign) Untcr* 
 
 t^an, TO./ (of consideration, study, 
 
 etc.) ®cgcnjlanb, m. 
 Sublime(ly), adj. & adv. ^o^. 
 Submission, a. Untetrourfigftit, /. 
 Submit, V. n. ft^ ergeien ; to — to, 
 
 ft4 gefaffen laffen. [bei^cn. 
 
 Succeed, v. n. gcltngen, (thrive) ge* 
 Success, a. Srfolg, m.; -ive, adj. et» 
 
 net ntt^ bcm anbcrn ; -or, s. SUaft* 
 
 folget, TO. 
 Succumb, «. n. unterHcgen. 
 Such, pron. folc^er, fold^e, foIc^eS. 
 Sudden(ly), oc?;. & adv. (on a — ), 
 
 Suffer, D. a. leiben, (bear) bulbcn, (per 
 mit) erittuben; -ing, adj. leibenb. 
 
 Sufficient(ly), aiij. & adm. gcnug, ^in' 
 rci(!^cnb. 
 
 Sugar, a. Buffet, to. 
 
 Suggestion, s. 3Jat^, m. 
 
 Suit, «. (law) 9)rojep, m. ; -able, adj. 
 VafTenb ; to be -able, jicmeii. 
 
 Sum, s. ©umme, /. 
 
TOCABULAET. — ^ENGLISH AND GEKMAir. 
 
 585 
 
 Summer, s. ©ommcr, m. 
 Summit, s. Oijjfel, m. 
 Sun, s. Sonne, /. 
 Sunder, v. a. fonbern. 
 Superabound, v. a. iibcrjliepen. 
 Superfluous(ly), a^. & ack. iiitX' 
 Supper, a. ^ievbiwi, n. [fluffis. 
 Supplant, «. ttu^fiec^en, setbrcingen. 
 Suppose, V. a. i/r. anne^^men, (imagine) 
 
 »ermut^en, (think) glauten. 
 Sure, adj. fitter, sewif ; -ly, adm. 
 
 ft(|erltc^, gewip, ganj gewti. 
 Surprise, s. Uekrvafi^ung,/.; ©rjlau* 
 
 nen, n. ; — ». n. fi^ njunbern. 
 Surround, -o. a. umgekn. [trauen. 
 Suspect, V. a. & n. argwii'^nen, mi j' 
 Sustain, v. a. unterfiujen, (suffer) ev« 
 
 Ictben. 
 Swallow, v. a. uetfcfjlingcn. 
 Swan, s. ©(i^wan, m. 
 Swear, ■». n. fc&wBren. 
 Sweat, ». n. f(^tt)i|en. 
 Sweep, ». a. fegcn. 
 Swe,et(ly), adj. & osii®. fug. 
 Swim, «. m. ir. fc&Wimmen. 
 Swindler, s. ©i|wtnbler, m. {m. 
 
 Sword, s. ©c^tiiert, n.; (sabre) ©dirt, 
 Synonymous, adj. fpon^mifc^. 
 
 T. 
 
 Table, a. SEif(|, m. 
 
 Taciturn, adj. f(|tt)etgfam. 
 
 Tailor, *. ©c^neiber, m. 
 
 Take, ■». a. vr. ne^men, (a place) cin* 
 ne^men ; to — (for), ^alten(fur) ; to — 
 of^ aine^mw ; to — pains, ^i^ it" 
 ntii^m ; to —place, gefc^c^en ; to — 
 hold of, faffm, angreifen; -a,pai-t. 
 genommen ; — down, 1jin' (^er*), 
 untetbringen. 
 
 Tale, a. ®ef($itl)te, /. 
 
 Talent, a. Snlage, &aif, f. 
 
 Talker, s. ©c^»ai;ev, m. 
 
 Tall, adj. lang, giop, (high) tjoij. 
 
 Tame, i). a. jdl;men. 
 
 Tapestry, a. Scpptd), m. [»crft)dten. 
 
 Tardy, a^. langfam ; to be — , ft(| 
 
 Task, a. SlufgaSe, f.; (one given) 
 
 Slrbeit, /. 
 Taste, «. (Sefc^ntacE, m. ; — v. a. & n. 
 
 toflcn, fc^mcdfen. [©teuern sa|Icn. 
 Tax, a. ©teuer, /. / to pay taxes. 
 Tea, a. %\jK, m. 
 Teach, ®. a. Ic^rcn, (instruct) un» 
 
 tetrti|ten; -er, a. Server, m. ; — of 
 
 languages, ©))rflc|Ie^t£r, m. 
 Tear, v. a. ir. tcipen; to — to pieces, 
 
 jetreipen. 
 Tediousness, a. Sttngwetltgfeit, /. 
 Tell, ». a. & n. vr. fagm, (narrate) ci" 
 
 jd^ilen. 
 Temper, sweet -ed, fanftmiit^ig. 
 Tempest, a. ©turm, m. 
 Tempt, o. Derfudjen, serlotfcn. 
 Tender(ly), adj. & adt. gefii^soll. 
 Tent, a. 3rtt, n. [Scrmin, m. 
 
 Term, «. (limit) ©renje, /. ; (law) 
 Terrible, adj. fiird^terlid). 
 Territory, a. ®et>tct, n. 
 Thaler, a. 3:^ttler, m. [note). . 
 
 Than, adii. <di, benn (see p. 335, foot- 
 Thank, V. a. banfen ; — ,a. or -a, pi. 
 
 3)ttn[, m. ; to give or return 
 
 thanks, banfen, bantfagen. 
 Theatre, a. Sweater, n. 
 Them, pron. )ie, i^nen (see p. 179). 
 Theme, a. STufgaBe, /. [footnote.) 
 Then, adij. bam, benn (see p. 335, 
 There, adv. bort, ba; — is, — are, e3 
 
 giefct, (inb (see p. 313, II.) ; -at, ba« 
 
 bet i -by, ba6ci; -fore, folglic^, bep» 
 
686 
 
 TOCABULAKY. — ENGLISH AND GEBMAIT. 
 
 ]^at6; -from, bason; -in, barin; -of, 
 
 bttsott ; -on, batan ; -unto, basu ; 
 They, pron. fie. -with, bamit. 
 
 Thick(ly), ad^. & adm. bic^t. 
 Thief, 8. 25ieJ, m. 
 Thimble, ». Singet^iit, m. 
 Thing, a. Sing, n.; 'SwS^t, f. 
 Tliink, r). a. & n. vt. bcnfen, (believe) 
 
 fllaudm, (find) pnben ; to — (of), 
 
 ^ttltcn (»on or ttuf). 
 Thirsty, adj. butfiig. 
 This, pron. biefer, blefe, bicfeg. 
 Thither, adm. bortfin, ba^in. 
 Thorn, «. (plant) 25orn, m.; (fig.) 
 
 @tac|el, m. 
 Thorough(ly), adj. & ado. bur^ge* 
 
 ^enb, ganjli^, bur^au^. 
 Though, conj. oBfi^on, oJgleic^. 
 Thought, 8. (Sebanfc, m. ; -less, adj. 
 
 gebanfenlo^. 
 Thousand, adj. tttufenb. [bro'^en. 
 
 Threat, «. Sro^ung, /.; -en, v. a. 
 Three, a^. btei. 
 Threshold, s. S(I)iBftte, /. 
 Thrice, (wfo. brcimal. 
 Thriftiness, ». ©patfamfett, /. 
 Throat, «. ^ala, w. 
 Throne, «. IJton, m. 
 Throng, «. ©(^«ttr, /. 
 Through, prep. & a<f®. bur(i^, ganj ; 
 
 -out,^r«2).&a(2».bur^, ganj, butc^=" 
 
 auS. 
 Throw, ®. ffl. & n. vr. tocrfen, fc^meigen. 
 Thursday, «. Sonnetjlag, m.. 
 Thus, fflds). fo, alfo, auf biefe SBtife. 
 Ticket, a. SSittet, m. 
 Tide, a. &i%, f. 
 Tiger, «. Kiger, m. 
 Tight(ly), a(i?. & adm. bii^t. 
 Till, prep. & adv. ixi. 
 Time, s. 3eit, /. ; (respite) gtifl,/.; 
 
 3RaI (Gr. p, 148, VI. 3) ra.; every-, 
 
 icbca SKal ; this — , bie^mal ; at 
 
 no — , nicmala ; in — , jur te^ten 
 
 Beit, tei Seitra. 
 Tire, v. a. crmiibeil ; -d, ac^. mube, 
 
 matt, fc^taff. 
 Title, 8. (name) 3taMic(ii), m. ; (of a 
 
 book, person, etc.) litcl, m. 
 To, prep, in, an, auf, bei, 6t8. 
 Toast, V. a. rofien. 
 Tobacco, *. Xt&nA, m. 
 To-day, adv. ^tute. 
 Together, adm. jufammen. 
 Token, a. 3eii^en, n. 
 Told, pcurt. gefagt. 
 Tomb, a. ®raS, n. ; inscription at a 
 
 — , ®tal)fd)rtft, /. [*e, /. 
 
 Tongue, 8. 3ungc, /./ (speech) Spra= 
 To-night, adm. ^eute Slbenb. 
 Too, adv. ju, (likewise) aui^. 
 Tooth, 8. 3a^n, m. ; -ache, a. 3a|n« 
 
 fd^metjen, pH. 
 Tom, pa/rt. jcttiiTen. 
 Torrent, a. ©front, m. 
 Total(ly), adj. & adm. gang. 
 Touch, «. ffl. (feel) fii^len, (handle) 
 
 angietfen. 
 Toward, adm. m^t;prep. gegen, nad); 
 
 -s, adm.m^i;—prep. gcgcn. 
 Tower, «. I^urm, m. 
 Town, «. ©tabt, /. [fac^en. 
 
 Toy, 8. ©pieljeug, n., (plural) Spiel* 
 Trace, track, a. ©pur, /. 
 Trade, s. .Jianbcl, m. ; — v. a. ^anbeln; 
 
 -r, 8. §anbeiamann, m. 
 Traffic, a. ^anbel, m. 
 Train, a. Sug, m. 
 Traitor, «. SJerrat^er, m. 
 Translate, v. a. itberfeljcn. 
 Translation, a. Ueberfe^ung, /. 
 Transparent, adj. & adv. bun^fw^tig. 
 
VOCABULAET.— ENGLISH AND GEBMAH. 
 
 587 
 
 Trarel, v. n. tctfen ; — through, 
 burd^reifen ;— ». SReife, /.; -er, s. 
 IRtifenbe, m. [^anblung, /. 
 
 Treat, v. a. iel^anbdn ; -ment, s. fdf 
 
 Tree, «. Saum, m. 
 
 Tremble, ®. n. sitttrn. 
 
 Trespass, v. n. itdertreten. 
 
 Tribe, ». ©tttmm, m. 
 
 Tiick, «. ©tretc^, m. v 
 
 Trident, s. Sretjafl, w. 
 
 Tried, ad/, iettci^tt, etptoJt. 
 
 Trifle, s. SleintgfeU, /. 
 
 Triumph, s. 3;ttump5, »i. 
 
 Trophy, «. Sltoppe, /. 
 
 Trouble, «. SKii^e,/.; — e. a. iemii^eit; 
 — refl. |ic^ tummern (urn); -some. 
 
 True, cu^. ma^t. [a^. lafltg. 
 
 Trumpet, g. XxoMfttt, f. 
 
 Trunk, s. fioffct, m. 
 
 Trust, «. aJcrtrauen, n. ; — v. a. & n. 
 (give confidence) ttttuen> (believe) 
 glauien, (give credit) torgen ; -y, 
 adj. getieu. 
 
 Truth, s. SBa^t^ett, /. 
 
 Try, ». a. sctfuc^en. 
 
 Tuesday, «. Sienflttg, m. [Stud, ?i. 
 
 Tune, s. SKctobie,/.; (piece of music) 
 
 Turbot, s. aSccrSutte, /. 
 
 Tureen, s. Sertine, /. 
 
 Turn, V. a. & ». bre^ett, (around) ft^ 
 umbrt^ettr (a coat,eto.) wenben, (out 
 of one's way) auatt)eic|en ; — round, 
 — back, umfe^ren ; — away, ftc^ 
 attumben. [fac^. 
 
 Twice, adv. jweintfll, (doubly) jwei* 
 
 Twinkle, s. SlugcnMilf, m. 
 
 Twist, V. a. ixi^m. 
 
 Two, ac^. imi, (both) bcibe ; -fold, 
 bopljelt ; — like (him), fciner jttei. 
 
 Tyranny, s. Xrjtamti, f. 
 
 Tyrant, s. S^ranti, m. 
 
 u. 
 
 Umbrella, g. Siegenfc^irm/ m. 
 Unable, adj. unfd^ig, (powerless) 
 
 ftaftIo«. 
 Unacquainted, a^. unBefttitnt. 
 Unadvisable, adj. unrat^fam. 
 Unbecoming, adj. unsapnb. 
 Uncle, s. D^eiw, Dnfel, m. 
 Uncover, v. a. aufbeilctl. 
 Under, prep, unter ; -stand, v. a. ir. 
 
 »ct|le:^£n; -standing, s. 2Jer(lanb,mi.; 
 
 to have an -standing, fid) Berttbte' 
 
 ben ; -take, v. o. ir. untcntc^men, »or* 
 
 ne^mtn ; -taking, s. Untcrnc^mcn, n. 
 Unfeeling, adj. gcfitPoS. 
 Unfortunate(ly), adj. & adv. unglitcE* 
 
 lid|. 
 Unhapp(il)y, adj. & ado. unglutflic^. 
 Unite, V. a. sereinigeti. 
 Universal(ly), adj. & a(Jo. affgemein. 
 Universe, 8. SBeltaB, n. 
 University, «. Itnwerjltcit, /. 
 Unknown, adj. unSetttnnl. 
 Unless, conj. ttu6ev, c* fci bcnn, — bag. 
 Unlike, adj. & ado. ungWc^; -ly, adj 
 
 unwa^rfi^einlic^. 
 Unnecessary, adj. itnnot^ig. 
 Untamable, adj. unicjoi^mbar. 
 Untied, part. & adj. log. 
 Until, adv. & prep. iii. 
 Unto, prep. an. 
 Untruth, s. Citgc, /. 
 Unwilling(ly), adj. & adv. ungern. 
 Up, prep, auf ; -stairs, obcii ; (to go) 
 
 nac^ oben {see p. 203, IX.) 
 Upon, prep, auf, in, an. 
 Upper, adj. oitx. 
 Urge, V. a. treibtn. 
 Us, pron. un^. 
 Usage, «. ®jbrau^, m. 
 
588 
 
 YOCABULAKT.— ENGLISH AMD GEBMAM. 
 
 Use, V. a. Itau^cn, geiranc^en, (a 
 thing) bcnuljett, (treat) ie^anbeln ; — 
 V. n. ft^ geiDoinen, iJilegen ; — «. ®e« 
 btauc^. m. ; to make — of, nujen, 
 Benu^en ; to be of — , Kon 9l«Uen 
 fern ; -d, adj. gtbrauc^Iti^, (accus- 
 tomed) getDO^nt ; -fiil(ly), adj. & 
 adv. nul^lii!^. 
 
 TJsual(ly), adj. & adio. getuo^tili^. 
 
 Utmost, adj. oiuperfl. 
 
 Utter, V. a. ttu8ft)tec^m. 
 
 V. 
 
 Vacant, adj. leer, (free) fret. 
 
 Vacation, «. gerien, pi. 
 
 Vainly, oi^'. & adv. eitcl. 
 
 Valiant(ly), ad;. & adv. tapfet. 
 
 Valley, «. Vs^^iX, n. 
 
 Valor, s. JaDferteif, /. 
 
 Value, v. a. aijtm; — , s. SBSert^, m. 
 
 Vanquish, ■». a. ticftegcn. 
 
 Vapor, s. 3)anH)f, m. 
 
 Vast(ly), adj. & adv. unge^eucr. 
 
 Vegetable, «. (plant) ^flanjc,/.; (cul- 
 in.) Scmiife, n. 
 
 Vein, s. Stbet, /. 
 
 Venom, s. ®ift, ra. 
 
 Venture, e. n. & as. wagen. 
 
 Verbal(ly), adj. & amZb. tBiirtK^. 
 
 Verdant, adj. grunenb. 
 
 Vermin, «. SEDurm, m. 
 
 Very, adv. fe^r; — much, fc^r. 
 
 Vessel, «. S(|iff/ n. 
 
 Victorious(ly), ac^. & fls(Z». Pegrett^. 
 
 Victory, «. ©teg, ??». 
 
 View, «. 9tu«ilc^t, /. / (glance) ^n^ 
 Mid, «i./ (opinion) ^nft(%t, /.; (in- 
 tention) Stbjii^t, /. 
 
 Village, «. 23orf, n. 
 
 Vine, s. ffiettl, TO. 
 
 Violence, s. Oewalt, /. 
 Violet, s. SBeiWjen, n. 
 Virtue, s. Sugcnb, /. 
 Virtuous(ly), adj. & a(i». tugcnb^aft. 
 Visit, v. a. & n. tefui^en; — s. ©efuc^, 
 Vitriol, s. SSitrioI, m. [m. 
 
 Vizier, s. 3)cjier, m. 
 Vocabulary, s. SJocatuIaiium, n. 
 Vocation, s. SRufi m. [einjiimmig. 
 Voice, g. <St\mmt, /.; with one — , 
 Volume, s. Sanb, m. 
 Voluntary(iIy), adj. & adv. frcttt)illi<t. 
 Vouch, V. a. & n. fciirgcn; -safe, v. a. 
 
 & n. geru^en, gmoifitcit. 
 Vow, V. a. gElokn. 
 Voyage, «. SRcifc, Sn^rt, /. 
 Vulgar(ly), adj. & ad/o. gemciit. 
 
 w. 
 
 Wag, V. a. (head) fd)itttclii, (tail) toc- 
 
 bcln j . — , s. ©tjapsogel, m. 
 Wage, V. a. (venture) tcagen, (bet) 
 
 wetten; to — (war), (Svteg) fu^ren; 
 
 -r, s. SBette, /. ; to lay a — , wet* 
 
 ten ; -s, s. pi. Zs\n, m. 
 Wagon, «. SEBagen, m. 
 Waist, s. Cei6, m.; (doublet) fiami» 
 
 fol, n.; -coat, aBeflc, /. 
 Wait, V. n. wartcn ; -ing, adv. ge- 
 
 tsartig (with gen) 
 Wake, V. a. toeiien. 
 Walk, V. n. gt^en, (go for or to take 
 
 a — ) frajieren (geljeti) ; to — on 
 
 foot, ju Sup ge^en ; — , s. ®ang, m. 
 Wall, a. aifaitcr, /. ; (rampart) SEall, 
 
 TO.; -nut, s. SBaHnup, /. 
 Wander, v. n. wanbern. 
 Want, V. (need) braud&eit, (reqtdre) 
 
 l!eburfm,(wish) woOen, ttitnfclen, (fall 
 
 short of) mangcliti — «. SKongel, to. 
 
TOCiiBULABT.— BNaLISH AND 6EKMAN. 
 
 589 
 
 War, s. .Rritg, m.; to make — , iltieg 
 
 fii^ren. 
 Wanii(ly), adj. & a<?:\ Warm. 
 Wash, 1). ffi. i'A TOafi^En ; -erwomau, 
 
 s. SIBafdjfrau, /. 
 "Watcli, V. n. & a. wttc^Eit, ieoHi^Un ; 
 — , ». U^r, /. / -man, Sacf)tcr, »i./ 
 
 -maker, «. n:^rmttd)cr, m. 
 Water, s. Saffcr; n.; -ing-place, s. 
 Wave, «. SBette, /. [Sabeott, m. 
 
 Way, «. SSeg, mi. / (manner) Sctfe, 
 
 /.; by or on the — , unterweg*. 
 We, pron. wtr. [fd)Wttc^en. 
 
 Weak, adj. fi^aact) ; -en, «. a. 
 WeaJth, s. Stei^t^um, m. ; (riches) 
 
 SRet(|t^umcr, pi; -y, adj. xtxij. 
 Wean, u a. mtwo^nen. 
 Weapon, «. SBaffe,/. 
 Wear, v. a. ir. tragcn. 
 Weary, adj. mitbe ; — ». a. etmiibcn. 
 Weather, s. Setter, n. 
 Wednesday, «. 9JJtttt»0(^, m. 
 Week, a. SBoc^c, /. [wic^t, n. 
 
 Weigh, V. a. tBiigen, wtegett; -t, «.®e» 
 Well, adj. & a(?«. (fortunate) woljl, 
 
 gut, (in good health) too^I, gefunb ; 
 
 as — as; fotoo^I . . .dli a«^. 
 West, s. S[Den(cit), m.; -em, o^?'- 
 
 wcfltid) ; -wards, trefltDcirtiS. 
 Wet, adj. nag. 
 What, pron. (which) ttJcIi^er, -e, -i, 
 
 was, (how much) tuie »icl ; what 
 
 time is it ? ttie »iel U^t t|l ti ? 
 Wheel, 8. Slab, n. 
 When, «cto. ttentt (Gr. p. 335, VI.), 
 
 wann, (Gr. p. 883, II.) Ai, (after) 
 
 nac^bem ; -ce, adv. teo^er ; -aver, 
 
 adm. wenn. 
 Where, adiJ. wo ; -fore, IDOju, (why) 
 
 WMum ; -of, bason ; -to, woju ; 
 
 -with, womit. 
 
 Whether, conj. o6. 
 
 Whey, s. Stoltcn, /. pi 
 
 Which, pron. weldjer, tucWje, ttelc^e^. 
 
 Whig, s. 3B^ig, m. 
 
 While, prep. & adv. wdl^renb, inbem. 
 
 Whistle, g. 9)feife, /. ;— -u. a. & n. 
 
 White, adj. wcip. [pfeifen. 
 
 Who, pron. totx, (which) «)eW)et, 
 
 Whole(ly), adj. & adv. gan;. 
 Wholesome, adj. gefunb. 
 Whom, pron. (see p. 199, 200 & 209). 
 Why, adv. ivarum. 
 Wicked(ly), adj. & adv. Mfe. 
 Wide, adj. wcit, (broad), ireit. 
 Widow, «. SEBitltue, /. ; -er, s. SBitt^ 
 
 ton, m. 
 Wife, s. SrttU, /. / SSBeiO, n. 
 Wig, s. 9)eruile, /. 
 Wild(Iy), adj. & a^. wilb. 
 Will, s. 2BiIle(n), m. ; — v. a. WoIIcn ; 
 -ing(ly), adj. & adv. rutHig, (glad- 
 ly) gem ; to be willing, icreit fcin, 
 aCiHenS fein. 
 Win, V. a. & n. ir. gewinnen; to — 
 
 the prize, ben 35tei4 getoinnen. 
 Wind, a. SBtnb, m. 
 Window, s. genjlcr, n. 
 Wine, a. SBcin, m. 
 Winter, a. SBintcr, m. 
 Wisdom, a. ffiei«^ett, /. 
 Wise(ly), adj. & adv. weife. 
 Wish, ■». a. wunWen, woUen. 
 Wit, a. SS5i^, m.y (person) SEBi^ling,™. 
 With, prep, mit ; -in, prep, in, Mn* 
 nen ; -out, prep. B^nt (baf); — , 
 adv. auger|ali, augen, btaugen. 
 Wither, v. n. sctttelten. 
 Wolf, a. SSolf, m. [man) Seii, re. 
 Woman, s. grau, /. / (as opposed to 
 Wonder, a. SISunber, n. ; — v. n. jic^ 
 
590 
 
 TOCABULAHY. — EiraLISH AND OEBMAK. 
 
 tBunfcern; -ful(ly), ad^. & adv. vc- 
 jlaunlid); wonderfully fine, — 
 beautiful, trunberf^ijn. 
 
 Wood, s. (timber) ^d\%, n. ; (forest) 
 SBolb, m. 
 
 Word, «. SBort, n. 
 
 Work, V. a. uriciten ; — «. Slrtcit, /. / 
 (of an author) SBetf, n.; -man, «. 
 Striciter, m,.; -house, s. S[rteiW» 
 
 World, s. aBelt, / [^au«, m. 
 
 Worm, s. SEBurm, m. 
 
 Worth, «. SCBert^, m.; — ad^.tovA^ ; 
 -y (ily), a<f/- *- '"''''• tBw'^' Wiirbig ; 
 to be — of, scrbienen. 
 
 Would, V. aux. ttittbe, tBcttte. 
 
 Wound, B. a. serwunbm. 
 
 Wreath, ». flranj, m. ; (of flowers) 
 SSIumenCranSr m. 
 
 Wrist, s. ®elenl, n. 
 
 Write, B. a. & ra. ir. f^teiien. 
 
 Written, part. gef(i^rieien. 
 
 Writing, «. ©c^teitcn, n.; (produc- 
 tion) ©c^rift, /. 
 
 Wrong(ly), at?;'. & a3m. (wrongful) 
 unrest, (bad) iiScI, falfc^ ; — «. ttn^- 
 xti/i, n. ; to be in the — , Unredjt 
 
 Y. 
 
 Tard, «. (court-) ^lof/ w. / (measure) 
 
 eae, /. 
 
 Year, «. 3a6r, n.; of (for) a — ja^rij. 
 
 Yellow, adj. gelJ. 
 
 Yes, aM. jo. 
 
 Yesterday, o<?». aepcni. 
 
 Yet, ccnj. bjc^, bennoc^/ rwc^; as — , 
 
 nod^ n^t. 
 Yield, «. as. & «.. etgeien, (give place 
 
 to) wei^enf (to entreaties)na($get)en. 
 Yoke, ». 3oc^, n. 
 Yon, yonder, jij-ora. jener, jene, jeneS ; 
 
 — («Z». borl, biiiien. 
 You, pro%. i^r, fte. 
 Young, adj. jung. 
 Your, pron. euet, i^r. 
 Youth, «. Sugenbi /.; -ful(ly), aSj. & 
 
 ad/B. jung. 
 
 Zeal, «. Eifet, m. ; -ous(ly), o^'. & 
 
 adv. ciftig. 
 Zinc, s. Bint, m. 
 Zone, «. Scne, /. 
 
PKOPBK AMD NATIONAL NOUHS, AND ADJKCTIVBB. 
 
 Proper and National Nouns, and Adjectives. 
 
 691 
 
 St'bolf, (abcluy, Adol- 
 plius. 
 
 Slcgup'ten, Egypt. 
 
 Slegvp'ter, Egyptian. 
 
 Stfrif'a, Africa. 
 
 oftita'nifc^, a^. African. 
 
 Sll'Den, Alps. 
 
 Slme'rita, America. 
 
 2(merita'net, American. 
 
 ttmerita'nifcl), adj. Ame- 
 rican. [glo-Saxon. 
 
 angcrfd^nft^' «'??'■ ■^- 
 
 Slra'bcr, Arabian. 
 
 31ti0to'tcle«, Aristotle. 
 
 Slft'en, Asia. 
 
 St'tften, Athens. 
 
 Slt^en'er, Athenian. 
 
 Stujltarien, Australia. 
 
 Sai'er, Bavarian. 
 
 Sat'ern, Bavaria. 
 
 bai'rifi$7 adj. Bavarian. 
 
 SBergien, Belgium. 
 
 Staun'fi^meig, Bruns- 
 wick. 
 
 SStuf'fel, Brussels. 
 
 Galifor'nien, California. 
 
 Eart^a'gc, Carthago. 
 
 £art^a'ger, Carthagi- 
 
 Eoicil'ia, Celia. [nian. 
 
 Ed'far, Ca!sar. 
 
 e^tiflua, Christ. 
 
 £^ti|l'f Christian. 
 
 Gijln, see, .Riiln. 
 
 G»njianttno')!eI,Constan- 
 tinople. 
 
 ©li'de, Dane. 
 
 Sanemarf, Denmark. 
 
 bd'mf(^, adj. Danish. 
 
 beutfii)( adj. German. 
 
 ®eutfi^'lai&, Germany. 
 
 iDeut'f^e» btr» hut ein 
 IBeutfc^cri German. 
 
 So'nau,/. Danube. 
 
 ©orot^e'a, Dorothea. 
 
 6'buarb, Edward. 
 
 Smil'te, Emily. 
 
 (Eng'Ioinber.En^lishman 
 
 eng'Itfil), adj. English. 
 
 Suro'tsa, Europe. 
 
 Europd'er, European. 
 
 gintt'lonb, Finland. 
 
 Sran'te, Frank. 
 
 Stant'furt, Frankfort. 
 
 groiiFtcitft, France. 
 
 Sranjo'fe, Frenchman. 
 
 franso'ftW, adj. French. 
 
 granv Francis. 
 
 grieb'rid), Frederic. 
 
 grij, (contraction of 
 griebric^). 
 
 ©al'lien, Gaul. 
 
 Oal'Uer, Gaul (person). 
 
 ®f'nua, n. Genoa. 
 
 ©enue'fer, Genoese. 
 
 ®eorg', George. 
 
 ®ric'c()e, Greek. 
 
 grie'^if^, adj. Grecian, 
 Greek. 
 
 ©rie'c^enlanb, Greece. 
 
 ®ua'ta», Qnstavus. 
 
 §ein'ri(^, Henry. 
 
 i)enriet'te, Henrietta. 
 
 Iiet'niann, Herman. 
 
 Iiolt'anb, Holland. 
 
 iioU'dnber, Dutchman. 
 
 :^oltdn'bird&, adj. Dutch. 
 
 Snbia'ntr, Indian. 
 
 Sn'bien, India. 
 
 Sr'lanb, Ireland. 
 
 3r'ldnbcr( Irishman. 
 
 3ta'Iien, Italy. 
 
 3talie'ner/ Italian. 
 
 italte'nif(i^, adj. Italian. 
 
 Sa'cot, James. 
 
 3ett'c^en, Nettie. 
 
 3o()ann', John. 
 
 So^an'na, Joan. 
 
 flarl, Charles. 
 
 jfttroli'ne, Caroline. 
 
 ^arl|a'ger, s«e Cartpgo. 
 
 floln, Cologne. 
 
 jtrc'ta, Crete. 
 
 Caccbdmo'nicr, Lacede- 
 monian. 
 
 latci'nif^, a^. Latin. 
 
 Scip'jig, Leipsio. 
 
 8ub'wt8( Louis. 
 
 Sui'fe/ Louise. 
 
 9Rttrgare't^e, Margaret. 
 
 aWa'ric, Mary. 
 
 SJiil'letmeer, Mediter- 
 ranean. 
 
 SKo'ri^, Maurice. 
 
 SJfog'fau, Moscow. 
 
 3)iuii'd)£n, Munich. 
 
 Slor'wcgen, Norway. 
 
 Def t(er)retc^, Austria. 
 
 Del l(et)rci(l)ct,Austrian 
 
 o|"'t(et)rei^ifcl), adj. Aus- 
 trian. 
 
 Dra'men, Orange. 
 
 9)(iri'fev, Parisian. 
 
 9)er'fer, Persian. 
 
 SJ^oni'jter, Phoeiiician. 
 
 ^ol'm, Poland. 
 
 pol'nifi^, adj. Polish. 
 
 sportugte'fc, Portuguese. 
 
 ^rttg, Prague. 
 
 9)reu9'c, Prussian. 
 
 9)teu6'cii, Prussia. 
 
 prcup'ifc^, adj. Prussian. 
 
 9>orcnd'eii, Pyrenees. 
 
 0I^ein, m. Ehine. 
 
 SRora, Rome. 
 
 SJS'mcr, Roman. 
 
 lo'niif^, adj. Roman. 
 
 Sf!u§'Ianb, Russia. 
 
 SRuJT'e, Russian. 
 
 tuff'ifii^, adj. Russian. 
 
 Sai^fe, Saxon. 
 
 ©ad)'feii/ Saxony. 
 
 ©ttc()ren'Go'b«rg»®o'l5n, 
 Saxe-Coburg-Gotha. 
 
 fiicft'jifd^, adj. Saxon. 
 
 ©^we'ben, Sweden. 
 
 ®4t»e'be, Swede. 
 
 ©^tBCtj,/. Switzerland. 
 
 ©^Wtis'er, Swiss. 
 
 Sopl^i'e, Sophy. 
 
 Sua'men, Spain. 
 
 ©pa'nier, Spaniard. 
 
 fpa'nif^, adj. Spanish. 
 
 ©9'tietl, Syria. 
 
 Sur'fe, Turk. 
 
 Siit'fei (3;urtc?),Turtey. 
 
 tiir'tifci^, Turkish. 
 
 SJcnc'btg; Venice. 
 
 IBcrci'mgte ©taa'tcit, 
 United States of 
 America. 
 
 SBEitin'bicn, West Indies 
 
 SBicn, Vienna. 
 
 SCil'^elm, William. ' 
 
VTie JVaiionai Series of Standard School- Sooks. 
 
 NATURAL SCIENCE. 
 
 '•rOUBTEM WEEKS" IN EACH BKANCH. 
 
 By J. DORMAN STEELE, A.M. 
 
 Steele's 14 V/eeks Course in Chemistry (New Ed.) 
 
 Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Astronomy 
 
 Steele's ^4 Weeks Course in Philosophy 
 
 Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Geology 
 
 Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Physiology 
 
 Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Zoology 
 
 Steele's 14 Weeks Course in Botany 
 
 Unr Tezt-Books in these stndies are, as a general thing, doll and nninteresting. 
 They contain from 400 to 600 pages of dry £icts and nnconnected details. They 
 abound in that which the student cannot learn, much less remember. The pupil 
 commences the study, is confuse J by the fine print and coarse print, and neither 
 knowing exactly what to learn nor what to hasten over, is crowded througli the 
 single term generally assigned to each branch, and frequently comes to the docse 
 Without a definite and exact idea of a single scientific principle. 
 
 Steele's Fourteen Weeks Courses contain only that which every well-informed 
 person should know, while all that which concerns only the professional scientist 
 is omitted. The language is clear, simple, and interesting, and the illustrations 
 bring the subject within the range of home life and daily experience. They give 
 such of the general principles and the prominent facts as a pupil can make famil- 
 iar as household words withiu a single term. The type is large and open ; there 
 is no fine print to annoy ; the cuts are copies of genuine experiments or natural 
 phenomena, and are of fine execution. 
 
 In fine, by a system of condensation peculiarly his own, the author reduces each 
 branch to tho limits of a single term of study, while sacrificing nothing that is es- 
 sential, and nothing that is usually retained fVom the study of the larger manuals 
 in common use. Thus the student has rare opportunity to econanAze hit lir/bi, or 
 rather to employ that which he has to the best advantage. 
 
 A notable feature is the author's charming " style," fortified by an enthusiasm 
 over his subject in which the student will not fail to partake. Believing that 
 Natural Science is full of fascination, he has moulded it into a form that altracis 
 ihe attention and kindles the enthusiasm of the pupil. 
 
 The recent editions contain the author's "Practical Questions" on a plan never 
 before attempted in scientific text-books. These are questions as to the nature 
 afid cause of common phenomena, and are not directly answered in the text, the 
 design being to test and promote an intelligent use of the student's knowledge of 
 the foregoing principles. 
 
 Steele's General Key to his Works 11.00 
 
 This work is mainly composed of Answers to the Practical Questions, and Solu- 
 tions of the Problems, in the author's celebrated ''Fourteen Weeks Courses " in 
 the several science;, with many hints to teachers, minor Tables, &c. Should be 
 on every teacher's desk. 
 
 3i 
 
JVatlonal Series of Standard SchoolSooks. 
 
 L, ITERATURE. 
 
 Gilman's First Steps in English Literature, 
 
 The character and plan of this exquisite little text-book may be best understood 
 from an analysis of its contents : 
 
 IHTEODncTioH. Chapter I, Historical; n, Definition of Terms; m, Languages 
 of Europe, with Chart. 
 
 Period of Immatubb Enoush, with Chart. Chapter IV, Original English ; V, 
 Broken English ; VI, Dead English; VII, Reviving English. , 
 
 Period of Mature Bnoiish, with Chart. Chapter VIII, The Italian Influence ; 
 rx, Puritan Influence ; X, French Influence ; XI, Age of Pope ; XII, Age of John- 
 son ; Xni, Age of Poetical Eomance ; XIV, Age of Prose Romance. 
 
 The volums concludes with a Chart of Bible TrauslatiouB, a Bibliography or 
 Guide to General Reading, and other aids to the student. 
 
 Cleveland's Conripendiunns, 
 
 English Literature. American Literature. 
 
 English Literature of the XIXth Century. 
 
 In these volumes are gathered the cream of the literature of the English-speaking 
 
 Seople for the school-room and the general readei-. Their reputation is national, 
 [ore than 125,000 copies have been soiii, 
 
 Boyd's English Classics, 
 
 Milton's Paradise Lost. Thomson's Seasons. 
 
 Young's Night Thoughts. Pollok's Course op Time. 
 
 CowPER's Task. Table Talk, &c. Lord Bacon s Essays. 
 
 This series of annotated editions of great English writers, in prose and poetry, 
 Is designed for critical reading and parsing in schools. Prof. J. E. Boyd pioves 
 himself an editor of high capacity, and the works themselves need no encomium. 
 As auxiliary to the study of Belles Lettres, etc., these works have no equal. 
 
 Pope's Essay on Man, 
 Pope's Homer's Iliad, 
 
 The metrical translation of the great poet of antiquity, and the matchless "Essay 
 on the Nature and State of Man," by Alexander Pope, afibrd superior exercise In 
 literature and parsing. 
 
 ^ESTHETICS. 
 
 Huntington's Manual of the Fine Arts, 
 
 A view of the rise and progress of Art in different countries, a brief account ol 
 the most eminent masters of Art, and an analysis of the principles of Art. It i> 
 complete in itself, or may precede to advantage the critical work of Lord Karnes. 
 
 Boyd's Karnes' Elements of Criticism, 
 
 The best edition of this standard work ; without the study of which none may h» 
 considered proficient in the science of the Perceptions. No other study can be Dur 
 sued with so marked an effect upon the taste and refluemeui uf tn« pupil. 
 
 36 
 
The JVational Series of Standard SchoolSookf, 
 
 ELOCUTION. 
 
 Thwing's Vocal Culture. 
 
 A Drill- Book for voice and gesture, by Eev. Frof. Thwing, of Brooklyii Tabenuele 
 Lay College. Price 60 cte. 
 
 Taverner Graham's Reasonable Elocution, 
 
 Based npon the belief that true Elocntion is the right Interpretation of THouonT, 
 and gniding the stadent to an intelligent appreciation, instead of a merely uecliun- 
 ical knowledge, of its rales. 
 
 Zaclros' Analytic Elocution. 
 
 All departments of elocution— snch as the analysis of the voice and the sentence, 
 phonology, rhythm, expression, gesture, etc.— are here arranged for instructiuu in 
 claases, lUnstrated by copious examples. 
 
 Sherwood's Self Culture. 
 
 Self-culture in reading, speaking, and conversation— a very valuable treatise to 
 those who would perfect themselves in these accomplishments. 
 
 SPEAKERS. 
 
 Northend's Little Orator, , $0.40 Child's Speaker, , $0.40 
 
 Two little works of the same grade but different selections, contaiuing simple and 
 attractive pieces for children under twelve years of age. 
 
 Northend's Young Declaimer, $0.50 National Orator, . TO 
 
 Two volumes of Prose, Poetry, and Dialogue, adapted to intermediate and gram- 
 mar classes respectively. 
 
 Northend's Entertaining Dialogues 70 
 
 Extracts eminently adapted tu cultivate the dramatic £iculties, as well as entertain. 
 
 Oakey's Dialogues and Conversations CO 
 
 For School Exercises and Exhibitions, combining usefhl instrnction. 
 
 James's Southern Selections for Reading and Oratory, 1.10 
 
 Embracing exclusively Southern literature. 
 
 Swett's Common School Speaker, 90 
 
 Raymond's Patriotic Speaker, 1.25 
 
 A superb compilation of modem eloquence and poetry, with original dramatic ex- 
 ercises. Nearly every eminent modem orator is represented. 
 
 COMPOSITION AND RHETORIC. 
 
 Brookfield's First Book in Composition $0.35 
 
 Making the cultivation of this important art feasible for the smallest child. By a 
 new method, to induce and stimulate thought. 
 
 Boyd's Composition and Rhetoric, 1.00 
 
 This work furnishes all the aid that is needful or can be desired in the various de- 
 partments and styles of composition, both in prose and verse. 
 
 Day's Art of Rhetoric, 90 
 
 Noted for exactness of definition, clear limitation, and philosophical development 
 if subject ; the laree share of attentic ' ' ' " ' ' ' 
 
 and the unequaUedanalysia of style. 
 
 38 
 
 of subject ; the larae share of attention given to Invention, as a branch of BhetoriCi 
 "'edai 
 
T^e JVati.onat Series of Standard Schooe-JSooA;t. 
 
 MODERN LANGUAGE. 
 
 Illustrated Language Primers, 
 
 Fkench akd English. German and English. 
 
 Spanish and English. 
 
 The names of common objects properly iUastrated and arranged in easy lessons. , 
 
 Ledru's French Fables, 
 Ledru's French Grannmar, 
 Ledru's French Reader, 
 
 The author*8 long experience has enabled him to present the most thoroughly 
 practical textrbooks extant, in this branch. The system of pronnuciation (by pho- 
 netic illastration) is original with this author, and will commend Itself to all Ameri- 
 can teachers, as it enables their pupils to secure an absolutely correct pronunciation 
 without the assistance of a native master. This feature is peculiarly valuable also 
 to "self-taught" students. The directions for ascertaining the gender of French 
 nouns— also a great stumbling-block— are peculiar to this work, and will be found 
 remarkably competent to the end proposed. The criticism of teachers and the test 
 of the school-room is invited to this excellent series, with confidence. 
 
 Worman's French Echo, 
 
 To teach conversational French by actual practice, on an entirely new plan, which 
 recognizes the importance of the student learning to think in the language wnich he 
 speaKs. It furnishes an extensive vocabulary of words and expressions in common 
 nee, and suffices to free the learner from the embarrassments which the peculiarities 
 of his own tongue are likely to be to him, and to make him thoroughly utmiliar with 
 the use of proper idioms. 
 
 Worman's German Echo, 
 
 On the same plan. See Worman's German Series, page 42. 
 
 Pujol's Complete French Class-Book, 
 
 Offers, in one volume, methodically arranged, a complete French course— usually 
 embraced in series of from five to twelve books, including the bulky and expensive 
 Lexicon. Here are Grammar, Conversation, and choice Literature— selected from 
 the best French authors. Each branch is thoroughly handled; and the student, 
 having diligently completed the course as prescribed, may consider himself, without 
 further application, an fait in the most polite and elegant language of modem times. 
 
 Pujol's French Grammar, Exercises, Reader, 
 
 These volumes contain Part I, Parts 11 and III, and Part IV of the Complete Class- 
 Book respectively, for the convenience of scholars and teachers. The Lexicon is 
 bound with each part. 
 
 Maurice-Poitevin's Grammaire Francaise, 
 
 American schools ar > at last supplied with an American edition of this fkmous 
 text-book. Many of our best institutions have for years been procuring it from 
 abroad rather than forego the advantages it offers. The policy of putting students 
 who have acquired some proficiency from the ordinary text-books, into a Grammar 
 written in the vernacular, cannot be too highly commended It affords an opportu- 
 nity for finish and review at once ; while embodying abundant practice of its ova ' 
 rules. 
 
 Joynes' French Pronunciation, 
 Willard's Histori'a de los Estados Unidos, 
 
 The History of the United States, translated by Professors Tolow and De ToRNoa, 
 win be found a valnable. Instructive, and entertaining reading-book for Spaniab 
 dasses. 
 
 40 
 
The JVational Series of Stanaard iSc hoot-'Jiooks- 
 
 GERMAN. 
 
 A COMPLETE OOUESE IN THE GEKMAN. 
 
 By JAMES H. WORMAN, A.M. 
 
 Worman's Elementary German Grammar 
 Worman's Complete German Grammar 
 
 Theee volomes are deBigned for intermediate and advanced claoscB rcBpectirely. 
 
 Though following the same general method with "Otto" (that of 'Gaepey'X 
 onr author differs essentially in its application. He la more practical, more Bya^ 
 tematic, more accurate, and besides introduces a number of invalaable features 
 which liave never before been combined in a German grammar. 
 
 Among other things, it may be claimed for Prof. Worman that he has been 
 die first to introduce in an American text-book for learning Germac, a Byeteni 
 of analogy and comparison with other languages. Our best teachers are also 
 enthusiastic abouthis methods of inculcating the art of speaking, of underetanding 
 the spoken language, of correct pronunciation ; the sensible and convenient origi- 
 nal classification of nouns (in four declensions), and of irregular vei bs, a)so de- 
 serves much praise. We also note the use of heavy type to indicate btymologica! 
 changes in the paradigms ind, in the exercises, the parts which specially illustrate 
 preceding rules. 
 
 Worman's Elementary German Reader 
 Worman's Collegiate German Reader 
 
 The finest and most judicious compilation of classical and standard German 
 Literature. These works embrace, progressively arranged, selections from the 
 masterpieces of Goethe, Schiller, Eomer, Seume, Uhland, Freiligrath, Heine, 
 Schlegel, Holty, Lenau, Wieland, Herder, Lessing, Kant, Pichte, Schelllng, Win- 
 kelmann, Humboldt, Eanke, Eanmer, Menzel, Gervlnus, Ac, and contains com- 
 plete Goethe's " Iphigenie," Schiller's " Jungftau ;" also, for instruction in mod- 
 em conversational German, Benedix's " Eigensinn." 
 
 There are besides, Biographical Sketches of each author contributing. Notes, 
 explanatory and philological (after the text), Grammatical References to all lead- 
 ing grammars, as well as the editor's own, and an adequate Vocabulary. 
 
 Worman's German Echo 
 
 Consists of exercises In colloquial style entirely In the German, with an ade- 
 quate vocabulary, not only of words but of idioms. The object of the system de- 
 veloped in this work (and its companion volume in the French) is to break up the 
 laborious and tedlons habit of translating the thougTUs, which is the student's 
 most effectual bar to fluent conversation, and to lead him to t/dnh in tJie languags 
 in which he speaks. As the esercises illustrate scenes in actual life, a considera- 
 ble knowledge of the manners and customs of the German people is alEO acquirod 
 from the use of this manual. 
 
 Worman's German Copy-Books, % Numbers, 
 
 On the same plan as the most approved systems for English penmanship, wltl 
 erogresBlve copies. 
 
vV. X f ^^^ ^ 
 
 <*5